■% 4 
 
 K^'^A •' 
 
 
Y^^-J^ 
 
 uUMnrut fJi 
 
lii: 
 
I. 
 
 POLTGRAFHICE: 
 
 O R, 
 The Arts of Drawing, Engraving, 
 Etching, Limning, Painting, Vcr- 
 nifliing, Japanjng, Gilding, d^c. 
 
 In Two Volumns. 
 
 CONTAINING, 
 
 I. The Arts nf^ Drawing Men, Women, Landskips, i&c* 
 
 II. <?/ Engraving, Etching, ^ni Limning. 
 
 III. 0/ Painting, Wafhing, Coloring, Gilding. 
 
 IV. Of the Original, Advancement and Perfeftion jf Point- 
 
 ing, tvich the Various Paintings of the Ancients. 
 
 V. Of the Arts of Beauti fying anflf Perfuming. 
 Vf. Of the Arts of Dying and Staining. 
 
 VII. (7/"Alcliymie,rffl(^?/!;? Grand Elixir of Philofophers. 
 vni. Of the 112 Chymical Arcana 0/ Peter Faber. 
 
 IX. (?/ Cliiromantical Signatures. 
 
 X. Of Staining <jnrf Painting Glafs, Enamel <J«</Gems. 
 
 XI. (?/ Vernifhing, japaaing, <j/ifl^ Gilding. 
 
 The Ej(rhth Editio?j, 
 
 Enlarged^ with Above Five Hundred confiderable Additions 
 thro' the whole IVork/-, nndthe Addition ofalmojifive whole 
 Boohs ^ not in any of the former Impreffiotis : Adorned with 
 XXV Copper Sculptures, the lili^ never jet Extant i 
 
 By WILLIAM SALMON, M. D. 
 
 Non ^uot^ Jed ^^anks. 
 
 London^ Printed for A. and 7- Churchill, at the B'acJ^StvaT! 
 in Paternofter-Roiv. And /. Nichnfm,3t the King%'Arm^ 
 in Little-Britain. M DCCI. 
 
To that 
 
 GREAT MAN 
 
 S^ Godf. Kneller, Kd 
 
 SIR, 
 
 T is Honor, as Qv* 
 
 cero Jap, which 
 
 gives Bei/ig, Life, 
 
 and Perfection to 
 
 Arts and Sciences^ 
 
 audit is That in you which, I hope, 
 
 mil Indulge this Infant Product ion^ 
 
 from MinervaV Stock : If it 
 
 A 2 Ob- 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 
Epiftle Dedicatory. 
 
 Okains hat jowr Approhation, I 
 have my End ^ and therein Jljall 
 account viy Endeavors Eortunate, 
 and my Self Happy. 
 
 I have made bold to Jhelter it 
 under yotir Vroteclion, of which my 
 fmnll Confidence makes me believe 
 I am not deceived : But of this 
 I am certain. That if it perijles 
 not by your Difike, it will live 
 by your Ejliriuition : It is your 
 Countenance of the Work, which 
 will be as a Seal to it, and make 
 it as a Standart of Truth to fuc 
 
 c 
 
 eedinz Generations. 
 
 %b 
 
 As Univerfal Fame acknow- 
 ledges you the Chief of your Vro-^ 
 fejiioUy and has made you a great 
 Judge of things of this Nature ; 
 (o I could not have c ho fen out 
 a more Vit or Excjui fit e Patron ; 
 
 a 
 
Epiftle Dedicatory. 
 
 a Man ds excellently Accomplifi-' 
 ed to T>et ermine, (is you are ad-^ 
 mirahly Skilful to ferforvL 
 
 The Work of it [elf is kit as a 
 Dead Body, hat as a Bod) with- 
 out a Soul 5 it is your Character 
 and 'Name inuji give it Life and 
 Spirit j and then with your Ade-- 
 mtrry, I am fure it will be Confe- 
 crated to Eternity, 
 
 I am wholly unskilld in the 
 Arts of Adulat.iony and know 
 nothing of 'Flattery : hut this I 
 fay, that could I V/ritc as £:c- 
 cellentlyi^ as you can Defg'i^ and 
 Decipher in Words, as well as you 
 can with the Pencil, I would leave 
 to all Fofterity, the Great Life 
 of the Immortal Kntllcr, 
 
 I will not detain you any long-' 
 
 er ; hut I have this to Ooferve, 
 
 4 3 That 
 
Epiftle Dedicatory. 
 
 That jou who are the Honor ef 
 your Frofejjiony and the Glory tf 
 your Art, have by your Excellency 
 therein, ohtained a Vrecedency a- 
 hove other Men ; and all your 
 Verformances are fuch, not to make 
 Imitators, but Admirers, amongfi 
 whom is, 
 
 Sir, 
 
 Your Faithful, 
 
 AND 
 
 Humble Servant, 
 
 William SalmoJL 
 
THE 
 
 PRE FACE 
 
 T 
 
 I.r ■ ^ i^E Si(hje[i of the enfuing Work^ is the 
 Art of Painting •, a Name not only too 
 fingular^ hut alfo too Jhort or narrow^ 
 to exprcfs whit is here intended there- 
 by : For we do not only exprefs that Art^ ( oi it is 
 generally received ) but alfo Drawing, JEngraving, 
 Etching, Limning, Painting in Oil, Wafhing, Co- 
 loring and Dying : All winch being confidered in 
 their proper Extent^ infinitely exceed that curtaiPd 
 Name <?/ Painting •, which that we might join all in 
 one proper and comprehenfive Word^ zve made choice 
 of that Greek Compound, POLYGRAPHICE. 
 
 II. To perfwade any one to the Study or Praflice 
 of thefe Arts, would be a great holly j fince Igno- 
 rance (zohich is alzvays blind) can never be able to 
 judge aright : For to him that already under ft ands 
 it, the Labour zwuld be ufelcfs and unprofitable ; to 
 him which is already delighted therein, it zoould bs 
 needlefs andfuperjluous -, and to the Averfe and Ig- 
 norant , it zaould be the putting, a Jewel into a. 
 Staines Snout : The exquifite Knowledge of whicb^ 
 if impofjible ever to be attained or underfiood by f neb 
 
 A 4 fre- 
 
The PREFACE. 
 
 prejudicatc and cloudy Souls , although it is Suffici- 
 ently known to 7?hiny already ^ and its Vfefulnefs or 
 apparent as it is Excellent : To enumerate the one^ 
 or rehearfe the other^ it is hut to perfvcade the 
 World ^ that it is day-light when the Sun is upon 
 the Meridian -, or at leaji to inculcate an Ignorance 
 of thofe things, which have been manijcftly known^ 
 even a long time fince. 
 
 III. The Method of this Work is wholly nevo^ 
 't^herein i^e have united and made one^ Juch various 
 Suhje^ls iiA' have been the uncertain^ opfcure and te- 
 dious Difcourje of a great number of variom and 
 large Volumes. What lliall we fay ? Things far a- 
 
 f under ^ we have laid together 5 things uncertain^ 
 are here limited and reduced ^ things oh/cure^ we 
 have made plain •, things tedioi/s^ we have made 
 fhort •, things erroneous^ we have rectified and cor- 
 rected •, things hard, we have made facil and ealy ^ 
 tJvngs various, we have colle£led •, things (in ap- 
 pearance ) Hcterogene, we have made Homogene : 
 And in a word, all thefe Arts we have reduced to 
 ccrrain Me;ids ;, brought under a certain Method 5 
 limited to practical Rides, and made them Perlpicu- 
 ous, even to a very mean Vnderjlanding, 
 
 IV. In the Compofure of this Work, ( hefides our 
 o^vn Olfervations ) wc have made ufe oj the befi 
 Authors now extant, that we could pojfbly procure 
 0) get ifito our hands ; wherein our Labour woi not 
 jmuU, what in Reading, Comparing, Trarfcribing, 
 
 Ciioofing, Correcting, DTpofing^WRtAiling^i;^';^ 
 thing in refpe^t cj Matter, Form and (3rder. The 
 which had we any Precedent to have followed, any 
 Vddi to have traced, any Example to have imitated, 
 any Help to have ccnfulted, or any Subject entire : 
 Or otherwife^ had the Number oJ our Authors been 
 fmall, their Maxims Truths, their Rules certain, 
 
 t heir 
 
The PREFACE. 
 
 ■ their Meanings not ohfacre^ or f^Wr' Precepts been 
 reduced to Method or Order^ we might not only vsiib 
 much more Eafe^ Flcafure and Certainty ^ lefs La^ 
 hoia\ Trouble and Tains •, greater Verfpcuity^ Tlainr 
 nefs and Singularity •, belter Order , Method and 
 Language •, but alfo in fhorter time have brought to 
 'Perfect ion^ what we here pre/entyou withal. 
 
 V. I/z //?/f Eighth Edition, we ha-be inferted above 
 Jive Hundred feveral Additions of fingular Vfe to the 
 
 Matter in hand^ and Jo neceffary to the Work^ that 
 7mthout them they anight really be accounted Defe- 
 ^ €tive. There is the variom Depi^ings of the Anci- 
 ents^ according to the Cujioms of feveral Nations.^ 
 drawn from the beft^ moft experienced and faithful- 
 left Authors^ whether Englifh, Italian or Latin ; tO' 
 gether with the Original Advancement and Terfe- 
 ition of thefe Arts. 
 
 VI. for the farther Satisfaclion and Plea/ure of 
 young Art if s^ zgc have given you a Tra?tJl.ation out 
 ^/ Latin, oj the One Hundred and Twelve Arcanums 
 of Petrus Johannes Faber , a mofi Learned and Fa- 
 mous Fhyfician (7/^Montpelier /';? France, and a very 
 great Chymift and Alchymift. They have been ear- 
 neftly fought for by many higcnious Gentlemen^ but 
 by reafon of the Scarcenefs and great Price of the 
 Bock^ they were not cafy to be had ^ arid being alfo 
 in Latin, not to be under flood by every one zoho had 
 a Curiofity that zvay. Kv thefe Rcafons we took the 
 T ains ef Tranflating the fame i, and in fo doings for 
 the better underflanding of the Matter^ have care- 
 fully claufed each Particular^ that the Safe of the 
 Author inight the better be apprehended. But truly 
 it is our Opinion^ that moft of the ?r^ if not all .^ need 
 a Clavis or Key to unlock them^ that their Meaning 
 and Intention might be underffood-^ and one Key, it 
 is fiid, will unfold them all^ except ii^o of them^ 
 
 whofe 
 
The PREFACE. 
 
 vohofe Meaning and Interpretation is according to 
 their literal ExpreJJion : The Invefiigation of the 
 Key, or finding out thofe two unriddled Arcanums, 
 we fhall leave to the Scrutiny of the Induftrioui Stu- 
 dent , who may at one time or other per Accideris 
 meet with that nnlookt for^ and unthought of which 
 is by many fo much defired^ and which peradventwe 
 by the fame Hand might have other wife been perpe^ 
 rually fought f$r in vain. 
 
 WIUAAM SALMON. 
 
 THE 
 
T 
 
 I. ^ J "^ HIS Book having in a few Years 
 time fo obtained in the World, as to 
 come to an Eighth Imprelhon, above 
 Fifteen Thoufand of them having been 
 already Sold ^ I was requefted once 
 more to give it a Review, not only to mend the 
 Faults efcaped in tlie former Impreflions, and to re- 
 duce it to fome betttr Order and Method ^ but 
 alfo to add to it fuch other new Matter as the 
 Nature of tlie Book might require, to fupply it in 
 feveral places, where it might be defeaive or 
 wanting : To Explicate it in fuch Places and Para- 
 graphs which were dubious, and not vulgarly In- 
 telligible : And further to Enlarge it with a num- 
 ber of New and moft Excellent Secrets, not yet 
 in many Mens Hands. 
 
 11. As to the particulars, which are added in tliis 
 Impreffon, you have, i. In the firft Book, an 
 Appendix containing five whole Ch pters. 2. The 
 Sixth Book of Dyi^ig and Staining ivholly new, 
 never any thing of that kind being publiflied in 
 Print to our knowledge before. It was the Manu- 
 fcript of an Experienced Dyer, who had pra£lifed 
 tliat Art above Fifty Years, and Dying, lefi: behind 
 him his Secret^ of that kind. I challenge nothing 
 of it, but the new Methodizing, and fitting it for 
 the Prefs. 3. In the Sevcntli Book, befides the 
 Additions in the Tenth Chapter, there are added 
 
 Eleven 
 
FOSTSCRIPT. 
 
 Eleven whole Chapters concerning the Fhilofophick 
 Tinlfure or EV/a-//-, viz. Chap. XII. XIll. XI\^ 
 XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII. 
 
 Which is the certain Work of a True Adept. 
 
 4. In the Ninth Book, the Additions are fcattered 
 throughout, ' but they are fo many as will make 
 compleatly three q'larters of that whole Book. 
 
 5. The Tenth Book, containing XLIII. Chapters, 
 is wholly new, there being exaftly laid down, and 
 in a facciu'El and brief Method., all the ways of 
 Painting, Coloring and Staining of Glafs,' Cryftal, 
 Enamel and Gems, and the way of making Adul- 
 terate or Counterleit Precious Stones fo exa8:, that 
 an Artift himfelf ihall fcarcely difcei'n the Artificial 
 from the True, without bringing thc-m to the Wheel. 
 6,. The whole Elcverah Book containmg the Aits 
 of Vernilhing, Japanning, and Gilding, reduced into 
 a (horter and much better Method, than ever was 
 done by any Author before. 7. Befides all which, 
 we ha\'c farther Enlarged and Compleated it, with 
 above Five Hundred other Additions, Paragraphs, 
 and Obfervatioijs, where the order and necellity of 
 the Work required it, which are interfperfed thro' 
 the other parts of the Work, viz. of the I. II. III. 
 IV. and V. Books, in their proper places ^ and are 
 either Explicatory or Directive to the matter in 
 hand. 
 
 Hi. In the Seventh Book, are fome Difcourfes of 
 Alchpiu\ and the very Procefs it felf, ( as it is be- 
 lieved) by which the'Maifers of that Learning, at- 
 tained to the Sum uf all their Glory. In the Per- 
 feclion thereof, there are Riches, Honor, Health, 
 and Long Liie : By -it Artcjim ( a Jew ) lived, as 
 is reported, a Thoufand \ cars ^ how true it i:>, I 
 will not lay ^ himfelf affirms it : And very Wile 
 Men, fuch as ^aracelfus.^ Vontaniis^ and ethers^ fcem 
 to give Credit to it. And tliereby ¥hiwmc1^ a t'rc/ich 
 Man. originally ll poor Scrivener in Farjs^ left fo 
 
 great 
 
posrscRipr. 
 
 great Monuments behind him, as muft convince th« 
 molt Incredulous, that he knew the Secret, and did 
 fuch mighty Works, at his own proper Colts and 
 Charges, as the moft Opulent Prince in Europe can 
 never do the like. He built Twenty eight Hofpi- 
 tals in France^ alfo T^venty Churches and Chappcls> 
 and Endowed them all, with large Revenues and 
 Incomes. 
 
 IV. As to the many Additions to every Impref- 
 fion of this Book hitherto, 1 make bold to excufe 
 my felf : I confefs it is an abufe, and fuch an one 
 which I my felf, who have been a great buyer of 
 Books, have often complained of ^ it is indeed an 
 Oppreffion upon the Publick, for when a new Edi- 
 tion comes forth, with confiderable Additions, the 
 former Book is worth little or nothing. The truth 
 is, the Copy was formerly in the hands of fiicBi 
 Men, who thought much at every Penny they laid 
 out, and provided it would but anfwer their ends, 
 ,and bring them Money, they cared not how meanly 
 the Publick was ferved by it. But now it is fallen 
 into the hands of more GenerSks Spirited Men, 
 who were delirous of having a good Work, and a 
 Compleat Thing, and ituck at no Money to bring 
 the fome to Perfection : And accordingly, you fee 
 to what a Maturity their Gentleman-like Ijifpofiti- 
 ons, and Noble Spirits have brought this Book : 
 'Tis through them, and their means, you have it 
 thus compleat ^ and to them you ought to (hew 
 your good Nature, in rendring your Acknowledg- 
 ments and Thanks, for that otherwife you muft 
 ha\'e been contented to have taken up with the 
 few Fragments, wliich the penuriouHiefs of the for- 
 mer Bookfellers had aflPorded you. 
 
 V. But to make you amends for this trefpading, 
 not fo m.uch upon your Patience, as upon your Pur- 
 ics, we oiTer you here the Valuable Additions 
 wliich tiiis IrapreifiOn is enriched withal ^ ivhich i 
 
 am 
 
POSTSCRIPT. 
 
 am very confident, the ingenious Artift would no?- 
 be without for ten times all that tlie Book will 
 coft him, ( notwitliftanding all the other Editions 
 which he has foimerly bought, which are now like 
 an old Almanack, out of Date : ) This is enough, 
 we hope, to give fome fatisfa8:ion, and flop your 
 repining, efpecially when you fliall confider ( by 
 comparing this Edition with Ibme of the former ) 
 , what Care and Pains I have taken in the Editing 
 thereof : This Copy alfo is all Correded from the 
 Prefs with my own hand, which I will not promife 
 any future Edition (hall be ^ and therefore may be, 
 on that account, more Valuable than any that (hall 
 be hereafter Printed. And withal I promife. That 
 ftom henceforth I will never make any more Alte- 
 rations or Additions to this Work. 
 
 From my Houfe ztBiackr William Salmon, 
 
 Fryers Stairs, Lmdm, 
 24 OSaber, 1700. 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 ^Ag. 44. lin. 29. and pag. 45. lin. ^o, for ReSl'tfiedy read Ke- 
 fieliii, pag. 774. lin. 30. for Cen(uralf read CmtrnU 
 
 THE 
 
THE 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Liber Primus. 
 
 Of Drawing. 
 
 Chap. ^ Page. 
 
 1 /If Polygraphice in General. I 
 
 2 Of the Injlruments of Dramng. 2 
 
 Of WAking Pajiils or Crions. 2, 3> 4, 5 
 
 Of u/ing Paxils or Crions. 6 
 
 Of ujtng Indian Ink. j 
 
 3 Of the Precepts of Dramng in General. 7 
 
 4 Particular ehfervations in Dramng. lO 
 
 5 Of the Imitation of the Life. 15 
 
 6 Of the Imitation of Draughts. I^ 
 
 7 Of Dramng the fMe of a Man. iS 
 • 8 Of Dramng the extream Parts. 23 
 
 9 Of Dramng the whole Body. 21 
 
 10 Of Dramng a naked, Body. 22 
 
 11 Of fhadoTPing a naked Body. 24 
 
 12 Of the re ay and manner of Sh adorn ng. 25 
 
 13 Of exprejjing Pajfions in the Face. 26 
 
 28 
 
 16 0/ 
 
 14 Of human Proportion, 
 35 Of Drapery. 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. Pag<j; 
 
 16 Of mixed and uncertain Formt. 28 
 
 17 Of Landskip. tg 
 
 18 Of Diapering and Antiijue. ai 
 Ip Of taking the true Draught of a Figure. 42 
 
 To take the fhape of a Leaf^ Herb, &c. 42 
 
 To tab the Picture of an Herb from an old Pi- 
 
 El'4re, 43 
 
 20 Of expending or c6ntra[}:in^ a Piciure. 44 
 
 21 Of Perfpeciive in General, 44 
 
 22 0/ f/jf Aciive part of PerfpeSlive. a6 
 2'^OfthefubieSitobejieen. aj 
 
 24 Of the general praEtife of PerfpeElive. 4p 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 25 0/ the UJes of Perfpeciive. ^i 
 
 26 Of the meafures of human Bodies. 5? 
 
 27 Offome General Obfervations. <± 
 
 28 Of Light, Shadow and Color. ^7 
 Sp 0/ the Explication of Terms of Art. 62 
 
 Liber Seamdus* 
 
 Of Engraving, Etching, and Limning. 
 
 I f\P Graving and the Infiruments thereof. 6cf 
 
 ^^ 2 Of Polifhing the Copper Plate. 71 
 
 Of holding the Graver. . 71 
 
 Of the vnay and manner oC- Engraving. 72 
 
 ^ Of Imitation of Coppies or Prints. 7^ 
 
 6 Of Engraving in Wood called Cutting. 74 
 
 7 Of Etching, and the AiateriaU thereof * 75 
 To make the hard f^arnifh. j6 
 To make thejoft P^arnifh. 76 
 To make the Aqua-fortis. 77 
 
 8 Of uftng the hard J^arnifh. ■^p 
 y Of the yray and manner of Etching. 80 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. Page." 
 
 Of Etchmz Landslips. 82 
 
 10 Of ufmg the Aqua-fortis. 84. 
 
 11 Of finlping the Work, 8"^ 
 
 12 Ofn/tng the Joft Farnifh. 86 
 
 13 Of Etching upon the Joft yarniffj. 87 
 
 14 Of uflng the Aqua-fortis and fimfhing the W-.rh.. 8S 
 I') Of Limning and the Materials thereof i 90 
 
 16 Of the Gums and their Ufe. 91 
 
 17 Of the feven Colors in General, 9 2 
 1% Of Colors in Particular. > 94 
 
 Ohfervations on Reds. 9^ 
 
 Ohfervations on BrofpnL 99 
 
 Ohfervations on Greens. it>iJ. 
 
 Ohfervations on Tsllows. ibid 
 
 Ohfervations on Blems. too 
 
 Ohfervations on Whites. ibid 
 
 Ohfervations on Blacksi ibid 
 
 -f4 glorious color of Eaft-Iiidi.l Cz^^/. } ot 
 
 19 0/ /z?/Vv^ and compound Colors. ibid 
 
 20 Of Colors for Drapery. 1 05 
 
 21 Of Liquid Gold and Silver, 107 
 
 Argentum Muficum- ibid 
 
 Autum Muficum^ . p ^- icS 
 
 22 Of preparing the Color). t^ailUfa .' ic^ 
 Mixtures for fhadomng Hi [lories. j i r 
 Mixtftres for fhadomng Faces. ibid 
 Mixtures for fhadow.ing Hair. ibid 
 
 23 0/ f/)# manual Injlruments. 112 
 
 24 Of Preparations for Limning, 1.14 
 2^ Of Limning in A^iniature,.. n6 
 
 26 Of Limning Drapery. lip 
 
 27 0/ Limning Landslip. 1 24 
 
 28 Of Light and Shadamy 1 26 
 
 29 Of Colors more particularly. :, ■. \-..y. 1^0 
 
 30 Of making fome Original Color s:^- , 1 
 
 31 Of Limning to the Life in General c i 
 
 m- 
 
 ?^ 
 
 71;^ JDf^^ coloring of a Figure. 
 
 To draw rcith Indian Ink. 1 3 5 
 
 ^2 Of Limning Landslip parikularly. , J:^9 
 
 33 Of the various forms or degrees of, Coloring,* I I'a 
 
 34 0/ Limning the She, Clo-dsj ,&c. " i f,' 
 
 35 Of Limning Towns, Ceiftlesj R^tini. 
 
 i.^.-- 
 
 a . 36 Of 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. Pgae 
 
 36 Of Mountains, Hills and the like. J45 
 
 37 Of Trees, Boughs, Cottages, &c. 146 
 
 38 Of Limning naked Figures. 147 
 3P Of Limning^ Hair. 145 
 
 40 Of Walls, Chambers and the like. ^ 14^ 
 
 41 Of Marble Pillars, Rocks, &ic. I^o 
 
 42 0/ Coloring Metals. ibid 
 
 43 Of Limning Florvers. 151 
 
 44 Of Radifhes, Turneps, Melons, Cucumhrs. 152 
 
 45 0/ Limning Fruits. 1 55 
 
 46 Of Limning Birds. 1 54 
 
 47 Of Limning Beajis. 1 55 
 
 48 0/ Limning Serpents. 157 
 ^p Of LimningWaters and Fijh. 158 
 
 Li^^r Tertius. 
 
 Of Painting, Wafhing, Gilding, Colors, ^r. 
 
 I /^^ Painting in General. 1 59 
 ^^ 2 0/ Painting in Oil and the Materials there- 
 of. 161 
 
 3 Of Colors in General and their Jiguifications. 163 
 
 4 O/" fitting colors for Painting. 1 64 
 
 5 O/^ Co/or J- /o/- Velvet. . 165 
 
 6 0/ Colors for Sattins. 1 66 
 
 7 O/" Co/or; /<9r Taffety, Cloth, Leather. 1 67 
 
 8 Of Colors for Garments in General. 168 
 p Of Colors for Metals and Precious Stones. j6p 
 10 Of Colors for Landskip. 1 70 
 
 II Of Painting the Face. 1 71 
 
 12 Of clean ftng eld Paintings. 1 72 
 
 13 Of a Picture in General. 174 
 
 14 0/ //)^ c/;{)zf(? ofCoppies or Patterns. 1 76 
 
 15 0/ dijpofmg of Pitlures and Primings. ijy 
 
 16 Of 
 
Oiap. _ ^ Pigc^ 
 
 16 Of Frefcoe, or Painting of Wijlls . 17S 
 
 ly Of Painting Sun dials ^ Tl^hcr-worl, Sici lyp 
 
 How Colors are to he Jet off. 185 
 
 To transfer the drasfght of a Dial upon the Plane:. iSo 
 
 To Gild the Figures of Sun dials. 1S7 
 
 18 Tvafhing Maps, PiEiurcs, Sic. i^p 
 
 ip Of Colors fimple for rcafhin^JUfaps-i S/x. ipi 
 
 To mah Verdigrife according to Glauber. ip'i, , 
 
 ■30 Of Colors compound for wa/hing Maps, &c, ip.y 
 
 2i Of mixing Colors and Shadomng. ip6 
 
 22 Of Colors for ivafl:^ing Landskips. ipS^ 
 
 23 Of the PraBice of WafJping. ipp , 
 HoTv to lay on your Colors. 200 
 
 ^iJ. Ohfervations on Vegetable Colors. 23 2: 
 
 25 Ohfervations on Mineral Colors. 226 
 
 16 Of Metals. [ \\ . 20p' 
 
 2y Of the way and inafiTisr of Gilding. 215 
 28 0/ making vploite Colors, and wmt^ning PUijfer Walls. 
 
 2p 0/ Mczzotinto, and taking ojf an old PHm on ivhite 
 
 Paper. 220 
 
 30 Of making various forts of Ink. 221 
 
 Liber QuarUis. 
 
 The Original, Advancement cind Perfedrion 
 of the Arc of Painting : E)cemplified m the 
 various Paintings ofdie Ancicnrs. 
 
 C\t^ the Original of thefe Arts. 
 
 ^-^ 2 Of tbe Proirrefs of thefe Ans. 
 
 3 Of the PerfeEiion ef^the Art of Painimg. . ^16 
 
 4 Of the Ancients de pitying their Ggds,. 4t]iftf-fiof S4t.iirn. 
 
 ■■■-.' ■ ' ■ ' 3'3i> 
 
 a 2 5 Ca*^ 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. Page, 
 
 5 Of the Ancients depi^ing Jupiter. , 327 
 
 6 Of tke Ancients depi^iing Mars. 529 
 
 7 Of the Ancients depiUing Phcebus or Sol. 330 
 
 8 Of the Antients depiEling Venus. 332 
 
 p Of the Ancients depi^ing Mc^ccmy- 335 
 
 10 Of the Ancients depicting Diana or Luna. 335 
 
 1 1 Of the Ancients depiBing Janus. 337 
 
 1 2 0/ the Ancients dcpiBing Aurora. 338 
 
 13 Of the Ancients depi^ing Juno. 33P 
 
 14 or the Ancients depiEiing Ops or Tellu?. 340 
 
 15 Of the Ancients depiBingNt[)\.imQ and Sea-gocls. 341 
 
 16 Of the Ancients dcpi^ing Ncmeiis. 343 
 
 17 Of the Ancients dcpitlingVstn. ibid 
 
 1 8 Of the Ancients dcpiEiing Plato. 345 
 
 1 9 Of the Ancients depicting the Vsmcx. 346 
 
 20 Of the Ancients depi^ing Minerva or Pallas. ibid 
 
 21 Of the Aficients depicting Vulcdn, 347 
 
 22 Of the Ancients depiBing Bacchus. 348 
 
 23 Of the Ancients depicting Fortune. 349 
 
 24 Of Virtue, Trmh, Peace , Honor , Fume, Opinion, 352 
 
 25 Of Ni^ht, Sleep, Silence, Pleajure, Fear 353 
 "26 Of Pmlofophers, Law-givers, Kings, Qneens^ 355 
 
 27 Of the Painting of the Sybils. 357 
 
 28 Of Arts, Virtues, Pajfions, and minor Gods. 359 
 
 29 Of cxprfjjing the Powers. 362 
 
 Eternity. ibid 
 
 Time. Fate, Fortune. ' 363 
 
 Ecjuality, ViBory, Peace, Providence, Concord, Fame, 
 
 Dcftiny. 364 
 
 ::50 Of depicting Virtues and Vices. 365 
 
 31 Of depict in g Rivers. ^6j 
 
 Tiber, Nilus, Tigris. ibid 
 
 Ganges, IikIus, Tliamifis, Ainu-, Po, Daiuibius. 
 
 • 3^S 
 
 AcheJou?, Niger. 369 
 
 -3 2 Of depiBing the Nymphs. ibid 
 
 Napjea, Dryades, Naiade?, llictis, Galatea, Iris. 
 
 370 
 
 Nymph.'c dianx, Aurora. ^71 
 
 3 3 Of depicting the nine A'laje.:. 'ibid 
 
 ^^ O'- the foHr Winds. , 372 
 
 ^5 Of the Alanths of the Tear- 373 
 
 Liber 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 hiber Suintns, 
 
 Of Beautifying and Perfuming. 
 
 Chap. Page: 
 
 I ^\P Painting the Face and Skin. ^ 375 
 ^^ ^OfCofmmchwhichhaMifymthofitPaint. 380 
 
 3 OfX^ofmeticks for the Fices of the Skin. 384 
 
 4 Of other admirable Beautifiers, 3°^ 
 
 5 Of cleanfing the Teeth. ^91 
 
 6 Of making a fweet Breath. 35?3 
 
 7 Of beautifying the Hair. ^90 
 
 8 Of Perfuming in General. 3PP 
 p Of the Aiatter of which Per fumes are ?nade. . ibid 
 10 Of the Oil of Ben. , 400 
 
 II 0/ Svpeet V/aters. 401 
 J 2 Of Perfuming Oils and Spirits. 404 
 1 ^ Of Perfuming Ejfences. 406 
 l^ Of Perfuming Unguents. 408 
 
 1 5 0/ Perfuming Ponders. 409 
 
 16 Of Perfuming Baljams, 4^4 
 
 1 7 0/ Perfuming Tablets. \ 415 
 
 1 8 Of Pomanders for Bracelets. 41 6 
 IpOfPerfumingWaJh-balls. 4x9 
 ^o Of Perfuming Soaps. 421 
 
 21 Of burning and boiling Perfumes. 422 
 
 22 Of Animal and Mineral Perfumes. _ 425 
 
 23 Of ?/jf Adulteration of Musk, Civet, Ambcrgrije, 426 
 2\ Of Perfuming Cloth, Skins, Gloves. 428 
 
 * 5 
 
 Liher 
 
The CONTjEHTS. 
 
 Liber Sextus, 
 
 Of the Arts of Dying and Staining. 
 
 Chap. Page, 
 
 "^ (\^ ^y'"S ^fh Colors. 431 
 
 ^^ 2 Of Dying BUds. 433 
 
 3 Of Dying B I cm. ^ 436 
 
 4 Of Dying Broy.ns. 438 
 % Of Dying a CinnamonColor. 44O 
 
 6 Of Dying Clove Colors. . 442. 
 
 7 O" Dying Flejh Colors. ' 443 
 
 8 Of Dying Gnyy RHJfet^ or Lead Colors^ 444 
 p Of Dying Greens. 445 
 
 I o O,^ Z); j/z^ H.?/V Co/or/. 449 
 
 I I Of Dying Ahiife Colors. 45Q 
 
 1 2 Of Dying Pink Colors. 453 
 
 1 3 Of Dying a Rofe Color. 453 
 
 14 Of Dying Red Rofe or Carnation Color. 454 
 150,^ Dyins^ Red Colors . 455 
 
 1 6 or D).//;ir ^ Re:{ Blufh Color. 45a 
 
 17 0/ 7^;/;.'_^ Scarlet nnd the Bon-dy:. 459. 
 1% Of Dying Sand Colors. ^ 461 
 
 19 Of Dying Sn^-^ Colors. ^ " 462, 
 
 20 O/" T^T'wj ^/£'/iff <?«(^ Purple Cehrs. 4^3 
 
 21 Of Dying ycllons and orange Tanny. 465 
 
 22 Of Watering Stf^s., tahngom Spots. /!^6y 
 
 23 O^' T^T^//^ P.?/jfrj P.p-chwent, Leather, d.69 
 ^■\. Of Dying Wood, HornSj Bowsy 6:c. 472 
 123 The Conclufion. 474 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Liber Septimus, 
 
 Of Alchimy, and the Philolbphers Elixir. 
 
 Chap. Page. 
 
 I ir\^ Alchimy in Geneyal. 477 
 ^^ 2 Of Saturn or Lead. 47p 
 
 3 0/ Jupiter or Tin. 481 
 
 4 Of Mars or Iron. 483 
 
 5 Of S0I or G(?W. 484 
 
 6 Of Venus or Copper. 485 
 y Of Mercury or Ofiick-filver. 488 
 
 8 0/ Luna or Silver. 4po 
 
 9 0/ ^^^ Accidents of Metals, ^pi 
 
 10 Of the great Philojophick WorL 505 
 
 I I Of the grand Elixir from an old Hermit. 509 
 120/ the Qnalities of the Philofophers Stone. 513 
 1 3 0/ the Matter of the Philofophers Stone. 5 1 7 
 14-4 continuation of the former DifcoHrfe, 520 
 
 15 Of the Preparation of the Philofophers Stone, 525 
 
 16 Of the PraBick part of the Preparation. 529 
 
 1 7 77)(? former Difcourfe continued. 532 
 
 1 8 0/ the InjirHments of this Work. 536 
 
 19 0/ the Fire j and firfl the Ignis Extcrnus. 5^7 
 
 20 O/" z-/?f Ignis internus. S40 
 
 21 Of the time for doing this Worl. 542 
 
 22 Of a Profitable Particular Work .5^4 
 
 APPENDIX, 
 
 23 Of cert m natural Expmments. S48 
 
 'a 4 Liber 
 
Th? CONTENTS, 
 
 Liber OBai^HS. 
 
 Faber's Arcanum^s. 
 
 Chap. Page^ 
 
 I nrHE highcji TtnUure of Sol, fixed for Luna. 557 
 
 -*- 2 The way of fixing Lun^. 55^ 
 
 5 77v ivhire fixed Tinttftre for Venus. 5S9 
 
 4 The fixed Oil of Mercury. ibid 
 
 5 The red Cimiaher of Antimony. <}6o 
 
 6 A fixed TinEiure to ProjeB on Venus. S6i 
 
 7 Thcf.xin^ of Oil of Tartar. ibid 
 
 8 To fix the Oil of S;il-Armoniack. 562 
 p A nonderfnl red Tificifire frorn Vitriol. 563 
 JO To make the aforejaid Oil of Cold. ^64 
 
 I I To encreafe Gold and Silver. ^65 
 
 12 yi fixed Tintiure for Venus. ibid 
 
 1 3 Tije purgation cf Venus /or the former Tinware. 567 
 
 14 T"" Co'igeal or Harden Mercury. ibid 
 
 15 lT7./i Regukis 0/ Antimony to male Gold, 568 
 
 16 For nsaiiiiig So\. 56^ 
 
 17 For the -nnitening of Copper. 57^ 
 V6TheCe?fientaticnofSo\. ibid 
 jcj Oil r-f S-Alphur Vive. 571 
 
 20 A TnEhnre for Sol. 272 
 
 21 To extraEi Mercury from Antimony. ibid 
 
 22 An Elixir of the Golden Work. ^ 573 
 
 23 The ex-raflion of the Virgins Mill. S74 
 
 24 For ihe whitening of Copper. 575 
 
 25 A ferret from Antimony and Mercury. ibid 
 
 26 A TiH^are ({ Luna upon Venus. 577 
 ■ 27 A Tin^Hrc of Sol upon Luna. ibid 
 
 2,3 Another Tncime of Sul upon Luna, 578 
 
 2p A 
 
The Contents, 
 
 Chap. Page. 
 
 29 A TxnBwe of Sulphur mi Mars^r Luna. 27S 
 50 A TinBure from Sulphur Vivey and Argent Vive upon. 
 
 Luna. 580 
 
 1^1 A preparation of Arfenicli to rchiten- Venus. 581 
 
 32 A fixed TrnElure to change Lima, into Sol. 582 
 
 33 Mercury Water. ibid 
 54 To Tinge Luna into Sol. 583 
 
 35 Crocus Martis more noble for the former fecret. 5% 
 
 36 Tb r.«^r;? Water into good Wine. 585 
 
 37 To r«r« f/v //^///'/f Oil of the Golden Marchafite into 
 
 Gold. 5S6 
 
 38 The Oil of an Alcali for the former fecret. 587 
 3P 71) 77«^e Luna f;?rfl Sol. ibid 
 
 40 To make the Mercury of Antimony. 58S 
 
 41 To extraB Mercury /row Metals. ^89 
 
 42 To tranfmute Antimony into SoL ibid 
 
 43 Mercury of Luna ^«^ wzV/; zV a great Elixir. 5PD 
 
 44 To ?m^(? and fix Ytvms into good Luna. 591 
 
 45 To fix and tinge Luna imogood Sol. 592 
 
 46 To fix Mercury into fine Luna. ibid 
 
 47 To fix Mercury into fine SoL 593 
 
 48 To fix Mercury into fine SoL 594 
 
 49 To /z.v Mercury into fine Luna. ibid 
 
 50 To fix Mercury into true Sol. 595 
 
 51 To »;4/-? f/?f Oils of Sol and Luna. ^96 
 
 52 To fix Luna r«/^o Sol. 597 
 
 53 To extratl Mercury /row So!. ibid 
 
 54 To fix this Mercury into fine Sol. 59S 
 
 55 To fix the Mercury of Luna into Luna. ^gg 
 
 56 To cement Luna into true Sol. ibid 
 '^j Toniake AiirMn: Potahile. 600 
 
 58 To w*.tif Argentum Potabile. 601 
 
 59 To tranfmute Luna /«ro Sol. 632 
 
 60 To tranfwHte Venus into Luna. 603 
 61^ ^S'z7^'fr A^ine v.yhich will never decay. 604 
 
 62 A Golden Mine to tranfrnnte Luna into Sol. 6:)2 
 
 63 -/^ /-fn^i«^ l-]V(?r, fo r/«^^Luna. 6o=j 
 
 64 To multiply Luna. 606 
 
 65 To tinge Luna wro Sol. 637 
 
 66 To w^^f ?/;(? fr«f Red Oil of Antimony. ibid 
 
 67 To fix Luna. ' 609 
 
 63 A 
 
T*c CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. t'iige. 
 
 6S A TinUure ofMars for tinging Luna. 6op 
 
 (5p To rfr/;/if Sol into Mercury, mth Mercliry. ' 6io 
 
 jro To w/«-f f a Golden Adine. 612 
 
 71 To »;ah the afore/aid Mine tinge Luna in Sol. 613 
 
 72 To tranfmute Mercury /«/o SoJ. 614 
 
 73 To rranfmute Mercury and Luna /»w Sol. 615 
 
 74 To f/;7^(? Venus into Luna. 616 
 
 75 To tinge Venus ?;?^o Luna. ibid 
 
 76 To tinge Luna wro Sol. 617 
 yj To tinge Luna into Sol. 618 
 78 To make a Water of Mercury. dip 
 7P To tinge Venus into Luna. 5 20 
 
 80 Another way to make Aq. Mcrcuri;. ibid 
 
 81 Aq. Mercuri), another re Ay. 621 
 S2 An Elixir of the Spar Satiirni. ibid 
 83 ^« Elixir from Pearl. 625 
 34 To make Jmatl Pearls into great Ones. 625 
 S5 To make Malleable Glaf?. 627 
 
 86 To make Carbuncles of Cryflal. 62% 
 
 87 To make Trees hear three times a Year. ibid 
 ^%Tofix Mercury Tuith Salt of Tin. 650 
 Sp To Hx Mercury into a white Oil for Iran/mutation into 
 
 Sol ' 6^1 
 po To fix Mercury into a i»hite Oil for TranftnHtation into 
 
 Luna. 632 
 
 pi To make a Red TinBure -mth Nitre. 63 5 
 
 p2 To make a White Elixir. 634 
 
 P3 To make a Red Elixir for Sol. 635 
 
 P4 Spirit of Ma.y-derv for the former fecret, 63 5 
 
 P5 The fixing of Arfenick. 6^6 
 
 c6 To refolve Sol into its firfl matter. 6:^y 
 
 • p7 To r^/ake Spiritus Mercurij. 638 
 
 98 Spirit of Lime to dijfolve all things. 63^ 
 
 P9 To tr animate Jupiter into Luna. ibid 
 100 A White Elixir to tranjmtae Adetals into Luna. 640 
 
 jci A RedTinn:kre ofMRrsfor Sol. 642 
 
 J 02 -.^« Elixir of Tin for the rehite Work. 643 
 
 IC3 A leffcr Tinware for the white Work. 644 
 
 10 j\.The Phyfical Stone made of Dew. 645 
 
 105 To fix Mercury. 646 
 
 I c^ To Co«^^<frf/ Mercury /«roLun;^, ^47 
 
 107 T« 
 
The CONTENTS. ' 
 
 Ciiap. Page. 
 
 107 To male the Mercury of Antinion)', 647 
 
 jo8 To convert Lead into Mercury. 64S 
 
 lOp A TinBure of Sol for Jranfmuting Lima. ibid 
 
 ,1 10 A Tinciurt of Luna for other Aietnls. 650 
 
 jli A Red Oil of Vi-riolj a Secret. 651 
 
 ii2 A Red TinBure from Arfenick. 6^2 
 
 113 The Conclufion of this Eighth Bool, 653 
 
 j'T 
 
 ^'^/v 
 
 hiber Nomts. 
 
 4^4* 
 
 Of Chiromantical Signatures. 
 
 J A Demon[iration jjf Clm-omanticd Signatures. 6'^6 
 •^^ 2, Whether right or left Hand tole judged hy. 662 
 
 ^ Of the Planetary Mounts. • :, -664 
 
 4 Ceneneral Judgments of the Hand. 6'yo 
 
 ^(}f the Line of Life. ,• .• 673 
 
 th Uf the Epatick or Natm-td L4nf. \- 6y'6 
 
 y Of the Cephalica or Head'Line. dSo' 
 
 8 Ciff/?^ MenCil, or Line of Fortune. 6S2 
 
 p^ 0/^?/v Reftri(5la, 0?- Cauda Di'acpnis. 6S5 
 
 10 Or^fr Ohfcrvanons on the H.'.nd-Wrifl. 887 
 
 11 Of the Saturnia, or Line <tf &tiirn/ 6<7'6 
 laO/'Linea Solari?, pr Stdmachica. ' 6572 
 i^Of the Cingulum, or Girdle 0/" yenus. 695 
 14 Of ?^«f Via Ladea, or AMhyWity. 6^5 
 i^Of the Mount of SRtum. 6(?j 
 10 0/ r^i^ Mount of Jupiter. 600 
 
 17 Qf the Cavea Martis, <««i^ Via Martis. 703 
 
 18 O/" the Aiount of Sol, 4«i^ Via Solis. 707 
 
 19 Of the Aiount of Venus. 710 
 
 20 Of the Aiount of Mercury, 712 
 2iQf the Amount of IxmTi. " ■ ji6 
 
 v-Ui 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap^ Page* 
 
 '22 Of the Menfli, Quadrangle or Table. yiy 
 
 23 Of the Fingers. 720 
 
 2^ Of the Thumb . 721 
 
 25 The Good and Evil Lines , and CharaBers, 723 
 
 26 Certain Chiromantical Aphorijms. 724 
 
 hiber Decimns. 
 
 Of Painting and Coloring, or Staining GUff^ 
 Enamel^ and Gtms, 
 
 SECT.!. 
 
 Of G L A s s. 
 
 i r\F Salts for Glafs Worlf. 7^0 
 
 ^^ 2 Of making Frit for Cryjtal. 734- 
 
 5 Of Artificial Cryfal. 737' 
 4 Colors for tinging GlaJS and Cryjial in General. 740' 
 5- Colors from Lead. 748 
 
 6 Of Colors f row Iron, 755 
 
 7 Of Colors from Copper or BraJS. 758 
 
 S E C T^ II. 
 Of G E M s. 
 
 8 Of" Cements, Aiineral Colors, And Gems. 767 
 p 0/ Artificial Gems in general. 774 
 
 10 >4 Pafle for a Beryl, or Sky-Color. 778 
 
 1 1 To male a Chalcedony. 778 
 
 1 2 Pa/le for an Oriental Ckryfolite. 783 
 15 Of making fair Oriental Diamonds. ibid 
 
The CONTEKTS. 
 
 Chap: Page: 
 
 14 PAJiesfor an Oriental Emerald. 787 
 
 1 5 Pafies for an Oriental Granate. yBp 
 10 Pajies for an Oriental Jacynth. ^po 
 
 17 Pafles for making Artificial Pearls. frgi 
 
 18 Other various ways of making Artificial Pearls. 794 
 Ip Padesfor Oriental Rubies and Carbuncles, 801 
 
 20 Pajies fer an Oriental Saphir. ^4 
 
 21 Pafies for an Oriental Topaz,. 8^5 
 
 22 Pafies for an Oriental Turcois. 807 
 
 SECT. III. 
 
 Of E N A M E L S. 
 
 23 Of Enametsin General. ibid 
 
 24 The may of Enamelling. So^ 
 
 25 To Enamel on Metals. Si I 
 
 26 Of Painting on Enamel. 815 
 
 27 Of Milk White Enamel. 814 
 2B0f Black Enamel. 815 
 2p Of fine Blerv and Turcois Enamels^ 810 
 
 30 Of Green Enamels. 8 1 7 
 
 31 0/ Purple Enamels. Si8 
 3 2 0/ Rofe colored Enamels. 8 1 9 
 ^^ Of Red Enamels. 820 
 34 0/ TelloTV Enamels. 822 
 ^^Of making China, to Enamel, Paint and Qild it. 825 
 
 SEC T. IV. 
 
 Of Painting Glass. 
 
 36 Of Painting Glafs in General, and of the Colors. 826 
 
 37 Preparations of Vegetable Colors. 830 
 
 38 Preparations of Mineral Colors. 835 
 3P Coloring or Staining Glafs from Randdlphe Holme, 
 
 /z«<r Gerard Wane. 841 
 
 40 Some other Colors for Painting Glafs. 842 
 
 41 The vpay of Painting on Glajs. 844 
 
 42 T'2S 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap^ Page- 
 
 42 The TMy of Gilding upon Glafs, 4^S 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 43 A Dijconrfe of Loohng-Gh.ffcs. 849 
 
 Liher Z^ndecimus. 
 
 Of Varnifhiog, Japanning and Gilding. 
 
 I C)F Injlrtiwents and Utenfils for thofe Worh 854 
 ^^ 2 Of Materials neccffary for thefe Works* 857 
 
 5 Of Siz.es and Gum Water. 863 
 
 4 Of waking Varnifhes. S66 
 
 5 Of fome other kinds of F'arnifhes. 871 
 
 6 Of making Japan Varnifhes. 876 
 
 7 Oy making Lackering Varnifhes. 878 
 S Of the way and manner of Varnifhing. 880 
 (T? Some general Ohjervations in Varnijhing. 881 
 loOf Varnifhing Wood withoM Colors. 8S3 
 
 I I Of Dying or Staining Wood, BoneSy Ivory, Ilorns. 885 
 ilOf Varnifhing Prints. 887 
 1 5 O/" Preparing Woeds for Japanning, 889 
 t^ Of JapanningWood ivith Colors, 8^0 
 
 1 jS/^c,^ Japan. ibid 
 
 2 Another Black Japan. 891 
 5 Mj/V^ Japan. ^92 
 
 4 ^/(fjy Japan. 893 
 
 5 Common Red Japan. 894 
 
 6 Dffp ^f^ Japan' ibid 
 
 7 P.?/f ^f.i japan. 895 
 
 8 OZ/T/^ Colored Japan. _ ibia 
 
 9 Chejlnm Colored Japan. ' ibid 
 .JO //^f/V Lazuli Japan. ^96 
 
 ^Of 
 
The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chapi Page. 
 
 15 of Marhle and Tortoife Shell Ja^an, 8^7 
 
 1 Marhle Jdpan. ibid 
 
 2 Another Marhle Japan^ 8p8 
 5 Tortoife Shell Japan. 8pp 
 
 4 Another Tortoife Shell Jaj^fu poo 
 
 5 Another Tortoife SheH Japan, poi 
 
 6 Another Tortoife Shelf Japan. ibid 
 
 16 Of laying Speckles or Stremngs on Japan* ' p02 
 
 17 Of Japanning Metals mthGHntVVatsr. P04 
 
 18 Of Japanning in Gold Siz,e. P05 
 ip Of JapAnning mth Gold and Colors. po8 
 20 ' 0/ i?;?//f i ^«^ Ewhojfed Worh, p i o 
 
 r^^ F/ry? 1%. ibid 
 
 27?f Second Way. pi 2 
 
 A Third Way. pi 5 
 
 To /ff ofEwhoJl Worh mth Black. pi 4 
 
 To manage Rock Work. pi 5 
 
 21 Of Bantam Work. pi 6 
 
 22 Of taking off' Japan Pattern^. pi 8 
 
 23 Of Gilding in Oil. pip 
 
 24 Of Gilding Wood mth ktirnifht Gold 4nd Silver. p2i 
 
 25 Of Gilding of Metals. P24 
 
 26 Of Gilding and PaintingMczzotmto Prints. p2y 
 
 27 0/ /4)'i»^ Pri^Z-J «p«» C?/^?!?. P30 
 To P^iwr Mezzotinto, or Engraved Landskip. p^i 
 To Paint a Humane Body. p-^i^ 
 To ^aini Drapery. P34 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 28. Of making Saalipg -Wax and GUm. p^ 
 
 
 • The 
 
The Chara^er^ Explained^ 
 
 gr. A grain. The 20th part of a fcrttpU. 
 
 3/. Half a fcruple. Containing 10 grains, 
 
 3 A fcruple. Containing 20 grains, 
 
 5/. Half a dram. Containing 3 grains, 
 
 3 A dram- Containing 3 fcraples, 
 
 5/. Half an ounce: Containing 4 drams Troy, 
 
 5 An ounce. Containing 8 ^r^srwx 7>«>y, 
 
 M.Halfapound. 0«f4/«%{7''««f^^rr7. 
 -^ * ^ s.^ oHnces Averdepit, 
 
 ib A pound. Containing S^i''*''''''^^' , 
 *^ 6^16 omces Aver depot z, 
 
 T^ Recipe. Taks or Receive, 
 
 'Jina. Of each a like. viz. alike Weight or Number, 
 
 SSS, Stratum fuper Stratum. Which //, Lay n^onLay, 
 
 VOLT' 
 
TOLYGKATHICES 
 Liber Primus. 
 
 o F 
 
 DRAWING 
 
 P 
 
 CHAP. I, 
 
 Of Polygraphke in General, 
 
 I. "ta 'polygraphke is an Art (6 much itnirating Nature, aS 
 that by proportional Lines, with anl werable Co- 
 lours, it teacbeih to reprefent to the Life fand that 
 in piano) the Forms of all corporeal things, with 
 their refpedive PaiTions. 
 
 This Definition is clear out of the Nature of the Arty {being 
 atfi a liberal Art^ as are Arirhmeiick, Geometry, Aftronomy, 
 Dialing, Mufick, C^c.) It is [aid to reprefint things in piano, 
 to difjtinguijh it from Carving, which is alfi a ^eprefemation of 
 tiHtural things with Rotundity and Thicknefs. 
 
 11. It is called, in general, in Greek ]spa(^.nx.ii, in Latin 
 PiElura, and in Englilh the Art of Painting. 
 
 IIL It is Sevenfold ftowitj in Drawings Engraving, Etch- 
 ings Limning, Painting, Wafhing and Colouring. 
 
 IV. Drawing is that whereby we reprefent the Shape and 
 Fcrnj of any cvporeal Swbrtance in rude Lines only. 
 
 V It confifts in Proportion and Paflion, as it bath relation 
 I'o motion acd fiiuiiion, in refped of Light and Vificn. K 
 
 B to 
 
2 Foljigraphices Lib. I. 
 
 to preportioneJ Quantity you add Colour, you will have at length 
 the Form and Pcrfcdion of ibc Figure ; fo that wbofoever 
 lees it, may be able to (ay, ibis is a Man, that a Peacock^ that 
 a Leopard ; and again tb.s is John, tbat Thomas, a ihird ano- 
 ther Man, ^c. And by the exad perfoimiug of ib'ie things, 
 you may depitfl one Fearful, ano-her Crying and Lamevring^ 
 another >^w^r;, another in Love, Sec. and that fo exctllemJy, 
 that the Party counterfeited may be thereby eafily known. 
 
 VI. Sanderfjn faith, This admirable Art is the Imitation of 
 the Surface of Nature in Colour and Proportion, i. By Ma- 
 thematical DamoDir ration. 2. By Chorograpbical Defcrip- 
 tion, 3. By Shapes of living Creatures. 4. And by the 
 Forms of Vegetable?. Id all which it prefers Likenefs 10 the 
 Life, coufcrves it after Death, and this aUogetbcr by the Senfe 
 of Seeing. 
 
 VIL The Pr^/fom^w fliews the true length, breadth, or big- 
 nefs of any part i'\n known mealuresj in refpedt of the whole, 
 »nd how they bear one to another : The Vajjion reprefeuis the 
 vifual Quality, in refped of Love or Hatred, Sorrow or Joy. 
 Magnanimity or Cowa'dice, Majefty or Humility : Of all 
 which things we (hall Tpeak in order. 
 
 VIII. Herein alfo Painting uitfers from Carving ; for t\\t 
 Carver s Intent is only co give the relf-lame Quantity to his Fi- 
 gure, which his riifiural Pstfern hath, vi:(. equal to the Life 
 in Quantity only: VVhri'i-s the Painter, by the help of Colours, 
 adds a k:~c! of life to ihc Similitude, and giies not only Q^ati^ 
 itty, but a Colourable {{efcviiK'.nce alio. 
 
 CHAR II. 
 
 Of the Infirumcnls of DrAwmg. 
 
 1. ^He Infltuments of Drawing are Sevenfold, vi:{. Char- 
 -■- coals, Feat^prs of a Duck's Wing, Black and Red 
 
 Lead Pencils, Pet,s made of Ravens Quills, Rulers, Compa(- 
 
 ies, and Paftils or Crions. 
 
 II. Charcoals are to be cbofen of Sallow-wood fplit into the 
 
 Form of Pencils, and fliarpned tea point, beirg chiefly known 
 
 hj their PUh la the middle. 
 
 Their 
 
Chap. 2 . The Jvjlrujmnis of Drawing, 5 
 
 Their ufe is to draw lightly the Draught over at firfl, 
 that if any thing be drawn amifs^ it may be tvifed out and 
 amended. 
 
 III. The Feathers oiighc to be of a Duck's Wing, ftbough 
 others may feive well enoughj with which you may wipeoui 
 any Stroke of the Charcoal where it is drawn amifs, kit Va- 
 riety of Lines breed Confufion, 
 
 IV. Blacl{ and J^ed Lead Pencils are ro go cv^r your 
 Draught the fecond time more exactly, becaufe this will not 
 v;ipe out with your Hand when you come 10 draw it over 
 with the Pen. 
 
 V. Pens made of Ravens Qaills (but others may ferve; are 
 to fini(h the Work : Bat herein you muft be very careful and 
 cxacH: i for what is now done amifs there is no altering of. 
 
 VI. The I{ukrs which are of ufe to draw ftralght or per- 
 pendicular Lines, Triangles, Squares or Polygons, the which 
 you are to ufe in the beginning, till Pradlice and Experience 
 may render ibem needlefs, ^ 
 
 VIL CompaJJes made of fine Brafs, with Stee! Points, to 
 take in and our> that you may ufe Black or Red Lead at plea- 
 lure. 
 
 Their VCe is fir/} to meafure (by help of a curious Scale of 
 e^ual Parts upon the edge of your Bjiler) your Proportions, and 
 whether your fVork^ is exaS tvhich is done with the Charcoal. 
 Secondly, To draw Circles, Ovals and Arches withal. 
 
 VIII. Pafiils or Crions are made of feveral Colours to 
 draw withal upon Coloured Paper or Parchment. Thus, 
 
 Tali^ Plaifier of Paris or Alabafler calcined^ and of the Co" 
 lour of which you intend to makf your Paftils withy ana. q. f. 
 grind them fir/i a/under, then together^ and with a little Water 
 makp them into Pafie i then with your Hands roul them into long 
 pieces like Blacky Lead Pencils, then dry them moderately in the 
 Air : Being dried, when you ufe them, fcrape them to a point 
 like an ordinary Pencil. 
 
 And thus may you make Paflils or Crions of what Co- 
 lour you pleafe, fitting them for the Faces of Men or 
 iVomen, Landslips, Clouds,. Sunbeams, Buildings, and Sha- 
 dows. 
 
 IX. Another way to make Pafiils or Crions. 
 
 Take Tobaco- pipe Clay, and with a little Water temper 
 the fame with wfaatCoIotir you pleafe, making feveral accord- 
 ing to the feveral Heights ot Colours you intend j which mix 
 
 B 2 with 
 
4 Poljigraphkes Lib. I. 
 
 with the faid Tobaco-pipe Clay, fo much as the Clay will 
 bear ; work all well together, make or form it into Pajiih or 
 CrioNSy and let tbetn dry for ufe. 
 
 X. A Pa/lil or Cr ion for a brown Compleclion. 
 
 Grind on your lione Cerufe, Red Lead, or Vermilion, 
 Englifh Oker, ind a lictle Pink ; to this add a proportionable 
 quantity of Plailtcr of Paris burnt and finely fifted, or Toba- 
 co-pipe Ciay , mix either of tbcra with the faid Colours, and 
 then roul them up. Here note, that Cerufe is mixed with 
 all the other Colouts alfo. Roul them up upon a Marble 
 Stone, and le» them be about the length of a Finger, and 
 the thicknefs of a Goofe- Quill. 
 
 XL Tbcle Papii's or Crions being dry, you may fharpen 
 them (wben you ufe them) wirh a Pen-knif? to a point, fo 
 (harp that you may draw a Hair. The Colour moft difficult 
 to work in tl-is kind is Cii'mfon, if you make ufe of Lake, 
 tvhicb you may avoid hy making ufe of I{pjfet ; and be fure to 
 n-)ix Cerufe wi;b all your other Colours and Shadows whai- 
 fotvtr. • 
 
 j^ftsr this manner, with proper Compojjtions, yon may make 
 a'S n'lanner 'df bedidtifu! Colours, as Greens for Landskips, and 
 Of her Colours, for I{^c!{s, Grrunds, Sk^es, fVai^s, &c. 
 
 XIL j4 Pajlilor Crion for Greens. 
 
 ThcfeCr;Vw are made of Pink and Bice; and Mafticote 
 and Small ; and Mafticote and Indico, with which Colours 
 you may make them lighter or deeper, as you pleafe ; re- 
 membring that where you are ro temper Ibfi or firm Colours, 
 as Umber, Ok?r, Indico, G?c you are to take the lefs PUifier 
 cf Paris ; but where the Colours are loofe, there bind chem 
 ftronger and fafter, by adding more Plaijler cf Paris. 
 
 Xin. ^^nother way to make Pajiils or Crions. 
 
 Take your Colours and grind them very fine upon a Mtr- 
 blv% ar-d fife tbern through a fine Tiffany Sieve ; then take a 
 piece of Tobaco-pipe Clay, and lay it on your Grinding- 
 Stone. and temper it and your Colours together with ftrong 
 Ale-V/qrf. Yon muft -be very careful not to make them too 
 wet, ;but of an even temper, like moift Clay, to rou! up with 
 your Hand upon your Srone : Then take a piece of Paper, 
 and dry them in an Oven, after the Bread is taken out ; or 
 you may otberwife dry them in a Fire (hovel by degrees till 
 they be hard cnourh ; which to know, have a piece of Pa- 
 per by you, and try if ihey caft, which if they do, t|iey are 
 ppt dry enough j iheh dry them again longer tjli they will not 
 
 ■'■■"■ " * c|ai 
 
Chap. II. The hiflrunients of Drawmg, 5 
 
 ctft i after which uke a Feather, and fome Sallet-Oil, and 
 oil ihem lightly over, and lb lay them to dry jgain, nil the 
 Oil be drank well into them, whith will make ihem excellenc 
 and to work free and ealie. 
 
 XIV. Obferve that ihofe Colovirs which bind bard of them- 
 felves, muft be tempered with lefs Tobacco-pipe Clay. More- 
 over, TeOow 0)^er burnt, and rouled up into a Paftil or Criori, 
 and dried with a moderate Heat ; an'd then being throughly 
 dried, and made very warm, and dipp'd idto Lin feed Oil, 
 and dried again till the Oil becomes well foaked into it, be- 
 comes molt excellenr. This being (hsrpened to a very fine 
 point, you may draw admirably withal, and ir will have that 
 quality, that wl^it is drawn with ic, although rubbed hard 
 with your Finger or Hand, it will not rub off, nor any pare 
 of it ftir. And without doubt all the other Colours may be 
 made to have the fame Quality. The German Mafters. and 
 ihofe of the Loiv-Dutch, made all their Crions wirh that Qua- 
 lity not to rub off, but were exireamly neat, brisk, lively, anu 
 Clike Oil-painringj very ftrong. 
 
 XV. The way and manner of iifing your Pa/iils or Crions. 
 
 Colour the Paper that you intend to draw on with a Car- 
 nation or Flefh-colour, near the Complexion of the Party you 
 intend to draw after : Cover the whole Paper with the laid 
 Complexion, which is made of Cerufe, Minium, and a littJg 
 Yellow Oker ground with a little Gum-Arabick. When you 
 prepare thera, make a good number ot various Complexions 
 together, it not being worth while to make one at a lime.i 
 lay this Ground-colour with a wet Spunge, but lee the Colour 
 be fo bound with Gum, that it may not ftir from the Papel" 
 by rubbing. This being done, and dry, draw the Ouifcetches 
 or firft rough Draught with Coal ; that being as you would 
 have it, draw over the fame Lines again more peikAly with 
 Red Chalk; then with your feveraJ Paftils or Crions rub in 
 your Colours firit, and after, with your Fingers fweeten and 
 mix them together, driving and confounding them one into 
 another, after the mannpf of Oil-Painters. And becaufe 
 many times the Crions will not fiurpen to fo good a Point as 
 Black or Red Chalk, you muft be very careful to clofe and 
 finilh all your Work at laft with Red and ^lack Chalk, which 
 you may Iharpen atpleafure. 
 
 B 3 XVI Ano' 
 
6 Polygraphkef Lib. I. 
 
 XVI. Another way of Drawing with Paftils or Criota on 
 Blue Paper, 
 
 The Ground-colours are to be robbed in firft wicb a Pencil, 
 and afterwards with a ttubbed Pencil or your Finger. After 
 the fame manner you may work in Parchment exceeding neat- 
 ly and fo curioufly, thatac a fmall diiiance they may be taken 
 lor Limning. 
 
 XVII. To maJ{e white Paflih or Crions. 
 
 Take Cerufe, or ordinary white Chalk, four Ounces j 
 Roach-Allum, two Ounces j grind them together fine, make 
 cbem up into a Mafs, burn them in a Crucible, and keep 
 them for cife. 
 
 XVIII. To the former add good Copies, Patterns and 
 Examples of good Pictures and other Draughts; wiihotic 
 which it is almoft impoflible that the young Artilt fiiould ever 
 attain to any Perfedion in this Art. 
 
 Thcfe that defire to be ftirnijhed with any excellent Patterns, 
 Copies or Prints, may have of all forts, tvhether of. Humane 
 Shape y Perfpe^ive, Defign, Lands kips. Fowls, Bea/ls, Infers, 
 Plants, Countreys, or any other artificial Figures, exquifitely 
 drawuy at very F^eajonable I^tes, where this Book^ is to be 
 fold. 
 
 XIX. Another way to make Paflils or Crions. 
 
 Take Tobaco-pipe Clay, before it is burnt, and grind it 
 well with a little weak Gum-water j then add to it Vermili- 
 on. Blue Bice, or Tellow Oakfr, or what other Colour you 
 pleafe : Let your Gum- Water be very weak, left it bind too 
 bard ; make it up into little Rowls, which dry, and fcrape 
 each to a Point for ufe, as you need them. 
 
 XX. Another way to do the fame. 
 
 Take a great Chalk-ftone, make deep Furrows in it, two 
 or three Inches long, and fo large, that you may lay in each 
 a Quill ; then take White Chalk ground very fine, temper \t 
 with Oil or Wort, and a little new Milk, and fo make Pap 
 thereof; then pour it into the Chalk Furrows, which in a 
 fliort time you may take out, and roul them up as you would 
 have them ; or otberwife let them lie till they are quite dry, 
 «nd then take them out and fcrape them into the Form you 
 defire : You may temper Lake, with burnt Alabafler, for a 
 Red, and fo for other Colours > bur Colours which bind over" 
 liard, mult have a little Water added to thsm in their grind- 
 iog. 
 
 XXI. T. 
 
Chap. 5. The Precepts of Dratpmg, 7 
 
 XXI. Tt draw with Indian Ink: 
 
 Tbe Out-ftrokes being firtt drawn with Black Lead, fafter 
 the Duft of the Charcoal is well bruOid off with a Feather) 
 then take a Stick of Indian Ihl^^ of the beft fort, (not that 
 which is whitifh and hard within, for that is naught, and will 
 not work wellj wet one end of it with Water, or rather with 
 your Spittle, which is better, for that h not fo fubjed: to fiok 
 into the Paper, which ought to be very good Du(ch Paper 5 
 and have ready fix or eight fniall Pencils, of feveral fizes, 
 which put en little Sticks two or three inches long, the better 
 to hold theiQ. 
 
 XXII. With the one Pencil you isiuft drav7, and with the 
 other at the other end of the Stick, you muft, (ii being a lii« 
 ile wet with your Spittle) wipe off the hard edge : Begin faiot 
 at fii'Itj then (hadow it higher, as you pleafe 3 otberwife, if 
 St be too dark at firft, you will be in danger of fpoih'ng your 
 Work. The leaft touch of your Pencil on the Indian Ink is 
 enough. This manner of Drawing is pleafant and admira- 
 ble, and now much in ufe, fetting off the Work very neatly. 
 See Lib. 1. Caf.^u Se&. 30. of this Work. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 Of the Precept i^ of Drawing in General. 
 
 1. HE fure to have all the Neceflaries aforefaid in readineftj 
 but it will be good ropradife as much as may be with- 
 out the help of your Rule and Compaffes : It is your Eye and 
 Fancy mult judge without artificial Meafurings. 
 
 II. Then firfl begin with ^lain Geometrical Vigttres, as Lines, 
 Atjgles, Triangles, Quadrangles, Polygons, Arches, Circles, 
 Ovals, Cones, Cylioders, and ib? like. For thefe are the 
 Foundations of all other Proportions. 
 
 III. The Circle helps in all orl^'ular Forms, asintbeSun^' 
 Moon, ^c. the Oval in giving uft Proportion to the Face 
 And Mouth ■-, the Mouth of a s or Well, the Foot of a 
 Glafs, (§c. the Square con'ines tb P.dure you are to copy,^c, 
 the Triangle in the half Face i tbe Polygon in Ground-plats, 
 Fortifications, and the like 3 Angles and Arcbet in Perfpedive^ 
 
 B 4 ih« 
 
8 Poljigraphices Lib. 1. 
 
 iht Cone in Spires, Tops of Towers tnd Steeples* the Cjlifr 
 der in Columns, Pillars, Pilalkrs, <and their Ornaments. 
 
 IV. Having made your Hand Bt and ready in general Pro- 
 portions, then learn to give every Object its due Shade, ac- 
 cording to its Convexity or Concavity, and to elevate or de- 
 prefs ibc fame, as the Object appears either nearer or farther 
 off the Light, the which is indeed the Life of the Work. 
 
 V. Thefecond PraHiceof Drawing confifts in forming Fruits, 
 as Apples, Pears, Cherries, Peaches, Grapes, Strawberries, 
 PL-afcods, (^c. with their Leaves ; the Imitation of Flowers, 
 as Rofes, Tulips, Carnations, C^c. Herbs, as Rofemary, Tyme, 
 Hyfop, (^c. Trees, as the Oak, Fir, Afh, Walnut, (^c. 
 
 VI. The third PraHice of Drawing imitates^ i.BeaBs, as 
 the Lamb, Elephant, Lion, Bear, Leopard, Dog, Cat, Buck, 
 Unicorn, Horfe, (^c. i. Fowls, as the Eagle, Swan, Parrot, 
 Partridge, Dove, Raven, (^c. 3. Fi/kes, as the Whale, Her- 
 ring, Pike, Carp, Thornback, Lobfter, Crab, (^c. Of which. 
 Variety of Prints may be bought at I^eafonable I{ates. 
 
 VII. The fourth Praxis imitates the Body of Man with all 
 its Lineaments, the Head, Nofe, Eyes. Ears, Cheeks, Hands, 
 Arms, and Shadows, all exactly proportional both to the 
 whole) and one to another, as well to (ituation as magni- 
 tude. 
 
 VIII. The fifth Praxa n in Drapery, imitating Cloathing, 
 and artificially fetting oS the outward Coveriegs, Habits and 
 Ornaments of the Body, as Cloth, Stuff, Silk and Linen, their 
 natural and proper Folds; which, although it may feem fome- 
 thinghard to do, yet by much Exercife and Imitation of the 
 cboiceft Prints will become facile and cade. 
 
 IX. In drawing of all the aforegoing Forms, or whatever 
 elfe, you muft be perfeifl, firft, in the exadt Proportions ; fc- 
 condly, in the general or outward Lines, before you fall to 
 (hadowing or trimming your Work within. 
 
 X. In mixed and uncertain Forms, where Circle and Square 
 wili do tjo good fbut only the Idea thereof in your own Fan- 
 cy] as in Lions, Horfes, and the like ^ you mufk work by Rea*^ 
 fon in your own Judgment, and fo obtain the true Proportion 
 by daily Pra(5lice. Thus, 
 
 Having the Shape of the thing in your Mind, firfl drattr it 
 rudely tpith your Coal, then mtre exaflly with ynur Lead or Pen- 
 cil ; then ferufe it well, and confidcr where you have erred, and 
 mend it, according to th^t Idea trhich you carry in ycur Mind. 
 This done, view it again, correHtng by degrees the other Parts, 
 
 even 
 
Chap. 3. The Precepts of Drawing, 9 
 
 even to the lea/i Iota, fo far as your Judgment will inform you i 
 and this you may do ttf it h twenty j thirty, forty, or niore Papers, 
 of fever al things at once. Having done what you can. confer it 
 with fome exceSent Pattern or Print of likf kind, ufing no ^tile 
 fir Compafs at aB, but your own ^afony in mending every Faulty 
 giving every thing its due place^ and Jufi Proportion ; By this 
 means you may reHifie aU your Errors, andjiepan incredible way 
 on to Perfe^ion. 
 
 XI. Having then good Patterns and Copies to draw by, 
 the young Artilt muft learn to reduce them to other Propor- 
 tions, either greater or fmaller, and this by often and a:! any 
 Trials (as we Ihall hereafter more particularly teach) this re- 
 quires great Judgment j for in a Cut, you (hall find neither 
 circumfcribiog Strokes, nor difference between Light and 
 Light, or Shadow and Shadow : Therefore ferious Obferva- 
 tions are required in the Sight of thofe things, whether con- 
 ing forwards or ^oing backwards. 
 
 XIL The drawing after Plaifler-work, done by Skilful 
 Mafters, as the Gladiator and Children of Prancifco, the Rape 
 of the Sabine Women, the Wraftler, the Venus of Greece, 
 Hercules, Hermes^ Anatomical Difledlions, and other Pieces 
 of Antiquity, are main and neceffary Introdudions to attain 
 a Perfe<flion ia Drawing after the Life. 
 
 Xin. This done, let the young Artifl now begin to exer- 
 eife in Drawing after the Life i ((or that is the compleateft, 
 beft, and moft perfe<5t Copy, which Nature has fei for Ob- 
 fetvationj wherein the Liberty of Imitation is prefented in 
 the largeft latitude ; and this muft be attained by much Pra- 
 diice abd diligent Exercife, adjoining the Inflru(5tions of a 
 good Mafter. 
 
 XIV. In this Pradiice of Drawing let there be a Perfetflion 
 attained, before ever there be the leaft Thoughts of Colours or 
 Painting ; for that afterwards ail things belonging to Paint- 
 ing, will io a Ihori lime be eafily and perfe(Aly underflood. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
10 Polygraphhes Lib. L 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of Fartknlar OhfcrvatiofTj in the Art of Drawbig, 
 
 I. IN drawing after a Print or P ilure, put it va fuch a Light, 
 ■*• as that the GJofs of the Colours binder not your Sigbr, fa 
 as that the Light and your Eye may equally and obliquely fall 
 upon your Piece; wbicb place at fucb adiftance.tbai at open- 
 ing of your Eyes you may view it all at once ; the greater 
 your Pidlure is, the further off you nauft place it to draw af- 
 ter ; the which you malt always be fure to pat right before 
 you, a tittle reclining. 
 
 IL Obferve to draw all your Out-lines at firft very faint 
 with a Coal, becaufe, if amifs, you may rub tbem out with 
 the Feathers of a Duck's Wing, or a bit of Bread, and fo 
 inend the Fault the more eafily, which, if you lean hard, and 
 draw very black, will be more difficultly rubbed out. Thefe 
 Out-lmes muft be drawn true and agreeable to the Pattern, 
 before you begin to Ihadow any part of it. The Out-lines 
 next the Light draw very fofi and faint ; and having drawn 
 one Feature, let it be a Diredlion for you in fome meafure to 
 draw another, by obferving with your Eye fand being alfo 
 guided by your Reafonj the diftance from that to the next 
 Feature, rowing a fmall Mark at the Place with your Coal, 
 and then draw it, and fo the next, till the whole Figure is de- 
 iigned. 
 
 III, Then obferve the middle of your Pitfture to be co- 
 pied, which touch upon your Paper with the point of your 
 Coal ; then obferve the moft perfpicuous and uppermoft Fi- 
 gures (if more than one.) which touch gently in their pro-" 
 per Places : Thus running over the whole Draught, you will 
 fee the Skeleton, as it were, of the Work. 
 
 Bta if you go on without thefe Confiderationi, wbereunto your 
 Draught tpiB tend or run j when having ended your fVorki you 
 ttiU be forced to draw the fame many times over and over again, 
 and it may bey every time to as little furpofe • by the tedioufnefs 
 of which, your Ingenuity Will be dulled. 
 
 IV. Be fecure of a right and true Draught, though you 
 do it flowly ; what you think may be done in two or three 
 Hoars, u will be better to beftow two or three Days upon ; 
 hy this means (though yoit ad leifurely, yet you will adt 
 
 prudently,. 
 
Chap. 4. T^e Art of Drawing, I j 
 
 prudently, and) you will both fooner and better than can be 
 imagined, attain the Peffe<flion of what you delire, 
 
 V. Tfaefe OttC-sketcbcs being made, view them diligeatly, 
 whether they anfweryour Pattern apparently ; for the Geftures 
 of the Life oughc to (hew themfeives eminently io the firft 
 and rudeii: Draughts thereof s without which, be fure your 
 Work will be faulty, 
 
 VI. Having liewed ifaefe Sketches, begin to correct ard 
 amend them (where you find them atKifs) and gradatim by 
 adding or diminilhing a little here and there, as you lee ii 
 differ from your Pattern, you will briog it neater and nearer 
 to the Life. 
 
 VII. Obferve the diflance of one Mufcle, or Joint, or Limb 
 to another, and the fame in all other Accidents of the Figure ; 
 their Thicknefs, Bignefs, Length, Breadth, Windings, Turn- 
 ings, Shadows, CS»c. Shadow nest to the Light very faintly ; 
 and where you fee bold and free Touches, be not fearful in 
 exprefling the fame. In drawing a Head by the Life, or o- 
 therwife, obferve to place your Features exac5tly right upon 
 the Crofs Lines, whether it be a foil Face, or a three quarter 
 Face, as you may fee in the Examples. In Forejhorting, there 
 make the Crofs Lines to fiy upwards, where they look up- 
 wards ; but bending downwards, io a circular manner, where 
 the Afpedl is downwards. And having the Out-lines true 
 made by a Coal, you rauft then proceed to trace over again 
 the fame Lines with a Pen, drawing them more exactly ; and 
 by imitating all tbeHsl:hes, with their exad Diitances one 
 from another, their crofTings, turnings, and winding, with 
 much boldnefs and freedom perfei^ your Def:gn. 
 
 This with a Charcoal you mayeafiiy do, becaufi you may toi^ 
 away what is amip. 
 
 VIII. In drawing after Piaifterand Embofled Works, choofe 
 a good North-light, which let defcend from above, not dila- 
 ting or fcattering it felf too much, by which you may the 
 more pteafantly ftiade your Work. 
 
 If theI{pom has a South'light^ fut oiled Paper h/ore the.^irf 
 dow I or if you draw by Candle-light, have a Lamp fioaded with 
 oiled Paper ; for a Candle will grow lower and lower, which c&ti- 
 fes the Shades to change, all which you avoid in a Lamp, 
 
 IX. Then fet your felf down about three tims'S as far 
 from the Pattern as the Pattern is high, fo as your Eyes in a 
 direct Line may vkw the fame ; then with a Plurrjb line oh' 
 ferve what Parts of your Pattern appear to. you, by the 
 
 extending 
 
1 2 Folygraphims Lib. I. 
 
 exieodiog ftreigbc thereof, and how one under another they 
 come in Sight, and accordingly make your fundamental 
 Sketches, as we have jud before taught. 
 
 X. In drawing the Mufcles of a Humane Body, you muft 
 firft have either the Life, or very good Patterns made either 
 of Plailter, or diawn in Pi(3:ures, enough of which are to be 
 found in Aoatomical fiooks, but chie% the Book of Jacob 
 Vander Gracbt, compleaied with many Varieties and Curio- 
 iities ; from wheoce the Alterations and Changes, RiHog and 
 Falling, Exteniion and Contraction, and other Operations of 
 the Mufcles, Arteries, and particular Members, are in Imita- 
 tion of the Life excelletuly depided. 
 
 XI. In drawing after a naked Body, all the Mufcles are 
 not fo plainly to be exprelfed as in Anatomical Figures ; but 
 that fide whofe Parts are moft apparent and Hgoificant in the 
 performing of any A<5tion, muft more or lefs appear accord- 
 ing to the Force of that Action. 
 
 XII. In young Perfons the Mufcles muft not manifeftly ap- 
 pear fo hard, as in elder and full grown Perfons ^ the fame 
 obferve in fat Men, and fleOiy, aid fuch as are very delicate 
 and beautiful. And in Women you muft fcarcc express any 
 St all, becaufe that in the Life they cither appear not at 
 all, or very little, unlefs it be particularly in feme force- 
 able Adlion ; and then you muft reprefent them but very 
 faintly, left you fpoil the fingular Beauty of the Body. The 
 like obferve in little Children. 
 
 XIII. In drawing of ihefe Mufcles the Moiion of the whole 
 Body is to be coofidered i in the rifing or falling of the Arms, 
 the Mufcles of the Breft more or lefs appear ; the Hips the 
 ]ike, according as ihey bend oatward or inward ; and the 
 fame chiefly in the Shoulders, Sides, and Neck, according to 
 the feveral Adions of the Body : All which Alterations are 
 lifft to be obferved in the Life. 
 
 XIV. The Width and Largenefs of the Picture is alfo to 
 be confidered j about the Legs and Garments below it flioutd 
 be larger, fliewing it flcnder above, as it were Pyramidal- 
 wife, by difcovering one Shoulder, and hiding the other, 
 which is fliortned by turning the Bofiy. 
 
 XV. But fometimes the Figure is to be reprefented biggeft 
 in the upper Parts, by reprefenting either both the Shoulders, 
 or both the Arms, fhewing the one Leg and biding the other, 
 or both of them, after one fort, as the Dilcrttipn of the Ar- 
 tift Oiall fee meet. 
 
 XVI. N i- 
 
Chap. 5. The Imitation of the Life. 15 
 
 XVI. Neither ought this to be obferved only ip the whole 
 Body, but even in every Part ^ To that in the Legs, when a 
 Mufcie is raifed outwards on the ooe fide, that which anfwers 
 diredlly on the contrary fide muft be drawn in and hid, for fb 
 it appears in the Life. 
 
 XVIL The Proponion of the Figure ought to be multipli- 
 ed by degrees in proportion of one to two, three, four, ^c. 
 For herein the chief Skill coafilieth ; the Diaoaeier of the 
 biggeft Place between the Kaee and the Foot, is double to the 
 lealt } and the largelt part of the Thigh triple. 
 
 C H A P. V. 
 
 Of the Imitation of the Life. 
 
 L |N order hereunto it will be neceflary (having fixed a coo- 
 ~*^ venient Time and Place) to cboofe a good Matter, with 
 whom you may fpend two Days in a Week at leaft ; or elfe a 
 Society of about half a fcore or a dozen young Men, who 
 are experienced to draw after the Life, by the Advice and 
 Example of whom, and your own diligent Obfervations and 
 Care, you may come sot only to mend one anothers Faults, 
 but alfo one anothers Judgments, 
 
 IL Then choofe a well-lhap'd Man, one of large Shoul- 
 ders, of a fair Breaft, ftrongly mufcled, full Thighs, long 
 LegSj and of a proportionable height, not too tall nor too 
 ihort, nor too thick nor too ilender, but a Perfon every ways 
 of an admirable Shape. 
 
 IIL Let this Exenaiplar be made to (land in a good Pofture, 
 reprefentiug iome noble Action of the Life, letting the Head 
 turn it felf to the right fide if the left be Ihadowed j and con- 
 trariwife, making the Pans of the apparent Shoulder fome- 
 wfaat higher than that which is obfcured ', and the Head, if 
 it looks upwardS) leaning no farther backwards than that the 
 Eyes may be feen ; and in the turning of it, let it move no 
 farther than that the Chin may only approach the Shoulder ; 
 making alfo the Hip on that fide the Shoulder is loweft, a Ut- 
 ile to ftick cat , and that Arm foremoft, where the Leg is 
 iiehind, apd cpRtr;jfiwire, 
 
 IV. The 
 
14 Polygraphkef Lib. I. 
 
 IV. Th^fame yoa naaft obferve in all four-footed BeaftsJ 
 and this generally to make tbe Limbs crofs-wife to cohere to~ 
 gether ; and in the turning of it forward, backward, up- 
 ward, downward, fideways, ever lo counterballance it by 
 tbe Oppofition of other Pans, tbe right Knowledge of which 
 is a great Step to tbe Imitation of the Life. 
 
 V. This done, let him, whofe turn it is to begin, firfl: 
 sketch on tbe Paper his own Idea's fbeing fixed in a conve- 
 nient Place and Light, as in the former ChapterJ wherein you 
 muft endeavour to make every part to agree with the whole, 
 firft, in Form ; fecondly, in Proportion j thirdly, in Acflion. 
 After this begin again, running over your Draught, bring it 
 to a Conciulion, as we fliill hereafter teach you. 
 
 VI. Obferving always, that after you have sketch'd your 
 whole Figure, that you choofe a Part (which you moft defire 
 to finifh) to perfed; the fame, in regard that with the reft 
 ftands in a good pofture j the Reafon is, becaufe Time will 
 not always eafily permit to finifli or compleat a whole Figure, 
 unlefs it be with expert Artifts ; it being much better to per- 
 itt\ a part than to leave the whole imperfetit, which as each 
 Pradiitiorer arrives and draws nearer to perfcdion, be may 
 with (o much tbe more boldnefs, fecurity, and certitude, at- 
 tempt the com pleating of the whole. 
 
 VII. You are alfo to confider after what mantier you would 
 have your figure to be feen, whether upon even Ground, or 
 from alofc ; far accordingly you muft make the poliiion of 
 your Exemplar. 
 
 VIII. Let the young Artift alfo, at his Conveniency, fome- 
 iimes view the Country, and pradiife upon the drawing of 
 Landskips, as much reprefenting Nanire (i. in rheir diliance, 
 2. in their mutual pofition, 3. in vifible afpeif^) as po/fible 
 may be : By this means he will come to have a general and 
 compleat Underftandicg in the Uoiverfal Meafures of all 
 Things. 
 
 IX. In drawing of the Face confider tbe Circumference 
 thereof, and whether it be round or long, fat or lean, great 
 or fmall, fo that ye be fure in tbe firtt place to take rightly tbe 
 dimeniions and bignefs of the Face. In a fat Face you muft 
 make the Cheeks to fwell out, and lb make the Face look as 
 if it were fquare. If it be neither too fat nor too lean, it 
 will be round, for the moft part ; but if it be a lean Face, 
 tbe Jaw-bones will ftick out, and the Cheeks fall in, and the 
 Face will be loDg.aod thin cr flender. 
 
 ^ X. Ob- 
 
Chap. 5. The Imitation of the I^ife» 1 5 
 
 X. Obferve, when you draw the outmoft Circumference of 
 a Face, to take the Head and all with it, oiherwHe you may be 
 deceived in drawing the true bjgnefs of a Face j and thea 
 you muft judicioufly confider and view all the gentle Master- 
 touches, which give the Spirit and Life to a Face, and diico' 
 ver the Grace,- Affedioos and Difpoiitions of the Miad, 
 wherein lies the £xcellency of the Art, and Glory of the 
 Arrift. 
 
 XI. A fmiling Countenance is differenced in the corners of 
 the Mouth, when they turn up a little: A ilaid and fober 
 Countenance in the Eyes, when the upper Eye- lids come fome- 
 wbac over the Balls of the Syes. A frowning Countenancs 
 in the Forehead, by the bending of the Eye-brows, and fome 
 few Wrinkles between the two Eye-brows about the top of 
 thf! Nofe. 
 
 XII. A laughing Countenance is from the unfverfal Cous- 
 poiition of the whole Face -, fo alfo an angry Countenance, 
 which is difcerned by extraordinary frowning. There are 
 alfo fome touches about the Eyes and Mouth, which you muft 
 diligently obferve, thereby giving a kind of Life and Spirit 
 to your Draught. 
 
 XIII. A graceful Poftu re is a mighty thing to be oblerved 
 in every Pidlure, that all things be exprels'd with proper 
 Adions ; to wit, in their true and natural Motions, accord- 
 ing to the Life and Spirit of it. In a Kj»g exprefs Majefiy^ 
 by defigning him in fuch a graceful Pofture as may caufe the 
 Spe(flators to behold him with Reverence. A Soldier exprefs 
 in fuch a Pofture as befpeaks the greateft Courage, Boldnefs, 
 iand Valour. Make a Clown in a fordid and clownilh Po- 
 iiure. A Servant or Page as one waiting with the utmoft di» 
 Jigence. And in all your Draughts make the inward AfFedli- 
 ons of the Mind to be lively exprels'd in the outward Adtions, 
 Motions, and Geftures of the Body. 
 
 XIV. But to attain to the exquifite Knowledge of thefe 
 things you muft diligently obferre the Works of the moft fa- 
 mous Mafters, and ftrive to imitate their Examples, who of a 
 long time had accuftomed themfelves to draw all Varieties 
 of Geftures and Poftures j as the Adions of Wraftlers, fight- 
 irg at Cuffs, Stage-players, Fencers, the inticing Allurements 
 of Curtizans , riding the Great Horfe, Turnaments , C^<?, 
 vyherein the Motions of the Eyes and Hands, and the Car- 
 riage of the whole Body, are exadly to be reuarked, if you 
 would in your Drawings exprefs any thing to the Life. 
 
 Xy.Buc 
 
1 6 ^ Polygraphices Lib. I. 
 
 XV. But thit this may appear the more natural, and not 
 forced, you muft oblerve in your Draught a kind of Carelef- 
 se(s and Loofenefs, cbac the fiady b^ not made ftiif in any 
 part, but that every Joint may have irs proper Bendings, that 
 the intention of the Figure may not be lame, and the Joints 
 as It were ftarch'd, but that every Limb may have its pro- 
 per Freenefs and Loofenefs, agreeable with the natural Life 
 of the Pidure. 
 
 XVL That every thing may thus naturally accord, yoa 
 muft often and diligently alfo obferve the Life. Should you 
 draw a Man turning his Head over his Shoulders, you muft 
 not turn or wind more than Nature will admit i nor muft 
 any other Adtion be forced beyond, or made to come fhort 
 of the Limits of Nature, yet it ought to be quickned ro the 
 bigheft pitch. As if you were to draw a Man fighting, ei- 
 ther ro ftrike, or avoid the Stroke of his Enemy ; in Run- 
 ning, Wrattling, Leaping, (£c. be fure you do not fo much 
 overdo Nature, as to exprefs a Pofture which cannot be imi- 
 tated with his natural Body. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the Jmitation of Draughts. 
 
 L "T He Learner muft, by many and often Trials, get a Ha- 
 ^ bit of Imitation ; which if it be to be done with the 
 Pen, beware of fcratching and making bin and lean Stroaks, 
 but rather broad, which you fliall draw from above, down* 
 wards ; but according to the Shades, fome of the Hatches 
 muft be fharp, fome broad, fome unequal, and fome equal, 
 
 II. Hold your Pen or Pencil fomcw hat long, fand not fo up- 
 right as when you write J leeming as though you laid it ftraight 
 forward ; and if they be Paftils, accnftom your felf to turn 
 them in your Hand j by this means you will prevent their 
 becoming fo foon blunt, and they wearing to a point may ferve 
 without fcraping the making of a whole Draught. 
 
 III. In fhadowing of your Draught, you muft firft begin 
 to do it faintly and fmoothly, and ftraight againft the edges of 
 the Light, io that it may lock as if it had been da(h'd wiih a 
 Brulh- Pencil i and theu here and there over(hadow it again in 
 
 the 
 
Chip. 6, The Imitation of Draughts, ij 
 
 the darkeft Shades farther out, and adoro it with Hatchings » 
 and where any thing more is required, put the fame in nim- 
 bly and clearly by gentle touches, the which will add a great 
 Grace unto your Work. 
 
 IV. Doefling (which is a certain blfmeering of the Work) 
 is to be done with Crions of Red or Black Chalk, touching 
 the Draught eafily all over fmoothly and evenly with the points; 
 thereof, and not with Cotton or the like put up into Quills, as 
 fome ufe j though that may be done in fome Cafes, as where 
 one Work is to be brought into another. 
 
 V. If Copies be taken fcbiefly upon coloured Paper) to 
 make it curious and neat, let the edges of the faeightning be 
 fmoothed a little fn&t with Cotton, but) with the like colou- 
 red Paper routed up to a (harp point at one end, and by this 
 means you will take away the (harpnefs and hardnefs of your 
 edges, and make them lock fweet and pleafanr. 
 
 VI. In Performance of thefe things a certain kind of Wash- 
 ing is fometimes neceffary, performed with Pencils dipp'd in 
 fome coloured Liquor, and fo laid upon coloured Paper •, and 
 this to be done either through the whole Work, or in a part 
 thereof, to wit, in fome principal flat Shades, which may be 
 afterwards loofly wrought over with a Pen or Black Chaik, 
 the which \^ill look very pleafafltly. 
 
 VII' This Wafliing mutt be fii-ft done very weak aftd faints 
 yet fmooth (without fmcoihing of it at the edges, except by 
 a new Stroak of ycvir Pericil moiftened with your Tongue ; 
 for much fmootbing will fpoil yoUr Workj this lirft Walhing 
 being dry, go over again with your Work, yet only thofe 
 Parts where there ought to be a darker Shade 5 and after- 
 wards again give fome deeper and harder touches without 
 fmootbing, the which will very much fet your Work off. 
 
 VIII. Faint Shadows, and Things obfcure, muft be pre^- 
 fented as faintly as may be, ehiefiy upon coloured Paper, 
 where the heightning helps you ; but beware you go not too 
 often over your Shades, left you fpoil them, by making them 
 too bard and ill-favoured. 
 
 IX. In Drawing, whether it be after a Draught or ibc 
 Life, firft obfervE the thing in general, inrefpe(5lof the cif- 
 cumfererit Strokes ; for thenti are they which bound and con- 
 tain all the parts of the whole, and wirbout which the parri- 
 cular Pans can never be perfecllly diftingaifhed, norreprefenc 
 theinfelVes in their Being : This done, then confider in hkc 
 ftlinner the Part^, and fuppofjag the parts each to be a vvhbki 
 
1 8 Volygraphices Lib. I. 
 
 you may come to reprcfeni the parts of parts, and by the fame 
 Means to exprefs the whole of any Draught whatfoever. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of Dramng the Face of a Man* 
 
 I. IN drawing of the Face you are firft to obfcrve its 
 ■*■ lion, whether upwards, downwards, forwards, or 
 
 Mo* 
 fide- 
 ways ; whether it be long or round, fat or lean, great or lu- 
 tle. 
 
 IB or if it he fat i the Cheeks will feem to fwcll ; if lean, the 
 Jaw-hones will fiicl{_out, and the Cheel(s fall in i hut if neither 
 too fat nor too lean, it will he for the mrfi part round. 
 
 II. Touch lightly the Features where the Eyes, Mouth, 
 Note, and Chin fliould ftand, (having firft drawn the Circle 
 or Oval of the FaceJ then make a tlroke down from that 
 place of the Forehead which is even with the Chin, coming 
 down where you (hould place the middle or tip of the Nofe, 
 and middle of ihe Mouth, which ftroak murt be made 
 ftraight down in a full right Face, but arched or oval in an 
 oblique Face, leaning that way towards which ihe Face doth 
 lurn ; then crofs the fhoke about the middle of the Eyes, ci- 
 ther with a ftraight Line in a right Face, or with a curved, 
 cither upwards or downwards, according to the prefent adii- 
 on or pofture of the Face ; then make another anfwerable to 
 that, where the end of the Nofe (hould ccme ', and another 
 for the Mouth, that it be not made crooked, 
 
 III. This Crofs is difficult to be underfticod in piano ; but 
 upon a Face made upon a fclid Body, in form or fhape of an 
 Egg, the feveral Variations of the faid Crofs are moft excel- 
 lently demonftrated ; and from hence may the Learner un- 
 derftand all the Alterations of a Face, and thereby draw it 
 ftU manner of ways, as fideways, upwards, downwards, for- 
 wards, backwards, C^c, and ihtt only by the motion of the 
 faifi cval folid, accordingly as in the following Figures you 
 may eafily perceive. 
 
 IV. Then if the Face look upwards towards Heaven, or 
 downwards toward^ the Earth, let the Eyes, Nofe, Moutb, 
 and Brows look accordingly with it j and now proceed to 
 the placing of the F6atuic:«. V. In 
 
Ciiclp. 7. JDraw'wg the Face of a Man. id 
 
 V. In a juft proportioned Face, the diftances, i. betvveeri 
 the top of the Forehead and the Eye-brows j 2. between the 
 Eye-brows and the bottom of the Nofe j 3. between the bot- 
 tom of the Nofe and the bottom of the Chin are equal. 
 
 Vi. In drawing the utmoft Circumference of a Face, take 
 in the Head and all wiih ir, left you be deceived in drawing 
 the true bigoefs. 
 
 VII. Then confider all thofe chief Touches which give Life 
 to a Face, adding Grace thereto, and fomething diicovefing 
 the Difpofiiion of the Mind. 
 
 So the Mouth extended, and the corners a little turnmg upt 
 /hews a fmiling Countenance ; the Eye-brotif bending^ and the 
 Forehead and top of the Nofe bettveen the Eye-brews wrinkjed^ 
 /hews one frorvmng j the tipper Eye lid coming fomething over the 
 Ball of the Eye, floews one fiber and Stayed j tinth many other 
 touches, which give Life and Spirit to a Face, ^which in good 
 Prints, by little and little, and diligent Obfervation jou will 4t, 
 laj} find out. 
 
 VIII. The diftances between the Eyes, is the length of one 
 Eye in a full Face, but in a three quarter or half Face ic is lef- 
 fenedj proportionably j and exacSiy underneath the corners of 
 the Eyes place the Noftrils. 
 
 IX. Having given touches where the Eyes, Nofe, MouiEi 
 •tnd Cfaitj fliould be placed, begin to draw them more esadl- 
 
 , iy, and fo proceed till the Face be finiflied •, and then make 
 liie Hair, Beard, Shadows, and other things about ir. 
 
 X. Be fure to make the Shadows rightly, and ba fuie not 
 to make them too dark, where they fliould be faint ; for tbae 
 
 ' Can never be made light again, and fo the whole Face is 
 toarr'd. * 
 
 7 be Shadofvi are fainter and lighter in a fair Facel than in d 
 fwarthy. 
 
 XI. When you have finilhed the Face, give here and there 
 fome hard touches with your Pen where the Shadows are 
 darkeft J then come the Ears and Hair, wherein, having 
 drawn the Out-line, draw the principal Curls, or Matter- 
 ftrokes in the Hair," which will be a Guide to you in the lel« 
 fer Curls, whofe Dependance are on them ^ always make the 
 Curls to bend exadlly, according to the Pattern, that they 
 may lie loofe, or carelefly, and not as if they were ftifF and 
 forced ; the Curls being rightly drawn, id the laft place 
 i^rike in the loofe Hairs which hang fcatteringly out of the 
 Girckf, • . . , 
 
20 Poljigraphkef Lib. I* 
 
 XII. In forming the Ear, defcribe ab Oval as u were, dnd 
 
 proceediog ligbily, join ftroke to ftroke, in fuch manner as 
 jou fee in the Figures j lb tbac the Ear may be entirely for- 
 med, without digreffing from the Bounds of Nature or Art. 
 
 XIII. Ltftly , having pradifed a little by Rule , and 
 brought your band in j in drawing of any thing, firft ftrike 
 the Oui-flrokes, principal Veins and Mufcles lightly, and af- 
 terwards fliadow them, ever following exquifiie Patterns and 
 Prints, which will both encreafe your Judgment, and bring 
 Command to your Hand. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of Draroing the Extreme Farts, 
 
 I. IN drawing the Hands, draw not all the Joints, Veins, 
 
 -^ or other things to appear plainly, but only lightly and 
 faintly, and iirike out the bignefs of the Hand and the man- 
 ner of its turning with faint touches, and not with hard 
 ftrokes. 
 
 If.Then that being done right,part the Fiogers,according to 
 the Pattern , with like faint ftrokes ; then mark that place 
 where any of the Fingers do Hand out from the others,witb a 
 faint Refemblance. 
 
 III. This done, proceed to draw it more perfedly, ma- 
 king the bending of the Joints, the Wrifts, and other princi- 
 pal things, more ezadly ; and laftly, go over with it again, 
 drawing every fmall bending or fwelling of the Fingers.Nails, 
 Knuckles and Veins, fo many as do appear. 
 
 VI.Learn by good Prints the juft Proportions of the Hands, 
 with their equal diftances, obferving this Rule, that accord- 
 ing as it turns one way or another, to (horten proportionally 
 as they appear to the Eye. 
 
 For fo much as it turns away from our Eye, fo much it lofet 
 in proportion, yea fimetimes a whole Finder, two, or three, or 
 more, is loft to our Sight, which you muft accordingly anfwer in 
 your Draught. 
 
 V. In drawing of the Feet, the fame Rules which we 
 even now enumerated, at the firft and fecond Sedion of ibis 
 Chapter, are to be underftood here. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 9' Of Drawing the whole Body, 21 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of Drawing the whole Body, 
 
 I. Tjlrft begin with the Head, and be fure to give it irs juft 
 *■ Proportion, anfwerable to what you intend the whole 
 Body (hall bej then draw the Shoulders in their exad breadth, 
 after them the Trunk of the Body, beginning at the Arm-pits, 
 and fo drawing down to the Hips on both fides, obferving 
 withal the exadl breadth of the Wafte j laftly, draw the 
 Legs, Arms, and Hands, exadly to your Pattern. 
 
 II. But iirft draw with a Coal, and that very lightly and 
 faintly, drawing nothing perfed fthat you may the ealier 
 mend it if it be amifs) and then afterwards finifh one thing 
 after another as cariouQy as you can. 
 
 IIL Let the parallel Sinews, Mufcles, Veins and Joynts, be 
 placed oppofite one to another in a ftraigh: line fas Shoulder to 
 Shoulder, Hip to Hip, Knee to Knee, Sc.) for which purpofe 
 draw iiraight crofs lines to guide you therein ; obferving that 
 which way foever the Body turns or bows, ihefe Lines may 
 anfwer accordingly. 
 
 IV. Let all perpendicular Joints, and Parts alfo, be placed 
 in a right line one under another (as they are in your Pattern) 
 for which end, draw a ftraight line (if the Body be ftraightj 
 from the Throat thorow the middle of the Breft and Privi- 
 ties, to the Feet, to which line draw all ihofe particular Points, 
 parallels, that the Body may not appear crooked or awry, 
 
 V. In bowings and bandings of the Body , let the extube- 
 ranceof the outward part be juft equal to the compreilion of 
 the inward part, making all things of an equal proporiion, 
 that as oppofite parts may be equal fas the Arm to the Arm, 
 Leg to Leg, ^c.) fo every part may be proportionable to each 
 other, fas the Hand not too big for the Arm, nor the Aim 
 for the Body, nor the Body fo^ the Legs, ^c.) only with this 
 difference, that (as the one part may appear fully to the Eye, 
 or the other may turn away either in part or in whole, or be 
 leen fide-wayj it be made fo much lefs than the other, by fo 
 much as it turns away from the Sight. 
 
 VI. As you obferve a juft proportion in bignefs, fo alfo in 
 length, that as every oppofite part may not be too long one 
 for another, but according to the propofed magnitude \ An*^^ 
 
 C $ in 
 
2,2 Volygraphkes Lib. I. 
 
 in this cafe, that if the Body be awry, or any ways bid, tholq 
 parts miy fliorten accordingly, to what is out of fight. 
 
 VII. O'oferve the jult diitance of one thing from another, 
 for by that means you will be rr.ore exad in your Draught, 
 and in fliort time perfedlly itairaie your Pattern or Nature. 
 
 VIII. If you be to draw a labouring Man, you tnuft, 
 without any regard of the Seafon, reprefcnt hiai with railed 
 jLimbs, and llrong Mufcles fwelling and {tandiijg forth, fweat- 
 ing and burning, elpecially in fuch as carry Burt'iens, draw 
 great Weights, or ufe veh-'tnent Leaping, Walking, Jetting 
 with Weapons, Fencing, and luch-like EKcrcifes. 
 
 IX. Lallly, But to luch as are fleeping, you rauft be care- 
 ful to give no fuch kind of Adions in their lying, as will not 
 in probability give them leave lo fleep; for being leprefented 
 with their Limbs or Bodies .Supported by their own force, and 
 not by the help of another thing, it fiiews the Weaknefs anci 
 Indifcretion of the Artift. 
 
 C H A P. X. 
 
 Of Dramng a leaked Body. 
 
 |. |N Drawing after the Life, as there are Variety of Faces^ 
 
 -■- fo no certain Rules can be delivered for the fame; yet 
 the following Precautious may be ufeful. 
 
 II. Di AW out the Head in an oval, one fourth pan for the " 
 Hair, one fourth p*rt for the Forehead and Brows, one fourth 
 for the No^e, and the Uft for tht Mouth and Chin. 
 
 in. Having drawn out the Head, meafure out eight times 
 the leng'h of the H?ad (the Head making one of the eight 
 Parts) and draw a (Vraight Line from the lo^ of the Head to 
 ?he fole of the Foot. 
 
 IV One Head's length from the Chin is for the Er-aft ; the 
 next (ighih part rcacfaeih to the Navel, the fourth part to the 
 Pi;v:ries, the fifth part to the middle of the Thigh, the fixth 
 part to the lower part of the Knee, the feventh to the fmall 
 of the Leg, and the eighth part to the Heel. 
 
 V. The Mufcles you muft obferve to draw exadlly as they 
 •re in the Life » the breadth of the Shoulders is about two 
 meaforesof the Head} the breadth of the Hips cwo meafures 
 
 of 
 
Chap. 10. Of Dramffg a Naked Body. 23 
 of the Face j the Arms ftretched out are juft the length of 
 the whole Figure, the Breafts alfo accounted j but without 
 the Breatts they are but fix. 
 
 VI. The Arms hanging ftraight down reach within a Span 
 of the Knee j the length of the Hand is the jult length of the 
 Face. 
 
 VII. Obferve firft to draw the Head exadly, and next, 
 the Shoulders in their juft breadth j then draw the Trunk of 
 ifae Body, and the reft as at the firft Sedion of the oinih 
 Chapter. 
 
 VIII. Be fure to place the Joints, Sinews, and Mufcles in 
 their natural Places, and alfo proportionately, in refpedt of 
 Magnitude, Similitude, and Parts, leB: it feem crooked and 
 deformed, 
 
 IX. See that every parallel Joint bend moderately, fo as 
 to anfwer in Nature its oppofite. 
 
 X. Laftly, It will be extreamly advantageous to draw ve- 
 ry much afcer the Life, and after good Prints of Anatomy, 
 and Statues and Anatomies made of Plaijier of Pari:, which 
 is the only way to arrive at the perfedlion of drawing a na- 
 ked Figure well, and without which indeed yon can never 
 cxped to be a good Ariift. XI. The Pidure alfo ought to be 
 quick, free, and lively ; and if you have many of them in 
 one piece, they ought to be fo ordered as that they may not 
 feem to be crouded, or to fall oflfenfively, but ordering theta 
 gracefully Con the foie ground efpecialiy) fo to manage the 
 Whole, that the reft of the Figures decline and leflen pro- 
 povtionably and by degrees, both in height, or magnitude and 
 ftrengtb, according to their feveral didaoces. 
 
 4 C H A R 
 
24 Pdljigraphices Lib. L 
 
 C H A P. XI. 
 
 Of Shadowing a leaked Body. 
 
 I. TTHc Shadows of the Neck, in a Child or young Wo- 
 -*• paan, are very fine, rare, and hard lo be feen : In ^ 
 
 Man, the Sinews and Veins are exprefled by (hadowiog of ihe 
 
 reft of the Neck, and leaving ihena white : The Shoulder is 
 
 fhadowed underneath ; the Brawn of the Arm muft appear 
 
 full and white, Ihadowed on one fide. 
 
 XL The Veins of the back of the Hand and the Knuckles 
 
 are made with two or three hair-itrokes \vitb a fine touch of 
 
 the Pen. 
 
 III. The Paps of a Man are fliewed by two or three ftrokes 
 given underneath, in a Woman with an orbicular Shade, fome- 
 wbat deep ^ the Ribs retain no Shadow, except you reprefent 
 one lean or ftarved. 
 
 IV. The Belly is made eminent by fliadowing underneath 
 the Breft-Bone and the Flank : The Brawa of the Thigh is 
 fliadowed by dravifng fmall hair-ilrokes from the Hip to the 
 Knee, and crofTed again overthwartly. 
 
 V. The Knee is to be finely (hadovved underneath the 
 Joint ; the Shin-Bone appears by fliadowing one half of the 
 Leg with a Cngle Shadow. 
 
 VI. The Ankle- Bone appe.irs by fhadowing a little under- 
 neath fas in the Koeesj and the Sinews thereof muft feem tp 
 take beginning from the midft of the Foot, and to wax big- 
 ger as they grow nearer to the Toes. 
 
 VII- Laftly, The Shadows of the Foot muft take place, 
 according as Reafoo and Occafion requires j for which fas 
 ^Ifo in all the former PreceptsJ the having of good Prints 
 Will be no fmtll Advantage unco you. 
 
 VJ H A * e 
 
Chap. I i. The vpay of Shadomng^ 7 5 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 The way and manner of Shadowing* 
 
 I. TF it be ft Surface only, it is beft fliadowed by drawing 
 •*• Lines either ftraight or oblique, (according as the Super- 
 ficies is) through the better half thereof. 
 
 II. If it be in a Body, it is a double Shadow, and is ufed 
 when a Superficies begins to forfake your Sight, as in Co- 
 lumns and Pillars, where it is double darkned, and reprefen- 
 tetii to the Eye, as it were, the Back- fide, leaving that unflia- 
 dowed to the Light. 
 
 III. The treble Shadow is made by crofllng over again the 
 double Shadowf and is ufed for the inward parts of things^ 
 fts in clefts of the Earth, Wells, Caves, the infides of Pots, 
 Cups and Di(hes. 
 
 IV. In ftiadowing, let the Shadow always fall one way, 
 that is, on the fame fide of the Body, leaving the other to 
 the Light. 
 
 So in drawing a Mant if I begin to jfhadotv his I(ight Cheeks 
 ImuSiJhadow the I^ghepan of hisNecky Arm^ Side^ Thigh^ 
 Leg, &c. 
 
 V. But if the light fide of the Body be darkened by the 
 pppofition of fome other Body ftanding between the Light and 
 It, it nouit receive a contrary Shadow, according as the Light 
 is cbfufcated. 
 
 So if three Pillars Hand together^ t!:4t in the midji mufi re- 
 ceive aShadotP on both /ides. 
 
 VL All circular Bodies muft have a circular Shadow (by 
 the firft Sedion of this Chapter) according to their form or 
 appearance, and the orbicular Shadow of the Objed which 
 ctfteth ir. 
 
 VIL Let your Shadow grow fainter and fainter, according 
 to the greathefs of the diftance from the opacous Body ftia- 
 dowing. 
 
 And the J^a/on isy becaufe all Shadottfs are pyramidal \ in 
 which caje, [pace of place prevails with the Light againfi the 
 Shadow. 
 
 VIIL Where contury Shadows concur, kt the meaneft 
 ind oj^ft folid Body be firft ferved 5 and in double and treble 
 
 Shadows, 
 
2 6 Polygrapkices Lib. L 
 
 Shidows, let the firfl: lines be very dry, for fear of blotting, 
 before you crofs them. 
 
 IX. All perfecfl Lights receive no Shadow at all ; but be- 
 ing manifeft, are only to be made apparent by that Body 
 which receives them, who(e Snadow mjult be according to 
 rhe efflax of Light i but the colour of the Light ought to 
 agree with the medium which receives it, whether it be Air, 
 Cryftal, Water, Amber, Glafs, Tranfparent-Wine, or the 
 like. 
 
 X. Some Artifts have ufe^ a little too much White, yet 
 with a certain kind o»' Grace, although their Work has been 
 much lighter than the Pitiern in the lighted part of the Body j 
 but then withal they make tne Shadow as much too much in 
 the obfcure parts, where the Light fell by reflexion to (ei forth 
 she decay of Light in the fame pare of the Body, by this 
 means tbs Work feems to be much raifed, thereby deceiving 
 the Sight, 
 
 Xi. For the Light which comes to the Eye in a pyra^- 
 Ujidal form, comes with a blunter and larger angle, and fo 
 reprefents the Objed: the more evidently, whence comes a 
 wonderful Eminency ; the Caufe ^f which is, for that there is 
 much more Shadow than needs ia that part wb^re the Light 
 decays moft. 
 
 Xl/. So that the vifual lines failing, that part comes to tlie 
 Eye with a more acute Angle, and therefore cannot be feen 
 fo perfedly) but feems to fly inwards, and Hand farther. oS. 
 
 CHAP. XIIL 
 
 Of exprejjing PaJJions in the Countettattce^ 
 
 I. T Ove is expreffed by a clear, fair, and pleafant Counte-^ 
 "*-* nance, without clouds, wrinkles, or unpleafant bend* 
 ings ; giving the Forehead 2»- ample height and breadth, with 
 ma jeftick Grace; a full Eye, wirh a fine Shadow at the bot- 
 tom of the £ye-lid, and a little a: the corner ; a proportion- 
 able Nofe ,- Noftrils not too wide ; a clear Cheek made by 
 'fliadowing of it on one fide ; and a fmiling Mouth made by 
 a thin upper Li p> and (hado wing the Mouth-line at thecor-^ 
 Ger», 
 
 II. Fc45 
 
Chap. 1 9' OfVatJionsmtheConntenancc. 27 
 
 II. Fear is expreflcd by making the Eyes look hollow, hea- 
 vy and downward^ thin faU'ri Cheeks, clofe Mouth, and ftar- 
 ring carelefs Hiic about the Ears. 
 
 III. Envy is beft deciphered by the oaly hangirg of the 
 Cheeks, and a pale Countenance ; and fomeiimes by grin- 
 ning of the Teeth. 
 
 IV. Let every Paflion be reprefented according to the out- 
 ward appearance thereof, as it is in ihofe Perfons in whom ic 
 reigns 5 obferving thz Rules at the fixtb Sedjon of the feventh 
 Chapter, 
 
 V. If you de%n a Perfedicn in this Art, you muft endea- 
 vour to chufe out the beft Adlions for every purpofe, in re- 
 ftraining the luxurious Fury of Nature by a deliberate Dif- 
 cretion which you ought to have in the Idea ; by the benefit 
 whereof you will finish your Defign with Delight and Con- 
 tentmetst, always expreffing in each Member a certain hid- 
 den refemblance of the principal Motions which afFed: the 
 Eye and Soul of the Spedlators, and merit the chiefeft Com-^ 
 mendation. 
 
 VI. To exprefs a Pa/Iion truly, you ought to give every 
 thing and pan its proper Motion, or that which beft befits 
 your Intention, which is nothing elfe but the agreement of 
 proportion and form to the nature and matter of the Adion 
 or Paffion intended, wherein confifts the whole fpirit and life 
 of the Art, which by Artifts is fometimes called ihcfury^ fome;- 
 times the gracey and fometimes the excellency of Arc : For 
 hereby you put an evident difference between the Living and 
 the Dead, the Fierce and the Gentle, the ff^ife and the Simple^ 
 the Sad and the Merry j and in a word, difcover all the fe- 
 veral Paflions and Geftures which Man's Body is able to 
 perform. 
 
 VIL But thefe things are impoilible ever to beexacflly done 
 in a Pid:ure, till you have firft carefully beheld the Life, that 
 thereby you may come as near the fame as pofTtble may be | 
 to which adding Arc withal, you will meet with no Motions 
 fo potent which you will not be able artificially to imitate : 
 Thefe things will be the more exadlly accomplifbed, if yoa 
 be often feeing and continually pradlifing what you have 
 feen. By this means yoa will unawares attain to a moft exad: 
 habit of doing v^ell, and lively exprefs all Geftures, Adions, 
 and Paflions ^bjed to natural Bodies, 
 
 VIII. The 
 
28 . Polygraph! ees Lib. L 
 
 VIII. The Paflions of the Mind are certain Motions pro- 
 ceeding from the Apprehenfion of feme moving or powerful 
 Objed ; now this Apprehenfion is threefold, vi:{. Senfitive, 
 Hationalt and Intelle^ual. From thefe three there arife three 
 principal Paflions in the Mind, vi:(. Pleafures of the Sen/is ; 
 Moral Vertues or Vices ; and a Pious, I{eligiom Life^ or Ineli' 
 giom and fVick^ed. 
 
 IX. From the particular Paflions or Affedions of the Mind, 
 as Love, Hatred, Deftre, Fear^ Joy, Hope, Sorrow^ Defpair, 
 Confidence, Boldnejs, Impudence, Conftancy, Fortitude, Ttmo- 
 rcufnefs. Valour, Anger, Pleafantnefs, Humility^ Patience, &c. 
 there arife fo many kinds of Adions, exadly to imitate 
 which, you ought to obferve carefully the motions of the Bo- 
 dy, by which they are outwardly exprefled. 
 
 X. And fo accordingly to diftribute and difpofe of them 
 in your Pidure , as you have obferved them in Nature ; 
 which if you fail in, you pervert the Order of Nature vid of 
 Things ; run your felf into Confufioo, and fo lofe the Beauty 
 of your Work. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 Of Hamati Proportion. 
 
 I. THe lergth of an upright Body is equal to eight times 
 * the length of the Face or Head: The Arm, hanging 
 ftraigbt down, reacheth within a Span of the Knee : The 
 length of the Hind muft be the length of the Face: The 
 Arras extended muft be ihe juft length of the Body. 
 
 Ti^wfotver f faith Vitruvius) tviU proceed in his iVorks with 
 Judgment, mujl needs he acquainted with the nature and force 
 cf Proportion. For all Dejigns carry with them fo much the more 
 Grace and Beauty, by hour much more tngemoujly they are pro- 
 portioned : This being well underfiood makes a Man not only an 
 excellent Judge of ancient and modern Arties and their fVorkr 
 manfhip, but alfo an admirable Inventer and Performer of rare 
 and excellent things himfelf. It adds Majefiy and Beauty to 
 bis DeJjgnSy and draws his Invention many degrees on to Perft- 
 fiion. 
 
 II. Thofe Parrs of the Body near to the Eye muft be made 
 greater and longer than thofe farther off, fbecaufe the Eye 
 
 judgetfa 
 
Chap. 14. Of Human Proportioft, 29 
 
 jndgeth fo of themj and according to the diftance from the 
 £ye, (o muft you vary from tbat which is otherwife the real 
 true proportion of thole. 
 
 It is almofi tmfojfible to do awf thing in the Art of Proper^ 
 tion commendabljf, without the Kjiowledge of Ariihmetick and 
 Geometry i wherefore the Kjiowledge of thefe Sciences is required 
 as a thing mofi necejfary : For how otherwife Jhould any one un- 
 derftand the exaH Meafure and Proportion of a Body ? 
 
 III. To makp a Side-way Head. 
 
 You muft firft form an equilateral Triangle, in what pofi- 
 lioQ you pleafe, turning the Triangle to noake the Face upon 
 one of the three fides, be it which it will, either upwards or 
 downwards, higher or lower, dividing that fide into three 
 equal parts ; the one to ferve from the lower part of the 
 Hair to the lower pan of the Forehead ; the fecond, thence 
 to the upper pare of the Noftrils ; the third, to the lower 
 part of the Cbin. 
 
 IV. Now having framed thefe three Lines, draw a little 
 crooked ftroak with a Coal, Chalk, or Biacklead Fencil,out 
 of the right line, which may reach from the top of the Fore- 
 bead unto the Eye-brow , from whence draw the flope line, 
 bending.ift the end. To make the Nofe 'either long , fliort, 
 grofs, or cbin, as you defire it,) let it end at the fecoad di- 
 Aance where the Noftrils are to end. 
 
 V. Then fubdivide the remaining third part in the midft, 
 where the Month Ihall be placed for the parting of the upper 
 and under Lips : Then frame the Chin, having refped to the 
 perpendicular Line , that it fall not cue of the middle of the 
 Chin, adjoining thereto, the under Chin,down to the Throat- 
 pipe or Gullet. 
 
 VL With the other two dividing lines , (the one frofti the 
 top of the Forehead downwards, ending in the midft of the 
 back part of the Ear ; and the other proceeding upwards 
 from the Chin, afcending till it meets with the fuperior de- 
 fcending line) guide your felf in defcribing the Ear, taking 
 heed that its Circumference ftretch not out too far about the 
 upper part of the Forehead. 
 
 Vll Defcribe a great circular line.by which,from the round- 
 nefs of the Head, to the nape of the Neck, obferviag the na- 
 tural proportion, and form iheoce downwards the reft of the 
 Neck. Obfcfve alfo tbiJt the tip of the Ear excseds tiot the 
 lower part of the Nofiril. 
 
 \in. To defer ibs the Fofe-right Fact., 
 
 Form 
 
3© Tdlygraphjces Lib. I. 
 
 Form a perfe(5l Oval, v/hich divide in the mid ft with a 
 line the longeft way. {vt:^) a perpendicular line, wbicii divide 
 into three equal parts, allowing a fourth of one of the three 
 parts for the Hiir in the Forehead. So have you the firit 
 third part for the Forehead and Hiir, the fecond third part 
 for the Nofe, the third part for the Chin. 
 
 IX. In the midit thereof nmft the Mouth be formed , al- 
 ways renaembring that the Eyes muit be in one line ; ihe crofs 
 lines of the Nofe and Alouth muit always be correfpondcni to 
 the crofs line ivbere the Eyjes are placed ; the Eyes t»uft be 
 ifie length of one Eyedil-ar.t from another, and their inward 
 corners let be exadly perpendicular orcr the out- fide of the 
 Noftrils. 
 
 X. To make the Ears, they muft be much forefliorincd, 
 by forefliortning, w:^. for that the Eye doih not lee their ex- 
 tended latitude , it mult be abbreviated or drawn in ; and 
 the length of the Ear muft he frc m the Eye-brows to the bot- 
 tom of the Noftrils ; thendtfcribe the Neck wiih the Hair 
 according to their natural fituation. 
 
 Xr. To draiv a Head fore-floor tned. 
 
 To do this with Frets, Grates, Squares, or Geometrical 
 Inftruments, breeds only a confufiou of lines, for ii;at this 
 Face can fcarcely be meafured by any Rule, unk/s the whole 
 Body be framed together: In this caSe therefore make a cir- 
 cular Draught Cmuch like that in the forerighc Facej wichtbe 
 afpe(5i: upwards or do'vnwards, as in the foreright Head, 
 where the tranfvcrfe lines are ilraight, but thcfe are drawn 
 circularly. 
 
 XJf. if the Head fiies upwards , the traced flrokes and 
 the divifions muft afccnd or rile upwards j but if it looks 
 downwards, then they muft ali decline downwards, with tbiJ 
 Caution, that the Ears and Eyes fall not out of their due 
 points, as ^oh may fee in the Example. 
 Xlll In forelhortniwg you mult take things as they appear to 
 the Eye. and rot to draw the full proportion of each parr, 
 but to fliorten all, according to the rate or reafon which tbey 
 are obfnfcatcd. 
 
 XI V.5o tfycu tfould draw a Ship foreright. there can .rppcar but 
 tnly her forepart [for the reft hetng hid car.not be expreji :) The 
 like of an Horfe looking fuB in my Face, or a Man lyin^ along ; 
 I mtiH here of ncccffity f/trefloorten, to exprefs the vtfual proper- 
 ty : And in this cafe your Eye and I^ a fin musl be your chxef Guide 
 to give the true reajon and meafure of thefe appearances, tphc 
 tber in Drawings Limning^ or Painting. XV, 
 
Chap. 14. Of Buman Proportion, 5 1 
 
 XV, The ufe of tbis forefliortning is to exprefs all manner 
 of ai3:ions in Man or Beaft •, to reprefent many things in ft 
 little room j to fhew at one view to the Eye and Mind, the 
 whole Body of a Temple, with all its Arches and Pillars, 
 whe'.her the infide or outfide, as alfo the fundry fides of Ci- 
 ties, Caftles and Forts, and fuch-like. 
 
 XVI. In every Cafe you muft make Nature the Pattern of 
 all Draughts, fo that nothing be exprefs'd, but what dotti 
 agree and accord with Nature ; and that nothing be either 
 forced beyond Nature, nor yet any thing to come ihort of 
 Nature. 
 
 j^s if in drawirfg the Figure of a Man, be fure you draw nog 
 fuch a PoUure as » impoffible for him to imitate tt>itb his nature 
 ral Body. 
 
 XVil. Obferve tbis Rule in all Forefliortnings, that you al- 
 ways rather imitate the viCbIc proportions of things, than 
 their proper and natural proportion by meafure ; for the Eye 
 and Underftanding together being direded by the PerfpeSlive 
 Art^ ought to be your Guide in Drawing and Painting. 
 
 X.YIIL And therefore in all forefliortnings there mult be a 
 proportion obierved,according to the Judgment of the £ye,thac 
 what limbs or parts of any thing do appear , may agree ia 
 proportion as well as in forelTiortning. 
 
 XlX.If you make a Side-face without any prefcribed Mea- 
 fure or Triangle j you ought however to confider in your 
 Mind the natural diftances and proportions, and by drawing 
 many without a Rule or Limit, you will, eafily do it by the 
 Eye, and your Hand will draw all things right by cuftom, 
 
 XX. And thofe firft Strokes or Draughts being taken from 
 the Life , and reduced by the Pencil with Colours, you will 
 find it very correfpondeni and like, and as exadt as you can 
 defire ir. 
 
 XXL The Proportion of aMan of ten Facts. 
 
 From the top of the Head to the Soal of the Fool, is di- 
 vided into ten equal parts. The iirit diftance begins at the 
 top of the Head, and reaches to the root of the Chin : The 
 fecond from thence to theTfaroar-pii; The third thence to 
 the parting of the Breafts : The fourth thence to the Navel: 
 The fifth thence to the Privities, which is juft the middte of 
 the length of the Body ; From thence to the Soal of the Fooe 
 are five pans more j whereof two are between the Privities 
 and the Mid-knees, and three more to the Soal of the 
 JFoot. 
 
32 Polygraphkes Lib. L 
 
 XXII.The firft of the ten parts which Is for the Face, is 
 to be divided into three equal parts : The firft beginning at 
 the upper pan of the Forehead, and ending upon the upper 
 crofs line of the Eye-brows : The fecond diftance reacbeth 
 from ihence to the bottom of the Nofe : The third reacheth 
 to the bottom of the Chin, which is the firft and uppermoft 
 divifion. Now in a foreright Face be fure to place the Eyes 
 the length of one Eye diltant from another ■■, and the length 
 of one Eye the bottom of the Nofe is to be. 
 
 XXIILTbe breadth of this Body confifts alfo of ten Faces, 
 vi:{. between the extremities of both the middle Fingers, 
 Dvhen the Arms are extended or fpread abroad ; and it is thus 
 divided. The Hand from the end of the middle Finger to 
 the Wrift, is the length of a Face, (or one of the tenth parts '.) 
 From the Wrift to the Elbow a Face and half : From the El- 
 bow to the Shoulder-joint, two Faces : Thence to the Throat- 
 pit, one Face : The Hands have the proportion of one Face : 
 The Nipples muft be placed at the diftance of a Face and 
 half from each other, equal to the diftance between the ^x'ii\ 
 and the Elbow. 
 
 XXIV. The compafs of the Head from the Eye-brows to 
 the Neck behind is double to the length of the whole Head. 
 The compafs of the Waft is the diftance of three Faces to ihe 
 diameter thereof, and is all one with the Trunk of the Body. 
 The circumference of the Body under the Arm-pits, and the 
 fpace between them and the Writts, anfwer in a double pro- 
 portion, and is agreeable to half of the Body. 
 
 XXV. The Meafures which are equal between them/elves. 
 
 I . The fpace between the Chin and the Throat-pit is equzl 
 to the diameter of the Neck. i. The circumference of the 
 Neck is equal to the diftance of the Throat-pit from the Na- 
 vel. 3. The diameter of the Waft is equal to the diftance 
 between the knob of the Throat and the top of the Head ; 
 and that is equal to the length of the Foot. 
 
 XXVI. 4. The fpace between the Eye-lids and theNoftrils 
 is equal to that between the Chin and the Throat-bone. 5. 
 The fpace from the Nofe to the Chin is equal to that from the 
 Throat-bone to theThroat-pit. 6. The diftance from the hol- 
 low of the Eye brow, and from the Eye-brow, to the centre 
 •of the Eye, isequi! to the prominency of the Noftriis, and thft 
 I'pare between the Noftri.'s atid the end of thei7pj-er Lip. 
 
 XXV/f. 7. The diftance between the top of the Nail of tUef , 
 Forc-fit)gcr, and the Joint next tbs Palm or Thumb , is equal ■ 
 
chap. 14. Of Htm/ an J? report? on, gg 
 
 to the diftance between tbe faid Joint and ibe Wrift. 8. The 
 greater Joint of the Fore-finger is the height of the 
 Forehead. 
 
 XIX. 9. The fpsce between that Joint and top of the NaiJ, 
 is equal 10 the lengih of the Nofe, trorn the tip to the Arch a- 
 bove the eyes,where the forehead and the Nofe is divided. 10. 
 The two firit joints of the middle finger, are equal to the 
 fpace between the Nofe and the Chin. 
 
 XX. I . The firft Joint of the middle finger wbereoo the nail 
 grows.is the diftance between the and No!e the Mouth. 2. The 
 fecond joint anfwers to the iirft which is equal to ibe fpace be- 
 tween the mouth and the chin. 
 
 XXI. 3. The bigger joyot of the Thum is equalto the length 
 of the mouth. 4. The fpace between the top of the Gbio, and 
 the dint under the lower lip, is equal to the lefler joint of the 
 Thumb. 5. .The leaft joint of each fiqger is double the length 
 <Df the Nail. 
 
 XXII. 6. The fpaces between the middle of the Eye-brows, 
 and the outward corner of the Eyes, is equal to the fpaces be- 
 tween the faid corners and the Ears, 7. The height of the fore- 
 bead, the length of the Nofe, and the diftaace of the Nofe 
 from the Chin are equal. 
 
 XXIII. 8. The breadth of the Hand is equal to the breadth 
 of the Foot. 9, The length of the Foot is equal to the meafare 
 roundabout theinltep. 10. Twice the breadth of the band, 
 is equal to the length thereof. 
 
 XXIV. I. The arches of the Eye-brows are equal to the 
 arch of the upper lip, at the divifion of the mouth, z. The 
 breadth of the Nofe is the length of the Eye, and are either of 
 themtqual to half the length of the Nofe. 3. TbeNavelisin 
 the middle betwetn the Nofe and the Knee* 
 
 XXV. 4. The fpace from the top of the flioulder to the el- 
 bow is equal to two Faces.and from them to the wrift one and! 
 a half 5. The breadth of the Body at the broadeft part of the 
 ihoulders is two faces and half,wfaich is alfo equal to the dift- 
 ance between the elbow and the end of the middle finger.d.The 
 ijreadih of the body ^t the Privites is equal to two faces. 7, 
 The Thighs at the thickeft part near the Priviiies^are ihedift" 
 ance of two Faces broad. 
 
 XXVI. 8. The thickeft part of tha Leg is equal to the 
 fpace between the top of the Forehead and the end of the Nofe. 
 9. The breadth of the back at the Arm-pits is' equal to two 
 faces^ and fo are the hips at the buttocks.- 1 0. The leogth of tbe 
 
 D tniddk 
 
5 4 Polygraphicef Lib. I . ' 
 
 middle finger is equal to the Ipace between its Uft joynt and 
 the wrift. 
 
 XXVlI. The froportions of a young man of nine Faces. 
 
 A flender young body of nine heads, is equal to nine times 
 the fpace between the top of the head and the end of the chin, 
 that being a ninth part of the length of the whole body. And 
 cbencc back again to the root of the hair a tenth or eleventh 
 pan. 
 
 XXVIII. But which way foeveryou draw it, this fpace is 
 alfo divided into three equal parts, whereof the fivii makes the 
 forehead, the fecond the nofe, the third the chin. However, 
 in a face for the eleventh parr, is a tufc of hair, which is ufually 
 expreft, fo that the forehead becomes lower by a third part, 
 which rule the Ancient Grecians always obferved. 
 
 XXIX. The ftoporttons of a man of eight Faces. 
 
 Firft draw a ttraigbt perpendicular line of the length you 
 defign the Figure, which divide into eight equal parts \ the 
 uppermoft part of which is the length of the head, in which 
 it behoves you to be very exatfl, becaufe the whole body muit 
 anfwer in proportion to it. 
 
 XXX. That eight part make into an Oval, which divide 
 iato four equal fpaces ; the firlt (hall be for the hair, the fecond 
 for the forehead, the third for the nofe, the fourth from the 
 lower parr of the nofe to the bottom of the chin. But draw- 
 ing after the Life, you need not follow this Rule exadlly, for 
 nature is extreamly various in her Reprefentations. 
 
 XXXI. Having drawn the head, there remain feven parts 
 tnore from the bottom of the chin to the foal of the foot. The 
 diftance of the chin to the breafts is the length of the head. The 
 third divifion reaches to the fraalleft pare of the wafte. The 
 fourth to thfc Privities. The fifth to the middle part of the 
 Thigh, The fixth to the middle part of the Knec.The feventh 
 lo the fmall of the Leg, The eight to the heel and fole of the 
 Foot, In the feveral parts all the other proportions anfwer. 
 
 XXXII. The Proportion of A Body ofjeven Heads,. 
 
 The length from the crown of the Head to the fole of the 
 Foot is feven times the length of the heacf : this is a large Head, 
 and all the Members and Limbs are anfwerable to it, 7^/;^. 
 Strong, Srurdy, and Raifed. Yet the Ancient G'-.«ci4»j painted 
 only the Goddefs Vefiawixh this proportion, it being grave and 
 Matron-' ike. 
 
 XXXIII. But you may give it to any other Goddefs, 
 which has any kind of grave, or folid Refemblance, as alio to 
 
 •the 
 
Chap. 15. Of Drapery. 35 
 
 the more ftaid and Ancient fort of Women, to SihySs, Pro- 
 pheteflTes and fuchlike, whom to draw with a flender and deli- 
 cate proportion would be a great overfight: As alfo to draw 
 « Prophet with the proportions of a young man. 
 
 XXXIV. To make a Child of Six Headsjou muft df^de 
 the wh jle length of the Body into fix parts, whereof the Head 
 muft be one. To draw a Child of five Heads, you muft divide 
 the whole length of the body into five pares, whereof the 
 Head muft be one. To figure out a Child of four Heads, you 
 muft divide the whole length of the Body into four equal parts, 
 whereof the Head muft be one. 
 
 CHAR XV. 
 
 Of Drapery, 
 
 I. TARaw the out-lines of the Garment lightly, and herein 
 ■*-' be careful, for the whole grace of the pidlure 
 lies there ^ then draw the greateft folds firft and ftroke thofe 
 into lefler j and be fure they crofs one another. 
 
 II. Sute your garments to the body and make them bend 
 with the body, according as it (lands in or out, ftraigbt or 
 crooked, or turns one way or another : the ciofer the garment 
 fits to the Body, the narrower and fmaller muft the folds be. 
 
 III. All your folds muft confilt of two lines and no more, 
 which you may turn with the garment at pleafure j (haddow- 
 ing the innermoft deeper, the outermoft moreybt ; and if 
 the folds be never fo curioufly contrived,fpare not to fliaddow 
 them I'^if they fall inward from the light) with a double or treble 
 (hadow, as the occafion requires. 
 
 IV. The greater folds muft be continued through the whole 
 garment, the lefler you may break ofFand fhorten as you pleafe. 
 
 V. The fhades of filk and fine linnen are very thick and 
 fmal!, which require little folds and a light and rare (hadow, 
 commonly but double at raoftjand fo alfo fine Drapery requires 
 more and fliarper folds than courfe. 
 
 VI. That part of a garment which fits clofe to the body 
 muft not be folded at a! I, but only fweetly fliadedjio reprefenc 
 The part of the body which lies under it, 
 
 D% VII. 
 
5 6 Tolygraphices Lib. I. 
 
 VIL Obferve the motion of the Wind and Air, for driving 
 loofe apparel all one way, drAwjog that part of the garment 
 firft, which lies higheft and clofeft upon the body, before you 
 draw the loofer part thai flies off from the body, leji by dratP- 
 inff the loofe fart of tbegarrhentfirfiyoufioeuld be out ^and fo place 
 the body crooked or atvry. 
 
 VlU. You ought alio to exaaaine the nature and difpofiripn 
 of light, cfpecialiy as it has relation to the Sun, or any bright 
 body ; for tbiit colours cannot be fecn but in the light ; and by 
 the help thereof they appear with a grace. 
 
 IX. Suppofe Blue be equally difperfed through all the parts 
 of a Garment, fo that there is no mere in one parr than in ano- 
 ther J yet notwitbftanding when it is illuftrated by any ligbr, 
 it caufeih one kind of brightnefs in that part where it iiriketh 
 ftrongly ; another kind of lultre where it llrikes more weakly ; 
 and another in that part, where it yet (hines Icis. 
 
 X Now to imitate ibis Blue j you muft take your Artifici- 
 al Blue colour j and temper it one way to exprefs the na- 
 tural B/z/f of iheGsrment : bur another way to exprefs it ia 
 the \%hi •• vis^. Ycu rauit nnix To mu:h White with your Blue, 
 a||you lind light in that part of the Gain.fnt, where the light 
 Itrikes ; more White where it ftrikes with lefs i and ftil! in 
 proportion lefs and lefs, till you come to the parts where the 
 ■ light lliines not. 
 
 XL Where the light ihiaes not but by I^fleBion, ihtte you 
 iiall only mix fo much (haddow with your Blue, as fhall be 
 enough to exprefs that counterfeit light, loofing it felf as it 
 were by degrees ; always providiug that you make your light 
 and (hadow to anfwer; 
 
 XII. T^ Folds or Plaits ought to run out every way like 
 Branches at Arms from' the body of a Tree j and to be fo 
 made that one plait may fo rife from another, as one Branch 
 or Bough, or one ftream of Water, comes out from another, in 
 fuch fort that there be no part of the Garment, wherein there 
 appear not fome of thefe folds. 
 
 XIII. Now thefe motions (hould be moderate, gentle, and 
 free, without any interruption, more to be admired for their 
 grace and facility, than for afie(9:ed pains and induftry: and 
 becaufeall forts of cloths have their feveral motions, as tvellas 
 Bodies ; it muft needs bejhat they differ between ihenjfelves, 
 according to the things wherein they difagrce. 
 
 XIV. 
 
Chap. 15- Of Drapery, 37 
 
 XIV. For this caufe, there muft be more light in fine 
 Cloifa,as Sarcenet, Linnen, Cambrick, Cyprefs (^c. in which 
 the plaits are fmall, raifed up, trembling, and as h Were Iweei- 
 ly waviag, ibmewbat puffed up, by extending and iorcading 
 ihemfelves like a Sail,where the motion receiveibmorcftrength 
 by the Wind,they fall clofe upon the bare skin, as you may fee 
 in Womens Garments, upon whom by reafon of their thinnefj, 
 they fail clofe upon the parts on that fide where the Wind blow- 
 etb, but are blown up on the contrary fide : The fame falls out 
 in Mantles, the loofe ends of Girdles and Garters; ail which 
 motions mot€ fitly appertain unto the Apparel of Nymphs, 
 GoddefleSj ©"c. in refpei5l of their lightnefs and airinels. 
 
 XV. Grofs and dull fhadows are found in ftiff Cloths where 
 the Plaits are few and grofs, fo that they are capable but of 
 flow motion-, and therefore they fink downwards, aud can 
 fcarcely fall clofe to the bare skin, for that their own grofsnefs 
 fuftaJQS them ; and thefe motions do mollly appear in cloth 
 of Gold, thick Leather, courfe wollen Cloth, (^c, upon which 
 ihe air can have little or no force. 
 
 XVI. Moreover the Plaits or folds muft have their mo- 
 tions accordingly as they are managed by the wearer, as under 
 the arm, and under the knee, by opening and ftretching ovjc 
 the arm and leg 3 ever making hard, ftiff, and grofs fold«, with- 
 out weaknefs or pliabknefs, in fuch fort, that by their appear- 
 ance, the nature and quality of the Garment may be known. 
 
 XVII. But mean motions, which are neither coo grofs, nor 
 - too flight, are fuch as appear in the folds of Stuff, and other 
 
 cloths of fine Wool i and thefe may eafily enough be moved 
 by the air, or become pliable to a mans limbs ; and fu make 
 not only moft fweet and plea'fant folds, but follow the bare 
 fiefh very well, becoming moveable and nimble, and falling 
 pliably about the loins,or any other parr. 
 
 XVIII. But befides thefe, there are alfo other kinds of mixc 
 motions, called turnings and crofllngs, which are proper unto 
 Damasks, Taffatacs, Sattins,Cloth of Gold, £5^<r. in which foUs, 
 croflling and breaking one another, appear, from the various 
 natares, qualities and conditions of the Drapery: but thefe 
 things are fo to be performed,that they may not favour of an 
 over-affe(ftcd imitation, without grace or order, to the fcand&l 
 of the Artift and his defigns. 
 
 £>3 GHAP, 
 
3^ Polj/graphkes Lib. L 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 Of mixed and uncertain Forms, 
 
 I. "pOr the drawing the form of any beaft, begin with your 
 •*■ lead or coal at the forehead, drawang downward the 
 nofe, mouth, upper and nether chop, ending your line at the 
 ibroac. 
 
 II. Then viewing it again where you begun, from the fore- 
 head,over the head, ears, and neck, continuirg till you have 
 given the full compalsof the buttock, then mark out the legs 
 and feet. 
 
 III. Viewing it again, touch out the breaft with the emi' 
 nency thereof; Laftly, finifli the tail, paws, tongue, teeth.beard, 
 and feveral fhadows. 
 
 IV. In drawing Beafts you muft be well acquainted with 
 their Hiape and atStion, without which you [hall never per- 
 form any thing excellent in that kind : and here if yon draw 
 it in an Emblem or the like, you ought to fliew the Landskip 
 of tlie Country natural to that beaft. 
 
 V. In Birds begin alfo the draught at ihehead /and beware 
 of making it too bigj then bring from under the throat the 
 breaft-line down to the legs, there ftay and begin at the pini- 
 on to make the wing, which being joined to the back line will 
 be prefemly finilhed. 
 . VI. The eye, legs and tr^in muft beat laft, letting always 
 fin birds as in beafts jtbe fariheft leg befliorteft ; their feathers 
 (as the hair in beaftsj muft take their beginning at the bead 
 very fmail, and fall in one way backwards in five rankSjgreaf 
 er and H?reater to the conclulion. 
 
 VII. Infeds, as flies, bees, wafps, grartioppers, worais,and 
 fuch like, are eafie to be drawn and not hard to be laid in Co- 
 lours •, in doing thefe, it will at firft be abfolutely neceflary to 
 bavfthe living pattern before your eyes. 
 
 VIII. To draw a flower, begin from the bofs tufft or wart 
 in the middle ; a« in a Rofe or Marigold, with the yellow 
 tufft, which being made, draw lines equally divided, from 
 ibence to tfcc greatcft compafs oi extent of your flower. . 
 
Chap. 1 7* Of Landslip. 39 
 
 IX. You may draw thena either fully open, or in the bud, 
 and laden with dew, wet and Worms, and then you may draw 
 rudely with the coal or lead the leaves afterwards giving them 
 their veins or jaggednefs. 
 
 X. To take the natural and lively (hape of ths leaf of any 
 Herb or Tree. 
 
 F/r/?, rahfi the leaf that you would have, and gently hruife tht 
 rihj and veins on the back-fide of it : afterwards tvet the fide tfitb 
 Hnfeed Oyl, and then prefs it hard upon a piece of clean white 
 Paper, andfoyoujhali have theperfeQ figure of thefaid leaf with 
 every vein thereof fo exa&ly expreji, as being lively coloured it 
 wiUfeem to be truly natural. 
 
 C H A P. XVII. 
 
 Of Landslip* 
 
 1. ¥ Andskip is that which expreflcth in lines the pcrfed vi- 
 
 *^ fion of the earth, and all things thereupon, placed 
 above the Horzion, as Towns, Villages, Caftles, Promontories, 
 Mountains, Rocks, Valleys, Ruins, Rivers, Woods, Forefts, 
 Chafes, Trees, Houfes and ail other Buildings, both beautiful 
 and ruinous. 
 
 II. Firfir, Always exprefs a fair Horizon, fliewing the 
 heavens cloudy or clear, more or lefs according to the occafiOD, 
 and if you exprefs the Sun, let it be either as rifing or fetting, 
 and as it were behind or over fome hill or mountain. 
 
 The Moon and Stars arefeldcm or never depiSled, unlefs it be 
 in reprefentation of twi- light ^ becaufe all things arefuppofed to be 
 feen by day, 
 
 » III. Secondly, Ifycu exprefs the Sun, make bis light to re- 
 fled: upon all the Trees, Hills, Mountains, RockSjOr buildings, 
 Ihadiog the contrary fide, after wticb manner alfo Ihadow 
 clouds, mifts, and the like, making the Ihadows to fall all obc 
 way. 
 
 IV. Thirdly, be very careful to augment or leflen every 
 thing proporiionabiy to their diftance from the eye, making 
 them either bigger or lefler. 
 
 D 4 , V. 
 
4Q Polygraph} ces Lib. I. 
 
 V. Inexprefllng things at large diftance8,as ten, twenty or 
 tfairty miles off ; where the objed is hard to be difcerned, as 
 whether it be Tenapic, Caltlc, Houfc or the like, fliew no par- 
 ticular figns thereof, or any eojincnt tiiftindlion i but rather as 
 weakly, faintly, and confafedly as the eye judgeth of it. 
 
 VI. If Landskips be laid in Colours, the farther you go, 
 the more you muft lighten it with a thin and airy blue, to 
 make it I'eem as if it were afar off, beginning at fir ft with a 
 dark green, fo driving it by degrees into a blue, according to 
 the diltance. 
 
 VII. Makeyour Ltndskip to (hoot (ts it were) away, one 
 part lower than another, making the neareft hill or place high- 
 eft, and thole that are farther off, to flioot away under that, 
 that the Landskip may appear to be taken from the top of 
 ao bir. 
 
 VIII. Let every thing have its proper motion, as in Trees 
 when they are fhaken with the wind, making the fmaller 
 boughs yielding j the ftiff;r lefs bending : in Clouds that they 
 follow the Winds : in f^verh the general current, and flalhing 
 of the Waters againft the boat fides. 
 
 IX. In rhe Sea, the waves and other proper agitations, the 
 fowling of the Billows, the tumbling of VefTels up and down ; 
 Ships floating, fome dipt, fome half-drown'd, fome flaodirg 
 almoft an end, fome hid almoft with the Waves, through the 
 uncertainty of the Surges, others endeavouring to live. 
 
 X. In the motion of Waters falling from an high place, bat 
 efpecially when they fall upon Rocks or Stones, you mufl: 
 make it leaping up into the Air ; and fpriokling all about.And 
 laftly, let every thing which moverh, whether effentially or ac- 
 cidentally, have its proper reprefcniatiou. 
 
 XI. Let your work imitate the feafon you intend it for. 
 As if you intend it for a tpinter fiece^reprefent felling of H^'ood; 
 
 Jliding upon the Ice ; fowling by night ; hunting of Bears or Foxes 
 in the Snow ^ making the Trees every wb«rcnak.ed or laden with 
 a hoarfroft ■ the Earth hear without greennefs^Flowers or Cattle I 
 the Air thickjy JVaterfro:{en,with Carts pajfing over it, and Boys 
 upon it, &c. 
 
 XII. Laflly, let every fJte have its proper parerga, adjuncts, 
 or adiiional graces, as the Farm-houfe, Wind- mill, Water-mill, 
 Woods, Flocks of Sheep, Herds of Cattle, Pilgrims, Ruines of 
 Teojples, Caftles and Monuments ; with a thoufandfucb other 
 only proper (o particular fubjeds. 
 
 C H A Fg 
 
Chap. 1 8. Of Diapering and Antique. 41 
 
 CHAP. XVIIL 
 
 Of D/aperiL'g and Afttiqne. 
 
 I. T^Iapen'ng, is a tracing or running over your work again 
 ^^ when you bave, £s it were, quite done, with damask 
 branches, and luch like. 
 
 Jt ii ufed to counterfeit cloth of Gold, Silver, Damdi^. Velvety 
 CbamUt and the like, tfith what branch and in what faftoion you 
 pleafe : it » derived from tht Greek tf^ord Sici.7:^.(c!My iranfeo, ta 
 pafs over, and only Jigni fie s a light fajfmg over the {ame again. 
 
 II. If you Diaper upon folds, iet your work be broken off 
 accordingly, and taken as it were by the half. 
 
 For reafonfhetveth that the fold covereth fomething which can- 
 not befeen by reafon of it, tphich if it tvoi ^rawn out at levgth 
 would appear plain. 
 
 III. Let the whole work be homogene ; that is, let the fame 
 work be continued tbrougbout the whole garment, felting the 
 faireft branch in the moft eminent and perfpicuous place, cau- 
 fing ic to run upwards,for elfeyour work would be ridiculous. 
 
 iV. You may either ftiadow the ground and leave your 
 work white ; or (hadow your work and leave the ground 
 white ; and as you fliall pleafe in this kind, your filling may 
 be with fmaf! pricks, which will (hew very fair. 
 
 V. Antique (ab antes) are buttereffes whereon the building 
 is ftayed, as alfo the outwardmoft ranges, ufed in fore- fronts 
 of houfes, in all manner of Compartments, curious Arcfaite<5l- 
 ure. Armors, Jewels, and Columns. 
 
 VI. The form of it is (only for delights fakej a general or ir- 
 regular conapofition of men, beafts, birds, fifties and flowers 
 and fucb like, without either rule or reafon. 
 
 VII. Laftly, obferve the continuation of one and the fame 
 work.through the whole piece, without the leaft change or al- 
 teration. 
 
 As if it be naked Boys, playing, lying, fitttngjor riding upon 
 Goats, Eagles, Dolphins and the lik^e ; firings of Pearl, Satyrs, 
 Tritons, Apes, Dogs, Oxen, bearing or drawing Fruits, Branches, 
 or any wild fancy after your own invention, with a thoufandfuch fl- 
 ther idle toys 5 befureyou obferve the continuation. 
 
 CHAP: 
 
42 Velygraphjces Lib. I. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 To take the perfe^ draught of any Figure. 
 
 I. nrAke a flieer of fine Venice Paper, wet it all over with 
 -■• linleedoylon one fide thereof, which then wipe off 
 as clean as you can ; let the Paper dry, and lay it on any pain- 
 ted or printed Pidure, then with a black-lead pen you may 
 draw it over wich ea(e : put this oyled paper upon a (heet of 
 dean white paper, and with a liiile pointed (tick or feather 
 out of a fwallow's wing, draw over ihe ftroaks which you 
 drew upon the oyled paper j fo ITiall you have the exadt form 
 upon the white pajper, which may be fet out with colours at 
 plea fu re. 
 
 //. Or tbttt. The picture being drawn as before in the oyled 
 paper, put it upon a flieet of white paper, and prick over the 
 drawing with a pen : then take fome Imali coal, powder it 
 fine, and wrap it iti a piece of fome fine linncn, and bind it up 
 therein loofely, and clap it lightly ail over the pricked line by 
 little and little, and afterwards draw it over again once or 
 twice, with pen or pencil. 
 
 III. Or thus, Rub a flieet of white paper all over on one 
 fide with black-lead, or elfe with vcrmillion mixed with frefli 
 butter i lay the coloured fide upon a flieet of white paper, then 
 lay the pidure you would copy out upon the other fide of the 
 coloured paper, and with a fmall pointed flick or fwallows 
 quill, go over all the ftroaks of your pidore, and it will be 
 exAit on the white paper. 
 
 IV. Or thuiX^y a piece of Lanthorn born upon the pidlure, 
 tV^en draw the ftroaks of your pid:ure with a hard nibbed pen 
 upon the horn; and when it is dry, breath upon the born 
 twice or thrice, and prefs it bard upon white paper a little 
 moiftned. 
 
 V. Or thus, Take an oyled flieet (as at the firft Sedion of 
 tbi? Chapter) rub one fide of it with lamb-black or lake ; lay 
 it upon a flieet of fair paper with the coloured fide downwards, 
 and upon it lay the pidure you would copy our, and trace 
 it over with a fwallows feather. 
 
 VL 
 
Chap. 19. To take a perfe^ Draught, 4g 
 
 VI. Or thus, Take fine lake mixed with linfeed oyl, and 
 draw with it, inftead of Ink, all the ont>ftroaks of any pid- 
 ure,aiid other tnaterial parts ; then wee the contrary fide of 
 the Pidare and prefs it bard upon a fheet of paper, and it will 
 leave behind it all that which you drew over. 
 
 VII. Or thw, Grind Printers black fine, and temper it with 
 water, and with a Pen dipt in it, draw over the oat-liaes and 
 mafter ftroaks : wet then Tome white paper with a fpunge or 
 the like, and prefs it bard thereupon ; and you (hall have the 
 ftroaks you drew upon the white paper. 
 
 VIII. Or thus. Lay the print (the back-fide of itj upon a 
 clear glafs, or oyled paper, then lay a clean paper upon the 
 print; hold it up againft the light, fo will you fee all the 
 flroaks which you may draw out, and ihadow alfo if you 
 pleafe. 
 
 IX. To take thefoape of any Leaf , Herb, or Plant, 
 
 Hold a whole Beaf or Sprig (as of Nettles, Plantane, &c.) 
 m the fmoakof Gum Sandrack, Rofin,a Link, or Waz-candle, 
 till it is well blackt, which place between the leaves of a (heet 
 of white paper.and carefully prefs upon the Leaf with fomc 
 fmooth thing ; fo Ihall you have in a moment the print on the 
 paper, fefpecially the backfide thereof^with the very Ramifica- 
 tions of the Fibres difperfed through it^ This may be of good 
 afe in Travelling, when we meet with ftrange Plants. 
 
 X. To take the PiSure of an Herhjfrom an old Pi&ure. 
 Take Venice Soap, dip it in water, and rub or moiften 
 
 the old Pidure all over, and very well with \t : then put up- 
 on it a piece of white paper, with other paper over ir, and 
 rub hard thereupon, or prefs them ftrongly together, and tb« 
 old Pidure will come ok exadly upon the white paper. 
 
 €HAP. 
 
44 Poljigraphkes Lib. I. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 To extender contra^ aFitlure keeping the proportion, 
 
 I. 'CNcompa^ your pidure with one greac fquarej which 
 "^ divide into as many little ones as you pleale: this done, 
 accordiog as you would have your pidure either greater or 
 lefs, make another fquare greater or lefs, which divide into as 
 many equal fquares which let be drawn with a black-iead 
 plummet. 
 
 II. Take your black-lead pen, and draw the pidure by lit- 
 tle and little, pafling from fquare unto iquare f by the exam- 
 ple of the patternj until you have gone all over with it : ob- 
 ferving that in what part of the Iquare the pidure lies, you 
 draw the like pare in the fquare anfwerable thereto, till you 
 have finiflied the whole. 
 
 III. Then draw it over with a pen, in which fecond draw- 
 ing of it you may eafily mend any fault, and Ihadow it at 
 pleafure. 
 
 IV. Lafily, When it is throughly dry, rub it over with the 
 crum ofwbire^bread, and it will takeoff all the black-lead 
 ftroaks, fo will your draught remain fair upon the paper. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of Perfpe^/ve in general. 
 
 /^nriKH' in Greek, PerfpeSiva in Latin, iht An of feeing 
 ^'^ in Englilh , is that by which we behold, contemplate, 
 and draw the likenefs of all magnitudes, jvift in form and man* 
 ner as they appear to the Eye. 
 
 II. The matter to be feen or fpeculated is a magnitude : the 
 manneroffpeculation is by radiations of Light, either dired, 
 redified or broken. ' 
 
 III. A magnitude is that which hath fortn ; and it is either 
 liDeal) fuperiicial.or folidsthat is, either a complication of points, 
 a complication of lines, or a complication of fuperficies. 
 
Chap. 21. Of Perfpe^^we in general. 45 
 
 IV. A line is a complication of points; that is (according 
 to Euclid] a length only without either breadth or thickfiefs, 
 
 V. A fuperficies is a complication of lines j that is, a length 
 having breadcb without tbicknefs. 
 
 For an the continuation of points makes a line ; fo the couching 
 together of lines makes * fuperficies : which k only th» iayirg 
 crofs wife, 
 
 VI. A folid is a complication of fuperficies ; that is,t length 
 and breadth, having depth or tbicknefs. , 
 
 And indeed it k nothing but the continuation of points upon 4 
 fuperficies either perpendicularly or bending. 
 
 VII. The Contemplation of the Objed: reprefenis the 
 matter to the mind, in the fame manner as its outward appear-^ 
 ance doth to the Eye. 
 
 And from hence comes Judgment where by the Artifi i enabled 
 to defer ibe the fame in lines y and delineate it^ according to its 
 apparent or vifual proportions. 
 
 VIII. To draw or defcribe the Appearance in lines Is the 
 acftive part of this Art, whereby the Idea conceived in the 
 mind fby fight and contemplation) is brought to light, 
 
 IX. A radiation is a beam of light, conveighing the like- 
 nefs of the thing, to the Eyes, or fight i and the knowledge 
 thereof to the mind or underftanding. 
 
 And this radiation « twofold^ either external from, the external 
 lights or inteleSlual from its being and power. 
 
 X. Dire& radiations are thofe which confider the direct oc 
 (treight beams, which pafs between the eye and the object:, 
 
 AndthisisthefirSt kind of perfpeSive ^ and is many titnei 
 (alone) called the Opticks. 
 
 XI. I^eUified Radiations are thofe which confider the re^ 
 Hedion of beams, and their (hape upon any polifh'd body,' 
 as on a Globe,Cone,Cylinder,Pyramid,or any regular folid. 
 
 And tUk is the fecohd kjnd of Perfpe&ive 9 t^hicb « called the 
 Art Catoptrica. 
 
 XII. Broken radiations are thofe which confider the break-] 
 ing of beams, as they are to be feen through a glafs or a Cry- 
 ftal cut into feveral plains or fuperficies. 
 
 And this » the third and laji kfnd of terffe^ive^hich n catted 
 the Artl>\o^ivkz, 
 
 GHAE 
 
4^ Polygraphiccs Lib. L 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 
 Of the A&rue part of Perfpe&rue, 
 
 I. ^He adive part of Pcrfpedive is either Ichnographicit^ 
 -*- Orthographical, or Scenograpbical. 
 
 II. Ichnographia^ is the de(cription of the plain bafe or 
 bottom of any body or building. Or the Lines or figure on 
 which the Subftance (Unds. 
 
 III. And it is twofold, to wit, either Geometrical or Sceno- 
 graphical. 
 
 IV. Ichnographia Getmetrical, is that which gives the fight 
 ofthebottomor bafeof any body or building. 
 
 So a Circle is the bafe cf a Column j and a fqaare n the bafi 
 cf a PeJefial, and the like y /"z/f */jff Geometrical Ichnography 
 M not feen in Sexton, or through a Glafi, unlefs it lies parallel 
 to the bafe ; andfo it makes no SeSlion tvith it. 
 
 V. Ichnographia Scenographical is the Appearance of the 
 fame bafe in Sedion, or through a Glafs, eretfted upright on 
 the fame plain, on which the bafe ftaods. 
 
 And by thk the faid bafe is extended in length but contracted 
 in breadth,forfoit appeareth to the eye. 
 
 VI. Orthographia, is the vifion of the forerigbi fide of any 
 plain ) to wir, of that plain or fuperficies which lies cqaidiftant 
 to a right line, paffing through the outward or convex centers 
 of both eyes, continued to a due length. 
 
 Andtherefore Perfpcftive Orthograpbia, is the delineation of 
 the apparent fore-right p'lin. 
 
 VII. Scenographia is the defcriptioQ of an oblique plain or 
 Other figure, that declines from ihe apparent or foreright plain ; 
 that is of that plain which makes Oblique Angels with the faid 
 foreright plain, and the two ftrait lines imagined to pal^ thro' 
 the two outward connex points of both your Eyes. 
 
 VIII. The Scenographick vifion of any form, body or building 
 is, of. that fide tpbich declines froyn, or conftitutes an Angle, ttfitb 
 the right line, paffing from the centers of both Eyes aforefaid: 
 this Artists calls the return of th* foreright fide. 
 
 Mil 
 
Chap. 23- Of the Suhje^sto befeen, 47 
 IX. liottf the Difference between the Orrhographick and 
 Scenograpbick vifionis this j the Orrhograpbick/b<«»j the fide 
 of A hody or building as it is beheld when the plain of the Gla/i 
 is placed equidifiant to that fide : but the Scenograpbick yfce»* 
 the fide of a body or edifice as it appears through a glafs raijed ob' 
 liquely to the faid fide^ or making an angle tberewttb. 
 
 C H A P. XXIII. 
 
 Of the Shhjed^s to be jeen. 
 
 I. 'T'He Baji of afiy tbing is tbe plain, flat, or floor upop 
 -■• wbicbany folid body, or objed: is placed, or raffed. 
 
 II. The Altitude or height is tbe perpendicular fpace of 
 place , between the bafe and eye, or height of tbe vifual poine 
 above tbe bafe. 
 
 III. The Vifual point, is a point in the Horizontal line, 
 wherein all tbe beams of tbe ^yes unite. 
 
 EjKiTipli gratia. If you look, on a longftraight Bsver, thefidet 
 of which run parallel^ yet by reafon of the di fiance both fides of 
 the Kjver (although it be very broad) will feem to incline ^ touch 
 and units with eachather in one common Point or Center : and 
 fo if you look on a lo?^fi-:'ti^ht brick-wall.the feveral lays of Brick., 
 and courfes of Mortar, wiS [at a great diflance) feem to incline 
 each tn other in one common Point or Center j this point refle&ed 
 on a glafs raifed upright on the bafe, is called the vifual point. 
 
 IV., The Hori:(ontat line is a line proceeding from the cen- 
 ter of the Eye to rhe vifual point, parallel to the Horizon 
 of tbe Earth. 
 
 And this iSi in men of ordinary height crftature, commonly a" 
 bout five foot from the ground or bafe. 
 
 V. The Diftance is tbe fpace on the bafe between the Glafs 
 and point in the bafe which lies diretflly under tbe eyes. 
 
 VI. Tbe Seclion is a plain of tranfparem or periucid matter 
 (as of Glafs) raifed upright upon tfae plain of the bafe ftaoding 
 before you, purallel to a ttraigbi line, pafliog through the con- 
 vex centers of both Eyes. 
 
 IVithout the kjtowledge of this Section or'^Glafs it is utterly 
 impnffble to underfiand perfpecftive, or l^nst^ what it mzans : Or 
 be able to give a reafon far the difference between the Ori:hc<?r2- 
 phick 4»<^ Scenograpbick figure, VII. 
 
4^ Polygraphicej Lib. I^ 
 
 VII. If the Glafs is placed near the vifual pcinr, and far 
 from the objedt, the figure which is feen will be very fmall : 
 and the rcafoo is, becaufe all rays comprehending the Ortho- 
 graphical and Scenographical hgures fihough more remote 
 from the cbjcd; tall into the vilu^l poinr.as ibtir common cen- 
 ter. 
 
 VIII. If the vifual point be more elevated (though at ibe 
 fame diftance^ the Scencgrapbick figure or form will appear 
 of a much larger magnitude: becaufe the vifual radiations- 
 being higher, the various perpendiculars raifed on the Sedtion 
 or Giafs, cut them in wider dittances, becaufe more remote 
 from the Glafs. 
 
 IX. If the Glafs incline to the vifual point, the Scencgra- 
 pbick vifion will be long-wife between the vifual poict and 
 the objed. 
 
 And the reafon is, hecanfe the plain of the Glafs heap in more 
 of the vifual J^jdiations. 
 
 X. If the Glafs recline from the vifwal point, the Scenngra- 
 pbick figure will appear rounder, and begin to refemble the 
 Ortbcgraphick. 
 
 XI. But If the Glafs is fixed equidiftani to the bafe,or plaiq 
 the objed ftandsupon j the Sccnographick and Onhographick 
 refemblance will be one and the lame. 
 
 And ths reafon is, becaiifs the form of the figure is lojlj or not 
 tifihle in the SeRion. 
 
 XTI. The Vifual B^aies, are tbofe lines which proceed from 
 the vifual point, tbiuijgh the Glafs, to any point higher or 
 lower than the phinofthe Horizon, 
 
 XIII. Diagonals, or lines of diftance, are'fucb as are drawn 
 from the point of diflance to any other higher or lower than 
 the Horizon. 
 
 XIV. Tht OhjeBy is that form, figure, body or edifice 
 intended to be cxprefTed in PerfpeSiive proportions. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 2 4 . The general praBice of PerJpe&Ive. ^.<^ 
 
 e H A p. XXIV. 
 
 The General Pra&ke of Ferfpe&ive. 
 
 I. y Et every line which in the Objed or Geometrical fig- 
 jL. gure is Itraight, perpendicular, or parallel to its bafe, be 
 lb alfo io its Scenographick delineation. 
 
 II. Let the lines which in the objed: return at right Angela 
 from the fore-right fide, be drawn Scenographicaily from the 
 Vifual point. 
 
 III. Let all ftraight lines, which in the objed return from 
 the fore-right fide, run In a Scenographick figure into the Ho- 
 rizontal line. 
 
 IV. Let the objed you intend to delineate ftaftding OK your 
 right hand, be placed alfo on the right band of theviftttl poirttj 
 »nd that on the left hand, on the lefc hand on the fame point : 
 and that which is juft before.in the middle of it. 
 
 V. Let thofe lines which are (in the cbjed) Equidiftant to' 
 the returning line, be drawn in the Scenographick ngure, trdm 
 that point found in the Horizon. 
 
 VI. In fetting off the altitude of Columns, Pedeftals and 
 the like, meafure the height from the bale-line upwaid in the 
 front or forerigbt-fide ; and a vifual ray down, that point ia 
 the front fliall limit the altitude of the Column or Pil.'ir, all 
 the way behind the fore-right fide or Orthographick appear- 
 ance, even to the vifua! point 
 
 This rule you mufl obferve in 4B figures, ds ttreH where there is 
 a front or fore'right-Jide, at where there is none. 
 
 VII. In delineating Ovals, Circles, Arches, Crofles, Spirals 
 and Crofs-arches, or any other figure, in the roof of any room ; 
 firft draw Icbnographically. and fo with perpendiculars, from 
 the moft eminent points thereof, carry it up unto the Ceiling, 
 from which feveral points carry on the figure. 
 
 VIIL The center in any Scenographick regular figure is 
 found by drawHng crofs- lines from oppofite angels: fer cht 
 point where ih'b Diagonals crofs is the Center. 
 
 IX. A ground plain of fquares is alike, both above: arid be- 
 low the Horizobtal line ; only the fnore it is diftant above or 
 beneath the Horizon, the fquares will be fo much the larger ot 
 tJvider,- 
 
 M 3Cs 
 
JO Polj'graph/aes Lib. I. 
 
 X. In drawing a perfpecflive figure, whertmany lines come 
 together, you may for the diredting of your eye, draw the 
 Diagonals in red ; the vil'ual lines in black j the PerpendicuUis 
 in gieen, or other ditferent coJuur from that which you intend 
 the figure fhall be oi. 
 
 XL Having coniidered the height, dillance and pofition 
 of the figure, and drawn it accordingly, with tide or angle 
 againft the bafcj I aile perpendiculars from the feveral Aogels 
 or defigoed Points in the figu^ to the bafe, and transfer the 
 length of each perpendicular, from the place where it touches 
 ibe bafe, to the bale on the fide oppofite toibe point of diltance, 
 fo will the Diametrals drawn to the perpendici-Iars in ihe bale , 
 by interfeiftion with the Diagonals drawn to the feveral tranf- 
 (erred diftances, give the angels of the figure : and fo lines 
 drawn frem point jo point will circumfcribe the Sccnograpbick 
 figure. 
 
 XII. If in Landskip there be any (landing Waters, as Ri- 
 vers, Ponds, and the like ; place the Horizontal line level with 
 the farthelt fight or appearance of it. 
 
 XIII. If there be any boufes or the like in the pidure, cen- 
 fider their pofition, that you may find from what point in the 
 Horizontal line to draw the fronts and fides thereof. 
 
 XIV. In defcribing things at t great diliance, obferve the 
 pioportion Cboth in msgniRide and diftance; in draught, which 
 appears from the objevil to the eye. 
 
 XV. In colouring and (hadowing of every thing, you maft 
 do the fame in your Pidure, which you obferve with your 
 eye, efpecitlly in obj.;d:s lying nearj but according as the 
 diftarce grows greater and greater.ib the colours muft be fain- 
 ter and fainter, till at laft they lofe ihemfclves in a darkilh sky 
 colour. 
 
 XVI. Tht Catoptricks are beft feen in a common looking- 
 glafs or other polirti'd muter ; where if the glafs be exjdly 
 flat, the objed is exadtly like its original j but if the glafs 
 be not flat, the refemblante alters from the original, and 
 that more or Icfs, according as the glafs differs from an exad 
 plain. 
 
 " XVII. In drawing Catoptrick, figures, the furface of the 
 glafs h to be coniidered, upen which you mean ro have the 
 reflexion ; for which you mutt make a particular IcJmographi- 
 r#/ draught or projection ; which on the glals muft appear 
 to be a plain fullof fquares,on which projecflion transfer what 
 l?iali be drawn on a plain divided into the lame number of like 
 
 fquaress 
 
Chap. 24. TbepraC^lfeofPerfiec^ive, 51 
 
 fquarfs where rhough the draught may appear very confufed, 
 yet the retiecSion thereof on the jiafs wili be very regular, 
 proportional and regularly compoled. 
 
 XVIII. The Dioptric^ or broken beam may be feen in 4 
 Tube, through a Crjftal, or Giafs, which hath its furfacecuc 
 into many others, whereby the raies of the objedb are broken. 
 
 For to the fat of the Cryfial or Wattr^the raies runftrei^k » 
 hut then they brea1\ and ma\e an Angle, the tphicb alfo by the 
 refraSed beams K made and continued on the other fide of the 
 fame fiat, lijr^j.-. -^ •. :;. 
 
 XIX. When ihefe faces on ft Gryftalare returned towards 
 a plain placed diredly before it, they leparate themfelves at a 
 good diltance on the plain j becaufe they are all direded to 
 various far diftant places of the fame. 
 
 XX. Bat for the affigaing to each of them a place on the 
 fame plain, no Geometrick rule is yet invented. 
 
 - A P P E N.D I X. 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 0/ tho. Z)fes of Verfpe^ive. 
 
 I. "OErfpeSiive then is a Science, or rather an An which is 
 ^ abfolutely neceflary toonewhowouIJ Draw well, En« 
 grave, Etch) Carve,or Paint, and which men of tho(e profelfions 
 ought rot to wane ; yet they are not to be fo wholly tubjedk 
 to its precepts, as to enflave thele Arts to its rules. 
 
 IT. You are to ufe it when it pleafingly leads ^ou into ib« 
 beauties of your work, and can be aifittant 10 you in your de- 
 figo, but when tfaofe things ceafe, you are to. leave it, left it 
 leads you to a precipice, or induces you to that which is repug- 
 nant to your peculiar Art. 
 
 III. Perfpe(51:ive,cannot of it felf be called a certain r»ile,but 
 is to be ufed with judgment, prudence and difcretion for if 
 you perfectly underftand it, yet if you pracflife it too regularly, 
 tho* you may do fuch things as roiy be within ihe rules 
 of your Art, yet your work will be difpleaGng to the 
 Sight. 
 
 E 1 IK 
 
52 Polygra^hkej Lib". I. 
 
 ly. The greateft Paiaters who have made ufe thereof, had 
 they rigoroully obferv'd it in their defignatioos, had much 
 diminiihed that Gbry which they attained to, aod which liaae 
 will give a kind ot Immortality to. 
 
 V. Such as too clofely follow its Precepts, may indeed make 
 things more regularly true, but they will be much wanting 
 of that harmonious excellency, that exquifiie beauty, and that 
 CbarmiDg Sweemefs, which would otherwifc have been found 
 in them. 
 
 VI. Architetils and Staiijaries of Ancient times, did not al- 
 waies find it to their purpofe;it was not their prudence to trace 
 the Geometrical pan ibexadly, as the rales of Pcrfpedive re- 
 quire. 
 
 VII. If you would imitate the Frontifpiece of the Rotunda as 
 the rulei of Perfpedlive require, you would wonderfully 
 err ; for the Columns which are at the Extremities, have 
 more in Diameter than thofe which are in the middle. 
 
 VIII. The Cornilh of the '?ala:{:{o Farnefe, which looks fo 
 beautifully if beheld from below, yet being more nerely view- 
 ed, is found to want very much of its juft proportion. 
 
 IX. In the PiSar of. Trajan, the higheft figures are much 
 greater than thofe which are below ; which by the rules of 
 Perfpefiive, (hould be quite contrary : here they increafe ac- 
 cording to the meafure of their diftance. 
 
 X. There is a rule which teaches the making of figures in 
 that manner, but it is no rule of PerfpeSlive^ iho' it is found 
 in fome books of that Art, and it is never to be wade ufe of, 
 but when it is for our purpofe : t'/Y when it may eafe the 
 f]gbr, and render the Objedt more agreeable to the mind. 
 
 XI. The Farnefian Hercules its Bafe is not on the level, but 
 on an eafy declivity on the advanc'd part ; the reafon of 
 which is, thaf the feet of the figure may not be hidden from 
 the fight, but appear more pleafing to the Eye, 
 
 XII. And this is the true reafon that tbefe Great men have 
 fometimcs ftept afide from the Geometrical Rules of Perfpedl- 
 ive, not in a S'ight or Contempt of the Art, but for the abfo- 
 lute pleafing of the ViCve fenfe. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 2 6. Meafftres ofHtmmne Bodies. 5 5 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 Meafures of Humane Bodies. 
 
 I. T^He face is that which begins at the bottom of the loweft 
 -^ hairs which are upon ttie fore bead, and ends at but- 
 torn of the Chin. 
 
 II. Some of the Ancients allowed but feven beads or faces 
 to their figures, but the molt of them allowed eight : we for 
 the molt part allow Ten faces, vi:{, from the Crown of the 
 head to the fole of the foot. 
 
 III. The face is divided into three partf, vi'^. i. The Fore- 
 head. 1. The Nofe. 3. The Mouth and Chin. 
 
 IV. From the Crown of the bead to the forehead, is the 
 third part of a face : from the Chin to the Pit between the 
 Collar bones,are two lengths of a Nofe. 
 
 y. From the Pit between the Collar bones to the bottom of 
 the Bieft, is one face: and from the bottom of the breft to 
 the Navel is alfo one face. 
 
 VI. From the Navel to the fliare-bone or Genitals, h one 
 face: and frotii the Genitals to the upper part of the Knee is 
 two faces. 
 
 VII. The Knee it felf contains half a face: and from the 
 lower part of the Knee tothe Anckle is two faces. 
 
 VIII. From the Anckle to the Sole of the Foot is half a 
 face : The fole of fhe^Foot is the Sixth pan of the figure. 
 
 IX. When a mans Arms are Stretched our, it is from the 
 tip of the middle finger of the right hand, to the tip of the 
 middle finger of the left band, the jult length of the whole 
 body. 
 
 X. From the one fide of the Breafts, to the other fide, is 
 two faces : the two uppermoft parrs of the Teats, and the 
 pit between the Collar bones in a Woman, make an Equila- 
 teral Triangle. 
 
 XI. The Hwwcrtfj, or Great bone of the Arm. from the 
 Shoulder to the Elbow, is the lengib of two fares : from the 
 £nd of tlie Elbow to the root of the little finger, vr^ the 
 ^hitm aad part of the band is two faces. 
 
 E 3 Xll 
 
54 Poljgraphkes Lib. I, 
 
 XII. From the Acetabulum of the Stoufder blade, to the 
 pit between tbeCoUar-boDes is one face : the band alfo is the 
 length of a face. 
 
 XUI. The infide of the Arm, from the place where the 
 Mulcte difappears, which makes the Bred, called the Petio- 
 ral Mufde, to the middle of the Arm,are four Nofes. 
 
 XlV. From the middle of the Arm> to the bt ginning of the 
 hayd'are five Nofes: ihe Thumb, and longeft Toe, are each 
 of them a Nofe long. 
 
 Ay. Laftly, as to the breadth of the Limbs, no exacft mea- 
 fure can be given ; becaufe the proportions are changeable, 
 according to the Qualities or magnitude of the perlbn.as being 
 fat or lean ; alfo according to the pofture they are in, and the 
 motion of the Mufcles ; all "which every Artiu is to regulite, 
 according to bis owp Judgment, and as the occalion may 
 require. 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 General Ohfervathns. 
 
 I, "IN drawing well, you muft endeavor to make your 
 
 •* Ccmpofitions conformable to tfaofe of the Ancients and 
 theip Cuftoms, yet having refped alfo to the prefent times. 
 
 J/. Avoid wbatfoever has no relation to your Subject, or 
 may be improper to it i things alfo having a lefs relation to it, 
 are not to be put into ihe principal places; thofe being re- 
 fcrv'd for the minutes of the Principal defign. 
 
 /(/. Jn pidures, neither the face, proportion, age , nor 
 Colour, are to be alike in all ; but they are to be as different, 
 as are the true and living Objeds. 
 
 IV, Your Subjed ought to be beautiful and noble, furnilhed 
 with Delight and Charms elegant and graceful, tl^t it may 
 not be faid that the Anift has laboured in Vain ; and fo as it 
 may tend t^ Perfedion or Confummayon of Art, fo far as 
 relates to tfft defisnation i that it may be as well as excellent, 
 
 able 
 
Chap. 27. General Obfervations. 55 
 
 able ro iRilruA and enlighien ibe Underlinndiog. 
 
 V. Your invention ought 10 be good, and rfae Poltures of 
 your deiign agreeable and harmonious, in rc-fped: ro ligiit,and 
 (hadows, which the Colours which are afterwards 10 b added, 
 taking from each, what rrtay moft conduce to the beauty of 
 your work. 
 
 VI. The principal part of the Pidure ought to app.ear in the 
 middle of the Piece under the ftrongert light, thai it may be 
 more remarkable than the reft, and not by the 01 her adjacent 
 parts behid from our fight ; yet lo as all together may cora- 
 pofe but one body.with the Draperie proper tor the Jame. 
 
 VII. All the Members or Pans of the' figure , are to be 
 combined'or knit together with a kind of Harmonie, as the 
 portions of the fame part are, that an apparent Chalm may not 
 be made, which will be difgraceful in your work 
 
 VllL' Where there are heaps of Objeds, th?y ought to be 
 diftinguiihed by different poftures and motions, which ought 
 not to be alike any more than^beir parts, ncr are they all to 
 be on one fide, but fee as much as may be in oppoiition one to 
 another. 
 
 IX. Among many figures, if fome (hew their f^parts, let 
 other fome Ihew their hinder parts, oppoling as 11 were the 
 back or buttocks to the belly. 
 
 X. Where alfo many figures are, let nor one fide of the 
 piece be void or empty, whilft the other is filled to the bor- 
 ders ; but let the parts and matter be fo difpofed, that both 
 fides may equally participate of the amplitude of the defign. 
 
 XL Let your piece not coofift of too marvy 6gure8 i for it 
 will be impoffibleiodifpofe and introduce them into the work, 
 with fuch a Grace.as may make the whole beaucifal. 
 
 XII. Becaufe many difperfed ObjeAs breed confafion, de- 
 tradling from the work that excellency and pleafiognefs, 
 which ought to give fatisfadipn to the beholder, 
 
 Xllh But if your work muft confift of many figures, you 
 ought to apprehend the whole defigo in your mind togethers 
 that when it is performed, it may appear at firft View, as 
 the produd of perfect harmony, and natures real work. 
 
 XJV. Such parts as are not eafy to be feen, and are not 
 natural, and all fore d adions and motions/ alfo UDComly 
 poftures and parts, are wholly to be avoided. 
 
 Xl/'. You mafl: alfo avoid ail out lines, and other lines,' 
 
 which are either equal or Parallel, or conftitute any pointed 
 
 or Geometrical figure, whether Triangles, Squares, Quin- 
 
 E 4 quaogles, 
 
%6 Polygraphices Lib. I. 
 
 quangles^Hexangles, ^c. which by their exad:nefs,or Teeming 
 exadrneis, fpoil ihe natural beauty> and give difpleafure to 
 the Eye. 
 
 Xl^. Nor are you lo be loo ftrid:ly tyed up to Nature, 
 but foaaetiiues you are to give way to fjigiits of Fancy, aad 
 your own Genius, by which many times things are added to 
 make the defign much more beautiful. 
 
 Wll. Yet you ought to imitate the Beauties of Nature, 
 as all the Ancients have done before us : for which parpofe 
 the whole Univerfe is often to be viewed and contemplated 
 on, ibat you may be furnilhed wiih great Idea's, wi h which 
 your work being adorned, they may be as (u many Charms 
 upon the fenfcs and underltaodingofthe Beholders. 
 
 XyiJL If your piece is but one lingle figure, it ought to be 
 perfedly finiflicd in all its parts, its drapery fweetly fpread 
 over it, the folds large, and following the order and motion of 
 ihe parts, that they may be feen as it were underneath by the 
 lights and ftiadows appendent, 
 
 XiX. If the parts are too much diftari^ from each other. 
 fo as there are void rpaces,you ate there to place fome fold cr 
 folds, which are to be deeply fhadowcd.toconftitutea feeming 
 joyning (as it vvere of the partsj 
 
 AX The beauty, of Drapery confii^s not in the multitude of 
 Folds, nor the beauty of Limbs in the quantity atid rifing of 
 the Mufcles, but rather in their natural Order and fimplicity. 
 
 XXL The management of the Drapery is to be taken frotn 
 the Quality of the Perfoas i if it is of a Clown or Slave, it 
 ought to be ccncife and ftort : if of iViagiftrates, bold and 
 ample : if of Ladies, Light, Sweet, and Sofr. 
 
 XXII Folds are fomerimes to be drawn out from hollows 
 ' aod deep fliadows, to wbich you are to give a Iwellipg, that 
 
 receiving the light, it may as it were extend the rlearnefs to 
 thofe places where the body requires it, fo will you avoid ihofe 
 bard fhadowings which are ever ungracefal. 
 
 XXIII In laying the Scene of the Pidure, you are to con- 
 fider rhe places fuppnfed, the Countrie': where brought forth, 
 the manner of their Aclions, with the Ufe and Cuftoms 
 belonging to them. 
 
 XXIV. You are to follow the order of nature ; as iti draw- 
 ing or painting Clouds, Lightning, Sun fliine, ^c. to place 
 ib«m towards the top of the piece, not towards the bottom; 
 and contratiwifc in putting WcIIj^ Waters, C^yes, Foiuidi- 
 
Chap. 28. Of Lights Shadow and Colour, 57 
 
 XXV. The lights and fhadows of round bodies ought to 
 be lively and ftrong, but in their turnings they ought to 
 loofe themfelves infenfibly , and confufedly, without a 
 fudden or abrupt precipitation of the Light all of a ftxdden 
 into the (hadow, or the fhadow into the Light. 
 
 XXVL But the Paflage of one into the other ought to 
 be eafy, fweet, and imperceptible, that is,they are to change 
 gradatim, the Light to flide (as it were) into the Ihadow^and 
 the fhadow into the Light. 
 
 XXVn. In tJTc fame manner, asif you would manage a 
 lingle head or figure , ) ou muft (in conformity to thefe 
 precepts) draw a heap of figures, compofed of feveral parts. 
 
 XXVIIL And where you have feveral heaps of figures 
 (which or ght not to exceed three or four,) you muft take 
 heed fo to place or feparate them from each other, that they 
 may be plainly diftingulfhed by Lights, Shadows, or 
 Colours. 
 
 XXIX. And thefe things are fo dexteroufly to be managed,' 
 that you may make the Bodies to appear enlightned by the 
 Shadows which bound the fight, and permit it not fuddenly 
 to go farther j and contrarily, the fhadows may be made 
 evident by cnlightning your ground. 
 
 XXX. You ought to draw a round body, in the fame 
 manner as we behold it in a Convex Mirror, in which the 
 Figures and all other things, are feen to bear out with more 
 Life and Strength, than even in nature it felf. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIII. 
 
 Of Lights Shadow and Colour, 
 
 J. TT He Drawer,Engraver, and Painter, are all to purfue 
 * one and the fame Intention, and to be under one and 
 the fame Condud: ; what the Drawer or Engraver, makes 
 round with the Crion or Steel Inftrument, the Painter per- 
 forms with his Pencil ; cafting behind what is to be made lefs 
 vifible, by Diminution, and breaking of his Colours : and 
 drawing forwards by the moft lively Colours, and ftrongeft 
 Shadows, that which is direClly oppofite to the Sight, as 
 teing neareft, or moft to be diftinguilhed. 
 
 II. 
 
5 3 Volygraphices Lib. I. 
 
 II. If folid and dark bodies are placed on light and tran- 
 fparent groi nds, as the Sky, Clouds, Warers, i'yc. thofe dark 
 bodies, &c. ought to be more rough, and more to be diftin- 
 guifhed than thofe with which thcv are encompalfcd j that 
 being ftrengthncd by the Lights and Shadows, or Colours, 
 they may fubhft and preferve their Solidity upon thofe 
 tranfparent grounds. 
 
 HI. In the mean feafon thofe light Grounds, as Sky,Clouds, 
 Wate|;s, being clearer and more united, arc to be calt oif 
 from the fight, to a farther diftance. 
 
 IV. You muft never in one and the fame Pidlure make 
 two equal lights , but a greater and a lelfer : the greater to 
 ftrikf: forcibly on the middle, extending its grcatcft clearncis 
 on thofe places of the defign ; where the principal Figures 
 of it arc, and where the Strength ^f the Action feems to be ; 
 diminifiiing it gradually,as it comes nearer and nearer to the 
 borders. 
 
 V. This is evident in Statues fet up on high in publick 
 places, their upper parts being more erdightned than the low- 
 er ; the which you arc to imitate in the diftribution of 
 Light. 
 
 VI. Strong fhadows on the middle of the Limbs are to 
 be avoided ; left the abundance of black which com.pofcs 
 thofe Shadows (hou Id fecm to enter into them, and feem to 
 cut them : rather place thofe Shadowings round about them, 
 thereby to heighten the parts ; making after great Lights, 
 great Shadows to fuccccd . 
 
 VII. On this Account Titiiin faid, he knew no better rule 
 for dillributions of lights and lliadows, than his Obfcrvations 
 drawn from a bunch of Grapes. 
 
 VIIL Pure White, either draws an objedt nearer, or fets 
 it off to a farther diiiance : it draws it nearer with black, 
 and throws it backwards without it : but pure Black (above 
 all other Colours) brings the ObjecV nearer to the Sight. 
 
 IX. The hght (being altered by fome colour) never fails to 
 communicate fomething of that Colour, to the bodies on 
 which it ftrikcs : and the fame eflFedt is pcrform'd by the 
 Medium of the air, thro' which it paffes. 
 
 X. Bodies which arc clofe together receive from, each 
 . other by reflexion, that Colour which is oppofite to them : 
 
 •vi:{. the" rcHedl on each other, their own proper Colours. 
 
 XL If a defign is filled with many figures, you muft al- 
 ways endeavour a union of Colours,for fear, that being too 
 different, Uiey fliould incumber the fight by their confulion, 
 
 with 
 
Clwp. 2 8. Of Light ^ShadoTP and Colour. 59 
 
 with the great numbers of their Members, feparated by 
 certain folds. 
 
 XII. And for this reafon, the Venetians paint their Drape, 
 ries v^ ith colours which arc nearly related to each other^and 
 fcarceiy diftinguifli them any other way, but by the diminu- 
 tion of lights and Ihadovvs. 
 
 XIII. Thofe parts of a Picflure fvhich are placed foremoft 
 or neareft to the View, lliould always be more finifhed^than 
 thofe which are caft behind ; and ought to be more mani- 
 feil than thofe things which arc tranllent and confufed. 
 
 XIV. Things remov'd to a diftance, though they are ma- 
 ny, yet ought to be made but one Mafs^ as the leaves on the 
 Trees, a flight of birds, Billows in the Sea, G?c. 
 
 XV. Objects v\hich ought to be feparated, let them be 
 manifeftly fo,and that by a Imall and pleafmg differencejbut 
 fuch as ought to be contiguous, let them not be feparated : 
 and v\here two contrary extremities are,letthem never touch 
 each other either in Colour or light. 
 
 XVI. The various bodies are everywhere to be of dif- 
 ferent Airs and Colours, that thofe which are feated behind, 
 may be united together, and thofe which are feated fore- 
 molt may be ftrong and lively. 
 
 XVII. In painting a half figure, or a whole one, which 
 is to be fet before other figures, you ought to place it near- 
 er to the Eye, and next to the light : and if it is robe painted, 
 in a great place, and at a diltance from the Eyes, then you 
 ought not to be fparing of great lights,the ftrongeft Ihadovvs, 
 and the moft lively colours. 
 
 XVIII. But you ought not to put a Meridian light in 
 your Pi(fture, becaufe there are no colours, which canrfulH- 
 ciently exprefs it ; but rather a weaker light, fuch as is that 
 of the morning or evening, whofe whitenels is allayed, and 
 the fields are gilded (as it were) by the fun beams -, or that 
 which appears after a Ihovver of rain, which the Sun gives 
 thro' the breaking of a Cloud. « 
 
 XIX. The parts which are neareft to us, and are moft 
 raifed, muft be ftrongly coloured, as it were fparkhng : but 
 the parts more remote from the fight, towards the borders, 
 more faintly touched. 
 
 XX. The field or ground ought to be free, tranfcient,light, 
 and well united with colours, which have a friendly agree- 
 ment with each other ; and of fuch a mixture, that there may 
 be fomething in it of every colour chat compofes your 
 
 work 
 
6o Pelygraphices Lib. I, 
 
 vvork : and let the bodies mutually partake of the Colour 
 of their ground. 
 
 XXI. Your whole Picture ought tote made of one piece, 
 wherein you muft avoid as mucli as you can poflibjyj to 
 paint drily. 
 
 XXI I. Your Colours ought to be lively, but not look as 
 if they had been rubbed or fprinkled with meal, vi:{. you are 
 not to let them look pale. 
 
 XXIII. When you make a Pidlurc by the life, you are 
 exadlly to follow nature, working at the fametime on thofc 
 pares which are refembling to each other. Ex. gr. the Eyes, 
 the Checks, Noftrils, and Lips j fo that you are to touch the 
 one, as foon as you ha\e given a ftroke of the Pencil to the 
 other, left the interruption, and fpaceof timecaufe you to 
 loofe the Idea of thofe parts which nature has produced to 
 refemble the other. 
 
 XXIV. Thus by imitating nature, feature for feature, 
 with juft and harmonious lights and fhadows, and proper 
 colours, you will give to the Pid:ure that Uvelinefs, tliatic 
 will fccm asif it were the living hand of Nature. 
 
 XXV. Smooth bodies, fuch as Cryftal, Glafs, Gems, 
 poliih'd Metals, Stones,Boncs,\Vood«;, ]z^z:\z, things covered 
 with hair (as Skins, the Beard, Head ; ) alio Feathers, Silks 
 and Eyes, which are of a watery nature ; and things which 
 are liquid as water ; and thofe corpoi-cal Species which arc 
 rerieCled by them : and ail what touches them, or is near 
 them, Ihould be painted and united on ilmr lower parts, but 
 touched above boldly by their proper lights and fha,dows. 
 
 XXVI. Let the parcsofthe Pidlure fomuch harmonize or 
 confent together, that all the fhadows may appear as if they 
 were but one : Embrace whatever is aflifting to you in your 
 defign, but avoid the things which may hurt it. 
 
 XX VII. Do not fo much .is touch with your CrLon,PcnciI, 
 or Graver, till you have well confidercd your defign, and 
 have fixed your out lines, and till you have prefcnt in your 
 mind a perfcdl: I(^e.r of your work. 
 
 XXVIII. By the help of a Looking Glafs, you may b« 
 afliftcd in many beauties, which you may obfcrve from Na- 
 ture ; as alfo by thofe obje»5ls which you may fee in an E- 
 vening, where you have an ample field, or large profped:. 
 
 XXIX. Thofe things which are painted to be feen in litT 
 tie or fmall places, muft be very tenderly touched, and well 
 united by gradual a'pproaches and colours ; the degrees of 
 "which ought to be more different, more unequal, more 
 
 ftrong 
 
Chap. 28. Of Lights Shadow and Colour, 61 
 
 ftrong and vigorous , as the work is more diftant. 
 
 XXX. If the Picture is to be placed where there is but 
 little light, the colours ought to be very clear ; but if it is 
 ftrongly enlightned or in the open air, tlie colours ought to 
 be very brown. 
 
 XXXI. Large lights are to be painted the moil nicely that 
 may be, and you muft endeavour to loofc them infcnfibly, 
 in the fhadows which fucceed them, and encompafs them 
 about. 
 
 XXXII. The Eye is to be fatisfied in the firft place, even 
 againft and above all other reafons, which may beget diffi- 
 culties in the Art, which in it felf has none ; the compafs and 
 defign ought then rather to be in your Eyes and in your mind 
 than in your hands. 
 
 XXXIII. Avoid objedts which are full of hollows, which 
 fcem broken in pieces, or refradled, which are little, and are 
 feparated, or in parcels, things which are rude, uneven, ill 
 coloured, and are -difplealing to the Eye ; or which are 
 partly coloured, and have an equal force of light and 
 fhadow. 
 
 XXXIV. You ought alfo to avoid all things which are 
 obkene, impudent, cruel, poor and wretched, fantaftical or 
 unfeemly ; things which are fliarp and rough to the feeling ; 
 and all things which corrupt their natural forms, by {he 
 confiiiion of their parts, and are entangled in each other. * 
 
 XXXV. But you are to chufe thofe things which arc 
 beautifiil,even in the utmoft degree of Perfection, which have 
 fomething of magnanimity or greatnefs in them, and whofc 
 Scetches or outlines will be noble, and magnificent ; which 
 will be diftinguiihed, pure, and without alteration, clean, 
 and united together, compofed of great parts, yet thofe bur 
 few in number and diftinguiihed by bold colours, and fuch 
 as are related, and are harmonious to each other. 
 
 XXXVI. Tho' nature is to be followed in many things, 
 and in moft, yet beginners are not at firft to be too fedulous 
 in following nature, left their works feem ftarcht or Stiff, 
 but they ought to begin with a certain carelefnefs/rccdom, 
 and boldnefs, which will accelerate, all their after endea- 
 vours, in order to the attaining the perfe(5tion of their 
 Art. 
 
 XXXVII. In the mean time, they ought to learn propor- 
 tions, the connexion of Parts, and fixing the Scetches or 
 out lines : they ought often to view and Exatrrine admirable 
 Originals, and ail the inkniibiliries and fweetnelTes of the 
 
 Arc, 
 
62 Polygrnphiccs Lib. I. 
 
 Art which will be attained rather by a skilful Mafter^ than 
 by fevcre and only Pracflice. 
 
 XXX VIII. After you have done foine part of 'your work, 
 let it lye by yon for fome days or weeks,vvirhout looking on ir, 
 and then view it again ; fo by that intermiirion, you may 
 chance to difcover your faults^ or the hrrorsor Excellencies 
 of your piece, which you may either mend, avoid, or ad- 
 vance, according to your skill and difcreticn : it will be in 
 vain for you continually to pore over your work, and dull 
 your GeiiiuSj in fpight of nature, and your prefent inclina- 
 
 tion. 
 
 XXXIX. As you walk abroad in the Streets, Fields, and 
 Country, obferve how nature plays and is dijjiolcd, and the 
 particular Airs, of the various Objedls, their poftures, moti- 
 ons, and pailions, and with what unconccrn'd freedom they 
 dilplay themfelvcs. 
 
 XL. And whatever you judge worthy to be obferv-ed 
 (tho it is but the Image or remembrance of a Country Clown 
 leaning with his breft upon his Club or Statf, as he is talking 
 unconcernedly with his neighbour -in the ftreet or field) 
 •whether it be upon the Earth, or in the Air, in the fire, or 
 upon the waters, whilft the Species or lAcns of them ar^- 
 frelh with you, record the fame, amd fo replenilh your Ima- 
 gination and Judgment. 
 
 XLI. ObjcAs of divers nanires which are aggroup'd or 
 combin'd together, are agreeable and pleafant to the fight ; 
 as alfo fuch things as are perform'd with freedom and eafe ; 
 becaufe they feem to be full of Spirit, and to be animated 
 with heat and fire. 
 
 XLII. But thofe things are not to be attained to, till af- 
 ter a long exercife and practice, and till they are throughly 
 weighed and confidercd in your Judgment and underftand- 
 ing ; tis an art to conceal from the beholders, the labour and 
 pains you have taken. 
 
 XLIII. If you would prove excellent in vour Myfteiy, 
 you muft aim at ready apprehenfion , difcerning Judg- 
 ment, Inclinations to learning, a noble heart, fublimc fenlc, 
 ifervor of Soul,and a Greatnefs of Mind;to which add, youth, 
 diligence, competency of fortune, a skilful Malter, and a 
 good alfedtion to the Science, without which, it will be im- 
 polfible for you to attain to any Excellency therein or arrive 
 to the Honour and Glory of your Predeceffors, who with 
 indefatigable labour, pains and Induftry, have brought the 
 Art to its perfevitic»n. 
 
 ^ CHAP. 
 
Chap. 2 9. Terms of the Art Rx^kakd, 62 
 
 CHAP. XXIX. 
 
 Terms of Arts Explicated, 
 
 I. j^L: The /I'r of a figure or Pidiure, is taken for Its Loo^ 
 or Appeara7?ce, in refpecft to its Mode, Sight, Light, 
 Shadowing^ and diipofition of the fame. 
 
 II. Antique. It fignifies the Sculpture, Graving,Archite(5t- 
 ure, and Paintings of the Ancients, made in the Times of 
 the Ancient Greeks and I{pmar?s, from the rime of Alexander 
 the Great ^ to PLocas hnperator, under whom the Goths and 
 Vandals ravaged and fpoiied all Italy. See chap. i^. SeSi. 
 5. aforegoing. \ 
 
 III. Apdtiide. It is faid to come from the Italian word 
 Attitiidbie-, and fignifies the mean or Pofture, and Adlion, 
 that any figure is reprefented in, or is capable of. 
 
 IV. Aqua fortis. It is a ftrong water, or Spirit made of 
 Vitriol and Nitre, of great Medical and Chymical Ufe ; but 
 here of fervicc chiefly for Etching Brafs or Copper plates. 
 See the making 'thereof in lih. 2. cap. 7. ScU. 1 8. & 15^^ 
 following. 
 
 . V. Br/^y7iP(?«a7. It isofufetodeanfethe work, wipe off 
 duft, and ftrike colours even, ^c. 
 
 VI. Surn'fJoer. It is an Iron ufed by Engravers,to rub out 
 Scratches and Specks, or any thing which may blemifh the 
 work ; and to make ftrokes or lines graved too deep, to ap- 
 pear fainter and fmaller, by rubbing them over therewith. 
 
 VII. Car too}?. It is a Dcfign made of many fheets of Paper 
 paftcd together, in which, the whole Story to be painted in 
 Frefco or otherwife, is all of it firft exa(5lly drawn. 
 
 VIII. Colouring. It is one of the Parts of Paintinig,by which 
 the Work or Piece receives its Tind:urejComplexion,Lights, 
 Shadows, and Beauty. 
 
 IX. Chiaro Scuro. It is twofold in Painting, i. When 
 there are onlytwo colours ufed. 2. It is the Artful diipofiti- 
 on of Lights and Shadows. 
 
 X. Contouer. The Contouers of a body, are the lines 
 which environ it, and conftitute its fuperficies. 
 
 XI. Crions. They are Paftils, or dry pencils, made of ie- 
 veral Coloured Pafts, to draw withal upon coloured paper 
 
 ©r 
 
6^ Volygraphiccs • Lib. t. 
 
 or parchmcnnt. See their various kinds and ways of making 
 in ///'. r . citp. z.fcB. 8. .-!</ 1 5 . 
 
 XII. Cornpajlfes. They are a brafs rnftrument,made com- 
 monly with Steel points,to take in and out ; that Jnk,biack, 
 or red Lead, may be ul'cd at pleafure : they arc chiefly of 
 \ife to meafure a diftancc, or ftrike a Circle, or portion of a 
 Circle, where you would be cxacfl. 
 
 XUL Defjgn. It fignifics, i . The juft meafurcs, Proporti- 
 ons, Scetchings, and outward forms that a figure or pidl- 
 urc (taken from nature) ought to have. i. The whole Com- 
 pofition of a piece of Painting • from whcncc,it is commonly 
 i\\d.jThere is an excclicyit defign in fuch n Piece. 
 
 XIV. Diflcmpcr. h is the Exadt- mixing of Colours, one 
 with another,or with Gum : the difference between that and 
 Miniature is, this latter ufes only the point of the Pencil - 
 the former ufes the Pencil in its full body. 
 
 A7'^. Drapery. It is ufcd generally for all forts of Clothing, 
 with which Figures and Pieces arc adornedjin the Modes and 
 Air of its fallings, foldings, and difpofition. 
 
 XFI. Drnxcing. It is the firft Art, and the beginnings or 
 firftpart of the Art of Painting, without which, nothing in 
 this Myftery could be attained to. 
 
 XVH. Dr.mght. It is the Copy of fonje dcf,gn to be en- 
 *gravcd, limacd, or painted. 
 
 XIIIL Erching. It is an artificial way of Engraving up- 
 on Brafs or Copper plates, by the help of 5//;7> o/ iV/>?r, or 
 Aqua fortis : oi which, fee farther, in the following Book. 
 
 XIX. Eifcl. It is an Jnftrument or Frame made of Wood, 
 much like a I adder, with iides flat, and full of holes, to 
 put in two pins,to fet your work higher or lower at pleafure, 
 for the Enfc of the Awift, whence doubtlels came the Nam.e 
 on the back fide ; there is a ftay, by which it may be fet 
 more upright or Hoping. See ///'. 3. cap. 2. fcSl 3. 
 
 XX. Figure, h is a general word, but here is taken for 
 any Engraved, Drawn, or Painted Objevft : but in painting 
 it is moftly taken for Humane Si.->apc and Proportion. 
 
 XXL Frefco. It is a kind of Paintivg, where the Colours 
 are applied upon frcfh Mortar, that they may incorporate 
 with the Sand and 1 imc. 
 
 XXII. Fefrocn. It is a fingular Ornament of Flower?, and 
 fuch like, which are put upon the borders and Decorations 
 of large Pieces of engraved works or Paintings. 
 
 XXIII. Grotesk^, or Grotcfco. It is a kind of Painting 
 found underground in th.* Ruincsof /<f?;;2.' : b\u with us, it 
 
 now 
 
Chap. 2^. Terms of Art Explicated. 65 
 
 now fignifies a fort of Painting, which- gives odd or ftrang^ 
 figures of Birds, Beafts, Serpcnts,Infedts,Herbs, Leavcs.Flow- 
 ers, Fruits, ^c. mixed together and continued in one Orna- 
 ment or Border. 
 
 XXIV. Graving.lt is an Art which teaches to transfer any 
 figure, piece, ordefign upon Brafs, Copper, Iron, Gold^Silver, 
 Stone,orWood,by thehelpof fharp pointed Steel Inftrumcnrs. 
 
 XXV. Graver. An Inftrument to grave wirhal, and it is 
 of three lorts, vi:{. Round pointed, Square pointed, and Lo- 
 zenge pointed. See lib. %. cap. i.Jeci. 3. following. 
 
 XXVL Gruffo. It is a combination or knot of tigurcs to- 
 gether either in the middle or fides of a Piece of Painting. 
 Of thefe Gruppo's, Caracbe would not allow above three , 
 nor above twelve figures for any piece. 
 
 XXVII. Hifiory-fainting.li is the Joyning of many figures 
 in one Piece, to reprefent any action of the Life, whether 
 Trur or Fabulous, accompanied with all its Ornaments of 
 Landskip and Perfpe*ftivc. 
 
 '^'XN iW.Ichiographic Xt is a fimple defcription of the plain 
 bafe or bottom of any body or building ; Or the Platform in 
 lines or figure, upon which the b-dy of a building ftands. 
 
 XXIX. jK^omntlck^ or Cromntick. It is that which the La- 
 tins call PiRura, and we in Englilh the Art of Pnintivg^ 
 and confifts chiefly in Drawwg^Engr.n'ihg, Etchwg,Limning, 
 Colouring, zr\<i faint ivg in Oyl. 
 
 XXX. Lands kjf. It is the defign of expreiling in figures, 
 the perfevfl vifion of a Country, and all things placed thereon, 
 as the Hori:(on, Towns, ViU ages ^CaJileSy Prcmontoyies^Mountains, 
 B^cks, Vaiilej, I{iiivs, I^ivers, Fore/Is, Woods, Clc/'cs, Trees, 
 Houfes, and all other ^cc;Wew/j attend ing the fame. 
 
 XXXI. Marnier. It is the habit of a Painter, not only of 
 his Hand, but of his mind, viz. his way of Expofing himfelf 
 in the three principal Parts of Painting, to wit, Invention, 
 Dcfign, and Colouring : It anfwers to Stije in Authors ; for 
 a Painter is known by his Manner or Mode, as an Author 
 by his Stile ; or a Mans hand by his lV,nting. \, 
 
 XXXII. JVWc/. It the figure of the Defign, which a Pain- 
 ter works by ; and it is either according to Nature, or o- 
 therwife : but Generally it fignifies tlmt which Architects, 
 Carpenters, Joyners, Painters, and Scii'ptcrs, frame or make 
 10 guide themfelves by in performing their De/igns. 
 
 XXXIII. Mlnatiire. It is the drawing a Great Figure or 
 Piece, in fmall ; as the making the figiu-e of a mans Head, 
 which is in a whole fheet of Paper in the bignefs of an inch, 
 
 . f or 
 
 li 
 
66 Polygrapbices. Lib. II. 
 
 or inch and half, the bringing in of a Church, Palace, Caftle, 
 Fort, Field, or Country, into the bignefs of an Inch, two, 
 or three : but this is belt performed by the help of Dimhii/h~ 
 ing Glajfes ground to an Exadlnefs ; the bcft of which kind 
 are made by Mr. John Tarwell, living at the Archimedes and 
 three golden ProfpeHs in LtiJgnte ftrcet, London. 
 
 XXXIV. Mc:{:{o-^eltevo. It is where the Figures rife up, 
 but not above half of them is feen j die reft being fuppofcd 
 within the Marble, Stone, or Wood. 
 
 XXXV. Mc:^:{o-'Iir,ilo. Ii is a Pidhire made half black, or 
 with no other Colours but black and white : but now it is 
 taken for a new Method of Transferring a defien or pidure 
 upon a brafs or Copper plate, by the help of an /ngine or 
 Tnftrumcnt made for this pnrpofe, which makes the polifhed 
 plate, every ways minutely rough ; upon which, the Dcr\gr\ 
 or Figure being drawn with Chalk, and a (harp Stiff, by the 
 help of a Burn!jhi)?g iron, the whole dcfign according to its 
 lighisand (hadows (burnifliing where you would have the 
 light ftrike - and that more or lefs, as you would have the 
 light ftronger or fainter, you will have with little labour and 
 trouble the i whole piece 'transferred upon the Plate, with an 
 admirable deal of Accuracy and Sweetncfs. 
 
 XXXVI. Nudity. It is any naked Figure of Man or "Wo- 
 man : but moft commonly of a Woman : when we fay. It 
 is a Nudity, we mcanjt is the Figure of n nailed 14'^omnn. 
 
 XXXVII. Optickj. They are the Art of feeing rightly, and 
 ccnfift of three parts : i. Optickj, fpeciallyfo called ; are the 
 Vili( n or Appearance of any vifiblc Objed:, whether ylnimate 
 or Innnirn.ite by Direct RadiationSj or beams of Light ; and 
 thcfe arc the E5ircA or Srrcight beams, which pafs between 
 the Eye and the Objed;. 2. Cntoptrickj, which are relieved 
 Radiations, or Beauty upon any polilhcd body as Globe, 
 Prifme,rcgular folid, Looking-Glafs,G?c. 9. Dioptrickj, which 
 arc broken Radiations or Beams, as they arc to be feen thro' 
 a Glafs or Cryftal, cur into fcveral plains or fuperficics. 
 
 ■XXXVIII. Orthographic. It ha. rcdangular Vifion of the 
 fore-right lidci^f any plain, or upright building : where if a 
 ftraight line paflcs from yor.r Eye to any part of the faid plain 
 or building it makes with the laid plain or building four right 
 Angles, %'!■{. two upwards and downwards from the faid line, 
 and the like two on the right and left hand of the faid line. 
 
 XXXIX. Pn.'let. It is a'flat, thin, fmooth piece of Wood 
 (cither Walnut-tree, or Pear-tree) about twelve /nches long, 
 and ten inches broad, aimoft Oval, at the narrowcft end of, 
 
 which 
 
Chap. 29' Termf of Jrt Explicated, 67 
 
 which is made a hole to put in the Thumb of the left hand 
 and near to that a circular Notch in the edge thereof, that fo 
 you may hold it in your hand : its ufe is to temper }'our 
 Colours upon. 
 
 XL. Pajiils. They are made of various coloured Paftcs 
 or Clay, and are the fame with Crions. 
 
 XLI. Pencils. They are made either ofblack^cr red Le.td, 
 (haved to a (harp point,or of hair,and are of feveral bignefles, 
 from a Pin, to the bignefs of a Finger, and called by feveral 
 Names^as Ducks Qiiill fitch'd, and pointed ; Goofe QriilJ. 
 fitch'd and pointed ; Swan's Quill fitch'd and pointed ; 
 JeweUing Pencils ; Brulh Pencils j fome in ^Uls ■ fome ia 
 Tin Cafes ; and fome in Sticks. 
 
 XLIL Parallel-lines. They are fuch lines^(whethcr ftraigh.t 
 or crooked) as are every where equally diflanc from another. 
 XLin. Peynngon. It is a Geometrical plain figure of 
 five equal Sides -, and five equal Angles. 
 
 XLIV. Polygon. It is a plain Geometrical Figure, confift- 
 ing of many Sides and Angles ; at Icaft exceeding four, as a 
 Hexagon, Heptagon, Odagon, Nonagon, Decagon, (3c. 
 
 XLV. Perpendicular. R is a falling Line, which falls upon- 
 another Line, or a Plain at right Angles on each fide the 
 line, and round about the Plain. 
 
 XLVI. Pedeftnl. It is a Square Body, or Foundation up- 
 on which a Column is to be placed. 
 
 XLVII. PiLificrs. They are Square Piliars_,which ufually 
 ftand behind Columns, to bear up Arches. 
 
 XLVlJI. Print. It is the Impreiiion of an engraved Plate 
 of Brafs or Coppcr,or a Cut or Carved piece of Wocd,upon 
 Paper, Parchment, Silk, or Linnen Cloth, reprefenting fome 
 Piece that it had been graved after. 
 
 49.Ql1adrat.lt is a figure of 4 equal Sldes,& 4 equal Angles. 
 h.piiadrant.Ii is the fourdi or quarter part of a Circle ;'but 
 is chiefly taken for a Matbcmatic.: I, or Aftrcnomi.tl Jnftrumcnt. 
 LI. [{eHevo. Jt is properly any EmbofTed ^a///?/^//?^, which 
 rifcs from a Flat S«/)f r/iViV^. Jt is laid like wife of Pninti7:g, 
 that it has a Great B^iievo, when it is (Irong, and that the fi'- 
 gitres appear round, as it vvcre,out of the Piece or Plane. 
 
 LII. I{elievD-Bajfo, or BaJJh-^lievo. It is, when figures are 
 little more than Dejigtied, and do rife but very little above 
 the Plain: and fuch are thofe Figures of the Ancients, which 
 they placed about their Cups and other Vcflcls. 
 
 1777. SeRion.It is a plainof pcrlucid or tranfparent matter 
 (as of Clals) raifed upright -^ipon the plain of the Bafe ftand- 
 
 F 2, ing 
 
68 Polygraph ices Lib. II. 
 
 ing before you, parallel to a ftraight line pafllng thro the 
 Convex center of both Eyes. 
 
 Lll^. Scciwgruphic. Jt is the dcfcription of an Oblique up- 
 right.inclining, or reclining plain, declining from the Ortho- 
 graphick Vifion, or fore-right plain^ w'^. of that plain which 
 makes Oh\ic\\\c\A)ig!cs, with the faid fore-right plain^and 
 the two ftraight Lines imagined to pafs thro the two out- 
 ward convex Points of both your Eyes. 
 
 LV. Si;(c. I. Gold Si:;^e. Take prepared yellow Oker, 
 what you pleafc, ^dd to it a little prepared Oil, and grind 
 them togcther,till they are fine, even as the Oil it felf Note, 
 youmuftputno more Oil to the Oker, than may make it 
 of a good ftifnefs to work well ; and to be of fuch a body, 
 that the Leaf-Gold being laid on ; it may fettle it felf Smooth 
 and Gloif/. Sec //'/^ 9. c<t^. i6./d-?. 33. following, 2. S/:;;c- 
 H^.ttcr. Take Glcw, Steep it all Night in Water ; then 
 melt it over the fire, to fee that it be neither too ftrong nor too 
 weak, and fo let it cool : if it is too ftilf when Cold, put in 
 more water ; but if too weak mnre Glue. 
 
 LVI. Stiff. Jt is a needle like /nftrumcntufed to draw thro 
 all the outmoft Lines or Circumferences of the Print,Pattern, 
 or drawing, you Etch after. 
 
 LVIL Shorming, or Forc-Jhorniing, It is when a Figure 
 fcems of a greater quantity than really it is : as if it fliould 
 fcem to be three feet long, when it is but one. 
 
 LVIII. Schi:{::^o. /t is die firft Attempt or Dcjign of a Pain- 
 ter, exprefling his fancy upon any SnbjeiSt. 'Jliefc Schizzo's 
 arc commonly reduced into C.rrtoons in Frcfco Painting : Or 
 Coppied and enlarged in Oil painting. 
 
 LIX. Stuccp-JPork. Jtis a Piece made of figures of all forts, 
 in a kind of Plaifter, and ufedto adorn a Room.either under 
 the Cornipoes^ov round the Ceiling j or in ComparcmenLs or 
 Divifions. if it is on the Ceiling it felf,it is commonly called 
 i'.et-worh,. 
 
 LX. Tinto. It is when a thing is done only with One Co- 
 lour, and that generally Black. 
 
 LXI. Vnrnip?. It is a thick fort of Liquor made by diflol- 
 /ving certain Rofins, or Gums, asthat of Juniper, Benjamin, 
 Maftick,01ibanum,Rnfin,Gum-I ack,S:c. in Spirit of Wine, 
 nr 1 infeed Oil (according to the ufe you ha\ c for it) for the 
 Prcfcrving and Adorning of Timber,Boards,Woodcn-Works, 
 &c. or to imitate and reprcfent the natural fon.ns of fe\ cral 
 bodies Animate and inanimate, as the fevenil and various 
 f reductions of Vegetables, Minerals and Animals, 
 £xj)licit liber primus. 
 
6^ 
 
 T LYGRJT HIC ES 
 Liber Secundus. 
 
 OfEN GRAVING, ETCHING, 
 and LIMNING. 
 
 Shewing the Jnfiruments belonging to 
 the Work ; the Matter of the Work, 
 the way and manner of performing 
 the fame ^ together with all other Re- 
 quifices and Ornaments. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Graving, and the In(lrnments thereof. 
 
 1, ^^"^ paving is an Art which teacheth how to transfer 
 ■ any defign |upcn Copper, Brafs, or Wood, by 
 
 \^^^ help of fliarp pointed and cuitiag Inftruments. 
 
 II. The chicflnftrumentsare four,i. Gravers, x. An Ojl 
 ftone, 3. A Cufliion, 4. A Burni(her. 
 
 III. Gravers are of three forts, round pointed, fquare 
 poimed.and Lozeuge pointed. 7he round k befi to [cratch with' 
 al : the fquare Graver k to make the large ft fir oaks : the Lo^^enge 
 K to makf ftroaks more fine and delicate ; bur a Graver of a 
 middle p^e betwixt the fquare and Lo:{engs fointed, will make 
 
 F 5 the 
 
yo Volygraphiccs Lib. II. 
 
 tke ftroaks er hatches /herr with more life and vigour, according 
 01 you manage it in worl^ing. 
 
 IV. The Oyl-ftone is lo whet the Gravers upon, which 
 mu(t be very Imooih, not too Ibft, nor too bard, and without 
 pin holes. 
 
 The ufe is thus : Put a few drop of Oil Olive upon the 
 fione, and laying that fide of it, tvhich you intend /hall cut the 
 Copper, flat upon thefione,a>het it very fiat and even, and there- 
 fore be fure to carry your hind {iedfafi tvith an e^ual ftrength^ 
 placing the forefinger firmly, upon the oppofite fide of the Graver. 
 Then turn the next fide of your Graver, and whet that in lil^e 
 Tn.^nner, that you may have a very fharp edge for an inch or 
 more. Lafily, turning uppermoft that edge which you have fo 
 whetted, and jetting the end of the Graver ohlifuely upon the 
 fione, whet it very flat and fioping in form of a Lo3[enge [with 
 an exaH and even hand) making to the edge thereof a fharp 
 point. It K imp)fflhle that the work^fhould be with the neatnefs 
 and curiqfiry dejjred, if the Graver be not, not only very good, but 
 al/o exaBly and carefully whetted. 
 
 V. The CufhioD is a leather bag filled with fine fand, to 
 lay the pUreupon, on which you may turn it every way at 
 eafe. 
 
 Tou mtifl turn your plate with your left hand., according at the 
 Jiroal^j trhicbyoy grave do turn, which muft bt attained with 
 diligent care and praSiice. 
 
 VI. The burnifhiog Iron is of ufe to rub out fcratches and 
 fpecks or other things which may fault your work in the plate j 
 as alfo if any ftroaks be graved too deep or grofs,io make them 
 appear lefs and fainter by rubbing them therewith. 
 
 VII To make your Gravers. 
 
 Provide fome crofs-bow fleet, and cauCe it to he beaten out into 
 fmall rods, and foftned, then with a q^oodfile you may fioape them 
 at pleafure ! when you have done, heat them red hot, and ftraight 
 dip It into Soap, and by fo doing it will be very hard : where 
 note,that in dipping them into the Soap, if you turn your band 
 never fo little awry, the Graver will be crooked. Jf your 
 Graver be too hard, tal^e a red- hot Charcoal and lay the end of 
 ycur Graver upon it till it begins to wax yellowtfh, and then 
 dip it into t.illow (feme fay water} and it tpill be tougher. 
 
 VIII. Have by you a piece of Box or hard wood.that after 
 you have fharpned your Graver, by ftriking the point of it 
 into tbe faid Box or bard wood, you may take off all the 
 rougbnefs tbo'u the points, which was caufed by whetting it 
 upon the oyl-ilonc. IX* 
 
Ghap, 5. Of holding theGraver, 7 1 
 
 IX. Laftly, take a file and touch the edge of the Graver 
 therewith) if the file cut it, it is too foft.and will do nogood: 
 but if it will not touch it, it is fit for your work. 
 
 If it Jhould break, on the point, it is a /ign it w tempered too 
 hard ; tvhich oftentimes after a little ufe by tvhetting tvill come 
 into a good condition. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of Polifiwg the Copper Plate. 
 
 I, npAke a plate of Brafs or Copper of what bignefs yoa 
 -^ pleafe, and of a reafooable tbicknefs, ttking heed that 
 it be free from fire-flaws. 
 
 II. Beat it as fmooth as you can with a hatntner, and thea 
 rub it as fmooth as you can, with a putnice-ftone void of Gra- 
 vel Cleft it fearch it, and focaufe as much labour to get them 
 outj and a little water. 
 
 III. Then drop a few drops of oyl Olive upon the plate , 
 and burnid) it with your burnilhing Iron ; and then rub it with 
 Charcoal made of Beech wood quenched in Urine. 
 
 IV. Laftly, with a roul made of a piece of a black Felt, 
 Caftor, or Beaver,dipt in oyl Olive, rub it well for an hour, 
 fo Ihall your plate be exadly polilhed. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of holding the Graver* 
 
 I. 
 
 iT will fae ueceflary to cut off that part of the knob of 
 -^ the handle of the Graver which is upon the fame line 
 with the edge of the Graver; thereby making that lower 
 iide next to the plate flat, that it may be no hindrance in 
 graving. 
 
 II. For ttorkjng upon a large plate.tbat part of the handle (if 
 not cut atvay] wiSfo reft upon the Coppery that it will hinder the 
 fmooth and even carriage of your hand in making your ifroaks, 
 and toiUcaufeyour Graver to run into your Copper deeper than it 
 foculddo. This done. F 4 *~ IT* 
 
72 IPolygritphkes Lib. II. 
 
 III. Place the knob at the end ofifae handle of ihe Graver 
 in ibe hollow of yum hand, and having extended your fore- 
 finger towards the point of the Graver, laying it a top, or 
 oppofiie to (be edge which fliould cut the plate • place your 
 thumb on the one fide of the Graver, and your other fingers 
 on the other fide, (o as that you may guide the Graver flat 
 and parallel with the plate. 
 
 IV. Be wary that your fingers interpofc not between the 
 plate and the Graver, for they will hinder you in carrying 
 your Graver level with the plate, and caufe your lines to 
 be more deep, grofs and rugged, than otherwife they would 
 be. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of the vpay and manmr of Engraving. 
 
 I. OAving a Cuihion filled with Sand about faine 
 • inches long and fix broad, and three or four ihick.and 
 a plate well poliflied \ lay the plate upon the CuQiion, which 
 place upcn a firm Table. 
 
 II. Holding the Graver (as aforefaid) according to Art, in 
 making ftraight ftroaks be fure to hold your plate firm upon 
 the Culhion, moving your hand, leaning lightly where the 
 ftroak ftiould be fine ; and harder where you would have the 
 ftreak broader. 
 
 III. But in making circular or crooked ftroaks, held your 
 hand and Graver, ftcdfaft, your arm at)d elbow refting up- 
 on the Table, and move the plare againft the Graver; for 
 oiherwife it is impollible to wake thofe crooked or winding 
 ftroaks with that neatnefs and command that you ought 
 to do. 
 
 IV. Learn to carry your band with fuch a flight, that you 
 may end your llroak as finely as you begin it ; and if you have 
 occafion to make one part deeper or blacker than another, 
 do irby degrees ; and that you may do it the more exadly, 
 obferve that your ftroaks be not too clofe. nor too wide. 
 
 For ynur more exaifl Dbfcrvaiion. prai5ice by fuch prints 
 whicharemore loofly fliadowed, lelt by imitating the oaore 
 dark, you fljould oot know where to begin or end. 
 
 V. 
 
Chap. $. Ofthe Jmitaimt of Copies or Vr'ints, 72 
 
 V. After yott have graved part of your work, it will be 
 needful to fcrape it wiih the fliarp edge of a burnilher or 
 other Graver, carrying it along even wiib the plate, (o take 
 off the roughnefs of the ftroaks j but in doing it, beware of 
 making fcratcbes. 
 
 VI. And that you may the better fee that which is Engra- 
 ven, with the piece of Felt or Cattor (at the fourth Se(5tion of 
 the fecond Chapter) dipt in oyl rub the places graven. 
 
 VII. Laitly, whatfoelrer appears to be amifs, you may 
 rub out with the burniflier, and very exadly polilh it with 
 your piece of Felt or Caftor and oyl ; which done, to cleanfe 
 the plate you may boil it a little in Wine-vinegar, and rub 
 it gently wiihabrulh of fmall Brafs-wire or Hogs briftles. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Imitation of Copies or Prints. 
 
 1. XJAvirg a piece of Bees wax tyed up in a fine faolland 
 •■■ -^ rag, heat the plate over the lire, till it may be hot e- 
 Bough to melt the wazj then rub the plate with the wa:e 
 lyed up in the rag, till you fee it covered all over with wax, 
 (which let be very thin: ) if it be not even, heat it again by 
 the fire, and wipe it over gently with a feather. 
 
 II, If you would copy a printed pidure, to have it print 
 off the fame way j then clap the print which you would i- 
 mitate with the printed fide next to the plate ; and having 
 placed it very exadly, rub the backfide of the print with a 
 burniftier, or any thing that is bard, fmootb and round,wbich 
 will caufe it to ttick to the wax upcn the plate : then take off" 
 the print Cbeginning at one cornerj gently and with care, left 
 you tear it (which may be caufed alio by purring too miich 
 wax upon the plate) srd it will leave upon the wax the per- 
 fedt proportion in every part. 
 
 Inhere note, if it be an old ftSture, before ^ou place it upon 
 the tPax, is Will be good to tracks it over in every limb iffith a 
 black-lead pencil. 
 
 III. But if yeu would have it print the contrary way, take 
 the duft of black-lead, and rub the backfide put upon rbe vi'ax- 
 cd plate J and with your needle or drawing point, draw all 
 
 th'' 
 
74 Poljigraphkes Lib. II. 
 
 tbeouc-linesof thedefign or print, all which you will fiod 
 upon the wax. This done. 
 
 IV. Take a long Graver either Lozenge or round (which 
 is better) very (harp, and with the point thereof fcraich over 
 every particular limb in the om-ilroak i which done, it will 
 not be difficult to mark out all the (hadows as you Engrave, 
 having the proportion before you. 
 
 V. Laftly, for Copies of Letters^ go over every letter with 
 black-lead, or write them with ungum'd Ink, and clap the 
 paper over the waxed plate as before. 
 
 See Chap. 9. SeSi. 20. ad 25. following. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of Eftgravwg in Woody called Cutting and 
 Carving, 
 
 L *l^)At figures that are to be carved or graven in Wood 
 -■- tnuft firft be drawn, traced,or pafted upon the wood; 
 and afterwards all the other landing of the wood(excfpt the 
 figurej muft be cut away with little narrow pointed kaives 
 made for that purpofe. 
 
 Tha graving in wood i( far more tedious and difficu/t than 
 that in Brafs or Coffer \becaufe you muji cut it, and be careful in 
 picking it otit, left you Jhoidd break any fart of the war kj which 
 would deface it. 
 
 II. For the kind of the wood let it be |)ard and tough : 
 the belt for this purpofe is Beech and Box or Peai-tree ; let it 
 be plained inch thick ; which you may have cut into pieces 
 according to the bignels of the fifjure you grave. 
 
 III. To draw the figures upon ihe wood. 
 
 Grind white lead very fine, and temper it with fair water ; 
 dtp a cloth therein, and rub over one fide of the wood and let it 
 dry throughly: This k^epeth the Ink, (if 7°" draw therewith) that 
 it run not about, ncr fink and tf you draw with P aft lis, it makes 
 the ftroaks appear more plain and bright. 
 
 IV. Having whicd iriC wood as before fif it is a figure yon 
 would copy,) black or red the blank (ide ot ihe print or copy, 
 and with a little Itick or 1 wallow's quill, trace or draw over 
 iht Itroaks of ihc figure^ 
 
 V. 
 
Chap. 7. Of Etching. 75 
 
 V. But if you pafte the figure upon the wood, you muft 
 not then white it over (for then the figure will pill off) but 
 only fee the wood be well plained : then wipe over the prin- 
 ted fide of the figure with Gum-Tragacanth diflblved in fair 
 water, and clap it fmooth upon the wood, which let dry 
 throughly : then wet it a little all over, and fret off the paper 
 gently, till you can fee perfedly every ftroak of the figure: 
 dry it again, and fall to cutting or carving it. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of Etching, and the Materials thereof 
 
 I. Z^Tcbing is an artificial Engfaving o£ Brafs or Copper 
 plates with AquafortK. 
 
 II. The Inftruments of Etching fbefides the plate) are thir- 
 teen. I . Hard VarniSo. 2. Soft Farni/h. 3. Prepared Ojl. ^. 
 Aquafortis. 5 'Needles. 6. Oyl-fione. 7. Brufis-Pencil. 8. But- 
 nijher. 9. A Scraper. lo. Compajfes. 11. h^ler, iz, Stift. 13, 
 The Frame and Trough. 
 
 III. Topolijh the Plate. 
 
 Although in Chap. 1 of this Book, we have fufficiently 
 taught how to polifli the plate, yet nevertbelels we think it 
 convenient to fubjoyn thefe following words. Firft, the plate 
 being well planilhed or forged, choole the (mootheit fide to 
 poliih I then fix it upon a board a little declining, and rub it 
 firm/y and evenly all over with a piece of Grindltone, throw- 
 ing water often on it, fb long till there be no dints, flaws, or 
 mark* of the hammer. 
 
 IV. Wafh it clean, and with a piece of good Pumice- 
 ftone, rub it crofwife to the former, fo long till there be no 
 rough ftroaks or marks of the Grindftone. 
 
 V. Wafli it clean agam, and rub it with a fine Hoan and 
 water croiWife to the former, till the marks of the Pumice- 
 ftone are rubbed out. 
 
 VI. Wafh it agsiin, and with a piece of Charcoal wit.hout 
 kno's (being beat red hot and quenched in Urine, the outfide 
 being pared off; rub 1 be plare wich water, till all the fmali 
 firoakf of the Hoan be vaniihed. 
 
 VII. 
 
7<5 Peljigraphiccf Lib. If. 
 
 VII. Laftly ,lf yet there remain any fmall ftroaks or fcratch- 
 e5, rub them out with the end of the burnifliing Iron ; but in 
 cafe they are very deep, you mult make ule of your Scraper, 
 and fcrape them out, and burnifli them afterwards; and thea 
 lattlytakea Charcoal prepared as aforefaid, and rub there- 
 with, with water, till the plate is glafed, fo fliall the plate be 
 fitted for work. 
 
 VIII. To mak,e the hard Varnijh for Etching. 
 
 Take Greek or Burgundy-pitch, Colophonium or Rozin, of 
 each five ounces, Nut-OyI four ounces ; melt the Pitch or 
 Rozin in an earthen pot upon a gentle tire •, then put in the 
 Oyl, and let them boil for the fpace of half an hour : cool it a 
 little upon a fofter fire till it appear like a Glewy Syrup ; cool 
 it a little more, ftrain it, and being almoft cold, put it into 
 a glafed pot for ufe. Being thus made, it will keep at leaft 
 twenty years. 
 
 IX. To makethifoft Varnijh for Etching. 
 
 Take Virgin-wax three ounces, Mafticb in drops two oun- 
 ces, Afphalcum one ounce: grind the Maftich and Afphaltum 
 feverally very fine : then in an earthen pot melt the wax, and 
 ftrew in the Mafticb and Afphaltum, ftirring all upon the 
 fire til! they be well diflblved and mixed, which will be in 
 about half a quarter of an hour i then cooling it a little, 
 pour ir into a balbn of fair water (all except the dregs) and 
 with your hands wet (before it is cold) form it into rouls. 
 
 X. Or thus, Take Virgin H'^.tx,fonr ounces: Afphaltum, two 
 runces r ^niber, Mafiich, of each one ounce : the three laft being 
 in fine Ponder, mix it over a gentle fire, that it miy not be 
 burnt ; then takjrg it from the fire, put it into a fot of fair tva- 
 ter^ and make it up into Balls or I{ouls. and preferve it from the 
 dufi ; trhen you ufe it^ take a quantity of it, and bind it up in a 
 pieceofTaffaty or Silk., and tife it as hereafter tt*e fhall direct. 
 
 XL Or thus, for a Red Ground. Takf Hed Lead, grind it 
 very weS, and temper it with varnifh. 
 
 XIL Or thus, for a White Ground. Take B^fm, two ounces'. 
 Wax, one ounce : melt them together, adding Venice Cerufe 
 finely nround, ttfo drams. 
 
 XIU. Or thus, for a Black Ground. Take Afphaltum four 
 ounces ; Bees TVax, two ounces ; melt them together, being loarm^ 
 lay it thinly on With a Lawn ^ag. 
 
 A7K Or thus, for another Red Ground. Take lied Lead 
 
 or Vermillion, grind it very well, then grind it with Linfeed Oyl; 
 
 lay it on very thin. 
 
 XV. 
 
Chap. 7. Of Etching. 77 
 
 XV. Or thus, out of a Manufcript. Take Virgin Wax, four 
 ounces : Afphaltum, Amber, MafiicJ^, of each two ounces (but if 
 cold weather, but one ounce of Majiickj B^Jln, Shootnak^rs Pitchy 
 of each an ounce : Common Fami/h, half an ounce : melting 
 the TVax in an Earthen Pot, put in the other things by degrees, 
 tpbich then well mixed, make it up into Balls or l{nuls, and keep 
 itfrdm dufiforufe. 
 
 X(^. Or thus, from Rinebrant. Take Afphaltum burnt, 
 lidajiick,. Amber, of each half an ounce : Virgin PVax, an ounce : 
 mslt the Wax and mix therewith the former things in Pouder, 
 then make it i"to Bal's or ^ouls for tife : M^^ you ufe it, heat not 
 the plate too hot, and lay your Blac\ Gtounninery thin, and the 
 White Ground upon it. 
 
 XVII. To make the prepared Oyl. 
 
 Take Oyl Olive, make it hot in an earthen pot, and put in- 
 to it a fufficient quantity of tried Sheeps Suet ffo much as 
 being dropped upon a cold thing, the oyl may be a little 
 hardened and firm) boil them together for an hour, till they be 
 of a/reddilh colour, left they fliould feparate when you ufe 
 them. This mixture is to make the fat more liquid, and not 
 cool fo faft, for the fat alone would be no fooner on the pencil, 
 but it would grow cold ; and be fure to put in more oyl in 
 Winter than in Summer. 
 
 XVllL To make the Aquafortis. ^ 
 
 Take diftilled White-wine Vinegar three pints ; Sal-Armo- 
 niack, Bay-falt, of each fix ounces j Verdigreafe four ounces. 
 Put all together into a large well giszed earthen pot (that 
 they may not boil over) cover the pot clofe, and put it on a 
 quick fire, and let it fpeedily boil two or three great walms 
 aad no more ; when it is ready to boil, uncover the pot, and 
 ftiric fometimes with a ftick, taking heed that it boil not 
 over ; having boiled, take it from the fire, and let it cool, 
 being clofe covered, and when it is cold, put it into a Glafs bot- 
 tle with a Glafs ftopple : If it be too ftrong in Etching, 
 weaken it with a glafs or two of the fame Vinegar you made 
 it of. 
 
 A7X, There is another fort of Aqua for ta, which is called 
 €ommon, which is exhibited in our Pharmacopeia Londinenjit 
 (3 Doron. Medicum. But becaufe thofe Books may not be \n 
 every mans hand, we will bereinfert it j ic is thus : Take dri- 
 ed Vitriol two pound, Silt-perer, one poupd, tr.is them and 
 diftil by a Retort, in open fire by degrees, 
 
 XX. To tnak? the Utchit^g Needles.. 
 
 Choofe 
 
yS Polygraph'ices Lib. II. 
 
 Cboofe Needles of feveral fizes fuch as will break without 
 bending, and of a fine grain ^ then taxc good round flicks of 
 firm wood (not apt to fplitjabouc fix inches loogjand as thick 
 as a large Goufequill, at the ends of which fix your Needles, 
 fo that they may Itand out of the fticks about a quarter of an 
 inch or lotuething more. You ought to have twenty Needles 
 at leaft j which you may fix in luch ItickSi as to have a pen- 
 cil at ibe other end. 
 
 XXI. I'o wbet thb points of the Needles tvith the Oyl-fione. 
 If you would have ihem whetted round, you mult whet 
 
 their points ftioi upon the Oyl-ilone ("not as lowing Needles 
 arej turning thetn round whilft you whet them, as Turners 
 do. If you wbet them Hoping, firft make them blunt upon 
 the Oyl-ttone, then holding them firm and fteady, whet them 
 floping upon one fide only, till they come to a flieri and 
 roundilh oval. 
 
 XXII. The bru/h pencil is to cleanfe the work, wipe oflf 
 duft, and to ttrike the colours even over the ground or var- 
 nilh, when laid upon the plate, 
 
 XXIII. The burnijher is a well hardened piece of fteel 
 Tome what roundilh at rhe end. Its ufes are what we have 
 fpoken at the fixth Se(5lion<of the firft Chapter, and the third 
 Sedlion of the fecond Chapter. 
 
 XXIV. The 5cM/>*r is one of the Inftruments fitted for 
 clearing the plate of all deep fcratcbes or ftroaks which the 
 burnilher will not take away j you are firft to fcrape them out 
 with the fcraper, (carrying your hand evenly, that you make 
 not more WGrk)aDd then afterwards to butnilTi upon what you 
 have fcraped. 
 
 XXV. The CctnpaJJes are chiefly of ufe to meafure a di- 
 ftance, or ftrike a Circle, or fome part or portion of a Circle, 
 where you defire your work to be cxadt. 
 
 XXVI. The Bjdler is of fervice chiedy, to draw all the 
 firaighr hatches or lines of your defign. upon plate j or, to 
 mark out dirtances upon a ftraight line. 
 
 XXVjr. The Seift is ufcd to draw through all the ouimoft 
 Lines or Circumferences ot ihe Print, Pattern, or Drawing, 
 which you Etch after. 
 
 XXVIII. To make the Frame and Trough. 
 
 The Frame is an cn'ire board, about whofe top and fides 
 is fattened a ledge two inches broad, to keep the Aqua fortis 
 from running rfffrom the fides when you pour it on: the 
 lower end of this board muft be placed in the Trough, leaning 
 
 floping 
 
Chap. 8. Of Etching. y^ 
 
 floping againfl: a wall or fome oiher thing, wherein you muft 
 fix feveral pegs of wood to reft the pUie upon. 
 
 XXIX. The Trough is made of a firm piece of EJai or 
 Oak fet upon four legs, whofe hollow is four inches wide ; 
 and fo long as n:iay beft fit your ufe : the hollow muft be 
 fomething deeper in the middle, that the water running 
 thither may fall through a hole fthere made for that purpofej 
 into an earthen pan well Leaded. The infide of tb» board 
 and trough muSl be covered over with a thick^oyl colour^ to hinder 
 the Aqua iotmfrom eating or rotting the board. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 The way and manner ofujing the Hurd ZJarnip. 
 
 I. O Aving well heat the polilhed plate over a Chafing difli 
 ^^' of coals, take fome of the firft varnifli with a little 
 ftick, and put a dropof it on the top of your finger, with which 
 lightly touch the plate at equal diftances, laying on the var- 
 nifh equally, and heating the plate again as it grows cold, 
 keeping it carefully from duft or filth ; then with the ball of 
 your thumb tap it upon the plate j ftill wiping your hand over 
 all, to make it more fmootb and equal. 
 
 And here bettare that neither the varnifio be too thicJ^upon 
 the flate, nor your handfweaty. 
 
 II. Then take a great lighted candle burning clear, with a 
 fliort fnuff, ^placing the corner of the plate againft a wallj bold 
 the varniflied fide downward over the candle, as clofe as yoo 
 can, fo it touch not the varnifli, guiding the flame all over, till 
 it is all pcrfedly black, which you muft keep from duft or 
 filth till it is dry. 
 
 III. Over a fire of Charcoals hang the varnilhed plate to 
 dry with the varnifh upwards, which will fmoak j when the 
 fmoak abates, take away the plate, and with a pointed ftick 
 fcratch near the fide thereof, and if the varnifli eafily comes 
 off, bang it over the fire again a little, fo long till the varnifii 
 will not too eafily come off j then t&ke it from the fire and 
 let it cool, 
 
 if 
 
8o Volygraphkcs Lib. II. 
 
 If the varnifhjhould be too hard, caH cold water on the hack,' 
 fide of the plate to cool it, that the heat may not make it too hard 
 and brittle. This done, 
 
 IV. Place it upon a low desk, or fome fuch like thing, 
 and cover tbar parr wbicb you do not work on, with a flieet 
 of fine white paper, and over that a Ihcet of brown paper, on 
 wbich may reJt your band, to keep it from the varnifh. 
 
 V. If you ufe a ruler. Jay (omc part of it upon the paper, 
 that it may not rub ofFfbe varnuTi ;and have an efpecial care, 
 that noduft or filth get in between the paper and the varoini 
 for tbac will hurt it. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 The wn.y and manner of Etching. 
 
 I. 1 N making lines or hatches, fome bigger, fome lefler, 
 A ftraigbt or crooked, you muft ufe feveral forts of 
 Needles, bigger or leffer, as the work requires. 
 
 II. The great lines are made by leaning bard on the 
 Needle; its point being (hort and thick, (but a round point 
 will not cut the varoilh clear : ) or by making divers lines ; 
 or hatches, one very clofe to another, and then by pafllng over 
 them again with a thicker needle; or by making them with 
 an indifferent large needle, and letting the Aquafortis lie the 
 longer thereon. 
 
 The heft 'Needles for thU work, are fiich as are tvhet Jlopirg 
 with an oval^ becaufe their fides tt'iS cut that trhich the round 
 ttfies will not. 
 
 III. If your lines or hatches ought to be of an equal thick- 
 nefs from end to end, lean on the needle with an equal force ; 
 leaning lightly where you would have the lines or ftroaks 
 tine or finall ; and tnore heavy where you would have the 
 lines appear deep or large-, thereby the needle may have 
 fome Impreffion in the Copper. 
 
 IV. If your lines or hatches be too fmall, pafs over them 
 again with a fhort round point of fuch a bfgnefs as you would 
 have the line of, leaning ftrongiy where you would have the 
 Ike deep. 
 
 V. 
 
Chap. 9. Of Etching, 81 
 
 V. The manner of holding the needle with oval point* 
 (which are tnoft proper to make large and deep itroaksj is 
 much like that of a pen, only the flat (ide whetted is ufually 
 held towards the thumb : but they may be ufed with the 
 face of the oval turned toward the middle finger. 
 
 VI. If you would end with a fine itroak, you ought to da 
 that with a very fine needle. 
 
 VII. In ufing the oval points, hold them as upright and 
 ilraigbt in your band as you can, firikingyour ilroaks firm- 
 ly and freely, for that will add much to their beauty and 
 dearnefs. 
 
 VIII. In Landskips, in places faribeft frona the figbr, 
 as alfo nearelt the light, uie a very llender poinr, lean-' 
 Ing fo lightly with your hand as to make a fmall faint 
 ftroak. 
 
 IX. In working be careful to brufli off all the duft which 
 you work off with the needles. 
 
 X. But this you ate to obferve, that you be able to copy 
 any Drawing or print exadlyjand to draw afrei good heads 
 of Plafter, or Figures, according to your own fancy, and 
 skilful in fliadowing every thing exadiy according ro art : 
 And therefore when you imitate Platter, be fuie to take the 
 true out-lines or circumferences, and taking novice bow the 
 Hiadow falls, to do it very faint and loft as the defign re- 
 quires. 
 
 XI. Therefore it is convenient that you be able to batch 
 with the Pen, exa(5tly after good Prints or Copies, at)d wberi 
 you can perfcdiy do that, and draw after Plainer, then 
 to imitate the life ; bat before you draw after the life, you 
 muft be very exacS: and true in your Out-lines or circumfe- 
 rences. 
 
 XII. Now to take the outmoft lines in any Draw- 
 ing or Print, upon the ground of tbe plate, you muft fcrape 
 a little white lead upon ihe btck fide of it, then rake 
 a feather, and rub it over every where alike, and fhake 
 off that which remains loofe. This done, take the print 
 and lay it upon tbe Plate, on that fide the ground 
 is, and fatten tbe four corners thereof to tbe plate with 
 a little fofc Wax: acd rake the Stift^ and drav/ Upon 
 the Print all tbe outaioft .'ines or circumferences exadtly ; 
 which dotifj take off th*^ pjinrfrom tbe plaic^ and all 
 the fame our~(ines and circumferences 5 'a bich you drew opoti 
 the print with the Stift,WilI be exa(ftlv found upoa the ground. 
 
82 Folygraphices Lib. 11 
 
 XIII. Then o'Dfeive exadtly how your original or pattern 
 is Ihadowed, and how dote tbe hatches joya, how they are 
 laid, and which way the light fails or comes in: and be fu're 
 to make the light to tall all one way ; if the light falls fide- 
 ways in the Prim j you mult hatch the other fide darkclt, 
 which is fartheit from the ligbr, and fo place your lights alto- 
 gether on one tide, and not confuledly, part on one tide, and 
 part on another. 
 
 XIV. Oblerve how clofe all the harches joyn, how they 
 incline, and which way they twift and wind ; which follow 
 as exadly as poifibly you can : but before you begin to hatch 
 or fliadow, you mult be fure to draw all the outtnolt lines 
 with a Needle upon the ground as artificially as you can, 
 which fhadow with your Needles of feveral foru according to 
 your Original. 
 
 XV. When you are to make a broad ftroak, then break 
 off the pointof your Needle, and whet it upon the oyl (tone, 
 four fquare till it comes to a point •, if you hatch fine ftrokes 
 then you mult ute fine pointed Needles: if middle fized 
 ftroices, then break oflF ibe point of a middle iizcd Needle, 
 and whci it as aforefaid i and fo in like manner according to 
 all the fizes : but lome Artifts, in making a bold or broad- 
 itroke, hatch it firlt fine, and fo by degrees make it 
 broader. 
 
 Etching Land-skips. 
 
 XVI. When you etch Land-skips, batch that which li 
 nearelt to the eye darkcft, and fo let it loofe or decline its 
 (hadows by degrees, making that which is fartheit off 
 fainteft. 
 
 XVII. The fame thing you muft obferve in etching of 
 the sky. For that which is neareft to the eye, muft be dark- 
 eft (hadowed, but in general as faint and loft as may be, 
 loofing it felf by degrees as is before dired:ed ; and the near- 
 er the sky comes to the ground, the more it muft loofe and 
 be fainter : when they both meet as it were together, the 
 sky muft be quite loft. 
 
 XV/II. When you have hatched it as exadly as you can 
 po/Tible with your Needles, after the Print or Drawing, then 
 compare them cxatftly together, that you may fupply any dc- 
 fecft, or mend what is done amifs. 
 
 XIX. In etching a piece q( Perfjfe8ive after a Draught or 
 Print, beware of Peifec'tion at a difiance, and be fure to 
 ftadow that which is neareft to the eye, perfefteft and 
 
 firongeft. 
 
Chap. 9. Of Etching, 85 
 
 {Irotigeft, and the farther from the eye, ft muft decline ia 
 iengtb, bread tb, and beightfr according to Arc and Proporir 
 on ; letting ibe Ihadovvs loofe, and grow fainter and fainter, 
 gradatim, till they are nearly loft, 
 
 Ft hing or Engraving of Letters. 
 
 XX. Screw the Copper place Cbeing fit for etching, by 
 one of its corners j CO a hand Vice, which hold over a Char- 
 coal fire till it be warm: then take a piece of Virgin Wax, 
 and rub it all over the plate, until it is coveied every where 
 alike. 
 
 XXI. This done, take a ftifF Ducks-wing feather fr.oc 
 riifledj and therewith drive the Wax even and faaootb, every 
 where alike, and lo let it ccol. 
 
 XXII. Then write the Letters or Hand, which you intend 
 to put upon the plate, on a piece of Paper with ungum'd 
 Ink : this psper thus written, lay with the written fide down- 
 wards, upon the waxed plate, and faften the four corners 
 with a little foft Wax ; the writing being fo jjlaced that the 
 lines may run itraight, 
 
 XXIII. Then take a Dogs tooth, and rub the pa- 
 per all over with it, not milfiDg any place ; which done 
 take off the Paper from the plate, fjp will all the letters 
 which you wrote on the papers be left cxadly upun the 
 Wax. 
 
 XXIV. Take nowa5'^»/V, anddraw all the letters through 
 the Wax upon the plate, and take a linneo rag, or Pencil 
 brufli, with which cleanfe the work from the loofe Wax i 
 lo will all the letters be drawn upon the Copper. 
 
 XXV. This, if you pour upon it good Aqua fortify will 
 be etched : but if you take away all the Wax, you may better 
 and more cominendably perform it by Graving, with 
 good Gravers well ground, and made fliarp towards the 
 points ; then whetted very fmooth and (harp upon a good 
 Oyl-ftcoe. 
 
 Gi CHAP. 
 
84 Volygraph'jces ^ Lib. II. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Of ufing the Aqua fortis. 
 
 I.|F there be any ftroaks which you v/ould not have the 
 ■■• jiqua fortis eat into • or any places where the varnifli is 
 rubbed off, meit fome prepared OyJ, and with a pencil,cover 
 thofe places pretty thick. 
 
 II. Then take a brufh pencil, or rag, and dip it in the pre- 
 pared oyl, and rub the bak-fideof the plate all over, that the 
 ^(jua fortif mzy noi hurt it, if by chance toy ftiould fall 
 thereon. 
 
 ///. Before you put ^^tt4 /or^» to the plate, gently warm 
 or dry rhe place by a fiie 10 dry up the humidity, which it 
 might contraifh by reafon of the Air j and to prevent the 
 breaking up the varniih upon the fiift pouring the Jquaform 
 ihereon. 
 
 ir. Place the plate by the nth. Sedion of the ytb. Chap- 
 ter of this Book, and with rhe Aqua fort a in an earthen pot 
 pour upon the plate, beginning at the top, To moving your 
 band rhac it may run all over the plate, which do for eight 
 or ten times: then turn it corner-wife, and pour iht Aqua 
 fonu on it that way ten or twelve times ; and then turn it a- 
 gain corner- wife theoiberway, pouring on \ht Aqua fortk 
 cig'tor ten rime? as before j doing thus feveral times for 
 the Ipace of halfa qiarter of an hour or more, according to the 
 ftretigihof the waier, and nature of the Copper. 
 
 Icor there mufl be Icfs time allctved to hard and brittle Coffer 
 forpnurtr,2^ or> the Aqua fortis, ^«f more to thefnft. . 
 
 V. Bu r you murt have fpecial regard tla caft on the Aquafor- 
 tis as occafion iTiall require, and as the work is j calling ic 
 on at leveral times, and on feveral places ; where you would 
 have it ^ry deep, often ; where lefs deep, fewer times : 
 where-light, lefs yet; where lighter, leller yet: and where 
 fo light as it can fcarcely be feen, once or twice : wafli it 
 with water, and cover it where you would have ic 
 lighter. 
 
Chap. I o. Of tijing the Aquafortis. 85 
 
 VI. Having thus covered your plates as occafion requires 
 for the fecond lime, place the pJate on the frame as aforefaid 
 and pour on it your AquafortK for a full half hour. 
 
 Vn. Then waflj it with water, and dry it, covering the 
 places which require lightnefs or faimnels (that they may 
 be proportionable to the deflgnj tfaen^our on the AqttafortK 
 for the laft time more orjels according 10 the naiure of 
 your work, and the deepnefs that it requires. 
 
 VlII. Ycumay rub off the varnilh or ground, as occafion 
 in your work requires with a Charcoal, to fee whether the 
 water hath eaten deep enough ; by which you may judge 
 of thefpace of time, that you are after to implpy in pouring 
 on the Aquafortis, in the works you will have to do, which 
 if the ftiadows require much deptb,or ought to be very black, 
 the water oughc to be poured on fat the leaft time) for an 
 hour or better i yet know,wo certain rule of time can be limited 
 for thii. 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 Of Fifjrpobig the work, 
 
 J. A LL the former operations being done, wafh the pfate 
 
 ^^ with fair warer j and put it wet upon the fire, till 
 the mixture be weli melted, and then wipe it very clean on 
 both fides with a linnen clotb, till you have cleanfed it of all 
 the mixture. 
 
 II. Take Charcoal of Willow, takeoff the rind of ir, and 
 putting fair water on the plate, rub it with the Charcoal^ 
 as if you were to polifti it, and it will take off the 
 varnilh. 
 
 Where note, that the Coal muft be (esc from all knots and 
 roughnefs, and that no fand or fihb fall upon the plate. 
 
 Ill Take ordinary Aqua fortis, to which add two third 
 parts of water, and with fome linnen rags dipped therein 
 rub the plate all over, fowili you takeaway its dilcolourirg, 
 and recover its former beauiy. 
 
 IV. Then take dry linnen rags, and wipe the plate fo as 
 to take off all the aforefaid water, and then holding it a lit- 
 tle to the firej put upon it a little Oyl Olive, and with a 
 
 G 3 . piece 
 
^6 Folygraphkes Vb. If, 
 
 piece of an o!d Beaver rplled up, rub the plate weH all over, 
 and laiilVj wipe it well with a dy cloaih. 
 
 V. Iden if any places Dttd touching with the Graver, as 
 fometimes it bapptos, cipecully where it is to b^' vi-iy deep 
 or black, perfc(5t them vvirh care • which done, the f late is 
 ready for the R.olling-Preft. 
 
 CHAP. XIL 
 
 T/je way ofnfing the foft Varnifl). 
 
 I. "THe plate being prepared by cleanfing it with a Char- 
 ■* coal and clean water, walh it well and dry it^ then 
 with fine whire Chalk fcraped and a fine rag, rub it well over, 
 not touching it with your lingers. 
 
 II. Lay down you plate over a Chafing dilh of fmaJl-coal, 
 yet To as the fire may have airi then take the ground or loft 
 varniH) (it being tied up in a fine rag) and rub it up and down 
 the Copper, fo as it may lufHifrtly cover it, f»;or Korbin 
 nor too thick :;' then lake a iliff Ducks feither, and fmoothit 
 as well as poilibly you can all one way, and then crols it till 
 it lie very well. 
 
 But you muji take heed that the plate be not too hot, for tf it 
 lie tiSthe oround fmcak^, the moijtnre will b: dried upland that 
 will fpoil the work,, andmake the ground break, or fly up. 
 
 III. Then grind fca^e Cerufe or Whice-iead with Gum- 
 water, To th?.t it may be of a convenient rbicknefs to fpread 
 on iheCopperj and with a large pencil, or fmall brulh, 
 ftrike the plafe crofs over, twice or thrice till it is fmootb ; and 
 then with a la: ger brufli fmade of Squirrels lailsj gently fmootb 
 rbe white, and then let it lie till it is dry. 
 
 IV. Or you may black the varnifli wiih a candle, as we 
 taught at tlvs Second Sedion of the Eighth Cbapier, and then 
 if it be cold, warm it over the fire, till the vamifh begin to 
 melt, that the fmoak may melt into the ground, fo thai you 
 rub it not off with yoar band. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 19, Of Fmiflnvgihe Work. S7 
 
 CHAP. XITI. ^ 
 
 The way ofEtcInng upoft the fcft VarniJI}. 
 
 I. TrHe way of Etching is the fame with that in the hard 
 "■- varnifli, only ycu muft be careful nor to hurt your 
 varoifli, which you may do by placing on the lides of your 
 plate two little boards, and laying crofs over tfaem another 
 thin one, fo as ibat it may not touch the plate, on which you 
 muft reft your hand wbilft you work. 
 
 M. Then place the plate oa a Dc;sk fif you fo plcafc) for by 
 that means the fuperfluous matter will fail away of it felf. 
 
 III. But if you have any defign to transfer upon the plate 
 from any Copy or Print, fcrape on the backfidc thereof fome 
 red Chalk all over j then go over that, by (crsjing (ovc\t fofc 
 Charcoal, till it mingle with the Chalk ; and wi(h a large 
 ftiff pencil rub it all over till it be fine and even and fo lay 
 down the defiga upon the plate; with a blunt Needle draw 
 over the out Itroaks : and oi you work, you need not [cratch hard 
 into the Copper, only fo as you may fee the Needle go through the 
 farni/h to the Copper. 
 
 IV. Always befurewhen you leave the work, to wrap 
 the plate up in Paper, to keep it from hurt, and corrupting in 
 the air, which may dry the varnilh : and io Winter time 
 wrap the plate up in a piece of Woollen, as well as paper, for 
 if the froft get to it, it will caufe the Varnifli to rife from the 
 Copper in the eating. 
 
 An inconveniency alfo will accrew, hy letting the Vamifh lio 
 too Ung upon the Plate before the work^ is finifoed j for three 
 or four months will confttme the moiflure andfofpoil all. 
 
 V. The marking of the defign upon the fofc varnidi, is 
 beft done with Black-lead or Chalk, if the ground is white ; 
 but with red Chalk, if the ground is black. 
 
 VI. Having Graved what you intend upon the varni(h,take 
 feme fair Water, a little warm, and caft it upon the Plate ; 
 and then with a foft clean Spunge, rub upon the White-lead 
 to moiften it all over ; and then walh the pUte to take away 
 the whiting, and dry it. 
 
 G4 VII. 
 
88 Polygraphices Lib. II. 
 
 VII. Oi Laftly, with Apa forta mixed with fiir water, 
 Wifh it all over, and by this means you may take away the 
 wbicing , which then wafh with common water and 
 dry it J and thus have you the plaie prepared for the 
 Aqua forta. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 Of vjmg the Aqua fortis, and finWing the Work. 
 
 I. pUi foft wax frcd or green) round the brims of the 
 -* plare^ (being firtt diawn into a loog flender roul or 
 firing/' and kt it be raifed above the vatnifh about half a 
 BaiUy Corns le; gjh ; fo chat placing ihe plate level, the wa- 
 ter being poured upon the plate may by this means be retained. 
 But that V ju iTiaf be lu'-e that 'he Aijiia forta fliall not run out, 
 you muft take a knif_* and heat it in the fire, and fear the wax 
 lound »buut under the plate, very clofe : and be (ure to fatten 
 the Wax as near to the edges of the plate, as you can con- 
 veniently, Tliis done. 
 
 11, Take fingle or common jitjua forrii fix ounces, com- 
 mon water two ounces ; mix them, and pour it gently upon 
 the plate, fo that it may cover it fully all over ; (o will the 
 ftiorger hatchings he full of bubbles, while the fainter will ap- 
 pear clear for a while, not making any fudden operations 
 to the riew. 
 
 "Note, to weah^en the Aqua fortis, you may alfo mix it with 
 Viie^ar, or a little of that ^qua fortis tvhich hoi been tifed for- 
 merly : for if ygur liquor be too fir mg, it tvill make the ipork^very 
 hard, &nd flmetimes make the ground to break-up. The deeper 
 the Aqaa tortis lies^ the harder it tvill eat. 
 
 III. When you perceive the water to operate a fmalltime, 
 pour i-- off inro a glazH carth-n difli, keeping itto ufe with 
 forae other , and throw fair water upon the plate, n wa(h a:; 
 wav the /Jquafcrtif, then dry the pJatf. 
 
 IV And where ynu would have thsCut to be fainf, tender 
 or fwcct, ccvprit vvi;h the prepared Oyl, and then cover the 
 plate ag^Jn uiih Aqua fort ii as before, leaving it on for 
 eight or tf D minutesor longer : then put off the Aquafortn as 
 before, walhing and drying the plate^ and covering with the 
 
 prepared 
 
chap. 14. Of Ujtng AqHii Fortk, 89 
 
 prepared Oyl other places which you would not have fo deep 
 as the reft. 
 
 V. Laftly, put on the Ai^ua fortis agaiB, for the fpace of 
 half an hour Cmore or leljj and then pour it off, wafting the 
 plate with fair water as before, 
 
 VI. As you iPou'id have your lines or ftroakjt to he deeper and 
 deeper^ fo cover the fweeter or fainter farts by degreef tvith 
 the prepared Oyl^ that the Aqua fortis may lie the longer on 
 the deep ftr oaks- Then, 
 
 Mil. Take ofFrbe border of wax, and heat the plate, fo 
 that the Oyl and varni/h may throughly tnelt ; which wipe 
 away well with a iinnen cloth; -then rub the piste over with 
 Oyl Oiive,and a piece of an old Beaver roU'd up.wbicb done, 
 touch it with the Graver where need is. 
 
 VIII. But if any rbi(»g be (at laft) forgotten; then rub the 
 plate aforefiid with cruans of bread, fo well that no filth or 
 
 ^oyl remain upon the plate. 
 
 IX. Then heat the Plate upon a Charcoal fire, and fpread 
 the foft varrifii with a feail3er upon ic^as before) fo that the 
 hatchings may be filled with varniih j black it, and then touch 
 it over again, or add what you intend. 
 
 X. Let your hatchings be made by means of the Needles, 
 according as the manner of the Work (hall require, being care- 
 ful before you put on the Aquaforta, to cover the firlt gra- 
 ving on the Plate with the prepared Oyl, (left the varniHi 
 Ihould not have covered all over :J then caufe the Acjua fortis 
 to eat into the work ; and lal^iy cleanfe the Plate as 
 before. 
 
 XL Your plate being deanfed, if you perceive that the 
 A(lua fcrtif has not eaten as deep in fome places, as it Hiould 
 have done,you muft help ibofe defedls with a Graver. 
 
 XII. To know when the Aquafortis has eat deep enough 
 after it has layen a quarter or half an hour, poisr oft' the 
 Aqua fortis from the Plate into a Glafs, wa/h it with a little 
 fair water.and with a knife fcrape offa little bit of the ground, 
 where it is hatcht, and may be leaft prejudicial to your 
 work ; ahd if you find it not deep enough, cover the bare 
 place of your Plate with your prepared Oyl, arid put the Aqt/a 
 fortis upon it again, letting it lye till you think it deep 
 enough. 
 
 XIIL Or mix it with fome new Aquafortis, if you think 
 what you have ufed to be too weak ; by many Tryals and 
 Frsidice, you will at length come to a certainty. 
 
 ' XIV. 
 
90 Poljgraphicef Lib. II. 
 
 XIV. Or you may make ihe Tryal upon a wafte piece of 
 Copper rudely hatched j pouring the /ipta fortts both upon 
 the Plate, and that at one and the fame time: after a luffici- 
 eot fealoD, with a knife take off a little piece of the ground 
 from the watte piece of Copper where it is hatched, and if it 
 be not deep enough, cover it again with your prepared Oyl, 
 and make a new Tryal, and lb proceed on, till you find the 
 Aqua fottis ba5 earen dteep enough. 
 
 XV.Obferve to wafli the Plate with a little fair water,before 
 you waim it.for o'herwife,ibe >^^«d/orrjj will ftain the Plate. 
 
 XVI. If the ground be broken up in any place, put off 
 iht Aqua fortis from the Plate, walh it with fair water, and 
 cover it with your prepared Oyl, then pour on the Aqua 
 fonts again , thus will you prelerve your Plate fium 
 injury. ^ 
 
 XVII. To mtktyom Aqua foreii \vri\k harder or fofter, 
 you muft cover tbofe places of your Plate which you would 
 have to be faint (after that the Aqua fonts has been once 
 poured off your Plate) with your prepared Oyl, which Oyl 
 you muftufeby degrees, as you would have your work 
 fainter : this in Etchirg L«ndskips yci will find nectffary, tor 
 that they muft iole and (taod at a di&.incegraiiatiTn. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 Of Llmmngy atd the Materials thereof, 
 
 I. T Imning is an Art whereby in water Colours, we ftrivs 
 *^ lorefemble Nature in every thing to the Life. 
 
 II. The Inftruments and Materials thereof are chiefly thefe 
 1. Gum. 1. Colours, 3. Liquid Gold and Silver.^. TheGrind- 
 Jlone and Muiler.i "y. Pencils. 6. Tabid to Limn ^in.j. Little 
 Glajfes, or Horefmufcle-jheHs. 
 
 III. The Gums are chiefly thefe four, Gum-Arabick' 
 Gum-Lake, Gum-Hedera, Gum-Armoniack. 
 
 IV. The principal Colours are thefe feven, ff^hite, Black,^ 
 ^ed, Green, Yellow, Blue, Brown : out of which are made mixt 
 or- compound Colours. 
 
 V. The Liquid Gold and Silver is either -natural or ar- 
 tificial. 
 
 Tfa( 
 
Chap, 1 6. Of th& Gums ^and their Ufe, 91 
 
 The natural is that which is produced of the MetaJs them-' 
 felves ; the arrilkial is that which is formed of oiher co- 
 lours. 
 
 VI. The Grind^one, MuSer, Pencils, Tables, and Shells^ or 
 little Glajfes, are only the rieccflary inttruroents and attend- 
 ants^ which belong to the pra-flice of Limning. 
 
 VIL Chufe luch Pencils as are clear and fiiarp pointed* 
 rot dividing into parts : of thefe you muft have many in 
 a readinels, a feveral Pencil at leail, for every feverai Co- 
 lour. 
 
 CHAR XVT. 
 
 Of the Gttms^ and their Z)fe. 
 
 I. "THs chief of all is Gum-Arabick, that which is white, 
 -■■ clear and brittle ; the Gum-water of it is made 
 thus. 
 
 Take Gnm-Arahick^y hruife it and tye it up in a fine clean 
 linnen cloath, and put it into a convenient quantity of pure 
 fpring-water, in a glafs or earthen vejfel ; letting the Gum re- 
 main there till it is dijfolved ; tvhicb done, if the water is not 
 fl iff enough, fut more Gum into the cloath i but if too flijf, add 
 more tvater ; of which Gum- water have two forts by ycu, 
 the oneftrong, the other weak 5 of which you may make a 
 third at plea fure. 
 
 II. But if you be where Gum-Arabick is not to be got, 
 you may inftead of that ufe the prepatatioa of Sbecps leather 
 or parchment following: 
 
 Take of thefhreds of white Shsep-Skjns (which are to be had, 
 plentifully at Glovers) or elfeof parchments, one pound ; Conduit 
 or running water two,^uart3,boil it to a thin gelly, then fir airt 
 it whilfi hot through a fine Jirainer, andfo ufe it. 
 
 III. Gum-Lake, it is made of whites of Eggs beaten and 
 ftrained a pint, Honey, Gum- Hedera, of each two Drams, 
 ftrong wort four fpoonfuls, mix tbem, and ftrain them with 
 a piece offpunge till they run like a clear Oyl, which keep 
 in a clean veflel rill it grows hard. 
 
 This Gum will dijjolve in water likf Gum-Arabick^ of which 
 Giim-'wateris made in like manner j it is a good ordinary varnifh 
 for PiSttres. IV. 
 
92 Polj'grapfjues Lib. 11. 
 
 IV. Gum-Hedcra, or Gum of Ivy ; it is gotten out of 
 Ivy ; by cutting with an Axe a great branch thereof; climbing 
 upon ao Oik-tree, and bruifing the ends of it with the head 
 ot the Axe ; at a Months end, or thereabouts, you may take 
 from it a very clear, and pure fine Gum, like Oyl. 
 
 V. It is good to put into Gold-fi:(e and other Colours, for thefe 
 three reafons : J. It abates the ill /cent of the /i::(e : i. It tviH 
 prevent bubbles in Go!dfi:(e and other Colours ; 3. Laftly^ it 
 talics attay\the fat and clamminefs of Colours :befides which it is 
 cf ufe in making Pomanders. 
 
 VI. Gum-Amoniacum, It is a Foreign Gum, and ought 
 to be bought ftrained. Grind it very fine with juice of Gar- 
 lick and a little Gum-Arabick water, To that it may not be 
 too (hick, bat that you may write with it what you will. 
 
 VII. l^^hen you ufe it., dratff tohat you will ttith it, and let it 
 dry, and when you gild upon it, cut your Gold or Silver to the 
 fajhion which you dreto with the fi;(e or gum, then breath upon 
 thefj::^e, and lay the Gold upon it gently taken up, which prefs down 
 hard with a piece of wool 9 and then let ft weS dry ; bein^ dryed. 
 with a fine linnen cloth Jiri^e off the loofe Gold J fo will what 
 was drawn be fairly gilded if it were as fine as a hair : it is called 
 Gold-Armoniackc 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 Of the Scv^n Cobnrs hi Gaiernl. 
 
 I, 'T'HE chief Whites^Tcct thefe, Spodium, Cerufe, White- 
 ■^ lead, Spamffj-whiie, Egg-ftiells burnt. 
 II. This Colour ;s called in G/"fe/i AJt'xo^ of mvx^o, video 
 t^-i fee, becaufe hivy.orn'i 'oh J'tAHf^ivMv o.^^f; whitenefs (3$ 
 Arifiotle faidj is the object of fight.in Latin Albus, from whence 
 the Alps had their name, by realon of their continual white- 
 nefs with Saow. 
 
 III. Tbe Spanijh- white is thus made. Take fine Chalk 
 three ounces^ Alum one ounce, grind them together with fair 
 water till it be like papj roul it up into balls, which dry 
 ieilnrely : then pui them into the fire till they are red hot ; 
 rake them out, and let tbcm cool : it is the be[i white of all, 
 togarni/h with, being ground with weak. Gum-water, 
 
 1Y« 
 
Chap. 17. Of Colours "in General, 92 
 
 IV. The chief Btackt are thefe, Harts-born burnt, Ivory 
 burnt, Cherry-ftones burnt, Lamp-black, Charcoal, Sea-coal, 
 Verdiier burnt, Mujpny burnt. 
 
 V. Black,^ in Latin Niger, is. fo called from the Greeks word 
 r£;cpo?, tohich fignifies dead, hecaufi putrefied and dead things are 
 generally of that colour. Lamp-black is theJmoal(, of a Link., 
 Torch, or Lamp gathered together. 
 
 VI. The chief i^e^i are ihefe. Carmine, V,ermiIion, Red- 
 lead, Indian-lake, native Cinnabar , Red-Oker , Yellow- 
 Oker burnt, Indian Red. 
 
 yil. It is called in Latin I{uher th^ rw pow j corticihta 
 vel grants mali punici ; from the Rinds or Seeds of Pome- 
 grances.as Scaliger faith. 
 
 VIII. The chief Gr^ew are thefe, Green Bice, Green Pink, 
 Verdigrife, Verditer, Sapgreen, Pink mixt with Bice. 
 
 IX. This Colour is called in Latin l^iridHs from Fires t in 
 Greek ^^<y^V i ^^ori, Grafs or Green Herb, which is of this 
 Colour, 
 
 X. The chief K//ott^j are thefe, Orpiment, Mafticct deep 
 and light. Saffron, Pink-yenow,dark and light, Oker de Luce, 
 Englilh-Oker, Roman-Oker, Gall-flone. 
 
 XI. This Colour is called in Latin Flavus, Luteus, in Greek 
 ^du'^'iy which is Homer's Epithete for Menelaus, where he calls 
 faim fcW'Vf Ms^'SA*©-. 
 
 XIL The chief fl/e«'* are Ultratiiarine, Indico, Smalf, 
 Blue Bice. 
 
 XIIL This colour is called in Latin C<erukm , in Greek 
 KvdycQ- a livccvQ-y the name of a ftone which yields Ultra- 
 marine. 
 
 XIV. The chief Bretons are Umber, Spanilh-brown, Co- 
 lens Earth, Gallftone, rufl of Iron, Mommy. It is called in 
 Latin Fufcm, quafi (pa? cnuATcfA , from darkning the Light, 
 in Greek tpaxU. 
 
 XV. This is to be noted, that of the aforenamed colours, 
 Vermillion, Verdigriefe.Orpiment and fome others are too courfe 
 and gritty to he ufed in water Colours -, unlefs they be purified 
 and prepared. 
 
 XVL AndTurnfole, Litmofe Hue, Hofe/, Brefil Logtvnod, and 
 Saffron, arc more fit for waihing Priws, than curious limning. 
 
 M. 
 
54 Fol)<^raphkcs Lib. IL 
 
 — 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 Of Colours in Particularo 
 
 « 
 I. f^Brufe, Grind it wirb glair of Eggs, and it will make 
 ^^ a very good white. It is too yellow for fome purpofes, 
 courfeand gritty. 
 
 II. PVbtte-lead, Griod it with a weak water of Gum-lake, 
 and let ir itand three or four days, after which if you mix 
 with it Rofet and Vermillion, it makes a fair Carnation. 
 
 III. To make that your White-lead (hah neither ruft nor Mat 
 (both tvhich are gr'eat fault sin the Art of Limning) before yotJ 
 grind it lay it in the Sun tttjo or three days, to exhale that grtajy 
 and fait matter that jxyfons and fiarves the colour i fcrafmg 
 atvay alfo the outfide that is foul nr dirty, which then grind with 
 fair H^ater^ or Lavender^ or F^ofemary water upon a Porpl^yre. 
 IVhen it v ground have in a readmcfs a chalky ftone^ tPith fur- 
 rows in it. into which furrows put the colour whilji it is wet, and 
 fo let it dry in the Sun, and it will be very dean and white. 
 
 IV. Being through diy, let it be wafht in this manner. Tal^e 
 cf the former cleanfed Liad a found pit it into a bafon of fpring 
 water, jlir it a while together ttll the water rs all very white, 
 then let itjiand, and a kindof greajiefcum wtll anfe, which blottf 
 off, and pour the white Water, (being /iff red afre/h, and a little 
 fettled again) into a clean Bafon, leaving the grojfer body at the 
 bottom behind (not fit for our purpofe:) let this water Ji and art 
 hour or two, till it is quite fettled. 
 
 > V. Then decant the clear water, and put to the fediment freflj 
 ttater,J}ir it as before mentioned, then let it fettle half the time 
 itdidat firfl, and pour cjf the white water into another clean 
 bafnn., leaving again ibe courfir part behind ; 1st this water Jet tie, 
 and decant away the clear water from it: the remaining Lead 
 dry, and then put it up into papers for your ufe. Thus reiined 
 five or fix limes, it will be moll pure, and bed for ufe. 
 
 Vr. When you have occafion for it, Iprcad a lirtle of ft 
 about a fliell with your finger, and temper it with Gum-water. 
 Ir be fame manner muft Certije be waflied. Obferve alfo in 
 grinding of White, that you grind it not too much, left it prove 
 greafy or Oyly, or of a dirty colour. 
 
 VII. 
 
 % 
 
Chap, 1 8. Of Colours mVarticluar, 95 
 
 VII. Spanifh-white, It is the beft white of alI,to garnifli wiib, 
 ground with Gufn-wacer. 
 
 VIII. Lamp-blacky ground with Gum-water, ic makes a 
 good black. 
 
 IX. Vermilion^ Grind it with the glair of an Egg, and in 
 the grinding put a little clarified honey, to make its colour 
 brigbiand perfedt. Native Cinnabar is better and a brisker 
 colour. 
 
 X. Cinnabar-lake y it makes a deep and beautiful red, otr 
 rather purple, atmolt like unto a Red-rofe. Grind it with- 
 Gum-lake and Turnfole-waier : if you will have it light, add 
 a little Cerufe, zn^ it will make it a bright Crimfon j if to 
 Diaper, add only Turnfolc water. 
 
 XL ^ed lead, Grind it with feme Saffron, and ftiff Gum- 
 lake ; for the Saffron makes it orient, and of a Marigold 
 colour. 
 
 XII. Tumfole, Lay it in a Sawcer of Vinegar,and fet it over 
 a Cbafing-difh of coals ; let it boil,then take it ofi*, and wring 
 it into a Ihell, adding a little Gum-Arabick, let it ftand till 
 it is diffolved : It is good to ihadow Carnation, and all 
 Yellows. 
 
 Xnl. Hsfet, Grind it with Brazil-water, and it will make a 
 deep purple ; put Cerufe to it, and it will be lighter j grind 
 it with-Litmofe, and it will make a fair Violet. 
 
 XIV. Spanijh brown, Grind it with Brazil-water: mingle 
 it with Cerufe, and it makes a horfe-fiefh Colour. It w not fa 
 brisk and lively as Indian ^d. 
 
 XV. Bo/e-Armoniack., It is a faiac colour j its chief ufe Is, 
 id making fize foe burnifh'd gold. 
 
 XVI. Green-bice. Order it as you do Blue bice ; when it is 
 moift, and not through dry, you may Diaper upon it with the 
 water of deep green. 
 
 XVII. Fer^i^rz/e, Grind it with juyce of Rue, and a little 
 weak Gumwacer, and you will have a moft pure green : if 
 you will Diaper with it, grind it with Lye of Rue (or elfe the 
 decodion thereof) and there will be a hoary green. 
 
 XVIII. Diaper upon Verdigrife green with Sap-green : alfb 
 Verdigrife ground with white Tartar.and then tempered witb 
 gum-water, gives a moft perfect green. 
 
 XIX. It ii extrcamly courfe unlefs it be purified as I have taught 
 in my Doroo, lib. 3. cap. 4. Sed. 13. § a. Being fo prepared 
 one ounce (till be ttortb Ten of the Courfe, or that »bich is bought 
 in thejhops. It is done withfpirit of Vtnegar, 
 
 XX, 
 
96 Polygra^h'ices Lib. IT, 
 
 XX. Ver^iter, grind it with a weak Gum-Arabick water: 
 it is tbe fainteft green that is, but is good to lay upon black, 
 in any kind ot Drapery. 
 
 XXI. Sap green ; lay it in (harp Vinegar all night ; pur in- 
 to It a little Alom to raife its colour, and you will have a 
 good green to Diaper upon other greens. It is a fhining but a 
 fading colour, ufe green Pink inftead of it i for it has neither of 
 
 thitie faults. 
 
 XXII. Orpment, Arfenicum or Aur i pigment um grind h with 
 a itiff water of Gum lake, becauieitis tbe beft colour of it 
 felf, it will lie upon no green, for all greens, White and Red- 
 lead, and Cerufe ftain it ; Wherefore you muft deepen your 
 colours fo that the Orpimept may be higbeft, and fo it may a- 
 gree with all Colours. It is of a Venomous property^ and fame of 
 it is courfe. 
 
 XXIII. Majiicoty Grind it with afmall quantity of Saffroa 
 in gum-water, and never make it lighter than it is : it will en- 
 dure to lie upon all colours and metals. 
 
 XXIV. Sfl^row, Steep it in glair : it may be ground with 
 Vermilion. 
 
 XXV. Pink: yeBow, If yoa would have it fad coloured,grind 
 it wiTh Saffron ; if light,with Cerfue : mix it with weak gum- 
 water, ard (buie it. 
 
 ■ XXVI Oker de Luce, grind it with pure Brazil water: 
 it makes a paifirg bair colour i and is a natural Ihadow for 
 gold. B^man Oker ts the more glowing of all tbe Okcrs. 
 
 XXVII. Vmber, It is a more fad brown colour. Grind it 
 with gum-water, or gum-lake ; and tighten it (if you pleafe) 
 with a little Cerqfe and l" blade of Satfron 3 to clcanfe it , 
 burn it in a Oucib^e, then grind it, and ic will be good, and 
 when you temper it in your (hell.ufe a dropor two of Onion- 
 water, and it will preferve it from crackling. 
 
 XXVIII. VUramarine, If you would haveir deep, grind 
 it wi:h Litmofe-wtter ; but if light, with fine Cerufe and a 
 weak G'jm-Arabick water. 
 
 XXIX. In s^rtndin^ ZJltramarine and other colours, let not 
 your motion be roofwifr, but grind it gently and flow, be-* 
 caufe the fwiftnefs of tbe motion, caufetb the Itones to hear, 
 which will caufc your colour to l^arve or loofc fomewhat of 
 its Lultre. el'peciallj^ if >i be a colour of ho great body, ti 
 Pink, Tndico, (^c. 
 
 XXX. Indico, ,Gr'iad it with water of Gum-ArabIck, as 
 Ujiramarine.*- 
 
 XXXf, 
 
Chap. 18. • Of Colours in Farticnlai\ ^y 
 
 XXXI. B'ue-Bice, Grind h wkh clean vvater, as fmzU as 
 you can, then put it into a fiiell, and vvarti it rhus : put as 
 much water to it as will fiii ap the vtiid or (hc!i, aod iiir it 
 well, let it ftand an hour, and thefilcfa arjd dirty water caft 
 away j then put in more clean water, do thus four or iive 
 times. , .• 
 
 XXXII. At laft put in Gutn-Arabick water fbmewbat 
 weak, ibai the Bice may fall to the bor-oin ; pcur ttfi the 
 gum-wacer, and pot lacte loit, wafiiit agiln, dry it, ar;dm;s 
 it wirh weak guai- water fif you would have it rjle ot the 
 fame colourj^ut with a itiff water of (jupaHak^:, if yoii 
 would have a mo(t pirfedl: blue J if a light b.'u*, grind it 
 with a litile Cerufe i but if a aioft deep blu?, add water of 
 Liimole. - — 
 
 XXXIII. SmaU, Grind ir with a little I;:ic Fvofet, andiE 
 will make a deep Violk.'c : and by puaiog in % qaantity of 
 Cerufe, it will make a light Violet. 
 
 XXXIV. Litrnofe blue^ Griod'it with Cerufe : with too 
 much Litmofe it makes a deep Line 5 wicb too much Ce- 
 rufe, a light blewr-giind it with the weak water of Gum- 
 Arabic k. 
 
 XXXV. Take fi.'is Litmofe^ cnt it in pieces Jay it in weak, tva- 
 ter of Gum- lal'^ for twenty four hoursj aniyou fhall have a wa- 
 ter of a moil ferfeSt A:{urei with tt'hich crater you may Diaper 
 and Damasks upon all otter hluei, to tjiake them fJcew tvore fair 
 and beautiful. 
 
 XXXyi: Orcha!, Grind it with unHaVd Lime and Urine^ 
 it makes a pure Viokt : by pauirg to more or lels Lime, yea 
 may make the Violet light or deep as you plcafe. 
 
 XXXK//. Munsmy byrnt, makes a good black: but other- 
 wife it is ill conditioned, bard,and will not flow fiom the pen- 
 cil, you cbay Hum ir in a Crucible well lared. 
 
 XXXVni EngHfh Oker, It is a yellow colour, and lies 
 even in the(ljell,o! lUeif : it is of great a fe being well ground. . 
 
 XXXlX Ptnk mixed with Bice, It is a good Green, the 
 faireft Pmkis beft; well ground and tempered with blue Bice, 
 allowing one quantity of Pink, to three of blue Bice. To deep- 
 en this colour in Landskip or Drapery, mix with it a little 
 Indico finely ground. , 
 
 XL. Indian Lake. It makes a delicate Purple, grind it with 
 a little Gum-water, and when it is ground fine, befireyois 
 pat it into the Ihell, mix a lirtle |Bouder of white Sugar-candy 
 wilt it, which will preferve it from crackling ; thes; may 
 
 H yoo 
 
98 Pvl)'g)\ihkcs Lib. 11. 
 
 you rpread ii thinly with your linger about the flielf. 
 
 XLI. Indian I^d. It makes a dark Red, becaufe this colour 
 is very courfe, you may ufe Z^mber^zrA « little Lake tempered, 
 which it as good. 
 
 XLI I. Ivvry black Grind it with a little white Sugar-can- 
 dy, It will prcferve it f'loin crackling out of your Ihell: it 
 makes a black. 
 
 XLIU. Chenyfione. It is burnt in s. Crucible fas is the fcr- 
 mer^ and fo ground. It is good for Drapery, and for a black 
 Saiiin. Tetnper it with a little white^lndtan-Lake^ and Indico. 
 Heighten it with a lighter mixture, deepen it with Jvory 
 black ; this was HilUards way. 
 
 XLlF. Caput mortuitm of Vitriol, Firft grind it well upon a 
 Porphyry; then carefully vvifli it, as we have taught you to 
 wafli White-lead in C/j<»/'. 18. Set^. 1. aforegoing i after grind 
 it with a weak Gum-lake- water : it makes a deep red.or al- 
 motta purple color. 
 
 XLV. Ohfervations upon fome of the preceding Colors, and 
 fir(t of £{EDS. 
 
 I. Vermillion. It is a mo(k perfetft Scarlet color; it is fo 
 fine that it needs no grinding, but may be tempered with 
 your Finger with Glair or Gum-water and fo ufed mixt 
 with a little yellow Benies, it makes it the lighter and bftgh- 
 ter Color, and is then principally u!«;d for Garments. 
 
 XLVJ. 2. i^-ii Le4^, It is the neareft toan Orange Color j 
 and mixt with yellow Berries, it makes a perfei5l Orange. It 
 is ufed for Buildings and high ways in Landskips, being mixt 
 with a little White. It is the only bright Color to ftiadow 
 vellow Ga«-ments with, to make rhem Ihcw li!:e changeable 
 Taff-tv, rjnd to color -any light Ground in a Piclurc.and feve- 
 ral other. ufe?, as you feeoccafion. 
 
 XLVII. 3. Cinr.ahar Lake. You may Hiadow. with it yel- 
 low Girments in tlie darkeft places,, as alio Vermillion mixt 
 with white only, it makes a Sky Color. With white and red 
 Lead, a F!'.'fh CJor i and is an excellent Color ofitfelfto 
 colour Garments with. Thts Color is dear, and therefore 
 inftond thereof, for ordinary ules, you may ule ^d Ink- thick- 
 red upon theFite.which wiillervc very well ; and better 
 than L.'^!''\ unlels it b." vrry good. 
 
 XLVIII. ^ I{edJ>:k It is made by boy ling Bra^^il in Pou- 
 der in Vinegar mixt wiih Beeradding a little Alum to heighten 
 the Color : boyi it tiil ir rafts ftrong on the To-gue, then 
 (train it out, add keep it clofe (topt for ufe. If you mix it 
 
 with 
 
chap. 1 8. Of Colours in Particular, j^- og 
 
 with a Flefh Color, or make a Sky Color thereof, you muil 
 not thicken ir. 
 
 XLXIX. OhfervAtions on B^WN Colors. 
 
 I . Spanijh Brown. It is a djrty Brown Color, but of gre^t 
 qfe i as alio to (hadow Vertniliion,or iay upon a dark Ground 
 behind a Pidure. You may ftiadow yellow Berries with it in 
 the darkeft places, when you want Lake or thick I^d Inl{. 
 Color not Garments therewith, unlefs it be old Men's Gowns. 
 
 L. 2. Vmber. It is a Hair Color, and the beft and bright" 
 eft when it is calcined red hot. But to color any Hare, Horfe, 
 Dog,^c. with it, you muft not burn it j but for other ufes ic 
 is beft calcined or burnt, as to color Pofts, bodies of Trees, 
 Timber-work, or any dark Ground in a Pidure. 
 
 LI. Ufe it not in Garments, anlels in old Men's Gowns, or 
 Caps ftanding together, for that they muft not be all of a 
 Color. But fordiftindlion and variety fake, you may ufe h 
 un burnt in many cafes. 
 
 LII. Obfervations en GI{EEN Colors. 
 
 1. Verdigrife. h is a good Green, but fubjedt to decay t 
 being dry upon Paper, it will be of a higher Color than when 
 it was firft laid on ; therefore to preferve it from that fault, 
 diflblve Sap-Green in if, and it will keep its Color. You may 
 make it fine by extracting its TioClure with Spirit of Vinegar, 
 and then evaporating to drynefs j an ouBce of that will bt 
 worth ten ounces of the other. 
 
 LIU. X, Verditer. It is a light Green, feldom ufed in any 
 thing but coloring Land-skips, which feemafar oSi and it 
 is good for fuch a purpole, becaufe it is inclining to blew., 
 
 LIV. 3. SapGresn. It is a dark dirty GreenvHever ufed but 
 to fliadow other Greens in the darkeft places i or tolayupoa 
 fome dark ground behind a Pidure, which ought to 
 be of a dark Green : bat you may do without this Color, 
 for Indico mixt with yellow Berries make juft fuch another 
 Golor. gi 
 
 LV. 4. Copper Green, h is an excellent tranfparent Colof^ 
 of a fhiningnacHre, if ihickned in the Sun, or over a gentle Fire. 
 It is raoft uled of any Green in wafhiog of Prints or Map$, e- 
 fpecially in coloring of Trees, Ground, Grafs, ^c. for it is a 
 mofl perfeEi Grafs green. 
 
 LVL Obfervations on rELLOfV Colors. 
 I . Saffron, It is a deep Yellow if it ftands long, and is good 
 principally to (h«dow yellow Berries with inftead yf Red Leadi 
 
 H 2; b« 
 
 
100 Polj'graphkes Lib. II. 
 
 buc is fomewbat a bi igbter iliadow : Red Lead and yellow 
 Berries, make juft the like Color. 
 
 LVII. 2. Mafiicote. It is a liglit Yellow, juft like yellow 
 Btriies mixt with White : it is tiled ro color a lighr Ground 
 in aPidurejand tbrn to Jl-iadow it with rhe Water, r;;^. the 
 ihinnclt part of the Color of burnt Umber or red Lead. 
 
 LVUI. 3. TeUc0 Berries It is mnft ufcd in walhing of Map! , 
 Pi(5tures, (3c. of all other Colors it is bright and tranfparent, 
 fit for all ufes, and fufncient without the ufe of any other 
 Yellow. 
 
 LIX. Obfirvati^ns on BLEl>F Colors. 
 
 I. BleiP Bice, h is the moft excellent Blew next to Ultra- 
 marine, andinay(e?ve inltead thereof, it is too good a Co- 
 lor to ufv" upon all ocofions: and for more ordinary ufes.you 
 may ufe Smalt in Itead of cither of them, but it will not "work 
 (o well as Bice, when you intend to beflow fome coft and p^ins 
 upon a piece, you may ufe Bice ; othcrwi.'^e ycu need u(e no 
 other Blew in your Work than BlewVerditer ; with which in 
 ordinary Works, you n: ay make a pretty good fhifr, though 
 all the other B/fWi be wanting. 
 
 X.A'. 2. Jndico. It is a dark BIew,ard principally ufed tofha- 
 daw with upon other Blews. Mixi wiili yellow Berries, it 
 makes a dark Grcrn, to ftiadow other Greem* with in the dark- 
 eft places. 
 
 LXI. 3. BkwVerditer. It is a very bright plea fant Blew, 
 and the eaGeft ro work with in Water: it is fomewhat incli- 
 ning fo a GteeR> and the Riewj which isthe molt of all ufed 
 mixed with yellow Berries it makes a good Green. 
 
 LXU. Ohfervntinrs on WHITE Colors. 
 
 1. Cerufe. It isthe beft White, next toSpantfli White, and 
 better than whirc Lead, if it be good and finely ground, as you 
 naay have it ready prepared at the Colour Shops i being only 
 tvbite Lead cleaned and made tnore pure. 
 
 LXni. 2. H^hi:e Lend. It will ferv^n place of the for- 
 mer, if waftt as before is directed ; either of them will ferve 
 the fao'e occafion, and being mixed with another Color 
 they trake itlighrei, the which you may vary in proportion 
 as you ice occafion, 
 
 LXIV. Ohfervarions onBLACl^Colcrs. 
 
 . I. . Lamf Black or FH^fiteYs B/aci(.Tt is the moft ufedbecaufe 
 k is the eafieil to be bad, dnd is j?cod in W-thing. But you 
 muft never put Black aroongft other Colors, to make them 
 dark, for io they will beccme dirty i neither (h&dow any Co- 
 lor 
 
Chap. 19. Of fftlx'i a g Colours. loi 
 
 lor with Black, unlefs it be 5/>4»;7^ Bro/rw, when you would 
 color an old Mans Govyn, which ought to be done of a fad 
 Color J all other Colors ih'.dowed with Black, look dirtilyj 
 not bright, fair or beamiful. 
 
 LXV. 2. Ivory Black; It is the deepeft Black that is; and is 
 thus made. Take piecesof /voiy put it intoa Furdacetill it.be 
 throughly burned, then take it out, and let it cool i pare off 
 the outfide, and take the blackeft in the middle. 
 
 LXVI. A glorious Color of Eaft- India Cakes. 
 
 In uling ot diefe C-kts, you may take one, or a part of one 
 of them, and put it into a Horfe-iVlurcle-Sheli, which is very 
 dean,addiog a little fair Wiaier i juft enough to wet it all o- 
 ver, letting ic lie lo abouc a quarter of ao hour: then fqneez it 
 hard againlt the Shell, or wring it out berwea\ your Fingers*, 
 and there will come forth an admirable trdnfparent Color, 
 which will ferve initead of Lal^e, if your I^d Cake be 
 good. 
 
 LWlI. Thefe Cakes are commonly counterfeit and good 
 for little, but you may know them by cutting a little way in- 
 to them : if they be good they are as red within as they 
 are without i if naught, they look pale and whitifh within. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Qfr/tixt kud c&m^ound Colors, 
 
 I. ^A^^U:, It is a wonderful beautiful color, compofed of 
 ^^ purple and white : ic is made thus. Take Cinnabar-' 
 
 lak? two ounces ; White-lead one ounce, grind them together. See 
 
 the twenty fourth Sedlion following. 
 
 If. Aglafsgray, mingle Cerufe with a little Azure. 
 
 III. ji haycoljr, toiogle V^frmillion with a little Spanilh 
 brown and black. , , . 
 
 IV. A deep purple^ It js.vofkdt of Indico, Spanifli-brown 
 and white. 
 
 It is called in Latin Var^tem, in Greek, 7n;pyt;j:-.(3-/ro»> 
 
 7r^?$u^.^ a kind of jloeU-fiftj that yields a liquor of that color. 
 
 V. An Ajk-color, or Gray, It is made by mixing White and 
 Lamp-black i or v/hite with Sinapex j Indfcoand black make 
 an A(h-coIor. 
 
 H3 h 
 
102 Polygrapbh'es Lib. II. 
 
 It is called in Latin C^Gus, and color Cinereus j in Greeks 
 
 TKctv/Ji and n^t^iiJui. 
 
 VI. Light Green, It is made of Pink and Smalt j wiib white 
 to make it lighter if need require. 
 
 VII. Saffron Color, It is made of Saffron aloDe by infij- 
 fion. 
 
 VIII. Flame Color, Jt is mpde of Vermilion and Orpimcnr, 
 mixed deep or light atpleafure: or thus. Take Red-lead 
 and mix it with Mafticot, which heighten with white. 
 
 IX. ji Violet color, Indico, V^hiic and Cinnabcr-lake. 
 make a good Violet. So alfo Cerufe and Litmofe, of each e- 
 qual pans. 
 
 X. Lead color. It is made of White mixed with Indico. 
 
 XI. Scarlet color. It is made of Red-lead, Lake, Vermili- 
 on : yet Vermilion in this cafe is not very ufeful. 
 
 XII. To tnak^ Vermilion. 
 
 Take Brimltone in pouder four ounces,mix it with Quick- 
 filver a pound, put it into a Crucible well luted, and upon a 
 (Charcoal-fire beat it till it is red hot ; then take it off and let 
 it cool. You have a berter way to do this in my Pharma- 
 copeia Londinenjls lib. 3. cap. 7. Se^. 54. to which I refer 
 
 you. 
 
 XIII. To make a bright Crimfon. 
 
 Mix tindure of Brazil with a little Cerufe ground with 
 fair water. 
 
 XIV. To make a fad Crimfon. 
 
 Mix theaforefaid light Crimfon with a little Indico ground 
 with fair water. 
 
 XV. To make afure Lake. 
 
 Take Urine twenty pound, boil it in a Kettle and fcum 
 it with an Iron fcutomer till it comes to fixteen pound ; to 
 which add Gum-Lake one pound, Alom fiv2 ounces ; boil all 
 till it is well colored, which you may try by dipping therein 
 a piece of lionen cloth ; then add Iweet Alom in pouder a 
 fufficient quantity, ftrain it and let it ftand : ftrain it again 
 through a dry cloth till the liquor be clear : that which re- 
 mains in the cloth or bag is the pure Lake. 
 
 XVI. To make a Crimfon-Lake. 
 
 Its ufually made of the floks (horn off from Crimfoncloth 
 by a Lye made of Salt-peter, which extrads the colour ; 
 which precipitate, edulcorate, and dry in the Sun or a Stove. 
 
 XVII. A fear green. 
 
 ^ Take 
 
Chap* 19. Of mixing Colom-s, 103 
 
 Take white Tartar apd Viidigrifej temper tfaem.wiih ftrong 
 White-wine Vinegar, in which a little Gum-Arabick haih 
 been difTolved. 
 
 XVIII. A f me Violet. * 
 
 Take a iittle Indico and tiodure of Brazil, grind tbetn 
 with a little Ceiuie. 
 
 XIX. A pure Purple Color. 
 
 Take fine brimttone an ounce and an half, Quick-filver, 
 Sal-Armoniack, Jupiter, of each one ounce j beat the Brim- 
 fione and Sale into pouder, and make an Ama^gama with 
 the Qaick-fiiyer andTin,mix all together, v. hi ch put into a 
 great glafs goard j make under it an ordiriury fire, and keep 
 it in a conftant heat for the fpace of fix hours. ^ • 
 
 XX. To makfi a TeBotff color. , ' 
 Take the Yellow chives in white Lillics,ftceptbefiT in gum- 
 water, and it wiU make a perfed: Yelio-4/ j'the fame froip $'*(-_ 
 fron and Tartar tempered with gum-water. 
 
 XXI. To mahaJ^dCohr. 
 
 Take the roots of the lefTer BurglofSj vi-{. Alkmet-, and heki 
 them, and Itrain out the j«yce, and mixt it with Aloni- 
 water. 
 
 XXII. To make excellent good Greens. 
 
 The Liver of a Lamprey makes an excellent and durable 
 graf? green: and yellow laid upon blue will change 'into green j 
 lo likewife the jayce of a blue Flower de Luce, mixed with 
 gum-water, win be a perfeiit and durable green or blue, ac- 
 cording as it is ufed. 
 
 XXIII. To make a Purple color. 
 
 Take the juyce of Bilberrie?, and mix it with Alom and 
 Galls, and fo paint with it. 
 
 XXIV. Tomakeaggod Murrv. 
 
 Temper Rofet with a little Rofe water, in which a little 
 gum hath been diiro!ved,and it will be good,bui not exceed- 
 ing that at the lirft Sedion of this Chapter. 
 
 XXV. To ma^e A:(ureor Blew, 
 
 Mix the Azure with glew-waier, and not with gum- 
 water. • t 
 
 XXVI. To make a TeBottf Green or Purple. 
 
 Buck-thorn berries gathered green and fteeped in Alom- 
 water yield a good yellow : but being through ripe and black 
 they yield a good green i and laftly , ^ being gather- 
 ed when they are ready to drop off, which is abowi rhe mid- 
 
 H 4 ^le 
 
iC4 Volygra'phicss Lib. II. 
 
 die or end of tJvemher, their juice mi xt with Alom-wtter 
 yields a ^od Purple coKiiv, 
 
 XXVII. To JHakc a Purple color. ^ 
 
 Take Log-wood, boyi it in Vinegar and Beer, in a gla- 
 red earcbcn VtfTel, adding ihi^rcto a little Alum, till you 
 tafte ii ro be Itrong oa your Tongue : being fufHcienily 
 boileij, fiiain out ihe L'q'jor ibroagh a Cicrtb, and keep kin 
 a Glats dofe ftcMpt for ule, 
 ^ XXl'Jiil Avother P;>rph Color. 
 
 MiK B<eitf Sice and Lni;e together ; or if y.-u want Brc, 
 take Bletp Ver titter (bui tb'at is not alrogetfaer lo good : ) mix 
 them will together and it i« done. If you want Lake, yoM may 
 ini^fid thereof \ik tbic!{ red I»^, which will do as well as 
 Lakf in l^'itjhing. 
 
 XXIX.To makf a Flefh Color. 
 • Mix • vvirh If bite a little Lake ard Red Lead ; a very 
 fmall qu.-\ntity bf each ; you may make it as light or as red 
 as yoU pleafe, by putting more or Icis White in it. 7f you 
 wodld iave ;i fwa. thy Co'npfcxion, ro diftinguifh a Man's 
 Flelh flom a Womans, put a little yellom 04;(er among your 
 Fielh Color ; and for your Hiadnvv put a little more Lake.znd 
 a fmall quantity oVi'urm'Urftbsr. 
 XXX To wake Chad Colm-s. 
 
 You m^y fometimes take Llefp Verdtier ; or Woite (hadow- 
 ed with Wietp Verdua : fbtnetimes lighf Muflicdte (hadowed 
 Vj'i.th bhtr Verditer :, cr L<«.t(? and White or red I»k,iud Tf^ite 
 rnario^ved wi:h bletr Vcrdtter, as aforclaid. 
 XXXI. To tnd'C Skf Color. 
 
 Mix iVhite wich light M:j/?/Vore or yellO'.v Berries for ?he 
 ioweit and ligbtell places: red Bfk^nm thichned and White, 
 for the next degree : Itlap V^ic^ znA fVlnte for a higher de-- 
 gree : and /»/?//»fizc? alone for the h'ghcU of all. In-tcad of 
 J3/c<?ynu,n3ay u!e Verditer; all which mu'ibe laid on, and fo 
 wroughtone into another, tfaac there bt; no ftiarpnefs or kr,- 
 fible beginning, in the edge of your "Cdiors, but that they bs 
 as it were one drowned in another. 
 
 XXXJL To make Colors of all ktnds cf Metals. 
 Take a piece of Cryftal, beatit'byit felf inl an Iron or 
 Brafs Mortar, and grind it dry, on a Marble or Porphyry 
 "Stone, till rhe PouJerbevery line; then grind it again on 
 the iaiTi.; Stone with good Glair of Eggs, and lay it on the 
 Work with a Pen or Pencil i being well dryed rub it over 
 
 with 
 
Chap. 10. Of Colours for Drapery. 105 
 
 wtth Leaf Gold, or any oiher Me.al, and it will be of the fame 
 Color that ibe Metal is of. 
 
 XXXIII.. If Quick-filvar two ounces be amalgamaied wi;h 
 Tin one ounce, then mekedj and after ground on a Painters 
 ftone very fmfkll, it will be apouderofa Silver Color. 
 
 C H A P. XX. 
 
 Of Colors for Drapery. 
 
 I. TlOr Tellow Garment!. Take Mafticot deepned wiih 
 
 *■ Brown-Oker and Red-Lead, 
 
 jr. For Scarlet. Take Vf rnailion deepened with Cinnabcr- 
 lake, and hcigbtened with toucher, of Mafticot. 
 
 JJI. ForCrimfon. Lay on Lake very thin, and deepen witb 
 the fame. 
 
 IV. For Purple. Grind Lake and Smalt together: or takt: 
 Blue-bice, gnd mix it with Red and White-Lead. 
 
 V. For an Orient Violet. Grind Litmofe, Blew-Smsit, and 
 Cerufe, but io mixture let the Blew have the upper band. 
 
 VI. For Blew. Take Azare deepned with Indy-BIew or 
 Lake heightened with white, 
 
 VII. Fcr Mack Velvet. Lay the garment firft over with 
 Ivory black, then heighten it with Cfaerryftone blacky and e. 
 Jiule white. 
 
 VIII. For blacky Sjttin. Take Cherry-ftone black ; rhe-n 
 whice deepned with Cherry-ftone black 3 and then laftlyjlvo- 
 ry black. 
 
 IX. For a pure Green. Take Verdlgrife, bruife it, and 
 ftcep it in Mufcadtne for twelve hours, then drain it into a 
 (hell, to which add a little Sap-green: ( but put no guio 
 therero.) 
 
 X. ?or 4 Carnation. Grind Cerufe, well walhed, with 
 F.ed-!ead ; or Cerufe and Vermilion. 
 
 XI. For Cloth of Golii; Take brown Oker,and liquid Gold 
 water, and heighten upon the fame with foiali Itroaks of 
 Gold. 
 
 Xfl. For white Sattin. Take firft fine Cerufe, which deepen 
 with Cherry-ftone-black, then heighten again with Cerufe, 
 and fine touches where the light falleth. 
 
 XllL 
 
io6 Poljrgrapfjhcs Lib. II. 
 
 XIII. For a I{tijfet Sattin. Take Indy-blew and Lake, 
 firfttbii.and then deepned w/ub Indy again. 
 
 XIV. For a hair Colour. It is wiaHe ouc of Mafticot, Um- 
 ber, Yellow Oker.Cerufe, Oker de luce, and Sea-coal. 
 
 XV. For a Popenjay Green. Take a perfe(5l Green mirgled 
 with Mafticot. 
 
 XVI. For changeable Sillf^. Take water of Mafticot and 
 Red-lead : which deepen wi-h Sap-green. 
 
 XVIL For a light Blew. Take Blew bice, heightened with 
 C?tufe or Spodium, 
 
 XVill. Fortojhaddow t{iiffet. Take Cherry ftone- black and 
 white J lay a light Ruffer, t^en (hadow it with white. 
 
 XIX. For a Skje Colour. Take Blew-bice and Venice Cc- 
 rufe: but if you would have it dark, take fome blew and 
 white. 
 
 AX, For a Straw Colonf. Take Mafticot, then white heigh- 
 tened with Mafticot, and deepned with Pink. Or thu*, Take 
 Red-lead deepned with Lake. 
 
 XXT. For TeSotttfh.Thin Pink deepned with Pink and Green : 
 Orpiment burned makes a Marigold colour. 
 
 XXII. For a Peach Colour. Take Brazil water, Log-wood- 
 water and Cernle. 
 
 XXIII. For a light Purple. Mingle Cerufe with Logwood 
 water : or take Tnrn(ole mingled with a little Lake, Smalt 
 and Bice. 
 
 XXIV. For a TTaJmit €olour. Take Red-lead thinly laid.and 
 (hadowed with Spanifti brown. 
 
 XXV. For a Fire Colour. Take Mafticot, and deepen it 
 with Mafticot for the flame. 
 
 XXVI.. For a Tree. Take Umber and white, wrought 
 with'Umber, deepned with black. 
 
 XXVII. For the Leaves. Take Sap-green and green Bice, 
 heighten it with Verditer and white. 
 
 XXVIIL For iVater. Take Blew and Wfaiie.deepned with 
 blew, and heightned with white. 
 
 XXIX. For "Banks. Take thin Umber, deepned wittf 
 Umber and black, 
 
 XXX. For Feathers. Take Lake frizled with Red-lead. 
 See Chap. ^6. following. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 21. Of Liquid Gold aful Silver. 107 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of Liquid Gold and Silver, 
 
 I. T Iquid Gold and Silver. 
 
 *-* Take five or (ix \txyp of Gold or Silver, which grind 
 (with a ftiff Gum-lake wariifti iod a good quaniiiy of Saltj as 
 iinall as you can ; then pat it into a-vial or glazed veflel j add 
 (b much fair water as may diflolve the (tifFgum-watcr j then 
 let it ftand four hours, that the Gold may fettle: decani the 
 water, and put in more, till ilie Gold is cleao waflied : to the 
 Gold put mere fair water, a little Sal-Armcniack and com- 
 mon Salt, digefting it dole for four days : then put all inro 
 a pieceofthm Glovers leather (whofe grain is peeled offj 
 and bang it up, fo will the Sal- Armoniack fret away, and the^ 
 Gold remain behind, which keep. 
 
 II. Or thus. Grind fine leaf Gold with (irong or thick gum- 
 water very fine i and as yon grind add more thick gum-water 
 being very fine, wajh it in a great fhell^ as you do Bice, then tem- 
 per it tvith a Itttle quantity of Mercury fuhl;mate, and a lit- 
 tle dijfolved gum to bind it in the /hell i jhake it-, and fpread 
 the Gold about the fides thereof ^that it may be all of one colour 
 
 and finenefs, which vfe tvith fair ftater, as you do other co" 
 lours. 
 
 III. The fame obferve in licjnid Silver ; with this obfrvaticn. 
 That if your Silver , by length of time, or humidity of the, air 
 become rufiy ; then cover the place asithjuyce of Garlic^ before 
 you lay on the Silver, itrhich will pre/erve it. 
 
 IV. fVhenyou ttfe it. temper it with glair of E^gs, andfo ufe 
 it with fen or pencil. Glair of Eggs is thus made. Take the 
 tphites and beat them with afpoon, tiS that rife all in a foam ; 
 then let them ftand all night, and by morning they will be turned 
 into clear water ^ which is good glair. 
 
 V. Argentum Mujjcum. 
 
 Take one ounce of Tin, melt it, abd put thereto df Tartar 
 and Quickfilver ofeachoneounce^ftir them well together un- 
 til they be cold, then beat it in a Mortar^ and grind it on a 
 ftonejmix i^ith gum water, write iherewith.and afterwards 
 fjolifli it.Sce my Ars Chynirgica. lib, t,Cap.7$.feEi, i.pag.^iS. 
 
 where 
 
lo8 Polygra^h'ices Lib. If. 
 
 where you have an other way of making it. 
 
 VI. Burnifjed Gold or Stiver. 
 
 Take Gum-lake and diirolve it into a ftiff water ; then 
 grind a blade or two of Saffron rherewitb, and you fhall have 
 a L\T Gold,: when you have fee ir, being thioughly dry, 
 burnirti it with a dogs tooth. Or thus^ having writ with your 
 pen or pencil what you pleale, cut the leaf Gold or Silver into 
 pieces, according to the draught.whicb take up with a fe^tbcr, 
 and lay it upon the drawing, which prefs down with a piece 
 of wool jar.d being dry, burnirt* it. 
 
 VII. Gold Armonitick. 
 
 This is nothing but that which we have taught at the 
 fifth Secflion of the fixteenth Chapter of this Book. 
 
 Vill. Si\i for burrti/hing Geld. 
 
 Take fine Bole-Armoniack three drams, fine Chalk one 
 drarr.Jgrind them as fmall as you can together with fair water, 
 three or four times, letting it dry after every time: then take 
 glair,and ftrain it as (hort as vvater,witb which grind the Bjle 
 and Chalk, adding 2. little Gum-Hedera, and a few blades of 
 Saf^Von : grind all as fmall as poffible, and put them into an 
 Ox Lorn (1 judge a glafs vefTel betterj and fet it to rot in 
 horfe-dung for fix weeks; then take ti up, and let it have 
 air, and keep it for ufe. 
 
 IX. Its ufe u for gilding p. ire hment s ^ book^- covers, and lea- 
 ther, thus lay thisfi:{e firfl upon the parchments, then with a fea- 
 ther lay the Gold or Silver upon it, tirhicb wlxn dry , burmjh it. 
 
 X. To Diitper on Gold or SHvor. . 
 
 You muft Diaper on Gold with Lake and Yellow Qksr , 
 but upon Silver with Cerufe. 
 
 XI. Auriim Mufictim. 
 
 Take fine Cryftal, Orpiment, of each one ounce, beat each 
 feverally into a fine pouder, then grind tbetn together well 
 with glair. 
 
 Hu may tvrjte tttith it, with fen or pencil, and your Utter or 
 draught will be of a good Gold color, 
 
 XII. Another way to do the fume. 
 
 Take of the befl Englilh Tin, of the beft Spanilh Quick- 
 Glvcr, of each an ounce : make an Amalgama, by putting the 
 Crude Mercury to the melted Tin, aodftir;ingit together: 
 then pouder them well, and mix them wicb riowers of Sal- 
 Armojiiack, flowers of Sulphur, of each an ounce: Calcine 
 gently till tbp Sulphur is confumed, fo wil! tW Aurum ftick 
 to the upper Cruft or Scoria. 
 
 XIII. 
 
Chap. 22. Of Preparemg the Colours. 109 
 
 XIII. Jhif poudereii fine., and ground with glair, will with 
 Pen or PenciUgive your Figure or Figure a Golden color. See the 
 fecond Edition of my Pharmacofceia Bataanaj lib. i. cap, 9. 
 fe(fl. 28. § 2. ad. lo. pag. 339. where you have five other fe- 
 veral voays of making it. 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 Of Preparing the Colors. 
 
 1. /^~ Olors, according to their natures have each a particu- 
 ^*^ Jar way of preparation : to wit, by grinding, walh- 
 iog or fte'eping. 
 
 II. The chief Colors to be ground arethefe ; White-lead, 
 Geiufe, Cinnaber-Iake, Oker yellow and brown, Pink, Indi- 
 co, Umber , Coleos Earth, Spanilh-brown, Ivory-black, 
 Cberry-ftone-black, Lamp-black, Indian-Red, Indian-Lake. 
 
 III. The chief Colors to he tffa/k'd are Red-lead, MaPdcot, 
 Green Bice, Cedar Greerr, Ultramarine, Blue Bice , Smait, 
 Vera iter. 
 
 IV. The chief Colors to he fieepd, arfi Sap-green, Saffron , 
 Turnfole, Stone-Blue, Venice Berries. 
 
 V. To grind Colors. 
 
 Take the Color you would grind, and fcrape off from ic 
 all the filth , then lay it upon the ttcne, and with the muller 
 bruifeit a little i then put thereto a little fpring water, and 
 grind all together very well, jill the color is very fine; which 
 done, pour it out into certain hollows or furrows cut in Chalk- 
 ftone, and there let it lie till it is dry, which referve in paper 
 or glaffes. 
 
 VI. In grinding your Colors, put not too much wafer to 
 thenjj upon the flone.f or they ought to be ground fometphat thick^., 
 like pulp or pap : and they ought not to he left too moifi, hut thicks 
 and clammy. * ' ^ 
 
 VII. "I/" after your Color if dry in th^P^eS, you can ruh, it off 
 with your fingers, it tnujl he hstter homnd with Gum ; and if 
 there is too much Gum, it tPtH /J:ine, and he apt to. crackjs off 
 after it is ufed 
 . VIII. To waflo Colors. 
 Put the color into a glazed veflel, and put thereto fair wa- 
 ter plemifwlly, walh it welf, and decant (after a while) the 
 
 water 
 
no Polygraphkes Lib. IL 
 
 water; doth:s fix or feven times; at laft put t!ie water fbe^ 
 ing ju(t troubled j into another glazed rcflel, leaving the 
 dregs ar boitotn : then into thisfccond vefTel put more fair 
 water, walhing it as before, tilf the water (being feitledj be 
 clear, and the color remain fine at bottom : we have taught 
 another way at the twenty fourth Section of the eighteenth 
 Chapter of this Book. 
 
 * IX. Before you take the Color out of the VeJJel^fpead it 'Oery 
 thin, about the fides thereof, and when it is dry, fame cf it trill 
 fall to the hot torn, which keep hy it felf: hut the remainder 
 tvhich flicks to the fide of the Bafon, is the befl of all-, which with 
 a feather firike off from the [ides of the Vejjel, for it will be finer 
 than any flower. 
 
 X. To ft eef Colors. 
 
 Take a quantity thereof, and put it into a (hell, and fill the 
 (hell with fair water, ro which add fome fine pouder of 
 Alum, toraife the color i let it thus fteep a day and night, 
 and you will have a good color. 
 
 XI. Where note. Saffron Reefed in Vinegar gives a good color ; 
 and the Vetnce Berries in fair water and a little Alum, or a 
 drop or two of qyl of t^itriol makes a fair yellow. 
 
 XII. But feme colors are to be boyled, at Brafil, Logwood, 
 Turnfole, Rinds of Wa,Inuts> Woodfoct, &c. thefe when boyled 
 are to be k^ept clcfe flopc in GlaJJesj till you have occajion to 
 ufe them. 
 
 XIII. To temper the Cclors. 
 
 Take a little of any color, and put it into a clean fhell, 
 and add thereto a few drops of gum-water, and with your 
 fingers work it about the (hell, then let it dry ; when dry, 
 touch it with your fingers, it any color comes off, you muft 
 add ftronger gum-water: but being dry, if the color glifter 
 or ihine, it is a fign there is too much gum in it, which you 
 may remedy by puting in fair water. 
 
 XIV. To help the defeas. 
 
 Some colors, as Lake, Umber, ami others which ars 
 hard, willciatk when they are dry ; in this cafe, in tempe- 
 ring them add a little white Sugar-candy in very fine pouder, 
 which mix withihe color and fair water in the (hell, till the 
 Suparcandy is dilfolved. 
 
 XV. Tbefe colors, Umber, Spani(h-brown, Colen Earth, 
 Cherry-ftone,ard Ivory-black, are to be burnt before ihcy 
 be pround or wafh'd. 
 
 XVI. To hum or cak'xie Colors, 
 
 This 
 
Chap. 2 2. Of Preparing the Colours. m 
 
 This is done in a crucible, covering the mouth thereof 
 with clay, and letting it in a hot lire, tilt you are fure it is . 
 red hot through : which done, being cold, wafli or grind it 
 as aforeiaid. 
 
 XVII. To prepare /haJotrs for Colors. 
 
 White is (haded with Black, and contrariwife : Yellow 
 with Umber and the Okers : Vermillion with Lake : Blue- 
 bice with Indie: Black-coal with Rofet, G?<:. c 
 
 XVIII. Ihefeveral temperatures for coloring and (hadotO' 
 ing of Hiftories. 
 
 They are twenty in number, t;!;;;. Sea-cole mixt with Lake. 
 2. Umber with Mafticot. 3. Yellow Oker burnt with white. 
 4. Umber with Ultramarine. 5. Yellow with Umber. 6. 
 Uml^r with Lake. 7. Verditer burnt with Red-lead and 
 "White. 8. Ultramarine with Lake. 9. Ultramarine with 
 Red- lead. 10. Ultramarine with white. 1 1 . lodico with white. 
 12. Indiqo and Lake with white. 13. Indico, Pink with 
 white. 14. Indico with Oker and white. 15. Indico with 
 Mafticot and white. 16. Cherryitone burnt with White 
 and Red-lead. 17. Burnt Ivory with Lake. 18. Indicoand 
 Pink with the belt Ruft of Iron. 19. Lake and Ruftoflron 
 with light Pink. 20. Ruftoflron SLad^LikCj for the deeper 
 Jhadows. 
 
 XIX. The fever al temperatures or mixtures for fhadowing 
 Heads after the Life. 
 
 The principle mixtures are twelve in number, vi^^. i. Lake 
 with Indian Red. 2. Red-lead with Roman Oker. 3. Indian 
 Red with Ultramarine. 4- Indian Red with Pink and Gall- 
 ftone. 5, Yellow Oker with Indico. 6. Red-lead with 
 Pink and Indico. 7. Red-lead with Roman Oker and Indico. 
 8. Red-lead with Pink, Yellow Oker and Lake. 9. Indico, 
 Lake and Roman Oker with whiie, 10. Indico. Pink, aad 
 Roman Oker with Indian Red. 11. Red-lead with Umber, 
 Mafticote, and Pink. 1.2. Pink vjith Roman Oker. 
 
 XX. Ike fever al mixtures for fhadotving hair, 
 
 I . White and Roman Oker for' light hair. 1, White and 
 Yellow Oker for lighter haih 3. White with Ruft and Ro- 
 man Oker. 4. Light Pink with 5ea-Cole and Yellow Oker. 
 5. Dark Pink with Ruft and Roman Oker. 6. Pink with 
 the beft Ruft and Gall-ftone. 7. Florence Pink with Lake 
 And bnrni Ivory ^ a good fhadoftf for hair and face. 8. White 
 with Umber and' Yellow Oker, for light hair. 9. The laft 
 mixture with more Umber and Cherry ftone black /or a deeper 
 
 hiir 
 
112 Polj'graphices .Lib. JF. 
 
 %air. lo. Yellow Oker with Umber and Cherryftoae-black 
 for dark h.iir. \i. The lift mixcarc with Umber and Cherry- 
 ftone-black for a darkfr hair. 
 
 XXI. To do thefe things artificially, you may temper the 
 natural Colors with your pencil upon your pallat, btiog firft 
 placed in order, then wee your pencil in water, and temper 
 upon the color you intend to make u(e of firft in your mix- 
 tare ; then rub your Pencil in a clean place of your Pallat, 
 leaving part of the color upon the place. 
 
 XXII. And in the fame manner take from as many of the 
 other as fliail be diredted for fucb and fuch temperatures or 
 mixtures. Or thus. Dip your finger in water, and temper 
 or mix your colors as you did with your Pencil, placing your 
 colors fo mixed upon your pallat in order. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Of the Ma/7 u ill Inftntnients. 
 
 I. TTH^ manual Inftrumeots are four (by the feconJ ScxTri- 
 ■"■ on of the fifteenth Chapter of ibis Book) to wit,T(^ 
 Grinding- fi one and Mailer, Penrih, Tables to Limn on, and 
 fiiellsor little glalTes to hold your colors. 
 
 II. The Grindi7inr-(}one may be of Porphyry, Serpentine or 
 Marble, but rarher a Prbble, for that is the beft of all others : 
 The MuSer only of Pebble, which keep very cleao. 
 
 Theje may be eafily got of MarbUrs cr Stone-cutters in 
 London. 
 
 III. Choofe your pencils thus, by their faftnefs in the 
 quiils,and their (harp pointi after you have drawn or wetted 
 tbem in your mourfa two qr three times j fo that although 
 larger, yet their points will comf|o as fmallas a hair, which 
 then are go^d ; but if tht y fpread or have any exiravagaot 
 hairs they are naught. 
 
 IV. To waPo your pencils. 
 
 After ufing them, rub the ends of them well with Soap, then 
 lay them a wfails in warm water to ftccp, then take rbcm out 
 and wafhtbem well in orher fair water. 
 
 V. To prepare the Table. 
 
 h 
 
Chap. 29. The Manual Instruments, iig 
 
 It inuft be made of pure fine pafte-board, fucb as Cards are 
 made of (of what tbicknersyou pleafe) very finely Qick'd and 
 glazed with a Dogs lootb. Take a piece of this paite-boafd 
 of the bigoeft you intend the Pi(5turc, and a piece of the 
 fineft and whireft parcbment you can get (virgin parchment^ 
 which cut of equal bignefs with the pafte^board j with thin, 
 wbire,new made itarcb,patte the parchment to the pafte-board, 
 with the outfide of the skin out ward-moft : lay on the 
 ftarch very thin and even, being thus pafted let it dry 
 throughly. 
 
 VI. Then the grinding ftoae being clean, ky the Card 
 thereon wiib the parchment fide downwards, and as bard as 
 you can, rub the other fide of the pafte-board with a Boars-, 
 tooth fet in a ftick ; then let it be thorow dry, and it will be 
 fit to work or Limn any curious thing upon. 
 
 VII. The fheils boldirg or containing your colours, ought 
 to be Horfe-mLsfcIe ftiells, which may begot in July ^cm. 
 Rivers fides j but the next to thefe are fmail Mufcle (hells, or 
 inftead thereof little glafe veflels in the fame form i£ 
 poiTible. 
 
 VIII. Your Table or Card being thus prepared, you are 
 to lay a ground cf flelh color, before yon begin your work, 
 and that muft be tempered according to the complexion of 
 the face to b^ drawn. 
 
 JX If the complexion be fair. Temper white I{ed lead and 
 lake tngether. li' iny bird, fwarihy complexion, Temper mith 
 your White and I{ed a little fine Majlicot, or Engli/h Oker. But 
 note that your ground ought always to be fairer than the face 
 you draw : for it is an eafiy matter to darken a light color, 
 bar a diiSculc to lighten a deep one. 
 
 X, Your ground thus prepared, lay it upon your Card, 
 whh a Pencil full of color, and rather thin and waterifl), than 
 thick and grofs, and with two or three daubs of your great 
 Pencil, lay it on in an inftant, the nimbler it is laid on,the*e- 
 vener the color will lye. 
 
 XL Cover alfo rather ton much of your Card, than too 
 li'tle, with this prime color; fomewbat more of the Card 
 with the ground color, than you (hall ufe for the face. 
 
 XII. This done, take a pretty large Fillnr of Ivory or 
 Cocus-wood, and before you begin to work, temper certain lit- 
 tle heaps of feveral (hadows for the face, wbisb you muft 
 mix with your finger, about the Pallar. 
 
 I CHAP. 
 
1 14 Polj/grapbicef Lib. II 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 Of Prcparathfts for Limnbig, 
 
 I. TJ Ave two (hells or fmall glaffes, in either of which muft 
 ■*- -^ be pure clean water, the one to wafh the pencils in 
 being foul i the other to temper the colors with, when there is 
 occad'on. 
 
 II. fiefides the pencils you Limn with j a lar^e, clean and 
 dry pencil, to cleanle the work from any kind ofdult.ihat may 
 fall upon it, which are called FitcD-pencils. 
 
 III. A fharp Pen-knife to take off hairs that may come 
 from your pencil, either among the colors or upon the 
 works or to take out fpots that may fall upon the Card or 
 Table. 
 
 IV. A paper with a bole cut therein to lay over the Card, 
 to keep it from dull and filth, to reft your hand upon, and 
 to keep the foil and fweai of your hand from fullyicg the 
 parchment, as alfo to try your pencils on before you ufe 
 them. 
 
 Let the floeUs or fmall glajjis, water, pencils and pen-knife 
 lie all on tie right hand. 
 
 V. Have ready a quantity of light Carnation or flelh'co- 
 lor temper'd up in a (hell by it felf with a weak gum-water, 
 if it be a fair compLxion, mix White and Red-lead together i 
 if a brown or fwarthy, add to the former, Mafticot.or Englilh 
 Oker, or both, 
 
 VI. But be lure the Po(h color be always lighter than the 
 complexion you would Limn ; for by working on it you may 
 bring it to its true color. 
 
 VII. In a large Horfe-mufcle (hell place your feveral (ha- 
 dows ffor the flelh color) in little places one diftin(5t from 
 another. 
 
 VIII. In all (badowings have ready fome whiie,and lay a 
 good quantity of it by it (elf befides what the (hadows are fyrii 
 mixed with. 
 
 IX. For Red for the cheeks and lips, temper Lake and 
 Red-lead together : (or blew (hadows (as under the eyes and 
 iQ veins] Jcdico or Ultrtmiriae and white. 
 
 X. 
 
Chap, 24. Preparation for Li mtjif^g. 115 
 
 X. For gray faint (hadowj, white,' Englilh Oker, fometiaes 
 Malticot: for deep (hacjows. white, Englifh Oker, Umber : 
 for dark /hadows. Lake and Pink, which make a good fleihjr 
 Ihadow. 
 
 XI. to make choice of the light. 
 
 Let it be fair and Urge and free fromjhadows of frees or 
 Houfes, but aS dear Skie-ltght, and let it be direci from above^ 
 and net traf^fverfe ; lef it be Northerly and not Souther Ij;: and 
 let the room be clofe and clcAn, and free from the Suh- 
 beams. 
 
 XIL Of the manner of fitting. 
 
 Let your dsik^on which you wor}{_ be fa fitaate, that fitting 
 before it^ your left arm may be tottfards the light, that the light 
 may Ilril{e /idling upon your wor!{. Let the party that is to he 
 Limned^ be in what pofture jhemfehes tffill defign^ but not 4- 
 bove two yards off you atmojl.. and level ttithyou. 
 
 XIU. fi^jcrem ohferve their motion, if never fo fmall,for the 
 leaji motion, if not recalled, may in /hort time bring on you many 
 errors. ' 
 
 XIV. Laflly, the face being fini/hed, let the party fl and (not 
 fit) at a farther dtjiance (four or jive yards off) to dram thepoHure 
 of his cloths. 
 
 XV. If you defgn to Limn upon Sattin- you m'liil take 
 Ifing-g!a(s, and fteep it four and twenty hours in water, thea 
 boyi it in fpirir of Wine, untilit be very clammy, which yon 
 will perceive by ciping your finger into it : then after your 
 out-iines are drawn upon the Satdn, uke an indifferent large 
 pencil, and walh it tbid over, as far as your out-lines are, 
 which will prevent your colors from finking or flowing. 
 
 XVI. To prevenc your colors from Unking into your 
 Card, Paper, or Parchment, you defjgn to Limn on. 
 
 Tal{e ^och-Alum, boy I it infprir.g water, then take a bit of a 
 fpunge, and wet the back: fide of your paper, (hut you intend to 
 draw on very thin, whilji the Water is hoty be as quick^in Wet- 
 ting of it as you can; this fvill prevent the colors finking. 
 
 XVil. Lafl'y, thefe general things are to be obferved^ 
 
 I. That if your colors peel, orbyreafonof the greaiinefff 
 of your Parchment, will not lie on, you muft mix with them 
 a very little ear Wax^or Civet. and it will help them. i. That 
 fie you not above two yards from that you draw by, 3, That 
 the perfon you draw, lit iu a higher (eat, than you that draw. 
 
 XVIIL 4. That you draw not any part in the face of a 
 Pid:ure, e:gadly at firft j ueuher finift an Eye,Nofe,or Mciitb, 
 
 li * cilf 
 
Ii6 Pol/'^rifpltices Lib. II. 
 
 till the reft of your work come up, and be wrought together 
 with it. 5. That when you have finifhed the Face> lei the 
 party ft»nd up, to draw the Drapery by. 
 
 X/X. 6. That blew Bice i( never ufed in a Face. 7. That 
 black muft not by any means be ufed : for oiher Ihadows, 
 your own obfervation muft diredt you, it being impoflible to 
 give a general Rule for the ftiadows in a!i Faces. 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 Of the Pra&ke of Liwniug in IsVimiiire , or 
 Dramtig of a face in Colors, 
 
 I. ^^0 begin the work- 
 
 -■• Have all things in a readinefs (as before; then on the 
 Card lay the prepared color faafwerable to the complexion 
 prelected) even and thin, free from hairs and fpots, over ibc 
 place where thePidure is to be. 
 
 II. The ground thus laid, begin the work, the party being 
 fet, which muft be done at three fittings : at the fit It lltting 
 the face is only dead colored, which takes up about two 
 hours time. 
 
 HI. At the fecond fitting, go over the work more curi- 
 oufly, adding its particular ^ces or deformities, Iweetly 
 couching the colors, which wnl take up about five hours 
 time. 
 
 IV, At the third fitting, finifli the face, in which you muft 
 perfect ail that is imperfeti and rough.putting the deep Iha- 
 dows in the face,as in the eyes,eye-brows, and ears, which are 
 the laft of the work, and not to be done till the hair, curtain, 
 cr back fide of the Pidure, and the drapery be wholly finifh- 
 ed. 1 
 
 y. The operation or work^at fir§l Jitting. 
 
 The ground for the complexion being laid, draw the out- 
 lines of the face, which do with Lake »nd white mingled j 
 draw faintly, that if you mifs in proportion or color you may 
 alter it. 
 
 VI. This done, add to the former color Red-lead, for 
 the cheeks cdq lips ; let ii be but faint (for you cacnot lighten 
 
Chap. 2 5' The Practice of Lm»hg^S^c. jij 
 
 a deep color) and make the Ihadows in their due places, as 
 in the cheek, lips, tip of ihecbio and ears, the eyes and roo^ 
 of the hair : Ihadow not with a flat pencil, but by (mall loucfcl- 
 es(asin batching) and To go over the face. 
 
 VII. In this dead coloring rather than to be curious,flriFe 
 as near as may be to imitate nature. 
 
 VIII. The red fliadows being put in their due places? 
 Ihadow with a faint blew, about the corners and balls bf the 
 eyes j and with a grayifli blew under the eyes and about the 
 temples, heightening the Ibadows as the lighr falls, alio the 
 harder Ihadows in the dark fide of the face, under the eye- 
 brows, chin and neck. 
 
 IX. Bring all the work to an equality, but add perfedion 
 to no particular part at this time j but irtiitate the life in like- 
 nefs, roundnef?, boldnefs, pofture, color, and the like. 
 
 X. Laftly, touch at the hair with a fatable color in fuch 
 curls, folds and form, as may either agree wiih the life, or 
 grace the Pidure : fill the empty places with color, and 
 deepen it more ftrongly, than in the deepeft fliadowed be- 
 fore, 
 
 X/. The operation or work, atfecond fitting. 
 
 As before rudely, fo now you muft fweeten thofe varieties 
 which Nature affords, with the fame colors and in the fame 
 places driving them one into another, yet fo as that no lump 
 or fpot of color, or rough edge may appear in the whole 
 wo k ; and this muft be done with a pencil fiiarper than that 
 which was ufed before. 
 
 XJI. Thisdone,goto thebackfideofthe Pidnre which may 
 be Landskip, or a curtain of IWw or red Sactin : if of blew 
 temper as much Bice as will cover a Card, and let it be well 
 mixed with gum; with a pencil draw ibeour-lincs of the cur- 
 tain: as alfo of the wbo'e Pidure ; then with a large pencil 
 lay thinly or airily over the whole ground, on which j'ou mean 
 to Limn the blew ; and then with a large pencil lay over the 
 fame a fubftantial body of color j in doing of which be 
 nimble, keeping the color moift, letting no part thereof be 
 dry till the whole be covered. 
 
 X/IJ. If the cartain beCrimfon, trace it out vfith/qdian- 
 Lakej lay the ground with a thin color i and lay the light 
 with a thin and waterifli color, where ^faeyfallj and while 
 the ground is yet wet, with a ftrong dark color tempered 
 fometbing thick, lay the ftrong and hard fliadows clofe by the 
 ether lights. 
 
 '5 XIV 
 
11 8 P.oUgrAphic^s Lib, II. 
 
 XIV- Then lay the liiwien with f<tini whiie, and ihe dia- 
 peiy fiai oi the color you micnd it. 
 
 XV. In ihe lace, ice vvfaai ihadoivs are too light or too 
 deep, for the curtain behind, and drapery, and reduce each 
 to their due perkvirion , draw the lini:s ot the eye-lids, and 
 Ihadow :he entrance into th': ear, dcepnels of the eye-brows, 
 and eminent marks in the iace, wi;h a very fiurp pencil. 
 
 XVI. Laftly, go over the hair, coioriug it as it appears 
 in the life, catting over the ground fome loale Jocks or hairs, 
 which will make the Picture itand as it were ac a diftance 
 from the curtain. 
 
 X^ll. Shadow the Unnen with white, black., and a little yehttf 
 4nd blew i and deepen your black^^ with Ivory-blacky mixed with 
 a little Lak_e and hidtco, ^ 
 
 Xnil. The operation or w or !{_ at third fit ting. 
 
 This third work is wholly fpent in giving (Irong touches 
 where you fee caufe, ia rounding fmooihiog and colui icg the 
 face, which you better fte todo, now the curtain and dra- 
 pery is limned, than before. 
 
 XIX. And now obfcrve wbatfoerer may conduce to the 
 perfeilion of your work, asgcfture, Icars or moIe<:,caiis of the 
 eyes, windings of the mouth, and the like j and bo fure ne- 
 ver to make your decpeit ftadows To deep as they appear 
 in the life. 
 
 XX. The ground color for hair ^ and how to heighten ar.d 
 deepen it. 
 
 You muft lay on the hair in minirurc, of a Color not fc 
 light as the lighteft, nor fo deep as the dcepcft (Tiadow, but in 
 a middle proportion between beih, on which you may either 
 beighten or deepen at plcifurc, 
 
 XXI. If you lay it on with thelightefi; color, it will require 
 t long time to work it down ; and if fo dark as the dceptll, 
 you cannot deepen it lower with the fame color. 
 
 XXII. Moreover you muft lay this Ground color, exiream' 
 ly even and fmootfa, and the fpeedier you are in doing it, the 
 {setter. 
 
 XXIIL In doing of ir, ufe a Goofe-quil-pencil, abd Jet the 
 temper thereof not be too thin, becaule the Parchment will 
 appear then through the ground, which it ought to cover ; and 
 rather than iifliould fo tpP^ar. when tbefirft laid Ground is 
 ^^Jy ^0 over the i^oat again vvith the fame colors, 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 2^. Of Tjmning Drapery, ii^ 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 Of Limning Drapery. . 
 
 I. A Full and fubftaniial ground being laid all over where 
 
 "^^ you intend the Drapery i as if blew, with Bice 
 faaoothly laid, deepen it with Lakeland Indico ; liglitning it 
 with a fine faint white, in the extreme light places, the which 
 underftand of other colors. 
 
 II. If the body you draw be in Armour, lay liquid Silver 
 all over for a ground, which being well dried and burnilhed : 
 ftadow it with Silver, Indico, Litmole and Umber, accor- 
 ding as the life diredts you. 
 
 HI. For Gold Atmoitr lay liquid Gold as you did the Sil- 
 ver, and fliadow upon it with Lake, Englilh Oker, and % 
 little Gold, 
 
 IF. Or thus. Take the finefi Jhell Gold, and lay it flat and 
 fmooth on the place you intend for Armmr: tvhen it is dry^ hur- 
 nifo it all over ttfith afmali fVeefels or Dogs tooth, fet in the end 
 of a Pencil ftick^, but fotnething longer. 
 
 V. For thefhadows, temper lak^, I{pman Ok,erj and gall ftone- 
 tvith a little Jhell Gold. 
 
 VI. The Heightnings being burnijloed, are to he left bright. 
 
 VII. In the fainter farts of the fhajotps, tife a little Jhell 
 Goldi and alfo in the deeped, which mufi be neatly and Jweetly 
 wrought into the Gold. 
 
 Fill Alfo take Gall fi one, and tetfiper it with fhell Gold, it 
 gives an excellent lujlure to all Gold works. 
 
 IX. In the darkejfi and deepe(iJJoadjws, mix a little black. 
 The heightnings are only the firji Gold burni/hed very bright. See 
 bow to do Silver Armour at Sed:. 51. following, 
 
 X. For Pearls, your ground muft be Indico and white; 
 the fliadows black and pink. To eatpreis the roundoefs and 
 lufture of a Pearl, ftiadow it with Indico, Gfaerry-ftone black, 
 and Pink. 
 
 XI. Or your Pwr/ may be laid wij,l|a white tnixed v^tb a 
 little black, a little Indico and Maftick.but very little io com- 
 parifon of the White, fcarcely to the huudredtb part : ibis be- 
 
 I 4 »8 
 
i:o Tolygr^ph/ces Lib. II. 
 
 being dry, giveihelight of the PearJ with a JictI; Silver, 
 fotnewbac more to the light iban the (haJowed fide. 
 
 Xll. Then take a Wbiteallayed with Malticot, and un- 
 derneaih the fliadowed fide, give it a cornpalfing Itroke, 
 which (hews a reHcdlion, then wiibout that, a Imall fliadow 
 of Sea-cole, undermott of ail > buc note, your Silver mult be 
 laid round and full. 
 
 XIII. For Diamonds, lay a ground of liquid Silver, and 
 deepen it with Cherry- {tone-black and Ivory-black: the 
 deeper the (hadow, the fdiier the Diamond. 
 
 XIV. For Babies, lay a Silver ground, which burnifh to 
 the b:gnels of a Ruby ; then with pure Turpentine temper'd 
 with Indian Lake, from a fmall wire heated in a Candle' 
 drop upon the burniftied place, fafliioning it as you picafe 
 with year Inftruments, which -let lie a day or two to dry ; 
 and if it be too long in drying add to the compofition a litde 
 powder of Maftick. 
 
 Xl^. For EmerauUs, or any green ftone, temper Turpen- 
 tine wih Verdigrife. and a linle Turmerick root, firft fcra- 
 ped, with Vinegar, drying ir, grind it to fine poudcr and 
 mix ic. 
 
 l(Vl For Saphires.mvx. or temper Ultramarine with pure 
 Turpentine, which lay upon a ground of liquid Silver polilht: 
 which mufi be the ground for all thefe ftones. 
 
 To make liquid Gold or Silver : fee the firji SeEiion of the twen • 
 ty fi>-fi Chjpter of this Book, 
 
 Xyil. For Scarht, Temper Carmine, and deepen it wirh 
 Indian-Lake. Or thus, Temper native Cinnabar and a little 
 Red-lead, and fhadow it with Indian-Lake. 
 
 XVIII. For Crimfon, Temper Cinnabar,L«kc and White : 
 deepen it with Lake. 
 
 XIX. For Crfr«/j//^t?,Terr per Lake and White, and deepen 
 or fliadow it wftb L^ke*. For a Peach Color, Ttmper Car- 
 tnibe and a liitle White ; and deepeo or fliadow it with 
 Lake. 
 
 XX. For a Violet, Temper fine Dutch- Bice and Lake; 
 and deepen it with Indico. For a Purple, Temper Bice and 
 Lake, and a liitle White ; and deepen it with Lake aed 
 Indico. 
 
 XXI. For an Orange: Temper the beft Red-Lead, and 
 a lit'le fine yellow Mafticcte ; (hadow it wiihGall-fkooe and 
 Lake. For 'an Orsnm Tgwney: Temper Cwnab-ir, ligbt 
 
 Pink, 
 
Chap. 16. Of Limmfig Drapery, 121 
 
 Pink, and a little yellow Mafticote ; fliadqw it with Gall- 
 ftone and Lake. 
 
 - XXll For a Sea-green : Temper Bice, Pink, and White ; 
 and deepen it with Greea Pink. For a f'rench Green : Tem- 
 per ligbi Pink one part,witb Dutch bice fix parts j and deepen 
 with green Pink. 
 
 irXIlI. For Sky: Temper Ultramarine with a little Whirej 
 and deepen with Indico. For Foppnjay : Temper Pink, and 
 a litrle Indico ; and deepen it wub Indico. 
 
 XXiV. For Straw : Temper yellow Mafticote with a very 
 little Cinnabar ; and deepen it with dark Pink. For a Lyon 
 Tawney : Temper Red- lead and iVIafticote, and deepen it 
 with Umber. 
 
 XXy. For /}(h colour. Temper Cherry-ftpne and White 5 
 and deepen it with Ivory black. For a bright B^d: Temper 
 Indian Lake with native Cinnab«r : The Indian Lake is the 
 beft of all other Lakes; but ii being very fcarce and dear, 
 you may ufe Florence-Lake iaiiead thereof. 
 
 XXVI. For all colors where Dutch-Bice is ufed, be fure 
 to make choice of that which is very fine, or elfe you will 
 find, that in working, in will lye very rough and uneven,and 
 not cover well. 
 
 JCXFII. And be fure that when you temper any of tbefe 
 colors for a Complexion or Garment^ you temper it on your 
 Pallat or (hell with your finger j and temper them very well 
 to mix them altogether, to make a good mixture and not too 
 waterifli. 
 
 XXVIII. Be fure alfo to preferve all your colors from dud, 
 and before you temper either in the (hell or upon your pallat, 
 to brufh it off with a large Pencil or Hairs foot, or to blow it 
 off. 
 
 XXIX In drawing of Cloths, be extream careful in habi- 
 ting every one, according to fbe degrees and Functions of the 
 peribn defcribed, givirg them alfo their right and proper co- 
 lors. 
 
 XXX For Example, the Virgin Mary is commonly repre- 
 fenied in Purple and Azure. J^ohn the Evangelift in Scarier. 
 John Baptift in a Hairy Mantle. The reft of the Apoftles in 
 Green or-Crimfon. 
 
 XXXI, There are two ways of working Drapery, The firft 
 way is that which the haliavs ufe ; which is done with the 
 point of a Pencil and hatching it. 
 
 XXXII. 
 
122 Folygraphices Lib. II. 
 
 XXXII. Some places are touched «li over alike,yet fo, as 
 when it isfinifhcd, you may perceive the Parchment appear 
 in ieveral places, quite ihrougb the work, which is indeed 
 too flight a way, and ought net to be called Limnirg, but 
 Wafliing. 
 
 XXXIII. The fecond wayyjhxch is the beft.Fir;^ lay a good 
 foil flat ground all over where you defign your Drapery, of 
 what color you would have it : this aone, you will find it 
 much eafier to work upon ; and you may either heighten or 
 deepen it, according as your ingenuity or the Life Ihall di- 
 rect you. 
 
 XXXIV. If you would have the Drapery blev^, you may 
 take an indifferent large Pencil with Ultramarine, cr inflead 
 of that, Dutch-Bice well prepared i let your Pencil be alircjll 
 fulJ of either of thefe colors, and therewith lay the color 
 even and fraootb, all over the place you intend for Drapery : 
 this you may deepen with Lake and Indico. Heighten very 
 faintly, and fair in the extream'^ft lights: the like oblerve 
 in all other colors of Drapery whatloever. 
 
 XXXV. Crimfon Velvet, Red, Green, and Blew, may 
 be heightned with fine Ihell Gold, it gives a m )ft admirable 
 ornament in cluth of Gold, efpecully if you mix fome of the 
 Gold, with the ground color it felf, which will make it much 
 the fairer. Thus great Painters hefghtned :ill their works of 
 Archiiedlure and Buildings, efpecially in ftately Rooms and 
 Palaces. 
 
 XXXVI. Be fure that you draw the out-linc« of the Gar- 
 ment very true and faint, becaufe the whole grace of a pid- 
 ure confifts much in the ouimoft draught, and more than in 
 the curious work within, 
 
 XXXVIL To do this, you muft fute the Garments to 
 I be body, and make them, bend and yield with it, and not 
 ftraitand tttff where it bendeth. 
 
 XXXVIII. Tn fit the Garments rightly to the body ; ob- 
 ferve which pan of the body bends in or cur, that the Gar- 
 ments may aofwer to the body upon the kaft turning any 
 way. 
 
 XXXIX. That the Garment may turn with it, you muft 
 cbferve where the body Ihould be, if it were bare, and there 
 form the Garments in the right places, making them to bend 
 or fit out, according to the Joynts and Limbs, and fometimes 
 plainly to appear through the Garments, and efpecially where 
 they are driven b^ the wind, or any other aition to lye loofe 
 
 frooa 
 
Chilp. 26, Of Limnbjg Drapery, 125 
 
 from the body. In this c^k exprels them lightly, and with a 
 kind of traalparency. 
 
 XL. Begin at the upper part of the Garment, and fo draw 
 down that part of the Garment (on both fidesj that lies dole 
 to the body, before you draw the loofe parts, that fly off from 
 the bddy, 
 
 XLI. For if you draw the loofe parts firft, before you have 
 finilhed chofe parts which lye clofe to the body or its parts, 
 you will be prefenily out] i^nd be apt to draw the body 
 awry. • 
 
 XLII. Therefore fome great Artifts draw lightly the naked 
 body firft, and put on the Garments afterwards, by which 
 means they can better fee to place the Cioathing rightly, and 
 to harig even upon the body. 
 
 XLIII. You muft alio draw the greateft folds firft, and fo 
 ftrike the greater folds into the lefs ; and be fure that you 
 make nor one fold to crofs another, Break alfo fome of the 
 folds into lefs ; and make them the narrower, where the Gar- 
 ments fit clofer. 
 
 XLIV. Obferve alfo to order your Drapery fo, that the folds 
 may fall all one way,efpecially in a ftanding Figure, though, 
 it will be otherwife fometimes in a Figure that is drawn fit- 
 ting. 
 
 XLV. For the Garments of a ftanding Figure, are lyable 
 to be driven by the Air and therefore muft be placed one 
 way. 
 
 XLVI. Be fure alfo not to make folds, where the Garment 
 ihould fit ftreight and doi^i as the Breafts, Knees, Thighs, (fjc. 
 which beat them out, and therefore in fuch places ought al- 
 ways to fit plain. 
 
 XLVII. Jojhadow in Ltmen : ufe black, white, a Utile yel- 
 low, and lefs blew : the black muft bedeepned with burnt I- 
 vory, with which mix a little Lake and Indico, or Litmofe- 
 blue. For greater variety of Colours and Mixtures, y^e Chap, 
 20. beforegoing. 
 
 XLVIIL As for Sattens and Silks, and all other fliining 
 Stuffs, they ought to have certain bright reflections, exceeding 
 bright, with fudden light Glances, efpecially where the light 
 falls brighteft ^ And fo by how much the Garment falls the 
 more inward from the light, by fo, much the Reflexions will be 
 the lefs bright. 
 
 XLIX. The like is Teen in Armour, Brafs-Pots and Kettles, 
 or any Gliftriog Metalj where you fee a fudden brighinefs in 
 
 the 
 
124 Pofygr/iphices Lib. IF. 
 
 the middle or Center of the Iigfar, from the Ihiniog quality 
 tnd difpoiition of thole things. 
 
 L. Chafed^ EmboJJed or ftointng Armour. The lighter places 
 ofit muft befpirklmg, which you may exprefs by raiiing 
 the high atid round places, with a Temper of Gall-ibne, and 
 Roman Oker, by touching with your pencil full of the Color 
 of it, over and over,!n one and the lame place, till the Touches 
 be raifed above the other work. 
 
 LI. Then cover over the raifed work, with the fineft (hell 
 Gold, (that is made at Anttverp) and burnifh it wi:b a Weefels 
 Tooth ; and the like if it be Silver Etnbofled. 
 
 Lll. Silver Armour. Take Ihell Silver, and Iiy it on, as 
 you did the Gold fat Scd. 3. abovej and burnifli it alfo when 
 it is dry, as you did the Gold. 
 
 LIII. For the Ihadows, temper Lake and Indico, with a 
 very little Umber: work all the (hadows down even and 
 fmootb, according to what youobletve in the Life. 
 
 LIV. The heightnirgs are to be left fthe Silver being 
 brightly burnifhed/ as in the Gold. The thinner part of the 
 Ihadou'S, being part of the depth of the ftadows, muft be 
 tempered with a little fliell Silver, and Iweetly and neatly 
 wrought into the Silver, being laid very flat and even as be- 
 fore mentioned. 
 
 LV, Cherryftone burnt, Dark, Pink, and Ruft of Iron, aie 
 a very good Ihadow for Emboffed Silver Armour : fo alfo is 
 Ivory Black mix: with Dark Pink, 
 
 c H x\ P. xxvir. 
 
 Of Limmttg Laudskip. 
 
 A LL the variable exprejfions of Landskjp are innumerable, 
 ■^ ■*■ they being as many as there are men and fancies ; the gene- 
 ral rules follow. 
 
 I. Always bigin with the Sky, Sun-beams or lighteft parts 
 firft ; next the yellowilh beams (which make of Mafticos an4 
 while) next the blewnefs of the Sky, (which make of Ultra- 
 marine or Smalt only :) for purple Clouds, only mix Lake 
 and white. 
 
 n. 
 
Chap. 27. Of Limning Lands kjp. 12* 
 
 II. At firil working, dead Color ali the Piece over, leave 
 no part of the ground uncovered, but lay the Colors fmooth 
 all over, 
 
 III. Work the Sky downwards, towards the Horizon 
 fainter and fainter, as it draws Dearer and nearer the earth, 
 except in lempeftuous Skies: the tops of mountains far 
 remote, woik fo faint that they may appear as loll ia the 
 Air. 
 
 IV. Let places low, and near the ground be of the color of 
 the earth, of a dark yellowilh, or brown, or green- the next 
 lighter green ; and fo fucceifively as they lole in difianccj let 
 them abate in color. 
 
 V. Make nothiog which you fee at a diftance perfect, by 
 expreffing any particular lign which it hath, but exprefs it in 
 colors, as weakly and faintly as the eye judgetb of it. 
 
 VI. Always place light againft darknefs and darkaefs ai- 
 gainft light , by which means you may extend the profped: 
 as a very far off. 
 
 VII. Let all Ihadows loofe their force as they remove from 
 the eye 5 always letciog the itrongeft fliadow be neareftband. 
 
 VIII. Laftly, Takelfinglafs infmall pieces half an ounce, 
 fair Conduit-water two quarts, boil it till the glafs is diffolvedi, 
 which fave for ufe: with which mix fpiritor oyl of Cloves, 
 Rofes, Cinnamon or Amljergriefe, and • lay it on acd about 
 the Pidure where it is not colored (left it fliould change 
 the colors : but upon the colors ufe it without the perfumes) fo 
 it will varnidi your Pidures, and give them a glofs, retaining 
 the glory of their colors, and take from them any ill fcem 
 which they might otherwife retain. 
 
 See the way of tempering Colors for Shadomingt in Chap. It. 
 Se^. 13. aforegoing. 
 
 IX. For Trees you muft have a dark Green, which you 
 may make by mixing Verditer with P/mA. ^^^ Indico : the 
 deepeft (hadows of all in Green, are made with Sap-green and 
 Indico. 
 
 X. To preferve your Colors in Limning. 
 
 Take Rolecnary-water double diftilled, or pure Spirit of 
 Rofemary, and with a few drops of it, temper your (hell of 
 while. However dead and faded it was before,ii will inftant- 
 ly become perfcd white. This Water or Spirit binders alfo 
 the Bubbles io White and Vmherj which are irgubUfomein 
 Grinding. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
126 Polygrd^hiccs Lib. II. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIII. 
 
 Of Light and Shadow. 
 
 I, r Igbis and /hades fet in their proper places in fuch a juft 
 *-* and equal proportion, as Namre dotb give, or the 
 life require, give a true Mea of the thing we v^ouid reprefent j 
 fo that lis not any color wb»t(ocver,nor any fingle itroak or 
 ftroaks which is the caufe thereof, but that excellent Symme- 
 try of Light and Shadow, which gives the true refemblance 
 of the light. 
 
 11. Jn (hadowing, be careful you fpoil not your work by 
 too grofs a darknels, whether it be hard or foft. 
 
 /]/. This Oblervation of light and dsrk is that which cau- 
 fetb all things contained in jour work ro come forward or fail 
 backward, and makes every thing from the firlt to the laft 
 to ftand in their juft places, whereby the diftancc between 
 thing and thing feems to go from you or come to you as if it 
 were the work of Nature it ielf 
 
 IV. Suppofe it were a plaifter Fig'-^re,take good notice what 
 appears forwards and what backwards, or how things fuc- 
 cced one anorber ; then confider the caule which makes them 
 in appearance eicher to incline or recline, and confider the 
 degrees of light and darknefs, and whether they fall forward 
 or backward, accordingly in your draught give firft gentle 
 touches, and after that heighten by degrees according as the 
 example and your own ingenuity (hall diredl. 
 
 V. Thofe parts are to be heighin'd in your work which 
 appear higheft in your Pauero; The greatert life which we 
 can give on white paper is the paper it felf, all lefTer lights 
 muft be faintly (hadowed in proportion to their refpeclive de- 
 grees. 
 
 VI. But on colored paper white Crions and Tobaccopipe- 
 cJay areufed for the firft and fecond beighteniogs^putting each 
 in their proper places, as more or lefs light is required, which 
 is a fingular obfervation in this manner of drawing, 
 
 VII. Then you muft take heed you beigbren not too many 
 places, nor heighten any thing more than what is needful, 
 Bor too near the datk or fliadows, or any out-line, (except 
 
 where 
 
Chap. 28 Of Light and Shadow. 127 
 
 where you intend fome refiexiun J left your work (hew bard 
 and rougb. 
 
 VIII. In faeigbreniog, or fueb figures «s require great ligfat, 
 put the greacelt light in tbe middle, «nd tbe lefler towards 
 the edges for the better peripicuity of your work. 
 ' IX. Laftly, leave fufficieni faint places on tbe gtouod of 
 your pa^per between your lights and /hades, that tfaey may 
 appear pleafaruly with a fingular plainnefj and fmoothncls. 
 
 X. Refledioti, is to be ufed in delineating, glittering, or 
 Ihining bodies, as Glafs, Pear!, Silver, (^c. let the caufeof 
 tbe refledlioD, be it more or lefs, be feen in tbe thing it felf, 
 
 XI In plain drawing, lay all your fhades fmooih, whe- 
 ther it be in batching or fmutcbing, keeping every thing 
 wichin its own bounds, and this is done by not making your 
 ftixdes at firft too hard, or putting one (hadow upon ano- 
 ther too dark. 
 
 XII Obferve that the greater parts of light and /hadows, 
 and the fmall parts intermixt in the fame, may always fo 
 correfpond as thereby to make more appearent the greater. 
 
 XIIL In Pidnres, let the higheft light of the whole, Cif 
 any darknefs ftand in the middle of it) appear more dark than 
 indeed it is : and in working always compare light with light, 
 and dark with dark, by which you will find the power of 
 eacB, and the genera! ule thereof in all operations. 
 
 XIV. L^t all your lights be placed one way in the whole 
 work, whether in tbe Figure, Face, or Garments. 
 
 XV. Ifthe light fall fideways on the Pidhire, you mnft 
 make the other fide which is fartfaeft from the light darkeft, 
 and let the lights be placed all together on the other fide, 
 and not confufedly on both fides, as if it ftood in the midft 
 of many lights, for the body cannot be lightoed equally ia 
 all places. 
 
 XVI. But. when you exprefs a Dungeon or Prifon with 
 a Torch lighted in it, you muft obferve that every thing in 
 it, as well as tbe Garments, muft receive their lights from it, 
 and therefore muft be fliadowed all on the contrary fide, 
 which obferve in all Ihadowings of the fame kind. 
 
 XVil. The true and natural difpofition of light, is that 
 which gives the principal grace to a Pit^ure, for that without 
 its due light, is clearly another thing. 
 
 XVlII. And although fo, it may be beautiful in its kind, 
 fo far as it is wrought ; but if afterwards it fliall be flja- 
 dowcd without judgment and Art, fo that the fkadows 
 
 be 
 
12 8 Polygraph'jcet Lib. IL 
 
 be confufedly placed, where the lights on^i to be; or con- 
 trariwife, ibc /i^/jfj where ibc Jhadowi Hiould be; and the 
 Concavities and Convexitiet out of their natural fituations, 
 the woik will nor only be conUifcd, but wholly if o led. 
 
 XIX Whereas on the contrary having //j^/jf/ rightly difpo' 
 fed, it lb mighiily adds to the perftd:ion of the Figure, that 
 it makes the Flat or Plane Icenn to be imb.fjj'ed. 
 
 XX. And thus light lightly difpoled, does that in the 
 Vainterj work, \sh'\t:ix fubjl ance or matter dots in the Car- 
 vers work ; infotnufb ibat ihcy Iftm robe Itnbolfed out- 
 wards, fuch is the force of Ito^bt and fhadouf. 
 
 XXI. And herein you will find admirable fcenes and 
 forejhortnings, proceeding purely from the true dilpofition of 
 the Itght ; without which the Figure would not only be 
 impcrfed:, but lole alfo much of its grace ; .dou"^b other- 
 wife well proportioned and placed. 
 
 XXII. This light is the caufe or formal reafoft v/bereby 
 colored things are ken, whofe Shapes and Images pafs to'rhe 
 Phantafy, and efpecially inlighten the eyes in which the Image 
 is formed ; which firft paflcth to the Common-fenfe, after- 
 wards to the Phantafy, and laltofallto the underftanding ; 
 whereby every thing is difcovered to be what indeed 
 it is. 
 
 XXIII. In refpedt of this light, three things occurc to 
 cur vifive faculty, r;:^. the viliua nines, the colored body.and 
 the faculty of feeing, which is in the eye. 
 
 XXIV. The Vifual lines l^gkncd, fwhich are the proper 
 fubjedt oi PerfpeBive) come to the eye in a Pyramidal form, 
 the ba fe of which Pyramis refteth in the objed: ; and the 
 Cone or Angle thereof comes to the eye more blunt or ob- 
 tufe, if the faid objed be near ; but more fliarp or acute, if 
 it be farther off, whereby it is not (o clearly or eafily difcern- 
 ed, as otherwife it would. 
 
 XXV. The colored ObjeFl or Body, comes not to the eye, but 
 its vifible fpecies or Ihapes are diffufed through the clearnelis 
 of the Air unto the Efe i which fpecies are only certain 
 Images like thofe we fee in a Glafs. 
 
 XXVI. And if the colored body ftand near ro this I- 
 mage, it comes to our eye in the fame qiunnry and big- 
 nefs of the Angel of the Pyramis, which being nhtufe or 
 blunt, makes the Image ferm as great as indeed it is, and (o 
 difcerned tbe morediltindly. 
 
 XXVII. 
 
chap. Q 8. Of Light and Shadow. 129 
 
 XXVII. But if far off, the vifible fpecfes appears lefSjaccor-' 
 diog to tbe proportion of the diftance and acutene.'s of the 
 Pyramidal Aagle. 
 
 XXVIII. The faculty of feeing is formed by the Concur- 
 rence of the other two things, vit^. the vifual lines, and th<r" 
 colored body > which iBformetb tbe eye by reducing it from 
 meer Ability into A<ft, and fo performing its operatioos, and 
 caufing the thing alfo to be feen more apparently and 
 diftiodly. 
 
 XXIX. From hence it is apparent, thai tbe felf fame body 
 cannot be equally ligbrced in all places, i. Becaufe the light 
 doth not diredily illuminate any more than that part which is 
 dire(^Iy oppoHte to it i tbe other parts which are oblique to 
 It are illuftrated more imperfetflly, by reafon of the intercep- 
 tion or obliquity of an opake body, through which its beams 
 cannot pierce. 
 
 XXX. 2. From the feveral diftances of the eye to tbe 
 farts of the fame body j for as the firft part of the body is 
 (een and placed neareft the eye, and fo comes to it with z 
 tnoreobtufe Angle, fo being more ligbtned, it is alfo feea 
 more diltindily, whereas the other parts being farther off, 
 come to the eye in a more acute Angle, and being ieffer 
 iigbtoed, cannot be fo plainly feen. 
 
 XXXI. If two, three, or four men ftood one behind a- 
 nother, all of them equally receiving the light ; yet in refpec^ 
 of your eye they do not i and therefore by the former Do- 
 (Hirine, you muft paint the fecond which is fartheft off frotxi 
 the eye darker, the third darker than that,and the fourth dark- 
 eft of all, and fo on if there be more, till the eye can fee no 
 farther. 
 
 XXXII. Tbe reafon is, becaufe the fecond ftaading farther 
 off, comes to the eye with a Ieffer Angle ("as aforefaid)wbere« 
 by i# cannot be feen fo evidently as the firff, the fame reafon 
 is for the third, fourth, fifth, C^e. 
 
 XXXIII. The fame thing is alfo to be under ftood, if the 
 vifible fpeCiesofone or many objedls be feen fideways, foe 
 according to their diftance and obliquity to the eye, fo yoH 
 tnuft (hadow them. 
 
 XXXIV. That part of tbe body muft be made lighteff^ 
 which has the light moft oppofite to it: if the lighc be pla- 
 ced above tbe head defcending ; then the top of thfe head 
 !!^ft &e made lighteft, the ftioulder next li^hteftj itd 
 
130 Polygraphkes Lib II. 
 
 fo yon muft ftiadow, by lofing the light by degrees. 
 
 XXXV. That part x)t the body which ftands fartbeit out, 
 mutt be made lightett, becaule it comes nearelt to the light.-, 
 ■nd ibe light loies io much ot its brigbtnels, by bow much 
 any pan cf the body bcods inward, becauie tbofe pans 
 which (tick out, do hinder the Glory and full Brightneis of 
 the light from tbofe parts that fall anything more hollow. 
 
 XXXVI Tiierefore, by bow much one part of the body 
 fticks cut beyond another, by fo much it muit be made 
 lighter than the other, aad c contrario, (o much the darker. 
 
 CHAP. xxrx. 
 
 Of Colors more particularly, 
 
 I. r^K?'' '* * good color, and much in ufe for lliadowj, in 
 ^-^ Pidures of the life, both for Hair and Drapery : In 
 Landskips it is ufed for Rocks and High-ways. 
 
 II. Pink,, the fairett, witb blew, makes the fafteft greens 
 for Landskip and Drapery. 
 
 III. Sap-green and green-bice are good in their kiad \ but 
 the firft is fo tranfparent and thin, the other of fo courfc 
 and grofs body, that in many things they will be ufelcfs, 
 efpecially where a beautiful green ('made of Pink and Bice 
 mixed with Indicoj is required. 
 
 IV. XJmbir, is a greaiie foul color ; but being calcined 
 and grouDd, it works lliarpand neat. 
 
 V. Spanijfh'hrott'n, is exceeding courfe and full of gravel ; 
 bsing prepared, it is ufed for a mixture made of Red- 
 lead mixt with a little Umber, which makes the ftm« 
 color, 
 
 VI. Cole/jj sarth or Terra LemnUy h is ufed to clofe up 
 the laft and deepefl touches in the (hadows of Pidures of 
 the life, and in Landskips ; ufe it when new ground. 
 
 VII. Cherry Hone-blacky, is very good for Drapery and black 
 tpparel : mixc with lodicc, it is excellent for Sattin ; it ap- 
 pears more beautiful or ihininp if mixed wirh a little white: 
 if deepned wiin Ivory-black, in hard reiie(ilion>, and ftrong 
 deep toncbeSj it is wondeirful fair. 
 
Chap. JO. Makifig Original Colors, 131 
 
 VIII. Ivory hlac\^ it ferres for a deep black, but is noceafis 
 so work wijbout h be well lempered with Sugai-candy, to 
 prevent peeling. 
 
 iX. ^d lead, well wafti'd, is a good color, but Vermilion 
 for thofe pieces which require an exquilite rednefs. 
 
 X. Indian- Lake, is the dearelt and moil beautiful of all 
 ordinary reds ; k is to be ground as wi-iue-lead, and mixt 
 with a litile white Sugar-candy and fair water, till the color 
 and Sugar- candy be throughly diflblved, which being dry 
 will lie very faft, without danger ^ cracking or peeling. 
 
 X 
 
 CHAP. XXX. 
 
 Obfirvations of mahlng fome Original Colors* 
 
 I. T" O make white-lead. 
 
 A ptji in o an earthgn pot or Crucible feveral plates of 
 fine Lead, cover ihem with White-wine Vinegar, covering 
 ihetop of the pot clofe with clay, bury it in a Cellar for (even 
 or eight weeks, and you will have good white lead upon 
 ihe plates, which wipe off. 
 
 II. To make Verdigrife. 
 
 This is made by hanging plates of Cdpper over the futnes 
 of AquafortH, or fpiric of Nitre, or by dipping them in iliC 
 fame or in Vinegar. 
 
 III. To make an Emerald Color. 
 
 Take Verdigrife in fine pouder, which temper with var- 
 nifli, and lay it upon a ground of liquid Silver barnilhi, and 
 you have a fair Eooerald. 
 
 IV. To make a ^uby colour. 
 
 Mix the fame with Florence Lake, and you Ihall have a vf.^^ 
 ry fair color. • 
 
 V. To make aSaphire color. 
 
 Thefame, '»«;(. Verdigriiemixt with Ultramarine, makes 
 a glorious Saphire. 
 
 VI. To ma\e a Crimfon Velvet. 
 
 Take Turnlble and mix it wirh Tndian-fake fwell ground 
 with gum and Sugarcandvj ! y it full, and when ir i' veec 
 wipe away the color with a dry pencil, where yoo woald, 
 
 K * - [iaf9 
 
i}2 Polygrapljices Lib. II. 
 
 have the beigbtning of the Crimfon Velvet appear, and the 
 ftrongcr refleiflioDS will be well exprefled. 
 
 V i. To mal^ a Silver blacky. 
 
 Tike fine Silver filings or plates, which dilTolve in fpirir of 
 Nitre or W(7«/i/(jm/, and evaporate to drinefs, or precipitate 
 cum Oleo Sulphuru or Salt-water, and you (hall have a fnow- 
 whice precipitate, which mixt with water makes the beft 
 black in the world, to dy all manner of Hair, Horns, Bones, 
 Wo'>d, Metals, C^^:. 
 
 VIII. To make a Murry or Ametbyjl. 
 
 It is made of Indian Lake ground with Gum-Arabick wa- 
 ter only. 
 
 IX. To maJ(e s B^d or I{iihy for Limning. 
 
 It is made of Indian-Lske (^which breaks of a Scarlet color j 
 ground with Gum-water and Sugar-candy. 
 
 X. To mak^ A:{iire blew , or Saphire. 
 
 It is made of Ultramarine of Venice f which is bcftj the 
 befl blew Smalt, or blew bice ground with gum-water only : 
 you may make good fliadowing blews of Indico, Flory and 
 Liimofe, all which need no waftiiog, nor Litmofe no grind- 
 ing, but only infufed in a Lixiviuni of Soap-alTies. 
 
 XI. To make a Green or Emerald. 
 
 It is made of Cedar green : in place whereof, take Green- 
 Bice to draw with : Pink i« good alfo for Landskips, mix- 
 ed with Bice-aOies ^as alfo with Mafiicotand Cerufe. 
 
 XII. To make a TeUowor Tofa:{. 
 
 It is made of Mafticot which is the beft, of which there 
 are divers forts, r;;^. deeper and paler: Yellow-Oker alfo 
 for want of better may do. Shadow Mafticot with Yellow- 
 Oker deepen it with Oker de Luce. 
 
 Xill. To make Vltramarine. 
 
 Take the deepeft colored Lapi La:(uli fbaving few vein* 
 of Gold upon it) heat it red-hot in a Crucible clofe covered, 
 then qaench it in Urine, Vinegar or Water in a Leaded 
 earthen pot, dry it well, then with a pair of pinfers nip off the 
 bard, gray, and whiieft pan from it, and grind the remain- 
 der with honied water as fine as may be, then diy itforufe. 
 The honied water is made of water a quart, boiled with 
 honey two fpoonfuU. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
Chap. 51* Limning totfje Life^bcc. 135 
 
 CHAP. XXXI. 
 
 Thefum of the Obfervat/o^j of Limning to 
 the life in gcfjci'al. 
 
 I. f ET the Table be prepared very exactly by fhefifib 
 *^ rule of the twenty third Chapter of ibis fecond Buck. 
 
 II. Let the ground be of iie(h color, tempering it accord- 
 ing to the complexion to be painted. 
 
 11/. If ir be a fair complexion, mix a good quantity of 
 Red and Wbiie-Leacf together fomewhat thick. 
 
 IV. If fwartby or brown, mix with the former a litilefine 
 Malticot or Englifh Oker, or botb, alwiys* obfervirg that 
 your ground be fairer than the complexion painted. 
 
 For faitnefs may be Jhadotted or darkened at fkafurt ; but if 
 it ^e fad or darl^, you can never heighten it. ^ for in Limnirg, the 
 figure is altoays wrought dotvn to its exail color. 
 
 V. Lay the ground upon the Card or Tablet, with a larger 
 pencil than ordinary, fee from fpors, fcrachesof the pencil* 
 or duft, and as even as polfible may be ; alro let the coloi be 
 rather thin and wateriih than too thi^:k, doing it very quick 
 and nimbly with two or three dafnes of the pencil. 
 
 VI. This done, prepare your fhadows in orJer, by tJte 
 fcventh rule of the four and twentieth Chapter of this fecond 
 Book. 
 
 Vir. Then draw the out-lines oif the face with Lake and 
 white mingled together very fine i fo that if you Ciould mi- 
 ftake in your firlt draught, ycu may vi/i h a (trong ftro-.k 
 draw it true, the other line by reafon of its faintncfs being 
 no hinderance. 
 
 The fe Ikies mufi be truly dratorij fharp andr.eat, tPith the 
 greateft exoHnefs imaginable. 
 
 Vni. Obferve the moft remarkable and deep fhidows 
 which keep in memory when you go over them with mo;e 
 exadnefs; drawing our alfo (\i you fo pleafe) the (h.pc of 
 that part of the body next adjoining to rhe face, x^/y. a little 
 beneath the (houlders, with a Itrong ^.nd dv k color, which in 
 cafe of miftake in proportion may ta/ily be ahered, 
 
 K 3 ' IX 
 
X34 Polygraphrces Lib. II. 
 
 IX. The Sirt fiitiog IS to dead color the face ; the fecond 
 Cciirg is ihe exact coloring and obfervacion of the feveral 
 fhadows, gracei, beauties or dcto:miiics, as they are in Na- 
 ture : the tiiird lilting is making ftuooth vvbai was before 
 rough an;:! rude j cloathing what was naked, and giving 
 ftror.g and deepaing touches to every relpcchve (hidow. 
 
 X. The dead color is thus made. 
 
 Tak« ff the afcrefaid ground (at the third or fourth SeSion 
 of this Chapter) and mix tt iriih fine I{ed lead, tempering it ex- 
 aEiij/ to a dead color of the cheeh and lips, having a great care, 
 that )ou make it Tiot too deep 'j which if light, you may do at 
 ple.'fwe. 
 
 Xi. The face is firft begun to be coloured in the reds of 
 the chfcks and lips, and lomewhat ftrc^ngly in the bottom 
 of the chin fifbeardlefsj alio over, undcuj and about the eyes 
 with a faint rednefs. 
 
 XII. The tm is moft cotninonly rcddifn,as alio fometimes 
 the roots of ;be liair. 
 
 XIII. The ground being walh'd over with this rcddilh or 
 dead color, let rbe fhidows be as wcli bold and lirorg as ex- 
 acfV Slid curious. 
 
 XIV. j4 good Figure, if hut dt ad colored only ^ and feeming 
 near hand very rcugh^ uneven and utipkcfant^yet being boldly and 
 firong'y done ahd fJof^otred tt^ill appear very fmooth, delicatiy and 
 ■ne^f if hut vieived at a diflance frrm the eye. 
 
 XV. Therefore curtojity and neatnffs of Color, is not fo much 
 to be regarded J as bold, lofty,, avd jhcng txprefjlng tt'hat is feen 
 in the life. 
 
 XVI. The next thing to be done is the ufe of the faini 
 blews, about the a)rners arid balls of the eyes and rcmple.*:, 
 which you muft^ork out exceeding fweetly, atid faint by 
 degree*. 
 
 XVII. Always be fure torrake the bard (hadows fall in 
 the dark dde of the face under the nole, chin, and eve-brows, 
 as the light falls, with lomewhat ftrong touches. 
 
 XVIII The light (had ows being donear.J finootbed.worfc 
 »be hair into fucb forms, curlings, and difpolitions as bcft a- 
 
 / dorn the piece. 
 
 ' XrX. Fii ft drato it with ccloYs. neatly and to the life -, then 
 wafhit roughly as the reft ; and-' the next time ftrfeH it : fit' 
 Unzuptbe empty f laces witb color ^ and the partings thereof 
 tPtib b/etf, ■ 
 
 XX. 
 
Chap, 51' Limn'ifigto thcLife^^LC, 135 
 
 XX. And ever remember, when you wou?d have your co- 
 lors or (hadows deep, Itrong, aod bold ; that you do tbem by 
 degrees, beginning faintly, and then encreafing the fame. 
 
 XXI. Firft, ufe the former colors in the fame places again, 
 driving and iweetning tbem into one another, that no pare 
 may look uneven, or with an edge, or patch of color, but 
 altogether equally mixt and difptrkd, lying foftand Imooib, 
 like fmoak or vapours. 
 
 XXII. Secondly, this work being done for an hour or two, 
 lay the ground for behind the Pidure cf Blew, or Crimfon, 
 like to a Satiin or Velvet Curtain. 
 
 XXIII. If blew, let it be done with Bice well tetupered 
 in a (hell : Firft draw the out-linc$ with the fame co!or,with a 
 fmall pencil ; then with a tbin and wateri^ blew walh over 
 the whole ground with a larger pencil. 
 
 XXIV. Laftly, with thicker color cover the fai^e which 
 you before wafli'd, fwiftly, that it dry not before all be co- 
 vered, fo will it lie fmooth and even. 
 
 XXV. If Crimfon, work A?ith Indian-lake, in thofe pla- 
 ces where the ftrong lights, and high rcfiedlions fall, let the 
 light be done with thin and waierift Lskej the deepning 
 and ftrong fliadows, ciofe by the light with thicker color : 
 this done, the Picture will be much changed ; the beauty of 
 theie jRrounds will much darken and deaden it. 
 
 XXVI. Let the apparel with fuitable colors be done only 
 flat with heightening or deepning ; and then go over the 
 face again, reducing the (hadows to ftnoothnefs and neatnefs 
 with a (harp and curiou« pencil : drawing the eyes, the lines of 
 the eye-lids; rednefs of the nef'trils ; foadow of the ears : 
 deepnefs of the eye- brows, and ibofe other remarkable marks 
 of the face. 
 
 XSVJI. So fmeetning the out- lines of the face Chy darkning the 
 ground, above from the light fide, and belotv on the dark^fide) 
 that when the tporl^is done ^ the ground may ft and as it were at a 
 diftance from the face behind i and the face may feem tofiand off 
 forttfard from the ground. 
 
 XXVllT. Then go over the h»ir, making it light or deep by 
 the life: and in apparel make ibe feveral folds and (hadows, 
 and what elfe is to be imitated, as it h in the life it (elf; 
 lightning the lines with the pureft white, a little ^leilow a,fd 
 fome blew j and deepning wish Ivory black . and bei^-ii- 
 ning with black mixed with a little Lake or Indico. 
 
 K 4 xurx 
 
J ^6 Tolygraphices Lib. II. 
 
 XXIX' This done, aod the pcrfon gone, your work beiug 
 yer rough, by your felf polish it, and ftrive to make it fmooth 
 and pleafanc, filling up the empty places, and fweetniog the 
 fhac'ows, wbicb yet lie uoeven aod hard. 
 
 XXX The apparel, hair, and ground being finilhed, now 
 give {tror:g touches for' the rounding of the face ; aod obferve 
 wbatfoever may conduce to liknels and rcfcoablance, as 
 moles, fmilings, or glancings of the eyes, motion of the 
 mouth, ©"c. 
 
 XXXI. For which purpofc,you may find an accifion of dif- 
 courfe.or caufe the perlon to be in acf^ioo, and to look merrily 
 and chearfully. 
 
 XXXII. Laftly conclude, that the eye gives the life; the 
 ■ofe the favor ^ the mouth the likeoels ; and the chin the 
 grace. 
 
 XXXIII. In fa?r colored Drapery, if the lightning be done 
 with fine fliell Gold it will add a mo(t wonderful lufture, 
 and be a Angular ornament to your works i and if this Gold 
 be mixt with the very grouncUit ieif, the apparel will appear 
 much the fairer. 
 
 XXXIV. The Dead coloring, of a whole figure defigned for 
 Htjiorical Limning. 
 
 It is twofold. I. To temper a fic-fli color fomewhat light- 
 er than you iuend it to be after it is wrought down by the 
 Variety ofjhadotring mixtures, which fleffi color you muft 
 temper in a large fliell, becaufe ic requires a quantity ; 
 it muft be of a good mixture, neither too thick nor toe 
 ihin. ^ - 
 
 XXXV. Then take a feoofe-quil- pencil full of the color, 
 and lay it on quick, even, and fmooth.on the place where you 
 defign the Figure; if 'you be not very nimble in the laying 
 it on, ir will not lye even. 
 
 XXXVI. The other way ' is thus. Inaead of flefh Color, 
 make ufe of the beft Lakfi- white, well prepared, aod lay it 
 on with the fame fizcd Pencil as before mentioned,and fo you^ 
 dead Color is as the Oyl- painters do, which muft be done 
 free, rough, and bold eft of all. 
 
 XXXVII. But note. That you draw all the out-lines of 
 your figure fnft with a Temperature of Lake andfVhtte, befor^ 
 jou Uy the ground Color for the flefli. Alfo, in dead colorings 
 Jenve not your Ihadows too dark, harlh; or hardj next to the 
 Jigbi, but fains:, even and rjifty. 
 
 xxxviir. 
 
Chap. 31. Limning to the Life^ &c. 137 
 
 XXXVIII. This done, mix FUkf-f^hue, and a little Med 
 fead, with which touch all the deep places both in Face and 
 Body, as your ingenuiiy, or the life fhall direift you. 
 
 XXXIX, This do exiream fainr, beuule if you lay it too 
 dark, you cannot heighten ic up again, wiibouc running the 
 hazard of fpoiling of it, but if too light, you may deepen it 
 by degrees at your pleafure. 
 
 XL. In the face make a deh'cate faintnefs, or faint Red in- 
 clining to a Purple, under the Eyes ; then touch the tip? of 
 the Ears, with the aforemeniioned mixture, as alio the 
 Cheeks, Lips, and the bottom of the Chin, and lo go on to 
 the foal of the foot, touching in all the following Mulcks 
 and places with this glowing color. 
 
 XLI, Then mix Gal-fions and Pink,, for the general ye Howifo 
 glowing JhadowSi and in fome places add to the fortner mix- 
 ture or temperature, a little Lake. 
 
 XL/!. Moreover you will perceive in the life, a faint 
 blew i(h color in feme parts of the body, which you mayex- 
 prefs with a temperature or xnlxxwrc oilndico and lVhite,2.r\d 
 (o proceed according to the fubjed: you draw after, whether 
 the life or coping after Painting. 
 
 XLIII. All thefe (hadows are to be exprefled after the 
 manner of hatching with a Fen, with gentle and faint ftrokes 
 walhing it along. 
 
 XLIV. But in this Dead coloring. See that you cover 
 your ground-color with the aforefaid Red and other (ha- 
 dows. 
 
 XLV. And be not to© curious in the firit working, bur ra- 
 ther make choice of a good, free, and bold following of na- 
 ture, than to affed: an extream near, fer, or ftarcht way. 
 
 XLVL Let not the roughnefs of your color difcourageyou, 
 for that is to be wrought down and couched by degrees with 
 the other fliadows, but not at firft. 
 
 XLVII. Then by degrees fweeten and heighten your flia- 
 dows according as the light falls. 
 
 XLVIIL In fome places touch ir with ftrong touches, and 
 in tho(e places bring your work up together, to an equal 
 roundnefs and firength, not finilhing any part of the figure 
 before the other, but vifiting and working all the parts curi- 
 ouOy alike, but in a manner at Random. 
 
 XLIX. Then obferve the roundnefs, coloring, and Iha- 
 ilowing, or whatever elfe is requifite to the perfe^ion of the 
 Work, " ^ 
 
 L. 
 
138 Polygrap/jices Lib. II. 
 
 L Having done with the fainter (hadows, fvveeten and 
 work them imo the Red ttill. 
 
 LI. Carefully oblerve all the variety of coloring, and with 
 your pencil cuiioufly delineate tl^fe leverai varieties of na- 
 ture vibjch you bad I udely traced out before. 
 
 LII. To do this make ufe of the fame color is the fame 
 pUces as you did before, working, driviogj and fweetening 
 the fame colors one into another 5 that nothing be left in 
 your woik wi^b a biilh edge, uneven, or in a lump, but all 
 as it were foccet, or driven one into another with the point of 
 lomewbat a /harper pencil than you ufe at firft, fo that your 
 ihadov.'s may lye dii'perfed, foil, 1 weec, fmooth, and gently 
 extended one into a noiber like Air, 
 
 LIU. Lziily, ob.^crve, that Skies, Waters, Trees Plants, 
 Flowers, and Giouod, arc all to be dead colored before the 
 Figures. 
 
 LlV. How to draw with Indian Ink- 
 
 It is done after the tnanner of WaHiing : Or, inftead of 
 the Indian Ir\ you may temper Lamp-blacky, or bread burnt. 
 LV. Take your Indian Ink, or Lamp-black ; and temper 
 it with fair-water, in a ftiell, or upon your band, your out- 
 lines being drawn with Cn!e, or Black-lead, take an indif- 
 ferent long (harp pointed pepcil, dip the point into fair water, 
 then dip the pencil into Indian Ink, and draw all your out- 
 lines very faint. 
 
 LVI. (Note that all the temperature of Indian Ink mud be 
 tbin and vvarcrifh, not too black.) 
 
 LVII. Wh<n it is dry, take a little bit of ftale white .bread, 
 snd rub out the our-lines which you drew wiih the Cole, (if 
 too black} then da/li on ycurfliadows very faintly, and deepen 
 ic by degrees, as you (hall think convenient, and finifli it 
 with Srifp'es, it being mcft advantageous to any one that (hall 
 pradllfc /."mnirg. 
 
 LVill. Beware of taking too much color in your pencil, 
 which you may prevent by firft drawing ic through your 
 lips. 
 
 LIX Iq laying on ycur Ihadows, never lay them too deep, 
 but deepen 'hem down by degrees •■, for if too deep you can 
 sever heighten them again. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
Cba^. 32. limmfig Landsfiip, &c. 139 
 
 \^ r.i .c\ X . -^'^ A A LI . 
 
 Cy" Limning La^ulsl{/p^ more pdrikuUriy, 
 
 I. "T'O i^i^e i^be Tablet for Landskip. 
 
 -*- Take A P^^^ cfVeilam.andfioaveittbi^ttponaFrr,r}-ie^ 
 fafiningit with pafte or g'ew and fading it upn a hoard ^ 
 theje manner of Tablets are 'altogether ufed in haly for Land- 
 ikjp, andHi(iary. 
 
 II. If yon draw & Land'^kip from the life, tske your (Na- 
 tion from the riic of ground, or cop of an h\\\, where you 
 ihall hive a Urge Horizon, marking yonr Tablet into three 
 divifions downwards from f he cop ra the bocvO'i). 
 
 III. Tfatn your face being diredly oppofed to theniidd 
 of ihe finitor, keeping yonr bo^iv fised, depicl wba: is diredt- 
 Jy before your eyes, upon your Tabitt on your nrdd.'e divifon, 
 tr.cn turning your htad (not your body) ro the right hand, 
 depiA what is there to be feen : adjoining it ro the fortiier. 
 In lil^e manner doii^z ty that tvhich is io he fecn on the left 
 hand, your Landskip trill be compleated 
 
 IV. M^ke every thing exad.noi or.Iy in refpecfl of diflance, 
 propor'ion and color; bnc alfoin refpcft of form, as if there 
 be HiSs, Dales, R^'cks, Mountains, CatiraFis, ^uines, Atju^e- 
 duSis, Totrns, Cities, Caiiles, Fortificatin^^^, or tpbaffrcver clfff 
 may prefent if felf to vietf ; making alvvTiVS a fiir Sky, ro b? 
 feen afar off; letting your light always defcend from the 
 left hand to the right. 
 
 V. In beginning your work, firft b?gin wirh a large Skye; 
 and if there beany fiiining or refiedrion of the Sun, beware 
 you mix no Red-lead in the Purple of the Sky, or Cloud-, 
 but only with Lake and white : the yellow and whitifh. beams 
 of Sol work with MaP.icot and white. 
 
 VI. Then with a frefii or clean pencil finilh the blcv^ifh 
 Sky, and Clouds, wirh fma'r only ! at the firft \corkTng, dead 
 all the work over, with colors fuirabfe to the Air. grectj 
 Meadows, Trees, and Ground, laying thctn fomewhat fmooth, 
 not very curioufiy, bur fligbtly and ha^'^ily. 
 
 VII. Make a large Sky, which work down, in rbe Hori- 
 zon^ faintly, but fairj and drawing nearer to the Ear:b, lec 
 
140 Polygraphices Lib. IT. 
 
 the remote Mountains appear fweci and mifty, almoft indi- 
 iiioguifliable, joyning with the Qoudsj and as it were loft in 
 the Air. 
 
 VIII. The next ground color downwards muft encrcafe 
 in iragnitudeot realon, as nearer the eyes, (omewbat blewiflj 
 or Sea-green : but drawing towards the firlt ground, let 
 them decline into a reddilh or popinjay-green. 
 
 IX. The lafl ground color, nnult be neareft the color of 
 the earthi vi:{. a dark yellow , brown and green i with 
 which, or fume color eear it, you mult make your firtt 
 Trees. 
 
 X. Making them, as they comcoear in diftance, to encreafe 
 proportionably in color and magnitude, with gr^at judg- 
 ment ; ihe leaves f^uwing and falling one with another, fome 
 appar':tit, others lort in lliidow. 
 
 XI. Let your Landskip lie low, and as it were under the 
 eye (which is mrMt graceful and natural] with a large and full 
 Sky not riling high, and lifting it leif into the icpof the piece, 
 as In me have done. 
 
 XII. Be fare to make your ftiadows fall all one way, vi\. 
 ro make light agajnft darkncCs, and darkncfs againlt light i 
 thereby cxttnding the piofpp(5t, and making it to (htw as a- 
 far otFj by loiing its force and vigour, by ibc remotcnefs 
 from the eye. * 
 
 XII!. In toucb!r.g ih; Trees, Boughs and Branches, put 
 all the dark Ihadovus fiiit, railing the lighter leaves above the 
 darker, by adding Mafticct vo rki; dark green, which may be 
 made with Bice, Piak, and Iridico. 
 
 XIV. The uppeimoft of all, expreft laft of all, by Wghtly 
 louching the exterior edges of fome of the former leaves, wirb 
 a little green, Mafticor, and v^hite : ihedaikeit (hadows you 
 may ^et off with Sap-green and Indico. 
 
 XV. Trees and their Leaves, Rivers, and Mountains far 
 diftant,you muft ftrive to exprefs with a certain real lofcnefs 
 anddelicatenefs. 
 
 XVI. In making Catarads, great falls of Waters, and 
 Rocks, you mu(t firit lay a full ground near the color, then 
 with allrongerin the dark places, and Hight heightning in 
 the ligbr. 
 
 XVI7. Remark all difproportlons, cracks, ruptures and 
 various reprefeniations of infinitely differing matters ; the 
 manner whereof is abundantly expreft, in almoft every 
 Landskip. 
 
Chap. 52. Limm/ig La»dsk]p^ Sec, I41 
 
 Horat. Epod. 16. 
 
 Vos, quibus eft virtus, muliebrem tollite ludlam, 
 
 Errufca praecer 8c volaie liuora. 
 Nos maaet Oceanus circumvagus j arva, beata 
 
 PetamTR arva, diviies & infulas : 
 Reddit ubi Cererem lellus inarata quotaonis, 
 
 £t imputata fiorec ulqu^ vinea. 4 
 Germinet & nunquam fallentis tertnes olivs, 
 
 Sulmque pul!a ficus ornac arboretn. 
 nil's iajuiTs veniunc ad muldlra capells; 
 
 Referique tenia grex amicus ubera. 
 Nee Vefperiinus circurogemit Urfus cvile j 
 
 Nee iniamefcit altaViperis humus: 
 Flurlque felices mirabimur : uc neque largis 
 
 Aquofus Eurus arva radat imbribus, 
 Pinguia nee liccis urantur femida glebis : 
 
 Utrumque rege temperanie Coelitum. 
 Non hue Argoo contend iiremige pinus, 
 
 Neque impudica Colchis intulit pedetn 
 Non hue Sidonii torferunt eornua nautar, 
 
 Laboriofa nee eohors Ulyflei. 
 Nulla nocent pecori contagia, bullius aftri 
 
 Gregem xfluofa torret impotentia. 
 Jupiter ilia piae feerevit littora genti, ! 
 
 Utinquioavit azretempus aureutn. 
 
 Tou nobler fpritSy hence with womens tears, 
 
 Sail from Etrufcan confines free from fears'. 
 
 The] Ear th-encirc ling Ocean fts invites, 
 
 I{ich JJlands, Fields, Fields bleji with all delights. 
 
 fVhere Lands untiH'd are yearly fruitfulfetn^ 
 
 And the unpruned Vine perpetual green. 
 
 Sill, Oiives by the faithful branch are born, 
 
 And mellow Figgs, there native Trees adorn* , 
 
 There, milchy Goats come freely to the fail, 
 
 I^or do glad flocks with dugs difiended fail. 
 
 The nightly Bear roars not about the fold, 
 
 tior hollow earth doth poifonous Vipers held. 
 
 Add to this happinefs.tbe humid Eafi 
 
 Dsth tm fpitb frequent Jho^ers the FisUs infejf. 
 
 Uor 
 
141 Pofjgraphkcs Lib. I!, 
 
 JNor the fat feeds are parcbt in barren land. 
 "The prvers above both tempWingtfich ccrmnand. 
 A'o Bark came hither tPJth Ar^mn oar, 
 JVar landed tvxnt on Colcbis on this fhour: 
 Cadrr.viS with filUdjails turned not thtr way, 
 'Kor painful troops that tvith Uiyflls fir ay. 
 Here amov^/t cattU no contagions are, 
 J<lorfce[ ^ocki droughty pofvtr of any fiar. 
 Wr^en brafs did on the Golden Age intrude^ 
 Jovefor the pious did this place feclude. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIII. 
 
 Of the various For/^Js or Degrees of Coloring. 
 
 I. "T Here are fouf various Forms or degrees of coloring, 
 ■* vi::[ I Of Infants, or Children. Z. Of Virgins^ or fair 
 ff^omen. ^, Naked Bodies. 4. Old or aged bodies. 
 
 II. hif ants or young Children are to be painted of a foft 
 and deiicaie compli xiun ; the Skin and ears of a ruddy and 
 pleafant color, a!mo(i tranlparcnr. 
 
 III. This may be done wirb Wiiire lead, Lake, and a little 
 Red lead -, (hadowing it tbio, faint and fofr ; letting the 
 Cbeeks, Lips, Chin Fingers, Knees, and Toes, be more rud- 
 dy than uihcr parts 3 mik-jog all ibeir Linnen very fine, ibin, 
 and transparent, or perfpicuous, with ftrong touches in the 
 ihickflt toMs. 
 
 IV. Virgins and fair Women are as curioufly to be exprefs'd 
 as the former, but tbeir Mufcles » re to be more apparent, 
 their (hspe more prrfedJ j and their ftiadows to be of a whii- 
 ifh yellow, blewifli, and in feme places almoft purf le, 
 
 V. But the moll- perfedb and exquifite direction is tlie life, 
 ^bicb ought rather to be followed than any tbinj^elivered 
 by rule. 
 
 VI. Frr thejhadntrs here, mix tfhite tPttb Pink ; and Jndico 
 and tthite y and infome places Lake ^ iPith A little Indico and 
 whi- 
 
 VII. As for Tfomens Bodies,' viz. Juch as are naked, they are. 
 to be reprefemed foft, round, plump, gentle and tender, and 
 ttithou: ma.ny Mufdes. 
 
 vui 
 
Chap. 39* Degrees of Colorwg, i,^^ 
 
 VIII. On the contrary, Mens Bodies are to be reprefented 
 firiing^flurdy,^out, and vigorous with the Mufcles exactly pla- 
 ced and dravn^ tpbich to do with judgment andVndetfiandino-^ 
 <^equires time, Jludj, and knowledge in Anatomy. 
 
 IX. Naked Bodies are to be painted ftrong, lively, and ac- 
 curate i exadly matching the refpedfcive pairs of Mufcltsand 
 Nerves, fixing each Artery in its due and proper pla«e, gi- 
 ving each limb its proper motion form and Situation, with 
 its true and natural color ; all which to do well may be the 
 ftudy and pradice of altnoft ones whole life. 
 
 X. Old or aged Bodies ought to be eminent for exzfi and 
 curious Ihadows, which may be ipade of Pink, Lake, and 
 Ivory-black, which made notable ihadows , in appearance 
 like the wrinkles and farrows of the face and band in ex- 
 cream old age. 
 
 XL Let the eyes be dark, the afpcd melancholy, the hair 
 white (or elfe the pate baldj and all the remarks of Antiqui- 
 ty or age be very apparent and formidable. 
 
 XII. Pink,ntixtwith Lake and ^d-lead, make an excellenP 
 Jhadom for old Mens Boiies: hut for the extreamefl or deepeH 
 Jhadowings cither in face or body, mix Lak? and Ivory-black, 
 which will make an excellent deep (hadom, and wiS be<very ufe- 
 ful in exprejjingof the feveral furrows and wrinkjes in the face 
 and hands of people extreamly Aged, with their dark -Ej^-^ <««'' 
 melancholy Afpe^s. 
 
 Xin. But notwithftanding all the foregoing rules, the poft- 
 ure or form of ftanding, and being, either of the whole body, 
 or any of its parts, ought diligently to be obferved, that the 
 life may be imitated. 
 
 XIV. In which, it pnfy lies in the breft and judgment of 
 the Painter to fet it off with fucb various colors, as may beft 
 befit the refpe(5tive complexion and accidental Ihadows of 
 each accidental pofition or poflurc; which are fometimes more 
 pale, fometitnes more ruddy j fomeciixies taore fainc, fometiines 
 more lively. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
144 Poljgraph/ces Lib. II. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIV. 
 
 OftheLintniffg of the Skje^ Clouds^ &C. 
 
 1. r OR a beautiful Sky, fitted for fair weather, take Bice 
 
 ' tempered with white, laying it in the upper part of 
 the Sky, (as you fee cecdj under which you may lay a thia 
 or faint purple with a fiEall foh bruih: working the under- 
 moft purple into the uppermoft blew ^ but Tots that the blevr 
 may itand clear and perftdl. 
 
 I/. Then for the Horizon or near the fame lay a fine thin 
 Malticot, which work from below upwards, till it mix with 
 the purple, after which you may take a ftronger purple, mi- 
 king here and there upon the former parple, as it were ihe 
 form of Clouds, as nature requires. 
 
 ill. Upon the Mafticot you may alfo work with Minium 
 mixed with Cerufe, to imitate the fiery beams which often 
 appear in hot and clear Summer weather, 
 
 iV. To imitate glory, with a great fliining light of a yellow- 
 ilh coloror the Sua-beams, you muft take Mafticot or Saf- 
 fron raixt with Red-lead, and heightned with Hiell goId,anci 
 the like. 
 
 V. A Cloudy Sky is imitated with pate Bice, afterwards 
 fhading the Clouds with a mixture of fevertl colors: a fair 
 Sky requires clouds of a greater fliade, with purple, 
 
 Vf. The clouds in a rainy Sky, muft be fliaded with lo- 
 dico and Lake : in a night Sky, with black and dark blew, 
 fmosky, niaking a blaze with purple, Minium and Cerale. 
 
 VII The clouds in a Sun rifing or fetiing maft be done 
 tvith Minium^ Cerule and .purple, making underneath the 
 clouds frittering f-.ro>ks, with Minium and Mafticot, or 
 Minium and Saffron ; fothat the fcaiiering upwards may ap- 
 pear fainfj and below, afar off near the Landskip, fome- 
 whar fiery. 
 
 VI}! A fiery Sky, let be made with a pale blew, fmooth- 
 ing ir dtnvr vardu whirh afrervA.»rds, you muft mingle with' 
 a lironp Red-I^ad mixi wirh CeruTc traking long dimina- 
 liveftroaks like the Sun-beams upnnrhe blew Slcy,wiih which; 
 let fall fooie purple ftroaksj much like tbs faid beams ; ibttfi 
 
 fweeiea* 
 
Chap, 36. Of Mount ams^^c. 145 
 
 fweeteo one into another with a fofi brufli pencil, wet in gum- 
 water, not too ftrong. 
 
 IX. Laftly, you may make a fair Sky, by ufing fair Bice 
 alone, and tempering it by degrees with more and more 
 white , fmoothing one into anoiber, from above down- 
 wards, and fhading ic as you Aail fee reafon and nature 
 require. 
 
 CHAP. XXXV. 
 
 Of the Limnwg of Towns, Caflles^ and Rnlnes, 
 
 I. npHofe Towns, or Cities, which feemai fartheftdi- 
 ■■- ftance, muft have but little fliadowing or heigbtning, 
 and fometimes none at all, tbefe if they appear againft the Sky, 
 muft be laid with Bice, and a little purple, and fliaded faint- 
 ly with a good blew. 
 
 II. Thofe which lie at a farther diftance, muft be laid 
 with Bice and purple as aforefaid, and (haded with light 
 blew, and heightned wich white. 
 
 III. Thofe which appear at an ordinary diftance, muft be 
 done with Vermilion and purple, and fhaded with a ftrong 
 purple (haded wiib white. 
 
 IV. Thofe which are near, muft be done with Vermillion 
 and white, and then (haded with a ftroug Vermillion and 
 brown Oker, mixt with white. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVL 
 
 Of MoHntains, Mills ^ and the likei 
 
 I. 'THofe Mountains which are next in fight, muft be laid 
 ■*■ with a fair green, and Ihaded with Sap-green ; fome • 
 times with brown Oker, and French Berries, to diftinguiih 
 tfeem from fucb as are farther off. 
 
 L £E. 
 
1^6 'Polygmphices Lib. IL 
 
 II. Sacb as lie farther off, maft be laid with green , blew, 
 and Malticot, and be (haded with blew, green^ and Ver- 
 digrife. 
 
 III. Such as lie yet farther, muft be laid with fomc ftrong 
 blew, white, and Bergh-green, and Ihtded with ftrong 
 blew. 
 
 IV. Such as lie yet farther, muft be laid with ftrong blew 
 and white, and (hided with blew only. , 
 
 V. Such as lie yet farther, with Bice and white, aod fta- 
 ded with Bice. 
 
 VI. Such as lie farther off, are only laid with white, and 
 (haded with a faint Bice. 
 
 VII. Fields being near, muft be done with a (ingular good 
 green, the which muft always be fainteft, according as they 
 are farther diftant ; heigbtning them with Mafticot, or a 
 light green, and Hiadowing with Sap-green, but not too 
 much. 
 
 VIII. Thofe which lie far, are to be laid with a 
 French berry yellow, made of a blew greenifli ; fliaded 
 with Oker. 
 
 IX. And in Fields, Hills, a«d Dales f whether near or far 
 off) there are many roads, paflages and ways, which muft 
 be laid either fainter or ftronger according to their diftance 
 and iituation. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVII. 
 
 0/ Trees^ Boitghs^ Cottages^ and the like. 
 
 L T* Hofe Trees df divers colors which ftand upofi the forc- 
 * ground, muft be laid with divers colors, as with Ver- 
 digrife. mixt with other gre^, or wiih Mafticot, and Bergh- 
 green mixt. and then fliaded with Sap-green j which you may 
 heig-htcn with Mafticot, mixt wirh White-lead. 
 
 II. If they appear yellow, ufe Verdigrife and Mafticot 
 mixt.and fhadow with Verdigrife. 
 
 III. If they be of a whitifli color, let them be laid with 
 Verdigrife mixt with Wfaitc-lead, and fhade tbem with Ver- 
 digrife, mixt with Indico faint i heighten them with Cerufe, 
 
 thai 
 
Chap. 58. Coloring Naked Figures. 147 
 
 thattbey may look of afaint ydlow green; or elfe wica a 
 little IndJco and yellow. 
 
 IV. Tbofe which ftand at a great diftance, lay with Indi- 
 CO, and white, and Hiadow wicb Icidico, and heigbcen with 
 the fame made a little Igbier. 
 
 V. If Trees be very old with mofs upon ihem,give them 
 the appearance of green and yellow, which coiri nix with 
 Pink, and Bergb-grecn : if they be of a wduilh yellow, do 
 rbem with Pink and white mixt with a little green 
 
 VI. Country Cottages lay with light Oker, which order 
 according to the newneis or oldnefsof the building. 
 
 Yil. Cottages of Timber, let be laid of the color of Trees 
 and Wood-work. 
 
 VIII. Thaicbt Coitagej if new, lay with Pink, Ihadow 
 with brown Oker, and heighten with Mafticoc mixt with 
 white: but if old, lay them with brown Oker raixt with 
 white, and heighten with uic fame. 
 
 IX. Straw colors at a diftance are done with lodico and 
 white, mixt fometimes with brown Oker, and fliaded with 
 indico. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVIII. 
 
 Of the Coloring of Naked Figures. 
 
 I. pOR PVomen and Children, take the beft Flake Wfafte-' 
 -*• lead, and a little good Lake, with which if you pleafe 
 you may mix a little Vermillion, but take heed that your 
 inixture be neither too red or too pale, but exadlly agreeable 
 tii the life it felf ; the which in this cafe is the beft di- 
 re<ftor. 
 
 it. This being dry.touch the lips, cheeks, chin, fingers,and 
 toes with thin Lake, and then heighten with white mist 
 with a little Lake or Vermillion. 
 
 IIL But if you would cover them fomewhat browni(h,mis: 
 vj'nb your Carnation, a little brnw^. Oker ; and (hade it 
 Ivith Red'Oker, and coal-black with a liule Lake, 
 
 L% IV, 
 
148 Polygraphkes Lib. II. 
 
 IV. In old Women take White, Vermillion and Brown- 
 Oker, and give the luftre where it ought to be with Vermili- 
 on mizc with a little Lake. 
 
 V. Shade it wich Red-Okcr and Lake,or with Wood foot, 
 or Lamp-black, and heighten with white mixt with a fmall 
 quantity of Vermillion. 
 
 VL Dead Children and young Women.paint with Brown- 
 Oker, white and feme Veimillioo,and Ihadow the fame with 
 the foot of wood. 
 
 VII. Dead old Women color with Brown-Oker mixt with 
 a iitde white, which Ihade with a ihin foot of wood firft, 
 then with a flronger. 
 
 VIII. Young men paint with Cerufe, Vermillion and Lake, 
 making it a little browner than for young Women ; giving 
 them lultre wich Vermillion and Lake, ihadowing with Lamp- 
 black and Brown-Oker ; and heightning with Cerufe and 
 Vermillion. 
 
 IX. Old Men Limn with Vermillion, Brown-Oker, and 
 white J (hade with foot and Lamp-black; heighten with Ver- 
 million, Brown-Oker, and white, and give it a luftre with 
 Lake or Vermillion. 
 
 X. Dead men color with Brown-Oker, white, and a little 
 Vermillion, as your difcretion fliall inform you, and (hade 
 with I'oor, or Lamp-black mixt with a little Cerufe, 
 
 XJ. Devils, Satyrs, and the like Limn with brown Okcr, 
 mixt with a little white and red, which mixture let be made 
 fome part whiter, fome part browner ; and ftroogly (hade it 
 with foot, as your own ingenuity may inform you. 
 
 [C HAP. XXXIX. 
 
 Of the Coloring of Hair. 
 
 L *T'He Hair of Women and Children is colored with 
 ^ limple Brown-Oker, and heightned with Mafticot : 
 The fame in rbe hair of men, only making it fadder or 
 1 ghter as the life requires. 
 
 Jl. Hair which isbiatk may be done wich foot, or Lamp- 
 black, but it will abide no heightning. 
 
Cliap. 40. Of Walls ^ Chambers^ 8cc. 1 49 
 
 III. Cbildreas Hair is fometimes laid with brown-Oker 
 and White, and heightned with the Came ; and fometimes 
 with Alora. 
 
 IV. Sometimes alfo they are done with light-oker, and 
 decpned with brown-oker, and heightned with Mafticot 
 fimple. 
 
 V-. Old Womens Hair with brown-oker and black, height- 
 ned with Brown-oker and white. 
 
 VI. In Gray Hair take more blaek than wbite,and heigh- 
 ten with pure white. 
 
 CHAP. XL. 
 
 Of Walls^ Chambers^ ani the Uk?, 
 
 I. pOR a brick Wall take Vermillion and wbiie,and (hi" 
 
 ■*- dow with Red-oker. 
 
 II. If the ground of the wall is laid with black and white, 
 (hade it with a thin black, if with Red-Oker and white, 
 ftade it with purple: or with Lake and black, or Red- 
 oker fimple. 
 
 Ill If it be laid with black, white, and purple. Ihade it 
 with purple and black. 
 
 IK I( the wall belongs to any Chamber or Hall, ha- 
 ving Figures or Statues ; fo order and temper your colors, 
 with fuch diftind:ion,tfaat the Figures and Wall be not drown- 
 ed in each other. 
 
 V. Sandy fore-grounds do thinly with brown-oker, fad or 
 light as the life prefents ; (hadow the fame with ihe fame 
 brown-oker, and Rocks with Red-oker, according as ihey 
 are near to, or far from the fight. 
 
 L3 CHAP. 
 
i$o Folygraphkcs Lib. 11^ 
 
 CHAP. XLI. 
 
 Of Marble Pillars^ Rockj, and the like, . 
 
 J. \J{ Arhle muft be done with a good and light pencif, after 
 ' *'*-* a carelefs manner in imiiation of Nature, wherein 
 all fucb ftains, colors, veins: and reprefeniations of the faces 
 of living things tnult be carefully obferved. 
 
 JI. The like is to be obferved in Recks, of Sandy colors, 
 and ragged forms ; which ff feen at a great diftance, muft be 
 colored with thin Bice, and then be<ghtRed with purple and 
 white, and fliaded with Smalt or a deep blew. 
 
 III. If ibcy feetu near, color them with brown-oker mixt 
 with white, which go over again with Vermillion mixt with 
 white, after which lay here and there feme Verdigrife mixt 
 with fome other green, 
 
 jr. la tbefe works you muft make fpots, ftains and break- 
 ings, with hatchings, which (hade with the foot of Wood or 
 Lamp-black mixt with a little white. 
 
 CHAP. XLII. 
 
 Of the Colon ng of Ale tab. 
 
 3. Tu Oit Gold color, take Red-lead, Saffron, and very light 
 *• Oker, with which color all manner of Cups, Di(hes 
 
 and the like, which Hiade with foot, and heighten with Ihell 
 
 Gold. 
 
 IT. For Silver, lay a thin white, which fliade with a 
 
 thin blew, mixt with a little black, and heighten wijh (hell 
 
 Silver. 
 
 ///, For Tin atid Iron, take white aod Tndico, and fliade ft 
 
 wifb Indico and Bice, acd heighten with vybicc or flieli 
 
 Silver, 
 
 iV. 
 
Chap. 4^. Of Coloring Flowers. I5'i 
 
 IV. For Brafsi take thin Pink, fliade it with Tndico oaixc 
 with greet), or withalmoft all ladicoj and beigbcen it with 
 Oiell Gold. 
 
 V. For Copper J take Red-okerand white, (hade it with 
 Red-oker, and heighten with Red-oker and white, heighr- 
 ning alfo here and there, where the light falls, with Ihell 
 Silver. 
 
 CHAP. XLIIL 
 
 Of the Coloring of Flowers. 
 
 i. *TrH£ Tulip, draw it firft with black-lead upon a white 
 ^ -*- ground, then fliade it a little fas for a white Flower) 
 with thin Jadian Ink, or with green ysHow Ink, or with 
 black-lead ground with thick guaa- water. 
 
 II. Then lay on your feveral colors refembling Nature, 
 which being dry, fliade wirh a higher color, and then farther 
 fliadovv it, according to the nature of the flower. 
 
 III. So that being fioiflied it may be like flame, Red, 
 Blew, Lake, Purple, Spotted, or other wife, in ioaitatiori of 
 the life. 
 
 IV. The Damask ^pfe, lay with Lake mist with white, 
 ihadow with the fame mixt with thin Lake ; and heighten 
 with white, 
 
 V. The green leaves, are done with Verdigrife mixt with 
 fome French berry green, fliade it with Verdigrife mixt 
 with Sap-greeo j the ftalks lay fome what browner with 
 browa-oker. 
 
 VI. I{ed I{pfet do with fine Lake mixt with white, fliade 
 it with brown Lake, and heighten it with Lake mixt 
 with white. 
 
 ViL PVhiteB^ei w/ar with Flake Lead, fliade it with 
 white and black (but the chief fliadows with a Itronger 
 black) and heighten with white. 
 
 VIII. The little thrums fwhich (omt erronioufiy call kt6^) 
 m the middle of the Rofe, lay with Mafticot, and fliadovy 
 ^vith Minium, and heighieti with white. 
 
 L 4 Xh 
 
^ 5 2 Polygraphkes Lib. II. 
 
 JX. The Clove gilUflower is done almoft like the Red- 
 rofe: tbefpeckling or fpotcing of it is done vvithLakci thofe 
 vvbicb are lighter, with a lighter red upon a pure white ; 
 thofe like flames wirh Vermillion and Lake, which (hade 
 with a ItroDger Lake j md fpeck the white with Lake and 
 Vermillion, to refemble the life. 
 
 X. The green ft alkjt or branches and leaves lay with Bergh- 
 green, and fhade with Sap-green. 
 
 XI. The Marigold do with yellow Orpiment and Mini- 
 um, fliadowvvith Vermillion and Lake mixi with Minium; 
 ard heighten with white and Maftigor. 
 
 XII. Corn-flowers lay wiih blew mixt with Tome white, 
 (hftdow with Indico, and (hadow with blew and white. 
 
 CHAP. XLIV. 
 
 Of RadjJJKS^ Turneps., Melons , Cucumbers.^ 
 and Cabbage. 
 
 I. Ty Adifhes are done with white, (haded with Lake, and 
 •*-^ as it were behind fweetned with purple : and fome- 
 
 times with green from the top downwards. 
 
 ir. The green leaves at top with Verdigrife mixed with 
 
 Sap-green, (haded with Sap-green, and heightned with 
 
 Maltifot. 
 
 III. T«r«f/»j dr* laid with white, (haded with foot ; ihe 
 leaves as the Radi(h leaves. 
 
 IV. Tellow Melons with yellow, (haded with brown-oker, 
 the V'f ins with a It ronger brown-oker, and then heightned 
 wifh white, 
 
 V. Green Melons with Jodico tnixt with Verdigrife and 
 Sap-green, (haded with Sap green and /ndico j and heightned 
 ▼ritb Mafticoi. 
 
 VI. Gucttmhers, the ends with a thin yellow, the middle 
 with green, fweetned the one into the other, and (haded with 
 Sap-green ; but the whole fruit with brown-oker, the fpecks 
 lay with red and black to the life. 
 
 VII. Cabbage white with very thin yellow, and in fome 
 places with very thing rcen foryelIowi(hgrcen)fweeining with 
 
 very 
 
chap. 4^ • How to CoUr Fruits, 155 
 
 very thin brown-oker mixt witb S*p-green, heighten with 
 pure white, 
 
 VIII. Cabbage red, lay with purple, (hade w it Lake, 
 and heighten with purple tnixi with white. 
 
 ^ CHAP. XLV. 
 
 Hoiv to Color Fruits. 
 
 I. f^Herries, witb Vermilion and fome Brazil, (hade with 
 ^-^ Lake, heighten with Vermillion mixt with white. 
 
 II. Heart Cherries in the middle with Vermillion and 
 Lake mixt with white, the Circumference remaining wiiitith, 
 here and there fweetning them with Lake, and iaeigbtning 
 with white, or mixt with a little Lake. 
 
 III. A Pear with Mafticot, (haded fweetly with brown- 
 oker; its blu(h witb Lake not too high, heighten with 
 white. 
 
 IV. Apples with a thin Mafticoi mixt witb Verdigrife, 
 (hade them with brown-oker,and give their biulh with a tbia 
 or deep Lake (refembling Nature,) and heighten with white. 
 
 V. If you will bive them very high, mix your white witb 
 fome Maftitot, but this muft be according to the condition 
 of the Fruit whether ripe or unripe, red, yellow or green, 
 
 VI. Mulberries with a very Uroeg Brazil, and then lay'd 
 over with black, fo that between the ft^lks and berries they 
 may look a little reddilh according to Nature. 
 
 VII. Strawberries with a white ground, which draw over 
 with Vermillion and Lake very thin ; (hade it with fine Lake, 
 and heighten witb Mal^icot mixt with Minium ; and then 
 with white only fpeck them with Lake, by one fide of which 
 put a fmaller fpeck of white. 
 
 VIII. fT^all-nuts with their green on, with Verdigrife 
 tnixt with Sap-green, (hade witb Sap-green and a little 
 white. 
 
 IX. fVaS-nuts without their green, with brown-oker, (ha" 
 ded witb foot. 
 
 X. 
 
154 Polygraphices Lib. II. 
 
 X. Bleaf Plumbs with purple, (hadowed with Bice, and 
 about (be Italks with a little green, well fweemed i heighten 
 with purple and white. 
 
 XI. ^hite Plumbs and P?acbes with thin Mafticot, Ihided 
 vith brown-oker j give them a blurti with Lake, and heighten 
 them with white. 
 
 XII. I{ed and Blew Grapes with purple, (haded with bleW| 
 and beigbtned with white. 
 
 XIII. White Grapes with thin Verdigrife (Ailed alfo 
 S/i/jmyfe green) mixt wiib Mafticot, fliadow with thin Verdi- 
 grife i and heighten with Maflicot naixt with white. 
 
 CHAP. XLVf. 
 Of the Lmnhg of Fowls. 
 
 I. "T He £<»^/f with black and brown-oker, fliadow it with 
 -■■ black, ihe feathers heighten with brown-oker mixt 
 with white. 
 
 II. The bill and claws lay with Saffron, and fliade it with 
 foot or Lamp-black : the eye? with, Vermillion beigbrned with 
 Mafticot, or with Saffron flirded or deepned with Vermillion j 
 let ibe taloDJ be done with black. 
 
 ni. The Stran with white mixt with a little black, heighten 
 it with fine and pure white, (a that its plumes or feathers 
 by that beightning may look well : the legs with a black 
 color. • 
 
 IV. The bill with Vermillion, fliaded with Lake : the 
 eyes yeltovv with a bbck round in the middle ; from which 
 falls a blackifli vein, defcending to the bill. 
 
 V. The Gonfe rvitb piore white than black, w:^. a light 
 gray, heighten it with a gray white ; the legs with black : 
 the bill like the Swan. 
 
 VI. T//e Dmc/;. with a light grey, the head with adtrk 
 blew, and dark green neck fweetly eoterwoven, the belly 
 with white, the legs with black mixt Tvith a little white, 
 (^c. butbefureto imitate the life. 
 
 Vlf 
 
 I 
 
Chap. 47 Of Limning cf Be aft s. 15" 5" 
 
 VII: The Turk^ey with black tai^i with a little white, frpia 
 the back towards the bell/ whiter by degrees, bat the belly 
 Ipeck with black, and in like manner the wiags. 
 
 VIII. Let hitn be fliaded with black, the wings with 
 Indico, ihaded with ftronger Indico, the bill with black, the 
 eyes blew, heightoed with white. » 
 
 IX. He being angry, the naked skin of his neck will be 
 blood red, which lay with VernailHon mixt with Lake, 
 fliaded with Lake : but otherwife lay ic of a whitilh blew- 
 color. 
 
 X. The Griffon with Saffron, fliaded with brown-oker or 
 foot. 
 
 XI. The Pheafant with grey, made of white and black,the 
 feathers of a white grey,the whole muft be fliaded with black, 
 and heightned with pure white ; the eyes like the Fa', on, the 
 legs with Pink, and Ihaded with black. 
 
 XII. The Falc0n with brown oker, and black mixt with 
 white, and rtiadowed with black, and fprinkled upon its 
 breft i heighten it with white, let his talons be black,above 
 the eyes lay with Saffron, and fliade with Vermih'on, the 
 bill with grey. 
 
 XIII. 7he S f or k.'^iih grey, heightned with white, and the 
 corners of his wings ('near one halfj with black, his long bill 
 and legs with Vermilion, fliaded with lake. 
 
 XIV. The Owl with Cerufe, black and foot, fliadowed with 
 foot, and heightned with yellow-Oker and white, foraetimes 
 white alone, the eyes yellow, circled with white, the legs of a 
 brown yellow. 
 
 CHAP. XLVII. 
 Of Limning of Be aft s. 
 
 I. ^"^eep lay wuh a thin white,fliaded with Indico and fctdi:, 
 and heightned yvith yvhite. 
 n. Hogs lay with brown-oker, fliaded vvith root,and height- 
 ned with Mtfljcot : you may as you fee occafion color the hair 
 here and there with ftronger brown-oker ; his eyes vvirh 
 "'-'•"■ ■■ "-' Ver- 
 
1^6 Polygraphices Lib. IL 
 
 Vermilion, which heighten with Mafticot, bis mouth with 
 Indico.or white and black, Ihtded with black. 
 
 III. A Bear with brown-oker, red-oker,and black mixti 
 Ihadow with foot alone, or inixt with black, and heighten 
 with bfown okcr and white. ' 
 
 IV. A Woalf with brown-oker and foor, (hadow with 
 more foot. 
 
 V. y? ^ra^^f^W/ with black, white, and brown oker, flia- 
 ded with black and foot, or black only j the mouth with black 
 and red-oker, fhaded with black and loot heightned with 
 red-oker and white. 
 
 VI. Tht E/f/ii^<7M/ (which isof a Moufe grayj with black 
 and white mixr with (oor, and (haded with black and foot, 
 and heightned with the fame, with a little more white. 
 
 VII. The mfe at th end of his trunl^. inwardly mud be 
 laid with Vermilion and Cerufe, fhadowed with black, or 
 black mist with Lake : in the fame manner the inner pan of 
 the ears, the ey«^s with white tending to a grey, 
 
 VIII. Mice are colored as the Elephant: l{^ts a little 
 browner. 
 
 IX. The "Unicorn with a pure white, ftiaded with black : 
 the chaps red, the eye and hoofs with a thin black. 
 
 X. The Hart with brown-oker, (haded on the back with 
 foor, which fweerly drive towards the belly, and (hade over 
 again with a ftrongfrr foot. 
 
 XL The necl^ nnd belly with wbice, the mouth and ears a lit- 
 tle reddilh, the hoof black, the horns with loot, and (haded 
 with foot mixt with black. 
 
 XII. Ti[)f H/W with the fame colors as the Hart, but thin- 
 ner, and higher, not lo brown. 
 
 XIII. The Coney with black and white, his belly all 
 white, Aveeined with black i and heightned with a ftrongef 
 white. 
 
 ^IV. The Hair with brown-oker, bis belly below a little 
 wbitiih ■■, (hade it on the back with foot} and heighten on the 
 belly with white. 
 
 XV. ApeSy Morikeyt and the like, with Pink and black, 
 heightned with Mafticot and white; the face lay with a 
 thin black mixt with foot, (haded with black and Pink mixt 
 with a little red-oker. 
 
 XVI. Cats if gray and brownifli, or tabby, with Jodico' 
 blew and white, heightned with pure white, and (haded with 
 
 Indian- 
 
Chap. 48. Of Limning Serpents. 157 
 
 Indian-blew and black mixc: in other colors ufe yoar 
 discretion. 
 
 XVII. The Afi with black mixi with whire like grey j if the 
 Afs be of a mingled brown, black and white mixc with 
 btown-oker, (haded with black in the mouth i heighten with 
 white. 
 
 XVIII. T/6* Lepoard with brown-oker and redoker mixc 
 with black, Ihadovv it with foot, the fpois with red-oker and 
 black, the mouth with black and white : heighten him with 
 light oker. 
 
 JrtX. Horfes, Dogs, Oxen and fuch like,if white,with white 
 mist with a little foot, or oker, (haded with a little black and 
 white, and heightned with perfe(^ white. 
 
 XX. If 0/4 Cheftnut-brown^ with red-oker and black 
 (haded with black and foot, and heightned with red oker and 
 white. 
 
 XXI. If an Afh-grey^ with black mixt with white, (haded 
 with black, and heightned with white.. 
 
 XXII. Jf black, wnh a thin black, (haded with a ftronger 
 black, and heightned with black and white. 
 
 XXIII. A bay Horfe with Vermilion and brown-oker ; 
 or only with red-chalk, (haded with red-oker, and heightned 
 with red-chalk mixt with white. 
 
 XXIV. Iffpotted, by mixture of the aforefaid colors and 
 difcreetely putting every one in its proper apartment or 
 place. 
 
 CHAP. XLVIII. 
 Of the Limning of Serpents, 
 
 I. '^ He Serpent on the back with Bice, and down- wards 
 towards the belly with a pale black, the back fpeck- 
 led with black fpecks. 
 
 II. The Adder with red-lead, Vermilion and Saffron, with 
 blew in the back, and on ih? btlly below Mafticoi and white, 
 fpeckled all over with black fpots 
 
 III. Toe Crocodile with & diik thin green* from the back 
 downards to the belly, 
 
 IV. 
 
1^8 Polygraphices Xiij. 11. 
 
 IV.Btlow the belly withMafticotjfo that the yellow andgreeo 
 may melr, or vanilTi away into one anoiherjfliadovv him with 
 Indido and fmalt, and heighten the belly vvich Mafticot and 
 Tvhite. • 
 
 V. The mouth before and within redifh, the fcales black, 
 ibeclavva ofblackilh green, the nails vvbolly black. 
 
 VI. The Frog with a fair green, fpeckled with blacky 
 and towards the belly with green mixt with ~ Mafticot, 
 fweetned with green (pockled : the eyes with Saffron, and 
 black round them, the back beightned with Saffron. 
 
 CHAP. XtlX, 
 
 Of Lmn'iHg Waters and Fijh. 
 
 I. IT/'Ater at a diftance with white and lodico, fliaded with 
 '^^ Indico mixt with Bice, and heighmed with white : 
 if near the Horizon much like the Sky. 
 
 II. JVaters near lay with ftronger Indico, heighten and 
 (hadow with the fame mixt with Bice : laftly heighten with 
 pure white. 
 
 III. iVaters nearer with ftronger Indico, fliaded and height • 
 ned as before. 
 
 IV. Waters in fields overgrown, with Pink and the like j 
 always imitating Nature. 
 
 V. Fijh in green Waters, with Indico mixt with French' 
 berry-yellow, (haded with a thin Indian-blew, and heightned 
 with pure white. 
 
 VI. But Fifloes ought alfo to be done according to their Nature 
 and Color, for fome are jellote, fame brown, fome fpeckled, fome 
 grifled^fime black,S<c. in all which to eonferve in Figure the true 
 Idea joa ought to takf dire^ions only by the life, 
 
 ISm. Secunii F J A' IS. 
 
 P OL 2- 
 
 i 
 
159 
 
 TO LYG RJT HICES 
 
 Liber Tertius. 
 
 Of Painting, WaHiing, Coloring, &>€. 
 
 Containing the Defcrifti^n and Z^fe of 
 all the chief InJirnmentS' and Materia 
 als, and the way and manner of Workc 
 ing. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Fainting in General, 
 
 !. r-« % HE Art of Painting (which is tfce imitatiod of 
 I Nature^ confifts in three things, to wit, Defign^ 
 ■B Proportion, and Color : all which are exprell 
 in three foris of Painting, vj:(. Landikip, Hi/icryund Life. 
 
 11. Landikip or Perfpediive, wonderfully refpeds freedom 
 and liberty, to draw even what you pleafe. Hijlory refpedls 
 proportion and figure : Life refpedis color j in each of which 
 there is a neceflary dependency of ^all the other. 
 
 Hi. The work of the Painter is to exprefs the exadl imi- 
 tation of natural things; wherein you are to obferve the ex- 
 cellencies and beauties of the piecCj but to refufe its 
 vices. 
 
 IV. 
 
l6o Poljigraphkes Lib. Ill, 
 
 IV. For a piece of Painting may infome part want Diligenctt 
 BoUnefs, Subiilty, Grace, Magnificence^ &c, while it isjuffict- 
 ently in other parts excellent ; and there/ore you are not fo much 
 toimttaie Ornaments, as to exprefs the inward fowet and 
 ftrengtb. 
 
 V. In Imitatidn, always be fure to follow the examples 
 aod panerns of the bdi mafters i left evil precedents beget in 
 you an evil habir. 
 
 Vi. The force of Imitation refides in the fancy or imagr- 
 nation, where we conceive fwhai we have feen^ the form or 
 Idea of that, or tbofe things which we would reprefeot in 
 lines and colors. 
 
 VII. This Fancy or Imagination is ftrengthoed, by lodging 
 therein all variety of vifible rarities; as i. Forms made by 
 light and darknefsj fucb as are to be feen in Summer io the 
 clouds, near SuQ-letting (which vani/h before they can be imi- 
 latedj 
 
 VIII. 1. Forms made by proximity or diftance of place.fuch 
 as are Trees, Woods, BuildiQgs,appeariag perfe(5l being near, 
 or confufed in their parts being far off. 
 
 IX. 3. Forms ofdfeams^ofwbich(wbeiher fleeping or wak- 
 ing/ the fancy maft be fully polfett. 
 
 X. Where Defjgn is required •, you njuft fancy every cir- 
 cumitance of the matter in hand, that in an inflant, with a 
 nimble hand, you may depi(5l the fame with livelinefs and 
 grace. 
 
 XI. Slow performance caufes a preturhation in the fancy, cooling 
 of the mind, and dejlru^ton cftbat pajjion which Jhotild carry the 
 work^ OH : but quickjiefs and diligence brings forth things even 
 excellent indeed : Care, I nduStry and Exerctfe are the frops^fup- 
 porters and upholders of Art. 
 
 XII. Be lure you dwell not too long upon defigning : alter 
 not what is well, left for want of exquifite jadgmeot you 
 make it worfe : and if in dcfigning, you want that ability to 
 follow ihcquicknefs of fancy, fubmir to a willing negligence; 
 a carekfs operation adds fometimes fuch a fingular grace, as 
 by too much curiofity would have been totally loft i then by 
 reviewing what is dcntf, make a regular connexion of all the 
 Idei "s conceived in your mind. 
 
 XIII. With ^;><r//w amend thofe things which others juftly 
 find fault with ; the reprehenfions of an Artift are as demoo- 
 ftrativc rules of experience •■, and weigh every ones opinion 
 for the advancement of Arc. 
 
 XIV. 
 
Ghap. 2. Of Paitttifig in Oyl, d'c. 16 r 
 
 XIV- Laftiy, be fure your piece be of a gcod DefJgn^hh- 
 flory ot Life • that the parts be well dippofed, theCbaraiil- 
 ers of Perfons, ^ro^er ; the Form magjiijicene, the color lively, 
 and the fpifit bold: that it may appear to be the woik of a 
 nimble fancy, ready memory .clear judgment, and large expe- 
 rience. 
 
 CHAR 11. 
 
 Of Fainthg in Ojl, and the Materials thereof. 
 
 I. T)Aioiing in Oyl is nothing but the Work or Art of Lim- 
 -■- ningyperformed with colors made up or mixed wiih 
 Oyl. 
 
 1\. The Materials of Painting arc chiefly Seven, i. The Ea" 
 fel. Z. The Pallet. 3. The Streining Frame. 4. The Crimed Cloath. 
 3. Pencils. 6. The Stay. 7. Colors. 
 
 III. The Eafe I is a Frame made of wood (much like ^ 
 Ladder) with fides flat, find fall of holes, to put in two pins 
 to fet your work upon, higher or lower at pleafure i fcmetiing 
 broader at bottom than at the top: on the oackfide wheieuf 
 is a ftay, by which you may fee t!ie Eajel more, uprigh: v- 
 fioping. 
 
 JK The Pallet is a thin piece of Wood, YPf ar-tree qr Wal- 
 nut) a foot loDg, and about ten inches broad, almoit like aa 
 Egg, at the narroweft end of which is made an hole to put 
 in the thumb cf the left hind, near to which is cut a notch, 
 that fo you may hold tbe Pallat in your Land, Its ufeis to hold 
 and temper the Colors upon. 
 
 V. The Streiving Frame is m&de c( vvood, to wbfch wifh 
 nails is faftned the Primed Cloathy which is to be Paiotrd 
 upon. 
 
 Thefe ought to be offtveraiJi:(ss according to the hignefi cf the 
 Cloath. ' ' , 
 
 VI. The Primed Clcaih is that which is to be P^iintcd up- 
 on; and is thus prepared. • , ., 
 
 Tillies good Canvas ayid frnocth !'■ orer trith a Jlick:P'''^e, fii,e 
 it ever with fi'^^e., and a little h6i7cy\ and let it dry ; then tvhite\ 
 it over oha mth tthiting andfi:{e mixed .0:!h a little hony^ fa 
 
l'6x Folygraph'jces Lib. III. 
 
 is the C loath prepared, on which you mxf dratp the PiQure with 
 a Coal ; and lajily lay on the Colors. 
 ' IVberenotCi honey keeps tt from crackjing^ feeling $r breaking 
 
 (Ut. 
 
 VII. Pencils are of all bignefTcs, from a pin to the bignefii 
 of a finger, called by feveral names, as Duckj-quiB fitched 
 Aud pointed ; Goofe-quiS fitched gnd pointed i Swans- quiUfitchtd 
 und pointed -y Jewilltng pencils, and hriflle pencils : fome in 
 quilis, (omein Tin cafes, and fome in fticks. 
 
 VIII. The Stay or Moljltck,^ is a Brazil ftick (or tbe like) of 
 a yatd long j having ac the one end thereof, a little ball of 
 Couen, fixed hard in a piece of Leather, of the bignefs of a 
 Cheflouc > which when you are at work you mud hold in your 
 left hand ; and laying the end which hath the Leather ball 
 upon the Cloath or Frame, you may reft your right arm up- 
 on it, wbiltt you are at work. 
 
 IX. The Colors are in number feven (utfupr^) to wit. 
 White, Black, Red, Green, Yellow, Blew, and Brown, 
 
 Of which fome may he tempered on the Pallet at firji, fomt 
 tnufi be ground, and then tempered y and other fome mufi be burnt , 
 ground, and lajily tempered. 
 
 X. To make the Size for the Primed doath at the fixth 
 Secilionof this Chapter. 
 
 Hake Glew, and boil it weB in fair water j till it be diffolvedy 
 snd it is done. 
 
 XI. To make tbe Whiiing for tbe fistb 5edioa of this 
 Chapter. 
 
 Take of the aforefaid 5;;^f, mix it with whiting grotmd, and 
 fo white your boards or cloath (being made fmooth) dry them, 
 and white them afecondor third time i lajily, f crape them fmooth, 
 anddr^w it over with White- lead tempered with Oyl. 
 
 XII. To keep the Colors from skinning. 
 
 Oyl Colors (if not prefently tifed) Will have a skin grow over 
 
 . tJjem, to prevent which put them into a glafs, and put the glafs 
 
 three or four inches under water Jo wiB they neither skin nor dry. 
 
 XIII. To cleanfe the Grinding-ftone and Pencils. 
 
 If the Gritjdinz [lone be foul, grind Curriers fhavings upon 
 itt and then crumbs of bread, fo Will the filth come off: if tbe 
 pencils befoul, dip the ends rf them in oyl cf Turpentine, and 
 fiuee:{e them htween your fingers, and they will be very clean. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. J. Colors in General, &c. 163 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 Of the Colors in General, and their fignifications, 
 
 I. 'T'He chief Whites kvVtivimg in Oyl are, White-Icid, 
 
 ^ Cerufe and Spodium. 
 
 II. The cKiti Blacks are Lamp-black, Sctcoal-black, Ivory- 
 black, Charcoal, and JEartb of Colen. 
 
 III. The chief /^f<^j are, VermiUioBjCinnaber Lake, Red- 
 lead, Indian Red, Ornocto. 
 
 IV. The chief Greens are, Verdigrife, Terra-vert, Ver- 
 diter. 
 
 V. The chief Tellows are, Pink, Mafticot, Englilh Oker, 
 Spruce Oker, Orpiment. 
 
 VI. The chief J5/f/rj are, Blew Bice, Indico, Uliraojarilift 
 Smalt. 
 
 VIL The chief Browns are Spanift-browo, burnt Spruce 
 Umber. 
 
 VIII. Tfaefe Colors, Lamp-black.Verditer, Vcrmih'oD,Bice, 
 Smair, Mafticot, Orpiment, Ultramariee, are not to be 
 ground at all, but only tempered with oyl upon the Pallet. 
 
 IX. Thefe Colors, Ivory, Cerule, Oker and Umber are 10 
 be buret, and then ground with oyl. 
 
 X. All the reft are to be ground upon the Grinding ftone 
 wiib Lin feed oyl (except White-lead, j when it is to be uled 
 for Linnen, which then is to be ground with oyl of Walna;s, 
 for Linfeed oyl will make it turn yellow. 
 
 Andnotpfince we are engaged to treat of colors^ it may neither 
 leunnecejfary^ nor unufeful for the young Artift to kflom tbeirnar ' 
 tural fgnifjcations; which takf oifollotveth. • 
 
 XL Blew fignifieth truth, faith, and continued zStiStiom ; 
 A^ure, Conftancy ; Violet, a religious mind. 
 
 XII. Orange tawny fignifies Pride, alfo integrity j TrftPw;, 
 forfaken ; Limmon, jealoufie. 
 
 XIII. Green fignifies hopes : Grafs-greent youtfajyouthfuloefs, 
 and rejoycing: Sea-green^ Inconftancy. 
 
 XIV. I^d fingnifies f uftice, Venue and Defence : Flame-, 
 color. Beauty and Defire : Matdens-blu/h, Envy, 
 
 Mi XV. 
 
1^4 Voljgvaphkes Lib. IIL 
 
 XV. TcHcw fignifics Jealoufie: pei fed: yellow, Joy, Ho- 
 nour, and greatnels ofSpirir: Gold color. Avarice, 
 
 XVI Flefocolar lignii^cthL^icivioaintfs ; Carnation, Cra.(ty 
 Sub;i'ty and Deceit: Purple, Fotiiwde ind Strength. 
 
 XVII. JVilloai Color (jgnifieih forfaken : Popingjay-green, 
 Wanionne's : Peach colory Love. 
 
 XVIH- ^H/Vtf fjgnitieth Death: Mtik^irbtte, Jnnocency, 
 Purity, Truth, JnU'griiy : Blacl^, Wildom, Sobriety, and 
 M,^iirn'r)g. 
 
 XlX. Siratp cdor Ggn'iBcthVknxy : I^iji of Iron, Witbered- 
 nefs ; £>-.-77/Kff Religion and holioers. 
 . XX. The W'-itC; Black,. I((d, and Green, are colors held/acred 
 in the Church c/Romt : VFhite is worn in the FelUvals of 
 ViVg'ns,Sainrs, Confellbrsand Angels, to ftiow their Inoocency : 
 I{ed in the Sokmnities of the Apoftles and Martyrs of Je- 
 fus: B/^cJ!^ in Lent and other Fa iHng days: Green is worn 
 between the F.pifhar.y and SeptuageJJima : and between Pc«- 
 tecoil and advent. 
 
 CHAP. iY. 
 Of the fittirjg of Colors for Paint iffg 
 
 I. r TPon the Pallet difpofe the feveral colors, at a conveni- 
 *''* cnt diitance, that they may not intermix : firft lay 
 onthe Vet mi lion, then the Lake, then the burnt Oker, then 
 the /ndian Red, Pink, Umber, Black and Smalt* each in their 
 order, snd lay the White next lo your thumb, becaufc it is ofc- 
 nefl ufed, for with it all the (liadows areto be Jigbtncd,- md 
 next the Whirea ftiff fort of Lake i ibws is the Pallet fur- 
 fflflu'd with fir pie colors for n face. 
 
 N et to temper them for jhadotving various compkxioKS do 
 th^. 
 
 II. For .1 fair complexion. 
 
 T^h Pf'^hite one dram, l^ermiUim, Lake, of each ttvo dram.r^ 
 temper fhe*n, end Ijy them a fide for the deepc/l Carnation of the 
 f.scr • t.-i part of the afortfaid mixture put a little more trhite^fcr 
 la I jr^bt Carnal if.T! ; and to pa>t rf that put rn ore rrhitt (ufhich 
 ttrr,pa on the Pal! i'O for the light el} color fthefac^. 
 
 HI. 
 
•Chap. 5^. Coicrs for Velvet, r^5 
 
 III. The faioifliadows for the fair Complexion. 
 
 Tal^ Smalt ^ and a little white, for th eyes ; to part of that 
 add a. little Ptnli and tamper by it feif for faint greenifto jhadi-irs 
 tn the face. 
 
 IV. The deep fiadows for the fame, 
 
 Takf Cinnaber Lake Pink^and blacJ^of each,a f'^^cierit tjua-itity, 
 tphich temper together'-,Jf the Jhadotrs ought to be redder than tnhat 
 ts temperedy add more Lakfi iifyellott'tr, add more Pink, i if lte;P' 
 er or grayer ^add more blacl^: thus (hall ibe_ PaUet he fiaedtnth 
 colors. 
 
 V. For « brown or fwarthy complexion. 
 
 The Jingle colors being laid on the Pallet at bt/ore, and_ i.'mpe- 
 red : to the U'hite, Lake and Vermilion, put a little burnt Ol^^r 
 for a TatOvy ; and for heigh tnimi^ add fome Tellow O'^er^ [» mtiuh 
 as may juji chani^e the colors. The faint and deei] fh.idoips are 
 the fame as at r/je third and founfaSe(ilion of this Chapter. ' 
 
 VI. For a Tawny compipxOn. ' ~ 
 
 The colors are the fame iptth the former, but the f.T^idou's are 
 different ; -trhich nttijl be made of burnt Oker and ^'m/'^r, 
 (a'hich tvtll fit well:) if thefhadotps be not yelloiv enough, add- a 
 little Pint{ to it. 
 
 VII. For a black complexion. 
 
 The dar\ fhadotvs are the fame tvith the former i but f.r 
 heightning take IVhite, Black, Lak'-, and burnt Oker ; in tem- 
 pert*ig of which put in the white by degrees, till you come to 
 the light ejl of all. M-'hers note that the finglc colors at firfi laid 
 upon the Pallet and ternpccd ferve for foadoms for ail com- 
 plexions ; and that all deepmn^s ought to be with black, Lal^ 
 and Pink, tempered together. 
 
 e H A p. V. 
 
 Of Colcrs for f^tlvet. 
 
 I. pOR black.Vchet.Tsiks. Lampblack and Verdig rife for 
 the firit ground ; that b^iilg dry.iakc /voiy biaik.snii 
 Verdigrifcrhadow it with White-lead mixt w\^h L feoi p-bla<.k., 
 J/- For G WW. Take Lamp-black and Whi'^e-iead, a^d wjrK 
 it like a RuOet Velvet, and ler^it dry -, ttien draw it o^ei wub 
 Verdig rile tempered with a iir;fe Pir,k. 
 
 Ms L[> 
 
l66 Polygra^hices Lib. III. 
 
 HI. For SeA-green. Take only Kerdigrife, and lay it over 
 Ruireiilf n Grafs-green^ put a little Malticoi to it; (hadow 
 tbele greens wub Rulfei, which lay according to the deepneft 
 of the greet). 
 
 JV. Por B^ed. Take Fermilion, and ftiadow it with Spanifli- 
 brown ; and where yoa would have it darkeft, (hadow with 
 Seacoal- black and Spanilh brown with the aforefaid colors, 
 dry it, and then glofs it over with Lake. 
 
 V. ForCrimfonor Carnation. Take rermilion, lo which 
 tdd White-lead at pleafure. 
 
 V[. For Bktp. Take Smalt tempered alone. 
 
 VII. For TeHow. Take Malticot and yellow Oker, and 
 where you would have it darkelt, (hadow it with Umber. 
 
 VIII. ForTawny. Take Spanifh-bio^vn, White-lead, and 
 Lamp-black, with a little Ferdigriie, lolbadow where need is ; 
 when dry, glofs it over with Lake and a lictle Red- 
 lead. 
 
 IX. For hair color. Take Umber ground alone j and where 
 it fliould be brigbteft, mix form White-lead about the 
 folds, lighten or darken with Wbice-lead and Umber. 
 
 X« For y^yfc-co/or. Take Charcoal, black and White-lead; 
 lighten with White-lead : a color Itkf to a dark^ ^Jfef «"'^ ^» 
 an Afh-coler. 
 
 XI. For Purple. Take Smalt and Lake, of each alike, tem- 
 per them (light or deep as you pleafej with white-lead. 
 
 XII. Lafily note, thatin painting f'clvet you muft aC firft 
 work it fomewhac fad, and theD give it a fudden brigbtnefs. 
 
 CHAP. vr. 
 
 Of Colors for Sattins. 
 
 L COR Blacky Take Lamp-black ground with Oyl, and tem- 
 ^ pered with white-lead ; and where you would have it 
 
 fliine moft, mix Lake with the white-lead. 
 
 II. For Green. Take Kerdigrife ground alone and mixed 
 
 wirh white-lead ; adding Pink where you would have it 
 
 brighteft : to the deepeft (hadows add more Terdigrife. 
 
 HI. For TeSf.tP. Take Mafticot, yellow Oker and Umber 
 
 fgroood each by themfeives) where ic Ihoald be brighteft ufe 
 
 Mafticot 
 
Chap. 7* Colors for Taffaty, &c. \6j 
 
 Mafticot alone ; where a light fliadow, ufe Oker, where dark- 
 eft ufe Umber. 
 
 /v. For Purple. Take Smalt alone , and where it fliould be 
 brighteft u(e whiie-lead. 
 
 V. ForI{ed. Take Spanilh- brown (ground alone) mix it 
 with Fermilion, and where it Ihould be brighcelt mix white- 
 lead with the Kermilion. 
 
 VI. For White. Take White-lead (ground alone) and 
 Xvory-black, which temper light or dark. 
 
 Vir. For Bletf. Temper Smalt and White-lead; where 
 it fliould be faddeft, uie Smalt ; where lighieft, White- 
 lead. 
 
 VIII. For Orange Color. Take Red-lead and Lakes ; where 
 brighteft. Red-lead, where faddeft. Lake. 
 
 IX. For Hair Color. Temper Umber and White-lead ; 
 where it fliould be brighteft, puc more Whire-lead,and where 
 the greateft fliadow, ufe Seacoal-biack mixed with Umber. 
 
 CHAP. VIL 
 
 Of Colors for Taffaty , C loath and Leather. 
 
 \, *'rjiffaties are Painted much as Sattin, thus : Take fuch 
 -*• colors as are fit for the purpofe, and lay them one bj 
 aooiher upon the work, and fliadow them with others. 
 
 II. Clotb is the fame work with Sattin, fa?e, you muft nor 
 gire to Cloth fo fudden a fliining glofs. * 
 
 III. Cloth of Gold is made of brown Oker and liquid. 
 Gold •, water and heighten upon the fame with fmall gold 
 ftroaks. 
 
 IV. For Buff, mix yellow Oker and White-lead •, and 
 where it fliould be daik by degrees, mix it with a little Um- 
 ber; whan you have done, fize it over with Umber and Sea- 
 coal-black. 
 
 V. For TeSottf Leather, take Mafticot and yellow Oker, flȣ- 
 dowit withUaaber. 
 
 VI. For black Leather, take Lamp-black, and fljadow it 
 with White-lead. 
 
 VII. For white Leather, lake White-lead, and fliadow it 
 with Jvory-black. 
 
 M 4 CHAP, 
 
t63 PoIjgr.?phkes Lib. Ill, 
 
 CHAP. vur. 
 
 0/ Colors for Garments in general. 
 
 I. Y'OK Back, Ler ihe dead color be Lampblack and Ver- 
 
 -^ digrife : being dry, go over with Ivory-black and 
 Verdigrilc jbuc before ibe fecond goiog over, heighten ii with 
 white. 
 
 if. For huiir Color. Take Uaiber and White for [he 
 j^rfunds; Umber and black f^r the deeper Ihadows; Umber 
 god Eng! fh Okcr for ;he meaner Ihadowi i while and Eng- 
 hih Oktr for the hcjghtning. 
 
 iJi. F.r bietp. Take /ndico and White: firft lay chc 
 White, th:n the Indico and White mixed i then deepen it witb 
 J'.di.o, and when dry, glaze it with UUiamarioe which will 
 never (^de. 
 
 Smalt wiH turn black.., and Bice will turi} green, 
 . IV. Por FUrple. Take Smalt tempered wiih Lake and 
 White-lead i then heighten with White-lead. 
 
 V. For a fad R^d. Take Indian Red heightned with 
 Whire. 
 
 VJ. For a light I{ed. Take Vermilion, glaze it over with 
 Lake, and heighten it with White. 
 
 VII, For a Scarlet, Take Fermilion and deepen it with 
 Lake, or Indian- Red. 
 
 VI [1. For Grsen. Take Bice and Pink, heighten it with 
 MaOicot, and deepen with Indico and Pink. 
 
 IX. Foryel'oi:^. Take Mafticot, yellow Oker, Umber ; lay 
 Mslticoc and white in thu* lighted places j Oker and White 
 in rhe mean places, and Umber in the darkelt, glaze it with 
 Pink. 
 
 X. For Orange Color. Lay the lighteft parts with Red- 
 icid and white, the mean parts wich Red-lead alone ; the 
 deeper pans wiib Lake, and if need is, heighten it with white. 
 
 Xf. For a fad Green. M'X Indico with Pink : Y or a light 
 Green mix Pink and Malticot j for a Grafs-green qaix Ferdi- 
 
 XII. 
 
chap. 9. Colors for, Metals, ^c. i^g 
 
 XII. Remember always to lay yellows, blews, reds and 
 greens, upon a wbiie ground, for tbac orjly giveth chem lik. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 > Colors for Metals and precious Stones, 
 
 1. TyO^lron. Take Lamp-black and Wfaite-Iead ; if you 
 
 * would have ic ruUy, take Seacoal- black, and mix- it 
 with a httle white. 
 
 \L For Silver. Take Charcoal-black and White-lead ; 
 v.'bere you wcuid have it darkeit, ufe n-iore Charcoal •, work, 
 Silver foo^pwhtt ruitilh, and give it afudden glofs with White- 
 lead only. r 
 
 Jll. YqtGoII TakeLike, Umber, Red-lead, JViafticot; 
 lijiy the ground with Red-lead, and a litrle dry Pink : where 
 you would have it darkelc , fiiadow it mo(t with Umber, 
 where ligbteft with Mafticor. 
 
 Note, in griming I^d-Iead for the Goldfi:{e, put in a little 
 Verdigrife to make it dryfopmr. 
 
 IV. ¥ or Pearls, Temper Charcoal-black with white-lead, 
 till it be a perfed: ruiTet ; then make the Pearl with it, and 
 give it a fpeck of White-lead only JO make it Oiine. ' 
 
 IVherenote^ that Cerufe tempered with Oyl cf white Poppy » 
 exceUent to heighten up Pearls. 
 
 V. Fo^ precious Stones. For Rubies, {^"c. lay their counter- 
 feit grounds with transparent colors , a'ndLake, Verdigrife and 
 Verditer give them a, fliining color. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
1 70 Folygraphices Lib; III. 
 
 i ,....■ . ■ " I.- . 
 
 C H A P. X. 
 
 Of Colors for Land ski p. 
 
 I. pOJ^ alii^ht Green, ufe Pink and Mtfticot befgfained* 
 ^ witb white : for a fad GrMnJndico and Pink faeigbcned 
 with Malticot. 
 
 II. For fame Trees ^ take Lake, Umber and White, /or other i 
 Charcoal and .vbite for others Umber, black and white, with 
 fome green ; and lometimes Lake or Vermilion, with other 
 colors. 
 
 III. For PVuoJ lake Lake, Umber and white,, mixing 
 fometimes a little green witbal. • 
 
 IV. For Fire, lay Red-lead and Vermilion tempered toge- 
 ther where it isreddelt : where it is blew, lay oyl, Smalt, and 
 white-lead : where it is yellow, take JVlafticot, and wcrk it o- 
 yer in certain pTaces ; where you would have it (hine mo(t 
 with Vermilion. 
 
 V. For an A:{ure Sf^ie, which feems a fir off, take Oyl , 
 Smalt, or Bice, and temper them with Linfeed-oyl. But grind 
 them not: for Smalt or Bice utterly loje their color in grind 
 ing. 
 
 VI. For a I{ed Skie, take Lake and white ; and for Sun- 
 beams, or yellow clouds aC Sua-rifiog or fetting, take Mafli- 
 cot and white. 
 
 Vll For ,a Night Sl^ie^ or clouds in a ftorm, take Indico 
 deepned with black, and heigbtned witb white. 
 
 Fill. For JVood Colors, they are compounded either of 
 Umber and white, Charcoal and white, Seacoal and white^ 
 Umber black and white ; or with fome green added : to 
 which you may adjoin fometimes, as in barks of Trees, a lit- 
 tle Lake or Feruiillion. 
 
 IX. Lastly for the fraFlical performing of the 0ork^ have 
 recourfe totbe rules delivered in chap, i f, lih. I. and chap. 
 ^n.libAV 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. II, Painting of the Face, 171 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 Of the Painting of the Face, 
 
 I. pjAve your necefTary pencils in readinefs, as two pendia 
 *• ■*< ducks quill fitcbed j and two ducks quill pointed ; 
 iwo Goofe quill fitched, and two pointed : two briftles both 
 alike ; one Swans quill fitcbed, and one pointed ; one lar- 
 ger pencil in a Tin cafe fitched -, and a briftle of tbe fame 
 Bignefj, every one having a ftick of about nine inches long 
 put into the quill tbereofj tbe farther end of which ftick mutt 
 be cut to a point. 
 
 - II. Have the pencils in a readinefs in your left hand, with 
 the pallet upon your tbutub.prepared with fit colors, and your 
 moljiic^ to reft upon j you muit work according to the di- 
 redtions following. 
 
 III. Tbe clotb being prinaed, and ftrained upon the Frame,' 
 take a knife, and with the edge thereof fcrape over the 
 cloth, left knots or tbe like fliould trouble it. 
 
 IV. Then fet the Frame and Cloth upon the Eajel, at a 
 convenient beighth, that fitting on a Itool (even with the 
 party you drawj you may ffave the face of the Pidure equal, 
 or fometbing higher than your own : fet tbe Eafel to the light 
 (as in Limning we ha ve taught) letting it come in upon your 
 left hand, cafting tbe light towards tbe right. 
 
 V. Let the Perfon to be drawn, fit before you in tbe poft- 
 ure be intends to be painted in, about two yards diitant 
 from you. 
 
 VI. Then with a piece of painted chalk draw the propor- 
 tion of the face upon the clbtb, with tbe place of the eyes, 
 tioCey mouth, ears, hair, an^d other poftures. 
 
 Here ^ no difficulty in t hi, if you mi fi much , tbe colors (fill 
 hrinji all to right again. 
 
 VII. Then take a pencil. Swans quill pointed, and begin 
 to paint fome of the iigbteft parts of the face with the 
 lighteft color, (as the beigbtning of tbe forehead, nofe, cheek- 
 bone of the lighteft fide :J tbe mean parts next (as tbe cheek- 
 bone of the dark'lide, cbia, and over the upper lip: 
 
 proceed- 
 
iV^ Folygraphkcs Lib. \\\. 
 
 proceeding, gradually lill you come to the redde(t parts of 
 
 aU 
 
 Vllr. L«y faint grecnilh fliadows in convenient places, and 
 where it is neceirary to foften barlhtr fliadows, but take heed 
 ot puttiug green where red ftiuul J b^\* 
 
 iX. The fiint- or light pans thus done, take one of the 
 Goole quill poihted, or Djcks quill fitcbed, and begin at the 
 eyes to ihadow wish Lake, guing uvcr the nofc, mouth, 
 cojnpafsofthe car, (3c. before you lay on any color, wiping 
 it lightly over with a lin.ntn rag to prevent ihs overcoming 
 of the other colors. 
 
 X. The colors both light and dark being put in, take a great 
 iitch pencil • and i'weeten the colors therewith, by going over 
 the Ihadows with a clean fufc pencil, which being well hand- 
 led, vvil! drive and intermix cbe colors one into another, that 
 they will look as if they were all laid on at once, and not 
 at divers times. 
 
 Wi:ere note, that the bigger pencils you ufe, the ftveeter and 
 hsttsr your worl{^tt*itl lie. 
 
 XL At the [econd fittings begin again wi:h clean pSncrls, of 
 foch bignefs as the work requires, and obferve well the 
 perfon, and fee what defe^fls you find in your work at firft 
 (itting, and amend them : then bcigbreo or deepen liie flia- 
 dows as occafion requires. 
 
 XII. Ld/?/)- take a Goofe quill bfiftle, and put in the bair 
 about the face (if iliere muft be any) and rub in the greater 
 hair, with the greater briitle, heightning it up wi;h the Goofe 
 quill penci!. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the cleatijjffg of any old hainthg. 
 
 I.. Tj^Ake good wood- afhes, and fearce tbem, or elfe-fbjme 
 *- S.tiaft or powder-blew, and with a Spunge and faif 
 water geatly walh the Pidlure you would cicanl'e ftaking great 
 caicol 'he (hidow?) which doqe, dry it very wclJ with a . 
 ck^nc'.oih. 
 
 II. 
 
Chap. 13- thedeanfir.g^cfan^^ildTainthg. 175 
 
 II. Then vatnifh it over again with fomegood varnilh.bu 
 fuch as may be waftied off again with water if need be. 
 
 We fodfl hereafter fhew the way of making varnijhes of feve- 
 ral forts, meanfeafcn this folktttng may jtrve. 
 
 III. Take either common Varnifli fmade with Gum fan- 
 drackdiflblved in Linfccd-oyl by boiling^ or glair of£ggs,and 
 with your pencil go over the Picture once, tviice, or more 
 therewith as need requires. 
 
 IV. // your painting be Wainfcotting, or any other Joy-^ 
 nery or Carpentry Work, you may take the Wood- 
 aflies (at Secil. i.) and mixing them lomewhat thick with 
 "Water, rub them over the Painting, with a ftiffBriftle Biufli, 
 as a Shoo Brufli, and '\o IcOur, wafh and dry ir, as aforefaid, 
 and rhen varnifli it with common Varnirti. 
 
 V. But if the Painting be more curious, as Figures of Men, 
 Beafts, Landskips, Flowers, Fruits, t3c. then take Smalt only, 
 and with a Sponge wet in Water.cleanfe it asabovefaid genjy, 
 which wafh after with fair Water, then dry and varnifii it, lb 
 will the luftre and glory of your Painting be much reco- 
 vered. 
 
 VI. This cleanfing of Paintings, ought not to be pra(5ii- 
 fed but feldom (w;^. when it is very much foyled) becaufe of- 
 ten and too frequent cleanfings in this kind, will by degrees 
 wear off" part of the Colours : And therefore endeavour .to 
 preferve their firft Beauty, by keeping them from fmoak, 
 duft, flys, ^c. 
 
 VII. All Pidures Cchiefly tbofe performed with mixtures of 
 white Lead; are apt to grow tawny, to tarnifh or grow ruiiy, 
 as may befeeninall old pieces: To prevent this, czpofe 
 them to the hot Sun three or four days in May or '^ur.e : i'o 
 will the ill Colour be much drawn offhand the painting appear 
 more frelhand beautifnf : this dcing yearly, you will wonder; 
 fully preferve them. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
174 Tolygraghices Lib. I If. 
 
 CHAP. XIIL 
 
 Of a Figure in general, 
 
 I. IN every Pidure there are always four principal confi- 
 -•^ derations : to wii, i. Invention, x. Prof onion. 3. Color', 
 and 4. Life. 
 
 II. Invention muft be free, and flow from a general know- 
 ledge of Aniiquiies, Hiiiory, Poetical Fidions, Geometrical 
 conclufions, and Optical confiderations, according to its Situ* 
 ttion or Afpedl, either near or far oflf. 
 
 III. And ibis Invention muft exprefs proper and fit things, 
 agreeing to the Circumftances of Time, Place, Mattery and 
 Per/on i and having refpedt to the modes of habits belongisg 
 10 the Country or People whether Antient or Modern. 
 
 IV. Proportion, Analogy, or Symmetry Cwhich you pleafe) is 
 that which limits each pare ta its proper bignefi, in reip ed: 
 to the whole. 
 
 iVhatfoever differs from this recedes from beauty, and may 
 he called Deformity. 
 
 V. This Proportion is called by Artifts the defigniog lines i 
 which are firft drawn before the whole is painted. 
 
 VI. Thefe proportions or lineal defigns, draughts, and fcetches, 
 may be called PtStme, which being tPeB done, flaem not only the 
 foape, but alfo the intent. 
 
 VII. In lines only, ipe may drattf the proportion of a Blacky 
 Moor, andfuch as fkall he Itkf html Nouf this skill proceeds from 
 the very higheji principles of Art. 
 
 VIII. Color is that which makes the Pidure referable what 
 we define to imitate j by mixing of various colors together. 
 
 I^- In making any thing apparentticisnecelfary to exprefs 
 its oppofire or contrary. 
 
 X. So light and fhadotvs forteard, fet forth Paintings out- 
 wards, as if you might take hold of them with your hand: black' 
 nefs makes things Jeem farther off, and is ufed in things hol- 
 lofp, as Caves, PVells, Sec. the more deep the more black: 
 
 XI. Brigbtoefs exceeds and is as light fparklirg m iplecdor. 
 
 IP 
 
Chap. 13. A Figure ijf general, 175* 
 
 It M ufed in the Glory of Angel: j twinkjing of Gems, Ar- 
 9noryy Gold and Siher vejjils, fires and flames. 
 
 XII. In Ptioting of a m&a, grace eacb limb with its pro- 
 per and lively color ; the black make fincerely black j the 
 white pure, with rednefs intermizt. 
 
 XIIJ. But to paint purely the exquifite beauty of a wo- 
 man,is never to be well done fexcept it be by a very ingenious 
 Artift indeed j her rare complexion being fcarcely poflible to. 
 be imitated with colors : There it none really kjiows the exaii 
 mixture for fuch a Countenance. 
 
 XIaT. Life or Motion is that from whence action or pafHon 
 doth refult, which in colored Pi\5lares is feen with a lively 
 force of Gefture and fpirit. 
 
 XV. Ta Jo flj^ if fi necejjary that the Artijh be wei acquainted 
 with the nature, manners, and behaviour of men and momen, 
 m in anger, fadnefs^ joy, earneftnefs, idlenefs^ love, envy ^ fear, 
 hope, defpair, &c. Every difturbance of the mind alters thf 
 Countenance into feveral pojiures. 
 
 XVI. The head caft down flicws humility ; caft back.arro- 
 gancy or fcorn ; hanging on the neck, languilhing; fiififand 
 fturdy, morofity of mind. 
 
 XVir. The various poftnres of the bead fliew the paffioos j 
 the Countenance the fame ; the eyes the like ; and in a word, 
 all the other pans of the body contribute fotuetbiog to the 
 cxpreflion of the ftid paffions of the mind, as is eatiiy to be 
 obferved in the life. 
 
 In excellent pieces youmay at a view read tht mind of the Af 
 tifi in the formality of the Story. 
 
 XVIII. Laftly, Be always fure firft to conceive that in 
 your thoughts, which you would exprefs in your work ; 
 that your endeavours being affifted by ao iniellecftual energy, 
 or power of operation, may at length render your produi^i- 
 OBS perfe(^. 
 
 <;;hap. 
 
1-^ Pdygraphkes Lib. Ill' 
 
 CK AP. XIV. 
 
 Of the Choke of Copies^ or Pattern. 
 
 I. TJE that chufeth a Pattern, ought to fee i. that it be 
 
 -tA well defigned * 2. that it be well covered. 
 
 If. lo the well defigning, be fure that it be true in every 
 pan ;and that the proportion of ibe figure be juft andcor- 
 relpond to the life. 
 
 HI. Il the Pitftiire be a fidllon, fee that it be done boldly, 
 rot only to exceed the work (but alfo the poffibiliry) of na- 
 itsre, as in Centaures. Satyrs^ Syrens, Flying-horfes, Sea-horfes, 
 TtitoriJ, Kereides^ See. 
 
 Alexander ah Alexandrio j'^/V^,f^4^ Theodore Gaza caught 
 one of thcfe Nereide«^>2 Greece, and that in Zealand, another 
 tras taught tnfpin : thefe Tritons and Noreides are thefe tvhich 
 are called Mare-maids, the Male and the Female. 
 
 IV. Natural figures (hew property. and are required to sgree 
 with the life : forced ligures exprefs novelty, and are ro be 
 beautified by exorbicincies according to the fancy of the 
 Painter wirhou": limitation: novelty caufes admiration, and 
 »drnirat!on curioliiy, a kind of delight and fatisfadicn to 
 the mmd. 
 
 Thefe things are not the produHs of fiupid brains, nor are 
 fhey com. lined ttrithin the ferimetreof clouded and dull Concep- 
 tions. 
 
 V. In the weM colf-rinp, know that in obfcurity or dark- 
 nefs there is a kind of dcepne'? ; the light being fwcctly 
 deceived ^r^<^if;»7J in breaking the Colors, by infenfible change 
 from the more high ro the more dull. 
 
 J« the I{ain-koiP t'^rs mixture it perfeEl ; the T>ariety of Co- 
 lors are throughly difpers d {like Sterns m the Sunbeams) am/r.g 
 one ar.rither.to create its juj} appearance. 
 
 VI. See rbat tne fwellings of the work agree to th? ex- 
 ili^ne Is of nature, ?rd as the parts rbcreof rrquire, without 
 iharpnels in oat-liney, or ilatneis within the body rf the piece; 
 .';s .lib that each hollownefs exadly correfrond :i. due pro" 
 pciions. • % 
 
 V/f. 
 
Ghap. If. The Difpojing of Figures Jkc. 177 
 
 VII. Laftly, View precifely the pa(Jions, as Joy, Sorrow ^ 
 LovCj Hatred^ Fear, Hape^ 8cc. and fee that they correfpond 
 with their proper polturesi for a touch of the pencil may 
 firaugely alter a palTion to its ju(t oppgfite or contrary, as 
 from Mirth to Mourning, ^c. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Of the Difpofing of Figures and Faint ings. 
 
 I 
 
 • A ^M^^ works, or Grotefce, may become a wall, the 
 •^ borders and freezes of other works j but if there be 
 any draughts in figures of men and women to the life upon 
 the wall, they will be beft of black and white, or of one color 
 beigbtned : if they be naked, let them be as large as the 
 place will aiJbrd: if of Marbles, Columns, Aqujeduds, Ar- 
 ches, Ruines, Catarads, lec them be bold, high, and of large 
 proportion. 
 
 II. Let the beft pieces be placed to be feen with fingle 
 lights, for fo the (hadows fall natural, being always fitted to 
 anfwer one light; and the more under or below the light the 
 better, efpecially in mens faces, and large pieces. 
 
 III. Let the Porch or entrance into the houfe, be fet out 
 with K^uflicl^ figures, and thing rural. 
 
 IV. Let the HaS be adorned with Shepherds, Peafants, 
 Milk-maids, Neat-herds, Flocks of Sheep and the like,in their 
 refpe«5live places and proper attendants i as alfo Fowls, Fifli, 
 and the like. 
 
 V. Let the Stair-cafe be fet off with fome admirable mo- 
 nument or building, either new or ruinous, to be feen and ob- 
 ferved at a view pa/Iiog up : and let the Ceiling over the top- 
 ftair be put with figures forefhortned looking downwards out 
 of Clouds, with Garlands and Cornucopia's. 
 
 VI. Let Landskjp. Hunting, Filhing, Fowling, Hiftories 
 and Antiquities be put in the Great Chamber. 
 
 VII. In the Dining-room let be placed the Pictures of the 
 King and Queen j or their Coat of Arms;forbearing to put any 
 other Pi(5lures of the life, as not being worthy to be their 
 coEnpanion? j unlefs at the lower end, two or three of the chi^f 
 
 N Nobility, 
 
178 T: ::ts Lib. III. 
 
 KoUby. asatie Royal Perfom : for wut 
 
 koccf T. : - -■ - " t the oeareft blood. 
 
 VHl Chamikrrs, pal otbcr 
 
 dri : e or i'pecaal 
 fric- 
 
 IX. iid o^rry PtiooBgs, 
 
 5?-? •; ^, ..«.—:.>* lie UkCjbaiiorbcar- 
 
 Qaut.: wt&,aadcxiercifeikdrlBBfes9 
 
 XI - -aii^i.pwCaftlc^Chwcb- 
 
 es or UKTkC C&ir r :rs. pot Boicage, aadwSd 
 
 wr ' :- - -^ Tawtikipt, for tbqr 
 
 CI 
 
 a~ z^cft pnvscc 
 
 R b«anty) 
 
 tbtm : -.e. 
 
 z^abovc 
 r: ; :t» ; becasle 
 
 Tf, cr- 
 
 :_j^ . . . ^ r chu 
 
 thojc attbf 
 
 CHAP. xvr. 
 
 QfFrefcoe, »r PaiKtirg cf iTjl/s. 
 
 T. TN PjuziQcg apQB WaUs, to make k eodare ike weatfaer, 
 . '^ jammaAgpHiyam[cakaawiAlJmewmBt,MSL, at 
 ^F^, wjxim fize color m poo. 
 
 IL Tbe pmfeeor piaifter Baft be BMde cf «cB waA*d line, 
 mixt vvitb 6ae ponder of oU nUift Axaes : tbe Line moft 
 beibofcea«aii'd,di«UitsSBkii«fa*nd«iiaBd aU yaw 
 work mft be done ia dear sad dxy weaibcr. 
 
 m. To nakc tbe work eDdsre,i)nkeiKacfaewal t— |w 
 of fataided aik, aboai fve «r it bdn ifanW, aai 
 
 • bf 
 
chap. i6. fating Sun- Dials, &cc. 179 
 
 by this means you may preferve the plaifter from peeling. 
 
 IV. Then with this pafte, plaifter ibe w*ll, a pretty thick- 
 nefs, letting it dry : being dry, plailter it over again about 
 the thicknefs of half a Barky corn, very fine and fraooth,ihen 
 your colors being ready prepared work this lalt piaiftring o- 
 ver, whileft it is wet, lo will your Painting unire and joya 
 faft to the plaifter, and dry together as a pertedl compoft. 
 
 V. In painting be nimble and free, let your work be bold 
 and ftrong, but be fure to be f xa(fl, for there can be no Al- 
 teration after the firlt Painting, and theiefore heighten your 
 Paint enough at firti, you may deepen at pleafure. 
 
 VI. All Earthy Colors are beft.as the Oker, Spanifh White, 
 Spanifh brown, Terraeveri, and the like : mineral Colors are 
 naught. 
 
 VII. Let your pencils and brufhes be long and fofi, other- 
 wife your work will not be fmooth. 
 
 VIII. Let your Colors beful', and flow freely from the 
 Pencil or Brufb, and let your defign be perfedl at firft, for ia 
 this, there is no after alteration to be made. 
 
 CHAP. XVIL 
 
 * 
 
 of Painting Sun Dials, Timler-work, (SiC. 
 
 J. IP the Dial be not drawn upon the Wall it felf ; you 
 * mufl have a Dial Plain, which you may make of the 
 firmeft and clearefl Oak, and throughly dry, fo as that it may 
 be free from (hrinking. 
 
 //. Cut your Board to fuch a length, as you intend the 
 length of the Dial to be of, and fo many of them, as may make 
 up the defigned breadth ^ joynt and plain them on both (ides, 
 then fet them to dry ffor though they have lain in a Houfe ne- 
 ver fo long, and are never fo dry, yet being thus (hot and 
 plained, they will fliriok afterwards beyond belief.) 
 
 lU When they are dry enough, and will Ihrink no more, 
 fhote them again with good Joyots, which fatten together io 
 the glewing with Pins or Pegs, as Coopers do the bottoms of 
 their Tubs. 
 
 N2 jr. 
 
r8o Poly^raphices C? Lib. III. 
 
 IV. Being tbas glewcd and dryed, let ii be well plained, 
 and iryed every way, that it may be borh fmootb and true : 
 let tbe edges be (hoc true, and all of a ibicknefs, that they may 
 fit into the Rabccsof tbe Moulding, put round it, juit as a 
 Pannci of Waioicot dotb in its Franne. 
 
 V. This wili give tbe Board liberty to fliriok and fwell 
 witbout rending, wfaereas mouldings, nailed round tbe edges, 
 as the vulgar way is, dotb To reftrain tbe motion of tbe 
 AVocd, tbat it cannot (hrink witbout tearing- but made tbis 
 way, tbey will lalt a long time, witbout eiiber parting in ibe 
 Joyots, or fplitting in the Wood. 
 
 VI. The colors cbiefiy made ufe of in painting Dials are 
 I. Cerufe, i. white-lead ; 3. Ltmp-Black, 4. Cbar cole or 
 Sea-cole, 5. Spanirti-brown, 6. Red-lead, 7, Vermillion, 8, 
 Cinnabar Lake, 9. Smalt, lo. Blew Bice, it. Blew Verdi- 
 ter, iz. Indico, 13. Umber, 14. Verdigrife, 15. yellow Oak- 
 er, i6. yellow Pink. 
 
 VII. But for a Plain Sun-dial, tbefe four Colors will ferve, 
 'vi:{. 1 . Spamjh-browriy for tbe priming Color, 2. Vermillion t 
 for drawing the Lines, 3. Lamp-black., for drawing tbe Figures, 
 4. white Lead, for ihe laft Color to be laid upon tbe 
 Plain. 
 
 VIII. But if you will bare your Dial more rich, you m«(i 
 have, I. Leaf-Gold (or gilding, z. Gold Sj:{ey to make tbe Fig- 
 ures to lay Gold on, ^. Smalt or Blew Bice for tbe Margin 
 and innrr Table. 
 
 IX. And for curiofity fake, you may ufe fuch other Colors, 
 as your faocy fliall direct you to be molt fuitable to 'the 
 detigo. 
 
 X. To fhefe. things add Linfeed Ojl, to temper your Colors 
 with : and 07/0/ Turpentine, to mix a little of ft with your 
 Colors, 10 make them d/y tbe more fpecdily. 
 
 XI. Cerufe and ti^hite Lead, are eafie to be ground fine: 
 and the only white Colors ufed in Painting in Oyl : tbele 
 «'e the laft Colors 10 be laid on the plains of 
 Dials. 
 
 KIT. And with them Ports, Pails, Paliradocs,Gate?, Doors, 
 Windows, Wainfcotting, ^c. are often colored both for beau- 
 ty and prefervation, they relifting the Weather well. 
 
 Xlll. Tbey dry well, but to make them dry more fpecdily, 
 fome in tempering put Oyl of Tutpentine to ibemi but 
 ihtn without doors tbey telift not the Wc&iber fo well. 
 
 XIII. 
 
Cbap. 17. 'Paint if}g Sun- Dial Sy^c, igj 
 
 XIV. Lamp Blacks is a fair Color, and may be tempe- 
 red with Linleed Oyl : But it muft be firtt barnt,iben ground, 
 afterwards tempered with the Oyl. 
 
 XV. A Utile of this with much fVI?ite, xmkes an ajhcolor; 
 and according to the proportion of either, it gives feveral de- 
 lightful varieties. 
 
 XVL Charco/gy is a good Black for ordinary ufes, but it 
 muft have good labor in grinding to make it fine ; it dries 
 well. 
 
 XVII. Spanijh Brown, the beft is of a deep bright color 
 and free froro Stones ; it grinds well with pains, and is the 
 only color ulcd in /»"iWm^ all manner of Timber- work. 
 
 XVIII. I. Becaufe it is cheap : z. Becaufe it drys kindly, 
 yet gives the Oyl Tufficient time to pierce into the Wood. 3. 
 Becaufe it freely receives all other Colors which are laid up- 
 on it. 
 
 XIX. This of It felf is a perfed: horfe-Flefh color, and a 
 natural fliadow for Vermilion : being mixt with white, it 
 gives fundry varieties, according to the various proporti- 
 ons. 
 
 XX. I^ed-Lend, it is not to be ground very fine on a Stone, 
 but you may make it fine by washing : ic is a great dryer 
 and binder, for which caufe it is mixed with fome other Co- 
 lors, to make them dry fpeedily : and it notably refifts the 
 weather, as well as any Color whatfoever. 
 
 XXI. Vermillion, It is a rich Color, and of a good body, 
 if it be fine ground, otherwife it is as bad a Color as any : 
 but being ground as foft as Oyl, no Color works better. You 
 had beft to buy it in the Stone, left it be fophifticaied with 
 red Lead. 
 
 XXII. It is a perfe(9: Scarlet, and mix with white,it gives 
 a Carnation, in divers varieties, according to the proportiooj. 
 Its fliadow is Spanilh Brown. With this we comaaonly draw 
 the Hour Lin^s on Sundials. 
 
 XXIII. Cinnabar Lakfl, it is a rich Crimfon color, and k 
 to be ground very fine. Mixt with Bice it make a purple of 
 divers varieties, according to the proportions. 
 
 XXIV. Mixt with White, it makes a Crimfon Carnation 
 in divers Varieties, which White abd I{ed-Lead, a flefli cor 
 lor. 
 
 XXV. It IS ufed in Ornaments of Dials, and in feveral 
 Flowcts. A Margin of a Dial with Gold Figures, is beautiful, 
 
 N s xxn, 
 
i82 Volygraghkes Lib. Til. 
 
 XXVI. Smalti ii is * delicate Blew at a difttnce, if ftrew- 
 ed on: if you will work it in Oyl, it mufi be made fine 
 with walhirg, andmixi wi'h wbite-Lead, but even ihcn it 
 work*; not well, but in time will be apt to turn Black. 
 
 XXVII. The beft way therefore is to llrew it on, and then 
 tbeie is Icarcely a more glorious Blew: ir is a good color 
 for tbe Marginof a Dial, if it be figured with Gold, as alfo 
 for other purpofes. If yon buy it to work in 0)1, tbe fineft 
 is befi which they call Oyl Smalt. 
 
 XXVI II. Blew Bice, it is a pa!e color, and fine enough 
 for almoit any ufe, and works well, though a little fandy. 
 It is ufed for a Margin ground in Dials, to gild Figures in 
 fmall Plains, that are near the Eve. 
 
 XXIX Mixt with Pin}{, it makes a Green : with Lal^ a 
 VuYple : with white a light Blew -^ and in each feveral varie- 
 ties according to the proportion?. 
 
 XXX. Blew Verditer^ It is fandy, apt to change and turn 
 greenirh. It may ferve in Dial Painting where Bice and Smalt 
 are wanting, but not lo good as either o^ them. Mixed with 
 yellows, it makes a good green : with Whites or Yellows, or 
 both, many other varieties. 
 
 XXXI Ifiilico, h is a very dark Blew, and feldom ufed 
 without a mixture of White, unlefs to (hadow with. It grinds 
 fine, works well, and is much ufed in common Painting for 
 |He laft colors of Poli', Pales, Rails, Pallifadoes, Doors, 
 Windows, or any other Timber work, for that it refitts the 
 weather well. 
 
 XXXII. Itisilear, and therefore many Painters ufe Blew- 
 Ballsy wbKh arralraoft like it, hut wt fo good a color either 
 
 for beauty or lalling, mixt with Wbite,it makes a Lead-Color: 
 and it is excellent to marble IVloite withal or to ftia' 
 dow it. 
 
 XXXIII. VnAer. It is a perfect hair color, it may be 
 ground very fine with much labor, and dryes and binds ex- 
 ceedingly, aod rherefore very well refills weather. 
 
 XXXIV. It is much ufed in Painting for the many vari- 
 eties it gives. Calcin'd in a Crucible, it is the natural (ha- 
 dow for Gold, and fome other colors. 
 
 XXXV. Verdigrife i It i$ a perfed Willow GrecD, and 
 therefore for fome ufes muft be corrected with yel- 
 lows. 'Tis very foul, and tberefoie ought to be cleanfed 
 
 tJlttS, 
 
 XXXVI. 
 
Chap. 17. PaintiftgSun-Dials.dic. 183 
 
 XXXVI. Grind it fine, and put to it eight times itt ttf eight 
 t>f fpirit of Vinegar j digeft till the Vinegar is tinged very Green ' 
 then decant the color, ca^ away the Faces, and evaporate the Vi- 
 negar in a brafs Vefica, fo have you a glorious Verdigrife at the 
 bottom, of which one ounce » ttforth ten of the former. 
 
 XXXVII. It drys fpeedily : mixt with Ptnk yellow, it 
 makes a pure lively grafs Green : with White, many varieties 
 of light Greens, ^c, 
 
 XXXVIII. Ifellow Oker. It is either Et^glifli or Foreign. 
 The one is of a Wheat Itraw Color, the other fomewhat deep- 
 er, with much labour it may be ground very fine. It is much 
 ufed in vulgar Painting, and to make Gold (ize vi'itha.l. 
 
 XXXIX. Teltow Pink. It is a yellow inclining to Gretr), 
 and grinds well. It is a good color for fome ufes, but chiefly 
 to mix withorher colors, to make Green wiihal. 
 
 XL. The aforegoing Colors are now to be either Burnt, 
 Ground, or H^ajht^ as they feverally require, and as we have 
 taught in C/j<i;>. 22. aforegoiogof this Book : this done you 
 are to grind thenj with Oyl, thus. , 
 
 XLI. Take about two fpocnfuls of the color yotl intend 
 to Grind, and pur to ii a little Liofeed Oyl, fbut fee yoa 
 put not too much) mix tbem together, and grind them well 
 upon your (tone with a Muller: add Oyl by degrees, till ii 
 comes to the tbicknefsof an Oynimeni, for fo it grinds much 
 better than when it is fo thin as to run about the ftone. 
 
 XLII. Oftentimes as you grind, bring the matter together 
 with a piece of Lanthorn horn, and as much as may be keep 
 it together in the middle of the ftone, till it is ground fine 
 enoughs then take it off, and put more cPor upon the ftone, 
 grinding as before, which work continue till you have Color 
 enough to ferve your occafion. 
 
 XLIII. This done, if you grind other colors after it,cleanfe 
 the ftone firft by grinding Sand and Water upon it,then walh- 
 iog it, and drying ic 
 
 XHV, The Colors thus ground wij] be too thick for ufe, 
 without adding more Oyl : therefore when you ufe them 
 fwheiher fimple or compoiinded, as your occafion requires) 
 you muft r^dd more Oyl ro them, till they be fo thin as to run 
 free with the Pencil, 
 
 XLV. Yet not to let the ground on which they are laid, to 
 be feen through them, or to run about when it is laid on ; 
 for fo, you muft be forced to go over it the oftnej*, before your 
 work will be fubftantial. 
 
 4 N XLVL 
 
184 Polygraphices lib. III. 
 
 XLVI. Whereas, if your Color be as ftiff as it can well 
 be wroughr, your work will be done with more fpeed ; and 
 once doing will be more fubftaniial, than three times with 
 the thin Color. 
 
 XLVIi. This is the cheat of common Painters who do 
 work by ibe yard, at a certain price; they do it with fuch 
 thin Color that all ibeir three times doing Gver,is not lofub- 
 ftjniial as one time would be, if the Color bad been of a thick 
 and ftroiig body. 
 
 XLVi II. And three times coloring w ith fuch a thick and 
 well bodied Color will Utt ten times as long, as that which is 
 wrought thus flightly by common Painters. 
 
 XLIX. Oblcrve alfo, that if the Color to be mixt,be your 
 priming Colorj viz. thefirft color you lay on, it ought to be 
 made iomuch the thinner, that it may have Oyl enough to 
 pierce into the Wood, which is much for its durability ^ but 
 after yourfifft Color is laid on, let your next be thicker, as 
 before is taught. 
 
 L But if your Color to be mixt be for the drawing of 
 Hour-lines, or making the Figures in a Sun-dial, then let it be 
 tempered as {tiff as is pcffible to ule it.tbai ir may not prefent- 
 !y decry, but may be capabfe by the quantity laid on, to laft 
 as lonp any color on the Dial. 
 
 LI. To which puvpofe, its being wrought in Fat Oyl will 
 much conduce :tow this fat or thick Oyl is made, we now 
 come to teach. 
 
 LII. flofp to make the [aid fat or thick, Oyl. Take Linfeed 
 Oyl what you pleafe, put to it a fufficient quantity of Red- 
 Lead fthe more, tJM| better) fo as it binders not the boyliag.* 
 This Red-Lead j'^dds a drying quality to the Oyl: 
 Let them boyi gently, over a Charcole fire without flame, 
 till it is boyled enough, which you may know by taking a lit- 
 tle of it out and cooling of it; if it roaps like thin Treacle, 
 or a Syrup, it is enough. 
 
 LTII. Then with a lighted paper fet it on fire that it may 
 take away much of its greaGnefs, let it burn a minute or two, 
 more or lefsasyour Oyl is in quantity: then extinguifli it, 
 by covering h clofe over with a Cloth, and letting it cool 
 and fettle, decant the clear Oyl, and keep it in a bladder 
 for ufe. 
 
 LIV. To make the GolJ fi:(^r. Take Tellottf Oker, grind it 
 on a ftone with water, till it be very fine, and lay it on 
 a chalk 5tone to dry, 
 
 LV. 
 
Chap. 17. Painting Sun- Dials ^ &c. 1 8 5: 
 
 LV. Or thus. Firft grind it fine as tforefaid, ihenwafliit , 
 (by Sed:. 6. Chap. ii. of this Book) and thereby feparate 
 the pure fine part of the Color, which dry as the 
 former. ", . 
 
 LVf. Take of this prepared OA.er, what you plea fe, add 
 to it a little of the former prepared Oyl, and grind them 
 together as you do other oyl Colors ; this work will be labo- 
 rious, for it muft be ground very fine, even as the Oyl it 
 felf ; and the finer it is, the greater luller will your Gold 
 carry that is laid on it. 
 
 LVII. Where note, that you put fo much of the prepared 
 Oyl to the Oker, that it may be of a good ftifl'nefsto work 
 well, and of fuchafit body, that after ilislaidon, it may 
 fettle it felf fmooth and glofly, but not fo weak as to run. See 
 Chap, 21. Sen. 5. 
 
 LVIU, Horn Colors are to be fet off, I. Bletts fet ofFbeft with 
 Telloiff and iVbites: indiflferently mih Black^i znd I{eds ; not 
 at all with Greens, Purples , or Browns. 
 
 LIX. a. Greewj fet off beft wiih VVbitet-^nd Yellows: not 
 at all WnhBlacks, Blews^ creeds. 
 
 LX. 3. Reds fet off beft with Whites and Yellows, indif- 
 ferently with Blews and Blacks. 
 
 LXI. 4. Tellows fet off beft with Blacks, Blews, and B^ds , 
 indifferently with Greens, Purples, and Whites.. 
 
 LXII. 5. Pf/j>>« and B/^c^f fet off well with any Color, 
 becaufe they fo much differ from all others. 
 
 LXIIl. The manner of Painting Sun-dials. Having the 
 draught of your Dial on paper, your Plain or Board fitted.and 
 your Colors prepared, proceed thus. •■ 
 
 LXIV. Take Spanifh Brown well ground, mixed, and 
 fomewhat thin, and with a large ,Briftle Bru(h, color there- 
 with your Plain all over, on every fide, fo that no part be 
 left undone. 
 
 LXV. This is called the Priming of your Dial. When it 
 is dry, do it over again wiih more of fhe fame Color, tempe- 
 red fomewhat thicker, which when dry alfo. 
 
 LXVI. You may do it over again a third time, with the 
 fame color, fo will your work be the ftrdnger, and laft 
 longer. 
 
 LXVII. When this laft time of coloring your Plain is dry; 
 then go over it with White-Lead Color ; which when dry, go 
 pyer it again three or four times facceffively after each dry- 
 ing: 
 
iB<5 Folygrapbices Lib. III. 
 
 ing: fo win the face ot your Plain be defended a- 
 ginli the fury aod violence of cbe weather for many 
 years. 
 
 LXVIII. Totramferr the Draught of your Dial upon the 
 
 Plain. The Ult Colonng being dry, draw on the Plain Cwiih 
 
 . a black Lead Pencil j a Horizontal Line, fo far from the up- 
 
 permoft edge of your Dial, as your Reafon (hall think fit, or 
 
 beft convenes with the Plain. 
 
 LXIX. Then fet out the margin of the Dial, with fundry 
 Lines for bouis, half hours and quarters: after, take the 
 Draught, and place it on the Horizontal Line, obferving to 
 place the Center, according as the Situation of your Plain re- 
 quires: 
 
 LXX. If the Dial be a direct South Dial, let the Center be 
 exadily in the middle of your Plain ; if your Dial declines 
 Eaftwards or Weftvvards, place the Center of the Draught, 
 between the Center of the Plain, and the Ealtern or Wefteru 
 fide rhpffof. 
 
 LXXI. li it declines but little, place the Center of the 
 Draught, but a little from the Center of the Plain ; if it de- 
 clines much, place the Center of the Draught the more out of 
 the Center of the Plain. 
 
 LXXII. For by thus doing you gain a greater diftance 
 forihofe Hour-lines, which in declining plains fall neafer to- 
 gether on one fide than they are on the other. 
 
 LXXIII And you ought to do it in all declining Plains, 
 except they decline far, as between eighty and ninety de- 
 grees, for then they are beft to be drawn without Centers.to 
 gain the more diftance for the Hour-lines. 
 
 LXXIV. The Draught being thus placed on the Plain, and 
 faftned with Pins or Tacks; transfer it upon the Plain, by lay- 
 ing the Ruler over every hour, half hour, and quarter 
 divifion. 
 
 LXXV. And where the Ruler fliall interfe(5l theboHndary 
 lines in the Margin, there make marks, by drawing lines 
 with a Black Lead Pencil of fuch length as each divifion 
 requires, drawing the boar and half hour lines quite through 
 the Margin, for the guiding you in the right placing the Fig- 
 ures. 
 
 LXXVl. Then draw the Suh-flile Line, as it lies in the 
 Draught, that it may guide you in right placing the Stile of 
 your Dial. 
 
 Lxxni, 
 
Chap. 17. Tainthg Sun- Dials, &c. 187 
 
 LXXVn. This done, take the Draught off, and with Ver' 
 million well ground and prepared, draw (be boundary lines, aS 
 al(b the hours, half hours, and quarters. 
 
 LXXVlll. Lei the color be as thick and ftiffasyou can 
 work it, lo as to draw a clear and fmooth Line ; the Lines 
 being drawn, then with Ltmp-Black delineate the Fig- 
 gures. 
 
 LXXIX. And io the Margin at the top of the Plain, you 
 may put the date of the year, or fome proper Motto. 
 
 LXXX. La ftly fix in, the Stile of your Dial, and paint it 
 in like manner as you did the Dial before : thus is your Di- 
 al compleated. 
 
 J.XXXL To gild the Figures of Sun-diah. Draw the Figures 
 or Letters you defire to have gilt with the Gold fize (at Secfl. 
 53. above^ which let dry fo long, till that by touching it 
 with the end of your finger, it will ftick a little, yet not 
 come off. 
 
 LXXXII. Then take leaf Gold, lay it upon your gild- 
 ing Cufliion, and with a very fliarp and fmooth-edged 
 knife, cut the Gold into fucb pieces as may bed befit your 
 work. 
 
 LXXXlW. Then with a flat ftick lin'd with Cloth, take 
 up your cut pieces of Gold, and transfer it to your fize, upon 
 which clap it down, and your Gold will leave your lin'd ftick, 
 and cleave to the fi2e,;,\f bich then prefs down with Cotton, 
 or a Hares foot. 
 
 LXXXLV. Thus do till all your fize is covered with Gold: 
 and when it is perfectly dryed, with your Hares foot, brulh 
 off all the loofe Gold, and the gilding will remain fair 
 and beautiful. 
 
 LXXXV. Then if you pleafe, Diaper on your plain 
 with thin Vmber, whatfoever fhall be fuitable to your 
 defign. 
 
 LXXXVh How to lay on your Smalt. '^\ien yon defjgn to 
 make the Margin of your Dial Blew, you muft do it thus. 
 After the figures are gilt, take white Lead, flifly tempered 
 v;ith fat Oyl fatSed:. 5r. above) and therewith cover over 
 your whole Margin : and then with a fmall fine fearfe fifton 
 your Smalt. 
 
 LXXXVIL Or otherwife with a Goofe quill Feather, co- 
 ver your Margin over with it, and with a piece of Cotton 
 dab it down clcfe.thai it may ftick faft to the ground laid un- 
 der it. 
 
 • Lxxxmi. 
 
 \ 
 
i8g Pclygraphices Lib. III. 
 
 LXXXniI. When it is all throughly dry.wipe off the loofe 
 color wiib a Feather, and blow the remaiDder off with a pair 
 of Bellows ; lo is your work finifhed: the iquare of the Dial 
 may alfo be colored Blew fif you fo pleafe) after the fame 
 manner. 
 
 LXXXIX. To Paint PVainfcot^ Doors, JVindotts^ Pojls, I(ails, 
 Pails, Gates, and other Timber tfiork. This differs not much 
 from the former method of Painting Sun-dials ; you may 
 proceed thus. Prime (the thing to be painted; firft with 
 Spanijh Brotpn, as you did your Dial Plain, two or three 
 times. 
 
 XC. Then ake iVhite Lead we\lKmpsred,or Vmber and 
 finite or B/erp Bafls, or Indico and Pf^iutf^ or any other 
 Color you intend your work fliall be done with j and that 
 Color fwhai ever it bej let it bcliidover your former 
 Priming, four or five times focceliively after each Dry- 
 ing : for the ofiner it is gone over, the longer it will 
 lalt. 
 
 XCI. You may do it with variety of Colors, or Marble 
 it as you pleafe, fo fliall your work be finilhed according 
 10 yourdefire. 
 
 XCII. But here note , that Wainfcotting, and other 
 Paintings within Doors, need not be done above twice over, 
 with the laft Color ; 'tis only that Painting which is ex- 
 pofed to the Air and Weather, that requires lo many times 
 running over it. 
 
 XCIII. And indeed, if it be not- well and often 
 done, it will not lift long, or be of any conliderable 
 feriricCo 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 1 8. IVa/hhg Maps y Figures, dec. 189. 
 
 'CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 Of Wajhing Maps, TiBures, &c. 
 
 /. r> Y Walhiog we have intend nothing elfe, but eiihej- to 
 ■*-' fet out Maps.or Printed Pidures in proper Colors. 
 
 II, The Inftrunaenis and Materials of Walhing are chiefly 
 thefe few, z;/;^. i. Alum Heater, z. S;;^e(jr Gum-water^ ^.li- 
 quid Gold, 4. Pencils. 5. Colors, 
 
 III, To make Alum-Heater. Take Alum eight ounces : fair 
 water, a quart : boil them till the Alun:i is difToIved. 
 
 IV, Or thus. Take fpring or Well- Water a Gallon, Rocb 
 Alum a pound, pouder and diflblvs it in Water by boil- 
 ing : filter it thro brown paper, and keep it for ufe. 
 
 V- With this water if you wet your Paper, before you 
 lay on your Colors, it will keep them from finking in, and 
 withal add a Luttre and beamy to the Colors laid on. 
 
 VI. But this you ipuft note, that if your Paper is not good, 
 you muft walh it over four or five times,, which may be done 
 with a large Brufh Pencil. 
 
 VII. h is alio to be noted, that .4/wot raifes ftaining Co* 
 lors, and preferves them from fading, 
 
 VIII. To make Sis[e. Take Glew, and fteep it all night ia 
 Water, then melt it over the fire, to fee that ic be neither too 
 ftrong, nor too weak : then let a little of ir cool : if ic is too 
 ftifF when it is cold, put more water to it: but if too weak, 
 put more Glew, and ufe it, Luke-warm. 
 
 IX. To rnake Gum-water. 
 
 Take pure fpring water a Qyari : pm ic into aJar-GIafsj 
 and hang therein a fafficient quantity of pure white and clear 
 Gum-Arabick, bruifed and lyed Ijp in a rag : let it hang till 
 the Gum is all diffolved. 
 
 X. Then put your fingers into the water, and if you find 
 them to ftick together as if they were slewed, your water is 
 too U iff, or full' of the Gum, which you muft remedy by 
 puttiqg thereto more fjjr water j and if you find it coo weak, 
 you may help it by adding more Gum. 
 
 XI 
 
190 Pc/jgraphices Lib. III. 
 
 XL With this water, or the fortner fize, moft colors are to 
 be lempered, and with lo much of the (aid Gam-water^which 
 being louche when dry, the color will not come off. where 
 note, that if the color glifter, there is too much Gum in it. 
 
 XII. Liquid Gold, h is exadly made by the firft Sedion 
 of the 2 1 Chapter of the fecond Book. 
 
 XIII. Pencils are to be of all forts both fiich'd and poititcd, 
 as alfo a large peocil bruITi to palle Maps upon Cloth i ano- 
 ther to wet the' paper with Alom water j a third to it arch 
 the face of the Pi(Sture withal before it be colored: and a 
 fourth to varnilh withal. 
 
 XIV. The colors are the fame with ihofe which we men- 
 tioned in Chap. 17, lib.^. to which add, i. Of Black^Vnu- 
 lers black. Fr4«;(j/or^ black, i. O/Jf^eJ, Vermilion, Rolfet. 3. 
 Of Blear, Verditure, Liimofc, Flory. 4. Of 2c//o/»,Cambogia, 
 Yellow-berries,Orpiment. •y.Of l{ed 6raztl,Logwood (ground/ 
 and Turnfole, Cochenele, Madder. 
 
 XV. But for the realon, that all thofe colors are not of ufe 
 for ftainitig or wafliing of Maps, PiAures, Globes, (^c. 
 Artifts have fele(5led out the moft proper which are as 
 follows. 
 
 XVI. I. I^ed, Brafil, Turnfole, Indian Lake, Cochenele, 
 Indian Cakes, RoflTet, Cinnabar, Vermillion, Red-lead. 
 
 XVII. 2. Tetlowj, Aloes, Cambogia, Yellow-berries, Saf- 
 fron,. Mafticot, Orpimeni, 
 
 XVIII. 3. Blews, Litmofe, Logwood, Indico, Verditer, 
 Blew Bice, Smalt, Ultramarine. 
 
 XIX. 4. Greens, Verdigrife, Sap-green, Verditer, Green 
 Bice. 
 
 XX. 5. >f^x>«, Flake White, Spaoifli White. 
 
 XXL 6. Brownsi Wood-foot, Rinds of Green Walnuts, 
 Walnut-tree Leaves, Spanilh Brown, Umber, iron Ruft. 
 
 XXII. 7. BUckj, common Jnk, Printers Black, Lamp' 
 black. Ivory Black, Hartshorn Black. 
 
 XXIII. Of thefe Colors, i. Some are to he burnt, isSptimOi 
 Brown, Umber, Printers B'ack, Lamp-black, Ivory Black, 
 Hartshorn Black, which are afterwards to be pround. 
 
 XXW. 2. Seme are to he ground ^i Vermili'in, Cinnabar, 
 Indian Lake, Indico, White-lead, Spanilh White, Ma- 
 fticot. 
 
 XXV. "i. Some are tohe tvajhed, as, RofTei, Red-lead, Bice, 
 Verditer, Orpimcnt, Spaoilh Brown, 
 
 XXl% 
 
Chap. I f. Colors fimple for Wajhing. i^i. 
 
 XXVI. 4. Some are to be fteefed, as, Aloes, CambogJa, 
 Yellow-berries, Sap-green, Verdigrife, Indian Cakes, Saffron, 
 Wood- foot. 
 
 XXVII. 5. Some are to be boyled, as, Brazil, Logwood, 
 Turnfole, Green Walnut Rinds, Wood-foor. Hotp thefe Ope- 
 rations are to be performed we have taught at large in lib. 2, 
 cap. 22. to which I refer you. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Of Colors fimple for Wafijing of Maps.&c. 
 
 I. A Xow, Let it be diflblved in a weak Gum-water ; it 
 ^■^ makes a deep or lad kind of Yellow Color, accord- 
 ing to ibe goodnefs of the Aloes. 
 
 IL Bra:(il. To i^t ground Brazil put fonall Beer and 
 Vinegar, of eacb a iuff^nt quantity, let it boyl gently a good 
 while, then put ^ herein Aluoi in pouder to heighten the color, 
 and fome Gum-Arab^cic to bind it ; boyl it till it lafte firong 
 on the tongue, and make a good red, Pink color, or light Vi- 
 olet 
 
 III. Logwood. Ground Logwood boiled as Brazil, makes a 
 very fair traofparent Violet or Purple Color. 
 
 IV. Qochenele. Steeped as Brazil was boiled, makes a fair 
 tranfparent purple : as tfaus^ take Cocbenele, and put it into 
 cbe ftrongeft Sope-Iees to fteep, aiid it will be a fair purple, 
 which you may lighten or deepen at pleafure. Infufed ia 
 ftrong Vinegar, it makes a tranfparent purple. 
 
 V. Madder. Take madder four drachms, ground Brazil 
 one ounce, Rain-water a quart ; boil away a third part ; 
 then add Alom half an ounce boil it to a pint j then Gum- 
 Arabick one ounce, which boil till it is diflblved, cool it ftirring 
 it often, and ftrain it for ufe. It is a good Scarlet die for Lea- 
 ther. ^ 
 
 VI. Verdigrife. Take Verdigrife ground finely one ounce, 
 put rn it a good quantity of common varnifh, and fo much 
 oy! of Turpentine, as will make it thin enough 10 work 
 wiibal j it is a good green. 
 
 VU. 
 
1 91 Polygraphices Lib. III. 
 
 Vil. Fine Verdigrife, difiblved in Rheoifli wine or Vi- 
 negar, makes a tranfpareut Green iacliaing to blew. 
 
 VIII. Ground with juice of Rue aud Gam-water, it is a 
 pure Green: wichouc the juice, it makes a glorious eiuerald, 
 mixt with Cryftals of Tartar in white-wine Vinegar, in 
 wbicb Gum-Arabick has been difiblved, makes a pure 
 Green, 
 
 IX. And Verdigrife, Alum, of each one drachm. 
 Logwood three drachms, boiled in Vinegar, make a good 
 Murry. 
 
 X Gamhogia. Diffoive it in fair fpring water, iind it w^I 
 make a beautiful and tranfparent yellow : if you would have 
 it ftrotiger, dilfolve fome Alum therein : it is good for Silk, 
 Linnen, white Leather, Parchment, Vellom, Paper, Quills, 
 &c. This color delights in no mixtures. 
 
 Xl. To make Verdigrife according to Glauber. 
 
 This color is made with Venus in Vinegar in earthen pots 
 fet into hot horfe dung : but if you diflblve your Venus with 
 fpirit of Nitre, and precipitate with a lye made of Salt of 
 Tartar, edulcorating and drying the Venus will yield an ex- 
 cellent Verdigrife, which will not corrode other colors as the 
 common Verdigrife doth. 
 
 X/T. To make Cerufe according to Glauber. It is made 
 with Saturn and Vinegar in an Earthen pot fct in borfe- 
 dung : butif you dilfolve your Saturn with Spirit of Nitre, 
 and precipitate with Salt water, you will have a Cerufe 
 whiter and purer than the ordinary, and much better whe- 
 ther for Painting or Chyrurgery. 
 
 XIIL Tehw Fu^ick_-berry. Boil it in water or fteep it 
 in AInm water, it makes a good and tranfparent yellow for 
 ihe fame purpofe. 
 
 XIK Turnfole. Put it into a fliarp Vinegar over a gen- 
 tle fire till the Vincg«r boil, and is colored ; then take 
 out the Turn(oIe and fqueeze it into the Vinegar, in which 
 diflblve a little Gum-Arabick ; it fliadows very well on a 
 Carnation or yellow. 
 
 AT. Lttntofe, Cnt it into fmall pieces, and fteep it a day 
 or two in weak Gum-Lake water, and you wiil have a pure 
 tranfparent blew water to walh with. 
 
 XVI. FhryBletp. Grind it with gltir of Epgs, if then you 
 add a little Roflet it makes a light Violet blew ; mix- 
 ed with White and Red-leaJ, it makes a Crane feather 
 color. 
 
 XVII. 
 
Ghap. 19. Colors fimple for WallMng. i^_^ 
 
 XVII. Saffron. Steeped in Vinegar and mixed wiib gum- 
 water is a good yellow. In White wine or Sack, it makes 
 alfo a good yellow j but more glorious if mixc wirh equal 
 parts of Cocbenele : you may alio Iteep icin glairof £ggs, 
 or grind it with Vermilion. 
 
 XVIII. Indian Lal^e. Ground with Gum-Arabick waier, 
 makes a glorious Murry i in grinding it, add a little Sugar- 
 candy: feme fay it makes a deep Pink or Bloom color. 
 
 XIX. Vermillion. Being ground with glair of Eggs and 
 Honey or Gum-water,it makes a deep Red, or Scarlet color. 
 
 XX. I^d-leaJ. Grind it v; it b a ftiff Gum-lake water ; if 
 you add Saffron, it makes it Orienr, and of a Mangold 
 color: of it felfii is between Red and an Orange color. 
 
 XXI. I{pJJet Walhed and tempered with Gum-water, dif- 
 fers not much in color from Indian Lake j but it will foon 
 fade and grow lighter i but bdng tempered with Brafil-water, 
 
 » twill be more deep. 
 
 XXU. hidiarrC,ik''s. Ufe them as ye do Turnfole fat SeEt. 
 \o. above) they make agoodiranfpareni Red color: into the 
 liquor put fame Gum to bind ir. 
 
 XXill. Mafiicote. Ground and tempered with Gum-water, 
 makes a good yellow, but not tranfparent. 
 
 XXIY. Orpiment. Walhed and colored with Gum-water, 
 makes an Orient or Gold color : there are feveral degrees of 
 it, fome more red, others more yellow. 
 
 XXV. VerJiter. WaHied and tempered with Gum-water, 
 is a good blew, but not tranfparent, or inclining to a 
 Green. 
 
 XXVL Jndico, Ground afid tempered with Gum-water, 
 makes a deep blew, and is iii to Ihadow all other blews. 
 
 XXVII. Bleip Bice. Waflied and tempered with Gum- 
 water, it is an excellent blew : there are ieveral forts of ir, 
 fbme lighter, fome faddcr. 
 
 XXVIII. Bletff Bice, Verditure, and fmah, ground (Ingly 
 witbGnm-waier for together) make a good blew. 
 
 XXIX. Smalt. Ground with a little fine Roflet, makes a 
 deep Violet, 
 
 XXX. Vltramarine, If you would have it deep, grind 
 it with Litmofe water j it is the beft and dcareft of all 
 blews. 
 
 XXXI. Sap-green. Steep it in Iharp Vinegar all night, to 
 which add a little Alum to raife its color. In Alum water it 
 fiaakes a good green to Hiadow with. 
 
 O xxxit; 
 
194 Polygraphkes Lib. TIL 
 
 XXXll. Green Bice. Wafhed and tempered with Gum- 
 water, makes a good, but no iranfparent Green. 
 
 XXKIH Lamp' blacky or Printers 'blacl{^ Burnt, ground 
 and tempered with Gum-water, make a good black. 
 
 XXXIV. Ivory black. Burnt, ground and tempered with, 
 Gum-water, as tbe former makes alio a good black. 
 
 XXXV. FUkf-Lead. Ground and tempered with Gum- 
 water, IS an excellent white. 
 
 XXXJ^L Spanijh IVhite. Ground and tempered io like 
 manner with Gum-wacer, makes the beft of all whites. 
 
 XXXVIL Spanifh Brown. BurtJt , ground, and tem- 
 percckwith Gum- water, makes t Redilh brown, or Liver 
 color. 
 
 XXXVni Vmber. Burnt and ground, and tempered with 
 Gam-water, makes a good haw color i and is very good to 
 fliadow with upon Gold. 
 
 XXXlX. Green of fVallnufs. Boiled in water and drain- 
 ed, and Gum-Arabick difTolved in tbe liquor to bind 
 it, makes an excellent color to exprefs High-ways, 
 Lanes, (^c. 
 
 XL, fVood Soot, Prepared in all refpeds as the for- 
 mer, ferves to the fame intentionsi and is much the better 
 color. 
 
 XLI. Native Cinnabar. Grind it as Red Lead, it is a 
 glorious Red color ; much exceeding the Artificial* 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Of CompounJeJ Colors for Wafhifig of Maps, ^c. 
 
 L f^^^nge Color. Red-lead and Yellow berries make a 
 ^^ good Orange color : thus, take Arnotio half an ounce. 
 Pet afhes one Drachm, water one pound, boil it half away, 
 then (Ira in it, and ule it hot. 
 
 It H good for yVhite Leather, Vaper^-Vellom, ^illsy Parch- 
 ment, ikc. 
 
 II. Green. Take diftilled vinegar, filings of Copper, 
 digeft till the vinegar is blew, which let ftand in the Sun or a 
 flow lire till it is thick enough, and it will be a good greea. 
 
 III. 
 
Cljaf). 20. Compouncled Colors y^Q, t^§ 
 
 Hi. Or thus, Takf Cedar-green (which is befi tf all) or in 
 fiead therof green Biee, fteep it in Vinegary and Brain it; tbe"^ 
 grind it well with fair water, and put to it 4 little bonejf, antt. 
 dry it well; whenjou ufi it, mix it with Gum-water. 
 
 IV. To make fine Indieo. 
 
 Take the blofToms of Wotde three ouncesj Amylutn one 
 onncei grind them with Urine and ilrong Vinegar, of 
 which make a Cake, then dry it in ibe Son, and fe keep it 
 for ufe. 
 
 V. A Blew to wajh upon paper. 
 
 Take of the bed Azure an ounce, Kermes two ounces^ mvt 
 thetn, which temper with clear Gual-water, and it will be a 
 glorious color. 
 
 VI. To make a Venice Blew. 
 
 Take quick Lime, make ic into a pafte with firong Vfne^ 
 gar, half an hour after put thereto more Vinegar to foften it t 
 then add Indieo in fine pouder one ounce, mix ihem^ and di-> 
 geft it in horfe-dung for thirty or forty days. 
 
 VII. Another excellent Blew. 
 
 Mix tine white Chalk with juice of JEIder-berries fuU 
 ripe, to which put a little Alum-water. 
 
 VIII. Tomak^blew Smalt. 
 
 Take fluxible fand, Sal-Nitre and Cobalt, tatx thetti to<: 
 geiher. 
 
 IX. A lively Yellow. 
 
 DifTolve Orpiment in gum-water, to ^^ichpuc a little 
 ground Vermilion ; grind them together and you diall have < 
 very lively color. 
 
 X. A light Green. Take j'uyce of Rue, Verdi grife, and 
 Saffron, grind theqi well together and ufe them with gum* 
 water. 
 
 XI. Or thus, Take Sap-green, Flower-de-luce, or Tattmy greenl 
 which fleep in water : Verditure and Cerufe mixt mith a littk 
 Copper green, make a good light color, / 
 
 Xn. Blew. Ultramarine, felew-Bice, Smalt, and VerdiiureJ 
 grouQd ficgly with gum- water, or together make a good 
 blew. . ^ 
 
 XIII. Brown. Cerufe, Red-lead, EnglilbOker, and Vis&l 
 make a good brown, 
 
 XIV. Spanifh-brottm. To color any Horfe, Dog, or the 
 like, you inuft not calcine it ; fyet not . calcined it is a dirty 
 color^ : but tefliadow Vermilion or lay upon any dark ground^ 
 behind a pi(lliire, to Ihade birries in thedarkeft places, or to 
 
 Oa colQff 
 
19^ Polygraphkes Lib. III. 
 
 Color wooden pofts, wainfcot, bodies of Trees and tbp like, 
 it is very good (biing buratj 
 
 XV. Flejh Color. Mix white, Indian Lake, and Red-lead 
 Caccoiding as you would have it light or decpj and ro 
 diftinguilh a mans ilefh from a womaD5, miegle with ica litde 
 Oker. 
 
 XVI. Colors of Stones. Verdigrife with Varni'fli makes aa 
 Emerald : with Florence Ltktz Ruby j with Ultramarine 
 « Sapbire. 
 
 XVH. A never fadingGreen. 
 
 Take juice of tiowers of Flower-de-luce, put ft into Gum- 
 water and dirjr k in the Sun. 
 
 CHAP. xxr. 
 
 Of mixing Colors and Sha^owhg. 
 " ' >■ 
 I, iN mixing be careful not lo make the color too fad, nor 
 ■■- take the pencils out of one color and put them into a- 
 nother. 
 
 II. In mixing colors, ftir them well about the water fe- 
 Tcrally till they are well mixed 5 then put them together, 
 tiSiking the color fadder or lighter at pleafure. 
 
 III. Gr^^n. is fliadowed with Indico and yellow-ber- 
 
 '^'tV. Blew is fhadowed with Indico, Litmofe and Flory, 
 or any ot them being fleeped in Lees of Sope-afhes, and 
 uf^d with gum water. 
 
 ' V, Garments are fhadowed with their own proper co- 
 lors r or you may mingle the color with white f for the light^ 
 ar^d (hadow it ufitb the fame calor unmiogled : or you may 
 take the ihinneft ofthc color for the light, and fliadow with 
 the thickeft or bottom of the fame. 
 
 VI. Sap-^reen is only ufed to fliadow other greens with, 
 and not to belaid for a ground in any Garment. 
 
 ■ VIL Lake ought not to be fliaded with any color, for it 
 IS a dark red ; but for variety you may fliadow it with Bice, 
 or blew Verditnre, which will make it like changeable 
 Taffata. 
 
 VIJL 
 
 f 
 
Cliap. z I . Colors for Landskip, &c. 197 
 
 VII/. The fliadow for Telhw-Berriei is Umber j but for 
 beauties fake with Red-Lead, and the darkeft touches with 
 Spanifh-browo i and for variety with Copper-green, blw^ 
 Bice or Verditure, j 
 
 IX, White feisoff hUws and hlacki very well : H{d fets 
 off well with yelloitf : Tellows with redt, fad blews, hrotens, 
 greens, and purples. 
 
 X. Blem (a off well yN'nhyellows, reds, whites, hrcwns, and 
 hlacl^s : and Greens fet off well with purples, »nd r*i/. 
 
 XI. Morc' efpecially, all light colors are fhtdowed with 
 colors of the fame nature, buc more fad ; as for Example : 
 Vermilion is fhadowed with Lake or Spanilh brow. Verditer 
 and Bice are Hudowed with Indico. 
 
 XII, Gamboge and ye llottf berries tvt fliadowed with XJiXi" 
 ber, with Red-lead or Vermilion. 
 
 XIU. I{ed-Lead is (hadowed with Lake or Spanilh brown 
 Mafiicote, is fhadowed with Red Orpiment. 
 
 XIV. Spani/Jj brown is fliadowed with burnt Umber, with 
 Brafil-water. 
 
 XV. Vmber is fliadowed with Umber burnt, I{pjfet t3 
 Brafil are fliadowed with Spanifli brown mixed with brafil- 
 water. 
 
 XVI. Verdigrife is fliadowed with Indico mixed with 
 yellow berry water. 
 
 XVI/. Wood Soot and WaUnut-fhellt are fliadowed with 
 Umber. 
 
 XVIII. From the various mixtures of the foremention'd 
 Colors, infinite varieties almoft may arife, even wbatfoever 
 one pleafes. 
 
 XIX. But for our purpofe of wafliing Maps,Glohes PiSureJ^ 
 Landslips, &c. the moft tranfparent colors are principal ; of 
 which tbefe are chief, vi:(. Brafil, Logwood, Indian cakes, 
 Tarnfole, Cambogia, Saffron, yeilotv berries, Litmrfe, Sap-green^ 
 Verdigrife, Wood Soot, green Walnut Jhells : of ihefe you may 
 by mixture make feveral compounds, as. 
 
 XX. Jl Compound Green. Mix verdigrife water with 
 yellow-berry-water: it will be tranfparent, and you may 
 Hiake it deeper or lighter according to the proportioa that 
 you take of either. 
 
 XXJ. 4 Compound blettf color. Mix Litmofe warer with 
 yellew-berry water, and you will have a triofpareot fad blew, 
 which yoa may heighten or deepen as the former at plea- 
 fure. 
 
 O s XXlh 
 
ip8 Pclygraphices Lib. III. 
 
 XXU. A Compound Orange Color. It is made by asixing 
 Brafil vratcr with yellow-berry water of a tranfpareni color, 
 infinite other Varieties you may find out by pradice, much 
 better than to learn tbetn by many words. See other dil- 
 Courfes of this work. 
 
 CHAP. xxir. 
 
 Of Colors for rvafiiftg Landskips, 
 
 I. /^Reen mixed with white, Pink, Bice, Mafticot, Smalr, 
 
 ^"^ Jndico, or Cerufe ; or blew Yerditure mixt with a 
 few yellow berries makes a good gfeea for Landskips, 
 
 11. For the faddeil btlls ufe Umber burnt : for the Ughteji 
 places, put yellow to the burnt Umber : for other bills 
 lay Copper green thickned or the fire , or ia the 
 Sun: 
 
 J/7. For the bexthiSs farther ojf mix yellow berries with 
 Copper green: let the fourth part be done with green 
 Verdit»re; and the furthefi and fainteji places with blew- 
 Bice, or blew Verdiiure mingled wiih white, and fliadow- 
 td with blew Verdiiure, in the (hadows indifferent 
 thick 
 
 l\t Let the high-ways be done with red and white 
 Lead, and for variety Yellow-oker ; (hadow it with burnt 
 Umber, which you may ufe for fandy Rocks and 
 Hills. 
 
 V. Bfcks may be done with feveral colors, in fome places 
 black and white, in other places red an^ white, aad 
 in others blew and white, and the like, as you fee con- 
 venient. 
 
 VI. Ihe i^ater taxi^ be black Verdiiure and white, flia- 
 dowed with green and blew Verditure, when iht banks call 
 a green (hadow upon the water, and the water is dark fha- 
 dowed, then (hade it with iadico, green thickned, and blew 
 Verditure, 
 
 VIL Color huildimgs with as much variety of pleafant co- 
 lors at may be itsaginable, yet Ie( feafoa be your cnle ia 
 mixing yovr colon. 
 
 VUL 
 
Chap. 23. The TiSiureofWafhing^ &c. ipp 
 VlU, You may fometimes ule white and black for the 
 Wall, Conduits or other things : for Bricli^-boufis and the like, 
 S^d- lead and white. 
 
 IX. If many houfes ftand together, fet them off with va- 
 riety of colors, as Umber lod while j Lake and white j 
 Red*lead and white, and the like. 
 
 X. Laftly, for the SIqc, ufe Mafticot or yellow-berries, 
 and white for the lo^efi and li^htefi places ; red RofTet and 
 white for the next degree ■■, blew Bice and white for the other i 
 blew Bice, or blew Verditurc for the bigfjeft. 
 
 XL Thefe degrees and colors mufl btfo tvrought together ^that 
 the edge of each color may not receive any Jharfnefs j that K,fo 
 as that you cannot perceive where you began to lay them, being 
 fo drotvned one into another. 
 
 CHAP. xxni. 
 
 Of the Pra^ke of Wafhing, 
 
 I. VY/Itb the Alum ttfater wet overih« pidures to beco- 
 ^^ lored, for that keeps the colors from finking into the 
 paper, and will add a luilre uQto them, make them fiiew fair- 
 §r, and keep thetn from fading. 
 
 II. Then let the paper dry of it felf fbeing walhed with 
 Alum-ttjater) before you lay on the colors 7- or before you wet 
 it again, for fome paper will need wetting four or five 
 times. 
 
 III. The waHiing of the paper with the Alum-water muft 
 be done wkb a large pencil bruHi, fucb as we have advifed 
 to at the iixtb Sedion of the nioeteenth Chapter of this 
 Book. 
 
 IV. But if you inteod to varnilh your Pictures after you 
 lave colored them> infteadof wafliitig them with Alum' 
 water, firft fize them with new £ze made of good white 
 ftard), with a very fine brulh; and this you mud be Aire 
 to do all over, for elfe the varnifh will fink through^ 
 
 V. Having thus prepared your work, go to laying on your 
 colors according to the former direi^ions, fuitiog tbem^asnear 
 as may bie, to^ie Hlb of every thing, 
 
 Q 4 W. 
 
*oo Telygrapmcej Lib. II f 
 
 Vi. But before you lay on your Colors, yon mutt know 
 how 10 cemper them ; which you may do in this man- 
 ner. 
 
 F//, r. Such colors as are ground trith fair water: take a 
 fmall Quantity of them, put it into a Florfe Mufcle-Jhell, fntttng 
 thereto fome Gum-water , and the Color in a little time will be 
 foftned : then with your finger being very clean bruife the Co- 
 hr againfi the fhell till you find no kjiot undiffohed : after with 
 a clean pencil fir oak^down the color to tfx bottom of the fhell, 
 and it is fit for ufe ', if it be too thicl{, add more gum water 
 to it. 
 
 VIIL 1. Such colors as are wafhed you muft temper 
 in a fhell with Gum-water in the fame manner as the 
 former. 
 
 IX. 3. Such Colors as are fieeped, the liquor only of them 
 is to he ufed Without any other preparation. 
 
 X. The Pidure being painted, you may with fize (as at 
 the fourth Scdtion of the nineteenth Chapter of this Book) 
 pafte your Maps or Pidures upon cloth, thus : wet the flieet 
 of cloth therein, wring it out, and ftraio it upon a Frame, or 
 nail it upon a wall or board, and fo pafte your Maps or Pi(fl- 
 ures thereon. 
 
 XI. Laftly, if the Picflure be to be varniHied, having thus 
 fixed it into its proper Frame, then varnifli it with a proper 
 varnilh fby the following rules) and the work will be fully fi- 
 nilhed. 
 
 How to lay on your Colors. 
 
 XII. Firft, provide your felfof pencils of feveral fizes, and 
 if you will be curious, you ought to have a great and a 
 fmall to each refpecSiive color : if nor you muft always have 
 by you a difli of fair Water, in which you muft wafh and 
 cleanfc your pencil, wiping it with a clean linnen cloth, be- 
 fore you put it into another Color. 
 
 XIII. For your pencils, chufe thofe that are good, thus : 
 fee that they be fulleft next to the quill, defcending or 
 lefTening into a fmall room and fliarp point, which you 
 may fee by putting the hair into your mouth, and drawing 
 it through your lips once or twice ; thee you will fee what 
 ic is, and if you find any extravagant hairs, £nge them off 
 by a Candles fjame. 
 
 XIV. Beitjg thus provided with G)lors and pencils ; if 
 you defign to lay any color about the edges of any Map, 
 Firt, Piece, or divifion of CrcuDd, in a PUt > as fuppofe 
 
 you 
 
Chap. 23. The Vra^ke of fVaJhhg, &c. aoi 
 
 you would indDfe a particular Field or Clofe in a Manner 
 with yellow. 
 
 XV. With your pencil take Camboge or yellow-berry 
 water a very Imall quantity, and on the iafide of the bJack- 
 leadline, draw the Color along of an equal breadth (as near 
 as you can) from the line, broader or narrower as yeur 
 field is in bignefs ; not daubing the field or clofe all over 
 with the Color, which would he put an abufe to your 
 Map or Plat. 
 
 XVI. Then having gone round the Clofe or Field in this 
 manner, with your Color, wet your Pencil in your mouth, or 
 have by you a fmall quantity of water to dip it in, and ftrike 
 along the infide of the colored line, bringing it more down 
 towards the center of the field. 
 
 XVII. And this will fweeten your Color, and make it 
 (hew as if it loft it felf by degrees, to the very color of your 
 paper or parchment. This cocrfe is to be taken not only for 
 yellows, but for all other colors. 
 
 XVIII. Laftly, with a pen fif you cannot do it handfomly 
 with a pencil,) take fome of the color which fhadows the 
 color you have already ufed about the field, and go 
 over your black-lead line only, fo (ball your field be fi- 
 nilhed. 
 
 XIX. Lajlljf, after the fame manner yoa may adorn all 
 the fields ia your Plat or Map, of divers colors obferviog 
 this, that you color not two fields ad joyning one to another 
 both of the fame color, but of different- 
 
 XX. And therefore it behoves you to know what colors do 
 fet off one another beft ; and as oear as you can, to lay 
 Clofes or Fields, adjoyning one to another, of two fuch co- 
 lors, that one fliadow may fervebotb. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
lOr Poljigraphiccs hib. III. 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 Experimental Ohfervations on Vegetalle Cohrs. 
 
 I. A ftrong Infufion of Galls filircd, mixed with a ftKong 
 •• and clear loiuiion of Vicriol, makes a mixture as black 
 a' i»i^: which with a little itrong Oil of Vitriol is made 
 Tranfparent again : after which, by the affuGon of a little 
 quatiiity of a Itrong Solution of Salt of Tartar, it regaiss its 
 black color again. Thefirji black, (alt ho pale tn writing yet)bting 
 dry J appears to be good Ink^ 
 
 II. Adecodion of dried red Rofes in fair water, mixed 
 with a filtrated folution of blew Vitriol, makes a black color; 
 this mixed with a lutl'* Aejuafortis, turns it from a black, to 
 X deep Red : which by afFufion of a little Spirit of U- 
 rine, may be reduced Itraight to a thick and black 
 color. 
 
 III. Telloto Wax is whitned by diflblving it over the fire 
 in Spirit of Wine, letting it boil ^ little, and then exhaling 
 the Spirit ^ or elfe whilft it is hot, f(?J^ating it by filtra- 
 tion. 
 
 IV. Fair water mixed with a blood red Tin^S^ure ofJ5e»- 
 jamin drawn with fpirit of Wioe, immediately makes it oi a 
 milk white color. 
 
 V. Blacknefs may be taken away with oyl of Vitriol ; 
 fo black pieces of Silk or Hair I have lurn'd lo a kind of 
 yellow, 
 
 VI. A handful of Lignum Nepbriticum rafped, infufed in 
 four pound of fpring water, yields between the light and tka 
 eye an almoft golden color Cunlets the infufion be too (Iroag) 
 bur with the eye between the light and if (in a clear vial) a 
 lovely blew as indeed it is : this with fpirit of Vinegar 
 may be made to varniHi (^i\\ keeping its goldeti color) 
 anii after with oyl of Tartar per deliquium may be leftpred 
 again. 
 
 VII. Cloih died with blew and Woad, is by the yeUow 
 decodion oiLuteola died into a greea. 
 
 vni. 
 
Chap. 24 Of Vegetable Colors, a 03 
 
 Vin. Syrup of Violets mixed with a bigb folption ofGoId 
 in /l^ua regia, produces a reddiih mixture ; and with a high 
 folution of filings of Copper in fpirii of Urine, a lovely fair 
 greeo. 
 
 /X. Syrup of Violets mixt with a little juyce of Lemoaj> 
 fpirii of Salt, Tmegar, or the like acid Salt, will be immedi- 
 ately red ; but mixt with oyl of Tartar, or a folution of pot- 
 allies it will in a paomenc be perfe(5t green : the like in juice 
 pf blew-bottles. 
 
 X. A good quantity of oyl of Tartar, put Into a ftrong 
 folution of Verdigrife, gives a delightful blew, which may 
 be varioufly changed by adding fpirii of Urine, or Hartf- 
 boro. 
 
 XI. AJtboijgb red Rofes hueg over the fume of Sulphur 
 lofe all their rednels, and become white, yet oyl of Sulphur 
 (which is nothing but the fumes condenfed)doth wonderfully 
 heighten the tindure of the fame. 
 
 XII. Cochenele will have its color far more heightoed 
 by fpirit of Urine than by redlified fpirit of Wine : and one 
 grain of Cochenele in a good quantity of fpirit of Urine,beiDg 
 put into one hundred twenty fix ounces of water, tinged it 
 falthough but faintly :) which amounts to above one hundred 
 twenty five thoufand times its own weight. 
 
 XIII. Twenty grains of Cbochenele heiog mixed with an 
 ounce of Saccharuth Saturni, makes a molt glorious purple 
 color : and fo accordingly as the quantity is either diminilhed 
 or encreafed, fo the purple color Iball be either lighter or 
 deeper. 
 
 Xiy. A few grains of Cochenelt being mixed with the 
 Lixivium of Quick-lime in a due proportion, makes a fa- 
 fling purple color, of the greateft glory imaginable in the 
 world. 
 
 XV. The juice of privet berries with fpirit of Salt, is 
 turned into a lovely red : but with a ftrong folution of pot- 
 afhes into a delightful green. 
 
 XVI. Upon things red by nature, as Syrup of Clove- 
 gilliflowers, juice of Buckthorn berries, infufion of Red Rofes,' 
 Brazil, &c. Spirit of Salt makes no confiderable change, but 
 rather a lighter red : but other falts turn them into a greenifli i 
 ^fpecially juice of buckthorn berries. 
 
 XVII. Juice of Jafmin and fnow drops, by a ftrong alcali- 
 t{ate folution, was (although of no color) turned into a deep 
 sreeniA yellow. 
 
 xv/ir. 
 
104 PoljgrapJukes Lib. III. 
 
 XVIII. Buckthorn Berries being gathered green and dried 
 are cal'ed Sap-berries, which being infufed in Alum-water 
 gives a ftir yellow {which is ufed by Boolchinders for the edges 
 of their Books, and to color Leather alfo : ) being gathered 
 whenihey are black, they »re alkd Sap-green, and make a 
 green color being put into aBrafsor Copper veffel for three 
 or four days j or a little heated upon the fire, and mixed with 
 
 . Alum in pouder, and prefled forth i fo put into bladders, 
 banging it up till it is dry : and being gathered about the 
 end of November, (when they are ready to drop) they yield 
 a purplifli color. 
 
 XIX. Tindlure o( Ccchenele, diluted never fo much with 
 fair water, will never yield a yellow color : a fingle drop of 
 a deep folution in fpirii of Ufine, diluted in an ounce of fair 
 water, makes a fair Pink, OFCaroation, 
 
 XX. Oyl or fpirit of Turpentine, digefted with pure white 
 Sugar of lead, yields in a fliort time a high red tindure, which 
 Chymxiis all BalfamutnSaturni. 
 
 XXl Spirit of Salt dropt into a ftrong infufion of Cochc 
 releor juice of black cherries, makes immediately a fair red: 
 but dropt into the infufion of Brazil, a kind of yellow : I'o 
 the filtrated lindure of Balaujiins mixed with good fpirit of 
 Urine, or the like, turns of a darkifli green; but with fpirit of 
 Salt, a high rednefs, like rich Claret wine ; which glorious 
 color may in a moment be deftroyed, and turned into a dir- 
 ty green, by fpirit of Urine. 
 
 XXII. A high iafufion of Lignum Nephriticum, mixed with 
 fpirit jof Urine gives fo deep a blew, as to make the liquor 
 cpaceus : which after a day or two vaniftes* and leave the li- 
 quor of a bright amber color. 
 
 Where note that infiead of Spirit of Vr ins you may ufeoyl of 
 Tartar^ or a flrongjolution ofpot-afhes. 
 
 XXIIT. Infufion of Log-wood in fair water (mixt. with 
 fpirit of Sal-Armoniackj ftraight turns into a deep, rich, lovely 
 purple ; two or three drops to a fpoonful is enough, left the 
 color be fo deep, as to be opacous. 
 
 XXIV. Spirit oi Sal-Armoniack^'il^ turn fyr up of Violets 
 to a lovely green. 
 
 XXV. Infufion of Litmofe in fair water gives in a clear 
 glafs a purple color: but by addition of fpirit of Salt, it will 
 be wholly changed into u glorious yellow* 
 
 XXVf 
 
Chap. ^4. Of VegetahU Cohrs, 105 
 
 XXVI. The Infufions and jaices of fever*! plants will be 
 much alcered by a folution of Lead in fpirit of Vinegar : it 
 will turn infunon of red Rofe leaves into a fad green. 
 
 XXVII. So Tindure of red Rofes in fair water, would be 
 turned into a thick green, with the folution of Minium in fpi- 
 rit of Vinegar ; and then with the addition of oyl of Vitriol 
 the refolved Lead would precipitate white, leaving the liquor 
 of a clear, high red color again. 
 
 XXVIII. We have not yet found, that to ezbibie ftrong 
 variety of colors, there need be imployed any more than iJhefe 
 five. White, Black, Red, Blew, Yellow : for thefe being 
 varioufly compounded and decompounded^ exhibit a variety and 
 number of colors i fuch as thofe who are grangers to painting 
 can hardly imagine. 
 
 XXIX. So Black and fVbite varidufly taixed, make a 
 vaft cotnpany of light and deep Grays : Blew and YeBm, 
 many Greens ; I{ed and Tel^otty Orange-tawniesi I{ed utid 
 PJ-'hite Carnations: ^ed and Blem, Purples^ &c. producing 
 many colors for which we want names. 
 
 XXX. Acid falts deftroy a blew color: Salphureous, Uri- 
 nous or fixed reftore it, 
 
 XXXI. Acid and Akala^ate falts with many bodies 
 that abound with Sulphureous or oyly pans will produce a red, 
 as is manifeft in the Tincfture of Sulphur, made with Lixi- 
 yiums of Calcined Tartar or pot-aflies. 
 
 XXXII. Lafilyit maybe tPorth trial (finct it hath fucceeded 
 infome experiments) fo to take away the color of a Liquor, as 
 that it may be'colorlefs ; which in what we have tryed, was 
 tbiis: fir ft by putting into the Tindure, Liquor, or Juice, a 
 quantity of the folution of pot-aflies or oyl of Tartar per deli- 
 quium^ and then affufing a good or ftrong folutionof Alum, 
 which in our obfervations precipitated the tinging matter, or 
 gathered it into one body (like as it were cnrdsj and fo left 
 the Liquor tranfpartnt md clear as £ryfiaU 
 
 GHAP. 
 
^^^ Toiygraghices Lib, III, 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 Experimental Ohfervations of Minerdl" 
 Colors. 
 
 ^S 
 
 ' VhlimAte Aii^oUtdi in fair wateri and mixed with a hV 
 tie fpirit of Urine, makes a milk white mixture in a 
 motneni: which by addition of AquA fortis^ immediately a- 
 gain becomes tranfparent. 
 
 II. If Sublimate two ounces, and Tin-glafs one ounce be 
 fublimed together, you will have a (ubiimatc not inferior to 
 the beft Orient Pearls in the world. 
 
 III. Silver diflblved in Aquafortn and evaporated to dry; 
 nefs, and fair water poured two or three tinaes thereon, and 
 evaporated, till the calx\% dry, leai'esii of a Snow white- 
 nefs : which rubbed upon the skin, (wetted with fpittle, wa- 
 ter or the like) produces a deep blacknefs.not to be obliterated 
 in Tome days. ■ 
 
 PVith this, Ivory, Hair and Horns m^y he dyed in fair water 
 of a lafting blacl{, 
 
 iV. Coral diflblved by oyl of Vitriol, Sulphur, or fpirit of 
 vinegar, and precipitated by oylof Tartar yields a Snow 
 wbiteBefs. The fame of Crude Lead and Quickfilver diflbl- 
 ved in Aquafortw: So butter of Antimony redbified by bare 
 aflPuGonin much fair water, will (though UniSkious^be pre- 
 cipitated into that Snow white pouder which (being wafhed 
 from its corrofive SaltsJ is called Mfrcttriw Vite : the like of 
 which may be made without the addition of any Mercury 
 at all. 
 
 V Mercury Sublimate and precipitate yield (with the fpirit 
 of Uiine, H«ri«horn, or the like) 4 tvhite frecifitate : hwx 
 with the folution of Poi -allies or other Uxtviate Salts an 
 Orange Tatvny. And if on a filtrated folution of Vitriol.yotf 
 f>ut the folution of a fixed fait ; there will fubfide a copi- 
 ous lubftance far from whitencfj, which Chymifts call the 
 Sulphur of Vitriol. 
 
chap. 1^: Of Mineral Colors, 207 
 
 VI. If Copper two ounces be mixt with Tin one ounce, 
 the reddiihnels will vaoilh : and if Arfenick fcalcined with 
 Nitre) in a jult proportion be naixed with melted Copper, ii 
 will be blanched both within and without. 
 
 VII. Fine pouders of blew Bice, and yellow Orpiment 
 nightly mixed, give a good green : and a high yellow foluti- 
 on of a good Gold in ^^«<2 i^^j^Mj mixed with aduequan- 
 lily of a deep blew foluiion of crude Copper in ftrong Spirit 
 of Urine, produces a transparent green : And To blew and yel- 
 low Enamel fuf d together in the tiame of aLamp,being Itrong- 
 hy blowed on wiihout cealing, produces at length a green 
 color. 
 
 VIII. An urinous fait, largely put into the diflblution of 
 blew Vitriol in fair water, turn'd the liquor and corpufcules 
 (which reGded) into a yellowifli color like yellow Oker. 
 
 IX. Verdigrile ground with Sal'Armoniacl{, and the 
 like fdigeited for a while in a dunghilj makes a glorious 
 blew. 
 
 X. The true glafs of Antimony exiracfled with acid fpirits 
 (with or without Wine) yields a red tinClure. 
 
 XI. Balfaoa of Sulphur Cof a deep red in the glafs) (haked 
 about, or dropt on paper gives a yellow ftain. 
 
 Xli' If Brimftone and Sal-Armoniack. in pouder, of each 
 five ounces, be mixed with quick-lime in pouder fix ounces, 
 and diftilled in a Retort in fand by degrees ; you will have 
 a volatile fpirit of Sulphur of excellent rednefs, though none 
 of the ingredients be fo. 
 
 So alfo oyl of Annifeeds mixed with oyi of Vitriol^ gives in a 
 trice A blood red Color, whieb/oon decays. 
 
 XIII. Fine Silver diflblved in Aqua fortn, and precipitated 
 with fpirit of Salt; upon the firft decanting the liquor, the re- 
 maining matter will be purely white : but lying uncovered, 
 what is fubjed; to the athbient Air will iofe its white- 
 nefs. 
 
 XIV. Sublimate diflblved in a quantity of water and fil- 
 tred, till it is as clear as Cryftal, mixed Cin a Venice glafs) 
 with good oyl of Tartar fer </«/f^«/«w filtred,(three or four 
 drops to a fpoonfulj yields an opacous liquor or a deep O- 
 range color j after which if four or five drops of oyl of Vitri- 
 ol be dropt in, and the glafs ftraightway be ftrongly fliaked, 
 the whole liquor will fto admiration) be colorlefs without 
 fediment. And if the filtred foluiion oifublimed Sal-Armoni- 
 
2o8 Polygraph ices Lib. Ill 
 
 niack, and Sublimate of each alike be mixt whh the foluricn 
 of an Alcalt, ic will be white. 
 
 XV. Spirit ot Sal-Armoniack^ makes the folution of Ver- 
 digrife an excellent A:{tire-y but it makes the lolution of 
 Sublimate yield a white precipitate. 
 
 XVI. So the lolution of tilings of Copper in fpii\ o 
 Urine fmade by fermentationj gives a lovely A:{ure color 
 which withoyl of Vitriol (a few drops to a fp)onfulJ is de- 
 prived in a trice of the lame, and makes it like fair water. 
 And fo a folution of Vcrdigrile in fair water, mixed with 
 Itrong fpirit of Salt, or depblegmated. Aqtiaforttf, makes the 
 greennels almoft totally to dilappear. 
 
 XVII. Q^aick-filver mixed with three or four times its 
 weight of good oyl of Vittic!, and the oyl drawn off in 
 fand, through a glafs retort, leaves a Snow white precipitate ^ 
 which by affufion of fair water, becomes one of the lovelieit 
 light yellows in the world, and a durable color. 
 
 XVIII. Tin calcined ferfe by fire, affords a very white 
 calx called Putty : Lead, a red pouder called Minium : 
 Copper a dark or greyilh pouder: Iron a dirty yellowifli 
 color, called Crocus Mart is : and Mercury a red pou- 
 der. 
 
 XIX. Gold dilTulved in Aqua re^ia Ennobles the Menftru- 
 iim with its own color: Silver Coyn diflblved in Aqua fortn 
 yields a tind^ure like that of Copper ; but fine Silver a kind 
 of faint blewifbnefs : Copper dilfolved in Ipiric of Sugar 
 (drawn off in a glafs Retort j or in oyl or fpirit of Turpentine, 
 affords a green tindlure; but in Aquafortis, a blew. 
 
 XX. Vermillion is made of Mercury and Brimftons fubli- 
 med together in a due proportion. 
 
 XXI. Glafs may have given to it a lovely golden color 
 with Quick-filver; but it is now colored yellow generally 
 wirh calx of Silver: yet Iheil-Silver, (fuch as is u(ed with 
 pen or pencilj mixed with a convenient proportion of poii- 
 dered glafs in three or four hours fu^on, gave a lovely Sap- 
 phirine blew. 
 
 XXII. Glafs is tinged green (by the Glafs-menj with xhz 
 Calx of Venus : which Calx mixed with an hundred times 
 its weight of fair glafs gave in fufion a blew colored 
 mafs. 
 
 XXIII. P«.'/^ (which is Tin calcined] as it is white of it 
 felf fo it turns the' purer fort of glafs metal into a white mafs, 
 which when opacous enough, (erves icst H v)hJt6 Enamel. 
 
 XXIV: 
 
Chap. %6. Of Mstalu zop 
 
 XXIV. This white Amel is as it were the Bafis of alltborc 
 line Concretes, that Gold-fmiths, and leveral Artificers ufc, 
 in the curious Art of Enameling i for this white and fufibic 
 fubftance, will receiye into it lejf, without fpoiling them, the 
 colors of divers other Mineral fubitances, which like it, will 
 endure the fire. 
 
 XXV. Glafs is tinged blew with the dark mineral called 
 ^affora : and with Manganefs or MagnejiM in a certain pro- 
 portiot), Glafs may be tioged of a tied Color > and alfo ef 
 a Purplilh or Murry: and with a greater quaDtity, into that 
 deep color, which pafifes for black. 
 
 XXVI. YcMow Orpiment fublitiMd with fea- fait, yields a, 
 white and Cryftalline Arfenick : Arfenick^cdiontA with pure 
 Nitre being duly added to Venm in the fufion,gives it a White- 
 nefs both within and without. 
 
 XXVII. So La^ii CaUminarfs turns Venns or Copper, into 
 Brafs. 
 
 , XXVIII. And ^ink^ duly mixed with Venus when it is i« 
 fufion, gives it the nobleit golden Color, that was ever feen 
 in the belt Gold, but it will not endure various meltings^ 
 
 XXIX. Copper difTolved in Aqua-fortk will imbue fc- 
 vcral bodies of the Color of the foluiion. 
 
 XXX. Gold diffolved in Ai^ua ^ffia will (tho not com-' 
 monly known j dye Horns, Ivory, ana other Bones of a du^ 
 rable Purple Color. 
 
 XXXI. Laftly, Cryftals of Silver made with Aquafort» 
 (tho they appear White) will prefeniiy dye the Skin, Nails, 
 Hair,Horns,and Bones, with a Blacliuoi to be walhed off. 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 Of Metals, ' ' • ^ 
 
 I. *^0 harden Qiiickr/ilvet. . , 
 
 "*■ Calt your Lead feparated from its drofs into a vsSd, 
 and whenic begins to cool, tbruft ia the point of a (tick, which 
 take out again and caft in the Argent Vive, and it will con; 
 geai : then beat it in a mortar, and do fo often ; when it U 
 hardj melt it often and put ic into fair water, doing it fo 
 
 P long 
 
zio Polygraphices Lib. III. 
 
 leng till it is bard enough, then being al! in a piece, boyl it in 
 Liofeed oyl, the (paceoi (ix hours, and it will become Mal- 
 leable, and may be hammered. 
 
 II. To ttnge Q^iicl{-filver of the ctlor of Gold. 
 
 Break it into foiall pieces fbeing hardncd) which put into 
 A Crucible, •*. uh the pouder ot Cadmia.Jiratumjuperflratum^ 
 mixed wiih Pomtgranate peels, Turmerick fbeaten fine) and 
 Railons, cover the Crucible and lute ii well, dry it well ; 
 and then fet it on a fire for fix or fcven hours, that it may 
 be red-hot j then blow it with bellows till it run, which then 
 let cool wbilit covered with coals> and ic will have the color 
 of gold. 
 
 III. To fix "Quiclc/ilver hef»g hardned. 
 
 This is done with fine pouder of Cryftal glafs, laid with 
 the Metal ftratum fuper (Iratum in a Crucible covered and 
 luted J heating ic all over red-hot, and then melting of it. 
 
 IV. To ma\e ^iick^filver malleable. 
 
 Firit harden ir by the firit 5edion, then break the Metal 
 into fmall pieces, and boil it a quarter of an hour in fharp vi- 
 negar : iheo add a I'mle Sal- Armomacl{, and digeft all toge- 
 ther for ten or twelve days ; then boil all together in a luted 
 Crucible, till it is red-hot, and by degrees crackt, Laftly, 
 hang the Mercury in a pot with Britnltonc at boitona : co- 
 ver it, lute it and fer it itiro the fire, that ir msy grow hot 
 by degrees, and receive the fume of the Sulphur ; do tfaos for 
 a month once a day, and the Mercury will run and be 
 hammered. 
 
 V. Another way of tinging Mercury. 
 
 Take purified Mercury one ounce, Sulphur two ounces, A- 
 ^uafortfs three ounces, let ihem all ftand till the water grow 
 dear ; dittil this with iis fcdiment, and at bottom of the 
 Limbeck you Ihall find the Mercury hard, andofaocxad: 
 color. 
 
 VI. To color and /often Gnld. 
 
 Diflblve Verdigrifein vinegar, and drain it through a felt, 
 then congeal, and when it begins to wax thick, put to it , 
 feme S^I-Armoniick and let it harden a good while, then 
 melt gold with ir, and it will heighten the color and make 
 it fotc. 
 
 VII. To make Gold and Silver fofter. 
 
 Take Mercury Sublimate, Sal Armnniack, of each alike ; 
 liwuder ih-m melt the gold, and put to n a little of this pou- 
 ier, and it will be foft. 
 
 VIII. 
 
Chap. i6. Of Metals. 'an 
 
 VIII. Another wAy to do the fame. 
 
 Take VitrioJ, Verdet, Sal-Ai mouiack, burnt Brafs, of each 
 half an ounce, mix them with Aqua fortis^ Itt it fo repofc 
 in the heat two days, then ]et it harden, do thus three times 
 with Aqua for'tis, and let it dry, make it into pouder. tti one 
 drachm put one ounce of gold three iiines> and it will be 
 fof ter. ^ 
 
 IX. Amber aiay to do the farm in Silver. 
 
 Take 5'alc-peier, Tartar, Salt, Verdet, boil all together, 
 till the water is confumed, then put to it Urine, and let it 
 fo confume, and you (hall have an oyJ, which put into mcl" 
 ted silver will do the fame. ^ 
 
 Or thus, T<«4e as matx^ wedges as jou have mleted, pit them 
 one night into a crucible in a furnace^ but fo as they melt not^and 
 they will be fcft and fair. 
 
 Or thus , Take honey , oyl^ of each ali^e, in whieh 
 quench the Gold or Silver three or four timeSy and it will b§ 
 fof ter, • 
 
 Or thus, "Take Mafiick,. Frankincenfe, Myrrh, Borax, Ver- 
 nix^ of each a like in pouder. 
 
 Or thus, Quench the Gold or Silver in water of Sal-Armonii 
 Hckr ^nd it Will be fof t. 
 ' X. To tinge Silver of a Gold color. 
 
 Take fine Gold, fine Silver, good Brafs, and Brafs of 
 Copper calcined with Sulphur-vive, of each alike, melt 
 ^hesn down togeiher,snd it (hall appear to be gold of eighteen 
 carets fine. 
 
 XI. Another way to tinge Silver. 
 
 Take Quick-lUver, purged three ounces, Ieaf-g6ld one 
 ounce, mix them and put them into a glafs Retort well lu- 
 lled, put it on the fire till it grow hot j then lake it off and 
 add to it Quick-filver purged two ounces, Sal- Armoniack, one 
 ounce, Sal Ellebrot hiK itx ounce, Borax two drachms, then 
 feal up the glals hermetically, and put it into a continual fire 
 for three days; then take itoqt, let it cool, open the Retort, 
 take cut the matter, and pouder it very fine; of which 
 pouder mix one ounce with filver five ounces, and it will 
 linge ic into a good gold color. 
 
 Note, Sal Ellebrot is thus made. Tal{e pure common Salt, 
 $al Gem, Sal Alcali in pouder^ of each one ounce, juice of Mints 
 four ounces, ffrtng water four founds mtti^le them, and evapo- 
 rati.^ And ^ickrjilver is purged by wajhivg it in /harp Vi- 
 
 P % negar 
 
2, IX Folygraphices Lib. III. 
 
 f^ffl^ar three or four times andftraining it thro Shamou Leather j or 
 h ftiblirHing it, tohtck is better. 
 
 XII. To brirg Silver into a Calx. 
 
 This is done by amalgamaiing of it with Quick-filver, 
 and then fubliming of it j or by diflblviog it in Aquafortisy 
 and precipitating it with the folmion of Salt, in fair water, 
 ^U)d then wafliing it with warm water often jo free it from 
 the falts : or elfc by mingling the lih'ngs with fublimcd 
 Mercury, and in a Retort caufing the Mercury to afcend, 
 which will leave at bottom the Calx of Silver, tit for Jew- 
 els, (3 c. 
 
 XIII. To blanch Silver. 
 
 Take Sat-/1rtnmiacl{_^ i{och-Alum, Alum Pulmofum, Sal Gem, 
 Argol, B^manVitrtoL of each ahkf i poiider and mix thetD,and 
 dilfolve them in fair water, in which boil the Silver fo long, 
 till von fee it wonderful white. 
 
 XIV. To color Silver of a Gold color. 
 
 Take Silt-peter two pouid , Roch-Alum five pound, 
 mingle, and diltil them, keeping the water for ufe. When 
 you ufe it, melt the Silver, and quench it in the faid water. 
 
 XV. To tinge Brafs of a Gold color. 
 
 DifTolve burnt Brafs in /^.;«<i/or/» (made of Vitriol, Salt- 
 peter, Alum, Vcrdigrife and Vermilionj and then reduce it 
 again, and it will be much of a gyld color. 
 
 XVI. To make Brafs through tvbite. 
 
 Heat Brafs red-hot, and quench it in water diftilled from 
 Sal-Artnoniack, and Egg-fhells ground together, and it will 
 be rtry white. 
 
 X VII. To make Brafs tt'hite othertfife. 
 
 Take Egg-fliells and calcine them in a Crucible, and lem* 
 per thein with the whites of Eggs, let it ftand fo three weeks i 
 heat rf-e Brafs rcd-bot, and put this upon it. 
 
 XV 1 11. To make Brafs. 
 
 T«ke Copper three pounds, Lapi Calaminar« one pound 
 in pouder, melt theoj together the fpace of an hour, then 
 put it out. 
 
 XI X The tray to color Brafs tphite. 
 
 Diifolvc a penny weight of Silver in' Aqua fort is, putting 
 it to the fire in a vefiei, till the Silver turn to water \ to 
 which add as much pouder of white Tartar as may drink 
 up all the wat^r. make it into balls, with which rub anj 
 Brafs and it will be wbitf as Silver. 
 
 XX. To tinge Copper cf a Gold color. 
 
 Take 
 
Cliap. z6. Of Metaii. 213 
 
 Take Copper, Lapi Calamiruris, of each four drachms* 
 Tucty two drachms : heat ihe Copper red-bot twice, quench- 
 ing it in pi(s : doing the like by the Lapis and Tuiry : lake of 
 the diffolved Copper half ar^ ounce, adding to it Honey ona 
 ounce, boil them till the Honey look black and is diythac 
 it may be poudered, which then beat with the Lapri^nd Tat- 
 ty : boil ihcoa again, till the Copper is melted, and ic is 
 done. 
 
 XXI. Another way to make Copper of a Gold color. 
 
 ^ Take the Gall of a Goat, Arlenick, of each a fufficieni 
 quantity, and diftil them > then the Copper being bright 
 being waflied in this water, vvill turn inta the color of 
 Gold, 
 
 XXII. Another way to do the fame. 
 
 Melt Copper,to which put a little ^/n;^ in filings, and the 
 Copper will hare a glorious golden color, 
 
 XXIII. To ma\e Copper of a white color.- 
 
 Take Sublimate, Sal-Armoniack, of each alike j boil 
 them in Vinegar, in which quench the Copper being made 
 red-hot i and it will be like Silver. 
 
 XXIV. Another way to whiten Copper. 
 
 Heat it red-hot divers times, and quench it in oyl of Tar- 
 tar per deliquium, and it will be white. 
 
 XXV. Another way to whiten Copper. 
 
 Take Arfenick three ounces, Mercury Sublimate two oun- 
 ces, Azure one ounce, mix them with good and pure greafe 
 like an ointment, with which anoint any Copper veflTeljthen 
 put that vefTel into another, and fet it into a digeftivi^kfaeac 
 for two months, after which cleanfe it with ^ brulh a^jwa- 
 ter, and It is done. 
 
 XXVI. Another may to whiten Copper. 
 
 Take Arfenick calcined with Saic-peter, and Mercury 
 Sublimate, which ca(t upon melted Copper, and it will be 
 white like Silver. 
 
 XXVli. Jofoften Copper. 
 
 Melt burnt Brafs with Borax in a Crucible, quench it in 
 Linfeed-Oyi, and then beat it gently on an Anvil- boil ita- 
 gain, and quench it in oyl as before, ' doing thus five or fix 
 times, till it is (oft en£.ugh ; and this will neatly unite with 
 Gold, of which you may put in more by half than yoq can 
 of other Brafs. 
 
 XXVlU. To tinge Iron with a Gold color. 
 
 P3 Lay 
 
^I4 Polygr.ijfhices Lib. III. 
 
 J-ay in a Crucible plates of Iron and Brimftone ftrgtum 
 fuper jii atum, cover and Jute it well, and calcine in a furnace, 
 ibtn take them out and tbey ui!l be brittle : put them into 
 a poi with a large tnoutb, and put in fharp diililicd vinegar, 
 digesting till they wax red over a gentle beat: iben decant 
 rbe vinegar, and add new, thus doing till all the Iroh be 
 dilfolved J evaporate the inoiliure in a glals Retort or Vefica, 
 and talt the remaining poader on Silver, or other white 
 Metal, and it will look like Gold. , 
 
 XXIX To make Iron or Silver of a Brafs color. * 
 Take Flowers of Brafs, Vitriol, 5(i/--/frOTot2/<jc/(r, of each a- 
 
 like in nne puuder j boil it half an hour in Itrong vinegar, 
 take it horn the fire, and pur in Iron or Silver, covering the 
 velld till it be cold, and the Metal will be like to Brafs, and 
 fit to be gilded : or rub polidied Iron with Aqua fortii in 
 wbiv^b fi.i. gs uf Brafs are diUblvcd. 
 
 XXX To (tnge Iron into a Biofs color. 
 
 Melt the Iron in a Crucible, catling upon it Sulphur vive, 
 then catt it into fmall rods, and beat it into pieces (for it 
 is very brittlej then in Aquafortis dilTolve it, and evapo- 
 rate the tnenjiruum, reducing the pouder by a ftrong fire in- 
 to a body again, and it will be good Brafs. 
 
 XXXI. To whiten Iron. 
 
 Firit purge it, by heating it red-hot. and quenching it in a 
 water made of Lye and Vinegar, boil'd with Salt and A- 
 lutn, doing this fo often till it is foaiewhat whitened. The 
 fragmenss ofthe Iron beat in a mortar till the Silt is quite 
 chaidB} and no blacknels is left in the Liquor of it, and till 
 the Iron is cleanA-d from its drofs: then Amalgamate Lead 
 and Quick-fllver together, and reduce them into a pouder : 
 lay th. prepared plates of Iron and this poudery?r4/«F7» fnper 
 Jiratum, in a Ctucible, cover it,and lute it all over very fhong- 
 ly, that the leaft fume may nor come forth, and put it into 
 the fire for a day ; at lengeb encreafe the fire, lb as it may 
 melt the Iron f which will quickly bej and repeat this woik 
 till it is white enough: It is whitened alfo by melting with 
 Lead the Marcbafit or fire-ftone and Arfenick. If you mix a 
 little Silver(wirb which it willingly unites) with it, it gives a 
 wonderful vv bite nefs, fcarcely ever CO be changed anymore, 
 by vpy art whatfoever. 
 
 XXXll To kfsp Iron from Hiiftinr, 
 
 Rub it ever with viocgtrmivr with Cerafe; cr with the 
 
 marrow 
 
Chap. 17. The wanner of GiU'tng. my 
 
 marrow of a Hart j if it be rufty, oyl of Tartar fer dJi^mum 
 will preCently take it away and cleanfe it. 
 
 XXXIII. To cleanfe Brafs. 
 
 Take jl^ua foftis aod water of each alike, (hake tbem 
 together, ar.d with a wollen rag dipt therein rub it over i 
 then prefensly rub u with an oyly cloth i Laftiy, with a dry 
 WolJen dochdiptin pouder of La fk Calaminari:, it will be 
 clear ap(j b'igbt as when new. 
 
 XXXIV To fif ten Iron. 
 
 Tiiie Alum, Sal-Armoniack, Tartar, of eaclc alike, pui: 
 them into good Vinegar, and fee them on the fire, heat the 
 Iron, and quench it therein : or quench it four or five times 
 in oyl, in which melted Lead hath been ptst fix or fcven 
 times. 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 The ways and manner */ Gilding. 
 
 I. *^0 lay Gold on any thing. 
 
 -■- Take Red-lead ground fine, temper it with Linfeed- 
 oyl : write with it, and lay Leaf-gold on ir, let it dry, and 
 polifli it. 
 
 IL To lax Gold on Glafs. ^ 
 
 Take Chalk and Red-lead, of each alike, griniJ tbcm to- 
 gether, and temper them with Linfeed-oy I : lay it on, ao4 
 when it is almott dry, lay Leaf gold on it ; let it dry, then 
 polift) it. 
 
 IIL To gild Iron with a water. 
 
 Take fpring water three pound, Roch-Aium three ounces, 
 Roman Vitrioi,Orpimcnt,of Earth one ounce, Verdigrife twen- 
 ty four grains, Sal-gem three ounces, boil all together, and 
 when it begins to boil, put in Tartar aod Bay-falt, of each 
 half an ounce ^ continue the boiling a good while, then take 
 it from the fire, ttrike the Iron o\tt therewith, dry it againft 
 the fire, and burnifliic. 
 
 IV. To layGoldon Iron or other Metals. 
 
 Take liquid Varnilh one pound, Linfeed Oyl and Tur- 
 F i pentine 
 
^l6 Polygraphices Lib. \\\. 
 
 peminc, of each one ounce ; mix ibcm well together: ftrike 
 this over any Metal, and afterwards lay on the Gold or Sil- 
 V-er, and when it is dry polilh it, 
 
 V. To Gild Stiver or Brafs with Gold water. 
 
 Take Qaick-filver iwo ounces, put ii on the fire in a Cru- 
 cible, and when it begins to ftnoak, put into it an Angel of 
 fine Gold; then take it off immediately, for the Gold will 
 be prefently difToIved : then if it be too tbin, ftrain a part 
 of the Quick-filver from it, through a piece ef Faftian : 
 this done, rub the Gold andQuick-filrer upon Brafs or Silver, 
 and it will cleave unto it, then put the faid Brafs or Silver 
 upon quick coals till it begin to fmoak, then take it from the 
 fire, and fcraich it with a hair brulh ; this do fo long till all 
 the Mercury is rubbed as clean off as may be, and the Gold 
 appear of a faint yellow: which color heighten with Sal- 
 Armoniack, Bole and Verdigrife ground together and tem- 
 pered with water. 
 
 iVhere note, that before you gild your Metal, you mufi boil 
 it trith Tartar in Beer or abater J then fcratch tt with a brafs 
 trirc briifh. 
 
 VI. Another tt>ater to gild Iron, Steel, f^nives, Stfordr, and 
 Armour with. 
 
 Take Fire-flone in pouder, put it into a ftrong red Wine- 
 vinegar for twenty four hours, boil it in a glazed pet , ad- 
 ding oQore Vinegar as it evaporates, or boils away: into 
 this water dip your Iron, Steel, (^c. and it will be black; 
 dry ir, then polifh it, and you will have a gold color under- 
 r*ath. 
 
 VII. • Another way to gild Iron with. 
 
 Take Salt-peter, Roch-alum burnt, of each half an ounce, 
 Sal-Armoniack an ounce, all being in fine pouder, boil with 
 ftrong Vinegar in a Copper Vf ITel ; -with which wet the 
 Iron, ^c. then lay on Leaf-gold. 
 
 VIII. Another way to gild Iron tvith. 
 
 Take Roch-Alum, and grind it with boys Urine, till it 
 ii well diffolved, with which anoint the Iron, heat it red- 
 bot in a lireof wood coals, and it will be like Gold. 
 
 IX. Togild Bookj. 
 
 Take Bole-Armoniack four peny weight, Sugar-candy one 
 pcny weight, mix and grind them with glair of Eggs, tbenoa 
 a bound Book, (while in the prcfs, after it hath been fmear- 
 ed with glair of Eggs, and is dryedj fmear the faid compofi- 
 eioB, let it dry, then rub it well ^ad polifh it : then with fair 
 
 water 
 
Gbap. 2 7' The manner of GiUhg. ziy 
 
 water wet ibe edges of the Book, and fuddcnly lay on the 
 gold, prefling it dawn with Cotton gently, this done, let it 
 dry, and t^hen polifli it exactly vyich a tooth. 
 
 X Anotbsr way of gilding Iron. 
 
 Take water three pound, Alum two ounces, Sal-gem three 
 oujnces, Roman Vitriol, Orpiment of each one ounce, fios 
 yEris ttveciy four grains j boil all with Tartar and 5ait as at 
 the third Setftioo. 
 
 XL To makfi Iron of the color of Gold. 
 
 Take Linfeed-oyl three ounces, Tartar two ounces, yolks 
 of Eggs boiled hard and beaten two ounces, Aloes half an 
 ounce, Saffron five grains, Turmerick two grains : boil 
 all in an Earthen veifel, and with the oyl anoint Iron, and it 
 will look like Gold. If there be not Liv{eed-oyl enough, you may 
 fut in more. 
 
 XII. A Golden liquor to color Iron, iVood^ Glafs, or Bones 
 ttfith. 
 
 Take a new laid Egg, through a hole at one end take out 
 the white, and fill up the Egg with Quick-filver two parts, 
 Sal-Armoniack iinely poudered one part ; mix them ail toge- 
 ther with a Wire or little ftick : Itop the hole with melted 
 wax, over which put an half Egg-fhell: digeft in horfe- 
 dung for a month, and it will be a line golden colored Li- 
 quor. 
 
 X//J. To gild Silk. andLinnen. 
 
 Take Glew made of Parchment, lay it on the Linn«n^ or 
 Silk, C^c. gently, that it may not fink : then take Cerufe, 
 Bole and Verdigrife, of each alike, mix and grind them up- 
 on a ftoae : then in a glazed veflll mix it with varniih, 
 which let firaper overafmall fire, then keep itforule, 
 
 ^/K Another of a pure Cold color. 
 
 Take juice of frefli Saffron, or ('for want of it/ Saffron 
 ground, the beft clear Orpiment of each alike : grind them 
 with Goats gall or gall of a Pike (which is betierj digeft 
 twenty eight days in horfe-dung, and it is done. 
 
 XK To gild on Wood or Stone. 
 
 Take Bole-Armoniack, oyl of Ben,of each a fufficieni quan- 
 tity ; beat and grind them together : with this fmear the 
 wood or ftone, and when it is almoft dry, lay on the Leaf- 
 gold, let it dry, then polilh it. 
 
 Xl^I. To gild ttith Leaf 'gold. 
 
 Take leaves of gold, and grind them with a few drops of 
 
 honey 
 
ai8 Folygraphkes Lib. Til. 
 
 boney, to which add a litile gum- water, and it will be cx- 
 Celleof to write or pajnt wuh. 
 
 IVll. To gild Iron or Steel. 
 
 Take Tartar one ounce, Vermilion three ounces, Bole- 
 Armoniack, /i^ua-vitte of each two ounces, grind ibem to- 
 gether wirb Linietd oyl, and put thereto Lapts CaUminarii 
 the quantity ot a haile-nut j and grind iherewuh in the end 
 a few drops of varniJh ; take it off the Hone, Itrain it 
 thro' a Lionen Cloth, ("for it muft be as thick as botiy) then 
 ftrike it over Iron, or Steel, and let it dry.- fo lay on your 
 Silver or Gold, and burnifli it. 
 
 XVIH To color Tin or Copper, ef a Gold color. 
 
 Take Linteed Oil,(et it on tiae fire,Scuin it ; and put in Am- 
 ber, Aloes, Hepatick, of each a like ; ftir them well together 
 till it grows thick ; take it off, cover it dole j and let it in 
 the Earth three days : when you ufe it, ftrike the Metal 
 all over with it, witha Peacil, let it dry, and it will be of a 
 Golden color. 
 
 XIX. To Silver any Meial. 
 
 Take ftrong Aqua-f^tis in which diffblve fine Silver, to 
 which put fo much Tartar ir fire ponder as will make it 
 imoPafte: with which rub any Metsl, and it will look like 
 fine Silver. 
 
 XX. To gild.fff as itjhall rat out with anylVater. 
 TakeOker cilcin^d, iriri^'cc ftone, of each alike, Tartar a 
 
 little : beat them with Lir^u 4 Oil and five or fix drops of 
 VarniHi j ftrain all thro a linnen cloth, and with this Liquor 
 you m«y imitate Gilding. 
 
 XXI. To gild Paper. 
 
 Grind Bole Armoniack with Rain-water, and give one lay- 
 ing of it : be'n^jdry, take Glair of Eggs, and add to it a lit- 
 tle Sugar Can.-iy and Gum-water, which lay over the former, 
 and upon this, (when in a fit drynefs) lay your Leaf Silver, or 
 Leaf Gold. 
 
 CH AR 
 
,lChap. 2-8. Of wakhg White Colors f^c. ti^ 
 
 CHAP, xxvnr. 
 
 Of making White Colors , and Whitening Plai' 
 Jler Walls. 
 
 I. A fine H^hitefor Water Colors. 
 
 ^Tak? filings of fine Silver,o^ Leaf-Silver, which difTolve 
 in A^ua-f or tis or Sp. MfJ-z.evaporate the Aqua fortis^xiW it looks 
 like Cryftals in the bottom of the Glafs : the other part of 
 the Aqua fortn decant, and waih the Silver in fair common 
 water, fiveor fix tio3es,iill it is freed from the Aquafortis, ■which 
 yoa may know by taltingj then dry ic for ufe. It maft be ufed 
 with Gum water, with a little water of Sugar- candy. 
 
 II. An Incomparable fine white Lead. 
 
 Take choice white Lead in Flakes, ^rind it well upon a 
 Porphyry with Vinegar, and it will turn BlackiHi ; thentaka 
 a pot full of Watcrjin which walh your White Lead very welF, 
 let it fettle, and pour off the Water : grind it again with Vi- 
 negar, and walh it in like manner again j repeat this work 
 pnce or twice more, a|;;i^ you will have an Excellent White,as 
 well for Water colori, as Painting in OyJ. 
 
 III. To tvhite tsajlo plaiftcr Walls. 
 
 I. The wall is to be very well Plaiftered, with very fine 
 Plaifter and well layed, which being throughly dry, it is to 
 be whitened with Lime Mi!k very clear as follows. 2. Before 
 you lay on the Lime Milk.thc Wall h to be very well wetted 
 with water i for in this confifts the fecret, chat the Wfaitning 
 may not dry too fall, but rather very flowly, for fo by drying 
 Leifurt-ly, the Lime will have time to fatten, fo as it will nei- 
 the whiten your Hands nor your Cloths. 3. If it is an old wall 
 andt here is any dirt on ir, or if it is free-ftone and it is dirty, 
 it ought M be fcraped pfF. 4. Lime Miik is made uf Lime 
 which baleen a long time flaked with a fuiScient quantity 
 of Water, ftirring it till it makes a white Froth; the water is 
 to be decanted after fome days time,and the Lime dryed,and 
 then it is to be made into Lime Milk, Ibme fay with New 
 Milk, but it is certain, that skimed Milk will dojtfae Cream or 
 Oily parts being taken off. 5. The Wall ought to be walht 
 over three or four timeSj and then the lall doing of it, ought 
 
 to 
 
iao J^olygraphicej Lib. Ilf. 
 
 10 be with Milk of nnflack'c Lime, that the white may be the 
 Gfoffier. 
 
 IV. Another may to da the fame. 
 
 The Wall being fitted and prepared as aforefaid, the Lime 
 Milk may be made either olwellflaked Lime, or rather of 
 Whiting i which done the firft time the W«I| is waQit over, 
 the Lime Milk ought to be ihin,ihenext time fomewhat thick- 
 er : the third time Itill thicker, putting in lels of the Milk as 
 yott think fit ; and the fourth time ihickeft of all, To wili vour 
 Wall be purely White. ^ 
 
 CHAP. XXIX. 
 
 Of Mezo-tinto : and the taking off^ an old Print 
 on White Paper. 
 
 L 'TTAke a well poliflied Copper plate, which make all 
 ■■■ over rough one way, with an engine particularJyde- 
 Ijgned for this purpofe ; then crofs it over with the Engine a- 
 gain i and if you fee occafion, crors it over again the third 
 lime, till it be made all over rough alike, t'i:^. fo as if it 
 were to be printed it would print black all over. 
 
 II. This done,take Cbarcole, black Chalk or black Lead^to 
 rub over the plate, and draw your defigtis with wbtte Chalk 
 upon the fame, then take a fharp Stiff, and trace out the out- 
 lines of the dcfign which you drew with the white Chalk. 
 
 IIL Where you would have the light ftrike ftrongeft, 
 rake a burnilhcr, and burniHi that part oftbe Plate, as clean 
 and fmooth as it was when it was firft polifhed. 
 
 IV. Where you would have the light fainter ; there you 
 mufl not poliih it fo much : and after this manner you 
 muft either increafe or decreafe the light in your defign, 
 making it either fainter, or ftronger, as the necelTity of 
 your work fhall require. 
 
 V. The fliape or form of the Engin or Inftrum^ is va- 
 rious and manifold, according to the fancy of the Amfl ; thofe 
 that defire them, may have them of feveral perfons in 
 London, who profefs and pradlife the Arts of Drawing, 
 Etching, and Engraving. 
 
 VI- To take an old Print off, on a piece of ttbite Paper, and 
 not fpoil the Print. Take Linfeed Oyl and fmear it all o- 
 ver the Print with a clean cloth. 
 
 VII. 
 
Chap. 50. Of makhg Ink. 221 
 
 VII. Take a clean piece of Paper, lay it over the former 
 Print j lay them both upon a pollifti'd Copper Plate, «od 
 pafs them thro' the Rouiing Prefs ; fo will the white 
 Paper receive the Reverfe ot the Print, or the Print back- 
 wards. 
 
 VIII. But to take the Oil out of the Print, you muft 
 wafli it with Oil of Spike or Turpentine : thee being dryed 
 by or over the Fire, the Linfeed Oyl, with the Oyl of 
 Spike will evaporate, and leave the Print as fair as it was 
 at firft. 
 
 G H A P. XXX. 
 
 Of making various forts ef Ink, 
 
 I. "TO mal^egood hlack^writ ing Ink^. 
 
 ^ Take ponderous galls three ounces in polder, rain- 
 water three pound, infufe them ja the Sun, or in a gentle 
 heat two days: then take Roman Vitriol well colored Ccom- 
 mon may do betier)and poudered, ihree Ounce: which put 
 therein, and fet all in the Sun for two days more^ fhake all 
 together, to which add of [good Gum-Arabick an ounce. 
 
 II. To makf red writing Ink. 
 
 Take Rafpings of Brazil obe once, white lead, Atom, 
 of each two drachms, grind and mingle them, infufe them 
 in Urine one pound, with gum-Arabick two fcruples, or 
 a drachm at moft. 
 
 III. Another way to makfi red Ink. 
 
 Take Wine-vinegar two pound, Rafpings ofBrafil two 
 ounces, Alom half an ounce, infufe all ten days ^ then gently 
 boil, to which add gum Arabick five drachms, diiTolve the 
 Gum, ftrain, and keep it for ufe. Note, two drachms of the 
 Gum in fome cafes may be enough; 
 
 IV. To make green Ink fo «'''»^^ With. 
 
 Make fine Verdigrife into pafte with ftrong Vinegar, and 
 infufion of green galls, in which a little Gum-Arabick 
 bath been dilfolved, let it dry and when you would 
 write with it, temper it with infufion of green Galls afore- 
 
 faid. 
 V Anether way to maksgrun Ink to write witl^ 
 
 ' ' Dififolve 
 
112. Votygr /aphides Lib. III. 
 
 Diflblvc Vcrdigrife in Vinegar, then ftrain it, and grind 
 it with a little Honcy,and mucilage of Gum Tragtcamh, up- 
 on a porphyry (ione. 
 
 VI. ' To make another ^reen hiJ^ to write with. 
 
 Boil Verdigrije wiib Argpl m fair water; and then 
 diffolve' in it a liitic ' Gum-Arabick^ , add it will be 
 goodi 
 
 Vll. ' To make blew Itik to ttfrite tfith. 
 
 Grind Indico with H<mey mixed with glair of Eggs or 
 glew'waterj made ©f Ifing-glals dilfolved in water, and ' 
 itraioed. 
 
 VIII. To make red'ttfriring'Jvk.of VermiUdn. 
 
 Grind Vermilion well upon a porpliyry ftone, wirh com- 
 mon water ; dry it and put it into a glafs veflel.to which put 
 Urine, (hake all together, let it feiile> then pour off the U- 
 rine ; and patting on more.Uritje, repeat this work eight 
 or ten times, fo will the Vermilion be well cleanfed ^ to 
 which pur glair of Eggs to'fwim on it above a fingers breadth, 
 ftii* .chert* together, aod' fettling abilradt the glair ; then put 
 on 'OipfeiKgUic of Egi(?s, repeating the famfe work eight or 
 tea.titr<^a$l(b,to takeawiy the fcent of the Urine: laftlyv 
 mix iij w/ith frefti glair,' ind keep it in a glafs-vefTcl clofe 
 fixJp'd;iBfttrJ^;^f*. Wh«n ^vi ufe ir, mix it A/»hb water 0*^ 
 vinegar. :*' i • i-' ''•"'>-' 1 • •. 
 
 IX. To make Printers black. Jh^. 
 
 TliJis is made by mirfglln^Lamf'-^Iack with liquid Var- 
 iMfti,'<»r^Wnfeed Oyl[and biiiliiig it a little,wb!ch you may make 
 k^hjckltt pteaftire. Ybii maft make it natoifterjn Winter,th»n; 
 in Summer ; and note that the thicker Ink-tnakes the fairer 
 letter. .'«! V»^< i>;.w 0^ yv-x\ (i-iu -v. * 
 
 If ' it*1ji "kto thick, you itieift put in liiore Linr^cd oil^'or 
 oil of'Wilnuis, fo may you make it thicker of 'ibinaer at 
 p(«afiirei' 
 
 X. To make red Printing Tnk 
 
 Grind Vermilion very well with the aforefaid liquid Var-* 
 nifli or Linfeed oyl. 
 
 KV. T6'tnake green Printing Ink. 
 
 Grind' Spanilh greeri with the faid VarniHi or LinfeetJ 
 oyl as aforeiaid : And afrer the fame manner, may you make 
 Printers Bieiv , by grinding A:{tirt with the faid Liofeed 
 Oyl 
 
Chap. 3 c. 0/' n^aking Ink. ii j 
 
 XII. To make white Ink. ^o ^^^te upon blac^ Paper. 
 Diirolve Tin Glafs or Spelter in AquafortKy made of N»- 
 
 tre and ^/«f» : piecipitaie with Oyl ot Tartar i edulcorate 
 perfectly with fair water, and dry it in a glafs Ba(bn : 
 this poudcr mix with Gum water, and it will bf a White, 
 with which you may write upon Biack paper : and with 
 pure tphite Flowers of Antimony you may do the fanoe. 
 
 XIII. To make China Ink^ I 
 
 Take Lamp-bJack puritied eight Ounces : Indicb, two 
 Ounces: Ivory black one Ounce : Peach ftone bbck' half 
 an Ounce : beat all together and make a MaA: make all 
 into a body with water, in which a very little Gum Ara- 
 bick has beet\ diflblred: and fo form them into long fquare 
 Rods, or Tables. 
 
 XIV. To make hlac^. tvriting Ink,. 
 
 Take Rain-water three pints : Nut Galls broken into 
 little bits, three Ounces: digeft in a Sand heat for a Week : 
 Then take Vitriol or Copperas two Ounces, and diflblve it ia 
 Rain- Water a pint, by gentle boiling ; adding in the DifTo- 
 Imion, a little Gum-Arabick; being diffolved, mix it with 
 the Water and Galls; digeft a Week in a faod heat^ and 
 keep the Clear for uie. 
 
 XV. A blacky Ink, which Vanijhes in twenty four hourt 
 time. 
 
 Boil or Digeft Nut Galls ia grofs pouder in Aiqua fortiJ : 
 add to them Vitriol or Copperas^ and a little Sal-Armoniackj 
 and it is done : what is written with this will Vanifh in 
 twenty four bouts. 
 
 XVI. To make Indian Ink. 
 
 Take Horfe Beans, burn, ih^ ^ill they are perfectly 
 black, grind it to a fubtile pou.(J?r, and with a weak Gum- 
 Arabick water, make it into a Fade, which form into long 
 fquare Reds. 
 
 XVII. To make another hlackt^^ifiig J"k; / 
 Take White Wine two quarts : Logwood ground on/ 
 
 pound: or fliavings of ic : boil till a quart isconfum^: 
 ftrain the Liqtior from the Wood, and put into it ?vut* 
 Galls bruifedjEigbt Ounces : Pocnegrante Peels four 0^ces: 
 mix and digeft in a Sand heat for a Week, (baking^t four 
 or five times a day : then add to it Roman Vitriol pr green 
 Copperas four Ounces : digeft two days more 3 afi^ which 
 
 y add 
 
214 Polygrapiiices Lib. IH. 
 
 add Gum Arabick four ounces : digeft twenty four hoursi 
 and Itrain all out into another VcfTel, tnd keep the Ink for 
 ufe Nore.tbat ihefe faeces will fcrve again for the fame quanti- 
 ty of Liquor, or Logwood Infufion. z. That ibe Pomegra- 
 nate jfecis are put in to make the Ink rt)ine. 3. That Rain- 
 water feems to be better Jor this purpofe than White Wine. 4. 
 That probably the quantity oftbe Gurn-Arabick is too mach. 
 
 XVIII. Another very good black, writing lnl{. 
 
 Take Thames or Rain Water a Gallon, Nut-Galls crackt 
 only into fmall bits one pound : Copperas four Ounces: In- 
 fufe all in a Gentle Sand beat, for fix Weeks, fhaking the 
 bottle four or five times every day : then dilfolvein it Gum- 
 Arabick eight Ounces, (1 fear the Gum is too ttftich, and will 
 make the Ink too thick:) and let it Itand upon the f^cesfor 
 ufe. ^ 
 
 XIX. Another hlac\ tvriting Ink.- 
 
 Take Rain Water a Gallon : Nut-Galls only Crackt into 
 bits a pound i Copperas eight Ounces : Alum eight Ounces : 
 lofufe all in a Gentle Sind beat for a Month : add Gum-A- 
 rabick eight Ounces : which diHulve in it, and keep the mix- 
 ture for ufe. 
 
 XX. Another tvriting In^. 
 
 Take ftrong ftale Beer a Gallon, (or White or Red-Wine 
 ihe fame quantity 5) Old Nails fix or eight pounds • digeit in 
 a Cold place for eight ten or twt Ivc Months : then decant 
 of the clear Tihdture. Take Catechu in fine pouder fixcuncesi 
 common Brandy a pint ; mix and in afand heat make a llrong 
 Tindlure which decant ; mix this with the former Tiovilure of 
 and it becomes a black Ink. 
 
 XXL Another very excellent black, tvriting Ink- 
 Take Mr. Toww^j Water zt IJIingten, or Water in which a 
 large quantity of old Nails has lain for a Year or two.a Gallon, 
 Nut-Galls broken into little bits a pound ; Common Vitriol, 
 or Copperas four Ounces ; lofufe all together for a Month, 
 Ivrring or (baking the VeDTei very well five or fix times every 
 day then add Gum-Arabick cut into bits two Ounces: 
 difTcf-vc and keep it continually ftirring once or twice eve- 
 ry day Note, when you ufe it, you may put in a little white 
 Sugar Candy, and difiblveit, fa will your writing fhine ; but 
 you ou£Jbt not to put it in but as you have occafion 10 ufe it,, 
 for after three or four days, it fpoHsihi Ink. 
 
 Ex f licit Liter 'j'ert*0 
 
3oi 
 
 P LIGKA FHICES 
 
 Liber du a r x u s. 
 
 Containing the Original^ Advancement 
 and FerfeBion of the Art of Painting : 
 Particularly exemplified in the ^various 
 Paintings of the Ancients, 
 
 / .^ _ 
 
 CHAP. L 
 
 Of the Original of thefe Arts. 
 
 T 
 
 I. ^ I ^ H E Original of the Art of Painting mas t^ 
 
 hn from the Forms of things Tchich do ap- 
 ■pear ; exprejjing the fume (as Ifidorus Pelu* 
 fiota faith) with proper ColourSj imitating 
 the Life, either hollow or frtelling, dark or 
 light, hard or fofty rough or fmooth, new or old. 
 
 Of fuch things (amongft Vegetables) Flowers yield the 
 greateft variety : of Animals, Man : of things^ Inanir 
 mate, Landskips, C>"(r. For this matter of Imitation was 
 prefented in the chief things only, for who i"hould learn 
 to imitate all things in NJature ? the greater being at- 
 tained, the lelTer will follow of themfelves ; if any Inall 
 attempt fo great a burthen, two inconveniences, faith 
 Sli'.intilian, will neceflarily follow, to wit, Always to fay 
 too much) and yet never to fay all. 
 
 II. And this Imitation of things feen rdth the Eysy rtoi 
 much helped hy the Idea's of things conceived in the mind, 
 frcm the cgminual mQtion o/" tht Imasrination, 
 
 ^ Al Whore-: 
 
joa Polygrafhtces Lib. IV. 
 
 Wherefore as Q^iintU'mn faith f///'. lo. cap. 3. of his 
 Inltitutions of Oratory) " We fliall do ^vell to accu- 
 " ftome our minds to luch a ftedfafl conft.incy of concei- 
 *' ving, as to overcome all odier Impediments by the 
 ** earneftnefs of our Intention , for if \it do altogether 
 "bend this Intention upon things conceived, our mind 
 ." need never take notice of any thing which the Eye lees, 
 "**'orthe Ear hears. And therefore thofe wliich would 
 profit much, muft take caie and pains to furnilli their 
 minds with all forts of ufcfiil Images and Idea's. 
 " This treafury of the mind (faith Cajfiodnrtis cap. 1 2. de 
 ** Anima.) is not over-loaden in halte ; if it be once flir- 
 ** nidied, the Artift fhall find upon any fuddcn occafioii, 
 *' all things neceflary, ready at hand ; whereas thofe 
 " which are unprovided iliali be to fcek. It is like to 
 the Analytical Furniuue in y^igchra, without the know- 
 ledge of which , no notable thing can be performed. 
 Now although the Imagination may be cafily_ moved, 
 j"et this fame excellency is not attained in an inftant ; 
 And without the ability oT exjprefling of the conceived 
 Images, all the exercife of the farcy is worth nothing. 
 
 III. Thefe Forms and Ideas nere not fingly confidered^ 
 hut compile at ely. 
 
 For whereas Nature fcarcely ever reprefents any one 
 thing perfedl in beauty, (in all its parts) lell it lliould be 
 laid, that llie had nothing more to diihibute to others : 
 ib Artifls of old chofe out many Patterns, which were 
 abfoiutely peifcit in fome of their parts, that by dcfign- 
 ing each part after that Pattern, which ^vas perfect 
 therein, they might at la(l prefent fmiediiiig perfeA in 
 the whole. And fow'hen Zenxis intended an exquifite 
 Pattern of a bcautitiil Woman, he fought not for this 
 pericdion in one particular body, but chofe five of the 
 TOott well favoured Virgins, that lie might find in theni 
 that perfect beauty, which (as Lucian iaith) muft of ne- 
 ceflity be but one. And Adaximns Tyrhu Iaith, you 
 fhall not find in haft a body io accmaiely exacl, as to 
 compare it with the beauty of a Statue. And Prcclus 
 tilth, if you take a Man brought tbrth by Nature, and 
 another made by Art of Car\dng, that by Nature Ilia 11 
 aot feem the flatelier, becaufe Art doth many things 
 more exactly : to which Ovid affents, w^hen that lie faith, 
 that Pjgmatm did Carv« the Snew-white loaage of Ivo- 
 
Chap. I . The Original of theft Arts, :jo 5 
 
 I}-, ivith fuch a happy dexterity, that it was altogether 
 impoffible that fuch a Woman iliould be Bom. 
 
 IV". T'rom tkh r.ranner of h^itaikn did arife the Skill of 
 Defigning^; from v^hence [prang the Artsof Painting^Liwri- 
 jngy Wapyins;, Cuflingy and allothcrs of tknt kind. 
 
 "Thel'e Arts in their infancy, were f.> mean, that tlie 
 firft Artift was forced (:is'zy£lianm fmh lib. 10. cap. 10. 
 of his Hiihry)m Painting to write, This is an Ox, this 
 a Horfe, this a Dog : but as Tully faith, (in lihro de dark 
 oratorihm) there is nothing bodi invented and finifhed at 
 a time. And AmDhita in lihro fecundo adverfm Gentes 
 *^ faith, " The Arts rue not together with our minds, 
 *' brought forth out oithe heavenly places j but are all 
 *' found out here on Earth, and in procefs of time, foft- 
 " ned, forgeJ, and beautified, by a continual meditati- 
 *' on : our poor and needy Life, perceiving fome cafual 
 *' things to lall out profperoufly, whileft it doth imitate, 
 *' attempt, try, flip, reform, and change, hath out of 
 " the fame afllduous reprehenfion made up iojne fmall 
 '' pieces of Arts, the which it hath aftenvaris by ftudy 
 " brought to fome perfe6lion. ' • 
 
 V. The Perfons'who were the fir ji Inventers of thefe Arts 
 arefcarcely inorfn, C^ecanfe daily nevp Inventions tvere ad- 
 ded) hit thofe famom Perjons nho either jirove to bring them 
 to perfeHion, or add to what was already invented, or other- 
 "wife were famous in any one particular thing, Hijiory has in- 
 part inforr^ed tts of. 
 
 The famous Paujias was the firft that attempted to 
 bring the Art of Painting to perfedlion. Apelks was the 
 firfl that undertook the expreffrng of invifible things, as 
 Thunder, Lightning, and the like; the which confidera- 
 tion of thefe ahnoft Impoflibilities, made TheophylaBm 
 Simocatm fin Epift. 37.) fay, that Painters undertake to 
 exprefs fuch things, as Nature is not able to do : and the 
 fame Apelks had a certain Invention and Grace, proper 
 to himfelf alone, to wlrich never any other Artificer ever 
 attained. And although Zeuxls, Apelles, Aglaophon, did 
 none of them feem to lack any thing of Art, yet they dif- 
 feredvery much, and had each of them fome peculiar Ex- 
 cellency, of which neitlier of tlie other two could boaft. 
 Here is but one Art of Calling, in which Myron, Poly- 
 cletm, Lyftppm have been excellent, yet did one very 
 much differ from another ,* Zenxis did furpafs all other 
 
 Aa 2 Am- 
 
^04 Polygraphices Lib. IV. 
 
 Artizans in Painting Womcns Bodies ; Lyfippiu is molt 
 excellent in fine and fubtile Workmanfliip : Polycletm 
 made excellent Statues upon oqe Leg ; Samim did excel 
 in conceiving of Vifions and Phantafics : Dionyfi-^ in 
 Painting of Men only: Polignotm moft rarely exprclTcd 
 the Affections and Pafllons "of Men: y^ntimochm m-ddc 
 noble Women : NiciM excellent in Painting of Women, 
 but moll excellent in four-footed Creatures, chiefly Dogs : 
 Calami^ made Chariots, with two or four Horles ; the 
 Horfes were fo excellent and exaft, that there was no 
 place left for Emulation : Euphranor, the firit and moft 
 excellent in expreffing the dignity, and marks of Heroi- 
 cal Perlbns j ^rejiodemm Painted Wreftlcrs : Serapion- 
 tvas moit excellent in Scenes : Pyrckiu (infcriour in the 
 Art of Painting to none) Painted nothing but Coblers 
 and Barbers: Ludio the firil and moll excellent in Paint- 
 ing Landskips : yiUpolhdorm, ylfclepiodonts Androhnlm, 
 AleviiSj were the only Painters of Philofophers, &c. 
 
 VI. Another Reafon of the Invention hereof, na^ from the 
 TKOving of the P^iffions. 
 
 For as Simonides faith, (comparing Painting with Voz- 
 fy) Pi6bare is a filei it Pocfy , and Poefy is a fpeaking 
 Picture: Upon the occafion of thefe words, Phtaroh 
 laith, The thi,igs reprcfemed by Painters, as 'if they me^-e as 
 yet doing, are propounded by Orators as done already : Paint- 
 ers e.xprejs in Colours and Lines, what Poets do in Words ; 
 the one doth that ixith the Pencil, which the other doth iviih 
 the^ Pen. When Latinia Pacattts had made a full Dc- 
 fcription of the miferablc end of the wicked Aiaximics, 
 he calls upon all the Painters to alTill him : Bring hither, 
 bring hither you pious Poets, (faith lic) the whole care 
 and fludy of your tedious nights : ye Artificers alfo, de- 
 Ibife the vulgar Argument of ancient Fables ; thefe, thclc 
 things deiervc better to be drawn by yourcunning Hands : 
 •Jet the Market-places and Temples be filled with llich 
 Speiladcs , work them out in Ivory j let tliem live in 
 ColoiuT^ ; let them Itand in Brals ; let them exceed the 
 price of precious Stones. It doth concern the lecurity of 
 all Ages, that fuch things might be fecn to have been 
 done, if by chance, any one filled with wicked defircs, 
 might drink in Innocency by his Eyes, when he lliali 
 fee the (horrid and deplorable) Monuments of thefe our 
 tirnes. And Gregorj Nyffen, upon the Sacriiicuig of Ifaac 
 
 iaith. 
 
Chap. 1 . 7 he Original ofthefe Arts, ^05 
 
 laith, / often faw in a Picture the Image of this FaBj upon 
 which I could not look mthout Tears i Jo lively did Art pKt: 
 the Hi/fory before my Eyes. 
 
 VII. The Egyptians wr^ thefirfi Invent ers of Painting : 
 The Greeks brought it fof^t of its rtidenefsj to proportion : 
 The Romans adorned it with Colours : The Germans (fol- 
 lowing them J made their rvorh more durable by Painting in 
 Oil : of whom ^^^Engliihj Dutch, Italian and French ar$ 
 become Imitators. 
 
 It is reported, that the Grecians were the firft Painters,' 
 and that their Colours were (in the infancy thereof^ on- 
 ly White and Black : but it appears more with reafon 
 and truth, that the Invention thereof fhould be afcribed 
 to the Egyptians, who (before the Invention of Letters) 
 figniiied their conceptions by Hieroglyphicls of Figures, 
 Cjrphers, Charaders and Pidlures of divers things, as 
 Birdsy Beajisy Infers, FiJJpes, Trees, Plants, and the like, 
 which by Tradition they transfer'd to their Children 5 fo 
 .they made the Falcon to fjgniiie Diligence, Strength and 
 Swiftnefs : the Bee a King ; its Honey, Mildnefs ;^ its Sting, 
 Juftice : a Serpent, (tail in mouth) the Revolution of the 
 Year : the Eagle, Envy : the Earth, a labouring Beaft : 
 a Hare, Hearmg, &c. Now, our bare learning to imi- 
 tate, is not enough 5 it is requifite, that fince we are not 
 firft in Invention, we fhould ftudy rather to outgo than 
 to follow. If it were unlawful (faith Quintilian) to add 
 any thing to things invented, or to find out better things, oar 
 continual lahoftr would be good for nothing ; for it is certain 
 that Phydias and Apelles have brought many things to lights 
 "which their Predeceffors ^new nothing of. Apdtes did ali 
 things with compleatnefs : Z euxis ^mth. aninelHmable 
 grace: 7?r'9/o^(f«fj with an indefatigable diligence : 77- 
 manthes with a great deal Oi fubtilty and curiofity : Ni- 
 cophanes with a irately magnL'icence. Now, to attain 
 tothefekind of Excellencies, it is necefTaryto havere- 
 courfe to variety of great Matters, that fomething out of 
 the one, and fomething out of the other, may be as fo 
 many Ornaments to adorn our Works ; and as fo many 
 lieps to lead us on to the door of perfection. 
 
 VIII. Abopit the time of Philip King of Macedon, /■/[»«■ 
 .Art began to flourijh : growing into great ejlimation in the 
 days of Alexander and his Succeffors : from thence through 
 all the feries of time even to this day, it hath received by dc- 
 
 A a 3 ^ gj-e^Sg 
 
3o6 TolygYAphices Lib. IV. 
 
 greeSy fuch rtonderf'Al advanccryients that it may he notvfaU, 
 ii is arrived at perfeShion. 
 
 For without doubt there is a perfection of Art to be 
 attained, and it is as poffible that I, or thou, or he, may 
 as well attain it, as any body elie, if v;e rcfolve to Itrive, 
 and take pains, Avithout fainting, or fear of dcfpair. 
 And fince the Art of Painting is (as Socrates faith)* the 
 refembJance of vifible thingc, the Artift ought to beware 
 tliat he abufes not the liberty of his Imagination, in the 
 Shapes of monftrous and prodigious Images of things not 
 known in Nature ; but as a tme lover of Art, prefer a 
 plain and honeft ^vork, (agreeing -with Nature) before ^- 
 aiy phantaftical and conceited Device ^vhatfoever. 
 
 IX. Lafily, That from Time, Form, Ma.^nitude, Num- 
 ber, Proportion, Colour, Motion, Reft, Situation, Simi- 
 litude, Diilance, Imagination ^wr/ Light, inajmgleand 
 complicate confUeration, this Art hath its ejfcnce or hei)7gy 
 ^indat la,} had by the help of inditjiriom .md unwearied Afindsy 
 its Original Production and A^anifefiation. 
 
 Light is that only thing, without which all thofe o- 
 ther things from which this* Art Iprings, -would be ufe- 
 •^^ leis ; -without which the Art it lelf cannot be. " It is 
 *^ .(as Sander/on £iith) the Heavens Oft-lpring, the eldeft 
 " Da.ughter _ of God, fiat hx, the iir/l days Creation : it 
 *^ twijikles in a Star, blazes in a Comet ; dawns in a 
 *^" ^tv:dy diffembks in a Glow-worm ; contradb it fclf 
 *' in a Spark, rages in a Fhme, is pale in a Candle, and 
 ** dyes jn a Coal. By it the Si^ht hath being, and the 
 " Imagination life, which comprehends the Univeifility 
 "of ail things without fpace of place: the whole Hea- 
 *' vens in their vaft andflill c^rtent, enter at oncethiough 
 ** the Apple of the Eye, Avithout any itraitnels o'( paf- 
 *^ lagc ; the Sight is a Senfe, -which comprehends that 
 *' which no other Senfe is capable of; it judgcth and di- 
 *' ftingullieth between two contraries in an inftant, it 
 *' confidcrs the excel lena^ and beauty t-f every Object; 
 *''the Ipangled Canopy of Heaven by night, the wan- 
 ** deling Clouds by day, the Avondsrful Form of the 
 *' Rain-now, the glorious matiitine appcMrancc of Pb(£' 
 ** bus-, the meridional Exaltation, the golden Rays which . 
 *'' flirround him, the' mutability of his Siradows,' his vef- 
 ***pettinc Setting ; the loftry tops of Mouiitaii,;^, unacccf- 
 i' (ibie and ridgy Rocks, profound Valleys, large Plains, 
 
 '< which 
 
Chap. 2I Farther Vrogrefs ofthefe Arts, ^07 
 
 " which feem to meet Heaven, green Tree?, and pica- 
 " fant Groves, delightful Hills, fweet and flowery Mea- 
 *^ dows, pleafant Streams, fpringing Fountains, flowing 
 " Rivers, ftately Cities, famous Towers, large Bridges, 
 " magnificent Buildings, fruitful Orchards andGardens, 
 " iliapes of living Creatures, from the Elephant to the 
 " Ant, from the Eagle to the Wren, and from the Whale 
 " to the Shrimp, the wonderful forms of Infers, the 
 " marching of Armies, the befieging and fbrming of 
 •^■^ Garifons, the Ipfolencies of rude People, and flight 
 " of the DidrefTed, the delblation^ and depopulation of 
 '^ Kuigdoms and Countries, the failing of Ships, terrible 
 " Sea-fights, great beauty of Colours, together Avith thou- 
 " fands of other things, all w^hich itdigefts, and niar- 
 " llials in ample Order, that when occaiion may be, it 
 " may exert its {tore, for the benefit, advantage, advance- 
 ** ment, and perfection of Art, 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of the farther Progrefs of thefe Arts. 
 
 I. A S God Almghty (i^ho is the Author of all WifdomJ 
 •^ ivoi the firjt Injiitutor hereof, fo alfo rvas he the Pro- 
 mfihator, by whom thefe Arts have made Progrejfion in the 
 World. 
 
 Certainly, faith Philojlratus, Pi6ture is an Invention 
 of the Gods, as well for the painted Faces of the Mea- 
 dow^s adorned with Flowers, according to the f everal Sea- 
 fons of the year ; as for thofe things which appear in 
 the Sky. What wonderful Eloquence is this 1 that in 
 lb few words, this Philofopher Ihould clear fo great a 
 Poirit. ButAvhat faith Gregorius Nyffenus ? Man, faith 
 he, is an Earthen Statue : and Snidas in Oratione prima 
 de Beatitudinihm, fpeaking of ^^<?w, faith, This was the 
 firit Statue, the Image framed by God, after which all 
 the Art of Carving uled by Men received directions : Lot'^ 
 Wife was another, turned into a durable Pillar of Salt, 
 of whom Prudemim (in Harmartigenia) faith, fhe waxed 
 ftift^ being changed into a more brittle fubltance, fhe 
 
 A a 4 iiand?;li 
 
^o8 Tolygraphiees Lib. IV. 
 
 ftandeth Metamorphofed into Stone, apt to be melted, 
 keeping her old pofture in that Salt-rtone Image ; her 
 Comlmefs, her Ornaments, her Forehead, her Eyes, her 
 Hair, her Face alfo ("looking backward) with her Chin 
 gently turned, do retain the unchangeable Monuments 
 of her antient Offence ; and though ihe melteth away 
 continually in Salt Sweat : yet doth the compleatnefs of 
 her Shape luffer no lofs by that fluidity ; whole droves of 
 Beafts cannot impair that favoury Stone fo much, but 
 ftiU tliere is Liquor enough to lick, by which perpetual 
 lofs, the wafted Skin is ev'^er renewed.. To thefc let us 
 add the Pattern of the Tabernacle flie wed unto Mojes up- 
 on Mount Sinai : the Braz^en. Serpent made by the exprefs 
 command of God : The Pattern of the Temple (which Da- 
 vid gave unto Solowon) after the foun w^hich God made 
 with his own Hand: Ez,ekiers Portraidl of Jf r«/rf/fw, 
 with its formal Sie?;e upon a iile, by exprefs command 
 froni God alio : The Braz^en S.atuc of our Lord Jefi^^ 
 Chrifi ereded by the Woman healed of the bloody llfue, 
 as is mentioned by Photinsy and A^erim Bifhop di Ama- 
 fa, and other Ecckfiaftick Writers. 
 
 II. By virtue of this Divine Hand it maSy that many Ar^ 
 tifis of old attained to a certain kind of perfc6lion in thefe 
 Arts. 
 
 We will only refer the proof of this to the Examples 
 in the 3 1 of Exodru, of Beznlecl and Aholiab ; of whom 
 God hirafelf witnefTeth, that he called them by Name, 
 to make the Tabernacle ; and filled them with his Spirit, 
 mot only to dcvife airious Works in Gold, in Silver, in 
 Brajsy and in Silk -, but alfo gave them SJcill to teach o- 
 thcrs the fame. 
 
 in. Nature alfo hath not been idle, but hath aUed a Ma- 
 (ier-piece herein. 
 
 Topafs by the glory of Flowers, the excellent comli- 
 •iiefs of Beafts, (as in the fpot? o{ Lcopardfy tails of Pe.i- 
 cocis, and the like) IwillonJy rem.irk the iame of a 
 Gem, which P) rrh.'iJ (\\'ho made VV;u* with the Romans) 
 had, of w^hich Pliny in lib. 34. cap. i. of his natural Hi- 
 itory, reports, tiiat it being an Agath, had tl.c nine Afkjes, 
 and Apollo holding of a Lute depidtcd therein j the fpots 
 jiot by Art, but by Nature, being fo ipread over tlie 
 ' ' Stone, 
 
Chap. 2. Farther ^rogrefs ofthefe Arts, 505 
 
 Stone, that each Mufe had her peculiar mark. See G^f-^ 
 fere I J cap 5. 
 
 IV. The care of Parents in the Education of their ChiU 
 dren, rvas another reafon of the progrefs hereof. 
 
 The Grecians y faith Arijiotle in cap. 3. lih. 8. of his Po- 
 liticks, did teach their Children the Art of Painting : and 
 Plutarch faith, that Patdm <t/£jnilipu had Sculptors and 
 Painters amongft the Matters of his Children, as well as 
 Philofophers and Rhetoricians ; 2Lnd Pliny faith, that by 
 the Authority of Pamphili^, this Art hath been ranked 
 among the liberal Sciences, and that only Free-born 
 Children fhould learn it. And Galen enumerating fe- 
 veral Arts, as Phyfich, Rhetorick, Muficky Geometry, Arith^ 
 metici, Logich, Grammar, and knovpledge of Larv ; add 
 unto thefe, faith he, Carving 3.nd Painting. And as the 
 Grecians were the firft, tliat taught their Children thefe 
 Arts, fo alfo they provided betimes for them choice Ma- 
 tters. 
 
 V. Thefe Majiers hy their careftilnefs and vigilancy, not 
 deceiving thofe that put their truji in then?, became main Pil- 
 lars of thefe Arts, and propagated them to Pojlerity • Tvhicb 
 hy the addition of conftderahle Gifts and Rewards had an ha* 
 nourahle Efieem in the World. 
 
 Their care was manifeft in laying down folid Princi- 
 ples of Art • of which ^uintilian in cap. 2. lib. 12. of his 
 Inttitutions of Oratory, faith, though Virtue may bor- 
 row fome fonvard fits of Nature, yet {"he muil attain to 
 perfeftion by Dodrine. Their vigilancy was feen in 
 watching, to apprehend their Scholars Capacities, that 
 they might fuit themfelves accordingly ; as in Tally's In- 
 ftance of Ifocrates, a fmgular good Teacher, who was 
 wont to apply the Spur to Eploorm, but the Bridle to 
 Theopomppu', and their Reward was eminent, as Pliny 
 noted in Pamphilns his School, out of which Apelles and 
 many other excellent Painters came, who Uught no bo- 
 dy under a Talent, (which is about 175 Pounds Ster- 
 ling) thereby the better to maintain the Authority of 
 Art. 
 
 VI. Their PraRice exactly agreed with their Precepts, 
 
 As with Seneca, that Labour is not lott, whofe Expe- 
 riments agree with Precepts^ fo wiih (iHintilian thofb 
 
 Exam- 
 
|l6 Votygraphices Lib. IV, 
 
 Examples may ffand for Teftimonies : andit w^ the 
 Pra6Hce of Painters of old, as Galen witnefTeth concer- 
 ning Po/jf/fwr, who hath not only let down in Writing 
 the accurate Precepts of Art ; but alio that he made a 
 Statue according to the Rules of Art contained in thofe 
 Precepts. 
 
 Vn. Thefe Precepts rvhich they Ui^ght their Scholar Sj they 
 delivered in Writing, that they might ever accompany them 
 Tpherejoever they ruent. 
 
 Atxlles gave the Precepts of this Art to his Difcipic 
 Terjeta in Writing, as Polycletm did to his : befides in- 
 anumcrable others now in being, too tedious here to re- 
 cite. The like did thefe following, AA<zm, MyUnAUiy 
 AlcetOi'y Alexis the Poet, Anafimenes, Antigonm.^ Ari- 
 fiodenj'ASjCariuSjArtimonyCallixenHsXhrijhdorHSjDcwocrituSy 
 Ephefins, Duris, Eupherion, Euphranor, IjihrninSy Hegefander 
 DelphiaiSy Hippias Eleies, Hypjtcraies, Iambi icHs, J aba Rex 
 Mauritania?, Malchus, Biz.a.'jti!is, Melantlmsy vUfendtch- 
 Wfis, Menetor^ Pamphihsy Polemon, Porphyria f^ Praxite- 
 lesy Protogenes ; Theophanes, Xenocrate<y and many others, 
 the chief of whofe Works are now loll. 
 
 VIIT. As Arts came novp into Eftimation, Jo at length 
 haves were ejlahlifhedfor their prefervation ; and Punijhments 
 for their Prevarication. 
 
 The begiruiingof tiiefc Laws was firftat Argos, Ephe- 
 fftSy Thebes a.nd Athensy as alfo in Egypty where a Work- 
 man (faith Diodoru! Sicul.'tsJ is feartully puniihcd, if he 
 undertake any Charge in the Commonwealth, or meddle 
 with any Trade but his own : the which Lav/, iaitli 
 HerodottiSy'thQ Lacedamonians did alfo approve of. By 
 means of which Laws it was, that the Artilts, of thofe 
 Nations attained to fuch a perfedUon of Art, as welliall 
 hereafter relate. 
 
 IX. The fervent defire and love of EmMlatioa to excel o- 
 thers ; thd commouiahle Simplicity of Art ; together mth the 
 content and famfaHion of doing jo^rj'.hiH-^ -velly gave a large 
 p'Ogrefs towards the advante of Ar 
 
 It was nobly faid ot Scipio A^n .ori-, uiat every mag- 
 nanimous .Spirit compares himlcU, not only with them 
 that are now alive ; but alfo with the famous Men of all 
 Ages; Avhcreby it appears, that great Wits are always 
 by the Sting of £muIatioii, driven forwards to great 
 ^latter5 j but he iliat bv tc j much love of his own Work'^, 
 
 com- 
 
Chap. 2. Further Froprefs ofthefe Jrff, '^i i 
 
 compare himfelf with no body, muft needs attribute 
 niiicii to his own Conceits. Doft thou defire the glory ot" 
 S-.viftnefs, faith Martial^ 0» E-pi^r. 36. lib. 12.) ftriveto 
 out-go the Tygcr., and the light Ofirich ; it is no glory at 
 all to out-mn AJfes. This Emiilanon is the force of great 
 Wits, whereby our Imitation is provoked fometimes by 
 Em'^^, and fcmetimes by Admiration, whereby it falls 
 out, that the thing we earnertly feek after, is fbon 
 brought to fome height of perfedion ; which perfe6lion 
 confiftsin exa6l Imitation, according to the Simplicity 
 of Art, and not in gaudy Appearances, which adorns 
 the Shadows much more than ever Nature adorned the 
 Subitance. This Imitation of the Life gave the Ani2:./in. 
 Fame J which "Fame quickened his afpiring Thoughts, 
 adding more Fuel to the Flames, till flich time as he 
 brought fortli a moft abfblute Work, whereby he con- 
 ceived a joy, content and fatisfadion, as durable as the 
 Work it lelf, upon which he now conceived himfelf a 
 happy Man, and through a jv& affiance of his Virtues, 
 kno^vs himfelf to be lifted up above the reach of Envy, 
 where he ftands fecure of his Fame, enjoying in this Life 
 (as if he were now Confecrated unto Eternit}'^) the Ve- 
 neration that is like to foUo^v him after his Death ; thus 
 an hondl Emulation a.nd Confidence, bringing forth Works 
 of general Applaufe, procureth unto its Author an ever- 
 la/ling Glory. Now, what a comfortable thing is this, 
 tohave a fore-feeling of what we lliall aftenvards at- 
 tain to ! 
 
 X. Another reafon of the Augmentation of tkefe Arls, 
 rCiOi the manifold ujes thereof among Men, either for good or 
 evil Purpofes. 
 
 As in natural Sciences, where words come Iliort, a 
 little PidUire giveth us the knowledge of Beafts, Birds, 
 Fillies, and other Forms, as well Inanimate as Animate : 
 In the TaHich, how fnould a General know how to fet 
 his Men in array, unlefs he try the cafe by Deiign or 
 Delineation ? fo in Architctlure to pourtray Platforms 
 after any fafhion, and to work out ti]e Patterns of high 
 and mighty Buildings in a little Wax, keeping in fo 
 Imall an Exam.ple, the exact proportion of the greater 
 Stru6tare : in Geometry the exadlnefs of Lines, Angles,, 
 Surfaces and Solids : in Botanclogia the" exa6f ihapes of 
 Herbs, Plants and Trees : in Zoohgia the lliapes of all 
 
 living 
 
'5 1 a Polygraph ices ' Lib. IV. 
 
 Jiving Creatures : in ^nthropok^ja, the cxaft Defcripti- 
 cn ot all the parts of Man's BolIv inward and outward : 
 in Chyntia, tlie forms of all Ch^'inicMl Vellels and Opc- 
 fations : in the Lives of Ill'iflyioHS ylicn and Princes, to 
 cxprefs their Forms arid Shapes to tb.e Life, that Age 
 might not prevail againft them, dcferving thereby (as 
 Varro faith) the Envy of the Gods themfelves : in Geo- 
 graphy j to defcribe in fmall Mips Kingdoms, Countries, 
 and Cities, yea, the Vv- hole World ; in Policy, RsMichal 
 in faving her Husband David, P:olor,:<cHs in the Image of 
 Alexander, which he ^villingly let Perdicca^ catch from 
 liim, fuppofing it to have been the Body it felf, thereby 
 avoiding much Blood- fhed ; Cyrus his wooden Perfians in 
 the Siege of 5Vrr^;>, by wdiich the Towns-men being fright- 
 ed, yielded the City : Efaminondas at Thebes, by the 
 Image of PalLts did Wonders : Amafis King o£ Egypt, his 
 golden Image made of the Bafin, in which his Feet ufed 
 to be Wafhed, which the Egyptians religioufly Woriliip- 
 ped, whereby he brought them to aft'ecl him, being now 
 a King, who was of an ignoble and bafe Parentage ; the 
 wooden Elephants of Perfens, King of A'facedonia, with 
 which he wonted his Horfes, that they might not be 
 frighted in time of Battel. _ The Ornaments of Temples, 
 Market-places and Galleries, places both publick and 
 private. Jniim Ca:fa/i Image m Wax, hideous to look 
 to, for 23 gaping Wounds he received, did mightily ftir 
 iip the Ronuns to revenge his Death. Worthy Men, 
 which had defended well ofthe World, had their Memo- 
 ries conferved with their Images j by ^vhich all thofe 
 tftat afpire to Goodnefs, and to follow their fkps, are 
 likewife filled with Hope. The Athenians have ere61ed 
 untQ zy^fcp a moll goodly Statue, l^ith Pbxdrns, and 
 have fet a contcm.ptible Slave upon an everlalling Bafe, 
 that all wight iindcrjliind, horv the nay -of Honour lieth open 
 to everyone, and that Glory likervife doth not fo TKuch follow 
 the Condition of our Birth as the F'irtnes of our Life. Bero- 
 y»j excelled in. A firolngy, wherefore the Athenians, for his 
 Divine PrognofHcations, creeled him a Statue with a 
 golden Tongue, fet up in their publick Sclioo!^, as Pliny 
 laith, l:h. 7. cap. 37. Publick Libraries were fiirniihed alio 
 with Golden, Silver, and Brafs Images of llicli, whofc 
 Immortal Souls did fpcak in thofe places- The Provoca- 
 tions of Vices have alfo augmented the Art j it hath Ixca 
 
 pica- 
 
Chap* 2> farther Frogrejs ofthefe Arts, 5 1 j 
 
 pleafing to Engrave wanton Lutts upon their Cups; and 
 to drink in Riba^ldry and Abominations, as Pliny faith in 
 tlie Proem of his 33. Book. 
 
 XI. 773^ ufe therefore of thefe Art j extending itfelffo Hnt- 
 verfally to all Intents hoiJo in War and Peace, it came to pafs 
 that Artificers were honoured by all forts of Aden, which them- 
 felves perceiving, did fiill endeavour to encreafe thi-s enjoyed 
 favour, by a daily advance of their Skill. 
 
 By Kings they ^vere Honoured ; for Demetrius, whileft 
 at the Siege or Rhodes, came to Proto^jnes, leaving the 
 hope of his ViL;l:oi7 to behold an Artificer. Alexander 
 the Great came alio to Apelks his Shop, often accompa- 
 nied with many Prince?. It was his will that none but 
 Polycle:m 'alone lliould Call his Statue in Braf?, that none 
 hut Apelles alone ihoa Id Paint him in Colours, that none 
 but Pyrgoteles alone Ihould Eng-rave him. The Effimati- 
 on of the Artifts were alio underitood from the Efteerr? 
 and high Rates their Works were prized at : a Pi6lure of 
 Bftlarchus, a Painter, was valued at its weight in Gokl 
 by Candaiiles King of Lydia : Ariflides was fo fingular in 
 his Art, that it is reported of Kirig Attains, that he gave 
 an hundred Talents (which is about 17500 Pounds Ster- 
 ling) for one of his Pictures. As much had Polycletus for 
 one of his. Apelks had for Painting the Pi6lure of Alex- 
 ander the Great 3500 Pounds, given him in Golden Coin. 
 Cctfar paid to Timoma'chus So Talents (about 14000 
 Pounds Sterling) for the PicUires of Ajax and Medea, 
 Many more Examples we might produce, but thefe may 
 fufiice ; at length no Price w^as thought equal to their 
 worth : fo Nicias, rather than he would Sell his Pi6lure, 
 called A^fn-z^ to King Attalus, who proffered him 60 Ta- 
 lents, (worth near 1 1000 Pounds Sterling) beftowed it as 
 a Prefent upon his Country. 
 
 XII. Art meeting Tvith fuch Succeffes, created a boldneji 
 in Artificers, to attempt even the greatefi Matters. 
 
 The great Coloffes of the Antients may ferve here for an 
 Example ; Zeuxes, above all the rert, hath been admi- 
 red for his Boldnels : Enphranor alfo excelled Parrhafta^ 
 in this kind, in that the Thefeus of the ■ one fo infinitely 
 excelled ihcThefeus of the other. So great an Excellency 
 of Spirit arofe in the old Artificers, as not to be daunted 
 by the Authority of thofe, who were like to cenflue their 
 JVorks : it was a great mark they aimed at, to avoid a 
 
 PJce- 
 
^14 Pol)graphices Lib. IV. 
 
 prepofterous Sha mc or Fear. And this they accompli.ilied 
 by takinn, care, not only to pvc them content, who muft 
 of neccfTity be contented with the Work, but a lib thar 
 they mi,^ht feem admuable unto them, which may judge 
 freely without controul. So they heeded to do well in 
 the Opinion of accurate and judjcious Speilators, rather 
 than to do tliat which liked themlelves. And therefore 
 whatfoever is dedicated unto Pofkrit^^, and to remain as 
 an Example for others, had need be well done,Neat,Po- 
 lilTied, and made according; to tlie true Rule and Law of 
 Art, foraiinuch as it is likely to come into the hands of 
 skilful Artificers, judicious Cenfurers, and flich as make 
 a narrow fcrutiny into every def.dl:. But as it is ijnpofTi- 
 ble to attain to an Excellency, or height of any thing 
 ivithout a beginning, fo do the firit things in going on 
 cf the Work, feem to be the lead : the height of Arts, as 
 of Trees, delighteth us veiy much, fo do not the Roots ^ 
 •yet can tliere be no height without the Roots. And 
 therefore we lliall find, that a frequent and continual 
 Excrcife, as it is moft laborious, lb it is moil profitable ; 
 leeing Nature doth begin, hope of Profit doth advance, and 
 Exercife doth accowplifh the thing j ought after. In luin, 
 by doing quickly, we fliall never learn to do wcllj but 
 by doing Vv-cll, it is very likely we may learn to do quick- 
 ly. To this Ipeedy and well doing there belongeth three 
 things, i;/-^. To add, to dctratt, and to change. To add 
 or detmcl, recjuireth Icfs Labour and Judgment ; but to 
 clcprefs thofc things that fwell, to railc thole things that 
 link, to tye clofe thole things Avhich arc fcattered, to di- 
 gcft things that ai'e without order, tocompofe things that 
 are different, to reftrain things thatare inlolent, requireth 
 double pains: for thole things maybecoiidcmncd,^vhich 
 once did pleafc, to make ^vay for Inventions not yet 
 thought of. Now without doubt, the beft Avay for E- 
 inendation, is to lay by tlie Defign for a time, till it 
 leem unto us as new, or anothers Invcnton j Ml otu' own, 
 iike newBirtlis, pleafc us toonnuch. 
 
 XIII. Laftly, That Txhich gave the greaiejl, and as it tv en , 
 the lajijlep totrards the augmentation of Art, rtas that free ii- 
 lerty tvhich Artiz,ans ^avc every one, tocenfttre^ to find fault 
 Tyith their Works, ana to wark their Defers. 
 
 It was the Opinion of Seneca, tliat many would have 
 attained unto WiBom, if they lud not conceived them- 
 
 felves 
 
Chap. 2. Farther Frogrefs ofthefe Arts, i i ^ 
 
 felves to be Wife already. When Phydm made Jupiter 
 for the Eleans, and (liewed it, he flood behind the Door 
 Jiftnin^ what was commended, and what difcommend- 
 ed in his Work ; one found fault with the grofnefs of his 
 Nofe, another with the length of his Face, a third had 
 Ibmething elfe to fay : now, when all the Spedators were 
 gone, he retired himfelf again to mend the Work, ac- 
 cording to what was liked of the greater part ; for he did 
 not think the Advice of fiich a Multitude to be a fmall 
 matter, judging that fo many faw many tilings better 
 than he alone, though he could not but remember him- 
 felf to be Phydias. But yet Artificers did not from hence 
 admit their Judgments generally in every tiling, but they 
 followed their Dircclions only in fuch thi?igs as did belong 
 to their Proffjfion. ' t^swhen ^|7v"//w made a Work, he ex- 
 pofed it in a place where all that palled by might fee it 5 
 hiding himfelf in tlie mean time behind the Pidure, to 
 hear what faults were marked in his Works, preferring 
 the common People before his own Judgment. And he 
 is reported to have in ended his Work, upon the Cenfnre of 
 a Shoo-maler, who blaming him for having made fewer 
 Latchets in tlie infide of one of the Pantoffles, than of 
 the other; the Shoo-maker finding the Work tlie next day 
 mended according to his Advice, grew proud, and began 
 to find fault with the Leg alfo ; whereupon Apelles could 
 not contain him.felf any longer, but looking forth from 
 behind the PiihirCjfaid, Nejutor ultra crepidam, he bid the 
 Shoo-maker not go beyond his Lail: ; from whence at laft 
 came that Proverb. He is the befl Man that can advife 
 himfelf what is fit to be done ; and he is next in goodne% 
 that is content to receive good Advice : but he that can 
 neither advife himfelf, nor will be dire^^d by tlje Advice 
 of others, is of a very ill Nature, 
 
 ICHAJe, 
 
5i6 Toljgraphites* Lib. IV. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Corffummntion or VerfeEiion of the \^rt 1 
 of l^Ainting» ^ 
 
 t. AS Invention gave reay to the advancement of Art, fo 
 ■^^ the advancement of the fame made way for its Per^ 
 
 fcBion. 
 
 The Invention arofe from the appearance of things na- 
 tural, conceived in Ideas, as we have abundantly figni- 
 iicd Qn the firjl Chapter of this Book) the Advance from the 
 bringing of thofe Ideas to hght through practice Ch Chap. 
 -2..) iVom whence arofe things very excellent for Greatnrfs, 
 very good for their /IfefnlneJ?, choice for their Novelty, and 
 fm^iilar for their kinds. 
 
 II. Eafe of Invention, plenty of Alatter, and neatnep of 
 Work, vpere fieps by v^hich Art vcoi Conftmr/iaied. For eaje 
 of Invention gave Encouragement, plenty of Afatter gave 
 Formation, and Neatneji gave Delight -, all which fb con- 
 Ipired together, to put fo much of Emulation into the 
 Artificer, to undertake or endeavour to do thofe things, 
 which in their kmd might never after be exceeded : this 
 indeed was their aim of" old, which although the Anti- 
 ents of this Art could never attain unto, yet did they 
 make fucli way, that fome of their Followers have done 
 thofe things, -which never any after them could ever 
 iTiend, northemlclvcs Icarcely come near. Eafie Inven- 
 tion fprings out of a great and well rooted fulnets ofLearn- 
 ing ; by being converfant in all forts of Studies, having 
 familiarity witii Antiquities ; the knowledge of innume- 
 rable Hiitorical and Poetical Narrations, together with a 
 through Acquaintance with all fuch Motions and Idea's 
 of the Mind, as are natui"ally incident unto Men : for the 
 whole force of this Art doth principally conlilt in thefe 
 things, liothing bearing a greater iway in the manifold 
 Varieties of Painting. 
 
 III. It Tvas the Opinion of Pamphilus (the Ma(ier of 
 ApcUcs) that TvjthoHt the knowledge of Aritbmetici, Geome^ 
 try, and the Opticks, this Art cokld not be brought to Per' 
 fe^ioii. 
 
 The 
 
Chap.^. TheVerfe^ionofVdnttng, 517 
 
 The Examples of Phidioi and Akamenes is pertinently 
 brought here : Tht Athenians intending to fet up the Image 
 of Minerva upon a high Pillar , employed thofe two 
 Workmen, purpofmg to chufe the better of the tvvo ; Al- 
 camenes (having no Skill in Geometry nor the OptichJ 
 made her vv^onderful Fair to the Eye of them that faw her 
 near. Phidia^s contrariwile (being Skilftil in all Arts, 
 chiefly the OpticbJ confidering that the whole Shape 
 would change according to the height of the place, made 
 lier Lips wide open, lierNofe fomewhat out of order, and 
 all the reft accordingly, by a kind of Refupination : the 
 tvvo Images being brought to view, Phidias was in great 
 danger to have been Stoned by the Multitude, until at 
 length the Statues were fet up ; where the fweet and ex- 
 cellent ftroaks of Alcameaes were drowned, and the dif^ 
 figured diftorted hard-favourednefs of Phidias liis Work 
 vanillied (and all this by the height of the place by 
 which means Alcamenes was Laughed at, and Phidias 
 much more Efteemed. Of like perfedion is Amidius his 
 Miriervfi j the Image of JyMo in the Temple of the Syrian. 
 Goddefs j the Head of Diana exalted at Chios^ made by 
 Bapahfs and Anthermus, Hercules in the Temple of An- 
 toniaj &c. An Artificer , faith Philo\iratus in Prmmia 
 Iconum, mull undcrftand the Nature of a Man through- 
 ly, toexprefsall his Manners, Guile, Behaviour, &c. he 
 muftdifcern the force in the Conltitution of his Cheeks, 
 in the turning of his Eyes, in the cafting of his Eye-brows ; 
 in lliort, he muft obferve all things which may help the 
 Judgment -, and whofoever is thus fiirnillied, willdoubt- 
 iefs excel and bring things to perfedlion ; he then may 
 ealily Paint a Mad-man, an Angry-man, a Penfive-man, 
 a Joyful-man, an Earneft-man, a Lover, &c. in a word, 
 the perfection of whatfoever may poflibly be conceived 
 in the Mind. 
 
 IV. Continual ohfervation of exqtdfite Pieces, Cf^hether Ar^ 
 tificial or Natural J nimble Conceptions, and Tr.anqmlity of 
 A^ind, are great means to bring Art to PerfeElion. 
 
 The Works of the Antients could never have be-en €0 
 exquifite in theExprefEon of PaffionSjbut by thefe means- 
 How perfeftly did Zenxis Paint the modeft and chafte 
 Behaviour of Penelop: ; Timomackis the raging mad Fit o£ 
 Ajax ; Sil anion the Frowardnefs of Apollodorus 5 Protoge-' 
 na the deep Penfivenefs of Philifcus 5 Praxiteles the Re- 
 
 Bb joycings 
 
1 1 8 Folygrdphkes Lib. IV. 
 
 joycings o^Phrpe ; Parrhafins a Boy running in Armour ; 
 SiTi^ArijiUes \i)& Anapa'Aomenos Dying for Love of his 
 Brother? Bodws\iii Image o£ Hercules, is of the fame na- 
 ture : Themijiius fhews us the true Image of feigned 
 Fricndlliip ; A^ellhis a moft lively Image of Juftice ; A- 
 fslks an admirable Picture of Slander ; thoufands of Ex- 
 amples more mi^^ht be drawn out of antient Authors, to 
 approve thefe things, if thcfe may be thought not fuffi- 
 cient. 
 
 V. This Perfection alfo lyeth in the trnth of the matter, the 
 occafnn thereof, ani Difcretion to ufe it. 
 
 The moft antient and famous Painters did make mucb 
 account of Truth, and had rather lofe the neatneft and 
 glory of their Pieces, than to endanger the truth of their 
 Story ; which indeed is the great Commendation of a 
 Picture, for as much as Lucian faith, That nothing can 
 be profitable but what proceeds from Truth. Occafion 
 alfo is a great matter ', the Pi6lure of Bacchus may here 
 lerve for an excellent Exaiif^le, whofe Paflion ot Love 
 w-as fo clearly expreffed therein ; carting afide his brave 
 Apparel, Fiowcr>, Leaves, Grapes, &c. Now, fn rcprc- 
 fenting things truly according to the occafion, Difcretion 
 ou"ht to be your Guide; for as in Tragedies, fo alfo in 
 Pi'Jtures all things ought not to be rcprefcntcd -, let not 
 A'Icde.i (faith Horace in lihro de Arte) Murder her own 
 Children in the prefcncc of all the People ; let not the 
 wicked Atrciis Boil Humane FlelTi openly; there are 
 doubt lefs many things, which had belter be left out, 
 though with iomt lofs of the Story, than with the lofs of 
 MoicRy^ wanton, unlawful and filthy Lufts, (though 
 they may gain the vain title of Wit) yet ihcy diminifli 
 not oi:ly the F.ftunation otthe Work-man, but alio the 
 Er;cellcncy of tht Woil', debannig it of perfcdlion. Pre- 
 cepts help Art nmch, in propounding unio us the right 
 way; but where they fail, our Wits muft iiipply, by 
 warily confidering wliat is decent and convenient ; for 
 tliis Art requireth ftudious Endeavours; adiduous Exer- 
 citations, great Experience, deep \Viidom, ready Coun- 
 iel, Veracity of Mindj diligent Obfervations, and great 
 Difcretion. 
 
 VI. To the former add MagnificincSj rfhich gives Anthoi 
 rity f fl things fxaUfnt,^ 
 
 Great 
 
Chap. j[. The PerfeSfionofPainthg. ^ig| 
 
 Great minded Men are mofl of all given to entertain 
 ilately Conceits ; therefore an Artiz^an ought to be of a 
 magnanimous Nature ; if not, yet that at leaft he ought 
 With a determined Refolution to aim at magnificent 
 things. So it feems, that Nature did difppfe Nicopkanes 
 to a high ftrain of Invention; Nicopkc.ms (X^xth. Pliny, lib, 
 35. cap. 10.) was gallant and neat, fo that he did Paint 
 Antiquities for Eternity^ whereby he was commended fon 
 the magnificence of his Work, and gravity of his Art. 
 Such Artificers therefore as do bring any thing to perfe6ti- 
 on, muit be of an exceeding great Spirit, and entertaiii 
 upon every occafion great Thoughts and lofty Imaginati- 
 ons ; by this means they fhall gain an cverlalting Fame ; 
 but this is impoiTible (faith Longinus) for any -^vho bufie 
 the Thoughts and Studies of their Life about vile andfla- 
 viili Matters, to bring forth any thing which might de- 
 lerve the admiration of fucceding Ages. If any Aniz^an^ . 
 be not naturally of fo great a Spirit, let him help Iiimfel£ 
 by the reading ot Hiffory and Poefie. Hiltory cannot but 
 mlpire a magnanimous Spirit, when fhe reprefents to us 
 lo m.any rare Exploits, and the Examples of fo many 
 great, noble and valiant Souls, who throughout all Ages,' 
 in the midlt of mo(i eminent Dangers, have demonftra- 
 ted their Virtues and Spirits not only to thofe prefent, but 
 all fuccceding times. Poefie alfo being of a haughty and 
 lofty Stile, doth much enlarge the Mind, and from thence 
 many excellent things are brought : the much admired 
 Elem Jfipiter which Phidias made, hinlfelf confelfed ta 
 be formed after the Image of Jupiter defcribed in Homer » 
 From the fame Poet did Apelles Paint the Image o^Di^na 
 among the Sacrificing Virgins. It is not the prefent Age, 
 but the Sacred Memory of all Polterity, which gives un- 
 to us a weighty and durable Crown of Glory. 
 
 VII. Exacl Analogy or Proportion, not only advanced 
 Art, h-it aljo hronghtit a degree nearer Perfe^ion. 
 
 Philoftrattis calls it Symmetric^ fome Analogy, others 
 Harmony ; this is the Appellation of the Greeks -, what 
 the Latins called it fcarcely appears, (as Pliny faith //&.' 
 ^4. cap. 8.) yet words equivalent in power thereto are 
 tbund, as Congruens, Equality ; and Tully (lihro primo ds 
 OJJiciisJ calls it Agreement and apt Compofition, Vitriviufy 
 Commodulation ', Agellius calls it a natural Competence ^ 
 P^intilian approves the word Proportion i by which, faith 
 
 B b 2 Phtarc^hf 
 
520 Poifgraphkes Lib. IV. 
 
 Pint arch, beautiful things are perfeded: it is one ofthofe 
 things which the moft High ufcd in the Fabrication of the 
 World, (Wifd. 1 1 . 20.) He h^th difpofed all things in mca- 
 ftire, and mimher, and veeight. The firft giver ot Symme- 
 trie or Analogy was Parrhafius ; Pdlycletus was a diligent 
 Obfer/er thereof; Afclepiodorm, an exaft Pra6lifer there- 
 of, whofe Admirer was Apelles, who efteemed it to pro- 
 ceed out offome Perfc6tions in an Artificer furpaffing in 
 Art, and which is moft apparent in naked and undif- 
 guifed Bodie?. Strabo faith, that Phidias cxa6tly obfcr- 
 ved this proportion in the Image Oi Jupiter Olympicus fit- 
 ting. The fame Phidias, as Ltician reports, could exa6lly 
 tell upon the firft fight of a Lions Claw, how big a Lion 
 he was to make in proportion to the fame Claw. Lineal 
 Pi6ture is the Foundation of all Imitation, which if it 
 be done after the tme Rules of Proportion, will lively re- 
 prefent the thing delineated : this is a Perfe6lion in kind, 
 w-bich vet cannot be compared to the perfe6lion of a co- 
 loured t^iilure. 
 
 VIII. Thii point of Perfection rvas farther advanced by the 
 exqfii/i.'enej? of Colof^ring. 
 
 The perfe^ion of Colouring arifcth from a certain right 
 underftanding of each Colour fevcrall}', without which it 
 is impr-fhble to mix any thing rightly, as Hern:ogenes faith. 
 The Greds (as Porpkyrins) call this mixtion of Colours, 
 CorrHp'.ion, "which n^")!!! Phi! arch alfo ufcd, when he faid, 
 that Ap-/lodvr'/.s (who firft found out thcCorniption, or 
 way oi'Shado'.ving in Colours) was an Athenian. Lnei- 
 f.n calls it G.'^f-^fion, where he faith, that by the. Art of 
 Pointing, Ima,?cs Avere made by a moderate confufion of 
 • Colour?, asWiiite, Blac!:, Yellow, Red, C>"f. by which, 
 as Philcfiy-atf-y^ laithin Prrxtmin IconatK, we know how to 
 imitate tiie Diverlities of looks in a Mad-man, in a (ad 
 orchecrfulCoume-.iance .- the colour of the hve,as brown, 
 gray or black: of the Hair, as golden, nrldy, brighter 
 flaxen • of the Cfoaths, as Cloth, Leather, or Armour - 
 of Places, as Chamberf, Houfes, Forcll-s, Mountains, 
 Rivers, Fountains, &c. this is done by the accurate mix- 
 tion, due Application, and convenient Shadowing,- as 
 Lucian laith in Zeaxide; through the Obfenation ot 
 light, fliadow, obfcurit\- and brightnefs, 3.s Plutarch \\'i\i 
 have it. For tliis caufc, faith Johannes GramnjaticHs, is a 
 white or golden Pi6iure made upon a black ground. Light 
 
 is 
 
Chap. J. Ihe Perfe^ioft of V Aiming, it\ 
 
 is altogether neceflary, feeing there can be no fliade with- 
 out it : Light and Shadow cannot fubfitt afundcr, be- 
 caufe by the one the other is apparent, for thofc things 
 ivhich are enlightned feem to flick out more, and to 
 meet the Eyes of the Beholder ; thofe which are iliaded to 
 be depreflfed. This fame of Light and Shadow, Nicias 
 the Athenian did moft accurately obferve ; as ■a.KoZeHxisy 
 PolyinotHS and Euphranor, as Philoflratus faith in lihro fe~ 
 cundo de vita Apollonii, cap. g. Apellcs Painted Alexan- 
 der as if he held Lightning in his Hand ; Philoftrattis ob- 
 fervedthe fame in the Pidiure of an Ivory Venus, fo that 
 one would think it an eafic matter to take hold of her ; 
 PaHJi.ti arrived to fuch an excellency in this, as Scarcely 
 any after could attain unto, as in the Painted Ox, faith 
 Pliny y which he made inimitable. Obfcurity or Darkneis 
 is only the duskinefs of a deeper Shadow, as Brightnefs is 
 the Exaltation of Light: if White and Black be put up- 
 on the f une Supeificie?, the White Avillfeem neareft, the 
 Black farther off: this being known to make a thing 
 feem holbw, as a Ditch, Cave, Ciftern, Well, &c. it 
 is coloured with Black or Brown 5 and fomuch the black- 
 er, fo much the deeper it feems ; extream Black reprefent- 
 ing a bottomlefs depth ; but to make it rife, as the Breafts 
 of a Maid, a ftretched-out Rand, &c. there is laid round, 
 or on each fide, fo much black or brown, as may make the 
 parts feem to ftick out, by reafon of the adjacent hollow- 
 nefs ; brightnefs is fometimes ufed for necelfity, but ge- 
 nerally for Ornament, (as in thePi6lures of Angels, Gems, 
 Armour, Flame, Flowers, Gold, and the like) the which 
 IS made always ^vith a mixture of light ; which mixtion 
 Painters call Harmoge, but is nothing elfe fave an undi- 
 fcernable piece of Art, by which the Artiz^an ftealin^ly 
 pafleth from one colour into another, with an infenfible 
 diftinilion -, this Harmoge is moft perfect in the Rainbow, 
 xvhich containing evident variety of Colours, yet leaves 
 them fo indiftinguilliable, as that we can neither fee 
 where they begin, nor yet where they end, as Boethius ob- 
 ferves in lihri qainti de arte mujica capite quarto. The laft 
 and chief perfedion of Colouring lieth in the out-lines or 
 extremities of the Work, being cut oft' with fuch a won- 
 derful fubtilty and fweetnefs, as to prefent unto us things 
 ■we do not fee, but that we rfiould believe that behind the 
 Piitures, there is fomething more to be feeoj than can 
 
 B b 3 eaJil? 
 
^22 Folygraphices Lib. IV. 
 
 eafily be difccrncd ; thereby fetting forth, as it were, thofe 
 things which are really concealed, this was Perrhajius his 
 chict glor^r ; but herein ^pelles exceeded all others what- 
 soever, as Pctronuisin Satyrico feems to affirm. 
 
 IX. Aciion and, Vajfiori id next to he confidered, in which 
 confi/fs Life and Motion . 
 
 There is not any thing that can add a more lively grace 
 to the Work, than the extream likenefs of Motion, pro- 
 ceeding from the inward A6lionor PafTion of the Mind. 
 It is therefore a great point of Art, which leads unto Per- 
 fection, the which Ave are to learn by cafting our Eyes 
 aipon Nature, and tracing her Iteps. Confider all the 
 Gelhires of the Body, as the Head, by which is expreiTed 
 the Affedions of the Mind. The cafting down of the 
 Head, fhewethdejeftion of Mind ; being caft back, Arro- 
 gance ,- hanging?, on either fide, languifhing; being ftiff or 
 iiurdy, chur'lillnnefs : by it we grant, refiife, affirm, threa- 
 ten j or pafTively, or balliful, doubtftjl, fallen, envious, &c. 
 by the motions of the Countenance appears Sorrow, Joy, 
 love. Hatred, Courtefie, Courage, Deje6tion, &c. by the 
 motions of the Countenance, are exprett the Qualities of 
 the Mind, as Modefty and Shamefacednefs, or Boldnefs 
 and Impudence : but of all the parts of the Countenance, 
 athe Eyes are moft powerful, for they, whether we move 
 or move not, iTiew forth our Joy or Sorrow; this is excel- 
 lently expreft by the Prophet, in Lcni. 3. 48. tlD^D JI^D 
 :'JDy TO, 1311^ hf UlJ^lin fi'd^e majim terrfldgnenijgnd 
 fheber bat gnan:mi, which TremelliHs renders, Rivis aquarnm 
 ^erftuit ocuIhs fTjeus, propter contri. ionern filia populi mei : and 
 again HDID ^*4'^ *1 niJH U[J^ griem nigger ah velo tidmah, 
 a. e. oculns mem deflmt nee defijtit . For the fame purpofe it 
 is that Nature hath furnillied them with Tears ', but their 
 Motion doth more cfpecially exprefs the Intention, as 
 Meeknefs, Pride, Spitefulnels, and the like; all which 
 are to be imitated, according as the Natureof the Adion 
 lliall require, as flaring, clofed, dull, wanton, glancing, 
 asking or promifing fomething. The Eyc-broAvs alfo have 
 rfome adlions, £ox they chiefly command the Fore-head 
 by contrafting, dilating, raifmg and dcpreuing it ; wrink- 
 led Brows ITiew Sadnefs and Anger ; Difplayed, Cheer- 
 fulnefs \ Hanging, Shame ; Elation, Confent ; Deprct- 
 fion, Diffent, &c. The Lips fliew Mockmg, Scorning, 
 Loathing, &c. The Arm gently caft forth, is graceful in 
 
 fami- 
 
Chap. ^ . The FerfeSiion of Pamhg. 321 
 
 familiar Speech ; but the Arm fpread forth towards one 
 Ude, llicws one fpeaking of feme notable Matter ; with- 
 out the motion of the Hands all motion is maimed ; the 
 Hands, as it were, call, difmip, threaten, reqzefl, abhor, 
 fear, asi, demand, promife, deny, douht, confep, repent, 
 numher, measure, rejoyce, encourage, hefeech, hinder, reprozfe, 
 (tdmire, relate, commend, &c. In admiration we hold the 
 Hand up, bent fomewhat backward, with all the Fin- 
 gers doled: in relating we join the top of the Fore-finger 
 to the Thumb-nail : in promifmg we move it foftiy : in 
 exhorting or commending, more quick : in penitence and 
 anger, we lay our clofed Hand to the Brefi: we clofe 
 the Fingers ends, and Jay them to our Mouth when we 
 confider, &c. It is not yet enough that the Pi6lure or I- 
 mage refembles the proportion and colour of the Life, im- 
 lefs it hkewife refembles it in the elerneanour of the whole 
 Body ; therefore CalMratus calls tliis Art, the Art of Coun- 
 terfeiting Manners. Ulyjfes is evidently, faith Philcfiratfix, 
 difcerned by his Aufterity and Vigilancy ; Menelans by 
 his gentle mildnefs j Agamemnon hy a kind of Divine 
 Majefty^ AjaxTelamonmshy bis gnmlook; Locrus hy his 
 readinefs and forwardnels. The beft Artifts ever change 
 their Hands, in expreffing of Gods, Kings, Priefts, Sena- 
 tors, Orators, Muficians, Lavnyers, &c. Zenxis Painted 
 the Modefty of Pf«f/o/'f : Echion made a new Married but 
 Shamefaced Woman : Ariftides Painted a running Cha- 
 riot drawn with four Horfcs : Antiphilus made a Boy 
 blowing the Fire ; Philoxenns Eretrias depi6ted the Pi6hire 
 of Wantonnefs: Parrhajiy.s made the Hoplitides ox Pi- 
 <iv:ures of two Armed Men, as may be feen in Pliny lib. 3 5. 
 cap.^, 10, and 11. Boethim made a Babe ftrangling a. 
 Goole : Praxiteles made a weeping Woman, and a re- 
 joycing Whore: Euphranordtew the Picture of P^m as a 
 Judge, a Wooer and a Soldier : fee Pliny lib.^/\, cap. 8. 
 where you may have many other Examples. It is worth 
 our pains to fee in Callijtratus thefe Defcriptions at large, 
 whereby we may fee it is a lingular perfetlion.of Art. 
 
 X. The lafi fiep cf PerfeBion is the right ordering and dij- 
 po/ing of things. 
 
 This Order orDifpofitionmuftbe obferved as well in a 
 Pi6lure confifting of one Figure, as in a Pi6ture of many 
 Figures. The Nature of Man, faith Xenophon in Oecono- 
 micoj cannot name any thing fo ufefiil and fair, as Or- 
 
 B b 4 der 5 
 
5 24 Polygrdfhtces Lib. IV. 
 
 der j aconfufed piece of Work cannot dererve admirati- 
 on ; thofe things only affedi: us, wherein every part is not 
 only perfed in it felf, but alfo well difpofed by a natu- 
 ral Connexion. It is not enough in a Building to bring 
 Hair, Lime, Sand, Wood, Stone?, and other Materials, 
 unlefswe take care that all this confufed Stuff be orderly 
 difpofed to the In-tent. Nature it felf feems to be iiphol- 
 den by Order, and fo are all things elfe which are fubju- 
 gated to the fame Law. Now, the way to attain to this 
 true order of Difpofirion, is, Ftrjl, To conceive the //i?<^ of 
 the Hiftory in the Imagination, that the prefence of the 
 things in the mind may fuggeft the order ot" difpofing each 
 thing in its proper place, yet with that fubtility, that the 
 ivhole may reprefent one entire Body. Secondly^ That the 
 frame of the whole Stru6b.irc of this Difpofition may be 
 analogous to the things thcmfelves ; fo that we may at 
 once reprefent things which are already done, things 
 vi'^hich are doing, and things which are yet to be done ; 
 perfeding, as Thiloftratus faith, in every one of thefe 
 things, what is moft proper, as if we were bulled about 
 one only thing. Thirdly, An Hiitorical Pickire mult re- 
 prefent the feries of the Hiftory, which although the Pi- 
 <5ture be filent, yet that the Connexion might (as it were) 
 Ipcak, putting the principal Figures in the principal 
 places. Fourthly, The parts mult be conneded, eafily 
 rolling on, gently flowing or following one another, hand 
 inha"nd, feeming both to hold and be upheld, free from 
 all abruption, well grounded, finely framed, andltrong- 
 ly tyed up together ; that the whole may be dclightfomc 
 for its Equality, grave for its Simplicity, and graceftil 
 for its imivcrlal Analogical Compofurc. Fifthly, That 
 moft excellent pieces (if the Hiibry will fjffer it) be llia- 
 dowed about with aide Thickets, and craggy Rocks, that 
 by the horrid nefs of fuch things, there may accrcw a 
 inore excellent grace to the principal j T/nft as DifcorcU 
 in Mufick make fomctimes Concords) from whence re- 
 fults a fmgular Delight. Sixthly, That to theic tlnngs be 
 added Perfpimity ; which, as Lacian faith, tlirough the 
 mutiLal Connexion of things, will make the Avholc com- 
 pleat and perfed. Seventhly, and Uflly, That the dilpo- 
 fition of the proportion be obfeiTed, in the due diftancc 
 of each Figure, and thcpofition of their parts, oF %vhich 
 we have f aid Something, SeBionfevcnthybwx. in general 
 •-■' - ?//.;■; 
 
Chap. 3 . The VerfeBion of P^'^^/^jj^; ^^ i 
 
 Vliny (lih. ^'y-cap. lo.) faith, that in this gt^-^ral clilpu-i 
 fition of proportional dittances, we have no KuUg . q^j. 
 Eye mu{t teach us what to do ; to which Hiiintilian ^f, 
 fents, -tvhere he faith, that thefe things admit no othei 
 Judgment, but the Judgment of our Eyes. ' 
 
 XI. Lartly, For the abfohte Confy:mmation or PerfeBiori 
 of the Art, Excellency of Invention, Proportion, Colour, Lifs 
 And Difpafition, mufl univerfally concur, ^nd confpire, tct 
 hring forth that comely graceful nej?, t^hlch is the very Lifs 
 i>.nd Soul of the Work^ the entire and joint Summ of all Per" 
 feSlions. 
 
 It is not enough, that a Pi6lure is excellent in one or 
 more of the aforefaid Perfe6lions, but the Confummati- 
 on is, that they all concur ; for if but one be wanting,, 
 the whole Work is defeftive. A good Invention affe(xs 
 the Mind ; true Proportion draws the Eyes ; lively Moti- 
 on moves the Soul; exquifite Colours beguile the Phanta- 
 fie^ and an orderly Difpofition wonderfully charms all 
 the Senfes ; if all thefe unite and center in one piece, 
 liow great an Excellence and Perfedlion will appear? 
 What a comely Grace ? this Grace it is, which in beautiful 
 Bodies is the Life of Beauty, and without which, its 
 greateft Accomplilliments cannot pleafe the Beholder. 
 For it is not fo m.uch the perfedion of Invention, Propor- 
 tion, Colours, Motion and Difpofition apart, which af^ 
 feet the Senfes, but all thofe Pcrfe6lions abfolutely united, 
 which brings forth that comely Grace, and higheft Perfe- 
 6lion, which Art aims at, and the Artizan firives after. 
 This Grace proceeds not from any Rules of Art, but from 
 the excellent Spirit of the Artificer; it is eafier attained 
 by Oblerv^ation and a good Judgment, than learned by- 
 Precepts, as Huintilian in his Inttitutions, lib. ii, cap. i. 
 learnedly obferves. And this Grace is molt graceful when 
 it flows with Facility, out of a free Spirit, and is not for- 
 ced or ftrained out with Labour and Toil, which quite 
 ipoils and kills the life of the Work: Now, this Facility 
 Springs from Learning, Study and Excrcitation. Art and 
 Nature mufl concur to the Conftitution , of this Grace j 
 Art rauft be applied difcreetly to thofe things which we 
 naturally affedl, and not to things which we loath -, left 
 we mifs of that Glory which we feek after. 
 
 CHAPJ 
 
5'-^^ //^ Polygrnphices Lib. IV. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 floivtfje Afitknts Depicted their Gods i andfrfi 
 of Saturn- 
 
 TJITf htre \nteni to comprehend the various rcays of the 
 I ' » Antisnts in DcpiFting their Idols, according to the Gi" 
 jloms of thofe feveral Nations, where they ivere Adored and 
 IVorPnppedy and that from the mofi antient, chiefeli and beji 
 'approved Authors now extant. 
 
 I. The 2.ntknt Romans Rgmcd Saturn like an old Man,' 
 tvith a Scythe or Hook in his Hand, by fome fignifying 
 Time, as his name C/'/'o«oj_ alio intimates. 
 
 II. They alfo figured him in the ihape of a very Aged 
 Man, as one who began with t lie beginning of the World, 
 holding in his Hand a Child, which by piecemeals he 
 feems greedily to devouro 
 
 By this is fignified the Revenge he tool: for heing expulfed 
 Heaven by his own Children, of which thofe which efcaped his 
 Fury, were only four, Jupiter, Juno, Pluto and Neptime, 
 ly which is jhadowed forth the four Ehnents, Fii'e, Air, Earth 
 and Water, which are not perijhahle hy the all-cutting Sickle 
 of devouring Time. 
 
 III. Martianus Capella Depi6ls him an old Man, hold- 
 ing in his Right Hand a Serpent, with the end of its Tail 
 in its Mouth, turnmg round with a very flow pace, his 
 Temples girt with a green Wreath, and the Hair of his 
 Head and Beard milk white. 
 
 The Wreath on his Head fJpews the Spring-time, his fnowy 
 Hair and Beard the approach of churl i(h Winter; the flow ne^ 
 cf the Serpents motion, the fuggifh Revolution of that Planet. 
 
 IV. Afacrohius defcribes him Avith a Lions-head, a 
 Dogs-head, and a Wolfs-head. 
 
 By the Lions-head is fignifed the time pre fent, (which is al- 
 ways flrongefi, for that, which is, r/jiji needs he more porverful 
 than that which is not J hy the Dogs-head, the time to come, 
 (which always fawns on us, and by whofe alluring Delights 
 Tve are drawn on to vain and uncertain hopes J^and hy the Wolfs- 
 head, time pall, (which greedily devourcth whatfosver itfirids^ 
 leaving no memory thereof behind.) 
 
 V. Macrd' 
 
Chap. ^. Of Defimng Jupiter. 527 
 
 V. Macnhitis alfo faith, that among the reft of his 
 Deicriptions, his Feet are tye^ together with thi-cads of 
 Wooll. _ %. 
 
 By which is Jhewedy that God does nothing in hajie, nor 
 Jpeedily cafiigates the Iniquities of Man, hit proceeds foivly 
 and unmllin^lyy to give them time and leifare to amend. 
 
 VI. EufehiHs faith, that ^/?^r^^ (the Daughter ofC(r- 
 lum. Wife and Sifter of Saturn) did place alfo upon his 
 Head two Wing^s, demonflrating by the one, the excel- 
 lency and perfedtion of the Mind -, by the other, the force 
 of Senfe and Underftanding. 
 
 The Platonich underjiand by Saturn the Mind, and its 
 inroard Contemplation of things Ccele/lial, and therefore called 
 the time in t^hich he lived, the Golden Age, it being refute 
 mth Qnietnefsy Concord, and true Content. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Horv the Antknts Defined Jupiter. 
 
 'i^C\Rpheus defcribes him with golden Locks, having en 
 ^^ his Temples peeping forth two golden Horns, his 
 Eyes fliining, his Breft large and fail-, having on his 
 Shoulders Wings. 
 
 By the golden Loch is fignifed the Firmament, and its 
 
 florioHs Army of Trahcent Stars : by his two Horns, the 
 iaft and Weft : by his Eyes, the Sun and Moon : hy his 
 Brsfi, the fpacious Ambtdation of the Air ^ and by his 
 Wings, the Fiery of the Winds. 
 
 II. Porphyrins and Snidas Depidled the Image of J^-yi- 
 ter fitting upon a firm and immoveable Seat -, the upper 
 parts naked and uncloathed, the lower parts covered and 
 irivefted ; in his Left Hand a Scepter ; in his Right Hand 
 a great Eagle, joined with the Figure of ViVvoria. 
 
 This Image -was ercB:ed in Pirsus, a jlately and magnif- 
 cent Gate of Athens ; by the Seat is ftoewed the Permanency of 
 God's Porter: the naked parts fhevp that the Compajfion of the 
 Diz>ine Porper is alw^ays manifeji to thofe of an tmderfianding 
 Spirit : the lower parts covered, fhevn that -while we wallow 
 in the WQrld, and a^s it were rock'd ajleep with the illicebrous 
 
 Blan' 
 
|2S Polygyaphices Lib. IV. 
 
 'Blandijhmfnts thereof, that the Divine Knovcledge is hid and 
 oh/cured from m : by the Scepter is fignified his Rale over all 
 things .♦ Eagle and Vi6loria hoTv alLM)ings fiand in VaffaUge 
 And Suhjection to the all-sommandin^ Povper. 
 
 III. Martianas Depiclares him with a regal Crown, a- 
 dorned with moft precious and glittering Stones ; over his 
 Shoulder?, a thin Vail (made by Palloi own Hands) all 
 white, in which is inferted divers Imall pieces ofGlalsre- 
 prefenting the moft refplendent Stars ; in his Right Hand 
 he holdeth two Balls, the one all of Gold, the other half 
 Gold half Silver ; in the other Hand an Ivory Harp with 
 nine Strings, fitting on a Foot-cloth, wrought with Itrangt 
 Works, and Peacocks Fea±ers ; and near his Side lieth a 
 Tridental Gold Em-bofTed Mafs. 
 
 IV. Plutarch faith, that in Crete^ he had wholly Hu- 
 mane Shape and Proportion, but without Ears. 
 
 By that Tvas (ignified, that Sy.periours and Judges ought 
 «of to he carried avpay by Prejudice nor Perfrvafion^ but (iand 
 firm, fledfafl and upright to all mithout Partiality. 
 
 V. Contrariwife the Lacedemonians framed his Pi6lure 
 v/ith four Ears. 
 
 By that they fignified, that God heareth and underjiandeth all 
 things j and that Princes and Judges ought to hear all In- 
 formations, before they deliver definitive Sentence or Judg- 
 ment, 
 
 VI. Paufanioi faith, that in the Temple o'i Aiinerva 
 (amon^ the Argives) the Statue of Jupiter was made -with 
 tlireeEyes; two of them in their right places j the other 
 in the middle of his Fore-head. 
 
 By Tsfhich is fignified his three Kingdoms ; the one Heaven, 
 tfje other Earth, the la/} Sea. 
 
 VII. With the Eleans (a People o^ Grece) the Statue 
 cfjove was compa6led of Gold and Ivory, empaled with 
 a Coronet of Olive Leaves; in his Right Hand the Iitiage 
 o^l^i^oria; in his Left a Scepter, on the top of which 
 was mounted the Portrai(5h.;re of an Eagle, upon a Seat 
 of Gold, enchafed with the forms of many unknown 
 Birds and Fifhes, upheld and fupported by four Images 
 of ViEloria. 
 
 VIII. In Caria (a Place of the kffcr A/iaJ the StaUie 
 cff Jupiter was made holding in one of his Hands a Pole^, 
 Axe. 
 
 The 
 
Chap. 6. OfDepI^hgM2iTs, ^29 
 
 The reajon of this was, as ¥lut3.XQh. faith from Hercules, 
 who overthromng Hippolyta the Amazonian ^ueen^ took it 
 from her y and ^ave it to Omphale/);V Wife, ^Lydian. The 
 "Platonilk underfiand hy Jupiter, the Soul of the World ; and 
 that Divine Spirit, through whofe Almighty PoTV.er every 
 thing receives its Being and Prefervation. 
 
 IX. He is alfo Painted with long curled black Hair in 
 a purple Robe, trimmed with Gold, and fitting on a 
 golden Throne, with bright yellow Clouds difperied a- 
 bout him. 
 
 CHAP. VL 
 
 How the Antients DepiS^ed Mars. 
 
 ISKXAcrohim faith, that the Pi6lures of M^trs were a- 
 ^^ domed and beautified with the Sun-beams, in as 
 lively a manner as could be devifed ; with an Aipedl fierce, 
 terrible, and wrathfiil, hollow red Eyes, quick in their 
 motion. Face all hairy, with long ciuied Locks on his 
 Head, depending even to his Shoulders, of a coal black 
 colour, landing with a Spear in tlie one Hand, and a 
 Whip in the other. 
 
 II. He is alfo fometimes Depicted on Horfeback, and 
 fometimes in a Chariot, drawn with Horfes called Fear 
 and Horror : fbme fay the Chariot was drawn with t'.vo 
 Men, which were called Fury and Violence. 
 
 III. Statins faith he wore on his Head a Helmet mod 
 bright and lliining, fo fiery as it fcemcd there iffued flalli- 
 es of Lightning 3 a Brett-plate of Gold, infculp'd with 
 fierce and ugly Monftersj his Shield depainted all over 
 vv'ith Blood, enchafed with defonned Beafe, with a Spear 
 and Whip in his Hands, drawn in a Chariot with two 
 Horfes, Fury and Violence , driven with two churliili 
 CoacI>men, Wrath and Befiriiction, 
 
 IV. Ifidorm faith, that the Pidlure of Mars was de- 
 painted with a naked Breft. 
 
 By Tvhich is fignified, that Men ought not to he timorous in 
 War, hut valiantly and Uldly expofe themfelves to Haz,ards 
 md Dangers. 
 
 V. Statins 
 
5 ^ o Polygrafhkes Lib. IV. 
 
 V. Scmta. faith, that die Houfe of Man was Built in 
 an obfcure corner of 77;r<?£r/V?, made of rutty, black Iron j 
 the Porters which kept the Gates, were Horror and Mad- 
 nef; within the Houfe inhabited Fury, Wrath, Impiety, 
 Fear, Tre.'ifon and Violence, whofe Governefs Avas Dij- 
 cord, featcd in a regal Throne, holding in one Hand a 
 bright Sword, and in the other a Bafm full of Humane 
 Blood. 
 
 VI. Ariofio, defcribing the Court of J/^rj, faith, that 
 in every part and corner of the fame were heard moft 
 Grange Echoes, fearful Shrieks, Threatnings, and difmal 
 Cryes; in the midft of this Palace was the Image of 
 Virtue, looking fad and penfive, full of Sorrow, Dilcon- 
 tcnt and Melancholy, leaning her Head on her Arm : 
 kird by her -was feated in a Chair, Fnry in Triumph : 
 not far from her fate Death, with a bloody ttern Coun- 
 tenance, orfering upon an Altar in Mens Skulls Humane 
 Blood, Confecrated with Coals of Fire, fetched from ma- 
 r.y Cities and Towns, burnt and ruinated by the Tyran- 
 ny of War. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Hoiv the Antknts Depcied Phoebus or Sol. 
 
 I 
 
 MAcrohi.ts faith,that in ^Ifyria was found the Statue 
 0^ Apollo, Phcshus or Sol, the Father of<^'fcs^U- 
 jfim, in the form o:"a young Man, and Beardlefs, Polilh-- 
 cd with Gold, who llretclnng out his Arms, held in his 
 Ri£;ht Hand a Coach-man's Whip ; and in his Left a 
 Thunderbolt, with fonie Ears of Corn. 
 
 The Tyrant of Syracufe, Dionyfius, with fury pulled of 
 the Beard from the Figure 0/ jtfculapius, faying it rvas very 
 Incongriiotu that the Father JhouU be Beardlef?, and the Son 
 have one fo exceeding long. 
 
 IT. Eiifehius faith, that in Egypt the Image of Sol was 
 fet in a Ship, carried up, and fupported by a Crocodil: 
 and that they (before Letters were inventecl) framed the 
 fhape of the Sun, by a Scepter, in the top of which was 
 dcxreroufly Engraven an Eye, ' 
 
 Thf 
 
ehap. 7. Of Depi "iing Phoebus or Sol. ^ 5 ^: 
 
 The Scepter /tgnified Gavernwem : the Eye, the Fomr> 
 rehich over fees and beholds all things. 
 
 III. The Lacedemonians Depi6led Apollo with four 
 Ears, and as many Hands. 
 
 By which ivas /tgnified the Judgment and Prudence of pod^ 
 leing fmft md ready to hear, hfit flow to fpeai, and from 
 thence grew that Proverb among the Grecians. 
 
 IV. Herodotus tz'goittth, that th^ Phoenicians had the 
 Statue of the Sun made in black Stone, large and fpaci- 
 ous at bottom, but inarp and narrow at top, which they 
 boafted to have had from Heaven. 
 
 V. LaBantms faith, that in Perfia, Phoebus or Apollo 
 was their chiefeft God, and was thus defcribed • he had 
 the Head of a Lion habited according to the Perfian Cu- 
 ftom, wearing on his Head fuch Ornaments as the Wo-; 
 menof jPfr/^ufed, holding by main force a white CoWj 
 by the Horns. 
 
 The Head of the Lion ^yeweth the Suns Dominion in the 
 Sign Leo J the Cow pews the Moon, Twhofe Exaltation is 
 Taurus j and his force Me holding, the Moons Eclipfe, which 
 fhe cannot avoid. 
 
 VI. Paufanias tdkihy that in Patra, a. City of Achaiay 
 a metalline Statue of Apollow^s found in the proportion 
 ofanOxorCow. 
 
 VIL. Lucianus faith, that the Ajfyrians fhaped hirri 
 with a long Beard, (iLewing his perfe6tion ^ upon his 
 Brett a Shield ; in his Right Hand a Spear, in the top 
 of which v/as ViBoria ; in his Left Hand Anthos, or the 
 Sun Flower : this Body was covered with a Veiiment, 
 upon -which was painted the Head ofMedufa, from which 
 dangled downwards many fwarms of Snakes ; on the 
 one fide of him Eagles flying, on the other fide a lively 
 Nymph. 
 
 VIII. ThQ Egyptians compofed the Statue of the Sun ia 
 the fhape of a Man, with his Head half Shaven. 
 
 By the Head half Shaven, is fignified, that though his 
 Beamy or Shining tnay be clouded for a time, yet that he will 
 return and beautifie the fame with his prifiin BrightneJS; as 
 the growing of the Hairs (which fignipe his Beams J to their, 
 fulfextent and perfe^ion a^ain, may denote. 
 
 IX. Martianus thus defcribes him j upon his Head 
 (faith he) he wears a Rwal and Gorgeous Crown, in- 
 chafed with multitudes of precious Gems \ three of which 
 
 jbeau- 
 
35^ PoljgrAphiees. Lib. IV* 
 
 beautifie his Fore-head; (ix his Temples ; and three other 
 thehindermoft part of the Crown : his Hair hanging down 
 in trefTes, looks like refined Gold, and his Countenance 
 wholly like Flame : his Veftment is thin, fubtil, and 
 wrought with fine Purple and Gold ; in liis Right Hand 
 he holds a bright Shield, and in his Left a flaming Fire- 
 brand : on his Feet he hath two Wings, befet with fiery 
 Carbuncles. 
 
 X. Eujehim wniQth, that in Elephantinopolis (a City 
 in Egypt) the Image oi Apollo w^as framed to the due like- 
 nefs of a Man throughout the Body, fave only, that he 
 had the Head of a Ram, with young and fmall Horns, 
 and his Afpe6l of a Cerulean and blcwifh Green, not un- 
 like to that of the Sea. 
 
 The Head of the Ram fignifies the Sum Exaltation in the 
 Sign Aries ; and the young Horns the change or nerv of the 
 Moon, made by her Conjun^ion mth the Sun, in rvhich /he 
 iooks blemfJy. 
 
 XI. He is alfo Drawn with long curled golden Hair, 
 Crowned with a Lawrel, in a purple Robe, a filver Bow 
 in his Hand, fitting on a Throne of Emeralds. 
 
 There might yopt fee mth greatcfl Skill intexed. 
 The Poriraittare of Phoebus lively dravon ; 
 And his fair Sifiers Shape thereto annexed, 
 Whofe fhining parts jeem'd fhadorv'd ore mth Lawn', 
 Arid though mth equal Art both were explaind. 
 And Workme)is care gave each of them their d;tc, 
 Tct to the view great difference retrain d. 
 In Habit ^ Shape, Afpecl, and in their Hue. 
 For one of them muji give the day his light : 
 And th' other reign Commandref of the night. 
 
 CHAP. viir. 
 
 How the Affcients Depicted Venus. 
 
 I. TTT E R Statue is framed in the fhape of a moft beau- 
 
 •'--*• tifiil and young Woman, itinding upright in a 
 
 ?juge Shell of Fiih, drawn by two other moit ugly and 
 
 ftrange Fillies, as Ovul at large noteth. II. Z'^^- 
 
Chap .9. 6f Depicti/igMcTcuxy, 533 
 
 II. Patifanm faith ilie is drawn in a Coach, through 
 the airy paiTages, -^vithtwo white Doves, (a.s Apnlems 2lI- 
 fo affirmeth) which are called the Birds of Venns. 
 
 III. Horace 3.nd firgil affirm, that the Chariot of r>- 
 nus is drawn by t'vvo white Swans, of Avhich Statim alfo 
 iTiaketh mention, w^ho faith that thofe Birds are moft 
 mild, innocent, and harmkfs, and therefof^ given unto 
 Venui, _ ■"■ 
 
 IV. Praxiteles an excellent Engraver in the liland of 
 Gnidos, made her Image Naked, and wathout Cloths, as 
 alfo did the Grecians. 
 
 By Tvhich was fignified, that all LuxurioPM and. Licentious 
 People mere,, hy their inordinate Lufls, like Beafis, depri-ned of 
 Serife, and left, as it tvere. Naked, and defpoiled of Reafon, and. 
 Underflanding ; and oftentimes alfo firipped thereby of their 
 Riches, Goods, and Eflates. 
 
 V. LaUantim faith, that the Lacedemonians framed and 
 compofed the Image di Venus all Armed like a Warrior, 
 holding in oiie hand a Spear, in the other a Shield or 
 Target. 
 
 And this reas hy reafon of a certain ViBory which the Wo^ 
 wen of that Place got over their Enemies, the People o/Mef- 
 fenia, which fnccefs ihey fuppofed to have proceeded from the 
 Poveer and Affifance of Venus, as infpiring thsfe Womens 
 Hearts with Courage, Stout nefs and Refolation. 
 
 VI. She is alfo depi6led with Yellow Hair, attired with 
 Black J a Scarlet, or elfe Dun-coloured Robe. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Horv the Ancients depi^ed Mercury. 
 
 I. "Tp H E Ancients defcribed him in the fhape of a 
 -■• » Young Man without a Beard, with two fmall 
 Wings fixed behind his Shoulders and Ears, his Body al- 
 moft all Naked, fave that from his Shoulders depended 
 a thin Veil, which Avinded and compared about all his 
 Body ', in his Right Hand he held a Golden Purfe, and 
 in his Left a Caducens, or Snaky Staff, to wit, a {lender 
 \Vhite Wand, ab^ut which two Serpents do annodate 
 
 C c and 
 
5 54 Polygraphkes Lib. IV. 
 
 and entwinerthemfelves, whofe Heads meet together juft 
 at the top, as their Tails do at the lower end. 
 
 This rcjemhlc.nce wa.^ called Concordia or Signum Pacis ; 
 upon which it came to pafs, that Amhajfah'ArSj and great 
 Men in matters of St ale ^ carried always in their hand Jnch 
 a hie Staff", and were called Cadiiceators. 
 
 II. Aptilems ymttxh that A^ercury was a very youth, 
 having very l"hort Hair on his Head, of an Amber Co- 
 lour, and Curled, paving for a Vertment only a liibtil 
 and thin Veil made of purple Silk. 
 
 III. Martianm Capella defcribes him young, yet of a 
 ftrong and well compofed Bodj'-, with certain young 
 Hairs, of ayellowini colour sprouting out of his Chin. 
 
 IV". Patifanias faith, that in a Province of Corinth, he 
 was dcpidicd like a young Man carrying a Ram upon his 
 Shoulders : And that a Statue ( brought from Arcadi.i 
 unto Rome ) cre6led in the Temple of Jupiter Olympicus, 
 had on its Head a Helmet of Engraven Steel • and over 
 his Shoulder, a Coat, who held under his Arm the Image 
 of a Ram. 
 
 V. Among fome of the Egyptians his Image was fra- 
 med with a I^cad Jike a Dog's, holding in his Right Hand 
 a Cadticem, or Snaky Wand ; iliaking with his Left a 
 green Bough o'i Palm. 
 
 By the Head of the Do^ was underftood fuhtihy andcraf- 
 ttnefs C no Bcaji bein^ Jofubtil as a Dog ; J by the Sn^ky 
 Wand, the power. of Wifdom and Eloquence in prodncing of 
 Peace, Jimrnificd by the (nreen Palm. 
 
 VI. B\- fome he was depicted in the Similitude of a 
 very aged Man, his Head almoll bald, lave that on the 
 fides there remained lome few Hairs, lliort and curled ; 
 his Looks grim, fevere and fovvre ; his Complexion of a 
 tawny, ancient hue ; his upper Garment, of a Lions 
 skin; in his Right Hand a huge Poll-ax, in his Left 
 Hand an Iron Bow 3 at his Back hanging a Quiver of 
 Stecl-hcadcd Arrows ; to the end of his Tongue were 
 faftned many fmall chains o^ Gold, at whole ends were 
 tied multitudes of all forts of Men, which he fecmed to 
 draw unto him ', looking always backward, to behold 
 the innumerable Troops of People following him. 
 
 By th:s defcription is Jignified the All-pow^rftd and Attra-* 
 ^ive Virttte of EloaMnce ; which by his Age is underfiood :q 
 h( found only in Otd^ Wifcj and ExperioKtd Mm^ oa being 
 
 in 
 
chap. 10. Of DepEiing Diana or Luna 3 j ^ 
 
 in thim more mature and ferfett, than in thofe of younger 
 Tears^ of which Homer /peaks at large in his Commendation 
 and Praife o/Neitor : from mhcfe Mouth C faith he J plen- 
 tifully rolled forth .wojl pleajant and dnlcid Streams ', rphofe 
 Pen difiilled Cryflalline drops of delicious Srxeetnefs j rahofe 
 Wor^s and Fruits fo compleatly adorned with Golden Sen- 
 fences y aJfnvJgeth the malice of Time, and mitigateth and al- 
 layeth the fpight of Forgetfdnefs, that his Perpetuity is In-* 
 graven in the Brafs-leavd Books of Eternal 2\demory^ never 
 , to he Blotted out. ' 
 
 VII. He is alfo drawn with long curled yellow Hair, 
 in a Coat of flame colour, and with a Mantle purely 
 white, triimned with Gold and Silver ; his Beaver white, 
 with white Feathers, his Shoes Golden, his Rod Silver. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Hojv the Ancients depi^ed Diana or Luna.' 
 
 I 
 
 T\Iana, Cynthia, Lucina or Ltina, was, according to 
 *-^ Propertitis, depicted in the likenefs of a young 
 Beautiful Virgin ; having on either fide of her forehead 
 t^vo fmall glirtering horns, newly putting forth, drawn 
 through the Air in a Purple Coloured Coach, b^ two 
 fwift paced Horfes, the one of a Sad Colour, the other of 
 a White. 
 
 Thefe tm differing Horfes, Boccslcc faith, Jherv that Jhe 
 hath power both in the Day and Night. 
 
 II. Claudianus faith, that her Chariot is drawn by two 
 White Bullocks, ( which Image the Egyptians worfhipped 
 with great zeal and reverence) having one of their flanks 
 befpotted with divers Stars, and on their heads two fuch 
 fharp horns as the Moon hath in her chiefeft Wane. 
 
 III. OVfro defcribes her Statue ( which he brought out 
 of a Temple in CiliciaJ of a wonderful height, and large 
 dimenfion, the whole Body covered with a large thin 
 Veil, of a youthful Afpe<ft, holding in her right hand a 
 lively burning Torch, and in her left an Ivory Bow, 
 with a Qjiiver of Silver-headed Arrows Iianging at het 
 back. 
 
 C c 2 IV, The 
 
^l6 Polj>graphices Lib. IV. 
 
 IV. The Poets (who call her the Goddefs of Hunting, 
 and Imperial Govcrnefs of Woods and Groves ) defcribe 
 her in the habit of a young Nymph, Avith her Bow ready 
 bent in her hand, and a Quiver of Arrows hanging by 
 her left fide ; a fwift paced Grey-hound fall tyed to her 
 right fide, with a Collar about his Neck ; and after her 
 followed Troops o^ Sylvan J^irginsy w^hich are Chart, and 
 are called the Nymphs of Diana. 
 
 V. Thefe Virgins and Votrcfies of the Goddefs, are 
 thus, defcribed. 
 
 Scarce mounted Sol upon his glorious Car, 
 When o're the lofty Hills, and lowly Plain^ 
 Running ap.ice yon might perceive afar 
 -A Troop of Amaz,ons to poji amain : 
 But nhen they nearer came unto yo>ir vieiv, 
 Tou might difcern Diana and her Crerv. 
 A carelejs Crejv of lively Nymphs, dcjpifmg 
 The joyous Pleafures and Delights of Love ; 
 Wafiing their Days in Rural Sports dcvifing : 
 which knovc no other, nor mil other prove. 
 Wing'd nith defire to overtake the chafe, 
 Affay they jiung rfith unrcjilied pace. 
 Their Necks and purple Veined Arms arc hare. 
 And from their Ivory Shoulders to their Knee, 
 A Silken Vej}v:ent o're their Skin they ware, 
 Through nhich a piercing Eye might chance to fee. 
 Cloje to their Bodies is the Jamc engiried, 
 Bedeck'd faith plcafin^ fion-ers there injertcd. 
 Each in her Hand a Silver Bow doth hold, 
 IVith -u ell- ft or d Quivers hanging at- their Backs :' 
 Whofe Arroixs being /pent they may be bold 
 To borrow irecly of each others Packs. 
 
 Thns are thefe nimble skipping Nymphs diflday'd, 
 77m do attend that Goddefs, Qneen and Aia'id. 
 
 VI. In Arcadia, faith Paufanias, was a Statue of Diana, 
 covered over with the skin ot a Hind, and from her llioul- 
 ders hung a Quiver of Arrows ; in one Hand a burning 
 Lamp, the other leaning upon the Heads of two Ser- 
 pents, and before her Feet a Hound. 
 
 VII. The Egyptians worlhipped her under the name 
 of IJis f and dcpi(5tured her covered with a Black and 
 
 SabJe 
 
Chap. II. Of DeftCiing Janus. 957 
 
 Sable Veftment, in token that (lie her felf giveth no 
 light ; holding in one hand a Cymbal, in the other an 
 Earthen Vefi'el of Water, upon which, as Servim laith, 
 many thought her to be the Genius of Egypt. 
 
 By the Cymbal is Jhewed the murmurings and roarings of 
 Nilus, If hen it overflows Egypt ; and by the other veJJeJ the 
 nature of the Conntry, which is moijf and fnll of Lakes, Pools 
 and Rivers. 
 
 VIII. She is alfo depided with Yellow Hair, a Grafs 
 Green Mantle, trimmed with Silver ; Buskins Silver ; 
 Bow Golden, Qiiiver of various Colours. 
 
 IX. Nymphte Diana in White Linnen to denote their 
 Virginity, and their Garments girt about them, their 
 Arms and Shoulders naked, Bows in their Hands, and 
 Arrows by their Sides. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 Hotp the Ancients depi^ed Janus, 
 
 I. TAnas is depicted with two Faces ; in. the one of his 
 J Hands is a long Rod or Wand ; in the other a 
 
 Key. 
 
 The two Faces of]a.nusJtgnifie time ; the one being wither- 
 ed and hoary, fJyews time paji, the other Tottthful and Beard- 
 lefs, time to come. 
 
 II. Pliny laith that Numa, King of the Romans, caufed 
 the Statue of Janus to be hewed out in inch fort, that the 
 Fingers of his' Hands appeared to be thiee hundi'ed fixty 
 five, to lliew that he was God of the Year, whereupon 
 they called the firft Month in the Year Januarius, from 
 Janus their God. 
 
 Under the Feet of Janus are oftentimes placed twelve Al- 
 tars, fhemng thereby the A4onths of the Tear, or Signs of the 
 Zodiacl, thro" which Sol males his Revolution. 
 
 III. The Phcemcians, as Cicero and A^acrobius report, 
 framed his Image in the form of a Serpent, holding hec 
 Tail in her Mouth, and continually turning round. 
 
 IV. Some depidied Janus with four Faces, ( as were 
 thofe Statues wjnich were found in divers places oiTuf- 
 £/inj/, Cc 3 By 
 
3 J » Polygyaphices Lib. IV. 
 
 By the four Faces nere fignified the fonr Seajons of the Tear y 
 Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter : which fome think 
 to he Venus, Ceres, Bacchus and Vulcan ; and fometimes 
 the Winds ^rvith Mollis, their Cowr^j and r. 
 
 CHAP. xir. 
 
 How the Ancknts depi^ed Aurora, 
 
 I. TjOmer defcribes her like a young Virgin, having her 
 •*^ Hair dil"hevelled, and hanging loofe about her 
 {houlders, being oFthe colour of the purefi Gold, fitting 
 in a Golden Chair, with all her Veftments of that hue 
 and colour. 
 
 II. ^irgil faith, that upon the inftant time of the Sa- 
 ble Nights departiire, llie coineth with one of her hands 
 full of Rofes, Gilliflowers and Lillies, taken out ofa Bas- 
 ket which fhe carries in the other hand, which fhe be- 
 fpiinkles on the Marble Pavement of the lower Heavens, 
 adorning the Sun with unfpeakablc Beauty. 
 
 III. Others defcribe her, holding in one hand a fla- 
 jning Torch, and drawn in a Gorgeous and Star-befpot- 
 ted Chariot, by winged Pegtufus j whidi favour fhe ob- 
 tained of Jnpiter by many importunate rcqucits, pre- 
 fently after thedownfal of Bellerophon. 
 
 IV. She is as it were the Herald and Meffenger oi' Pha- 
 Iffs, who receives her being from the Virtue of his Beams ; 
 and is no other but that Rubicund and Vermillion blulh 
 in Heaven, which Sol's firit appearance workcth in the 
 Orient, and from thence defccnding, beautifies our Hcmi- 
 Jphere with fiich a rcfplendency. 
 
 V. She is alfo depicted m a purple Robe, in a blue 
 Mantle fring'd with Silver. , 
 
 CHAT. 
 
Chap. I g . Of BepBing Juno. 3 \ 9 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Hov9 the Ancients delisted Juno. 
 
 I. CHE was fet forth by the Ancients like a middle 
 ^ aged Woman holding in one hand a Silver Veffel, 
 in the other a lliarp Spear ; and Homer faith fhe was 
 drawn in a Chariot gliftering with Precious Stones ; 
 whofe Wheels were Ebony, and their Nails fine Silver, 
 mounted upon a Silver Seat ; and drawn with Horfes, 
 which were faftned with Chains of Gold. 
 
 IL She is oftentimes depided with a Scepter in her 
 hand, to fliew that fhe hath the beftowing of Govern- 
 ments, Authorities and Kingdoms. 
 
 III. Martianm depi6ls her ( fitting in a Chair under 
 Jupiter ) with a thin Veil over her Head, with a Coro- 
 net upon it, inchafed and adorned with many Precious 
 Jewels \ her inward Veftment fine and glittering, over 
 which depended a Mantle of a fad darkifh colour, yet 
 with a fecret iLining Beauty ; her Shoes of an obfcure 
 and fable colour r, in her right Hand a Thunderbolt ^ and 
 in her other a loud noifed Cymbal. 
 
 IV. Paufanioi faith that in a Temple in Corinth, her 
 Statue ( made of Gold and Ivory ) was adorned with a 
 glorious Crown, on which was infculped the Pictures of 
 the Graces j with a Pomegranate in the one hand, and a 
 Scepter(on the top of ^vhich was a Cuckow) in the other : 
 for that Jupiter, when he was firft enamoured of Jttno, 
 transformed himfelf into that Bird. 
 
 Torching this Story ( and others of like kind ) Paufanias 
 faith, that althongh he did not believe fuch things to he true, 
 nor any others, which are fo written of the Gods -, yet, faith 
 he, they are not altogether to be reje^ed, in that there were 
 nofpich things, as reported, bm that they were impleated and, 
 filled with Myjieries, and carried in themfelves an inward 
 meaning, and fecret underfiandin^, the which no doubt fome 
 might by their writings have unfhado^ed, if the Tyranny of 
 fore-paffed times had not deflroyed and obliterated the fame. 
 
 V. TertHUian writeth, that in Argos, a City in Greece, 
 the Statue of Juno was covered all over with the boughs 
 
 Cc4 ~ ' of 
 
54© Polygrdfhtces Lib. IV. 
 
 of a Vine, and underneath her Feet lay the skin of a 
 Lion, which difcovered the hatred and difdain llie bare 
 towards Bacchm and Hercules, to whohi ( as the Poets 
 fay) {"he was Step-mother. 
 
 VT. Some have Painted her a middle aged Woman, 
 holding in one Hand a Poppey-flower, or Head : with a 
 Yoke, or pair of Fetters lying at her Feet. 
 
 By the Tohe vfM meant the Band of A^farria^e, which tyeth 
 Alan, and Wife together : And by the Poppey, fruit fnlnejs, or 
 the innumerable ijjfue of Children, nhich are brotight forth 
 into the Worl I C flgnified by the roundnefs of the Poppey heady 
 and its nnmberlefs Seeds therein contained. J From hence ma- 
 ny fuppole her to be the Goddjfs of Marriage, 
 
 VII. She is alfo Painted wnth Black Hair and Eyes, 
 adorned wnth a Sky-coloured Mantle, or Pied j wrought 
 •with Gold and Peacocks Eyes, like the Orient Circles in 
 the Peacocks Train. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 How the Ancients depi^ied. Ops nndTtWrn, 
 
 I. \A Artiantis faith, that Ops ( the Wife o^ Saturn ) is 
 an Old Woman, of great bignefs, continually 
 bringing forth Children, with "whom llie is encompaffed 
 and fet round, going in a Green Veftment, with a Veil 
 over her Body, Ipotted Avith divers cokairs, wrought with 
 infinite curious knots, and fet with all forts of Gems and 
 Metals. 
 
 II. Farro ( out of Boccace ) thus detcribes her : She is 
 Crowned ( faith he) with a Crown infculpt with Ca- 
 illes and Towers ; her Apparel Green, ovcrlhacicd with 
 Boughs ; in the one hand a Scepter, in the other a Ball 
 orGbbc • "and near to hiv a Ch:uiot of four Wheels, 
 drawn by four Lions. 
 
 By the Cro-An is ftgnifcd the IIMtations cf the Earth ; by 
 the Greennf's :ind Bo'.tghs, the Increafe thereof ; by the Scep- 
 ter, the KwgdotT/s and Govenr-Kcnts of the Wolhi; by the 
 Fall, the rojmdnejs thereof : by rhe Chariot, the continual 
 Amotion, Change and Alteration of Things- : by the Lions, the 
 : ■ ^ ' ' WI-!o>n 
 
Chap. 15. Of DepiBing Neptune. 541 
 
 Wifdom and Strength of Mankind, by rshich things tire car- 
 ried on and managed. 
 
 III. Ifidorm faith, that this Goddefs was Painted hold- 
 ing a Key in one of her hands : which fhews, that in the 
 \Vinter the Bowels of the Earth are Locked up by reafon 
 of cold ; which at the approach of Spring and Summer 
 are unlocked again. 
 
 IV. She was I'ometimes depifted in the form of an 
 Ancient Woman, having her Head Circumcindl with 
 Ears of Corn, holding in her hand a Poppey-head ; drawn 
 in a Chariot (as Orpheta faith ) with two fierce and un- 
 tamed Dragons. 
 
 V. The Earth is alfo called Ceres, which many hare 
 depi6led with Torches, Lights and Fire-brands in her 
 Hands ; as Praxiteles in a Temple, feated upon a Pro- 
 montory of Attica. 
 
 VI. She is alfo Pi6lured in a long Green Mantle. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Horv the Ancients depicted Neptune, and the Sea 
 Gods, 
 
 I. 'VT£pm«f among the Ancients is depainted with Ic- 
 -^^ veral Countenances, fometimes with Mild and. 
 Pleafant Looks, ibmetimes with Lowring and Sad, and 
 at other times with a Mad, Furious and Angry Afpecl 5 
 Naked, holding in his Hand a Silver Trident or forked 
 Mace, (landing upright in the Concavity of a great Sea 
 Shell, forcibly drawn by two Monttrous Horfes, which 
 from the middle downwards have the proportion and 
 lliape of Fillies, as Static fiith. 
 
 • That variety of AfpeEts (according to Virgil and Ho- 
 mer ) is given him from the Sea, in that it at Jundry times 
 Jhen-eth it felf fo : And the Trident, the three Gulfs of the 
 Alediterranean Sea. 
 
 II. Som.etimes he is depainted with a thin Veil hang- 
 ing over one oi his Shoulders, of a Cerulean or Blewilh 
 Colour. 
 
 III. Lmanns i^ttQth him down with marvellous Ion? 
 
 Hair 
 
542 Poly^raphices Lib. IV. 
 
 Hair hanging down over his Shouders, of a very Sad and 
 Darkifli Coloui- 
 
 Tet SzxvwxsKini others affirnf, that nil the Gods of the Se.i 
 ttere for the nicjl part in the fhaps of Old Men with White 
 and Hoary Hairs, proceeding from the Froth or Spnme of the 
 Sea. 
 
 IV. Plato defcribes him in a fi.imptuous Chariot, hold- 
 ing in one hand the Reins of a Bridle : in the other a 
 Whip, drawn by Sea-Horfes Galloping. 
 
 V. Adartianas defcribes him of a Greenifh Complexi- 
 on, wearing a White Crown : figniiying thereby the 
 Spume and Froth of the Sea. 
 
 VI. GlaucHs ( another Sea God ) faith Philojiratus, hath 
 a long white Beard and Hair, foft and dropping about 
 his Shoulders, his Eyes green and gliftering ; his Brows 
 fiill of wrinkle?, and green fpots ; his Brefl: all over- 
 grown with greenifh Sea-weed, or Mofs, his Belly, and 
 from thence downwards, Fil"h-like, full of Fins and Scales. 
 
 VII. Galatea ( a Se;a Goddefs ) is defcribed ( by the 
 faid Philolirattis ) to be drawn in a ftrange framed Cha- 
 itot, by tAvo mighty Dolphins, which were guided by 
 two Silver Reins held in the hands of old Tritons daugh- 
 ters ; over her head, a Canopy made of Purple, Silk, and 
 Silver, with her Hair hanging careleQy over her Shoul- 
 ders. See her defcribed oi a JMymph^ Chap. 32. Se^l.y. 
 
 VIII. Oceanus, ( the Father of all the Sea Gods ) faith 
 Thales Milffiiu, is depainted, drawn on a glorious Cha- 
 riot, accompanied and attended with a mighty company 
 cf Nymphs ; with tlie Face of an Old Man, and a long 
 white Beard. 
 
 IX. <t/£oliis is depainted with f^voln blub Cheeks, like 
 one tJKit with main force fliives to blow a blaft ; two 
 final I Wings upon his Shoulders, and a fiery high Coun- 
 tenance. 
 
 He is called the God and Ruler of the Winds, whofe dejcri- 
 fticns are in Chap. 34. of this Book. 
 
 X. Thetis ( another Sea Goddef ) is dcpidled by the 
 fixth Sedion of the t^vo and tliiitieth Chapter ol this 
 Book. 
 
 XL Neptune is alfo dcpi6led with long hoary Hair, in a 
 Blue or Sea-green Mantle trimmed with Silver, riding in 
 a Blue Chariot, or on a Dolphin of Brown Black Colour, 
 With a Silver Trident in liis liand. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 1 6. Of Defining Nemefis. 545 
 
 CHAP. xvr. 
 
 How the Ancients dep0ed Nemefis. 
 
 I. C H E was by Macrohius defcribed with Wings Ofi 
 _ her Shoulders ; hard by her fide the Rudder of a 
 Ship, iTie her lelf ftanding upright upon a round Wheel ; 
 holding in her Right Hand a Golden Ball, in the other 
 a Whip. 
 
 II. She is often depided, holding a Bridle of an Horfe 
 in one hand, and in the other a Staff. 
 
 III. Chryfippm ( as Aulns Ge'lllm faith ) defcribes her 
 like a young Virgin, beautiful and modeft, with an Eye 
 prying round about her, for which caufe the Ancients 
 called her the all difcerning Lady. 
 
 Th'u Nemefis, as Paufanias and, Ammianus Marcel- 
 linusy^^, ^904 held to he the GoMejl of PHnijJmiems^ tvho ca- 
 ftigates the offences ofAfalefa^ors, mith Pains and Torments 
 according to their Sins and Demerits • and Rewarding the 
 VertHom mth Honour and Dignities : She was the Daughter 
 of Jufiitia C i^ho dwells and inhabits very fecretly within the 
 HoPife of Eternity J recording the offences of the wicked J and 
 a mofi fever e and cruel pimifher of arrogancy and vain-glory. 
 Macrobius faith, that this Nemefis was adored among the 
 Egyptians (hy them called alfo Rhamnufia ) as the reven- 
 ger and chief Enemy of Pride, Infolency, and Haughtinefs ; 
 and that fhe had eretl and dedicated unto her; a mofi [lately 
 and magni^ck Statue of Marble. 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 How the Ancients deputed Pan. 
 
 l.'OAN (the God of Flocks and Sheep) is from the 
 ■*■ middle upwards in proportion like a Man, with 
 his Face ruddy and fanguine, being very hairy -, his Skin 
 and Breft covered with the Skin of a fpotted Dos or Leo- 
 nard i 
 
^44 Folygraphicts Lib. I V. 
 
 pard ; in the one hand q Shepherds Hook, in the other a 
 Whiftle : from the middle downwards the perfect lliape 
 of a Goat, in Thighs, Legs and Feet. 
 
 II. jf(ij}inc fiiith, that Pan's Stauie was made in a Tem- 
 ple in Rome, near the HiU Palatine^ appearing to the view 
 all Naked, laving that it was flightly enlliadowed and 
 covered with a Goats Skin. 
 
 Thereby is fignifieA that ( as it vpoi reputed in thofe Days J 
 Pan kept his habitation a?r,(mg Hills, Woods and Groves, rtho 
 vpas indeed mcfi of any Adored and Worfhipped by Shepherds, as 
 he that had the peculiar Care and Government of their Flocks. 
 
 III. Goat-ear d Va.n, his [wall tipt nem grown horns 
 Advance then; [elves, about rfhofe cither fide 
 
 A fioyf'ry Garland twines, and there adorns 
 His curled Temples rtith a wonA'roin Pride. 
 His Face is of a hiirh and reddi'h blufh. 
 From nhich hangs donn a ft iff roiigh Beard or buJJ?^ 
 And for his Bodies ve(lnre he doth wear 
 The fine/} skin of the mcj} J potted Doe, 
 That ever any in thofe Woods did bear. 
 Which from his Sho'dder loofe hangs to his Toe. 
 And when he r^alks, he carries in his hand 
 A Sl^cpherds Hooky made of a knotlefs Wand. 
 
 ServiHs £iith, by the horns is fignificd either the Beams 
 of the Sun, or New of the Moon, at what time llie is 
 Horned : his red Face fignifies the Element of Fire : his 
 long Beard, the Air : Ids Ipotted Garment, the Starry 
 Firmament : his Shepherds Hook, the Rule and Govern- 
 ment of Nature. 
 
 I v. After the form of Pan were the 'Fams, SylvanSy 
 Satyrs and Fairies fet forth, having little Jliort horns grow- 
 irj|i on their heads, with linall ears and lliort tails. 
 
 Thcfe are held among fome people in very great rez^ard and 
 chfervance, being o'^a wonderful f peed in running. Plutarch 
 vritethj that there nxs one of thefe bro-Aght and prefented for 
 4 rare zift unto S)[[a., as he returned from the Wars againfi 
 Mithridates. 
 
 V. Pla'to underftandeth by Pan, Rcafon and Know- 
 ledge ; which is twofold ; the one of ,1 Man, the other of 
 a Beaft ; by the upper pait of Pan, he iignifics Truth, ac- 
 companied with Keafon, which being Divine, lifteth Man 
 
 up 
 
Chap. 18. Of Dtf'iBing Pluto- ^4 5 
 
 up towards Heaven : by the lower parts of him is ugni- 
 fied the Fallenels, BeafUinefs and Rudenefsof thofe, who 
 living herein the World, are only delighted with the 
 Pleaiiires and Foolilli Vanities thereof. 
 
 CHAP. XVIIL 
 
 How the Ancknts de^iSied Pluto, 
 
 I. \/lArtianm faith, that Pluto fitteth ( in the lower Re- 
 ^^^ gion ) Majefiically in a Chair, holding in one of 
 his Hands a black Imperial Scepter, and on his Head a 
 ilately Crown ; at whofe Left Hand fitteth his WifePro- 
 Jerpina, attended with many Furies, and Evil Spirits, and 
 at whofe Feet lieth chained the Dog Cerherm, 
 
 II. The Ancients alfo hav^e painted him in a Chariot, 
 drawn with four iurious black Horfes, from whofe 
 fiery Noftrils proceedeth thick and ill-favoured Smoak, as 
 Claudianus faith. 
 
 III. Some lay, that his Head is encircled with a Gar- 
 land o^Cyprefs leaves ; others with Narcijfm leaves. 
 
 The firfi p:>ew Sadnefs and Horrour, afed in Burials, and 
 ahom the Dead : the other more grateful, and are ujed in 
 memory of the untimely Death of that Touth. 
 
 ' IV. Charon C Pluto's Ferriman, w^hich carries Souls over 
 the three Rivers of Hell, Acheron, Cocytm, and Styx J is 
 defcribed old, yet exceeding ihong, with a black Mantle 
 hanging loolely over his Shoulders, as Boccace and Servius 
 lay. 
 
 By Charon f; under jiood time ; and whereas he is fuppofed 
 to have the tranfportation of Souls from the one fide of thofe 
 Rivers to the other ^ thereby is jlgnified, that time,Jofoon asji't 
 are born and brought forth into the World, doth carry us along 
 ly little and little unto our deaths ; and Jo fetteth us over thoje 
 Rivers, mhofe names, by interpretation, fignifie Sorrovpfulnsjs^ 
 for that vpepajs this Life rpith Adifery and Adverfity. 
 
 V. He is alfo depiaed with long'^urls^t black Hair ] in 
 a Robe of Cloth of Geld, 
 
 CHAP. 
 
54<5 Folygrafhices Lib. IV. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 UoTiV the Ancients Depi^ed the Parcae, or Siflers, 
 
 I. 'T^ H E Sirters, ivhich are called Parcdj are faid to at- 
 -■- tend upon Pluto, which are three, and are called 
 ClothOf Lache/is and Atropos. 
 
 II. Clotho takes the charge of the Births and Nativi- 
 ties of Mortals : Lache/is of all the rell of their Life ; and 
 Atropos of their Death, or Departure out of this World. 
 
 III. They arc all three depicted fitting on a row, very 
 bufily employed in their leveral Offices ; the youngelt 
 Sifter drawing out of a Diltaff a reafonable big Thread : 
 the lecond winding it about a Wheel, and turning the 
 lame, till it becomes little and flender : the eldeft (which 
 is Aged and Decrepit) ttood ready with her Knife, when 
 it lliould be Spun, to cut it off. 
 
 IV. And they are defcribed to be inverted with white 
 Veils, and little Coronets on their Heads, wreathed a- 
 bout with Garlands made of Flowers of NarcijJHi. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 How the Ancients Depi^ed Minerva, or Pallas. 
 
 1. \Alnerva, (as taken for Bcllona) as Licophrones faith, 
 ^^ was depided with a flaming Fire-brand in her 
 Hand by the Ancients- 
 
 II. Molt Writers have defcribed Minerva in the fhape 
 of a young Woman, o^ a lively and.frci"h Countenance, 
 yet of an angry look, fix'd Itcdfaft Eye, of a blcwilh green 
 colour, complcatly armed at all Weapons, with a long 
 Spear in the on9 Hand, and in the other a Cryftal Shield, 
 or Target : upon her Helmet a Garland of Olive Branch- 
 es, and two Children, Fear and Horror by her fide, with 
 naked Knives in their Hands, fveming to tlireatcn one 
 another. 
 
 III. Pati- 
 
Chap. 21. Of Dep^ing Vulcan. 547 
 
 III. PaHJanlu faith, that in Greece the Statue oi Mi- 
 nerva was made with 2.n Helmet, on the top of which 
 was the Shape of a Sfhynx; and on the fides thereof two 
 Can'^ed Grifjins. ' , 
 
 IV. Phidias making her Statue in Greece, placed on 
 the top of her Hehnet the form of a Cock. 
 
 V. She was alfo painted in Greece, fitting on a Stool, 
 and drawing forth little fmali Threads from a Diftaff ; 
 for that the Ancients fuppofed her to be the Inventreis 
 of Spinning, and the like. 
 
 VI. Lajily, She is depidled with a blew Mantle Em- 
 broidered with Silver: and is called the Goddefs of 
 Wifdom. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 How the Ancients Depi^ed Vulcan. 
 
 I. 'VT^lcan is depifted ftanding, working and hammer- , 
 
 y ing in a Smiths Forge, on the Hill (L/Etna, fra- 
 ming Thunderbols for J«/7iffr,and fafhioning Arrows 'for 
 the God of Love. The Opinions rvhich the Ancients had of 
 Vulcan vpere varioti^, in nhich refpeU he iajhaped Jome times 
 in one form^ fome times in another- 
 
 ' II. Some make him Lame of one Leg, of a very black 
 and fwarthy Complexion, as it were all fmxoaky ; of a 
 general ill iLaped proportion in all his Lineaments ; and 
 becaufe that he is the Husband of Venus , often depidlure 
 her with him. 
 
 III. Alexander Neapolitanu5Xt\2ittthj that in one place 
 o^ Egypt was ereded the Statue c£ Vulcan, which held in 
 one of its Hands the true and lively Proportion of a Mole, 
 and in his other Hand a Thunderbolt. 
 
 The Mole mas fo placed, hecatife they thought he fsnt nn- 
 fpeakahle numhers of Moles among them, as a Plague to them^ 
 Tvhich did eat, gnaw and dejiroy every thing -which tsm * 
 good. 
 
 IV. . He is alfo paiijted Lame ija a Scarlet Robe. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
J48 Polygraphiees. Lib. IV. 
 
 CHAP. xxir. 
 
 How the Ancients Depicted Bacchus. 
 
 J.T^Hilofrratiti faith, that his Statue was framed in the 
 -*- likenefs of a young Man without a Beard, of a cor- 
 pulent and grofs Body, his Face of an high colour and 
 big; about his Head a Garland of Ivy Leaves; upon his 
 Temples two fmall Horns; and dole by his Side a cer- 
 tain Bea(t, called a Leopard or Panther. 
 
 This Defcription is dn^^rtn from the nature of Win*, ((*[ 
 Tfhichj oi the Poets feign, Bacchus is the God) vehofc Inven- 
 ter and Finder ottt rvai certainly Noah, vchich not only Mofes, 
 hut alfo Jolephus rt«r/ Ladlantius Ipecially affirm ; veherefore 
 fame fuppofe him to be this God Bacchus. 
 
 II. Clandianus faith, that his Image or Statue is mad\s 
 all naked ; thereby iTiewing the Nakednefs orthofe which 
 abufe thcmfelves with Wine, by which they reveal and 
 open thofe things which ought to be concealed and kept 
 hid. 
 
 III. Diodornf Siculm faith, that B^dms among the 
 Grecians was depid^cd in two fcveral forms, the one of a 
 very aged Man, with a long Beard, (lift" and thick, the 
 other of youthtul year?, of a pleaiant and amorous Af- 
 pecl:. 
 
 By fhe firjl is flxned the (ffe^Ts of the intemperate life of 
 Wine, rdoich overcQ-mci Natsire, and brings with it old Age : 
 hy the other, hoiv it Cherijlxs and Revives the Heart, ttfcd 
 Tnoderately. 
 
 IV. Aiacrohisis f lith, that Bacchus Avas framed fome- 
 times in the likenefs ot a young Child, Ibmetimcs of a 
 Youth, Ibmetimes of a Man ; and lometimes in the like- 
 nefs of decrepit old Age. 
 
 By theje was fignified the four Seafons of the Year, the Vine 
 "being dedicated to Sol, in whom they all exijl. 
 
 V. This Piflure was made m the likenefs of a Br.ll, 
 among the Cyrenians, (a People Inhabiting the farther 
 part of Perfu.J 
 
 The reafon hereof yeas, becaufe Profeypina (^r/;^ Danghter 
 cf love") iroHzht him forth in that form, 
 
 ^ WhPhik^ 
 
Chap.2.j. Of Dep/c^wg fortune. 549 
 
 VI. Philojhatus Ikith, that Bacchus was oftentimes 
 drawn cloathed in Womens Garments, and in a long 
 purple Robe ; wearing upon his Head a Coronet of Rofes, 
 with Companions and Followers, all of them in like 
 loofe and wanton Garments, falliioning themfelves fome 
 like Rural Nymphs^ as the Dryadcs, Oreades, &"c. fome 
 like Sea Nymphs, as the Nereides^ Syrens., &c. Ibme like 
 Satyres, Fauns and Sylvans, &c. 
 
 The Womens Garments Jhere, that Wine males a Man 
 Taint, Feeble and Unconjiant, like to a Woman. 
 
 VII. Paufanias faith, that among the Eleans, the Pi- 
 6lure of Bacchus was made with a long Beard, and 
 cloathed with a long Gown hanging to the Feet ; in one 
 Hand a fharp Hook, and in the other a Bowl of Wine, 
 and round about him many Vine-trees and other fruitful 
 Plants. 
 
 VIII. The Statue of Bacchus alfo Avas fometimes fet 
 forth and adorned with Coronets made of Fig-tree Leaves, 
 in Memory of a Nymph (as fome fay) called Pfyche,-w\n.Qh. 
 was by the Gods Metamorphofed into that Plant. 
 
 In like manner the Nymph Staphilis (on whom Bacchus 
 rtas alfo Enamoured) mas Transformed into the P^ine, from 
 Tuhence it is that thofe Plants are fo exceeding grateful and 
 pleafant unto this God. 
 
 IX. He is painted alfo with iliort brown curled Hair, 
 with a Leopards Skin, or in a green Mantle, a tawny 
 Face, with a Wreath of Vine Branches. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Horp the Ancients Depi^ed Fortune. 
 
 I. T^Ortune was depided by fome -^vith two Faces, one 
 ^ white and well-favoured; the other black and- 
 ugly. 
 
 And this was, hecaitfe it was held, that there were two For- 
 tunes, the one good, from whom came Riches, Happineji, 
 Quiet, Content and Pleafure : the other had, from whom came 
 Wars, AffliEiions, Crops, Vifafiers, CdamitieSj and all o- 
 therMiJeries rphatfoevtr' 
 
 P4 H. The 
 
^S'o Polygraphkes -Lib. IV. 
 
 II. The Thehcam wmi'Xq. her in the Hiapeof a Woman ; 
 in one of her Hands a young Child, to wii, Plmo or 
 Riches. 
 
 • So thr.r in the H.inds of Fortune, they put the difpofing of 
 We.^l hy Hosv^ur, Glory ^ and dl Hiippmcjfes. 
 
 III. Ad,irilnnm dclcribes her a youno; Woman, al- 
 wa5's moving; covered with a Garment of the thinned 
 Silk; her ftcps uncertain, never refting long in a place; 
 carrying in hcrlpacious Lap the univerfaf fulnels ot" the 
 Trcafurce, rs.iches, Honour and Glory of this World ,- 
 which in lia{}:y nianner (with her Hand)"llie offers; which 
 Qfler, if not infbntly received, m-rs utterly loll; in her 
 Right Hand a white Wand, with which ilie finitcs iiich 
 as Offend her, flight her Kindnefs, or are not nimble 
 enough to receive them. An old Poet thus fung : 
 
 Oh cruel Fortune, S.epdame to all Joys, 
 That difmhcrit'li m frofv fneet Content, 
 PhmginF^ onr Hopes ih troubled Seas annoys j 
 D'pnvw2^ f!\ of that rvlrch Nature lent! 
 When will thy proud ipfdting HmnoHr ceafe, 
 T' alfwnge tl?e Sorrows of an only one? 
 Thai free from care, its Soul may live, in peace, 
 j^nd not be Adetan'orphos'd into Sione. 
 But nhy entreat I thy un (table Heart, 
 Kr.oning thy gre^te]} Phafure, thy Delight 
 Cunfifts in aggravating Agonal s jhtart 
 Poijond niih Woes, by l^enoM of thy Spi^ht f 
 'Tis what thou nih, wufl Hand, tlyerefl wufl falL 
 All Hsn-ane things pay Tribute to thy A-^igh: : 
 And this mu^ i'ij'c, 7vhen pUafcrh'thec to call. 
 The Oiloer Perifh in a noeful Plight. 
 And this is it, that chokes true Virttus Breath., 
 Aiahng it Die, th'oUgh fhe ImK/nrtal be: 
 Friiitleji it mahs it ', fubjeci: unto Death, 
 To fatal Darkncft^ where no Eye can fee. 
 Oh come yon mounded Souls, conjoin mth n;e j 
 In fome adnr^ibraie Thicket let us dwell. 
 Some place n-hich yet the Heavens ne'r did fee, 
 There let ns bttild Jome defpicable Cell. 
 
 Strength, Beauty perifh : Honours fy an'ay : 
 And T^iih Efrates, Friends vanijh and decay. 
 
 IV. In 
 
chap. 2 J. Of DefiBing Fortune* 351 
 
 IV. In a Temple in Greece^ Fortune Avas made in tlie 
 form of a grave Matron, clothed in a Garment agreeable 
 to fuch Years, whoie coimrenance leenied very lad ,• be- 
 fore her was placed the Image of a young Virgin of a 
 beauteous and pleafant Alpe6t, holding out her hand to 
 another j behind thele, the Image of a young Child, lean- 
 ing with one of of its Arms upon the Matron. 
 
 The Adatron is that Forttme, nhich is already paji ; the 
 young P^iigin, that ivhich now is j and the youngChild beyond 
 them bothy is that which is to come. 
 
 V. Qitintm Cnrtins laith, that among the people of 
 Scythia, Fortune was depicf ed in the form of a Woman 
 without feet, having round about her at her right hand 
 a number of little Wings. 
 
 VI. Alexander Neapoliianm relateth, that in Greece, 
 her Image was made Avhoily of Glafs ; to fhew that her 
 favours are brittle, and lubjcil to fudden decays. 
 
 VII. Cehcs the Philofopher refembled Fortune unto a 
 Comedy, in which many Aclors appear ofter, a^ Kings 
 and great Monarchs ; and prefently after become poor 
 Filliermen, Slaves, Bond-men, and die like. 
 
 VIII. Socrates compared her to a Theatre, or Com- 
 mon Meeting Place, where without all Order or Obfer- 
 vance Men take their Places and Seats, without reipe6t 
 to the Dignity of any. 
 
 Hereby is fheived^that [he C withoftt refpeB of birth, -worth, 
 merit or jiate,) blindly, unadvifedy, and mthout any order or 
 reafon, bejhrvs felicities, riches and fa'TJOurs. 
 
 IX. In Egira, 3. City of Achaia,, Forttme W2is drayvn 
 in the iliape of a Beautiflil Woman, who held in one of 
 her hands a Cornucopia ; in the other, the Boy Cupid, 
 
 By Tvhich is jignified C ^ Paufanias jaith ) that Beauty 
 rc'ithout Riches avails nothing j and indeed I may jay he is 
 douhly fortunate, mho in his Love enjoys the fruition of both 
 Beauy and Riches : bat he is happy in the Superlative Degree, 
 v^tjo, with the other tmo. meets vpith Virtue and Love aljo. 
 
 X. Giraldpu faith, that Fortune was %vith fome depi- 
 cted riding on a Horfe galloping 3 with vsrhich fwiftnels 
 ihe feems to pafs invifible, after whom followeth Defli-^ 
 ny with great wrath and fury, holding in her hand aa 
 Iron Bow, and aiming to ftrike Fortune at the heart. 
 
 By her jviift galkping, is fignified her mutability. See Se^c, 4. 
 CI^p. 2§, vphersfhe i7tahnfor one of the Porvers. 
 
 Dd2 CHAP. 
 
^52 Folygrafhices Lib. IV. 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 How Vertue, Truth, Peace, Honour, Fame and 
 Opinion, were depi^ed, 
 
 I. XTErtfie in Greece was made in the form of a Pilgrim^ 
 ^ like a grave and aultere Woman ; fitting alone 
 upon a four Iquared Stone, MelanchoUy, and leaning 
 her Head upon her Knees. 
 
 Being A Pi I grimy fhews Jl^e hath no refiing pi ace, fecure 
 abode, or certain habitation upon the Earth : the form of her 
 fitting, fhevps her life to be full of troubles, dangers, croffes. 
 And mijeries, See Se6l. i. Chap. 30. of thts Book. 
 
 Hsc angiifta via horrendis fcatet undique monftris, 
 Et vita innumeris eit interclufa periclis. 
 Sed tamen incolumes hac virtus ducit ahunnos, 
 Extrema ut vitent, ne pes hinc inde vacillet. 
 Proclamat longe fpes, hic limt digna laboris 
 PrtEmia, & excipient mordaces gaudia curas. 
 Pax, fiiiecra quies nullo temeranda dolore, 
 Lstitia hic, habitant Ion gum, fine fine, per scnim*. 
 
 Fierce Aionflcrs do this narrow paffage bonnd, 
 yind deadly dangers it encompaji round. 
 Tet VertHc doth her FoHon-ers fafely guide, 
 Lefi they Jhould go afiray on cither fide. 
 And Hope proclaims afar ; lo here you P^all 
 Hime Joy for Sorrovo ; Honey for your Gall. 
 Here Peace and Joyful Reft for ever dwelL 
 Which neither Crufs nor time fl^all ever quell. 
 
 II. Truth, faith Hippocrates, was framed in the fimiii- 
 tude arid likenefs of a BeautifiU Woman, attired with 
 Gravity and Modefty : Philofiratmid^wh that {[\q. remain- 
 cth in the Cave o\Amphiarus, clothed all in white Gar- 
 ments of a Beautiiiil hue : Lucianns faith, that her Sta- 
 tue was made in the form of a young Woman, habi- 
 ted in rags, and bale attire, with a Superfcription over 
 her Hud, how {be was vtp^onged and ahtfed by Fortune. 
 
 III. Peace, 
 
 I 
 
Chap. 25. Of kftding Silence y Sleep fi^c : ^55 
 
 III. Peacey faith Arifiophanes^ was framed in the ihape 
 of a young Woman, holding between her Arms the In- 
 fant Plmoy tlie God of Riches, and Ruler of the lower 
 Regions. 
 
 Shs is alfo called Concordia, and is afpecial friend to the 
 Goddefs Ceres, from nvhom comes the encreafe of Frmts, Corny 
 and othernntriments . ^f^Chap. 28. Se6l.4. 
 
 IV. Hononr is depicted with two Wings on its Shoul- 
 ders ; which, as Alciams faith, was made in the form of 
 a little Child, clothed in a purple Garment, having a 
 Coronet or Wreath of Laurel about his Head -, holdmg 
 hand in hand the God Cnjiid, who leads the Child to 
 the Goddefs Venue y which is depainted right over againft 
 it. 
 
 V. Fame is Painted like a Lady, with great Wings,!' 
 and feeming to proffer a flight, and to mount from the 
 Earthy and rove abroad : having her Face full of Eyes ; 
 and all over her Garments an infinite number of Ears 
 and Tongues. See the XXI. Se^ion of the twenty ninth 
 Chapter of this BooL 
 
 VI. Opinion, faith Hippocrates, refembles a young Wo- 
 man, not altogether fo fair and lovely as Truth, yet not 
 deformed, or ill proportioned ; being rather impudent 
 than modeftly bold in her demeanour, with her hand 
 ftretched forth to take whatfoever is offered and prefien- 
 ted to her. 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 How Night, Sleep, Silence, Pleafure and Fear^ 
 mre depicted, 
 
 !• "^^/j^ ( the Mother of Sleep and Death ) was depi- 
 "^^ ded by the Ancients in form of an old Woman, 
 having two great Wings growing on her fhoulders, alt 
 coal black, and fpread abroad, as if Ihe feemed to offer 
 a flight ; and that ihe is cbrawn in a Chariot, whoic 
 Wheels are made of Ebony : having a fad Countenance, 
 and an upper Garment oi a deep black, fpotted all ovef 
 with Silver ipots like Stars, as Boccm ikith ^ 
 
 Dd 3 She 
 
 \ 
 
J 54 Folygraphices Lib. IV. 
 
 She is alfo dep'iBed like an old Wowm in a black Alamle, 
 f potted mth Stars of GoU. 
 
 II. Sleep, ( the Brother of Death) faith Hefioiy was Pain- 
 ted of a moft fowre, Icnvringandfid Afpcd; a^ed, and 
 holding in her left hand a young Child, very beautiful ; 
 aixi in her right, another Child, of a mod fwartliy, black 
 and dull Complexion, with Legs and Anns very crooked. 
 Philojirattis in a Tablet ( ivhich he made for Ar^whiarm) 
 makes her like an aged Woman, flothful and lluggilli, 
 clotheii with feveral Ciaiments, the imder black, the up- 
 per white, holding in on€ of her hands, a Horn, pouring 
 forth Seed. 
 
 By th Garment is fignified Nisrht and Day ; hy the Seedy 
 Ref}[ Eai^and Q;iiet. 
 
 III. Harpocrates ( thcGodoi Silence ) called in Grcel; 
 Sigtrleor-, was made, as Martia/im and yiptileim fay, in 
 likenei. of a young ChiKi, who cloie to his Lips l^eld 
 oue of his Fingers, as a fign of Secrecy. Some pourtrAict 
 him -without any Pace at all ; all covered with the ?kin 
 oi a Wolf, painted full of Eyes and Ears: 
 
 Shemng it to be good to See and Hear much, but to [peak 
 litcle. 
 
 IV. Voh4pti4 or Pleafure, was depainted a Lady, ha- 
 ving a pale and lean Countenance, fitting in a Ponti- 
 fical and Maieftick Chair, Embroidered and EmbolTed 
 with Stars of Gold, Treading and Trampling upon 
 Vertue. 
 
 V. Fear, faith Paufanitu, -^vfts fliaped in feveral forms 
 by the Ancients 5 fometimcs with the Head of a Lion 
 among the Grecians ( as on the Shield of Agamemnon : J 
 and fometimes with the deformed Face and Body of a 
 Woman. 
 
 77;f Corinthians dedicated this PiElure fo made Mnio the 
 Sons cf Medea j which mere fain for bringing J:tch fatal 
 gifts to the Daughter of old Crcon, whereby f>e, and all 
 thai; Regal Family perijhed, and were for ever Extin^. 
 
 CH A P. 
 
Chap.26. Afitcknts depii^.Wifenten^^c. 5155 
 
 CHAP. XXVL 
 
 How the Ancients depiCied fever alWifemen^ Fhi- 
 lojophers, LarvgiverSj Emperonrsy KJngs and 
 Queens, 
 
 I. Qldonitis Apoll'mmus in the ninth Epiille of his ninth 
 ^ Book, faith, that the Philofopher Zettfi^^itf-is was 
 Painted with a crooked Neck : Arams with a Neck 
 bowed downwards : Zcno with a wrinkled Forehead. 
 
 II. ■ Epicurus was painted with a fmooth skin : Dio- 
 
 fenes with a hairy rough Beard : Socrates with whitilli 
 fi^ht Hair. 
 
 III. Arijhtle was paintel with a ftretched out Arm ; 
 .Zf^^o^r.^^^ with a Leg fomewhat gathered up : Hemcli- 
 tHs, his Eyes lliut with crving. 
 
 IV. DemocritHs with his Lips open, as Laughing; Chry- 
 ftppus with his Fingers clofe prelfed together, for num- 
 bering : Epiclid with his Fingers put afundcr, for the fpace 
 of meafurcs. 
 
 v. In fbme ancient Bibles, and many Piilures yX/c)' 
 fes is deicribed with horns. 
 
 " The ground of this abfurdity was a mirtake of the 
 " HehrCiV Text, in that of Alofes defcending from the 
 "Mount, upon the nearnefs of the words, \^p Keren^ 
 " CornMy an horn, and pp Karan, Lmcco, to ihine. The 
 *' vulgar Tranflation ( oi Exodus -^i^. 29. 35. ) agrees with 
 *' the tormer, to wit 5 Jgnorahat qubd cornuta e/fet fades 
 " ej:is. Qsii videhant faciem Mofjs e([c comrnkm. The 
 *' Tranflation of Paulas Fagiiis is otherwife, vl<>. Mofes 
 ** nefciebat qabd mulms ejfct fplendor gloria vahjts ejns. Ec 
 '^ viAernnt plii Ifrael, cjmd nitdta ejfet claritas gloria faciei 
 *' Molis. TremeVms and Junius have it thus, Ut ignoraret 
 *' Mofche fplendidam ejfe faEtam cutem faciei fpta. Quod 
 *^fplendida faBa effet cutis faciei Mofchis : agreeing with 
 '* the Septuagint, AJi%dtseu » ^o-^n t* x?*5«^7®" tb -s-^irotri^, 
 '* glorificatus efi afpetim cutis feu colons faciei. 
 
 VI. But Mojes is generally depi(5ted with bright Hair, 
 a very beautiful Vifage, with radiant Scintillations about 
 his Head, in form of HoarinelSj which in Painting is 
 called Glory. Dd 4 YIL^Mv« 
 
^$6 Polygraphlces Lib. IV. 
 
 VIT. Alex.inder the (jreat, "vvith brown Hair, and a 
 ruddy Complexion, riding upon his Horfe ; but by fome 
 riding upon an Elq:>hant. 
 
 The re (if on of thfs t6 hard to he difcerned j for at much m 
 J find not in Hijiory^ that ever he ufed that beafi in hi^ Ar- 
 mies^ much lejs in his own Pcrfon : except it were for that 
 remarkable haitel which he foa^ht rcith Porus Kinz of India, 
 7f herein re ere n^any Elephants: In rvhich himjetf C ^ti Cur- 
 tius, Arianus and Plutarch relate ) tpo^ on Horfeback, the 
 name of which Beafi yet lives^ and is famous in Hifiory to 
 this di'^ 
 
 VIlT. Numa Pompilitis -with white Hair Crowned with 
 a Silver Bend or Diadem • his Robe Crimfon, trimmed 
 •with Gold; his Mantle Yellow, trimmed with Silver 3 
 his Buskins Watchet and Silver. 
 
 IX. ey£ncas the Trojan Prince in a Purple Mantle 
 trimmed with Ciold. 
 
 X. David (the King oflfraelj with Brown Hair, a 
 ruddy Complexion, and a long Beard. 
 
 XI. Elizabeth Queen of England, pale Faced, light 
 bro\vn Hair, and gray Ey'd. 
 
 'XII. Dido Queen of Carthage in a Purple or Scarlet 
 Mantle, her Under-garments Purple ; a Golden Qui- 
 ver ; Hair Yellow, tyed up with Spangles and Knots of 
 Gold. 
 
 XIII. GuJiavHs Adolphw King oi Sweden with Yellow 
 Hair. 
 
 XIV. Adahomet the Turh great Prophet in Garments 
 all of Green. 
 
 XV. German Emperours in a Violet-coloured Robe, 
 Watchet, or Light-coloured. 
 
 XVI. Roman Ewperonrs, with Yellow Carrufliers Em- 
 broidered with Silver ; the Labels of their Sleeves, and 
 fliort Bafes of Watchet ; the under Sleeves, and long 
 Stockings White ; a Laurel Wreath, with a Silver Jewel 
 before : and Rays of Gold ifliim^ from the Wreath. 
 
 XVil. Pyi.ha"or/is in White Garments with a Crown 
 ofGold. 
 
 XVIII. Empedoclesy in Violet, Murry, or Purple, and 
 fogeiurally the rell 01 thcGrccian Philofophers. 
 
 XIX. Erajmiu Roterdamusy Ycilow Hair'd, gray Ej^'d, 
 and fomewhct Pale. 
 
 XX. The 
 
Chap. 27. Pahting of the Sibyls, ^^j 
 
 XX. The Virgin Mary is commonly reprefented in 
 Purple and Azure : John the Evangelifi in Scarlet : John. 
 Baptifi in a Hairy Mantle : The refi of the Apojiles, in 
 Green or Crimion, 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 The Fainthg of the Sibyls, 
 
 T, Qlbylla Agrippina, a Woman in Years, in a Rofeal 
 *^ Garment. She is by divers Authors called ^A-]^yt)- 
 tica. Said as writes, that llie Prophefied m'^y£gjpt in the 
 days of Pharaoh : She Prophefied thus, That hands Jhptild 
 he laid on the invifible Word, his Beamy fhall not appear, hin 
 Mothers Womb JJpoil encloje him, and He C '^ho is Eternal 
 Joy) jhall Weep. 
 
 II. Sibylla Libyca, an Elderly V/oman, Crowned with 
 a Garland of Flowers, in Purple Garment?. She was 
 Born in Libia, (otherwife called Elijfa J and lived in the 
 time of Euripides : Ldian'ti:? qivss her the fecond place 
 among the Sibyls for her admiiable Predictions, viz.. The 
 time dravcs on, and is not far off, vphen the God of Light fhall 
 he environed with the radient bfiir-KS of the San. 
 
 III. Sibylla Delphica, with a Black Garment, a young 
 Woman with a Horn in her Hand. She was fo called, 
 becaufe iht was Born at Delphos. She lived before the 
 Siege of Troy, and foretold the manner of that War : 
 and Prophefied of Cliriit thus ; Know him for thy Lord, 
 ycho it the Son of God ; a Pcophet fhall be Born of a pure Vir" 
 gin rtithout the Seed of Man. 
 
 IV. Sibylla Phrygia, in red Garment?, having an old 
 Saturnian hard favoured Face. She is fuppofed by many 
 to be Cajfandra, and Prophefied very Divinely of the day 
 <0i Judgment. A Trumpet ( laid ilie ) from Heaven fhall 
 give a very terrible and dreadful found j all Kings fhall 
 (land before the Judgment Seat of God, who will at once Judge 
 both Jufi and Unjufi. 
 
 V. Sibylla Herophila, a young Woman, very fair, in a 
 Purple Garment, and Head covered with a Vail of 
 J-awn. She was alfo called Erithrea, who (^SLsApollo" 
 
 doras 
 
15^ Polyoraphkes Lib. IV. 
 
 inrus Erirhretif fzyz ) was a Citizen of Erhhrea in lonui j 
 {he Piophelied to the Greeks^ that they lliould overcome 
 Troy : and alio of Ch^-ift, That the Earth Jhall fweat as a 
 token of Judgment ; a Kingjhnll come from Heaven, vehofe 
 Kingdom fhall he Everlafting. 
 
 V i. .Sihylli Europe a, a comely young Woman, having a 
 high, red-coloured Face, ri fine Vail on her Head, and 
 clad in a Garment of Gold work. It is faid, that Hie 
 was Born in JerafaUfn, but the place of her Birth is not 
 certainly known : She Prophefied thus ; The Almighty 
 fhall coj}?e accompanied' n'iih his Legions of Angels, he jhall 
 realk over the Hills and Cloud::, he jhall live Poorly, and in. 
 Silence jhall he bear rule. 
 
 VII. Sibylla Perfica, with a White Vail, and a Golden 
 Garment 'thz lived in the CXX. Olympiade, and was 
 Born in a Town called Noe, by the Red Sea : She Pro- 
 phefied thus : O Eca. h, thou fhah be trodden under foot ; 
 the Son of God Jhall be Born into the Vyorld, and he Jhall 
 bring to Man Salvation : the Invifible Word Jhall he made 
 nftble. 
 
 VIII. Sybilla Samia, a middle aged Wonmn, clothed 
 in Willow w^eedsj having a Pahu m her hand. She w^as 
 Bom at Fhiton in the Itle of Samos in the <t/£gean Sea, 
 near Thrace : OJfiodorm fays, flie Prophefied 66%. Years 
 before the Birth of Chrirt, and yet Prophefied as though 
 flie had lived in his days ; vi-c. O ill advifed and indif- 
 creet People of Judca, wAo did not turn to the Lord yoptr God : 
 yoid' have not truly known hir/r, bat baye Crowned him mth 
 Thorns ; and given him Gall to drink. 
 
 IX. Sibylla Hellefpqntica, a young Woman in green 
 Garments, with a round, lovely, frclli coloured Face • 
 hokLfiig in her Left Hand a Book ; and in her Right Hand 
 a Pen. She was Born in the Territories of Troy, in a 
 place called A'farmifjia, near the Town ofGergitha : He- 
 raclides Pontictts fays, thatllie lived in the Days of Solon, 
 and Reign of Cyras, about the LX. Olympiade : She Bro- 
 phefied thus ; Be evr/rforted, O Nations, call upon yonr 
 God, yonr Iniquities fhall be forgiven, and yoa fhall find Mer- 
 cy at the hands of th Lord. 
 
 X. Sihylla Tibtmina, an old Woman in Purple Gar- 
 ments, of a hard Vilagc, holding in her Apron the Books 
 of the Sibyls. She was Born in Italy, in a Town near 
 Rome, upon the Banks of the Tybt^r, from whence Ihe 
 
 took 
 
Chap. 2$. Fainting Arts ^Virtues ^kc. J59 
 
 took her name: She Prophefied, viz,. A Branch ^941 hui 
 from a fvpeet Root, a Flower floall fpring from theuce, ani 
 the Spirit of the Lord [hall rcji upon it. 
 
 XI. Epiroticay called alfo Cmmieria ; fhe is Painted 
 like an old Woman in a Grotto, with a hard favoured 
 Face, and in purple or dark coloured Cloths. She was 
 faid to be Born near the Bofphorm -, but otjiers lay in 
 Cimmeria, a Town of Campania in Italy : She Prophefied 
 a while after the dettru6lion oiTroy, thus ; That a F'irgin 
 P^ould bring forth a Son, roithom the help of a A^ an, an A 
 noHrifh him with the milk of her Breafis. 
 
 Xil. Cumana -, fhe is Painted like a grave Matron^ 
 with a Veil, and in blue coloured Robes, hiding her feet. 
 She was Born in Cuma, a Town of Campania, in Italy, and 
 lived in the LV. Olympiade, in the time of Numa Pom- 
 pilius, and Tarquinns Superhus : She Prophefied thus ', Af- 
 ter three Days ( fays llie ) he Jhall triumph ever Death, re- 
 turn to the Light, and be the firfi rtho jhall give Evidence 
 to the RefpirreEiion, thereby ' to jirengthen the Faithful in the 
 Hope of Eternal Life. 
 
 XIII . Thefe Sibyls for their Prophecies of Chri/} are in high 
 eficem : they are Ten in number, aj: Varro faith ; yet others 
 wake Ti^elve, of which we are not fatisfied ; Boyfardus ifi 
 his Treatife of Divination, befides thefe Ten, addeth Two o- 
 thers, Epirotica and Cumana. 
 
 XIV. Some, as Martianus, will have but Two ; Pliny 
 and Solinus, but Three ; jElian Four ; and Salmafius but 
 the flrji Seven. They are generally defer ibed as young Wo* 
 men, yet fome were old, as fhe that fold the Books unto 
 Tarquin, from whence we conclude the Licentia pidtoria is 
 very large. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIII. 
 
 The Painting of Arts ^ VertueSy PaJ^onSy and 
 Minor Gods, 
 
 J. A Rithmeticl is painted in cloth of Gold : Geometry 
 
 •^ fallow feced, a green J4antle fringed with Silver, 
 
 and a Silver wand in her right hand ; AJironomy with a 
 
 Siver 
 
l6o Polygraphices Lib. IV. 
 
 Silver Crefcent on her Fore-head, an Azure Mantle, a 
 VV.itchet Scarf, with Gold Stars. 
 
 II. Faith is painted in -white Garments, with a Cup 
 of Gold : Hope in blue, with a Silver Anchor : Charity in 
 yellow Robes ; on her head a tyre of Gold with precious 
 Stones ; her Chair Ivory. 
 
 HI. Religion in a Silver Vail, with aGarment or Man- 
 tle of white : Jii(lice in a white Robe, and a white Man- 
 tle ; with a Coronet ot Silver, and white Buskins : Inno- 
 cency in white. 
 
 IV. Concord in a Sky-coloured Robe, and a Yellow 
 Mantle ; Peace in White, Icattered with Stars, or a carna- 
 tion Mantle frine;ed with Gold, a Vail of Silver, Green 
 Buskin?, and a Palm in her hand in black ; UnMiimity 
 in a blue Robe, Mantle and Buskins j with a cliaplet of 
 klue Lillies. 
 
 V. Wifdom in a white Robe, blue Mantle, feedcd with 
 Stars : Larr in purple Robes, fecded with Golden Stars ; 
 a Mantle of Carnation fringed with Gold ; purple and 
 yellow Buskins : Govsrnmenv in Armour. 
 
 VI. Watchfulnef in a yellow Robe ; a fable Mantle 
 fiinged with Silver, and feeded Avith waking Eyes ; a 
 chaplet of Turnfole ; in her Right Hand a Lamp ; in her 
 Left, a BtU : Confidence in a parti-colourcd garment : 
 Modefly in blue. 
 
 VII. Etrrnity in blue, feeded with Golden Stars ; the 
 Soul in wliite Garment?, branched with Gold and Pearl; 
 and Crowned with a Garland of Roles ; Felicity in pur- 
 ple trimmed with Silver. 
 
 VIII. Love in Crimfon fringed with Gold, a flame- 
 colourcd Mantle, a chaplet of red and white Rofes : Ne- 
 utral ^jfeciion, in Citron colour ; Envyy'm a difcolourcd 
 Garment full of Eyes. 
 
 IX. Joy, in a green Robe, and a Mmtle of divers co- 
 lours, embroidered with Flowers ; a Garland of Myrtle ; 
 in her Right Hand a CryRal Cruife, in her Left a Golden 
 Cup : Pleajure in light Garments, trimmed with Silver 
 and Gold r Laughter in feveral colours. 
 
 X. Wii, in a aifcolourcd Mantle : Jollity, in flame co- 
 lour : Fcifiime in purple trimmed with Gold. 
 
 XI. Opinion in black Velvet, black Cap, with a white 
 fall : Imptdence^ in a party-colourcd garment ; Audofityy 
 in bluilL colour. 
 
 XII. /fo-. 
 
Chap. 28. Painting Arts yVertues^ he, i6i 
 
 XII. Honour J in a purple Robe, wrought with Gold : 
 Liberty y in white : Safety, in Carnation. 
 
 XIII. Cupid was painted ( by Zeaxis ) in a green Robe : 
 Hymen in long yellow hair, in a Purple or Saffron co- 
 loured Mantle : Ti-iton ( Nepttmes Trumpeter ) with a 
 blue Skin, in a purple Mantle. 
 
 XIV. Urania, in a Mantle of azure, filled with Lamps : 
 'j4(irea the Goddefs of Juftice, in a Crimfon Mantle, trim- 
 med with Silver : Graces all alike, as Sifters, in Silver 
 Robes. 
 
 XV. Telhsj the Goddefs of the Earth in a green Man- 
 tle : Ceres, with yellow hair, and a firaw-coloured Man- 
 tle trimmed with Silver : V'efia, daughter of Saturn^ in 
 white Garments filled with flames. 
 
 XVI. Flora in a black Mantle, of divers colours : Profer^ 
 pine in a black Mantle trimmed with Gold flames : Echo, 
 ( theGoddefs of the Air, and Daughter of Speech, the en- 
 tirely beloved of Pan J is an invifible Goddefs. 
 
 XVII. Aufonm G alius reporteth that llie hath often- 
 times diffwaded, and reprehended fuch, who would un- 
 dertake to depaint her, and repeats the fame in an Epi- 
 gram, whofe fence in Englijh is this : 
 
 Sm-ceafe tlyoa medlin^ Artiji thy endeavour. 
 
 Who for thy skill hafi reapt ftich long livdfame : 
 Strive not to paint my Body, Shape, for nevrr 
 
 Did any humane Eyes behold the fame. 
 In concave Caverns of the Earth I dwell, 
 • Daughter o'th' Air, and of each tailing Voice y 
 In Woods and hollovp Dales I build my Cell, 
 
 Joying to re-report the leafi heard noife. 
 To grief oppreji, and Men difcon folate, 
 
 That tell each Grove their Souls vexation^ 
 Their dying Agonies I aggravate, 
 By their dole accents iteration. 
 
 ylnd he that will defcribe my form aright^ 
 Mufi fhape iiformlejs jound^ or airyfprite. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
^62 Pol/gra^jtces Lib. IV. 
 
 CHAP. XXIX. 
 
 7o exprefs the Porverf. 
 
 I. TiTemty, It Is expr-cfTed iti the form of a fair Lady, 
 ^-^ having three heads, fignifying Time paft, preient, 
 and to come ; in her left hand a Circle, pointing with 
 the Forefinger of her right hand up to Heaven : the Circle 
 iignifies llie hath neither beginning nor end. 
 
 II. In the Mediils of Trajan, (he vpos fgured >-?.'/, fitting 
 upon a Sphear,Tfhh the Stin in one Hand, and the Aioonin 
 the other : ( by her fitting is figniiied perpetual conrtan- 
 cy. ) 
 
 III. In the Aiedah of Fauttma,/^." is drawn mihaVeilj 
 and in her right hand the Globe of the World. 
 
 IV. Boccace, mriting of the Progeny of the Gods, faith ^ that 
 the Anciems derived it from Demogorgon, as the principAl 
 anifirji oftherff rdl^who inhabited in tlye A'fiddle or Center of the 
 Earth, encircled round about, and circumvefted with a 
 dark and obtiifcate Cloud, breathing from his mouth a 
 certain liquid humidity. 
 
 Bat however iv^at Eternity w, the name doth clearly dif- 
 cover, containing in it/elf all Worlds and Ages, and not limi- 
 ted, or meaJHred by myjpace of time. 
 
 V. Claudius ^fj^^/kj' tt by a Serpent that encompaffah roswd 
 Toith her Body, the Cave or Den m herein it licth, fo as makinz 
 aGrcle, fhe holds in her moHth the end of her tail, which with 
 the ytgyplians was the Emblem of ayear. 
 
 All in a Circle thus fh; fits involved, 
 Whoje firm tenacity is ne'r dijjolv'd : 
 She lends f:/rth times, and thefN rccals again, 
 Ages to come, and pafijhedoth retain. 
 
 VI. Bfit according to Boccace, as Eternity hath an ahfolttte 
 command over all times, Jo jhe lives far hence in jome remote 
 and :i/iknmn Vale, where humane fieps never approached, but 
 u even :n,fo!4nd out of the Grlefiial inhabitants, thofc happy 
 Smilsy who (land b/fore the prejence of the greatefi, that only 
 incrrs all things. 
 
 VII. Tme. 
 
Chap. 29- lo exprefs the Powers: ^61 
 
 VII. Time, It is drawn flanding upon an old Ruine 
 winged, and with Iron Teeth. Or thm. An old rnan in 
 a garment of Stars ; upon his head aGirland oFRofes, 
 Ears of Corn, and dry Sticks, ftanding w^m the Zodiack, 
 with a Looking-GIals in his Hand • two Children at h^ 
 Feet, the one Fat the other Lean, writing both in one 
 Book ; upon the Head of one the Sun, upon the other the 
 Moon. Or tkm, An eld Man, Bald behind, Winged,^ 
 with a Scithe and an Hour-Glai's, having a lock of Hair 
 On his Forehead. 
 
 VIII. FatCy a Man in a fair, long, flajren Robe, Iook= 
 ing upwards to two bright Stars encompaifcd with thick 
 clouds, fi'om whence hangs a Golden Chain. 
 
 IX. FortwiCj a Naked Lady, having an Enfign or Veil 
 overlliadowing her, (landing upon a Globe or Ball, 
 
 La.6h.ntKi?, faith th^nt Fortune is a'yain, idle and, fsnje" 
 hfs fi.^me, fhemng forth Aians ive.^hiejs in attributing any 
 thinf thereto : -which Marcus Tuiluis confirmsth, fvkere he 
 faith. That this natKe of Forttme, was firjl brought in ta 
 cover the ignorance of Man. Alexander Neapolitaniis 
 faith, that in Pr^neile, in a Temple, [he was depi^ed in the 
 Jhape and form of two Sifiers, both conjoined in one and the 
 fame Statue. 
 
 X. Paufanias /^/tV/;, That her moji ancient Statue roas that 
 TPphich Bupalus made in Greece inP^ape of a Woman, upon ivhofe 
 Head was a ropmd Ball, and in one of her Hands a Oornuco- 
 pidjhe is called the blind GoddeJ^, and partial Lady, by reafon 
 of the befiowing of her nnconjiant and mztable Favours. 
 
 Imperious Ruler of the Worlds defigns, 
 Lady of Solace, Pleaiure and of Pains : 
 Like Tennis Balls thou beat'lt us to and fi:o, 
 From Favours to Difgi" ace, from Joy to Woe ; 
 From Wars to Peace, from Rule to be commanded i 
 But with unconftancy thou now art branded. 
 
 XL Macrobius faitb fhe, nasfet forth with \¥ings on her 
 Shoulders, (to jhewthat poe was always atHand among Aden J 
 had by her fide the Rudder of a Ship ( to poew that fhe doth 
 Rule and Command ) her felf placed upon a Wheel, holding 
 in her Right Hand a Oolden Sail;, ana in the other a Whip j 
 fkmng mere th: f?mled , Wcalti) and Honof»'; md where Jhs 
 frowned J Crops and Mifcrylhonld fQlkw. 
 
 ft In 
 
^^4 Polygraph tees. Lib. IV. 
 
 XII- In ^gypt Fortune rtas depiH-ed lih a Lady turning a 
 ^eat Glajs Wheel ^on whoje Top rvere f^nny Men. playing^ others 
 clirnhing up ; and others having attained it, precipitating them- 
 felves, and falling domi hack again. 
 
 XIII. Equality, A Lady lighting tvvo Torches at once. 
 
 XIV. Vichory, is expreffed by a Lady clad all in Gold, 
 in one Hand a Helmet, in the other a Pomegranate : By 
 the Helmet is meant Force, by the Pomegranate unity of Wit 
 and Counfel. 
 
 XV. Auguflus drevo her mth Wings ready to fly, /landing 
 hpon A Globe, with a Garland of Bays in one hand, in the other 
 A Coronet of the Emperor, voith thefe Wor^j,Imperator Cacfar. 
 
 XVI. In the Medals c/Octivius, fhe is drawn mth Wings, 
 (landing on a Baje, in one Hand a Palm, in the other a Crovpn. 
 of Golf. 
 
 XVII- Peace, is drawn like a Lady, holding in her right 
 Hand a Wand or Rod downwards towards the Earth, 
 over a hideous Serpent ot fundry colours ; and with her 
 other Hand covering her Face with a Veil, as loth to be- 
 hold Strife or War. 
 
 XVIII. Trajan gave a Lady, in her Right Hand an Olive 
 branch, in her Left u Cornucopia. In the Medals of Titus, a 
 Lady having in one Hand an Olive Branch, the other lending a 
 Lamb and a Wolf coupled by the Necks in oneToke. TheOiivs 
 TPas iilways the Emblem of Peace. 
 
 XIX Providence, A Lady lifting up both her Hands 
 to Heaven, with thefe Words, Providentia Deornm. Or 
 thus, A Lady in a Robe, ni her Right Hand a Scepter, in 
 her Left a Cornucopia, "with a Globe at her Feet. 
 
 XX. Concvd, A Lady fitting, in her Right Hand a 
 Charger for Sacrifice, in her Lett a Cornucopia, with the 
 Word Concordia. Or thus, A fair Virgin, holding in one 
 Hand a Pomegranate ; in the other a Mirtlc Bunch. 
 
 The nature of theje Trees are Juch, thai if planted, though a. 
 good [pace one from another, they mil meet, and mth twining 
 embrace one another. 
 
 XXI. Fame^ A Lady clad in a thin and light Garment, 
 open to the middle Thigh, that ihe might run the falter j 
 two exceeding large Wings -, Garments embroidered with 
 Eyes and Ears, and blowing ot a Trumpet. 
 
 XXII. Defliny, A Lady, who with great fury, and ex- 
 cealing celerity holds in her Hand an Iron Bow rea- 
 dy bent, aiming to ilrike Fortune even at the very 
 Heart. Deltiny 
 
Chap. JO. Of Vertues And Vices, 365 
 
 Deftiny ani Fortune can never ap-ee ; and therefore as 
 Fortune flics from Deftiny, fo Deftiny parfaes Fortune j 
 for where Deftiny Jets focty there Fortune is, as it vpercy 
 Inchantei and Conjnredy as having no Power, Efficacy or 
 
 Vertfie. 
 
 CHAP. XXX. 
 
 Of Vertues a^ictFices; 
 
 I. yrr^rtue is reprefented by Hercdes, naked, with his 
 ^ Lyons Skin, and knotted Club, performing fome 
 one of his Labours ; as offering to ftrike a Dragon keep- 
 ing an Apple-tree : or holding in his Hand three Golden 
 Apples. 
 
 Hercules is nothing elfe hut Vertue, his name in the Greek 
 Tongue is 'H^js^ajJ? , qmf% r\^<; KMof, Junonis gloria : vel 
 qnia K?.mei tk? ti^eoai celebrat aut commemorat Heroas, 
 Tvhich is the property ofp^ertue : he is drawn naked to demon- 
 fir ate her fimplicity : by the Dragon is fet forth all manner 
 of yices : hy the Lions skin, magnanimity and greatnefs : by 
 his Oaken Club, Reafon and Policy : by its knottinefs, the 
 difficulty, pains and labour infeeking after Vertm : by the 
 three Golden yuppies, the three Heroical Vertues, Afoderation, 
 Content and Labonr. 
 
 II. Piety is drawn like a Lady, with a fober counte- 
 nance ; in her Right Hand llieholdeth a Sword ftretched 
 over an Altar ; in her Left Hand a Stork -, and by her fide 
 is placed an Elephant and a Child. 
 
 The Stork isfo called of raf>H, the reciprocal or mutual 
 Io7je of Parent and Child, of which this Bird was ever a» 
 Emblem, for the love and care fhe hath of her Parents h' 
 ing old. The Elephant feems to Worfhip towards the rifing of 
 the Sun, 
 
 III. Hope is drawn like a beautiflil Child in a long 
 Robe hanging loofe, ftanding upon Tip-toes, and a Tre- 
 foil, or Three-leav'd Grafs in its Right Hand, in its Left 
 an Anchor. 
 
 The loofe Veflment {hews, fhe never pimheth or UndsTruth, 
 
 ^mding Qn Tip-tQjs fhms fhe always flandeth dangeronfly } 
 
 ' E^ fhe 
 
^66 Pofygraphices Lib. IV. 
 
 thi branch of Trefoil [hews Knowledge , (the ground ofFaichJ 
 ^aith (the ground of Hope, ) a>td Hope it felf. 
 
 IV. Mercy^ a Lady fitting upon a Lion, holding in 
 one hand a Spear, in the other an Arrow j which llie 
 feemeth to caft away. 
 
 In the Medals of Vitellius/^f fits with a branch of Bays 
 in her hand, and a Staff lying by her. ^ , 
 
 V. Jujiice^ a fair young Virgin, drawing after her, with 
 her Left Hand, a black, hard, ill favoured Woman, ha- 
 ling her by main force, and flriking her over the Face in 
 a Kverc manner. 
 
 The young Virgin was Juftice, the other Injuria : fhe is 
 drawn young, and a Virgin, tojhevp, that Judges and Admi- 
 nijirators ojLavf ought to he incorrupt and free from. Bribes, 
 Partiality or Flattery, but Jufl, Confiant and Sincere. 
 
 VL Felicity, a Lady fitting in an Imperial Throne, in 
 the one hand fhe holdeth a Caducens or Rod, in the other 
 hand a Cnmacopia. 
 
 VII. Fruit fulnefi, a Lady fitting upon a Bed, and two 
 ittle Infants hanging about her Neck. 
 
 VIII. Dijfimulaiion, a Lady wearing a Vizard of t^vo 
 Faces, in a long Robe of ciiangeablc colour ; and in her 
 right ha,nd a Magpye. 
 
 IX. Security, a Lady leaning againft a Pillar, before 
 a^ Altar, with a Scepter in her hand. 
 
 X. Calurmiia, a be<iutift.il, rich and youngWoman, ap- 
 proaching towards a Judge, gorgeous in her habit, Avith an 
 aii^iy, (rorniiii and difcontented look, and red and fiery 
 Eyes^j ihe liolds in her left hand a flaming Torch : and with 
 her fight 1 he by force dra^vs a young Man by the hair of the 
 
 XI. Envy, a wonderful lean old Man, with a pale and 
 ttiea^e face, in whofe withered cheeks Age hath wrought 
 deep furrows and wrinkles. 
 
 Xil. Penitence, a Women in vile, ragged and bafe At- 
 tilCj infinitely deploring her being ; and bemoaning her 
 lelf in paffionate fits above all meafurc, continually 
 tv©c^ini§. 
 
 e H A P. 
 
chap. 5 1. Of Rivers, ^S') 
 
 CHAP. XXXI. 
 
 Of Rivers, 
 
 I. TJ Erein you ought to obfeire the AdfutKfts and Pro- 
 ^■^ perties of the fame ; which confifts in fome no- 
 table Accident done near them ; fome famous City, 
 Trees, Fruits, or Reeds fituate upon their Banks ; fome 
 Filh only proper to their ftreams j or recourfe of Ship- 
 ping from all Parts of the World. 
 
 II. Therefore you had befl place the City upon their 
 Heads j their Fruits in a Cornucopia ; Reeds, Flowers and 
 Branches of Trees in their Garlands, and the like. 
 
 III. The River Tiber. It is expreffed ( in the Vatican 
 at Rome) in a goodly Statue of Marble lying along ( for 
 fo you muft draw them ) holding under his Right Arm 
 a She Wolf, with two little Infants flicking at her Teats, 
 leaning upon an Urn or Pitcher, out of which iffueth its 
 ftream : In his Left a Cornucopia of delicate Fruits, with 
 a grave Countenance and long_ Beard ; a Garland of 
 Flowers upon his Head j and relting liis Right Leg upon 
 an Oar. 
 
 IV. The River Nilus. It is feen ( in the Vatican J cut 
 out in white Marble, with a Garland of fiindry Fruits 
 and Flowers^ leaning with his Left Arm upon a Sphynx j 
 from under his Body ilTueth its flream : In his Left Arm 
 a CornHcopia fiill of Fruits and Flowers on one lide, with 
 Sixteen little Children, fmiUng and pointing to the 
 flood. 
 
 The Sphynx tpos fometimes a Monjier which remained hy 
 Nilus : the Crocodile km t» ka^kov S'eiXtS.vt from his ha" 
 tred of Saffron ; the moji famoiss Monjier of Egypt ; The 
 jixteen Children, the Jixteen Cubits of height, the uttermoji of 
 thefiomng of Nilus : their fmiling looks, the profit of it, 
 Tvhkh glads the hearts of the Sun-burnt Inhabitants. 
 
 V. The River Tigrts- It M^as drawn like an old Man 
 ( as tlie reft) and by his fide a Tiger. 
 
 This Beafi vpos given a» well for its Jkr<:e firMms, as far thff 
 !}ors 9f Tigers which ars there. 
 
 Ee 2 YLThe 
 
J 6 8 Pofygraphices t ib. I V. 
 
 VI. The River Ganges. It bears the fhape of a rude 
 and barbarous Savage, with bended brows, of a fierce 
 and cruel Countenance, crowned with a Palm, having, 
 as other floods, his Pitcher, and by his fides a Rhino- 
 ceros. 
 
 This River runneth through India, an^ hath its head from 
 fi, Fountain in Paradife. 
 
 VII. The River Indus. It is drawn with a grave and 
 jovial Afped, with a Garland of its Cquntrey Flow- 
 ers, by its fide a Camel ( from ;:t*/'^* ) i^ 's rcprefen- 
 ted pleafantly, grave, as an Emblem of the Indian 
 Policy. 
 
 This is the grcatejl River in the World, receiving into its 
 Chanel threefcore other great and famous Rivers^ and above an 
 hundred Icffer. 
 
 VIII. The River Thamifis. In the Houfe of an Ho- 
 Tiourabk Friend, I faw the Thames thus drawn : A 
 Captain or Soldier lying along, holding in his Right 
 Hand a S^vord, and under his Arm tlie Auguft ToAver : 
 in the other a Cornucopia of all fragrancie?, with a Gol- 
 den Chain which held four Crowns ; and with this he 
 encompaffed the ftrcams, from under which bending 
 of his Left Arm .they feemed to flow : his temples were 
 adorned v/ith Bays, the River was empaled on one fide 
 uith Anchors, and on the other flood Ctfar?^ Augulia. 
 
 IX. The River j^mus. It is a famous River in Italy, 
 drawn like an old Man leaning upon his Pitcher, pour- 
 ing out Avater : upon liis Head a Garland of Beech, by 
 hisri.^ht fide a Lyon, holding forth in his di.xter Paw a 
 red Lilly or Flower-de-luce, the ancient Arms of the 
 chief City of T^A^cany. 
 
 By I he Garland of Beech is Jet forih the ^reat abundance 
 of Beech Trees growing about Faflerona m the Appennines, 
 jfhere Arnus I.aih his head. 
 
 X. The River Po or P.tdus. It is depicted with an Ox's 
 face, having a Garland of Reeds or Poplar on his Head. 
 
 It is fo called from the Sijler of Phaeton, :vhom the Poets 
 feign dejlroyed with Lightning, and drowned here : the head 
 of the Ox J is from its horrid noife and roaring, vthoje crooked 
 Vanks rcfcmble the horns thereof ; by the fides ^hereof grorvs 
 much Reed, and many Poplars. 
 
 XI. The River I><?««y/w. In an ancient Medal of the 
 Emperoi-ir Trajan, it is depi<^ed with its heads covered 
 w'X^^ a Veil. It 
 
Chap. J2. Of NytH^hsi 559 
 
 L is fo drami, hecauje its Head or firft Spring is uninoi^n, 
 Aulonius fahhy 
 
 Danubius periit capiut occiiltatus in ore.' 
 
 XII. The River AcheJons. Ovid defcribes it with a 
 Garland of Reeds, Willow, and thelike : having two 
 Urns or Earthen Pitchers, the one empty, the other caft- 
 ing out water ; and upon its head two horns, the one 
 whole, the other broken. 
 
 This River, as it is the mofi famous of all Greece, Jo it di- 
 vides Mto\i2Lfrom Arcadia, and then falls into the Sea. This 
 is fetched from the Fable of Hercules, who comhated him in. 
 the likenefs of a Bully and. broke one of his horns for Deia- 
 nim's fakey there turning both its flr earns into one, vphere^ 
 upon one of the Urns is empty. 
 
 XIII. The River Niger. It is drawn like a Black-Moor, 
 with Glory, or a Coronet of Sun-beams falling upon his 
 Urn, having by its fide a Lion. 
 
 By the Sun-beams and Black, is /hewed the Clime, lying 
 under the Torrid Zone, whofe inhabitants are Blacks or 
 Moors ; the Lyon is that which the Comtreys Mauritania and 
 Barbary breed, being the fiercefi in the World. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIL 
 
 of Nymphs, 
 
 I. "VT T 'M $ H Nympha, a Bride Cf^om vilv and dcufi^cu 
 "^^ as it were a f re fly or new Creature : or as fome will 
 have it, Nympha qiuafi Lympha, by changing L. into N. 
 after the Dorick dialect : J it is nothing elle but an Alle- 
 gory, from the Vegetative Humidity, which gives life to 
 Trees, Herbs, Plants and Flowers, by which they grow 
 and increafe. 
 
 IL They are feigned to be the Daughters of the Ocean,' 
 the Mother of Floods, the Nurfes of Bacchusy and Goddef- 
 fes of Fields, who have the protedion and charge of 
 Mountains, Herbs, Woods, Meadows, Rivers, Trees, and 
 generally of the whole Life of Man, 
 
 E e 3 IIL Firfi^ 
 
570 Polygnphices Lib. IV. 
 
 III. Firjl^ Napxa,, Nymphs of the Mountains. 
 
 Let them be drawn of a fweet and gracious Afpc6l, in 
 green Mantles, girded about in the middle ; and upon 
 their heads Garlands of Honeyfuckles, _Wild-rofes, Tyme, 
 and the like ; their a6Vions, dancing in a Ring, making 
 Garlands, or gathering Flowers. 
 
 They are fo called from NctTic? the Top of an Hill, or Wflody 
 Valley. 
 
 IV. Secondly^ Dryadcs, Nymphs of the Woods. 
 
 Draw thefe Icfs fair than the former, of a brown or 
 tawny Complexion, hair thick like Nfofs, and their Attire 
 of a dark green. 
 
 They are fo called from Aft;< an Oai, having their hegin^ 
 nin^ vpith Trees, and dying again -with them. 
 
 V. Thirdly, Naiades, Nymphs of the floods. 
 
 Draw them beautiful, with Arms and Legs naked, 
 their Hair clear as Crythl ; upon their Heads Garlands 
 of Water-creffes, with red leaves : their adlions pouring 
 out water. 
 
 They are fo called from Ni*> to fion-, or babble, as tvater 
 doth. 
 
 VI. Thetis, a Lady of a brown Complexion, her Hair 
 fcattered about her Shoulders, crowned with a Coro- 
 net of Periwinkle and Efcallop fhells, in a Mantle of 
 Sea-green, with Chains and Bracelets of Amber about 
 her Neck and Arms, and a branch of red Coral in her 
 Hand. 
 
 VII. Galatea, a molt beautiflil young Virgin, her Hair 
 carclefly falling about her Shoulders like Silver threads, 
 and at each Ear a fair Pearl ; with a double ftring of 
 theni ( fometimes ) about her Neck and Left Arm; 
 a Mantle of pure thin and fine white, waving, as it 
 were, by the gentle breathing of the Air, viewing in her 
 liand a fpunge made of Sca-fioth : She is fo called from 
 >aAtf, lac, milk. 
 
 VIII. Iris, a Nymph with large wings, extended like 
 to a Semicircle, the Plumes fet m rows of divers colours, 
 as yellow, green, red, blue or purple j her Riir hanging 
 before her Eyes, her Breafts like Clouds, drops of Water 
 falling from her Body, and in her hand Iris, or the Flower- 
 de-luce. 
 
 Virgil makes her the Mcffenger of Juno ( where fhe is 
 taken for the Air ) when he iaith, Irin de Cdo mifit Sa- 
 tnrnia Juno. *X. 
 
V 
 
 Chap. J J. Of the nine Mufes. 571 
 
 IX. Nymphdi Diana ; Let them be clQathcd in white 
 Linnen to denote their Virginity, and their Garments 
 ^irt about them 5 their Arms and Shoulders naked j Bows 
 m their hands, and Arrows by their fides. 
 
 X. Aurora, the Morning. A young Virgin with car- 
 nation Wings, and a yellow Mantle ; in her Fore-head 
 a Star, and Golden Sun-beams from the Crown of her 
 Head, riding upon Pegajm, with a vial of Dew in one 
 hand, and various Flowers in the other, which fhe fcat- 
 tereth upon the Earth. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIII. 
 
 Of the Nine Mufts, 
 
 I. r^Lio, She is drawn with a Coronet of Bays ; in lier 
 y^ right hand a Trumpet, in her left a Book, upon 
 which may be written Hiftoria j her names is from Praife 
 or Glory. 
 
 II. Euterpe, Is crowned with a Garland of Flowers, 
 holding in each hand fundry Wind-inftruments ,• her 
 name is from giving delight. 
 
 III. Thalia. Draw her with a fmiling look, and up- 
 on her Temples a Coronet of Ivy, a Mantle of Carnation 
 embroidered with Silver' twift, and Gold fpangles, and in 
 her left hand a Vizard -, her Ivy (hews {he is Miftrefs of 
 Comical Poefie. 
 
 IV. Melpomene. Draw her like a Virago, with a ma- 
 jefteck and grave Countenance, adorn her head with 
 Pearfe, Diamonds and Rubies ; holding in her left hand 
 Scepters with Crowns upon them, other Crowns and 
 Scepters lying at her feet : and in her right hand a naked 
 Poniard, in a Mantle of changeable Criinfon. Her gra- 
 vity befits Tragick Poefie. 
 
 V. Polyphywnia. Draw her a6Hng a Speech with her 
 Fore-finger, all in white, her Hair hanging loofe about 
 her Shoulders, of an Orient Yellow, upon her Head a Gar- 
 land of the choiceft Jewels intermixt with Flowers, and 
 in her left hand a Book, upon which let be written Stta- 
 dere j her name imports Memory to whom the Rhetori- 
 cian is beholden, 
 
 Ee4 VhErato: 
 
-^ji Polygraphkes Lib. IV^ 
 
 VI. ErAto. She hath her name from ''E.f«<, Amor^Love: 
 draw her Avith a fwcct and comely Vifage, her Temples 
 girt with Myrtles and Rofe?, bearing an Heart with an 
 Ivory Key ; by her fide CufU, winged, \vith a lighted 
 Torch ; at his Back, his Bow and Quivers. 
 
 VII. Terpftcore j a cheerful Vifage, playing upon fome 
 Inrtrument ; upon her head a Coronet of Feathers of 
 fundry Colours, but chiefly green ; in token of the Vi- 
 <5lory which the Mules got over the Syrens, &c. by fmg- 
 ing. 
 
 VIII. Urania. A beatiful Lady in an Azure Robe; 
 upon her Head a Coronet of bright Stars ; in her ri^ht 
 hand the Celcftial Globe, and in her left the Terrelhrial. 
 Her name imports as much as Heavenly j Urania C<eli 
 niotiis JcrMtatur & Ajlra. 
 
 IX. Ciiiiope. Upon her Head draw a Coronet of Gold ; 
 upon her kft Arm Gnrlands of Bays in llore, for the re- 
 ivard of Poets ; and m her right Hand three Books, up- 
 on which write Homerm^ Virgilim^ Ovidins. 
 
 The Alufcs had their names ^ as Eufebius faith ^ yiufj, -n 
 IJXHVy Vfhich is to infirnctf becanfe they teach the moji honejl 
 and laudable difciplines. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIV. 
 
 Of the four Winds. 
 
 I. X^Ums, the Eafl-Avind. Draw a Youth with puffed 
 •*-' and blown Cheeks ( as all the other Winds mult 
 be ) Wings upon her Shoulders, his Body like a Tawny- 
 Moor, upon his Head a Red Sun. 
 
 II. Zephyrusy the Weft-wind. Draw a Youth a\ ith a 
 jnerry look, holding in his Hand a Swan, with Wings 
 difplay'd as about to fing, on his Head a Garland of all 
 forts of Flowers. 
 
 '71s called Zeph^'^rus qiiafi (mv tpiquv^ Winging life, be- 
 caufe it cherijhcth and quickneth 
 
 III. Boreas^ the North-wind. Draw it like an old 
 Man, with a horrid, tenlblc /ook ; his Hair and Beard 
 Coyered_ with Snow, or the hoar Froll j with the Feet and 
 Tail of a Serpent. 
 
 IV. An^ 
 
Chap. 5 5 . Of the Momhs of the Tear, ^71 
 
 IV. Aiijiery the South-wind, is drawn with Head and 
 Wings wet, a Pot or Urn pouring forth Water, with 
 which defcend Frogs, Grafhoppers, and the like Crea- 
 tures, which are bred by moifture. 
 
 CHAP. XXXV. 
 
 Of the Months of the Tear, 
 
 I. "TAnmry muft be drawn all in white, like Scow or 
 jj hoar Froft, blowing his Fingers ; in his left Arm a 
 Billet, and Aquarim (landing by his fide. 
 
 II. February is drawn in a dark sky colour, carrying m 
 his right hand Pifcesy or Fifhes. 
 
 ill, March is drawn tawny with a fierce look, a Hel- 
 met upon his Head, leaning upon a Spade : in his right 
 hand Aries ; in his left Almond Blollbms and Scions ; 
 and upon his Arm a Basket of Garden-Seeds. 
 
 IV. Aprilh drawn like a young Man in green, with 
 a Garland of Myrtle and Hawthorn-buds, winged • iii 
 the one hand Primrofes and Violets j in the other Tat-rta:. 
 
 V. May is drawn with a fw^eet and lovely Afpecl, in 
 a Robe of white and green, embroidered with Daifadills, 
 Haw- thorn and Blue-bottles ; on his Head a Garland 
 of white and red Damask Rofes ; in the one HaniJ 
 a Lute ', upon the Fore-finger of tloe other a NightingaL 
 
 VI. June is drawn in a Mantle of dark grafs-green j 
 upon his Head a Coronet of Bents, King-cobs, and Mai- 
 den-hair ; in his left hand an Angle 5 in his right Cancer ; 
 and upon his Arm- a Basket of Summer Fruits. 
 
 VII. July is drawn in a Jacket of a light yellow, 
 eating Cherries, with his Face and Bofom Sun-burnt, 
 on his Head a Garland of Centaury and Time, on his 
 Shoulder a Sithe ; wdth a Bottle at his Girdle, carrying a 
 Lion, 
 
 VIII. Augufi is like a young Man of a fierce loolc, in 
 a flame-Goloured Robe ; upon his Head a Garland o£ 
 ^■^Vheat ; upon his Arm a Basket of Summer fruits -, at his 
 Belt a Sickle, bearing a Virgin, 
 
 IX. Scpteni" 
 
574 Volygraphices Lib. IV. 
 
 IX. September is drawn in a purple Robe, with a cheer- 
 ful look, and on his Head a Coronet of white and pur- 
 ple Grapes ; in his left hand a handful of Oats, with a 
 C&rmcopia of Pomegranates, and other Summer Fruits ; 
 and in his right hand a Ballancc. 
 
 X. OSioher is drawn in a Garment of the colour of de- 
 caying flowers and leaves ; upon his head a Garland of 
 Oak-leaves with tlie Acorns ; in his right hand a Scor- 
 pion } in his left, a Basket of Services, Medlars and Chelt- 
 muts. 
 
 XI. Novemhr in a Robe of changeable green and 
 black ; upon his Head, a Garland of Olives, witli the 
 Fruit ; in his right hand Sagitarius j and in his left bun- 
 ches of Parfnips and Turneps. 
 
 XII. December is drawn with a horrid AfpeiSl, clad in 
 an Irifh Rug, or courfe Freeze girt about him : upon his 
 Head three or four Night-Caps, and over them a Turlipj 
 Turbant j his Nofe red. Beard hung with Iceikles ; at 
 his Back a bundle of Holly and Ivy, holding in Furred 
 Mittens a Goat. 
 
 Where note, it mil be good to give every Aionth its proper 
 and natural Landskip ; not making Blojfoms and Fruits upon 
 Trees in December j nor a barren face of the Earth and 
 Trees in June. 
 
 Explicit Liber ^tartns. 
 
37% 
 
 P LTGKA THICES 
 
 Liber q.u i n t u a 
 
 An Idea of the Arts ^/Beautify- 
 ing ^/^i Perfuming. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 of Painting of the IE ace and Skin, 
 
 ^' ^ I "^ ^^^ ^'^■y^ ^^^^^^ ^^ ¥" ^(^orning of the Face 
 
 ■ and Skin ; the firfi is by Painting : thefe- 
 
 ■ cond is, by application of excellent Cofme^ 
 M ticks, which give a very natural, ahfolute and, 
 
 I ajiing Beauty. 
 
 II. The firfl way, which is that of Painting, is the 
 fLibjc6t matter of this Chapter. Some may wonder that 
 xve fhould meddle with fuch a Subjedl: as this, in this 
 place J but let fuch know, the Painting of a deformed 
 Face, and the licking over of an old, withered, wrinkled 
 and weather-beaten Skin, are as j)roper appendices to 3. 
 Painter, as the redtification of his Errors in a piece of 
 Canvafe ; Nor is there any reafon, but that the Artilt 
 fliould (hew his care in the one, as well as to exprefs his 
 skill in the other, fmce a fmglc deformity in the Body, be- 
 gets a complication of tniferies in the Mind, and a unity of 
 DefeEisy a multiplication of Evils. 
 
 III. And though fome think that natural Deformi- 
 ty brings with it a torrent of Dejedtions, yet let fuch 
 
 under- 
 
^j6 Folygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 linderrtand, that when time lliall have made its full re- 
 %"oIurion, thcmfelves may be the produ6l of fuch a Con- 
 ception : But we confefs it fecks darknefs, and only fol- 
 laces it felf in obfcurity, and dusky foiitudes. 
 
 IV. For fuch whofe Bodies have part the ilamp with 
 Ibme faults, and have miffed the imprefTions or reflexi- 
 ons of Beauty, which might make them deleilable in 
 himiane Society', ever make choice of darknefs as their chief 
 Companion. 
 
 V. Deformity isaDifeafe efteemed the moft pernicious, 
 and its iffue is a matter of dangerous confequence, chief- 
 ly oLfirH^ions to Ladies Preferment. Now to prev-ent this 
 danger, to take away thefe obftru6Hons, and to deliver 
 you from the embraces of fo hideous a Monlter, thefe Cof- 
 meticks we have offered upon the Ah or of your defeats j 
 protefting that the ufe of thefe Beautifiers, will make 
 your ru^j Skiny and ill-looked Faces, to out-lTiine, with a 
 radiant luftre, the mod fplendid of all the Nymphs of 
 Diana. 
 
 VI. Though you may look fo much like the Image of 
 Death, as that your Skins might be taken for yo^f Win- 
 ding-llieets, 3'et by our directions you may attani fuch 
 a rofie color, and fuch a lively cheerfulnefs, as lliall 
 not only make you look like natures w^orkmanfliip, but 
 alfo put admiration into the beholder?. 
 
 VII. Thus we teach you, lippid Mortals, to retrace the 
 l^eps of youthfulncfs, and to transform the wrinkled 
 Hide of Hectiha, into the tender skin of the greateit of 
 Beauties j which then you ^vill dull by the advance of 
 your Features, and make all conceited lliadows of glo- 
 ry, to vanilh in your prefence. When once your Arti- 
 ficial heat fhall appear, others lliall feem pale wiih En- 
 vy for your perfedtions; and their riatural mddinefs fhall 
 only ferve them to hluflj, to fee their features clouded by 
 your fplendor. 
 
 VIII. By this means your fparkling Glories lliall fire 
 PUtonick Lovers, fo that none, though as cold as Saturn,, 
 fliall be able to refiit your adluatin^ flames, but ihall 
 force the (touteli: l;eart, to be a Sacrifice to love. If any 
 remain unfcorched, it mufl be only thofe leaden hearted 
 Cowards, who <ki^z wot approach yom ^^■cunzi, for fear of 
 melting ; or thuic undelerving Soldiers of Venru (of a 
 frigid Conltitution ) who dare not fo much as look up- 
 
 00 
 
Chap. I . OfFaintiftg the Face.^ 8fC. ^77 
 
 on your youthful fire, for fear of being burnt to allies. 
 But it may chance that fome one or other, may con- 
 demn your hearts for evilj becauie you itrive to make 
 your faces good, and may like your in-fde the jforfe, be- 
 caufe your omfde may look fo well. 
 
 IX." Avoid not company for want.of Beauty, when 
 Art aflfords an innocent liipply, but with confidence crucijfie 
 that evil Confcience, which forbids the ufe of a little 
 Oil to make a cheerful Countenance, and the drinking 
 of a little Wine to make a merry Heart. Borrow our 
 Artificial Beautifiers, and hzcomefplendid, that you may 
 be fit to be gathered by the hand of fome Metamorpho- 
 fed Hero 5 kit in the Garden of Deformities, growing 
 green with jicinefs, you Ihould be taken for Thijiles, and 
 fo cropp'd by AJfes, 
 
 X. To clean] e the Face and Slin. 
 
 Before any thing be ufed to PairSi, or make the Skin 
 beautiful, it muft 'be made* very clean thus : firft wafii 
 with warm Water, and fvveet Icented Wafh-balls very 
 well ; then rub the Face with a cloth, ^nd wafli well 
 with water in wliich Wheat-bran is boiled j fo is the 
 Skin prepared. 
 
 XI. Or thus : Take StMimate two drams in fine pou- 
 der, glair of fix Eggs, boil them in a glafs xt&\, till they 
 grow thick, then prefs out the water, with which wafn 
 the Skin. 
 
 XII. To male a white Fhchs or Paint. 
 
 Take Talck and pouder it, by beating of it in a hot 
 Mortar, to the pouder of Talck add diftilled Vinegar, 
 boil it at a gentle fire in a wide glafs, let the fat froth 
 that fwims at tup, be taken off with a fpoon ; then 
 evaporate the Vinegar, and mix the remaining Cream 
 with flegm of common Salt, or a little Pomatum, y/ith 
 which wafh or anoint the Face, and it will beautifie it 
 much. 
 
 XIII. Another very excellent. 
 
 Take crude Talck in pouder one ounce, Oil of Cam- 
 phire two ounces, digelt till the Oil is white j it is a no- 
 ble Fucus for Ladies Faces. 
 
 XIV. To make the aforefaid Oil of Camphire. 
 
 Take Camphire four ounces, Bole twelve ounces, make 
 them into Balls,, and diy them in the Sun, then diffil 
 them ill Sand in a glafs Retort, into a Receiver that hath 
 
 diftillsd 
 
378 Folygrafhices Lih^W. 
 
 dilHlkd Rain water therein ; firft there will come forth 
 a white matter, which melts in the Alcmbick, and falls 
 into the Receiver, then a clearer water ; and at lall 
 with a flronger fire, the Oil we fpeak of. iweet fcen- 
 ted, which rectified with Spirit of Wine will be yellow 
 as Gold. 
 
 XV. Another excellent Fmus made cf Pearl. 
 
 DifTolve Pearl in diiHUed Vinegar ; precipitate with 
 OW o^ Sulphur per Cawpanam ; then Iweeten and digsli 
 with Spirit of Wine ; abitrail: the Spirit, and you have a 
 magifterial Fhchs will melt like Butter. 
 
 'XVI. To make the heji Fhchs or Paint as yet Inorvn. 
 
 Tiike P^enetian Taick, cleave it into fliccs, digcft it in the 
 heat of the Sun, or of aHorfe-diinghill for a Month, with 
 didilled Vinegar, made of Spanijh Wine, adding every 
 Day new diliil led Vinegar to the former, till the Vinegar 
 be mucilaginous ; wnich then diftil by a luted Retort 
 and a large Receiver, with a naked fire. Firfl there comes 
 forth the Vinegar ; then a white Oil, which fcparate. 
 After you have cleanfed the Skin hy the fecond SedHon, 
 then firft waih with the Vinegar, after anoint with the 
 Oil : if the Face be firil well waili'd from all impurity, 
 this one anointing may hold for a Month without fading. 
 This Cofmetick, if rightly prepared , is worth about five pound 
 an ounce. 
 
 XVII. An excellent Fy.cus made of Bulls gall. 
 Take Bulls galls dried in the Sun, whofe tindture extract 
 
 with Spirit of Wine, witli which befmear the Face ( be- 
 ing cleanfed by the tenth Section ) leaving it on tor three 
 or four Days, without going abroad, or expofing the Skin 
 to the Air ; at the end of the time cleanle the Face again 
 by the faid tenth Section : lo almoit to a miracle, the skin 
 of the Face and Neckisrendrcd molt grateriiUy wliire, foft, 
 delicate and amiable. This is the Spantjh Fucus which 
 feveral Ladies now ufe. 
 
 XVIII. To make an excellent Red Fucus. 
 
 Make a deco6tion of red Sanders in double diftilled 
 Vinegar, adding a little Alum, with a few grains oFMusk, 
 Amber-grife, or of fbme fweet Spices, and you will liavc 
 a pcrfedt red Fucus for the Face. 
 
 XIX. Another very excellent. 
 
 Take iuicc of Clove-gilliflowers, with which mix a littlf 
 juice of Limons : with tliis Paint your Face, and you fhall 
 have a pieafmg red colour. XX. Ta 
 
Chap. I. Of P aim wg the Face, Sec: gy^ 
 
 XX. To do the fame another r^ay. 
 
 Make a ftrong infiiilon of Glove-gilliflowers in rectified 
 Spirit of Wine, adding a few drops of Oil of Vitriol, or 
 inftead thereof, a little Alum, and the Juiceof a Citron ot 
 Limon j fo (hall you have an excellent colour to liautiiie 
 the Face with. 
 
 XXI. A Fucm or Paint not eafie to he difcovered. 
 Take feeds of Cardamoms, or grains of Paradife 
 
 Cubebs, Cloves, anv^. rafpings of Brazil, which infiife 
 in re6liiied Spirit of Wine for ten Days, over a gentle 
 heat ', then leparate the Spirit : this is fo perfe6l a Fu- 
 cus, that it may deceive any Man, for this clear wa- 
 ter gives a frefii, red and lovely colour, which will laft 
 long. ^ 
 
 XXII. A Fucus or Cofmeticl of River Crabs. 
 
 Take of the flelli which remains in the extremities of 
 the great claws of River Crabs ( being boiled ) a fufli- 
 cient quantity, which dry gently, and then extrad a 
 deep tin6ture with re6lined Spirit of Wine ; evaporate 
 parjrpf the Menjiruum^ till the tindlure have a good thick- 
 nef^Sr body ; %vith which ( the skiri being cleanfed ) a- 
 noint the cheeks firft, applying over it fome other albify- 
 ing Cofmetick. 
 
 XXIII. Spanijh Wooll, yeherewith Women Paint their 
 Faces red. 
 
 Boil Iliearin^s of Scarlet in water of Quick-lime half 
 an hour, of which take two pound ; to which put Brazil 
 two ounces, ( rafped ) Roch Alom, Verdigrile, of each 
 one ounce, Gum-Arabick two drams, boil all for half an 
 hour, which keep for ufe. 
 
 XXIV. To do the fame another way. 
 
 , Take Spirit of Wine one pound, Cochenele half an 
 ounce, ralped Brazil one ounce, Gum-Anunoniack thrte 
 drachms, mix and dige(t till the Gum is diffolved ; then 
 boil it gently, and ftrain it for ufe, into which you m^y, 
 put old Linnen Rags, or S^mjh WopU atpleaiwK, 
 
 chap; 
 
^Sc Pol) graph tees. Lib. V. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of Cofmeticks which Beautifie without any thing 
 of Faint, 
 
 LAN excellent Cofmeticl or Liquor of Talcl. 
 
 ■^^ Take pouder of Talck (made by rubbing it with 
 Pumice ftones j oi: beating it in a very hot Mortar ; or 
 filing it with a Goldfmiths fmoothing file) eight oun- 
 ces, Salis Tartari fixtecn ounces, calcine it twelve hours 
 in a wind Furnace, and let it in a Cellai-, feparating 
 that which melts, from that which doth rrot ; then cal- 
 cine this dry Calx added to four times its weight of Sal- 
 nitre, with a llrong fire, fo the Talck will be melted into 
 a clear white mafs, which being fet in a Cellar will turn 
 to a clammy liquor. 
 
 This rponderfdly whitcr.s and hemtifies the Skin, an(U^l»s 
 an>/iyfpots and freckles from the Face : li^-t yonmul} norHavc 
 the liqmr long on, but rvafh it off with dccoclion of Wheat Br any 
 that it corrode not the Skin. 
 
 II. To make the S^in foft and fmooth. 
 
 The Face being very clean, by the tenth Sedion of the 
 firrt Chapter, w^alh it very well with a Lixivium of Salt 
 of T.irlar, and after tliat anoint it Avith Pomatum ; or 
 which is better, Oil of fivcct Almonds, doing this every 
 Night going to Bed. The Pomamm we have taught the 
 way to make in our Pharmac:>pceiaj lib. 5. cap. 4. Sefl. 22, 
 
 & 2<,. 
 
 III. A Water to cleanfe the Face from Scurf and Jl'for- 
 phew.. 
 
 Take diftilled Rain Water fi^ ounces, Juice of Liinons 
 twelve ounces, mix them, andwaih Avith it Morning and 
 Evening, anointing after it at Night going to Bed with 
 the Oil or Pomatum aforeikid. 
 
 IV. An Unguent rvhich brings the Skin to an exquiflte 
 he amy. 
 
 Take of our Pomatum one ounce, Salt of Tartar one 
 drachm, Musk twenty grains, mix them well, and ( the 
 Face or Skin being very clean ) anoint Morning and E- 
 vening. 
 
 V, A 
 
C hap. 2 . Of Pamtwg theFace^ 8^c. 381 
 
 V. A n.'onii£rf%l Cof.yjjtikk cf great }^orth. 
 
 Take white Tartar twenty ounces, Taick, Salt, of eat '1 
 ten ounces, calcine them in a Potters Furnace verywdi ^ 
 tlien grinding; the matter upon a Marble, put it into 
 Hippocrates his Sleeve, and let it in a Cellar, or other 
 moift place for twenty or thirty days, and there wiU 
 drop from it a precious Oil ; which being rubbed upou 
 the Skin loftly with a Linnen Cloth ( the Skin being duly 
 rkanfed firlt ) takes away all kind of fpots, and makes it 
 loft and delicate. 
 
 VI. A cheap J yet excellent Cofineticl. 
 
 Take Alum in fine ponder, and iLake it with Whites 
 of new laid Eggs, being a little heated, till fuch time as 
 they grow thick to an Ointment, with which anoint the 
 i':Ke Morning and Evening three or four days 3 and it 
 will take away l]30ts and wrinkles, and make the Skin 
 grow clear and £iir. 
 
 VII. An excellent Mercurial Cofwetich prevalent again^ 
 mnl} deforrh'ities cf the Skin. 
 
 Take Mercury purified from all blacknefs half a pound. 
 Mercury Suhlimate in pouder as much, mix them in a 
 Stone or Marble Mortar ; put them into an Alembick o£ 
 a firait Orifice, put on dilHlled Vinegar, till all De co- 
 A-ercd three or four fingers, letting it ttand four days, dai- 
 ly ilirring the lame at certain times, then it extracts a 
 Ttvhitiiii Pouder ; the whitilli Vinegar by inclination fe- 
 parate, rejecting it, and put on other Vinegar : the pou- 
 der at bottom keep fo for fome days : which labotir y '..i 
 muit io often reiterate, till you have abundance of that 
 while pouder, which dry, and keep for ufe : anoint widi 
 it", by mixing with it a little dilfiUed Rain Water, and it 
 wall take away all blemillies of the Skin, as alfo Tetters. 
 Life it not too often, and beware you touch neither Eyes 
 rior Teeth with it. 
 
 VIII. Another of great ejiimation. 
 
 Take Mercury SHhlimate., Saccharum Saturni, of each two 
 drachms. Role Water, Juice of Limons,of each two oun« 
 ces, mix them like to an Ointment, with which anoint 
 gently at Night, and the next MotningWith. the Pomatum 
 aforelaid. 
 
 IX. To male a kind of Lac Virginis, an excellent Cof- 
 ^etick. 
 
 Take dittillcd Rain Water a quart, SdccharHm Saturn i 
 F f cryffal- 
 
382 Polygrdphices Lib. V. 
 
 crylbiUized one ounce, miK them, and then walli uith 
 the^water, being I'ettled : the fine white Ponder at bot- 
 tom, is alfo an excellent Fucus or Paint, which may be 
 laid upon the Skin, if very clean : note, ibmc ufc Vine- 
 gar inltead of Rain Water. 
 
 X. To make Oleum Tartari ^er deliquiftm. 
 
 Take Salt of Tartar, which put into a bag, with a 
 corner, in" a moift Cellar, and the Oil will diftil there- 
 from in drops : with this Oil you may mix a little fair 
 water, and wafti your Face at Night going to Bed ; and' 
 the next Morning, the Face being very clean, you may 
 wafli with the aforefaid Lac Virginis 5 thus continuing 
 for fome days, you may create an exquifite and lalting 
 Beauty. 
 
 XI. A compound Cofmetick ejieemsd by fame of great 
 force. 
 
 Take of the aforefaid Lac Firginls one ounce. Oil of 
 Tartar, aforefaid, half an ounce, mix them, with which 
 wafh Morning and Night for about a Week, or more, as 
 you fhail fee occafion ; then anoint with the following 
 Ointment. 
 
 XII. To r,iake the Cofmetick Ointment^ aforefaid. 
 Take Musk three drachms, Ambergrife two drachms. 
 
 Civet one drachm, grind them upon a Porphyre or Mar- 
 ble Stone, with Oil of Ben, and RhoJium, of each three 
 ounce?, with which anoint, as aforefaid : note, lome in- 
 ftead of the Oil of Ben, vie Oil of iivect Almonds. 
 
 XIII. A Vegetable Cof7netkk. 
 
 Befmcar your Face or Skin at Night going to Bed, with 
 the juice of Wake Robin ; it is excellent. 
 
 XIV. Ah incomparahle Cojmetick of Pearl. 
 Diill^lvc Pearls in Juice of Limons or Diliilled Vine- 
 gar, which dig,eft in 'Horfe-dung, till they lend forth a 
 dear Oil, which will fwim on the top : thii is one of 
 the mort excellent Cofmciicks- or Bcautiriers in the 
 World ; This Oil-, if mil prepared y is richly rt^orth fcven pound 
 an ounce, 
 
 XV. A Cofmetick Ointment of great worth. 
 
 Take or' our Pomatumj aforefaid, {m oiAccs, Saccljarum 
 Satfirni two ounces, mix them, and anoint Morning and 
 Evening. 
 
 XVI. Another very good for the Skin. 
 
 Mix Sacchmtm SAttfrni one drachm, in Vinegar half an 
 
 ounce, 
 
chap. 2. Of^aintifJg the Face, Sec: jSj 
 
 ounce, which mingle with the glair o: Eggs, and anoint 
 with it. 
 
 XVII. A Cofweticl wonderful to make c. pkajtng rnddy 
 Complexion . 
 
 Take Oil of Tartar four ounces, Alum, Sal Gem, of 
 each one ounce, Borax, Camphire, of each half an ounce, 
 beat them well together, to which adi of Briony water ■ 
 a Pint, diilil them in Balneo, and you will have yout 
 defire. 
 
 XVIII. Another for the fame. 
 
 Take Madder, Myrrh, Saifron, Frankincenfe, of eacfi 
 alike, bruife and iteep all in White Wine, with which 
 anoint the Face going to Bed, and in the Morning wafh. 
 it off, and the Skin will have a gallant pleafmg biufh. 
 
 . XIX. To make the Cofmetick of Aiyrrh very excellent. 
 
 Boil Eggs till they are hard, flit them and take out the 
 yolks, fin them up with poudred Myrrh, clofe them toge- 
 ther, and lay them in a moitt Cellar, and the Myrrh will 
 dilTolve into Oil. 
 
 XX. Ti m.ike a very good Wajh to whiten the Sknij and 
 give a good Corripicxion. 
 
 Take Limons, Hens Eggs boiled, of each ttvelve oun- 
 ces, Turpentine eight ounces, diriil all in Balneo Marine, 
 with which wajfh : when you wafh, you may drop into 
 it a drop, two or three of Oil of Oranges or Cinnamon, 
 for fragrancy lake. 
 
 XXI. A Cofmetick to wake a rough Skin fmooth. 
 
 Take fweet Almonds blanched four pound, moiflen 
 them with Spirit of Wine and Rofe Water mixt toge- 
 ther, of each two ounces, beat them together, and fry 
 them ; and when they begin to Imoak, put them into 
 a Bag, and prels them ( in a Prefs made for that pur- 
 pole) and there will come forth a very clear Oil ^ 
 which put into Rain Water, and beat it till it is exceed- 
 ins; white. 
 
 Ff2 CHAP. 
 
J 84 Polj/graphices Lib. V. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of Cofmetkksy rvhicb remedy the various Vices 
 of the Skin, 
 
 I. 'T'O tah avpay Sun-hHrnings. 
 
 -■• To the gliir of ten Eggs put to it Sugar-candy one 
 ounce, and anoint with it going to Bed : or anoint with 
 the ]uice of Sow-bread at Night going to Bed • and in 
 the Morning with Oil Ompkacine. The like cfteds hath 
 our Lac Firginis, at the ninth Se6lion of the fecond 
 Chapter, as'allo Oleum Tartar i, and other things of Hke 
 nature. 
 
 II. To tah away Rehiefs and Pimples. 
 Firlt prepare the Skin by batliing it often with the 
 decodtion of Wheat-bran, and applying Pultifes of 
 Bread, Milk and Oil thereto : when the Skin is thus 
 fupplcd and rariHcd, you may cure them either hy our 
 Liquor of Talck, at the firft Section of the fecond Chap- 
 ter, or Mercurial Cofmetick at the fcventh Se6tion of the 
 lecond Ciiapter, or our Lac Fin^^inis and Oil oi Tartar at 
 the ninth and tentJ] Section of tiic fecond Chapter, or by 
 often walliing with juice of Limons. 
 •III. To take aivay Freckles. 
 
 Take juice of Limons,. put it into a Glafs-bottle, to 
 vvhicii put fine Sugar, and Borax m poudcr, digett it 
 eight days in Sand, tlicn ufe it ; or mix Sal Tart.vi with 
 VVhitesof Eggs, and apply it ; or often ufe our com- 
 i30und Colinctick at the eleventh Seition of the fecond 
 Chapter, or Oil of Tartar alone, for fome Weeks ; but 
 if all fail, you muft have rccourlc to our Liquor of Talck 
 at the fird Scdion of the fecond Chapter, or Mercurial 
 Cofmetick at the Icventh Scdion of the fiid lecond 
 Chapter. 
 
 IV. To take away ff^ots from the Face or Skin. 
 
 This is done by anointing Avith Oil of Tartar for ten 
 
 days ; and after all that to walli it with a Lixhmnt of 
 
 Qukk-lime in which Sal-armoniack liath been diffolved 
 
 .^r a I0112 time : or you may ule the Cofmetick at the 
 
 tliird Se3tion of the fecond Chapter camphorated. 
 
 ^ V. T9 
 
Cha p. ^ . Of remedying Vices of the Skin, 3 S 5 
 
 V. To cleanje a fcurfy Skin. 
 
 It the Creature be fat, foment firft with a Lixivium of 
 Salt of Tartar ; biit if lean, make a Fomentation of Bor- 
 rage, Buglofs, and Mallow leaves, which ufe for fome 
 days : this being done, Bathe the place where the fcurf 
 is, with Splritm Nicot'un.t made by fermentation, which 
 being dried in, anoint firfl with Oil of Tartar, then with 
 Oil of Almonds ; repeating the three lad works fo often 
 till the fcurf goes away. 
 
 If all thefe fail, yon mufl have rccourfe to our Liqmr of 
 Talckj or Adercurial Cofmetklz ; or thofe at theffth and eighth 
 Se^iion of the fecond Chapter, which without doubt mil perform 
 your defire. 
 
 VI. To free the Skin from Tetters and Ring-worms. 
 Diffolve Sublimate one ounce in a Glafsof RedWinc 
 
 by boiling, with w^hich wafh the place Morning and 
 Evening, letting it dry of it felt, for three or four days 
 together, and it will certainly cure : if they be not in- 
 veterate, our Liquor of Talck at the lirtt Section of the fe- 
 cond Chapter, or Mercurial Cofmetick may fufficient- 
 ly do ; or you may anoint with this ointment. Take 
 Sal' Tar tar i two drachms, burnt Alum three drachms, 
 poudcr and incorporate with Whites of Eggs : . Or this. 
 Take Sulphur vive three drachms , Camphire on^ 
 drachm, Hogs-greafe two ounces, m\% and make an 
 Ointment. 
 
 VII. To tah away Wrinkles from the Skin. 
 
 Take Oil of Almonds, lees of Oil Olive, and make 
 them into an Ointment with Wax, pouder of Camphire 
 and Maftich, with which anoint. Oil of Myrrh to a- 
 iioirit with, is eminent in this cale : or walli with a de- 
 codtion of Briony roots, and Figs, of each alike : or dif^ 
 foive Gum Tragacant in Lac Virginis, and walh with 
 that. Excellent good is a rtrong decodlion of Pomegra- 
 nate Peels in White Wine, to walh often with. 
 VIII. _ To take away Warts. 
 
 The Juice of the greater Spurge with Salt, anointed, 
 takes them away, fo alfo a continual walliing with a 
 Lixivium of Quick-lime and Salt of Tartar. The Juice 
 of Verrucma performs the lame. A Plailter of Cantha- 
 rides, with a defenfative, is very good in this cafe : fo 
 alfo this following Wafh ; Take Saccharum Saturni three 
 ounces, Sd-armoniack one ounce, Vitriol common fix 
 F f 3 drachmsj 
 
^S6 Polygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 drachms, Quick-lime ei^ht ounces, boil all in water four 
 pound, to the confumption of the half, with which often 
 bath the Warts, and then walh with our Mercurial wa- 
 ter. Black So.'p hath often been found very good j but 
 efpecially a Flaifhr of Turpentine. 
 
 IX. To heal Chaps in the Skin. 
 
 Our Tomatmi in this cafe is moft excellent : yet thii> 
 following is commendable. Take Capons ^reafe mixed 
 well with Camphire, and anoint with Oil ot Turpentine 
 two drachms, mixed with \Jn7uentHm Populeon two oun- 
 ces. So alio Oil of Rofes mixed with Sheep Suet and 
 Wax to an Ointment. 
 
 X. To heal Burnings and Scoldings. 
 
 Excellent good is the Vngiicntum Bithrum in our 
 Synopfts A'fedicinte, both to draw out the fire, and to 
 heal. To draw out the foe alfo, glair of Eggs mix- 
 ed with Role Water, is very prevalent : lo alfo is 
 Salt, raw Onions, Soap, Yeft, Oil of Tartar, and the like. 
 To hinder the rifing ottheBlifterSjHens dung three oun- 
 ces, mixed with Hogs greafc four ounces, and Salt of 
 Tartar one ounce is very good 5 fo alfo a Cataplafm 
 of Honey and Caims of Bread ; but bcil: of all a plai- 
 ner of lirained Opiums with Oil and Wax, which per- 
 forms all the intentions to admiration. If the Blifter 
 break, it may be prefently skinned by anointing with 
 Oil of Eggs, and waOiing often with Lac F'irginis, Itrew- 
 ing upon tlie lore, ppuder of Bole, Tutty, Cerufe, or the 
 like. 
 
 XI. To title away Scars and Maris of the Swall Pox* 
 Take of Oil ot Tartar one ounce and half, Cerufe dif- 
 
 folvedin Oil of Roles one ounce, Borax and Sd Gem oi 
 each one drachm, mix and make an Ointment, with 
 whicli anoint. Oil of Tartar alone performs this work 
 well : lo Salt of Tartar, mixed with poudcr of Myrrh and 
 Oil of Roles. But Emplaft. EpiJ'pai?icum is infallible and 
 fafe. 
 
 XII. To heauti§e the Hands. 
 
 To make them ibit, often anoint with tl;e Oil of ^1- 
 jnonds or our Vowaium at Night going to BeJ, waOiing 
 them ihc next Morning widi dccocVion of Whcat-bian : 
 after a wiiile waii them with Salt of Tartar, dilToIved 
 in fair water, perfumed with Oil of Cloves, Oranges, 
 Rliodmi'i .-.r Ci (..ivron. o, rliif, Ti':f T'niirc Soap dil- 
 
 lolvcd 
 
Chap. ^ . Of remedying Vices of the Skin, ^8 1 
 
 folved in Juice of Limons one pound, Virgin-honey four 
 ounces, Sublimate, Orrice root, Sugar, Salt of Tartar, A- 
 lum, Borax, of each one ounce, Balfam of Peru, two 
 drachms, Oil of Cloves one drachm. Oil of Rhodium and 
 Cinnamon of each half a drachm, make a mixture. to 
 wafli the hands withal : Or this, take pouder di Venice 
 Soap one pound, Orrice Root eight ounces, Amylum fix 
 ounces, mix them and make an Ointment with UqnU 
 Storax and Oil of Benjamin a fufficient quantity ,• it 
 wonderfiilly whitens, fmooths and foftens the hands. To 
 anoint alfo with Bulls Gall is very good. 
 
 XIII. To help hands which arefwoln, and look red or blfte 
 Tviih cold. 
 
 What we even now faid ( in the latt Section ) may be 
 faid again here : to -which' we add, that a long bathing 
 bf them in a lather of Caftle Soap, is very good : 
 or if a repercuflive Plaifter be applied made of Bar- 
 Icy meal, Saccharum Satirml, and Oil of Myrtles ; 
 vv^alliing ( after the coming off of the Cataplafm ) with 
 Juice of Limons or White-wine Vinegar*: a Plainer of 
 Turpentine mixed with Salt is good. Often to anoint 
 the hands with Oil of Rofes, Almonds, or Pomatum at 
 Night, and the next Morning with the Lac Virginls pre- 
 vails much. Oil of Annifeeds, Caraways and Fennel 
 prepared Chymically, as alio Cloves and Oranges, mix- 
 ed -with Oil of Almonds, and often ufed, are eminent 
 above all other things. 
 
 XIV. To wale the Skin f oft, fmooth and white, take ajt>ay 
 Pimples, Morphew, Scurfy &c. 
 
 Bath the places affeded, well. Morning and Night, 
 with Powers of Rofcnrary, Amhcr or Limons, and you will 
 have your defure in fome lliort time with advantage. 
 Thefe things arc beyond all iiitherto named« 
 
 iF f 4 C H A E 
 
'588 Polygraphlces Lib. V. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Other AdmirAble Bcauf/fiers, 
 
 I. *TpO remedy the evil cnlottr of the Green Sichnejs. 
 
 *■ Take Crocus Mirtis aperitive, Harts horn cal- 
 cined in fine ponder, ot each an ounce ; double refined 
 Sugar two ounces : mix them. Dole two drams Morn- 
 ins; and Evening, wafhing it down with a Glals ot White 
 Wine. 
 
 n. For Sore nnd Bleared Eyes, or a [harp humor in thcw. 
 
 Take Damak Rofe Water a Pint, Sricchamm S.iturni 
 a dram ; mix anddiflolve : drop it 3, 4, 5, or 6 times a 
 day into the Sore, Rhcumntick or Inflamed Eye. 
 III. For Sore and WtCfiin^ Eyes. 
 
 Take fair water three Quarts ; and being boiling hot, 
 put into it fine Bole one ounce, w^hitc Vitriol fix drams, 
 Camphire one dram ; digeft upon the faeces a Week, and 
 decant the clear for ule It cures Sore Jiunning Eyes, 
 tilllorts of Ulcers, Tetters, Ring-worms, Scabs, C^r. be- 
 ing in' thefe larter cafes ufed twice a day, half an hour 
 tit a time, as ho: as the Patient can endure it. 
 
 IV. To remove rhe filrhy colour of the Tellnw Jaundice. 
 Give the part}' Morning and Evening a brge fpoonful 
 
 of the black Tindture of Iron, ( made by putting old 
 Nails into White Wine, anddigcfting them together fur 
 fome Months, lliaking the Bottle once a day ) this clear 
 Mack Tinclure you may give in White Wine or Ale, as 
 the Patient likes beft. Ir cures alfo the Grcen-fickncfs, 
 and provokes the terms in \'\'omen. 
 
 V. For Fir^pleSy and other Deformities of the Face and 
 Skin. 
 
 Take Damask Rofe-water a Gallon : Salt Peter in fine 
 ponder half.a pound ; mix and diifolve over a gentle 
 heat, and keep it for ufc. Wafn often the Face and Skin 
 therewidi, it admirably clears it from almofi- all Dcfor- 
 jcities. 
 
 • VI, Another fcr the fame. 
 
 T;ike Dama.-k Rofe-water a Gallon, Oil of Sulphur an 
 Ounce ; mix and let the Patient walh th;.rewith Morn- 
 ing 
 
Chap.4» Other Admirable Bemi fey Si 389 
 
 jng and Evening. If it is too fharp, you may put in 
 'more Rofe-water : it is good againlt Pimples, Tetters 
 Ring-worms, Scurf, Morphew, Leprofie, Freckles, &c. 
 
 VII. Another mixture excellent againfi rednefs of the 
 Face and Pimples. 
 
 Take fair water two Quarts, White Wine Vinegar a 
 Gallon, Lime Juice a Qiiart, Spirit of Wine or Brandy 
 three Pinf^^, mix them ; walli herewith two or three times 
 a day. 
 
 VIII. A Cofmetich again/} Freckles. 
 
 Take Flower of Sulphur, Salt Peter, of each two oun- 
 ces j Juice of Limons a pint and half ; Brandy, fair Wa- 
 ter, of each a Pint; mix", digeft in Sand for 14 days, 
 and keep the Water upon the Faeces : wa(h with it 
 twice a day, and Jet Cloths wet therein dry upon the 
 Freckles. 
 
 IX. Another againft Pimples, Scurf, JUforpherv, Scabs, 
 Freckles, &c. 
 
 Take fair Water a Gallon ; Spirit of Wine two Quarts ; 
 Oil of Salt four or five ounces : mix them, and ^valli 
 therewith twice a day. 
 
 X. Another Cofmetick. 
 
 Take Corroftve Sublimate made into fine pouder ( be- 
 tween pieces of ftrong Paper and Leather, and beaten 
 Tvith a Hammer, that its Atomes may not fly into 5X)ur 
 Mouth, Noftrils, and Eyes : ) one ounce ; put it into 
 boiling Water a Gallon ; when it is diifolved put to it 
 three Gallons of Damask Rofe-water, and keep it for 
 life. With this W' ater touch or wafh Scabs, Pimples, 
 King-worms, Tetters, Scurf, Morphew, Freckles, Len- 
 tils, &c. twice or thrice a day, and it will cure. 
 
 XI. Another Cofmetick. 
 
 Take Crumbs of Wheat Bread hot out of the Oven 
 four pounds ; glair of Whites of Eggs N® xvii;. Goats 
 Milk two Gallons ; Shells of Eggs N'^ xviij. burnt white j 
 mix, and diftil off the Water in a Glais Alembick, with 
 a gentle fire. It is good againrt fpots and rednefs of the 
 Face. 
 
 XII. Another excellent Cofmetick. 
 
 Take Ox Galls N° vj. Roch Alum, Nitre, of each two 
 ounces j Flowers of Sulphur one ounce ; Borax, Gam- 
 phire, of each half an ounce -, the grols ingredients be- 
 ing in fine pouder, mix them with the Galls, and Ihake 
 
 them 
 
g^ Poljoraphices ' Lib. V. 
 
 them together for a quarter of an hour, tvtrj day for a 
 fortnight ; then let all fettle, decant the clear, and fil- 
 ter through brown Paper, and keep it for ufe. It is an 
 excellent Beautlficr. 
 
 XIII. A Cenr-Cloth to lay over the Face all Night, to mah 
 it foft and fmooth. 
 
 Take white Bees Wax four ounces, SheepsSuet, Spernja 
 Cstiy of each two ounces ; Oil of Ben, Camphirc, of each 
 cne ounce ; melt all together, and fprcad it thin upon 
 Cloth, and fo apply it over the Face every Night. 
 
 XIV. To dcarije the Hands and Face, and make the?i; 
 Jphite^fo^tj and fmooth. 
 
 Take Water two or three Gallons ; Calves Feet a 
 liifficient quantity ; boil all together, and make a good 
 firong Gclly ; ftrain boiling hot through a double FLin- 
 nel bag : add to it half the Qinntiiv of the Juice of Li- 
 mon?, filtred through brown Paper, boil to a confidence, 
 and keep it for ufe : -walli Morning and Evening the 
 Hands and Face with this Geily, and it will make an 
 txcellent Skin. 
 
 XV. A Wajh for a Tannd Face. 
 
 Take Wheat Bran a quarter of a Peck : WHnte Wine 
 Vinegar three ■ Quarts ; infule warm for one Night : 
 then add twenty Egg^? beaten all together, lliells and all j 
 mix, and diitil m a Glafs Balnea to dr^'uefs : fb will you 
 fcave a Water, which will add an admirable Beauty to 
 tl]e Face. 
 
 XVI. Another excellent Water for a Tannd and Sun- 
 lurnt Skin. 
 
 Take Barley Water, the fccond water made of hull'd 
 Barley, and filtred r'lrough brown Paper, a Gallon ; Tin- 
 cture of Balfam of Peru four ounces j miK thcin together, 
 and keep it for ufe. It is fiid to clear the Skin, make 
 the Flelli plump, and take away wrinkles, if long ufed, 
 and preferves Youth and Beauty : your Face ought al- 
 ways to be wafli'd very clean bctore vou ule it. 
 
 XVH. To CfirePiiji't}es,Pm.pleSj Ruhufh Inching, Ring- 
 Tforr,:s, Tetter s^ Scurf, A/orpl:e;v, and oiher like Defornsities 
 cf the Face and Skin. 
 
 Take choice White Wine Vinegar, a Gallon : Juice 
 of Lumons filtred tlirough brown Paper, a Quart: BraA- 
 dy a Pint : mix them and keep it for ufe. Sprinkle this 
 jfcjuKturc upon a Chafing-du^i of Coals, and receive the 
 
 Fumes 
 
Chap. 5. Ofclea?2fmg the Teeth. ^91 
 
 Fumes of it upon your Face, Hands, Arms, or other parts 
 afFc6ted, three or four times a day -, and continuing this 
 courfe tor fbme few days, it will effediially cure thofe 
 difeafes aforenamed. 
 
 XVni._ ^«^ excellent Pomatum for the Face, Lips,8cc. 
 
 Take Oil of Ben fixteeri ounces ,• choice tryed Mutton 
 Suet, or Lamb Suet, four ounces ; melt them together ; 
 and colour it of a reddiOi bluOi, by putting into it M- 
 kanet Roots : with this you may anoint as you fee occa- 
 fion. It wliitens ajid foftens' the Skin, being often 
 ufed. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of clears fmg the Teeth, 
 
 I. "Tp O cleanfe Teeth r^hich ere furred over. 
 
 •*- Rub them every Mornins;, and every time after 
 catmg with Crernor Tartcri in fine pouder ^ and then 
 walli them with this mixture. Take fair watcrj a Oucrt ; 
 White WtneF'jnegar, a Pint^ Juice of Limons, halfaPint ; 
 White Port Wine, a Pint and half ; Brandy, half a Pint ; 
 mix thenj, to make a walli for the Teeth. 
 
 II. Another excellent Wafh for thcjap^e. 
 
 Take redified Spirit of Wine a Pint ; Oil of Sulphur 
 an ounce ; mix them : this makes them purely ckan ; 
 liril wafli or rub them with this, and then afterwards 
 w^afh them with fair warm water. 
 
 III. To Tyhiten hlack Teeth. 
 
 Take Sjrup of Rofes fixteen ounces ; Damask Rofe- 
 water twenty ounces ; Spirit of Sulphur, or Vitriol, four 
 pounds ; mix tliem. Firil rub your Teeth with a cloth 
 dipt in this Liquor, then wafh your Mouth in Damask 
 Rofe-^vater- 
 
 ly. yi Pouder to cleanfe the Teeth rphenftirrd. , 
 
 Take Red or White Coral, which beat to Pouder and 
 levigate upon a Porphyre, with Damask Rofe-water ; 
 dry it, and keep it for ule : Avith this rub the Teeth twice 
 a day. Some ufe pouder of Bricks, which if fine, is good, 
 being mixt with a little ' Honey. After rubbing th« 
 
 Tcetli 
 
^92 Polygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 Teeth ivith thefe Poudcrs, walli them with fair water, or 
 Role-water. 
 
 V. Another for the fame. 
 
 Take Allic- oi^ Rolcmary-branche?, a pound ; Rofe 
 Vinc|vir q. s. digLft^xxiv.hours, then dry it, and keep the 
 poud-.r to rub your Teeth Avith. 
 
 VI. Another for the fanie. 
 
 Take levigated Poudcr of Crabs Eyes and Claws, and 
 of red Coral, Ponder of burnt Harts-horn, ana four oun- 
 ces ; Salt of Wormwood one ounce: mix them, aiid make 
 a Pouder. 
 
 VII. Another Ponder for the Teeth. 
 
 Take Puinice-lbne in' fine Pouder, Coral levigated, 
 Brick-durt, of each a pound ; Catechu twelve ounce=; ; 
 Orrice Root, c'2,lit ounces : mix and make a Pouder to 
 rub the Teeth with, Morning and Evening : wafhing 
 them after wardb with a mixture oi c> jual parts of Damask 
 Rofe-water, fair water, and White Wine Vinegar. 
 
 VIII. To V(hiten black Teeth. 
 
 Take Roic-water a Gallon ; Oil of Sulphwr four oun- 
 ces ; mix them. Tye a Rag to the end of a ftick, dip it 
 in the former water, and Icowrc the Teeth therewith ; 
 this do Icveral times, Morning, Noon and Night, till the 
 blackncfs is gone j then rub tlicm with Oil Ben, perfu- 
 med with a few drops of Oil of Cinnamon. 
 
 IX. To l.iftcn loofe Teeth. 
 
 Firll rub the Teeth with this- Pouder. Take Catechu, 
 Roch-Alnm, of each alike quanthy in fine Ponder^ mix them^ 
 and rub the Teeth mth the fame. Then waih with this : 
 J^ Damask Rofc-water a Quart, ifrong Tinthnre of Catech:^ 
 fx ounce:, mix them : and after that Avalli them with the 
 beft Red Wine, Morning, Noon and Night : and every 
 Night going to Bed lay fre("h or green Scur\'-y-grals be- 
 tween the Cheeks, Lips and Teeth all Night. 
 
 X. To Cure Teeth Vyhich are Rotting. 
 
 Take Harts-horn calcined and levigated, magifhry of 
 Coral, of each four ounces; Qrricc in poudcr fix ounces; 
 Oil of Rhodium a dram : mix them for a Dentifrice to 
 rub the Teeth withal. It will keep them white and 
 fcund. 
 
 XI. Another for the fame. 
 
 Take Harts horn calcin'd and levigated. Salt of Tartar 
 fulphuratcd, of each eight ounces ; mix them for a Den- 
 tifrice, 't»s exocilent. XII, A 
 
Chap. 6. Of making a Jtveet Breath. 595 
 
 XII. ^ Liqmr t(k cleanfe them. 
 
 If you do but touch them twice or thrice a day vv ith 
 my SpiritHs Apsriens, it will in a little time make them 
 as white as it is pollible for them to be ; after ufmg of 
 which each time, you may walli your Mouth with fair 
 water. 
 
 XIII. Where the Teeth are P^otten and. Hollon\ 
 Make httle Pellets of fJrained Opium, and Myrrh^ 
 
 with a few drops of Oil of Caraways, and put them 
 into the hollow Teeth ; repeating it as oft as need re- 
 quires. 
 
 XIV. To help or eafe the Pain of the Teeth. 
 
 - If the Teeth are hollow, fill the hollo wnefs with fome 
 of the former Pellets : Or make fmall Pellets of our Lm- 
 cianum^ and a little Lint, and ufe them as the former ; 
 but if they be not hollow, lay long Rolls of our Laada- 
 nnm made up v,4th Lint, all Night between the Cheek 
 and Teeth, or Gums, repeating, the application two or 
 three times in the Night, and if the Pain is vehement, 
 take alfo inwardly two or tlirce (3rains of the fame Lan- 
 dannm. , 
 
 XV. 71? Help or Cure the StinUng of the Teeth. 
 
 If they ftink much, often walh then with Damask 
 Rofe-water, a little lliarpned with Oil of Sulphur ; or 
 with Brandy, a little lliarpned with Oil of Vitriol ; or 
 with Spring Water, lliarpned with choice Juice of Li- 
 mons I or with Tincture of Cinnamon made in common 
 Brandy j and you muli: be always fiire to ^valli them 
 ivith lome of the former things ; or with fair water mixt 
 with White Wine, or White Wine Vinegar, after Eat^ 
 ing : and this is daily to be continued till the Cure is 
 abfolutely compleated. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of mahmg a Srveet Breath. 
 
 I. A Stinking Breath comes from one of thcfe four caw- 
 
 ^^ les, vU. from rotten and defeilive Teeth ; putri- 
 
 fied Lungs ; or Ob^rudion of the Stomach j or a Diftem- 
 
 per of the Head. 11. To 
 
394 Poljgraf bices Lib. V 
 
 II. To Cure it when it proceeds frofn Rotten Teethyf>ic. 
 
 This is to be' cured by the directions given in the for- 
 mer Chapter, of which we h:ivc ipoken largely enough, 
 lb that no more need be laid in tliis place. 
 
 III. To rer/;edy a jf inking Breath, nhen it proceeds from 
 futrified Lungs. 
 
 Outw^ardly anoint the Breft and Stomach with Juice 
 of Tobacco, boiled to a thicknefs, mixt with an equal 
 quantity of Oil of Amber. In^vardly give Balfam of 
 Sulphur Morning and Evening, and in all that the Pa- 
 tient drinks in the day t'mc, lomeDropSyW<-. 20, 30, or 
 40 Drops at a time or our Spirit tu Aperiens. 
 
 \Y. Some other Ren:edies for the fame purpofe. 
 
 Give inwardly the Anifated Balfam of Sulphur, Mot- 
 nlng and t\ening 15, or 20, or 25 Drops, made into a 
 Bolus w^ith double refined Sugar ; at Ten in the Morn- 
 ing, and Three in the Afternoon, give half a dram o^Be- 
 z,oar Minerale, or Antimonmni Di.^.phoreticMm, or as much 
 of Antihe^iciim Poterijy or a Scruple of Arcanum Jovis^ 
 made up into a Bolus with Syrup of Green Ginger. Let 
 him alto now and then eat a Race oi Green Ginger, and 
 drink after it a Glals of good Re I Florence Wine. Thefe 
 things being taken for leveral Days, or Weeks, at laft 
 conlummate the Cure -with this : In the Morning, and 
 at four Afternoon, let him take this Bolus : TAe Catechu 
 in fine ponder, NH'.n;egs in poudcr, Bez,oar mincralj of each 
 /in ounce ; Oil of Cinna'/Kon x:<:. dr'tps : choice Honey enough 
 to make it into an ElcEiuary ; Dofc as much as a Chefnut 
 at a time : and at Night let him take this. Va Venice 
 Turpentine two ounces , Catechu in fine ponder q- s. mix 
 md make Pills : Dole, a dram every Night at Bed 
 tune. 
 
 V. A Siinhng Breath from Vijlcmpcr of the Stomach. 
 
 This is cured ty opening and cleanling the Stomach : 
 firlt Vomit with Vmum Benedtcium one ounce, or more, 
 as Itrength requires, which may be repeated two or three 
 times : or you may Vomit in like manner with Tartar 
 Emetic k, or fome other Antimonial Vomit, or with P^i- 
 negar or Wine, or Oxymel of Sipils : this done, you may 
 purge the Bowels with our Farrtiiy Pills four or five times, 
 and after that, every Morning tailing the Patient may 
 take a Scruple o[ Pil.Rujfi, or three drams of Elixir Pro- 
 ^rietatis for ten or twelve times, cither aery day, or" eve- 
 ry 
 
Chap. 6. of making a fweet Breath, ^^5 
 
 ry other day, in the Morning farting, drinking after it 
 fome warm Broth or PolTet-drink. 
 
 VL A Stinking Breath' from Dijhmper of_ the Head, 
 
 You are to confider the Caufe of the Diftemper, whe- 
 ther it is from Apoftems, the Pox, Leprofie, Elephantia- 
 fis, &c. and then to purfue the Method uled in the Cure 
 of thofe Difeafes ; for fo the Cauie being taken away^ 
 the Effeds will foon ceafe. Yet neverthelefs, if the Pa- 
 tient will be pleafed to take fome few Dofes of the Pi- 
 luLi Lunares every other Night at Bed time, or every third, 
 or fourth Night, he will find a Satisfadion beyond ail 
 Expe6lation. 
 
 VIL A Stinking Breath from Ulcers of the Nofe, ThroAt, 
 or Mouth, 
 
 This cannot be cured but by curing of thofe Ulcers : 
 if they be not inveterate and Ikibborn, they may be cured 
 with this Walh : Take Aqua Regnlata two ounces : Tin- 
 Bure of Catechu one ounce : Honey, enough tofppeeten mithkl: 
 with this gargle or wafli the Throat, Mouth or Nole, 
 three or four times a day : if this will not do, you muft 
 ufe the Water of the Griffen, which feldom lails, though 
 the Ulcers be never fo rebellious : but if all thefe things 
 f'lil, you mud make ufe of this. Take Damask Rofe-water 
 fvc oannces : Pomrs of Mercury tvoo Arams j mix them * 
 and therewith gargle or walh the Parts affeiled three or 
 four times a day, this will not fail. 
 
 VIII. To re^ifie the Breath when it fmells of any thing 
 that is eaten. 
 
 Chew Coriander Seeds or Zedoary in the Mouth, or Ja-' 
 maica Pepper, drinking a draught of Wine after it : or you 
 may chew the Perfumed Grains of Catechu, which wilt 
 give the Breath an incomparable Odour, beyond moii 
 other things. 
 
 C H A^ K 
 
^^6 Poljgraphiees. Lib. V. 
 
 CHAP. VIL 
 Of Beautifyiffg the Hair, 
 
 I. T^O dye the Hair black. 
 
 J- This is done with the Calx of Lmia ( made by 
 Spirit of Nitre) mixed with fair water, and the Han 
 walhed therewith, with a Spungc : it is the moft excel- 
 lent thing of th.at kind that is yet known. 
 
 II. To keer> the Hair from falling off. 
 
 Take Myrtle-berries, Galls^Emblick MjTobalans, of 
 each alike, boil them in Oil T)mphacine, with which 
 anoint ; it is an excellent Medicine, yet as old as Ga- 
 len. 
 
 III. To remedy Baldnefs. 
 
 This is a hard thing to cure, yet the following things 
 are very good. Rub the Head or bald places every Mor- 
 ning very hard with a coarle Cloth, till it be red, anoin- 
 ting immediately after Avith Bears greafe : when ten or 
 fifteen days are paft, rub every Morning and Evening 
 %vith a bruifed Onion, till the bald places be red, then 
 anoint with Honey well mixed with Muftard-leed, ap- 
 plying over all a Plaliter of Labdan'/.m mixed with Mice- 
 dung, and Pouder of Bees : do this for thirty days. If 
 all the former fail, bath with a decodtion of Bur-dock 
 roots, n^dc with jl Lixivuim ( of Salt of Tartar) two 
 parts, and Muskadcl one part 5 immediately applying 
 this lilnguent : take Thaffi 01 Turbith one dram (in 
 pouder ) Bears-greale one ounce, mis them, which ule 
 for fixty days ; if this make not the Hair come, the de- 
 fcd is incurable. 
 
 IV. To take aw/'.y Hair from places mhere it f}?oiild not 
 grorp. 
 
 Take Quick-lime four ounce?, A-^ripi^nientum one 
 ounce and a half, Sulphur vive. Nitre, ot each half an 
 Giiwzc^ Lixivium of Salt of Tartar a quart, mix and boil 
 all 10 long in a glazed earthen pot, till puituig a quill 
 therein, all the feathers peel off, and it is done. Firlt 
 foment the place with warm water a little before you 
 ufe the aforelaid Medicine ; a quarter of an hour after 
 
 waflii 
 
Chap. 7. Of making the Hair grorv: ^gj 
 
 wafh v/ithvery hot water ; then anoint with the afore- 
 faid Unguentj and in a quarter of an hour it will do the 
 work, when the hairs ai*e fain avvray, remember to anoint 
 with Oil of Rofes ; now to keep them from ever grow- 
 ing again, anoint for fome da^^s with an Ointment 
 made of the Juice of Henbane and Nightihade, Opium 
 and Hogs-greafe. 
 
 V. To wake the Hiiir curl. 
 
 Walli the hair very well with a Lixivhim of Quick- 
 lime, then dry it very well, that done, anoint it with Oil 
 of Myrtles, or Oil Omphacinej and pouder it well with 
 Sweet Pouder, putting it up every Night under a Cap : 
 if the party be naturally of a cold and moift Conititution, 
 the waflning, anointing and pondering muft be perpe- 
 tually ufed once or twice a Week during Life, the Hair 
 being put up every Night. 
 
 VI. To mah Hair lank and jif.g that cp.rls too much. 
 Anoint the Hair throughly twice or thrice a Week with 
 
 Oilof Lillies, Rofes, or Marlli-mallows, combing it after 
 it very well. 
 
 VII. To m^le the Hair grow long and/oft. 
 
 Diiiil Hogs-greafe or Oil Olive in an Alembick, with 
 the Oil that comes there -from anoint the Hair, and it will 
 make it gro^v Jong and foft : ufe it often. 
 
 VIII. To preferve the Hair from fplitting at the ends. 
 Anoint the ends thereof, with Oil Omphacine, or Oil 
 
 of Myrtles, they are eminent in this cafe to preierve the 
 Mair from fplitting ; fb alfo an Ointment made of Ho- 
 ney, Bees-wax and Oil Omphacine, or Bears-greafe. 
 
 IX. To maie White Hair of a Brown colour. 
 
 Take Aqua fortis three ounces : filings of Siver two 
 penny weight, or value of Six pence, digefl in a boiling 
 Balneoj till the Silver is perfedlly diffolved, then mix with 
 it a little Strong Water -, with which wafh White Hair, 
 and it will make it of a Brown Bay color. 
 
 X. To male the Hair grow -well and thick. 
 
 Make a flrong decoilion of Tops of Hemp in Wine,"' 
 and therewith wafh the Head and Hair Morning and 
 Evening for three Weeks or a Month. 
 
 XI._ To make a Tellow Head of Hair Black. 
 Anoint the Teeth of a Comb with Oil of Tartar per 
 deliamum, and dip a Sponge in it, and do the Comb 
 with itj and Comb the Head in the Sun ( it being firlt 
 
 G g waihed 
 
^98 Polygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 vvalTicd clean with fair warm' Avater ) do this for a qaar- 
 ter ot "an hour togrther, often anointing; the Comb with 
 the Oily Sponge, and repeat it thrice a day for leven (.lays, 
 lo will the Hair become Black, afterwards you may an- 
 oint it with Oil of Rhodim7. 
 
 XII. A Water to colour the Hair hlacl. 
 
 Take Aqua fortis three ounces ; fine Silver in Leaves 
 one ounce : put them in a GlafsMatrefs, and over a gen- 
 tle fire diffolve the Silver t then add Damask Rofe-water 
 half a Pint, boil a quarter of an hour ; after add the 
 Jirice of two large Citrons ; boil again another quarter 
 of an hour, and'keep it for ufe, in a Bottle clofe ftopt. 
 When you ufe it, take four Spoonfuls thereof, and add 
 as much juice of Citrons ; warm them, and waili the 
 Hair therewith, with a bit of Sponge, taking heed that 
 you touch not your Skin, or any of your Linen, becaufe 
 It will rot it ; the Hair being wafht, let it dry on. 
 
 XIII. To ir.ah the Hair prow long. 
 
 Malce a Lye of the Aihcs of Maidenhair, Southern- 
 wood, Mullein, Hemp tops, and Cane Roots, diffolve in 
 every quart of Lye half an ounce of Myrrh, and add to 
 it an equal qiuantitv of White Wnie ; with this walh 
 the Hcr>d Morning and Evening for twenty days. 
 
 XIV. To n-iike the Hair gruw in bald places. 
 
 Firlt wafli tl.c places atfcCted very well, for almoft a 
 quartcr-of an hour, with a Deco6tion of Wheat Bran ; 
 then for a quarter of an hour, or longer, rub the faid af- 
 fected places with a large Itrong Onion cut in halves : 
 do this fu' almolt half an hour ; and afterwards anoint 
 tlje parts with this Ointment. Take Bcars-grcalis a 
 pound ; Juice of MoUy^o; of Onions, eight ounces : pou- 
 f/cr of Moufe-dung fix ounces,: Oil of Tarter per deiiqHi:mi 
 one ounce ; mi^ them, and anoint, therewith : Let all 
 this work be done two or three times a day, and conti- 
 nued for a Month compleat ; if the defomuty is not un- 
 ciuiiWe, this.wiil p^rfoxio the \\oik> 
 
 C H A P. 
 
chap. B, 9. 0/ Ter fuming in General, j^i^ 
 
 C H A P. VIII. 
 Of the Art of Perfuming in General, 
 
 1. TN this Art two things are to jbe confidered, viz. 
 
 -*- I. The way and manner of making of PerRimesJ 
 
 2. Tiie way and manner of Perfuming. 
 
 II. The Perfume it felfis confjdered, i. In relpe6l of 
 its form. 2. In relpedf of itsCompofition. 
 
 III. The Form of the PcrFume is either Water, Oil, Ef- 
 lence,Unguent,Pouder, or Tablets. 
 
 IV. The Making and Compofition is taken from the 
 Form and Matter. 
 
 V. The Matter is either Vegetable, Animal or Mi- 
 neral. . -^ ■ : , , 
 
 VI. The way of Perfuming is according to the Matter 
 to beperfiimed. 
 
 VII. The matter to be Perfumed is either Natural, as 
 Hairs, Skins, Cloths, Air, cr^. or Artificial, as Pomanders, 
 Pouders, Walli-balls, Soaps, Candles, and other tilings of 
 like nature. 
 
 C H A P. IX. 
 
 Of the Matter of which Perfumes are made, 
 
 I, ^HE ground o£ Vegetable Perfumes, is taken from 
 -*- Flovpers, Seeds, Herhs, Roots, Woods, Barks, and 
 
 Gums. 
 
 11. The chief FW^n- for this ufe, are of Clove-gilli'^ 
 
 flowers, Rofes, Jafemin, Lavender, Oranges and Saffron. • 
 HI. The chief Seeds or Fruits are Nutmegs, Cloves, Ca,--' 
 rawaySjGrains, Seeds oi Geranium Mofchatptm, Musk-feeds, 
 and the Nut Ben, which Oil is only ufed as a Vehicle. ^ 
 ! IV. T^he chief Herhs are Geranium AhfchntHm, Bafil;^ 
 Sweet Marjoram, Savory, Time, Angelica, Rpfemary, L^- 
 nnderj HyiTop, iweetTrefoil, Mint, and B^y-treeleaves. ~ 
 G§ 2 Y- The 
 
400 Polygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 y. The chief Roots are of Calamus Aromatku;, Ginger, 
 China.,Caryoph)!Uta, Indian Spickruird, and fwect Orricc, 
 or Iris. 
 
 VI. The cWiQ^ Woods are of yellow Sanders, Xylo-hal- 
 fanmmy Lignum, Aloes, RkodiMn;, Sajfafras and Cedar. 
 
 VII. The Barks and Peels are of Cinnamon, Mace, 
 Granges, Limons and Citrons. 
 
 VIII. The chief Gums are Frankinccnfe , Olibanum, 
 Labdanum, liquid Styrax, Balfamiim l^ermyj, Amber-grife, 
 Styrax Calamita, Benjamin, Amber, Camphirc. 
 
 IX. The chief matters of Perfumes taken from Ani- 
 mals, are Musk, Civet, Cow-dung, and other Turds. 
 
 X. O^ Minerals there are tvvo only, which yield a Per- 
 fume, and they are Antimony and Sulphur. 
 
 chap: X. 
 
 of the Oil of Ben. 
 
 I. 
 
 TH E little Nut which the ArMans call Ben, is the 
 lame \vhi'ch the Lajins call Nux Vnguentari.i ; 
 and the Greeks y Balanta Afy-epfua ; out of which is taken 
 an Oil, of great ulc in the Art of Perfuming. 
 
 II. 71? make iheOil of Ben. Blanch the Nut5, and beat 
 them very carefully in a Mortar, and fprinkic them with 
 Wine, put them into an Karthen or Iron Pan, and heat 
 them hot, then put them into a Linncn Cloth, anil 
 prefs them 'in an Almond Prcfs, this work repeat, till 
 all the Oil is extraded, fo have you Oil of Bin by cx- 
 preflion. 
 
 III. In like manner you may exprefs the Oil out of 
 Citron Seeds, incomparable for this purpofc, to extract 
 the fcent out of Musk,Civct, Amber, and the like, becauie 
 it will not quickly grow rank, yet Oil of the Nut B^n is 
 much better. i 
 
 IV. Tills Oil of Ben hath two properties ; the pne is, 
 that having no fcent or odour of it fell, it alters, chanr!,cs 
 Or diminilhes not the fcent of any Perfume put into it : 
 the otlier is, that it is of a long continuance, fo that it 
 
 fcarcc- 
 
Chap. IT. Of Sweet Waters, 401 
 
 fcarcely ever changeth, grows rank, cormpts, or putrifies, 
 as other Oils do. 
 
 V. To make a Perfume thereof, put the Musk, Am- 
 bes^ &c. in fine pouder, thereinto, which keep in a Glafs 
 Bottle very clofe ftopt for a Month, or more, then ufe it. 
 
 VI. Or thiu, Blanch your Nuts, and bmife them, 
 ( Hade Nuts may do, tho' not fc good ) and lay them be- 
 tween two rows of Flowers, fuppofe Rofes, Jafemin, &c. 
 or other Perfumes ; when the -Flowers have loft their 
 fcent and fade, remove them, adding frefii ones ; which 
 repeat fo long as Flowers are in fealon ; then fqueez out 
 the Oil, and it will be moft odoriferous. 
 
 VII. Laltly, by this laft you may draw a fweet fcent 
 out of thofe Flowers, out 6f which you cannot diftil any 
 f^veet water. 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 Of Sweet Waters, 
 
 I. "-v. HE firfi Sweet Water. 
 
 -*- Take Cloves in pouder an ounce, yellow San- 
 ders, Cdlamm Aromaticpts of each half an ounce, Aqua Ro- ' 
 farampdwafcenarum fifteen pound, digeft four days, then 
 diftil in an Alembick ; to this new diftilled water put 
 in pouder Cloves, Cinnamon, Benjamin, Storax Calami- 
 fa, of each half an ounce, diftil again in Balneo ; laftly put 
 the water into a glafs bottle with Musk and Ambergrife, 
 of each ten grains, keep it^clofe ftopt for ufe. 
 
 II. The jecond Sweet Water. 
 
 Take Damask Rofes exungulated three pound. Flowers 
 of Lavender and Spike, of each four ounces, Clove-gilli- 
 flowers, and Flowers of Jafemin, of each two pound. 
 Orange-flowers one pound. Citron peels four ounces. 
 Cloves one ounce, CinnamonjiromA- CalamitayBenja.mm, 
 Nutmegs, of each half an ounce, all in pouder, Aqua 
 Rofarnm fix pound, digeft ten days, then diftil in Balneo : 
 to the diftilled water add of Musk and Ambergrife of each 
 thirty grains. 
 
 g 3 m,^ 
 
402 Folj^raifhices Lib. V. 
 
 in. The thitil Sneet Water. 
 
 Take Rofes, Clove-gilliflower?, of each one pound, 
 Flowers of Rofeman-, Lavender, Jafcmiriy Marjoram, Sa- 
 vory, Tirne, of each three oun^e?, dry Citron peel=, one 
 ounce. Cinnamon, Beniamin, Stor^.x Caiimita^ of each 
 half an ounce. Nutmegs, Mace, of each one dram ; bruifs 
 the Herbs and Spices well, digert in the Sun nvo days, 
 then difBl in B^Jnfo : to the diftilled water add Musk in 
 ponder one fcruple. 
 
 IV. The founh Sifeet Water. 
 
 Take Cloves, Cinnamon, of each one dram, Mace, 
 Grains, Musk, Ambergrile, Citron peel?, of each hall' a 
 dram, Benjamin, Storax- Calamita^ of each one I'aruple, 
 Aquy. Rofar'Am twelve pound, digeft fifteen days, then di- 
 ftil in B.^.lneo. 
 
 V. The fifth Street Wetter. 
 
 Take Rofemar^-flower --ater, Orange-flower water of 
 each five pound, Ambergi ife one fcruple, digeft ten daj"?, 
 then difHl in Balneo, or keep it without dilHlling. 
 
 VI. The ftxth SrrmW.tter. 
 
 Take Rofes two pound, Macalcb, half a cbam, Am- 
 bergrile ten grams, bruile what is to be bruifed, digeft in 
 Sand three days, then diftil in Balnen. 
 "VTI. The Jn-enth Siree: Water. 
 
 Take green peels of Oranges and Citrons, of each four 
 ounces. Cloves half a dram. Flower? of Spike fix ounces, 
 ^qy.:i Rfifarum Bamajcenaram fix pound, digeft ten dapj 
 then diliil in Balneo. 
 
 VIII. The eighth Svteet Water. 
 
 Take ofthe\\'aterof the fifth Sedion fix pound. Musk 
 ten grains, m.k and digeft them for ufe. 
 iX. Tl:e ninth Sneet Wetter. 
 
 Take ^cjtf.x Rofar'^n:, Aty.ix F^rrffm de Jafcmin^ of each 
 four pound, Musk one fcruple, digeft tendays, then diltii 
 in "Sand. 
 
 X.'The tenth Svreet W^^ter. , 
 
 Take Damask-rofcs, Miisk-rofes, Orange-fiower^, of 
 each foLU' pound, Cloves ^.vo oimces, Nutmegs one ounce, 
 diftil in an Alembick, in the nofe of which hang Musk 
 three Icruples, Amber t^vo fcruples, Civet one fcruple, 
 tyed up in a rag dipt in bran, and the White of an Egg 
 mixed. 
 
 XI. nf 
 
Chap. II. . Of Sweet Wdten. 4© 5 
 
 XI. The eleventh Sweet Water, calhd Aqua Nanla, or 
 Naphe. 
 
 Take Aqua Rofaritm four pound, Orange-fiosver wa- 
 ter nvo pound, waters of fwect Tiefoil, Lavender, Sweet 
 Marjoram, cf each eight ounces, Benjamin two ounces, 
 Storax one ounce, Labdanum half an ounce, Mace, Cloves, 
 Cinnamon, Zanders, Lignum Aloes, of each one ounce, 
 Spicknard one ounce ^ all being grofly beaten, digeft a 
 Month, tliin in a glafs retort diftii in B,iln:o. 
 
 XII. The tTvelfth Sireet Water, called Aqua Mofchata. 
 Take Spirit of Wine redlified to the higheft two pound, 
 
 Musk three fcruples, Ambergrife two fcruples, Civet one 
 fcruple, digeft in the Sim t^venty days clofe ftopt in a 
 grals vt^d; a drop of this water put into any otlier li- 
 quor, will ver^- well perfiime it. 
 
 So may yoy. extract the /cent out offaeet Floners, irirh this 
 difference, that they lie hnt a little nhile, becauje iheir earihy 
 fnhjlance rcill mah the fpirit ill-favoured. 
 
 XIII. The thirteenth Sireet Water. 
 
 Take a quart of Orange-flower water, and as much ' 
 Damask Rofe-^vater : add thereto Musk- willow feeds, 
 grofly bruifed, four ounces, Benjamin two ounces, St^'rax 
 one ounce, Labdanum fix drams. Lavender flowers two 
 pugils, musked Cranesbill three pugils, Sweet Marjoram 
 as much, Calampu Aromatic m a dram, diftii all in a glafs 
 Stillatory in Balnea, the Joints being well clofed that no 
 vapor get out. 
 
 XIV. The fourteenth S^eet Water. ., 
 
 Take Beniamin, Stoi2.%Calamita, of each tvvo ounces; 
 Cloves, Winter Cmnamon in pouder, of each gee ounce j 
 Orange peels, Limon peels, ( the yellow ) of each half an 
 ounce ; Musk feeds an ounce and half ; Spirit of Wine 
 a quart : digeft twenty days, fhaking it €\-ery day : then 
 decant the clear, and add idusk, Ambergrife m fine pou- 
 der, ana five grains ; mix them well, and keep them to- 
 gether for ufe. 
 
 XV. The Queens Perfumed Water. 
 
 Take Dam.asK Rofe-water a gallon, Orange-flower- 
 water two quarts j Sweet Marjoram water, Angelica 
 water, of each a quart ; Winter Cirmamon, yellow of 
 Orange and Limon peels, Jamaica Pepper, of each two 
 ounces ; Cloves, Cinnamon^ Nutmegs, of each half an 
 ounce j yellow Sanders, Saflafras, Rhodium, of each one 
 Gg 4 ounce; 
 
404 Tolygrdphices ' Lib. V. 
 
 ouiKC ; Benjamin eight ounces : All the ingredients be- 
 ing in fine pouder, put them to the waters in a glals bot- 
 tle, adding Spirit ot Wine a qtiart ; digelt in a gentle 
 Sand hear for a Month, tlicn decant the clear water, and 
 add to it, if you lo plcafc, Musk in fine pouder a fcruple, 
 Ambergrife ten grains, tied up in a Nodule, which let 
 lye in the liquor fo Jong as it Jafts. 
 
 XVI. Another excellent Perfumed W/tter. 
 
 Take Damask Rofe-water a Gallon, Spirit ^f Wine a 
 quart ; Benjamin, i'.'^r^A- Calami: a, yellow Sanders, Mu?k 
 leeds, of each fourteen oimccs ; SafTafras, Winter Cinna- 
 mon, of each two ounces : Orrice Root three ounces ; 
 Cloves, Nutmegs, Cajjia Ligna, Wood of Aloes, yellow of 
 Limon and Orange peels, of each half an ounce : Musk 
 in fine pouder a fcruple, mixt with double refined Sugar 
 half an ounce ; the ingredients being each a part made 
 into fine pouder, mix akogether, and digeft in a gentle 
 Sand heat for fourt)' days ; and keep the Water for 
 life. 
 
 XVII. An excellent Perfumed and Colored Water. 
 Take DamasJc Rofe leaves frefli gathered, Clove-gilli-- 
 
 flowers, Violets, or any other Sweet and Aromatick 
 Flower, put them into an Alembick, and aftufe thereon 
 a fufficient quantity of fair water impregnated with Spi- 
 rits of Salt, C an ounce of Spirit to a pint of Water : ) fill 
 the Alembick fiill of the Flowers, and this impregnated 
 water: digeft xxiv. hours till you lee your water is well 
 colored ; then decant the clear liquor, i^o will it have the 
 color and fmell of the Roles, or other Flowers, as if they 
 were frelh gathered. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of Perfuming Oils and Spirits. 
 
 I. 'Tp O njohe Perfuming Oils by Jnfitfion. 
 
 ■ •*• This is taught fiilly at the hftli Section of the 
 
 tenth Chapter aforegoing. 
 
 II. To wrike Oleum ^mperiale. 
 Take Ambergrife four dram?, Storax Cahmita eight 
 • - ounces, 
 
Chap. 12. f Perfuming Oils^^c, 40^ 
 
 ounces, Rofc-water, Oh am Rofatum, of each two pound. 
 Oil ot Cinnamon and Cloves, of each half a dram, put 
 all into a glafs, and digeft in Hoife-dung twenty days : 
 this done, gently boil all for a quarter of an hour, which 
 then let cool ; with a fpoon take off tlie Oil which fwims 
 a top, to ^vhich put of Musk and Civet, of each two 
 drams, digeft all in a gentle heat for twenty days, and 
 keep it for ufe. Where note the Amber and Storax at 
 bottom will ferve to make Sweet Balls of, to Jay among 
 Cloths, or Beads to carry in ones hands j or for. a Per- 
 fume to biu-n. 
 
 III. To make Oil ,of Cinnamon. 
 
 Digeft Cinnamon grofly bruifed in fpirit of Wine, 
 fharpned with Oil of Salt, in a glafs veflel, with a blind 
 head clofely luted, in a gentle heat for ten days, then di- 
 liii in an Alembick, as we have more at large taught in 
 om PharJKAsop. Lend. lib.d^. cap.^.Jecl.i2. it is a wonderfiil 
 Perfume, the moft fragrant and pleafant of all Oils, as 
 wtH m tafte as fmell : the ufe of it will certiinly take 
 away a flinking Breath. 
 
 IV". To make Oil of Rofes, called adeps Rofarum. 
 
 Take Damask Rofcs, pickle iheni with Bay Salt, and 
 after three Months, with a large quantity of water diftil 
 in afties with a gentle fire, fo have you Oil, and Spirit, 
 or water, which keep for other diltillations. Wickerm 
 hath it thus, 
 
 Rofarum folia in umbra aliquandift ajfervara in matula, 
 "vitrea magna ponuntur, chjh^ fi[ fundus latftSy C^ ad dimi- 
 dinm vas impfetur : inde affiinditur ipfis Rojarnm foliis tan- 
 turn aqm rojaceA [tillatitiA, qaantmn jatis fuerit, m optimi 
 made ant : appof:6que pileo viirco caico, jiipaiifque optimi rl' 
 mis cera gummiata^ quindecim dlehts equinofimomacerantur : 
 Jic tamen, ut matato, ami frigejcere c(Ppr,it, fi;.vo, calor aqua- 
 lis fervetur. AppofiiO mox matula rojfrato pilco, igne mode- 
 rat o cinerum, aqua omnis elicittir : qua ntrjiis in eadem 
 matula, optime prius a fxcihm mnndain ahhtaque ponitur, 
 fT calemis aqua balneo lentijfwio igne elicittir, dim tota in. 
 I'as rccipiens aheat. Nam in fundo matuJa, remanehit oleum 
 rofarum, colore ruhrum, perjpicuum, & Afojchi odore fua-_ 
 viter fragrans. 
 
 This IS the greateft of all vegetable Perfumes, and of 
 an ineftimable value. See the Left way of making it in 
 ray Pharm. Bateana, lib. i. cap. 2.fs^. 6p. 7, 8, & 9. 
 
 y. To 
 
4e6 ToljgtAphkes Lib. V. 
 
 V. To muh Oil 0/ CAUr^r^a j4r0f>:aticni. 
 
 It is made as Oil of Cinnamon : it is a very great Per- 
 fume, helps a Stinking Breath, Vomiting, weak Memo- 
 ry, &c. 
 
 VI. To r^: ah Oil of Rhodium. 
 
 It is made as Oil of Cinnamon : is a very excellent 
 Pcrfiime, good for the Head, Breath, and the Senfes. 
 
 VII. To make. Oil rif Indutn Spicknard. 
 
 By inftifion it is inade by the firit Section ; by diftilla- 
 tion, as Oil of Cinnamon. It is an eminent Perfiime. 
 
 VIII. To make Oil of Benjamin. 
 
 Take Benjamin fix ounces in pouder, which diflblve 
 in Oil of Tartar, and Aqtij. Rojjrum, of each one pound, 
 which diliil with a dole pipe in an Akmbick. So is 
 made Oil ol S:orax and Lahdanum. 
 
 IX. To n:ake Oil of St'jr.zx compound. 
 
 Take Oil of Ben, or iiveet Almond?, one pound ; Sto- 
 rax grofly beaten four ounces ; Benjamin, Cloves, of 
 each two otmces, digefl: (till the Gums are melted) over 
 hot Coals ; then prefs out the Oil diligently. 
 
 X. To n.ake Spirit of Amher^^rife. 
 
 Take of the bell revitiiied Spuit of Wine, a pint j Oil 
 of Salt half an ounce, Ambergrife, Musk ( both in fine 
 poudcr ) of each two drams, ical up the glafs hermetical- 
 ly, and digett in a very gentle heat, till the Tincture is 
 fully drawn out ; three cr four drops of tl^s Spirit will 
 Permme a pint of any Li(]uor richly ._ Or you miay put a 
 drop or two round the brmisof a drinking-glafs ; hair a 
 Ipoontiil of it mixt with a fit Vehicle, is a rich Cordial. 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 Of Perfuming Efftnces. 
 
 J. "T* HE ir.iy to extract EJfences is fome7t>hat difficnhy 
 -*- viz. by DijIilUtion, CakinMionj Dige'iion or Men- 
 
 fintum. 
 
 II. If by a Menj^m^fij ufe not a watry One for a wa- 
 
 try Eifence ; nor an oily one for an oily EiTence • be- 
 
 caule being of like naaires, they are not eaOly fcparated ; 
 
 but 
 
Chap. 1 5 . Of ftr fuming Ejfe^jces* 407 
 
 ^it on the contiaiy,chufean oily A'fenftrmnz foraAvatry 
 EfTence, and a watry Aienjtruum for an oily ElTence. 
 
 III. IF the ElTence of any Metal be to be extraded by 
 a Corro[we A<[enjlr;mM, after the work is done, feparate 
 the Salts from the Waters, and uie only thofe Salts which 
 will be eafily taken out again ; Fhriol and Alom are ve- 
 r^' difficult to be feparated by reafon of their earthy fub- 
 Itance. 
 
 IV .- To extraB: the E [fence oyj ofA^Iusl, Amhergrife, Civet, 
 and other Spices or Aromaticks. 
 
 Mix the Perfume with Oil of Ben, which in a glafs 
 bottle fet in the Sun or Sand for ten days, then itram it 
 £'om the dregs, and the ElTence will be imbibed in the 
 Oil. Then take Spirit of Wine, and diftilled fountain 
 water, which mix with the faid Oil, and digeft for fix 
 days, then didil in Sand ; fo will the ElTence and water 
 alcend, (the Oil remaining; at bottom without any fcent) 
 that effence and water diiUl in BJneo in a glafs veffel, 
 till the water be come off, and leave the ElTence in the 
 bottom in the form of Oi!. 
 
 V. Another way to do the fame. 
 
 Infiife the matter in Spirit of Wine a fufficient quan- 
 tity, mixt with a tenth part of Oil of Salt, or Sulphur, di- 
 gelt for ten days, then dilHlin Sand, as long as any water 
 will come over ( but have a care of burning ) which di- 
 ftilled Liquor draw off in Balneo,^xith. a very gentle heat, 
 and the quintelTence will be left in die bottom, of a liquid 
 form. 
 
 Vl. To extraB the Effence om cf Herbs /md Florvcrs, as of 
 Sweet Marjoram, Ba/il, Orange-flo'iverSj Jafeminy &c. 
 
 Eruife the matter, and put it into a glafs velTel to fer- 
 ment in Horie-dung for a Month, then difliil in Bnlneo : 
 fet it in dung for a week again, and diilil in Balneo a- 
 gain ; which reiterate fo long as it will yield any liquor ; 
 put the diftilled matter upon the Capm mort'dum, diitil- 
 ling thus for fix days ; draw off the water in Balneo ; and 
 the ElTence remaining exprefs in a prels : which being a 
 week fermented in dungy will yield the perfect fcent, co- 
 lour and vertucs of the matter defired. 
 
 VII. To extraB the Effence out of Salts. 
 
 Calcine the Salt, and grind it very fmall, then lay it 
 upon a Marble in a moift Cellar, fetting under it a pan 
 to receive' the dilTolution -, therein let it ferment for a 
 
 Month, 
 
'4o8 ' Tolygyaphices Lib. V. 
 
 Month, tfien with a gentle fire diililin Biilnfo : caflaway 
 the infjpid water, which comes from it j and let tliat 
 which rcmams in the bottom, to ferment another Month, 
 then diftilout the infipid water, as before ; repeating this 
 work fo long as any infipid water may be dxawn : then 
 evaporate a^vay all the moilture, and what remains is 
 the qirintefTence of Salt. ' 
 
 Where Note, i . That thefe Saline qHintejfcnces as they may 
 te ufedy mil draw forth the perfect and compleat ejfence of any 
 vegetable rchatfoever. 2. That the ejfence of Salts thus drairn, 
 TfUl Scarcely come to trvo ounces in a pound. 
 
 VIII. Ejfence of Cinnamon. 
 
 Take Oil of Nutmegs, by expreffion, eight ounces : Oil 
 of Cinnamon four ounce? ; mix perfedly, and keep it for 
 ufe. 
 
 IX. yi Liquid Ejfence of Cinnamon . 
 
 Take Chymical Oil of Nutmeg? Uirct ouncet : Oil of 
 Cloves one ounce ; Oil of Cinnamon eight ounces : mix, 
 digert ten day?, and keep it for ufe. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 0/ Perfuming Unguents, 
 
 h*T*0 waie Unguentum Pomatum, or Ointrnent ofAp- 
 
 ■* pies. 
 
 Take Calves Suet three pound, Oil of Ben one pound, 
 SheepsSuict nine ounces, bmifed Cknesone dram, Aqua 
 Rofarnm two ounces. Pom waters pared and fliced one 
 pound, boil all to the Conlumption of the Rofe-w.itcr ; 
 then rtrain without prclTmg, to every pound of which add 
 Oil oi' Rhodium and Cinnamon, of each thirty drops. 
 II. To make a compound Pomatum. 
 
 Take of the.Pomatum aforefaid, (without the Oils) 
 four pound, Spicknard, Cloves, of each two ounces ; Cin-- 
 fiamon, Storax, Ben;amin, of each one ounce, ( the Spices 
 and Gums bruifcd and tyed up in a thin rag) Rofe-wa- 
 tcr eight ounces ; bcil to the Confumption of the Rofe- 
 water, then .add white wax eight ounces, which mix 
 well by melting, Itrain it again, being hot j and when 
 
Chap. 15. Of Fer fuming Fouders. 409 
 
 it is almolt cold, mix therewith Oil of Musk ( made by the 
 firft Section of the twelfth Chapter ) then put it out, and 
 keep it for ufe. 
 
 III. Another excellent Ointment. 
 
 Take Calves Suet, one pound, Oil of Ben fix ounces, 
 Sacchartim Satarni two ounces, mix them well by gently 
 melting them , to which add Oils of Musk and Amoergrife, 
 of each half an ounce, let them all cool, and beat th« 
 Unguent well in a Mortar, and keep it for ufe, 
 
 IV. To make Unguent nm Adofchatum. 
 
 Take Lambs Suet one pound, Oil of Ben fix ounces, Am- 
 bergrile, Molcb, of each one dram and a half, ( ground 
 with Oil of Jalemin upon a Marble ) adeps Rofarum half 
 an ounce, ( ground with Civet one dram) mix ail together 
 into an Ointment, which keep for ufe. 
 V. A good Fomatuni. 
 
 Take Sheeps Suet two pounds ^ Oil of Ben one pound : 
 mix them over a gentle heat j add to them Oil of Tar- 
 tar per deliquhim one ounce : when well mixt, caft all 
 into warm ivarcr, ilir them well together ; then let it 
 ftand and cool : then gather the fat lubltance from the 
 top of the water, and mix with it Chymical Oil of Oran- 
 ges, and of Limons, of each half an ounce, and keep it in 
 a pot clofe covered for ufe. 
 
 Note, Hogs Lard is not to he ufed in theje Compofitionf, 
 lecanje it quickly grows rank, and jiinks. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 Of Fer fuming Fouders. 
 
 I. "Tp O make Pouder of Ox dung. 
 
 -■- Take red Ox dung in the Month of May and dry 
 it well, make it into an impalpable Pouder by grind- 
 ing : it is an excellent Perfume without any other ad- 
 dition ; yet if you add to one pound of the former, Musk, 
 and Ambergrile, of each one dram, it will be beyond 
 comparifon. 
 
 II. To make Cyprian Pouder. 
 
 Gather Musk-mofs of the Oak in Bscemlery Jamury 
 or Fehruary, wafh it very clean in Rofe-water, then dry 
 
 it, 
 
'41 o Pofygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 it, (kep It in Rofe- water ibr two days, then dry it again, 
 whidi do olten times ; then bring it into fine ponder and 
 learce it ; Ol which take one pound, Musk one ounce, 
 Ambcrgrile halt an ounce, Civet two drams, yellow San- 
 ders in pouder two ouncts, mix all avcU together in a 
 Marble mortar. 
 
 III. Another rcay to mnle the f^me. 
 
 Take of the aforefaid Pouder ot'Oak-mofs one pound, 
 Beniamin, Storax, of each two ounces in line Poudtr ; 
 Musk, Ambergrilc and Civet, of each three drams, mix 
 them well in a mortar. 
 
 IV. A Sweet Damash Pouier to lay among Cloaths. 
 Take Damafk-role leaves dyed one pound, Musk halt 
 
 a dram, Orricc root, fweet Marjoram, yellow Sanders, 
 Wood of Aloes, Saffafras, of each three ounces j mix 
 them, and put them in a bag. 
 
 V. Anoibcr for the j.:me^ or to v:.exr ^ihout one. 
 
 Take Rofe leaves- dryed one pound. Cloves in ponder 
 half an ounce, Spicknard two dram, Storax, Cinnamon, 
 of each three dran-is, Mui^k half .a dram, mix ihem, and 
 put them into bags for ulc. 
 
 VT. Pofider of Sivcet OrricCy the firji tray. 
 
 Take Florentine On ice-root in Ponder one pound, Ben- 
 jamin, Cloves, of each four ounces in ponder, mix them. 
 VII. Po'jdcr of Floreruine Orricc y the jecond nay. 
 
 Take or" Orrice-root fix ourices, Rofe leaves in ponder 
 four ounces, Marjoram, Cloves, Storax in pouder, of each 
 one ounce, Benjamin, yellow^ Sanders, ol' each half an 
 ounce, Xylo aloe;^ four bunces,Musk one dram,Cyprus iialf 
 a dram, mix them j being groily poudcicd, put them in- 
 to bags to lay ainongil linrien : but being line, they will 
 ferve for other ufe, as we lliall iLew. 
 
 VIII. Pofider of Orrke-rootSythe third w^, e.vcellent for 
 linnen in h^gs. 
 
 Take roots of Orriee, Damask Rofes, of each one pound. 
 Sweet Marjoram twelve ounces, flowers of Rofemary,aiid 
 Rowan Camomil, leaves of Time, Gerauinm AIojchatHm^ Sa- 
 vory,* of each fqur ounces, Cyprus roots, Benjamm, Xylo- 
 aloes, yellow Sanders, L/^««w Rhodnm, Citron peel, 6". o- 
 rax, Z..'W^,-2»»?, Cloves, Cinnamon, of each one ounce; 
 Musk two dramsyCivet one dram arid a half, Aiiibergrile 
 one drain, pouder and mix them for bags. This compo- 
 fition will rctainits'ftrength near twenty years. 
 
 IX. Po'.t' 
 
Chap. 1$. Of perfuming Pouder Si 411 
 
 IX. Ponder of Orrice^ the fourth way. 
 
 Take Orrice roots in ponder one pound, Calamus Aro- 
 nimcm, Cloves, drj^d Rofe leaves, Coriander feed, Gc" 
 ranium Mof chat urn, of each three ounces, Lignum Aloes y 
 Marjoram, Orange peels, of each one ounce, Storax one 
 ounce and a half, Lahdanum half an ounce. Lavender, 
 Spicknard, of each four ounces, pouder all, and mix 
 them, to which add Musk, Ambergrife, of each tivo 
 fcruples. 
 
 X- Pulvls Calami AroMAt'id compojltm. 
 
 Take Calamm ArornMicm^ yellow Sanders, of each 
 one ounce ; Marjoram, G:ranium Mofchatum, of each one 
 ounce ; Rofe leaves, Violets, of each two drams, Nut- 
 megs, Cloves, of each one dram -, Musk half a dram, make 
 all into pouder, wliich put in bags for Linnert. 
 
 XI. Another of the fame. 
 
 Take Calanjus Aroriiatici-iS) Florentine Orrice toots, of 
 each two ounces, Violet llowers dr}"ed one 'ounce, 
 round Cyprus roots two drams ; adep Roj^uHm one 
 dram and a half, reduce all into a very fine pouder: 
 it is excellent to lay among Linnen, or to ftrew in the 
 Hair. 
 
 XII. An excellent perfuming Pouder for the Hair. 
 Take Orrice roots in fine pouder one ounce and a hali^ 
 
 Benjamin, Storax, Cloves, Musk, of each two drams ; be- 
 ing all in fine Pouder, mix them for a Perfume for Hair 
 Pouder. Take of this Perfume one dram, Rice-flower 
 impalpable one pound, mix them for a pouder for the 
 Hair. Note, fome ufe white Starch, flour ot French Beans, 
 and the like. 
 
 XIII. A Siveet Por>>dcr for a Silk Bag. 
 
 Take Benjamin, Storax Calamita, Cloves, Lignum Aloes, 
 of each two ounces ; yellow Sanders three ounces, Flo- 
 rentine Orrice Hyi ounces, Musk half a dram, mingle 
 them. 
 
 XIV. Another for the fame. 
 
 Take Florentine Orrice, Spicknard, Sweet Marjoram 
 dried. Geranium Mofchatum, of each four ounces ; Da- 
 mask Rofes, Cyprels, Lavender Flowers, of each three 
 ounces ; Benjamin, Lignum Rhodiumj of each an ounce, 
 mix them. 
 
 XV. A Damask Pouder for the like intention. 
 
 Jake Damask Rofes, yellow Sanders, Lignum Aloes, 
 
 of 
 
412 Polygraph iees. Lib. V. 
 
 of each four ounces ; Benjamin, Spirknard, Cyprefs, of 
 each two ounces, mingle them together. 
 
 XVI. Another for the fame pfirpofe. 
 
 Take Damask Rofe leaves a handful, cut off the white?, 
 put them in a glafs, and put to them Musk hah"' a fcru- 
 p!e, Ambergriie Gx grains, Civet four grains, fiop ti:C 
 glafs dole, and fet it in the Sun till the leaves be through- 
 1}^ drv. 
 
 XVIT. A Pouderfor a Sjveet Bag. 
 
 Take Orrice, Cyprcfs, white Sanders, Lavender, Da- 
 mask Rofes, of each four ounces ; Calamm, Storax Calr.- 
 mit/t, Benjamin, Sweet Bafil, Sweet Marjoram, Geraninm 
 yi/q/oW«w, of each two ounces ; Cloves, Rofemary flow- 
 ers, of each one ounce, mix them. 
 
 XVIII. Damask Poider for a Srveet Bag. 
 
 Take Damask Rof^s four ounces and a half ; Mario- 
 ram, Orrice, of each four ounces ; Gcraninm A'fojch.iiHm 
 three ounces ; Lahdanm?? two ounces and a half, Lignur/i 
 Aloes, white Sanders, Cloves, Cyprefs, Benjamin, GiU- 
 mns, of each two ounces j Musk, Oil of Savin, of each one 
 dram, mingle them. 
 
 XIX. White Damask Ponder very €ne for Hair. 
 
 Take Orrice in ponder, white Starch, of each eight 
 ounces ; fine Musk a icmplc, mix it firft with a little, 
 then with more, and laltly with the whole by degrees, 
 the longer it i? kept the. better. 
 
 XX. Another Damask Po:*dsr in Grofi. 
 
 Take Damak Rofcs two ounces and a half ; Cr- 
 lamas, Orrice, Cyprcfs, Geranium Aiofchatnm, Laven- 
 der flowers, Iweet Marjoram, Labdanum, of each tno 
 ounces ; Benjamin, S.orax Calamita, of each an ounce and 
 half J NigelU Romana one ounce ; Musk a dram, mingle 
 tlicm. 
 
 XXI. Another Damask Ponder. 
 
 Take Orrice four ounces 5 Cloves two ouncc<^ ; L.-rA- 
 dany.m, Cyprefs, Benjamin, of each one ounce ; Calamus, 
 St or ax Cat am it a J of each half an ounce ; Civet,. Musk, of 
 each ten grains, mix thein. 
 
 XXII. Another Street Pea kr. 
 
 Take Orrice fix ounces ; Cloves four ounces ; yellow- 
 Sanders, ^'^or^tAr Calamita, ana t\vo ounces, Labdannm one 
 ounce, Musk a fcruple, make a Poudcr. 
 
 XXIII. y^'t 
 
Chap. 1$. Of Ferfuming Ponders. 415 
 
 XXIII. An excellent Siveet Bag. 
 
 Take Florentine Oirice three pounds, Cdamm Arom.i- 
 ticMs, Lignum Rhoiium^ of each one pound ; yellow San- 
 dets ten ounces, Benjamin in grofs pouder eight ounces. 
 Cinnamon in pouder four ounces, Cloves in pouder two 
 ounces, mix them for a bag. 
 
 XXIV. Another Pouder for Sweet Bags. 
 
 Take Damask Rofes four pounds, lliavings or ralpings 
 q£ Ligmm Rhoditim three pounds, Florentine Orris in 
 pouder two pounds ; yellow Sanders, Qdampu Aroyyiati- 
 cHs^ Galingal, Cinnamon, Cloves, yellow of Citron, Li- 
 mon, and Orange peels, ana four ounces j Benjamin, 
 Styrax Calamity, ana two ounces ; beat all in a Mortar 
 to a fine pouder, and fift it thro' a hair Sieve, &c. 
 
 XXV. A Cylrrcfs Ponder. 
 
 Take Musk-mois four pounds, tteep it in Damask 
 Role-water two quarts, mixt with Powers of Rhodium^ 
 Sweet M:ir;oram, and of Savin, ot each lour ounces ; af- 
 ter it has lain xlviii. hours, take it out and dry i.t - \i\~ 
 fufe it again for as long a time, take it out and drv 7?-^ 
 and repeat this to the fourth time, then reduce it Vc :\ 
 line pouder J to which add yellow Sanders in p' o.ie- 
 eight ounces, Musk in pouder four drams; Ambergiiif. 
 two drams : Civet a dram : mix them all well to-,etii -r 
 in a Marble Mortar. 
 
 XXVI. A Perfuming Ponder- 
 
 Take Musk-feed eight ounces, Musk four ounce?. Am- 
 bergrife two ounces. Cloves two ouiices, Virginia Sna'<- - 
 root one ounce ; make each apart into fine pouder, th. ... 
 mix them, and add thereto Civet half an ounce ; mix 
 them well in a Stone Mortar, and keep it for ufe. With 
 this you iTiay Perfume Hair Pouder, Sweet Bags, ar4 
 other like things. 
 
 XXVII. To male Grounds for White Pouder. 
 
 Take Cuttle-bone in fine pouder twelve pounds, while 
 Starch eight pounds, Orrice pouder, fine bone Allies, of 
 each one pound j each being in fine pouder, mix them 
 together, and pafs them through a fine hair Sieve. 
 
 XXVIII. Another for the fame. 
 
 Take pure white Starch, Rice, each in fine pouder, of 
 each tu^elve pounds ; Florentine Orrice in fine pouder 
 three pound : mix them. 
 
 H h XXIX. A 
 
4x4 Pofygraphices Lib.V. 
 
 XXIX. A Ground for Grey Ponder. 
 Take what remains at Sccl. 27. above, which beat a- 
 gdin, and add to every pound thereof, Avhitc Starch ciglit 
 ounces, yellow Oaker two ounces, Charcole a fmall 
 quantit^^, all being in fine pouder, pafs it through a hair 
 Sieve, and keep it for ufe 3 and to be perfumed as you 
 lliall fee fit. 
 
 XXX. Another Brown Pouder. 
 
 Take Rotten Wood, beat it to a fmall pouder, and 
 pais it through a hair Sieve, and then perfume it. 
 
 XXXI. A Perfume for ordinAry Ponder. 
 
 Take Florentine Orrice in fine pouder two pounds ; 
 Damask Roles in fine pouder, Musk-f^ed^ in pouder, of 
 each one pound ; Benjamin four ounces, yellow Sanders 
 in pouder three ounces, Storax two ounces. Citron peels 
 in pouder one ounce, Cloves in pouder half an ounce 5 
 mix them : this will ferve for forty pounds of white 
 Starch in fine pouder, being mixt together, by pafTing 
 them through a hair Sieve. 
 
 XXXII. An excellent Amher Pouder. • 
 
 Take Rotten Wood,Bean-flower, of each eight ounces ; 
 yellow Sanders, Ligrium Rhodium, of each four ounces; 
 Cyprefs Wood, Saffafras, of each three ounces, Benjamin 
 two ounces j Storax Calamita one ounce, CaUmtu Aro- 
 Tfi^jicffi half an ounce ; make each apart into fine pou- 
 der, and mix them. Then take Machaleb, or Musk-leeds 
 in pouder two ounces, Musk ten grains, Ambergrile lix 
 grains, both in pouder ; mix thefe three things together, 
 and then put them to due former mixture, and keep it 
 in a glafs dole ibpt for ufe. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 OfFerfunung Balfams, 
 
 I. "^r^Aturd Balfams perfumed. 
 
 ^^ Take Baljamum verum one ounce. Musk, Am- 
 bergrifc. Civet, of each two fcruplcs ; mix them for a 
 Perfume : it is the molt fragrant and durable of all Per- 
 fumes. 
 
 W.An 
 
Chap. 1 7. Of 7er fuming Tablets, ^i 5 
 
 II. An odoriferous compotind ^ alj.hr/. 
 
 Take of the aforefaid Balfam periiuTied one cui:ce. 
 Oils oi^ Rhodium and Cinnamon, oi each two drams, raix 
 them : this is an incomparable Perfume, and better 
 than the other for fuch as are not affected fo m,uch with 
 Musk. 
 
 III. Balfamum Aiofchatum. 
 
 Take Oil of Musk one dram, Oil of Cinnamon half a 
 fcmple. Virgin Wax one dram and a half, melt the VVax, 
 and miK them according to Art. 
 
 IV. Another very good. 
 
 Take Cloves, Cinnamon, Lavender, Nutmegs, of each 
 two drams, Oils of Cloves and Rhodii^^r/?^ of each half a 
 dram, Wax three drams, Musk and Ambergrife, of each 
 ten grains, mix them into a Balfam. 
 
 V. Another very excellent for thojc thAt love not the f cent 
 of MtMky and the like. 
 
 Take Oil oi Geranium Mofckatnmy ( made as adeps Ro-' 
 jarmt by the fourth Sedion of the twelftli Chapter ; adeps 
 Rofarum, Oil of Cinnamon, of each one (.iram, Virgiu 
 was fix drams, melt the Wax,, and mix the Oils for a 
 Perfume. 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 Of Ferftimmg TabktSo 
 
 I. 1^ mdh red Admlardines or TaHets, 
 
 •*• Diflblve Gum Tragacanth in Rofe-water, fo thaj: 
 it may be as thick as Gelly : which make into pai-'-c with 
 the following compofition. Take Amyhim one pound, 
 rnie Sugar half a pound, Cochenele two ounces, Musk 
 three drams, all being in fine pouder, t?\k them, and 
 make Tablets with the aforefaid Mucilage of / ragacanthy 
 Iquare, long, round, or of what form you pleafe, which 
 dry in an Oven , out of which Bre^-d hath besa late- 
 ly drawn ; but be fure you dry them till they be as hard 
 as horns. 
 
 II. Another fort of Red Tablets . 
 Take gf the jiiTpKlgid comppfiuon o|ie.'P9Uj:^d, Clpv^^, 
 Hh 3 Cinnamon, 
 
4i6 Polygraph fees Lib. V. 
 
 Cinnamon, Nutmegs, Ginger, of each t%vo ounces, Co- 
 chenele one ounce, all being in fine ponder, make into 
 Tablets, >vith the aforeikid Mucibge, and dry as afore- 
 laid. 
 
 in. To make Telloiv TMets. 
 
 Take Amylum one pound, fine Sugar half a pound, 
 yellow Sanders four ounces , Saffron two ounces, _( or 
 you may dip the Amyhm in ftrong tin6lure of Satfron, 
 and then d^vj it again ) Musk four drams, all being in fine 
 pouder, make the Mais into Tablets, w'wh the aforefaiil 
 Mucilage, adding Oil of Cinnamon in drops two tUams, 
 diy them carefully in the lliade. 
 
 TV. Another fort ofl^ellow Tablets. 
 
 Take Amyhm died with tinclure of Saffron one pound, 
 Sugar half a pound. Saffron two ounces. Nutmegs, Cin- 
 namon, Ginger, of each one ounce ; Carraways half an 
 ounce. Musk three drams, Ambergrile one dram, all in 
 fine pouder make into Tablets, as aforefaid, adding Oil 
 of Cinnamon two drams ; which dry in the lliade, till 
 they be as hard as horn. 
 
 V. To wake Adufcardines or Tablets of any other colour. 
 
 You mufl: make them after the lame manner, only ad- 
 ding the colour you do intend ; and in this cafe we think 
 'that it is better that the Amyhm be dipt in the tincture, 
 and dried firft before you ufe it. Where note, that thele 
 Tablets, when ufed, are to be held in the mouth, in which 
 they will dilfolve, thereby cheerins; the Heart, reviving 
 the Senfes, comforting the Spirits, ftrengthening Nature, 
 icftoring the Body, and indeed nobly perruniing the 
 Breath. For them that do not love Musk, you may make 
 ifiem without, ufing inftead thereof, fomuch the more Oil 
 of Rofcs or Cinnamon. 
 
 CHAP, xviir. 
 
 of makff/g Pomanders for Bracelets. 
 
 I. 'np//£ fir/} fort. Take Orrice pouder, Cloves, Mace, 
 -■- Cinnamon, of each lialf an ounce ; yellow San- 
 ders, Styrax, Iweet AJf^j of each two drawj j Ambergrile, 
 
 Musk, 
 
Chap. 1 8. Of Pomanders for Bracelets. 417 
 
 Musk, of each one dram ; Balfam of Peru, Oil o£ Rho- 
 diuwj of each one fcriiple -, Civet two drains, all being 
 in fine pouder ( except the Balfam and Oil ) mix toge- 
 ther, and make into pafte with Mucilage aforefaid, of 
 which form Beads, drying them in the fliade for ufe, 
 
 II. The fecond Jon. Take S-crnx, Lahdanwr!, of each 
 one dram and a half ; Ben;amin one dram. Cloves, 
 Mace, Spicknard, Geranium Mojchatumy of each tea 
 grains 5 Musk, Ambergrifc, of each fix grains ^ with 
 Mucilage make a Pomander for Bracelet^. 
 
 III. The third fort. Take Damask Kofe leaves extin- 
 gulated two ounces, beat them impalpable : Musk, Am- 
 bergrife, of each two fcruplcs. Civet one fcruple, Z.r/- 
 danum one dram with Mucilage of Gum Tr.igacmtfj, in 
 Rofe-water aforefaid, make a Pomander for Bracelets. 
 
 W. The fourth fort. Take Storax, Benjamin, of each 
 an ounce and half, Musk two drams. Oil of Cinnamon 
 one dram., with Mucilage aforefaid make a palte of Pa- 
 mandcr, very excellent. 
 
 V. The fifth fort. Take Spicknard an ounce, f\veet 
 Marjoram, Geranium Mofchatum, of each half an ounce 5 
 Orrice, Cloves, of each two drams, Calamm, Lignum 
 Rhodium., Lignum Aloes, of each a dram ; Cyprefs, cen- 
 jamin, Cinnamon, white Sanders, of each a fcruple ; 
 Lahdanum, S^yrax Calamity, and Liquida, of each half a 
 Icruple ; -with Mucilage of Gum Tragacanth in Rofe-wa- 
 ter make a paRe for Pomanders. 
 
 VI. The fixth fort. Take Storax Calamita two ounces, 
 Bafii three ounces. Cloves an ounce and half, Benjamin, 
 Marjoram, Storax liquid, of each one ounce ; Calamm, 
 Cyprefs, Lahdanum, of each half an ounce ; Musk a fcru- 
 ple, Ambergrife twelve grains. Civet {^iyl grains, with 
 MuciJage of Gum Tragacanth in Rofe-water make Po- 
 manders. 
 
 VII. The feventh fort . Take Labdanum an ounce, Sto- 
 rax, Cloves, Mace, Cinnamon, of each three drams, Am- 
 bergrife, Musk, of each a dram and a half. Virgin 
 Wax an ounce, mixt with Sweet or Chymical Oil of 
 Bays half an ounce, dilTolve, mix and work them weli 
 together. 
 
 VIII. The eighth -n'ay. Take Labdanum fix ounceS;, 
 Wax two ounces, Camphire, Calamus, Myrrh, yellow 
 Sanders, Wood of Aloes, Olibanumj Mafticli, of each 
 
 H h 3 two 
 
41 8 Folygraphieti Lib.V. 
 
 two drAins ; Cinnamon, Cloves, Zedoary, Storax, Cala- 
 mint, of each a dram And a half • Musk, Ambergrife, of 
 each a fcmple ; put them into a Mortar, and with a lit- 
 tle MaliP.fey, make i mafs for Pcnanders. 
 
 IX. The^ 7jh:'h 0t. Make Gum Tra^acanth half a 
 pound into a Mucilage with Damask RoK-water Muski- 
 fied, to which add Storax CaL'^mua nine ounces, Nut-- 
 megs four ounces, Lah^anum three ounces, Cinnamon, 
 Cloves, Camphire, liquid Storax, natural Balfam, of each 
 one ounce : put the Lahdanum into the Mortar, with a 
 little Oil of *^^pike, and then the other things, which 
 beat into a pafte, with pouder of black fallow Char- 
 cole. 
 
 X. The tenth fort. Take ftrong Mucilage of Gum Tra- 
 gaciinth, in Rofewater, which make into pafte with Musk 
 and Ambergrife in fine pouder, of each a like quantity ; 
 then anointing your palm arjd fingers with Oil ofMu^k, 
 or fome other Iweet Oil, as of Lavender, or the like, form 
 them into round little Balls or Beads, which put upon 
 a firing, and dry them between two papers ; being dry- 
 cd, keep them clofe from the Aii', till you have occafiou 
 to ufe them. 
 
 XI. The eleventh fort. Take Cloves four ounces, pou- 
 der of Contrnyerva^ Virginia Snake root, of each three 
 CUncee ; Winter Cinnamon two ounces. Liquid Storax 
 one ounce, Mucilage of Giuii Trdgacanth a fufficient 
 quantity ; make them into a pafte by beating in a mor- 
 tar ; and your hands being anointed with Oil of Ben, 
 mixt with equal quantities of Oil of Rhodium, or Oran- 
 ges, orLimons ; form them into round little Beads, which 
 put upon a Silver Wire, and dry them. 
 
 XIL P^iftili of Rojes. Take Damask Rofes half blown 
 cut off* fiom the whites, Ben;amin in pouder, of each 
 four ounces j Musk in fine pouder, Ambergril'e in fine 
 pouder, ann^v^ grains : beat all together in a mortar to a 
 pafte ; then add Oil of Oranges or Limons, or of Savin, 
 one dram : mix well and make a Paflc, &c. 
 
 XTII. Another more rich. Take Benjamin in fine pon- 
 der four ounces, Cloves in pouder, Storax liquid, of eacli 
 two ounces ; Lignum Aloes in fine pcudcr one ounce : 
 Musk, Ambcrgrili;, of each one dram in fine pouder i 
 beat all in a mortir to a pafte, adding more Storax as 
 you lee occailon : and fo make it up iuioBcad?. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 19. Of Smtt Waters. 4 1 9 
 
 CHAP. XlXi^ 
 Of Ferfum'wg m/b-Balls. 
 
 I- 'T^O male Barhers Wafh-Balls. 
 
 ^ Take puriiied Venetian Soap fix ounces, Macaleb 
 four ounces, Ireos, Amyh'm^ of each fcven ounces ; Cloves 
 two oinices, LahAanwn^ Annifesds, of each one ounce ; 
 Nutmegs, Marjoram, Cyprefs pouder,. Geranmn Mojcha- 
 tuTHy Camphire, of each half an ounce, Storax luyucia half 
 a dram. Musk ten grains, all being in fine pouder, with 
 a little fine Sugar, beat all in a mortar, and make them 
 up into Walli-balls. 
 
 II. To do the fame another way. 
 
 Take of the faid Soap two pound, juice of Macaleb two 
 ounces. Cloves, Orrice, of each three ounces, Lahdanptm 
 two ounces, Storax one ounce, all being in fine pouder, 
 mix with the Soap, of wliich make Balls, drying them in 
 the ibadow. 
 
 III. To male Balls of white Soap. 
 
 Take of white Soap five pound, Orrice four ounces, 
 Amyltim^ white Sanders, of each three Qxmzz^Storax one 
 ounce, all in pouder, fteep in Musk-water, of which make 
 palk for waili-balls. 
 
 IV. Another jort very good. 
 
 Take of white Soap four pound, Orrice fix oimces, 
 Macaleb three ounces. Cloves two ounces, all iii pouder ; 
 mix with the Soap afittlc Oil of Spike, Rhodhtm, or the 
 like, of which make Balls. 
 
 V. Another way to make them of Goats Fat. 
 
 Make a ilrong Lixivium ofPot-aibcs, as that a new laid 
 Egg will fwim thereupon, which boil with Citron peels: 
 take of this Lye twenty pound. Goats Fat two pound, 
 boil it for an hour, then iirain it thi-ough a linnen cloth 
 into broad Platters of fair water, expofing it to the Sun, 
 mix it often every day till it begins to grow hard, of 
 which you may form Balls, wliich you may Perfume with 
 Musk half a dram, Civet one fcmplc, Oil of Cinnamon 
 ten drops. 
 
 H ii 4 yi. To 
 
^20 Polygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 VI. To mah covimon IVafJj-Balls, the hcfl of that kind. 
 
 Take Veiiice or Caftk Soap iliccd very thin, four 
 pounds, Spirit of Wine half a pint, beat all together ; 
 then add Chymical Oil oFSalfafra5,or Limons,an ounce 
 or more ; and beat again very well : Lartly, add white 
 Starch made into a Pafie with water, by boiling a futii- 
 ciei]t quantity to make all into an even and fniooth 
 Mai^, which form into Balls of four ounces a piece, with 
 pouder of w^hite Starch, dry them and keep them for 
 ufe. 
 
 VII. To male the />(/? Bolonia W.tfJj-BaHs. 
 
 Take Genoa '^oap, white and pure, fliced thin, eight 
 pounds • iindackcd Lime two pounds ; ^qua P^ita a 
 quart : beat them well together in a Mortar, and Jet 
 them lie torcthcr for 48 hours i then fpread it abrcad, 
 and lay it a drying : being dry, be;it it in a Mortar, and 
 add to it A4acaleh, or Musk-leeds in fine pouder, yellow 
 Saiider? in fine pouder, Orricc-root aUb in pouder, of 
 each eight ounces : mix, and beat them up ir;to a Parte 
 with Wl.ites of Eggs q. s. and two pounds of GumTr.t- 
 gacanth uifTolved in Damask Role-water, and lo make 
 the Mais up into Wafli Balls. 
 
 VIII. Another fort of Wafl^-Batts. 
 
 Take Genoa Soap fliced thin twenty pounds, Aqua Fit<s 
 two qu.irts ; mix, and dilTolve over a lire : the Soap be- 
 ing melted, add thereto white Starch in fine pouder five 
 pounds : Orrice pouder four pounds : whites of Eggs 
 N°. twenty .• Mucilage of Gum Trag.tcanth ^. s. mix, 
 p.nd make a Pafte : to which add Benjamin eight oun- 
 ces : Stor^x, yellow Sanders, of each fix ounces ; Cloves, 
 "Winters Cinnamon, SafTafras, of each four ounces : Nut- 
 megs two ounces ; Musk-feeds ten ounces ; each made 
 apart into fine pouder : beat all up into a Mafs, and 
 make Walli-Balls of what bignefs you pleafe. 
 TX. A very good fort of W.tfh-Balls. 
 ' Take Genoa Soap thin lliced ten pounds ; Aqua Vit£ 
 a quart ; mix, and melt them over a gentle fire, evapo- 
 rating away part of the Aqu^i Vita : then add Ornce in 
 fine pouder two pounds : and wdth Mucilage of Gum 
 Tragacanth q. s. beat it into a Pafte, of which form Wal)i 
 Balls J dry them, and keep them for ufe. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 20, OfPerfum'wg Soaps, 4x1 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Of Perfuming Soaps* 
 
 I. *irO purifie Venetian Soap. 
 
 ^ Cut it fmall, to which pat fomc Rofc-water, or 
 ether Perfuming water, boil them a while, then {hain 
 it, and it will be fweet and good, then take off the Soap 
 whidi fwims a top with a Ipoon, and lay it upon a Tyie, 
 and it will prefcntly be dry • being white, free from filth 
 and unduofity. 
 
 II. Another ivay to do the fame. 
 
 Grate the Soap, and dry it in the Sun, or an Oven, 
 ponder and fearce it, then moilien it with foaie fiveet 
 water, or Oil of Spilce, which'dry again ( in the l]iado\y ) 
 and keep it for ufe. 
 
 III. To male rohite nimleA, Soap. 
 
 Take white Soap purified as aforefaid three pound. 
 Milk of Macalcb one ounce, Musk, Civet, of each ten 
 grains ; mix them, and iiiakc all into thick cakes or 
 rouls. 
 
 IV. Another hnd of fweet Soap. 
 
 Take of the cldeft P^enice Soap, which fcrapc and dry 
 three days in tlie Sun ( purifymg it as aforefaid ) two 
 pound, Orrice, ylmyhiw, of each iix ounces ; Storax li- 
 ■qiiida two ounces • mix them whilil hot : which put in- 
 to Pans to form Cakes. 
 
 V. 'To male f oft Soap of Naples.^ 
 
 Take of Z./A-i^??/?;^ of Pot-ailies ( lb fh:6ng as to bear an 
 Egg ) fixteen pound, Deers Suet two pound, fet them 
 upon the fire to fmimer 5 put all into a glazed VelTel with 
 a large bottom, fet it in the Sun for a while, ftirrincr it 
 five or fix times a day with a ilick, till it wax hard like 
 Pafte. Then take this Pa(te, to which put masked Roic- 
 water ^. s. keep it eight cUiys in the Sun, ftirring it ;ir 
 aforefaid, \o long as it may neither be too hard nor too 
 loft ; then put it up in Boxes or Pots. 
 
 VI. To make the fame Soap masked. 
 
 Put to the laid Soap, Rofe-water two pound, fine Musk 
 in ponder half a dram, then mix the i^id water as before. 
 
422 Polygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 VII. Another exqttifite Soap. 
 
 Take of the aforelakl Lixivium, or Oil of Tartar pfr 
 deliquium twelve pound. Oil Olive three pound, mix them, 
 Amylnm two pound, Gum Arabick one ounce in poudcr, 
 glair of Eg2s two ounces, put all together, and rfir con- 
 tinually ibr four hours time, then let it ftand the fpace 
 of a day, and it is done. You may perRuue it as before 3 
 this makes the Hair fair. 
 
 VIII. Another exceeding the former. 
 
 Take CroAvn Soap, Vine-a{hes, of each one pound ; 
 inake it into Cakes with pouder of Roch Alum and 
 Tartar, of each alike, which you may perfume at plea- 
 iurc. 
 
 TX. To get the Juice or Milk of Aiacaleh. 
 
 Take the fwcet and odoriferous grains of Afacahb, 
 which beat in a mortar ( with Role- water, or fome per- 
 fiiming w^ater) till it becomes like pap, then prefs out 
 the Juice or Milk ; w^i.iich ufe within two or tliree days 
 Mi it fpoil. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of burning and boiling Perfumes, 
 
 I. *TrO mah Pcrftmed Lights. 
 
 -■- Take Olibanum"two ounces ; Camphire one 
 ounce ; beat them into pouder ; of which make, with 
 Wax, balls or rouls, which put into a glals Lamp with 
 Kofe-^vater, and lighted with a Candle, will give a fair 
 light, and a very good fcent. 
 
 II. AnotfKr fur a Ltmip. 
 
 Take fwcet Oil Olive one pound, Benjamin, Siordx 
 in pouder one ounce, Musk, Ambergrilc, of each one Icni- 
 ple, mix all with the Oil, which put in a Lamp to bmn : 
 and the Oil will yield a fragrant odour. 
 
 III. To mnke pcrf/imed Candles. 
 
 Take L^Many.m^ Myrrh, Xylo-alocs, Styrax CtiLn.nit/ty 
 of each one ounce and a half: Willow Charcole one 
 ounce, Ambergrife, Mu?k, of each ten grains ; make 
 them into Paftc with Mucilage of Gum Tr.'z^tcanth in 
 
 •^ Roic- 
 
Chap. II. Of boiling Perfumes, 425 
 
 Rofe-water, which form into roiils like Candles, and dry 
 for ufe. 
 
 IV. A Perfume to fmoal and Ivirn. 
 
 Take LabiUnum two ounces, St^^rax one ounce, Ben- 
 jamin, Cloves, Mace, of each half an ounce ; Musk, 
 Civet, of each ten grains, all in line pouder ; make up 
 into Cakes with Mucilage of Gum Tragacanth in Rofe- 
 xvater ; which drj'", and keep among your Cloths ; which 
 when occafion requires, you may burn in a chafing-dilh 
 of coals. 
 
 V. Another fmoahng Perfttme to hnrn. 
 
 Take Labdanur/} two drams, Stor.ix one dram, Benja- 
 min, Frankincenfe, white Am.ber, Xylo-aloes, of each 
 two fcruples,Ambergrile,Musk, of each five grains, make 
 all into Cakes as aforcfaid. 
 
 VI. Another very excellent. 
 
 Take Stor^^x^ Benjamin, of each one ounce ; Wood of 
 Aloes half an ounce, Ambergrile, Musk, Civet, Baliam 
 of Peru., Oil of Rhodmn;, of each two icmples ; Ivory 
 burnt black a lufficient quantity j pouder what is to be 
 poudered, and mix all together ; which make into a 
 Paile, with the Ivory black and the Mucilage alorelaid ; 
 make little Cakes and dry them, which keep in glalfes 
 clofe ftopt for ufe, 
 
 VII. Another very good, hm'of lefs co(l. 
 
 Take OUhanum one pound, Styrax CaUrmta and Li" 
 quidfiy of each eight ounces ; Labdannm fix ounces. Wil- 
 low Charcole a fuflkient quantity ; \yith Mucilage of 
 Tragacmth make a Parte as atbrelaid. 
 
 V III. Afvpeet Perfume to burn. 
 
 Take Storax Calamita, Benjamin, of each an ounce: 
 Labdanum fix drams ; Musk five grains : put them into 
 a mortar heat fo hot, that by beating with a little Pcrtle, 
 they may v^rork together like Wax, u'-hich make into lit- 
 tle Cakes or Balls, and keep their, for ule. 
 IX. A burning Perfnme for a Chamber. 
 
 Take Benjamin, Mattich, of each an ounce : Storax 
 Calamita, Gum Anime, Amber, of each half an ounce: 
 Time, Sweet Marjoram, Lignum Aloes, yellow San- 
 ders, of each two drams : all being in pouder, with Gum 
 'Tragacanth diffolved in Rofe-water, make a Mafs for 
 Cakes or Balls. 
 
 X. Anr 
 
'424 Pofygraphhes Lib. V. 
 
 X. yt not her for the fame. 
 
 Diilolve GumTra^acanth in Damask Rofe-water, and 
 make it into a Pafte with Lahdmujn, Styrax CaUmitaj 
 Benjamin, Amber, of each two drams ; Lignum Aloes^ 
 Lignum Rhodinnf, o': each two ounce?. : all being in poii- 
 der ; mix, and make Cakes. 
 
 XI. Another for the like intention. 
 
 Take Benjamin, S'yrax Caiamta, Amber, all in pou- 
 dcr, of each half" an ounce ; Lignum Aloes^ yellow San- 
 ders, of each fix drams in ponder : make them into Paltc 
 with Gum Tragacanth diilolved in Rofe-watcr j which 
 form into Cakes, and dry them for ufe. 
 
 XII. A Perfume called Amhcr Taile. 
 
 Take Styrax Calamita tvvo oftnces : Florentine Orrice, 
 Amber, ana an ounce and half : Nutmegs an ounce : 
 Musk a fcruple : being in pouder, make a Paf le with 
 Gum Tragacamh dilTolved in Rofe-water. 
 
 XIII. A boiling Perftime. ■ 
 
 Fill \ Silver or Earthen pan with Damask Rofe-wa- 
 ter, adding Cloves ■well bruifed half an^ ounce : Bay- 
 leaves two drams : put them over the fire, and as .it 
 walles, fill up with frelli Rofe-water. 
 
 XIV. King Henry his Prrfuwe. 
 
 Take Damask Rofc-watcr a pint ; Cloves bruifed, 
 yellow of Linions, of each half an ounce ; Musk ten 
 grains ; boil all in a perfuming pan, with tvvo drams of 
 white Sugar. 
 
 XV. King Edward hif Perfume, 
 
 Take Damask Rofe-ivater a pint ; Ambergrife a fcrur- 
 plc, Civer ten grams ; mix in a perfuming pan, fctting 
 It over loft Emben^. 
 
 XVI. The French Queens Perfume. 
 
 Firlt burn chips of Cyprefs in the Chamber a pretty 
 while, tlie Doors and Windows being fhut. Then lake 
 Damask Rofe-water a pint : white Sugar Candy ai) 
 ounce : put them into a perfuming pan, and let them 
 boil fofily on Embers. 
 
 XVII. Caffolets^ or perfumed Cakes to burn. 
 
 Take Benjamin in hne pouder fixteen ounces : Storax 
 JicjHida eight ounces : Gum Guajaci, Maltick, each in finq 
 pouder fix ounces : Lahdanum, Calamus AromanaUj yel- 
 low Sanders, Xylo-aloe?, Saflafras, all in fine poudfr, of 
 each tliree ounces ; Cloves, Nutmegs in pouder, of each 
 
 one 
 
Chap. 22. Of Ammal Perfumes^ 425 
 
 One ounce ; mix all together, and with Mucilage of Gam 
 Tragacanth beat all into a Mafs, which form into little 
 Cakes, and dry them for ufe. 
 
 XVIII. Other Pafiiles, or perfumed Caies to ham. 
 Take Benjamin in fine ponder, Storax Calarnita and 
 
 Licffiida, of each a pound : Frankincerife, Roiin, Maftich, 
 Olibanum, Gum Anime, Gum Lac, of each eight ounces: 
 yellow Sanders, Xylo-aloes, Winters Cinnamon, of eacti 
 fix ounces : Musk one ounce : all being in fine pou;ler, 
 mix, and with Mucilage of Gum Tragacanth a fufficient 
 quantity : make a Mafs, which form into Cakes and 
 dry. 
 
 XIX. Another hnrni/i^ Perfume. 
 
 Take Gum of Peru and 7o/«, of each a pound : Ben- 
 jamin ni pouder four pounds : yellow Sanders in pon- 
 der, enough to make it into a Pafte. 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 0/ Ammd and Mineral Perfumes, 
 
 I. np/ff Animal Perfume of Paracelfus. 
 
 -*■ Take Cow-dung in the Month of May or Jane-, 
 and diftilitin Balneo ; and the water thereof will be an 
 excellent Pcrfiime, and have the fcent of Ambergrife. 
 
 II. Lard, Adaskified^ a great Perftime. 
 
 Take Hogs Lard very pure one dram. Musk, Civet, of 
 each half a dram, mix them well for Boxes. 
 
 III. The Adineral Perfume of Antimony. 
 
 DifTolve Antimony in Oil of Flints, Cryftal or Sand : 
 coagulate the folution mto a red mafs, put thereon Spi- 
 rit of Urine, and digeft till the Spirit is tinged ; pour it 
 off, and put on more, till the Tindhire is extra6ted ; put 
 all the Tin<5kires together, and evaporate the Spirit of 
 Urine in Balneo ; and there will remain a blood-red li- 
 quor at bottom ; upon which put Spirit of Wine, and 
 you iTiall extract a very pureTin6lure fmelling like Gar- 
 lick : digeft it a Month, and it will fmell like Balm 5 
 digeft it a while bnger, and it will fmeli like Musk, at 
 Aiibergnfe. 
 
 Befides 
 
426 Volygra^hkes Lib. V. 
 
 Befidcs being ^ Periume, it is an excellent fudorifick-, 
 and cures the Plague, Fevers, Ltus f^en€rea^8>zc. 
 
 IV. Afccr the fame manner yon m.iy make ^is fubflantial 
 a "Perfume of Sulphnr or Brimjione. The making of the Oil 
 cf Flint Sy i\e have taught at the [even and fiftieth Seel ion of 
 zhe nine and. tmmieth Chapter of the third Book. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Of the Adulteration of Musky Civet and Amhtr- 
 grife. 
 
 B 
 
 T reafon that thefe choice Perfumes are often adulterated 
 or counterfeited, we /hall do our endeavour to dijcover 
 the Cheat, le(l any being deceived therchy^ jhouldfujfer lofi. 
 
 I. Mmk is often adulterated by mixing Nutmegs, Mace, 
 Cinnamon, Cloves, Spicknard, of each alike in a fine or 
 impalpable pouder, with warm blood of Pidgeons, and 
 then dried in the Sun, then beaten again, and moiltcn- 
 ed with Musk-water, drying and repeating the fame 
 work eight or ten times ; adding at la(t a quarter part 
 of pure Musk by moifbiing and mixing with Musk-wa- 
 tcr ; then dividing the Mais into feveral pans, and roul - 
 ino them into the hair of a Goat, Avhich grows under his 
 tail. 
 
 II. Others adulterate it thus : By filling the Musk-cods 
 %vith Goats blood, and a little toailed Bread, mixed with 
 a quarter part of Musk well beaten together. The cheat 
 is difcerned by the brightness of the Goats blood. 
 
 III. Or thusy TdkeSiorax, Lahdanum-, poudcr of Xylo- 
 aloes, of each four ounces ; Musk and Civer, of each half 
 an oimce, mix all together with Damask Role-water. The 
 cheat is dilcerned by its eafie diifolving in water, and its 
 different colour and fccnt. 
 
 IV. Or thus, Take Go:its blood, pouder of Angelica 
 roots, Musk, of each alike, make a mixture. 
 
 V. To adulterate Civet : Mix with it the Gall ofa^iOx, 
 and Siorax iKiueficd and walhed : or you may adulte- 
 rate it by the ;'ddition of Honevof Gr;.". 
 
 VI. Tc 
 
Chap. 2 3- OfMulieratwgMuik^kc. 42^ 
 
 VI. To re[iore the loji [cent to Mml^ or Amhergrife. 
 This is done, by hanging it fometime in a Jakes or 
 
 HoLife of Office : For by thele ill fcents its innate vertue 
 and odour is excited and revived. 
 
 VII. Another vpAy to c.duUerate Civet. 
 
 Take pure Pulp of Raifins of the Sun eight ounces : 
 Musk in fine pouder one. ounce : mix them well together, 
 and add Civet eighteen ounces : mix again, and dige^ 
 in a Bolt head in a Sand heat for tAventy days j then be- 
 ing cold, take it forth, rtir and mix it well together, and 
 keep it in a Jar glafs clofe covered with Bladdei;s. 
 
 VIII. Another rvay to do the fame. 
 
 Take Uqnid Storax-, Honey, Ox Gall, fine pulp of Figs^ 
 of each two ounces and half : Musk in fine pouder one 
 ounce : choice Civet twenty ounces : mix them well in 
 a Mortar, put them into a Bolt head, and digeft twenty 
 days, aforefaid, &c. 
 
 IX. Tb Adulterate Amhergrife. 
 
 Va. Ben Nuts three ounces, beat them in a perfe6lPuIp : 
 to which add SperrKO. Ceti three ounces ; beat them alio 
 well together ; then add Benjamin in fine pouder, Flo- 
 rentine Orrice in fine pouder, white Starch, of each fevea 
 oimces : Bitumen in fine pouder one ounce : Musk in 
 fide pouder half an ounce : Ambergrife in fine pouder 
 fix ounces : mix them all together, and with Mucilage 
 of Gum Tragacanth make a Mais or Paile, which work 
 ivell togetlier wdth your hands. 
 
 X. Another adulteration of Amhergrife. 
 
 Take of the former compofition ten ounces, Amber- 
 grife in fine pouder twelve ounces : Spirit of Damask Ro- 
 les a fufficient quantity : beat them together in a Mor- 
 tar till they are well iiiixt j and keep the Mafs to make 
 Perfiiines with. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
428 FoljgraphUes. Lib. V. 
 
 CHAR XXIV. 
 Of Verfuming Cloth^ SkinSy Gloves^ 8^C. 
 
 I. "T^ O Perfume Shins or Gloves, 
 
 ^ Put a little Civet tliereon here and there, (if 
 Gloves, along the Ibams ) then walli in Rofc or Masked 
 Avater four or five times, or fo long as that they favour 
 110 more of the Leather, prelfing them hard every time j 
 tlien Jay them in a platter, covered with the faid water, 
 mixed with poudcr of Cyprefs a day or two ; take them 
 out, prefs them, and dry thcni in the ("hadow : beins; 
 half dry, befmear them a little with Civet mixt with 
 Oil of Jafemin or Ben, on the inward fide chafing them 
 with your hands before a fire, till you think that the Ci- 
 vet hath pierced or gone through the Leather j leaving 
 them fo a day or more j then rub with a Cloth, that the 
 Gloves or Leather may grow foft ; leaving them lb till 
 they arc almoft dry, being drawn and ftretchcd out ; 
 then hold them over fome burning Perfume to dry, and 
 wetting them again with Musk-water, do thus twenty 
 times : lattly, take Musk and Ambcrgrifc a fufficient 
 quantitv, which mix with Oil of Jafemin, Benjamin or 
 Ben, difiblve at the fire with a little ^erfiimed water, 
 with which ( with a Pencil ) (Irike the Gloves or Leatlier 
 over on the outfide ; befmearing the feams with Civet ; 
 laftly lay them for fix or eight da^'s between two Mat- 
 trefles, fo will the Skins or Gloves be excellently per- 
 fumed. 
 
 IL Another rvay very excellent. 
 
 Take three pints of Wine, Shceps Suet or Fat one 
 pound, boil them together in a VeiTel clofe covered, this 
 done, wafli the Greafe fix or feven times w^ell with fair 
 tvater, then boil it again in White Wine and Rofe-wa- 
 ter, of each one pound and a half, with a fmall fire, till 
 the half bs confumed : then take the faid greafe, to which 
 put pulp of Iweet Navews, roafted, half a pound ; boil 
 all in Rofe-water half an hour ; then ftrain it, and beat 
 it in a Mortar, with ^ Ijtilc Oil of Jafemin and Musk, 
 
 with 
 
Chap. 24, Of Perfuming Q loves] 429 
 
 with which befmear your Gloves ( after due wafhing, as 
 aforefaid ) rubbing it well in by the fire. 
 III. Another rpay for Gloves. 
 Waih new Cprduban Gloves, wafh them well three 
 or four days ( once a day ) in good Muskified White- 
 Wine, prefling and fmoothing them well • laflly, walli 
 them in musked water, letting them lye therein for a 
 day, then dry them with care. This done, iteep Mmk, 
 Amber, Bafl, of each one dram in a quart of fweet wa- 
 ter, in which difTolve Gum Tragacanth three drams, boil 
 all gently together, and in the boiling add Civet one 
 fcruple, with which befmear the Gloves, rubbing and 
 chafing it in, then drying them according to Art. 
 
 IV. Or thui- : Firit walli the Gloves or Skins in White- 
 Wine, then dry them in the (hade ; then wafb them in 
 fweet watet, mixed with Oil of Cloves and Labdannrnj 
 of each alike : laltly, take Musk, Civet, Ambergrife, or 
 each the quantity of fix grains, Oil of Musk half adrapi, 
 mucilage of Gum Tragj?.canth fifteen trains : mix them 
 well together in a Mortar, which chafe into the'waih'd 
 Glov^es before the fire. 
 
 V. Or thus. Take Damask Rofc-water muskified, q. s. 
 put it into a Pewter or Earthen difh, and lay the Gloves 
 in it one night and day, with a little turning now and 
 then, and that they may be throughly wet ; then 
 take them out, and dry them carefully : Take Cloves an 
 ounce and half, in fine pouder ; mix it with the fame 
 water, and lay it upon the Gloves, wetting them through- 
 ly, and dry them as before : Take Oil ot Ben, ox of Al- 
 monds an ounce j Musk half a dram; Ambergrife a fcru- 
 ple : grind all well together upon a ftone, with a few 
 drops of the former water, with which anoint the feams, 
 and chafe it into the Leather, laying many pairs one 
 
 • upon another for fome time, till they are throughly foak- 
 cd, and then keep them carefully from the Air. 
 
 VI. Or thm. Take Oil of fweet Almonds, 6r of Ben, 
 which is better, two ounces : Musk two drams : Amber- 
 grife half a dram : Oil of Cloves Chymical, a dram and 
 half: Grind all well together upon a Porphyre (the 
 Musk and Amber being firft in fine pouder ; ) then digeft 
 tw^o Months, and keep it for ufe : Take Damask Rofc- 
 water muslofied, and wet your Gloves therewith very 
 well upon a bo«iid, then dry ^emj da this three or four 
 
 I i times. 
 
4^0 Volygraphices Lib. V. 
 
 tiiries,and at laft anoint them with the former, with this 
 Oyl, you may anoint your hands, it will not only per- 
 fume them, out alfo make them foft and fmooth. 
 
 VIT. Or thii. Take Oyl of Cloves two ounces : Sty- 
 rax O.lamitn^ one ounce : Benjamin half an ounce, Cin- 
 namon three drams : Musk half a dram : Ambergrife a 
 fcruplc : fwect Marjoram, Time, of each fiftteen grains : 
 mix and grind them on a Porphyre, to be ufed as the 
 former Oyl, after wafhing of the Gloves in Damask 
 Rofe-water. 
 
 VIII. Or thm. Take Musk two drains : Ambergrife 
 one dram : Civet twelve grains ; mix them together well : 
 then add Gum Trag^.cmth diffolved in Damak Rofe-wa- • 
 ter muskified ; grind all upon a (tone till they are very 
 fine, and fully mixed ; then Jay it upon your Gloves 
 with a Brull), being firl-t wafht in this following water. 
 Take Lye of rcood-afhes a tint and half : the yellow of a do- 
 z,en Oranges : Brajll and yellow Sanders in ponder .^ of each 
 An ounces \ Alum a fmall quantity : boil to the Conjumpti^ 
 en of a third part ; firain, and with a clean cloth or hrufh 
 "jfafh oz'cr your Gloves ( being firjl Tv/ijht in rain water from 
 their Alum and Ezgs ) to colour them, fonr times j then be' . 
 in^dry, ^ply to them the former Oyl. 
 
 jX. Of ihu. Take Musk a dram : Ambergrife half a 
 dram, Civet fix grains, grind them on a rtone with Oy^I 
 ofLijnonS; or with equal parts of Oyl of Liinons, Saiu- 
 fras and Rhodium ; with which your Gloves ( being 
 waiht as in the former Sc(^ion ) are to be perfumed by 
 anointing them witii a fitiall brufh. 
 
 X. Cloths, Linneny or Woollen, Coffers, Trttnh, and the 
 like, are beft perfumed ( with little coft ) with the fmokc 
 of burning Perfumes, after which you iriay Iprinkle them 
 often with Damask Role-water muskified, and anoint 
 1 he Corners and Clofurcs of the boards with lb;ne of tlic 
 former Oyls. •• •■ 
 
 
Alt 
 
 ^ 
 
 T LTGRA THICES 
 
 Liber Sextus- 
 
 The Art of Dying and Staining. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 Of T)yin^S^^ Colour Si 
 
 \:: .-■ 
 
 I. "T"* O i^t an Afh-0)hnr.^ 
 
 ^ ' Take Water a fufficient quantity : Nut Galfs' 
 bruifed fmall eight ounces : Madder two ounces : put all 
 into the VcfTeljand let them boil : then enter twenty yards 
 of Broad Cloth, and handle it, letting it boil two hours: 
 then cool it, and pilt in Copperas t^vo ounces, and enter 
 your Cloth again, and handle it ; and let it boil a (quarter 
 of an h,our longer, and cool it. If you would harp it lad- 
 der, you muft put in more Copperas. Note, 7^4t Ha nd- 
 ling of it, /ignites to RohI it on the Roller, Oi it Is hoilinF, 
 find to let it all in again^ to hinder its Spotting, and to ma^e 
 it take colour equally. And Cooling it, fignifies to take it 
 tip and Air it. 
 
 II. Another AJh-Colour. 
 
 Take Nut-galls bruifed fix ounces : red Tartar bruifed 
 four ounces ; let them boil well one hour and half in 
 the Liquor j then enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, 
 and handle it well, aad cool it : after which put in 
 
 li 2 " ~ two 
 
432 ♦ Polj/graphices Lib. VI. 
 
 two ounces of Copperas, and fadden it with Copperas 
 as you pleafe. 
 
 III. To dye the be(i Ajh-ColoHr. 
 
 Take fair Water a fufficicnt quantity : red Tartar four 
 ounces ; Nut Galls thr-c ounces; bruife them fmall, 
 and enter your twenty yards of Cloth, and boil an hour 
 and half : then cool, and fadden as you think fit^ 
 
 IV. Another vpay to dye an Ajh-Colottr. 
 
 Take Water a fufficient quantity, which put into the 
 Copper ; to wluch put Nut Galls bruifed fmall fix oun- 
 ces : kt the Copper boil, and enter your Cloth, and boil 
 an hour and half, and fo cool your Cloth : Then put in 
 of red Tartar four ounces, which difiblve : put in yoiu: 
 Cloth again, and boil half an hour ; and fo take it forth, 
 cool and air it : Laftly, put in Copperas half an ounce, 
 and let it melt ; enter your Cloth again, and fadden it 
 as you pleafe. This will Dye three pounds weight. 
 
 V. Another Afh-Coloar. 
 
 Take Water a fufficient quantity ; Galls bruifed fmall 
 fix ounces ; put all into a Cauldron, and let them boil : 
 then enter your Cloth the fpace of an hour and half : 
 then put in of red Tartar five ounces, (the Cloth being 
 firft taken out ) which dilTolve, and put in the Cloth a- 
 gain, and let it boil half an hour. Take the Cloth out 
 again, and put in Copperas, White Vitriol, of each half 
 an ounce , dilTolve, enter your Cloth again, and it will 
 be a good Colour, for to Dye three or four pounds 
 weight. 
 
 VI. Another kind of AJh-ColoHr. 
 
 Take Water a fufficient quantity, and add to it Nut- 
 Galls beaten fmall four ounces : Cochenclc half an 
 ounce ; boil them together, and enter your Cloth, and 
 boil an hour and half, and fo cool your Cloth : then 
 put iji Copperas four ounces, and enter the Cloth, and 
 ladden : toiswill dye twelve pounds of Yarn or Cloth. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap.2. Of Dying BUch. 45J 
 
 CHAP. n. ; 
 Of Dying Blacks, 
 
 I. 'Tp O Dye a Black Colour. 
 
 -■- Take Water ^. \f- Alder-bark, or Alder-tops fix 
 handfuls, more or lefs, made fmall ; put them into your 
 Copper, and boil them an hour with a rery good fire : 
 then take them forth, and put in Nut-galls bruiled fmall 
 two pouncfs : Sumach one pound : Logwood four oun- 
 ces ; and let them boil : then enter your twenty yards o£ 
 Cloth, and handle it ; and boil four hours : take it out 
 and cool it ; then put in of Copperas one pound ; beiVig 
 melted, enter your Cloth again, and handle it : boil it 
 an hour, and cool it again : put in Chamber-lye eigte 
 quarts, enter your Cloth again, boil it half an hour, then 
 cool, and wafh it well. 
 
 II. To Dye a Black upon a Blue. 
 
 Take Water q. s. or thirty fix quarts ; Nut-galls bea- 
 ten fmall nine ounces: Wool!, Woollen Yarn, or Wool- 
 len Cloth or Flannel, the weight of three pounds ; boil 
 them for four hours : after Avhich take the Matter forth 
 and air it ; then add to the Liquor green Copperas eigh- 
 teen ounces j and if there is not Liquor enough, put in 
 more Water, fo much as to cover the Cloth, ere and let 
 it boil tivo hours, handling it always. Then take it out 
 and Air it ; put it in again, and Air it ; and put it in 
 again, till it is black enough : After which cool and walli 
 it. Note, if you put in fome Sumach with tlie Galls, it 
 will make a better Black. 
 
 III. Another Black Dye. 
 
 Take fair Water q. s. Nut-galls bmifed fmall a pound, 
 Sumadi half a pound ; Alder-bark, Oak-bark, of each 
 four ounces : make them boil, and \vhen it begins to 
 boil, put in a little cold water, that it may break the 
 boiling ; flir all together, and put in your Cloth, letting 
 it boil three hours ^ after which take it out, and put m 
 more frelli water, and make it boil, adding to it Cop- 
 peras one pound : being dilfolved, put in your Cloth, 
 and boil it two hours : then take it out again, and put 
 
 113 in 
 
4H Polygraphices Lib. VL 
 
 in more Copperas cf. s. and Log-wood ground half 3. 
 pound: make itboi], and put in your Cloth again, and 
 let it boil an hour. This "vvill Dye five yards of Broad 
 Cloth, or ten yards of Cloth, three quarters wide. 
 
 IV. Another Bl^ck Dye. 
 
 Take Water q! s. Log-wood ground, Sumach, of each 
 a pound : Nut-galls bruifed linall two pounds : boil 
 them together for an hour, and fo enter your Wool, 
 Cloth, Flannel, Yarn, &c. boil again an hour, and take 
 it out, cool and air it ; then put in Copperas three 
 pounds, let it melt, and put in the "Wooll, Cloth, &c. 
 again, and boil near an hour, take it out and walli it. 
 This will Dye twenty pounds weight of any^bf the for- 
 mer things. 
 
 V. Another to Dye tnenty Tards of Broad Clothy Szc. 
 Take Water q. s. Sumach five handfuls j Logwood 
 
 s^found two handfuls, Alder-bark bruifed fmall two 
 liandfuls, boil them all together ; then put in your Cloth, 
 and boil tliree hours : take it out, cool and Air it, and 
 . make it Black, with a fufficient quantit}^ of Copperas. 
 
 VI. Another Black Colour for twenty Tards of Btoad 
 Cloth. 
 
 . Take Water q. s. Nut-galls bruifed fmall two pounds, 
 Aldcr-bark a pound and half. Madder one pound. Su- 
 mach half a pound ; mix all together in the Caklron • 
 when it boils, put in the Cloth, and let it boil three 
 ihours, after which take it out, and let it cool : then put 
 in Copperas half a pound, and when it boils put in your 
 Cloth again, and boil an hour ; and handle it, and boil 
 an hour, and take it out and cool it : after which put 
 ill more Copperas, and fome Urine, then put in your 
 Cloth again, and boil till it is Black enough. 
 
 VII. Another Black Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Nut-galls bruifed fmall a ix)und ; 
 Logwood ground, Sumach, of each half a poimd : Alder- 
 bark four ounces ; boil, and enter your Cloth ; then cool 
 and Air it, and with Copperas, a' pound and Imlf, dar- 
 ken the colour, as you delire it. This is enough for four- 
 teen pounds of Wool, Yarn, Flannel or Clotli. 
 
 VIII. To mde a firm Black Dye. 
 
 Firit Wadd it with the Blue (in Chap. ^.^SeCt. 8. fol- 
 lowing) then take Water thirty quarts ; Galls bruifed 
 fmall one pound ; Vitriol three pounds : firli boil^ the 
 
 Galls 
 
Chap. 2. Of Dying BUch. ' 4^5 
 
 Oalls and Water with the Stuff or Cloth two hours : 
 then put in the Copperas at a cooler heat for one hour : 
 after which take out the Cloth or Stuff, and cool it, and 
 put it in, boiUng it for anotlier hour : laftly, take ir out 
 again, cool it, and put it in once more. 
 
 IX. To recover the colour of Black Cloth, when decayed. 
 
 Take Fig-tree kaves, boil them well in Water, wafh 
 your Cloth in it, dry it in the Sun, and it will be a much 
 fairer Black. 
 
 X. To mah Lamp-bUci hetter. 
 
 Make a Fire-fhovel red hot, and lay the Color upon 
 it, and- when it has done fmoaking, it is enough. It may 
 be ufed with Gum-water, and ought not to be ground 
 when uftd with Oil. 
 
 XI. A finer Lamp-blacl: than vrhat is uftially fold. 
 
 It is made with Lamps of Oil, laying Something clofe 
 over to receive the Smoak. 
 
 XII. A Black from Skeeps-feet. ^ 
 
 Take Sheeps-feet bones q. s. calcine them in an Oven^ 
 or in a Crucible in a Furnace, and quench them in a wet 
 Cloth : you muil grind them in Water before you add 
 any Gum. This Black will mix with Lake and Umber 
 for Carnation in Min iature or Water Pamting. 
 
 XIII. To Dye Martins Skins, with long Hair, of a very 
 good Black, fvhich never fades. 
 
 Take Water q. s. new Nut-galls two pounds, Beef 
 Marrow two ounces : boil them in an Earthen Pot clofe 
 covered, often ftirruig it, lelt the Galls burn, and boil 
 till it makes no noife when you (iir it, then beat it, and 
 ilrain out : Take of this liquor two pounds : Copperas 
 twelve ounces ; Roch Alum twelve ounces : Litharge 
 eight ounces : Verdigrife, Sumach, Sal_ Armoniack, of 
 each four ounces : each being beaten by it fdf, mix, and 
 boil them together, and keep the Liquor to Dye with. 
 Note, Before you apply the Liquor, you muil wafii the 
 Skins two or three tunes in very pure clear Lime water; 
 and when you apply the Dye, you mutt do it with a Pen- 
 cil againft the gram of the Hair, and afterwards the other 
 •way alfo. Thefe okms, when dry, differ little or nothmg 
 from Sables. The Verdigrife fome leave outj but it doss 
 
 iiO hurt to the Liquor. 
 
 I i 4 CHAP. 
 
^^6 PolygrAfhices Lib. VI. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of Dying Blues, 1 
 
 I. 'T' O Bye a Blue or Sky Colour. 
 
 -■- Take Urine cj.s. Jndico four ounces, beat it fmall , 
 and diilblve it in the Urine in a gentle heat, clofe cover- 
 ed : then try its ftrength with a little piece of Wool or 
 Flannel : if it does not dye well, let it (land longer, un- 
 til its colour is good. It will be gjeenilh at firft, and 
 afterwards it will turn Blue : put in a Pint cf Yeft into 
 your Liquor before you put in your Wool, Yarn, Flan- 
 nel, &c. and it will make it Dye the better : the Icfs In^ 
 dico you put into the Liquor, the better Sky-cobur it will 
 be, provided it be not too little. 
 IL ^n excellent Blue Colour. 
 Take (iile Urine q. s. Rock Jnclico, in fmall pouder, 
 four ounces ; let them ftand and ibak in a good heat till 
 the Indico is diffolved, add to it a pint of flacked Lime, 
 and a pint of new Ycil : mix well together, and let all 
 ftand a quarter of an hour very hot, then ftir it : And 
 enter t^venty yards of Broad Cloth, and handle it over 
 and over, tor the fpace of half an hour : then cover it up 
 for twelve hours, and then take it forth and wafli it. If 
 it is not deep enough, heat the Fat, and put it in again. 
 
 III. Another Blue Colour. 
 
 Take boiling Water q. s. put into it Pot-Afhes : Indi- 
 CO a pound ^ Madder two ounces ; Wheat Bran four 
 pints': mix all together, and cover it the Ipace of twelve 
 Lours : then open it, and put in one pint of Woad, ftir 
 it about very well, and cover it up tor an hour ; after 
 which open and ftir it about, fcum it, and then put in 
 your W\iol, Yarn, Flannel or Cloth. This will Dye a- 
 bout fourty pound weight. 
 
 IV. To Dye another Blue Colour. 
 
 Take Urine q. s. make it very hot ; put into it Indico 
 m fine pouder lour ounces ; Madder half as much as of 
 Indico : ground Malt as much as of the Madder, and a 
 little Yeft ^ Pot- Aihes nvo ounces j cover it up, and let 
 ' ■ ' ' ' it 
 
Ghap; ^ Of Dying Blues. 4^7 
 
 it Itand in the warmth of the Fire, and try when it co- 
 lours well ; then wet your Cloth in warm Water, and 
 keep the Fat warm, and work your Cloth in it, till it is 
 a good Blue ; obferving to ftir it often that it may not 
 fpOt : keep it thus working till you think the Dye is deep 
 enough. 
 
 V. To Bye another Blue Colour. 
 
 Take EbuUis or Dwarf Elder-berries ripe and well 
 dried ; fteep them in Vinegar twelve hours, then with 
 your hands rub them, and ftrain them through a linnen 
 Cloth, putting thereto fome bruifed Verdeter and Alum... 
 Where note. That if you would have the Blue to be clear, 
 you mutt put the more Verdeter to it. 
 
 VI. Another excellent Blue Dye. 
 
 Take Tincture of Brafil q. s. Vinegar three ounces ; 
 Copper fcales one ounce : Salt one dram : mix all in a 
 Copper VefTel, in which put the Matter to be Dyed. 
 
 VII. Another (Ingnlar Blue Dye. 
 
 Take calcin'd Tartar three pugils, unflaked Lime one 
 pugil ; water q. s. make a Lixivium, and filter it : to 
 twelve or fifteen quarts of this Lixivinm, put Flanders 
 Blue one pound, and mix them well. Set it to the Fire, 
 till you can fcarcely endure your hand in it, then firlt 
 boil, ( what you would Dye ) in Alum Water, then 
 take it out, and dry it 5 aftenvards dip it in hot Lye 
 twice or thrice, and put it into the Dye again. 
 
 VIII. To make ajuhjiantial Blue Dye. 
 
 Take Water a Gallon, more or lefs ; Woad one pound ; 
 infufe in a fcalding, or almoil: a boiling heat for nventy 
 four hours : then put into it Wool, Cotton, Stuffs, Flan- 
 nels, or Cloth of a White colour. 
 
 IX. Another good Bhe. 
 
 Take Urine q. s. heat it in the Caldron, and diiTolve 
 therein Indico eight ounces 5 then put it into the Fat, 
 and add Madder one ounce, and a little ground Mault ; 
 let it ib.nd a while ; then enter twenty yards of Cloth, 
 working it till it is deep enough. 
 
 X. Another fair Blue. 
 
 Take Sal Armoniack, Quick-lime, of each a pound : 
 Verdeter two or three ounces j put all into a Vial, and 
 let it in a Horfe Dunghill for fourty Days. 
 
 XI. Another fair Blue Colour. 
 
 Take Turnfole, infufe it all Night in Urine j the Day 
 
 foi- 
 
43S Poiygraphices Lib. VI. 
 
 following grind and mix it with a little Quick-lime, ac- 
 cording as you intend the colour : if you would have it 
 a little (liining, add to it a little Gum Arabick. 
 XII . To By: Barley Straw, &c. of a Blue Colour. 
 Take a Lixivium of Pot-Alhes q. s. Litmos, or Log- 
 wootl ground, a pound : make a Deco6lion ; then put 
 in your Straw-, and boil, and it will be Blue. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 Of Dying Browns. 
 
 J. "TpO Dye a :^ood Brown Colour. 
 -*- Take Water a. s. 
 
 q. s. put It into your Copper or 
 Cauldron, and put thereto Redwood ground. Nut-galls 
 bruiicd fmall, cf each twenty ounces : boil them toge- 
 ther, and enter your Cloth (twenty yards of Broad Cloth) 
 and let it boil two hours and a half, cooling it always 
 with a Cooler, for fear of Ipotting, after which, take it 
 up and Air it ; then put in Copperas fixtecn ounces ; 
 and enter your Cloth again when it is near boiling, and 
 handle it, letting it boil half an iiour, and fo cool it. If 
 you would have it ladder, put in more Copperas. 
 
 II. To Dye a Sad Bro)vn. 
 
 Firlt infuie tlie matter to be Dyed in a fti-ong Tin- 
 <5lure of H(fr;?;o^.? (."/■.<•, then in a bag putSaftron and Allies, 
 (iratHn: Juper fira'.Hw, upon which put Water two parts, 
 mixed with Vinegar one part : ih'ain out tlie Water 
 and Vinegar, being throughly hot, fifteen or fixteen 
 times : in this Lixiviate Tincture of Saffron put your 
 fpnner matter to be Dyed, letting it lye a Night, then 
 take it out, and without wringing hang it up to dry: 
 tliis work repeat the fecond and third time?. 
 
 III. To Dye a Brorvn Tawney, or Iron Rnjl Cclostr.^ 
 Make a ftrong Decodion of Walnut-tree leaves in fair 
 
 Water : then put in the Matter you would Dye, and 
 boil it fome hours with the Leaves in the laid Liquor : 
 and when it comes out, it Avill be txaclly of tlic colour 
 you defire. 
 
 IV. To 
 
Chap. 4' Of Dying Brmm. 4^9 
 
 IV. To mdke the Colour called a London Brown. 
 
 Firft make your Cloth ( twenty yards of Broad Cloth) 
 of a bright Blue : then take ihle clear Liquor made of 
 Wheat Bran q. s. Logwood ground four ounces : Alum 
 two pounds and half: mix and boil your GJcth two 
 hours and half, and fo cool : after which take freOi Li- 
 quors made of Wheat Bran and clear, to which put Mad- 
 der two pounds and half, and handle it, with a quick: 
 fire, to a boiling, then cool ; after which take clear 
 water q.s. Logwood ground eight ounces : Braiil ground 
 four ounces, let them boil well, adding fome Urine ; 
 then enter your Cloth, and handle it, and let it boil a 
 quarter of an hour, cool, and walli it well. 
 
 V. Another Broivn Qlour. 
 
 Take Water as much as may cover twenty eight 
 pounds of Wool, Yarn, Flannel, or Cloth, put it into a 
 Cauldron or Copper, to which put Nut-galls bruifed 
 fmall two pounds : Redwood ground eight ounces, and 
 put in the matter to be Dyed : boil all together three 
 hours, and take the Cloth out, and Air it : then put in- 
 to the lame Liquor Copperas four pounds, melt it, and 
 enter 3^our Cloth again, and boil it, to deepen the co- 
 lour as you pleafe. 
 
 VL Another London -Frw;;. 
 
 Take Water q-s. Nut-galh bruifed fmall Ostecn oun- 
 ces, Redwood ground, Madder, Fuftick, of each eight 
 ounces j boil all together an hour ; then put in your 
 Cloth, &c. and let it boil an houralfo; after which 
 take It out, and let it cool : then put in Copperas two 
 pounds, and when melted, put in your Cloth again, and 
 ladden it : this will Dye twenty pounds weight. 
 Vn. Another kind of Brown. 
 
 Take Water q. s. and put into it Nut-galls bruifed 
 fmall one pound : Redwood ground two pounds and 
 half: boil tvvo hours: enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, 
 and fadden as you pleafe. 
 
 VIIL Another London Brown. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Redwood ground twenty- four ounces : 
 entertwenty yards of Broad Cloth : boil all together one 
 hour ; take it forth, and cool it ; and put into the Li- 
 quor W^ood-ioot q. s. and let the Copper boil till the 
 Soot is diffolved ; then put in your Cloth, and boil 
 an hour j take out the Cloth and cool it : put in Cop- 
 peras 
 
'i^o Tofygrdphiees Lib. VI. 
 
 peras q. si put in your Cloth again, and fadden as is 
 ^ufual. 
 
 IX. Another Brorvn Colour. 
 
 Take water q. s. Madder two pounds : Nut-galls 
 bruifed fmatt twenty four ounces : Fuftick twelve 
 ounces: put all into the Cauldron together, and let 
 them boil -, then enter fifty pounds weight of Wool, 
 Yarn, Flannel, or Cloth, and boil two hours and half : 
 then cool it, and put in Copperas two pounds, and boil 
 to a juit fadnefs. 
 
 X. To Dye Bttrley-jtrMVP^ 8zc. Broron. 
 
 Take of Lixivinm q. s. Indian wood grortnd, green 
 (hells of Walnuts, ana eight ounces : ftecp the Straw 
 four or five days in a gentle heat, and then take them 
 out. 
 
 XI. To Bye or Stain Wood of a Walnut-tree Brown. 
 Take the green {hells of Walnuts, dry them in the 
 
 Sun, then boil them in Oil of Nuts j and with this Oil 
 rub your Wood. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 Of Dying a Cinnamon Colour, 
 
 I. *TpO Dye a Cinnamon Colour. 
 
 •*- Take Water q. s. emit Madder a pound and 
 half ; Nut-galls a pound ; Fuftick a pound ; Red- 
 wood two ounces ; boil all in your Cauldron ; after 
 enter your txventy yards of Cloth, and handle it, boil- 
 ing it ftrongly for two hours -, cool it, and put into the 
 Liquor, Copperas four ounces, enter your Cloth again, 
 boil and handle it • boil a quarter of an hour and cool j 
 and put in Copperas two ounces more : enter your Cloth 
 again, and handle it, and let it boil a qiuuter of an 
 hour, then cool, and it "will be a good Cinnamon co- 
 lour : the lefs Copperas the lighter it will be ; the more 
 Copperas the deeper. 
 
 II. Another Cinnamon Colour. 
 Take Water q. s. dry rotten Oak half a Bullicl, Mad- 
 der two pounds 'j boil them well, and enter twenty 
 
 yard.s 
 
Chap. ^ i Of Dying Cinnamon Colours: 441 
 
 yards of Cloth ; which handle well, and boil three 
 hours, ftill handling it : take it out of the Cauldron and 
 Air it j and if need be add a little more water to the 
 Dye, and put in Copperas twenty four ounces : enter 
 your Cloth again, take it out and cool it ,• and if it is 
 not fad enough put it in again with more Copperas. 
 
 III. Another Cinnamon Colonr. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Nut-galls bruifed fmall four pounds ; 
 Fuftick, Red-wood ground, of each a pound 5 boil 
 theni all together : then enter your Cloth, and handle it 
 well, for fear of fpotting, and boil it two hours, and 
 cool it : then put in to ladden it Copperas two pounds. 
 This will Dye 48 or 50 pounds of Wool, Yarn, Flannel, 
 Bays, Cloth, &c. 
 
 IV. Another Cinnamon Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Madder two pounds : Redwood 
 ground a pound ; boil them together for an hour : then 
 enter 40 pounds of Wool, Yarn, Cloth, &c. and boil 
 again an hour : take it up and Air it, and put in Cop- 
 peras three pounds ; which when melted, put in the 
 Cloth again, and make it boil, &c, 
 
 V. Another Cinnamon Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. cruft Madder three pounds ; Nut- 
 galls bruifed fmall, Fuftick, Redwood ground, of each a 
 pound: rotten Oak-wood, Tanners-bark, of each half a 
 pound ; boil all together : then enter t\venty yards of 
 Cloth, and boil an hour and half, afterjwhich cool, and 
 fadden with Copperas eight ounces j and if that deepens 
 it not enough put in more. 
 
 VI. Another Cinnamon Colour. 
 
 Take Water q.s. Nut-galls, Madder, of each a pound: 
 Fuftick twenty four ounces ; Redwood ground fix oun- 
 ces : boil, ana enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, cool, 
 and fadden with Copperas four ounces, &c. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
44a Folygra^hices ^ib. VI. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 Of Dpng Clove Colours. 
 
 I. *irO Bye an excellent Clove Colour. 
 
 ■■- Take Water q. s. Fu(tick twenty four ounces : 
 cruft Madder, Nut-galls, of each a pound : Red-wood 
 ground tour ounces ; boil and enter twenty yards of 
 Broad Cloth: boil two hours with a iltong heat, hand ling 
 it : then put in Copperas half a pound, Oak Ihavings 
 four ounces ; enter your Cloth again, handle it w^eli ; 
 boil half an hour, ancl fo cool it ; it' you would have the 
 colour ladder, put in more Copperas. 
 
 II. Another Clove Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Joyners Oak-lhavings four pounds: 
 Madder two pounds : Red-wood, Walnut-tree Leaves, 
 of each four ounces ; boil them well : and enter t^venty 
 yards of Cloth, which handle well and boil three hours, 
 ftill handhng it : take it out, and Air it ; adding if 
 need requires a little noore water : then take Copperas 
 tliirty ounces ; enter your Cloth again, take it cut and 
 cool It 'j and fadden it ( if need requires ) "ivitii more 
 Copperas. 
 
 III. Another Clove Colour^ 
 
 Take Water q. s. Nut-galls, Red- wood ground, of 
 each a pound : Fuilick, Madder, of each eight ounces: 
 Sumach four ounces ; boil all thcfe together tor an hour ^ 
 then enter your Cloth, &c. and boil aa hour ; take it 
 out, and put in Copperas two pounds ; being melted, 
 put in your Cloth again, and let it boil; This will Dye 
 twenty pounds weight of Wool, Yarn, Cloth, &c. 
 
 IV. Another Clove Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Sumach fix: handfuls ,• FufHck three 
 handfiils : Red-wood 2,round one handfuL boil all thefe 
 two hours and half with t^venty yards or Broad Cloth, 
 then cool, and fadden with Copperas as you lee fit. 
 
 V. Another Clove Colour. 
 
 cjTakp Water q. s. Nut-galls two pounds : Madder two 
 pounds: Fultick a pound and half; boil all together; 
 tool with a little Water, and then enter 48 or 50 pounds 
 
 of 
 
Chap. 7' Of Dying Fkjb Colours, 445 
 
 of Wool, Yarn, Cloth, &c. handle your Cloth, and boil 
 two hours and half, then cool, and ladden with Cop- 
 peras two pounds four ounces. 
 VI. A Liver Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Nut-plls bruifcd fitiall, Red- wood 
 ground, of each one pound ; Sumach eight oqnces : Mad- 
 der four ounces : Fuftick two ounces : boil all together, 
 and enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth : boil half an 
 hour and cool ; adding nipre Copperas if yow would 
 have it fadder. 
 
 CHAP. VIL 
 Of Dying Flejh Colours, 
 
 I. 'T'O Dye ttn Incarnate or Flefh-colour in Grain. 
 
 ■*• Take ttale Liquor made with fair Water and 
 Wheat Bran, or fowre Tap-wort, being very clear ^. s. 
 Alumbruifed two pounds and half : red Tartar bruifed 
 foiall one pound : boil all together, and enter twenty 
 yards of Broad Stuff: boil and handle it well for three 
 hours, after which cool your Cloth and waili it -^vell • 
 then take freflh Bran Liquor, ( made of a Peck of Bran ) 
 tlie clear Liquor q. s. Grains of Cherraes four ounces_, 
 dryed iipon a Pewter Difh before the fire, and made in- 
 to a fine pouder : red Argolin pouder fourouiices : mijc, 
 thefe three things together, and make them boil -, enter 
 ypur Cloth, and handle it, boiling it three quarters of 
 an hour ftrongly, and keeping the Cloth un^er the Li- 
 quor ; then cool and wafh It well . 
 
 II. Another InfarnateColonr in Grmn. 
 Take fmall Beer q. s. Alum twenty ounces : r^d Tar- 
 tar ei§ht ounces': melt or diflblve, and enter twenty 
 yards of Stuffy Cloth, d^c. and boil it two hours ana 
 a half, then cool it, and let it lye in the Water^ twenty 
 four hours, : after which walh it well. Take fair Wa- 
 ter, fmall Beer, of each equal parts q. s. Grains in fine 
 pouder an ounce j infufe them all night, putting in al- 
 io a little Wheat Flower, about an ounqc , tl:ien make 
 it ready to boil; aod CQtec the Cloth. 
 
444 Poljfgraphiees, Lib. VL 
 
 III. Another Incarnate or Fle^y Coloftr. 
 
 Firft boil your Cloth very well in a good Alum wa- 
 ter, take it out, hang it up dropping, and let it dr}^ 
 Take clear Bran liquor q. s. Cochenele in fine poudcr one 
 ounce, Tartar half an ounce j mix, and make almoft a 
 boiling heat, letting it take as little Air as may be, then 
 enter your Cloth, and handle it as quick over as may 
 be, for about^ half an hour j after which take it out, 
 wafh it well in cold water, and hang it up to dry. 
 
 IV. Another Incarnate or Flefh-colonr^ called fi Rafp-her- 
 ry red. 
 
 Take Water, or rather Bran Liquor q. s. Alum three 
 pounds ; boil for three hours j then add Madder four 
 pounds, Brafil ground four ounces, Alum one ounce, 
 trefh Bran Liquor q. s. boil ; and then enter twenty 
 yards of Chamlet fluff, but riot boiling j keep it in two 
 hours, take it out and walli it well. 
 
 CHAP. viir. 
 
 of Dying Grey^ R^Jf^^} ^^ ^^^^ Colour. 
 
 I. A Silver Grey Colonr. 
 
 ■^ Take Water q. s. Nut-galls bruifed fmall two 
 ounces : Tartar bruifed three ounces ; boil them : enter 
 twenty yards of Stuff, Cloth, &c. handle it, and boil an 
 hour and half, and cool it : then put in Copperas an 
 ounce J enter your Cloth again at a boiling heat, han- 
 dle it, and boil a quarter of an hour, and fo cool. If 
 you would liave it ladder, put in more Copperas. 
 II. To Dye a Light-grey Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. bfut-galls bruifed fmall four oun- 
 ces : white Tartar bruifed iinall four ounces ; make them 
 boil : then enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, and han- 
 dle it, boiling an hour and half : cool your Cloth, and 
 put in Copperas an ounce and half ; enter your Cloth 
 again, and handle it ; boil a quarter of an hour, and 
 cool it : if you would have it ladder, adil more Ccp- 
 pcrae. 
 
 m.n 
 
Chap. 9. Of Dying Gnens, 44^ 
 
 III. To Dye a Lead Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Nut-galls bruifed fmall one pound, 
 Madder half a pound ; make thein boil ; enter twenty- 
 yards of Broad cloth, boil an hour, take it out and cool 
 It : then add to the Liquor Copperas four ounces ; boil, 
 and put in your cloth again, and handle it a quarter of 
 an hour ; after which take it forth and wafh it. 
 
 IV. To Dye another Lead Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Nut-galls bruifed fmall a pound : 
 Red-wood ground two ounces : boil all together ; enter 
 twenty yards of Broad cloth, and handle it, and boil an 
 hour and half: take up your cloth and cool it : after 
 which put in Copperas eight ounces ; enter your Cloth 
 again, at a boiling heat, and handle it, and let it boil 
 half an hour, and cool it : if you would have it fadder, 
 ufe more Copperas. Note, That quantity which Dyes 
 tAventy yards of Broad cloth will dye forty yards of 
 Stuff. 
 
 V. To male a fair Rnffet jColour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Brafll ground one ounce : boil it an 
 hour: Grains in pouder half an ounce ^ boil and enter 
 your Wool, Yarn, Cloth, ore. boil an hour, cool, and 
 add Copperas four ounces : enter your Matter again, boil, 
 cool, &c. 
 
 VI. Another Rnjfet Colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Brafil in pouder. Red-wood, of each 
 half a pound : Nut-galls two ounces ; Copperas four 
 ounces : mix, boil an hour, enter the Matter you would 
 Dye, and let it lye twenty four hours. 
 
 C H A P. IX. 
 Of Dying Greens. 
 
 I. ^T'O Dye an Olive Green. 
 
 -*• Take clear Bran liquors, but ftale q. s. Alum, 
 three pounds ; Logwood ground one pound, boil and 
 enter twenty yards of Broad cloth, boil two hours and 
 half ; cool and waili it well. Take clear water q. s. 
 Nedder ( comnjonly called Linge ) Heath Strawel, or 
 K k Fuftick, 
 
446 Polygraphices Lib. VI. 
 
 rulHck, fo much as may make twenty yards of Broad 
 cloth Gieen. Then take clear water ij.s. Furtickapound, 
 (Jm(t Madder, Nut-galls, Sumach, of each four ounces ; 
 boil, and enter your clotli, and handle it well : boil it 
 an hour and half, and lb cool : add Copperas four oun- 
 cef;, and enter your cloth again, boil half an hour j if 
 you would have it fadder, put in more Copperas. 
 
 II. To Dye a Poping jay Green. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Alum two pounds : Logwood 
 cround eight ounces : boil and enter twenty yards of 
 Broad cloth ; boil three hours, and make it a bright yel- 
 Io>v ; then draw it through a cold Fat, and then waih 
 it. 
 
 III. To Dye a good Sen-green. 
 
 Firft make it a fad Blue, then take Water (}. ;. Alum 
 two pounds : Logwood four ounces : boil and enter your 
 cloth, boil three hours ; then waili it, and make it a bright 
 YcJloAv : after w^iich draw it through a cold Eat, and 
 then v/ail\ it again. 
 
 IV. To Dye a Grah Green. 
 
 Firtt make it a fact Blue : then take Alum two pounds, 
 boil, and enter your cloth, and boil three hours, and 
 wadi it ; then dip it into a good Yellow Dye. 
 
 V. To Dye a French Green. 
 
 Take clear ftale Bran Liquor q. s. Alum two poimds 
 and a half, boil ; enter twenty yards of fad Blue Broad 
 cioth, boil it two houVs and a half, and walli it well. 
 Take fair Water y. j. Heath Strawcl, or Fuftick, a fuffi- 
 '■-'•cnt quantity ; boil well, and put in your cloth, and 
 handle it well : then take twenty ounces of Logwood 
 ?,rcund, and put into the Dye, alfo Copperas four oun- 
 ces (wliich binds the colour) and if you pleafe, you 
 may new draw the cloth through a Blue Fat, and han- 
 dle it, lb will it be finillit. 
 
 VI. To Dye a i^crdigrife Green. 
 
 Take Water (j. s. make it as hot as you can endure 
 your hand in it ; to which put Verdigrife^ two ounces 
 in fine ponder : enter twenty yards of Muff, and handle 
 it well v/ith your hands : let it lye in the Liquor all 
 Night, ftii-ring it Ibmetimcs ; and then let it lye till it 
 IS deep enough. 
 
 VII. To Dye a Popingjay Green. 
 
 Take clear ftale man liquor, or fowre Tap-wort q. r. 
 
 Alum 
 
chap. 9. Of Dying Greens, ^47 
 
 Alum three pounds,^ boil, and enter twenty yards of 
 Broad cloth, and boil three hours ; cool your cloth and 
 walli it well. Take fair water </. s. Nedder (called alfo 
 Linge) or Heath Strawel, a good quantity, boil it well, 
 and take it out j then enter your cloth, and boil it well, 
 making it a bright yellow : heat your Blue Fat, and put 
 .in Iniico bruifed fmall four ounces : Madder three oun- 
 ces : ground Malt two quarts ; nevy Ye ft a quart : mix 
 thefe things w^ell together, keep them as hot as you can, 
 ^ndletit Itand, till it will- ftrike Blue : then enter your 
 cloth, and handle it well (to avoid fpotting) till it is 
 done, and fo walli it. 
 
 VIII. To Dye another French Green. 
 
 Firil make your cloth a good Blue : and take the fame 
 clear Bran Liquor you take for your other Greens a. s. 
 Alum three pounds : Logwood ground four ounces ; boil 
 well, enter twenty yards of Broad cloth j boil two hours 
 and half J after take it out, cool it, and walli it well. 
 Take fair water ([.s. good Hedder, or Heath Strawell, fo 
 fo much as to make your cloth a good Green. Take fair 
 water q. s. Logwood ground a pound, let them boil, and 
 ,add a little Urine : enter your cloth, boil a quarter of 
 an hour, and handle it, and fo cool it. If you would 
 'have it a fad colour, enter it again, cool, and walli it. 
 
 IX. To Dye a Forrejl Green. 
 
 Firit make your clotli a good Blue. Take clear dale 
 Bran Liquor q.s. Alum three pounds : Logwood ground 
 five ounces : let them boil, and enter twenty yards of 
 Broad doth, handle it, and boil two hours and a half: 
 rake it out, cool and wajfh it w^ell. Take fairw^ater q. s. 
 and good Hedder, enough to make your cloth a good 
 Green -, boil it well, then enter your cloth, and boil it 
 a convenient time. Take fair water q. s. Logwood 
 ground twenty ounces boil them a quarter of an hour, 
 cool a little, and then enter your cloth and handle it 
 well, letting it boil a quarter of an hour longer, after 
 wliich cool your cloth, and waQi it well. 
 'K. To Dye aGraJ^Grecn. 
 
 Firft make your cloth a bright Blue. Then take clear 
 iiale Bran Liquor or fowie Tap-wort q. s. Alum three 
 pounds j let them boil, and enter twenty yards of Broad 
 cloth, handle it, and bpil it with a ftrong fire for two 
 Jsours , cool it, and %valh it well. Take fair water q.j. 
 Kk 2 Hedder 
 
44^ Polygraphices Lib. VL 
 
 Hedder or Heath-Stiawel, what you think fit : boil well 
 for an hour ; take forth the Hedder, and enter ^'our 
 cloth, handle it %vell, and kt it boil a quarter of an 
 hour ; then cool, and put in a little Urine ; enter your 
 cloth apiain, boil a quarter of an hour, cool, and walh it 
 %vell. Note, That the different or variom colours of Greens 
 ^irije from thi firji Blue being lighter or f adder ', or from the 
 Tell ore being a deep or light colour. 
 
 XI. u4 very good Green colour. 
 
 Take Sap-green, bruife it, put water to it, then add a 
 little Alum, mix and infufe for two or three days. 
 
 XII. To make a very good Dye. 
 
 V'ni\ Dye the Cloth or Stuff Yellow, as we dire6t in 
 Cl.'^p.ij. SeB. 6. following, then put it into the Blue Dye 
 defcnbcd mChap. 3. Sech. §. albregoing. 
 
 XIII. To male a dark Green colour. 
 
 Firlt Dye yoin: Wool, Yarn, Stuff or Cloth, of a Blue 
 colour, as we direcl in Chap. 3. SeB. 8. aforegoing : then 
 put it into the yellow Dye in Chap. 17. SeEl.6. follow- 
 ing ; and it will be of a dark Green colour. 
 
 XIV. To Dye a Poppingjay Green coiour. 
 
 Make a weak Lixivium of Pot-alTies, (lich as the Coun- 
 try People Avafh their Clothes with : put into it Inctico, 
 a fufficient quantity : then put in your things to be 
 Dyed ( being firfi Dyed Yellow ) and let it boil, the lon- 
 ger the better ; lo will the colour be good. 
 
 XV. A very fair Green for Adinintnre. 
 
 Grind Verdigriie with Vinegar, and a little Tartar ; 
 and then add a little Quick-lime, and Sap-green : grind 
 all well together, and keep it in OieJl : if it grows hard, 
 make it foft with ^'in£gar. 
 
 XVI. To ?/iah n very f.iir Green. 
 
 Take Verdigriie, Tartar, Vinegar, of each ^. s. boil them 
 all tc!;ether, and it is done. 
 
 XVII. Another Green for Limning. 
 
 Take Buckthorn-berries gathered the latter end of An- 
 Puff, when ripe : I'eat them, and boil them eight or ten 
 nours very gently ; then add water to make it thinner, 
 Ih'ain through a cloth, as hard as you can, and add to 
 the Liquor Alum in pouder </. s. fome add Vinegar, but 
 then it i^ longer a drying, and will be ruddy. You mult 
 keep it in a bladder in the Ihadc, or Chimney corner, 
 and it wUl keep well. 
 
 XVIII. rp 
 
Chap. lo. Of Dymg Hair Colours, 449 
 
 XVIII. To make Sirmv Green. 
 
 Boil it in water with Litmos^ or Logwood, and then 
 it will be Blue : and then boil them in a Lixivium of 
 Pot-alhes, and Yellow Barbery-bark, and they will be 
 Green. 
 
 XIX. To make a Beautiful Hqnid Green. 
 
 Take Verdigrife one pound ; white Tartar in pouder 
 eight ounces : Wine Vinegar a quart : mix all, infufe 
 for one night, and then boil till half is confumcd ; 
 and filter whilit hot. When you ufe _ it, mix Gum Am- 
 moniack and Safiron to rtiften it : it will giaze over 
 Buckthornberry Greens. If you mix it with the Juice of , 
 thofe Berries, and Azure; it- will iuake feveral Ibrts of 
 Greens. 
 
 XX. To make Green Balls. 
 
 Take Buckthorn-berries a pound : beat and boil them 
 Jn ten pints of water till half is confumed: ftrain all 
 through a cloth, and put into the liquor as much Cerule 
 in fine pouder as will make it into a Parte : which form 
 into little Balls, and dry upon Tiles : when dry, ftiffen 
 them with dilfolved Gum : they will be the better j if 
 you mix with them fome water q^ Gum Ammoniiu:}.. 
 
 C H A p. X. 
 
 Of Dying Hmr Colours, 
 
 I. 'T^O Dye a Hair Colour. 
 
 * Take Water q. s. Alum three pounds, with 
 which, Alum twenty yards of Broad cloth : and after 
 which make it of a bright Yellow with Furtick. Take 
 Water 7. s. Nut-galls in pouder two pounds : Madder 
 in pouder four ounces, let it boil an hour ; then take it 
 forth and cool it, afcer which put in Copperas eight 
 ©imces ; and making it boil, put in your doth, and han- 
 dle it well, about a quarter of an hour, then take it forth 
 and cool it. If it is not lad enough,^ put it in agaia; 
 for the oftner you take it out and put it in, the fadder it 
 will be. 
 
 K k 5 II. An*- 
 
'4$o Polygraphtces Lib. Vr, ' 
 
 II. Another Hair Colour. 
 
 _ TaJ^e Water (j.s. Alum three pounds : enter twenty 
 3'ards of Broad cloth, and boil it three hours: take it out, 
 and wafli it well, and make it a bright Yellow. Take 
 Nut-galls eight ounces ; Madder four ounces made 
 fmall 5 put them in 3'our Cauldron, and let them boil : 
 enter your cloth and handle it well, and boil one hour : 
 then take it out and cool it : add to the former things 
 Copperas eight ounces ; let it boil, put in your cloth a- 
 gain, handle it j and repeat this work till it is fad e- 
 aiough. 
 
 III. ^ Hair or Cloth colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Cruft Madder, Nut-galls, Sumach, 
 Red-wood ground, of each a pound : boil, enter twenty 
 3^ards of Broad cloth, boil an hour, and faddcn with 
 Copperas fix ounces. 
 
 IV. Another Hair colour. 
 
 Take Water 7. s. Fuftick one pound : Nut-galls eight 
 ounces ; Madder four ounces j Red-wood two ounces ; 
 make them boil : enter twenty yards of Stuff, &c. and 
 boil two hours : cool your cloth, and put in Copperas 
 four ounces : enter your cloth again, handle it, and boil 
 a quarter of an hour, then cool, and put in more Cop- 
 peras, if you would have it fadder. 
 V . Another Hair colour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Fuftick eight ounces : Nut-galls 
 bruifed fmall fix ounces , Red-wood ground four oun- 
 ces ; make them boil j then enter your cloth, &c. and 
 boil two hours and half : afterwards cool and fadden 
 with Copperas eight ounces. This will ferve for twelve 
 poupds of Wool/ Yarn, Cloth, &c. 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 Of Dying Moufe Colours. 
 
 1. ^O male a light Moufe ^ Lead, or Sever Grey colour. 
 
 -*■ Wet your Stuff, Cloth, &c. well in water, then 
 take Water q. s. Nut-galls beaten fmall two pounds ; 
 boil a little, enter your cloth, and IHr it well up : put 
 
 in 
 
Chap. II. Of Dying MoufQ Colours', 451. 
 
 in Red-wood ground \. s. according as you would have 
 its lightnefs or ladnels ; making it fadder with more 
 Galls, and a gentle heat : if you would have it fadder 
 yet, tiien put in a littk Wood-Soot, but then it will 
 become a Brown : boil, and then cool; and lafUy fadden 
 with Copperas. 
 
 II. "To mah a Afonfe, or light A<foJ^ cnlour. 
 
 Take Water q. s. FuiHck a pound and half : Sumach 
 one pound : Nut-galls eight ounces : crull Madder four 
 ounces : let them boil, and then enter your cloth ( twen- 
 ty yards of Broad cloth) and boil two hours, and han- 
 dle it well ; after which cool, and add Copperas one 
 pound, enter your cloth again, handle it, and boil half 
 an hour ; then cool : put in Urine q. s. enter your cloth 
 again, boil a quarter of an hour, and fadden as you 
 pleafe. 
 
 III. To Bye a Moufe colour out of a White. 
 
 Take Water q. s. FulHck three pounds ; Nut-galls one 
 pound: boil, enter twenty yards of Broad cloth, boil 
 two hours ; handle it well and cool ; afterwards add 
 Copperas a pound ,• enter your cloth again, boil almoft 
 an hour, and let it boil well in the faddcning, and fb 
 take it out, and cool it ; add then more Coppera?, and 
 put in your cloth again, till you think it iad enough ; 
 if you would hare it a bright Moule colour, put in iomc 
 crult Madder. But if you would have it a Green Moule, 
 put no Madder in, but cool it often, ib will it fadden 
 the better. 
 
 IV. To Dye a Aloufe colour hl'jed. 
 
 Take Water q. s. Alum two pounds and half : enter 
 twenty yards of Broad cloth, boil two hours, and take it 
 forth, and cool it, walliing it well. Take fair Water q. s. 
 Heath orFuitick, a luflficient quantity ; enter your cloth, 
 and make it Yellow, as you do your Greens : then take 
 Nut-galls in fmall pouder half a pound, and put tliem 
 into the faid Liquor, enter your cloth, and let jt bod m\ 
 hour j take it out and cool it j after add Copperas half 
 a pound -, make it boil, and enter your cloth again : boil 
 an hour, cool it 3 and add more Copperas, as you would 
 have it in fadnefs : cool often, and it will f idden the 
 better, and the lels Copperas will ferve. 
 
 V. Another Aiouje colour. 
 
 Take Watery. /. Nut-galls beaten fmall a pound: 
 
 K K 4 Madder 
 
4$ 2 Polj/graphices Lib. VI. 
 
 Madder a pound : Fuftick trvvo ounces : boil an hour j 
 enter twenty yards of Camlet, boil again an hour ; take 
 it oat and cool ; add Copperas three ounces, and fad- 
 den, &c. 
 
 VI. Another Adoufe, or light Tree-Afof colour. 
 Take Water 7. s. FufHch a pound and half, Sumach a 
 pound : Nut-galls half a pound : cruit Madder four oun- 
 ces : boil them, and enter twenty yards of Broad cloth : 
 boil two hours and cool : then put in Copperas a pound : 
 enter ^^our Cloth again, and boil an hour, and cool : 
 add Urine 7. s. enter your cloth again, and boil till it 
 is fad enough : the fadder you would have it, the more 
 Copperas put in. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of Dying Fink Colours, 
 
 I. 'TpO Bye a Pinl Colour in Grain. 
 
 "*• Take clear itile Wheat-bran liquor 7. s. Alum 
 two pounds and a half : Red Tartar one pound, melt 
 them, and enter twenty yards of Stuff, or fine Flannel ; 
 boil three hours, and cool, and wafh. Take frefh clear 
 Liquor of Wheat-bran, Red Tartar, Grains, both m fine 
 pouder, and of each three ounces ; mix, boil, and enter 
 your cloth, handle it well, and boil tliree quarters of an 
 hour, cool, and walli your cloth well. 
 
 II. Another Pink Colour. 
 
 Take Wheat-bran liquor 7. s. Alum eight ounces ; 
 boil and Alum your cloth two hours : after -winch take 
 it cut, and wain it- clean, casing away that Liquor. 
 Take fair water 7. /. Cochenele in pouder one ounce : 
 Grains ofChermes half an ounce : Aqua fortis 11. drams : 
 make them luke-warm,and put in your cloth, and let it 
 ftay in, till it is ready to boil ; then take it out ; This 
 will ccjour feven pounds weight. 
 
 III. 7~a Dye a Fink colottr in Grain. 
 
 Take Wheat-bran Liquor 7. s. Alum fix ounce?, dif- 
 folvcd in fmall Beer, mix, boil, and enter your clotii, 
 boil an hour, take it out, and cool it : add Wliite Tartar 
 
 iii 
 
Chap. I J. Of Dying Roje Colours, 45 jv 
 
 in pouder two ounces ; Cochenele in fine ponder half 
 an ounce ; enter your Cloth, Stuff, &c. and boil an 
 hour and half : it will dye three ^^ards of broad Flannel ; 
 the more you wafh it, the brighter it will be ; but let it 
 not hang in the fhadow whiltt it is wet. 
 IV. An Ohfervation rs^orihy of Note. 
 It is to be Noted, That Pini Co lour i, and all Colours 
 Dyed in Grainy are not to be Dyed in Iron or Copper Veffels^ 
 hut in Pewter J or rather Tin F'ejfels, becaufe thefe attroEl or 
 draw forth the Colour ^ and fix it, making it unchangeable : 
 Nor are you to ufe Iron Waters, or Waters Springing from 
 Iron, or yitriolick Mines, &c. 
 
 CHAP. XIIL 
 Of Dying a Rofe Colour, 
 
 I. •-j"' O Dye a Rofe-Cdour. 
 
 -*- Take Liquor q. s. Alum two j)ounds, Madder 
 eight ounces : let them boil ; then put in forty eight or 
 fifty pounds of Wool, Yarn, Stuff, Cloth, &c. and boil 
 two hours 3 after which take it out and walh it clean. 
 Take fair water, cj. s. BraGl ground two pounds, mix : 
 when it begins to boil, put in your Wool, Yarn Stuft^ 
 Cloth, &c. and boil till it is well coloured. 
 
 II. Another Rofc-Colour, 
 
 Take the fame Liquor which you ufe for Reds, q. s. 
 being very clear. Alum three pounds : enter twenty 
 yards of Broad Cloth, boil three hours, cool and warn 
 %vell. Then take frelli clear Wheat-bran Liquor, Mad- 
 der two pounds and a half : enter your Cloth at a good 
 heat J handle it to a boiling heat, and cool, and wafh 
 well: then add Brafil ground one pound and a half; 
 let it boil half an hour, after which put in Ibme ftale 
 Urine; enter your Cloth again, boil half an hour, cool, 
 and wafh it well, 
 
 III. Anothrr Rofe-Cclour. 
 
 Take Liquor q. s. Alum two pounds, ^'Iadder twelve 
 ounces ; enter fifty pounds of Woo!, Yarn, or Cloth ; 
 boil two hours, cool, and waih well. Then take freili 
 
 clear 
 
4^54 Polygraphices Lib. VL 
 
 clear Liquor q. s. Biafil ground three pounds j boil half 
 an hour : enter your Wool, Yarn, Cloth, &c. and put- 
 ting in Urine q. s. boil iialf an hour more, cool, and 
 ivail:! it, &c. 
 
 IV. An Ohjervation. 
 It is to be noted. That frefli clear Liquor, is that which 
 is newly made with Wheat Bran, and Fair Water ; 
 the Bran being afterwards Itraincd forth ; and this is 
 that Liquor which all the Ingredients are intended to 
 be boiled in. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 of Dying Red-Rofe^ or Carnation Colours^ 
 
 I.nrO Dye a Red-Rofe, Blood-Red, or Carnation Colour. 
 
 -■- Take Liquor of Wheat Bran, q. s. Alum three 
 pounds, Tartar two ounces : boil, enter twenty yards of 
 Broad Cloth, boil three hours, cool, and walh it. Take 
 frelh clear Bran Liquor q. s. Madder four pounds, boil, 
 and faddcn according to Art. 
 
 II. Another Red-Rofe, or Carnation Colour. 
 
 Take Wheat Bran Liquor, q. s. Alum two pounds, 
 Tartar tAvo ounces ; boil and enter twenty yards ot Cam- 
 let, and boil three hours j after which take it out and 
 walh it very well ; then add Madder a pound, enter 
 and boil it again, cool and wafli it : after which, take 
 clear Li(}uor q. s. Cochenele in fine pouder two ounces, 
 Tartar two ounces, enter your Camlet, boil and finiih. 
 
 III. To Dye Crimjon in Grain. 
 
 Fir(t boil the Yarn, Stiift",d'<:. in the Red ( in chap. 15. 
 JeB. 8. following) then finilli it ui a ilrong Tindure of 
 Cochenele, macle in part ^vater part wine, or in Wheat 
 Bran Liquor : Where note, That the VelTels in \vhich 
 the Materials are to be boiled, mult be lined with Tin, 
 othcrwife the Colour will be defective. The fame ob- 
 leu'c in dying of Silks (in each colour ) with this cauti- 
 on, * nat you give them a much milder heat, and a longer 
 
 TliilB. 
 
 IV. Ano- 
 
Chap. 15. of Dying Red Colours: ^^ 
 
 TV". Another Carnation Colonr. 
 
 Take Running water four Gallons, Pot AOies two 
 pounds : mix and digeft 48 hours : this done, divide the 
 Liquor, half into one pot, and half into another pot :' let 
 the firft pot Itand in the hot Embers, up to the top, or 
 in a Furnace ; and the other by a fire, to keep warm, 
 and to fill up the firil: as it boils away. Into the firft 
 put Red Brijca, or Sj^anifl} Flocks, or Wool, two pounds. 
 Jetting it boil till it is thick -, adding Akmi, and a little 
 Gum Arabick, of each the quantity of a "Walnut : dimi- 
 nilh the heat, and let it be onlylcalding hot; then put 
 in the matter you would Dye, letting it lye 24 hours in 
 the Liquor. 
 
 V. An excellent Ohfervaticn. 
 
 The Bow Dyers kno^v that the foUition of Jupiter, 
 ( which is dilfolved Tin ) being put into a Kettle", to the 
 Alum and Tartar, makes the Cloth, &c. attract the 
 colour into it, fo that none of the Cochenele is left, but 
 is all drawn out of the Water into the Cloth. 
 
 VI. Another Ohfervation. 
 
 The Spirit of Nitre being ufed with Alum and Tarter, 
 in the firft boiling, makes a firm Ground, fo that they 
 fhall not fpot nor lofe their color by the Sun, Fire, Air, 
 Vinegar, Wine, Urine, or Salt water, &c. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 Of Dywg Red Colours, 
 
 |. 'T^O Dye the hefi Red Colour. 
 
 ■*• Take clear ifelc Wheat Bran Liquor, or fowre 
 Tap-wort q. s. Alum bruifed three pounds, put all into 
 your Copper, enter your twenty yards of Broad Cloth, 
 and handle it ; boil three hours, cool, and walh it well: 
 Take frefh Wheat Bran Liquor ^. s. Madder five pounds ; 
 enter your Cloth at a good heat, han41e it to a boiling 
 heat, cool it, and walli it well. ^ Take frelli Wheat Bran 
 Liquor q. s. let it boil, and put in Urine a Gallon -, en- 
 ter your Cloth, boil half an hour, cool it, and walh it, 
 ,and it is done. 
 
 Note, 
 
45^ * Polygraphices Lib. VI. 
 
 Note., Urine is not much ufed now, and fome do not 
 walh the Cloth oiH: of the Alum. 
 
 II. Another Red Dye. 
 
 Take clear fair water q. s. Alum three pounds : boH 
 and enter t^venty yards of Broad Cloth ; boil it two 
 hours and IialF, take it out and Rans; it, and hang it up 
 a little while to let the water drop from it. Take clear 
 Bran Liquor q. s. Madder four pounds ( fteeped firil an 
 hour in Small Beer) bring it almoft to a fcaldin^ heat, 
 and enter your Cloth, and handle it Aviftly for the 
 fpace of half an hour ; take your Cloth out, and put it 
 into Uiine, after which wafli it well, and it is done. 
 
 III. Another very good Red Dye. 
 
 Take Water q. s. and three ounces of Alum to every 
 pound of Wool, Yarn, or Cloth ; boil the Wool, but 
 put it not in till the Alum is melted : boil three hour?, 
 take it out, and walli it well in cold water, and calt 
 away the Licjuor. Take frelli clear Bran Liquor, or 
 Small Beer unboiled, add to it five ounces of Madder to 
 every pound of Wool, Yarn, Cloth, 6~f. put in the Mad- 
 der when the Liquor begins to be warm, break the Mad- 
 der well with your hands, wlien in the Liquor ; and 
 when it is near boiling, enter your Cloth, CT'c. and han- 
 dle it well, boiling it half an hour, or till it is well co- 
 loured : then put in three quarts of Urine, give two or 
 three boil?, and fo take out your Cloth, &c. 
 
 IV. Another Red Colour. 
 
 Take Liquor q. s. Alum three pounds : Tartar one 
 pound, boil and enter twenty pounds of Wool, Yarn, 
 or Cloth J boil two hours, take it out, wafli it clean, 
 cafi away the Liquor, and put in clear fair water, and 
 Madder four pounds : when it boils, enter your Cloth, 
 &c. again, and handle it, till it is enough. 
 
 V. Another Red Colour or Dye. 
 
 Take Water thirty quarts. Alum two pounds and a 
 half: and therein boil thirty pounds of VVool, Yarn, or 
 Cloth, and take it out. Take fair Water ten Gallons, 
 Madder five fhillings worth, let it Ifand twelve hour?, 
 boil and enter your Wool, Yarn, Cloth, &c. boil quick- 
 ly, and then take it out, and put it into Itrong Urine 
 lor one hour, then take it out and walli it. 
 
 VI. Another Red Colour ^ or Dye. 
 
 Take fowre Bran Liquor q.s. Alum two pounds and a 
 
 half, 
 
Chap. i^. Of t>y\ng Red Colours, 457 
 
 half, Tartar two ounces : enter twenty yards ofBroa 
 Cloth, and boil three hours, and take it out. Take frelli 
 Bran Liquor q. s. Madder four pounds : boil, handle, 
 and finilli it. 
 
 VII. Another Red Dye. 
 
 Take ftale Wheat Bran Liquor, fix days old, or fowre 
 Tap- wort q. s. Alum three pounds : enter twenty yards 
 of Broad Cloth, boil three hours, cool and walhi. Take 
 frefb and clear Bran Liquor q. s. Madder four pounds, 
 fteeped in the fame Liquor : enter your Cloth at a good 
 heat, and handle it to a boiling ; take it out, cool, and 
 waili it well. 
 
 VIII. A good Red Dye. 
 
 Take Rain-water, q. s. Brafil in pouder, fine Vermil- 
 lion, of each an ounce : Alum one dram. : boil them 
 till half is confumed. 
 
 IX. Another excellent good Red Dye. 
 
 Take Lixivium of unflak'd Lime five Gallons, Brafil 
 ground two pounds and a half ; boil to the half : then 
 put to it Alum twenty ounces : keep it warm, but not 
 to boil : Then what you would Dve in this Liquor, dip 
 firrt into a Lye made of Afhes of Tartar, letting it dry, 
 then dip it into the Dye. 
 
 X. Another very good Red Colour, or Dye. 
 
 What you would Dye, firtt boil in Alum Water ; 
 then dip it into the following Liquor. Take Water q. s. 
 Roffct one pound, Gum Arabick a little, boil a quarter 
 of an hour, and then ftrain it for ufe. 
 
 XI. To make a pure clear Red Dye. 
 
 Take Wheat Bran Liquor thirty quarts, or q. s. Bjrafil 
 in pouder four pounds : Alum in pouder two pounds : 
 Tartar one pound : mix, and diifolve, and make a Tm- 
 6lure : enter your Stuff, or Cloth : boil for two hours: 
 take it out, and boil it again in frefh Bran Liquor thirty 
 quarts ( adding madder three pomids ) and perfect the 
 Color with a moderate heat without boiling. 
 
 XII. Another good Red Dye. 
 
 Boil the things you would Dye firft in Alum Water, then 
 take them out, and boil them in Water, with Brazil in 
 fine pouder : let it boil till the Icum arifes, then put in 
 the things to be Dyed, and let them boil till the Water 
 looks of an Orange Tawny ^ carting in then alfo a hand- 
 ful of Bay Salt, 
 
 XIIL To 
 
458 PolygrA^hices Lib. VI. 
 
 XIII. To colour Barley Srra.vci^ 8cc. Rel. 
 
 Boil s^round Brafil in a Lixivinm of Pot-adies, and in 
 that boU your Straw. 
 
 XIV. A Red Tigment ivhichfh.ill not grow Black. 
 Take pure fine Vermillion, grind it with Water of 
 
 Cnm AmmoniacHrrty with the addition of a little Saffron. 
 
 XV. To Dye a good Red. 
 
 Jake Ibfc clear Wheat Bran Liquor (j. s. Alum three 
 pounds : enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, handle it, 
 and boil three hours : take it out, cool it, and walh it 
 well. Take frclli Bran Liquor q. s. Madder fix pounds : 
 enter your Cloth at a boiling heat, and handle it, till it 
 is as deep as you would have it j and if you pleafc finiili 
 it with Brafil. 
 
 XVL To mah Red Paper. 
 
 Take Bartard Saffron, or Safflower, eight ounces; put 
 it into a Linnen Bag, and wafli it by a River fide, till 
 it fcarcely gives any colour : then put the remainder in- 
 to a Balbn, fprinkhng it with the poudcr of Glafs-wort, 
 ( or rather with Soda) one ounce ; fo put it into a little 
 Pail of Blood-warm Vv'ater, always ftirring it • after 
 which lirain it, and add a little Juice of Liraons, to make 
 it give a Red Color. The Paper ought to be fine, an^ 
 dipt into the Bafon. 
 
 CHAP. XVL 
 
 Of Dying a Red Blufh Colore 
 
 LnrODr a Red BlaP^-Color. 
 
 ^ Take Italc clear Wheat Bran Liquor fix days 
 old, q. s. Alum three pounds and a half : Red Tartar 
 half a pound : melt them, and enter twenty yards of 
 Broad Cloth j handle, and let it boil tliree houi;s j take 
 It out, andwalliit well (butlbmcwalh it not.) Take 
 frelli Liquor q. s. of the befl Madder three pounds, enter 
 your Cloth, and handle to a boiling heat ; cool, ami 
 Avafh again. Laitly, take frelh clear Bran Water^ q.,s. 
 let it boil, enter your Cloth, and let it boil a quarter of 
 an hour : t:ool, and wain it well again. 
 
 ZL A 
 
Chap. 17- Of Dying ScarktSy^Q. 4^^ 
 
 II. A Red Bltfjh-Colour in Grain. 
 
 Take ftale fowre clear Bran Liquor q. s. Alum three 
 pounds and a half : Red Tartar half a pound : enter 
 twenty ^^ards of Broad Cloth, boil three hours, cool, and 
 walli. Take frelli clear Bran Liquor (j. s. beit Madder 
 three pounds : enter and boil again. Take freili Bran 
 Liquor q. s. Grains in fine pouder four ounces : Red 
 Tartar three ounces : enter your Cloth, and boil an 
 hour or more, keeping your Cloth well under the Li- 
 quor: then cool and wafh. 
 
 III. Another BhJJp Color in Grain. 
 
 Take clear Itale or fowre Wheat Bran Liguor, q. s. 
 Alum three pounds and a half : Red Tartar eight oun- 
 ces : melt them, and enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, 
 boil three hours, handle it %vell, take it out, cool and 
 wa(}i. Take frelli Bran Liquor, q. s. enter your Cloth, 
 and handle it, letting it boil a quarter of an hour, cool, 
 and walli. Take more frefli Bran Liquor, q. s. make it 
 boil, and add thereto Grains in pouder tw^o ounces: 
 Red Tartar an ounce and half ; Jet them boil, enter 
 your Cloth, handle it, and let it boil three quarters of 
 an hour, then cool, and walli it well. 
 
 IV. To make a Spanifh Carnation Colour. 
 
 Take Baftard Saffron, or Safflower, walli it well, dry 
 it, and beat it ; and to a pound of it, being beaten, add 
 Calcined Tartar four ounces : grind all together, and 
 put it into a double courfe Linneu Bag j and affufc 
 upon it a quarter of a pint of Limon Juice blood warm ; 
 put this into a fufficient quantity of fair water, and 
 then put in the things you would Dye. But the Stuff-^ 
 or Cloth you would Dye, is firft to be boiled in Alum 
 w^ater. 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 Of Dying Scar let y and the Bow Dye* 
 
 I. ^0 Dye a Scarlet Color in Grain. 
 
 ■*• Take liale clear Wheat Bran Liquor q. s. Alum 
 three pounds : enter your twenty yards of Broad Cloth, 
 
 and 
 
460 Polygraphises. Lib. VI, 
 
 and boil three hours, cool and wafli it : Take fair wa- 
 ter q. s. Ncdder or Strawel a fit quantity, Jet them boil 
 well, cool with a little water, enter your Cloth, and 
 make a bright yellow ; cool and walh it again. Take 
 frelli Wheat Bran Liquor q. s. Madder four pounds : 
 enter your Cloth at a good heat, handle it to a boiling, 
 cool and walli it well. Take more frefh Bran Liquor 
 q. s. Cochenele in fine pouder five ounces : Tartar three 
 ounces : enter your Cloth, and boil an hour or more, 
 keeping it under the Liquor, then cool and wafh. 
 
 IL To Dye a Bajiard Scarlet color. 
 Take (tale Bran Liquor twelve days old, q. s. Alum 
 three pounds and a half ; Red Tartar one pound ; dif- 
 Iblve, enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, boil four 
 hours, and handle it well, cool it, and let it lye in the 
 Alum watc?r twenty tour hours, and walh it in fair wa- 
 ter ( but lome do not. ) Take frelli Bran Liquor q. s. bed 
 Madder one pound : enter your Cloth at a good heat, 
 handle it well to a boiling, keeping but a flow fire : cool 
 and waili well. Laftly, take frelli Bran Liquor q. s. 
 enter your Cloth again, boil half an hour, cool it, and 
 'wafli it well. 
 
 in. Another Scarlet Coloftr in Grfiin, from a White 
 Colour. 
 
 Take fair water, clear Bran Liquor, of each equal 
 parts, q. s. Alum nine pounds and a half : Tartar five 
 pounds and a half, melt tliem : then enter thirty pounds 
 weight of Wool, Yarn, Flannel or Cloth : boil four 
 hours,'take it out, and let it cool, and Avalli it well in 
 fair cold water. Then take Grains ( commonly called 
 Cochenele ) fifteen ounces, in fine pouder : Tartar fifteen 
 ounces : frelli Bran Liquor q. s. mix them, enter your 
 Cloth, &c. handle it to a good heat, and your Cloth 
 being White, it will be of a good Scarlet Colour j let it 
 boil two hours, handle it well, take it out, and wafti 
 it. 
 
 IV". To perform the Bow Dye. 
 Take double Aqm fortis ten ounces, ( fome fay Gxteen 
 ounces ) Filing,s of Pewter twenty ounces : Filings of 
 Silver, or leaf Silver two ounces : put in the Pewter into 
 the Aqna fortis to dilfolve, and after that the Silver, dif- 
 folving over a gentle heat : Then take Cochenele in fine 
 pouder i Crtaai of Tarter in fine pouder five ouncc^ 
 
 * mix 
 
Chap. I S. Of Dying Sand Colours. 461 
 
 mix them with the former things, and add to them 
 White Starch forty Spoonfuls, dilTolving and mixing. 
 Now take the Liquor you intend to Dye with, and put 
 in a proportional quantity of the former mixture, ( but 
 in a Brafs Veffel lined with Pewter or Tin ) boil a quar- 
 ter of an hour, and it is done, &c. See C^^p. 14. Se^. 5. 
 aforegoing. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 0/ Dyiftg Sand Colours. 
 
 I. ^O Dye d Smd Colour. 
 
 J- Take water q. s. Nut-galls in pouder one pound, 
 Madder fix ounce^ Fuftick four ounces : let them boil, 
 and enter your Cloth (twenty yards of Broad Cloth) let it 
 boil two hours, and handle it, and fo cool it : add Cop- 
 peras four ounces ; enter your Cloth at a boiling heat, 
 let it boil a quarter of an hour, and handle it, and fo 
 cool it again. If you will have it fadder, put in more 
 Copperas, enter your Cloth again, and boil another quar- 
 ter of an hour, cool and -vafh. 
 
 II. Another Sand C 
 
 Take water q. s. Red-wuo.: ground two pounds and 
 a half. Sumach one pound : enter your Cloth, boil two 
 hour- . .id cool. Add Copperas two pounds, eater yo-ir 
 Cloth again, and fadden as you tliink fit, &c. 
 
 III. Another Sand- Colour. 
 
 Take water q. s. Nut-galls a pound in pouder, boil 
 them a little : then add Red-wood ground q. s. viz.. ac- 
 cording as you Avould have the Sand Colour, Light or 
 Dark : enter your Cloth, boil an hour, and handle it : 
 if you would have it Darker, add a little Wood-loot : 
 enter your Cloth, and boil pretty well, and cool ; after 
 fadden as you pleafe with Copperas. 
 
 IV. Another Sand Colour. 
 
 Take water q. s. Nut-galls in pouder one pound : 
 Madder fix ounces : Fuifick four ounces : Red-wood 
 ground three ounces : Brafil ground two ounces : boil, 
 enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, boil two hours, and 
 
 * Li cool: 
 
4^2 Polygrsphices Lib. VI. 
 
 cool : add Copperas three ounces : enter your Cloth 
 again at a boiling heat, handle it, and boil a quarter of 
 an hour, and fo cool. If you would have it ladder, you 
 mult put in more Copperas. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 Of Dying Snuff Colours. 
 
 I. 
 
 npO • Dye a. Sntfjf or Chefnnt Colofir. 
 
 -■- Take water q.s. Nut-galls in pouder one pound. 
 Madder four ounces and a half, Red-woal ground one 
 pound, Fultick four ounces : make them boil, and enter 
 twenty yards of Broad Cloth ; handle it, and boil two 
 hours, and cool: add Copperas fouf ounces, enter the 
 Cloth, and handle it, and boil it a quarter of an hour, 
 and cool it ; if you would have it f adder, ufe the more 
 Copperas. 
 
 II. Another Snuff Colour. 
 
 Take clear ftak Bran Liquor, 7. s. Alum three pounds : 
 enter twenty yards of Broad Cloth, boil tluxe hours, 
 cool and wal"h it. Take f ' 'er 7. j. Nedder or Stra- 
 well a fufficicnt quantit<f, tc--. vvcll, cool with a little 
 water, enter your Cloth, and make a bright yellow, cool 
 and waili again. Take frcdi Bran Liquor 7. s, Ktiul^r 
 four pounds. Galls eight ounces : enter your Cloth at 
 a good heat, har.dle it to a boiling, cool and walli it. 
 Take new frelli Liquor q.s. Coppera?, Sumach, of each 
 half a pound, enter your Cloth, and boil for an hour, 
 cool and walh. 
 
 Wl. Another Snuff Colour. 
 
 Take water q. s. Fuftick two pounds : Nut-galls 
 in poudtr one pound : Madder, Red-wood ground, 
 oF each lialf a pound : mix, and let them boil : enter 
 your twenty yards of Broad Cloth, and boil two hoars 
 and a half, take out your Cloth and cool it : a».U.l Cop- 
 j'eras four ounces, let it boil, eater your CloLli,and lad- 
 «.leu as ypu fee lit. 
 
 IV. An Ohjtrvation. 
 
 In making a light Snuff Color, you muit put in the 
 
 Ids 
 
Ckp.io. Of DjUgViMykc. Colours, m 
 
 lefs Copperas : if you would have it^ to Jook Greeniilj^ 
 
 you m'uft ufe the more FuiHck.;_fcut,ifvou woultihave 
 
 It look the more He'd, uFe the ir^re'Eed-Wood,) 'nsriT 
 
 V. Another Smiff Colour. ^ --i •>' nr rbod 
 
 Take water q. s. Logwood gl^pupH^oe pound ; Fu^- 
 ftick, Sumach, of eacH two oUnqes'; mix,; and make the 
 Lead boil lirongly, enter your Cloth, j^Qq jboil :a fluar*- 
 ter of an hour, and fo cool : add Copperas eight di^hces, 
 and fo iadden as you fee occaiiom.// _.;; ;i ;. ,_ ,.1^1 
 VL Another Snujf Colour. : scam mi- i -' ■' .^ jiCVf 
 
 Take Water ^./. Red-woodw^oij^^ two J)otinds': 
 Brafil giound one pound : Sumach [one pound, Nut- 
 galls bruifed fmall two ounces : bdil,; enter your Cloth; 
 boil two hours : then add CopperajS^vi pound and hall^ 
 enter your Cloth again, and iadden a? f^oxt. fee fidj il. i 
 
 .\'ll. Another Snt^ Colour. " • ^ • "7 
 
 Take Watery. /. Fuftick two pounds, Madder or^ 
 pound. Red-wood ground half ^3>'^!?'^ • ^^t them, boil 
 and then enter twenty' yards of Broacl' Cloth, liandle i.t> 
 and let it boil two hours, andi cool it : add Copperas 
 four ounces, which is enough for the lighter Color ,• then 
 cnter^ your Cloth, handle it, boil half an hour, andtheii 
 take it out and ^opi it • •! . 
 
 jjiii. ijuj ; ^iJk.ti 
 
 
 CHAR XXI 3t '^2!^^ 
 
 Of Dying Violet and. Vurfk Colours, ,;;.;j 
 
 ^7 
 
 I. 'TpO make a Purple Colour, or Dye. ; 
 
 -*- Take Water q. s. Alum twenty .oupces : Mad- 
 der five ounces: boil, enter twenty yards of Stut^'j ah A 
 boil two hours and half, take it out, and walli it well. 
 Walli the Lead, and then put in clean Water q.s. Log- 
 wood ground two pounds, boil it a while, and enter 
 your Cloth, handle it well, and take it out, and coolit : 
 enter it again, and put it in and out, till the Colour is 
 flrong enough. 
 
 IL To make a Violet Colour in Grain, out of a fad Blue. 
 
 Take fair Water, clear Bran Liquor, of each equal 
 
 partSj^ qi sy Alum nine pounds and a half : Tartar five 
 
 LI 2 pounds 
 
4^4 Tolygrafhms Lib. VI. 
 
 pbutids and a half ; melt them, and enter thirty pounds 
 wei^t of Wool, Yarn, Stuff, Cloth, &c. of a fad Blue 
 color J boil four hours, cool, and waQi it in cold water. 
 Then takie frelli Bran Liquor q. s. Cochenele, Tartar, 
 both in fine pouder, of each fifteen ounces : mix, enter 
 your Cloth, handle it to a good heat, boil two hours, 
 •handle it welij take it out, and walli it, and it will be 
 €>£a,pure Viokt or Purple color. 
 (•:.:y\\\.. Another Turple Color., mthoat Bluing. 
 
 Take clear ftale Wheat Bran Liquor, or fowre Tap- 
 wort q. s. Alum three pounds : enter twenty yards of 
 Broad Cloth, boil three hours, cool, and waih well. 
 Take freih Bran Liquor, q. s. Madder twenty ounces j 
 £titer your Cloth, boil with a quick fire, cool, and wafli. 
 Take clear, or fair water, q. s. LogAv-oocl ground twenty 
 four ounces, boil half an hour, and put in fome Urine, 
 then enter your Cloth, handle it, and boil half an hour, 
 take it out and cool it : add Nut-galls bmifed two oun- 
 ces, and enter yc^j^'Cloth again, handle it, and boil 
 half an hour, cool arnd' walli ir.-'. .- 
 em'iy,. Another f^joht or P'yirph Color'i. 
 •;tTake clear Ifeile Bran Liquor q.f-. Alum three pounds: 
 enter twenty -^af4s of Broad Cloth, and boil two hours 
 and half J cool and walh well. Take fielh Liquor q. s: 
 Madder t^vent}' ounces : enter your Cloth, and boil with 
 a t}ui€k-fiic, <:.©oi,-and wafli wrcH;— Trik^ friir Water q-. t.~ 
 Logwood ground ci^ht ounces : Braril|,round two ouii- 
 ces : let them boU"^4"arter of aiifioup] enter your Cloth 
 at a boiling heat, handle it, and boil a quarter of an 
 ' hoiu', take^ it puf, .a^(| cool it : add Urine q. j. enter your 
 Cloth again,' boif a^quarter of an hour, then cboi and 
 Vv'alli it well. - , - 
 
 V. A p-eorl P^iolei- or Purple Color. . /- r 
 
 ■/iTifteW^-iWftoftir gallons: Myrtle berries eightpouTids ; 
 AJuin one oun^J'calcin'd Bralsone ounce : mix them 
 ift aBrafsKetEle-GrVdrel, boilhalf ^ hoiir, an,d (tain 
 
 1j VL To male /another pleafifnt Vhlct ar P:rrph Dye. 
 
 . Viril Dye it Blue by Chap. :?. Secl-:S. of this Book;' 
 then boil it in the former Red at f/.'^p. 15. Scfi.ii. 
 aforegoing; laftly, finilh it with a Decoction of Bra- 
 fiL--.'4?i \ 
 
 VIL Ar.G- 
 
Chap. 21. Of Dying Teltom^ &c. 4^5 ''^ 
 
 Yll. Another Pwple Color. _ r^/.- 
 
 Take Orchal, mix it with half Urine, and let it boil^^ 
 till it is of a Dark color : then put in the Matter ypi^., 
 would Dye, letting it lye 24 hours or more. '^ ' - 
 
 VIII. An Excellent Violet Color. 
 Take calcin'd Tartar, Turnfole, of each a pound, - 
 beat them, and tye them up in a Linen Cloth, and fteep • 
 them 24 hours in Water ; and then put in the Matter 
 which you would have to be of a Violet Color. 
 
 J'/'- 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 Of Dying Tellows^ and Orange Tawny. 
 
 I. 'T'O Dye a Tellow Colour. 
 
 -*- Take Water q. s. Alum one pound : enter ygur 
 Yarn, Cloth, &c. boil two hours, and take it out, a^i^^ 
 walli it clean. Take frelh fair Water q. s. Fuitick ,tw.p\ 
 pounds ; let it boil, and enter your Cloth, boil it aii^ 
 hour, and take it out : this will Dye twenty pounds 
 weight. 
 
 II. To Dye an Orange Tajvney. 
 
 Let youi- Wool, Yarn, Flannel, Stuff, or Cloth, d:-<r. 
 be firil: Dyed into a Red color : and then being Red, let 
 it be dyed into a Yellow color. 
 
 III. Another svay to Dye an Orange Tarvney. 
 
 Take ftale Wheat Bran Liquor q. s. Alum three 
 pounds : enter twenty yards of Broad Clodi, handle and 
 boil three hours : take it out, cool, and wafli it well.. 
 Take fair Water, and good Linge or Hedder, which, 
 grows in Morafle?, Moors, or Swamj's ; boil it a good 
 while, and take forth the Hedder, and coyl with a little 
 cold Water ^ then enter your Cloth, and make it a good 
 Yellowy take it up and Air it. Take frelh Bran li- 
 quor q. s. Madder two pounds, enter y^ur Cloth, and. 
 boil it with a quick fire : then take it out, cool it, and 
 walTi it well. Oblerve,you may make it a good Yellon' 
 with Furtick, and then afterwards perfect it with Mad- 
 der. 
 
 LU IV. To 
 
4^6 . Fph^^^Pihh^ l-ib. VI. 
 
 ^ IV. To male anhther Telloyp Color. 
 
 Take Buc)cthorn-bfri;ie<i- gathered about the beginning 
 oFy^»^y7?jbmile them, and add a little Alum in fine 
 poudcr • mix, and keep ^ll ijn a Brr^fe Veffel. 
 
 V. Another good Tellon- 
 
 Make a ftrong TindHve of Saffron in White Wine 
 Vinegar, and ^AA thereto a fufltcient quantity of Alum 
 in pouder. 
 
 VI. To make another excellent Tellorv Dye. 
 
 Take pure clear Wheat Bran Liguor thirty quarts : 
 Alum three pounds : enter your Stuff or Cloth, boil for 
 two hours : after which take Wold, Weld, oi- Dyers 
 Weed two pounds, and boil it till you fee the colour 
 good. 
 
 VII. Another good Tellorv Dye or Color. 
 
 Take Running Water, and JVlalt-wort, of each a like 
 quantity ; in which dilfolve a iufhcient quantity ofA- 
 lum, by boiling. Into this Liquor put whatlbever you 
 would have Dyed Yellow, and let it boil a good while : 
 then take it out, and put it into a itrong decocHon of 
 Wold, Weld, or Dyers Weed, made with Chalk Wa- 
 ter, and (laying weight upon it ) let it boil an hour or 
 tivo. 
 
 VIII. To Dye c.n Orange-TAxney Color. 
 
 Make a weak Lixivium of Pot-Allies, or fuch Buck- 
 Afhes, as Women waih their Cloths withal : put into 
 it. Wood-Soot, a fufficicnt quantity ; and black Cork : 
 boil a while, then put in the Matter you would Dye, 
 ( being firll Dyed Yellow) and Jet it boil a Httle, cait- 
 ing in whilrt it boils, a handful of Bay Salt. 
 
 IX. To Dye Barley Straw , &c. of a Tcllovp Color. 
 Take a Lixivium of Pot-Afhes q. s. Yellow Bark of 
 
 the Barbery Tree a pound : make a decodlion, and in 
 this boil your StraAv, &c. 
 
 X. To Dye a Telloiv (;olor. 
 
 Take Alum Water 7. /. inner Bark of a Plum Tree, a 
 pound; or as much Sumach; make a Decoftion, and 
 boil what you think fit in it, and it will be of a fiir 
 YelloAv. 
 
 XI. To maie a Teiloiv. 
 
 Take Orpimeht 7. J. grind it with Water, then put it 
 in littie parcels upon Paper to dry, and then you may 
 ufe it as a pit;mcnt. 
 
 xii.ro 
 
Chap. 22. Of uking out SfaiSy 8cc. 467 
 
 XII. To make an Orange Color. ^ a 
 
 Take Vermillion, grind it with a little Saffron, and. 
 then mix with it a little Red Lead. 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 
 Of Watering Stuffs^ and taking out Spots, 
 
 l.TjOWto water Stuffs, &C. 
 
 -ti. Take Water, q. s. Gum Tragacanth one ounce : 
 mi,x and dilTolve, and make a thin clear Water : then 
 take ten yards of Stuft", and wet i^ with the laid Water 
 all over, and put it into a Prefs : let it lye a pretty 
 while, and turn it twice : after which, you mull fcruc 
 the Prefs very hard, and fo let it ftand until it be 
 cold. 
 
 II. An Ohfervation. 
 
 The Gum-water ought to be pure thin and clear, o- 
 thenvife the folds of the Stuff will (tick together : it is 
 alfo to be done very hot, eife it will not penetrate ; and 
 the Stuff, &c. is to be throughly wet therewith, )'-et not 
 too wet. 
 
 III. To tale out Spots. 
 
 Walli them with Oil of Tartar per deliquuim, two or 
 three times, and they will vaniOi ; then walli with Soap- 
 fudds, and laitly with fair warm Water. 
 
 IV. To take oHt Ink Spots. 
 
 Wafh them three or four times with Juice of Limons, 
 or with ikong White-Wine Vinegar, and it will do j 
 after walli them with Genoa Soap, and lalHy with tair 
 warm Water. 
 
 V. To take out Spots of Turpentine y or Pitch. 
 
 Firit rub them well with Hogs-Lard, or old thick Oil, 
 and repeat this two or tliree times ; then Soap .theni, 
 and walh with warm Water. Spirit of Wine is alio 
 good in this cafe. 
 
 VI. To take oat Spots of Greafe. 
 
 Rub them very wtU two or three times vAth Oil of 
 Turpentine, and they will vanilli away to a wotider : 
 laftly wal)i aaain with Reclified Spirit of Wine. 
 
 LI 4 VII. n 
 
4^S Polygrdphices Lib. VI 
 
 VII. To tah out Spots of Oil or Greafej out of White or' 
 Tied Silk. 
 
 Take ^t^ua Vit£, and rub the Spots well with it : theii 
 take Glair of new-laid Eggs, and rub the Spots well 
 therewith, and let it dry in the Sun ; after which waQi 
 it with clean water, and prefs it well. 
 
 VIII . A Ponder to tnh out Spots. 
 
 Take Bone-Afhes of Sheeps Legs calcin'd White, make 
 them into fubtil pouder ; which lay warm upon the 
 Spot or Stain, till it begins to change color ; then remove 
 it, and lay on more, and contmue it till the Spot is gone". 
 
 IX. Another for the fame. 
 
 Take White or Wheaten Bread juft drawn out of the 
 Oven ; lay one piece of it above, and another under- 
 neath the Silk, and it will draw out the Oil or Greafe. 
 
 X. Another for the fame. 
 
 Take Honey and mix with it Glair of Eggs, and Sd 
 Armoniack, and lay them on the Spot for fome time, 
 and Walli it with fair Wat?r. , ' 
 
 XI. To take Spots of Ink out of Silk. 
 
 Take Itrong White Wine Vinegar, hot Afhcs, rub them 
 well upon the Spots, and walli afterwards with Soap 
 and Water, and the work will be done. 
 
 XII. To take Spots of Pitch, Tar, Turpentine, &c. ottt of 
 Cloths. 
 
 Take common Oil, or Hogs Lard, rub it well upon and 
 into the Spots, Letting it lye for 24 or 48 hours, then 
 rub it well with your hands, and wring it, after which 
 walh it clean with Soap and water. 
 
 XIII. To take out Stains. 
 
 Take Soap a pound : Fullers Earth eight ounces ; un- 
 flakcd Lime two ounces : mix all in fair water, and af- 
 ter a while lay it upon the ftains. 
 
 XIV. Another tray. 
 
 Mix white Starch and Water together, making it into 
 a Palle ; with this cover the Stains as thick as a Sliilling 
 or Half Crown, and leave it on till next day ; then rub 
 it oft as you do dry dirt ; and the Stains will be vanilhed. 
 
 XV. To t^tke a!' Spots of Ink out of Linnen or Woollen. 
 
 Squeez Juice of Luiions upon the Stain, which rub in 
 very well, and being dry, repeat this three or four times ; 
 and then waih it with fair Water, and the Ink or Iron 
 molds will be vani/licd, 
 
 C H A P. 
 
Chap. 2 J i Of D/mg Pafer^ &c» 469 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 Dymg of Paper, Parchment^ and Leathery &c. 
 
 I. 'TT'O male Paper tvaved lile Aiarhle. 
 
 •*- Take divers Oiled colours, put them feverally in 
 drops upon water, and IHr the water lightly ; then wet 
 the Paper ( being of fome thicknefs ) with it, and it will 
 be wavpd like Marble ; dry it in the Sun. 
 
 II. To rcrite golden Letters on Paper or Parchment. 
 
 This maybe done by the ninth, thirteenth and fixteenth 
 Seiflions of the twenty feventh Chapter of the third 
 Book : or write with Vermilion ground with Gum Ar- 
 moniack, ground with glair of Eggs, and it will be like 
 Gold. 
 
 IIL To tale out hlotSj or male hlacl Letters vanijh in 
 Paper or Parchment. 
 
 This may be done with Alum-water j or with Aqua 
 forti-s mixed with common water. 
 
 IV. To male Silver Letters in Paper or Parchment. 
 Take Tin one ounce, Quick-filver two ounces, mix and 
 
 melt them, and grind them with Gun> water. 
 
 V. To yprite rcith Green Ink. 
 
 Take Verdigrife, Litharge, Quick-filver, of each a fuf^ 
 ficient quantity, grind and mingle them with Urine, and 
 it will be a glorious green, like an Emerald, to write or 
 paint with. 
 
 Or th.m^ Grind Juice of Rue aod" Verdigrife with a lit- 
 tle Saffron together ; and Avhen you would write with it, 
 mix it with Gum-water. Or thm^ Dilfolve Verdigrife in 
 Vinegar, ftiain it ; then grind it with common water, 
 and a little Hony, dry it j then grind it again with Gum 
 water, and it is done. 
 
 Vi. To write on Paper or Parchment rciih Bine Inl. 
 
 Grind Blue with Honey, then temper it with glair of 
 Eggs, or Gum-water made of lling-glafs. 
 Y\l. To dye Skins Blue. 
 
 Take Berries of Elden, or Drawf-elder, firfl boil them, 
 then fmear andwalli the Skins therewith, and wring 
 them forth : then boil the Berries as before, in the diffo- 
 
 lutioii 
 
470 Polygraphicfs Lib. VI. 
 
 lution of Alum-watcr, and wet the Skins in the fame 
 water once or tA\-icc, dry them, and they will be very 
 Blue. 
 
 VIII. To dye Shins into a Reddijh Colour. 
 
 Firft wafti the Skin in water, and wring it well : then 
 wet it with the folution of Tartar and Bay-falt in fair 
 water, and wyn? it again : to the former diffolution add 
 Arties of Crab-rtv.'!?, and rub the Skin very well there- 
 with, then walli with common w^ater, and wring them 
 out : then Avalh them with tindhirc of Madder, m the 
 folution of Tartar, Alum, and the aforefaid Allies ; and 
 after ( if not red enough) with the tincture of Brafil. 
 
 IX. Another rcay to dye them Red. 
 
 Walli the Skins, and lay them in galls for t^vo hours, 
 wrin| them out, and dip them into a colour made with 
 Ligup-HTK^ Alum and Verdigrife in water. Laftly, twice 
 dye them with Brafil boiled with Lye. 
 
 X. Another n:ay to dye them Blue. 
 
 Take the bed Indico, and ileep' it in Urine a day, 
 then boil it with Alum, and it will be good. Or, temper 
 the Indico with Red Wine, and w^aln the Skins there- 
 with. 
 
 XI. Ti dye Shins purple. 
 
 Tal.e Roch-alum, diftolve it in warm water, wet the 
 Skins therewith, drying them again ; then take rafped 
 Brazil, boil it in water well, then let it cool j do thus 
 thrice : tliis done, nib the dye over the Skins with your 
 hand,, which being dry polilli. 
 
 XII. To dye Skins of a fad green. 
 
 Take the filings of Iron and Sal-Armoniack, of eacli 
 alike, Itccp them in Urine till they be foft, with which 
 befmear the Skin, being llretched out, drying it in the 
 lliade, the colour will penetrate and be green on both 
 fides. 
 
 XIII. To dye Shins of a piiVe Shie Cobur. 
 
 For each Skin take Indico an ounce, put it into boiling 
 water, let it (land one night, then warm it a little, and 
 witji a brulli-pencil befmear the Skin twice over. 
 
 WV . To dye Shins of a pure TeHors:. 
 
 Take fine Aloes one ounce, Linfced Oil two pound, 
 diilolve or melt them, then ilrain it ; bcfmearing the Skins 
 therewith j being drj^, varniili them over. 
 
 XV. To 
 
Chap. 2f . OfDywgTarchfnent,2>:c, ^jt, 
 
 XV. To dye Skins Green. 
 Take Sap-green, Alum-water, of each a fufficient quan- 
 tity ; mix and boil them a little : if yoiv would have the 
 colour darker, add a little Indico. 
 XVh To dye Skins TelloTV. 
 Infufe Woad in VinegJ^r, in which boil a little Alum ; 
 Or thus, having dyed them Green by the fifteenth Sedi- 
 on, dip them in deco(5lion of Privet-t5erries, and Sai&on, 
 and Alum-water. 
 
 XVII. To dye them of an Orange Colour. 
 
 Boil Fuftick-berries in Alum-water : but for a deep 
 Orange, ufe Turmerick-root. 
 
 XVIII. A liquor to gild Skins, Afetals, or GLrf. 
 Take Linfeed Oil three pound, boil it in a glazed VcC- 
 
 fel till it burns a Feather being put into it, then put to 
 it Pitch, Rofm, dry Varnilli, or Gum-Sandrach, of each 
 eight ounces, Aloes Hepatica four ounces ; put all in 
 ponder into the Oil, and Ihr them with a {tick, the fire 
 being a little encreafed : if the liquor is too clear or 
 bright, you may add an ounce or two more of AlocsSoc- 
 catrine, and diminilfi the VarniiL, io the liquor will be 
 darker, and more like Gold. Being boiled, take it, and 
 Itrain it, and keep it in a Glafs for ufe : Avhich uie with 
 a Pencil. 
 
 Other jiaining Colours. 
 
 XIX. To make a fine Blue Jtaining vra*cr. 
 
 Make a weak Lixivium of Pot-a(lnes, or take Lime- 
 water, put into it a fu'ficient quantity of Florcy, and 
 difiblve therein a little Alum, ^i.nd (Hr it well over the 
 fire ; then take it o^\ and call: therein Wool Allies, fo 
 will you have a fine Blue. 
 
 XX. A weaker Blue jiaining^ n>atcr. 
 
 Take water a fi^cient quantity, dilToIve therein a iii^ 
 ficient quantity of Florey blue, and a little Alum 3 fo 
 will it be of a fainter colour than the former. 
 
 XXI. A jiaining Blue water, weaker than the latter. 
 Take pure Well-water a quart : two ilielbtiill of Flo- 
 rey blue J mix them well together, and lay them on thin ; 
 This is the faintett of all the three. 
 
 XXII. A deep green ftaining water. 
 
 Take Juice of the greened: Worts half a pint, luain it 
 through a Cloth ; and dilTolve therein a lutiicient qiLiri- 
 tity of purified Verdigrife : mix them well together, and 
 
 it 
 
472 PolygraphiceV, Lib. VI. 
 
 it will be a ^ood colour. How to purifie Verdigrife fee in 
 my Doron, lib. 3. cap. 6. Sed. 13. §.2. being Jo prepared, 
 one ounce mil he rtorth ten of that unprepared. 
 
 XXIII. Another green finning Colour. 
 
 Firft ftain the Leather, Parchment, or Paper with a 
 Blue, and let it dry : then lay thereon a yellow ftaining 
 colour, lb %vill the green be much the better. 
 
 XXIV. To maie a light fiaining green colour. 
 
 Take a pint of Wort made of Malt : and mix there- 
 with a fhell full of Florey, ftirring them well together ; 
 firft ftain with this, then upon this ftaining, lay yellow, 
 till it grows green : the more of your yellow ftaining li- 
 quor you lay on, the better will your green be. 
 
 CHAP.' XXIV. 
 Dyi;jg of JV^odj Horns dnd Bones, &c, 
 
 I.'X'O dye Elder ^ Box, A'fulherry-treey Pear-tree, Nu> 
 tree of the colour of Ebony. 
 Steep the Wood in Alum- water three or four days, then 
 boil It in common Oil, with a little Roman Vitriol and 
 Sulphur. 
 
 Where note, the longer you boil the Wood, the blacker it mil' 
 he, but too long rKt^kes it brittle. 
 II. To dye Bones green. 
 
 Boil the Bones in Alum-water, then take them out, 
 dry them and fcrape them, then boil them in Lime-wa- 
 ter with a little Verdigrile. 
 
 in. To dye Wood like Ebony, according to Glauber. 
 Diltil an A.juafortis of Salt-peter and Vitriol, and 
 ^therew ith befmear the Wood, as oft as you fee occalion. 
 
 IV. To rfiake Hdrns black. 
 
 Vitriol diifolved in Vinegar, and Spirit of Wine will 
 iTiakc Horns black : fo the Snow-white Calx of Silver in 
 tair water. 
 
 V. To make Bones -^yhite. 
 
 They are ftra!:H,cly made white by boiling with water 
 and Lime ; cominiully (cumming of it. 
 
 VI. To dye Bones green. 
 
 T.ike white Wine Vinegar a quart, filings of Copper, 
 
 Verdi- 
 
Chap. 24. Of Dying Wood^ Horm^ &c. 47 j 
 
 Verdigrife, of each three ounces ; Rue bruifed an hand- 
 ftil ; mix them, and put the Bones therein for fifteen 
 days. 
 
 VII. To dye Woodf HornSy or Bones red. 
 
 Firft boil them in Alum-water, then put them into 
 tin(^re of Brazil in Aluin-water for two or three Weeks : 
 or into tin6lure of Brazil in Milk. 
 
 VIII. To dye them Blue. 
 
 Having firft boiled them in Alum-w^ater, then put 
 them into thedilTolutionof Indico in Urine. 
 
 IX. To dye them green Hie Emeralds. 
 
 Take Aquafortis^ and put as much filings of Copper 
 into it, as it will dilTolve ; then put the Wood, Horns, or 
 Bones therein for a Night. 
 
 X. To dye Brijlks and Feathers. 
 
 Boil them in Alum-warer, and after, while they are 
 warm, put them into tin6kire of ^affton, if you would 
 have them yellow : or Juice of Elder-berries, if blue: or 
 in tincture of Verdigrife, if green. 
 
 XI. To dye an Az^ure Colour. 
 
 Take Roch-alum, filings of Brafs, of each two ounces ; 
 Fiili-glew half an ounce, Vinegar, or fair water a piut, 
 boil it to the confumption of the half. 
 
 All. To J(if ten Ivory and Bones. 
 ^ ^ Lay them t^velve hour? in Aqua fortus, then three da)^ 
 in the Juice of Beets, and they will be tender, and you 
 may make of them what you will : To harden them again^ 
 Jay them in strong White Wine Vinegar. 
 
 XIII. To make Horns f oft. 
 
 _ Take Urine a Month old, Qiiick-lime one pound^ cal- 
 cined Tartar half a pound, Tartar cmde, Salt, of each 
 four ounces ; mix and boil all together, then Ihain it 
 twice or thrice, in which put the horns for eight daye, 
 and they will be foft. 
 
 XIV. Another rvay to make them foft. 
 
 Take allies, of which glafs is made, Q.uick-lime, of 
 each a pound ; water a fufficient quantity, boil them tijl^ 
 one third part is confumed, then put a teathef into it, if 
 the feather peel, it is fodden enough, if not, boil it lon- 
 ger, then clarifie it, and put ic out, into which pur ii- 
 Imgs of Horn for t^vodaysj anoint 3^our hand with Oil, 
 and work the Horns as it were Palte, thexi make it into 
 what falliion you pleafe. -* 
 
 XV. A no- 
 
4)4 Polygra^hkes lib. VI. 
 
 XV. Another fpay tofoffi Boms'. 
 
 Take Juice of Marubiun. Alexanders, Yarrotv, Ce- 
 landine and Radilli roots, with ftrong Vinegar, mix them, 
 into which put Horns, and digell ieven days in Hofls- 
 dung, then work them as before. 
 
 XVI. To c^fl Horns in a moHld., lih as Lead. 
 
 Make a Lixivium of calcined Tartar and Quick-lime, 
 into which put filings or Icrapings of Horn, boil them 
 well together, and they will be as it were Pap, tinge it 
 of the colour you w^ould have it, and then you may call 
 it in a mould, -and make thereof' what falliioned things 
 you pleale. 
 
 XVII. To wc.h Ivory white. 
 
 If Ivory be yellow, fpotted or colotired, lay it in Quick- 
 lime, pour a little water over it, letting it lye twenty 
 four hours, and it wall be fair and white. 
 XVIII. To dye Bmes black. 
 
 Take Lythargc, Quick-lime, ana t\vo pounds : Water 
 j^. s. mix, and put in your Bones, and Itir with a Hick 
 till they boil apace : then take it off the fire, and ftir 
 till all is cold, and the Bones will be very black. 
 
 . CHAP. XXV. 
 
 The CONCLVSIO N. 
 
 I. TTO enumerate all the great variety of Dyes or Co- 
 -*■ lours, or olfer at an .Ellay to reduce them to a 
 certain method, as jt is a labour needlels, lo it is as alto- 
 gether impoflible, there being infinite Colours to be pro- 
 cluced, for which ( as yet ) we have no certain, known, 
 er re.d name. 
 
 II. And out of what wc have already enumerated in 
 this Book, ihe ingenious (ifthey pleale j ilia 11 find (by 
 little Pradice and Experience ) fuch great variety to be 
 apparent, tl at lliould we exprefs the number though 
 but in a very low or mean dcgie:, we could not but be 
 cxpofed in cenlure to an Hyperbole, even of the higheft. 
 
 III. Every of the foregoing Colours, will alone, or 
 fingly, produce a great number of others, thc'firfl more 
 
 deej^i 
 
Chap. 2$. Ihe Conclufton. 47^ 
 
 deep or high ; the latter, all of them paler than each o- 
 ther. 
 
 IV. And according to the variety of Colours the Mat- 
 ter is of, before it is put into the Dye, fiich new variety 
 alfo lliall you have again when it comes out j not ac- 
 cording to what the Colour naturally gives, but another 
 clean contrary to what you ( although an Artift) may 
 expect. 
 
 V. For if Grange Colcfurs be dipt into Dyes not na" 
 tural to them, they produce a forced colour of a new 
 texture, fuch as cannot poflibly be preconceived by the 
 mind of Man, although long and continued experience 
 might much help in that cafe. 
 
 VI. And if iiich variety may be produced by any one 
 of thofe fmgle Colours j what number in reafon might 
 be the ultimate of any two or three or more of them, be- 
 ing complicate or compounded ? 
 
 VII. Now if fuch great nmnbers or varieties may be 
 produced, i. By any one fingle Colour. 2. By being 
 complicate ; how fhould we ( without a certain and de- 
 terminate limitation, by denomination, or name ) ever 
 order fuch confufed, unkown, various, and undeterrai- 
 nate Species of things, in any pleafant intelligible me- 
 thod ? 
 
 VIII. Since therefore that the matter ( as yet ) appears 
 not only hard, bat alio impofhble ; we Ihall commend 
 what we have done to the ingenuity of the induiirious : 
 and defire that favour from the Experienced, with love 
 to corredl: our Errors ; which a6l of kindneis will not 
 only be a fliture Obhgation to the Author, but alfo en- 
 force Potterit}- to acknowledge the fame. . 
 
 Explicit Liber Sextns, 
 
' 477 
 
 P LTGKA FHICES 
 
 Liber Septimus. 
 
 0/ A L C H Y M I E: Wherein is treat- 
 ed of the true Fhilofophers TinSiurej 
 and Procefs of the fame. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Alchymie m General. 
 
 I. K LC H Y M I E IS 2in Amhicl word, and figni- 
 aA fies the Tranfmutation of Metals, Semi-Me- 
 -^ tals and Minerals. 
 
 II. It is then chiefly concerned with the Mineral King- 
 dom, which confilb of Metals, Semi-Metals, Salts, and 
 Stones. 
 
 III. The Metals are in Number Seven, vi-c. Saturn, 
 Jupiter y Mars, Sol, Venm, Mercury, and Luna. ; called 
 by the Vulgar, L€ad,Tin,Iron, Gold, Copper, QHtck-Jiher, 
 and Silver. 
 
 IV. The Semi-Metals are, Antimony, Cinnabar „ Tin- 
 gUfs, and Zink. 
 
 V. The Salts are chiefly, Vitriol, Sulphur, Arfenici^y 
 Alum, Nitre, Borax, and Salt. 
 
 VI. The chief Stones are, Lapis Calaminaris, Tutia'y 
 hamuli, and Lime-ftone. 
 
 VII. Now out of thefe the Alchymiji defigns one of 
 three things : to wit, i . Either the Counterfeiting of the 
 fine Metals. 2. Or the Separation of fine Metals out of 
 the bale : or, 3. Tht Generation of the fine Metals out of 
 the bafe, by Tranfmutation. 
 
 Mm Vnr.The 
 
47? Pofygraphfcet Lib. VII. 
 
 VIIl. The Counterfeiting of the fine Metals is done by 
 giving the Color and Body of a fine Metal to that which 
 IS bate ; as the tinging of Lead into a Gold color ; the 
 whiting of Copper ; the reduction of Mercury or Quick' 
 Jther. 
 
 ' IX. The Separation of fine Metals out of bafe, is done 
 by attrading of the Particles or Atoms of the fine ( con- 
 tained in that bafer) into one heap or mals, that they 
 might not be carried away by the wings of the Volatile 
 or bafer Metal. 
 
 X. Thtu it appearSy there is a large puantity of Goldy in 
 Lead, Tin^ Copper and Silver : and much Silver in Tin^ Cop- 
 per, and Iron : the proof of this is manifeji by the parting Say 
 C as they call it) to wifj the Teji by Strong Waters ; by which 
 you may find that one' pound of Lead rvitl yield near three or 
 four- penny weight of Silvac, and one ofGAd. 
 
 XI. One pound of Tin mil yield fomething above an 
 ounce of Silver ; and ahtfut tvpo penny weight of. Gold, or 
 more ; one pound of Silver mil yield about one ounce of 
 Gold ; and Copper about a quarter of the fame quantity, or 
 
 7K0re,%iC ..: J '.',-. ^ . . . y.^: 
 
 XII. But this is according to the goodnefs of the Metals, 
 and the skill of the Undertaker ; for by this re ay of Separation^ 
 Tvhat is gotten will never pay the Co?, it remains there fo-e, that 
 Tve fearrh out fome way more profitable, the which in the fol- 
 lowing Lines, to the' true Sous of Art, we (hall f lit h fully pre- 
 fent according to the bcfi of our knowledge : But we are 
 bound to be a little the more obfcure, for the fakes of fome 
 ingratcfiil Men, by whom we know our jufi meaning will be 
 traduced ; OHr skill in Art abufed ; and our perfon fought to 
 be rent and dejlroyed, jhould we but adventure to be fo open^ 
 as to give them the clear knowledge thereof. Let others fcarch 
 ^ ve have done, it is Jome fatisfa^ion, that the matter here 
 fought, is really in rerum natura ; the which joined to the 
 certainty of anothers attaining thereof, may give life to fu- 
 ture hopes, which as the purcurfer of better tki»gs, may point 
 at the great work it j elf. . ■ '- 
 
 XIII. The Matter of Tranfmutation is done by that 
 great Pouder, Ttn^'ure, Elixir, or Stone of the Philofo- 
 phers, which, according to the Opinion of Paraceljp^; 
 and others the moi\ Icained , we ihall fignifie in few 
 words. 
 
 XIV. By 
 
chap. ?. 0/Saturn, or Lead, 47^ 
 
 Xiy. ^f^isTtn^iire or £/;>/>, according to thejuda;- 
 in^m of the Ancients the whole Body of any Metal 
 '' *■ ' fcpa;at6d from its impurity ) is changed mto fine 
 
 CM A P. IL 
 
 Of Saturn, or Lead. 
 
 I. Q^turn is a cold, grofs, dull and heavy Body, re- 
 
 ^ piete with much Impurity, yet full of a Golden 
 ^etcury.^ « 
 
 'II. ijt is tinged irito a pure Golden Color by calcina- 
 tion thereof witti Antimony, and imbibing the Calx 
 thereof with the Spiru of Kenw^ Lapis Calnminnri^, Tmui^ 
 and Zink^ feverally prepared, and mixt ana^ and then 
 jredUjCe^, adjoynin^ to every ounce of Xead in Calx, a peii-r 
 ny weight of the Golden Sulphur of Venm. \ 
 
 III.' Its Lunar property is extracted, by a fimple calci- 
 iiation with ^rfenick a.n6. Nitre, ana, and imbibition of 
 the faid Calx for about feven days in the Oil of Salt. 
 
 IV. Or thm. Take of our Seed or Salt of Li^na one 
 
 ounce, of the Salt diVemM one ounce and a half • of the 
 
 crude body of Saturn one ounce, mix, and melt theiii • 
 
 then feparate, and you ihall iiave the Satarnian Luna, 
 
 , with confiderable advantage. 
 
 ' • V. Take Lead beaten into thin Plates ; and let them 
 be put into a Glafs Vefl'el, together with common Sale 
 and Mercury : Let it be well doled together, and digeli- 
 ed in the Earth or Horfe-dung, for ten whole Months j 
 ^nd it will be coil verted into Quick-filver. 
 .VI. Take Lead purified a pound, Sd Armoniack two 
 ounces in pouder, Sal Nitre in pouder one ounce, Sal 
 £/f/>ro/- bruiled, half an ounce : Put ail into a Cmcibl? 
 on a violent hot fire, for two whole hours ; then take it 
 out, and it will be prepared for the Silver work. 
 _ yil. Or tkm. Get an earthen Pot, whofe bottom is 
 full of hole?, put it into another Pot, and let it be co- 
 v-ered in a fmall Pit : dig up the Earth thereon on every 
 (i\t, and tread it down with your Foot ; Fill the upper 
 
 M m 2 void 
 
4^0 Polygrdfhsces Lib. VII. 
 
 void place with unflaked Lime, to the middle : then 
 take Lead cut into tliin little bits, and lay it upon the 
 Lime ; and over the Lead more Quicklime ; put upon 
 it boil'd Llrine, cover the Pot arid lute it well j make a 
 great fire on every fide, heaping it up even over the top, 
 and -continue it io for a day ; fo fhall a purified Lead 
 f:ill through the Lime and Holes into the lower VeiTel, 
 which will be prepared for Tranfmutation. 
 
 VIIL Or Lead may be thus purified. Melt your Lead 
 often, and cait it into the Hiarpell Vinegar : Melt it a- 
 gain, and caft it into Juice of Cellandine : then into 
 Salt-water : then into Vinegar, in which Sd Armoniack 
 his been dilTolved. And laitly, let it be poured out into 
 the Cupel, and fo it will be very well purified. 
 
 IX. Take jpring-water. Vitriol, of each a pound ; 
 ir,i\; them together : filter through brown Paper, and 
 dilbl the Water off in a Glafs Alembick, which keep 
 in a Glafs for ufe. Take Quickfilver an ounce : put it 
 into a Ciiicible over the fire ; and when it begins to be 
 hot, add purifi^rd Leaf Gold an ounce j and fo remove 
 it from the fire : then take of your purified Lead one 
 p(iund ; amalgainate it with the aforefaid mixture of 
 Quickfilver and Gold, over a gentle fire, ftirring it with 
 an lioii Kod : being well mixed, piut thereto an ounce 
 of- the former Vitriol Water, ftir, digeft a Month, eva- 
 porate, and you have a Medicine in order to Tranfmu- 
 tation. 
 
 X. The Preparation of Saturn. Set it in a Furnace of 
 Calcination, (lirring it while in Flux, as you do Jupiter, 
 till it be converted into Allies : fift this, and fct it again 
 in a Fire of Calcination, till its fugitive and inflamabic 
 fubflance is gone : then take this red Calx, ijnbibe and 
 jirind often with common Salt clcanfed. Vitriol puri- 
 fied and fliarp Vinegar : this matter often imbibe, dry 
 and grind, till all its nnclcannefs be wholly removed ; 
 this done, add Glafs ground to pouder, mix them well 
 together, and make thtm How in a Crucible. Calcine it 
 again with pure Sal ArmcniacJ;, -And moil fubtilly grind 
 and dilfolve it into a clear Water upon a Porphyry Stone 
 in the open Air, in a cold and moid place ; augment- 
 ing the Salt, if need be. This is the Preparation of the 
 Ferment of Lead for the Red Elixir. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. ^ Of Jupiter, or Tin. 481 
 
 c H A P. m. 
 
 Of Jupiter, or lift, 
 
 I. Tl7j5/Vfr is much a more noble body than Saturn, and 
 3 ( as we laid before ) abounds much more with a 
 Solar and Lunar Mercury. 
 
 II. It is reduced into the Imitation of Silver by often 
 melting of it. and quenching of it in the Spirit of Arfe- 
 nick J or by Calcination of it with Lime ( three ounces 
 to a pound of Jupiter granulated ) and then by often 
 cxtinguifhing the fame in the fpirit of Arjenick afore- 
 faid. 
 
 III. The Luna is extracted out of it thus : Let Jupiter 
 be married to our Luna of the fame ftature, by the Pried 
 Mercury, after which let them drink their fill of the Mi- 
 neral fpirit of the Grape ; then put them to Bed in the 
 exaltation of Luna, and houfe of Venus, and the next 
 morning let them drink very well of the fmitmll Wine 
 of the Daughterof L»«^ J this bein^^ done, you will find 
 Luna like a Bride coming forth out ol the Marriage Cham- 
 ber ; but with the Wings of an Eagle, which Wings you 
 muft clip by the means of Mars, elfe you will lofe 
 her : Thus, take of the Seed of Mars, and the eldeft Son 
 of old Saturn, ana, make them contend with Tellus, for 
 three whole days and nights, till they conjoin and be- 
 get a Son, white as Luna, and fixt as Sol. This Son 
 will by force take Jupiter % Wife from him, and being 
 fmitful caufe her to bring forth a plentitul and profitable 
 IfTue. 
 
 IV. Or this. Kill Jupiter ( in conjunclion with Luna) 
 by_ the fire of Tellm, then revive the dead Body ( after 
 it is impregnated with the A^ineral fpirit of the Grape) 
 by the help o£Sat{irn,3.nd you have a numerous oft-fprnig 
 of Luna. 
 
 V. Or thus : Marry Jupiter to Luna ; then marry him 
 to her daughter, and join thefe IlTues together, and they 
 will fympathetically attradl: and join all the Seed of Z^- 
 na into one family or lump. 
 
 M m 5 VI. Or 
 
4§|> Poiygraphicer Lib. VII. 
 
 VI. Or thtu : Which is both the bcft and cafieft way. 
 Take Jupiter and melt him, then quench him ten times 
 in xht Spirit o^ Tenus , till he is reduced very fmall and 
 Jow : this done, join . him with the Daughter of Luna 
 calcined with Tellti),2Ln^ the work is over. This U very 
 profitable, and the wojl uJef'A of all, bm by reafon of the un- 
 vcdrthinefs of this generAcion, it cannot admit of any expli- 
 canon. 
 
 VII. The Gold, is thus Extra6kd : marry Jupiter ter 
 Vemis, and their oft-fprmg to Sd by the means of Pricft 
 Mirciiry : put them to Bed ( in the life of Phcebm J for 
 three whole days and nights, afterwards make them 
 dnmk with the Ipirit of the Daughter of Fenm, then 
 make a perfc6l conjun6lion with the eldeft Son of.S'^f- 
 tur^i, and you fliall have what you fought. 
 
 VIII. Or thus: Calcine J Hpiter granulated one pound, 
 with Qiiick'lime four ounces, mix all with die Calx of 
 Venui and Luna ana ; calcine again for three days, im- 
 bibe in the fpirit of Fenm ( that is, the fixed Oil) for 
 feven day?, then reduce to a regulfu with Saturn, and 
 afterwards feparate with Antimony. 
 
 IX. The preparation of Jupiter. Mt\t Jupiter, and con- 
 tinually {lir it with an Iron Rake, till it is brought to 
 Allies. Thefe Allies fift, calcine them again, adding 
 fire not exceeding the Fire of it? funon,and ftir it often, 
 calcining it for 24 hours, till all its fuperfluous humidi- 
 ty be wafted : then well walli it wath purified common 
 Salt and Alum 5 and moft Ibarp Vinegar, and dry it ; 
 g^rind again, and walTi and dry, doing thus fo often, 
 till by the acuity of the Salts, Alum and Vinegar, its 
 whole humidity, blacknefs, and filth is done away and 
 confumed. Add to it Glafs in ponder, mix, and with 
 a fufficient fire make it flow in a Crucible, having a hole 
 in its bottom, let within another, and the pure clean 
 body will delcend -, the whole Earthlv feculent fubftance 
 remaining above with the Salts ana Glafs : for in that 
 Body reduced and defcended is an equal and perfcdl: 
 proportien of pure Argent Vive, and white Sulphur not 
 burning ; becauie fire and the Corrofive?, have divided 
 the whole humidity, and fugitive inflainable, conupt, 
 and black flibftance : and through that delcenfory th?. 
 whole feculent fubilance is compleatly fcparated. Ar- 
 terwards calcine this pure reduced Bgdy again, ^vnh 
 
 pure 
 
Chap. 4' 0/ Mais, oy Iron, 4^^ 
 
 pure and clean Sal Arntoniad, until it be in weight 
 nearly equal ; being well and perfedtiy calcined, grind 
 the whole well upon a Porphyry Stone, and put it in 
 the open Air in a cold and humid place, or in a Glafs 
 Veffel in Horfe-dung until the whole be diffolved, aug- 
 menting the Salt, if need be. This water is the ferment 
 o£ Jupiter, for the White Elixir'. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of Mars, or Iron 
 
 I. W-^^^ is yet a more noble body, but harder and 
 ^^ more replete with /rem or filth, yet full of a So- 
 lar and Lunar Mercury. 
 
 II. It is converted into Copper by the Oil or Spirit of 
 Vemu : into Brafs by the means of Lapis Calaminaris, 
 and made to imitate Silver by impregnating its Calx in 
 the burnmg Spirit ofArfenick. 
 
 III. It has much Silver and Gold in it, But they are 
 extraCled with great difficulty ; thus, firft melt the body 
 with an equal quantity of Tin, Lead and Copper ; this 
 done, granulate it, and imbibe the body with Oil of 
 Venus very itrong, then calcine it with the butter ofArfc- 
 nick ( if you extrail its Silver, ) or Antimony ( if its Gold ) 
 imbibe this Calx over a gentle heat in the ftrongeft Oil 
 of Flints, or Sand for ten days : tiicn reduce it. 
 
 IV. Mars is whitened by the rales which we have 
 delivered in Lib. 3. cap. 26. Se5h. 31. and made of a Gol- 
 den Coloir by Se6l. 28. of the fame Chapter. 
 
 V. The preparation of. Mars. Let it be calcined as f^e- 
 ntu with common Salt cleanfed, and let it be wafhed 
 with pure Vinegar ; bemg wafl^ed, dry it in the Sun, 
 arid when dryed, grind and imbibe it with new Salt and 
 Vinegar, and then put it into the fame Furnace, as Vve 
 fhall hereafter fay diVcnm^ for three da^'s: this calcina- 
 tion dilTolve into a clear water, which is the -vvatcr of 
 the fixed Sulphur, wondciiu!iy augmenting the Colour 
 of the Elixir. 
 
 M m 4 VI. Anc 
 
4^4 Polygrdphicis Lib. VIT. 
 
 VI. Another preparation of Mars. Grind one pound 
 of the filings thereof, with half a pound of Arjenicl 
 fublimed. Imbibe the mixture with the Water of Salt' 
 peter and Sal-Alcali, reiterating this Imbibition thrice : 
 then make it flow with a violent Fire, and you will 
 have jour Iron White ; Repeat this work till it flow 
 liifficienth'^, with peculiar dealbation. 
 
 VII. Take of the Calx of Mars made into a Parte 
 xnxh Mercury \). pounds: o£ P^enm iv. pounds: o( Sa- 
 turn iv. pounds : mix thefe without Ferment, and boil 
 the mixuire for feven days, and you will find the whole 
 dry. Fix it rnd put it (together with half its weight of 
 Litharge beaten into Pouder) into a reducing Furnace, 
 and you will find a body of great profit. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of Sol, or Gold. 
 
 I. COL is the pureft of all Metals, and the very perfefti- 
 ^ on of the Mineral Kingdom, at the wlwch, all our 
 pains, labours and endeavours aim. 
 
 II. This Gold of it felf is dead and without force or 
 power, but being quickned, and enlivened, it has an in- 
 ward feminating or germinating property, which being 
 raifed and brought forth by its innate life ( till now lockt 
 lip) can dilate it felf C having a fitting Womb to receive it J 
 into ten thoufand times its own quantity ; and thereby 
 tranfmiue or change the Mercurial property (which is in- 
 deed immature Gold) of all Metals into its own nature 
 and kind. 
 
 III. This imntatme Gold in the bodies of all Metals 
 would have come to perfe6tion oF its own accord, had it 
 been ennobled with a fufhcient fulphur, lite and heat, 
 to have caufed fuch a natural fermentation and excretion of 
 the abounding filth anddrofs, in which the fo fmall par- 
 ticles and Atoms of the Seminal Golden property was 
 latent, or buried. 
 
 IV. The quickning of the inward life of this Metal is 
 folcly done by the help of the Seed of Metals, to wit, 
 
 Mercury^ 
 
Chap. 6. 0/ Venus, or Copper. 4$ 5 
 
 Mercury, but^ how or after what manner we fhall mor^ 
 plainly (hew in Cha^. 12. following 
 
 V. Sol is thus prepared. Take Sol beaten into thin 
 Plates, or rather Leaf Gold, and with them and Com- 
 mon Salt prepared, make Lay upon Lay in a VeiTel of 
 Calcination, which fet into a Furnace and calcine well 
 for three days,untillthe whole be fubtilly calcined ; then 
 take it out, grind it well, wafli it with Vinegar, and 
 dry it in the Sun, afterwards grind it well with half its 
 weight of Sal-Armoniack, cleanfed from its common or 
 Sea-Salt; fet it to be diiTolved, untill the whole (by the 
 benefit of the Salt) be diiTolved into a mofi clear wa- 
 ter : this is the precious Ferment for the Red Elixir, and 
 the tme body made Spiritual. 
 
 VI. Take Gold diifolve it in its own water, and de- 
 C06I and prepare it, by boiling it away to a third part ; 
 then expofe it to the Air,and let it in Balneo or in Dun^ 
 for certain days ; then will it be the Oil of Gold ; lo 
 will the Ferment of Sol be perfect for the Red, which 
 keep forufe. 
 
 CHAP. VL 
 Of Venus, or Copper. 
 
 I. ^EtiHS is the fineft of the bafe Metals, and contains 
 ' more of a Golden Sulphur than them all. 
 
 II. She is Whitened, and made like unto Silverj by 
 calcining it with Butter of the Daughter of Luna, and 
 Sah of Tartar, and tiien reduced by Saturn, and being 
 often melted and extinguilhed in the faid Butter. 
 
 III. Or thus. To the afore reduced Kfw/if^, being melted 
 add (for an ounce of Venm^ two penny weight of our 
 fixed Mercury. 
 
 IV. She is made of a Golden colour by often changing 
 the calx (calcined with the Son of Sattsrn) in the SpiiiL 
 of Antimony, Zink, Lapis Calaminarls, and Laprs Tutia : 
 then reduced by being melted with a lliliicient qiuuiitv' 
 of Lapis Tutia, and ten or twelve times malted, ani 
 quenched in the aforefaid Spirit. 
 
 VI. Her 
 
4S5 Tolygraphiea Lib. Vlf. 
 
 V. Her Silver is extracted as tliat of Tm by the Third 
 SeEi. of Chap. 3. Or thwy calcine her with Butter of the 
 Daughter of Luna , to which calx adjoin the calx of 
 Lma and^ and reduce with Saturn. 
 
 VI. Her Gold is extracfled thus : Calcine her with the 
 Son of Saturn : then calcine Lima with the fame alfo r 
 put both thefe calxes together and calcine for three days 
 with the Son of Saturn inixt with Tellm ; to which aad 
 the Calx of Sol calcined with the fame Son of Saturn , 
 j4nai put all together and calcine them for twenty four 
 hours, reduce them with Antimony j keep them all in a 
 melting heat for three days, then take it forth,and quench 
 it being melted ten or twelve times in the tinging and 
 fixing Spirit of Lapis Calaminarisy Antimony and Zink, 
 Ana. 
 
 This is very proftahic, and not difficult to perform ; it way 
 he done alfo (at before J rtithom ealcination. 
 
 VII. yenus is made of a Silver colour thue. Take 
 Merairy fublimate,and a proportionable quantity of phi- 
 loio^Yiick Sal-Armoniack; add Vinegar, and let them boil 
 together: in this quench Auricalcam or Copper (being heat 
 red hot) and it will become white like Silver. 
 
 VIII. She is made of a Gold colour thus. Take Cop- 
 per, Lapis Calami/iarisy ot each halt an ounce ; Lapis 
 Tutia I}, drachms: let the Copper be firft heat red hot and 
 cxtinguillied 2 or 3 times in Urine : do the like with 
 the Lapis Calimanans and Tu:ia : To the Copper thus pre- 
 pared add Honey half an ounce, boil them together till 
 the Honey becomes black and dry : which take and beat 
 with the Lapis Calimanaris and the Tutia^ then mix all 
 together by melting, and you have your dcfire. 
 
 IX. She is whitened thus. With purified and reduced 
 Litharge mix fuMmied Arfenick ; and cait it upon Copper 
 in fufion ; it whitens it veiy well. 
 
 X. Or thu^. Mix Silver and Copper together ; and 
 upon that mixture call the Whitening medicine. For the 
 Silver is a greater friend to Arjenick, than any other 
 Metal ; it alio takes away fradVion from it, 
 
 XI. Or thtts. Upon a mixture of f^enus and Dora 
 melted caft pieces of iliblimed Arfenick^ and Afcnnry : 
 They arc better in pieces than Pouder, bccaufe the Pon- 
 der coniumes and vanillies Iboncr, or before it can do its 
 opciauon. 
 
 XII. Take 
 
CAdp. 6, 0/Vcnus, or Copper. 487 
 
 Xn. Take Mercury precipitate, and Copper ca.\cincdy 
 diflblye each a part in diflblving Water and mix the dif- 
 folutions together j. coagulate , and put the whitening 
 Medicine on it, and it will be exactly like Silver. 
 
 XIII. Or thus. Take Mercury precipitate, and Li- 
 tharge, diiToh'E each a part : joyn thefe folutions in one : 
 then take the Calx of the Body you intend to whiten, 
 difTolve it: ;oyn all thefe together ^ coagulate, and re- 
 duce with Borax. 
 
 . XIV. Or thai. Take Qaici-fflver, fliblime it fo often 
 from precipitate Merctay ^ till it be fixed in it, and 
 fprouts forth, put this upon melted Copper , and it will be 
 very wliite. 
 
 XV. Or thfis. Diflblve I^^fA'/zffr and Litharge in a 
 proper diiToIving Water : joyn thefe folutions together 5 
 and by thefe the fubftance ot Copper will be whitened. 
 
 XVI. Or thus. It is alfo whitened with lublimed 
 Arfenkh : Take Calx of Copper , mix it with fiiblimed 
 Arjenkk. Reiterate the Sublimation, and continue it 
 till the Arfenick flay with it : this will be the more eafie 
 and firm if a quarter part of the Calx of Silver be added 
 to the faid Calx of Copprr. 
 
 XVII. Orthns. Put the i\Muxitdi Arfenicl to the Sil- 
 ver ; and then the whole upon the Copper, and it will 
 be excellently whitened: Or mix Litharge, or Calx of 
 Lead diifolved with Silver, put tliis upon Arfenick ; and 
 laflly caft all this mixture on the Copper Body and it will 
 be very white. 
 
 XVIII. To Prepare Copper. Cement very thin Plates 
 of f^enas with Common Sale well cleanied in a Cruci- 
 ble, covered and well luted, for 24 hours : this cementa - 
 tion repeat (fcraping oif wiiat is caianed) till all the 
 Plates are confumed. Grind this Calx to a moft fubtil 
 Pouder and walli it with Vinegar, till ir comes from it 
 colourlefs : imbibe it again with Salt and Vinegar,giind, 
 and calcine in an open Veifcl for 3 days; takeicoui, 
 grind, and waih well with Vinegar, dry. and add haii 
 Its weight in Sal- Armouiack, grind till \i is imp:ilpabif> 
 and expofe it to the Air to be diifolved, adding Itill frelh 
 Sal-Armoniack if need ihall be, till the v.-hole be maoc 
 Water. Tliis is the Water of the fixed Sulphur of f'^i- 
 
 flHS. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
488 Pol/^rdphieef. Lib. VU. 
 
 CHAP. vn. 
 
 Of Mercury or Quickfllver. 
 
 I. 'XM^'^o is the Roct of" Metals, and pureimma- 
 
 aVI turatc G:ild. 
 
 n. By this the Body of Sol is opened thus : make an 
 Amalgaina of Sol and Alercury fo long till the Mercury 
 will f^valbw up no more : leparate and you fliall find 
 your Gold likeEanh newlv broken up: tins Gdd being 
 put into the iWeetOil o: Salt becomes more perfectly 
 dilTolred, which being dialled till it comes ever the 
 Hslm will anfxver your intenton : but there is a more 
 noble and excellent way of opening of the Body of Gold 
 which here v»-e may not declare, yet in its due and con- 
 venient place l"hall be mankeft, and that is only by the 
 help of a perfect fweet, or rather infipid THen.incPft. 
 
 III. To mak.! oar -xhitt Mtrasj ; This is only done by 
 a fimple dilTolution in the aforeiaid 'in(%^'xd nan tr-Aum. 
 
 By this white Aia-y^ ; is Coppa- made of a durable 
 white, after a thouland meltings. 
 
 IV. To n-iki onr nd Mtrcitry ; This is done by a dif- 
 folution of the Spirit of Tdlus, and then tinged by the 
 Mineral Spirit cf the Grape : and laftly ^xtd h :ht gran, 
 Sriri: 3-' Venus. Tl)is Ttill ^rr-titly unite rritb Gold, never 
 more to be feparated by all the Art of Man. 
 
 V. Take Q^.ck-jiher 2 or 3 times purified with Sal- 
 Armoniack and Urine ; put it into a Crucible over a tem- 
 perate Fjre J %vhen it waxes hot, put prepared Jupiter 
 thereon as much, and augment the Fire by degree?, 
 till the Flame grows blew : make the Fire then ftronger, 
 and blow a little : when you fee it begins to give ever 
 fnioaking, take it trom the Fire, and you will find your 
 Silver a'>nfiierably Augmented. 
 
 VI. Take Sulphur of Ven'^.-^ pure, red, and fixed, 
 but mel: n^ like Wax: cart it upon purified Aferr^y 
 m a iult proportion, and in a fit heat j and the Aiercury 
 will become good Gold. 
 
 VII. r# 
 
Chap. 7. O/'Mercury, w Quickfilver. 489 
 
 VII. To harden Qmck-filver. It is done with the fiimes 
 of either Saturn oijttpner. Melt Jftpttr, and when it 
 begins to be cold, make holes in it, and put youi QHtck- 
 filver therein, and it will be hardned j which being re- 
 peated often, will be the more firm. 
 
 VIII. Take Mercury and Salt-Peter, ana ; beat them 
 into dufl, put them mto a Glafs well Luted, over a 
 gentle Fire for 2 hours : augment the Fire, till the 
 Imoaking ceafes; after the fmoak comes a Flame, out 
 of the neck of the Glafs, and the Mercurial Sulphur re- 
 mains in the bottom, as it were white and fixed. Take 
 it out, and add to it an equal quantity of Sal-Armoni- 
 ack J beat them to a P9uder and mix them well ; fub- 
 lime, firft in moderate Fire j then in aftronger ; fo con- 
 tinuing for 4 hours : take this fublimate, and fublime 
 it again with its /^^cf; 6 times, fowill the Sulphur remain 
 in the bottom of the Veffel: take it, beat it to Pouder, 
 and on a Marble, let it refolve to an Oil : This is Sul- 
 phur of Aiercury for Tranfmutation. 
 
 IX. Take purified Quick-fiver ij. ounces; Leaf-fihsr 
 j. ounce : make an Anialgama, and let it lUnd 7 days, 
 then fublime therefrom the Silver, walh it in Water 
 clean, and dry it. Take this Calx of Silver and^'" "">lre 
 it in Aipa fords ^ and evaporate to drynefs ; mir 'ry 
 Calx with Borax, and melt it into a Mafs ; of 
 this Silver and mix it with the like weight of ime Gold 
 and you have a prepared Body to be tinged of a Gold 
 colour : Make of this an Amalgama with ten times its 
 weight of purified Quick- filver : Abitrail the Silver, and 
 you have a porous Body, fit to receive the tinging Me- 
 dicine. 
 
 X. The Ferment of Ferments. It is made for the white 
 after this manner. Take Ferment of Lma with its Oil 
 (at Chap. 8. Se[i. 6. and j.J add to it twice as much 
 Arfenick, lublimed and diifolved in its proper Water ; 
 then to both thefe add Mercury, diiToh'-ed as much as the 
 Arfenick : Mix the Waters and fet them over a Fire for 
 one day to be incorporated : then draw off the Water by 
 an Alcmbick , and Cohobate it 15 times; fo inceratintr, 
 it will be fluid as fufible Wax. Add as much melted 
 Wax, commix, and proje6t upon J/^rf«ry walhed, as 
 you defile. v'^" 
 
 XI. Thi 
 
4 Jo Polygrdfhices Lib. VII. 
 
 XI. The Ferment of Ferments for the Red. Diflblve Sol 
 in its own water ; ^add to it Sulphur, diflblye it in the 
 lame water 2 parts: Mercury diliblvcH 3 parts: let all 
 be truly diffolyed into a moft clear water, which being 
 mixt boil for one day, that they may be Fermented, draw 
 d^i cohobate the water 1 5 times : Incerate wi^h yellow 
 Virgins Wax, with half its weight of Oil of Blood or 
 Oil of Eggs : then projedl upon Crude Mervny, and you 
 lliall have your defire. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 O/Luna. or Silver. 
 
 I. T XJnd is the meaneft of the fine or pure Metals, ^n(J 
 
 •*-' (^as it were) vnhite Gold. 
 
 But Luna differs from Gold, more tlian in the coloiu: 
 onlyj vU. in Weiglit too, and that very (;opfidera- 
 bly. " 
 
 II. She is tinged of a Golden colour by our red Mercf^ 
 ry (c^' 41 'd per je for 2S days in a Pelican or other con- 
 veriient \'eirel, till fuch time as the faid Mercury will 
 endure the llrongett Fire) the yellow colour this Mercury 
 gives is fixtd. 
 
 III . Her Gold is exadily extrafted by the method deliver- 
 ed in Ch'ap. 6. ScEi. 6. 
 
 Or thus. Take Sol, Luna., J^enus^ of each a likequan- 
 ty ; melt them together, and keep them in fufion for 7 
 euiys: then take them forth, and by the Refiners Art 
 leparate the Gold ; you will find your Gold (if you 
 have been careful in the Operation) to be augmented 
 nearly an fixteenth part. ., '' . 
 
 IV. Or thus. Calcine her with the Son* of S^tttfm^ to 
 which add our red Mercury ^ ana. put all into Oil of 
 Salt tor ten or twelve days; heat it red hot, and ex- 
 tinguiGi in Oil of Flints or Sand ten times ; to this 
 Caixaddof ^nt Lapis Tutia, ana. reduce all and feparate 
 with Antimony. 
 
 V. Take Sal-Armoniack ij. pound ; purified fiom 
 2ts Common or Sea Salt: pure Vermilion i. pouml: 
 Grind them again togetliei and fublime 6 or 7 times : 
 
 then 
 
Chap. 9. OfMetds. 4(^1 
 
 then lay the Vermilion on a Marble ftone to diflblvf. 
 into Water, which keep for your Work. Take pieces of 
 ficefli Vermilion iij. ounces wet it in the former water, 
 and afterwards in the Glair of Eggs : and roul it in tlw 
 filings of fine Silver \). ounces, fo often till it has take« 
 up all the ij. ounces of Silver. Put thefe in a firm Iron 
 Pot, which may be clofed with a ttrong Screw : put it 
 into a Furnace, give Fire by degrees, and incrcafc it 
 gradatim to the higheft degree, continuing it fo for a 
 Philofophical Month, and you will have a Medicine for 
 Tranfmutation of Copper into Silver, which being try'd 
 upon the Teft with Lead, will prove good at all 
 Aflays. 
 
 _ VI. The Preparation of Luna. Lnna or Silver is fiib- 
 tilized , or attenuated, and reduced in manner as is 
 above faid of Sol. Therefore in all and every part of 
 this Work, do the fame in its Subtilization, as you did 
 with the Gold : And this water of Luna is the Ferment 
 for the white Elixir. 
 
 VII. DifTolve Lma in its own Corrofive water, which 
 water boil away to a third part ; then expofe it to the 
 Air, or fet it in Balneo, or in Dung for certain days ; 
 fo liave you Oil of Lma, and the Ferment for the white 
 Perfedled. 
 
 C H A P. IX. 
 
 Of the Accidents of Meuls, 
 
 I. T^ O make Iron of a Gold colour. 
 
 ^ Take Alum of Melancy in Pouder, Sea- Water ) 
 mix them : then heat the Iron red-hot, and quench it in 
 the fame. 
 
 II. To make. Iron of a Silver cohnr. 
 
 Take Pouder of Sal-Armoniack, unflack*d-Lime, mix 
 and put them into cold water, then heat the />o« red-hot, 
 quench it therein, and it will be as white as Silver. 
 
 III. To [often Steel to ^rave upon. 
 
 This is done with a Lixivium of Oak-alhes and un- 
 flak'd-Lim.e,,l?y caliipgthei'f^/ijico itj ajiid letting i| 
 
 reiiKiia 
 
492 Pofygraphfcef Lib. VII. 
 
 remain there fourteen days. Or thus, Take the Gall of 
 an Ox, Man's Urine, Verjuice, and juice of Nettles, of 
 each alike, mix them ; then quench 5fff/ red-hot there- 
 in four or live times together, and it will become very 
 foft. 
 
 IV. To harden Iron or Steel. 
 
 Quench it fix or feven times in Hogs blood mixed with 
 Goofe-greafe, at each time drying it at the fire before 
 you dip it again, and it will become very hard and not 
 brittle. 
 
 V. To folder on Iron. 
 
 Set the Joynts of Iron as clofe as you can, lay them in 
 a glowing Fire, and take of Venice-G\2Lk in Pouder, and 
 the Iron being red-hot, call the Pouder thereon, and it 
 will folder it felf 
 
 VI. To connterfeit Silver. 
 
 Take Ci^^ftal Arfcnick vii; ounces, Tartar vj. ounces, 
 Salt-Peter ij. ounces, Glafsj.ounce and an half, lubli- 
 mate half an ounce: make them feverally into fine 
 Pouder and mix them : then take iij\ Pound of Copper in 
 thin Plates, which put into a Crucible (with the former 
 Pouder firamm Jnper jfratuw) to calcine, covering it and 
 luting it fbongly, let it ftand in the Furnace for about 
 eight or ten hours : then take it out, and (being cold) 
 Ireak the pot, and take out all the Matter, and melt it 
 wiih a violent Fire, carting it into fome Mold. Then 
 take Purged Brafs i|. pound, of the former metal j. 
 pound ,• melt them together, cafting in now and then, 
 ibme of the aforefaid Pouder, after which add half as 
 much of fine Silver melting them together, and you 
 have that wliich is defired ; Laflly^ To make it as white 
 as Silver, boil it in Tartar. 
 
 VII. Another way to counterfeit Silver. 
 
 Take purified Tin viii. ounces, Quick-Silver half an 
 ounce, and when it begins to rife in the firfl heat, take 
 Ponder of Canthandes, and calt into it, with a lock of 
 Hair, that it may burn in it; being melted put into it 
 the Pouder atbrelaid, then take itfuddenly from the fire, 
 and let it cool, 
 
 VIII. To p«/r^f Brafs. 
 
 It is clcanfetror purged, by carting into it when it is 
 mcltetl, broken Glais, Tartar, Sal-armoniack and Salt- 
 peter, each of them by turns, by little and little. 
 
 IX. T9 
 
Chap. 9. Of Metals, 495 
 
 IX. To tinge Lead of a Gold colour. 
 
 Take purged Lead one pound, Sd-Armoniacly in pou- 
 der, oae ounce, Salt-peter half an ounce, Sal Elebrot two 
 drams ; put all irito a Crucible for two days, then add to 
 it Sulphur of Sol, and it will be throughly tinged. 
 
 X. To purge Lead. 
 
 Melt it at the fire, then quench it in the fharpett Vine- 
 gar ; melt it again and quench it in the Juice of Celan- 
 dine ; melt it again, and quench it in Salt-water : then 
 in Vinegar mixed with Sal Armoniack : and laitly 
 melt it and put it into Ailies,and it will be well cleaii- 
 fed. 
 
 XI. To Make Lead of a Golden colour. 
 
 Put Qiiick-filver one ounce into a Crucible, fet it 
 over the fire till it is hot, then add to it of the beft leaf- 
 gold one ounce, and tnke it from the nre, and mingle it 
 with purified Lead melted one pound ^ mingle all well 
 together with an Iron Rod, to which put of the filtrated 
 lolution of Vitriol of Sol in fair water one ounce ; then 
 let it cool, and it will be of a Gold colour. Diifolve tr.e 
 Vitriol in its equal weight of water. 
 
 XII. To take aiy,ay the ringing and fcftnefs of Tin. 
 Melt the Tin, and cad in fome Qiiick-filver, remove 
 
 it from the fire, and put it into a Glals Retort, with a 
 large round Belly, and a very long Neck ^ heat it red 
 hot in the fire, till the Mercury fublimes, and the Tin 
 remains at bottom 3 do thus three or four times. The • 
 fame may be done by calcining of ,it three or four 
 times, by which means it will looner be re.i-hot than 
 melt. 
 
 XIII. To take away the foftnefs, and creaking noife of 
 Tin. 
 
 This is done by granulating of it often, and then re- 
 ducing it again, and quenching it often in Vinegar and 
 a Lixivium of Salt of Tartar. The creaking noiie is ta- 
 ken away by melting it feven or eight feveral times, and 
 quenching it in Boys Urine, or elfe Oyl of Walnuts. 
 
 XIV. To take aw.ay the deaf found of Tin. 
 
 Tliis is done by dilfolving it in Aquafortis over a gen- 
 tle fire, till the water tiy away ; doing thus fo long till ic 
 is all turned to a Calx -, 'which mixed with Calx of" Silver, 
 and reduced, performs the work. 
 
 N n XV. To 
 
494 Polygraphices Lib. VII. 
 
 XV. To r»ah that Tin crack not. 
 
 Take Salt, Hony, of each alike, and mijS them : melt 
 'your Tin, and put it twelve or more times into it, then 
 ftrain out the Tin, and it will purge and leave crack- 
 ing ; put it into a Crucible, which jute, and calcine it 
 four and twenty hours, and it will be like Calx of 
 Gold. 
 
 XVI. To tale arvay the hrhtlenefs of any Metal. 
 
 Firft calcine it and put it under dung, then do thus ; 
 when it is red-hot at the fire, or melted, quench it often 
 in Aqua vit<e often diftilled ; or ufe about thcin Rofin 
 or Turpentine, or the Oyl of it, or Wax, Suet, Euphor- 
 bium, Myrrh, Artificial Borax : for if a Metal be not 
 malleable, unduous bodies will oftentimes make them 
 fotter ; if all thefe, or fome of thefe be made up with 
 iome moidure into little Cakes : and when the Metal 
 yields to the fire, by blowing with the Bellows, we caft 
 m fome of them, and make them thick like mud, or clear, 
 then fet the Metal to the fire, that it may be red-hot in 
 burning coals, take it forth and quench it in them, 
 and fo let it remain half an hour to drink in. Or anoint 
 the Metal with Dogs greafe, and melt it with it, for that 
 will take away much of the brittlenefs of it, and make 
 it fb that it may be hammered and wrought. 
 
 XVII. To colour Metal like Gold. _ 
 
 Take Sal Arr^ioniach, White Vitriol, Stone-falt, Ver- 
 digrife, of each alike, in fine pouder j lay it upon the 
 Metal, then put it into the fire for an hour, take it out 
 and quench it in Urine, and the Metal will have the co- 
 Jour of Gold. 
 
 XVIII. To nmh a kind of Counterfeited Silver of Tin. 
 This is done by mingling Silver with Tin melted with 
 
 Qiiick-filver, continuing it long in the fire, then being 
 brittle, it is made tough, by keeping it in a gentle 
 fire, or under hot Embers ( in a Crucible ) for about twen- 
 ty four hours. 
 
 XIX. To foder upon Silver, Brafs^or Iron. 
 
 Take Silver five peny neight, B rap four peny reeight, melt 
 them together for Jo ft Soder, which runs fooneji. 
 
 Take^Silver five Peny vceight. Copper three peny weighty melt 
 them together for hard Soder. 
 
 Beat" the Soder thin, and lay it over the place to be 
 Sodered, wliich muft be firit fitted, and bound together 
 
 with 
 
 i 
 
Chap. 9. Of Metals. 49 ^ 
 
 with Wire as occafion requires : then take Borax in pou- 
 der, and temper it like pap, and lay it upon the Soder, 
 letting it dry, then coyer it with quick coals and blow, 
 and it will run immediately ^ take it prefently out of the 
 fire, and it is done. 
 
 Note, I. If a thin^ is to he Sodered in two pUces, (which 
 cannot he well done at one time J yon nmfi firfi Soder with the 
 hard Soder y and then with the foft ; for if it he frff done 
 with the foft, it will nnfoder again he fore the other he So- 
 dered. 2. That if yon would not have your Soder run ahottt 
 the piece to he Sodered, ruh thofe places over rpith Chalk, 
 
 XX. To male the Silver Tree of the Philofophers. 
 Take Aqua fortis four ounces, fine Silver one ounce,. 
 
 which diffolve in it : then take Ai^ua fortis two ounces, 
 in which difiblve Quick-fiiver : mix thefc two Liquors 
 together in a clear glafs, with a pint of pure water ; {iop 
 the glafs clofe, and after a day, you ihall fee a Tree u> 
 grow by little and little, which is wonderful and plea- 
 lant to behold. 
 
 XXI. To make the Golden Tree of the Philofophers. 
 Take Oyl of Sand or Flints, Oyl of Tartar per deli-' 
 
 quiu'/Tiy of each alike, mix them well together ,• then dif- 
 lolve Sd in Aqua Regis, and evaporate the Menftrmrn, 
 dry the Calx by the hre, but make it not too hot ( for 
 then it will lole its growing quality ) break it into little 
 bits ( not into pouder) which bits put into the aforeiaid 
 Liquor, a fingers breadth one from another in a very clear 
 glafs, keep the Liquor from the Air, and let the Calx 
 fiand {till, and the bits of Calx Vvill prdently begin to 
 grow : firil fwell \ then put forth one or two iiems j then 
 divers branches and twigs, lo exadlly, as you cannot but 
 wonder to fee. 
 
 Where note, That this growing is not imaginary hut real. 
 
 XXII. To make the Steel Tree of the Philofophers. 
 Dilfolve Steel in redlified Spirit or Oyl of Salt, fo Triall 
 
 you have a green andfweet iolation, fmelling like Brim- 
 Kone ; filter it, and abllraft all the moifture with a gen- 
 tle heat, and there will dittil over a Liquor as fweet as 
 rain water, ( for Steel by reafon of its drynefs detains the 
 Corrofivenefsof the Spirit of Salt whidi remaineth in 
 the bottom, like a blood-red mafs, and it is as hot on the 
 tongue as fire;) diflblve this blood-red mafs in Oyl of 
 
 N n 2 Flints 
 
49^ Pol^graphices Lib. VII. 
 
 Flints or Sand, and you fhall fee it grow up in two or 
 three hours like a Tree with ftem and branches. 
 
 IfyoH prove this Tree at the Tej}, it mil yield zood Goldy 
 vhich it dravaeth from the Oyl of Sand or Flints', thefaidOyl 
 leing ffill of a pnre Golden Snlphnr. 
 
 XXIII. To mah Oyl of Flints or Sand. 
 
 Take of moft pure Salt of Tartar in fine pouder twen- 
 ty ounces, fmall Sand, Flints, Pebbles, orCryftals in fine 
 pouder five ounces, mix them ,• put as much of this as 
 Avill fill an Egg-lThell into a Crucible, fet it in a Furnace, 
 and make it red-hot, and prefently there will come over 
 a thick and white Spirit; take out the Crucible whilft it 
 is hot, and that which is in it, like tranfparent glafs, 
 keep from the Air ; after beat it to pouder, and lay it in 
 a moill: place, and it will diflblve into a thick, fat Oyl, 
 which is the Oyl of Flints, Sand, Pebbles or Cryftals. 
 This Oyl precipitateth Metals^ and mahs the Calx there more 
 heavy than Oyl of Tartar doth ; it is of a Golden Nature, and 
 extra^is, Colours from all Minerals ; it is fixed in all fires, 
 r/jdketh fine Cry/fals, and Borax, and matnrateth imperfe^ 
 Metals into Gold. 
 
 XXIV. To melt Afetals quickly. 
 
 Take a Crucible, and make in it a lay or courfe of the 
 pouder of any Metal, then lay upon it a lay of Sulphur, 
 Salt-peter, and Saw- dull:, of each alike mixed togetlier, 
 put a coal of fire to it, and the Metal will immediately 
 be in a mafs. 
 
 XXV. He that fhall obferve the work and reafon of 
 the Silver, Golden and Steel Trees, may in like manner 
 proiuce the like out of the Calx of other Metals. 
 
 XXVI. To whiten Silver, 6irc. 
 
 Silver Vcffcis or Inltrumcnts boiled with Salt, Alum, 
 and Tartar, gives them that whitencfs and clcarncls, 
 which they would Icarcely be brought to by Brulhing, 
 Puuiice-ftone, or Putty : old fuUied pieces may be bro'jglit 
 in a trice to the like fairnefs, by the help of warm^i.y;w- 
 fortis. 
 
 XXVII. To Blanch Venus. 
 
 T'AkQ u^rfenick eight ounces : Sal-nitre, white Tartar, 
 of each two ounces, Borax one ounce : being in fine pou- 
 der. Cement rcnni therewith, by laying thm plates, lay 
 upon lay, after 48 hours, of a Cementing heat ( the Cru- 
 cible being Itrong, well ftopt, or covered and luted 
 
 ilrongly ) 
 
Chap. 9. Of Metals, 497 
 
 flrongly ) encreafe the fire, and caufe it to melt all down 
 together. 
 
 XXVIII. Another way to do the fame. 
 
 Sublime rafped or granulated 'Jupiter with Nitre into 
 flowers, of which take one ounce : Mercury fublimate as 
 much ; diffolve each in Aqua fortis : mix the folutions, 
 and evaporate, or draw off to drynefs. One ounce of 
 this pouder will blanch four or five ounces of Venm^ 
 without ever Tarnifliing. 
 
 XXIX. Another rriay to do the fame. 
 
 I. Take White Wine Vinegar, itrong Lye made of 
 Wood Afiies, fo ftrong as to bear an Egg, of each four 
 pounds : Sulphur, Hogs-blood, of each one pound i pou- 
 der the Sulphur, mix altogether, and digcft in an Earthen 
 pot clofe covered for eight days, then drain it. 2. Take 
 f^entio eight pounds : melt it and quench it in the afore- 
 faid Lye : melt it again, and quench again ; this do for 
 four times, fo will ihtVenm be in raeafure prepare J. 
 3. Take white Arfenid, Sheeps-iuet tried, of each a 
 pound : white Lead four ounces : boil all together in a 
 Kettle, continually (Hrring them, till they boil to a pou- 
 der, which keep for ule. 4. Take the atore. prepared 
 Venus^ melt it now a fifth time, to which put of your 
 prepared pouder of Arfenid, a little and a little at a 
 time, by eiegrees, ( the F&nm being firft melted ) (iiiring 
 it wnth a wooden (tick, till it is dillblved in the Metal, 
 then catt it into a clofe Ingot. The former rou.ler will 
 ferve for eight pounds of F<f«/*f. 
 
 XXX. Another way to do the fame. 
 
 I. Take Arfenick fubliuied two ounces : common Salt 
 two ounces : lublime them together three times, then is 
 it fixed. 2. Take fine Lma in Fihngs or Leaves, half an 
 ounce : .Mercury fublimate a fiiificient quantity, grnid 
 well upon a Marble tfone ; to which add the former pre- 
 pared Arfenick, with forae fixed Sal Armonkck . 3 . Grind 
 them well together with Wine Vinegar dialled, in 
 which fome Borax has been diffolved, then ft them dry : 
 being dryed wet them again, ^vith tiie faid Vinegar, and 
 dry again upon a foft fire : do fo five times; 4. Take 
 fine Luna one ounce : and as much of the aforefud Me- 
 dicine, /^^//^jtj prepared eight ounces : mix and melt them 
 together : it will be in appearance next to perfedl. 
 
 N n 3 XXXI. n 
 
49^ Polygraphices Lib.VH. 
 
 XXXI. To fix ^al Armoniack for this WorJc. 
 
 I . Take Sd Armoniach fublimed to a perfe6l whitc- 
 mefs, put it into aGJafs Alembick with Head and Re- 
 ceiver, catting upon the Sal Armoniack fome good diiHl- 
 led Vinegar, to overtop it a hand breadth, diftil upon 
 a foft hre. 2. Then put upon it more frelTi Vinegar, 
 and dittil again : this repeat, till the Sal ArmonUck re- 
 inains in the bottom ; after which let the fire go out of 
 it felf, and keep the Oyl clofe ilopt for ufe. 3. If yoii 
 take Mercury two ounces, and make it hot in the hre : 
 then drop on it three drops of this Oyl ; the Mercury will 
 be congealed into a pure Metal : of this, one part will 
 make ten parts of Venm^ as fair as Silver : the ten parts 
 of Venui being hrlt melted, and the Mercnry one part be- 
 ing cad upon it. 
 
 XXXII. To fix Arfenicl. 
 
 Take a ftrong Lye of Allies and Quick-lime, filter it ; 
 in which diffolve Arfenick : then evaporate the humidi- 
 ty by boiling, and the Arfenick will be prepared and 
 mt. 
 
 XXXIII. To whiten Copper or Brafs faperf daily, as 
 Txhite as Silver. 
 
 Take Sal Armoniack, Alum, Nitre, of each alike quan- 
 tity : put to it a little of the filings of Silver refined, or 
 , leaf Silver: mix them Avell together j and put it into 
 the fire, till it be red-hot in a Crucible, and till it has 
 done fmoaking. Then moiften this ponder with Ipittle, 
 and nib youx Copper or Brals therewith, and it will be 
 white. ' 
 
 XXXIV. To Silver Copper, and Bra]?. 
 
 1. Cleanfe the Metal with Aqi^a fortis, by lightly 
 wa!"hing it therewith, and immediately throwing it into 
 fair water, or by heating it red-hot, and fcouring it with 
 Salt and Tartar, and fiir water, with a iinall wire briiili. 
 
 2. DifTohe ibme fine Silver in Aqua fortis in a broad 
 bottomed Vcffel ofGlafs, or Glafed Earth, then over a 
 Chafing-difli of Coals evaporate away the Aqua fortis. 
 
 3. On the remaining dry Calx put water five or fix times 
 its (]uantiiy, or as much as will be needful perfeitly to 
 diffolve it ; this water with the like heat evaporate : on 
 which put more frefii water and evaporate again ; and 
 if need be, the third time ; making the fire towards the 
 latter end fo llrong, as to leave the Calx perfectly dry, 
 
 •which 
 
Chap. 9.^ Of Metals. 499 
 
 which if^^our Silver be good, will be of a good white. 
 4. Take of this Calx, common Salt, Cryftals of Tartar, 
 of each alike in quantity or bulk, not weight : mix all 
 well ; then put phe Metal into fair water, and take of 
 the aforefaid pouder with your wet fingers, and rub it 
 well on, till you find every little cavity of the Metal fuf- 
 ficiently filvered over. 5. If you would have it richly 
 done, you mud rub in more of the pouder 5 and lallly, 
 walTi the filvered Metal in fair water, and rub it hard 
 with a dry cloth, that it may look fmooth and bright. 
 6. This, though done without Quick-filver, may laft 
 fome years, and when the Silver begins to wear oft, may 
 as eafily be renewed. 
 
 XXXV. To Gild Iron and Steel. 
 
 I . You muft make your Iron or Steel have the colour 
 of Brafs thus: polilli the Iron or Steel, then rub it with 
 ^qnafonis, in which fifings of Brais have been diffol- 
 ved : the fame underhand of Sih-er. 2. An Amd?ama 
 of Gold and Mercury with which Gilders gild Silver, 
 Brafs and Copper, will not gild Iron or Steel : but thus 
 it may be done ; Coat the Iron or Steel with Copper by 
 diffolving very good Vitriol of Copper in warm water, 
 till the Liquor be fatiated with the Vitriol ; then Im- 
 merfe feveral times in the folution the Iron or Steel, fiiil: 
 Icoured till it be bright, and fuft'ering it to dry each 
 time of its felf j for by this immerfion, being repeated 
 often enough, there will precipitate upon the Iron, e- 
 nough of the cuperous particles to fill the fuperficial 
 pores of the Iron. 3. By this fafe and eafie way, ha- 
 ving overlaid the Iron with Copper, you may gild it as 
 Copper, either by the aforefaid Arndgama^ or by the for- 
 mer Section of this Chapter. 
 
 XXXVI. To prove the goodnels of Sublimate. 
 
 I. Caft it on the Coals, and if it is good, it jvill burn 
 with a Blue flame j but if it make any otlier colour, it 
 is naught, and has Arienick in it. 2. Or thm. Take the 
 Sublimate, and drop thereon a few drops of Oleum Tar- 
 tari per deliquipim : if it turns the Sublinuite of a deep. 
 Yellow, Reddilli, or Oninge-tawne}', it is good ^ but if* 
 not, or it be Black, there is Arfenick in it. 
 
 XXXVII. Another vray to fix S.d Armoniack. 
 Grind it very well, put it in a CofHn of Paper, which 
 
 put in a pot full of Qidck- liine in fine pouder, that the 
 
 N n 4 paper 
 
500 Polygraphkes Lib. VII. 
 
 paper may be in the midlt ot the Lime : then cover the 
 pot well, and lute it dole, and put it in a Potters fur- 
 nace, and it will be fixed. 
 
 XXXVIII. To niAke nn Oyi which z'lves the Colonr of 
 Gold. \ ^ / 
 
 Make a ftrong Lve -^vith Lime and Tartar calcined 
 with Alcali : in it dilTolve Sulphur in ponder, and Saf- 
 fron of Aiars ; then put it into the fire, and make it boil 
 till it waxes red : after put all into a Glals Bottle or A- 
 lembick, with a Receiver : dilfil and take the water ; 
 this water cohobate twelve times, or imtil you lee a 
 whitenefs go forih of the Alembick. The lign being 
 come, all that which remains in the bottom, is a fixtOil, 
 that which does give the tme Colour of Gold, to whatfo- 
 ever is put iiito it, and is an excellent Secret in other 
 Chymical ^^'orks. 
 
 XXXIX. ^nOilofGoU. 
 
 I. Take Sulphur Vive, Nitre, of each a like quantity ; 
 difti!,and it will be white and fixed. 2. After the flame 
 fublime this fixed Sulphur three times Avith equal weight 
 of Sal Armoniack, which rcfolve again per deliqaium. 
 5. Take a fuflicient quantity of this diflblvcd Liquor, 
 and ca.il it upon a Golden Duckate in flux, and it will 
 become an Oil. 4. Tliis Oil becoming cold will con- 
 geal, and one part tlicieof Tranlmutes fifty Parts of 
 Mercury. 
 
 XL. To jral.e Uvinp;^ Silver cr Gold. 
 I. Take of the Red Lvon ( /. e. Red native Cinnabar) 
 twelve parts, pulverile it well ; then grind it with one 
 part of Calx of fine Silver, or purified Gold. 2. Put all 
 into a fmall bolt-head, fet it in warm Sand to the neck ; 
 luting the neck of the Glals very well. 3. Give the fiiit 
 degree of tire for a Week: the next Week, the Ibcond 
 degree : then the third degree ; and the fourth degree, the 
 fourth and lafl: Week, to'^a hiffnig degree ; that is, if you 
 let a drop of water fall upon the Saiul, it will hifs; 
 4. Then let the fire go out, and cut the Glafs wiih a 
 King : take the Cryitilline matter, ( like a Ring near 
 the neck of the GLffs ) pulverife and grind it with its 
 weight ct the Calx ot Sol or Luna aforelaid. 5. P;ils 
 the atbrenxntioncd four degrees in eight liours to a hii- 
 fmg ; open thcGlafsas before, and take iheitarry Crown, 
 wluch is the living Silver, which augment by digelHon, 
 
 with 
 
Chap. 9* Of Meuh, 501 
 
 with a twelfth part of Luna or Sol at a time, as often 
 as you pleafe, or till you have a fufficient quantity of 
 living Luna or Sol. 6. Take a fmall quantity of this 
 living Sol or Luna, and digett it in Alhes, until it chan- 
 ges towards a white or red Earth. 7. Then take this 
 white or red Earth, which Ama!gama,with living Silver 
 and Calx : digeft again in a Glafs Hermetically fealed, 
 till it come to perfedt whitenefs or rednefs. 
 XLT. To whiten Copper. or Iron. _ 
 
 Take Calx of Silver, grind it with two parts of Cal- 
 cined precipitate Arfenick, and one part of white pre- 
 cipitate Mercury, imbibe them with water made of Sal- 
 Nitre, Sal-Armoniack and Litharge, of each equal parts ; 
 do this, till they have drunk up their weight of the wa- 
 ter ; put one part hereof on four parts of prepared Cop- 
 per, or Iron. 
 
 XLIL Another tvay to do the fame. 
 
 Take calcined Silver, Tin calcined and diil(-)lved, of 
 each a like quantity : mix, dry, and cover it with twice 
 as much lublimed Arfenick^ 
 
 XLIIL Another way to do the fame. 
 • Take calcined Silver, Arfenick, Sulphur diblimed and 
 ground, Sal-Armoniack, of each a like quantity : mix, 
 and fublime all thrice ; caft one part upon fix parts of 
 prepared Iron or Copper. 
 
 XLIV. A good Dealbation of Venu<. 
 
 Take Realgar one ounce : Argent Vive lublimed three, 
 ounces and a half: Tartar calcined an ounce : grind aijd 
 incorporate, and put them into a Vial with a NoX 
 twelve Inches long, and its Orifice io wide as tAvo fin- 
 gers may enter ; lute it, and lee it over a fire covered 
 with a cloth. Fiifl: make a gentle Sre lO-: a quarter of 
 an hour ; afterwards augment the fire underneath, and 
 round about, till the Furnace be very hot and red : 
 When all is cold, break the Velfel, an 1 take out the 
 Metalline matter. This may eafily be brought to per- 
 fection. 
 
 XLV. Another for the fame pHrpofe. 
 
 Upon Tutia fublime one part of Mercury fublimate 
 and two parts of Arfenick fi.iblimej, until it fliall have 
 ingrefs. This clearly and very fpeciouily whitens Ve- 
 nus, 
 
 XLVI. AnQ' 
 
502 Polfgraphiefs Lib. Vlf. 
 
 'KLVX. Another for tide fame. 
 Imbibe three parts of Mercury fublimed, and two 
 parts of Arfenick fublimed with three parts Litharge dif- 
 folved : to thele eight add other eight parts of Arfenick 
 fublimed : grind them together, and flux them with Oil of 
 Tartar, fo may you ( with it ) whiten prepared Venus at 
 pleafure. 
 
 XLVII. Another for the fame. 
 Grind Metalline Arfenick with as much CaljC of Luna, 
 and imbibe the mixture with water of Sal-Armoniack ; 
 dry and grind : afterwards diffolve Salt of Tartar in wa- 
 ter of Salt-petre ; with wliich Oil imbibe the Medicine, 
 and dry it. Repeat this thrice, incerating and drying. 
 This is an admirable thing. 
 
 XLVIIL Another for the fame) 
 Imbibe Jupiter calqined, wallied and dryed, fo ofteri 
 with Metalline Arfenick, with half as much fublimed 
 Mercury, till it flows and enters Venus 3 for it whitens 
 the fame (iffi;:ft prepared) glorioufly. 
 
 XLIX. Another for the fame. . 
 Upon Tutia, one part fublimed, dilTolved, and coagu- 
 lated, fublime white Arfenick three parts ; reiterate the 
 fublimation upon it four times, that it may have in- 
 grefs. With them adjoin half as much ( as the whole 
 is ) of fublimate Mercury, grinding and incerating four 
 times with water of Sal' Armoniack, Nitre and Tartar, 
 of each alike. With this when Coagulated, Cement 
 prepared plates of Venus, and melt, and you will have 
 a very beautiful Metal. 
 
 L. Another for the fame parpofe. 
 Grind Venus calcined and incerated, to which add 
 Arfenick fublimed, and half a part of Mercury fubli- 
 med ; with which being well ground and mixed, add a 
 little water of Sal-Armoniack , and incerating upon a 
 Marble : dry and fublime ; revert the fublimate upon 
 the faeces, again imbibing ; do fo three times : the fourth 
 time imbibeVith the water of Nitre, and fublime what 
 can be fublimed: reiterate this work, till it remains fluid 
 in the bottom. This upon Copper will make a glorious 
 "whitenefs. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 10. Of the Fhllofophfck Worh 50J 
 
 ^ C H A P. X. 
 
 Ofthefecret Uermetick My fiery ^ or great Phi" 
 lo/ophfck fVork^ 
 
 117 E cannot he fo vain as to pretend to the World that wg 
 ^^ have attained the InoTmledge of this great Secret, much 
 lefsfo to be the Afafier thereof, as to he the injiruElor of other 
 Men : hm this vie can Jay, ne have converfi mth mofi Au- 
 thors that have wrote thereof 5 vpe have with a great deal 
 of diligence and findy compared their Sayings one mch ano- 
 ther ; and vpe have hy a long and continued Exercife and 
 Pra^ice in the Mineral vpork, found out not only the natures 
 of Metals, and in v^hat degree of purity they Hand in one to 
 another -, hm we have alfo found ont i^any excellent SecretSy 
 of real worth and Value, hy which, although we cannot pro- 
 fejS a knowledge of the great work it Jclf, yet we thereby fee 
 not only a pojjd^ility, hut alfo a probability thereof in nature 
 C to that man whom it fhallfo far pleafe God to enlighten } 
 and therefore judge we may in fome meafure the better un- 
 dertake to difcourfe thefayin^s of thofe Worthies, who having 
 attained this Myflery, thought good in Cloudy and Myfieriom 
 terms to puhlifh the fame to the World, that none hut the truly 
 worthy Sens of Art might be partakers of the fame. 
 
 In the following lines then, we /hall tell you what has been, 
 told us, and what we do conceive thereof, hy the comparing of 
 the Sayings of the mofl excellent Men together, fuch as were 
 Eafii, Paracelflis, Lullkis, Ripley, Bacon, ^;?i others -, and 
 this in fo concife a manner, that the Opinions and Judgments 
 of all thofe Men ( though far af under in words ) may center 
 not only in truth it felf, hut alfo in the narrow compafs of 
 the following SeElions ; the which that we might fo perform, we 
 expreji our conceptions of their fenfe in a language confonant 
 thereto. 
 
 I. The Seed of Gold is Icdged in all Metals. 
 This is apparent from then- generation, whofe origina- 
 tion is Mercury, which is indeed immatiirate Gold ; and 
 io remains immaairate in the bafer Metals till a ripen- 
 ing Sitlphur, and a meliorating Spirit quickens that Se- 
 minal 
 
504 Pol/grdphiees^ Lib. VIL 
 
 minal property lodged in the Womb of impurity. But 
 Avherc that Sulphttr and Spirit is to be found, has hitherto 
 been kept as a feaet among the true PhiJofophers : If I 
 may beg the pardon of thofe Sons of Art, I would fpeak 
 once for all : but fince the Seal of the Philofophick Silence 
 puts a bar to my plainnefs, I mutt tell you they are to 
 be found only in the Philofophers Sol and Luna ; which 
 are extra6led out of their Earthly Stars, by the folc power 
 oF the Philofophick Aiercury^ and the Spirit of Mercury, 
 as Bafd Valentine lias truly faid. 
 
 II. This Seed of Gold may he qnicTtned or made to live. 
 
 This is done through the death of the firtt matter, and 
 difpofition of the fecond to a refufcitation or refurre(^i- 
 on of that innate, energetical, and feminal life, and that 
 only by the power of the Solar and Lunar Sulphur uni- 
 tai, through the dilTolving Philofophick Mercury : the In- 
 fant then fcems to be born ; and fo requires noii- 
 rilliment ; and therefore you mutt feed it with the Spirit 
 tf Mercury, that it may grow and encreafe ; but you 
 \\\\x[\ give it in jutt weight and meafure, leit you fuftb- 
 catc it, and fo dcltroy the hopeful proiuclion. 
 
 111. This Semen being quickned, dilates it felf into other 
 BDdiss, and tranfmutes them into its oryn property. 
 
 That is, jutt as the Seminal life of Vegetables tranf- 
 mutcs or changes tliat fuccus or humidity of tlie Earth, 
 proper to thernfelves into their own forms and natures ; 
 and lb of a little Seed th.ere becomes a great Tree : fo 
 that as the Earth is the Womb out of which fo fmall a 
 Seed becomes a great Tree, by the tranfmutlng property of 
 the innate Seminal Yilc in the Seed : fo all the bafe Me- 
 tals are the Womb unto that feminal purity ; in whic!i 
 Womb, if the Seed be difpofed ri^hti}-, there will be as 
 ceitain a generation and encreale ; and the purity of 
 the bafe Metals will be tranfmuted into tliat feminal 
 property to a vail: augmentation. But this growth and 
 cncrcc'.le mutt be made by the nutriment which is given 
 to it, c/.'-c. the Spiri: of Mercury : and this feminal purity 
 is tlie proper Off-fpring of 5'o/ and Luna, produce.! thro 
 the Power of our .Philofophick Mercury ^ without which 
 rothin§ can be done : for that is it, which makes alive 
 and quickens the Dead Bodies of Sol and Luna, and re- 
 vives their latent Spirit, making them to encreale an 
 Hundred thoufand told. 
 
 IV. Tku 
 
Chap. lo. OftheFhilofophkk Work. ^05 
 
 IV. That this may he rightly done, the hdies of the hafc 
 Aletals mtijl he opened and prepared. 
 
 That is, they muft be brought into a mortification, 
 that that ttrong band which has hitherto chained the fe~ 
 minal life, may be broken, and fo^ the energetici virttte 
 may be fet at liberty : this is preformed by the flying 
 Dragon who devours all that he comes near : this being 
 done, the femen muft be caft into this mortified Body 
 ( impregnated with the fpirit of Mercury ) that it may 
 there generate, tranfmute and fix. It is manifeft then 
 that the tranfmuting fubftance is not taken out of the 
 Bodies of the bafer Metals, but extra6led out of the molt 
 pure and perfe6l ; nor can imperfedl Bodies be made 
 better by things worfe tlmn themfelves, but only by 
 things better. And therefore the more imperfed, being 
 opened and prepared according to Art, they are made 
 fit to receive the Vital or Living Seed of the more per- 
 feft. 
 
 V. This may he done in any of the hafe Metals : hm they 
 C I He the Earth J yield an encreafe according to their degrees 
 in pHrity • fo that more of the Body of a pure Metal is tninj- 
 mtitedy than of an impure. 
 
 As barren Earth cannot yield fo great an increale as 
 a fertil foil ; fo neither can a bafe Metal yield fb great 
 an augmentation as a more fine. The bafer Metals 
 yield an increafe according to the quantity of the A4er- 
 cury which they contain, and that is the fubftance which 
 is tranfmuted ,• all the other fubftances are Heterogenous 
 and prove Drofs, which by the fermentative power of 
 our Solar and Lunar Sulphur, are feparated and cafl of}^ 
 ( almoft refembling that of Yeft in Wort : ) and as the 
 SuccHs of the Earth yield an encreafe, and makes th^ 
 Seed call into the Earth to grow j fo the immature Mer- 
 cury in the bafer Metals feeds our Solar and Lunar Secds^ 
 and makes them to grow and encreafe ; which by the 
 Plajiick poyver of this Seed or Sulphur, is tranfmuted into 
 its own principle, and made to be the fineft Gold : but 
 this increale is according to the goodnels of the Kleial ; 
 thofe which are pureft, and contain moft Mercury, yield 
 the greateft quantity in Tr an [mutation. 
 
 VI. The Bodies of the hajcr Metals heing fitted:, the Semen 
 muft he c^ji into the fame to generate. 
 
 That is, there is to be a Conjunction of the Simen or 
 
 tru'^ 
 
%o6 Pofygraphices Lib. VIT. 
 
 true Golden EJfence, with the prepared body to be tranf- 
 muted : now you mult be careful you ufe not the fim- 
 ple body of Sol for this Semen, for then you will be de- 
 ceived J the matter in which the Generative Spirit is 
 lodged is another thing : if you bury a whole Tree or 
 Plant in the Earth, that will not generate, and bring 
 forth another Tree, but perilh and rot, the feminal or 
 generative vcrtue and life is clog'd and loaded, and is fo 
 ineffecHve ; but if you bury the Seed of the fame Tree, 
 you may have another, or more, according to the quan- 
 tity of Seed fown ; the lame you muft underttand in the 
 t;encration of Metals, and of the Golden work ; it is not 
 Gold which will generate Gold, but the Seed oi' Gold. 
 But how this Seme/i is to be obtained, is alfo a fmgular 
 work ; for the Body o^Sol it fclf mult be opened by the 
 lielp of our Philojophick Mercury, which the Philofo- 
 phers fay is a dry water, which will not wet the hands ; 
 after which, it mult be purified and calcined, and 
 brought to perfedtion by digeition ; and nourillied as 
 the Child in the Womb, by the Spirit of the fame Mer- 
 cury : And how this Mercury is obtained is another 
 thing : It is compofed of the highell and molt volatile 
 Spirit, extra6led from the Juice ot the Mineral Grape, 
 conjoyned to the molt fix'd and permanent principle of 
 the Vegetable Grape, whofe Elfence is the Root, and Ori- 
 ginal of the Produdlion of all Mineral, Vegetable and 
 Animal Subrtances. 
 
 Vll. This Semen mu(i he Volatile. 
 Otherwife it cannot tranfme, for nothing but a Vola- 
 tile Spirit or Elfence can dilate and fpread it felf : a 
 fxed matter cannot operate at all, for all fixed things 
 are dead, and their life remains in a central Ifate, not 
 fit for codlion. This is evident in the Volatile Salts of 
 Vinegar and ddck-liwe, which furpafs the Art of Man 
 to attain fimple ; but if you mix a Lixivium of Quick- 
 lime with Vinegar, you may have a large quantity of 
 Salt, and that fixed, which was before unattainable. 
 Thus you fee out of two Volatile.t\\n\p,, a third ablblute- 
 ly fixed is produced ; and this is thie condition of this 
 
 great work 
 
 VIII. It mu'^ he of an unchangeable blood red colour. 
 Odierwife it could not tinge ; for were it only yellow, 
 it would create only a taintiih kind of green : but this 
 
 our 
 
Chap. 10. OfthePhflofophkktVork, 507 
 
 our Philofophick Tindture generates Gold of the highett 
 and pureft nature, and having the deepeft yellow. The 
 whole Body of Sol it fe!f is all pure TinBure : only it is 
 bound up, and fixed with Bolts and Bars, as it were - 
 and this fixt property is that which makes it appear on- 
 ly of a faint yellow : its perfed, intire, and moiifuhlimg 
 Redneji is lliut up, fo as you cannot fee or behold it. 
 But when thefe Bolts and Bars are broken, and the Doos 
 fet open ( where this vaft Treafure lies ) by the invin- 
 cible power of our Philofophick Mereftry, and its fublime 
 Spirit : Then you may come to fee the King in his Tri- 
 umphs, and behold that never-fading Glory, or Mafi- 
 fterial Tincture ; which is able to magnifie it felf an 
 hundred thouf and fold. 
 
 IX. This Semen is mad^ VoUtiU hy the deJlruElion of its 
 external form. 
 
 That is, nature mnft be brought to a6lion, that the 
 inadlive body may let fall its Semen, out of which the 
 Golden Tree of the Pbilolophers is produced. The body 
 of So/ mud be broken into Atoms Philofophically, and 
 opened ; that is, the fixity of its external body muft be 
 removed, which can only be done by the help of our Phi- 
 lofophick Mercury, and the mighty Spirit of the fame, which 
 penetrate into the moft inward receifes of its fiibiiance, 
 where the highelt and richefl: Treafure is lodged. That 
 therefore being removed which makes it fixed, it then 
 naturally ( as it were ) becomes Volatile ; and grows in- 
 to a Tree of almod an immenfe magnitude, in which 
 the wonders of Nature are contained. 
 
 X. This Strntn is made hlood-red hy impregnating of it 
 mrh thefpirit of Mercury. 
 
 It is neceflary that there be a common band to con- 
 join the bodies, which are to be united : as the bodies 
 of the bafe Metals, which are the Womb for this Seed, 
 are to be mortified ; fo muft that body be, out of which 
 you extradl the Semen : and as that mortified and prepa- 
 red body is to be impregnated with the Spirit of Mercury, 
 io muft this Semen, that there may be as well a fympa- 
 thy and likenefs in Nature, as an unity in Body. But 
 it is to be noted that the Spirit of Mercury does not give 
 the 2,reat Rednefsto this Solar Sulphur : No, that is a 
 Radical Quafity innate in Sol himfelf : all that this 
 mighty Spirit does, is the turning the infide outwards, 
 
 that 
 
^o8 Polygraphices Lib. VII. 
 
 that the internal Quality and Principle may be made 
 obvious to the Eye, and lo upon occafion, be brought in 
 to Ad, which otlierwife would lye Dead and Dormant 
 for ever. 
 
 XI. The matter out of rohich this Semen is to he extraEled 
 is purely Sol. 
 
 We mean {imply, and without Metaphor, Gold ', for 
 if there be an innate life, power and virtue, in the bafc 
 Metals, why not in this ? If Mercury, Lead, Iron, Cop- 
 per and Silver, contain the Seminal life of Gold, why 
 fhould Gold be excluded, which is the thing it felf? 
 Theie Metals do each of them contain a fmall quantity 
 oi Mercery, but it is immature j but they are all want- 
 ing in the Solar Sulphur j having a Sulphur of their own, 
 which is corrupting, and can by no Art whatfoever be 
 tranlmuted into aSo/;?r Nature, each being in their Root 
 of a diftering ipfdc'j'. And of them all Luna contains 
 the greatclt quantity of Mercury, which is very pure, 
 and brought by Nature nearly to perfedion, vi^. to 
 Fixity : it only wants its pores to be repleat or filled up 
 with a Solar Sulphur, for by that alone, the compleat 
 Weight, abfblute Fixity, and perfed Tincture would be 
 given to it, Tvhereby it would be brought into the Solar 
 Stock, unalterable in Nature and Quality for ever. 
 
 XII. The Semen t/ei/i^ ca(i into the body prepared for it, 
 is there to be digcfied, tilt both be terfeBly united, vrhoje ftw 
 fie conjun^ion "is the produd: of the Golden Kingdom. 
 
 This digeftion is perfected only by the force of an ex- 
 ternal fire, conjoined with the inward Seminal life. This 
 is ProjeElion, which is indeed by the force of a Culinary 
 fire ; but it is to be regulated according to the proper 
 degrees of Nature: when this Royal Tmclure is put upon 
 any bafe or inferiour Metal, It melts like Butter, fpreads 
 over the Surface thereof , finks into it, fills its pores, contracts 
 its Mercury into one globular body, as it nere, and tinges 
 it throughly ; whereby all its/com, filth, impurities, and 
 defilements are feparatcd, the pure Solar Reguln-s tailing 
 intirely to the bottom. 
 
 XIII. The lafi thing to be confiiered is the multiplication 
 of your TinHure ; for if that is wanting, your quantity nould 
 be vpafied, and fo your vtork ivould come to an end : this is 
 performed by addition of m,ore of the pure Solar Body, to the 
 already perfected TinUure* 
 
 For 
 
Chap. II. Ofthe PhilofophickWork, 509 
 
 For the true traniinuting Property is in the Tin&jre, 
 and Sol it felf ftands in need of this Tranfmtitation -, be- 
 caufe the Matter which tranfmutes, mutt be an hundred 
 thoufand times finer, more pure, and more exalted than 
 the moft fine Gold -, for if it was not much higher and 
 finer than Gold, it could never tranfinute other Metals 
 into Gold, but only be as Gold, and be able to do no 
 more than Gold can ; and fo, by mixtion with other in- 
 feriour Metals, would it felf become much worfe than it 
 was before, according to the quantity of the Alloy which 
 is mixed with it, and would only make a bafe Mixture, 
 not a Tranfmutation. Therefore, that you may mMlti- 
 ply your TinEiure, you muft add to it ten parts of pure 
 fine Sol J and nouriih it with the SpiricHs Mercarij, in 
 proportion to what it can receive, digeiting in a gentle 
 Fire, till fuch time as you fee the figns of perfe6li6n ap- 
 pear ; and by this means you may continue and aug- 
 ment your Tindture, ai infinitum^ even for ever. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 J Frocefs of the fat d Grand Elixir, from an Old 
 Hermit. 
 
 I- 'npAkc Mineral Quicl-fdver iijv pound, viz,, made 
 -*- neither of LeMnoi Tin, arid caufe an Earthen 
 Pot to be made, well burn'd the firft time, glaze it all 
 over, except the bottom, the which anoint with Hogs 
 Ld/d, and it will not glaze. 
 
 II. This is done, that the Earth of the QHicl-fdver 
 may fink into the bottom of the Pot, which it would 
 not do being glaz'd, nor become Earth again : This Pot 
 mutt be made a good foot long, ofthe falfiion of an Uri- 
 nal, with a Pipe in the midtt of it. 
 
 III. The Furnace muft be made on purpofe, that the 
 Pot may go m clofe to the fides of the Mouth of the Fur- 
 nace. Set on the Pot a good great Cap or Head, with 
 its Receiver, without luting of it. 
 
 IV. Give it a good. Fire of Coals, till the Pot is all 
 on fire and very redj then take the Fire out quickly, 
 
 O o and 
 
^ 10 of the PffHofophfck fVorh Lib. VII. 
 
 and put in the Quick-fihcr at the Pipe, and, with as 
 much h.idc as you can, Itop it clofc with Lute. 
 
 V. Then will the Qnick-fiher, by the heat and force 
 it finds, both break and work 5 a part thereof you (hall 
 fee in the Water, as it Were a few drops; and a part 
 will Rick to the bottom of the Pot in black Earth, and lb 
 let the Pot cool within the Furnace, as it is; then open 
 it, and you Ihall find the Qtikk-fiher in it all black, 
 which you muit take out and wain very clean, and the 
 Pot alfo. 
 
 VI. As for the Water wh'iA does dittil out of it, put 
 it afide, or caft it away ; for it is nothing w^orth, becaufc 
 it is all Flegm. Set the Pot into the Furnace again, and 
 jmake it red-hot ; put in the Qjiick-ftlver, lute well the 
 Pipe, and do as you did the firtt time; and do this fo 
 often, until the Mercury becomes no more black, which 
 will be in ten or eleven times. 
 
 VJI. Then take it out, and you fhall find the Merce- 
 ry to be without FJegm, but joined with Earth, of which 
 two Qualities it murt be freed, being Enemies to Na- 
 ture : Thus the Qmck-Jilver \xi\\ remain pure, in colour 
 Celeftial, like tcw^zlire, %hich ]'6u'rhay know by this 
 fjgn, vii.. Take a piece o( Iron, heat it hot, and quench 
 it in this Mercnry, rand it will become foft and wliitc 
 \\kQ.Lnnit. 
 
 VIII. Then put the Aiercwy into a Retort of Glafs, 
 between two Cups, fo that it touches neither bottom 
 ihor fides of thecCups, and make a good Fire under it, 
 and lay Embers on ^hetop, the better to keep the heat of 
 the Fire; and in 40 hours the Mercury will diitil into a 
 flimy Water, hanging together, that it will neither wet 
 your Hands, nor any kind of thing but Metal only. 
 
 IX. This is the true AquA Vits. of the Pliiiofophers ; 
 the true Spirit lo many have fought for ; and which has 
 been dcfired of all Wife Men, which is called the £/- 
 jen.ce^ Q^lnteffencej PoirerSy Spirit, Snbjhncfy Water and 
 Afixii'.re of Merctiry, and by many other the like Names, 
 without lirange things, and without offence to any 
 Man. 
 
 X. Save well this precious Liquor or Water, obfcured 
 by all Philofophers, for without it you can do no good 
 or pcrfecl Work ; let all other things go, and keep this 
 only J for any one that lees this Wafer, if he has any 
 
 Pra(i^icc 
 
Ch Jip. J I . Of the Philofophfck IVorki 5 f / 
 
 Pra(^tice and Knowledge, will hold to it, for it is preci- 
 ous axid worth a Treajti4re. 
 
 XI. Now retteth to make the Souly which is the per- 
 ie^^on of the Red, without wliich you can make neither 
 Sol nor Lma, which iliall be pure and perfeft : With 
 this Spirit you ma^r make things apparent and fair; yea, 
 XiXoi\ true and p^iedl ; AH Pliilofophers affirm, that the 
 Soul'is the Subfence, which fultaineth and preferves the 
 Body^ making it pertecl as long as it is in it. 
 
 XII. Oux Body then muft have a So%l, other wife it 
 would t^either move nor work ; for which reafon you 
 mull coiifider and underhand, that all Metals are com- 
 pounded of Mercury and Snlphnr, Matter and Form : 
 AdercMry is the Matter, and Sulphur is the Form. Ac- 
 cordir^p to the purenefs q^ Mercury and Sulphur, fuch is 
 the IqB^ience they affume. 
 
 XUI. Thus Sol is ingendred of moft pure fine Mercury y 
 and a pure red Sulphur, by the Influence of the Sun ; 
 and Luna is made of a pure fine Mercury, and a pure 
 white Sulphur, by the Influence of the Moon. 
 
 XIV. Hence it is that Luna is more pure than the 0- 
 ther Metals, which have need of cleanfing ; being 
 cleanfed, they need but only the pure Sulphur, with the 
 help of SqI and Luna. Sulphur is the Form of Sol and 
 .Lana, and the other Metals ; their other parts are grofs 
 Matters 0^ Sulphur and Mercury. 
 
 XV. Husband-men know many times more than we 
 do : They, when they Reap their Corn growing on the 
 Earth, they gather it with the Straiv and Ears. The 
 Straw and Ears are the Matter, but the Corn or Grain is 
 the Form or Soul. 
 
 ,XVI. But when they Sow their Corn, then they Sow 
 not the Matter, which is the Straw and Chaff, but the 
 ^oul or Form, which is the Corn. So, if we will Reap 
 Sol or Luna, we muft ufe their Form or Soul, and not 
 tlie. Matter. 
 
 XVII. The Form or Soul is made by God's help, after 
 this manner. You muft make a good Sublimate, that 
 is ieven times fublimed ; the lalt time of the feven you 
 . muft fublime it with Cinnabar without f'^itriol, and it 
 will be a certain Qumtejfence of the Sulphur of tliat ^n- 
 timony. 
 
 Oo 2 XVIII. When 
 
5 X 2 of the PhUofophers Stone, Lib. VII . 
 
 XVIII. When this isdone,take of the fineft 5*0/ j. ounce* 
 or of the fine{tL««^as much; file it very fine ; or elfe 
 take leaf Gold or Silver; then take of the aforefaid Sub- 
 limate iiij. ounces; fublime them together for the fpace 
 of fixtcen hours ; then let it cool again, and mix them all 
 together, and fublime again ; do this four times. 
 
 XIX. And the fourth time it will have a certain 
 Rundle, like unto the Matter of the white Rofe, tranf- 
 parent and moil clear as any orient Pearl, weighing a- 
 bout V. ounces. The Sublimate will flick to the brims 
 and fides of the Velfel ; and in the bottom it will be 
 like good black Pitch, which is the Corruption of Sd 
 and Lnna. 
 
 XX. Take the Rundle aforefaid, and diflblve it in 
 mott ftrong diflilled Vinegar (i./. Spirit) two or three 
 times, by putting it into an Urinal, and fetting it in 
 B. M. for the fpace of three days, every time pouring it 
 into new Vinegar, ( i. e. Spirit ) as at the firft, till it be 
 quite difTolved; then diflii it by a Filter, and favc that 
 which remains in the Pot, for it is good to whiten 
 Brafs. 
 
 XXI. That which palTed the Filter with the Vinegar, 
 fet upon hot Allies, and evaporate the Moilture and Spi- 
 rit of Vinegar with a fi^ft Fire, and fet it in the Sun, 
 and it wiirbecome moft white, like unto white Starch ; 
 or red, if.you work wiih Si)l^ which is the Form^ Sod or 
 Smphtir of Lun A a.nd Sol, and will weigh a quarter of an 
 ounce, rather more than Itfs ; fave that well. 
 
 XXII. Take ni the name of God, an Urinal half a 
 foot high ; and take of the firm Body v. ounces ; of the 
 SomI o\:'Su!ph>ir of Sol or L<:fna, a quarter of an ounce; 
 and of the Spirit iv. ounces ; put all of them into the U- 
 rinal, and put on its Head or Cover, with a Receiver 
 well clofed or luted. 
 
 XXIII. Dirtil the Water from it with a molt foft Fire, 
 :jnd there will come off the firft time ylmoft iii. ounces : 
 Put the Vv^iter on again, without moving the Urinal, 
 and diftil it again, until no more Liquor will diftil ; 
 which do fix or fevcn times, and then every thing will 
 be firm. Then fet the fame Urinal in Horle-dung itven 
 days, and by the virtue and fubtlcty of the heat, it will 
 be converted into Water. 
 
 XXIV. Diftil 
 
Chap. 12. Of thePhilofophersStojie. 41 1 
 
 XXIV. Diftilor filter this Water with ftripes or Qireds 
 of Woollen Cloth j a grofs part will remain in the bot- 
 tom, which is nothing worth ; all that which is pafTed 
 through the Filter congeal, which will be about iv. or 
 V. ounces ; and fave it. When you have congealed it 
 three times, melt x. ounces of moft fine SolotLma, and 
 when it is red hot, put upon it iv. ounces (fome fay xiij. 
 ounces) of this Medicine, and it will be all true and 
 good Medicine. 
 
 XXV. Likewife melt Borax and W.ix, ana j. ounce, 
 to which put of the former Medicine j. ounce -, put all 
 thefe upon Mercury^ or any other Metal, iij. pound, and 
 it will be moft fine Sol or Luna^ to all Judgments and 
 AlTays. Thus have I ended this Proccfs, in vvhich, if 
 you have any Pradice or Judgment, and know how to 
 follow the Work, you may nnil'h or compleat it ia 
 forty days. 
 
 This Procefs is under a Vail, yet there is indeed mucH 
 to be learnt out of it. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Smlities of the Philofophers Stone. 
 
 I. f\^ what Qualities the Philofophers Stone confifb, 
 ^^ I hold it neceifary to make a ihort and true In- 
 formation, though one or more may know it aheady ; 
 however, the Coniequence is this : If this thing be right- 
 ly and plainly underftood, then one finds himfelf near 
 the Scope, and can eafily judge, whether the Matter 
 handled, and the imagined Subje6l contain all the nc~ 
 cellary Requifites, you will not then go to work after an 
 unskilful manner, and commit it to Succels. 
 
 II. He that hath not the following Properties together 
 in one _Mafs or Centre, or only gueifcth that they are 
 there, is truly far from the mark, and Shooteth at the 
 white, ^ whicti he doth not fee, and will have the lels 
 hope of it. 
 
 III. Therefore let none dream, that he hath accom- 
 j)lilli5;d the Art, or that he can compafs the Stone in a 
 
 O o 3 Ihort 
 
^14 OftheVhiloJophersStotti, Lib. V If. 
 
 Ihort time, or any particular, whilft yet he doth not 
 know, what Qiuatities or Properties the Stone or the 
 particular Tin<^ure muft have ; if he knoweth neither the 
 beginning nor middle, how can the end then be known 
 to him ? 
 
 IV. Thofe could beft teftify of it, who hate fcen a 
 Tindure with their Eyes, and have felt it with their 
 Hands ; and do know that this noble Pearl is not .a vain 
 and foolilb work, as many ignorant Perfons fuppofe. 
 
 V. It is fuch a work, which tranfmuteth really all 
 inferior Metals into pure or fine Gold, or Silver, it fud- 
 denly penetrates all the parts of Mans Body, and refto- 
 reth the defects of Nature, and bring? Health again, in 
 fuch manner, that Man may rather be amazed at, than 
 only admire it. 
 
 VI. And hereby it is manifeftly feen in the tranfmu- 
 tation of Metals, how the Tincture is a tranfcendent fixed 
 J>ibihi/?ce, -which can far lefs be deftroyed by any Element, 
 than Gold, but the Tinclure in it felt is the tranfcendent- 
 ly pcr.ed: Eflence of Gold; nor is there any thing com- 
 parable to this precious Jewel, in refpedt of the ingrefs 
 into other Metals. 
 
 VII. And though many fluid things are in Vegetables, 
 as Wax and Oyl ; in the Minerals, Sal Tart art, Sal E- 
 lebro;, Mercuric SublimatUi ; in the Metalline Bodies, 
 Tiiui, Lead, Wifmuth, Antimonia, Zinick, and the 
 ]ike ; yet all thefe are not comparable to this not in the 
 leart degree. 
 
 VIII. A likenefs, fimile, or example, may be given 
 thus: if you melt one pound of Lead, and put into it 
 one dram of Gold or Silver, the Lead receivctn that Bo.iy 
 io, that afterwiud in the leafl quantity of that Lead, 
 this dram of Gold or Silver can be found effimated in 
 tl";e proof. 
 
 IX. Now if this can be done io fuddcnly and eafily 
 in a mean or bafe Metal, what wonder is it, if the eter- 
 nally fixt and fluid Medicine fhould do the like? On the 
 other fide, let Men open their Eyes, and fee, whither the 
 Salts, Tartar and Mercury, or the mentior.ei Mnierals, 
 penetrate fo, and mingle with the Body s radically. 
 
 X. Though all the requifites be in this Tincture, yet it 
 it Avanted only the ingrefs, then lurely all hopes would 
 be lolt : Therefore thole deal fooliilily, wliich intend to 
 
 coaguUie 
 
Chap. 12. Of th^ 'Bhilofo^hrs Stont, 515 
 
 cpagij^ite the Spirit of Vitriol, Tcn;^, &c. with all forts 
 of Salts to a fixt Mafs. 
 
 XI. And though a fixation llioukl appear to thein, yet 
 it would not be equal to one atome, in comparKon of 
 our Salamander, and they will Hill want the mod ne- 
 celTary thing, namely the ingrels. 
 
 XII. Though other things, as Wax arid Butter, be fluid, 
 yet their fluidnefs is not comparable with the fluidnefs of 
 Metals, the one mingleth not with the other, but IWims 
 on the top, burns away, evaporateth, and tumeth to 
 nothing. 
 
 XIII. If none could meet with fiich Dire6lions or In- 
 (Irudions in the Writings and Books of the truly Learned 
 in this Art, out of what Kingdom the true and only Me- 
 dicine ihould be made, or taken, yet he may perceive it 
 out of this Difcourfe : but the Books of all Philolophers 
 are full and clear to the fingle Eye, which inform, that 
 like muft be affociated or ioyned unto its like. 
 
 XIV. Again, this noble Pearl mull: have a liiltiili 
 penetrating nature, and be endued with all the Ihengths 
 ot the four Elements. 
 
 XV. If it lliall diffolve in any Liquor, and in a mo- 
 ment divide it felf in the Human Bo ly into all the Ar- 
 teries and Blood, then it muft not be likened unto any 
 thing in the World, but only unto Salt or Sugar. 
 
 XVI. Our S.'ibjetlHm mult be colder than Ice, and yet 
 hotter than Fire, becaufe it muft temper the extream 
 hotBodysof J^^?.f and yenns^ and tranlmutc them into 
 the molt like proportioned fabltance 01 Gold ; and a£;ain, 
 it muft heat the molt cold Bodys oF Lead and of Silver, 
 io as that they may never return to their former fiitc a- 
 gain. / 
 
 XVII. Now, though this may feem incredible tomoft, 
 tliat in one only fiibitance all the quaUties of the Ele- 
 ments lliould meet togechir, and be joyned together in 
 one tye or covenatit : yet it is not ftrar.gc to thole, who 
 fee how their matter or iubltance containeth all things : 
 and how it is a V/atcr asid yet no Water, how the Earth 
 fr^immeth on the Water j how the Earth is Water and no 
 Water. 
 
 XVIII. And alfo, how the Air is our Mafia, and how 
 our Earth is a mcer Fire, according to Hermes his laying, 
 
 O 4 whsn 
 
i; 1 6 Of the Philojophick Work. Lib. VII. 
 
 when he faith, the Wind or the Air doth carry it in its 
 Belly. 
 
 XIX. Laftly, in this our moft noble Bird or Phsnixy 
 there arc all the Heavenly and Earthly Vertues or 
 Strengths, becauie it is generated out of the moft Volatile 
 and the molt fixed fubftance. 
 
 XX . Heaven is the Father, and the Earth is the Mother, 
 ivhich are revealed, when Heaven joyneth with the Earth, 
 and our Solar and Lunar Child is Born. 
 
 XXI. But many will fay to this, as unlikely as Hea- 
 ven can be brought to the Earth, fo unlikely is this Phi- 
 lofophcrs Stone to be had : As the one is impofllble, fo is 
 the other a Deceit and Lye. 
 
 XXII. But to anfwer this in fhort : we have no need 
 of the vifible Heaven and Earth, but of their Powers. 
 For as the Moon worketh on Man, Beafts and Vegeta- 
 ble?, by her Power, and is not prefent or near them : fo 
 is it here alfo. 
 
 XXIII. The Moft High hath replcnilhed our Heaven 
 with all Heavenly Powers, and our Earth with all Earth- 
 ly Powers, io that no more need be faid hereof. Yet wc 
 lliall fpeak further of this matter in the profecution of 
 our Dilcourfe : though now we let 'it reft, lliewing by 
 this little in few word?, the Properties of the true Philo- 
 fophick Stone of the Ancients. 
 
 XXIV. Others fee whither their Operations be uni- 
 form G-r no, and whither their Principles be fo too ; that 
 they be not impure or unfenriceable to the work they de- 
 fign them for, which requires the higheft homogenity and 
 fixity. 
 
 XXV. He that taketh exa6l heed to himfelf here, and 
 pondereth all well which we Ihall Difcourle, he may 
 judge firmly and truly of any Procefs which he hears, 
 whether it be true or not,' and whether the dcfircd and 
 hoped for end may be obtained or no. 
 
 CHAP. XIIL 
 
Chap. 1 J. Of the Fhtlofofhers Stone, ^i 7 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Of the matter of the Fhilofo^hers Stone. 
 
 I. CEcondly, what is the matter of the Stone ? Here you 
 *^ may remember, what innumerable opinions there 
 are concerning this one point. Some think becaufe this 
 Medicine is Univ^erfal, therefore it is and it mutt be found 
 every where, and can be made out of every thing, elfc 
 tlie name cannot be proper for it. 
 
 II. Another defends the contrary: This they do becaulc 
 they have not the knowledge of the matter, and this is 
 one of the greatett Errors ; For if Men fail or err in this 
 point, then furely they err in all the rett. 
 
 III. It is remarkable, and I tettify it upon my Con- 
 fcience, as often as I have difcourfei with feveral Men, 
 tho' profoundly Learned, yet I heard them talk of this 
 point varioufly and the clean contrary way, and I could 
 never perceive of any, tha.t they were within the pale of 
 Truth. 
 
 IV. Every one imagined to himfelf a matter, which 
 he defended afterward in the beft manner ; at latt I heard 
 lo much, efpecially of the moft skilful in this noble 
 work, that nothing can be reported from their Opinions : 
 muchlefs, becaufe it is Univerial, they thought no one 
 thing could be preferred before the other. 
 
 V. Here lyeth the caufe of the great difficulty in at- 
 taining unto this high Secret, as alio by reafon of Mans 
 unthankfulnefs and evil concupifcence, the one con- 
 founding the other, as it was at the Building of the Tow- 
 er 0^ Babel y where the one hindreth the pLirpofe and in- 
 tention of the other ; fo that the Mytteries of this Science 
 cannot be revealed unto them. 
 
 VI. Greatly w^as this point darkned, but may eafily 
 be refolved, yet hardly believed : the uiott are of opinion, 
 he that nameth the matter by nauic, iu this work, is 
 the greatett Seducer ; yet Theophrafics and others did no;: 
 ftick to nominate the Matter or Subjcd to be the Minera 
 Solis, Lun^ et Saturai. 
 
 » yiL Though 
 
5 1 8^ Ofphe Phtlofiphen Sfont. |,ib, VIL 
 
 VII. Though they ufed herein no ambiguitie, yet io 
 many judgments were given upon their Writings, that 
 all believed, th^iTheophrajiw and Bcfdiiu had never the 
 true Univerfal Tindhire. 
 
 VIII. But fuch Calumniators were never in the Phi- 
 lofophical School, nor underftandany thing of their My<» 
 fterious Writings, which is the reafon why they cannot 
 imagine how the one is three, three five, and five one ; 
 or how two are four, and four are two. 
 
 IX. Nor will they grant that this Secretum is the work 
 of Women, and Childrens Play j nor that the Poor may 
 attain unto it as well as the Rich. 
 
 X. It would be prejudicial to their deep Intelle6l, if a 
 poor iimplc Creature fhould indeed ("hew the work done 
 with the Hand, before them ; whereas they think not 
 tliat God diltributeth his Gifts wonderfully, even as it 
 pleafes him. 
 
 XI. In brief, he that will undertake to open the Gate 
 ofMyfteries, with the naked Intelleft, without the illu- 
 mination of Gods Holy Spirit, and without an induflri- 
 ous, careful working, willabfolutely mifs of his end. 
 
 XII. And here all Underltandingand Reafon is de- 
 fedive, and there is none but mull itand amazed, that 
 God lliould hive ibut up, lockt in, and hid fo deep, 
 this mofl noble Jewel next to the Soul, and that in lb 
 mean a Subjcif, difeftcemed by all Men. 
 
 XI II. Therefore avoid or meddle not with any Vege- 
 tables, nor yet witli Minerals, fo may you find that to 
 be true, which Theophrajfn^ faid, that there is found in 
 mam' places in Europe^ one Mineral in the Bowels of 
 the Earth, which in theoutfide is marked with the figure 
 of the Addcrocofme, and is in the beginning ^jirnm Sphe- 
 re Solis, or the Tree of Goldy or its Root ; which breaketh 
 or groweth nigh unto the Gold Oar. 
 
 XIV. This carrieLh its Seed in abundance about it, 
 and is Saturnine^ bcciule it cometh from the Heart of 
 Saturn, and mav well be called Sencx, which the mo(i 
 Ancient and molt Judicious Philolophers, call ihe Father 
 of SAtnrn 5 and have marked it with tliegreateltand moii 
 wonderful Sign, viz.. , 
 
 XV. They gave it a round circle, which containeth all 
 things, and a direct upright line, and a Diameter coin- 
 ing out of the Center, and then vi'itn a Crofs, which 
 
 ihcwcth 
 
Chip* 1 5. Ofthf Fhilofofhers Stom, 519 
 
 fheweth very Great and Mylierious things, as it is fcen 
 in this annexed Figure. $ 
 
 XVI. The Greateft Potentates and Monarchs have ufed 
 this Sign, as a means of their Felicity and Dominion. 
 For this caiife, ThtophrafluscsAhit Signutn Majoris Mnn-' 
 4i, and Baftlius calls it the round Ball of the Goddefs For" 
 fmey in which Gold, Life, and the Refurredion dwel- 
 leth, bringing the Salvation of Truth to the Man of God, 
 and is indeed all in all ; the which every Philofbpher 
 may take into further confideration. 
 
 XVII. But I teftify, that this Sign is at once, the Ma- 
 giftery, beginning, middle and end of the whole Work : 
 and through it, is it difcovercd and publillied ; and it 
 is that in which all, what Men fcek for, and dcfirc to 
 know, is typified and contained. 
 
 XVIII. NoAv left any be yet fcnipulous, that I keep 
 Men ftill in darknefs, and my declaration is not fuffici- 
 ent,- and that feeing the work is Univerfal, there are of 
 ncceffity more parfs belonging to it : for this caiife, I di- 
 re6l both the one and the other to Philofophers and their 
 Sayings. 
 
 XIX. And chiefly to FUmellm, who holds theSubjedl 
 to be not only one matter, but fneweth alio, what may 
 be drawn from it, when he faith ; \Jnnm habetur in hoc 
 Aitmdo Afetalln?n, in quo MercmtPi'S mjier feti £qtia hcecno- 
 fira ahunde reperitnr. _ Tabul. paradifi, Know ye, that 
 there is but one thing in all the World, out of which our 
 Art is made. 
 
 XX. Scndivogii'i-Sy in Tra^. de trihm Principiis : There 
 is but one matter in the whole World, through which, 
 and out of which, the Philofophers Stone can be made. 
 
 XXI. Though he nominateth two things, as S'/Aphnr 
 and Mercviry^ yet know, that nvo things may be but one, 
 as when I lay, Spirit and Boly is but one, it is rightly 
 faid \ for the Body was a Spirit at iirii:, and by the Ar^ 
 chem was coagulated into a Body. 
 
 XXII. Therefore Phiiofophersdefire but one m.atter of 
 X)ne Subftance, Avhen they lay, our Body and our Spirit, 
 our Father and our Mother. 
 
 XXI II. And as Husband and Wife are one Body, one 
 Fleih and Blood, arid from one Seed, yet unlike to the 
 Eye and Generation, and yet are but one ; io is the Spi- 
 rit 
 
^20 Of thePhilofophers ^tone, Lib.VIL 
 
 rit and the Body one, though they be not like one to a- 
 nother in the outfide. 
 
 XXIV. Hence it follows, that the firft beginning of 
 this magiitery, is of one bein^ out of two Subitances, 
 of a fix and unfix J that the one is the Seed, and the other 
 is the Womb, the one is the red fixed Man, and the o- 
 ther the white Woman j the one is the Mercury, the o- 
 ther is the Sulphur. 
 
 XXV. And to make it clearer, under the Name of 
 the Flying Eagle j all that muft be underitood, which 
 Philolophers have called their Aqua Sicca, Mercnrie, 
 Fnnie, Acetum Acerrmum, Aqua AiercHrialis, Spiritpu 
 Mercurii, Mare ficcum, Avis Hermetii, &c. thereby to 
 fleceive the Ignorants. 
 
 XXVI. But to inform the Underttanding, this Vola- 
 tile Spirit is of a noble quality, all in all, and deferves 
 to be called Spiritm Univerfalts Mandi j but among the 
 Fix, there remained only the name of Corpus Solis, be- 
 caufc it is adorned with the moil equal proportion of all 
 the Elemental Powers and the Itrongeft Strength, and 
 containeth perfeilly as in a Center, the property of 
 all things. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 ji continuation of the former Difconrfe, 
 
 I. C\^ this one Body many things may be faid, becaulc 
 ^^ itpreienteth it lelfalfo, fo that one, (unlefshe 
 be fenfelels and ftupid) mufl: admire it as a noble and 
 principal Agent, and a great work of Gotl. 
 
 II. Befides the Carpus Solis, it is endued with fuch 
 fixity, that it is only for it felf firm, and keeps io; and 
 it is known by experience, it cannot communicate the 
 Jeafi: of its fixednels to its Brethren. 
 
 III. BcHdes it is known, what tliofc have effected, 
 %vhich divulged fo many Defcriptions how the Anmm 
 Potahile lliould be made ,• and to lay nothing, how that 
 Philofophcrs have quite rejeiled connnon Gold. My in- 
 t.cntion is this, to make known, firit, wliat kind of Gold 
 
 ia 
 
Chap. 14. Of the Fhihf others Stoned 521 
 
 is meant, and afterward to diftinguifli, what the Gold is 
 in it felf and its Matrix, then the faid Qucftions will 
 cafily be anfwered, and a new regeneration be granted. 
 
 IV. I havefpoken afore of twoSubitances in one be- 
 ing in one only matter, and imparted the fame faithful- 
 ly, the one I called Saturnine, or after our Language, 
 Lead Oar, Lead Glafs, Minera Philofophka Satttrnij or 
 magnejia Plumhea. 
 
 V. The one is as the other, yet the one is more nigh, 
 more excellent, then the other, very fiibtil, penetrating, 
 fluid, volatile, poyfonous, metallin, animal, mineral 
 and vegetable, the principle of all things j out of which 
 are generated Gold and every Metal. 
 
 VI. It is a Fume, and a Medicament of all Medica- 
 ments, like Sealing Wax, whatever you print it upon, 
 you may have that print again. 
 
 VII. This is the true Principle of the one Afercftrius 
 CatholicHs Miner aW-, and Genitor oi Sol, and the Mother 
 or Womb of the Gold in tlie ftrength unremoved, on 
 which Nature wrought little, becaulc the little Grain of 
 the Fix'd is yet very fmall in it. 
 
 VIII. This is the Minera, which is cfteemed for the 
 higheft and greateft Secret, becaufe it hath the qualities 
 of all things, and can be turned into Water, Fire, Air 
 and Earth ; yea, the Effences of all Elements are toge- 
 ther in it. 
 
 IX. But as the Seed of Gold is fo high and great, fo is 
 the Matrix much higher ; for without that the Gold could 
 not be regenerated, renewed, opened and fhut again -, 
 and made perfect after a tranfcendent way, as Bafilim 
 attelteth, vi^. 
 
 X. That it is impoffible to make Gold without this 
 Potable Spirit, much lefs can be prepared the Sulphur 
 of Sol with any Corrofive : for this Water excels in its 
 ftrength, as well the great Ocean, becaufe the EfTence 
 of the Water is in it, as alfo'the Fire, in which is the 
 greatcll and ftrongeit Fire, and is fitly enough compared 
 with Cerberus. 
 
 XI . He faith further, that this Spirit is a fupernatural, 
 volatile Fire, Spirit ; for which caufe, it was called the 
 Sulphureous livm^ Water, which muft exalt the Body of 
 Sol into a Medicine, fo as to get a tranfcendent power 
 tor to tinge his Fellows. 
 
 XII. And 
 
52^ Ofth Fhilofo^ers Stem, Lib. VH, 
 
 ' IXHrAnd that never any, either univarfai oi parti- 
 cular TiiKStiire, nor other Univerfal Medicines' can be 
 obtained, without this Sulphureous, Spiritual Being, oj: 
 SpiritHS A4ercMHi. 
 
 Xm. For no Natural, Heavenly or Eartljly Fire can 
 bum the Body c£ Sol, without tl>is SuilphurcouE, Living 
 File of ours, there isjio Aiiio fubtiJ and pure, which 
 can carry our Body in its Belly, as this Air c*n. 
 
 XIV. Not any Earth fo qualified, out of wbich this 
 Lyon may be generated, as ours, becaufe it is with the 
 Gold, in refpeit of its principle, uniform, and of one 
 being.; of which more Inall be fpoken hereafter in the 
 Preparation. 
 
 5CV. The matter of the SoJar Body, which is as the 
 Fixt is .of a very equal affinity with the Volatile : For the 
 fix'd Blood with the Red. Lyon is drawn from the unfix 'd 
 Blood of the Green Lyon. BeGdes or without this, Uith 
 BafiiiuSy it is impofTible to obtain a new Generation. 
 
 XVL Thele two Subftances muft be, and can be re- 
 duced again into one, by the help of Vulcan, fo that 
 they never can be feparated again ; and herein Jyeth tlxe 
 greateft and higheft Mattalhip and Science. 
 
 XVIL Many liave tormented the Gold very ill, ma- 
 king ufe of a Men{hruiun which was not right, and was 
 incongruous, neither did they ufe the legitimate Matrix ; 
 hence it was impofl'ible for them to loqfen or break its 
 faft, firm Bands, and to bring it to its firit Being. 
 
 XVIIL Many Jiave brought the Spirit oi Salt, Urine, 
 Wine, Sal Armoninck, yhriol, ros r^AJalis, and the like, 
 to make it a calcined Body,or thoiight to open them with 
 common Mercury, but they miifed it -, though they knew, 
 Unsit Am- itm is the Leader, Pnnceps and Moderator omni- 
 um lumnum, et corpcmm rtliqiiorum ; and that its pre- 
 paration mui-t be bit with a true diifolution, cUe no Tni- 
 cture can be obtained. 
 
 XIX. Yet they were ttill kept ignorant of the noble 
 .Alenfirmm ; ib tliat they begot inikad of Legitunate 
 Children, meerly Baitards. 
 
 .XX. But if they had known the Prima Materia, viz- 
 the one matter ot" Gold, they would not liave miifai of 
 the only dilfolving water, as'thefirlt matter of the Gold- 
 -He that doth notknon^ this, can never attain to any true 
 preparation of Gold, or of the Philofophick Tinii^ure ; 
 
 but 
 
Chap. 14. Of the Fhihfofhirs Stof2e] ^^ 
 
 but it is like to a hidden Treafure kept under Lock and 
 Key, he that hath not the Key, mutt let the Treafint 
 alone. 
 
 XXI. I muft needs confefs, that I my felf have quite 
 defpaired of fuch a dry Menftrmm,^ but by the Grace of 
 God I ^ot an illumination, to dilcern the meaning of 
 the Philofophers dark Sayings, having confidercd that 
 which Bajilim taught, Saying. 
 
 XXII. If thou canft not find thy Menjirmm, do not 
 defpair therefore, but call in to thy help the Power and 
 Virtue oi Sutttrn, he will not leave thee unrefolved, but 
 he will put an Offering into thy Hand, of a high glitter- 
 ing Minera, which is grown out of the firit matter of all 
 Metals. 
 
 XXIII. If I had not committed io many Errors in 
 Chymick Proceffes, and wrought in vain, I had not yet 
 attained thereunto : for it is not a fmall matter to get the 
 true Bird oi Hermes truly and ferviceably out of th& One 
 Being. 
 
 XXIV. Therefore that obje6lion is to no purpofe, that 
 tnany wrought in vain upon Gold, wliich muii: be impu- 
 ted to their ignorance, and not to the.poffibiUty. 
 
 XXV. But that there Ibould be no more ftrength and 
 vertue in Gold, than it flieweth in its fubftance, and 
 that it could impart nothing to its Brethren in its fub- 
 ftance of his precious Blood, is not to be beUeved ,• for 
 otherv^^fe the Regeneration, Multiplication, yea, and 
 the Tranfmutiition alfo it felf would have been un- 
 known. 
 
 XXVI. But as this cannot be denied, fo is it pofTible 
 to prove, that Gold is the true Seed of our Tin6ture. 
 
 XXVII. If any {"hall deny this, I could wilb to fee 
 him, that could defend and demonftrate a more congru- 
 ous and fitter matter. 
 
 XXVIII. Is it not palpably feen, how grofly thofe did 
 err, which fought for this moft fixed Being out of an o- 
 ther Kingdom, and preferred the lame before this noble 
 Body ? Such could reap nothmg but Shame and Difgrace, 
 who took in hand fuch mean and corruptible po3':fonous 
 things, fir differing and far diflant from the pure, in- 
 corruptible and permanent Nature of Gold. 
 
 XXIX. They ihould have confidered the Philofophers 
 Sayings, as Smdivogim in 7, Tra^. Thangh thoft hadjr the 
 
5«4 Of the Philofophers Stone, Lib. VIL 
 
 firft matter of Metals ^ according to the judgment ir faying 
 of Ph ilofophers, yet rrere it impojfible for thee to multiply the 
 fame central Salt without Gold* 
 
 XXX. Item thefe Verfes. 
 
 Taie pure Gold refind, 
 ExtraEl its Soul or Mind. 
 Corrode not, but dijfolve. 
 Its Tinclure you involve. 
 Its hands of (ircngth untye. 
 And make the Dead to Dye. 
 Its Body thus dejlroyd. 
 Life comes to he enjoy d. 
 JStU through our hidden Fire, 
 Obtained is your defire. 
 
 XXXI. And if Baftlnu had known another Ferment, 
 he would not have bid thee in his firft Key to make the 
 Purple Cloathing out of Gold, but perhaps .out of Mars 
 or Venus. For if you Avill meliorate the Fruits of the 
 Tree of Gold or Silver to this inoculating, there muft 
 not be taken any other twigg, but a Solar or a Lunar 
 one. 
 
 XXXII. Gold alone 'tis true, as alfo'all the Metals, 
 are in themielves dead, fo that it Icems as if the Philo- 
 fophers had reiedled it, and recommended the Philofo- 
 phical one j but a faithful Follower mult fee here, with 
 open Eyes, and learn to undeiftand, that indeed com- 
 mon Gold is dead, and fo long it, is to be rejeded, and 
 and is unierviceable. 
 
 XXXIII. But when it fliall be radically diffolved with 
 the Philofophical Spirit, or Spiritual Gold, and reduced 
 to its Prima Materia^ and then raifcd with its Amma 
 glorified and tranfcendently perftBed ; then it may be feen 
 whither it will iliew it fclf dead or living. 
 
 XXXIV. In the mean time let none feek for any o- 
 ther Ferment bcfides this, to the end, that the truth of 
 that Saying may Itand firm, what is lowed will be reap- 
 ed again; and that there is not found in all the World 
 a more fixed Sulphur, (Namely, unto Fermentation^ 
 than tlRri. i^ in the Bodies of Sol and Luna 
 
 CHAP. XV- 
 
Ghap. I> OfthePhilofopbfik Work. J25 
 
 G H A P. XV. 
 
 Of ibt freftttition of the PbUofophtrs Stone, 
 
 1* /^ Oncerning the Preparation, I will takeaway front 
 v^ the Reader really all his doubts, and not talk by 
 hcar-fay, as others have done: but I will make known 
 boldly, not Opinions, but an experimental Knowledge, 
 having put my Hands to the Work. 
 
 IT. r did hope, that I fhould be joyflilly recompenfed 
 for my pains, to the end, that my Fellow Searchers in 
 Nature fliould cftedhially reap comfort thereby; and 
 feerein I was not deceived : but yet at firft this noble 
 Work was cut off and brought to nought ; fo that there 
 was no more left to me, but only a dark or clouded Di- 
 redion, and a Draught or Ocular demonttration. 
 
 III. But purfuingNature in her own way, I fay and 
 mean by this way, I had caufc to expert a far grcatv^f 
 and abounding reward, then I could have from my So- 
 phifticated Labours j and accordingly it fell out fota 
 me. 
 
 IV. For although the true dcfired Fixity was not y«t 
 at hand, yet fome feleft pieces in the Proje6lion {"hewed 
 an eminent pofTibility, befides what I had taken notice 
 of at.thediffolution of Bodies in the changing of Coiors. 
 
 V. Therefore will I communicate now the praclick 
 part feithfully, and more largely or plainly, -than evesr 
 a-ny hatli done before me; and will omit nothing of thg 
 Manuals which- Philofophers, as is apparent, pafs by 
 in filence. 
 
 VI. As you find in BernhardfU, where he faith ; that 
 he knew many which knew the matter of the Secret, but 
 they knew not the manner of the Preparation. 
 
 VII. Therefore let every one take heed and have a cars, 
 that he be not feduced by Sophifters, much leis kt hiiu 
 fix any thought on forcible Fires, Aqua Fortis, or othef 
 firange things, as to make his beginning thereby to this 
 Miftery ; for all fiich things will be in vain, 
 
 VIII. Let him foft be acquainted with the right iTsat- 
 ter, and confjder the beginning, then he will know how 
 
 P p w? 
 
526 FolygrAphieesl Lib. VII. 
 
 to proceed, and learn experimentally how he muft finiOi 
 the Work. 
 
 IX. The fame known and noininatcd matter is found 
 in many places : and it is well faid of it ; that it, or the 
 Stone, which is flung at the Cow, is more worth than 
 tht CGn% 
 
 X. In the fame is the true only Phllofophers Mercury, 
 in form of a mofl: fair, moft pure and white Pouder, 
 which is called the white Dove, and the Doves of Diana, 
 An'ima Samrniy and tlie Prima Afateria Aietallorum^ 
 which is drawn from the Secunda, of an excellent vola- 
 tile, penetrating Subitance. 
 
 XI. So that according to its quality, it foaks in as 
 Oil into every Metalline Body, and tmges them in a 
 moment into a white Body, as Theophrajlm faith in Li- 
 Iro Vexat : My Sjm-it is that Water which Joftntth and open- 
 eth all the congealed Bodies of my Brethren. 
 
 XII. In Medicine it is the greatert centrated Purge, 
 and the Poylbn of the Dragon : if but the 100 part of 
 a Grain be taken, it giveth many Stooles,to admiration. 
 
 XIII. This white jLilly is not unfitly called the dry 
 Corporeal Water, becaufe it mingleth with Metals, as 
 Water mingleth with Water ; it is alfo the great Salt 
 Sea, ffom -whence Metals have their beginning. 
 
 XIV. It can be turned alfo into a right natural wet 
 clear Water, like Cryfiial: it is the molt bitter matter^ 
 and can be made to be the fwceteft : and it is the Spirit, 
 which is found dilperfcd every where, and in every 
 thing. 
 
 XV. About this Preparation many -went to work, but 
 could not hit the trwe w^ay : they had the knowledge of 
 this Mineral, but .they were amazed at the wonderful 
 Operation, and at the appearance of the great variety 
 of Colours therein ; fo that they ceafcd to confider fur- 
 ther of the other Miracles. . ";>1 ■ ■• 
 
 XVI. Many a judicious Man which followed thtf Let- 
 ter, hath given over there, where he lliould have begun ; 
 many a one came fo nigh to it, that he had the Lilly in 
 his Hand, knew in Ibme meaiure its Virtue, and yet they 
 dclpaired, as not conceiving and believing the great 
 things which it could pertorm. 
 
 XVII. This noble white Flower is that which they put 
 many Names to, and is obtained by Art, x/;*. the icpa- 
 
 OtlOR 
 
C hap. 15. Of the Philofophers Stone. ^27 
 
 ration of the pure from the impure ; but it befools them 
 all, becaufe they knowing that the Kings Bathlliouidbc 
 pure, were mightily offended at the mean form of the 
 Subie6i, and could not comprehend that the Pearl was 
 vailed or hidden, which lyes in it, under flich a poor 
 gray Coat, and with the rankeft Poyfon. 
 
 XVIII. And becaufe they would be more wife than 
 the Creator himfelf, therefore they invented a multitude 
 c£ A'lenfirmms, thereby to perform the faid Separation, 
 and to get the true Philofophical Mercury, which Zc.eha.- 
 rius calls Flos Soils ; and Ridley and others call it, the 
 Sperme or the QHintejfence of our ftinking Earth, 
 
 XIX. But their intention being a m^eer invented work, 
 fo there came nothing of it: for to our matter no ftrange 
 thing muft come: which if any fuch Meterogenity is put 
 to it, then is it impure and unieiviceable. 
 
 XX. In it felf it hath no fuperfluity, but it is altoge- 
 ther like unto a common A4erc'/.ryj to be driven up in a 
 Fume, wliich is the life of Metals : and when this loofeth 
 the leaftintheFire, it is impofllble to open and to bring 
 the Gold therewith into its Prmn Materia, as the Turbo, 
 witnefleth ' ^ 
 
 XXI. Therefore there is required this Minera at the 
 begiriijng, without the addition of any Itrange thing at 
 all, for the diflblution or Icparation, but only by and 
 of its felt ; out of which, afterward Avith the help o^iTd- 
 can is brought forth its hot Baliam_, that it is in form 
 palpable and impalpable, and yet is it prcfented vifibly 5 
 fb that nothing more can he required of it. 
 
 XXII. For which caufe, Philoibphers cry. Our Stom 
 dorh ffihlime ml dijfdve its felf, and doth all it felf. They 
 fay, "that after the ConjunCliOn it is a moff eafie Wcrkj, 
 a V/omans Work, and Childreus Play. 
 
 XXIII. And'ib they reject altogether thofe, that iifi 
 great Subtilties and divers hlements, and would get ne'.^r 
 Principles : whereas Nature aforehand hath put the mat- 
 ter into the Hand of the Son of Wifdcm, in which is to 
 be found the pure Subftance, or as I m.ay fay, the Fote- 
 /i:;tes or Qitintcffsnce of ths Elements, and the three pute 
 Principles. 
 
 XXIV. And on tlie ether fide, among tlie Sophiilers 
 t^'ierc arifeth a great doubt, what Nature intended to 
 f'laks of her ilippofedPiindp^-^s? 5tis sw Errcr^ if Ha- 
 
 "P p 2 twr^l 
 
528 Pofygraphices, Lib. VII. 
 
 tures be not diftinguiilied and kept in order ; whereas 
 God for orders lake puts every thing into its own place, 
 where it lliould ftand. 
 
 XXV. Therefore how miferable a thing is it, when an 
 old wife Fool with his opinion banifheth as it were, by 
 his fubtilties, the Truth and real Science out of or from 
 Natures poifibilitv ; and on the other fide leadeth them 
 on impolllble, difficult BufinefTes which he doth not un- 
 derftand, neither hath he any ground for it. 
 
 XXVI. Many boafl:, that they have the Philofophical 
 Luna and So/, and cannot defend or prove in fadl, what 
 they in words maintain, neither indeed with the Philo- 
 fophers Sayings, becaufe according to the meaning of 
 Rojariusj there is no Sulphur to be found under the Sun, 
 which i? like to the Sulphur of Sol and Lunay 
 
 XXVII. Underftand here the Fixity of it ; therefore 
 none can call his Sulphur or Mercury in defed o^ Fixity ^ 
 a Sulphur or Mercury of Sol or Luna Ewbryonaied, much 
 lels elemcntated, but he mult be doubtRil iHll, whither 
 it be not ^nArfenicalFumcox a. Real^rijh Sulphur, which 
 IS far off from our red and white Ferment. 
 
 XXVIII. And it is lufficiently feen now adays, that 
 many cry up for an Aurum potabile, the EfTences of Li- 
 tharge, of Copper, Iron, Tartar, &c. and often a na- 
 turally fallen Rain water Afenflruum, which ftood on a 
 Gold Calx, which was not extraited, and become red of 
 its Iclr', by vertue of putrefadlion ; thefe they fell for a 
 great price to People, tho' a notorious and grand Deceit, 
 and containing no kind of fixed Solar or Lunar Sulphur 
 whatloes'er. 
 
 XXIX. But it is far other\vife with our Pradica: and 
 though our Subjed of the Mineral Stone containeth the 
 true Philofophical Adercury and S.'dphur, fo that by its 
 Iclt, ffue :i.U addinone vel diminutione, fucha perfect Uni- 
 vciial Medicine can be made of it ; yet the Univerfale 
 Gc.'icraViJJhrjHm is far higher, which is proved thus. 
 
 XXX. B'jcaufe this Lmpii A'fineraUs doth not touch any 
 Mcials yer, unlef^ it be iirit Fermewtcd : therefore Philo- 
 fophers bid us, to carry this Medicine upon Gold and 
 Sliver, that the Spirituality may be confirmed thereby, 
 and the Uis,rets may be compaiicd or obtained. 
 
 XXXI. Now if the Fixity and Ingrefs lliall be taken 
 fiom two fixe.l forts of Metals, what think you can hin- 
 der. 
 
Chap. x6. Of theVhilofophers Stom, 529 
 
 dcr, if I fliould prcfently mingle therewith the Calxes 
 of both Bodies ? 
 
 XXXII. I tell thee of a truth, that this was the very 
 fhort way of the Ancients, of which Theophr^jipu wioto. 
 fo much, in which many before me have gone, and I 
 my .felf have walked in. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 Of the PraSiick part of the Preparation. 
 
 I. T fhall now faithfully reveal and i"hew the Pra6llca 
 •*• how firft may be had our Matrix ^ Adercnri^u dn- 
 plicatui, and our Regina, or Aqua jlcca. Let every one 
 obferve carefully the Dodrine of Philofophers, and fee 
 how we bring wholly and alone the Eletlmm unto per- 
 fedion, M^hich containeth the Philofophical Mercmy and 
 Stilphnr, to the end that the right Lap^ Mineralis be 
 made out of it. 
 
 II. But becaufe we intend to operate upon, or for the 
 general work or Univerfal Tin^ure, you mufl know, that 
 you are not to take the Body, but the cleareil:, pureit 
 Effence of our Subje6l, to make therewith our Ferment 
 foft, and tranfcendently or plufcjuam perfeil, for to get 
 the Arcanum Arcamrum ; in w^hich lyes hid the greateft 
 Myfteries, which the Philofophers kept moft fccret. 
 
 III. However its Preparation is intimated by them 
 thus, when they lay : fac Meramum per Mcrcurinm^ per 
 Aquam Mercurialer/iy which are Golden Words, and 
 impolTible for Ignorants to believe. 
 
 IV. Viz.. That itfhould be Mercwins d-Aplicatns ojcSab- 
 limatus : however this Preparation cannot be had ^vithout 
 addition, neither muft that which came to it in the Pre- 
 paration, ftay with it, as Theophr.ipis faith, in Tiucl^ira 
 Phyftcornm. 
 
 V. He that will follow the footfteps of Truth, let him 
 feek after the nearer matter, ' which in tlie Druggilts Shops 
 may be had for a fmall price, and m many places it 
 may be had for nothing. 
 
 Pp 3 VI. TijlA 
 
5^0 Tolygrnfhkes. Lib.VR^ 
 
 VI. This muFcbe mingled with two parts of the mod 
 bitter Water, which ir the orpanded Fagle, or the glow- 
 ing Coal, which the Court-Milbcls, orControler/of an 
 Hundred Years old, in the white ii-iiidlc, giveth forth ^ 
 and it va\\[\ itand f:r a time in the Cellar. 
 
 VII. Then our Green Lyon is Iben with admiration, 
 and that is made manif;!!:, which in many places is found 
 in Mines; and out of which Metals grow, which is the 
 lij.'ht Salt or Vitriol, of which ^^/'ff/jf/'^ faith : F'i^rioUm 
 jc'A Sal ejj medianj CT" fn'jopritwi Sewen gentrandi omnia Me- 
 tf.!u, ti?.nq;ta'm principi'im reTT^orijJimum omnium Aietallornm. 
 
 VIII. When this diifoJution is dor.e, then is it brought 
 h\ Diftillation on tlie top of theOlympick Mount, where 
 ou! white Dove delireth to rert, being eagerly purfucd by 
 the Fagle, to n^ike a Prey of her. 
 
 IX. But it is io beaten off by the Rainy Weather, tliat 
 our Dove bv tlie help of tlie Red L^'on, becomes io pure 
 as pulveriled Pearl, or Diamond Pouder ; a Poyfon of 
 Poyion, and the tme Spirit of Saturn, and of Arfeniclc. 
 
 X. This is afterward our White Lilly ^ or Spirit us Ader- 
 enriiy Aqua. BeneAltia^ wdiich Philofophers called a Cry- 
 ftalhnc Air, coagulated by Nature, ^►i/j/w very plainly 
 calls it AlHK-im phmojum ; but Salomon calls it the bright 
 glittering Lace. 
 
 XI. If this work be rightly performed, you have then 
 found the firfl Key which opens into the Virgins Caftle : 
 and there to wait for a further fuccefs, and to be kept 
 from erring in the Fermentation, that all may be brought 
 to the wifhed end. 
 
 XII. But tliisonc thing muft be well confidered, how 
 the Ferjremu.r or Semen yiultbe prepared, that the Pin- 
 guedo Terra n jirA may the better work into, and be quick- 
 ly di/Tolved. 
 
 XIII. Ar.d becaufe mention is made of Gold belong" 
 ing thereto, it is requifite, that the fame be well broken 
 and iubtiltzed by BalHi'.fs his Femer Bath. ' 
 
 XIV. Othcnrife, if it be dilfolved by the common 
 A qua Fonts, and the prajcipitated Gold by Salt of Tar- 
 tar be taken, th?n the Spirits of Viitriol are prxcipitated 
 alfo with the lame ; fo that of one dram of Gold two 
 are gotten often ; neither can thefe Spirits be edulcora- 
 te.!, aiul arc vcit obftrucHve. 
 
 XV. With 
 
Chap. 1 6. Ofthe'PhilofofhickWorki 531 
 
 XV. With the Silver it is done thus ; it is diiTolved in 
 TLTiAqmFortisy prsecipitated in a Copper Pan, then the 
 Calx is to be very well edulcorated^ and refen^ed for ufe. 
 
 XVI. But for more fecurity, left you iliould be hin- 
 dered, by reafon of the cdlhroGvc Spirits, it is more fafc, 
 that folia Solis & LunA be taken inftead of the diiTolved 
 Goli and Silver to proceed in the Work, then will you 
 be free from any fear or danger. 
 
 XVII. And the truth of thefe old Verfes fiands firm. 
 
 If thou the Gem mthin vpouUfi gety 
 The Key muft to the Loci he fit. 
 When Head and Tail are joynd in one. 
 The mighty Work's perform'd and done. 
 
 XVIII. Where for a further inftrudion I fay, that by 
 means of Sendivogius and others, I went mightily aftray, 
 when they faid : the one is the Matrix, the other is the 
 Seed of the Man, and the third the Seed of the Woman. 
 
 XIX. Others take the Red Servant and the White 
 Woman : Others put the Volatile to the Fixt, coagulate 
 after the ancient way, then fay they you have the Tin- 
 6lure of Philofophers. 
 
 XX. Theophrajius faith, take the red Blood of the Ly- 
 on, and the Gluten AquiU, &c. After a long confidera- 
 tion, and for experience fake, I took in hand two Works 
 together. 
 
 XXI. I mingled in a due proportion, the Ferwentum 
 Solis & Luna, as the perfect Seed of the Man, and of the 
 Woman, with the Matrix. 
 
 XXII. After that I joyned the Frrmentum Solis, as the 
 Seed of the Man, with the Philofophical Earth, as its 
 Matrix or the White Woman. 
 
 XXIII. Thirdly I joyned the Mercury with the white 
 Ferment or Calx Lun<ey and put all under the Hand of 
 Vulcan, expecting the poflibility on both fides ; biit at 
 the alteration of the Fire, I found but one effe6l. 
 
 XXIV. Hence every one may be affured, that he can- 
 not be damnified, which way foever he taketh, except 
 in Harveft time ; wherein the Fruits will appear corref- 
 pondent to the Seed of each. 
 
 XXV. This Conjun6lion, though it looks but mean, 
 yet you muft not tranfgrefs in the quantity or weight, 
 
 Pp 4 lor 
 
^^2 Pol^grsphkes. Lib. Vn. 
 
 tor if therein an Error lliould be committed, it wojild b^ 
 an Univerfal Error thro' the whole Work ; for which 
 caiife, it is neceffary to take the Advice of truly Philoljb- 
 phick Authors. 
 
 XXyi. For my part I followed Senihogitu, and he 
 may iafely be followed. For he faith TV^t^. 9 if the Gold 
 be mingled with it eleven times : Scil. 11 parts, then is 
 it weak, almoft unto Death, theChalybs conceives, and 
 Bears a Son, who is more glorious than his Father. 
 XXVII. If afterw^ard the Seed of the new born Son is 
 
 put agr^in into its Matrix^ then he cleanfeth the lame, 
 
 and niaketh it a thoufand times fitter to bring forth the 
 
 inofl: glorious Fruit. 
 XXVIIL He that flrikcsthis in the Wind, and flight- 
 
 eth it, cannot make a mixture, nor attain to any dmo- 
 
 lution or perfe6lion. 
 
 XXIX . But when the Conjun6lion is done in the afore- 
 faid manner, the Compound, (which however comes 
 from one) is fet into a convenient Digeftion, and is con- 
 tinued for a Month. 
 
 XXX. And then isitfeen afterwards, how thePhilo* 
 fophers Mercury worketh on the Body, and the putrcfa- 
 chon enfueth ; the whole matter turning into a blaci^ 
 colour, like Ink. 
 
 XXXI. And thePhilofophersdarknefscometh to light, 
 io that the Calcination and Solution of the wife Maliers 
 is performed at once therein. 
 
 XXXII. And the Pores of our Body are thus opened, 
 that through the help of the Volatile Body or Servant, 
 the Fixt may be made Volatile alfo, and the Parents 
 may feed on the Child, and keep united infeparaUy. 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 The former Dijcourfe eontiftued. 
 
 I. "T^He Philofophers Sublimation muft not be tak«n 
 -"- tor a thmg that is driven on high, as the Sophifters 
 fay : but the clofe and compadt Body muft rightly b? 
 ©pened and lubtilized, and tlie impure feparated from 
 th^ pure. 
 
 II. Nor 
 
(Jhap. 1 7 . Oftk Phih/ophers Stone, 5^5 
 
 II. Nor that Sal Armonjack mutt be added to k, as 
 Chymitts ufually do, and fo mingled together; and 
 though Sendivogm maketh mention of ftale Urine, yet 
 he meaneth Sal Armoniack, when he fet forth ourpene- 
 ^ting Mercury by fuch a Sal Armoniack. 
 
 IIJ. For as Sal Ai-moniack pjenetrateth, and brings 
 the leaft Metal into Corruption, fo doth our Sal Armoni- 
 ack with the moft fixed Body : for itcorrodeth, diflblveth 
 and corrupteth the fame, caufmg another form, and a 
 new Generation to come forth. 
 
 IV. Corruptio enim unias eji Generatio alterhu ; and this 
 is performed by the help of a due gentle Fire, and by 
 the Mercurial Fume or Mineral Water, which is the true 
 Fontina Bernhardt ; that after the finifhing of the fame 
 degree the Ferment is not to be found again, though the 
 Fondna were drawn dry. 
 
 V. Now if this degree be iiiccefsfully finifhed, as it 
 may commodioufly be done in a Month or four Weeks, 
 thereupon followeth the Coagulation, which hath coagu- 
 lated and dryed up many Mens Brains, infomuch, that 
 they lott thereby all their Underf-landing. 
 
 VI. Becaufe they imagined, that a wet Spirit belong- 
 ed to this Solution, and tliat they faw and concluded, 
 that the Solution or Menlhuum is of greateft concern- 
 ment; whereupon they ftrove to ufe a multitude of 
 means for the Solution, as their Writings and Books of 
 Proceifes fufficiently fliew. 
 
 VII. Falling into fuch Errors, at latt they knew not 
 bow to bring the diffolved Bodies to any coagulation ; 
 and before they could compafs it, their Glalfes broke in 
 pieces. 
 
 VIII. Yet fbme of them brought it to a confidence 
 by pellicanizing, frequent Cohobations and Circulati- 
 ons ; but the Mafs they obtained, was to no purpofe, 
 and worth nothing to their Intention ; becaufe the re- 
 quifites mentioned above, were not found therein. 
 
 IX. Our true Coagulation is performed in this man- 
 ,ner, the Spirit mutt fix and coagulate it felt with the 
 
 Calxes of its kind. For Coagulation and Fixation is 
 
 one. 
 
 X. And our Spirit is not a common Water, but a 
 JTioft Volatile Spirit and Hermaphrodite, becaulip it trajii- 
 eends all oth^r diffolving Waters, opening radically the 
 
 Silver 
 
5?4 'Polygrafhicts. Lib. VD- 
 
 Silver as ^rell as the GoLl, which could not be done by 
 any other Spijit or ^^^lte^. 
 
 XI. Hence it isrcquiiltc thit it be brought to a fuper- 
 fist Subllancc, and if it ^vere not a Metalline, dry Spi- 
 rit, fuch a Coagulation could ne^^cr cnfue ; tor no com- 
 mon Water or Spiiit can be mixed with Mctab, as to 
 make it inkparablc. 
 
 XII. In this degree the Fii-e mud be fo encrcafed and 
 continued, till the black loole its Telf", and turn white, 
 where the Fume allayeth, and lb unitctli, tint it cin 
 no more be ieparated \ and this is performed mcerly by 
 Vttlcin. 
 
 XIII. For as tlic Volatile was at the firft tlie Agent, 
 and by its fubtileft Spirits diilblres the Body, and cb.an- 
 ges it into a Spirit ; fo is it now in the other file. 
 
 Xn^ The Body becomes now the Agent, and ler? 
 forth his hot fiery Namre, binds the Spirit, and r:^:\:i 
 It generate in ma^'.im plus qnam I'n-'MUm^ but this rCv:} • - 
 rceh time; and this Labour can iurdly be fiuilhci in 
 a Ycir. 
 
 Xy. But there are required fomc Months to the true 
 Calcination of our ey£^, where the degrees of Fire mul^ 
 rife. For Fhilofophers-fay, Ccff'bwitc &s no/rrum cnm igne 
 forrljfimn. 
 
 XVI. Therefore tbis burning mull continue for a time, 
 if you intend to get the Phiiuxj fo that the Ma^a look 
 not s;recn .as a Smaragd^ but be dianged into the colour 
 of a Ked Ruby. 
 
 XVII. Yet, before this tliere prececds the colour of a 
 Peach Bloilom, for a fign that the Work goeth right. 
 
 XVIII. The Work being brought thus Var, thou ihalt 
 fee, how eafily die Terra Altrrua may be feparatcd from 
 it, for to get the EJfence of all EJ^ences ; and thou mayrt 
 hare the Stone in ferwa ficca & liq%Ua, wliich is one 
 \\>rk, and yet fooleth many. 
 
 XIX. For when oui" Body hath been firft in tlie filrifh 
 Waters, they mult be the lame at lalt, for the true Uni- 
 venal Tnic^uie mult infillibly luve fuch qualities, if fo, 
 be it Ihall be ler\iccable to its Brethren, as lus been 
 laid, yi^.. to the inferior Metals ; and Cure Mans In- 
 hrmirics. 
 
 XX. For .as in Hirreft time, the Husbandman gathers 
 Ins Sowed Corn with great cnaeal'e, fo here there is feeu 
 
 alio 
 
Chap. 17- Of the Thilcf of hers Stone. 5^5 
 
 alfo a great augmentation; lo that it rcioyces and rc- 
 frcfhcs the Poficiror, and requites all his pains in quanti- 
 tate &qualitaie. 
 
 XXI. Nou-, that all thing? may be compleat in this 
 Work, and that I may not be blamed lor any conceal- 
 ment, I will fufficiently innm6l you, how the laid Se- 
 paration muft be made, and hc.\v the Central Salt after 
 Calcination and Fixation, mufl be cxtradcd. 
 
 XXII. Though the Philolbphers, by rcafon of fomc 
 Ignorant?, and unexperienced Peribns in the Work, were 
 filcntand myfkriou?, yet they made tl-c erd clear and 
 manife(t ; and they conicll plainly, that the final Soluti- 
 on was in the Wine VclTcl, viz.. tnat by the Spirit, which 
 lyeth |-:'d therein, thi? faltilb Extraction can be had. 
 
 XXIII. For fay they, as a Glaf?, jRlIed with common 
 W^ine, doth not run ovcrir any Gold be laid in it, but 
 keepeth together, and as the Magnet draweth Iron, fo 
 doth the Spirit of Wine and the Elfcnce of Gold, far 
 more abundantly; fo that thereby a full reftitution of 
 Mans weak Body may etifuc. 
 
 XXIV. So that Philolophcrs by the help of their Work, 
 may take fomething out oi it, for to hold out the better, 
 that the Operator may in the interim have folnewhat to 
 live upon. 
 
 XXV. And they bid Men to reduce it to a particular 
 Worky (wliich is underltood thus, th;^t Silvr can be 
 tranfmutcd into GoldJ of which more Ihall be fpokcn 
 in the Chapter of particulars, to which place 1 refcive it. 
 
 XXVI. Every one may cafily gucfs by that, which 
 hath been laid, of what the Lapis mult be compotcd, if 
 ^t the half lime, a Booty may be taken out horn thence. 
 
 XXVII. I lliould Ipeak alio of the augmentation, but 
 Jiot having perfeded the Work fo far, to the great and 
 Univerial latisfaction, I leave it now here with this 
 Preparation, and fo far as my experience has truly 
 taught me. 
 
 XXVIII. Not doubting, but when you have come 
 thus far in the true way, and that it is fully known ta 
 you, that the augmentation may prolperouily fuccced or 
 ?n(ue, which, as I conceive, cannot be performed byany 
 other means but tlirougli its Principles; and thus 1 leave 
 ;liis Dil'courfc of Preparation. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
^1$ Foljigraphices. Lib. VII. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 Of the Inftruments ft for this Work, 
 
 I. /^F the neceflary Inttruments I have this to fay; 
 ^^ our Stone, fay Philofophers, is one matter, and 
 requires one VeiTel, and one Furnace : hence it may be 
 gathered, that indeed it mutt be no otherwife. 
 
 II. I my felf hadno need of SubUming, Calcining or 
 Reverberating Furnaces, Athanors or dull Henrys, or o- 
 ther leveral Furnaces ; there is no need of Artificial Vcf- 
 fcls, efpecially to thofe that have the truth. 
 
 III. OneGlafs, aVelTelof Glafs orClay, in the form 
 of a round Chamber or Egg, is enough at the beginning. 
 
 IV. It is true indeed, that thofe which walk in this 
 way in an other form, invent other Veifels and Furna- 
 ces, becaufe their intention is itrange j therefore they 
 muft have ttrange Inltrument-s alfo. 
 
 V. But they may be asked, if Spirit hs Mercurii, ViEiri- 
 cliy Solisj Roris Afaialis, Sulphfirisj Salis Armoniaciy &c. 
 have been the MenflrHo. PhilofophorHm ; pray what In- 
 ftruments had the Ancients} in whofe time there were no 
 Glajfes in ufe ? And what ufed they for their Coagula- 
 tion of corrofive Spirits ? 
 
 VI. I am of opinion, that their Earthen Pots, would 
 have attracted far fooner, as they truly thought, and 
 fuddenly coagulated fuch Spirits. 
 
 VH. But by this confideration every one may guefs, 
 that their Aqua Solvens whi} needs have been a dry Water or 
 Spirit) for ethervfife it hadheen impoffihle, that the [aid An- 
 cient s^ by reafon of the vant cf GUjfes or firm In/hnmentSy 
 could have coagulated the [aid Spirits. 
 
 VIII. And all the Philofophers had grofly err'd, that 
 ever made mention of a ^r> AienjirHHWy if there had been 
 at hand another Diffolution. 
 
 IX. Now, though fbmething may be obiedled againtt 
 this, yet I do hold, that I may build further upon my 
 Experience and the futhfiil Writings of Philofophers, 
 than upon any Mans imagination. 
 
 X. Befidc?, 
 
Chap. i8. Of the Fhtlofof hers Stone. 557 
 
 X. Befides, the faid Ancieat truePhilofophers had not 
 fo great Expences to build luch fair Artificial Furnaces 
 and ftately Laboratories, as they do now a days, kit 
 made ufe of a fmall Furnace in a quiet place, and at- 
 tended the fame. 
 
 XI. The variety of feveral Furnaces intimates the va- 
 riety of Labourp, and diverfity of Matters, when other- 
 wife all the Writings concord with one Saying ; that 
 the Being of our Art doth not confift in varieties of Mat- 
 ters, as //<?rw<?j- plainly fpeaks of it. 
 
 XII. Therefore let Novices not trouble themfelves with 
 many Furnaces and Laboratories, one fmall Furnace is 
 enough to exert and demonftrate all the degrees therein. 
 
 XIII. Let it be fetin a place, where you fear not any 
 danger of Fire, left mifchief lliould enfue, and fpoil or 
 deftroy all your Work. 
 
 XIV. And into this Furnace let him fit a Capell or 
 Pann, and fill the fame with Sand or Aibes, and fet his 
 Glafs therein, and not take it out, unleis he fee the 
 whole Mafs look of a Blood red Colour. 
 
 XV. When that Colour appears, it is the fign of Har- 
 vcft, which is nigh at hand. Let this fnjpce CQncemiitv 
 the Infirwnents and Furnaces. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Of the requijite Fire: and frft of the Ignis 
 Externus. 
 
 1. 1 N the next place there followeth the Fire, hoAv tliat 
 -*• murt be governed , fo that this moR noble Miirery 
 
 tliat 
 
 - i'y 
 
 may be elaborated, and brought forth j which is a molt 
 neceflary point for Novices to know, kit they fall into 
 hurtful Errors. 
 
 II. For it is known, that Authors have concealed their 
 Fire, which is the chiefell and greatett ma-rier of the 
 Operation herein, and intended to terrifie and keep orf 
 the limple bnes by their dark Sayings. ^^ 
 
 III. I grant, whaty^r/-."/?^; iaithmthe Book of rr^A, 
 that our Fire is for to expand the natural Ekin^ntal Fire, 
 
5^8 PolygrAphices. Lib. VIL 
 
 which Rirs up and maketh the other Heavenly and Ter- 
 reftial Fire to work, which is hid in the matter. 
 
 IV. And this, when he laith : pm: our Gold ami Silver 
 in o-4r Fire^ then it t'Arns to a dry Liquor. 
 
 V. And becaiife here are named two Fires, let every 
 one oblen'e, that the common Fire is too weak, to burn 
 our Phcenix, if the other- Fire, which is hid in ths matter, 
 (miohtilykept fecret,with ftrangeNames)did not the beft. 
 
 VI. Hence the Ancients faid; not Balneum Marine, 
 j4[hes^ Sandsy &c. fed ignis calcis vivXy five cdor Sutphn- 
 ris vet Mermrii no/frij &c. is t\:i true Fire. 
 
 VH. And it is true, that of thefe two Fires the one 
 without the other can do nothing : and if the Operation 
 of both fliall enliie, then the natural Fire muli kindle 
 the other, and make it work. 
 
 VIII. And the cold mull not be taken for the warm, 
 nor the warm for the cold, much lefs the external muft 
 not exceed with a great force the internal; for then all 
 your doing will prove a labour in vain, and drive the 
 Volatile from the Fixed. 
 
 IX. Or, caufe our Malf^i, being very fluid, to be 
 brought mto a Flux or Running ; as it happened to mc 
 la-eral times, that my whole Work was fpoiled thereby. 
 
 X. But the Fire, as Bcmhardus faith, mult be an equal 
 digefting, conttant Fire, not too forcible nor too hot. 
 
 XI. In the firll degree, you muft not make haft "with 
 the Solution, for if the Body be not rightly dilTolved, 
 there cannot follow any firm Fixation of the Volatile. 
 
 XII. After the Solution, it is requifite, that.the fecond 
 degree be exerted or obfeived, where the whole M.-iffa is 
 turned to a white Diamond-like Poudcr; but before 
 that, there appear feveral fair Colours in the Glafs, as 
 well as in the matter. 
 
 XIII. When this is done, and the Albedo changeth, 
 ib that it turns to the appearance of a P<?rf<r/)fn/o.'<rW')/ow, 
 then make the Fire nut too ftrong, left you fpoil thq 
 Work. 
 
 XIV. For Philofophers attcftcd fo, and have declared 
 it fo, when they laid ; Combarite as nojinsm cam igne for' 
 tijfmto. 
 
 XV. Then the whole Operation obtaineth the end, 
 when the whole Subftance is turned into a deep red co- 
 Jour, like unto a iluby, or like to Bloody and in 
 
 Of 
 
C bap. 19' Of thtVhilofofhtrs Stem, 5^^ 
 
 or on a glowing plate, Iheweth its fclf like an OH witlt- 
 out a Fuine, of a fweet Tafte, and diifolveth like Salt 
 in any Liquor. 
 
 XVI. Then is the Body Calcined, and the Spirit rights 
 ly united and fixed. 
 
 XVII. It might be asked, becaufe I faid above, that 
 the Mafs is very Volatile, and melteth into one Liunj> 
 in a ftrong Fire, and cauleth damage ; how one might 
 be fo cautious, as fp^cially to oblerve it, feeing that" in 
 the fourth degree the ftrongett Fire mult be uled } 
 
 XVIII. Here obferve, that the Matter or the 6p?rit, 
 at the beginning, hath not endured yet a irae unitnii^ 
 with the Body, but through the force of Fire may eafily 
 be feparated from it in the Flux, Melting, or Sublima- 
 tion. 
 
 XIX. But after the DilTolution our Spirit is coagulated, 
 and hath no more any fuch fiuidnel?, and is no more 
 feparable, two are become one j fo tliat no Element can 
 feparate them. 
 
 XX. It may be objedled, doit not thou contmditft thy 
 felf .^ inuft not thy perfe^a Maffa, or Laps Philofophkus, 
 be fluid, like Wax or <Oil? Why doft thou lay, that af- 
 ter the Solution and Coagulation, there is no more any 
 liich fiuidnefs or damage to be feared ? Perhaps thy Me- 
 dicine will be an unworthy matter, as others, a iturdy' 
 unpenetrating Ponder ? 
 
 XXI. Note here again, that after the finiiliing of our 
 Work, there is then required the greateit and molt fecrec 
 Science. 
 
 XXII. For when our Body is duly Calcined with the 
 Philofophers Afercury^ or is diifolved with the often m.en- 
 tioned ^qua Sicca, and coagulated; then at lait t!;erq 
 happeneth a Separation. • • "w- 
 
 XXIII. So that the Terra .,!^or;?/^ feparateth from the 
 Eifence of Sol, and muft be ieparated, as Sendivogim 
 faith in TraEt.de A^ercurio: T^hsnip is hnrnt, then is ic put 
 in the Water, ^.nd is digcfied; .afier it is digefted, is it given 
 to Sick Bodies', for the whkhj-l'hti'vd /ilready npmnated the 
 Spirit of Wine. . '■ '■ \r/r /■.■ : ■ ;^. ■ 
 
 XXIV. For this Terra Mortua, as an unworthy tiring, 
 containetha great, ifardinefs Or hardnefs, which hinders 
 liie flux or^,t]uiLdnefs of qht hjjence. - - • ■• •■«■ - - ■ 
 
 XXV. But 
 
540 Folygrdphkes. Lib. VIL 
 
 XXV. But after the Separation^ we have tht true in^* 
 comburtible Oil, the Aftral Salt of Philofophcrs, theend^ 
 which is Hke to the bcgiiumig, the moft worthy fix>uv 
 the moft unworth^^ 
 
 . XXVI. And in brief, after this final Sepiaration, thoii 
 haft thy Medicine in forma Sicca & Liqmia ; the true Trea- 
 fure of all Riches, the greateft Miftery, which lay fecreC 
 and hid in Nature, the true Afylnm defertornnrPauperttmj 
 and the right taie infallible augmentHm ; yea, fijch al 
 Treafure, of which I fpeak, tliat thou mayft cry, VIC-' 
 TORI A. 
 
 XXVII. For this Salt hath the vidory of ail things, 
 over all the Volatile Spirits of Mctah, and, to coagMate' 
 AiercHry. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 Of the Ignis Internuf* 
 
 I. *T^O fay fomething of the Myfterious Fire of our mat- 
 -*• ter, I muft confefs the truth, that I muft agree 
 and confent with the true and faithful Philofophers, andj 
 fay, that our dry Water is nothing elfe, but a Sulphu- 
 reous Living Fire. 
 
 II. But it is not the common Sulphur, which Calci-. 
 iieth Metals, burneth and deftroyeth them; but it is a.* 
 SulphfireoHs Water, which bringeth Metals into a Melt- 
 oration. 
 
 III. And of this Geher faith,^»j Sulphur contMifcerey & 
 Corporthns Amicari noverit, inveniet Arcannm de fecretis 
 ISiattirdi maximum. 
 
 IV. This Sulphureous Living Water, is one of the 
 greateft Fires, which hath power to mingle with our 
 Body. 
 
 V. And it is the true EfTcnce of the Elemental, Hea-f 
 venly and Earthly Fire, which tvpifieth the Fire of the 
 Laft Judgment, whereby the Elements themfelvcs are 
 dilTolved; and HkiII bring forth new Elements, as it 
 were the Elfences of the former. 
 
 VL But 
 
Ch ap. 2 o. Of the Phitofophick Workp 541 
 VI. But becaufethis Eir exceeds, or goethbeyond the 
 common reafon, it is counted an ImpofHbiiity, and Ab- 
 fuidity ; and none takes pains to underfimd tbefe plain 
 Sayings of the Philofophers. 
 
 . Vil. Much lefs do tliey underfbnd the profound Al- 
 legorical Doctrines of the true Sons of "VViidoin, who 
 wholly concealed their Fire. 
 
 VIII. And it is iuR, it lliould be concealed, and kept 
 fecret, that it may be efleemed as a folly or fondncfs to 
 the Self-defigning and wicked World. 
 
 IX. Many undertook to elucidate this point, but they 
 have not meliorated the Spagyrical Republickj but only 
 deteriorated it. 
 
 X. They invented a Itupendious multitude of Firesj 
 of Candles, Lamps, and the like: they adviled the ufe 
 of Steel Glaffes, ofHorfe Dung and Hogs Dung, imbi- 
 bed with Urine, oi* Aqua Vitat : at lall: they iiiYented, 
 the continual lliaking and ftirring, that they inight ftir 
 up our Fire, and to be the caufe of the Solution. 
 
 XI. But Bernhardtis counted all this meer Foppery, 
 and rejeded them ; though many did iraagiue,. that ^ 
 diverfity of Fires was requifite. ■_ 
 
 XII. For, as perchance a Philofbpher may have pb? 
 tained the end fuccefsfuUy, for which realon he has rt^ 
 je6led all other ways, and walks only after his owri 
 way: fo, becaufe out of any thing in the VVvorld this 
 our Medicine may be prepared, therefore of necetTity irt 
 thofe cafes there are required alfo fevefal Furnaces, lu- 
 (h-uments and degrees of Fire. 
 
 XIII. Every Mailer, who knows beft the qiialitics of 
 his Work, knows how to order the Regiment of Fire as 
 hepleafeth. 
 
 XIV. But it needs no exaft Art or Goverrmcnt, bs- 
 caufe Children and Women fportingly can perform it. 
 
 XV. The Fire, (viz.. the natural) is ail the Art, where- 
 by Nature or the W^ork is accompliflied, the other In- 
 grediences are mean, as Bernkardu.: iixixh*. mreriirkmid- 
 tiUidine Ars ncjira non co,^fi}it : ell enbn Res pina^ Medici- 
 na una, Lapis unus, in quo totm^. A-Ia^iileri^m conjiilit, cni 
 7',on addiwHS rem extranearyi nifi q'iod in ejus prctparatiofie 
 Jiipf?flfia rermvemus. Nam per cnni-^ et hi ea fimt omni4 
 Artinecejfaria. He that teacheth other'.v'fe, is a Sophi- 
 ftcr; and. only ufes the Baliances of Deceit. 
 
 Q.q XVI.Befide?, 
 
542 . Polygrafhicts. Lib. VII. 
 
 XVI. Befides, if every Philofophcr, in time of Bern- 
 hardt^s, made his Stone out of a fingular matter, no 
 knowledge could be had concerning it fo foon, and fo 
 eafily ; but only by this means, their ivords and deeds 
 agreeing, it produced a Knowledge and FriendOiip one 
 ^mong another ; and Avithout this it would have been as 
 a concealed Trcafure to this day. 
 
 XVII. But their agreeing and Harmonious Difcourfe, 
 in the Fundamentals of Truth, drew them together, that 
 they could judge, whether this or that, or the other Man, 
 ran the race of TTruth, or faw into the depth of the Miltery 
 they Ibiight after. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Of the time for ptrforming this Work. 
 
 I. T Aftly, and in the fixth place, of the time, which is 
 •^^ required for the preparation of this great Work, 
 we come now to Treat. Authors arc in feveral opinions, 
 fome fpeaking of eight, three, two and one Year,* thefe 
 lincqual judgments concerning the time, may make a 
 Man doubtful, and ready to err j yea, and after a due 
 pondering, to fall into Error. 
 
 II. But I hold it with Bernhardus and Sgndivoginsj that 
 our Stone, as my own great experience affures me, I fay 
 that it may very well be finillied in a Years time. 
 
 III. For in one Month the putrefadion is performed ; 
 m the fccond Month the Dillolution, Calcination and 
 sublimation, all which is but one ; in the third Month 
 appcareth in the Mafia, canda pavonis, and the Rainbow j 
 in the fourth Month the Agent and Patient j aiid the 
 white Colour alfo appears. 
 
 IV. This white Colour lafteth two Months ; and if 
 you do not keep the true and due degree of Fire, it hold- 
 tth yet longer. 
 
 V. After the ending of the whitenefs, nothing can be 
 amils in the Fire, yet fo long it murt be continued, till 
 the Medicine gettcth the true pUJqmm perfeElion , and is 
 
 of 
 
Chap. 21. Of the Philofof hick Work. 54$ 
 
 of a tranfparent, Ruby like Colour; which at laft th\~ 
 loweth infallibly. 
 
 VI. But why they differ fo much in the time, I think 
 the reafon thereof to be this, becaufe at the firfl in the 
 Solution, their degree of Fire Was too gentle, anl their 
 Work went flow unto blacknefs ; or dit that feme hai 
 invented to themfelves fuch a long time, and then" pio- 
 pofed matter could no fooner be coagulated. 
 
 VII. I alfo believe, that fometimes, many Years are 
 rtqyivctdiunlo Coagulation, 2ind.plufqHam perfetlion, of the 
 Spirit of Kiiwo/, Terra, Roris, Satis, &c. and no willied 
 efte6l foUoweth. 
 
 VIII. Thefe differing times doth not take away the 
 pofTibility of this great Work ; and the iliortcr time is 
 tiotto be flighted or rereded, as untrue or falfe. 
 
 IX. Laftly, none ought to imagine, as if this my Tin- 
 6lure at its firft beginning lliould tinge prefently One 
 Hundred Thoufand parts, and bring in great Riches ; no, 
 this cannot be done, becaufe it is yet in its Infancy', or 
 "the firft degree. 
 
 X. But it mufl be brought to fuch redundancy, fuper- 
 fiuity, or mighty fmitfulnefs, through the long continued 
 and manifold Imbibings. 
 
 XI. But if one hath gotten to a deep Ruhcio in this 
 Work, he may be fully allured, that his Labour will 
 •ftot go unrewarded; and that it ^vill not be in vain, or 
 without effed. 
 
 XII. This Tincture is fufficient in the Medicinal UfCj 
 and has no need of augmentation ; but it is eafie 10 ex- 
 traft the white fixed Salt out of the caldn'd Work ; and 
 iiiay be ufed to all Difeafes, to cure them, and rellore 
 the Body unto perfe6t Health. 
 
 XIII. And thus have we Hniilied this Difcourfe in few 
 and true Words, and Dedicated it to the Life of the fm- 
 cere and indefatigable Searchers out of iraili. 
 
 dq ^ CHAP. X}(it 
 
5 44 Polygraphias. Lib. VII. 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 
 Of a frofitable particular Work, 
 
 I. y^Aily Experience teftifics, that among many thou- 
 
 *~^ land Pruceifc, yea, among Cart Loads ot them, 
 the'c is not one which is true: by reafon whereof this 
 noble ArtisiTighted, defpifed, andfet at nought. 
 ' il. Andbecauleby t'lele many talfe ProcelTes, Man- 
 kiiid has been deluded, therefore it Avas alfo thought, 
 that ihcic was no fuch thing as the Philofophers Stone, or 
 'iniCtuK; and that the Univerlal TinClurc could never 
 be brought to perteclion, or to perform the Tranlmuta- 
 liisi of Metals. 
 
 HI. To which we Anfwer, That there is infallibly 
 fucii a ihing as the true Univerlal Ti:n6lure; and befides 
 tLic, that there are certain profitable infallible particu- 
 lar,-, which are pra6t cable without great difficulty. 
 
 IV. In the Operation of the whole Work, the matter 
 mull be found on the one part, as well as on tlie other j 
 file the Writin^^? of the Pluloiophers, w^ill be found no- 
 thing but fallhoods. 
 
 \^. But as the Phi lofophick Stone or Tin6lure hasits 
 peculiar and manifold requifites j ib alfo have the parti- 
 cul.:rsthe lame rcciuifites. 
 
 VI. Now, that you may avoid tlie falfc ProcefTes, and 
 have a fure foundatioii to bailcl upon, as to particulars, 
 lo as to make them profitable, and not fail neither in 
 beginning, continuation, nor end, I ihall lay down the 
 ioUowing Philojophick r'i.-riiy for a Rule, z/i^. 
 
 VII. To:i muji unite Sol and Lnnn fo firmly and ahjolutelyy 
 that thy may he for ever infeparable ;• If you know not hovv 
 to do this, you knownotliing truly in our Art. 
 
 VIII. Here lies the Root and Foundation, yea, the 
 profound Milkry of all particulars, the which my expe- 
 rience has demohlTiatcd to me in manifold and various 
 ways. 
 
 IX. Undcrftand tli-^ thing rightly, and lay hold of 
 Diligence, lb will the Vail oi' Ignorance be taken from 
 
 your 
 
Chap. 22. Of the Philofnphers Stone, 545 
 
 your Eyes ; for all Proceiles which center not in this f^s- 
 rity are vain and falfe. 
 
 X. Now, that you may have no caufe tocomp!:iin of 
 the brevity of the afore didnrsd Pkilofophick F'crl'y^ heir 
 fart-her what the Ancients and Great Men in this Art 
 fay. . 
 
 XI. You muft fo join or mi^ Gili and Silver, aiat 
 they may, (notwithttanding any means svhatlbever; be 
 infeparable. This is Ipokcn of a particular Work. 
 
 XII. What think you, if I fliould fo perfectly unite 
 thefe two Bodies, what would this Union cojiie to? I 
 give the Searcher after Truth leave to judge. 
 
 XIII. But truly I tell thee, that this united Sol and 
 Lnna^ thus perfectly done, can ne -er be feparated, no: 
 neither by Aqua Forns, the QHari, O.mem^ nor And^ 
 monj. 
 
 XIV. And when they are thus united, it is a very 
 great and profitable particular: for here Lum^ by the 
 virtue and power of ^'y/, is totally fixed, graduated, and 
 made ponderous. 
 
 XV. This is the particular which the Ancients (learn- 
 ed in this Art) bid you to underltmd ; that you may be 
 able to proceed on, and to purfuc, to the finilliing of the 
 great Work. 
 
 XVI. Here Lnna, rides on a Chariot of four Wheels, 
 like Sol^ viz. Color, Fixity, A/LilLhVny and Pondcr-fi:y : 
 Here llie borrows Six Meafures of the Sun, and as a 
 Queen, wears the Kings Crown: here the Frigiiity is 
 conquered by the Calidity ; and the White Woman be- 
 comes the Red Man. 
 
 XVII. And here the tfue Filiids Hcrmetis may fee, that 
 the Doctrine of the true Philofophers differs much, from 
 the jugling Procelfes of Deceivers, for that our p.-^rnc:fUr.r 
 have thdr Ojf~jpring from the Root of the tnie UrAverfal 
 SnbieEi. ^ ^ 
 
 XVIII. And it is tlie greatefl of Truths, that the Con- 
 junBion and Union of the Boiies of Sul a>iJ lyma is -he real 
 beginning of our triie Medicine-, Elixir or 'Tihclure. 
 
 XIX. Among the vulgar Proceff-S, there is nothing 
 but fillhooi arid deceit, wherein the Lnna is iitvtv ii«e i, 
 but is wanting of pond'^rofiiiy, and black; h iviug i)'2-;n 
 oulr walhed^ and hxe I (as they ciU itj wit'i J/iic, a:id 
 
 0-4 3 . gV.iduaLs^l, 
 
^/\6 Poiy^yaphicef. Lib. Vir. 
 
 or.idi'atcd, with the Sulphurs of Af an zn^VenHs, and 
 made p Miderous with Sainrn. 
 
 XX. O tnoliiliners! O blindnefs of Mind! can com- 
 ino;i S;ilr be the Soap of the Philofophers ? can the Vo- 
 latile Sulphurs of A'fars a.nd f^enHs be ever made the Red 
 f.xe-^ Ef^gle, or the Ked fixed Sulphur of Sol i 
 
 XXI. Can common Satnrn^ ox its f^itramy ever become 
 «iur ponderous Ruby Star, or our fixed Salamander ever 
 livipp in the Fire? 
 
 XXII. Have not the Philofophers faid, that whatfo- 
 cver is to be meliorated, or made better, it muft be thro* 
 a better thing than it felf, and not thro' a Avorfe, as is 
 daily 'ih'!'. nradice of Sophifters, 
 
 XXriI. How do they Rand with their fixing Pouders, 
 and their ingrefs Pouder?, melting like Butter in the Sun ? 
 whfiiT: t'icy want the true knowledge, how to diflinguiili 
 bcnvcen that %vhich is fixed and that which is not fixed. 
 
 •XXIV. If they underrtood in wliat degree of fixation 
 S'.il and Lma are graduated, and of what Quality their 
 Specie's 2irCy in Melting, Calcining, DifTolving, Cement- 
 ing, Graduating, and the like ; they would be alliamed 
 to i;o about the making of Gold with Drofs or Turds. 
 V XKV. Bui as to the clearing up of thefe particular 
 Work?, I refer vou to my former Difcourfe de preparatione 
 Lapidisjifrom Chap. 1 2. to this prefent Chapter ; from 
 w\hence you muii get the Kev, which muft open, and 
 Jet vou iiito the iecret Miftery even of thefe particulars. 
 
 XX\''I. Ey which you will kno\v how to take forne- 
 thing out of the United Bodies of Sol and Luna, -^nd bow 
 to r-diice the fame: if you proceed other wife, you will 
 foolijlhly fall into Error, which may lead you {'tu pro- 
 bable) into the Paths of too late Repentance. 
 
 XXVn. He that has once truly obtained this -^ug- 
 f^?c-zhi^;, is aifured that he has met with the '/nfallible 
 Verily, with an incorruptible Tincture, yea,, with an 
 inii:,!te Treafurej and needs the help of no otfier In- 
 
 XXyjTI. This Augmentation in the particular and 
 iTTKveri'al way is to be kept in the profundity of thePhi- 
 Jofop'-.ick Silence; and Avhen Difccxirlcd of, to be done 
 on?y in Parables, Kiddles, and Simil!tudf^*s, and as it 
 ^v^ic at a diH;ince, tiiat Profane and Vik Pcrlons may 
 L». ktpL" horn the knowledge thereof. 
 
 XXIX. The 
 
Cha.p.22. Of the Philofophers Stone, 547 
 
 XXIX. The PoiTeflbr of this Treafure has no occafion 
 to run to Kings, Princes, Lords, Nobles, or Great Men : 
 they that do To, have none oF the Secret, but defire to 
 try ConcluGons at other Mens Charges. 
 
 XXX. The true PoiTelTor fecks not after fiich Friend- 
 fliips, or Earthly Glories \ he is content with his Modi- 
 cum, or Little, and has enough, even the whole World 
 in his Philofophers Egg, which he can carry about him 
 wherefoever he goes. 
 
 XXXL Befides, he may confider, that between a 
 Prince and himfelf, no endeared, no faithful or conftant 
 Friendiliip is to be found : and fo lays Smdivogim : as 
 often (fays he) as I went about to communicate ar.y 
 thing to Princes and Lords, I always met with deceit 
 and vexation. 
 
 XXXIL But to the matter in hand : Endeavour mfely 
 to prepare the Philofophick SubjeSl ; keep the fame in a da^ 
 heaty in the Philofophick Marriage Bed ; and in patiencs 
 pojfefs your Soul, till the Conjummmon of the Work is accons- 
 pfijhed. 
 
 XXXin. Avoid all great Compoimds ; and think not that 
 you have obtained any Particular r/jo' /ro^ Luna; unhfsfhe 
 is meliorated thro' the Influence, Po>ver, Goodnefs and Sweet- 
 nefs of Sol. 
 
 XaXIV. Tis a meer deceit to fay, that there is no 
 Gold, but what was firft Silver; nor any Silver, but 
 what was firft Saturn, Jupiter or FcnHs : if this was not 
 true, then Aq. Regis would diifolve Silver as well as 
 Gold : and Aqua Fortis would diifolve Gold as well as 
 Silver, which we fee and know they will not. 
 
 XXXV. Forif fo, we need not look long after the 
 true Tin<fture ; for it would be a fmall matter to Digeil 
 the Oar's 0^ Lead, Tin, Copper and Silver, fo as to tranl- 
 mute them into a better Matter or Metal. 
 
 XXXVI. And you will find it to be a certain Truth, 
 that every Genrn has its particular Semen, or Seed, and can- 
 not he meliorated y unless it is done by the Acme, orfupcrfhiity 
 of the Fixity of Sol ard Luna. 
 
 XXXVII. But I grant, that the Original or Beginning 
 of Metals in the General, is a Vitriolic k,^Salt Water, rahtcrj 
 is impregnated by the Sulphur of every Genus, and then if 
 formed er tranfmuted into fuch a Aietal, according to the 
 
 kind of the Sulphur. 
 
 ^ ■ ^ Q^q 4 XXXVIII. Now 
 
54S Fchrrifhices. L*b. VIL 
 
 XXX^^TII. N«^w \i i::T rnc fhouM attempt to diflrlr; 
 the inicHcr Meral.- into their M. Water, two' tbc fiift 
 Water, aiJ then t^* !rppr^^:natc and fix it wkh tiic 5»/- 
 |»rar, 5>**fii, rr S«td et "^j/and I4Mj(, tiic Work would 
 ^' tfaatooMaiiy tfao'ncvtiibioog 
 
 L rcetbeendibeictif. 
 
 AlC!\ I A. A -. who b it, that u fo filJ'd with 
 
 Icariiinj: ani ''rH, and lis Spirit of Wii- 
 
 dr ir_, thii C3: Trf ITx*^ r' .Mr.jdi: witS 
 
 Out which, fiui -^ i ..^ r rebels, CDQld DCTCT bc accosT.- 
 plil>;ed? 
 
 XL. In conchirKm, be warned, and foiknr my Ai- 
 ricc which in thi* Diicourie 1 hi'-e s.ircn: Oblerre tbe 
 wrrJs of my Docrnre, and take it for a Maxim of Trath ; 
 T.:g: vizhm :ti ^tH'iutdi*» §f S9I jnU Lmu^ the RfydO^- 
 Jprut^ COM nivfr U ctxtfhed 0r trm^k ftnb. 
 
 CHAP. XXTII. 
 
 An A?? END I X, 
 
 Ccntxnirr Cer;j-/i X^t.-irJ Extirimentj. 
 
 I. ^O mh .-frr-- -.4/ f .rc. 
 
 a« it comes forth out ord-.e Chen, being very hot, arsi 
 as much as you pk^*? -•- •' -to a bolt bc2idof GLiis 
 (wiiixHit anj other what is io the Bccai it 
 
 ftit which preicT.:; 'nlly. Then fet it 
 
 in Digtrfli^n ma- tbe fpaoe of nyo 
 
 Mrntbs, and it wiji oc mnicd into a FibioiK FlcJh. 
 Tb:s being exalted to a higher pcriCi^icn by the Rules of 
 An, jTu TT-ay cafilr^ce bow great a Nooriihcr and Rc- 
 fferar vc Whent is,' and what an Excellent Mediane 
 xcav ht m^ic of it. 
 
 J I. T rt4i( in yir-iirid MJL^Wrif. 
 
 Take a Wine VciTel well Hoopt with Iron Kvp*, 
 and one end open, to whidi a dole Corcr mull be fiiitd 
 to nke on and oif at plealiire, let it in a warm piaa% 
 fill it full of fair VVaitr, to crery Gallon of wfaidi put 
 nro four^ of Mallago Raiions, fiift bmiTcd in a StociC- 
 
 MoTaT j 
 
Chap. 2 J. Cerum natural Experrmefttj, ^49 
 
 Mortar; and to every Twent}- Gallons of ^Vater a good 
 handrul ofCakVivc: corcr the Veffel dole, and keep 
 it warm with Cloths : let it itand four or five days to 
 work : then iee if the Raifons bs rilen upj and beat them 
 do^sm, and cover it again as before, beating them down 
 rs-ery fourth or fifth day for three or four Weeks : then 
 put a Tap in, four Inches above the bottom, and fee if 
 irtafts like Wine ; if not, let it ftand a while longer ; 
 after which draw it off into another Wine Veflel, and 
 to e\-ery Twenty Gallons put a Pint or Quart of the beft 
 Spirit of Wine fas you would have it in flrength) two nevv 
 laid Eggs, and a Quart or better of Allicant well beat- 
 en together. Let it fiand in a Cellar as other Wine till 
 it is fine, and fit to be Drunk. 
 
 III. To Tr.alt an Artificial Clxret. 
 
 Take Water iix Gallons : choice Cider two Gallons : 
 bsft Mallago Railons braifed eight Pounds : mi^ and let 
 them ftand all in a warm place fourteen davs, ftirring 
 them well once every day. Then preis out the Pvailbns, 
 and put the Liquor into the Veifel again, to which add 
 Tuice of Rafp-Berries a Quart: juice of Black Cherries 
 a Pint: juice of Black Berries a Pint and a half: co^tr 
 this Liquor with Bread iprcad thick with ftrons, Muftard, 
 the Muftard fide being downwards, and fo let it work 
 by the Fire three or four davs ; airer which Tun it u-y^ 
 let it ftand a Week, and Bottle it up, fo will it become 
 a very brisk and pleafant Dnnk. 
 
 IV. To n-^ie <?» Artipcisl A-falmfej. 
 
 Take eight Gallons of Spring Water : Englifh Honey 
 two Gallons : make them Boil over a gentle Fire for an 
 Hour : take it onF, and wdien it is cold, put it into a Rund- 
 Jet, iianging in the \^effel a Bag of Spices, a.nd let it in 
 the Cellar for half a year, at the end of which yoa may 
 Drink it. 
 
 V. Tfl male Rj/p-hmj Win:. 
 
 Take Canary a Gallon : Rafp-berries 2 Gallons: mix 
 and d-geft 24 hours : ikain them out, and add Raifons 
 of the Sun ftoned three Pounds : digeft agam tour or five 
 daTS, lometimes Itirring them together: then pour Ou 
 the cleareft, and put it up into Bottles, which put into 
 a crld pLice : if it be no: fweet enough you may dulcify 
 it with Sugar. 
 
 VI. An^hir ficy to do :Lf [umf. 
 
 Take 
 
5 5P rofygraphues. Lib. VIT. 
 
 Take ;aice of R.-iljjbcrries, Bottle it up clofe, and fet 
 ^t in .1 Cellar, and it will become clear, and keep all the 
 year long, and be very fragrant, a few Spoonfuls of this 
 put into a Pint of Wine Iweetned with Sugar, will give 
 It a full taile of the Berry : two or tliree Ounces of the Sy- 
 rup of the juice will do the fame. 
 
 VII. To pHrify Oyl Olive, that it may he eaten with plea- 
 fare. 
 
 Take fair Water 2 Quarts, Oil Olive a Pint: mix, 
 and iTiake them well together for a Quarter of an Hour 
 in a Glafsj then feparate the Water from the Oil with 
 a fcparating Funnel. Do this four or five times, or more, 
 as you lee occafion, till the Oil becomes very pure: and 
 the \:i[\ time walh it with Rofe Water, then hang in the 
 n\\<M\ of the Oil a courfe Bag full of bruifed Nutmegs, 
 Cloves, and Cinnamon, fo will you ^ive it an excellent 
 tafte. 
 
 VIII. To pHrify Butter, ani male it of amoji fvpeet tafte. 
 Melt Butter with a (low Fire in a well glazed Earthen 
 
 Vcfrcl,beingalmoftfilledwithrairWater,workingthemwell 
 together,and when it is cold take away theCurds and the 
 Whey at the bottom. Do it again the fccond time ; and 
 if you fo pleafe, the third time in Rofe Water, always 
 working them very well together. The Butter thus clari- 
 fied will be as fweet in ta{ite,as the Marrow of any Beart, 
 and keep a longtime, by reafon of the great impurity 
 which is removed by this means j the Drols being near a 
 Quarter of the whole. 
 
 IX. To make Sage, Par/ley or Pennyroyal Batter. 
 When the Butter is newly made, and well wrought 
 
 from its Water, Milk, and WheyilTi part ; mix there- 
 with a little Oil of Sage or Parfle^-, fo much, till the 
 Butter is ftrong enough in talte to your liking, and then 
 temper them well together: this will excule you from 
 Eating the Plants therewith: and if you do this with the 
 arorefai.l clarified Butter, it will be far better. 
 
 X. To purify and refine Sugar. 
 
 In a (Irong Lixivium of Calx Vive diilolve as much 
 courfe Sugar as it will bear, adding to every Quart of 
 Licjuor, 2" Whites of Eggs, beaten into Glair, iiir them 
 well together, and make them Boil a little, taking off 
 the Skum, as long asany will arife : then pais all through 
 a creat Woollen Cloth Bag, fo the Focccs Aviil remain 
 
 behind 
 
Chap. 2 J. CerUm nAturd Experime»fs. 5 5 1 
 
 behind in the Bag, then Boil the Liquor again fo long 
 till being dropt upon a cold Plate, being cold, it is as 
 hard as Salt : this done, put it out into Pots or Moulds 
 for that purpofe, having a hole in the narrower end 
 thereof, which muft be ftopt for one Night, afterwards 
 being opened, the MolofTes or Treacle will drop forth: 
 then cover the ends of the Pots with Potters Clay, and 
 as that Clay finks down, by reafon of the finking of the 
 Sugar, fill them up with more Clay, doing thus, till the 
 Sugar will fink no more. Laftly, take it out, and be' 
 ing hard and dry, bind it up in Papers. 
 
 XI. To male a VegetaUe grow more glorious than its 
 Species. 
 
 Reduce any Vegetable into it^ 3 firft Principles, and 
 then join them together again, being well purified : put 
 the lame into a Rich Earth, and you fliall have it pro- 
 duce a Vegetable far more Glorious, than any of its 
 Species. 
 
 XII. To male a Plant grow in tvco or three Hours. 
 Take Allies of Mofs, which moiflen with the juice of 
 
 an old Dunghill, (being preffed out and flrained) then 
 dry them a little, and moiften them as before ; do this 
 four or five times : put this Mixture, not being very dry, 
 nor very moift, into an Earthen Veflel, and in it let 
 Seeds of Letticc, Purflain, or ParQey ^ (for they will 
 grow fooner than other Seeds) being firft impregnated 
 with the EiTence of a Vegetable of its own Species : (fome 
 fay the juice of the fame Plant) but efpecially the Spirit 
 will do inftead of the EfTence) till they begin to fpsout 
 forth ; which then put into the faid Earth, with that end 
 upwards which Springs. Put the Veffel into a gentle 
 heat, and when it begins to dry, moifha it with the 
 faid juice of Dung: Thus may you have a Sallet while 
 Supper is making ready. 
 
 XIII. To reduce a whole Vegetable into a Liquor, rphich 
 piay be called the EJfence thereof. 
 
 Take the whole Plant with Flowers and Roots, bruife 
 them in a Mortar, put all into a large Glafs Veffel, (but 
 a Wooden one is better) fo that two of three parts may 
 be empty; cover it exceeding clofe, and let it ftand in 
 Putrefaction in a moderate heat for a year, and it vv'ill 
 all be turned into a Water. 
 
 XIV. To 
 
^52 VoljgYAphices. Lib. VII. 
 
 XIV. To mxle the Lively Form and Idea of any Plant 
 Appear in a Glafs. 
 
 Take the former Water (at Seft. 13.) DHlill it in a 
 good Glafs in Allien, and there will come forth a Water 
 and Oil, and in the upper part of the Vcffel a Volatile 
 Salt: theOilfeparate and keep by it felf: with the Wa- 
 ter diffolve the Volatile Salt, and purify it, by Filtering 
 and Coagulating. This purified Salt imbibe with the 
 laid Oil, until it will imbibe no more ; Divert them well 
 together for a Month in a Veflel Hermetically Sealed ; 
 lo will you have a mott fubtil Effence, which being held 
 over a gentle heat, or the Flame of a Candle, by which 
 nieans it may be made hot, you will fee the fine Sub- 
 fttnce, (which is like impalpable Afhes or Salt) fend 
 torth froju the bottom of the Glaf^, the manifeft Form 
 and Idea of the Vegetable, vegetating and growing by 
 Jirtle and little, and putting on fo fully the form of Stalks, 
 Leaves and Flowers, in luch perfect and natural wife, 
 that one would believe the lame to be real 5 when as in 
 truth it is the Spiritual Idea, arifing with the Spiritual 
 JFilfence of the Plant ; this, were it joined with its proper 
 Farth, would take to it ieli-' a more folid Body. Now as 
 foon as the Vellcl orGlals is removed from the Fire, this 
 Idea or Repreientation vanilhes, becoming a Chaos and 
 confufcd Matter, returning to its Sediment, Irom whence 
 it arole. 
 
 XV. Another vpay to male the E[fence of a Plant. 
 
 Put the Herbs, Flowers, Seeds, Spices, &c. into re6li- 
 fied Spirit of Wine ; extradl a very itrong and deep Tin- 
 cture, upon which put Itrong Oil of Salt, and Digeft in 
 Balne'), till an Oil Iwim above, which feparate ; or elfe 
 draw o^* the Spirit of Wine in Balneo, and the Oil or 
 tlfence will remain at bottom : but before the Spirit of 
 VVine is abltraded, the Oil or EfTence will be Blood red. 
 
 XVI. Another way to make the true Ejfence, or rather 
 jQjfin'elJence. 
 
 Make the Water, Oil, and Volatile Salt, as before is 
 Taught ; and from the Faeces extract the fixed Salt, which 
 purify according to Art ; which Salt reiolve in a Cellar 
 upon a Marble Stone to an Oil, which is that vve call per 
 DeliqHiHvi ; filter it and evaporate, till the Salt is white 
 as Sno.v, with thiie S.ilts inibiDe as much of the Oil as 
 you CTU in.i'v'e it rec/u-e ; then digelt till the Oil wdl not 
 
 Ic pa rate 
 
Chap. 2 J . Ceruift mtwd Experiments, 555 
 
 feparate from the Salt, butbecome a fixed Pouder, melt- 
 ing with an eafie heat. 
 
 XVII .To niah the form of a FirrTree appear inCelophonia. 
 
 DilHll Turpentine in a Retort gradatim: when all is 
 DifHlled oft", keep the Retort Hill in a reafonable heat, 
 that what humidity is (Hll remaining may be evaporated, 
 and it become dry. Take it then off from the Fire, and 
 hold your hand to the bottom of the Retort, and the 
 Turpentine which is dr^^ed, (called alfo Colophonia or 
 Rofin) will crack afunder in feveral places, and in thole 
 Cracks or Chaps, you fliall fee the perfed figure of Firr 
 Trees, which will there continue many Months. 
 
 XVIII. To make Harts Horn feemingly^ groiv in a Glafs. 
 Take Harts Horn broken into fmall bits, and put them 
 
 into a Glafs Retort to be Didilled, and you ("hall fee the 
 Glafs to be feemingly full of Horns ; which will continue 
 there fo long, till the Volatile Salt be come over. 
 
 XIX. An Excellent Invention to mah a pleafant Fire. 
 Take of the befl: New Cattle Coals 3 parts beaten 
 
 fmall: Loam one part: mix them well together into a 
 Mafs with Water, of which make Balls, and dry them 
 very well. This Fire is durable, fweet, and not offen- 
 five, by reafon of the Smoak or Cinders, as other Coal 
 Fires are, but Burns as well in a Chamber as Charcoal 
 it felf . And this Fire may ferve alio for Diftillation. 
 
 XX. To male a durable and lafiingOil. 
 
 I . Take unflaked Lime, Bay-Salt, Oil Olive, of each 
 a Uke quantity ; mix them well together, and Diftill in 
 Sand : Cohobate the Oil upon the fame quantity of freih 
 Lime and Salt : this do 4 times. 2. The Oil by this 
 means will be clear, and impregnated with what Sale 
 was Volatile in the Lime and Salt. 3. If it be feven 
 times Diih lied, it will be a? pure, odoriferous and fubtil, 
 as many Diftilled Oils of Vegetables. 4. This Oilwhiltt 
 a DiiiiUing, has a mod fragrant Smell, and of a molt 
 durable quality, which durability comes from the Saline 
 Impregnation: befides which, it is good againlt any in- 
 veterate Ach or Pain in the Limbs, or other parts. 5. A 
 Lamp made with this Oil, will burn fix or leven times 
 as long, as that which is made with other Oil; alfo si; 
 burns very fweet. 6. You ought to be very caur!,ou3 ia 
 making of it, qt eUe your Glalfes r/ili quickly break. 7. 
 ■ . ' You 
 
554 Polygraphices, Lib. VII. 
 
 You muft take very ftrong Lime, fuch as your Dyers 
 ufe, and call Cank. 
 
 XXI. To make a Candle that (hall lajl long. 
 
 Mix with your Tallow unflaked Lime in Pouder: Or 
 makeiyour Candles of Caftle Soap : fiich Candles as thefe 
 •will be admirable for Lamp Furnaces. Now it is the 
 Salt in the Lime and Soap, that preferves the Tallow 
 from burning out lb faft, as otherwife it would. 
 
 XXIL To make the DijHlled Oil out of any Herb, Seedy 
 Flower, or Paper, in a moment, without a Furnace. 
 
 You muft have a long Pipe made of Tin, or Tobacco- 
 Pipe Clay, wdth a hole in it as big as a fmall Wall nut, 
 three or four Liches from one end of it, into which you 
 muft put the matter you would have the Oil of: fet it on 
 Fire with a Candle or a Coal : then put one end of the 
 Pipe into a Bafon of fair Water, and blow at the other 
 end, io will the Smoak come into the Water, and the 
 Oil AviU fwim upon it, which you may feparate with a 
 Funnel. 
 
 XXIIL To reduce Rofm into Turpentine again. 
 
 Take Oil of Turpentine and the Colophonia, or Rofin 
 thereof, in Pouder: mix thefe together, and Digeft 
 them , and you lliall have Turpentine of the fame con- 
 fiftency it was before, but of a more fiery and fubtil Na- 
 ture : Pills made hereof are more excellent for opening 
 Obftrudtions of the Breft, Lungs, Kidneys, Bowels, &c. 
 than thofe that are made of raw Turpentine. 
 
 XXIV. To Write or Engrave upon an Egg, Pibble, 
 Flint, &c. 
 
 Write what you pleafe \vith Wax or Greafe upon an 
 Egg, Pibble, Flinty &'c. tlien put it into the itrongeft 
 Spirit of Vinegar, or Oil of Salt, letting it lie two ot 
 three days ; and you Oiall fee every place about the Let- 
 ters or Writing, eaten or confumed away ; but the place 
 where the Wax or Greafe was not at all touched. 
 
 XXV. To make a Ponder, which being wftted Jhall be 
 hndled. 
 
 I . Take a Loadftone, pouder it, and put it into a 
 ftrong Crucible, cover it all over with a Pouder made 
 of Calx Vive and Colophonia, of each a like quantity ; 
 put alfo fome of this Pouder under it : when the Cruci- 
 ble is full, cover it, and lute the clofures with Potters 
 Earth, put it into a Furnace, and there let it Boil; after 
 
 take 
 
Chap. 2 5 . Cert am natural Experiments, 55^ 
 
 take it out, and put the matter into another Crucible, 
 and fet it in a Furnace alfo ; this do till it becomes a 
 very white and dry Calx. 2. Take of this Calx one part : 
 Sal Niter well purified four parts : and as much Cam- 
 phire, Sulphur Vive, Oil of Turpentine and Tartar: 
 Grind what is to be Ground to a fubtil Pouder, and 
 put all into a Glafs Veffel, with as much well re(9afied 
 Spirit of Wine, as will cover them two inches orer. 3. 
 Stop the VelTel clofe up, and fet it in Horfe Duna thrcd 
 Months, fo Avill all the matter become an uniform Parte : 
 Evaporate all the Humidity, untilthe whole Mafs be- 
 comes a very dry Stone ; which take out, pouder it, and 
 keep it very dry. 4. If you take a little of this Pouder, 
 and fpit upon it, or pour fome Water thereon, it will 
 take Fire prefently ; fo that you may light a NIarch, or 
 any fuch thing by it. 
 
 XXVI. To make a Room feem to he on Fire. 
 
 Take redified Spirit of Wine, and diffolve Camphire 
 therein ; evaporate this tn. a very clofe Chamber, where 
 no Air can get in ; and he that firft enters the Chamber 
 with a lighted Candle, will be amazed ; for the Chamber 
 will feem to be fiill of Fire, and very fubtil, but of little 
 continuance. This done in a clofe Cupboard or Prefs, 
 will be much more perfpicuous and vifible. 
 
 XXVII. To make the four Elements appear in a Glafs. 
 Take Jet in fine Pouder an Ounce and half; Oleum 
 
 Jartari per deHqmnm, (made without addition of any 
 Water) two Ounces, coloured with a light Green, with 
 Verdigrife : add thereto Spirit of Wine, tinged with a 
 light Blew, with Indico, two Ounces: of the bert rectifi- 
 ed Spirit of Turpentine, tinged of a light Red with Mad- 
 der, two Ounces : mix all thefe in a Glafs, and iTiake 
 them together, and you lliall fee the heavy black Jet fall 
 to the bottom, and reprefent the Earth : next the Oil of 
 Tartar made green falls, reprefenting the Water : Upon 
 that fwims the Blew Spirit of Wine, reprefenting the 
 Air or Sky : And uppermoft of all will fwim the fubtil, 
 red Oil of Turpentine, reprefenting the Element of Fire. 
 It is rtrange to fee ho-^v after lliaking all thefe together, 
 they will be dilHndlly feparated one from another. If it 
 be well done, (as it is eaiie to do) it is an Admirable and 
 Glorious Sight. 
 
 XXVIII. To reprefm the Ms WM in a Glaj). 
 
 Take 
 
55^ Volygrx^h'ues. Lib. VII. 
 
 Take the finefl Sal-Niter, what you picafe; Tin, ha'f 
 fomuch: mix them well together, and Calcine them 
 Hermetically : then put them into a Retort, to which 
 adjoin a Glafs Receiver, with Leaves of Gold, put into 
 the bottom thereof ; lute them well together j put Fire to 
 the Retort, until Vapours arifc that \s\\\ cleave to the 
 Gold : augment the Fire till no more Fumes afcend ; 
 then take away the Receiver ; clofe it Hermetically, and 
 make a Lamp Fire under it j and you will fee reprefent- 
 cd in it, the Sun, Moon, Stars, Fountains, Trees, Herbs, 
 Plants, Flowers, Fruits, and indeed, even all things, 
 after a very wonderful manner. 
 
 XXIX. To male a perpetu.-tl motion in a GLifs. 
 
 Take Qiiickfilver, Tin, ^na fcven Ounces : pure Sub- 
 limate fourteen Ounces: dilTolve in a Cellar upon a 
 Marble, (which in four days will become like Oil Olive) 
 mix and dilVdl in Sand, and there will Sublime a dry 
 Subftance : put the Water w^hich Diftills oft" back upon 
 the Earth, in the bottom of the Stillatory, and dilTolve 
 what you can : Filter it, and Diuill it again, and this 
 do four or five times; then will that Earth be Co fubtil, 
 that being put into a Vial, the fubtil Atoms thereof will 
 move up and down for ever : but you mufl: be llire to 
 keep the Glafs clofe ftopt, and in a dry place. 
 XXX.To ^ake Regains of Antimony) for AntimonialCHps. 
 
 Take Antimony in Poudcr, Niter, of each a Pound: 
 crude Tartar in fine ponder two Pounds: mix, put them 
 into a Crucible, cover the Crucible, and melt, fo wall 
 the Regains fall to the bottom, which pour into a brafs 
 Mortar fmearcd wath Oil. Or tkns. Take Antimony 
 poudered two Pounds: crude Tartar in pouder four 
 Pounds : melt as before. This Regulpts you may caft in- 
 to Cups, Piclures, Medals, or w^hat Figures you pleale : 
 Thele infufed in tAvo or three Ounces of Wine in an 
 Earthen glazed VeiTel, or in a Glafs, in a gentle. heat 
 all Night, gives you a Liquor in the morning which will 
 Vomit : Dofc from two Drams, to two Ounces and a 
 half; you may iweeten it if you picafe with a Uttle 
 as white Suaar.Thefc Cups or Puitures will lait tor ever, 
 and be as effectual after athoufandtimes Infufionat firft. 
 
 Explicit Liher Septimiis. 
 
 ^ POLY- 
 
5^7 
 
 ?0 LT GRAF H ICES 
 
 Liber Octavus. 
 
 Faber's Arcanum's. 
 
 Containing the 112 Chymical Arcana 
 of Peter John Faher^ a uioft Eminent 
 and Learned Phyfician. 
 
 Tranflated out of Latin into Englifh^ 
 By William Salmon, M, D. 
 
 C II A P. I. 
 
 The highefl Tincture of So\y fixed^ /or Luna, 
 
 \.f^ ■ ''^ A K E of Gold and Venus, of each equal 
 parts, melt them together in a ihong Cru- 
 cible, then beat them into thin Platcsj 
 and cement them together with a part of 
 the following Cement. 
 II. TaJce Antimony and Cinnabar A. ^ij. Lapis H^- 
 matitis, common Vitriol calcined red, common Salt 
 prepared, A. 5;. Bole Armoniack ^y?. German Azure 
 Stone ^. reduce all into a fine PouJer, which Ikew 
 upon the aforefaid Plates (in a ftrong Crucible) Stratum 
 Jnper Stratumi 
 
 T 
 
 R t III. Cemeat 
 
558 Polyoraphices. Lib. VIII. 
 
 III. Cement them togetlier with a Fire of Revcrbera- 
 tionfor twelve hours ; then take out the Cmcible, and 
 melt the Metal within^t : how much of the Venus is 
 carried away in Fumes, you may know by weighing it. 
 . IV. Repeat the Work again with new Venus extra- 
 ^ed from the Mine, by melting them, beating them in- 
 to Plates, and cementing again with the aforefaid Pou- 
 der for other twelve hours, with a reverberatory Fire. 
 
 V. Continue the Repetition fortAvelvc times, always 
 adding new Venus ; lo lliali you have at laft a moft ru- 
 bicund Gold, one part of wliich being put upon twelve 
 parts of fixed Luna, ("hall tranfmute it into mod fine 
 Sol 'j and by this is Gold multiplied. 
 
 C H A P. II. 
 
 7 he mitnntr of fixing Luna. 
 
 I.T^Akc of the beft Luna calcined %vith Mercury, as 
 -*■' much as you picaie, reduce it into fine Pouder, 
 
 and mix it with an equal quantity of the {a) Cinnabar 
 
 of Antimony. 
 
 XL Sublime, and in e^-ery Sublimation, renew the 
 
 Cinnabar for three times: what remains in the bottom 
 
 after the third Sublimation, difTolvc in this following 
 
 Aqua fortis. .... 
 
 ITT. Take Niter and Vitriol A. ft?.- Antimony and 
 
 VerdigriicA.liij. mix them, and make an Aqua fortis 
 
 accordiiig to Art. 
 
 IV. in the prefcribcd A.F. diflblve the above prepared 
 Luiii-. ; haltening the Diflblution in warm Allies for 
 thre* d:n's : after tiie third day draw off the Aqua fortis 
 byDittiliation. , • 
 
 V. That which remains in the lx)ttom, reduce into a 
 b^dy with Borax, fo is it fixed and tinged, and after a 
 wonderful manner Avill embrace the above prepared 
 Tir.cb.ire of Gold. 
 
 VI. And this is the way by the help of which the 
 Tind^ure of Venus is drawn out of the body of Venus, 
 
 and 
 
Chsip* jj. 7 k fixed Tiff Bare for Venus. 5 59 
 
 and is tranfmittec^ njred into the body of Sol, and out 
 of Sol again into fixed Luna. 
 
 (i) Slime fftppofe, that for want thereof ^ yon mayHjeHnn- 
 gmm Cinnabar. 
 
 firrr^ 
 
 C H A P. m. 
 
 ihe White fixedlm6iurt for Venus* 
 
 1,^ \A Ercury fublimatc ft/- or as much as youpleafe ; 
 *^^ of the moft pure and limpid Oil of Tartar 113;. 
 Borax tfeii. eiilTolve the Borax in diftiiled Vinegar a fuf- 
 iicieiit quantity ; filtrate the Diflblution, which being 
 clear and limpid, join with the former Oil of Tartar; 
 then mix with them the Mercury I'ubiimate in fine Pou- 
 der, and let it be diffolvedin warmAlhes. 
 
 II. Upon that which w^ill not be diflbived, put new 
 Oil of Tartar conjoined as before, with the Diifolutioii 
 of Borax. 
 
 III. Then diftil the DiiTolution in Allies,- and upon 
 what remains in the bottom, put neAv Oil of Tartar aiui 
 Borax as before, till the Mercury lliall become in the 
 bottom of the Alembick like Wax, flowing with a very 
 gentle heat, and congealing with cold. 
 
 IV. Projeitone part of this Oil of Mercury, upon teii 
 parts of melted Venus, and it will be all good Silver: 
 And fo the fixed Oil of Mercury tinges Venus both with* 
 in and without, that the Tindure remains for ever. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 The fixed Oil of Mercury. 
 
 I.Bj"V4 "Ercury fublimate, and Sal Armoniack Ana, as 
 
 *^^ much as you plealej iiiblijne them both toge- 
 
 tlier four times^ or till there lliall remain in the bottom 
 
 R r 2 of 
 
560 Polygraphfces, Lib. VIII. 
 
 of the fublimatory, a great quantity of fiifible Mercury, 
 and in the neck of the Retort the Sal Armoniack. 
 
 II. Break the Retort, reduce the Mercury into Pou- 
 dcr, which dilVohx in (a) diltilled Vinegar : filtrate the 
 Solution, and diftil the Vinegar : nhat remains in the 
 bottomdiffolve again in trefh diltilled Vinegar. 
 
 III. At length dilTolve it in common dimlled Water, 
 which Solution do io often, till the Mercury is converted 
 into a pure Oil, which is able to diirolveall things 3 but 
 moit powerfully Gold and Silver. 
 
 IV. And Gold and Silver, dilTolved in this Oil of 
 Merciu'V, and coded or digdkd till they are converted 
 into a fixed Oil, or fixed Salt, will make a wonderful 
 Projedion upon Venus, yea upon crude Mercury. 
 
 V. The realm is, becauic that this Oil or Salt being 
 (h) fixed, converts the lame Met.ils into fine Silver, 
 
 VI. If this Salt be made Volatile, and then fixed a- 
 gain, it will be a more powcrtlil Arcanum. 
 
 (a) There is intended Spirit ofFine^ar. (b) The Oil or 
 Salt is not fixed ^ hit is fo called in refpccl of the end or inten- 
 tion rehich is to fix : for no fixed thing can fix a velatile 
 thin^j for fixity dcnjonilrates nothing but deaanejs, and no 
 dead thing can invade another s Property : this is apparent to 
 be intended, by the very Propofiiion follomng theje vfords. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 7 be Red CinjtdAr of Antimony. 
 
 l.'T'Ake of the beft Antimony and Mercury fublimate, 
 -*- Ana : difUl them by a Retort: and to the matter 
 
 remaining in the Retort, add new Mercury fub4imate, 
 
 und diHil again a? before. 
 
 11. At lai2,th, force the matter with a IhongFire, fo 
 
 Vv'ill the Cinnabar of Antimony be l'.iblimcd in the neck 
 
 of the Retort ; which for three Jays is to be continually 
 
 in the Retort, till it is very red. 
 
 in. Bv.t the Liquor which dilhls from the Mercury 
 
 fublimate and Antimony, highly rcdtify by Diflillations, 
 
 till it emits no tkces. IV. To 
 
Chap. 6. JfixedTmSfunupoHYenus. ^6i 
 
 IV. To this put Mercury feven times fublimed, and, 
 by various and many reiterated DilHllations it will be 
 fixed ; which you will the more eafily obtain, if you add 
 the former (a) defcribed Oil conjoined with Luna, and 
 fix them together by reiterated Cohobations. 
 
 V. Thus have you the Oil of Mercury and Antimony, 
 which is admirable to tranlmutc Jupiter into Luna, by 
 putting one part upon ten parts of melted Jupiter. 
 
 (a) That Oil is mended at /(f^.4. chap.^. aforegoing. 
 
 C H A P. VI. 
 
 j^ fixed Tw^ure to project /^/fo/f Venus, 
 
 L'TpAke fixed Oil of Tartar, (as we iliall hereafter teach) 
 
 -*• Sulphur Vive, A. ^ij. mix them, and make a p.ill^e, 
 which put into a Retort, and diftil, fo have you a retl 
 Liquor. 
 
 IL This Liquorput with crude Mercury into a Glals 
 Retort, draw it off again by Diltillation, and the Mercu- 
 ry will be fixed at bottom of the Retort. 
 
 IIL You may project with this fixed Mercury upon 
 Venus fufcd in a Crucible (one part upon five parts of 
 Venus) but it will not be able to make a Tranfiriutad- 
 on, except that the fixed Tartar be conjomed with Luna 
 in a fixed Oil. 
 
 IV. The reaibn is, becaufe there is no fixed Tincltir? 
 can be made to tinge,^ without the perfect Metal is conr 
 verted into an Oil or fixed Salt, from whence is made a 
 fixed Oil by a conltant^nd through boiling. 
 
 CHAP. VIL 
 
 The fixing of OH of JarUr. 
 
 I.'nrAke Tartar calcined to whir' nefs ; dilTolve it m 
 •*• common Water, filler and' Hn^kc it very pure. 
 
 R '^ 3 IL Then 
 
 / 
 
^6i Polj^rapffuefM-'-V^ Lib. VJlL 
 
 ' Hi, Then in a Glafs Urinal, over a gentle heat in 
 Sand, evaporate the Humidity, till a skin or luch like 
 appears to cover it on the top. 
 
 III. That fign appearing, put in a little fair comtnon 
 Water ; and boil it again, till a skin appears on the fu- 
 pcrficies or top ofit. 
 
 IV. Put again to it a little common fair Water, and 
 boil it again, till you fee a skin again appear to cover it. 
 
 V. Put again more Water, and bail it again, till a 
 skin covers it again : This do io many times and fo long 
 till no more skin nill appear to cover it, for then it is 
 fixed, and will remain or endure fufion ia the Fire. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 To fix the Oil of Sal Armomack, 
 
 I.nnAke Sal Armoniack ftj- Qiiick-linie ^viij. common 
 -■■ Water ^fs. mix and incorporate them together : 
 put them hito a ftrong Crucible, which cover and lute 
 very well, putting it in a cementing Fire for four hours, 
 then taking it out. 
 
 J I. Dilfolve the matter in common warm Water, and 
 make it boil for an hour, then filter, and make the Li- 
 quor very clear. 
 
 III. l"his Liquor evaporate, and congeal the Salt, 
 which then mix together with the White of an Egg. 
 
 IV. Put this into a moilt place to diffolve into Oil, 
 moitglorioufly fixed : to ndiich conjoin an equal quan- 
 tity of Mcrcuiy feven times iiiblimcd, by cohobating it 
 upon the matter which will not fublime, till they are 
 both brought into a fixed Oil. 
 
 V. Oi\t part oUhis Oil put upon inelted Venus ttixi;. 
 tinges it admirably white, which whitencls will remain 
 for ever. 
 
 VI. But if yo4 conjoin l\vj^ Oil with Oleum Luna?, it 
 Vi-iU be much moTr noble ard perfcCl, 
 
 '0.,. 
 
 ^ C H A P. 
 
Gfcap. 9. OfRU linBure from Vitriol, -fj^ j 
 
 CHAP. IX. v; 
 
 A wonderful Red TinSlure esCtraBed frifm : 
 Vitriol. ' 
 
 r'npAke Roman Vitriol calcined to Rednefs, diiTolre it 
 ■*- in diltilled Vinegar with filtrate, and make very 
 cfcar, evaporate, deficcate, and congelate it and reduce 
 it into a very ftibtil Ponder. 
 
 II. Imbue it till it grows moift with Water of Sal Ar- 
 moniack, extraded by Dittillation, and dry it with a 
 gentle Fire. 
 
 III. Imbibe it again with Water of Sal Armoniack, 
 drying it as before; this do fo many times, till it has 
 drunk up fo much of the Watter Oi Sal Armoniack, as 
 the Vitriol it felf did wqigh. , ■ 
 
 IV. Put the matter lo imbibed in a large Glafs Ma- 
 trcfs wellrtopped, which phice in a hot Bath for hftccn 
 days, or in Horle Dung, which keeps more the equahty 
 of the heat. 
 
 V. Then take the Vitriol out of the Matrefs, and put 
 it into a well luted Retort, from which dilHlwitha gen- 
 tie Fire, to drinefs, or fo long till no more will come 
 forth. 
 
 _ VI. After augment the force of the Fire gradually, 
 till the Spirit comes forth, and continue it in the lame 
 degree, till all the Spirits are come over. 
 
 VII. Let the Fire be yet augmented, till the Retort 
 grows red and is perfc6tly hoi:, fo will the Vitriol be 
 rubified. 
 
 VIII. That you fliall join with the matter found fub- 
 limed in the neck of the Retort, by beating them toge- 
 ther: which mix with their own Water contained in 
 the Recipient, h^ imbibmg, beating anddryi'^g lo long 
 till all the Water is infufed, and imbibed into the laid 
 Vitriol. 
 
 IX. And theSublimation isto be reiterated, joining 
 the volatile matter with the fixed ; fo will there be a mat- 
 ter fixed, and very red as Blood. 
 
 X. This you r.uii^ reduce into Potider; put it into a 
 Ih'ong Glais Phial, which dole well; bury it in a coid 
 
 R r 4 aiid 
 
5^4 Foij'graphhes. Lib. VIIL 
 
 and moiit place for fifteen days or more, till it is difTol- 
 vcd into a moll red Water, which filter and make very 
 clear. 
 
 XI. Proje6l this upon Mercury fevcn times fijblimed, 
 fo will it be rubified, and converted into a red Oil. 
 
 XII. This Oil conjoin with an equal quantity of the 
 Oil of Gold, which you lliall fix together in a Retort, by 
 abflradling the Humidity with a gentle Fire, fo have 
 5'oua perfect Medicine. 
 
 XIII. One part of this Medicine being put upon a 
 thoufand parts of crude Mercury, warmed in a Cruci- 
 ble ; or upon a thoufand parts of Luna, or of any other 
 Jmperfe6l Metal, it will convert them into the molt pure 
 iGold. ' 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 7o make the aforejaid Oil of Gold, 
 
 I-'TPAke of Sol as much as you pleafe, diffolve it in 
 -■" Royal Aqua fortjs wherein Sal Armoniack or com- 
 jnon Salt is diffolved. 
 
 II. Keep warm the DifToiution fi")r fifteen days, then 
 abflradl the A. F. by DifHllation, cohobating the diflil- 
 Jed Water many times upon fhc matter remaining in the 
 tottom of the Stillatory. 
 
 III. Renew^ the A. F. three times, till the Sol remains 
 converted in the bottom of the VeiTel into a red Oil. 
 
 IV. Diffolve a quantity of this Oil in Aqua Ardent! 
 defiegmated, and let them be conjoined. 
 
 V. After\vards abllradl the Aqua Ardens or Spii'it of 
 Wine, and the Oil of Sol will remain in the bottom cf 
 the VeHel. 
 
 VI. This Oil conjoin with the aforefaid (^) fiiblima- 
 ted Mercury, fo liave you indeed a perfect Medicine. 
 
 (a) At jcB. JO. mi li^ of cbap. p. iif.reping. 
 
 C H A P. 
 
Chap. 1 1 . Ihe inerufeofGoUy &c. 51^5 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 To mike an increafecf Gold and Silver. 
 
 L'TpAke of the bed foliated Sol ^j. of the beft Mercury 
 -*• 5111;. mix them together, and make an Amal- 
 gama, 
 
 II. Then tak? of common Salt decripitated, as mucJi 
 in weight as is all your Amalgama, which mix togethec 
 by beating. 
 
 III. Put them into a Glafs Retort in Afhes, and dilHI 
 with a ver}^ fhong Fire, fo will the Mercury afcend, and 
 be feparated from the Gold, wliich will remain in the 
 bottom of the VeiTel. 
 
 IV. The Gold wafh with common fair Water lb. long 
 till it has no tali of the Salt. 
 
 V. Then take it out and melt it alone, and you iliall 
 find your ounce of Gold to be encreafed a whole drachm, 
 viz,, for your §viij. you will have ^ix. 
 
 VI. This Gold, if you cement with the Cement de- 
 scribed in (^) ourfirl-t Arcanum, and then again amal- 
 gamate it with the former Mercury, you lliall multiply 
 the Gold more and more, even till all (h) the Mercury is 
 tranlinuted into Gold. 
 
 VII. And by many times cementing the Gold, and 
 amalgamating it with Mercur^^ and mixing it with de- 
 cripitated Salt, as is afore laid in this Arcanum, you 
 >vill have a very high and large Augmentation, 
 
 (a) See chap, i . fe^. 2, (b) Till a great part of it is 
 tranfmnted. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 A fxed Impure for Venus. 
 
 I.T^Ake filings of Venus ftj. of the beft Mercury 
 
 -■■ wallied loij. beat'them with Vitriol in a Marble 
 
 Mortar, till tlicy are am.iigam.ated together. II, 
 
556 PoI^^SHm^:\v\v lib.vnr. 
 
 II. ThisAmalgamabcat, and by many Lotions make 
 it purely white, to whichratil Sil Ar^ioniack i^j. white 
 Arfenick fvj. white Tartar $;. common Salt decripita- 
 ted ij. , ^_ 
 
 "111." Btat all to^^htr, am imbibe the Ponder with 
 diftilled Vinegar, till the mafs becomes of the body and 
 thicknefs of Honey. • 
 
 IV. Put it into a Retort, and diftil to drynefs, or as 
 much as you can make come over; and what iublimes, 
 put upon the Faeces, and mix then* by beating or 
 griudm^. 
 
 V. This Miirture imbibe with new diftilled Vinegar 
 (a) fo long till nothing will afccnd, but all remains fix- 
 ed in the bottom. 
 
 VI. This fixed matter beat, and mix it with the 
 Whites of Eggs, dry it with a gentle heat, and put it in- 
 to a Pot (not of Glafs or glazed) with a fit Cover well 
 luted to it, and calcine it in a Itrong Fire, tor one whole 
 day. 
 
 Vn. Then diflblve the matter in (i) Mineral diflilled 
 Vinegar, filtrate and make it very clear ; then evaporate 
 the Vinegar by Diftillation to drynels. 
 
 VIII. Diilolve it again, filter and clarify, which four 
 times repeat, till your fixed matter remains in the bot- 
 tom of the Alcmbick, like running Oil. 
 
 IX. One part of this, conjoined and melted with as 
 much of the bcrt Luna, is lufticient to be put upon thirty 
 parts of purging Copper. 
 
 X. And ifthe matter be oftentimes di/Tolved in Mine- 
 ral diltilled Vinegar, and as often coagulated and dil- 
 lolved again, at length (me part will be enough to caJt 
 upon an hundred parts of purified Copper. 
 
 (a) VijiiHing again to dryncfs^ mi imbibing and dillil- 
 ling. (b) Thi-s Aiin:rd J^incgar ought to be extrMed with 
 Niter, or common Salt, for then done it makes the Solutions 
 and Coa2,HUitions. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
CKap. 'i j* The Purgdth» is/ Venus.' i^6j 
 
 . '' 'ill ■ ! \>r.':: .. ■ •'.; / • 
 
 ^^^•''"'CM'A^P. XIII. - 
 The Purgation ofVeniisfor the former TinSiarei 
 
 I.'^Ake an hundred Whites of Eggs, beat them toge- 
 •^ ther with a Stick, till they are conrerted into'a 
 Glair or Water. 
 
 II. In this Water put hot {d) Eggflhels to the quantity 
 of ibj. crude Tartar tbi. put them into a Glafc VefTel, 
 ftop it clofe, and digeft it in warm Horfe Dung for eight 
 days ; then diftil a Water tiierefrom by a Retort. 
 
 III. In this Water quench fufed and melted Copper 
 three or four times ; fo will it be prepared and purged to 
 receive the former Tinfture, 
 
 (a) The word the Author ufes is Calens, hut in whatfenfe 
 is fomewhat dijjichh to be uhderfiood ; if the thing he intends, 
 be only drynejs, douhtlefs they only ou^ht to he made hot or 
 warm : hnt if Incinerationy they ought to be made red hot, 
 $r calcined. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 7o coKgtd or harden Mercury. 
 
 1,*"^ Ake of Mercury thus pjrepared as much as you pleafe. 
 
 -*- Let the Mercury bou in the Juice of Limons for 
 fix hours; then boil it again for fix hours in the Juice of 
 Bears Breech ,• and then for other fix liours in common 
 Oil and Vinegar mixt together in equal quantity. 
 
 II. The Mercury thus prepared, putintoa ftrongGlafs 
 Matrefs well luted wi:h this following Lute. 
 
 Ill- R Calx viva well beaten, Tartar well beaten, 
 and common Salt A. q.s. {a) makcaPalie with Whites 
 ol" Eggs, ofvshich make Lute; and with which let the 
 Matreis, wherein is the prepared Mercury, be luted ac- 
 cording to Art. 
 
 IV. Let 
 
55f -^i Toljrgraphices. La>.VIII. 
 
 IV. Let tlic Matrefs have a very narrow mouth, which 
 clofc very -.veil with a Qafs>Stopplc, and the aforefaid 
 Lute, (y) ' _ ' ' . 
 
 V, TJiyi put it into a gentle Fire in Afhes for three 
 hours, afterwards incrcale the Fire, and continue the 
 iamc degree of heat for another day. 
 
 , VL This dene, break the Glafs, and you (hall find 
 the Mercury tranfmutcd into good I.una. 
 
 (a) Teu may fee the way of making fever al other good 
 Lutes fit for this Purpofe in onr Pharmacopoeia Londinenfis 
 lib, 6. cap. 5. fe^. 3, 5, 10. (b) If the neck he narrow e- 
 nought yoH may give it the Hermetick Lme atfett. 14. of the 
 aforecited place. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 Pf^ith th Regulus ef Antimony to makt Gold, 
 
 I.TAke Regulus of pure Antimony, fine Gold and Sil- 
 -■■ vcr, of each equal parts, melt and make them run 
 
 in a Ciiicible, fo liave you a friable or brittle matter 
 
 like Glafs. 
 IL Beat and ponder it, and make an Amalgama 
 
 with ^iij. thereof with the Mercury of Antimony ^ix. 
 
 which Thirt up in a Matrefs well cloicd. 
 
 in. Put it upon a gentle Fire for a Month ; but m 
 
 fuch a Fire, as in a Month i]Jay inlpiifate it, and make 
 
 it grow black. 
 
 IV. In the fecond Montli increafc the Fire, or bury 
 the Matreis again more deeply in y\ flics ; but lo incrc-Mfc 
 the Fire, or bury it lonuich the more deeply, as that the 
 matter may grow up into a mineral Tree. 
 
 V. Contiime this degree for a Month ; at length for 
 eight days augment the Fire, till the matter is melted. 
 
 "VI. This matter amalgamate again n-ith new com- 
 mon Mercury well walLcd ; and boil it again tor three 
 Months, as before, augmenting the Fire. 
 
 VII. Thus have you the matter of the Projection, one 
 part of which being put upon ten parts of Luna, tranl- 
 mutes it into fine Cold. VIII. Tiiis 
 
Chap. i6* For the makhg of SoL 5^9 
 
 VIII. This matter, if it be throughly and perfectly 
 depurated by Sublimation, and then fixed fo as to be a 
 Pouder, fufible like Wax or Butter, you have rfie Poun- 
 der of Projeilion to be put upon all Metals, one part up- 
 on a thoufand of any impure MetaL 
 
 IX. And if moreover this matter be yet diilolved in 
 mineral dilHlled Vinegar, and then coagulated, it adds 
 much more to the perfection of the Wor^.. 
 
 X. And if it be often diifolved in common Water di- 
 ftilled and coagulated, fo tliat the matter be made (a) 
 fwect, it works perfedlly," and cui'cs all Difeafes, both 
 in Mankind and Metals. . ,.,• 
 
 XI. Thefc Solutions being: tfcty often^tcrated or re- 
 peated with fair common Water, it will be converted 
 into a fweet red Oil. ' ." ^ ': : 
 
 (a) T^at is meant frv;et, a^ being freed, ftwn the Salts 9r 
 corrojive Acidity of the Spirits of the mineral yinegar. 
 
 .. 'h-j. hn . ^'>v^'V f :':.". '1 
 
 ■Ijl:' i\ t; ... ', 
 
 For the makhg of Sol. . jr igr/iD- 
 
 .'- ■ ' '^'.-i.'i':. .- . . 
 
 L'TpAke Niter, Verdigrife, Sulphur vive, Roman Vi- 
 -*- triol, A. ihfs. SaF Armoniack ^iv. Citinabar ^ij. 
 reduce them into a fine Pouder and mix them. 
 
 II. Put them into a luted Retort, and diftil therefrom 
 an Aqua Regis, obferving the degrees of Fire. 
 
 III. In thisA.R. diffolveof the beft Sol 5;. then in a- 
 nother Matrefs, dillolve a part of the beft Mercury well 
 wallied |iv. - 
 
 IV. Conjoin the Diffolutions, and with a gentle Fire 
 feparate the Aqua Regis, cohobating (the Water drawn 
 off) thrice, upon the matter remaining in the Retort. 
 
 V. And put common Water often diftilled (when the 
 aforefaid A-R- is feparated) upon the Farces, which dif- 
 folve, filter and clarify ; this often iterate, feparating 
 the A.R. which at laft will all come forth. 
 
 VI. Then put upon the matter the firft Water which 
 is fweet, that at length it may Iweeten the matter re- 
 
 trainiiig 
 
I.BQ 
 
 570 ' Polygraphices. Lib. VIII. 
 
 maining ih the bottom oFthe Stiliatory, and convert it 
 to a fweet and fixedOil. 
 
 VII. One part of this Oil put upon tyirenty parts of 
 (a) Saturn or Luna, -will convert it mto Gold. 
 
 (a) Tott wuj} prepare yoitr Saturn, or yoa wll do nothing. 
 
 • W rcHuu 
 'rv!-o:jq;iH A P. XVII. 
 
 ^r the whitening of Copper. 
 
 'Ommon Salt calcined ^fs. Quicklime 5^5. Arfe* 
 nick calcined 7^]. Tartar calcined 51s. fixed Salt 
 Armoniack, Borax A. 51/. Mercury fublimed («) fevcn 
 times as mi«:h, mix, and make of all a Pouder. 
 
 II. Calcine it (/O for an hour, then diflblve it in (c) 
 diftillcd. Vinegar, filter and evaporate the Diifolution. 
 
 III. Calcine it again a little, and diirolve again in 
 dilHlled Vinegar-,; ^is W-ork fo often repeat, till yoLi 
 have a Salt fufible as Wax; aiid an incombulhble Oil. 
 
 IV. One parf of this put upon p x. of (r^) purged Cop- 
 per aforementioned, coi>f ert$ it. into goal Silver; tliis is 
 the belt whitening of Copper. 
 
 (a) Iffippofe there is intended 3xiv. or xlvfs. (b) Ton muii 
 calcine it very gently, lejl yon lofe your Lahopir. (c) Where- 
 foever yon meet, vith difiilled Vinegar, always underhand the 
 Spirit thereof, of- that from rt^hich rhe fiegm is abjiratied, (d) 
 Jhe rffty'is .taught in chap^ 1:^, aforegoing. 
 
 C HAP. XVIII. 
 
 The Cemtntdti(/n of Sol. 
 
 I.'T'Ake Koman Vitriol ^iV: Sal Armoi-.iack 5!. Vcrdi- 
 
 A gnfe 5Is. Croctii A'fartis, Niter, A.fi. mix and 
 
 make a Pouder, which lubliiv.e tUi it will lublime no 
 
 mor«. II- Then 
 
Chap. 1 9* Oil of Sulphur Vive. ^ 7 f 
 
 II. Then diflblve it in putrified Urine, filter, clarify 
 and evaporate the Solution -, that which remains at bot- 
 tom, is the fecret Cement. 
 
 III. Take (a) Luna and Gold of each 5;- nielt them 
 together, and let the Mafs be beateh into {b) thin leaves, 
 which cement with its equal, vy eight of the foregoing 
 Pouder, and the whole Mafs^ will be tranfmuted ihtd 
 
 fine Gold. 
 
 ■''■■■''. 't 
 
 (a) ToH muj} take cupelUted or fine Luna, (li)-' ff/tppofe 
 vtry fnj all filings, made with a very fine File, may dk Jhh 
 Tvork nearly as Tfell.' ■ ^ '■- -- 
 
 ; . I ! V r. 
 
 * C H A Fv; xtx. 
 
 Qfhf Sulphur iMveu 
 
 I.npAke of Tartar calcined ifcj. ^ilptiur Vive Itfs. beat 
 •*■ them into Pouder^ and put it into a Retort, clo- 
 fing it well, which keep fo for two days, without D^ 
 filiation. ; - - — • 
 
 II. That time being paft, diiiil by Aflies with a ftron^ 
 Fire, fo liiall you have a v,ronderi"ul Oil, which certain^ 
 ly cures the Failing-ficknefs, if about gut.x. be taken 
 for fome days together in a Morning^faffing. (a) 
 
 III. So alio Mercury prepared, as we have before de- 
 clared in Chap. XIV". cures the Falling-fickneis, beiftg 
 given (b) in gr. x. 
 
 IV. And if it be caft upon throughly melted Venus, 
 it perfe6lly whitens it. 
 
 (a, b) In a convenient VehiculHm, as Ejfence tf Peony,) 
 Win s of black Cherrie^ or fome fticb like Mqf^or. 
 
 CHAP 
 
57« Folj/gtdphkes, Lib. VIIL 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 A It fixture for Sol. 
 
 I.'T'Ake of Sol 5;. of Luna ^fs. of the bert Mercury 
 J- wafhed 3ii. make an Amalgama, which put into 
 
 a Glafsbody well clofed. 
 
 II. Set it in a gentle hc^t for twenty or thirty days, till 
 
 the Amal^ama is converted into a red Pouder. 
 
 lit. Join this with new Mercury, and boil (or digeft) 
 
 again till it is fixed, which work repeat tour times, and 
 
 diflblve it in the following Aqua fortis. 
 
 IV. Take Roman Vitriol, Filings of Mars, Sulphur 
 vive, Niter, common Salt, A.itfs. froip all wliich pre- 
 pare a Water by f>i(^11atit)n, which will be very red. 
 
 V. In this Water difTolve the aforefaid matter, pre- 
 pared from Gold, Silver ai^d Quick-filver. 
 
 VI. Then abftrad the Aqua fortis, and cohobate of- 
 tentimestijl the Water comes forth white. 
 
 Vli. Dilfolve again in mercurial Vinegar diftillcd; 
 filter, clarify and abftracl the Vinegar. . 
 
 VIIT. After that difTolve the matter again in common. 
 Water diflilled ; then filter, clarify and aWlrad the Wa- 
 ter, till the matter remains in the bottom of the VclTtl, 
 converted into a runningOil, or fulible Salt. 
 
 IX. Cattp j. of this Oil-OrSalt upon crude Mercury 
 made pretty hot p lOp. and the whole will be converted 
 ill to good Gold. , . 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 V\ N- 
 
 7 he Extra^ton of Mercury from Antimmj. 
 
 LHTAke Antimony 5viii. pouder it finely, and put it 
 -■- into Capacious Matrcfs, upon which put the belt 
 Aqua Vitae ifcii. Salt of Tartar \\\. Sal Armoniack Jn;. 
 mix them well together in tb.e iiime Matrcfsj {top it up 
 clofc, and putrefy in warm Horle Dunj for Hlteen days. 
 
 II. ThcR 
 
Chap. i2. JfJ Elixir of the Golden Work, 5 7 J 
 
 • II. Then take it forth, and circulate it (being yet dole 
 llopt) eight da ySv . 
 
 III. After boyl It for tvvt) da^'s, 2nd you will find the 
 Mercury in the bottom running, ^nd Volatile : Out of 
 every Eight Pound of Antiinony, you will have running 
 Volatile'' Mercury |v. 
 
 IV. This is the beft Mercury for the performance of the 
 Preparation of that Arcanum at Chan, 15. aforfiooing. 
 
 CHAP. xxii. 
 
 An Elixir of the Golden Work, 
 
 I. CUblimc Meiairv' feven times with common Salt pre- 
 *^ pared, and at lart fublime the fame five or Icven 
 times with Sal ArmoniacJc, till the Mercury remain at 
 the bottom fufible as Wax.- 
 
 II. This Mercury dilfolve in mineral diftilled Vine- 
 gar, filter the Solution, and coagulate, by diiHf ling from 
 thence the Vinegar. 
 
 Ill,: Diffolve the Mercury in the Vinegar, wfiich re- 
 peat three or four times till the Mercurv will melt as 
 
 IV. This Mercury thus prepared, difTolve in pure di- 
 ftilled Rain Water, then coagulate, which do many 
 times 5 and at length diffoive it in the humidity of the 
 Air. 
 
 V. To this clear and limpid Solution add the Cals of 
 Sol (prepared with Mercury and common Salt) which 
 diffoive alone into a mo{t rubicund Liquor. 
 
 VI. This liquor by many Solutions and Coagulati- 
 ons, convert into a fixed Oyl and a pure Elixir. 
 
 VII. Being caiUipon a thouland parrs of fine Luna, 
 'x% will tranimute it into the purert and belt Goli. 
 
 S s CHAP. 
 
574 Pofygraphices, Lib. VIII. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Of Drmirjg forth the Virgins Milk, 
 
 1. 'TpAke Mercury feven times fublimed iti. Diffolve it 
 J- in t[iis following Water. 
 
 II. Take May Dew lix times Diftilled, common Aqua 
 Fortis Icvcn times DilHUed A. ifci. mix them together, 
 and Di(HU by a Retort two or three times, io have you 
 a very Oiarp Vinegar. 
 
 III. In this yt-TLi muft difToIve your aforclaid feven 
 times lublimed Mercury, v:\-\\z\\ Dilfolution putrify for 
 :i Month in •warm Horie-dung. 
 
 IV. Tlicn Didill, and always conjoyn the Water 
 which Dill:ills<>vcr, with that part oL the Mercury whicll 
 ren"uiins at ti^c bottom, till all the Mercury alcends by 
 Diftiilation, wiiich wiji quickly be done it'the Artift be 
 a wife learcher out ot Nature. 
 
 V. For the Water of May Dew muft be augmented 
 whtn the dry Wat«r afcends from the Mercury remain- 
 ing in the bottom. 
 
 .VI. Wliich Mercury is {o often to be dilTolved in the 
 Diliillcd Walter of May \)t\\\ till at length it all af- 
 cends Acid. 
 
 VII. This IS that which is called Lie Virgineum, or 
 Virgins Milk, and the moll iliarp Diltilled Vinegar (/?) 
 iittcd ror the Dilfolution of all MeLilick Bodies, convert- 
 jn2, them into a fufihle Salt, and a fixed IncombuRible 
 Oyl. 
 
 VIII.- By the help hereof all Our Arcanums are moft 
 perfectly compkated, without it nothing true can be 
 found j from whence it comes to pals that this Vinegar 
 is iilld in the making and perfecting oi every Secret. 
 
 "*' 'GO 755^ ^ 'V^. '^ffrcitrial finegar mintionei Chap* 20, 
 St'ct, y'.' ^^foregow^. 
 
 G H A p. 
 
Chap. 34* lor Whit ning of Confer, 575 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 For the Whitening of Coffer, 
 
 I. "TpAke of tlie beft Liihai as much as you pleafe, melt 
 ^ it in a Crucible, and calt upon it an equal quaa- 
 tit}' of the whitcft Arlenick broken into little bits. 
 • II. Caft it into a Reed, or in the form of an Ingot^. 
 and it will be brittle as Cjlafs. ; 
 
 III. Then beat it to Pouder, and mix it with an e>i 
 qual quantity of Mercury leven times Sublimed : Sub- 
 lime again till the Mcrctiry is fixed with the Luna in the 
 bottom of the Velfel. 
 
 IV. If this be not quickly done, conjoyn your Luna 
 fo prepared with fufible Mercury fo made {d) with Sal* 
 Armoniack as is above laid^ fo will your matter be per- 
 fectly fixed, 
 
 V. This matter di lib Ive incur (i^) Virgins Milk, which 
 Solutions being fevcral times repeated, it will be convert-' 
 ed into a fufible Salt, and a fixed Oyl. 
 
 VI. This is to be fweetned from its Acrimony, by Di- 
 jftilled Water iterated with many Cohobations j lo will 
 it be a moit perfe6tOyl. 
 
 VII. One part of it put upon a thoufand part? of 
 melted Copper, it gives it an Eternal Tindure^, whicb 
 will always remain, yea, in the Fire it felf, 
 
 (a) y^ccording as is taught in Chap^ 4. and Chap. 22. (/') 
 Xhe making of ivhich yon may fee at large Chap. 23 > afore- 
 going. 
 
 C H ^ P. XXV. 
 
 A Secret from Antimony and Mercury » 
 
 I. 
 
 •T^Ake Mercury feven times Sublimed with Vitriol 
 -■- and common Salt, (the Vitriol calcined to reJ- 
 nefs, being changed every time, and the common Salt 
 diminiihed, being dilTolved, defecated, and made pure) 
 
 S s 2 tjjac 
 
57Q ^olygrapbices. Lib.Vin. 
 
 that thereby, vi^. by the Sublimation thereof, the Mer- 
 cury may extraftthe Tinttureof the Vitriol and Salt. 
 
 II. Take of this Mercury feven tinies Sublimed ftj. Mi- 
 neral Antimony, or Antimony as it comes from the 
 Mine, as much j reduce all into aiine Pouder, and mix 
 them together. 
 
 III. i?ut them into a Retort, and digcft in wann Horfc 
 Dufig for 25 days, or a month ; Avhich done, 
 
 IV. Place the Retort in a Furnace in Allies, and Di- 
 ftill vvith a very gentle Fire tor 12 Hours, then increafe 
 the Fire, till a Red Oyl comes j after which put out the 
 Fire, atid cool the Veffels. 
 
 V. Take out the Oyl, and put it into a Retort clofe 
 Hopped, which place in a very good heat for 8 days. 
 
 VI. After that Diltill in Balneo Marix Ilx times, and 
 a feventh time in hot Allies, till it is ver^- pure and clear, 
 limpid, and lliining as Gold. 
 
 VII. In this Liauor diflblve Gold calcined with Mer- 
 cury and Salt, or let it be converted into a fixed Oyl, 
 and then conjoin it with its equal weight of Gold, boyl- 
 ing them together till they are fixed. 
 
 VIII. Or Diftiri the Volatile part, which cohobate fo 
 often upon the fixed remaining in the bottom of the Vel- 
 fei, till the whole is fixed. 
 
 IX. One part of this fixed Oyl tinges an hundred parts 
 of Luna, and turns it into pure Gold. 
 
 X. Alio Leaves of Silver heat red hot, and extingiiilh- 
 cd in tliis Oyl, arc tranfmuted into fine Gold. 
 
 XI. And it fixes Crude Mercury into Gold, if fomc 
 few drops thereof be projected upon it in a hot Cru- 
 cible (rf). 
 
 XII. Its Vcrtues and Power are multiplied if it be Oi"- 
 ten difToived (in the laid Water extracted from Antimo- 
 ny and Mercury feven times Sublimed) repeating the 
 DilH nations and Putrcfaitions. 
 
 (a) /;/ this cafe it vfill he much the letter rvay fir(t to fix 
 the AincHry by the fn>nes of Lead, in fitch fort that it may 
 endure 7?sclting the bitter, led it ctherTfife Jhould all fly array, 
 before the operation is pirformed. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
QHAP. XXVI. 
 
 j4 TinSiftre of Silver upon Cofper. 
 
 I. npAke of Luna (Amalgamated with Mercery) Sii/- 
 •*• •of 5 extraded with Calx Vive and Tartar from 
 Mercury Sublimate, ^iij. 
 
 II. Let the Mercury be well waOied with Salt and 
 Vinegar, to which add Salt often purged till it flow like 
 Wax, which is done by many Solutions, Calcinations^ 
 and Fuflons. 
 
 III. Mix all in a Fixatoiie Veffel, which for a Month 
 put upon warm Allies, till the whole is fixed. 
 
 lY. To this add Mercury Sublimate (fixed by many 
 Sublimations with Sal Armoniack) thrice the weight, 
 and fix again ; bojd it for a Month, and it will be per- 
 fcdtly fixed. 
 
 V. This you mufl: repeat four times, or till the Water 
 flows like Wax without fume. 
 
 VI. Then proie6l of this matter p. j. upon Venus p. x. 
 and it will be tinged perfedlly into Silver. 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 A Tw5fure of Gold upon Luna, 
 
 I. 'T'Ake of fine Luna |ij. of fine Sol ^j. melt them toge- 
 "* ther, and bring them into thin Leaves, which 
 diffolve in Aqua fortis. 
 
 II. To thisDilTolution add Mercury feven times Sub- 
 limed ^iij. then Diliill to drynefs. 
 
 III. To this matter aid fixed Mercury and fluid or fu- 
 iible, prepared with Ssi\ Armoniack, as above laid; 
 which again diffolve, and abfl:ra6t the Aqua fortis to 
 drynefs, which repeat by thrice cohobating, till the mat- 
 ter flows tike Wax without tlime. 
 
 IV. Projecl: oF this p. j. upon fine Luna p. x. and it 
 will be good Gold. 
 
 S s 3 CHAP. 
 
578 PolygrnLfhices. Lib.VIII 
 
 c H ^ P. xxvin. 
 
 jtftother lincfufe of Gold upon Lum, 
 
 J. *TrAke of fine Sol cilcincd Avith Mcrcuty, Sulpluir'^ 
 J- and common Salt pi'eparcd and well purified j 
 wafh the Calx in warm Water, till it is fwcet, and 
 freed from all manner of. faltnefs. 
 
 IL Take of this Calx |ij. Mercury fcvcn times Subli- 
 med, and reduced again into running Mercury |ij. mix 
 them well. 
 
 III. Then ptit them into a Fixatory or ftrong Matrefs 
 ivell ilopt, which place in an Athanor for a Month, 
 that the matter may be congealed. 
 
 IV. Diflblvc again with the fame Mercury prepared 
 in the fime manner as aforefaid, by beating and mix- 
 ing till the matter will flow as Wax. 
 
 V. Jhen diflblve it in our Virgins Milk, or our Diftil- 
 led Vinegar, which wc have declared above, in the 
 Three and Twentieth Chapter. 
 
 VI. The Diflblution filter till it if cleat, which is ma- 
 ny times to be dryed, and to be diffolved a?ain by many 
 Cohobations; which is lb often to be iterated till tlie 
 matter will flow ns Wax, without any fume. 
 
 VII. Then edulcorate it with Spirit of May Devv,that 
 it may lofe all its Acritude j fohave you a true Elixir, 
 to pioicd upon Luna. 
 
 VIII. One part hereof put upon a thoufand parts of 
 melted Luna, will tranfmute it into the belt and fiwtik 
 Gold, which will be more pure, if with patience it is 
 •elaborated. It is a long Preparation. 
 
 CHAP. XXIX. 
 
 A Tincfiire of Sulphur and Mars for Luni* 
 
 1. ""pAke Scales of Iron (plenty of whichyou may find 
 ; -■* in a Smith? Shop) being beaten off from the red 
 kot Iron, tbj. yellow Sulphur as much. 
 : , . 11. Muc 
 
Chap. 29. ATirtSinre forlMm, 579 
 
 II. Mix and burn them together, atkling new Sulphur 
 ^j. or ii. for the fecond or third CombiilHon. 
 
 III. Being burnt, beat it, put it into a Retort, and 
 Diftillby Allies, obferving the degrees of Fire, lb have 
 you an Oyl of Sulphur in a large quantity ,• becaufe the 
 Sulphur of the Iron is adjoyned to tlie common Sulphur, 
 by which the humidity is augmented. 
 
 I v. The Diltillation being done, augment the Fire, 
 till the matter remaining in the bottom of the Retort is 
 red hot, and well calcined to Redncfs. 
 
 V. This matter thus Calcined Red, take, and put up- 
 on it its own Waterin aGlafs VeiTei, to which add Spi- 
 rit of Life {a) four times as much as there wasot the Oyl 
 or Hiarp Water, Diltilled from the Sulphur and Mars. 
 
 VI. Put thefe in warm Allies that they may boyl 
 gently, and extra(5t a Tincture by boylnig from the Cal- 
 cined matter. "• 
 
 VII. This Tin6lure decant by Inclination, and add 
 new Spirit of Life, putting them into a gentle heat to 
 digert till it is Coloured. 
 
 VIII. This Tindlure decant, and conjoyn it with the 
 former, which Work fo often repeat, till the Spirit of 
 Life or Mercury will be no longer tinged. 
 
 IX. Put thefe TincWesofthe Spirit of Li!e into a 
 Stilbitor}', and with a very gentle Fu'c fcpirate the Sp:rit 
 from the Tindure, which will rciUciin in the bottom ot 
 the Veffel thick like Honey. 
 
 X. To this Tincture add of Mercury, f/'J here is meant 
 the Mercury of the Philofophers, well wa'licd an eiual 
 Puantity, mix them throughly, which digeft in a gentle 
 heat for one day, till the Mercury is fixed into a Red 
 Ponder. 
 
 XI. This RedPouJer dilfolve in our Virgins Milk, and 
 Cohobate often till it is converted into a Red Oyl fixed. 
 
 XII. This Oyl conioyn with an equ.il Qiiantity of 
 the Oyl of Gold, and digcfr in an equal and gentle heat 
 for a Month, and it will perfedly fix the Oyl of Mar?, 
 Sulphur and Mercury. 
 
 XIII. This being put one part upon mcl ted Luna an 
 hundred parts, gives a wonderful Tindure. 
 
 (a) There is meant ??;irier^l Spirit of Wine j fome think Spirit of 
 Aicrcttry ; vohich is. the thini>^ : others Spirit. ofQjicklime, bn: 
 they are deceived. 
 
 S s 4 C H A P. 
 
580 Potygraphices, Ub. VIII. 
 
 CHAP. XXX, 
 
 A rif95fure frtm Sulphur Vive, and Argent 
 Vive, upon Luna. 
 
 \. "T^Ake o? Salplmr l^ive^ or that which was never yet 
 -■- melted, but is as it was taken out of tlic Mine, 
 (for that has the better and greater Tinchirc.) 
 
 IT. Take of this Sulphur Ifcii. reduce it into Ponder, 
 and put it into a iirong capacious Glafs Urinal ; upon 
 wliich put Spirit of Wine perrei^ly Deflegmated, io much 
 as may cover it the breadth of five or fix Fingers. 
 
 III. Place it in warm Allies, that it may gently boy?, 
 taking off the Scum which arifes with a Spoon, and cart- 
 ing it away ; this boj/Iing continue for three Days and 
 Nishts, adding new Spirit of Wine as the former walks. 
 
 IV. At the end of three days the Sulphur will be fufi- 
 ble and incombufiiblc, which dry with a conti nued gen- 
 tle heat, till the Spirit of Wine is totally vanil>icd. 
 
 V. This fixed Sulphur mix well with its equal Quan- 
 tity of Mercury (well walhed) in a Glals Mortar with a 
 Glafs Velfcl, till they are throughly nungled. 
 
 yi. Then put it into a Ihong Glafs Matrcfs, with 
 Spirit of Wine covering it the breadth of foiu* Fingers, 
 ^vhicln fiop very clofe, and place in warm Horfe Dung 
 for fifteen days, and the Spirit of Wine will be defeca- 
 ted, the matter remaining dry. 
 
 VII. Take the Matrcfs from otit the Horfe Dung, and 
 place it in warm Alhes, fo will the matter turn black as 
 Pitch in a (c\\ days; andconthiuing this gentle heat, it 
 will pafs thiiough all Colours, till it comes to a pcrfedl 
 Rerlnefs, Wkc that of a Ruby. 
 
 " VIII, This matter fix in a Fixatory in an Athanor for 
 a Month, till its Odour or Smell is moft fragrant and 
 I'vveet, which you inav perceive by the aperture of the 
 Vclicl. • - ' , 
 
 IX. If this matter be difiolvcd. in our {a) Virgijis 
 Milk, and then a?aia in Spirit of May Dew, till it is 
 Iwect ; It win more perfectly make a Tranlmutation 
 into Gold. 
 
 X. One 
 
Chap. 31- 7o whifett Venus. ^^t 
 
 X. One part of it being' putupon a thoufand parts of 
 melted Luna, or upon any other Metal, it tranfmutes 
 them into the finett Gold. 
 
 XI. Yea, bein| put upon Crude Merairy (h) in a Iiot 
 Crucible, it tranimutes it into a Stone of the iapie Vir- 
 tue and Efficacy. 
 
 XII. One part of this Mercury being put upon an hun- 
 dred parts of Qiiickfilver, fixes it into goed Gold. 
 
 (a) The nay of mahng it is taught in Chap 23. aforegoing. 
 
 (b) Toy. may firfi fix it rvith the fumes of Lead. 
 
 CHAP. XXXL 
 
 A Preparation ofJrfenick to whiten Ventts^ 
 
 I. npAke Sal Niter, Roch Alum, common Salt prepa- 
 -■- red, A. %]. mix and make an Aqiua fortis accord- 
 ing to Art. 
 
 II. The Faeces beat well, and put to them Cryfialine 
 Arjhnck in fine Pouder ifcj. which Sublime once, 
 
 ill. Beat this Sublimate fmall, and difTolve it in the 
 aforefaid A. F. and clarifie the Solution. 
 
 IV. Diltill this diiioived-^r/fw/VZ- by a Retort, and 
 you will have in the bottom a dry matter, which in a 
 nioiit place will relblve into Oyl. 
 
 V. To this Oyl add the Oyl of /.««.?, (the Preparation 
 of which we have taught before) and fix them^ together for 
 a Month in a warm place. 
 
 VI. Then abiha6l the liiperfluous humidity by Diftil- 
 lation, till there remains in the bottom of the Stillatory 
 a truly fixicd Oyl. 
 
 VII. This Oyl will penetrate Copper and tinge it 
 white; and one part or it being put upon one hundred 
 parts of melted Copper,, will tranilntite it into good 
 Silver. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
s^ 
 
 Pofygraphices, Lib. VIIL 
 
 CHAP. XXXII. 
 
 [A fixed lin^ffre to convert Luan into Sol. 
 
 I. 'TTAke of the beft Z.«nrf calcined with Mercury, and 
 Salt prepared : mix it with an equal Quantity of 
 Cmnahar of Antimony ; thefe Sublime three times. 
 
 II. In every Sublimation repeat the Cmnabar of An- 
 timony. 
 
 III. Then diiTolve this matter in a Compound Aqua 
 Fortis, made of Niter and Vitriol, A. ifcj. Antimony, 
 Verdigrile, A. ^iij. make the Solution over warm Alhcs. 
 
 IV. Keep the Diffolution warm for three days, at the 
 end of which time Diftill a Water, and reduce the Foe- 
 ces into a Body, by melting or diflblving them with 
 Borajc. 
 
 V. Thus have 3'ou a Tin£lure foxLun/iy which with an 
 ecjual Qiiantity of fine Sol, will tranfmutc it into good 
 Gold. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIII. 
 
 Mercury Water, 
 
 I. 'T'Ake Mercury Sublimate in fine Fouder If;. lay it 
 * on a ftrong fubftantial plate of Tin, with a hole 
 in its middle ; place it on a Glafs Funnel in a cold place, 
 that the Mercury may melt per delLprnm. 
 
 II. This Liquor Di(Hll in Balneo, repeat the DifHlIa- 
 tions, until the whole in ittcr be turned into Water, and 
 doth all arife in the Diftillition. 
 
 III. Take all this DilHIIed Water and draw it off in 
 Ailie?, Avhat remains in the bottom of the Alcinbick let 
 it melt again per deUqniaWy and DiQill again in Balneo 
 and Allies, as before, till no Faeces rcmaui m the boL- 
 toni of the Alcmbick. 
 
 • IV. In 
 
Chap. 34^ 7o tinge Luna />/t7 Sol. 585 
 
 IV. In this Mercurial Water feven times Diftilled in 
 A flies, is Gold (Calcined with Mercury, Salt and Sul- 
 
 .phnr) to be diffolved. 
 
 V. This Solution is to be putrefied for fifteen days in 
 HorftDung, and Diftilled with a gentle Fire in Allies?, 
 and Cohobated upon the Foeces, till it be converted into 
 a true fixt Oyl, whofe Vertue is wonderful. 
 
 VI. One Pound thereof will go upon an hundred of 
 melted Silver, and turn it into pure Gold, tinging and 
 tranfmuting of it throughly. 
 
 VII. If its Oyl be fweetned with Spirit of May Dew, 
 by often DifTolving, Diftilling and Cohobating, its Ver- 
 tue and Efficacy lb encreafeth, that it cures all Dileafcs 
 both Humane and Metallick. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIV. 
 
 7o twge Luna into Sol. 
 
 h 'T' Akc of the bcft Sol calcined, Crociis Mank^ calci- 
 -*- ned Brafs, of each alike ; add thereto Sd Armo-^ 
 nUck^ redified upon Croci'i-s Adartis^ by Solution of the 
 Sd Armonmck in lliarp Spirit of Vinegar ; for the Croats 
 being lb diflblvcd, tingeth the Sd Armoniack with its 
 Colour- 
 
 II. By Diflillation or Exficcation and Sublimation, let 
 this Tincfure be joyned to the Sal Armoniack. 
 
 Illi DifTolve of this Sal Armoniack 4 Ounces, in our 
 Vinegar ; our Virgms Milk {a) and put into this Soluti- 
 on the Pouder of the Crocus, of Gold, and of Calcined 
 Brafs^, in which perfectly diifolve them all. 
 
 IV. Filter and purify the Solution, and let it putrefy 
 for a Month in Horfe Dung, then Diitill by a Retort in 
 a gentle Fire, or Alh or Sand heat. 
 
 V. Cohobate the matter on the Faeces, till it be con- 
 verted into a fufible Salt, u'hich fweeten with Spirit of 
 May Dew, and then it Avill tinge very well; one part 
 will go upon ten parts of melted Silver, and tranlinutc 
 it into good Gold. 
 
 (a) S{S Chat!. 22. aforegoing, 
 
 C H A P. 
 
5:54 Wygraphhes. Lib. VIIL 
 
 CHAP. XXXV. 
 
 7o make Crocus Martis wore noUe^ forperfecf- 
 hg the former Secret, 
 
 I. 'TpAkc as many Filings of Steel as you pleafe, wafh 
 -*- them Ten or Twenty times in Water, in which 
 Salt is dilfohed, till the Filings arc very clear and pure, 
 then dry them. 
 
 II. Put them into a Glafs Matrefs, and Afflife there- 
 on itrong Spirit of Vinegar, to which add a good Quan- 
 tity of difToIved Sal Armoniack. 
 
 III. Place the Glafs Matrefs in the Sun for 8 da^'s, 
 turning it every day, and lliaking it ; then decant the 
 Vinegar, and put on frelli Spirit, with new Sal Armo- 
 niack. 
 
 IV. Shake well the Matrefs or VefTel, and put it into 
 the Sun again, until tlie Vinegar is tinged, which decant 
 alfo, and add it to the former. 
 
 ^ V. This Work you mult repeat, till the Filings are 
 dilTolved in the Spirit of Vinegar and impregnated ivith 
 the Sal Armoniack. 
 
 VI. piiiill thcfe Tinduvcs with a gentle heat, fo will 
 the Spirit come ofl^ and leave the Crocus at bottom, 
 anort admirable in augmenting the Tindure in the for- 
 mer Chapter. 
 
 VII. This Crocus may be reduced into a true Red Oyl 
 of Mars j and if it be often dilfolvcd in Spirit of Vinegar, 
 and then diifolved in Spirit of May Dew, it will be turn- 
 ed into a molt Red Oyf. 
 
 VIII. This Oyl if it be joyned with the Oyl of Gold, 
 and fixed, it will be a moft perfedWork, of which one 
 part will go upon an hundiCvl parts of melted Silver. 
 
 IX. Mercury feven times Sublimed will be tinged by it, 
 and converted into a molt Red Oyl, nearly equal in 
 Vertuc and Power, to the former Oyl of Gold. 
 
 C H A P. 
 
Chap. 3^' To turn Water yfo Wine. 585 
 
 CHAP. XXXVI. 
 
 To turn Water into good Wine. 
 
 I. 'TpAkeofthebeliWine fix Quart?, or what Qjianti- 
 -■- ty you pkafe ; Diftill it in a Gliik AIeiTibick,large 
 and high, with a gentle Fire : Or fubiVitute goodSpirit of 
 Wine (feven times at leaft reiiified) in its place, that it 
 may be perfe6lly Dephlegmated. 
 
 II. The Spirit thus reaified keep well ftopt in aGlafs, 
 then -profeaite your Diftillation, and the FJegm will 
 come over, which re6lify feven times, till it be vei^ piir'fe 
 and clear, and free from all manner of Faeces in tlie 
 Diftillation. 
 
 III . The Flegm thus prepared, keep in a Glafs by it 
 felf; increafe the Fire in the fame Diftillation, and you 
 will have a Red and Foetid Oyl : This you muft fo often 
 redlify till it be white and clear, and has loft its Em^j- 
 reumay which keep in a Phial well ftopt. 
 
 IV. Calcine the remaining Faeces in a Crucible, with 
 a ftrong open Fire, till they are white; to which Calci- 
 ned Faeces put the rectified Flegm, in a new Glafs Alem- 
 bick, with a blind head: Let'it Boy I for an hour, then 
 filter and purify it. 
 
 V. This purified Liquor Diftill in an Alembick, and 
 the Faeces remaining Calcine again, as before, and dif- 
 folve it in the Flegm : Thus do 7 or 10 times. Calcining, 
 Diifolving and Filtering, till you have a pure white Salt, 
 freed from all Faeces and Impurity. 
 
 VI. To this pure Salt add its own reclified Spirit, re- 
 ferved after the feventh Rectification, and in it diftolve 
 the Salt in a warm Sand heat ; filter and purify the Solu- 
 tion, and if there remains any thing undilTolved, Calcine 
 it again. 
 
 VII. Being Calcined, diffolve it in the reftified Flegm, 
 then Coagulate, and diffolve it in the re6lified Spirit; 
 which Solution DilHll and Cohobate fo long upon the 
 remaining Salt, till it be turned into an Oyl, which pu- 
 rify, and make Volatile, by joyning it with its own 
 Spirit. 
 
 VIII. This 
 
^86 PofygraphUef. Lib, VOL 
 
 VIII. This by continual Digeition fix, being fixed, 
 add to it the former rectified Oyl, and fix both together, 
 then Volatilize and fix it again. 
 
 IX. Thus arc all the Elements of the Winejoyncd in 
 this fixed Mixttire ; and it will turn Water into good and 
 pure Wine : One Pint will turn po Pints of Water in- 
 to Wine, which is wonderful to ice. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVII. 
 
 7o turn the fttpbk Oyl of the Golden Marchaftte 
 into Gold 
 
 I. "TpAke 6fthe heft Marchafite of Gold ftij- reduce it 
 -*• into very tine impalpable Pouder, which diifolvc 
 in AqM Regis J upon warm Allies. 
 
 il. Decant off" the clear part of the Solution from the 
 turbid Faeces, Diftillthe Solution clenr, dry the Poeccs^ 
 and Cohobate the Diitilled Water upon the Faeces ; al-^ 
 \vays purifying the Solution, and decanting it clear off 
 from tlic troubled Faeces. 
 
 III. At length dry the Marchafjte, and add to it of 
 !;ood Gold (calcined with Mercury, Salt and Sulphur) 
 ©ac Ounce, and of the Sal Armoniack nibified fwith the 
 Crocus M.artis, as above) 2 Diachins ; of Mercury 7 
 times Sublimed ^ Drachms. 
 
 IV. Mix and incorporate all togetlicr in a Marble Mor- 
 tar, with a Glals Pclkll, :2i\d. put all into a Rciort, and 
 Diftiil with a gentle Aih heat, till all tlie humidity is 
 vaniilied. 
 
 V. Then increafti the Fire, that the Volatile parts 
 may Sublime into tlic neck of the Retort; after which 
 break the Retort, and joyn the matter beaten into Pon* 
 der in the bottom with wlrat Sublimed into the neck. 
 
 VI. Mix them very well together, and Sublime them 
 again; repeat this Work Icvcn tune?, the matter will 
 be Cas fufible as Wax) in the bottom of the Retort. 
 
 VII. joyn this fulible matter with the lixt Oyl of the 
 Alcaly, or fixt Salt; Digclt them for a Month n\ an A- 
 thanor ilia ftrong Glals j and if need require,. Diged it 
 
 longer. 
 
Chap. 58. 7 otiffgeLun2L into Sol 587 
 
 longer, until it be congealed into a fufible, yet fixt mat- 
 ter. 
 
 VIII. You may prqiedl with this, by putting one 
 Ounce thereof upon an hundred Ounces of Mercury, 
 made hot in a Crucible. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVIII. 
 
 To make the Oyl of An jlcali to prepare the for" 
 mer Secret, ^^j./ 
 
 I. "TpAke Sal Alcali 10 Pounds, beat it inaMafbk 
 -■- Mortar, and incorporate it with Dittilled Vine-r. 
 gar, of which make round Balls,- and dry them in .tl« 
 Sun. 
 
 II. Put thcfe Balls into a Reverberatory, and calcine 
 them for 24 hours, then diflblve them in a iufficient quan- 
 XkY of Dirtilled Vinegar j filter the Solution, andDilHlI 
 to dryncfs. 
 
 III. Then diflblve it again in frelliDiftilled Vinegar, 
 the miitter is turned into a fixt Oyl and Salt, fufible as 
 Wax. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIX. 
 
 lo tinge Luna iftto Sol. 
 
 I. npAke of thebeft Antimony well Poudred one Pound, 
 -*- crudeTartar and Salt, of each as much ; Poudet 
 them all, and being well mixed, calcine them in a Itrong 
 Crucible, with a violent Fire. 
 
 II. Encrcafe the Fire till the matter is melted, and 
 let It remain melted for four hours^ that the Regulus may 
 fall to the bottom of the Crucible. 
 
 III. When the matter is cold, feparate it from the Re- 
 gulus, which keep ; the reft of tli£ matter diflblve in fair 
 
 Wateu 
 
5^8 Vo^grafhices, Lib. VIlL 
 
 Water, by Boy ling it; then filter and purify it as much 
 as you can. 
 
 iV. This matter tlius filtered and purified, mix with 
 the Spirit of Vinegais lb will the Golden Sulp'.mr of tiie 
 Antimony precipitate. 
 
 V. This feparate by Filtration, fo will the Golden 
 Sulphur remain in the filtering Paper, which dry by a 
 gentle Fire. 
 
 VI. The drycd Sulphiu: diffolve in our Virgins Milk, 
 and Digeit it till it be tinged. 
 
 VII. Then Diftlll the Solution, and the acid part of 
 the Diftillation Cohebate upon the Faeces, tliatlhey may 
 "bt diffblved again and purified. 
 
 VIII. Repeat this Work fo often, until it be turned 
 into a red fixt Oyl, which is to be;oyned with tlieOyi 
 of Gold, and Digefkd until it is fixed into a fufible and 
 tinging Salt. 
 
 iX. One Ounce of this Salt will tranfmutc an hundred 
 Ounces of melted Luna- into good Sol. 
 
 -;ii;-i. ■ . - - Knim:>. . , 
 
 C H A p. XL. 
 
 Ho make the Mercury of Antimony. 
 
 I. •T^A-k<: of the Regulus mentioned in ttie former^Chap- 
 -*- ter 4 Ounces, of Sal Armoniack, well depurated 
 by Solution anditirfed^'8 Ounces. , 
 
 II. Ponder and mix them all together, and Sublime 
 them in a ftrong Ghils. 
 
 III. Repeat the Siiblimation 5 w 6 times, till the Re- 
 gulus does rile with the Sal Armoniack. 
 
 IV. Then diffolveall in common Xair Water, warm- 
 ed, and impregnated with the Salt of Tartar; lo in the 
 bottom of the Veffcl you will find the Reaulus farncd 
 into a running Mercury, after Meniltual Dige(tion. See 
 Chap. 21 atoregoing. 
 
 C H A r. 
 
Chap,s!j.2» 7 otranft^ttte Antimony intoSol. 58.^ 
 
 C H A P. XLI. 
 
 To extrd^ Mercury from C\fet4s reduced tnto 
 a. Calx. ' ' '^ ' ^ 
 
 ■.',i oh -•• 
 I.T\IiIblve in coipmon Aqua fortls, Salt: calcined bv^ 
 
 -■-' degrees, until the Aqua for tis will dilTolve m 
 more. . , 
 
 ir. tnto this Water put Regulus of Antimony, if you 
 defire its Mercury-, or the Calx of Lead, Tin, Iron, Cop- 
 per, Silver or Gold, if you defire their running M^-rciury. 
 
 III. Stop the Glafs %yell wherein the Solution of the 
 metallick Calx is made ; digeft it for a month in Horfc- 
 dung, and then diftil off the Aqua fortis, and dry tlic 
 matter. 
 
 IV. Repeat this Work again, digeft, diitil and dry, 
 and add to it its Own weight of Sal Armoniack, and as 
 miich of Tartar, upon a good quantity of Aqua ardcn.s, 
 
 -Of.Spirit ofWine^'V-'-^.C , \'":!Jll'v!'1 ',)■..•.; _ti\ 
 
 V. Digefl: this Mixture for 15' days, then caufe it to 
 boil ; and you will find running iviercury in the bot- 
 tom. 
 
 CHAP. XLII. 
 
 To IrAnfmnte Antimony into Sol. 
 
 I.'T'Akc Mercurv of the Regains of Antimony yy. 
 ■■' of the bed Gold filed or made into thin leaves ^i- 
 make an Amalgama -thereof. 
 
 II. Then with common Mercury and pure fine Silvei> 
 make another Amalgama, beat and mi.x: both t!ie A- 
 malgama's in a Glafs Mortar, with a Giafs Peilel. 
 
 III. Being well inix d, put them into a 'lon-g Bolt 
 Head well (lopt, and in a gcnik heat digef-t the matter, 
 until it wax black. . 
 
 IV. Then encreale the Fire, anddi^eft until it grows 
 
 T t ^vb•ite-; 
 
^go Polygraphicer. Lib. VIIL 
 
 white; digeftftill, and encreafe your Fire, till the Mat- 
 ter wax red as Cinnaber. ' 
 
 V. To this add new Mercury drawn from the Regu- 
 Jiis ot" Antimony or Silver, mix them well together, and 
 digell them again, till the matter waxes white, and 
 red as before. 
 
 VI. This do three times, and you will have a true E- 
 lixir fur Sol ; one ounce whereof will go upon a thou- 
 land ounces of melted Luna. 
 
 VII. And if this matter be difToIvcd in the mercurial 
 Water we have taus,ht to prepare in the XXXIII. Chap- 
 ter atoret;oing, it will l->c an unparalell'd Secret ; and 
 being Iweetned with Spirit of May-dew : it cures all 
 Difeafes, both Humane and Metallick. 
 
 CHAP. XLIII. 
 
 lo make Mercury of Silvery und with it & 
 great Elixir, 
 
 I.'TpAkc of the bed Silver 1'\]. diflblveit in Aqua fortis, 
 -■- and digell it for a month, then diltil and coho- 
 bate three or tour times. 
 
 II. At lenj!;th draw off tlie Acui fords to a fourth 
 part, and place the rcll in a cold moift place to cryftaN 
 Jize. 
 
 III. To thefe Cryfhls well dry'd, add of good Oil of 
 Tartar rnadeofthe bell: and whitcft Salt ol Tartar *v;.. 
 of diifolved Sal Armoniack §ii. digelt them in Horle- 
 dnngfor amonth, or in Balnco, in a Glafs Matrafs very 
 well fiopt. 
 
 IV. Then add to It fliblim'dSal Armoniack, and Salt 
 'df Tartar, of each equal in weight. 
 
 V. Digcft it -with Spirit of Wine for 15 days, and 
 then let ii boil, and in the bottom you will Hnd a run- 
 ning Mcrcurv, which dry, and wain with Salt and Vi- 
 iiciz.ir, and a?,ain drv it. 
 
 VJ. This Mercury amalgamate with Gold and Silver, 
 anddigertthc Auial^ama, that it may be turned into a 
 red Puudei. 
 
 VII. Then 
 
Chap. 44. TofixLunz,&c. 5.91 
 
 VII. Then nourilh it with the like Mercury, digelt it 
 that it may be fix'd, and again diffolve it : this do feven 
 times, and fix it, till it he converted into a red Pouder. 
 
 VIII. One ounce of this Pouder will make a Proje- 
 6lion upon an hundred ounces of melted Luna, and tiirn 
 it into good Sol. 
 
 IX.' And if this Pouder be diflblv'd in the Water of 
 Mercuf)'-, and digefted into a fix'd Oil ; one ounce will 
 prqjed upon a thoufand ounces of melted Luna : it will 
 alfoprojed: upon all other Metals, but chiefly upon Tin, 
 and Lead. 
 
 CHAP. XLIV. 
 
 To fix and tinge Venus into .good Luna. 
 
 I.^T^Akc of Mercury feven times' ^fublim'd,fV;5i. Sal Ar- 
 -*• inoniack as much ; Calx of Luna ca!lcin'd with 
 Mercury ^ij. mix all together and lublime them. 
 
 II. What Sublimes, add to the Fsec^s, beat them to- 
 gether, and again fublime in a new Glafs : wliich Work: 
 repeat till nothing fublime, but all remains at the bot- 
 tom of the Glal's. _ ■- ^ 
 
 III. Then pouder it, and in a moid place, let it run 
 fer deliquium j which Liquor filter, purify and congeal 
 upon warm Allies. 
 
 IV. Dillolve it again with the Water which afcends, 
 filter and congeal upon Ai}ies ; which Work repeat fe- 
 ven times, and it wall be a Medicine ; of wliich one 
 ounce will change fifty ounces of Mercury into Luna : 
 and tinge an hundred ounces of Venus into good. 
 Luna. 
 
 Tt - C H A F 
 
5s^,> /Pol):graphices, Lib. VIII. 
 
 G H A P. XLV. 
 
 ' .7:a fix Luna , and tinit it into good Sol. 
 
 [.•npAIre McrcuiiV i^tven luiies lublim'd jiij. Gold cal- 
 r 4- cin'd ( with MercuiT, S:ilt and Sulphur )7f;. Oil 
 (jf Crocus Mattisl often diirolv'd, -vvaOi'd and purity 'd 
 ^iii. rubify \i Sal Aritioniack ^iv.. 
 
 II. Mix thein tos^ethcv, and fublime them with a. 
 ftroiig Fire in a Glal? Matrafs in Allies: what Sub- 
 hmes, put again to the Faeces n'liich remain in the bot- 
 tom, and repeat chis io often till it will fublime no 
 more. ., - 
 
 III. Then wliat is'irfi the ■ bottom beat'and pouder vc- 
 rv fm-ill : this Pouder put into a Glafs with holes in it, 
 over a Glals Funnel, and in a raoilt place, let it melt 
 fcr delicjaiuw to Water. 
 
 IV. ThjiT- Water, hltcr, purify and didil it : ^^hat 
 remains in the bottom,, dilTolve ag.ain in the Water that 
 diibird over; and ix;peat this till the mattertcmains in 
 ihc bottom, in.ii,uKiii(i, red and fufible Salt. 
 
 V. One ounce of this cafi upon an hundred ounces of 
 Mercurv, \vaim\l i^n. a Crucible, will tranlmute it into 
 good Sol : and pvoieCtcJ upon an hundred ounces of fine 
 Luna, makc<. it ail Gold of proof. 
 
 C H A P. XLVI. 
 
 To fix Mercury into fine Luna. 
 
 I.T"Akc of calcin'd Tin |iv. diflolvc it in a fufficicnt 
 -■- nuantity of the Virgins Milk, (in Chap. XXIII. 
 aU>rei',('.ing.) 
 
 II.' Dii!,elt the Solution for eight days in warm 
 AOus, that the Calx may be dillblv'd. 
 
 in. Dilloive the Calx of Silver Ot) in the fame Vir- 
 pjns Milk, and dige{i it alio for eight days ; at length 
 ;oin both thcli; Solutions together, and dillii them in 
 Allies. IV. To 
 
Chap. 47* To fix Mercury f.fU-Q fifie SoL 593 
 
 IV. To the matter remaining in the bottom add f iv. 
 of the Oyl o^ Sal -^c all (b) and diftiLit, and dry it. 
 
 V. Then join both' the diftlMations together, w^. what 
 is diftilled frojn the Virgins Milk, and what came troiu 
 the Oil Oi^S"^/ ^l/J<?/; or fixt Salt. "- 
 
 VI. In this mixture dilTolve the remaining matter in 
 the bottom oftheGlafs, filter and purity it, and ag^iiti 
 diftil. 
 
 _ VII. Repeat this Solution, filtration, and dittlllatton, 
 till the matter is turned into a fixt Oil, or Ririble Sak. 
 
 VIII. One ounce hereof will projed upon an hun- 
 dred ounces of crude Mercury made hot in a Crucible, 
 and tranfmute it into fine Luna. 
 
 (a) i. e. Silver Leaves, hut truly Cflx o/" Silver, fbj See 
 Chapter ^S. afore-going ; SMt of Tartar is alfo a Sal Alcali 
 of the highejl order j and pojfibly the real thing which is in- 
 tended. 
 
 CHAP. XLVII. 
 To fix Merjury into fine Sol. 
 
 I. 'npAke of the bcft Minium |vj. dilTolve it in a | )od 
 -*- quantityof our Virgins Milk j and dige.Ht tor 8 
 days. 
 
 II. Add to it of the Crocus Mortis or of its Oil ^iv. 
 mix all together and putrifyit for eight days in Horicr 
 dung or in a Balneo MaricE. 
 
 III. Then dilfil to a drynef?, and diiri)h'e it agafn 
 with its own Water ; filter and purify it : repeating this 
 work, tin the matter is converted into a red and fulible 
 Salt 
 
 IV. Add to this Salt of the Oil of Sol ^ii. mix and 
 digeit till they are fixt; then in their own 'Water dil- 
 Iblve the matter again : repeat this ^o ofteii, till all oe 
 tiirwed into a true aiid red fixt Oil. 
 
 V. One ounce of this will fix and tinge a tho.iian I 
 ounces of Mercury, being made hotinaCrU-ible; it wiU 
 alio tinge Luna into fine Sol. 
 
 T t 3 C tl A P, 
 
594 "■ Pohgrapkhes, Lib. VIII. 
 
 CHAP. XLVin. 
 
 Jo fix Mercury i?fto fine Sol; 
 
 I.TTAke Crocus Martis ^W. of the be(t red Lead as 
 -■• much: diiTolve all in a Sufficient quantity ot'out 
 Virgins Milk. 
 
 II. Digeft the Solution in a Balneo, /. e. a bath for Rf- 
 teen days ; filter and purify it, then diftil it to drynefs 
 in a Retort in Allies : cohobate upon the fseces, diitolve, 
 filter and purify again, and dilUl in a Retort to drynefs ; 
 and do this till the matter difiblve without any faeces. 
 
 III. Then diflblve and diftil, till the matter be turned 
 into a fufible Salt : to this Salt add Gold (calcined with 
 Mercury, Salt and Sulphur) well wafhed, ^ij. Oil of 
 Sal Alcali or fixt Salt ^iij. mix and digeft for 15. days. 
 
 IV. Then draw off the fuperfluous moifture, andceho- 
 bate by diffolving, filtering and diftilling, fo long, till 
 your Salt is moft pure, red, and ftifible. 
 
 V. One ounce of this Salt will projedl upon, fix, and 
 tranfmute a thoufand ounces of Mercury'' into fine Sol. 
 
 CHAP. XLIX. 
 
 To yfjf Mercury into fine Luna. 
 
 I. *TpAkc of the bcft white Lead and of the Calx of 
 -■- Silver (calcin'd with Mercury) of each |i;. dif- 
 iolve them in our Virgins Milk. 
 
 II. Filter the Solution, and digeft it in Balneo for 
 1=^. days ; then add to the fsccs new Virgins Milk that 
 all may be diiTolved ; for the Calx of the Silver is hard 
 todilfolve, and will remain undiifolvcd, if you be not 
 careful. 
 
 III. You fhall know when the Luna is diiTolved ; 
 for then the fjfces in the bottom of the VciTcl will leein 
 Ipongy or light. 
 
 IV. After all is diiTolved and made pure, diftil to 
 drynefs: then dilfolvc and purify the Solution again, 
 
 till 
 
Cfeap. ^o. To fx Mercury wto true Sol. 59^ 
 
 till all the matter be turned into a fufible fixt Salt "5 
 which will be done in 1 2. or 15. Solutions. 
 
 V. One ounce of this fufible Salt may be projedcd up- 
 on a hundred ounces of Mercury heat in a Crucible, and 
 it will tranfmute it into good Luna. 
 
 C H A P. L. 
 Jofix Mercury i»to true Sol. 
 
 I. 'T^Ake the red mineral i\ov\t (a) heat it hot, and 
 -■- quench it in ftrong Vinegar r^J>. do ib feven 
 times. " ' 
 
 II. Then heat and pouder it very fmall, and diiTolve 
 It \n common Aqua fortis Cc), putrify the Solution 15 
 days in Horfe-dung, or Bdneo MarU. 
 
 III. Filter the clear part of the Solution froiji the fs- 
 ces, then diliill it, and cohobate upon what remains in 
 the VeiTel ten times. 
 
 IV. Then diffolve in our Vinegar or Virgins Milk, 
 filter and purify the Solution as* before, and dili:il it. 
 
 V. Then diifolve it in Oil or Water of Mercury (dj ; 
 let it be diiTolved, dr3^£d CO and dilHUed, until it be 
 turned into a fixt Oil, or fufible Salt. 
 
 yi. To this Salt add Oil of Sol as much, then fi>: it, 
 Tvhich is done by a ("hort digelbon becaulc the laid Solar 
 Oil is fixed (f) of it felf ; therefore the fixation is done 
 in a very little time after they are mixed together. 
 
 VII, This red Tincture is multiplved, and its Virtue 
 and Pouer increafed and 5;. ofthisTincWe will project 
 upon a thoufand ounces of Mercury, and fix it into pure 
 Sol. 
 
 (a) That is Clnnab.ir ruztive or artificial, hm rather na- 
 tive, (b) Here yoH are to under jfand Spirit ofyinegar, freed 
 from all its fiegm. (c) Underfiand the ftrorigeii Al\ux forti^ 
 of the commortd kind, viz. that which is doMe. (d) See the 
 preparation thereof in Chap. :^'^. aforegoing. (€) By drying 
 here is meant coaxal a: lag. (f) Not that it is abfolmely fixed 
 in itfelf, for indeed it is mofl f'^olatile, but it is Jo called he- 
 captfe it is of a fixinz property, nnd fixe: other things. 
 
 T t 4. ^ C H A P. 
 
\^^ ^ "^ Pol^grafhilh?' Lrb.VIII 
 
 CHAP. LI. 
 
 To make the Oils of Gold and Silver, 
 
 I. np Ake of the Gold, (calcin'd with Salt, Sulphur, 
 ^ and Mercury, and then waflied) 5!;. dilToIve it 
 in a fuflRcient quantity oi Aqua regin. 
 
 II. Digert it in BAnto or Horlc-dung for i^. days, 
 and dillolve the Solution to the conliimption ot a third 
 part, the reft take trom the fire, and expofeit'to the cold 
 Air, that the Gold may congeal C^O i"to yellow Stones 
 Or Cryflals. 
 
 in. Put thefe Stones upon a GLifs, and let it run to 
 Water r/'^, the relt of the Solution again diftil to the 
 third p:irt, then expole it to the Air to Cryftalize, as be- 
 fore, and run per delujumm^ and diitil as before. 
 
 IV. Repeat this Avork lb ofien, until the Crylhls or 
 little yellow Stones are turned nito a fixed Oil. 
 
 V. But by cohobating upon it Aqnafortis^ it will be 
 Iboncr turned into a fufiblc Salt, (c). And after tliis 
 manner is the fixed Oil of Luna prepared. 
 
 VI. Thelc Oils are very nccejlary for the perfecting 
 of feverals operations, and arc the principal things of 
 note in Chvniidrv; for we need no other liscret, but 
 tliclc Oils of Gold and Silver. 
 
 VII. AndaluhoLigh there arc many other things which 
 can do it, yet thcle very Oils augment and multiply, 
 and are of that Virtue, that they arc true ferments. 
 
 VIII. Tlicv turn allotherfixcd Oils drawn from Mi- 
 neral? or Mct.ils into their own lubftances ; and fo by 
 the Oils of Sol and Luna, the fixed Oils of nnperfccl 
 Metals arc multiplied. 
 
 (a) That is, fhoor wto Golden Cry;}aLu (b) viz^.. to dif- 
 f'-lve into a liqu-ir per dcliquium. (c) This is according to 
 'the fnind f>^ Pa race Has, who thinks that by continual ^tjfuft- 
 On of more of the drfjidvent y'>fi nill at length divide the mat- 
 ter into fo l?raU- and Inbiil particles that it will become Oil. 
 See my poron Mcdiclun, lib. 2. cap. i.ScCt. 16. §. i. 
 and 5. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 5 3 . lotxtra^ Meicury from Sol. 5 97 
 
 € H A P. LU. 
 
 Jo fi^, Lma, into Sol, 
 
 I. ♦T'Akc ordryed Roman Vitriol fxi;. Antimony, and 
 ••• Sulphur, of each |iv. Verdigrife, Sublimate, of 
 each $ii. Sal Nitre 5vij. make of thefe a Water accordin* 
 to Art. 
 
 II. Take Ifcj. of this Water, and add to it |vi;. of 
 Cryftals of Arfenick, in a large Glafs Matrafs with a 
 Jong neck, which circulate till all beaked. 
 
 III. Then dry it, and pouder it ; Take of this ponder 
 Ifej. and caft it upon ftvj. of melted Silver ; and it will 
 make it fomewhat brittle. 
 
 IV. Toaft this Metal upon a Cupel, till it be fweet, 
 and then dilfolve in Aqua Regia ; what will not diflblve, 
 melt with Borax in a Crucible, and you will find halt 
 the Luna turned into Sol. 
 
 CHAP. Liir. 
 
 Jo extr^a^i Mercury from Sol. 
 
 I. T^Ake what quantity you pleafe of Sol, calcined %vith 
 -*- Salt, Sulphur, and Mercury, and leven tunes ic- 
 peated, by abttradling the Mercury in a Retort, and ad- 
 ding frelh Mercury to the matter remaining in the bottom 
 of the Glafs, till the Sol is reduced to a very fine Pouier. 
 
 II. Take of this prepared Gold §i;. of ihe belt white 
 Salt of Tartar (from which the belt reclihed Spirit of 
 Wine has been diililled) |iv. common Salt decrepitated, 
 dilToived, and congealed again |ii. Sal-Ariuoniack 
 purely fublimed |i. the belt rectUicd Spirit of Wine ^v;. 
 mix them all together. 
 
 III. Put all into a Glafs VelTcl, ftoptwell, and pu- 
 trify it in Horfe-dung, or Balnco, for a month. 
 
 iy. Then diiHl oti the Spirit of Wine, and if any 
 
 Qiiick- 
 
598 PoljgrAphices, Lib. VIII. 
 
 Quick-filver rcm-iin at bottom, diflblrc it in Aquaforthf 
 and cehobate it three or four times. 
 
 V. At laft put to it t!ie belt rcdtificd Spirit of Wine, 
 and make it to boyl, fo lliallyou find the Mercury alone 
 in the bottom of the Vcffcl, which purify very well, and 
 keep it for perfe6ling of the following Arcanum. 
 
 C H A P. UV. 
 
 7o fix this Mercury into mofifi»e Sol. 
 
 I. TpAke of the forementioncd Mercury (of Sol) ^j. of 
 -■- common Mercury drawn from Cinnabar, with 
 Lime and Salt of Tartar, ^xx. mix all together, and put 
 to it of the belt Oil j. drachm ; which mix well together 
 in a ftrong Glafs. 
 
 II. Digeft them for a month in Aflics, till the matter 
 is turned into a fixed redPouder. 
 
 III. DifToIve this Ponder in our Virgins Milk (4), 
 the preparation of which we have formerly taught, filter 
 and purify the Solution. 
 
 IV. Digeft this in Horfe-duqe for a month ; then draw 
 off the Virgins Milk, and keep or rcierve it for other fe- 
 crets. 
 
 V. The remaining matter diffolvc again in Spirit of 
 May-dew, filter, and purify the Solution, and abftract 
 it again by a gentle or flow diftiliation. 
 
 VI. This work repeat fo often, till you have a Salt 
 fufible as Wax or Butter; of which §;. will tranfmute 
 a thoufand ounces ot' common Mercury (well wafhcd or 
 clcanlcd) into pure Sol. 
 
 (a) Se^ Chapter 23. aforegoing. 
 
 C H A P. 
 
Chap. 5 5. lo cement Luna intG trtte Sol. 599 
 
 C H A P. LV. 
 
 7o fix the Mercury of Luna into Luna. 
 
 I. •T'Ake of Mercury drawn frohi Luna 5I}. common 
 -■■ Mercury, drawn from common fublimate §i;. 
 and an half or ^xx. Oil of Luna ^ij- Oil of Tin 5ii;- mix 
 all together. 
 
 IL'Put them into a ttrong Glafs Matrafs, and boyl 
 in an Afh heat, till the matter is fixed into a Pouder oi 
 white Salt. 
 
 IIL This Powder or Salt diiTolve in our Virgins Milk ; 
 filter and purify the Solution: then diltil off the Milk, 
 and cohobate it feveral times, till all the matter be con- 
 verted into a Salt, fufible as Wax. 
 
 IV. Diflblve this fufible Salt in Spirit of May-'Dtvi:, 
 and dulcifie it by cohobation : fo long do this, till the 
 Salt be turned into a true and white fixed Oil. 
 
 V. One part of this Oil, will tranfmute a thoufand 
 ^arts of common Mercury into pure and fine Luna, and 
 tor ever fix it. 
 
 G H A P. LVL 
 
 To cement Luna into true Sol. 
 
 I. npAke of burnt Brafs 5'- Roman Vitriol made red, 
 and of the beft Crocus Martis, of each Sij. Lapis 
 Tutia, Sal-Armoniack, of each ^i* make them into a moft 
 fubtil pouder, and mix them together. 
 
 IL Take then of the fineif Sol, and of the fincft Luna, 
 of each equal parts thereof, which cement with the for- 
 mer Pouder in a Crucible. 
 
 HL Lay them in the Cmcihlc., firatttm f/iper /Iratum 
 with the Pouder, which cover and well lute it, and ce- 
 ment for twenty four hours. 
 
 IV. Then walli the Plates, and melt them ag.iin, and 
 make Plates, and cement as before with the lame Pou- 
 der ; 
 
4foo Folj/gYAphices. ^ib. VIII. 
 
 der : this do fevcn times, and all the Luna will be 
 turned into themofi pure Sol. 
 
 1 f ■ » . ■ ■ 
 
 C H A P. LVIL 
 y. To make Atinim Potabile, to prolong life. 
 
 I. 'T'Akc of the moft pure and fine Sol, what you pleafe, 
 *- diirolve it in Aqua regia in which prepared com- 
 mon Salt is difTolved, and putrify the Solution in Horfc« 
 dung for a month. 
 
 , II. Then add thereto half a pound of rectified Spirit of 
 Wine, digeft in Balneo for fifteen days, and abltrad the 
 Spirit of Wine. 
 
 III. The Sol again dilfolve, and cohobate feven times 
 upon the matter remaining in the bottom. 
 
 IV. Now here is to be noted in this Solution, that the 
 S'lqHa foriis (a) which is firlt put on the Gold to dilTolyc 
 It, is to be feven times rectified in new Retorts, that it 
 jnay be freed from the Salt. 
 
 V. The Sol being thus diflblvcd is then to be put into 
 Spirit of yt/rfjy-Dcw, and fo difTolved: abftratl the Spirit, 
 anidilfolve again, and abftract to drynels. 
 
 VI. This dry matter expofc to a cold and moift Air 
 for a night, tliat it may be diffolved, and the acrimony 
 of the ^r/«^/or/ij r^^ be fully taken away. , 
 
 VII. Dillolve again d( nfW'y with new rectified Spirit 
 of Wine, anddry it by diliillation ; which Avork leven 
 umcs repeat, till all the Sol is turned into a fweet Oil. 
 
 Vf n. This is Av.r'.'.m Potabde^ which will cure all Dif- 
 eales and Infirmities, and prolong life to cxtream old Age. 
 Dofc one grain or drop m a Ipoonful of good Spirit of 
 Wine (c). 
 
 C.I. b.J Li both thcfs plucks yon Jte to HudmUnd Aqua Re- 
 gia ; Cc) not rectified, fur then it nill be too jironv to he ta" 
 ke-ii: jiillc.ii thereof you may ufe pureCm.iry, or which is bet- 
 ter, choice Cinnamon W.iter. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. ^Sy To make Argentum, &c. ^oj^^ 
 
 CHAP. LVIU. >J 
 
 7o make Argentum Potabile, toCftre aSDifeXj 
 fes of the Brain. 
 
 I.nr'Ake of fine Silver what quantity you plea jfe, diir' 
 -■- folve it in a fufficient quantity of Gommoa: (:4-) A-r 
 qua fortis. 
 
 II. Puttify the Solution in Horfe-dung for a.' month, 
 or in BJneo MarU, ; then diHil the matter to drynefs, 
 and cohobate upon the Faeces feven times. 
 
 III. Diifolve the matter again into our Virgins Milk ; 
 purify the Solution by Filtration, and putriiy again in 
 Horfe-dung for fifteen days. :\ j | ' > , 
 
 IV. Abttra6l "then xht Lad TirgineHnr, and cohobate 
 upon that which remains in the bottom. . 
 
 V. Then difiblve witl3 a fufficient quantity of the bed 
 Spirit of Wine ; putrify the Solution in warm Horle- 
 dung or Bdrieo Maria for eight days ; abftrad: the S^Tr?C 
 and cohobate 'lei'en times; and if the Solution be >ot 
 clear, filter it. 
 
 VI. This done, ab^rack the Spirit of Wine, and dil- 
 folveinSpirit of ^4)'-dew ; filter the Solution, and ab- 
 ftra6l fo many times, till the matter is convtrte^l-iito a 
 ■fufible Salt, and Iweet. 
 
 VII. Arid to make it fwectcr, you^ may diitolve it in 
 new freih rectified Spirit three or four times, fo will vou 
 have a pure Iweet Oil of Luna or Argentum Po^dnle^ 
 for the Cure of all Difeafcs which aii'ect the Brain. 
 
 VIII. It is very certain, that if all the Oils of Sol and 
 Luna (before prepar'd) were often dijfolv'd in -the-bcft 
 re6lified Spirit of Wine, and dulcified with Spirit of 
 ykf^-dew, and fo freed from the Spirit'of the Aquit'for- 
 tis, they might with more fifety and plcafantnclsbe^ta- 
 ken into the Body, for the curing of Difeafe?. 
 
 IX. Neither is their Virtue and Property oi traniinu- 
 tingMetals into Sol and Luna thereby weakned, but ra- 
 ther fortified and extended. 
 
 X. But fee that ^-ou operate warily and skilfully, for 
 there is what can be delired in Chymical Preparations, 
 if you can but obtain thefe metaliick OiJs, fi^r the cu- 
 
 rms 
 
6o2 Polygraphices. Lib. VIII. 
 
 ing of Difeafcs in Men and Metals, as Experience can 
 tcftify. 
 
 XI. Yea, the Bodies of Vegetables may be cured by 
 thcfe Oils, perfc6lly dulcified ; tor all Bodies, Animal, 
 Vegetable and Mineral have one and the fame Fountain 
 of Life. 
 
 XII. And out of the fame Fountain, may be prefer- 
 ved, and brought to the utmoft Perfection that can be, 
 which few underftand or believe. 
 
 (a) Without doiiht you ought to take the ie^ Aqu/tfortis, 
 elfe you may chance to lofe your Labour, 
 
 CHAP. LIX. 
 
 To trmfmute Luna into SoL 
 
 L'T'Akelt;. of the belt Aqua fortis, dirtil it from the 
 -■- Sal Armoniack, and common Salt prepared, of 
 cacfi ^iij. which repeat leven times. 
 
 II. DilTolve in this Royal Water of the moft fine Gold 
 ^j. and of Mercury amalgamated with llich Gold liv. 
 
 III. Digeft or boil them in a fhoiig Glafs Matrals in 
 warm Allies for a month, till tlie whole matter is con- 
 verted into a red Pouder. 
 
 ^ IV. This Pouder dilfolve in the aforefaid Water, and 
 digert it in a warm Balneo MarUSot a month. 
 
 V. Then diftil to drynefs ; cohobate fcven times, by 
 putting what is dittill'dupon that which remains dry at 
 bottom. 
 
 VI. Add to the dillill'd W^atcr Spirit of May-dew, 
 in which diflblve the matter, purify and filter the Solu- 
 tion ; tliis repeat many times, till the nutter is convert- 
 ed into a fulible Salt. 
 
 VII. This Salt dulcify with the Spirit of yt/.n-dew, 
 lepeating it with frclh Spirit of ALry-dtw, until the Salt 
 be Iwcct, dml retains no Acrimony. 
 
 VIII. One part of this will prolcd upon a thoufand 
 parts of melted Silver : and if you continue diirolving it 
 in Spirit of yl/^y-dcw, its Virtue will be thereby more 
 and more augmented. CHAP. 
 
Chip.6o. 7otra»fmuteVtoxis intoLum\ 60 j 
 
 Ch A P. ^tx: 
 
 '' ''' ^ To irdffjhgt^e Venus' into'Lum. 
 
 Ii*T*Xke Mercut^'j^awn from' Sublimate with Lime 
 ' '*, and Tartar 3Yiy- of the bd\ Leaf-filver 311;. mix 
 and make an Amaliania. 
 
 II. Digeft this Amalgama in ^ Matrafs well clofed in 
 warm Amesforamorith, tillit is converted into a Pou- 
 der, br grows into a Tree. ', ' ' , 
 
 HI. Let tliis Mercurial and Lunar Tree be diffolv'd 
 in common Aqtia' forti^lTiAde of Vitriol, Saltpetre, and 
 Alum. 
 
 ^iMV: Digett this Solution in Balneo for a month, 
 theti abftraCl and diftll to drynefs j and cohobate feven 
 times with the diliill'd Water. 
 
 V. Then digeft the matter %vith the molUhong Spirit 
 of Vinegar, filtering and purifying the Solution 5 which 
 putrify m warm Horfe-dun» for fifteen days. 
 
 VL TIienabftra6l by DiftilLition, and dilTolve what 
 remains at the bottom with Spirit of May-d^w, lever*, 
 times reft ified. 
 
 VII. This Work fo often repeat, till tlie matter is con • 
 verted into a Salt fufible and nx'd. ' 
 
 VIII. Projeft one part of this Salt upon a thoufand 
 parts of Venus, and it will all be converted into moil 
 pure Luna. 
 
 IX. Let this Luna, made fufible, be oftentimes dil- 
 folv'd in a cold and moift Air, and then congealed, that 
 its Virtue thereby may be muldply'd ; fo thereby you 
 may prepare a Silver Mine for tlie-Tranfmutatioa of 
 Venus. 
 
 X. From this Mine yoii may take every month or eve- 
 ry week, half its weight, to proje6l on Copper. 
 
 ff. XI. JBut let thei^e\be added to the xeraaming matter 
 Mercury fublim'd or crude ; and {0 the Silver Mine or 
 Matter will never decay, as will be manifeft by the fol- 
 lowing Arcanwm. Jhe lame may be done with Sol. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
fH .: " Polygraphices. lAb. VIIL 
 
 e H A P. LXJ. 
 
 J perpetfMl Silver Mine, that will never decay, 
 
 1,'T'Ake of the Silver and Mercury in the former Ghap- 
 -■- ter it.j. to which add of the Mercury drawn from 
 Cinnabar, with Lime and Salt of Tartar by DilVillation 
 half a, pound. 
 
 11. lylix and beat all together in a Glafs Mortar with 
 a Giais Pefkl; then put it into a Matrafs with a long 
 neck, which clofe well, and digeft it in^warm AOics 
 for a month ; in which time it will be all fix'd and con- 
 verted into one Subftance with the former. 
 
 in. "fhcn take half a pound thereof, and caft it upon 
 an hundred pounds of purify 'd Copper melted, and it 
 w^ill all be pure Luna. 
 
 IV. Now, that this Mine may not decay, put half a 
 pound of prepar'd Mercury, or common Mercur\', well 
 wafh'd to the aforelaid Mine in a GlaJfs Matrals; and 
 boil or digeft it for a month (clofcftopt) in warm Allies ; 
 lb Avillthe whole Medicine be of equal Virtue with the 
 iirft. ■ , . -. . 
 
 V. And by this manner of feeding it with Mercury, 
 your Mine will laft for cverj.fo that every month you 
 may taKe out half a pound, for tlic Tranlmutation of 
 Venus into good Luna. 
 
 VI. In the lame manner may you likewife proceed 
 with Sol, as Hull be declared ia the following Arca- 
 num. 
 
 CHAP. LXII. 
 
 A ftrpetud Golden Mine^ to tranfmute Luna 
 into SoL- 
 
 I.T^Akc of the Sol, prepared by fome of the former Se- 
 
 •*- crets, or at lealt, Sol that is by Art covertcd into 
 
 a fix'd Oil or Salt which is tiifiblc; take of this tlifiblc 
 
 Salt 
 
Chap. 6j' -^ trnging JVafer to twge Luna. 60 f 
 
 Salt of Gold tfej. of Mercury drawn from Cinnabar, as 
 is before taught, half a pound. ^ 
 
 II. Mix and beat all together in a Glafs Mortar, with 
 a Glafs Peftil ; and put it into a ftrong Glafs Matrafs, 
 with a long neck, which flop or 61ofe well. 
 
 III. Put this, Matrafs to digeft in warm Afhes for a 
 month, and in that time all the Mercury will be con- 
 verted into a Medicine, of equal Virtue with the foi:« 
 itier. 
 
 IV. Take of this Medicine one part, and cafl: it upon 
 a thoufand parts of melted Luna, and it will all be 
 turned into good Sol, 
 
 V. To this remaining matter add half a pound of 
 Mercury prepared, f «f fptpra) an.i digelj it for a month 5 
 fo will you find, that your Golden Mine will be inex- 
 haulHble. Thus by the pure Oils of Sol and Luna are 
 jnade the Golden and Silver Mines. 
 
 CHAP. LXIII. 
 
 A thging Water to tinge Luna. 
 
 I.'TpAke of burnt Brafs (prepared and difTolved in com- 
 -*• mon {a) Aqua fortis, and deficcatcd by Abftra- 
 <5lion of the Aqua fortis) half a pound ,• of the Tindure 
 of Mars, or of CVoc/^ Manis, dilfolved into Oil, half a 
 pound ,* Roman Vitriol calcined only to whiteneis ftj' 
 crude Antimony, _ Sulphur and Mercury fublimate, of 
 each 5ii;. Verdigrife, Lapis Tutia, of each 5i;- pouder 
 them all and mix them. 
 
 H. Put them all into a Glafs Retort well luted, and. 
 from hence draw arf Aqua fortis, and therewith often- 
 times imbibe this matter. 
 
 III. Then calcine it in a Crucible with common Salt 
 and common Mercury ; or elfe difTolve your Luna in a 
 Glafs Alembick, and abItra<B: the Aqua fortis by Diltil- 
 lationj what remains in the bottom will be tinged 
 Luna. 
 
 IV. This tinged Luna may with Borax be reduced in- 
 to a body, throughly tinged with the higheil Golden co- 
 lour. Uu V. The 
 
6o6 Polygraphices. Lib. VIII. 
 
 V. The Faeces of this Aqua fortls are very profitable 
 to cement Luna with equal parts of Sol, to tinge it into 
 a Golden colour ; they being mixt in equal quantities, 
 made into Plates, and cemented with the faid Pouder 
 for twenty four hours in a well luted Crucible according 
 
 to Art. 
 
 (a) That is niAde hy the common Recipe, hnt you ought t» 
 take thebeji ef that kind, viz. Double Aqua fonts. ' 
 
 CHAP. LXIV. 
 7o multifly Luna. 
 
 I.^TTAke of the beft Mercury, well wafhVl, ^y- l^i^l ^^ 
 _-*- with common Salt and Maw's Spittle, by ftrongly 
 grinding of it in a Glals Mortar with a Glafs Peftil. 
 
 II. Being thus mortified or killed, put it into a Cruci- 
 ble, and upon it Pouder of Cryfblhne Arfcnick half a 
 dram ; Tartar calcin'd to whitencis with Salt petre, as 
 much. 
 
 III. You mu/i have ready another Crucible, in the 
 Ix^ttom ofwiiich let plates of Copper be madcfa(t, that 
 they may not tall down %vhen it is joined with the lower 
 Cnicible. 
 
 IV. |oin both the Crucibles together, viz,. That with 
 the Mercury, Arlcnick and Tartar, to that with the 
 Copper, letting that with the Copper be uppermoft, 
 and lute them well together, that nothing may per- 
 ipire. 
 
 V. Then put them into a re^'erberating Fire for four 
 hours: for the firfl hour let the Fire -be fott and gentle ; 
 (or the fecond Wronger ; for the third approaching to the 
 hii;hclt degree ; and for the laft hour cover all over the 
 CruciJ-ilcAvith lixc or burning Coals, and make the Fire 
 very iirong for that liour. 
 
 VI. Then kt the Fire go out, and the Crucibles cool : 
 being cool'd, take forth the matter in the upper Cruci- 
 ble, adiiering to tiie Copper plates, whidi keep. 
 
 VII. Take pure fiwe Silver 3j- "idt it, and put to ic 
 
 by 
 
Chap; 65. To Hnge Luna into Sol. 607 
 
 by degrees the Mercury found in the former fuperlor Cru- 
 cible, and upon it crude Tartar, till you fee the matter 
 clear and fplcndid, fo will your Silver be augmented to 
 the one half. 
 
 CHAP. LXV. 
 
 To tinge Luna into Sol. 
 
 I.TpAke of the red Oil of Antimony, and of the red 
 -■- Oil of Mars, of each 5iij. diilil them together till 
 
 they be purely clear and red. 
 
 n. To this add the Oil of Sol ^ir. mix them together, . 
 
 and boil or digelt till they are all fixt into a fafible Salt, 
 
 or fixt Oil, which will be done by the help 0: the Oil of 
 
 Gold. 
 
 in. When they are all fixt, proie(5l one part upon ati 
 
 hundred parts of pure Luna, and it will all be tranfihii- 
 
 ted into fine SoK 
 
 IV. Thefe Oils of ^nlimony and Mars we have al- 
 ready taught to make in feveral of the aforegoing Arc\:- 
 nums, as alfothe Oil of Gold, fo that it is not neceifary 
 here to repeat the lame again. 
 
 V. But the true Oil pf Antimony we have not yet 
 taught, but in the following Chapter you fiiall ceitau'ily 
 find it. 
 
 CHAP. LXVI. 
 
 To make the true Red Oil o/Antimony. 
 
 I.T^Ake male mineral Antimony ( which is known by 
 
 -■- its long and fparkling beams, for the female 15 
 
 different, and known by its (lender and fmall beams) 
 
 Jfciir. pouder and diifolve it in ftvj. of the Spirit of 
 
 II, Mix them in a long neck'd Glafs Matxafs; and 
 U u 2 kt. 
 
6oZ . Pohgraphicesf. Lib. VIIL 
 
 let them putrify in Horfc-dung for tvvo or three months, 
 or in the preflings of the Vintage, where the putrefa<ftive 
 heat is more cxad -, and in which you may keep it for a 
 month. 
 
 III. Then difiil the matter by an Alembick put upon 
 the head of the_Matrafs, in ^^ra.rm Allies j and dittil 
 whatever you arc able to bring over. 
 
 IV. That which, conges over put upon frefh male mi- 
 neral Antimony, And digefl as before for a month, two 
 or three, and diibl it after the fame manner. 
 
 v." Then put what is dilHll'd forth on frelli mineral 
 Antimony, and digeli it for fifteen days j then diftil it 
 de novo ut prim ; and repeat this fo often, till the Spirit 
 of the Aiay-^tw dges arife with the Spirit of the Anti- 
 mony. 
 
 VI. Then take of this acid Spirit ftj. of male mine- 
 ral Antimony half a pound ; di^eit them in warm 
 Allies for a day, leaking the Glais often, till the acid 
 Spirit be tinged of a red colour. 
 , VII. This red Tindtuic decant by Inclination, and 
 affiife thereon fielli Spirit : repeat this fo often, by pour- 
 ing off, and puttiiig on frcfli, till you have a great quan- 
 tity of tinged Spirit. ^ ^ 
 
 VIII. Put all thefe together, and dittil them in Bal- 
 veo Adarix with a very gentle heat, till nothing more 
 will arife. 
 
 ^ IX. And in the bottom of the Glafs Alembick, tlicre 
 will remain a red Tindlure of Antimony : this dittil p.'r 
 Ctiieres, and a red Oil of Antimony will afcend. 
 
 X. This rectify two or three times in a Glals Retort, 
 and the Oil will be pure red. 
 
 'XI. This Oil dittil with the Oil of Mars, and mvi it 
 all with an equal quantity of the Oil of Gold, and all 
 fnall be fixt as in the former Secret ; and it is a inoft 
 wonderful thing to tinge Luna into Sol. 
 
 XII. If you putrify male mineral Antimony in Hoife- 
 dung wicti Water of Turpentine, the Spirit will be 
 tinged into the colour of Blood. 
 
 ;XIII. This" Spirit thus rubiiy'd, being digcftcd upon 
 new and frci>. uialc mineral Antimony, will caufc it to 
 yitid more copiouflv the Oil of AntimcHiy. 
 ■ XIV. AnJ ihis Oil will be of the fame Virtue with 
 t\it former, being .prepared after the ianie method, as 
 when diifolved in jjpirit of .4/»fj-de\v. CHAP. 
 
Chap.dS. Tv fixLunsi', 60^ 
 
 CHAP. LXVIL 
 
 To fix Luna. 
 
 I.pvTffolve Sal Armoniack ^j. in the Water or Flegm 
 •f-' of Vitriol, and as much, vU. y. of Sulphur 
 Vive. 
 
 II. Diftil them in a Glafs Retort,; 'apd after that the 
 Flegm ofthe Vitriol is come over, encreafe the Fire, and 
 fublime the Sal Armoniack with the Sulphur Vive. 
 
 III. Caft of this Sublimate a fufficient quajitity on 
 melted^" Silver in a Crucible, and it lliall be hxt to re- 
 ceive the following Tindtu-e. 
 
 CHAP. LXVIII. 
 
 7o extradi n T. injure from Mars to colour Luna . 
 
 L'TTAke Filings of the beft Steel, heat them red hot in 
 -*- a Crucible, and quench them in ftrong Vinegar : 
 this repeat feven or ten times. 
 
 II. Then take |iv. of thele Filings ; of Sal Armoniack 
 3ij- Mercury liiblimate as much : diflfolvc the Sublimate 
 and the Sal Armoniack in warm Water, and filter it. 
 
 III. Put this upon the aforefaid Filings in a Glafs Re- 
 tort, or an Alembick ; after two or three days abftrail 
 the Water; and what remains in the bottom dilfolvc in 
 our Vinegar or Virgins Milk, and it will be tinged into 
 the colour of Blood, 
 
 IV. Decant the Tin6lurc, and affufe more Vinegar 
 or Virgins Milk, until the matter will yield no more 
 Tindure : then diftil it, and in the bottom ofthe Alem- 
 bick will remain a molt excellent red Oil. 
 
 V. This Oil will be better, and more penetrating, if 
 5'oucohobate upon it thf Vinegar or Virgins Milk, which 
 will not afcend, bi.it remain in the bottom of the 
 Alembick. 
 
 II 11 3 . VI. One 
 
6 to Poiygrdphices. Lib. VIH. 
 
 VI. One part of this Oil caft upon fifteen parts of 
 melted Luna, will turn it all into fine Sol. 
 
 VII. And if to this Oil, you join an equal quantity 
 of the Oil of Gold, and fix tkem together in Allies by Di- 
 geftion for a month , your Medicine will be the more 
 perfect. 
 
 CHAP. LXIX. 
 
 7o reduce Sol into Mercury with commo»^^ 
 
 Mercury. ^^•'•WIR^ 
 
 ■«, 
 I.'-pAke of the bcft Sol purified with Antimony, and 
 
 -*■ niade into fmall Filings or tliin Leaves, fij a- 
 malgamate it with ^xxiv. of common Mercury, wafh'd 
 and purg'd very well. 
 
 II. Divide the Amalgama into four parts, and put 
 it into four feveral Glafies; add to it twelve times as 
 much Aqua. RegUj di(Hllcd with Sal Armoniack, as the 
 Amalgama weigheth. 
 
 III.'^So divitle tliis Water, that in each Glafs there 
 mav be the weight of the Amalgama, io that thefe 
 tAvelve parts may dilTolve the whole Amalgama in a 
 month, by Digeltion in Allies.^ 
 
 IV. When the Amalgama is diflblved, diftil off the 
 Aqua fortisy and dulcify the remainder with Fountain 
 Water, till all the Antimony of the Salt or Aqna fortis 
 is taken away, and the Water comes off fweet. 
 
 V. Let the Water be very pure ap.d clear, or diftil- 
 Icd ; and have a care that noDuft or Filth fall upon the 
 rouder. 
 
 VI. Dry all 3"our matter very well in an A Icmbick, 
 that the Mercury may be f;ived. 
 
 Vil. Then encreaic the Fire, that the whole Mercury 
 may be brought over into the Recipient, and in the bot- 
 tom you will hiul a calcined Salt, which reverberate for 
 firtcen days in a Reverberator^^ 
 
 Vin. So will vouf Sol b^ well calcined, and brought 
 into an impalpable Ipungy Pouder. 
 
 IX. Take half this Gold thus calcined, and the Mer- 
 cury 
 
Chap. 6^, To reduce Sol hto Mercury. Sit 
 
 CLiry that was diftUled from it, being well walli'd from 
 the Impurities it contracled from the Aqua fort/4 : take 
 of it as much as of the calcined Gold. 
 
 X. Mix or amalgamate them very well together, by- 
 beating or rubbing them in a Mortar. 
 
 XI. Then put it into a Glafs well rtopt, which bury 
 in warm Afhes for five days, until it be reduced into a 
 red Pouder. ' " 
 
 XII. To this matter add a third part of frefh Mercury, 
 beat or grind, and mix them together, and boil or digeit 
 them in a Glafs Matrafs, till all be converted into a red 
 Pouder. 
 
 XIII. Repeat this fo often, until the Sol hath imbibed 
 een times its own weight of Mercury. 
 
 XIV. Put this Pouder into a great quantity of com- 
 mon Water diltillec -, &xx it with your Finger, that the 
 Water may be thick or troubled ; then decant it whilft 
 it is fo troubled, and put it into a Glafs Velfel. 
 
 XV. Put on more of the fame matter upon the re- 
 maining matter, flirring and moving the Water, till it 
 is troubled again ; then decant it immediately. 
 
 XVI. Thus continue, until the Water has taken up 
 all the Pouder ; fo will you have a very lubtile Pouder. 
 
 XVII. And if there be any thing in the bottom, which 
 will not be taken up with the Water; calcine it with 
 Mercury, by mixmg, grinding and digefting them in a 
 Glafs Matrafs. 
 
 XV III. Then pafs it all through Water, as before : 
 take this Water, and let it fettle, and let fall its F.^ces ; 
 decant the Water from the Fasces ; io will you have them 
 of a Golden colour. 
 
 XIX. Dr}^ them with a gentle Fire, and put them in- 
 to a Glafs Matrafs, and digeit it in Allies for a day ; 
 then take out the Pouder, and beat or grind it in a Glafs 
 Mortar, and dii^ell it in warm Allies as beibre. 
 
 XX. Then take it out and beat it again, and repeat 
 this eight times, digelting lor a day at a tnne. 
 
 XXI. Beat or griiid, aiid digell it again ; then put the 
 Pouder into a {iiong Glais Matrafs well luted ar.d liopt, 
 and bury it in a vefy hot Sand, making under it a very 
 ffrong Fire, and the fuperfiuous Water of the Mercury 
 will come forth firrt.' 
 
 XXII. At kiit the Mercury will come forth in great 
 
 qiwntiLiesj 
 
6 It Tolygraphices'. Lib. VIII 
 
 qiLintitles ; for all the Pouder will be turned into Mer- 
 cury, and there will nothing remain in the VelTel but a 
 black Pouder. 
 
 XXIII. This Pouder, by a ftrong Fire, will be turned 
 into a black Glafs. And thus is the Gold reduced into 
 Mercury with common Mercury. 
 
 XXiy. The Mercury is amalgamated or joined with 
 the Spirit and Soul of the Gold, and is called animated 
 Mercury ; of which are made Golden Mines by the fol- 
 lowing method. 
 
 CHAP. LXX. 
 
 To make «t Golden 'Mine. 
 
 I.*TrAkc of the Gold above calcined, whereof we have 
 ^ -*■ left a half part for this Arcanum : Take, I fay, 
 Silj. or as much as you have left ; and put to it a third 
 part ot our animatea Mercury, as before prepared. 
 
 II. Digeft it in a Glafs Matrals, buried in Aflics ; 
 then give a itrong Fire, that ibme of the matter in the 
 Matrafs may be iiixed. 
 
 III. Put back that which comes over in the DifHlIati- 
 cn, upon that which is fixed, and beat them together, 
 incorporating, and mixing, and digelting or boiiing in 
 a Matrafs till the Calx of Gold hiis drunk up much of 
 the Mercury. 
 
 ■ ly. And if the animated Merairy be fpent with the 
 Spirit of the Gold, then fiibftitute in the place tlicrcof 
 common Mercury wel.VOvanicd) dilfolved or purified. 
 
 V. So will the red Pouder encreafe in an infinite 
 quantity; and you may encreafe as much of this Mer- 
 cury as you pleafe, making all running and live Mer- 
 cury ; and it iliall be animated Mcrcurj'', and of die 
 fame Virtue and Efficacy with the former. 
 
 VI. Which muft agam be digeiled or boiled with the 
 Calx ot Gold, and by degrees converted into a red 
 Pouder. . 
 
 VII. Of this Pouder make little Pills with Gum Tra- 
 gacanth dilfolved in Water, and project it upon melted 
 
 Gold 
 
Chap. 71 . ^0 tmge Luna into Sol. ^r| 
 
 Gold in a Crucible, and the Calx will be meltecl with 
 the Gold, and the Gold multiplied. 
 
 VIII. After this manner will your Calx be turned 
 into fine Gold, and your Mine be made to encreafe for 
 ever. 
 
 IX. But then you mult keep the faid Calx of Sol fer- 
 mented with the Water of Mercury, and convert it into 
 a red Pouder, and then into animated Mercury, and 
 this animated Mercury into a Calx, and this Calx prch 
 jeft upon 'melted Gold. 
 
 CHAP. LXXI. 
 
 I0 make the aforefaid Mine have the Virtue of 
 tinging Luna into Sol. 
 
 I.^Ake what quantity you pleafe of this Mineral or 
 -■- Mine, and put it mto a ftrong Glafs Matrafs well 
 ftopt, in warm Afhes, with a gentle Fire, for fourteen 
 days, till the Calx has acquired a moft red Tin6lure. 
 
 II. This very redTincbare it acquires only by this Di- 
 gciHon, by Virtue of the Spirit of Gold, which gives the 
 moit perfect red. 
 
 III. If it be digefted longer, it will acquire a greater 
 red, till it looks like deep Saffron or burnt Blood, fa 
 deep will be the Tindure. 
 
 IV. Take of this rubified Calx of Sol ^iii. of the Oil 
 of Sol as much ; and as much of the Oil of Mars, and the 
 red Oil of Antimony, as above prepared. 
 
 • V. Mix and incorporate all tos;ether, and digefl till 
 they are all converted into a moft red Pouder ; one part 
 of this will projedtupon a thnufand parts of melted 
 Luna, and tranfmute it into fine Sol. 
 
 VI. If this Pouder be dilfolved in our Virgins Milk, 
 into a fixt Oil, be filtered and 'clarified atterwards, 
 and digelkd and fixed into a l\veet Oil with Spirit ot 
 /t/.r^-dew, as we have before taught in many of thefe 
 our Arcanums, it ^vill tranfmute ten thoul'and parts of 
 melted Luna into fine Sol. 
 
 VII. And if this Oil be yet fubtilized and attenuated, 
 
 it 
 
/i4 Poljgrsphices. Lib. Vflf. 
 
 it ^'ill tranfmiite Luna wiihout Fire into Sol, and that 
 by bare Infufion of the Luna in the (aid Oil. 
 
 CHAP. LXXII. 
 
 lo trspfmute Mercury into Sol. 
 
 I.'T'Ake Mercury ftj. crude Vitriol, Verdigrifc, crude 
 •*- Tartar, common Salt, of each ft;. 
 
 II. Put the Vitriol, Verdigrife, Tartar and common 
 Salt into an Iron Pot, upon which atfufe the ftrongeft 
 Vinegar, that they may all be diffolved. 
 
 III. Being dilTolved, put to Fire, that they may boil; 
 and when they begin to boil, put the Mercury into the 
 Pot, and continue the boiling till the half part of the 
 Vinegar is confumed, or fomcthing more. 
 
 IV. Then take it from the Fire, and ftir or fhake the 
 matter, and decant what is liquid into an Earthen Vef- 
 fcl J and in the bottom of the Iron Pot you will find 
 your Mercury half congealed or coagulated. 
 
 V. This waih very well with common Water, till 
 the VVater comes off clear. 
 
 VI. Then digeR all this Mercury again with the liquid 
 part of the Vinegar which you decanted out of the Iron 
 Pot ; and clarify by adding new Vinegar, and boiling 
 again for two or three hours in that Vinegar in which 
 the Verdigrife, common Salt, Tartar and Vitriol were 
 di/folved. 
 
 VII. After this decant the liquid part by Inclination, 
 and you will find the Mercury half congealed : this Luna 
 wa("b again with common fair Water, till the Water 
 comes otf clear. 
 
 VIII. Expofe this Mercury to a cold and moift Air 
 for three nights, and it will be coagulated very hard. 
 
 IX. Reduce it into a verv iiibtil Ponder, and mix it 
 with the Yolks ol Eggs and Crocus Mar: is, pure Earth 
 (Chalk) Sirattiw ftipcr Stramm in a Crucible, giving a 
 fliong Fire for two or three hours j and your Mercury 
 will be like Copper. 
 
 X. This join with an equal quantity ofcupellated or 
 
 tefk-d 
 
Chap. 73« lotratffmuteMcrQmyimoSoh 615 
 
 totted Luna 5 melt them together, and teft them, and 
 you will find your Luna tinged. 
 
 XI. This tinged Luna melt with an equal weight of 
 the bell Sol, and all will be pure and fine Gold, of a 
 mpft pure colour. 
 
 XII. And if your coagulated Mercury (made hard in 
 the cold) be reduced into a moft fubtil Fouder, and im- 
 bibed with Oil of Mars, and then melted with Luna, 
 all the Luna will be tinged into Sol. 
 
 XIII. And thus Mercury may be tranfmuted into the 
 fineft Sol, which lliall ftand all Tryals, if fine Sol be 
 joined therewith. 
 
 XIV. For the Spirit of Verdigrife does convert and 
 fix Mercury into Qopper ; and then the Oil of Mars doe^ 
 augments its Tindure, and communicate it to the Sil- 
 ver, and by adding fine Sol thereto, all is made into 
 pure Gold. 
 
 CHAP. LXXIII. 
 
 7o tranjmute Mercury and Luna into Sol. 
 
 I.'TpAke of the Mercury aforefaid coagulated and fixed 
 -*- in an Iron Pot, with Verdigrife, Vitriol, Tartar 
 and common Salt ; Take, I lay, of this Mercury 5v;. 
 of Silver calcined with Salt, Sulphur and Mercury, as 
 much. 
 
 II. Mix them well, and imbibe this Calx with the 
 Oil of Mars tliree or four times, imbibing and drying it 
 in a Crucible. 
 
 III. Add then of Merairy Sublimate 5xvi;. and beat 
 or grind them well together, and imbibe it three or four 
 times, imbibing and drying it in a Crucible : then melt 
 it, and all will be pure fine Sol. 
 
 IV. This Sol, if thou diffoh^eft jn our Vinegar or 
 Virgins Milk, and it be digelkd into aredfixeiOil, and 
 then conjoined with equal weight of the Oil of Gold, 
 and fixed together, you will have an Oil, one part of 
 which will proiedi upon an hundred parts of melted 
 Luna, a,nd tranfmute it into fine Sol, at all alTays. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
6i6 TolygrApbices. Lib. VIII. 
 
 CHAP. LXXIV. 
 
 To tinge Venus into Luna. 
 
 I.^Akeof Luna calcined with Salt, Sulphur and Mer- 
 •*■ cury, and three tunes repeated with frelTi Salt, 
 Sulphur and Mercury : Take, I lay, of Silver thus pre- 
 pared 5xvii;. which imbibe in the following Water e- 
 leven times, imbibing and drying in a Crucible upon 
 the Luna. 
 
 IL Then take of Sal Armoniack 3xviij. Mercury fe- 
 ren times fublimcd Z^\'\j. mix them together and dif- 
 folve them in warm Water diltilled f and filter the So- 
 lution. 
 
 in. In this Water imbibe the aforefaid Calx of Silver, 
 and then diifolve it in Spirit of Vinegar. 
 
 IV. That which will not diifolve in warm Allies, cal- 
 cine again with frelli Salt, Sulphur and Mercur}\ 
 
 V. This Calx imbi'jc and exficate in the aforefaid 
 Water of Sal Armoniack fo often, till itisall diflolved. 
 
 VI. Thefe Solutions of Luna put into a Glafs Alem- 
 bick or Retort, cohobating ottcnturic? upon the remain- 
 ing matter in the bottom, till the Vinegar does afcend 
 fweet andinfipiJ. 
 
 VII. Then add frefh Vinegar, and again diifolve and 
 coagulate, and that fc\'en times, till the Vinegar alcends 
 fharp, and the Solution be uirned into a fixca Oil or fu- 
 fible Salt. 
 
 VIIL One part of this Oil projcclcd upon an hun- 
 dred parts of melted Venus, turns or tranfmutes it all 
 into good Luna. 
 
 CHAP. LXXV. 
 
 To tinge the fame Venus into Luna. 
 
 L'TpAke of the before prepared Alcali Oil, (in Chap. 
 
 -■- XXXVIII.) Mercury la- en times fublimcd with 
 
 fixed Sal Armoniack, of each 5xx. II. Dil- 
 
Chap. 7^* 1o tingt Luna into Sol. di 7 
 
 II. Diflblve them in ivarm common Water diftilled; 
 filter the Solution, and abftrad the Water by Diftil- 
 lation. 
 
 III. Take this Salt and Mercury, with Oil of Tartar, 
 and difiblve them in the ikongelt Spirit of Vinegar, 
 and dilHl to drynefs. 
 
 IV. Cohobatc this Spirit of Vinegar now drawn off 
 fo long, till the matter is conv^erted into a fixt Oil. 
 
 V. Proie6l one part of this Oil upon an equal weight 
 of melted Luna; mix them well in a Crucible, and the 
 Oil will be reduced to a Pouder. 
 
 VI. Take of this Pouder one part, andprojcfl: it up- 
 on an hundred parts of melted Venus, and it will be 
 all moft fine Luna. 
 
 yil. If you diifolve this Pouder in our Vinegar, it 
 will be converted into a fixed Oil: one part of which 
 will tranfmute a thoufand parts of melted Venus into 
 the befl: and moft pure Luna, not to be parallelled in 
 purity, whitenefs and found. 
 
 CHAP. Lxxvr. 
 
 Jo tinge Luna into Sol. 
 
 I.T^Ake cmde Antimony pxx. as much Crocm MmU : 
 -*- crude Tartar 3xi;- Salt Petre as much j pouder 
 and mix them. 
 
 II. Then put it into a ftrong Crucible, and with a 
 violent Fire calcine for fix hours; melt it wxll, that the 
 Regulus may faU to the bottom of the Crucible. 
 
 III. The Crucible being cold, break it, and take out 
 the Regulus ; the reft of the matter diifolve in pure clear 
 Fountain Water ; boil the Solution, and filter it. . 
 
 IV. To this' filtefed Liquor- add, by degrees, diftilled 
 Vinegar,' 'z//;^. drop by drop, and a Golden Sulphur of 
 Antimony will precipitate to the bottom. 
 
 V. To tills Sulphur w^ell dryed add an equal quantity 
 o^ Crocus Alartis, and as much of fixed Sal Armoniack^ 
 with 3xvi- of Mercury fublimate. 
 
 yi. Mix them all and let them ftand in a Glafs Ma- 
 
 trals 
 
6 1 8 Polygraf kites. Lib. VIII. 
 
 trafs with a long neck, in a ftrong Sand heat for a 
 month ; then djlfolvc all in common Water, diftilled 
 and warm ; filter the Solution, and it will be of a fine 
 red colour. 
 
 VII. Diftilitnowto drynefs, dilToIve again, anddi- 
 ftil to drynefs, doing thus fifteen times. 
 
 VIII. So iTiall you have at length aredfixt Oilj to 
 which add the Oil of Sol and Oil oF Antimony, anddi- 
 geft them in a Matrafs for a month, till they arc all uni- 
 ted and fixed together. 
 
 IX. So will you obtain a fixt Oil, one part of which 
 being projeded upon a thoufand parts of melted Luna, 
 will traniinute it all into good Sol at all aflays. 
 
 X. But it will be more ftrong and effedlual, if the 
 Luna on which you do project be fixt ; yet the confe- 
 quence of this is not very great in this Work, becaufc here 
 the Olenm Soils does fix the Luna. t 
 
 XL Thus have you a Golden Oil of the fixt Sulphur 
 of Antimony, wonderfully Efficacious in the Traniinu- 
 tation of Metals, if you know how to work. 
 
 CHAP. LXXVII. 
 
 7o tinge Luna into Sol. 
 
 I.T^Ake of the Water from the above prepared Regulus 
 -*• of Antimony (before the Sulphur is precipitated 
 from it with Spirit of Vinegar) Ifeij. Crocm Afetallornm 
 well rubified as much. 
 
 II. Make an Amalgama orPafte oftheCrocfu, which 
 dry with a gentle Fire, then calcine it in a Crucible for 
 four hours, after which diifolve it in common diftilled 
 W^ater or May-dew. 
 
 III. Purify and filter the Solution ; and what of the 
 CrocfM will not diffolv^e , calcine in a ftrong Crucible 
 with a moft vehement Fire ftr a day and a night. 
 
 IV. Then imbibe it again with the aforefaid Water, 
 and make it pure; which dry and calcine for two or 
 three hours : after wliich diirolve it in Spirit of May 
 dew. 
 
 V. Repeat 
 
Chap. 78. To make a Water of Mercury, 619 
 
 V. 'Repeat this the third time, calcining what doth 
 not diflblve, till all the Crocns is turned into a moft red 
 Water. 
 
 VI. To this Water add Mercury fevcn times fublimed, 
 and digert till they be turned into a red Oil : proiect 
 one part of this upon thirty parts of melted Luna, and 
 it iliall be all fine Sol. 
 
 VII. But if an equal quantity of the: Oleum Solis be 
 added to it, and fixed together in a Glafs Matrafs for a 
 mor|h, it will be the more effedual and pou'crful in 
 Tranfmutation. 
 
 G H A P. LXXVIII. 
 
 To make aWafer of Mercury* 
 
 I.'T'Ake of Cinnabar of Mercury fublimed firom Vitriol 
 **• and Hitre three or four times, always taking frelli 
 Nitre and Vitriol : the Mercury thus prepared by the 
 Cinnabar, mix with a fuflicient quantity of pure white 
 Salt of Tartar. 
 
 II. Difiblvc it by a Retort, and bring over the Mercu- 
 ry in a live and running body : this ftrain through a C Loth- 
 or Leather, and mix with it an equal quantity of coui- 
 mon Mercur^^ 
 
 III. Put them together into a Retort, anddigeft m 
 Balneo for eight days, then dilHl by a Retort in AiKes, 
 fo will you have a Water come over in great quantity-. 
 
 IV. That which remains in the bottom wnli he a 
 white Salt, which diifolve in a moift place, and reclity 
 it by Diflillation in a Retort, always diltolnng what 
 remainsin the bottom. * 
 
 V. That which w^ill not afcend, join with your firit 
 diftilled Water, and redify it leven times, and it will 
 be the beft Water for performing of many great Works, 
 but chiefly the following Secrsts. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
620 Pofygraphitef. Lib. VIIL 
 
 CHAP. LXXIX. 
 
 To tinge Venus into Luna. 
 
 \rVhkt Luna calcined with Salt, Sulphur and Mcrcu- 
 '^ ry %vj. diffolve this Calx of Luna in a fufficient 
 
 quantity ot the afore jprcjDared mercurial Water. 
 
 IL Digclt this Diflolution in a gentle heat, and diftil 
 
 off the Aqua MercHril, and cohobatc it on the matter, 
 
 till nothing more will rile or afcend. 
 
 in. Thus at length you will have 0/(f«z??Z,»«^, which 
 
 will tranfmute Venus mto good Luna, one part being 
 
 proje6led upon fifteen parts of melted Venus. 
 
 CHAP. LXXX. 
 
 Another rvay to make the Aqua Mercurii. 
 
 i.'T'Akc of Sol calcined with Mercury, Salt and Sulphur 
 -*- ^iij. diffolve it in the above prepared mercurial 
 Water. 
 
 IL DifHl the Solution, and cohobate fo often upon 
 the Solar Calx, till it is converted into a fixed Oil, or 
 fufible Salt, having paffed through all colours, and be- 
 comes red, fixt and fufible as Wax. 
 
 ■ III. One part of this nxt Salt will tranfmute an hun- 
 dred parts of fine Luna into pure and fine Sol. 
 
 IV. If this Oil be joined vyith a fufficicnt quantity of 
 the Aqua Adercnrii, and diiVille^, and all be made vo- 
 latile ; and after, by confiant Digdlion, be again fixt, 
 its Power and Virtue will be multiplied nd mfinitHm-. 
 
 ♦cf?AP. 
 
Chap* St. to m^ke Aqua McrcurlL 621 
 G H A P. LXXXL 
 
 I0 make the Aqua Mercurii another waf, 
 
 1. npAke common Mercury vT-ell w^tOied and fqueezed 
 -*• through Leather, and inclofe it in a Ihong Ma- 
 trafs with a long Neck, which Seal up Hermetically. 
 
 II. The Matrafs being thus Sealed up, put it into a 
 putrifying heat, with Woad, vi<,. where the Woad is 
 prepared in the Shops to Dye Cloth with, there being i 
 great heat, for four or five Months ; let^ the Glafs I lay 
 be buried in the warm Woad up to half the Neck. 
 
 III. Leave it in that heat for three or foiir Months, 
 and in that time will all your Mercury be turned to Wa- 
 ter, which reclify feven times, till it be molt clear, pure 
 and limpid, and leaves no Fv^ces in Diftillation. ; 
 
 IV. With this Mercury you may work great Things in 
 the perfe6l Metals, by diflolving and coagulating them, 
 and converting them into a fufible and fixed Salt. 
 
 V. Thereby you have many Secrets and Elixirs to tinge 
 Luna into Sol, and Venus into Lima ; and the reft of 
 the imperied Metals, as Tin and Lead into Sol and 
 Luna^ 
 
 VI. This Aqua Mercmi may be made in a putrifyiii;* 
 heat of the prefling of Grapes, which being redlified, is 
 of the fame Vertue" and Efficacy. 
 
 Chap, lxxxil 
 
 7o make an Elixir of the white Stoneifomdamof^g 
 Lead» 
 
 I. "TrAke the white Stones Avhic.h are found in Leaden' 
 -*- Mines, .tnd towards the North of the fame Mines, 
 for that it is moft moift : Take I fay a Stone newly taken 
 out of the Mine, and break it into little pieces, with lit- 
 tle pieces alfo of the Mine or Ore. 
 
 II. Put them all into a Retort well luted, and Diftil 
 for two days in a ftrong Fire, till the Retort grows red 
 hot* 
 
 • X X HI. Let' 
 
622 Polygraphices. Lib. VUl. 
 
 III. Let the Recipient be large, and to a third part 
 fiill of the Spirit of uMay Dew, that it may receive the 
 Spirits that come over. 
 
 IV. When all the Spirits are drawn over, and the Re- 
 tort has been kept in a red hot heat for two or three days, 
 then take it from the Fire, and being cold, break it. 
 
 V. If the matter be of a red colour, it is well ] but if 
 it be more of a white, then it is to be calcined in a Cru- 
 cible, with a very itrong Fire, for fix or eight hours. 
 
 VI. Now wc eome to the Water, which is to be Di- 
 ftilled with a very gentle heat, till the Acid Spirits afcend, 
 o- Hre come forth, wliich are to be received in an open 
 Veffel. 
 
 VII. And the Spirits of yl^^j* Dew, which will afcend 
 fii it, are to be kept ; but in the Acid Spirits are to be dif- 
 lolvcd the cilcined matter, upon which a great quantity 
 O- the fiiid Spirit is to be put, and in a Glal's Velfel. 
 
 VIII. Let it be well Itopt, and made to boyl for an 
 hour, then filter and purify it. 
 
 IX. Upon the matter remaining undiiTolved, put more 
 Acid Spirit, and boyl it again in a Glafs Veifel clofe 
 ftopt, for an Hour, vvhich filter and clarify as before. 
 
 X. Mix and Diltil all the Solutions to drynefs, and 
 difTolve the matter again, by afEifing thereon all that 
 vvhich has Diftillcd over. 
 
 XL This Solution filter and clarify, and DiRil again ; 
 which Work lo often repeat, till you have a white Salt 
 or Pouder. 
 
 XII. If all the matter will not yet dilTolvc, but fonic 
 of it does remain, it mufi: be calcined again, anddilfol- 
 vcd as before, till the whole or intire matter is dillolvcd 
 and converted into a fulible Salt, which is fo often to be 
 di/folved in our Acid Spirit, till by repeated Diflillations 
 it is brought to a Volatility. 
 
 XIII. And it is tlien farther to bediffolved in the faid 
 And Spirit, till by repeated Dirtillations it is brought to 
 a Water, which is to be redified feven times at the leaft. 
 
 XIV. Then it will have acquired an exceeding pene- 
 trating Vertue m diffolving of all Metals; and in this 
 Water thiis prepared is to bediffolved the pert ect Metals, 
 as Sol and Lima; one part of the Metal in ten parts of 
 the WaLtr. 
 
 XV- Mi*, 
 
Chap. 8 5. To prepare an Elixir from FearL 62 j 
 
 XV. Mix, dilTolveand di^elt the Solution, or boyi it 
 in a Glafs Matrafs, well clofed or lealed up Hermetically 
 which is better: DigettferNineor Twelve Months, until 
 the Water, with the Metal diflolved, be converted into a 
 fufible Salt, fixed and red, if 3'ou have diflolved Sol in it j 
 or fixed and white, if ^-ou have diflolved Luna in it. 
 
 XVI. Thus at length is it become a wonderful and 
 ftrange Secret, thetaie Arabian Elixir, ftupendioufly con-!- 
 verting all impure Metals into Sol or Luna. 
 
 XyiL And by diflblving this Pouder after Congelati- 
 on, in new and frelh Water above prepared, it acquires 
 far greater VertuesinTranfmutation. 
 
 XVin. And from hence its Virtues and Force may 
 be augmented to an Infinity. 
 
 CHAP. LXXXIIL 
 7o prepare art Elixir from Pearl, 
 
 i. "TpAke Golden or Silver coloured Pearls, as many as 
 -■- you pleafe, Pouder them, and mix them with an 
 equal quantity of Sulphur Vive. 
 
 II. Calcine them in a Crucible, with a ftrong Fire, 
 until the Sulphur be confumed ; then add new, but not 
 lo much as before, and Calcine it as formerly. 
 
 III. Increafe the Fire, and make the Crucible red hot, 
 for four or fix hours ^ then let it cool, take out the matter 
 and bcatit fmall. 
 
 IV. Put it into a Retort, lute it well all over, and pi- 
 t\[[ in a fhongFirc, that all the Acid Sulphureous Spirits^ 
 may come torth, which are to be received in a Vclfel iialt 
 full oii A/ay Dew. 
 
 V. When all the Spirit is come over, break the Retort, 
 and take out the matter, Pouder it, and expole it to the 
 cold Air for a Night ; then put it into a well luted Retort, 
 and with a (Irong Fire Diftill it into the fame Reccnver, 
 that the yet remaining Sulphureous Spirits maybe brought 
 Over. 
 
 VI. Repeat this Work feven times, expofing it to the 
 Air, and then Diltilling of it, until the Water in the Re- 
 cipient have ail Acid Talk. 
 
 Xx 2 VII, Duul 
 
^24 Pol^grAfhices. Lib. VIIl. 
 
 VII. Dillil this Water in a gentle Fire, lell it boyl, 
 and when the Acid Spirits come forth, change the Recei- 
 ver, and put a clean Receiver to, that you may receive 
 them ap;irt. 
 
 VIII. Rectify them feven time?, that they maybe pu- 
 rified ; and in this Acid Spirit diftblve the matter left ir* 
 the bottom of the Retort, after the firft Diftillations. 
 
 IX. And in a Glafs well llopt, with a gentle Fire, di- 
 g.e(l the Solution, then filter it, and upon the remaining 
 lUidiiTolved matter, put more Acid Spirits. 
 
 X. Dilfolve by DigeRing;, and filter the Solution ; this 
 do till the greater part of the matter prepared from the 
 Pearls be dilfolved. 
 
 XI. Diltil this Solution to drynefs, and put the re- 
 m lining drv matter into the Water Diftillcd from it ; 
 purify and filter the Solution ; this do till you have a pure 
 Salt, without any Faeces ilibfiding in the Solution. 
 
 XII. Take of this Salt what quantity you pleafe, and 
 dillolve it in ffclli Acid Spirit well dephlegmated, and 
 d\^c{\. the Solution in a gentle heat. 
 
 'XIII. Then dittil to drynefs, keeping the Vinegar, and 
 calbng awa^ that which comes over firrt, becaufeitis 
 infipid; or if yoti plcafc, you may put it to the infipid 
 Dirt' lied Water. 
 
 XIV. Repeat this Work till the Salt becomes Volatile, 
 and afccnds with the Acid Spirit. 
 
 XV. And thus often difTolvc it in the faid Vinegar, 
 ahvays feparating the Flcgm which comes firlt, and re- 
 peat it till your Salt be turned into an Acetum, and riles 
 with the Acid Spirit. 
 
 XVI. This Spirit redlify fcven times, by fcparating it 
 from its Plcgm ; and in this Spirit thus reclified, diffolve 
 ih? p'. rfs;ct Metals, one part in ten parts of this Divine 
 Water. 
 
 XVII. Digeft this Solution in a Glafs well ibj^t, or 
 Menncticajly lealed, (lell any thing afceiid) until the 
 matter is fixed into a fuliblc fi^ed Salt. 
 
 XVI n. But fijlt it is to be dilfolved four times in our 
 Acid Water, and fixed and coagulitcd. 
 
 XIX. Thus have you at length an Elixir molt powerful 
 for t! e Trunlmijtation of imperfed Metals into Sol and 
 Luna. 
 
6hap. S^.Tomdefmall Pearls into great ones62^ 
 
 XX. If there be Sol or Luna diffolved in this Acid Wat 
 ter, and congealed by a continual Digellion, you will 
 bave a {lupendious Elixir for the Great Work. 
 
 XXI. This Metallick Spirit of a Mineral may be dravyn 
 from any Marchafite or Mineral, becauf^it is inherent in 
 them, and does give the Formal and ElTential Being to 
 them all. 
 
 XXII. But the way of drawing it is more facile ia 
 fome than in others. 
 
 XXIII. And the true way, according to the Chymical 
 Art, is here mort faithfully delivered, if you undcritand 
 the way of Calcining, Diffolving, DiftiUing, and luch 
 other like Chymical Operations. 
 
 XXI.V For thele things arc abfolutely ncceflary for you 
 to know, that you may feparate from the Spirit all Fj:- 
 culential Impurities, the Drofs or Lees of the Elements. 
 
 XXV. This being thus perfecied, there remains nothing 
 at lad to be done, but only to Digeli 
 
 CHAP. LXXXIV. 
 
 To mdke Jmdl Pearls into great ones. 
 
 * 
 
 I. 'T'Akeofthe le.ill, yet cleareft and brighteft Pearl;^, 
 "* what quantity you pleafe, difroh'e them in our 
 Acid Spirit, or in the Water of Mercur\-, DiiHlled Twelve 
 times, or more, till it is fweet and clear. 
 
 II. In this Water I fay, diifuh-e your Pearls in a Glafs, 
 which flop well, and put it over a gentle heat. 
 
 III. When all your Pearls are dillolved, filter the Solu- 
 tion, and purify it, and Diibll in a gentle Balneo. 
 
 IV. When the Di filiation is over,"cchobate the Dial- 
 led Water upon the remaining matter, that it may again 
 be diflblvedand purified. 
 
 ^ V. This Work reiterate fo long, tliat at length it may 
 diiTolve without any Fsces, and remain more cic.ir :v\d 
 i^^lcndid at the bottom of the AlciMbick, like true Pearls. 
 
 VI. Then have m a reidinefs Silver Moulds, which 
 let be gilded with Gold, made of that bigneis and Figure 
 you dehre your Pearls to be of. 
 
 X X z Vil. And 
 
6i6 PolygrAphkes. Lib. VHI. 
 
 VII. And with a Silver SpAtula take your matter thus 
 prepared and fill your Mould? on both parts, which let 
 be perforated with a final 1 hole, to pafs a Silver Wire or 
 Thre.id through, that the Pearls may be bored through. 
 
 VIII. Then clofe your Moulds, (being full of the"^ pre- 
 pared matter) and let them fland For two or three days 
 m a warm place, that they may harden. 
 
 IX. After which take out your Pearls from the Moulds, 
 and put them into a warm Glafs, which cover with ano- 
 ther Glafs. 
 
 X. Or rather hang them in a Phial with a Thread faft- 
 ned to them,andtyedabout_the Neck of the Phial; which 
 Phial {bp,and let it ftand in a moderate heat for fifteen 
 days, that they may be well hardned. 
 
 XI. After that your Pearls are well hardned, take your 
 Mercurial or Acid Liquor, wherein you diffolved your 
 Pearls, and reduced them to their firft matter; in which 
 Liquor let fome of your Pearl be diffolrcd. 
 
 XII. Often repeat the Dirtillation, till your Pearls are 
 turned to a Volatile Salt, and then to a Liquor. 
 
 XIII. Take this Water or Volatile Salt of Pearls, and 
 put it into the Glafs where your Pearls are fufpended. 
 
 XIV. Let the bottom of the Glais be round, but let 
 not the Pearls touch the Water, but hang as it were about 
 the middle of the Glafs, your Water covering fomcwhatg 
 more than the bottom thereof 
 
 Xy. This done, flopivpthcGlafsclofe, andlctitltand 
 to di|^eft in a warm place, or gentle heat, for a Month , 
 or io long, till your Pearls iTiine, and are of a fplendent 
 Colour, fo as to pleafe you ; then keep them, for they arc 
 pcrfcdt. • ■ 
 
 XVI. Almoft after the fame manner you may prepare 
 great and refulgent Rubies from fmall ones; but yet it is 
 after a more pcrfedl way and manner. 
 
 XVII. If you proiedl ot" the fixt Oil of Gold on melted 
 Cryfiil., you may prepare excellent Rubies orCarbtmclcs 
 ^ccorduig to Art. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 8^. To make walkdle Glafs, Cij 
 
 CHAP. LXXXVj 
 
 To make malleable Glafs, 
 
 I. *TpAke Oil of Luna Twenty Drachms, Oil of Mercu- 
 -*• ry, or its Water feven times re6lified, one Pound j 
 mix them together and Dilfil them. 
 
 II. Repeat the DiWillation till the Oleum Luns rifes 
 with the Water of Mercury in DiftiU ition 
 
 III. Dirtil this Water again till it is fixed, and convert- 
 ed into a fixed Oil ; and this repeat four times. 
 
 IV. In the fourth time the Oil of Luna is fixed with the 
 Oil of Mercury, fo that they render Glafs malleable; for 
 lb great is the Vifcofity in your Oil, that it removes the 
 brittlenefs of the Glafs, and fo leaves it of a malleable 
 temper. 
 
 V. Thereafon is, bccaufe that the Radical moifture of 
 the Glafs is multiplyed by the Radical moiikire of the 
 Metals, which is plentiful and turgent, or fwcUiiigin the 
 Oils of Luna and Mercury. 
 
 VI. Andif in thisOil made Volatile, Diamondsfiiould 
 be dilTolved, and then digefted into a'fixt Oil, it would 
 tranfmute all Glafs into Diamonds, only by projedting 
 this Oil on melted Glafs. 
 
 VII. There are alfo other precious Stones comprehended 
 within this Oil, when it is made Volatile, and digefted, 
 and fixed again by DigelUon continually, for the fpace of 
 a year. 
 
 VIII. Alfo this Oil can turn Glafs into precious Stones 
 of any kind whatfoever, if therein, (being made Volatile) 
 precious Stones of the fune kind have been diliolVed and 
 digeded with it into a fixed Oil. 
 
 IX. For as Metals are included in their fixed Oils, fo 
 are precious Stones in theirs, as Raymnnd/'ts LMllii46 doth 
 witnefs in many places; the which thing wc lliall teach 
 you in the following Chapter. 
 
 -Xx 4 CHAP. 
 
6^^ Poljigrafhices. Lib. VIIL 
 
 C H A P. LXXXVL 
 
 Jo make Carbuncles ofCryfid. 
 
 I. 'TpAke Oil of Sol tlirce Ounce?, Oil of the Vital Mer^ 
 -*- cury before prepared, t\vo Pounds; diffolvc the 
 Oil of Sol in the Water or Oil of Mercury. 
 
 II. This Diitil lb often, by cohobating the Water of 
 Mercury upon the Oil of Sol, till it does alccnd both red 
 and clear. 
 
 III. In this clear and limpid Oil diflblve the belt Ru- 
 bies, purify the Solution, and Diftil it fo often till all 
 comes over, and the Oil does iliine and fparkle in the 
 darkeft of places; (for the Goodnefs and Beauty of Car- 
 buncles confifl: in their Splendent Rays.) 
 
 IV. Keep and digefl: this Water in continual Digeftion 
 for a Year in a Glals Matrafs, Hermetically fealcd up, till 
 it is molt perfectly fixed, which will be in about a year. 
 
 V. Take this Radiant, or Glorious Red fixed Oil, and 
 projed it upon melted Glais, or rather Cryital, a Pound 
 m weight. 
 
 VI. For if you ufe lefs than a Pound weight of Crylfcil, 
 the Cr}^ftal v.ould be turned into a Medicine ; but two 
 or three Grains or Drops will be fufficicnt for a Pound of 
 melted Cryltal, and will turn it into a pure and fhining 
 Carbuncle, which you mult caufe the Lapidaries to poiilli. 
 
 VII. This Oil of Carbuncles is profitable to prelerve 
 Health, and is eqtuil in Virtues and Properties to the Oil 
 of Gold, for the confervation of the fame, and the pro- 
 longation of Life, even beyond the bounds of Humane 
 Nature. 
 
 CHAP. Lxxxvir. 
 
 7o beautify Trees with Truii thrte times in Ajexr, 
 
 I. "npAkc cf that Fniit which you would have to grow, 
 ■ -■- three times a "Vear, beat it, and expreis tlierefrom 
 the Juice, which put into a Wooden VclTcl well doled, 
 adding to it a little Salt, and place it in a Cellar. 
 
 11. When 
 
Chap. 87. 7o hemtlfy Trees with Fruit, 62^ 
 
 II. When it grows warm, diftil it in a gentle heat, 
 to obtain its Spirit j which redify, and ieparate from its 
 Flegm. 
 
 III. Keep it all, and re6lify it feven times, andrcfeive 
 the Spirit in a Glals Veffel well Itopt. 
 
 IV. The Flegm redlify feven times or more, till it c- 
 mits no Faeces, but afcends pure. 
 
 V. All the Foeces or Body of the Fruit calcine (adding 
 i>evv Fruit in Calcination) m an Earthen Pot able to en- 
 dure the Fire, and in an open Fire calcine alfo a great 
 quantity of Fruit, that you may have good irore of 
 Allies. 
 
 VI. Let the Aflies be calcined to a whitenefs : dit- 
 folve the Salt in the redlified matter, by boiling in 3 
 Glafs VelTel well ftopt. 
 
 VII. When it boils, purify the Solution by Filtrati- 
 on ; then calcine the Afhes again in a (kong Crucible ; 
 w^hich done, boil them in new Flegm fcven times rc- 
 aifed. 
 
 VIIL Purify the Solution by Filtration ,• mix all the 
 Solutions together, and dilHl them to drynefs. 
 
 IX. Calcine the Salt remaining in the bottom, and 
 %vitha gentle Fire melt it; then diflblve it again in cU- 
 ftilled Flegm, and purify it by Filtration. 
 _ X. Then diilil again, and repeat thefe Operations, 
 till you have a melt white Salt. 
 
 XI. Dillblve this Salt in the above referved Spirit, di- 
 rtil them together, and cohobate very often, till the a- 
 bove-mentioned Salt does rile with the Spirit. 
 
 XIL This Saltaiifing, you have inreadinefsthe Fruit 
 of that kind, from whence this Spirit and Salt did pro- 
 ceed. 
 
 XIII. Now beat and bruifc your Fruit, and mix it 
 with fome of your Flegm, and a little of your Spirit ; 
 mix them well, and put them to grow fowr in the Sun, 
 and let the Flegm be turned into Vinegar. 
 
 Xiy. This Vinegar diftil often, aiid in it (.lifTolvc 
 your -fixt Salt, and by reiicrated Cohobations convert it 
 into a fufibleSalt. > 
 
 XV. ThisSiffc volatilize with its Spirit ; and being vo- 
 latile, turn it into \Vatei, to which add half of your 
 $alt melted, and digelt it into a fixt Salt. 
 
 XVI. Tills tixt Salt volatihze aitir the former manner, 
 
 and 
 
6^o Poly^rdphieef. Lib. VIII. 
 
 and cwirert it into Water ; to xvhich add half of your 
 Salt melted j convert it again into a fixt Salt, by boiling 
 it in a clofe ycflfel. 
 
 XVII. This Work yoii murt do four or fcvcn times, 
 making the fixt volatile, and the volatile fixt ; and fo 
 yoii lliall attain the atorcliiid Secret ; whofe Virtue and 
 rroperty is to adorn Trees three times a year, with the 
 Fniit of its own kind. 
 
 XVIII. The way and manner of doing it, is thus : 
 Take of your melted or fixt Salt *;. and diftolve it in five 
 miarts ot common fair Water, or Aiay-d.zw : and with 
 this Water, water or fprinkle your Tree, and it will 
 caufe it to flourilh with Leaves and Fruit every three or 
 four months. 
 
 XIX. But you muft obferveto gather the Fruit as foon 
 as it is ripe ; and then prefently again to water the Tree 
 cx'cry day with a little of your former Water, wherein is 
 diifolved an ounce of your faid fixt Salt. 
 
 XX. It is alfo to be watered with other common Wa- 
 ter, not forgetting alfo very well to dung and prune the 
 iamc. 
 
 ^ XXI. Hence wc may conclude the Salt is made vola- 
 tile and fixt, by meansof the Ferment. 
 
 XXII. If you diifolve the Salt in Alay-dcw, and in 
 tliis impregnated Water moirten or (teepCorn, it will be 
 very much multiplied ; the encrcafe will be much more 
 plentiful, and the Grains and E^irs of Corn will alfo be 
 much larger. 
 
 XXIII. After this manner you may multiply and en- 
 crcafe any other Friut or Grain whatlocver, in very large 
 proportions. 
 
 CHAP. LXXXVIII. 
 7o fix Mercury mth the Salt of Tin. 
 
 I. 'T'Ake pure Salt of Tin purified froiff all its Fxccs 
 -■- 5\'ij. Mercury fcven times fublimed *iii. inix and 
 incorporate them together, and in a llrongGlafslublime 
 them. 
 
 II. Sub- 
 
Chap. 89. lofx Mercmy into an Oil. 6^t 
 
 II. Sublime a fecond time upon the Faeces which are 
 left in the bottom of the Glafs-^. 
 
 III. Then weigh it, and if it be heavier than it was, it 
 is well, and doth begin to fix a part of the Mercury witfi 
 the Salt of Tin. 
 
 IV. Continue the Sublimation of the Mercury upon 
 the FcEces, by beating and mixing them together, until 
 all be fixt, and the Mercury remain in the bottom. 
 
 V. This will be done about the fiftieth time ; for the 
 Merairy is very flowly fixt ; but at length it doth fix, 
 and give a mctallickFufion, PLsGeber witnelTeth. 
 
 VI. For the Proof of the Truth hereof, when you have 
 thus fixt Mercury, add a little new Mercury icven times 
 fublimed, viz,, about 5V- or ^ij. which you lliall mix 
 and fliblime together, and immediately about the third 
 or fourth part will be fixt by the Sublimation, and con- 
 verted into a fufible and fixt Mercury. 
 
 VII. Repeat this four or feven times, by adding to 
 your fixt Mercury, new Merairy feven times liiblimed, 
 until you have a great quantity of Mercury fixt, and 
 flowing as Wax. 
 
 VIII. One part of this pro,ie6led upon an hundred 
 parts of melted Copper, will tranfmute it into fine 
 Luna. 
 
 IX. And being proje6led upon fine Luna melted in a 
 Crucible, it will turn the Luna into a Medicine, of the 
 lame Virtue and Property. 
 
 T'o fix Mercury hto a white Oil^ which will tranf- 
 mute imptre Mttals into Sol. 
 
 CHAP. LXXXIX. 
 
 I. •TpAke pure Oil of Mars |iv. Oil of Sol ^iv. mix 
 •*- them together, and add thereto Mercury i^tv?.n 
 
 times fublimed ^ii;. mix and iublime them m a ilrong 
 
 Glals Matrals. 
 
 II. What fublimes put back to the Foece?, till at 
 
 length it be all molt perfedlly fixt. 
 
 IIL Add to it new Mercury leven times fublimed ^ii. 
 
 and 
 
6^2 Polygraphiees. Lib. VIII. 
 
 and mix them together, by beating and grinding them ; 
 andfublime fo long till that which remains in the bot- 
 tom of the Matrafs be fixt, and will melt as Wax, and 
 he congealed in the cold. 
 
 IV. Take of this matter one part, and projed it upon 
 crude Mercury one hundred parts, and the Mercury lliall 
 all of it be turned into good Sol. 
 
 V. Alfo if you project it uport Saturn, Jupiter or Ve- 
 nus, it will turn them all into fine Sol. 
 
 VI. And if this Mercury be fixt, and tinged with the 
 fixt Tin6ture of Sol, it will tranfmute all Metals into 
 Sol. 
 
 VII. For Mercury thus prepared, is true Sol opened, 
 fixing and tinging all the imperfe6l Metals into its own 
 Subrtance. 
 
 VIII. Which Subftance being perfeft and communi- 
 cable, it tranlmits its Pcrfedion to impure Metals, and 
 perfedtly digeils their indigcfted and imperfcd: Subllance. 
 
 CHAP. XC. 
 
 To fix Mercury into a, white Oil^ which rvill tranf 
 mute ifftpffre Metals into Luna. 
 
 I. 'TpAkcO/^ww L'AHd:, and Oleum Jovi^^ of each 5iii- to 
 -*- which add Mercury feven times fublimcd Jiij. 
 mix and fublimc them together. 
 
 II. Put back what is liibluned to the Faeces, and 
 repeat this Worl< fo long, till all the matter be fixt to- 
 gether in the bottom of the Glafs Matrals. 
 
 III. To this fixt Mercury add frelli or new Mercury 
 fcven times fublimed, and fublime as before, till all be 
 fixt in the bottom of the Matrafs. 
 
 IV. And that it may the fooner fix, add to every Sub- 
 limation freih Mercury : and repeat this till you have a 
 white Oil flowing like Wax, and fixt. 
 
 V. Take one part of this Oil, and project it upon an 
 hundred parts of any imperfect Metal, and all will be 
 converted into moll fine Luna. 
 
 VI. If this Oil be dilfolved or mixed with Mcrcury- 
 
 Watcr, 
 
Chap. 9 1 . To make a red linctitre qf Nitre. 6^1 
 Water, and make volatile, and again fixt by Digeftion, 
 for a year, in a ftrong GlafsMatrals Hermetically fealed, 
 you will have a white Elixir, which will project upon 
 all the imperfe6l Metals, one part tranfmuting a thou- 
 land parts. 
 
 VII. He who underttands this Art, vvill not contra- 
 di6l thefe Secrets ; yet they require an ingenious and ex- 
 quiiite Artificer or Operator to perform them. 
 
 CHAP. XCI. 
 
 T'o make a red linSture t>/'Nitre. 
 
 I. ♦TpAkc the befl: Nitre and ponder it ; calcine it with 
 ■*■ Charcoal in an Iron Crucible or Pot : diflblvc 
 the calcined matter in Spirit of May-d^My filter and di- 
 ftil it to drynefs. 
 
 II. Calcine it again with a foft and gentle Fire, ta- 
 king great care it meltnoti then diflblve, filter and di- 
 Ifil it again. • '■' • \ 
 
 III. Repeat this Work, always diflblving with frelli 
 v^,«)i-dew, until you have a fixt Oil of Nitre flowing 
 like Wax. 
 
 IV. This Oil is to be made volatile, by often diffol- 
 ving, dilHlling and exficcating of it. 
 
 V. Take of this volatile Salt, a large quantity, and 
 with yt/^>-dew, putrify it for a month in Horfe-dung in 
 a Glafs Matrafs well ftopt. 
 
 VI. Then difiil till all your matter is converted into 
 the Spirits of .May-deWy and is purely volatile, and fe- 
 parate it frpm its Flegm by a gentle heat in Balneo. 
 
 VII. That which remams in the bottom of the Vef- 
 fel, and will alcend by the heat of a Balneum, diftilp^r 
 ciners!, and repeat it leven times. 
 
 VIII. So have you the pure and univerfal Mercury of 
 the World, moit likbtil and volatile ; by the help where- 
 of moii wonderful things are to be done in Chymiitry., 
 but chiefly in the following Secrets. 
 
 C H A P. 
 
6 34 Polygrafhices. Lib. VIII. 
 
 CHAP. XCII. 
 
 To make a white Elixir, 
 
 I. ♦TpAkc of Leaf Silver, or Silver Calcined, as much as 
 
 -■• you pleaie, diflblve it in a liiflicient quantity of 
 
 this Mercury, and the Univ^erfal Liquor above prepared. 
 
 IL Digeft the Solution for Eight days in Horfe Dung, 
 
 then Diiiil it to dryncfs. 
 
 in. Cohobate that which Diitiis over upon the re- 
 maining matter, always putrifying the Solution for eight 
 days. 
 
 IV. Repeat this fo often, till the Solution of the Lu- 
 na afcends with the Spirit which diflblved itj this Wa- 
 ter Diltil feven times in new Retorts. 
 
 V. Put to this Spirit or Water as much cupellated, 
 te(ted, or refined Silver, as it will diifolve. 
 
 VI. Tliis Solution being clear and pure, put it into a 
 long Necked Glafs Matrals, which itop well, and digeft 
 it in an Athanor, until it is fixed into a white Oil. 
 
 VII. One part of this Oil willtranfmutea thoufand 
 parts of any other Metal into pure Luna ; it will alfo 
 tranlinutc crude Mercury into fine Silver, one drop there- 
 of being calt upon it. 
 
 VIII. If 3'oa yet proceed farther, and make this Oleum 
 Ltma. thus prepared Volatile, and then bring it again 
 into a fixed Oil, it will tranfmute all other Metals into 
 fine Lmia, without any Fire. 
 
 IX. And one drop being put upon the Metal, it will 
 penetrate even to the Center of the Metal, and will tinge 
 and tranlaiute into fine Luna all imperfecl Metals upon 
 which it is projeikd. 
 
 X. But it it be fcvcn times turned into a Water, and 
 then fixed again, it will Tranfmute in an nifinite manner 
 the laU inipci fed Me::ils into Luna. 
 
 XL And if it be pro;ecled upon Luna, it will turn the 
 Luna into a Medicine oi the lame vertue and property : 
 Thus will your Medicine be multiplyed ad infinitum j ncr 
 need you to du tlie lame Work ova agiun dc nuvo. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap.9?« '^^ ^^^^ ^ ^^^ Elixir. 6^$ 
 
 CHAR XCIII. 
 
 T'i? make a red Elixir for Imnfmutation of all 
 other Metals into SoL 
 
 I. npAke of the bett Sol feven times purged with Anti- 
 •*' mony, in fine Filings, or in Leaves, 1 8 Drachms, 
 diffoive it in our above prepared Spirit. 
 
 II. Digeft the Solution in a Glais Retort in Balnea Ma- 
 ria for eight days, then Diltil it in Allies. 
 
 III. Cohobate upon the matter in the Retort, (and if 
 need be, add new Spirit to help it to diifolvc) fo often, 
 till the Sol does afcend witii the Spirit in a red or white 
 Water. 
 
 IV. In this Water feven times Dirtilled, diifolvc as 
 much frelli Sol as it will take up, anddigeii this Solution 
 in a Glafs Hermetically iealed, till it be turned into a 
 moftRedOil. 
 
 V. This Oil is wonderful in preferving of Health ; one 
 drop taken once a W^cek docs prolong Life beyond the 
 bounds of Humane Nature . 
 
 VL Bcnig ^rojeded on bafe Metals, it Tranfmutes 
 them into fine Gold; and being projeded on SoJ, it chan- 
 ges it into a Medicine of the fame vertue ; and cafi oa 
 Cryfel, it produceth Rubies and Carbuncles. 
 
 VII. It alio makes Glafs malleable, and Rubies to be 
 of a relplendent Colour j it multiplys the Fruits of ail 
 lorts ot Trees, if fome drops be dilTolved in Water, and 
 the Tree watred therewith. 
 
 VIII. It likewife renders all Animals more pleafact 
 and itrong, and prolongs their Lives: Thus by this Medi- 
 cine, (which exceeds all others) is whole Nature renewed. 
 
 CHAP. XCIV. 
 
 Jo frefare the Spirits of May Dcrv for the for-- 
 mer Secrets, 
 
 I, OAther Dew in the Month of May^ with a ckam 
 *"^ wiateLinnco Cloth ipread upon tbcGiafe, which 
 
 cxpicls 
 
6^6 Polygraphke'f. Lib. VIIL 
 
 Cxpiefs from the Cloth ; thus gather a very large quantit3^j 
 and tilter it. 
 
 II. Put this into a great and capacious Glafs Matrafs, 
 which flop well, and digefl it in Horfe Dung for fou;*- 
 teen days, then Diltil it in Balneo to a fourth part. 
 
 III. This fourth part remaining, caft away, for it is 
 in othing worth; and that which was Diftillcd, digcll a- 
 $:,ain in a large Matrafs well ftopt, in Horfe Dung, for 
 tourteen days. 
 
 IV. Then Diffil to a fourth part, as before* do thus 
 four times, digelHng what is DilhUed over, and Diftil- 
 ling always to a fourth part, cafHng away every time the 
 laid fourth part remaining in the Matrafs. 
 
 V. Thus will you have a mort pure Spirit of Dew, and 
 very penetrating ; by the help whereof you may prepare 
 the Calcined Sol or Gold ; make it Volatile, and turn it 
 into Water, aswe have taught in Chap. 6i aforegoing. 
 
 VI. Thereby Salts are Calcined, made volatile, and 
 fixed, and coiwerted into a volatile Spirit or Water. 
 
 VII. And by the help thereof all the fixed Salts ofMe- 
 tals are made volatile, and converted into a Spirit or 
 Water ; and if you are indeed an Artill, you may by 
 this turn all Metals into their firlt matter. 
 
 V///. And out of this pure matter, freed from ail its 
 Farces and Excrements, is made an Elixir of a wonderEii 
 virtue in Tranfinuting of Metals- 
 
 CHAP. XCV. 
 1 he fixing (?/ Arfenick. 
 
 I. T^Ake well fublimed Arfenick^ and mix it with Oj-^ 
 -■- of Tartar, and make it into a Palte, with Watet 
 of Sal Armoniack, ib as it may be a foft Palie. 
 
 II. Put this Palle into a Glafs Matrafs well flopped, 
 and Digeft it in a temperate heat for Twenty Four hours. 
 
 III. Then take it out and grind it on a Marble, moifl- 
 cmug it with Oil of Tartar and Water of Sal Armoniack, 
 antrOigclt it aga'n, repeating this Work four tunes. 
 
 W. Then grind it well on a Marble, diffolve it in Horfe 
 Dung in a Glais Mitrals well ftopt, and congeal or eva- 
 porate upon W4j:m AlLes. , . ' 
 
 V. Diliulve 
 
Chap. ^6,7o re/ohe^ol into itsfirfl ntitter. 6'^J 
 
 y. DiifoJveitagain in Horfe-dung, and amalgamare 
 it five times ,* fo will you find your Arfenick fixed and 
 flowing as wax ; one part of which will tinge twenty 
 parts oF Copper. 
 
 VI. If this Oylbe diffolved in Spirit of May-dew, and 
 purified, and then joyned with an equal quantity of 
 Oleum Ltinay and Oleum Mercuriij and coagulated ; it 
 "will tinge yet more poxverfully. 
 
 VII. One part thereof being pcojedled upon an hun- 
 dred parts of melted Venus, will tinge and tranlinute it 
 all into fine and mofl: pure Luna. 
 
 CHAP. XCVI. 
 
 io rejolve Sol into itspjl matter. 
 
 I» VJT'Ithout regeneration no Medical or Ghymical Ar- 
 ' '^ canum is polTible to be attained ; therefore if you 
 defire to obtain any thing from the common Gold, it 
 mufl: be regenerated.- 
 
 II. If that this Gold may be regenerated, it is to be 
 reduced into its firft Principles, but chiefly into its vital 
 Sulphur, the Baliam of whole nature. 
 
 III. This Sulphur is called Gold; and Gold freed 
 from its Fetters, is enabled to cxerciie its vertue and 
 il:rength, and thofe Adions and Properties that lay hid 
 in it. 
 
 IV. To difcover this, we miift diiToive Gold with 
 Gold, that is, with the internal Sulphur of Nature, 
 %vhich lurketh or lyes hid in all things. 
 
 V. Let us with common Su<phur, fo often draw the 
 Sulphur from other things, that in its center it may 
 comprehend tlie Sulphur or' another. 
 
 VI. Take therefore common Sulphur in a very great 
 ^uantity^ vix.. as much as you pleafe ; and diilblve it 
 in common ^qn^t-ftrtis ; and circulate it in a glafs Ma-- 
 trafs well Ibppe.i, till the ^^t/rf'/orn.' bs fweet and in- 
 fipid. 
 
 Y V Vlt Thea 
 
6^li^ Poljgraphices. Lib. VUL 
 
 ' Vn. Then diaW It off" by difUllation^ and put it on 
 frcfli ; disced and clifculatc in warm Allies, till it alfo be 
 fwTCt, nhich diftil x^ft- as before. 
 
 VIII. Do thus till the AqHA-fortis will be no more 
 Avcct, but lliarp, and comes over Itrong : then force it 
 all over j and the remaining matter digeft till it wares 
 white ; and continue the heat till it grows of a pure 
 colour. 
 
 IX. This matter is fo often to be diflblvcd in the tc- 
 6lified Spirit of Wine, (the Spirit being frelh cver^time) 
 until a moft red Tin6lure does afcend with the Spirit. 
 
 X. This Tincture is to be feparated from the Spirit of 
 Wine by dilVillation in Balneo. 
 
 XL Then the Glafs is to be removed into Afhes, where" 
 tiic Tindure is to be dilHlled off j and .you are to rcdtiiie 
 it icven time?. 
 
 XII. In thisTindhirc which is the true Sulphur of Na* 
 tufe, is Sol to be diffolved, in a very gentle heat ; and 
 being fo diffolved, to be circulated, and fo often difhl- 
 led uli it afcends with the Sulphur of Nature.^ 
 
 XIII. Then diffolve more common Sol in tfcis Sulphur, 
 antl in a well (topt Glafs digett until all be converted in- 
 to a tnoft red Oyl, fixed and of a moft fweet odour. 
 
 XIV. This moft fragrant Oyl preferves and prolongs 
 life, and has wonderful effedts in tranfmutation. 
 
 XY. This Oyl wants an equal in Alchymy : for one 
 part thereof will trajifmutc a thoufand parts of any 
 nhperfcbt Metal j by projedting it thereon. 
 
 CHAP. XCVII. 
 
 To mAki the Spirit ^/Mercury. 
 
 I. T"Ake Mercury fublimate %]. of the beft Potters 
 ■*■ Clay tbii;. poudcr them both, and with Spirit of 
 M'ly-dew, malax them together, and make little Balls 
 ti creof, \vhich dry. 
 
 ,11. Being dryed, moiffen them with Wine, and dry 
 a<ain : tlien put them into a Retort well luted, and give 
 hrc by degrees for four and twenty Hours. 
 
 ni. If 
 
4G!iap.'9^. Tdinake a Spirit of Lime, 6\^ 
 
 III. If any thing fublime into the neck of the Retort, 
 mix it with more Clay, and moiften it with the liquor 
 which comes oyer, and again diftil it, till nothing fub- 
 ilme, but that the Mercuty pafles over in a Spirit. 
 
 IV. This Spirit redifie Icven times at the leafi 
 
 V. With this Spirit you may^do wonderful things in 
 tranfmutation of Metals, for which caufe I have inlefted 
 it among thefe Secrets* 
 
 CHAP, xcvjir. 
 
 *To fftajce a Spirit of Lime^ which mil diffahe 
 all things, 
 
 1. 'T^AkeQuicklinie, what quantity you pleafe, and 
 ■*- diftil Spirit of Wine from it ten or fifteen times ; 
 
 renewing the Spirit, and often pouring fteOi on the Cal^ 
 
 or Lime, remaining at the bottom. 
 
 II. Take of this Calx three Parts, of Potters Clay 
 
 eight parts; of pure Salt of Tartar one Part: mix them 
 
 together, and in a luted Retort, diihl them with a flrong 
 
 Fire, until all the Spirits come forth. 
 Ill; Re<ftifie this Spirit %yell : Then will it diffolve all 
 
 Metals, and work Wonders in Tranfmutation. 
 
 IV. If you diffolve Cryftal in this Spirit ; you Oiali 
 have a Salt of Cryftal ; and a, true Secret for diilolving 
 the Stone in both Reins and Bladder. 
 
 V. The pofe is half a Drachm in Wild Alexander 
 Water : It isalfo a fecrct, fine and fafe Remedy iti the 
 Gout* 
 
 CHAP. ^CIX. 
 
 'to tranfmnte Jupiter into Luna. 
 
 i.- npAke Jupiter J melt it, and quench it in the Watfif 
 -*- of tg^lT-icls, and it will loie its crackling and tw- 
 iineli of mdting/t 
 
 T Y 2' llf T-heri 
 
6^o Poijgrdph/ces, Lib. VlII. 
 
 II. Then take it, and amaJganutc it with the like 
 quantity of well wallicd Merairy. 
 
 III. Wal"h the Amalgama with common Water and 
 decrepitated ^alt: and when the Jupiter rather than the 
 J^lnaIgama is cleat or clean, put it into a Retort, and 
 dilHl it with a rtrong Fire, that the Mercury may bcfc- 
 parated horn the Jupiter. 
 
 IV. WaOi your Merairy and clcanfc it, by prcfTing it 
 through Leather, and again amalgamate it with the 
 Jupiter, and walh the Amalgama as before, with Salt 
 and Water. 
 
 V. Diftil the Amalgama again with a ftrong Fire : 
 The Mercury ^vall^ and prefs through Leather, amal- 
 gamate it with Jupiter, and diltil twelve times. ^ 
 
 VL At Jait mix halt a partof Luna with it (the Mer- 
 cury being fcparated from it ,•) then taft that Mixture, 
 ai!((you will rind your Luna much augmented. 
 
 Vll. Tliis is done by waQiing and difHlling, and a- 
 malpmating with the Jupiter j for fo is the Mercury 
 fiK(d, and by its own Sulphur turned into Luna. 
 
 VIIL But ifgood Luna had been added to it at firft, 
 the Work would have been done fooner and better j for 
 the Luna will lurden the Jupiter. , 
 
 CHAP. C 
 
 7o make a rvhite Elixir to tranfmute all Metals 
 into Luna. 
 
 1. *TrAke Mercury, feven times fublimed ; diiToIve it in 
 -■■ common A.j'ia-fortis j digell the Solution for tcu 
 i\z''''' in Bc.bteo Al^iri^, and in Balneoi^iiXA it todrynefs. 
 
 II. The matter being dry, fubliinc it : and dilfolve a 
 pirt of the niattcf L>y it lelf, in a cold and moift place : 
 The Solut on digeli ibr ten Days, then diftil it, and re- 
 peat the Sittillation three times, which keep in a Glafi 
 dole l!;cpi>€d. 
 
 HI. Theotlicr partof the Mercury fublimc fo often in 
 a Kcton, till it be hxcd in the bottom thereof. 
 
 -^ IV. To 
 
Chip. 100. To make A tphite Elixir, Sec. 641 
 
 IV. To this fixed part ioyn an equal part of the Spirit 
 of Mercury, as it is prepared and diftillcd above, and in 
 a Glafs fealed up, putriiic it in Balneo for fittcen days, 
 till it ^rows white. 
 
 V. This white matter fublime in Afhes, into the Sul- 
 phur of Nature. . 
 
 ^ VI. This Sulphur diflblve with two Parts of your Sp'- 
 irit before referved ; digeft the Solution in Balneo for ten 
 Days. 
 
 yll. Then gently diftil off the Spirit, and what re- 
 mains in the bottom, is the Oyl of the Sulphur of Nature, 
 which is to be fermented with an equal part of the Oyl 
 of Luna, then digeft tiH it be fixed, and is become per- 
 (cdly white, in a Glafs Matralswellclofed. 
 
 VIII. This being pro;e(5led upon fufed Luna in a 
 Crucible, th? Luna will become as brittle as Glafs. 
 
 IX. One part of this Glafs, will tinge a thoulknd parts 
 of Venus into true Luna. 
 
 X. The Oy! of Luna for this fecret is thus to be pre- 
 pared, Take of the firft Luna in Leaves |iv. dilfolve ic 
 in ^aua-fortis, d'lgcCt the Solution for a month in Bi-Jneo, 
 
 XI. This digeitcd matter diltil per Balnettm, nith a 
 gentle heat : And to the liquid matter remaining in the 
 bottom, put rcdified Spirit of Wme, fo much as may 
 over-top It about four Inches. 
 
 XII. This matter digeft w ^4/«fo ten Days, then diftil 
 oft the Spirit of Wine, 
 
 XIW. The remaining matter at bottom, digcfcw 5,?/- 
 neo for one hundred and fifty Davs, till it putrincs aiul 
 grows white. 
 
 Xiy. This white matter fublime, then diflblve it in 
 Alchohfatc Spirit of Wine, and digclt it m B^..--, mr 
 ten Days; arter which abfcrad the Spirit, and thic 
 which remains in the bottom is the Ovl of Iui:a.ind the- 
 Fermentof the white Stone. 
 
 XV. If this Oyl be filtrcd and diifalved in the Spiiit 
 of Mercury, it wiJl at lait becoane a true StoHc, and of 
 admirable venues, as is before dec bred- 
 
 XVL After thw lame manner may you v.ork with Sol, 
 to make the red Elixir, which will tratilamie all other' 
 Metals into fine Sol. ' : 
 
 ^'y^ C fj A F. 
 
<$42, Foljgrapbices. Lib, VUV 
 
 C H A P. CI. 
 
 7o make a red JhSfureofMzts for Sol. 
 
 I. T^Tfiblve Iron in our diffolving Water, and digcft the 
 k *-^ folation in Balnea for ten days. 
 
 . II. Then draw off the AcfuA-fortis in a gentle heat r 
 the matter remaining in the bottom diffolvc in Spirit of 
 Vinegar, digeft it ten days, and then diftil off th^ Vine- 
 gar. ^ . . • 
 
 IIT. pifTolveit again in frefh Spirit of Vinc^afV and 
 
 digeiiit for ten days/« Balneo and then diflil ofttheSpi- 
 
 "^it :'!-fupra. . » 
 
 i ly. To the matter remaining in the bottom affufc 
 
 Spivir of Wine, fo much as may cover it fix inches over, 
 
 fMid dig Jii the matter in Balneo for ten days. 
 
 V. Abflracl the Spirit of Wine by diftillation, and 
 TiKrcdtindure of yJ-/<3'rf remaining in the bottom diftil 
 
 - ^jU it afce.ids by the Alembick, which re6lify three or 
 tour times, or till itbemoftpure. 
 
 VI. Then from its Earth draw a Salt, which purify by 
 many folutions and calcinations, and then joyn it with 
 an equal weight of itsTind^ure, or red re6lifyed Oil. 
 
 VII. Divert thele together till they are fixed into a 
 Rubine, •which ferment with Oletim Soils, whofe prepa- 
 ration we have taught in feveral places before goings 
 
 VIII. The matter being all fixed, caft one part upon 
 three parts of melted Sol; atid then upon a thoufand 
 weight of Luna, or any other Metal, and all will be 
 goodo')/. ' ' ' ' . ' 
 
 IX. But farther, if this matter be joyned with the vo- 
 Uiile Tin*5hire of Mars, and diffolved, and then again 
 fixed; its virtue in tranfmuting of imperfect Metals, will 
 be thereby veiT much increafed, ^Irnod ad infinittiw. 
 
 X. And if that one part tliereef be projected upon. 
 (looboo) an hundred -thouland parts of any imperfect 
 
 . Metal, it Will be all-l'ranfmutcd into good Sol. 
 
 XI. -And if tlii? Medicine be caft upon Sol, it will be. 
 tranfmutcd into a- Medicine of cqiKi virtue to the for- 
 mer. • '- 
 
 ' CHAT. 
 
■Clfcip* 102. To mike an Elixir 0/ Jupiter. 6\i 
 
 6 H A P. cA. 
 
 7o mikt 4^> Eliiir and Meciume of Jupiter for 
 ,. ,, the whffe Work, 
 
 I. "^Ake Mercury of Tin, half a pound ; diifolve it in 
 ,;'%|"common Aqna-fortis, and cUgeit it m BaUeo. tot 
 ten days. 
 
 H. Then diftil off the AquA-fortis to drynefs, and re- 
 peat this work three times, viz,. difToIving that which 
 remains in the bot.tom, with new Aqtia-fomsj ^nd 
 digcfl: ten days, and diftilling off the Aqtm-fortis to 4rjr 
 
 ■ficfs. ,;■; 
 
 III. Repeat the folution again with frelli Aq'^a-forty-^; 
 digcft utfuprtHy and then draw off the Spirit in Afhcf .. 
 • IV. Put what remains in the bottom into a llrong 
 Glafs Matrafs well luted, and fublime it with a iiron^ 
 fire for fix hours. 
 
 , . V. What fublimcs, mix with freOi Mercury, drawu 
 from Jupiter as. aforefaid, incorporate them tos^ether, 
 and make an Amalgama. 
 
 VI. This Amalgama wafh well, and filter it with 
 clear Oil, fo that the Mercury may not appear to run. > 
 
 VII. But a Pouder being made of both Mercuries with 
 Aflies, let it be fublimed for fix hours ; and to this mat- 
 ter afid an Amalgama of Liina with the Mercury of Ju-^ 
 piter, and fublimc till all remain fixed m the. bottom of 
 the Veffcl, and melts like Wax. 
 
 VIII. And this is done, by adding ne^w 'Mercury of 
 Jupiter fublimed, and then diffolve in A.jiM-frns, .uid 
 again fublimed J thus wiU it become flscd and flowing 
 like Wax. 
 
 IX. This MeAicinc being pro)e(5led upon Saturn, Jupi- 
 ter, Venu8 or Mercury, converts them ail. into finQ Luna ,• 
 one part bcmg projected, upon an hundred ofanyimucr- 
 fetft Metal. ^ 
 
 X. And if it be projected upon fine Luna, all the Lu- 
 na will be tamed into a Medicine, of equal Virtue witli 
 th; foriner^ 
 
 Yy4 CflAL. 
 
644 Fel;^rafhicef, ^ Lib, VIII. 
 
 ' 19 H A P. ,CW. 
 
 j4 kjjer tinciurf for th white Work, 
 
 I. 'TpAke common Salt diffolved in May-dicw, and (© 
 A otten coagulartd, till it will melt in the fire like 
 Wax ; which that it may the fooner be pertbrmed, every 
 time you coagulaiev melt it in the crucible, and lb caft 
 it ir.to the Water of yt/^y-devv. 
 
 II. Then it is to be filtred, and this is to be fo ofteo 
 dotie, till it will melt like Wax as aforefaid. 
 
 III. Take 0^ this matter, ?5xix. of pure white Salt 
 drawn from Egg-lliells 5xix. Mercury fevcn times fub- 
 limed and dulcified, ^xx. pure white Salt of Vitriol 
 ^xviii- mix all well together. 
 
 IV. Then put them into a (irong Glafs Matrafs well 
 luted, and fublime them with a (hong fire four or fevetj 
 times. 
 
 V. To this matter add of fublimcd and fixt Arfcnick, 
 fxviii. of calcined Luna 5xix. of fublimed and fixed Sal- 
 Ar;:iontck 5x\aii- mix them. 
 
 VI. Then fublime them, and repeat the fublimations 
 upon the faces, till the whole matter be fixed, and no- 
 tliinw more will afcend. 
 
 VII. Then dilfoive this whole inatter in a cold and 
 moiii: place, letting it run pfr ^f/i£^«i«w ; filter, purify, 
 and coa?.ulate the Solution. . \ 
 
 VIIT. This Coagulum dilTolve \n May-(\z\v, till all 
 Ix: converted into a fixed Oil, 
 
 IX. 0:;e part of this Oil pro;e6lcd upon an hundred 
 parts of fuicd V^nus, n-iil tranfmutc it all into fine 
 Luna. 
 
 X. Thefc Salts thus prepared and made fufible, receive 
 their chiefJt Tincture from fhc Arienick, Mercury, and 
 Lui:a, which are all dilTolved with theie Salts and by 
 Art prepared, and converted into a while fixed Oil. 
 
 XL This Oil wonderfully tingeth, and by tinging 
 dodi fix ; UT it hasm it Iclf fixedncls, and permanency, 
 4ii tlie lire. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chapb 104. Of the Thyficd StofteofDenr. ^45 
 
 C H A P. CIV. 
 
 Of the Phyjical Stom made of Dew, 
 
 X. T^Ake a great quantity W AprlU or Afay-Atw, an(l 
 -»• dilHl It with a gentle heat, till it becomes fomc- 
 what thick in the bottom of the Alembick. 
 
 II. PutintothisWater a quantity of the Loadftone, 
 and from the f»»e with a very ftrongfire, in a Retort^ 
 draw forth an acid or lliarp Spirit, which rectify fcven 
 times and referve it, 
 
 III. The Loadftonc calcine with a ftrong fire in a 
 ftrong Crucible for three hours, and extra(5^ a moft pro- 
 fitable Salt, with the flegm of the Dew, before diitit- 
 led, by boiling the Loadftorie in the faid flegm. 
 
 IV. Filter the flegm and diftil it in an Alepbick, m*^ 
 the bottom of which, you fhaii find a moli pure white 
 Salt.' J.'^' ■ ■' ' / ■ .;■•' 
 
 V. This Salt calcine in a Crucible with a ftrong fire, 
 three or four hours ; and then dilTolve it in the Spirit of 
 May-^^w^ before prepared. 
 
 . VI. This folution filter and diflil with a very gentle 
 heat, and that wjhicli remains in . the bottom, diflblve, 
 and filtrate, fo long till it emits no faeces in diifolution, 
 and remains in the bottom of the Alembick, in the 
 form of a moft plive white Oil. ; 
 
 VII. Sublime or caufe this Oil to afcend with a very 
 - Itrong fire into the Sulphur of nature : This Sulphur dil- 
 
 folveinthe Acid Spirit above prepared and referved. 
 
 VIII. This Solution purify, and dry or evaporate it 
 by ditiillation ; and again diflblve it and evaporate it 
 'by diftillatiofl ; and this fo often repeat till your Sulphur 
 is diflblved into a volatile Water, and afcends by the 
 Alembick' with the acid Spirit. 
 
 IX-. And thus is this acid Spirit made the true Vine- 
 gar of the Chymiilsj moft iharp, and diifolving all 
 things. 
 
 X. Take of this moft Iharp Vinegar, twenty eight 
 drachms: of the fineftand beftSol; feventcen drachms ; 
 
 diirolve the Sol in the laid Vinegar. 
 
 « 
 
 XI. Digeft 
 
645 Fdy^raphiees. -^ ^tib*. VIB?. 
 
 XI. Digcft this folution in a Mat^fs well ftopt for 
 a month, then put it upon an Alciabick and dilHl it 
 todrynefs. 
 
 XII. What diilils, cohobs^te upon'tfic nfatt^remain- 
 ing in the bottom, and repeat this work fo often, till it 
 is all converted into a red fixed Oyl imh^Jb^ttomtrf" thp 
 Matrafs or diftillatory. , ,_ '\v'ry\\^ , ' 
 
 XIII. Separate thc^flegm or infipid drqps of Water, 
 which came over firit in the diftillation oF our Vinegar ; 
 and put that only upon the remaining matter which is 
 (harp or acid, till it is all fixed into a red fijc?4 Qii- li 
 
 XIV. One part of this will turn a thousand parts of 
 jiny imperfedl Metal into pure Sol: and if it be pro- 
 ieaedupon an equal weidit of fine Sol, it will convert 
 it all into a Medicine of the fame Virtue and property, 
 
 XV. And if youdiflblye this Medicine with new anf! 
 •frefh acid Spirit, and digeft it again in a well ftopt 
 Matrafs, till all is turned into a red fixed Oil, yoiv 
 Medicine will be multiplied both in quantity and Vir- 
 tue. 
 
 CHAP. CV. ^ 
 
 I. » • . - < 
 
 'to jfjc Mercury. 
 
 I. »T<Ake Mercury dulcified and often fublimed eight 
 A drachms : Salt-peter depurated and freed from 
 all its common Salt, as much : mix them together. 
 
 II. Sublime them in a ftrong Matrafs, with a very 
 Itrong fire : then fublime without the faeces which ar» 
 left in the bottom of the Glafs. 
 
 III. And lb long fublime, till it is fixed in the bot- 
 tom ; fo have you a fiifible, fixing, and tinging Mercu- 
 ry ; of wliich one part will go upon an hundred parts of 
 melted" Venus. 
 
 IV. And if this fixal Oil ofMerairy, be joyncd with 
 the fixcd.Oil of Luna, it will tinge the more powerftilly, 
 and its virtues will be multipiyed. 
 
 V. And if this fixed Oil hediflblved in our firong Vi- 
 I7fgar, prei>arcd in the former Chapter, it will be all 
 
 converted 
 
Ci^ap. 167. To extra^ ^^ Mercury, &c, ^$47 
 
 converted into a Spiritous Water, which will penetrate 
 
 and -diiTolve all things. 
 
 ., y\f And herewith are performed ftrange and ftupen- 
 
 dibus fecrets, with Sol, Luna, and precious Stones, in 
 
 (brdcrto Mansjiealth, as alfo foe making Glafs mallea- 
 
 tJ?, ;^d G^ycnjii^.ip ipato precious ftoncs.-,. 
 
 .. , , ' . ■ ! vcf.rfMiar. ■■ 
 
 C H A P. CVI. 
 
 Jo congeifl Meroury into Luna. 
 
 I. npAke Auyipigmentum, half a pound : Mercury Sqb- 
 •*- limate as much ; mix them, and grind them' till 
 they beconic a molt fine pouder. ^ ;' 
 
 II. Put it intp a Retort, and diftil (according to Art) 
 in AOics a gummofe liquor, which redlify feven tiiAes. 
 
 III. Then take well waCbed Mercury four ounces, 
 which amalgamate with filings or leaves of the mort 
 pure Luna : wa{h the Amalgama with Salt and Spirit 
 pf Vinegar till it he white and pure. 
 
 IV. Ijubibc this Amalgama in the former liquor, and 
 jdigeft in a Matjrafs covered with Ljitum Sapientite olqfe 
 ftopt in a ftrong fire, for four days, and increafe the tire 
 for eleven Hours.( . ^ 
 
 V. At laft melt it in a Crucible, and it wilX be moft 
 fine Luna. 
 
 VI. And if you add a little Calx of Tin well calci- 
 ned and well walhed, it will be better, and you will 
 find in the fufjon a, greater ^ijuantity of Luna. 
 
 CHAP. CVII. 
 
 To extra^ thelAQioxcY <?/ Antimony , 
 
 • I. ^Ake flowery of Antimony made fsrfe in an i 
 " -"-en VelTel, as much as you pleale j and add 
 
 ! earth- 
 
 .thefe- 
 
 to pure Salt of Tartar m very fine Pouder, Qtiickyhme, 
 
 and 
 
64,i Totj/grdphiees. lib; VIH. 
 
 andSal-Armoniack, of each as much as of the flowers of 
 Antimony. 
 
 n.#T6 thefe add of the bcft Spirit of Wine a fufficicnt 
 quantity; and in a Glafs Matrafs well ttqpt, digeft 
 them for a month in warm Horfe-dung, or in Balneo. 
 
 III. Then di^il, and at the end of the diftillatioi'i, 
 you will find a running Mercury of Antimony in the bot- 
 tom of the Receiver. 
 
 ■' '' ^-'l , ' 1 [\ .J — 
 
 C HAP. CVIII. 
 
 7o convert JLead ifita Mercury. 
 
 I. 'Tp Ake of the belt Salt of Borax three ounces : Salt of 
 -■- Lead three ounces : Oil of Tartar three ounces : 
 filings of Lead four ounces: Sal-Armohiack three oun- 
 ces; The beft Spirit of Wine fix ounces J mix them well 
 together. - , ■ '' 
 
 IL Put them into a Glafs Matrafs, ftop it well, ancJ 
 digeft ia Balneo for a month ; then diftil^ and a run- 
 ning Mercury will be drawn from the Lead. * .. 
 lu. This Mercury you may eafily fix into Luna with 
 Oleum Luna ; and into Sol, with OUum SolLf ; the man- 
 ner and way of doing which, you jnay- coHeci out of 
 fome of the aforegoing Chapt-ers. 
 
 CHAP. CIX. 
 
 ji tincfure of Sol for the tranfmutathnofLunst, 
 
 I. T^Ake of the mineral of Sol, Cwhich has not yet 
 -*• j>aft the fire) one pouivi, beat' it into bits, or 
 irrto a grofs pouder, and put it into a well luted Rc- 
 tcnt. 
 
 II, Diftil with a ftrong fire, and what comes over.. 
 Jcccp m the Rc>:.ip'cnt doie Itopt. 
 
 in. What 
 
Chip. 109* A 7 Mtire of So\y &c. 649 
 
 III. What remains in the Retort, expofe (whilft it is 
 yet hot) to the cold Air for a Night ; and in the morn- 
 ing put it into the Retort again, arid diftil it as before 
 into the fame Recipient. 
 
 IV. What remains in the bottom of the Retort, ex- 
 pofe again (whilft it is yet hot) to the cold Air for a 
 whole night ; the next mornilJg put it into the Retort 
 again and diftil it. 
 
 V. This work repeat fo often till you have a very 
 great quantity of Water. 
 
 VI. Then take your Mineral which remains in the 
 bottom of the Retort, and difTolve it in a ftrong Aqua- 
 fortis. _ • .'.'.'. 
 
 VII. Puri^ the Solutioii, and digeft it for a whole 
 month in Balneo MarU. 
 
 VIII. Then diftil to drynefs, and cohobate the Wa- 
 ter diftilled off upon the feces till it grows fweet. 
 
 IX. After which, diifolve the matter remaining in 
 the bottom, wath the above refcrved Water (in the^re- 
 ceivcr well ftopped) drawn from the mineral expofed to 
 the cold Air. 
 
 X. Being diffolved, filter and purify the Solution; 
 putiifie it for a month in Balneo j then diftil to drynefs : 
 cohobate, and diftil again, until your matter afccnds 
 the Alcmbick in a wonderful Salt. 
 
 XI. This Salt dilTolve, and diftil till it is converted in- 
 to an Acid Water, which rcdtify, and free it from ail 
 its infipid flegin. 
 
 XII. Then in this mofu ftrong reclified Vinegar, dif- 
 folve Sol calcined with Salt and Mercury : all being well 
 diffolved, purify the Solution and digeft it (abltraiting 
 the flegm if any be) until the matter by a conftant di- 
 geftion is converted into a red and and fixed Oil. 
 
 X'lII. This Oil (as the other above prepared red Oils) 
 may be mukiplycd, and its Virtue and Power extend- 
 ed in like manner. 
 
 XIV. One part thereof will pro;e6l upon athoufand 
 parts of auy imperfedt Metal, and tianlmute it into 
 inoft fine Sol, without comparifon. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
65A Potygraphkes. Lib.VIIfc 
 
 C H A P. ex. ' 
 
 J tMure of Luna, for ctkr Metals. 
 
 I'.'T'Ake of the mineral of Luna in grofs Poudcr twd 
 -■■ pounds : Mercury fevcn times liiblimed half i 
 pound : mix them together, and in Bdlnco MarU putri- 
 fy them for a month. 
 
 II. Then diftil into a Recipient well joyned or luted 
 to the neck of the Retort : what comes over into the 
 Receiver, keep therein well flopped. 
 
 III. The matter remaining in the Retort cxpofe while 
 it, is yet hot, to the cold Air for a night : break the Re- 
 tort, and if any thing be fublimed into the neck there- 
 of, bruife and grind it, and mix it again with the mat- 
 ter. 
 
 rV". Then dilHl it as before, and keep the liquor that 
 cornes over into the Recipient, with the other clofe fbpt * 
 and expofe the matter whilft yet hot to the cold Air for 
 a night «r/«pr4. 
 
 V. What fublimes or afcends, if any be, mix with 
 the remaining matter, and again dittil in a new Re- 
 tort. 
 
 VI. This work fo often repeat, till you have a very 
 great quantity of Acid Water, which re6tify, andfepa- 
 rate from its Hegm. 
 
 VII. Then diflblve of thctmatter remaining in the 
 Retort four ounces; in a llifficient quantity 0^ Aquit^ 
 fortis: you ^rc not to diflblve all your matter, bccaufc 
 It will be too much ; four ounces will be enough. 
 
 VIII. Digeft the Solution in Balneo for a month, then 
 diftil and dry it : and this work fo often repeat, till your 
 diifolved matter is converted into an Oil. 
 
 IX. DilTolve this Oil in the Acid Water above rc- 
 fervcd in the recipient: then diftil it to drynifs, and fo 
 often repeat the diltillation, till all the Oil afcends with 
 the Acid Water, and the whole becomes one Acid. 
 
 X. Rectify the Acid liquor feven times ; and therein 
 diifolve a fit (juantity of Luna, and repeat the Solution 
 and DiftiUatioii, till it be all turned into a fixed Oil ve- 
 ry clear, 
 
 XL Thi? 
 
Cha;p. 1.1^ T^o make areAOU of Vitriol 6^t^ 
 
 -XI;ThikOU converts aUimperfedt Metals into fine 
 Liina. • '■ • / " ' . 
 
 XII. And ifyou diflblrc it again in the above lefervcd 
 Acid Water, and according to art digeft it into a fixed 
 Oil of Luna, one part will go upon ten thpufand Parts 
 of any impcrfe<a' Metal. 
 
 XIII. And being projeded upon Luna, it concerts it 
 into a Medicine' of the lame virtue and property. 
 
 CHAP. CXL 
 
 To make a redOil of Vitriol^ a f tent in the cffre 
 of all Difeafes. 
 
 I.TpAke Salt of Vitriol a pound : make it red by ma- 
 -*- nifold Calcinations and Solutions, fo often itera- 
 ted, till it becomes to the higheft rednefs, 
 
 II. DilTolve it in the beftredified Spirit of Wine three 
 pounds ; and digeft the Solution ia Balneo Marie for 
 a month. 
 
 III._ piftil it in a Retort, with a ftrongfire ; cohobate 
 the Spirit up©n the red Salt, and 16 often repeat the Co- 
 hobation, till with the Spirit of Wine, a red Oil afcends ; 
 or the Spirit is tinged with a red Tincture frcfin the Salt 
 of Vitriol. 
 
 IV. Diftil this tinged Spirit m Balneo Maria y with a 
 gentle heat, and the red Tincture will remain in the bot- 
 tom. 
 
 V. The Spirit of Wine thus denudated of its Tincture, 
 put upon the Salt of Vitriol again, that it may be again 
 tinged. 
 
 VI. Repeat this till your Salt of Vitriol is all come 
 over with the Spirit of Wine, or converted into a Vo- 
 latile Tin6ture. 
 
 yil. This Tindure feparate alfo fr8m the Spirit of 
 Wine, andredtifie it three or foar times by a Retort in 
 Allies. 
 
 VIII. In this redtified Tincture dilTolve the Calx of 
 Sol ; lb will it become fixed by; rpieans thereof, and both 
 converted into an Oil. • - -^ '■■ ■'- 
 
 IX. This 
 
6^t Pofygraphiees, Lib. Vllt 
 
 .IX. This being by art made volatile, and then fixed 
 again, becomes a very great medicine curing all Dilca- 
 fes; and purifying or purging the Icprofy orall Metals. 
 
 X. One grain ot it is fuflicient for the prolongation and 
 confervatian of human life for many years ; and for cu- 
 ring of any difeafe. 
 
 XI. One grain alfo is enough to tranfmutc a pound 
 of Saturn, Jupiter, Mercury or Luna into the moit fine 
 Sol. 
 
 CHAP, CXII. 
 
 Jo extrA^ A red TMurefrom Arfenick, 
 
 Ij'TpAke Cryftal Arfcnick half a pound : Ponder it vc- 
 -■- ry fine, and diflblve it in common Aqha-fortis 
 fcven times dillilled and rectified. 
 
 II. Filter and purify the Solution, and digcft it in BaU 
 neo for fifteen days, then diftil to drynefs. . 
 
 III. Diflblve again in the felf fame Water that came 
 over, cohobate upon the foces, diffolve, clarify, filter, 
 and diftil ; and do thus fo often, till it diffolves without 
 any faeces, and the folution becomes of a red colour, 
 with a white Salt fettling at bottom. 
 
 IV. Separate this Salt, and keep it for the white Tin- 
 6ture, to projed: for the white. 
 
 V. Now take only the Solution, and put to it a 
 fourth part of Sol : but let the Sol be firft diffolved in 
 Aqun Rc^ia. 
 
 " VI. Then joyn the Solutions, and digelt them, in 
 BAlmo Adarii for a month, and then dilfil to dryncfs. 
 
 VII. Cohobate, or again put back the Water to_ the 
 fsces and again difTolve, purify and filter the Solution, 
 and dil-til to dryncfs. 
 
 VIIT. Diirolve again, and repeat this work, till it 
 emits no farces, but your matter is converted mtoa moft 
 rubicund Oil. 
 
 IX. This Oil circulate in aGlafs Matrafs Avith a long 
 neck well flop'd, till the Oil is ib fixed, as that it will 
 i^ot in the ieall alcend. 
 
 X. Take 
 
^haj^.iij. Conclupon of thu Eighth Book 5^| 
 
 . X. Take of this Oil one penny weight, and project it 
 Upon fine Luna one pound, fuied in a Crucible, and it 
 Ivill tranfmtite it aU into tlae moit pureSoU 
 
 . Chap, cxiii. 
 
 Ihe conclusion of this eighth Booh, 
 
 i.. T Peter John Faher here publifll thefe Arcana for the 
 
 J- producition of Sol and Liina, and dedicatt^ tl^.cm to 
 the Sons of Philofophy^ ndt as having been all experi- 
 enced by me; btit as they are agreeable to reafqnj the 
 principles of Alchymy and true fundamentals ot Art; 
 I am unwilling to draw ytlU into expences, or caule 
 you to exhault your Trealure, con fume or lofe your 
 time : my defign is that you may reap Fruit by our In- 
 itrudions; .• 
 
 il.. For this purpole it is neceflary that w^ Convert 
 Metais whether pure or impure into a pure Salt : for it is 
 only profitable to us thit by aMetallick Sulphur we tinge 
 the; faline parts of Metals: to which purpdfe the Arcanjt 
 in this prelent work w^hoUy tend : teaching how Me- 
 tals and Minerals may be converted into a pure faline 
 and ftifibie fubftance. 
 
 HI. Thus proceeding inthis Artof Alchytfty, you will 
 not blame but praife me, for that I advife you not to 
 things vain, but fuch as are advantageous and profitable. 
 This istliefecret in, Alchymy as I have fiid, to convert 
 Metais into a fiafibleSalti to volatile this Salt with thf; 
 Spirit that turned the Metal into luch a Salt j to make 
 the volatile fipct, and the fixt volatile again ; and this 
 again fixt, till the Royal Sulphur is able to dlgeil and 
 tinge the Imperfect Metals into Sol and Luna. 
 
 IV". This is done by Dilfolution and Coagulation. 
 This is the Sum and accomplillinien": of the wiiok Artj 
 there is nothnig more true in this leaning j God him- 
 felf is witnefs. By the Arcana here laid dcS^n, -you ma/ 
 fee how fruitful Alchymy is in the production of Sol an. I 
 Luna : but this you will never compleatiy perceive, un- 
 ities ycU und^riund the humuhm Radicdf or Mercury 
 
6^4 Polygraphices. Lib. V HI. 
 
 of MctaTs ; and how to free and depurate it, from its 
 impurity and (aces. 
 
 V. For the tranl'nuitation of Metals confilb only in 
 the pure and fixed Metalhck Mercury or radical moiflurey 
 educed by patience and conltancy in operating ; for they 
 require a long time to be brought to a laudable and 
 dctircd end : Art is iCng and tedious, and requires a pa- 
 tient, learned, expLit, and conltant Operator. Chy- 
 mical fmits are not fuddenly brought to maturity, but 
 by length of time, and a previous and continual digeftion, 
 therefore is patience and conltancy lb reiiuifitc. 
 
 VI. Chymilhy imitates Nature, and is tedious iii di- 
 geiling and pcrfecfing of Metals. The very Fruits of 
 Vegetables call for a Years digeition ; much more will 
 the incorruptible Fruits of Minerals and Metals exa6l a 
 longer time to accomplilh their maturity and perfedUon : 
 for the Metal lick fublhnce or Sulphur cannot be per- 
 fectly and abfolutcly united with its Mercury or Radical 
 juice, but by length of time, and a previous digettion. 
 
 VII. The perfcdion of all Metals confilfe in the well 
 depurating or their Metallick juice or moilture ; and io 
 abiolute a union between them, that the ftrength of 
 fire ll-.all not be able to feparate them. Therefore think 
 not much of the time you imploy in depurating and di- 
 gefting of this Mercury, or Radical moiifwej or Juice of 
 Mora kin thele our proceeding Arcana. 
 
 W\\\. For thereby it is mani felt that the Metallick 
 ;aiceor nioiitiire is freed troni its Elementary f^culencies, 
 and by digedion perfedUy united and ioyned together. 
 The truth of thefe things! doubt not of iii the Icalf, al- 
 though I have not adually experienced them all, becaulc 
 they are clear by the principles of Art and Nature, the 
 latter of which will not deceive you, if you acl according 
 to her Method. 
 
 IX. I have experienced fbme of thelis fecrets to be true • 
 whtrefore I beljevc the xd\ to be lo too : and I doubt 
 not but you will find them molt taithfully laid down, 
 if you exadly adhere to, and follow what is yvritten, 
 Iiaving patience m digelting, imiting, and fixing, ac- 
 cording 10 the tenor of the Arcanum you pretend lo 
 
 iollow. 
 
 X. And 
 
Ghap. 1 i ^. Conclufton of this Eighth Boook 65^ 
 
 X. And if tliey require a longer time than I hwc 
 prefcribed, be not backwards to give it, till you com- 
 pleat what you feek for : and although the depuration^ 
 and digeftion be very tedious, yet this encouragement 
 5^ou have, never to be fruteated of the pcrfciVion you 
 ieek after. Love and wifli me well • and ib Fare- 
 wel. 
 
 Explicit Liber OBavUs-^ 
 
 tz ^ Polygr^' 
 
6^6 Lib.IX* 
 
 ?0 L TGRA? HICES 
 
 Liber Nonus. 
 
 Of Chiromantical Signatures. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 A Rationd Demonfimtion of Chiromantical 
 Signatures. 
 
 I.^Tpv H E Foundation of Chiromanq^ depends upon 
 I the tme Appropriation of the feveral Mounts, 
 -■- Fingers, or Places in the Hand, to their pro- 
 per Stars or PJanets. 
 
 II. The Ancients have aflTigned the Root of the middle 
 Finger to Saturn ; of the fore Finger to Jufiter ; of the 
 Hollow of the Hand to A'lars ; the Root of the Ring 
 Finger to Sol ; of the Thumb to l^entis ; of the little Fin- 
 ger "to Mercury ) and laltly, the Brawn of the Hand, 
 near t'oe Wrirt, to Luna. 
 
 III. That Line which comes round the Ball of the 
 Thumb, towards the Root or Mount of Jupiter^ is cal- 
 led Line A JovLih's, or the Life Line ; thatfromthe Wrirt 
 to the Root or Mount of SiJtnrn, Lima Saturnialis ; but 
 if It points to the Root or Mount of Sol, Linea Solans, 
 if to MercHry^ Line a Mcrcnrialis : that which gOf^rfifOia 
 JJNea 'jovialii to the Mount of Luna^ Linca Lunarts, £- 
 pa-ica,'oi tiic Natural Line. 
 
 ^IV. The other great Line above it is called Linea Stel- 
 /<?/.?, or the Line of Fortune, alfo Aienjalis, theMenfal or 
 Tabic Line, becaufe it limits the Mounts of the Planets, 
 and is impieifcd with various Virtues in thole places, ac- 
 cording 
 
Chap. I. Of ChiromAnticd Signatures, 6^j 
 
 cording to the Nature of the Planet, whofe Mount it runs 
 under, or fets a boundary unto : Laftly, The fpace be- 
 tween the Natural Line and the Line ot Fortune, is cul- 
 led Menfa, the Table. 
 
 V. All other Lines lliall either proceed out of the fides^ 
 cf the former, or elfe from fome proper Mount. 
 
 VI. Every Line, great or fmall, long or iliort, hath a 
 certain Beginning or Root, from which it rifes ; and a 
 certain End or Point to which it tends. 
 
 VII. The diltance between both ends^ is the way of 
 its Paflage ; in which way it either croiTes fome other 
 Line, or elfe is crofTed ; if it do neither, its Signification 
 is continual, and ought fo much the mX)re to be taken 
 notice of. 
 
 VIII. Every Mount hath a proper Signification, which 
 it receives from the Significations of its proper Planet, 
 being abftra<5lly confidered : the fame underltand of all 
 the principal Lines aforefiid. 
 
 IX. Suturn is the Author of Old Age, Inheritance?, 
 Melancholy, Malice, Sorrow, Mifeiy, Calamities, Ene- 
 mies, Imprifonments, Sicknefs, Dil'eafes, perplexities^ 
 Cares, Poverty, CroiTes, Death, and whatfoever Evil 
 can befal Humane Life : he fignifies Fathers, Old Men, 
 Labourers, Dyers, Smiths and Jefiiita. 
 
 X. He /iljo fignifies one Auliere andSatyiical, 'svith a Heni 
 declining^ Eyes fixed upon the Earth, hanging Lips and a. 
 fuUcn Countenance, vpajiing hiwfelf with a furiow Silence. 
 
 XI. He gives a Complexion or Colour betrveen Black and 
 TcllojVj A/eager, Dijiorted, of an hard Skin, eminent f'^eins^, 
 fwalt Eyes, Eye-hrovps almofi joined together, a thin Beard, 
 thick Lips^ jajf-dorpn Looks, an heavy Gate, and jlumhling 
 as he, mes., ' 
 
 * Xlt. He fignifies Envy, and enviotu Aien^ a Way-hyer 
 &T. 'P adder upon the H^h-ivay, Bnt where he is nell placed ^^ 
 he fignifies one SHhtii^ Wife or Crafty, Intelligent, Ligenioi^f^ 
 one of profound Thought's, giv^n up to fecKCt ContempLxtions, 
 a Preferver or Keeper of hidden Things, and a Ftnda- out of' 
 Things that are hjf. 
 
 XIII. Jupiter is the Author of Health, Strength, Mc>^„ 
 (Jcration,"Sobriety, Mercy, Riches, $ubl-b,nce, Goodncls, 
 Liberty, Religion, Honelty, Jufiice, Modtity, andaU- 
 other things which may make a Ma,n happy : he fignific^ 
 Churrhes, Church-men, Lawyers, Scholars, Ciothici;;:^ 
 and the like. ' Zz ^ " wy.lh 
 
658 Folygrafhices, Lib. IX. 
 
 XIV. He fignifles o^.c 7 mi natured, fortunate, f met, flea- 
 f'nt, n jycllW^Pr-^ ; ^.ne %onefl, neat, of ^ood Parentage, and 
 honourable. He snvfi Cre.irfalnefs, rlgi^t ju'i<Tment, Truth, 
 Heavenly Wijuc?^:-, \Jnd.-^">nding, and is 'he Be/ioiver of 
 .Riches, Goodnefs and K/r:;i 'le denotes one merry, tnge- 
 ■,uoti^, fair, honourable, hof pit able, kind, and every vcay^ 
 '■(?.'» ' . 
 
 XV, He prefigures a Man of a Sanguine Complexion, he-^ 
 nveen iVhite and Red, of a delicate Bony, good Stature, high 
 F'rrC'hcad, and a Head lifted up. Eyes fomewhat big, fhort 
 Nftriis, large Teeth, a light coloured Beard, ataUcompleat 
 P"dy, honeft, jufl and fair Conditioned. 
 
 Xyi, Aiar/h the Author of Strife, Contention, Pride, 
 Vrcfumption, Tyranny, Thefts, Mur-clcrs, Vi6lory, Con- 
 C|iie(l, Infonunacy, Boldnefs and Dangers: he fignifies 
 Phyljcians, Chirurgcon?, Apothecaries, the Camp, all 
 Mifitary Men and Preferments, edge Tools, Butchers, 
 Carpenters, Gunners, Baihlfs, and the like. 
 
 XVII. He is ^he Author of War, Fighting, Blood and 
 Strife ; und (ignifies one (Irong, bold, quarreljom, infolent^ 
 a Tray. '■or, or a Subvert er and Overt urner of States and King- 
 doms. He gives Pomr and Might, Heat ap.d Burning ; and 
 pgriifes F'^iolence, Contention, Ir^pudence, and alt dij ordered, 
 incnnflderrite and heady ASlions. 
 
 XVUI. His Countenance is terrible, cruel, fierce, angry ^ 
 pro'id, hajly and imperious. He gives a red Complexion, 
 deep yellow or black Hair, round f^iTagc-, fiery Eyes, and a 
 lavage revengeful Look : well placed, he fignifiesiChirurgeons, 
 Cip^aiiis, Commanders, ajjd Greats A'hn uiulcr Military 
 DlJ''i^l;;:e. 
 
 XIX. Sol is the Autlx)r of Honour, Glory, Renown, 
 preferment, Life, Gcncrofity, Magnanimity, Soveraign- 
 tv, Domini'^-, Power, Trealiircs, Golil, Silver, and 
 ^v!l.^tlbever may make the Life of Man Iplendid ; he fig- 
 niHjs Kings, Princes, Rulers, and alt Men in Power, 
 Almtcrs, Gold-linitlis, long Life and Wildom. 
 
 XX. He fignifies one of a noble' and generom Nature, for- 
 tunate, honcil, neat, pr:idcnt, intelligent., mje ; the Cover- 
 n'r and Bcftoner of Li'e and Beauy, and the Difpc tier of E-. 
 vil : whence the Greeks fometimes called him 'AM^iy^Koy 
 a.il VV,(xbw^. 
 
 XXI. The Hehre\vs call him tS^Dl!? Shem^lli, from mi- 
 iii^riug or Serving, he beinz the chief Minifler and Serv^tnt 
 
Chap. I. OfChiromAnticalSigmtures. 659 
 
 of the vdhde World ; md the Arabians CD?2]£f Shaniesl 
 XXII. He gives Cottrage, Honour and Ai^^-iejiy, a Man. 
 cenjideratey tvije and prudent, one of a middle Stature, cow- 
 ly Perfonage, curled Hair and hronpnijh, of a red or I anguine 
 Complexion, trufiy and magnanimotu ', but being ill placed ^ 
 f^ain-glorioHS and a Tyrant. 
 
 XXI IT. yenm'is the Author of Joy, Plcafure, Mirth, 
 Solace, Lurt, Uncleannefs and Idlenefs : llie fignifics 
 Women-kindj Sifters, Ladies, Whore?, Curiofitics, La- 
 pidaries, Silk-men, Taylors, Mercers, Upholilcrers, Pi- 
 <5hjres, Pidure-drawers, the Pox, and Dileaies proceed- 
 ing from Llncleannefs. 
 
 XXIV". She fignifies one mild of Difpofi:ion, fair, beauti- 
 ful, pleafant and merry,'' given to Mirth and Jollity, and 
 the Author of Fruitfulnep. She forefheivs Joy, Friendjhip, 
 Mercy, Bounty, Love, Sports, Dalliance, Dancing, Embra- 
 cing, Kijjin^, and fuch like. Being hot and moijt, Ihe is the 
 Mijfrejs of Generation^ makes an aimable, pleafant and 
 chearful Countenance, prettily mixed with Red. 
 
 XXV. She gives a compleat Body, enclining to Tanllefs^ 
 fair and round yijaged, tvith beautiful roivling Eyes, brown 
 er flaxen coloured Hair, of a lovely Difpofuion, gentle, boun- 
 tiful, courteoii-s, affable and merciful : being ill placed or dif- 
 pojed, fhe /ignifief Whores, Strumpets, Ba&ds, Pimps, Pan-' 
 ders. Thieves, and juch like. 
 
 XXVI. Mercury is the Author of Craft, Subtilty, Po-. 
 licy, Deceit, Perjury, Study, Hearing and Merchandi- 
 zing ', he figniiies Merchants, Oerks, Scholars, Secreta- 
 ries, Ambalfadors, Pages, Mefljengers, Poet?, Orators, 
 Stationers, Cheaters, Thieves, petty Lawyers, Philolb-* 
 phers. Mathematicians, Aihologers. 
 
 XXVII. He fignifies one pvifr, nimble, eloquent, inditfri-.. 
 »H4, rflje, rational, a diver into abdruje Adyfieries, Good with 
 the Goody Bad viith the Bad, Male with the Male, and F^-^ 
 male nit h the Female, an Interpreter or Expounder of^, the 
 Adyjleries of Nature ', one mutable, changeable or inconfiant^ 
 lively, prompt, and of a ready W'7f.. 
 
 XXV I II. He gives a Co??/plexion neither very v/hite nor 
 very black, a long f^ijage, an high Forehej.d, jmall Eyei\_ 
 Brown or almoji Black, an even Nnje and iomething long, 
 thin Beard, long and fender Finge^-s, one h!ify,jubtii, witcy,^ 
 fhsirp and "iVAry^ Being ill, placed or difpojed, he (tgmfts. 
 
 % I ^ Thiivet^ 
 
 ■^v 
 
00 Pdygufhices. Lib.lX. 
 
 TLievei, cheating Sollicitors, hiavijh LafeyerSy Knight i of 
 the Poli^ Witcksy \yiz.ards. Diviners^ &c. 
 
 XXIX. Luna is the Author of popular Fame, both 
 Good and Eyil, ]oy and Sorrow, MutabiUty and Incon- 
 ftancy, Affc6lion' and Difaffe6lion, Moifture, and every 
 £ffe6i which may be faid to be common : l}ie fignifieis 
 Waters, Ships, Seamen of all forts, Queens, Ladies,^ 
 Gorerncl:- the common People in general, Neighbours, 
 Mothers, Kindred, Fifhmongers, Vintners, Tapfters, 
 MidwiveSjNurfes and Travellers. ' 
 
 XXX. She is the Tranflator of Light from one Planet to 
 lv:o ■'.?(} , imparting her Light to alt the other Stars, and com- 
 
 ■ prehenU-'.g or receiving their Virtues and Pawers. She gives 
 C:U .^:J.-Moilinr:y feminine Honour and GJory, Chajfity, 
 Pi 7, Aio-cy, and the Suhduer of Carnal AffeElions, taking 
 care of all States and Conditions of Aien, both hy Sea and 
 Ir.md. 
 
 XXXI. Her fypuence is over Tempefis and Storms at Sea, 
 ever the Birds of we Air^ and the Beajis of the Field , over 
 Serpents ,.: Land, and Fifhes in the Water, making things t9 
 ehl and jidiv^ according to her decreafe or encreafe. 
 
 XXXli She jhevps one moveable, henlgne, innocent, ftm- 
 flcy chajie ^jid cfmom ; gives a pah Countenance, middle 
 Stature, round Vifage, and either hlach^ hrown or grey Eyes, 
 according asfhe is AfpcBcd, and the Sign P^e is in, tender 
 Body, Flejhy, and of afoft and fmooth Skin ; one that is fa~ 
 cil or eafy to be entreated, an AffeEier of News and new Tilings, 
 inconjiant, &:c. Being ill placed or difpofsd, fhc fignifies on: 
 ^estlc-brotved. Ill-natured, and a Scold. 
 
 ' This being Imivn, underfiand, 
 
 XXXIIT. Firfr, That the Lines take their Signiiication 
 from the Mount of that PJanet from whence they rife. 
 
 _ XXXIV. Secondly^ TImt the 'plate from whence any 
 X-ine rifes, lliews the Ground, Caiifc or Original of the 
 things fignificd by that Line ; the' Line or Mount to 
 ■Vvhich it point?, fliews thelfTuc to what the thing tends, 
 and what may be the end of the Matter ijgnifted. 
 
 XXXV , Third hy That whether the Lii x lignifies Good 
 or Evil, if it be cut or croiTcd by any other Line, that 
 Line io ciitiing it v,;ill. at a certain time not only abate 
 thcGooJ,hut -ilfo take away the Evil,if^it is fo fignified. 
 
 XXX\i. f'Vo-'hly, That the NaUire and Quahry of 
 tiiai Line thus delhoyir.g the SigniUcation pi' the former, 
 
 ■ " ' ' i^i 
 
Ghap* I . Of Chiromimicd Signatures. 66 1 
 
 is known by qpnUdering from what place it rifes, and to 
 what place it .tends. 
 
 XXXyil. F//r;[>/y, That a double Judgment arifes from 
 every Line, by accounting it, firft, from the one end j 
 fecondly, from the other. 
 
 XXXVIII. Sixthly f That little Lines rifm^ out of the 
 fides of any other Line, both augment the things fignifi- 
 cd by that Line ; and alfo fignify new matter arifmg by 
 things fignified by the Line trom whence they rife ; and 
 the place tQ which they point, fliew tp wh^t they tend. 
 
 XXXIX. Seventhly, That the Mounts or Lines adorn- 
 ed with Stars, or fmall Lines not crofled, or pointing to 
 evil places, fhcw ^reat Good and Happinefs to tlie Per- 
 fon, by things fignified by the fame Mount or Liue : and 
 on the contrary vitiated with croffes, fpots or knots, (hew 
 miich Evil and perplexity.. 
 
 XL.^Laflly, The beginning, of the Lines, (hew in the 
 beginning or fore part of Life; the middle, inthemiddJLc 
 part of Lite ; and the ends of them, the lattet part, or 
 tnd of Life : fo that if any Evil or Good be fignified by 
 at]yLine, you mult hint the time according to the afore- 
 faid Reafon. 
 
 XLI. Froin thefe Rules (being obferved) you may at- 
 tain to the Knowledge of the Natures, Qualities and 
 Difpofitions of all forts of People, their Affcdions and 
 Padions, anfwerable to the Virtues and Influences of 
 the Stars and Planets, which the ancient Mathematicir 
 ansand Alhologers have, by long Experience, taken 
 notice of, and otjfcrved, as does fuificicntly appear by 
 their Works. ' ' ' C 
 
 XLII. 'Tis trne, here we ought to enqnire into the denomi'-. 
 nated times rvhen the things fignified (loould coma, to pufs ; 6«£ 
 hecaufe that' Matter is jomething long and ahfirufe, (being 
 
 cur pHrpofi, tvejhall at this time fay little of it here. 
 
 XLllL Notvpithjlandingj although n^e have net here de- 
 lineated every thing in particular, yet vpe havi, laid ('^ i'^ 
 Tpeere) the Ground and Foundation of the Art ; out of yikich, 
 as out of a Fountain, the induflriom Student ?ifay, at his oven 
 Leijure and Pleafure, rear a fiately Fahrick. Be pleafed t9 
 vic79 the fecond Figure of the Hand, in yphi&h the Numh&rs 
 
662 Polj/graphiees. Lib. IX. 
 
 fiz,ni[y TeArs : therein yon may partly fee the Geometrical 
 keajon of that meAfure of time. 
 
 CHAP. 11. V: 
 
 - ..••'.'Si 
 
 Whether Right or Left Mundis to he^tidgel^y, 
 
 I. TF it is dem^ndg^^yhich of the Hands is to be chofen 
 J- to make a jua^ment: by, it is generally anfwered 
 by Artifts, The "Lerc Hand, tho' you may make your 
 Views and Obfervations on both ; for that in the one 
 the length of Life is beft known, and in the other Rich- 
 es and Honour.' 
 
 II. However, you arc.alifb to confider, whether the 
 Perfqn is Right or Left Handed ; if Right-handed, the 
 Left is chiefly to be chofen : but if Left-handed, tlien the 
 Right, becaufe the Hand that is moft in Ufe, has gene- 
 rally fcweft Lines, they many times being worn out, 
 altered or obfcured by much udng. 
 
 III. But however, you are to confider both the Hands, 
 and lee w^hich Hand has mofi: or greatcit number of Lines 
 upon it ; which arc faireft, largeft and deepeit ; and 
 w^hich are either continued very long, or cut iliort, or 
 divided into conddcrable breaches by other eminent 
 Lines ; and to cliufe that Hand to make the chicfcft of 
 your Judgment from. 
 
 IV. However, they will have the Left H;ind to be 
 that in which the Chiromancer a»ght to lay the Foun- 
 tlation of hisPredidions, asbcing ncareitto, and reach- 
 ing the Heart, alfo governed by Soly and dedicated to 
 
 1i>. By 
 
 this H'Aud (i^^5 ^viceiwaj and the Thumb, 
 the Vhyfician iliould know the State of his Patient, all 
 the Veins, Avitrits and Lines of this Hand and Ann, 
 gomg toti]cmort noble p:irts of the Body, particularly to, 
 the Heart, which is the Seat of all Dtfircs, Atfcctioni^anci 
 Lufts j and whence proceed alio all the Conceptions of 
 our A6lion?. 
 
 VI. Wherefore (fay they) the ArtKt mufV by alt 
 jnean^tdraw his Judgrncats from this Hand, which he 
 
 mufl 
 
Cbaip. ft. Which Hand to judge by. 66^ 
 
 muft earnclHy view, and obfcrvc the Dilbondon of th^ 
 Lines, their Pofition, Colours and Accicients ; tho' h^ 
 may withal look on the Right Hand, and efpecially the 
 Wrift, which is the place of Years,_ whence may be 
 known the length of Life, and the Difeafes which may 
 happen to the Perfon. 
 
 VIL Take into Confideration alfo, the Temper and 
 Conttitution of the Body, that it be not wnearied at the 
 time when you make your Obfervation of the Lines j for 
 A6lion thro' Heat, draws the Blood from the Centre to 
 the Circumference and extrearrf Parts, and fo by Exte- 
 liuation the natural Heat is exhaufted. 
 
 VIIL Be cautious alfo of the callous or brawny Con- 
 dition of the Hand, made fo by Labour, or otherwife 5 
 for this clouds the Lines, and makes them not fo per- 
 ceptible- 
 
 IX. You are nottoobfcrve the Hands of C!-"''dren un* 
 der four or fix Years of A£!;e ; for in thofe tender Years, 
 the Subftance of the Body is too fluid and foFt, uncertain, 
 and apt to receiv'c divers and various Forms and Lines, 
 by reafon the Conftitution and 'Temperament is v.cry 
 much fubjedt to alter. 
 
 X. Nor make your Obfen^ations and Judgment at a- 
 ny tiniv when the Body is Faiting, nor yet when it a- 
 bounds with Gluy:ony and Drunkcnnefs, or is over- 
 toiled with Labour, Thoughtful nels and Care. 
 
 XI. Judgment is not to be given when either the Per-' 
 fon or the Artift is diii:empercd thro' Fear, Anger, over- 
 much Joy, Sorrow or Grief, Wrath, Fury, Paflions or 
 Infirmities, or is affe6ted with any acute Difeafe, as 
 Fevers, C^t:, excefs of /^^«/^, &c. for in thefe Cafes the 
 Body is alterable, and receives a falfe Imprelfion, which 
 will much hurt your Judgment. 
 
 XII. Lafily, It is to be obierved, that in fome People 
 the one Hand has uo Lines at all, except the Life Line 
 and Table Line, andlbmetiraes no Life Line, but only 
 a broken Table Line or Natural Lin?, whiHt the other 
 Hand i"hall be full of very eminent, fjir and large, and 
 expreOive Lines :^n this Cale, this other Hand, fuUeil 
 of Lines, is tobexiken, and Judgment to'be made by it. 
 
 whether it be the Riglit or the Left. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
66^ Polygraphiets. tib. IX. 
 
 CHAP. UL 
 
 Of the FUmtATjf Mounts. 
 
 I. "T* H E Hand is divided into three Parts, ^/i. The 
 J- Wrijly th^ Palm, 2Lndtht Fingers. ThtWri/i'is 
 the lower part of the Hand, and is the place of the Re- 
 ftr'iEia. The Palm is the hollow of the Hand, from the 
 JReJlriBa to the Fingers lOng ways ; and from the Extre^ 
 mity of the other fide of the Tnumb, to the outfide of 
 the little Finger, orMoimtof Z/»«<)?. The fw^^rj arc five, 
 attributed to five of the Planets, the Thumb or Polhx to 
 f^enus ; the fore Finger or Index to Jupiter j the middle 
 Finger or Meditu to Saturn \ the Ring Finger or Annu- 
 laris to Sol ', and the little Finger or AuricHlaris to Mer* 
 cury. 
 
 II. Thefe Fingers, at their Bafes, have certain Mounts, 
 which are attributed to the fame Planets which the Fin- 
 gers are. 
 
 III. The four Fingers have twelve Joynts, attributed 
 to the t^velve Signs of the Zodiaci^ viz. To t!'^ f -ft, fe-i 
 cond and third Joynts of the fore Finger, Ger. ■, "anrm 
 ^n^ Aries I to the firft, fecond and third of »iU liddle 
 Finger, Pi fees, Aquarius ^wA. Capricorn ; to the hii\, fe- 
 cond and third of the Ring Finger, KiVgo, Leo znd Can- 
 cer ; and to the firft, fecond and third of the little Fin- 
 
 fer, Sagitary, Scorpio and Libra : the firft ]©ynt of each 
 inger is the Root which borders on the Mount of the 
 fame, and the third joynt is the Extremity or End 
 thereof. 
 
 IV. Every Mount denotes fomething worthy of Con- 
 fideration; the Mount of^^««/, is the Mount of Love; 
 the Mount of Jupiter, Riches and Honour ; the Mount 
 oi Saturn, Mistortimcs ; the Mount of 5'o/, Honour and 
 Riches ; the Mount of Mercury, Sciences, viz.. Thclc 
 are the places where thofc particular things are to be en- 
 quired about. ^^ , 
 
 V. In the middle of the Palm is thririangle of A4ars, 
 which fignifies Fury, and things Mihtary j and towards 
 the outfide of the Hand, under tlie Mount cf Mercury, 
 is the Mount of Lm.^j which llicws the Affections of the" 
 )^Imd, yi, New, 
 
Gbap. J. Of the FUmtdry Mounts. 6<5j 
 
 VI. Now, according to the different Natures of Men 
 and Women, fuch are the various different Marks j Cha- 
 raders, Signatures and Impreffions in their Hands, ("hew- 
 ing their natural Inclinations, Difpofitions or Fates, 
 whether they be good or evil. 
 
 VII. Satumian Perfons have more of the Charadcrs of 
 Satftrn on the Mount of Saturn, in their Hand, than 
 any other Characters, efpecially that large Samrnian 
 Line arifing from the Wrilt, and running thro* the Palm 
 to the Mount of Saturn j which, when it is well colour- 
 ed, fait and itrait, it denotes^good Fortune. 
 
 VIII. The fame, if the Charader of^«/);m-, Croffcs, 
 Stars, parallel Lines, Scales, Branches, Tiiangles, Rhom- 
 bus's be foimd either in the Finger, Mount orLine of 5U- 
 turn, they forefliew Friends, good Counfel, deep Cogi- 
 tations, fair Buildings, delighting in Agriculture, lo^-ing 
 long Journies, Riches, Profperity and Succefs in Trading, 
 
 fetting Money on all hands, one of few Words, Difcrect, 
 'nident, and of long Life, even to old Age j yet with 
 all this Profperity, towards their latter days, .they fignify 
 Palfies, neurotick Pains, and Ingratitude from fuch to 
 whom they have formerly been x^ery kind. 
 
 IX. 81 if upon thofe places of Saturn there be infor- 
 tunati ^*^ i^, as Semi-circles, broken Lines, and imper- 
 fe6t li,-e Grates or Gridirons, or like Hairs, or the Cha- 
 ra6t€r o£ Saturn ; or if the Mons Saturni is turbid, crooked, 
 wrinkled or ill coloured, thefe things are Significations 
 of one Proud, Self-wiird, Conceited, aBoalter, DilTem- 
 bier, and unfociable, unworthy, ungrateful, plunged in 
 manifold Labours and Troubles, under the Frowns and 
 Anger of moft Pepple, attended with Poverty, and they 
 ufually Die wretched and unlamented. 
 
 X. Jovial Perfons are known by the Plurality of Lines 
 on the Mount of Jupiter, more of them and fairer on 
 this Mount, thanelfewhere, they fignify one wife, judi- 
 cious, faithful, religious, and an excellent Moralifl, bold, 
 confident in Dangers, merciful, tender-hearted, friendly, 
 merry and chearful, loviwg Good and hating Evil, and 
 likely to have many Children. 
 
 XI. If the good Characters mentioned at Secl.VlU, 
 aforegoing, be on this Mount, they are of general Good, 
 import and declare Prelacy and Preferment, Riches, 
 Content and true Friendlliip, and indicate the Pcrfon, 
 
 whether 
 
666 PolygTAphkes. Lib. IX. 
 
 u'hether Man or Womnn, to be beloved or favoured of 
 King?, Princes or great Pcrfonages ; that they fhall lead 
 an honclt Liie, and afted the Qonverlktion of righteous 
 People. 
 
 XI I. But if the evil Charadcrs mentioned at SeEi, IX. 
 aforegoing, be lound on this Mount, it fliews them to be 
 incefkious, and femininely aftcded, not loving, as they 
 ought, their own Parents, attended with Poverty, Weak- 
 ncl?, and ot an unpleafing Converfation. 
 
 XIII. The Letter O being round on the Mount of 
 Jupiter, lliewsHonedyof Lite, and Riches all the days 
 of Life, and to be much beloved of Women, of Princes 
 and great I^erlons ; and the Perfbn to be of a fubtil Wit : 
 but iVthc Letter O be oval like a Shield, it lliews Noble- 
 nefs of Mind, Wiidom, Prudence, Difcretion, loving and 
 kind beyond mcafure, of a piercing Intelledl, growing in 
 Riches and Wealth, and in Love and good Repute with 
 all Perlbns, and yet will find but few faithful Friends 
 all the days of their Life. 
 
 XIV. Martial Pg-fons are fuch whom the Line of Life 
 and Natural Line direcf, being continued, and well co- 
 loured ; it figniHes Boldnefs,much Adion,Promptnef?,yct 
 inconftant, raih, fierce, ftout, little caring for Riches or 
 fearing Poverty, getting by right or wrong, without re- 
 Ipecf to jultice. 
 
 XV. if the good Characters at ScEl. VIIL be in the 
 Triangle q[ A-idrs, they fignify Riches, and Fainiliarity 
 with Princes, great Captains and Generals, Ingenious, 
 much loving Sciences, and liich as can bridle their An- 
 ger. 
 
 XVI. It the evil Cliaraclers at SeEl. IX. be found in 
 the place q^ Adars, it lliews one of a hard and lioney 
 Heart, full of Wrath anJ Iniquity, a Patricide or a Fra- 
 tricide, one of evil Conditions, and liibjed^ to Stone or 
 Gout ; a Perfi<)n Contentious in his Namre, affefting 
 vile VVomen, Murtherers of Wives or Husbands, Falfe, 
 Lyers, Treacherous, Companions of Thieves and wicked 
 Peifons, (hidyingclole and fecret Mifchiefs. 
 
 XVTI. Solar Perfonshave Lines more frequently ma- 
 iiit'elt on the Mount oi Sol than elle where, which fhevvs 
 them great Inventors and Imitators of ingenious Arts, 
 dv^ing often iiich thinp as they were never taught, yet 
 many times poor and flighted, but honoured of Stran- 
 gers. 
 
lap. J. Of the Planetary Mounts, 66^ 
 
 ^crs. They are eafie to be angred, very loving, yet 
 fcarcely having a faithful Friend, of a free and voluble 
 Tongue, eafie and harmlefs Converfation, but often be- 
 traying themfelves to their Enemies. They love Wo- 
 men, are Courtiers', faithful in their Tru(t, VVilb, Pru- 
 dent, Noble and Generous. 
 
 XVIII. If the good Charaaers at SeB. 8. be found 
 on the mount of SoJ,_it fhews a Perfon, who tho' he 
 may have many Enemies, yet they ftiall not be able to 
 prejudice him, but he lliall be always able to overtop 
 their Malice, and overcome them : He fhall grow migh- 
 ty, and greater than his Parent?, and for his Wifdom, 
 Prudence and Generofity ihall be beloved of great Pcr- 
 fons, and ibmetimes exalted to Government and Do- 
 minion, to great Riches and Honours. 
 
 XIX. But if the evil Characters at Se&:p. be found on 
 the faid/o/^r Mount, they fignifie the quite contrary 
 to all the former ; the Man lliall be a waiter and de- 
 Itroycr, and fometimes a Patricide, fhall prey upon and 
 lubvert other Men, a great lover of Women, fordid in 
 Luxury, loving and delighting therein : He may chance 
 to be hurt by Iron, or Fire, apt to have difeafes in his 
 Head, Eyes, and Stomach, and oft-times to die a fud- 
 den, or untimely Death. 
 
 XX. J^eneral Perfons are liich as have the Mom 
 Veneris, adorned with lines more than any other place ; 
 and tho' they have many times good Fortune, yet they 
 are generally Carelefs, little minding the cares and af- 
 fairs of the World ; delighting to live Delicately, Nice- 
 ly, and Idly, without labour or care, of a i\veet kind 
 and loving Difpofition, and apt to be Amorous, Affable, 
 laviOi in their Expences, delighting with Cupid, Mirth, 
 Singing, Dancing, and Mufick, eagerly mnnuig after 
 every rhin^ their fancy affcdls. 
 
 XXI. If the good Character? at SeEl. 8. be found up- 
 on the mount oiVenu;, they fhew merriment, keeping 
 company with noble Perions, growing Rich by Marry- 
 ing luch, and a bettering their Condition by means of 
 goood Women and Religious Perions : they are learch- 
 ers out of fecret things, rnie, faithful. Amorous, lovers 
 of Gardens, Hne Houfcs, Pidures, and Gallajitry, but 
 withal Liaxuuous, in their Iporting and delights \Vith 
 
 Women , 
 
66S Pofygraphhes: Lib. Dt. 
 
 Women, for which they may be publickly Scandalized, 
 but othcrwifc Fortunate, ancf may acquire Riches. 
 
 XXir. But if on the Mons Veneris Ihall be found the 
 evil Charadtcrs at Se^. p. it (hews the Perfoii to be un- 
 faithful, bewitched to the love of Women, fuffering 
 much difgrace thereby, poor and mean, injurious, a For- 
 nicator an Adultetcr, defiling himfelf with his own 
 Blood, Inceltuous, a Salomite, a Perfon doing fordid 
 and vile things, a muitherer of Wives or Husbands, a 
 defilcr of their Fathers Beds, and poflTibly may teceive 
 fome hurt in the Eyes by Iron or Fire. 
 
 XXIII. Mercurial Pcrfons are fuch as have many and 
 eminent Lines upon the mount ofAfercHry^ and flidi 
 delight in Singing, Dancing, Eloquence,^ Mufick, ma- 
 king of Orations, Arts and Sciences, as Grammar, Rhe- 
 torick, Logick, Arithmetick, Geometry, Aftrdnomy, 
 Dialing, Cofmogra^w, Geography, Navigation, Aftro- 
 Jogy, Law, and the fcarching into profound deep and 
 fecret things, and loving, and frequenting fuch compa- 
 ny as delight in thele thmgs. 
 
 XXIV. If good Charaders arc upon that mount of 
 finger, they fliew fame and honour by Arts and Scicn* 
 ces ; they that Travel into forreign Countries, trade and 
 deal abroad, and get great lubftance thereby, and it 
 may be, be preferred to lome Honours, Authority, rule or 
 command in thofe Places, be apt to learn feveral Lan- 
 guages, and be teachers of Arts and Sciences j and tho* 
 wife and difcreet and very Ingenrous, yeL be put pooi* 
 and mean in Youth, but may abound in Riches after 
 the middle Age of Life. 
 
 XXV. But if the evil Charaders are upon that motmtjj 
 it denotes the Perfon to be light finored, Thievilh, Faifi- 
 dious, Impure, Inordinate, Concubmators, Liers, Swear- 
 ers, Perjured, Treacherous, Unjull:, Meddlers with other 
 Peoples bufinefs, unitable, unconiknt, bold, foolilh, of 
 1 fly muttering Tongue, evil minded, negligent and 
 
 ,*ielefs of their own Affairs, counterfeiters of Seals, 
 forgers of Writings and falfe Deeds, and fuch as for the 
 mol\ part continue fuch an infamous courfc of living 
 all the days of their Lives. 
 
 XXVI. Lunar Pcrfons are fuch as have on the Qua' 
 drangle ot Mount of Lwm many, fair and eminent 
 
 Lines, 
 
Chap. j. Of the PUmtar) Mounts, 66 y 
 
 Li-nes more than are to be found on other Mounts or Parts 
 of the Hand, it jlie'ws the Pcrfon to be uiutable and 
 changeable in his Natiue and Difpofition, often apt to 
 change his Mind, movable in his Perfon, as alio in his 
 Fortiuie, not long (iibie in any Condition, very buljr 
 Perfons, and apt to thruft themfelves into much Buli- 
 r.efs, and to become very popular. 
 
 XXVII. If tl;e,<;oodChara6lers at 5;^^. VIII.be forind 
 on this Mount, it denotes them to be fortunate, to be re- 
 ligious, and to love religious Company, yet lubtil and 
 lofty minded, popular, and learned in Arts and Scien- 
 ces, they will go to Sea, or get Riches by the Seafaring- 
 Trade, are apt to Travel, and get Wealth thereby j they 
 are faithful, honeii:, of good Report, Noble, Magnani- 
 mous, and -will rile to Preferments and Honours by the 
 Means and Favours of Rich and Noble Women. 
 
 XXVIII. But if any deformed Figures be found on 
 this Mount, or flich as arc not fait to the Afpecl or Eye, 
 the Pcrfon will beauii6led with niciny Sorrows, be troub- 
 led with m.'i'nifa'd Difeafes and Vexations, will con- 
 fume his paternal Subitince, and go behind hand in the 
 World, beaPerfeverer in Evil, involved, and as it were, 
 drowned in Libidinous Actions, unliable in all things 
 he undertakes, and be affeded with the Phthifick, A(th- 
 ma, Blindnefs or hurts of the Eyes, and Diitsmpers pro- 
 ceeding from Wind, and poflibly may pcrilli by foine 
 lintimelv Death. ' 
 
 XXIX. If on the Mons Lume be found a well confti- 
 tuted Crofs, with fair and bold Lints, it lliews the firlt 
 and third part of their Lives to be poor and needy; but 
 in the lecond patt of their Lives, they iliall abound in 
 Riches, even to Admiration ; and again in Age be re- 
 duced to their firlt Condition, according as the other 
 Mounts and Lines lihew an encreafe or dimiimtio.n of 
 Foitune. 
 
 XXX. It wete good in this Cafe, tostdvife fuch Per- 
 fons not to Marry, but rather to retire, if they have a 
 Subftanee which will anfwer it, or elfe to betake them- 
 felves to the Service of fome Great or Noble Perfon, 
 where they may lead an eaf^^, fafe and quiet Life, free 
 from the Turmoils of the World , and tht jnanifold 
 C^jhanges of uncpnllant Fortune. 
 
670 Potygraphices, Lib. IX* 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 1 he General Judgments of the Hand, 
 
 I. TF the end of the Digitus A'firoirij extends beyond 
 -*• the laft Joynt of the Annnlcris^ luch a Man is Ma- 
 fkr of his Houle, and has, or iliall have an obedient 
 and wcll-pleafmg Wiic : but if it is lliort, and reaches 
 not to the Joynt, he has, or will have a Shrew, an in> 
 pcrious, commanding Woman, and one who will wear 
 the Breeches. 
 
 IF. But if in one Hand the little Finger exceeds the 
 Joynt oi the Annul Aris, and in the other it is lliorter, it 
 denotes one VVjfe to be obedient and good, and another 
 to be a Shrew, diibbedicnt and evil. 
 
 III. If the longed little Ff'iger is on that Hand, which 
 Ihews the Linesnioft confpicuous, then the fir(l Wife 
 will be the good Wife, the fecond the evil : and contra- 
 riwilc, if the ihortefl little Finger be on the mod fignifi- 
 cant Hand. 
 
 IV. If there be any Lines at the tops of Fingers, be- 
 Avarc of Drowning or falling into Water: obferve in 
 what Finger thcfe are, fo may you know the Month in 
 which this Misfortune will happen. 
 
 V. If they are on the Digitta Jovis, the Danger will 
 be in Af/irch, April or Ahy ; if on the Digitus Sattirniy 
 then in Decemhery 'January or February ; if on the Difitus 
 Sol is J then in J»ney July or Auga:} ; but if on the' i^i^i- 
 tHs MercHrijy the Danger will be in the Months 0^ Sep- 
 tember, OElober or November. 
 
 VI. ^f you find two Lines under the Joynt of the 
 Thumb, it Oicws great Inheritances and PolfelTions ; but 
 if' there is but one, it lliewsno great Wealth : if tliefe 
 Lines be great and apparent, ttic Perlbn has fomc E- 
 date, ;tbout which he is in Debate or Law Suits. 
 
 VJI. If l^etwccn the Joynts of the Thumb there lit 
 two Lines ilretci^ed out, and well united, the Perfori 
 win Ik a Gameder ; but by means of his Gaming, he 
 Hill be in danger of his Lite; but if ihcy be dii-ioincd, 
 cr winding and crooked, he will hazzard to fall into 
 Thjcvcj hands, and be Robbed. 
 
 VIII. If 
 
Chap. 4' QenerAl^udgmemsoftheHand, 6ji 
 
 yilL If the Hand has t\vo Lines joined together 
 tvithln, under the latt Jbynt of the Thumb, it ilievvs 
 Danger by Water ; but if they are pale, it fignifies that 
 Danger to^be in Childhood, or that it will happen in 
 Age: but if thefe Lines are without, it threatens Lois 
 by Fire. 
 
 IX. If a Woman has Lines at the Root of the Thumbs 
 upon the Mount oiVenus^ fo many Lines as there arc^ 
 fo many Children (hall fhe have; if they Verge towards 
 the outfide of the Hand, io many Mbn iball have to dd 
 with her, or Marry her. 
 
 X. If the firft Joynt of the Thumb has Lines avIucH 
 joins to it within, from the part of the fore Finger, that 
 JPerfon will be in danger of Hanging, and fo much the 
 more certain it is, by how much the more the faid Line 
 ireprefents it, and defcends from the Table Line. 
 
 XI. But if the faid Line be united without, and not 
 %vithin, it fhews the Perlbn Oiall loofe his Head ; if it 
 is environed all abdiit, the Perfon iball be Hanged. 
 
 XII. If the Table Line is crooked, and falls betwceri 
 the middle and fore Fingers, it fignifies Etfiifioii c'f 
 Blood. 
 
 XIII. If the Fingers are thicker at tlie Joynt^^ than be- 
 tween, and that the IntsmodU be fmall, fleiider and 
 dry, as if the Flelh were waiied, it forefhews Poverty 
 and. Mifery ; the Peribn is a great TalJcer, and over- 
 wife. 
 
 XIV. The Mon,s Vemris fwelling up, or being higlil 
 fhews Luxuiry, Wantonnefs^ unlawful Loves and 
 Whoring. ^. . ,^ 
 
 XV. If on the Mount of V'enpi-s feveral Lines lllall 
 thwart from the Line of Life to it, the Perfon is Luxuri- 
 ous and Wanton ; and for that lliall be hated. 
 
 XVI. But when you find two Lines (frvim'tli^ Life 
 Line) near the Thumb, and they fair and apparent, they 
 fi'gnify much Wealtli and Riches. 
 
 XVII. If you find the Fin?,ers retorted, as it were, at 
 the highed joynt, and a little bending backwards or - 
 derh% it isafign of a virtuous Envy or Emulation, and 
 that the Perfon is a protefled Enemy to Vice. 
 
 XVIIL tf the whole Fingers ihali be bending back- 
 wards^ it llhtviTs one Ingenious and Subtil, but fomctimes' 
 Unjuft and Mifchievious; .-■""',• 
 
 h^z i a):X; If 
 
672 Pofygrdphices. Lib. IX. 
 
 XIX. If the Line of Life Hiall be feparated or divided 
 into halves, thePerfon Hull be Wounded into his Body 
 with a S\vord. 
 
 XX. IftheHandis fliorter than it fhould be, accord- 
 ing to the Proportion of the other Members, itlliewsthe 
 Perfon is a gre;it Talker, a Glutton, Ccnforius, Infati- 
 able, Injurious. 
 
 XXI. If a Woman has the Palm of the Hand ihort, 
 aiid the Finders lonp, it is a fign that ihe ihall bring forth 
 with great t*ain and Difficulty. The reafon is, becaufe 
 the privy Parts are narrow, for the Fingers have Rcfcm- 
 blancc of them. 
 
 XXII. If a Peribn has a Hand fomething long, and 
 the Fingers lomewhat thick, it Ihews the Perfon to be 
 flothful, idle and carclcls, yet a good Perfon and very 
 niodefL . 
 
 XXI II. Ifthc Hands be long and great, it Ihews one 
 Libcraland good Conditioned, a Perfon of Subtilty, and 
 of a great Spirit, a Peribn of Prudence and Advice, and 
 a faithful Friend. 
 
 XXIV. If the Palm of the Hand is long, and the Fin- 
 gers of a good Proportion, and notfoft in touching, but 
 rather hard, it lliews one Ingenious, but Mutable, and 
 given to Luxury and Wanionneis. 
 
 XXV. If the Palm of the Hand is longer than its due 
 Proportion, and the Fingers more thick, and alfo ihort, 
 by lo much as they arc the more Ihort, they fignify the 
 Perfon to be iomuch the more idle, careiefs, negligent, 
 fool i lb and }")roud. 
 
 XXVI. If the Hand is hollow, folid, and well knit 
 in the joynts, the Perfon is likely to live long j but if 0- 
 Vi.r-thwarted, itlhews {'iKMTnclsoFLife. 
 
 XXVII. If the Hand is according to the Proportion 
 of the rdt of the Bt)dy, but the Fingers are too ihort and 
 thick, and fat at the ends, it ihews a Perfon Vicious, 
 and furniihcd vvitlr crafty an I evil Defigns. 
 
 XXV'III. If angular Branches Ipring from the Table 
 Line towards the Mounts of am' ot the Planets, they lig- 
 iiify nuich Good, ProHt and Uain to the Perfon, trom 
 ihingsriy;i;ifiL'd by thatPlaiict. 
 
 XXIX: J ; angular Branches, with fiir and good Lines, 
 ipring irum the Natural Lijic, and tend towards any of 
 tik PJ^ujL'Ury Mounts, they fignify Healthy Srrcngthand 
 
 Wcakh, 
 
Chap. ^. Of the Line of Life, 675 
 
 Walth, and that the Perfon fliall bend his mind to fiich 
 things as that Planet naturally fignifics. 
 
 XXX. If angular Branches, with fair and good Lines, 
 fliall fpring from the Life Line, tending towards fome 
 of the Planetary Mounts, they fignify Strength of Life, 
 and Years, and that the Life ihall be maob happy and 
 eafy by (iich things as are fignified by the Planets who 
 are Lords of thofe Mounts. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Lijoe of Life, 
 
 L 17' Af./>tf jtw Linen Cardiac a, LineaFvnlis. The Line 
 ^ of Life is that which encludeth the Mount of the 
 Thumb. 
 
 IL This Line, broad and of a lively colour, n^ell 
 or largely drawn , without Interiectioris and Points, 
 iliews long Life, and one ilibiedt to few Dilcafes: but 
 fttnder, lliort and broken, or cut with little crofs Lines, 
 of a pale or black colour, lliews lliort Life, with many 
 Infirmities. 
 
 III. If it makes a good Angle with the Hcp.^.tk.^y and 
 the Angle be adorned with Parallels or little Croifes, it 
 llicws a good Wit and a pleafant Difpofiiion. 
 
 IV. This Linea Fitalis abounding with Branches to- 
 wards the upper end, and thole Brandies extending 
 thcmfelves towards L/w.",^ Hspatica, fore'hew Riches and 
 Honour,- but if thofe Branches defcend towards the Rf- 
 jtricla , they threaten Poverty, Contempt and deceittUl 
 Servants. 
 
 V. If this Line be cut ',vith little Lines like Hairs, it 
 fjgnifies Difeafes, which if they fall towards the Hep.ni- 
 ca, lliews in the younger Years, in the middle of the 
 Line, in the mi.idle of "the Age, if towards the Rejhitlay 
 in the latter Year=. 
 
 VL If this Line be any where broken, it threatens 
 great Danger of Life in that Age Vv'Iuch the place of the 
 iaid Breach betokeneth, which you may iind out with 
 a great deal of Exactnefs, if you divide the Line into 
 
 A a a 3 ninety 
 
674 FoljgrA^bicet. lib. DC. 
 
 ninety equal partj, bcguiEir.g to number tfcem Iram A 
 toward? B. 
 
 yil. If tkeCharacleTor 5»/, (-.i^. 0) be fiJimd in 
 this Line, k ihcw? the IdIs of an Eye, ii rtro £udi Fi- 
 imrr?. the icfs of bofli Eyes. 
 
 • Vlir. ALinc paiTmg; tbrou|hth!5^*iii to the Trian- 
 ^ ctf j^itr.s {hews V/ounis and Feiers, and nuuiy Mif" 
 tortuncs in journeying. 
 
 IX. A Line proceedin? from the Vitai beneath the 
 An|;lc it makes with ihs H:p;i:icM to the Mount oiS^uurny 
 CnT\L^i^ an Enriou; Mm, as alfo iorat dan|erous S^ttr- 
 nijtn Dt/cafe, as a Confiimpiion, &c. wh'.ch ihall fail 
 in iholc Ye.i'"- f:2r.:nfd by that part of the Vital Line, 
 ivh'cu the f lii Line toacheth. 
 
 X. Bur fucfc a Line paiT-ng from d?c Viul to the Ring 
 F.Xteij ir.cws Honour aed \VeaIth, and that by means 
 of Ivnr.e Nrble Woman. 
 
 XI. I:" It is !arg, not cut, of a good colour, and well 
 aniwerii:i.tbe AVriii, it fnews a long and quiet Life. 
 
 XII. It a Star be placed therein, fomc of wbofc 
 Beams may reach co the Mpunt 0i»nj*/j J^purr or Mjn-i^ 
 it l"hews Mi5tbrture in matters of Lo\'e, Honour ot War. 
 
 XIII. If there is a double Line ot Lue, they fi2;nify 
 :r.iry Years and fortunate, and the Favour of Kings, 
 F: nresani are^tMen: alio Victory in Wars, eiiaealc 
 o; P-.'wer a:.d*vcalth. ' v 
 
 Xl\'. If a Woman has a double Lice of Life, they 
 fcnity great Fortune, and a Woman much beloved of 
 bcr Hufband; if iTiC prove? Uncha/^, ihc bacomcsaMi- 
 ftrtfs to forae great Man or Men. 
 
 XV. If the Lue Line be pale or li^-id, it thews much 
 Fur?, which will be the caufe of fhortning the Life. 
 
 X v^. if it ftrlkcs up with Branches between the 
 Nhunts of Jstpup- and I'^mnsy it Ls a il»n of great Richc; 
 ar.a Honours. 
 
 XVII. La Star be at the i-ower end of it, itinewsDi- 
 fcafcE in old Age: if any Lines thwart orcrofs it, they 
 
 _ areurf-rmnate, and fiznifv lo manv Difeafe*. 
 
 XV II I. If there aic. three Stars wiihin this Line, tbev 
 r:;::r3- Calumny, SiaSJhr and Dilgace by means of 
 \'k ( men, C" curM. 
 
 ' XIX. I:" there be CrriTes m it. Women Oiall Iof« 
 him. but bcihali be Unfortunate ty rcaloji of tbem, 
 and m iaisgei o: hif liie. XX. Ir 
 
Chap. ^. Of the Line of Life, 67 $ 
 
 XX. If this Line is entire, long, clear, rtiddj^, it is a 
 fignof long Life, Health and o;nodFortmiej butiflhort 
 and abrupt, the Perion will Die young. 
 
 XXL If it makes an Angle Avith the Menfd under 
 the Mount of Jupiter^ it llievvs great Credit and Repu- 
 tation with the People, and much Wealth by Indullry. 
 
 XXII. The Linea f^italis being cut at top, betux-c'n 
 the Thumb and Mount of Jupiter y fliews Sickntfs in 
 Youth, or the younger Years ; but if on the fide of the 
 Triangle of Mm-s, more towards the middle of Life. 
 
 XXIII. If a Triangle is in the midft of ihc Line of 
 Life, the Perfon will be Murthered : \i there be two fuch 
 Triangles in it, they will Die by the hand of jul'iice. 
 
 XXIV. If there are Lines coming from the Mo.int &f 
 Vennsy and croffing the Life Line, it denote one unfrr- 
 tunate in Love, and Death either by Sickneis or Oiher- 
 wife. 
 
 XXV. The Line of Life crookedly forked, with uneven 
 CrofTcs, towards the Wrilt, it iheus one not very Wife, 
 a Wanderer and Vagabond. 
 
 XXVI. Two CrolTes at the upper end of tlie Line of 
 Life, near the Thumb, in a Womans Hand, ii; dciioi;cs 
 her to be Vlnchaft, Lewd and Shameleis. 
 
 _ XXVIL If it is divided in the middle, it lliews great 
 Sickncfs in the middle part of Life ; if towards the Writt, 
 a languil'hing Difeafe in old Age. 
 
 XXVIII. The Line of Life grofs and red, it ftgnifies 
 one Proud, Haughtvand Cruel, and dclightin;; \x\ Ciu-= 
 elty ; one of a gow Ingenuity, biit employs it to evil 
 Defions. 
 
 _XaIX. If there be three Stars or three Points in th: 
 Line of Life, they ihew Slanders and Dilgracc by occafi- 
 Gn of Women: if thofe Stars arc without the Line, the 
 Perfon receives Difgtace, but recovers his Reputation a-' 
 
 XXX. If a Triangle is at the end of the Line of Life,, 
 to\Yards the Wriil:, it (liews on^ full of Words, Falfe, and; 
 importunate in begging any thing. 
 
 XXXI. If aCrofs is made between the Line of Li c 
 and the middle or Natural Line, it lliewt the Perion to 
 be Generous, Liberal, Noble and Wilis, and one beloved 
 aind reipe6te4 of the greater and better Sort. 
 
 Aaa4 XXX.U,. If 
 
61 6 Polygnphices, Lib. IX. 
 
 XXXII. If the Soror Aiartit is p.ir.illcl to the Line of 
 Lie, having a Crofs, it fignifiesCjoodncf?, Sweetnelsof 
 Temp:r, andUprightncls of Mind. 
 
 XXXIII. If It branches towards the H<"ymca^ or Na- 
 tural Line, it Hicn's Honour, Riches and Dignities. 
 
 XXXIV. If it branches out towards the Wrill, it de- 
 notes Unfaichfulncls of Servants, GUumny, Difgrace 
 and Poyert}\ 
 
 XXXV. If it is dift'ufed into divers fniall Lines, it 
 prenotes Sickncfs, Poverty and Want towards old Age. 
 
 XXXVI. If there be Croffes in it looking towards tltc 
 Hfpatic.iy it lliews Dangers, Misfortune's, maUgn Fevers, 
 and fudden Deatli. 
 
 XXXVII. If it is forked, fo as one of its Branches 
 point towards the Afms Solis, it fignifies honourable 
 Marriage, Riches by Women-kind, and Favors from 
 Wotncn. 
 
 XXXVIII. If the two ends of the Fork bend towards 
 the Mount oiTentts, it indicates Whordoins, Fornicati- 
 on, Adulter}^ Inceft :ind Sodomy. 
 
 XXXIX. If the lame thing be found in a Womans 
 Hand, it iliews an infamous, impudent, lullful, lliame- 
 Jefs Whore. 
 
 CHAP. VL 
 
 Of the Epatkl'y or Natural Line. 
 
 I, "T* H E Natural or Liver Line is that which runs from 
 '*- the Life Line or Mount of Jupiter through thq 
 middle of the Palm, terminating j^enerally upon the 
 Mount K)\ Ln-ia. 
 
 IL This Line flraight, continued and not cut by o- 
 ther oblu;uc Lines, ihcws a healthy Conltitution and 
 loi;g Li.c : but iliort or broken, not reaching beyond t!x 
 middle of the Palm, llgnifies a ilioc^^fc replete with 
 manv Difeales. 
 
 HI. The longer this Line is, fo much the longer Life 
 it fignifif, if it be cut at the eiid thereof, it tlueatens 
 the cud of Lite with Ibme dangerous Difeafe 
 
 IV. If 
 
Chap. 6. OftheNaturdLine. 611 
 
 IV. If any Breach appears, (yetfuch an one as feei 
 almofl: continued) it lliews a Change of Life, if uj.'dtr 
 the middle Finger, in Itrength of Years, if under i.t 
 Ring Finger, in declining Age. 
 
 V.^ If the upper part of it be far diftant from the Vi- 
 tal, it l"hews manifold Difeafcs of the Heart, and alio 
 a prodigal Perfon. 
 
 VI. If it be crooked, unequal, of various Colours, 
 and cut by other Lines, it Ihews an evil Habit of the 
 J-iver, and Difeales thence proceeding, one Ill-natured 
 and Foolifh. 
 
 VII. If {tralght drawn and well coloured, fhcws V^it, 
 Honour and Health. 
 
 VIII. If it has a Parallel or Sifter, it gives Inheri- 
 tances. 
 
 IX. If continued with little hard Knots, it fhews Mur- 
 kier according to the number of thole Knots. 
 
 X. It it terminates with a Fork or Angle towards the 
 Mount oi' Lma^ it fhews a Foolilli, Hypocritical, 111* 
 riatured Perfon ; if it tends to the Menfalj it Ihcws a 
 Slanderous and Envious Perfon. 
 
 XI. When it cuts the Vital eminently to the Mount 
 of P^cnus or Soror Aiartis^ efpecialiy if the lame be of a 
 ruddy colour, lliews danger of Thieves and many ill Di- 
 feales, thrcatning Life. 
 
 XII. If it has many CrolTes in it, it fignifies Riches 
 and good Fortune j but he will be one given to Lyin<» 
 and Flattery. ; ^ 
 
 XIII. So many Lines as are between this Line and the 
 A^enfalf fo many Siknelfes they fignify to happen in the 
 firft Age, but they lliall not be Mortal : if the laid Lines 
 extend to the middle Finger, thole Sickneffes lliall hap- 
 pen in the fecopd Age ; but if they reach as far as the 
 fore Finger, thole Sickneffes Ilia 11 happen in old A^e ; 
 in ihe firlt of which beware of Death. 
 
 XIV. If in this Line there be any Knots, fo many as 
 there are, lb many Murthers lliall the Peifon commit. 
 
 XV. If a Woman have thefe Knots, i\\z will Kill her 
 Hush-and, or fc^e of her Children. 
 
 XVI. If it is of a pale colour, it Incws anIU-condi-' 
 tidied Perfon, andfubjed tomany Difeafes. >' -f >^ 
 
 XVII. If there be any Croffes upon it, or but lialf 
 Crdlfcs, it denotes the Perfon to be beloved by iome e- 
 
 mn^.ent 
 
67S Poly^rsphices. Lib. DC. 
 
 mincnt Church-men, as Biihops, &c. and to have Pre- 
 ferment by their means. 
 
 XVIII. It" it hasaCrofsin it near the middle Finger, 
 it iTiews a violent Death by AfTaflination. 
 
 XIX. If it is retorted, and touches the Table Line, it 
 denotes lome great Lofs to happen unexpe6ledly, and 
 by Accident. 
 
 XX. If this Hepatici Line is double, it (hews that an 
 Inheritance lliall fall to the Perfon in their middle Age. 
 
 XXI. The number of CrofTes between the Hepxtick 
 and the Mom Lmt, fignify fo many Favours from great 
 Men, but with danger of Imprifonment. 
 
 XXII. If this Line is great and broad, it denotes ma- 
 ny Years, at kaft 80 or po Years, and in old Age, Po- 
 verty. 
 
 XXIII. If this Line is cut in two and difcontinucd, 
 and iliall be fo cut by certain Clefts, let the Perfon a^ 
 void Princes and great Men, and their Services, Icaft he 
 loofe his Life. 
 
 XXIV. A half Triangle or Triangle being juft be- 
 tween this Line and the Line of Life, in the Plain of 
 A^ars, it fignifies Combats, Duelling and Quarrelling. 
 
 XXV. If it is twice forked , and looks towards the 
 Hypothenary it lliews Hypocrifie, Zeal, and Deceit 
 in Religion. 
 
 XXVI. If it be obfcure and thick, it fhcws a weak, 
 dull Mind ; but if it is little, with this Obfairity, it 
 iliewsone Fooli'Ti, and full of vain and idle Words. 
 
 XXVII. If it has in it certain Points and Marks, he 
 will be fubjc<St to Difealts, and be in danger of being 
 Murthered. 
 
 XXVIII. If this Line is not found when the Vital and 
 Menfal fhall ;oin together and make an Angle, the Per- 
 fon v/ill be Bold, Beftial and Cruel, and in danger of 
 his Lie, till his 30th Year is part. 
 
 XXIX. If this Line is wanting, and inftcad thereof a 
 Star or Crofs be found, let liim beware of the GalJows. 
 
 XXX. If this Line makes an Angle with the Life Line, 
 tho' obtufe, or there be any Star? or Crolfes between it 
 and the Life Line, it ibews one Virtuous and Good, of 
 a generous Spirit and noble Courage: but in a Woman* 
 It fignifies M ilice, and an lil llndcrllanding betwixt hc^ 
 and her Husband. 
 
 XXXI. If 
 
Chap. 6. Of the Natural Line, 1^7^ 
 
 XXXI. If in a Man this Line is red and well coloured, 
 with fome Branches making an Angle, it lliews one 
 Cruel, Mercilefs, and given to Quarrelling and fight- 
 ing. 
 
 XXXII. The fame in a Womans Hand, ihcws her to 
 be at Variance with her Husband, and may be in dan- 
 ger of Killing him, without aiiy Caufe or ReafoH. 
 
 XXXIII. If a Woman has this Line half doubled, it 
 fignifies that fhe will live to a great Age, and Marry 
 many Husbands, yet not have many Children, being 
 very Letcherous. 
 
 XXXIV. If in this Line there is a right-Iin'd Trian-? 
 gle, near the Table Line, and the Line of Life, itihcws 
 a Man too fmgular as to matters of Religion, and ont 
 that will not be Prielt-ridden. 
 
 XXXV. If this Line is (traight and not dirtind, but 
 is crofied by other Lines, it lliews Health, a great Un-, 
 derftanding and Memory, yet one Hair-brain 'd, change- 
 able in the moft ferious things, and fcarcely relblved in 
 any thing. 
 
 XXXVL If the Jy^fprff/V^ reaches almoft to the Wrill 
 with the Cephalicay it lliewsWeakncfs of Brain and Sim- 
 plicity, and danger of Madnefs or Dotage : and in a 
 Woman, thatllie lliallhave hard Travel in ChiLl-bcar- 
 ing, and may grow Crafcdin her Underitanding. 
 
 XXXVII. tf the Hepatica is winding up and dowrt, 
 and waving, itfliewsanillMind, a Cheat, a Thief, &c. 
 but othcrwifeitllaewsan Honeft, True, ]\x[\, Virtuous^ 
 pood Perlon. 
 
 XXXVIII. If it is forked, or when there is above it 
 this Figure w'^. Part of Fortune, it Ihews great Riches, 
 and Dignities, Knowledge of Arts and Sciences, Great- 
 nefs and Subtilty of Spirit. 
 
 XXXIX. If together with the Cephalica it is forked, or 
 makes up a Triangle or Quadrangle, it Ihews one Co- 
 vetous of Wealth and Honour, which he ^viU endeavour 
 for by all ways right or wrong. 
 
 XL. The EpiUka {traight, l]ie\vs Health and Prolpc- 
 rlty ; but if crooked, Sicknefs and Shortnels of Li.e ; if 
 crooked and of divers colours, Wcakneis, Swooning., 
 Palpitation ot the Heart, Waiting, &c. 
 
 XLI. Ifit is well coloured, it l^ews Goodncfs, one of 
 afubtilSpuit, pleaUntantdMerry. 
 
 KMLIf 
 
6Zo Polygrapfjtces. Lib. IX. 
 
 XLII. If there be a Crois at one of its Extreamities, it 
 denotes danger of being Robbed, and at length fudden 
 Death: andif forked in the Extreamities, Poverty, Beg- 
 gary and Contempt ; and in old Age, one overwhehiied 
 with Cares, Troubles, AtRi6lions and Straights. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 of the CefhdicA or Head Line, 
 
 I. "T" H E Cephalica arifeth below from the Cardiaca^ and 
 -*• is drawn thence to the Epatica, thereby making a 
 
 Triangular Figure. 
 
 II. Making luch a perfect Figure, and it having a 
 
 lively colour, without Interfe(5tion, declares one of great 
 
 Prudence, and a Perfon of no Vulgar Wit or Fortune- 
 Ill. So much the more pcrfcil the Triangle, lb much 
 
 the more Fortunate, and it ihews a Man very Wife, 
 
 Temperate and Couragious. 
 
 IV. Ifthe Triangle be obtufe, it iTiews an evil Nature, 
 Clownij"h and Rudr, if there be no Triangle, it is (Hll 
 worfc, andlliews the Perfon to be Foolilli, a Liar and 
 Prodigal, and generally one of a ihort Life. 
 
 V. The higher Angle being ri^hi, or not very acute, 
 fliews a Generous Man ; but if ii be very, acute, or if it 
 touch the Line of Life under the Mount of the middle 
 Finger, it declares a milerabk^iiardand covetous Wretch, 
 alfo forefliews a Confumptifni. 
 
 VI. The left Angle made upon ihtEpatica, in theF^- 
 ricnt^ (bcmg a right Angle) Ihews a profound Under- 
 lianding. 
 
 VII. The Cephalica cafting unequal and irregular 
 -Clefts to A'fons LHn<e, thereby conlbtiiting Ihange Cha- 
 raders, fhews a dull Head, .ind Danger by the Sea in 
 Men: but in Women DilcoiUcnts, Milcinlar,es, and 
 the like. 
 
 VJII. But cafVmg equ^l Lii.c?, it prefaces the contra; 
 ry in both Sexes: to wit, In Men W lidom, and Succefs 
 at Sea j and m \Vomen Contentment and happy Child- 
 bearing. 
 
 IX. If 
 
Chap. 7. Of the Head Line, 6S1 
 
 IX. If the Cephalic A makes a Cleft or apparent Star 
 upward to the CaveA Martis, it llicws Boldnefs and Mag-- 
 nanimity of Mind: but if it let the fame fall down- 
 ward, it manifetts Deceit and Co^vardife. 
 
 X. The Cephalic A joined to the Rejiri^a by a remarka- 
 ble Concouriej i"hews a happy and joyful ©Id Age. 
 
 XI. But if it be drawn upwards, (in form like a Fork) 
 towards the place of Fortune, it (hews much Subtilty 
 and Craft in the Management of Aftairs. 
 
 XII. If in this Fork the Chara6ler of Sors be found, 
 it lliews Riches and Honour by the Mans own Induftry. 
 
 XIII. This is the Line which makes a Triangle with 
 two other Lines, viz.. the Epmica running on the Top, or 
 if you JJleafe, on the Bafis of the Triangle, the Line of 
 Saturn under the Afons Saturai^ making the one Leg ; 
 and this Line rifmg from the bottom of the Satumia to- 
 wards the Aions Soils or McrcArij., making the other 
 Leg. 
 
 XIV. A Crofs or Croffes in the Extremity of this Line, 
 fignifies one Pious and Religious, Devout, and a Vota- 
 ry to Sandtity. 
 
 XV. The Cephalic a m2Mm% a Triangle with xh^Epati- 
 ca and Cardiaca, it ihews Ingenuity, good Fortune, a 
 happy Life, and a quiet and peaceable old Age. 
 
 XVI. The CepkalJcafoTktd towards the Aff«/k/, fhews 
 a Perfon adfivc in all kitxls of Affairs, and one very In- 
 genious in Arts and Sciences, ^wid taking Pleafure in 
 the fime. 
 
 XVII. If it is ftarry towards the Vlain of Afars, it 
 prenotes Boldnefs, Courage, Promptitude, Ralhnefsand 
 Stoutnefs. ^ 
 
 . XVIII. If the Cepkdica near the Hand-wrift be not 
 divided or interrupted, but of a good Proportion and 
 Colour, and afcending «p to the Line of the Stomach or 
 Epatica , and making vVft^L the Linea f^italis a perfedl 
 Triangle, it ihews one Prudent and W^ife, Fortunate 
 and Prol'pcrous \n all things, and that he is the Favou- 
 rite of Fortune. 
 
 XIX. If the Cephalic^, is Ihort, it fliews Folly, Prodi- 
 gality, Beggary, Lying and ihortneis of Life. 
 
 XX The Cephalica broken or divided, and winding, 
 it fignifies Misfortunes, WeaJ^ncfs of Brain, and of tfi( 
 
 Animal 
 
 the 
 
68a Poiygraphicesy Lib. IX. 
 
 Annimal Pun6lions, Fearful and t^oolilli : and if a Wo- 
 man, Oae Dies in Child-bed, or has bard Labour. 
 
 XXL If it is without any breaking at the Re/lriSla, it 
 Hiews Honcfty and Quietnefs, Glory, Prudence, \Vif- 
 dom, and much Wealth or Riches, and a good old Age, 
 without Trouble. 
 
 XXII. If there be in this Line any Stars, being in the 
 Tri.mgHlfWi Martis , it denotes the Man apt to pick 
 Quarrels. 
 
 XXIli. But if a Star be in this Line, looking towards 
 the Brawn of the Hand, it lliews one fubiedl to Theftj 
 Robbery, Fraud, Deceit, and other ill Actions. 
 
 CHAP. VIIL 
 Of the Mcni'sd Line, or Lir.e of Fortunt, 
 
 I. "Tp'H E Menfdl or Line of Fortune (called alfo Lima 
 -■- ThoraUs) takes its Origina4 from under the iMount . 
 of MercHry, and 'extends it lelf towards the Mount of 
 Jupiter. 
 
 II. This Line, if it belong enough and without In- 
 cifures, fhews Strength of Body, and Conitancy of Mind j 
 the contrary if it be ihort, crooked or cut. 
 
 III. If it terminates under the Mount of Saturn^ it 
 lliews a fooliili, idle and deceitful Perfon. 
 
 IV. If in this Line be found certain Pricks or Points, 
 it fhewsa Lctchcrous Perfon . * 
 
 V. IE t\\Q Epaiica be wanting, and the .4/m/*?/ be an- 
 nexed to the ^/m/, it forci hews either Bctieading, Hang- 
 ing, or other untimely Death. 
 
 VI. If from the Admjd a Line afcends to the fpace 
 between the Mounts of Jnpiter and Sa:wn, another to 
 the fpace between the Mounts ol^ Saturn and Solj and a 
 third to the fpace between the Mounts ot Sol and A'fer- 
 ctiry, it fignifies an Envious, Turbulent and Contenti- 
 ous Perfon, 
 
 VII. A Jittle Line only thus drawn to the fpace be- 
 tween the Aions Satm-ni & Solis, ihews Labour and 
 Sorrow. 
 
 vin. If 
 
Chap. 8. of the Lim of fortune. 68} 
 
 VIII. If annexed to the Epatica, making therewith 
 an acute Angle, the fajne. 
 
 IX. The Menfal projedling fmall Branches to the 
 Mons Jovisy {hews Honour and Glorv. 
 
 X. But if it be naked or fingle, it ihews Poverty and 
 Diftrefs. 
 
 XI. If it cuts the Mount o^Jftphery it fiiews a cove- 
 tous Mind, and great Pride. 
 
 XII. If it fend a Branch between the Mons Jovis & 
 Saturniy it (hews in a Man, a Wound in his Head ; but 
 in a Woman, Mifcarria^e or Danger in Child-bearing. 
 
 XIII. Confufed little Lines in the Menfal ihcw Sick- 
 nefs and difeafes ; if under the A-fons SAturni, in Youth ; 
 under the Mons So I is, in the middle Age j under the 
 Mons Mercttriij in old Age. 
 
 XIV . If there be no Menfal at all, it ("hews one Faith- 
 Itfs, Bafe, Inconftant and Malicious. 
 
 XV. The fpace between this Menfal and the Lined 
 Hepatica, is called the Table ; if this Table is fair and 
 large, broad and continued, or filled with good Chara- 
 dcrs, it lliews a large and ample Fortune, and the larger 
 the more fplendidthe Fortune. 
 
 XVI. The beginning of this Table, which is mofUv 
 under the Mount of Jupiter, lliews the beginning and 
 former parts of Life: that part of it near the Mount of 
 Luna and under Mercury, the latter parts of Life. 
 
 XVII. In the Menfal Line confiihthe greateft part of 
 Chiromantical Signatures, becaulc it runs along under 
 the four Mounts of Jupiter, Saturn, Sol and Mercury^ 
 and moftly terminates upon the Mount of Luna. 
 
 XVIII. If a Star is upon this Line under the Mount 
 of Jupiter, it lliews evil in refped^ of Riches ; if under 
 the Mount oi Saturn, want of Health; if under the 
 Mount of Sol, Dillionour and Diireipedt ; if under the 
 Mount of A^ercury, want of Succels as to Sciences and 
 Merchandizing. 
 
 XIX. If a Crofs is upon this Line in the fame places, 
 it ihews good Fortune in the fame things as the other 
 did evil : thus Authors : but I have obferved, that a Star 
 in thole places has prcfaged fmgular good Fortune to 
 the Perfon ; and therefore referr thoie Judgments to fome 
 ill Cliaracters placed thereon. 
 
 XX. If - 
 
684 Polygraphiees. Lib. IX. 
 
 XX. If this Table Line is large, clear and well co- 
 loured, it fhews Plea fantnefs, Courage, Liberality, Mag- 
 nanimity of Mind, Faithfulnefs and long Life. 
 
 XXL If there beCroifes in this Line towards the lit- 
 tle Finger, it forelLews Death in a proportionate num- 
 ber of Years ; but a little Star fignifies Exile, Impriibn- 
 ment and Shame: I am of Opinion, that a little Star 
 ihews the lefler Good. 
 
 XXIL The Table Line making an Angle with the 
 Epatica^ under the Thumb, ibews one liiperlativcly Co- 
 vetous. 
 
 XXin. The Menfal naked and fin gle near the Mount 
 oi Jupiter^ or a Star there, it lliews Po\erty. 
 
 aXIV. if other Lines thwart this Line, it fignifies fo 
 ■^ many Afflidions and Sicknefles, whicli lomctimcs may 
 be caufed thro* Love. 
 
 XXV. The ^(f«/»?/ ftretching beyond the middle Fin- 
 ger, it lliews Felicity and Riches ; but if not, P.overty ; 
 and in a Woman, that llie will be given to Whoririg 
 and Pleafure, Vanity and Lying. 
 
 XXVL If it is double or divided into three, in one of 
 the Extremitie.s, it lliews one Fortunate, Stout, Liberal 
 and Modeft. 
 
 XXVII. If it is forked in the end towards the Mons 
 Jovify or full of Branches near the Mons Lunte, or hairy 
 at the Extremities, it fignifies difquict and doubt of 
 Mind, Anxieties, Mifcry, andLoffcs; or Riches acquired 
 thro' Violence and Deceit j but the Perlon himielf may 
 poffibly be of a good Humor. 
 
 XXVIII. If It gives Branches between the fore Finger 
 and the middle Finger, it iliews a Wound in the Head, 
 Quanelfrng; and to? Woman, Death in Child-bed. 
 
 XXJX. But ifitgives Branches on the Mount of rV'/- 
 ter, it fignifies Prelacy, or Ecclcfiaitical Honours, Dig- 
 nities and Preferments : io alfo if there is upon this Line 
 two Crolfes. 
 
 XXX. If vifible Points be feen in this Line, it lliews 
 Luftfulnefs, Lafciviouliiels and Incontinence. 
 
 XXXI. If the Menfal is crooked, it lliews untimely 
 Dcatii by fome Accident or Cafualty, or Biting of fome 
 MadBeali. 
 
 XXXII. If in the Extremity near the Afons Lnn^t there 
 is found an O or Circle, and if the Line be double, it 
 
 ihew^ 
 
Chap. 9. 0/ Cauda Draeonk 6is 
 
 fhews Wounds by Weapons or Fire ; and in Combats 
 and Duels he will be overcome. 
 
 XXXIII. The Menfal ending between the middle and 
 fore Fin.^ers, it prenotcs one very Weak and Sickly, fub- 
 ;ed to Bloody Fluxes : and if it be a Woman, {he will 
 Die either in Child-bed, orby fome Flux of Blood. 
 
 XXXIV. If two Branches ifTue from tht Menfal, and 
 reach to the Natural or Epatica^^ thro' the middle of a 
 Crofs, it gives the finding of hidden Treasures, and by 
 the ineans of S.intrn, if under the Mons Saturnu He that 
 has fuch Branches ihall be Fortimate, thro' finding out 
 hidden thin.ss- 
 
 XXXV. Iht Menfal having a Branch torvvards the 
 fore Finger, and another towards the middle Finger, if 
 it be blunted or obtuie, it ihews one Fortunate, and 
 that ilia 11 obtain great Riches. 
 
 XXXyi. If upon tht, Menfal there be another Line> 
 it fignifies Incon limey, as Taifner -asmX Indagine fay; 
 and if it be a Woman, llie will delight in Company-- 
 keeping, but may not be Co bad as reported. 
 
 XXXVII. Two Branches going out of the Menfal like 
 the Charadtcr of 2» AqnariHSj bending towards the little 
 Finger, it lhe\vs one very defirous of Learning .and 
 Knowledge, even to thofe Arts which are unlawful, as 
 Sorcery, whereby he may loofe his Life or Honour, 
 
 XXXVIII. If in thz Men/a! a. Cutting happens be- 
 tween the Pving Finger and little Finger, which leparates 
 the two Mounts thwarting this Line, it {"hews Lofs and 
 Ruine by Law Suits, and Suits about an Inheritance ot 
 Land. 
 
 XXXIX. If the Men-fal is wanting, it fhcnvslol? of 
 Eftate, or of ah Inheritance; but in length of time he 
 may, by his own Indulky, gain Wealth and Riches be?^ 
 yond Expectation, r ^ 
 
 C H A P. ]% 
 of the RfiflriOia ^ Cauda Draconis. 
 
 % 'X' H E Refiri^a is that Line \yhich divides the Han.^ 
 
 '*■ from the Arm-, either by a liu^le,doubk o.l friple 
 
 Bbb " Tranl" 
 
686 Polygrapkicef, Lib . IX- 
 
 Tranfcurfion, thereby determining the 7»w'«poxrffA6vor or 
 Subjed of Art ; which by fome is called the Dijcriminul 
 Line. 
 
 U. If the i^^/^rz^A be double or treble, and crtended 
 in a right and continued tra<ft, it lliews a healthful Con* 
 ftitution of Body, and long Life. 
 
 III. That Line which is neareft the Hand, continued 
 without Incifure, and of a good colour, iLews Riches. 
 
 IV. But if it be pale or crooked, or cut in the middle, 
 it fhews Weaknets of Body and Poverty. 
 
 V. A Line drawn from the ReftrOlA to Mons Lwia, 
 fhews Poverty, Imprifonment and private Enemies. 
 
 VI. If that Line be crooked, it doubles all the Evil, 
 andilie^vs a perpetual Slavery or Miftry. 
 
 VII. But luch a Line being clear and ttraight, and 
 extended to the Mons Lunte, lliews many Journeys and 
 Peregrinations both by Sea and Land. 
 
 VIII. If it extend to iht Mons Jovii, it foreQiews 
 Eftimation and EcclefiafHck Dignity, but that the Maa 
 {ha.ll live in a ftrange Country. 
 
 IX. If to the Epatlca, it fhews Honeliy, Truth and Sin- 
 cerity, and one of a healthful and long Life. 
 
 X. If to the Aions Soli^, a great and certain Good, 
 and gives Honour and Command in the Common- 
 wealth. 
 
 XI. And fo from the fame Rcafon, paifing to the 
 Mons Adenurii^ it ilicws a learned and ingenious Soul ; 
 but if it reach not that Mount, but is broken about the 
 middle, it lliewsalying, prating, idle Perfon. 
 
 XII. If it alcends direcily to the Mons Saturni^ it 
 fliews an Inheritance in Land ; but if it be crooked, it 
 Oiewsa covetous Peribn, and one of a very ill Nature. 
 
 XIII. A Line running fiom the Refirittathtou^ the 
 Aions Veneris^ lliews Poverty, Advcrfity and Want, and 
 tl at by means of lome Women or Woman-kind. 
 
 XIV. A Crols or Star upon the Rejiri^ay llle^vs a liap- 
 py and long Life. 
 
 XV. One or more Stars upon' the Re!lriBa,_ by the 
 A'fons Ventrisy in Women, llicw3 Le^vdiiefs, Dillionour 
 and Infamy, 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Ghap. t o. OhfertfAtioHs oH the Wrifi. 61 f 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Other Obfervaiiofjs on the HimAWrifii 
 
 I. TF four Lines be in the Hand-wrift, all alike and 
 A wellcoloiued, theyfignify anAgc ofSo, ^o or iod 
 Years or more. _ - 
 
 II. And ifthere is two little Branches, making a iTiarp 
 Angle, it lliews the SuccelTion of an Heritage by the 
 i)eath of fome Relation, and in his old Age he lliall at-' 
 tain to fuch Honours as he is capable of. . 
 
 III. If there be many Lines upon the Hand-wrifl, 30 
 Years is to be allowed to every Line ; but Avhether they 
 be few or many Lines, you are to comprehend therein 
 all the Ages of the Givers of Years. 
 
 IV. The Ages o^ Saturn are 1 50, 57, 43 and 30 Years ; 
 Q^ Jupiter 136, 80, 45 and 12 Years; ot M«rs 121, 66, 
 40 and 15 Years ,• OiSol 1 20, 90, 70 and 20 Years ; ot 
 P'entis 135, 82, 45 and 8 Years j 01 Mercnry i^.yjj^ 59 
 and 20; ofLma io8, po, 66 and 250 . 
 
 V. If the Lines are many, itrong, good, (Iraight^ ana 
 at large diflances, they fignify the greateft Years j but 
 if fewer in number, the lefler Years; fo alfo if they be 
 but two Lines, and they pretty far afunder : otherwife, 
 if but two Lines, and near together, they fignify the 
 mean Years ; and if but one Line, the lelfo iiumiber of 
 Years. 
 
 VI. The Giver of Years is known by confiderino; the 
 Mounts or Places of the Planet?; for that Planet is the 
 Giver of Years whole Mount or Place is fulleft prmoll 
 adorned with Lines of what kind fbever. 
 
 VII. If the Lines or Characters upon thofe Moiints or 
 Places be ftron^, faijt and good, they fignify the greats 
 c(t or greater Years, t\\zReflri^a concurring ; but if they 
 be ^veak or evil CharadkrS; then the leili:r and ieaft 
 Years. 
 
 Vlil. If there be three tines in the Hand-wrift, the 
 Perfon may live to po Years of Age, and i.^' they be decpV 
 and the Spaces broad, then they may liv« to too Years j 
 and it may be (if ot a Itrong Conftitution) Eve many- 
 Years beyond it» 
 
688 FolygrAfhicts. Lib. IX. 
 
 IX. If there be but two Line?, the Perfon may live to 
 be about 60 Years of Age ; but if the Lines be ihong, 
 deep and good, and the Space large or broad, they may- 
 live to 70 or 80 Years or more. 
 
 X. If tliere is but one Line, it fiainifieg fhort Life ; if 
 there is more than one, and the firft is crooked, and the 
 re(t ftrait, \yith an Angle, and continued, it llievvs a 
 weak Conrtitution. 
 
 XL If Lines are fcattered abroad in the Hand-wrift, 
 it fhews about 43 Years of Age, one Couragious, but of 
 little Wit. 
 
 XII. If the Lines upon the Hand-wrift crofs one ano- 
 ther, it is hazardous but the Perfon may Die by the Sen- 
 tence of the Judge. 
 
 XIIL If the firit Line of the Wrift is grofsand thick; 
 the fecond fine and fmall or flender ; and the third a- 
 gain be thick and grofs, they flievv that the firlj Age 
 ihall abound with Riches ; the fecond Age fhall be filled 
 witli Poverty and Misfortune ,• but the third or la(t Age 
 he fhall recover his Riches and good Fortune again : and 
 if there is a fourth Line, and it is fmall, he lliall meet 
 ivith Misfortunes and Poverty again, and fo end his 
 Life. 
 
 XIV. If the Lines of the Hand-wrift come to the flat 
 of the Handj they lliew great Inconllanq'- and Irrefolu- 
 tion. 
 
 XV. Ifa Line crolTcs the Wrift, and crookedly fpreads 
 it felf towards the Line of Life, it fliews Sicknefs ; if it 
 is pale, it fignifies Death to be near -, if it is black, it 
 lliews tlie approach ot' fome Difeale, which will be long 
 and langnilhiir^. 
 
 XVl.'lf any Line of theWrift afcends up to the Palm ■ 
 and Hollow of the Hand, thro' the Line of Life, and it 
 be red, it lliewsWeaknefs of Body, Debility of llnder- 
 •ftanding, and one that pofTibly may be a Cuckold. 
 "• XVli. If many Lines fprcad themielves abundantly 
 ."on the Wrift-, and end towards the Mount of LnriiU it 
 iliewsVoyagesbySca andLand, long Expeditions, pet- 
 peuial Travelling, and a Vagabond-kind of Life. 
 
 XVIIL If the Lines of the Wrift fie Icattering and 
 fpread abroad, io as they touch not one another, but 
 crooked h^ pafs divers ways, tliey llgnif}- great Ingenuity, 
 
 mucii 
 
Chap. I o. OhfervAtionsonthtWrifi, 6Sg 
 
 much Curiofity, ^reat Thoughts, high Courage, anclon.e. 
 aiming only at high things, ^ . 
 
 XIX. If among the Lines of the Wrilt there is one 
 ivhich thwarts or crolTes them, and afcends thro* the 
 Piain of Mars, even to the Mens So!^, it l>ie\vs unex- 
 pected Honours and Riches, and which will come fud- 
 denljr, as alfo the Favour of fome King, Prince or great 
 Man. 
 
 XX. If the Lines of the Wrift nre double towards the 
 Mons L-maj and if one Line afcends towards the Sto- 
 mach Line, and be uneven, it lliews Tribulations and 
 great Adverfities, being Cheated, and danger of many 
 Encounters or of AiTaOination. 
 
 XXI. If on a Womans Hand there be a Triangle near 
 the Mount of Z/,'<«^, and beginning at the Lines of the 
 Wrirt, it fliews Lewdnefs, one who is Corrupt even, 
 from her tender Years, and iliall be given to all forts of 
 unclean Anions in the flower of her Age, and be an in- 
 famous and .,^mmon Whore. 
 
 XXII. If Croffes be on the Wrift of a Woman, it 
 fhews one Shame-fac'd and Cliaft ; and if there is one 
 m the middle, looking towards the Plain of M.rrs, (he 
 will V>G a Widow either by or before 30 Years old, and 
 be Religious withal. 
 
 XXIII. If a crooked Line (like a Bow) traverfes the 
 Lines of the Wrilt, it Ihews a fervile Perfon ; if there 
 be tivo fuch crooked Lines, it iLewsuntiiTiely Death, or 
 by the hand of Juftice. 
 
 . XXiy. If the Wrift Lines be red and pure, they fhew 
 a Martial Perfon, and one who lliall be fortunate and 
 honourable in Wars. 
 
 XXV. It the Wrift Lines be in manner of a Chain, 
 cfpecialiy the firft, it ihews an Llnfortunate and Labo- 
 rious Lile ', yet at length, by much Labour, he ihall get 
 Wealth and Riches. ' ^ 
 
 XXVI. A long Wrift, without! nterfedions, figni- 
 nes Strength of the Habit of the Body, and a Conftancv 
 ofMmd. ^ 
 
 XXVII. If the Wrift is lliort, cut and diffefled, it ' 
 fhcws a weak Habit of Boiy, and Deieiledneis of 
 Mind. 
 
 XXVIII . If the Lines of the Wrift look towards thofc 
 of S,mniUjth^Y tbrelhew one Vain-glorious and a Liar. 
 
 Bbb 3 XXIX, If 
 
6^Q Foiygrdphtcts. Lib. IK. 
 
 XXIX. If the Blanches of the Wrift Lines afccnd to- 
 wards the Mount oi Jupiter, they fignify Honours, Dig- 
 nities and Riches. 
 
 XXX. If thofe Branches afcend bctn'een the Mons 
 Jov'^ and Mons Saturniy the Perfon iTiall be Wounded 
 in the Head ; and if a Woman, Hie nill Die in Child- 
 bed : but if they afccnd to the Mms Satumi, they ("hew 
 Poverty and Difcontcnt. 
 
 XXXT. If there be CrofTes or Stars in thefe Lines, they 
 demonftrate Tranquility of Life in old Age. 
 
 XXXII. If thofe Branches afcend to the Afons Sollsf 
 they fignify Honour, Glory and Greatnefs. 
 
 XXXIII. If thofe Branches look towards the Mom 
 Veneris, or raake a Triangle, they fhew Fornication, In- 
 caft and Adultery. 
 
 XXXIV. |f thofe Branches look towards the Mount 
 oi Mercury, it fignifies much Good by Trade, Arts and 
 Sciences. 
 
 XXXy. If they look towards the Mount of Luna^ 
 they point out Peregrinations, Travelling about the 
 World, much Bufmels and Popularity. 
 
 XXXVI. If thofe Branches tend towards the Hepatick 
 Line, they fignify Integrity, JufHce, good Nature, and 
 long Life. 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 (Hfthe Saturnia, or Line of Saturn. 
 
 T. TTHis Line is that which afcends from the Rejlritla 
 •*- through the middle of the Fo/^, to the A^ons Sa- 
 tdirni ; whicli Line, if it be cut or parted, is called Fia 
 Comhnli.i. 
 
 II. This being full and extended to the Mons Saturni, 
 fhews a Man of profound Cogitation?, of great Wifdom, 
 and an admirable Counleilor in all great Actions. 
 
 III. If it be combuft, it is an evil Sign, forefhewing 
 many Misfortunes and Poverty in one part of Life. 
 
 IV. A Line dra^vn from the Vitd through the Epati- 
 CA to the Mom Sati^ni, making an Angle with tlie Li- 
 
 ne4 
 
Chap. II. OftheLineofS^imn, 6qi 
 
 nea. SaturnU, forellicws Imprkbnment and Captivity, 
 and many Misfortunes. 
 
 V. The Saturnia bending backwards in Cavea Martis^ 
 towards the Ferient, the fame. 
 
 VI. This Line filled with unufual and inaufpicious 
 Charafters, {"hews Unhappinels and Difarters. " 
 
 VII. A grofs Line running from the Interval of the 
 Afons Jovis to the Menfal, and breaking or cutting of 
 it, (hews Difeafes or Wounds in the Belly or parts ad- 
 jacent. 
 
 VIII. The Saturnia begins at the bottom of the Palm, 
 croffes the Table Line, and ends upon or under the Mom 
 Saturni : in fome it is forked upon the Mount j others 
 have it double in two parallel Lines ; and in fome it 
 pafTes the A<fms Saturniy reaching to the third Ligament 
 of the Finger. 
 
 IX. If this Line is divided, and one part of it goes to- 
 wards the Line of Life, itllnews Affiffination, or an un- 
 happy or l"hameful Death, or Self-murther. 
 
 X. If the Saturnia goes witlj, or begins, or leparates 
 the Epatica, it fignifies Honeiiy and Goodnefs, yet a 
 great Subtilty of Spirit, one careful of his own Affairs, 
 and Fortunate. 
 
 XI. If it comes to the Brawn of the Hand, and fo 
 goes -to the Afons Saturni ^ it lliews Affliclions, Impri- 
 fonment. Tribulation and Slavery. 
 
 XII. If it is fair and entire, it iliews Health, with 
 much Happiwcfs and Tranquility : and when it is fo fi- 
 tuatcd in the middle of the Finger, it lliews Counfel?, 
 Prudence, Secrets, Felicity and good Fortune. 
 
 XIII. If it defcendsfrom the middle of the Finger to 
 the Brawn of the Hand or Hypothenar, and divides it, 
 fignifies Prifons, Tribulations, Affiidions, Slavery, and 
 particularly Gaily Slavery. 
 
 XIV. It it is forked in the Extremities, and paflesthc 
 Hepatica or Natural Line, it ihews Candor ajid Sincerity, 
 Prudence and Subtilty, good Fortune in Agriculture and 
 Husbandry. 
 
 XV. If it goes towards the Line of Life, defcending 
 thro' the middle of the middle Finger, cutting the Mount 
 ofSatHrn, it figniHes Imprifonmcnt, Grief, Affliction, 
 Slavery, and an unhappy Death. 
 
 Bbb4 XVI. If 
 
dp 2 Pol^grafhices, Lib. IX. 
 
 XVI, If this Line is wanting, or is winding, and 
 that at one ef the Angles thereof there is a Star, it figni- 
 fies lofs of Goods, Poverty, Shame, Contempt, hiipri- 
 lonment and great Calamities. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 Of the Linea Solaris, or Stomachica. 
 
 I. ^His Line takes its beginning out of the Line of 
 •^ Fortune, and afcends, dividing the Afons Solisy 
 ftraight to the Ring Finger, which is Digitus Silis. 
 
 II. In fome (arifing from the bottom of the Line of 
 Life, or near the Rejhi^aJ it afcends even to the third 
 Ligament of the Digitus Solis, and is molt commonly 
 branched, as having Lines in an equal greatnefs. 
 
 III. If the Linea Solaris is entire and fak, it fhcws 
 Favopr, Refpecft, Greatnefs, Riches, Honours and Dig- 
 nities. 
 
 IV. If it is diffecled or cut, and unequal, it denote? 
 lofs of Goods and Eftate, Poverty, Crolfes, Contempt, 
 Difgrace, Bafcncfs, Envy, Slavery, and much ill For- 
 tune. 
 
 V. If thisLineiscutby theO'«^«/r<wFV;m/.f, whether 
 in the Right or Left Hand, it prenotes CrofTcs and Mil- 
 fortunes to happen by the means of Women, Filthynclf, 
 DilFioneiiy, Wantonnels, Fornication, Whoredom and 
 
 ■ Adultery. 
 
 VI. If it is apparent and double, it lliews one attaiii- 
 ing to high Oflices and Dignities, C^poad c.ipxvj and 
 that he ihall meet with liich as iliall envy him ; yet he 
 ■iliall attain tiie Favour of Kings, Princes and great Men, 
 ■ivho rtiall raile him to the highcft degree of Glory. 
 
 VIL If the Linea Solaris is crolfed by any Lmcs, fo 
 many Lines as there are, io many tliail there be whicjh 
 iliall envy his Prcicniient and Dignities : and thole Ene- 
 mies or envious Perfons ihall do all that lies in them p 
 prejudice Iiim. : . . 
 
 VIIL But if this Line is apparent an4 double, not- 
 .%'ithlla^iding thole iiuny erofs Lines, thole Enemies antl 
 
 envious 
 
Chap. I j . Of the Girdle of Venus. ^9 j 
 
 envious People fhall never hurt him, but he jfhall over- 
 come them ; and the greater the Envy of his Adve- ^ rics 
 is, fo much the morelhallhe advance in Honours, Dig- 
 nities and Wealth. 
 
 IX. If it is clear and fomewhat ruddy, till it comes 
 to the Table Line, it fignifies Offices of Judicature, ^c- 
 quiredby Prudence, Knowledge, and a genteel Coi: er- 
 lation ; but if it is pale, it fignifies the contrary, and 
 weaknefs of Judgment. 
 
 X. When this Line is wholly wanting in one that 
 takes not much Pains, it lliews one who will be of n( ■ 
 great Dignities or Honours, but continue in a low or 
 mean Condition, unlefs other great Significations help 
 and iliew the contrary. 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 Of the Girdle of Venus. 
 
 L C^Ingtilum Veneris, or the Girdle of Venus, is a circLi- 
 ^ lar Line, or a Piece or Segment of a Circle, drawn 
 from the Inter\^al or Space betw^een the Aims Jovis & 
 SatHrni, and ending in the Interval or Space between the 
 jMons Soils & Mcrmrii. 
 
 II. ' Or, it is a piece of a Circle, which begins be- 
 tween the fore Finger and middle Finger, and goes to, 
 and ends between the Ring Finger and little Finger, in- 
 cluding in its Circuit the two Mounts of Saturn and 
 S§L 
 
 III. This CinguUm Veneris {hews Intemperance and 
 Luft in both Sexes, a bafe and beftial Life, a filthy So"- 
 domite, who abufes himfelf both witli Mankind and with 
 Beads. 
 
 IV. By reafon that this Line is net often found in 
 many Hands, fcarcely one in twenty having it, there- 
 fore the ancient Mafkrs of thi3 Ail Ir.ve given us little 
 Account of it : but Ibme of the Moderns, as Taifnerm 
 and Tricajjhs, have briefly Ipoken of it, and |iven us 
 Rules well grounded, and luch as have been tound to 
 be true. 
 
694 Poly^rspbiees. Lib. IX. 
 
 V. Where therefore this Girdle is found, it fio;nifies 
 Fornication, one cxtrcamly given to the Sins of the FieOi, 
 a nionftrou? Uncleanncfs, even to Beltiality, or Sins a- 
 gain ft Nanire. 
 
 VI. If this Gngahim is on both Hands, it doubles all 
 the former Significations, and /hews a mofl impure Liic, 
 and Sodomiikal Converfation. 
 
 VII. Bdot ( a learned Man ) fays, he found this true 
 in two Men : ih: f>ne received j^reat Difgraces for this 
 Vice, but the Umbrage of Religion has yet protected 
 him. The other he fore-warned of forae vehement and 
 cjitraordinar^'^ Punifhment for it ; and he was Burned 
 by the Sentence of the Judge at yUkpreax : but this laft 
 had on this Girdle, on the right fide of the middle Fin- 
 ger, a half Star, which fignined a great Punilhment, 
 
 VIII. If this Cingulmt is differed or cut on the part 
 of the Digittis Solaris, it fhcws lofs of Goods, by rcafon 
 of fome vile Filthinefs, as Adultery. 
 
 IX. If thefe Cuttings aie under the Digitus Saturni, 
 or the middle Finger, it prenotes the Perfon fhall be Af- 
 fadinated for his Unclean nefs, Whoredorfis or Adul- 
 tery. 
 
 X. If there arc two Croffes upon this Line, one on 
 the fide of the fore Finger, the other on the fide of the 
 little Fing'er, or towards it ; they fignify that Virtue 
 will overcome this Vice ; and that Piety and the fear of 
 God fhall oi'ercome thcfe Vicious Inclinations. 
 
 XI. Says a Maftcr in this Art, Siigitur apparet in horn- 
 nilns Cingulum Veneris, hominem (alacem, UhidinofnWy 
 & inji^niter prarientcm, foriiiJum prsterea, & in Congrejftf 
 Vencr'co, & abominahilem dcnn'at. This is to be under- 
 stood of both Sexes, but chiefly of the Female. 
 
 XII. Indeed, whoever has this Lini:, will be no Ene- 
 my to the other Sex, but will certainly exceed the Limits 
 of Honefty, and be given to Whoring, Inecft, Sodomy, 
 Beaftiality, Chambering, and all other dilhoneft A(5^i- 
 ©ns. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. t4- ^f ^be Milky Wsy. 69$ 
 
 CHAR XIV. 
 
 Of the Via La£lca, or Milky Way^ 
 
 I. pRom the Linea Vitalisy near the Wrift, certain 
 ^ fmall Divifions or Lines do take their beginning, 
 ibmctimes to the number of five or fix, which Lines ao- 
 yance towards y?/(?»j Luna, or Mount of the Moon; ainl 
 thefe arc they which we call Fia Laciea, or the MiUcy 
 Way. 
 
 Ii. If this ria LaBia appears not much in the Hand 
 of a Man, it is a fign of Sicknefs, Head-achs, Dcfluxi- 
 oris. Catarrhs, Gouts, &c. 
 
 in. If it is full, compleat, and the Lines well pro- 
 portioned, it {hews Ingenuity, Favour of Women, and 
 happy Voyages. 
 
 IV. If the P^ia LaBea is cut or difTeded by other Lines, 
 it ihcws Faldiood, Deceit, Meannefs of Spirit, Unhap* 
 pinefs, Poverty and Want. 
 
 V. If it is unequally cut, it fhews wcakncfs^Un- 
 derltanding, Dulnefs and Slownefs in all A6lion$ and 
 Llndertakino;s. 
 
 VI. But if therein there appears CrolTcs in a good 
 form, it fignifies that the Perlon lliall be Religious, and 
 very much love Solitude, or be of a Melancholick Hu- 
 mor, or Lunatick and Crafed in his Brain, and fo pcr- 
 fwade himfelf that he fees Vifions, Angels, Phantafms, 
 and a thoufand other Chimera's, which form thcmfehrct 
 in his difturbed Imagination. 
 
 VII. It this Way^ is entire, and many of its Lines pa- 
 rallel and proportioned, it {liews good Fortune both by 
 Land and Sea, in Trading and Commerce, that he lliall 
 have Prudence andUnderftanding, a good Mind, and a 
 great Memory, and that almolt all thmgs ihall fall out 
 to his great Satisfaction . 
 
 Vlil. If there be on the Lines of the l^U LaBea cer- 
 tain Stars, looking towards Afons MercHrii or the Mount 
 of Mermryy they give great Wealth and Riches : and he 
 that has luch Marks and Stars, will be filled with Wif- 
 dom, Underftanding and Prudence, and be ycrj Happy 
 
 and 
 
^9^ Pol/graphices, Lib. IX. 
 
 ^^ and Fortunate, fo that almoft all things fhall fuccccd 
 
 '• to his Contentment. 
 
 '*- • IX. If the Lin'js of the Fm La[lca bend towards the 
 Mons Teneris or Mount of Venii<:^ it iLcws the Perfon 
 fhall be beloved of the contrary Sex ; and he or fhe Ihall 
 be one of a gentle, kind, aimable Humour, Officious, 
 Refpcdlful, and full of Complafiance j and by Obfe- 
 quiouihefs and Flattery, iLall infinuate themfclves in- 
 to the oth:rs Favour. 
 
 X. If the Via LuBed tends towards Mom Solis or 
 Mount of the Sun, it fi^nifies Wealth, Riches, good For- 
 tune, Preferments, Dignities, Honour, Glory and Re- 
 nown. 
 
 XI. But if towards Afons Satnrni or the Mount ofiW- 
 turn, it iTiews Melancholy, a difaffc6ted Mind, Trou- 
 bles, Affli61:ions, Croflcs, implacable Enemies, Poverty, 
 Want and Contempt. 
 
 XII. If fomeofthc Lincstend ^ow7ix^?>Mom Saturm, 
 and fomc towards Mons Solis, it flicws a mixture of 
 Riches and Poverty , Honour and Contempt, and of 
 good and evil Fortune. 
 
 XIII. If the Lines tend dircftly to Mons Lmjt^ it 
 {hews Popularity, Wealth, Riches and Honour, to be 
 obtained among vulgar People. 
 
 XIV. Some Authors defcribe the Via La^ea or Milky 
 Way, to be a Line running upwards from the RejlriBa 
 thro' the Feriens or Mofjs Lmte, beyond or on the out- 
 lide of the Cephalic. 
 
 XV. Which Line, fay they, if it is whole, and ex- 
 tended to the little Finger, it lliews good Fortune both 
 by Sea and Land, the Favour and Love of Women and 
 great Ladies, anda great Good beyond Expe6lation. 
 
 XVI. But if it is ("hort, or cut, or crooked, it llicws 
 Unbippincis, Poverty, Shame, Dilhonour, Contempt, 
 Troubles, Atfiictions, Croifes, and a poor and lo\v E- 
 ihte. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. I $. Of the Mount of Saturn. 697 
 
 C H A P. XV. 
 
 Of the Mount of Saturn. 
 
 I. ^TpH E middle Fingcs is called Digitus Saturni, and 
 -■- from thence the Mount or Swelling which is un- 
 der it, is caJled Aions Satumi ; which Mount is often- 
 times environed by many other Lines : from the Joynts 
 of the faid Finger, and from the Finger it felf and the 
 Lines we find on the laid Mount, we draw the Judg- 
 ments following. 
 
 II. Tbefirft Joynt of the middle Finger is reprefented 
 by Pijces X, and fio;nifies Fehrmry ; the fecond ^ Aqua- 
 ritis, and flievvs January ; the third 'Vjp Capricorn^ and 
 pre notes December 5 becaufc the Sun goes thro' thofe 
 Signs, in thole particular Months. 
 
 III. If from tl]c Plain of Mars, or lower from the 
 Wrift , there arifes a Line half apparent, palTmg thro' 
 the Mons Saturni, and ending in fome one of the Joynts 
 of the middle Finger, it fhcws fome Imprifonment or 
 great Affli6lion to happen in one of thofe Months figni- 
 fied by that Joynt in which it ends, according to the 
 prcceeding Rule. 
 
 ly . If on the upper fide of this Finger, viz.. on the 
 Nail fide, there be Stars or Croffes, whether on the Right 
 or Left Hand, the Star or Stars fignify Imprifonment 
 for fome Matters of State, or fomething of great Confe- 
 quence : but a Crofs or Croffes fignify Death for Reli- 
 gion. 
 
 V. A Crofs or Croffes does not fignify Happinefs in 
 all places, for it is the Opinion of the Ancients ; and 
 fome have told us, Crux in omnibus locis nonjemper honi- 
 .tatem nature fgnijicantis retinet, feci inter dnm malitiofam 
 "qmlitatem inducit, &c. and that is the Reafon that a 
 Crols or Croffes in the aforefaid places fignify a publick 
 Death or Execution, yet honourable, as being that to 
 which Honour, Virtue and Piety oblige him. 
 
 VI, If from the fecond to the third Joynt there arc 
 three Lines, of which two are a Crofs, it Ihews to a Wo- 
 man much Infamy , as a reputed Whore, Imprifou- 
 jncnt. Whipping, JBanillmiect, and fometiracs danger 
 
 of 
 
6^9 Pohgrsphkts, Lib. IX, 
 
 of Death: to a Man, it iTiews great Infamy, Imprifon- 
 SKot, Fetters and Baniihinent. 
 
 VII. Two CTofs Lines appearing on Mons SatHrni, 
 (after 50 Years o.' A^c) if they be unequal, it prenotcs a 
 £hamet'ul Death in feme publick place of Execution. 
 
 Vin. If an Ecclefiattical Perfon has thofe Lines, 
 ihcv l>iew to him perpetual Ilnprifonment, Forieiturc 
 of \\\s Benefices, with Shame and Infamy, becaufc of 
 Rapes, Incerts, Whoredoms and Adulteries. 
 
 IX. Many Lines upon this Mount, Ihew Penury, 
 Necctfity , Beg? arv and many Fears ; alfo fometimcs 
 Imprifonmrnt tor Debts of his own, or fomc others. 
 
 A. A Star upon the fir(t Joynt of this Finger, {"hews 
 the Perlbn {"hal 1 be Aflaflinated or Murthered. A French 
 Author fays. That he knew the Truth of this to his great 
 Grief, this Event happening to a Gentleman, a good 
 Friend of his, who having fuch a Mark or Star ; he had 
 fbre-warncd him of fuch a Danger, and he w^as after- 
 wards Murthered in his own Wood, as he was one day 
 Walking. 
 
 XI. If the Mons SatHrni is full and manifeft, without 
 Wrinkles or Incifions, it llicws one Simple and Weak, 
 without Craft or Deceit, yet Induftrious in his Domc- 
 ffick Affairs, according to his Capacity of Mind and 
 Strength of Body. 
 
 XII If from the Table Line there comes forth a Line 
 reaching to the Mons Saturni, it fignifies great Anxiety, 
 continual Cares and Difquiet in providing for this Lite, 
 and that he will hazzard the being always Poor, and in 
 Want. 
 
 XIII. If on the Mons SatHrni there is a Line, which 
 begins at the firft Joynt of the Digitns SatHrni, and that 
 the faid Line is cro/Ted by twootlier Lines, like the form 
 of a double Crofs, it denotes Imprifonment, Captivity, 
 Slavery, Chains and Fetters : but if there is but one or a 
 fmgle Crofs, it fignifies the quite CO ntr.iry^ 
 
 XIV. A Woman having on the firft joynt of this Fin- 
 ger 5 or 6 Lines, afccndmg towards the fecond Joynt, 
 yea 11 7 or 8 Lines, it fignih-s io many Children, and 
 or the moft part Males, without any Females between ; 
 
 but they ihall be generally Unfortunske and Poor, 
 lining mileiably, as if they wcic ilic Dre^s of the Peo- 
 ple. 
 ^ XV. Many 
 
 I 
 
Chap. 1 6. Of the Moufrt of Szturn, 6g^ 
 
 XV. Many and various Riinul:ie<=, imall Lines or 
 Clefts on MonsSatnrni, llicws one W'ckeJ and Malici- 
 ous, Fraudulent and Deceitful, but»vit!ial igitated with 
 continual Mileries, Inquietudes and C ire?. Sorrowful^ 
 Timerous, and oFan anxious and bitter Spirit, and very 
 wiltul in their Nature. 
 
 XVI. If a Line or Cleft pafs from the Merfd over 
 the Aions SatMrni, to the Root of tlie Finger, "it /"hews 
 one Anxious, and very much perplexed, unquiet, tiir- 
 moilcd and troubled with Cares, always itriving Tas it 
 were) againft the Stream, and at long run is little the 
 nearer. 
 
 XVII. Many aofs Lines on this Mount and Finger, 
 ihew Labours, Cares, Penury, Want and Imprifon- 
 incnt. 
 
 XVIII. Interfei^ed Lines paffing from A^fons Sau^ni 
 to Mons Solis, fhcws a Perlon flow, dull, laz^^ carelef?, 
 foolilh, ftnpid, fimplc, timerous, doing nothing with 
 Reafon or Judgment : Ibmetimes, as it Ihews a fooliili 
 Mind, it fjgnines alfo Rudenefsand Impudence. 
 
 XIX. In a Womans Hand, if more Lines and Se6li- 
 ons pafs between the Afontes SatHrni & Solis than be- 
 tween the Aiontes Solis & Afercurii, if flie is not Barren, 
 it j[hews the will have more Males than Females. 
 
 XX. If any little Se(^Vions or Lines, coming from the 
 principal Lines, be extended to the Afons Satm-ni, they 
 ihew the Perfon to be of evil Life and Conver^tion, 
 Infamous, and not to be trufted. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 Of the Mount of Jupiter. 
 
 I. "Tp H E Mount of Jupiter is the Tubercfdftm under the 
 
 -*" fore Finger. 
 
 IL If upon the Mount of Jupiter there be a Star or a 
 double Crois, it forelhevvs Riches, Pro^erity and Hap- 
 pinefs, one Born to noble and glorious Aaions, one 
 Honeft, Aftablc, Courteous and Renowned, a generous 
 Soul indeed, and f;uthiul in all their Undcrtalangs. 
 
 ///. The 
 
70O Polygraphices. Lib. IX. 
 
 III. Tlie fame, if this Mount is adorned with a pa- 
 rallel Line, or a Line fweetly drawn, between it and 
 the F/W, it fhews great Dignities, and Eltimation with 
 •great Men. 
 
 IV". But if this Mount be vitiated, with a Charadcr 
 like a halfGridiron, it fhews Unhappincfs, Calamities, 
 Poverty , Difgrace and Depofition from Honours and 
 Dignities, loiTes by Women-kind, and Difcales in the 
 Heart and Lungs. 
 
 V. The fame, if a Line, cutting this Mount, tends to 
 the Mount or Line oi Saturn j this alfo threatens an A- 
 poplcxy. 
 
 VL A Crofs, but cfpecially a clear red Star, on tliis 
 Mount, is a Signal and fure Dcmonttration of a Iplen- 
 didLife, repleat with Honour and Glory, Riches, and 
 an eternal Name. 
 
 VIL The Chara6ler of X J npitcr u^on Mons Jovis\ 
 fjgnifies great Honours and Dignities, T^^o^^ Capax) ac- 
 cording to the Degree or Rank of Extradion, and nra- 
 ny times more. 
 
 VIIL The lame Character upon the firlt or fecond 
 Joynt of the Digitus Jovisy Ihevvs great Riches and Pol- 
 Jeffions, alfo Inheritances by the Death of Kindred ; but 
 if it is in the third Joynt or Extremity of the Finger, it 
 fhews Law Suits, Difpleafure and Quarrels with his 
 near Relations. 
 
 IX. Two equal Lines near the firfi Joynt of the Digi-' ■ 
 tHs Jevis, they fjgnify one Virtuous, Generous, Noble, a 
 Perion of Goodnefs, Strength and Courage. 
 
 X- Ir'in the lame Joynt (iii a WomansHand) there 
 be parallel Lines, they preiiote many Children, but 
 more Males than Females. 
 
 XI. A Woman having two or three Lines between 
 the lecond and third Joynts, being red and fair, they 
 fhew her to be Ingenious and Jovial, but in danger of 
 Dying in Child-I:)ed. 
 
 XIL A SLar ujwn the firll Jo^'iit of a Woraans fore 
 Finger, flicws her to be Balhtld, Shanie-fac'd, Honelt 
 and CliaiL 
 
 XIII. A Star on the fecond Joynt of the fame Finger, 
 lliews her to come to great Preferment and Riches atbsr 
 50 Years of Age. 
 
 xir.A 
 
Chap. 1 6, Of the Mount (/Jupiter. 701 
 
 XIV. A Lo2cnge-like Figure on the Afom Jovis,, with 
 a Line paffing thro' the middle of it, iliews Happiners, 
 an honeft and virtuous Life, an honourable old Ogc, ftiU 
 of Honour and VVeulth. 
 
 XV. A Crois or two t)n the Mons JoviSi Hiews Ho- 
 nour, Dignity, Authority, Favour of Kings and Princes, 
 and a fortunate Mirriage. 
 
 XVI. A Crols near the fiift Joynt of Digits Jovu^ 
 and towards the outfide, between it and the Extremity 
 of the Life Line, ihews Ecclefiaftical Preterments> Ho- 
 nours and Dignities. 
 
 XVII. Four or iivc Lines between the firrt and fecond 
 Joynts, in form of a Gridiron, denotes Difpleature or 
 the Anger of great Ladies, or that there may be danger 
 of lols ot Life. 
 
 XVIII. A Star on Aions Jovisy ll^ews Dlfgrace,- In- 
 f uny, Deprivation of fomc Honour, Oilice or Dignity, 
 thro^ Folly, Cardcirnefs, or fome Error committed J 
 but two Stars fignify the quite contrary. 
 
 XIX. A Line arifing out of the Table Line, and cut- 
 ting the Mount of Jupiter) flicvvs fudden and violent 
 Death. 
 
 XX. If this Line ends in the firlt Joynt of Jnpitfr, ic 
 is fignified by n Gtrntni, aiul the faid vi»^lent Death will 
 happen in Af.iy; if in the fecond 'or middle Joynt, re- 
 prckntcd by 6 T^nrns, it will happen ii\ April ; if in 
 the third or upper Joynt, in the Extremity of the Finger, 
 rcprclented by T Aries^ it will happen in M^inh, 
 
 XXI. A Crols or Star on the outiide of the Di^Jtm Jo* 
 y/.f, and a Line running from Monx Jovis lha.\l ftretclj 
 thro' the Hand, and extend to the Wfill:, ihews Weak- 
 neis, Cowardife, Fcarfulnefs, one Covetous and Envi- 
 ous. 
 
 XXII. If that Line fo found in the Hand is cut or in- 
 terle6icd, ic tbrclliews Evil, Imprifonment or fome great 
 Punilliment, or that he may Die in Prifon. 
 
 XXIII. A Chi Iding Woman having three fair appa- 
 rent Lines or Sections on Afons Jow, or running equal- 
 iy along the Finger, flicvvs many Children. 
 
 XXIV. If the middle Line of thofe Lines is lliortef 
 than the other, and the other bigger at one end than a- 
 iicther, and not even or well compofed, it Ihews a Wt>- 
 nun Inuiiodcil, Impudcnt> and without Shame. 
 
 C c s XXr, The 
 
joi Polygmphices. Lib. IX. 
 
 XXV. The fanie alfo if a Scmi-citclc, i$ found there 
 crofFing thole ltraig,ht Lines. 
 
 XXVI. A Woman having many and fmall Tranl- 
 
 vcrfe Lines at the Root of the Finger, towards the Finger 
 oi Saturn, and near the Mount, fhews ilie fliall have a 
 large PoiTefTion or Inheritance left her by the Death of 
 Friends. 
 
 XXVII. But if fiich crofs or tranfverfe Lines are 
 found on, or near the lecond Joynt, it argues one Frau- 
 dulent, Falfe, Unjult, Envious, and a Lyar. 
 
 XXVIII. The fame alfo, xi Mons Jovis is cleft, they 
 are alfo Wrathful, Morofe, Furious and Infamous. 
 
 XXIX. Crofl'es on the Mount of jMp/Vrr, fliew encreafe 
 of Honor, Glory, Dignities, Riches, Wealth, Happinels, 
 and all other good Fortune ; alfo Ecclefiaitical Prefer- 
 ments and Honors. 
 
 XXX. And indG<!d fuch a Crofs or CroiTes upon this 
 Mount , are to be molt Happy and Fortunate in all 
 things, for Fortune i'eems to drop her Favors into their 
 Mouths ,* they are Pleafant and Eafie, Magnanimous, 
 and of an elevated Spirit, being fuperior in Figure to 
 moft Men of the fame Character or Profeffion ; they arc 
 Generous, Liberal^ Free, flighting mean things, Honelt,. 
 Noble, covctmg Fame and Honor, and not without 
 fome Arrogance or Pride, as (triving after Rule and high 
 ihiiigs, yet Ifudious of Friendfhip, Loving, Gentle, Cour- 
 teous, Peaceablc,Wife, Pmdent, not wanting Eloquence, 
 excelling in Couniel, conftant inMind and Refolution, 
 growing in Wealth and Riches, and fimple, juit and ho- 
 iieft in all things. 
 
 XXXI. Aiom: Jovis plain, fmooth, clear and well 
 proportioncvl, iIkws Hoiiefty of Life, and a good Na- 
 ture ; and by how much it is replcnilhed with Imall ob- 
 fcure Rimulaes, or Lines likeCkfts, a little afunder, at 
 equal dillances, lb much the more Good, alfo Honors- 
 and Dignities trom Princes and great Perlons. 
 
 XXXII. A Line leparating the Index or Alons Jovis, 
 from the Aions Sdtwni, if it is confpicuous and red, it 
 llicws great Weaknefs in the Bowels, and Danger to a 
 Woman in Child-bed. 
 
 XXXIII. A itraight or right Se6tion mnning from the 
 Root of the Imiex^ and carrying it felf towards the Na- 
 tural Line and the Supreim- Angle^ denotes Greatnels 
 
 and 
 
Chap. 1 7. of the Cavea Martis, &c. 70 j 
 
 and Magnanimity of Mind, the Cftre and Charge of 
 great things ; and l"he\vs one fecking after Wealth, Rich- 
 es, Honor, Glcdy and T^ame. 
 
 XXXIV. A fmall Line from the Menfal, running or 
 pointing to A^ons Jovis, has the fame Significations with 
 the former : ?aid if thefe Se6>ions be crofled or cut difor- 
 derly with other fmall Line?, they fignify Wounds on 
 the Head. 
 
 CHAP. XVIL 
 
 Of the Cavea Martis, d»d the Via Martis. 
 
 I. T^H E Cavia Martis is the Hollow in the middle of 
 ^ the PaIp!, commonly called the Triangle of A/^r.f, 
 
 made, of the three principal Lines, to wit, the CardUca, 
 
 Cephalica & EpAiic^i. . -v 
 
 n. The ria or Lima Martis^ (called alfq the rital 
 
 Si!}er and Sotor.A<fariisJ is a Parallel to the Line of Li.^c 
 
 €rii the Afons P^entris. 
 
 in. Alars is Fottimate io often as the $oror Afaftis- 
 
 appears red, clear and fweetly drawn, and when either 
 
 Stars or Croffes are found in h\s Cav^a or Triangle : and 
 
 thereby is fignifie'd Courage, Boldnels, Magnaiiimity,' 
 
 Fortitude and Strength : the Man is Imperious, Strong, 
 
 and a great Eater. 
 
 IV. But if the Triangle be Infortunated by evli Lines 
 from the Mons Ventrii or Lm^^ the Perfon is Litigioiis,- 
 Scornful, Proud, Difiainful, Deceitful and Wicked ^ a 
 Thief, Lecher, Robber, Murthcrcr, andniallhavcaLife 
 wholly filled with Unhappinefs. 
 
 V. The Character of T? Saturn in the Triangle, (hews 
 a dnnger of falling from lome high place. 
 
 VI. A crooked Line afcending from the Triangk to 
 the Adcns Sartirni, Inews Iinprifonmcnt. 
 
 VII. A Line from the Laid Triangle towards the -R?- 
 y?r/ff.^, terminating under the A4ons Lana^ lliews many 
 Peregrinations, Journeys and Travels. 
 
 VIII. The Soror Martis augments all the Good fignifi- 
 ed by the C^rdiaca or Line of Li[e, but particularly it 
 
 C c e 2 j)romiie^ 
 
704 Polygrafhices. Lib. IX. 
 
 rroiuifes Succcfs in War, and the Love of Women . 
 
 IX. The Cnra A^artisj oiTriangulum Martis we have 
 dcfcribed at SeB. I. of this Chapter ; but fomc Authors 
 are not latisfied with thofe Limitations: others fay, 
 That the Plain oi Triangle of A/^r/ is that Space only 
 which is bounded with the Cephalicaj Epatica & Sarurnia : 
 however, tlie PLin or Cavea Aiartisy taken as extended, 
 is all that Space comprehended between the CW/.-rr .1-, 
 Cephalica & Epatica ; and this is truly the Palm or Hollotv 
 of the Hand. 
 
 X. The Cird'iaca or Line of Life, with the Epatica, 
 make the rirrt, highelf and fupream An°le ; the Epatica 
 joined with tht Cephalica, make the fecond Angle, which 
 in the Right Hand is called the Left Angle, and in the 
 Left Hand the Right Angle: the Cardiaca towards the 
 Wviit, joined wjth the Cephalicaj ( or if ihatis \vanting, 
 with ihc S,.omachica or Linea Solaris J make the third An- 
 gle, which we call the lowcft; andofthcle three Angles, 
 %vith their three Sides, is the Triangulnm Martis com- 
 poied. 
 
 XL If in the Planum or Triangulum Aiartis, the Sifter 
 of the Lificu F'italis be clear, not too long nor too lliort, 
 it Ilicws good Fortune in War, honorable Employments, 
 Courage and Valor. 
 
 XII. If the Angles a*" the Triangle be equal, and the 
 Lines well colored and itraighr, it ll^ews one of a good 
 Nature, liiund Body and Healthy, Fortunate, of good 
 Rcput.itlon, and a long and happy Life. 
 
 XIII. If ihc Flannm Afartis is hollow, and the Lines 
 therein be oblique or crooked, it ihews Death in Com- 
 bats, Duels ui Quarrels, a great Wound in the Head, 
 Diflocaiions or Iraoiurts of Bones by falls from Horfes, 
 I'r.idpiccs, &(■■ 
 
 XIV. If ihc Lines in tlic Angles of the Triangle are 
 obkure and unequal, making the Triangle irregular or 
 out of a good form, it ilicvvs one Dull, Clovvnilh, Un- 
 mannerly, Dull as an Als, one uncapable of deep 
 Thoughts. 
 
 XV. When there are Stars in this Plaifjy they fignify^ 
 Want, Poverty, Mistortiuies, feci ct Enemies, danger of 
 'AiraJhnaiion., l>y ipeaking too freely, or dealing too 
 plainlv, 
 
 XVLWhcn 
 
Chap. 17. 0///&eCavea Martis, &c, 70 f 
 
 XVI. When xh^Tr'tangU is Ipacious and large,it gives 
 Riches, Magnificence, Courage, and makes one Liberal 
 and Kind- hearted. 
 
 XVII. But if it is little and narrow, it (lievvs Mcan- 
 nefs and Poornefs of Spirit, Fears, Sufpicions, Poverty, 
 Want J and where there is a kind of tulnels, makes one 
 Niggardly and Avaricious. 
 
 XVIII. If in the Left Hand of a Man, at the Rig^it 
 Angle, looking towards the Mom Mercm-ii, if upon or 
 near that Angle there be three little parallel Linr:, they 
 iLew a great Vivacity of Spirit, one given to Cliymiltry, 
 having Knowledge of profound Piiilofbphical Secrets, 
 and acquainted wnth the great Hermetick Myllciy. 
 
 XIX. The Triangle fiir and well proportioned, figni- 
 fies all kinds of Good, a great Viviicity of Spirit, ih'eiigili 
 o': Underl'landing, and an unconquerablj Soul. 
 
 XX. The Line o'i Satnm defcending into this Ph.in or 
 Triangle, iTiews Imprifonment, Captivitv, Slavers, Mil- 
 fortunes in War, falling into the Enemies hands, and 
 great AfflidHons one upon another. 
 
 XXI. The Triangle being of a good form, large, and 
 very apparent, it ihews Happinefs and abundance of 
 Wealth, but with a DiHiculty of preiening it, being 
 much fubiedl to Envy. 
 
 XXII. One or more CrolTes in this PLiin, lliews a 
 Warrior, and that in War he lliall get Honor and Re- 
 nown. 
 
 XXIII. But if tnofe CrolTes are towards the CepkiUc.ry 
 he will not be very Fortunate, neither in War nor o- 
 tlierwife. 
 
 XXIV. If a certain Rednefs pofTefTes the Extremities 
 of the Angles, it Oievvs one Envious, given to evil Speak- 
 ing, and a Parafitc, Sycophant or Flatterer. 
 
 XXV. When there are four Lines in the Triangle, in 
 form ofaCrofs, in the high or liipream Angle, it figni- 
 fies an Envious Pcrfon, a Detector, and one iiifpedted of 
 Theft. 
 
 XXVI. If the Lines witliin the PLvinn: M'trtis are 
 long, beginning at the Wriit, and going towards the 
 Brawn of the Hand, vU. ad Aiontem Lnn&j it jLcws 
 much Travel in a Military way, a reitlels Life, unieiied, 
 and always in Dangers and Hazzards. 
 
 Ccc3 XXVII. If 
 
7o^ Polygrdphices. Lib. IX. 
 
 XXVII. If in the middle of the Triangle there are a- 
 ther little Triangles, or Jirtie Triangles towards the 
 Wrill, they fignify Qiiarrel?, Contcniions, Strife, Duels, 
 which may be with Danger, and lomciimcs with Shame, 
 Contempt, and lofs of tife. 
 
 XXVIII. Thefe fmall Triangles being towards the 
 Aierf^.l or Line.iSoLiri^, lliew Visftory and Honor. 
 
 XXIX. If the Right Angle made with the Ep^ica & 
 Cardiaca is decent and M'ell formed, itiliewsa goodUn- 
 derftanding and a itrong Memory, one of an aclive and 
 vigorous Spirit. 
 
 XXX. A Brawninefs or Hardncfs in the middle of the 
 Triangle, ilnews one Wrathful, Furious, Quarrelfome, 
 Crafty and Violent. 
 
 XXXI. If in ihtPLinum Martis the Sifter of the Line 
 of Life is lliort, it QiewsMisfortimcs in War, Boldnefs, 
 Deceit, Thievillinefs, one Unfaithful, Idle, Shamelefs, 
 Seditious, Impatient, Vain-glorious, Foolilli, Treache- 
 roxi?, a Murthercr, &c. 
 
 XXXII. A Star about the Right Angle of a Man's 
 Hand, denotes him Perfidious, Deceitful, Thievi("h, Tur- 
 bulent, a Dctradbr, given to Rapin and vile Courfcs 
 
 XXXIIT. If a Star is in the Triangle in a Wonians 
 Hand, it lliews Impudence, a rvoliimte, an Adultcrefs, 
 whole End will be infamous and fatal, by way of Exe- 
 cution. 
 
 XXXIV. If this Star is hairy like a Comet, Hie may 
 polliblv have three or four Huslxinds before iht Die:.. 
 ■ XXXV. If the Right Angle is little and iharp, it 
 il^cws one Provident, Sparing, and encrealing Richer; 
 but if it is oblcure and thick, or biunt, it lliews Igno- 
 rance, Duhiels, Stupidity, and a Slowncfs of Keiolu- 
 tion. 
 
 XXXVI. If the Left Angle is pointed or iliarp, it fig- 
 niHcs one Loc]uacious, a Sophiftcr, and mahcioufly In- 
 dulirious, that takes great Pleaiure in Dcceivmg, and 
 doini'.ibme fmall Cheats, Villanics and Rogueries. 
 
 XXX VII, If this Triangle is quite wanting in a Man's 
 Har.d, loas there i? no form of it, lomc of the Line;- 'ly- 
 ing ahlcr.t, it iliews much Evil, one that is DeCyitful 
 ^nd double Minded, Inronlbnt, a l^yar, liibject to much 
 ii, ki.'fls, and ofafhort Life. 
 
 CHAP 
 
Chap. 1 8. Of fheMoftnt of the Sun, &c. 707 
 
 CHAP. XVIIL 
 
 « 
 
 Of the Mount of the Sun. and Vig Soils. 
 
 1. 'Tp H E Mount of the Snn is the THherculHm under Uic 
 -■- Ring Finger. 
 
 II. The F"ui Solis is a right Line,^ runnii:jg down from 
 the Mount of 5*5/ to the Triangle of y!-/*?/-/. 
 
 III. A Star or Stars upon the Aions Solis y fhevvsone 
 Faithful and Ingenious, and that he Ihall attain to great 
 Honor, Glory and Dignity, be honored of Kings, Princes 
 and great Men ; one of a great and magnanimous Spirit, 
 Wile, Juft and Religious. 
 
 IV. But a Perpendicular thereon, cut or crofTed with 
 a Line from the Mofis Saiumiy lliews Pride and Arro- 
 gancy, a Boafter, a poor bafe Spirit, and one that lliall 
 lall into irrecoverable Miferies. 
 
 V. The Fia Solis dt^x^ and not broken, or cut by a- 
 ny ill Line, lliews Honor in the Commou-n:calth, and 
 the Favors of Kings and great Princes. 
 
 VI. But it being cut orconfufed, or hurt by any Line 
 from either the Mount or Line o^Sarum, it Hiews the 
 contrary. Poverty and the Hatred of great Men. 
 
 VII. The Mons Solis is limited at the one end by the 
 firlt Joynt of the Ring Finger , at the other end by the 
 Aienfat or Table Line: and on the other fide by the 
 Mons Sattimi j and on the other fide by the Mons Ader- 
 curii. 
 
 Vm. One Line only coming from the A'lenfaU^ to- 
 wards the firft Joynt of the Digitus Sulirisj ihews Riclifs 
 by SuccelTion, and it lliall happen in thru Month figni- 
 fied by that Joynt in which the Line ends. 
 
 IX. The hrll Joynt is repreiented by itC FzV^o, and 
 fjgnifies AHgHji 5 the fecond Joynt is reprefented by i\ Lcoy 
 and fignifies July ; the thifd Joynt or Fingers end is re- 
 prefented by c^ Cancer, and fignifies June. 
 
 X. If above the third Joynt, towards the end of the 
 Finger, there be certain Lines, they Ihew Buiiiiefs, Ne- 
 celTity, Poverty; and that the Perlbn will apply himfelf 
 to curious Arts and hidden Secrets, and will be apt to 
 be Vain, Foolilli and Llnprotitable. 
 
 . •. ; Ccc4 XL If 
 
^oS Poljfgraph/ces, Lib. IX. 
 
 XI. If there be certain Lincs'bctwecn tlie firfl and Ic- 
 cond Joynts, if tlicy are (Iraight and parallel, they ihew 
 one of good Nature, and one that by feveral ways and 
 means ihall enrich hiinlelf, by Trading, Labor, and 
 dealing in Cattel. 
 
 XII. If fome I'mall Line5 begin at the Line of For- 
 tune, and afcend towards the firft Joynt of the Di^itHs 
 Solii, being parallel and not joining, they denote ima- 
 ginary Happincis and Satisfailion, and a vain alfuming 
 to loine Offices an-' 'i^nities. 
 
 XIII. Iflonie -ri, beginning at the firft joynt of 
 this Finger, ftretch towards the Tabic Line, without In- 
 terfc6lions or Cuttings, they denote Goodncfs, Wifdom, 
 Prudence and Subtil t^' of Spirit, great Wealth and Rich- 
 es, alfo Knowledge of Arts and Sciences. 
 
 XIV. If there is a Crols or Crofles from the fccond to 
 the third Joynt, they fignify Honors, Ixit without Riches ; 
 that the Perfon ihall be cfteemed for foine good Pans, 
 but will beUntbrtiinate. 
 
 XV. ACroisuponA'fon.fSoIisy fliewsoncintollcrably 
 Covetous, and that will not enjoy the good of what he 
 has, is afraid of Spending, but ftrivcs to grow Richer 
 and Richer. 
 
 XVL If on the third or upper and cxtrcam ]ovnt, 
 there is a Star or Crols, it ihews one that will be Rich 
 by Inheritances or Legacies from his Relation? ; other- 
 wife very Unfortunate, as if he was Born for Troubles, 
 or to lie in Priion. 
 
 XVIL A Woman kaving a Crols upon A'funs S;)ii(^ 
 fhc will grow Rich by Lcwdncf? ; and if Beautiful, ibe 
 will make her Fortunes by the Ruine ot' nr.iuy youi.g 
 Men, and that llie will be verv Cautious and Covetous ; 
 if llie is not Handlbme, iVie will be a Bawd, yet coun- 
 terfeit Hohnels and Devotion. 
 
 XVIII. If between the firit and fecond joynts there 
 is a Crofs, on the Hand ot a Woman, it ihews her to 
 become Ri.h by Marriage and Dowr)-, and ihall come to 
 Femiuinc Honors. 
 
 XIX. It there be fmall crooked Lines at the firft Joynt 
 of this Finger, having^levcral Seditions or Cuts, they ihe w 
 Want, Poverty, ill Temper, Vikutis, Dulncls of Spirit 
 and Infamy. 
 
 XX. Lines 
 
Chap. 1 8 . Of the Mount cf Venus. 709 
 
 XX. Lines running from the Mtnfd to the root or 
 bottom of the Ring Finger, fliew a prudent and provi- 
 dent Perlbn, lb much the more if they arc fair, even and 
 well colored. 
 
 XXI. Many {lender Lines, red and well colored, 
 fpreading themfelvei on Mons Solt:^ lliew one Merry, 
 Pleafant and Prudent ; but if crooked and red, Afflidh- 
 on and Vexation. 
 
 XXn. If two crooked Lines run parallel from the 
 Wrifi, towards Mons Solisj ending near the fame, they 
 fignifymolt happy Fortune, Honon Dignities, Felicity, 
 Prudence, Wildom, Arts, Sciences, and one Generous 
 and Virtuous ; and the fame more cfteciually, if they 
 run above the firft Joynt. 
 
 XXIIL Thefe Lines running thus,in aWomans Hand, 
 fliews that llie lliall attain Riches and Honors by means 
 of a Husband. 
 
 XIV. If thefe parallel Lines are found in the fecond 
 Jnynt,the Perfon lliall always live in Honor, andpoi- 
 Ids much Riches. 
 
 XXV. Little parallel Lines or Branchings on Mons 
 Solir, fignify the fame as on Afons A^fenuriiy one Inge- 
 nious, ofalharp, quick and happy Wit, skilled in mii- 
 vcrfal Learning, but a little Affe{fted and Proud withal, 
 and attaining to Preferments and Dignities Spiritual 
 and Temporal. 
 
 XXVI. It is truly ebfen'ablc, that when Lines are 
 doubkd, as Parallels, that they double the Significati- 
 ons of Good, and lliew Honelty, Sobriety and Virtue, 
 and a comely Grace in Speaking : but they fignity o- 
 therwile, if others pafs over and cut them in a Chequer 
 falbion. 
 
 XXVII. But ifthcy are equal, fair, well colored, and 
 not interfedfed among themfelves, it fjicws one Aulpi- 
 cioi^and Fortunate, and that Iball conquer and fubdue 
 his Enemies under his Feet. 
 
 XXVIII. If no fuch Lines touch the Finger, nor arc 
 equally extended from thc^ Afenjalj but llretch towards 
 the DtgitHs Satitrni^ they fignify a Mutation and change 
 oi' Life, according to the Alteration of the Times. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
7IO Tolygrdphkes. Lib. IX. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 Of the Mount e/ Venus. 
 
 I. "Tp H E Mount of J^enus is the Tuberculfim of the 
 ■*■ Thumb : it bc^jns at the Wrilt, and is enclofcd 
 by the Line of Life, -vyhich ends between the Tliumb 
 and fore Finger : all tiiis enclofed Space, called the Ball 
 of the Thur^h, is this Mons Veneris y or Mount of /^(r««j. 
 
 II. A clear Star, or Furrows that be red and tranf- 
 verfly parallel upon the Mons Veneris, and is much ele- 
 vated, {"hews one Merry, Cheerful and Amorous j it 
 fhcws alio one faithful, juft and entire, one with whom 
 an incormpted Tye of Friendfhip ( being once made ) is 
 durable for ever : it alfo fignifies great Fortune or Eilate, 
 and Subflance by a Sweet-heart or Lover. 
 
 III. But this Mount infortunatcd by evi4 Lines, or 
 Lines from evil places, and irregular Figures, iliews a 
 I.etcherous Perion, an Adulterer, a poor, bafe, fordid 
 Wretch, who fhall fpend his Subftancc on Whores. 
 
 IV. The Charadler of the a Trine Afpc6l on this 
 Mount, flicws a great l-ortune by Mirriage. 
 
 V. The Mount ofVc;i-is\o\d of Lines and Incifures, 
 fliews a rude, etfcmin.uc and fooliih Pcrion, and one 
 lidiculous and unfortunate in Wedlock. 
 
 • VI. If It be broken or diifected, it Ihews Infamy and 
 Difgracc by Lurt and Letchery. 
 
 VII. If Incifions, Lines or Stars are near the upper 
 Joynt of the Thumb, they fjgnity to a Woman, that 
 ihe iTiall be Married young, butlhall not be very happy, 
 but be in danger of being Killed or Murihered by her 
 Husband. 
 
 VIII. If there is a Star near the Nail, it lliews tlvit a 
 Woman will be very jealous and Furious, and be in 
 danger of Killing or Murthering her Husband. 
 
 IX. If Hair is upon the Adons Veneris, or upon the 
 Ihumb, or many Cartings, it fhcws one RulHck, Lln- 
 ovil. Slovenly, and ci little Underlianding. 
 
 X. A Woman having Incifions or crol's Lines on the 
 outiidc of the Thumb, near the Nail, ihc.vs that Oie is 
 
 Mi f chic- 
 
Chap. 1 9. Of the Mount of Venus. 711 
 
 Milchievious, Subtil, Crafty, Deceitful, andonewhofe 
 Company ought to be avoided. _ 
 
 XI. It the Mons Feneris is fair, pretty ruddy, ha^in^ 
 fav Incifions or Cuts ; or if there be, and they be clear 
 and dilHncl, they denote the Man or Woman very A - 
 morous, Letchcrous, defu^ous of Coition, and given to 
 PJays, Dancing, Mufick, and all kinds of Pleallire. 
 
 XII. If two or three Croffes are on the firft Joynt of 
 the Thumb, near the Mount of Finusy it fignifies ( in 
 Women efpecially) iuch as are Qiiarrelfome and hard to 
 pleafe. Contentious, Difloyal, Scoffers, great Talkers, 
 rerfidious, and evil Speakers. 
 
 }Cjn. But if thefe CroiTes are near the fecond Joynt, 
 they denote Wifdom, Hinnility, Devotion, Piety, ex- 
 emplary Virtue, and an Ardent Religious Zeal. 
 
 XIV. If there are three or four Intcrteftions or Cut- 
 tings under the firft joynt of the Thumb, if they are 
 broad, they fignity Riches in Youth, which will be by 
 Marriage. 
 
 XV. Butif thefc Intcrfedions or Lines arc above the 
 faid Joynt, the faid Riches and Honors will happen 
 when the Pcrfon is older, or in middle Age, or upon a 
 fecond Marriage. 
 
 XVI. And if thefe Incifions or Cuts are nearer the Ic- 
 cond Joynt than the firft, all the faid Good will happen 
 in old Age, and upon a third Marriage, which has been 
 obierved in many. 
 
 XVII. If in the middle of this Mount there is a St.ir, 
 clear and apparent, and regularly or w^ell formed, it lig- 
 nities that lie or Ihe llmll be very happy and fortunate 
 \n Love, and receive tlie full Eticcb and Aniwk;rs of all 
 their Amours. 
 
 XVIII. If a Woman has a O Circle or O Oral, in 
 the middle of the Alons f^eneris , it lliews her to be a 
 Strumpet or Whore, proftituting her Body to any one, 
 yet never latisfied. 
 
 XIX. If a Woman has a Line in ths upper Fart or 
 Ligament, which l"hall crois the lirft Joynt, and come 
 towards the Line of Life, in: will Per.ili by or in Ibme 
 Ii!ceftuou?, Adulterous orWhontnAd: this Line, it 
 is Due, denotes Riche?, but tliey wWX be attended with 
 I>iihonor and Shame, and ihe ivid have a lad and v\'-o- 
 ful End. 
 
 XX. A 
 
7 1 2 Folygtdphices. \Xh, IX. 
 
 XX. A Man having fiich a Line, it iTiCws a violent 
 Death by means of Women and Lewd Company j anct 
 Ibme about the day of Marriaj^c, or not long after. 
 
 XXI. If aCrofs is near the rirft Joynt of the Thumb, 
 itOiewsLuft, Lctchcry, Uncleannels, Fornication, A- 
 dultcry, Inceft, and all manner of lewd and abomiiu- 
 ble Anions. 
 
 XXII. If four Lines appear on Mon^ Veneru^ under 
 the firft Joynt, nmning down towards the outward part, 
 thcyiliew Riches, Wealth and Honor in thefirlt Age. 
 
 aXIII. Several fmall, bright and plain Lines upon 
 Tilom Veneris^ and reacliing to the Root of the Thumb, 
 lliew great and long Travels thro' many and ih^angc 
 Countries. 
 
 XXIV. Women who have a O Circle on the Mount 
 of nr«,v.r, arc Lu-xurious, Letcherous, Libidinous, Intem- 
 perate, and Iniatuble ni Luft, committing Whoredoms, 
 Inceft, Adultery and Sodomy. 
 
 XXV. One, two, three or more Stars being found 
 clear, ftrong and well proportioned upon the Mount of 
 Vrnu!^ fhcws a happy and plcafant Perfon, one of a 
 free, generous and gcnieel Converfation, delighting in 
 Mirth, (lallantry, and the Recreations of P^enns, of a 
 cbea'-(ul Afpect, but Modef}, and much affc(5^ing /^-^t'^^-- 
 rf^i/ S}X)rts ; alloMufick, Singing, Dancingand ioHity, 
 Joving g(XKl Company, with Liberality, Freedom and 
 great Faithful ncf'-, tmcin fnendlbip, ;u(Hn Promifmg, 
 kind and aflFcctionate in Treaiin.g, hating hiijc and mean 
 Actions, delighting m doing Good, and rcioycing in 
 their Friends Profperity. Thefc, as thev l!\ c comfoita- 
 hlyand pleafantly, -tvithout Anxiety, Trouble, Care or 
 Vevation, fo they Die in Peace and Satistadlion, lea- 
 ving a fwcct Savor of Sincerity and Gencrofity behind 
 them. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Of the Mount c/ Mercury. 
 
 I. T" M n \l"-unt of Afrrcury is the THhemJum under 
 ^ rhc liiiie Finger, or Digmts AicrcHrj^ \vhich has 
 
 pn 
 
chap. 29. Of the Mount o/Mercury» 71 j 
 
 on the one fide the Line or Mount o'i Sol ; and on theo- 
 ther fide the outward part of the Hand ; it is bounded a- 
 bovc by the firit Joyntof the Finger of Mercury ; and be- 
 low by the Aienj'd Line, and the Aions Luntt, or Mount 
 of the Moon. 
 
 IL This Mount happy and fortunate with a Star or 
 parallel Crofs, or the Character of the A, Trine AfpecSl, 
 ilievvs Wit and Ingenuity, and makes the Perfon a great 
 Orator, gives him Subrtance by Arts and Sciences, and 
 the Underftanding of fecret My(leries in Alchymy, Mu»- 
 fick, Painting, A(trology and Philology, ancl raifcs the 
 Perfon to Dignity by means of his own Wit, Prudence 
 and Induttry. 
 
 in. But this Mount afflicted, or without Lines, or 
 hurt by a Line from the Mount of Saturn^ ( cutting the 
 Mount of Sol J or from the Triangle 0^ Mars, ilieWs a 
 poor, low and dull Wit, a Perfon of no Audacity or 
 Courage, a nicer Coward, a Lyer, Pratler, Thief, Cheat, 
 Traitor, and one Faithlefs, and fomctimes Melancholy, 
 Mad or Frantick. 
 
 IV. Thefe Judgements arc the more firm where the 
 Lines and Signatures are fair, firm and clear : but if 
 they be dull or oblcr.re, thefe Judgements are more du- 
 bious and iiitfiatte. 
 
 V. A Line from the Mom Luna to the Mons Mercurii, 
 not cut or broken, ftiews a Man Eminent and Famous 
 in his Trade or Profeflion, (among the common People) 
 let it be what it will. 
 
 VI. Lines going from the Men/ J to the Mons A'fer- 
 curiiy are faid to fignify Children ; but they truly fignif\' 
 Subtilty of Spirit, a deep Underftanding, Wildom and 
 Prudence ; one fearching into Arts and Sciences, and 
 given to Travel. 
 
 VII. Lines coming from the Root of the little Finger 
 upon this Mount, if they be a'ooked, they ("hew the Per- 
 Ion lliall never attain to thofe Arts and Sciences he fceks 
 after, but will be inclinable to Craft, Deceit, Falihoud, 
 Thieving, and other vile things. 
 
 VIII. If in the fecond Joynt there is a C, or X, or )(, 
 itfnewsone verylnconftant, Credulous, fubject to Pal- 
 fions, Learned and yet a Fool, or no wife Man. 
 
 IX. The Mouiit of a decent height, well colored and 
 proportioned, fignifies Conltancy and Pericverance, and 
 
 one 
 
714 PotjgYdfhkts, Lib. IX. 
 
 one who has banilhed foolilh Love from him, Chaft, 
 Virtuous, and a Lover of Sciences. 
 
 X. If in the third Joynt of this Finger there is a Star 
 or Crofs, it fhews Poverty infallibly, tho' the Pcrlbn has 
 Learning, Arts and Sciences ; that he will be in danger 
 of being Deceived and Robbed, and hinfelf ihall be iiib- 
 ]t&. to Theft and Deceit. 
 
 XL If in the firit Joynt of this Finger there is the 
 Charafler of % Jupiter^ it ihews one Vain and Arro- 
 gant, from the fittle Knowledge he has, which confifts 
 more in Pretence than Reality ; and he may think him- 
 lelf Eloquent or a great Rhetoritian. 
 
 XIL If this Mount is half filled with Lines, which arc 
 unlike and unequal, but ilraight, it ilicws one of a do- 
 ciblc Nature, Faithful, not given to Lying, a Hater of 
 Superftitious and External Ceremonies, as believing no- 
 thing in them ; one Fortunate, but not deeply Learned 
 in Arts and Sciences. 
 
 XIII. Ifin either of the Joynts there is a Crofs, it fig- 
 nifies one without Religion, or one of all Religions, with- 
 out any great Affedion to any, yet one that will not 
 give any Woriliip to any Creature, tho' never {b goodly 
 orcxcellent. 
 
 XIV. If on this Moimt there is V ylriesy it fliews 
 Riche? acquired by Learning : if ;:» u4qHariHs, it lliews 
 the contrary, thro' Igilorance: if VS Capricorn, vain 
 Know led^e and a fhameh.ll Death. 
 
 XV. iFon tliis Mount there be certain Lines, which 
 come from without the Hand, and reach dire6^1y to the 
 Linea Solaris y it fjgnifies one without true Knowledge, a 
 Lyar, abufing every Body with vain Pro miles. 
 
 XVI. If tboie Lines are crooked, they lliew one vile 
 and wicked, given to Deceit and Cheating, a Thief, and 
 ibmetimes wovfe. 
 
 XVn. The firtl joynt of this Finger is reprefented 
 by ^ Sagitary y and fignifics the Month of NovemUr : 
 the Iccond joynt is fignified by f\ Scorpioy and fignifies 
 the }Aonth oi.Othber : the third joynt is rcpreiented 
 by '^ Libra, and lignifics the Month 6t Septernber : and 
 tliefe Months aniwer to fevcral time«, in winch things 
 fignified by tlic Signatures of thole leveral joynts Ihall 
 happen. 
 
 XVHI fe 
 
Chap. 20. Offke Mount of Mercury. 71 ^ 
 
 XVIII. If this Mount is covered with many ftraight 
 Lines, of divers form* and colors, it (hews one Docible, 
 but a Lover of Sedls, Bold, Impudent, a Whoremafter, 
 a Lyar, yet Hater of Superttition, no Lover of Temples, 
 and difregarding Oracles, apt to all Arts, chiefly to the 
 Mathematicks, Poetry, Philology, Philofophv, and a 
 Searcher into Natures Secrets ; alio learning Mechanical 
 Arts, as Limning, Painting, SculpUire, Vamilhing, &c. 
 
 XIX. If the fame Lines are found on the firft Joynt 
 of the Finger, they {hew one Rhetorical, Airogant, Su- 
 perftitious. Proud and Wanton. 
 
 XX. If they are found on the fecond Joynt, they fi^- 
 nify a good Orator and Preacher ; but it they be revcrfey 
 it inews one Hibjeft to various PafTions. 
 
 XXI. A fmall graceful Line, even and well colored, 
 arifing from the MenfJ Line, and extending to the Root 
 of the little Finger, well formed, and Diametrically 
 pafling the Mount, denotes Fieenels of Mind, Generofity 
 and Liberality. 
 
 XXII. Retorted Lines from the fuperior part of the 
 little Finger, in a Womans Hand, (hews one Talkative, 
 Info! ent and Inconfiant. 
 
 XXIII. Certain parallel Lines, more or fewer, arifmg 
 at the Menfal, and reaching to the Root of the little 
 Finger, fo many Lines as there be, fo many Marriages ; 
 if they arc pale, they fignify Marriages part ; if long, 
 well colored, fair and ftrong, they fignify Marriages to 
 come. 
 
 XXIV. If any Line is reairvated or circular, and 
 tends from the Root of the Finger to the middle of the 
 Mount, it fliews a Perlbn of a good Wit and Capacity, 
 a Perfon of great Hopes, andwhoitispofiiblemayreach 
 the height of good Fortune. 
 
 XXV. Parallel Lines ariGng from the Adenfal, tend- 
 ing to the Root of the little Finger, (as at SeEi. 23. afore- 
 going) if they are grofs, fquallid and red, they mew one 
 addided to Theft, Robbing, Rape and Ruinc of Man- 
 kind, and contumated with all kinds of Vices wliatioc- 
 vcr. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
7l6 Poljgr apices. Lib. IX. 
 
 CHAP. XXL 
 
 Of the Mons Luns, or Mount of hum, 
 
 I. "X* H E A'fons iMrnt. ( called aUo Feriens h Fenendo^ 
 -*- the fmiting part) is the Mount comprehended 
 under the Tuhenulam of Mercury, between the AienjA 
 and Refiricla. 
 
 IL The J^o;z/ Ltin£ filled with happv Character'^, (as 
 we have before hinted) (hew* one Honcli, ]u(l and Ho- 
 norable, and makes a Man Famous through a Kingdom, 
 gives him the Praile of the common People, and the ac- 
 <inaintance of great and noble Ladies, and makes him 
 happy in Navigation. 
 
 III. But bein:^ infortunated by evil Charadlers, or a 
 Trapez,iay or evil Lines from the Triangle of Mars^ or 
 Lines broken, or cut with oblique Angles, it iTnews one 
 of a. various, poor and inconftant Life, a Beggar, a Per- 
 son envied by almoin all People, one Wicked, Treache- 
 rous and Deceitful, a Perfon lubjcd to Travel, Capti- 
 *uv or Banilliment. 
 
 (V. If the good Lines on the Ftrient be fair awd come- 
 ly, they premonltrate io much the more Happinel?, and 
 in Women Fruitfulnels : but the evil Lines pale, lo 
 much the more Evil. 
 
 V. Mons Lm£^ or the Mount of the Moon, which is 
 called alio Lecm L%n£y the Place of the Moon, and the 
 Hypothtnar or SahvoLt, ( pars ea mantis et} (jh£ opponitftr 
 J'^ohtJ the Brawn ov outward fide of the Hand or Fifl ; 
 It is that part which below is bounded by the RcfiriH.i.-. 
 above is bounded by the Alcnial ; and on the one iidc 
 by the Ccphahca^ or' that part of the TrianE,le of AfAn . 
 and on the other iide by the outward part of the Hand or 
 Fift. As the Ball of the Thumb or Aions Vsneris (car- 
 Tinfapars m^inu, inter Pollicem & LineamVitahm) is called 
 'fhennr ; lo the Brawn of ttieF'it oi Aions />««<cis called 
 Hyvothenar. 
 
 VI. If there be Stars on Alons Lmx ^ it ihews one 
 Deceitful, Cratty, Treacherou-, and a great Lyar ^ Stars 
 in tliis place iisnify one W' ickcd. Infamous, Perhdious, 
 
 Contu- 
 
Chap. 22. Of the Menfa <?r ^Able. jtf 
 
 Contumelious, a DifTcmblcr, and one not tit to bcCon'^ 
 verred withal. 
 
 VII. But if there are Croffes inftead of Stars, the quite 
 contrary is fi^nL^eA , one truly Eeliaious and Devout ; 
 if there be five of them, the Peribn is always Sickly, 
 and does not live to fee the pth Year. 
 
 VIII. If any one of the hve Croiles be vani>.ed, the 
 Party i^^ near Death, or at farthelt is in the Year in which 
 helliallDie. 
 
 IX. Lines being pale or encUning toblackncfs on 
 Af.ns Lun£, l}iewor.e Unfortunate in Travelling, Tra- ' 
 ding, Bufmefi, and almoft in all things he underCikes 
 or meddles withal. 
 
 X. If there is a O Circle or O Oval upon this Mount, 
 it fignifies, according to hdagine, the lofs of an Eye ; 
 or elfe it fignifies fome great Sicknefs, as the Cpilepfie, 
 ApOpIe^ry, Pal(ie, Gout, Lamenefs, Convulfions, &c. 
 
 XI. If on the lower part ot Mo ts Lm£^ near the ^?- 
 f^riEhu^ there is a A Triangle, in a Womans Hand, it 
 lliews her given to Lewdness; but (lie will b" Ri:h iil^ 
 her latter Years, and abound vvith Wealth ; for a a is . 
 one of the happy and fortunate Charadlers. 
 
 XII. Fair, bo!d,d"t[lin6l, well colored and well propor* 
 tioned Lines upon this Mount , fignify Happi.:els and 
 Prolperity , Riches and Plcalurcs , and much Wealth, 
 which ("hall be acquired by the common lort of People : , 
 he lliall alfo be fortunate in Travelling, whether at home 
 or abroad, and. have Succefs in all things he puts his 
 ♦iands to. 
 
 G H A P. XXII. 
 
 Of the Menfa, Quadrangle or Taite^ 
 
 1. "T" H E Mmfx or QHndr.mgle is the Interval or Space 
 • -■" bet^vixt the Menfd and Epatici ; the which is gi- 
 ven or attributed to Fortuiey from whence the Table" is 
 tailed the Place o£ Fort me. 
 II. The Men/it being large and broad, and repleat 
 Ddd v/it!i 
 
7t? Pol)X^aphic€S. lib. DC. 
 
 AvitJi, £;Qp^ Figurejs, ihcjn-s Riches and Ticafur^, one of a 
 liberal ir.agnaniir.ous Spirit, ai.d of long LitV 
 
 III. But linall and narrow iJiews Poverty oi a (lcn(^cr 
 aiTd' mean Fortune, a Niggard, a Coward, a pjiitui, 
 poor, tairiiiJ and, ipean Soul. 
 
 IV. 'A lirle Circled iri the Menfay £hcws a great Wit^ 
 and a prorouud Pc'rion in Arts ^uid Sciences. 
 
 V. The Mcnja termir.atiiig in an Angle under A4{^ns 
 Jovt<, by the Concourse o'the Menial ^nd CaruM;a^ Of. 
 Vila! Line, ihews Fal|}iood ai,d Treachery, and. one of 
 lUorr Lite. 
 
 VI. A Crofs or Star within it, clear and of good pror 
 portion, cipecially under the Mount ot i"?/, iV.ews Ho- 
 r.or and Dignity by me:ins. of great and noble Men, and 
 ercreaic by noble Men : if it be the Chara<5ier of "V _/«- 
 pier^ it n-'eu's Lcclehailical Piefermcnt. 
 
 VII. The lame Crois or Star, being doubled or triplcil, 
 ivondcrLully enc'reaicththe aforeiaid good Fortune ; but 
 ait or confuted by other little Line?, the laid Good is 
 much diverted, anvl.Ajixjeties and Troubles thrwati e.l. 
 
 VI f I. Good and equa) Lines in the Mcn/a, ihcw 
 goo.i Fortune J evil and- ail torted, or crooked , the con- 
 trary-. 
 
 1a. a. CroC^or Star in the A-fenfuj ovct Alons ZjftUf 
 fiie.ws Fortunacy in Travelling. 
 
 X. If. there b^ wo Menf a, it IhewS a cloudy anciiob-. 
 {cure Life and Fortiinc^ 
 
 XI. Wliat and where thc.A^cnf.i .or Q^ftdran^h 'u, ^ve^ 
 have already declared at SeB:. i. of this Chapter^^ Uic « 
 fome Artifts will confine it in a narrower Compafs, 
 making it indeed to be the Space between the AienjA 
 Zud'Epatica, but wifl have if i6 ffretch in lengtli, oi^ly 
 irom the Liw^ Sa'Hrnia to the Line a Sob.ru ; which in 
 my Opinion is toogr&u a Stricbieis: I rather adhere to 
 that Limitation in the f.rj} SeU. of this Chapter aforegoing, 
 at leaft when thoie liin.eii appc^ir nou 
 
 XII. It is to be noted, that lipon every Line which 
 ma'as the Oiiadrangh oiAiaij.., there may happep In- 
 cilions or. Cuts, from one, two, three, to leyen, (which 
 larger number happens but leLiom.) In thclc calcs, the,- 
 Good fignificd by ihole Lines; lliall be. lo. many vvays, 
 and It may be kt many Mo«t\is,ot,Y4ars^"hindr«d, pr«;- 
 iudiccd or interrupted. 
 
chap. 22. of the Mount of Luna., 719 
 
 XIII. If the Lines be'Tmall, iTiort, ftiallo'V or faint^ 
 or difficult to be feen, they fignify only Months ; but it' 
 lar^e, long, deq), bold and perfpicuousorred, theyfig- 
 fiity fo niariy Years. 
 
 XIV. If on the Tabic Line, or upper fide of the Qiia-* 
 drangle, there is a Star, it ihews Courage, Faith, Truths 
 Juftice, a good Confcicnce, and a free Converfation ; 
 but thro' his too great Liberalit}^ and Goodnefs may fall 
 into Poverty ; bm he lliall rife again, recover his former 
 Wealth, and have Favor of great Men. 
 
 XV. A Star in the middle ottht Men/a or Qtiadrangle^ 
 fhews one Juft, Virtuous, Merciful, and that he ihall 
 arrive to much Wealth, Honors and Dignities, quoai 
 Ciipax. 
 
 XVI. If the Incifions or Lines which rnake theOiia- 
 drangle, are lively and well colored, as it were ruddy, 
 they ihevv one Wile, Underlianding and Rational, Pru- 
 dent, Impartial and of good Reputation j Honell: and 
 Juft to all Men. 
 
 XVII. If in the Afenfa ox Quadrangle a Star appears 
 U]^on the Line otSatum^ and looks towards the Mount 
 ot Fentu, it ihews a Man much given to Women, lb as 
 to become Scandalous, and to duninilh his Fortune or 
 Fftate. ~ 
 
 XVIII. If this Star is on the Linen Solar-s or Stoma- 
 ckica, it figriifiesDifeafes, but that heihall thrive in his 
 Trade or Bufmefs, and get much Wealth. 
 
 XIX. If the Aisnfa or QiiadranvU is broad and well 
 proportioned in its Quadrature , it lliews one of Cou- 
 rage, Free, Generous and Liberal, afpiring to and at- 
 taining to high Honors and Dignities , and great 
 Wealth. 
 
 XX. If in the A^feiila or QHadrangle there is one or 
 more Crolfes^ and that they are very apparent, they 
 fliew one Devout, Pious and -Religious, and that he 
 (ball change his Habitation or/Dvvelling for Profit and 
 Advantage. * 
 
 XXI. Bntifthefc Croifes are crooked or ill Ibaped, or 
 croffedby other Lines, they fignify the contrary to what 
 is faid in the former Setiion. '■ 
 
 XXII- If the Men/a or Qftadrattgle h little and nar- 
 row, it fignifiesone of a poor Spirit, extrcamly GDvdtoii^ 
 Cruel, Furious and Unmcrcitul, Falfe, Deceitttil, Mif- 
 
 Ddd 2 diteviou^ 
 
72 o Polygraphices, Lib. IX. 
 
 chicvioiis and Qiiarrelfome, and in a word, one of a 
 very evil Life and Converlation. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Of the Fingtrs, 
 
 I. /^Vertlnvart Lines in the uppermoft joynt of the 
 ^^ In,\cx or fore Finger, l"hew Inheritances ; but 
 fuch in the middle joynt, llicvv aSubtilPerfan. 
 
 II. Ric;ht Lines running between tholb Joynts in the 
 Iniisx y Inew in Women a plentiful Ifllic ; in Men a 
 nimble Tongue. 
 
 III. If they be in the firfl ]oynt near Monsjnvis, they 
 fhe\v a ple.ilant and couiteous Difpofition, and a Man 
 of a generous Soul, 
 
 IV. But a Woman who Iiath a Stir in the fame place, 
 is Lafcivicus and Whorillr. 
 
 V. Little Gridirons in the firft Joynt of the A'leditu 
 or middle Finger, an unforninate and melancholy Pcr- 
 ion ; but equal and parallel Lines lliew Fortune by deal- 
 ing in Metals: and tiiat a Woman iliall have a Son, 
 bleil will) Church Preferment. 
 
 VI. A Sur there ihews a violent Death by DrcfTvn- 
 •irg or Witchcraft, or the fikc : but a Star or Stars in the 
 firft Jovnt of this Finger of SAtam, in a Womans Hand, 
 fhews Barrenneis: i^o alio if a Crols or Crolfcs be found 
 there. 
 
 VII. A grof;- Lnie rifing from the A^ons S.itftmi, 
 through the whole Fii.gcr lo the end thereof, lliews a 
 meer Fool or Mad Pcrion. 
 
 VIII. If the Finrer o( Saturn is plain and fninoth, 
 without Scdlions or Wrinkles, it ibevvs a plain, ftmple, 
 hojieft Man, Laborious, Diligent, and without Fraud 
 or Deceit. 
 
 IX. In the Annul.ir or Ring Finger, a Line rifn\^ 
 from the Atons Sol is, itraight through the Joynts thereof, 
 iTiews Honor and Glor)-. 
 
 X. In the firft Joynt of the AnnnUr ^ <h\ua\ Lines 
 ihew Treaiiire and Honor j ovcrthwart Lines, the Ha- 
 
 - trcd 
 
Chap. 24* ^f ^^^'^^^^^'^^•rw, 7^^ 
 
 tred of Kings and great Men ; but if Inter fe<5lev.l, their 
 Envy fliall be abated. 
 
 XI. In the AurkiiUr'u or little Finger, a Star in its 
 firlt Joynt, near the Mount thereof, Ihews one of Inge- 
 nuity, and a good Orator. 
 
 XII. Evil Chara6lers and obtufc Angles, the contra- 
 ry : thofe unfortunate Signs in the firft and fccond Joynts, 
 fnew a Thief ; in the lall Joynt, one perpetually In- 
 con ilant. 
 
 XIII. Some Authors predict the number of Wives or 
 Husbands, by the number of little Lines in the outmod 
 part of the A4om Aiercurn ; but in my Opinion thoie 
 things ought rather to be fought out m the Mount oi" 
 Ventu. 
 
 XIV. And as in the Mounts good or evil Chara6lers 
 are Omens of good or evil Fortunes, fo alfo on the Fin- 
 gers they fignify the lan^e. 
 
 XV. The firfl Joynt near the Mount, flnews the fird 
 Age ; the lecond Joynt, middle Age ; and the Udjoynt,^ 
 old Age ; but it "is our Opinion, that the Diredlions of 
 tlie principal Significators in every Geiiiturt, more pro- 
 perly demonfh'ate the times in -svliich the Good or Evil 
 lignified by thofe Marks or Lines, may probably hap- 
 pen. 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 Of the Thumb. 
 
 I. A Line furrounding the Pollex or Thumb, in the 
 ■^ middle Joynt, fhews the Peribn lliall be Han^" 
 ed. 
 
 II. A Line pafilng from the upper Joynt of the Pollex 
 to the Cardiaca or Life Line, ihevvs a violent Death, or 
 danger by means of fome Married Woman. 
 
 III. The firll and lecond Joynts free from Incifure?, 
 fliew a carelefs, flothful, idle and vain Perion. 
 
 IV. Equal Furrows drawn under the lower joyn 
 fhew Riches, Wealth, Poireflions and Inheritan-ce- 
 
 :\-)X. 
 
 Ddd 3 , y.. OvxT- 
 
722 Folygraphices. Lib. IX. 
 
 V. Overthwart or crolb Lines, clear and long, under- 
 neath the Nail and Joynt of the Thumb, Hiew Riches 
 and Honor. 
 
 VI. If a Line pafTes parallel to the Root of the Thumb, 
 below it, or upon the A-fo/K I^cnfris, it denotes the Pcr- 
 lon to be l^entrcala.nd Lnlthil, and to abound in Riches ; 
 and the nearer it comes to the Line.t P''italis, the better 
 and the more Good. 
 
 VII. If in the la(^ Joynt of the Thumb, a little under 
 the Nail, or near the Joynt, Lines appear bright, clear 
 and well compoied, they prefage Riches and" Honors, 
 good Fortune fallins; even as it were into their Mouths. 
 
 VIII. A Line going from the top or upper Joynt of 
 the Thumb, running down towar.ls the Line of Lite, but 
 cut or broken into fevcral parts, ihews violent Death by 
 fome Weapon, Duels, Quarrels, &c. 
 
 IX. Certain crofs Lines, broken and imperfed, and 
 irregular Marks at the Root of the Thumb, ("hews an 
 Ambitious, Prodigal, BoalHng, Libidinous Perion. 
 
 X. If a Woman has in the fird Joynt of her Thumb, 
 xinder the Nail, three or four Lines, interfering and 
 cnnTif.g one another, i"he will be Wounded, and be in 
 danH.er of Death by her Husband. 
 
 ' XI. They who under the fccond Joynt of the Thumb 
 have many and little CrofTcs, will lead Vntuous, Good, 
 Holy, Pious and Religious Lives. 
 
 XII. Two Lmes under the fecond Joynt, prenote a 
 Perfon Quarrelionie, Crofs, W-xatious, Litigious, Un- 
 faithful, Petulant, Foolifn, Wanton and Shamelets : the 
 lame alfo if Blanche-, are t(:^und in the lame place. 
 
 XTII. Rimulaes, Chinks, Clefts or Lines, more or Icfs, 
 circumfcribing the Thumb, near the firlt Joynt thereof, 
 il^ws (for tlK moftpari) Death by Hanging. 
 
 XIV. Thiteor four Lines appearing equally, or crof- 
 fing under the hrll Joynt of the Thumb, ii.ew Riches 
 nnd Honor in Youth ; but if they are above the Joynt, 
 thcv give the fame in riper Age or muLlle Age: but it 
 jth'ev {)C found near the Ttcond joynt, in old Age. 
 ' XV. In a Woman thofe Lines lb appearing, ihew her 
 to be Falfe and Deceitful, and one Ill-conditioned. 
 
 XVI. One, two or more Stars on the (kil Joynt ol;^ 
 the Thumb, liiews one of a Iweet and gentle Nature, of 
 good Conditions and Manners, Facetious, Plcalant and 
 
 ' Jslcny, 
 
CiUp. 2 5 . Good and Evil Marks, &c, 725 
 
 iMerry, afied^in* and deligfating in Vtnm aiid all forts 
 ■df F'enend Sports, Paftimes and Pleafures. 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 The Good And Evil Lines ^ Marks or Characters, 
 
 I. "T* H E good Line?, Matk? or Chara6lers, are Paral- 
 -*- Icls, as Tiz or 1 1 double or treble, and t'le like: 
 Croifes, as4"f^'^ doable, and the like; Star% as the 
 Sex:ile Alped ^ or the like: Ladlers-lleps and Qua- 
 drangles, as D Or CD: the Trbis Alpeil, as a : An- 
 gles, as the rtglit or acute , or a Muh-anglc, &c. the 
 Characters of /3,''i:^>-a'i id /i*;^///, as T^, $^ and other the 
 like a kin to thefe. 
 
 II. The unfortunate and evil CharaSter? are deibrined, 
 irregular and uncouth Figures, broken Lines, crooked 
 Lines, Gridirons, the Characters orT? Saairn and ^ 
 Mars: the Opt) jl. ion § : irregular Circles, obtufe Aii- 
 gles, and fuch-Hke. - - - -■ 
 
 III. LajHyy As the quantity of Lines ccnfideffd In 
 their length and depth ; their Quality, in fhcir Shape 
 and Complexion ; their Aciion, in touching or cutting 
 other Lilies ; their P.^jfton, in being touched or cut ofo- 
 thers; and their PLue in which they are pofited Or loca- 
 ted, ought to be oblerved ; ib alio their time or" appear- 
 ing or difappearing ought not to pa(s our Cogni^ance.^ 
 
 IV. For u is Moi certain, that Jofrie Lines are prolonged 
 to certain Te.irs of oar Age, other I owe (hortned ; fomitimtj 
 they wax pale, fometiwes ^rovf red ; [owe of one fhape qai'^e 
 vanijh, while others of another fhape rile : n^rv the Ca^fs 
 vpithom doubt is the variotu Progreffions of the Aphe'ical 
 places in the Geniture, to their v<rr-i^fu and con:in^cnt Pr'o- 
 ntijfors, to the Injlnence ef which, the whole Man it jelf ii 
 JHbJHgated. 
 
 V. And therefore it behoves the Indu/friom and S'tidi- 
 QHi Artiii, not to determine all things at fir/} fi^ht, f'^r no 
 Aian can attain the knowledge of all Par:icH\ars at one In- 
 fpedion ; but yearly to make neve Objh'vationSj (vs the P erf on 
 tncreafes in Age. 
 
 D d d 4 V. Aiorea- 
 
724 Polygraphices. Lib. IX. 
 
 VI. Moreovfr h ii lo be ohftrveti^ thitt theft Juipmenti 
 h^ no: hhvrrri fimply alonf^ btit by being compared nuh the 
 Rales ^'l-'ere { in Chap. I. c.fore'roing, from whence many 
 ether Fr'^gnof}.cks more tl.an what vb; have here mentioned will 
 driff^ to the infinie Pleajure of the Ariijij and SatisfaUion 
 of the curiom InM.ji.or. 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 Containing certain c hiromantical Afhorifms, 
 
 I. TNc'fure? ard CrofTes upon the Mount of Satnm^ 
 .. -*• ll^e'v iome lisht Ad'-erhtics and Diieale'^. 
 ^ :^ II. Tvv'O. three or more litik Lines on the fir(t]oynt 
 
 of the little Finger, ihcw the Dominion of Mercury, 
 
 and an acute Wit. 
 
 III. The 'l/o/z^ /^(f.Tfm notably fiirrowcd, fhcwsWan- 
 
 tonpe(?, and one that ("hall obtain many Loves. 
 .. ly. A large and broad Men fa, Hiewsa free and li- 
 beral Soul : and if it be adorned wi:h 8,ood Figures, an 
 
 Accuinvhcion o much Treaf nes and Rchcs. 
 3 V. Ti e Sa "rnia only touching the Epanca, ilievvs one 
 ringenioijs, and of Jonp, Li e. 
 
 r VL /V/ons j,oz'is,\vd\ adorned wiih good Figures, dc- 
 
 m.onlhatetheheight oi Honor. 
 -•; VII. A Crofs near or upon the Ferient^ fliews aiifpi- 
 
 cioiis and profitable jjournies, and Honorable. 
 
 Vin. A Cro-s in the AfeaU^ undur the v^»;;«/-fr, 
 
 fnews Honor, Glory and Treiiurc: but ir any o its 
 -Lines be cut by the Epatica, it llicvvs lols ot Subliance 
 
 inrvIdAp.e. 
 
 IX. Two, three or more parallel Linesupon the Feri-- 
 em, fliews many profi:ahlc andplcalant journics. 
 
 X. Two or three parallel Lines upoa the Afons Mer~ 
 curii^ enclines to all manner of Arts and Sci;:nccs, and 
 gives a profound Wit. • 
 
 XL The Via S4is not hurt, (hews H.-inors, but if it 
 be cut or touched by other Lines, Iome Lnpediment 
 thercii ; if tlic obftructive Line ariles from the Monf 
 Alercariij by ioiut Aierairid Man or Thing, or the like ; 
 
 if 
 
Chap. 26. thtrcmifithil AphoTifms, 725 
 
 if from the Mons Lun£, from foine Woman-kind, tlic 
 common People, or feme vulgar Bufmefs: if from the 
 Mons Sanirni, from fome old Man or Men, fome worn- 
 out Prielt or Prophet, or Informer, or other SatMrniam 
 Mitter: the like judge if itarifes from other parts. 
 
 XII. Parallel Lines upon the Mom; Saturni, falling 
 upon and cutting the Ahnjnl Line, fhews Sicknefs, Po- 
 verty and Want in old Age. 
 
 ,'..- XIlT. The cutting of the Vital^ iliews Difeafes about 
 thofe Yeais which the parts of the Line cut fignify. 
 
 XIV. If the Line cutting the f^i.al comes from the 
 Triangle of Mats, it iTiews Wounds, or a burning Fe- 
 ver, or the Fr^«f^-Pox : if it comes from the Sittrirni/i^ it 
 fliews Melancholy, a Confumption, or a Fall, &c. 
 
 XV. The Soror Mitrtis very conlpicuous and eminent, 
 iliews Boldneis and Courage, and one that will be for- 
 tunate and formidable in War. 
 
 •*' XVI. An excellent good Cephdica, fliews an incom- 
 parable Ingenuity. 
 
 '; XVII. A Crols upon Mons /;,««4: declares Fruitiiil- 
 refs and many Children ; as alio iafe Delivery in Child- 
 bearing. 
 
 XVIII. The Saturnia rifing obliquely from the Re- 
 ^ri[h. to the Aions Satarni, ihews Labor and Sonovv, 
 and one of a covetous Difpofition. 
 
 XIX. A Line arifnig from the middle of the Hand, 
 cutting the Epatica, and afcending to the Extremity of 
 the A'fenfdy under the Mons Merami, fhews in the de- 
 clining Age, an unfaithful Friend or Fiiends, fr^oia 
 whom lliall come Lois and Detriment. 
 
 XX. A Crois or Star near or upon the Epatioff fhcws 
 fome eminent Good. 
 
 • XXI. As the A^ons Samrni afflisSled foreHicws Di- 
 feafes, io thois Difeafes are chiefly the Gout or a Con- 
 liimption ; if the Line afflicting the Aions Saturni ariles 
 from the Triangle of AiarSj it declares eitlier an Hedick 
 or the Stone. 
 
 ' XXU. The Cing'JHm Veneris generally iliews Intem- 
 perance; but if it be interleded or cut, it is a pofitivc 
 Sign of Senluality and Lafc-vioulnefs ; and that the 
 Perfon iball futfer in Reputation and good Name, and 
 not without caufe i and oftentimes forelbews want of 
 ■Iffue. 
 
 XXIII. The 
 
7^5 P^yj^r4ffhices. Lib. IX. 
 
 XXIIT. The Tran^lc 0/ .4^.?r/ bting ptrfedt, thti*!*- 
 /«r;z/? cxtcn Ici only to the toiehiag or' the Epjitica, the 
 Ciphalic.t continued to the M'^n{ AlerfAriiy and the ^la 
 iJ^eavcvy tair, are firm Arguments of one exceeding 
 Fortunate. 
 
 XXIV. Parallel Lines drawn from the Mounts b'' Sd- 
 turn and Sol, to the A'l^'is Lmay (lievs encreale of For- 
 tune atui SiibftaiKC in Foreign Countries, and in Tra- 
 velluii^ ; as alio from fome eminent Lady or Ladies, 
 Wo.' en-kind, the common People, and things Litn.tr, 
 
 XXV. The Menfal cutting the jMom Jovu, flicn'S 
 one P-iiKonatc, and full ot Wrath : if the' fame he cut 
 under the Mo-is Satur^ji^ by a i'hort and thick Line, it 
 ihcwslome grievous Dltcmper in the Bowels and lower 
 pare "rhc Sclly. 
 
 XX VL The ^ta LdleA, arifing from the ^?y^r/c7v and 
 VncJ, fnews an ol.l Age full of Tranquility •. 2.\-\\ io 
 much the mor;:, if the end thereof upon the Ahns Lante 
 be aJonied ^v'-th a Crofs or Star, or parallel Line. 
 
 XXVn. Th* Epaka enciined towards the J^e/tri^^t, 
 (thereby makii ig a narro>v Triangle) makes one not orer- 
 Wiie, vet Covetous. 
 
 XXVin. A Lme coming from the yi:al into the Tr- 
 4inz>diim AfaniS, making a Crois with the S/itnrnia, Oic\rs 
 Wounds and dancer of Life by Thieves, and fiich-likc: 
 ^ fome Crois ihews Fevers a ho. \ ' 
 
 XXIX. The fame is fignified if the Menf.tl be corn 
 joincd with dicEp>th-.i byaijy intervening Line. 
 
 XXX. A Crois or Star on the ?jpper part of the A/ons 
 Veneris, iliews unlawful Loves and a Letcher : this is 
 the more confirmed if the laid Mount be wtll adorned 
 with Furrow?. 
 
 XXXL AS)ihr mnQ(X unto ihc S^turnia, confirms its 
 Significations double. 
 
 XXXn. The Cep'ulica extended even to the A'fons 
 Mtrcuriij l"hews Eloquence, aready Wit, and much In- 
 genuity. 
 
 XXXIII. If the VU Soils appears not m the Hand, the 
 Favors of IPrinces and great Men will not be eafily at- 
 tained. 
 
 XXXIV. A Line running from the Vital ^o the Aiom 
 Joins, (but (;ipccially patting through the VualJ ihews 
 
 Gicat- 
 
Chap. 26. Chiro7n4mi€Al Jphortfms, 7^7 
 
 Greatnefs and Honor, ^nd that foin^tiwes to come by 
 Women-kind, or by Marriage. 
 
 XXXV". The Aienjal projeiHng little Branches to* 
 ■wards the Ferienty under the Tuberculum Afercttrii, pre-, 
 fa ges Poverty. 
 
 'XXXVI. A Line falling from the Intervals of the 
 Mons Saturni & Jovis, threatens a dangerous Wound 
 in the lower part of the Belly. 
 
 XXXVII. The l^ital differed by a Line from the 
 A'ions Saturniy ihews a A'a.nztxou^ SatHrnian Difeafc; 
 kom the Mons Jovis, a Difeafc of his Nature ; from the 
 Mons Solis, a Sol^ Difeafe ; from the Mons Mercnrii^ 
 one Whimfical, or afflided with a Mercurial Dillem- 
 per ; from the TriangHlum Mortis, a A^furtial Difeafc, 
 as fome Wound or burning Fever -, from the Mons Lnnt, 
 Madnefs, Dropfie, or fome other Lmur Difaffe6lion. 
 
 XXXVIII. The Me:ifal or Line of Fortune cut by a 
 Line from the Mons Jovis, iliews Lofs or Damages by 
 things or Perfons Jovial ; by a Line from the Mons Sar 
 t%rni or Lima Satmnia , by things or Perfons Sattarnine ; 
 by a Line from the Mons Mercuriiy by Scriveners, Petty- 
 Fog^ers, and things or Perfons MercnriaL 
 
 XXXIX. A Line running from the Mons SAturni tfl 
 the Mons Lume, parallel to the P^ital, ihews wonderful 
 Preferment and Dignities, and a Perfon Formidable, 
 but not without great Envy. 
 
 XL. The Soror Martis running through the Fital to 
 thQ Mons Jovis, fhewsthe d or other Afpe6t of "U and $ 
 in the Geniture. 
 
 XLI. The Rejlridia not broken or cut, but continued, 
 and of a good color, argues Riches and a healthful Con- 
 Ititution of Body. 
 
 XLII. The Gfp^^/zV^ having a Siiler, confirms the Sig- 
 nifications thereof, let them be what they willj and if 
 t,he faid Sifter reaches to the Epadca, it. ihews one Craf- 
 ty and Subtil, and excellent in managing of Affairs. 
 
 XLIII. Good Lines upon the Mons *S'tf//j being cut, 
 {hews Honors, but full of Troubles. 
 
 XLIV. Parallel Incifures on thQ Mons Lun^, tending 
 to the place 0^ AUrs, Ihew long Journies. 
 
 XLV. The £p;r/iV*?extreamly produced, argues. a, very 
 long Life. 
 
 XLVI. A 
 
7*5 IPolygraphices. Lib. IX. 
 
 XL VI. A Crofs in the utmoft part of the MmJA near 
 the Ferient, and another in the Qpbalica near the ReJ}yi- 
 Ba, denotes a plentiful Life in old Age, and many fuc- 
 cefsful Tournie?. 
 
 XLVIL A Crofs in the Ovea M4rth ihcws an Incli- 
 nation to Arms and Maitial Difcipline, and fometimcs 
 Wounds. 
 
 XLVIII. The SatHrnia -whole, and extended through 
 the EpaticA and MenjAly llicws a happy Succefs and E- 
 vent of A6Hons, and' one of profound Cogitations. 
 
 XLIX. A Line coming from the Mons Jovis to the 
 Afonj yeneris, ( not cut by any evil Line) prelhgcs a 
 great Fortune by Marriage. 
 
 L. A Crofs j\\i\ above the Refiri^a^ between the A<fons 
 Veneris a.nd the Mons Lm<e, fhews Tranquility and Hap- 
 pinefs in old Age. 
 
 LI. The Menfiil full of Branches, (almoft like a Her- 
 ring Bone ) and they pointing towards the Mons Jov'u^ 
 eminently declares anincrcaie of Riches. 
 
 LII. The Charader of "VL Jftpiter m the Aienf a, under 
 Afons Soils, Hiews Preferment Ecclefiaftical. 
 
 LIII. Parallel Lines in Triangnlnm yl/<i;-m, pointing 
 towards the Fcfient, argue Felicity and much Good. 
 
 LIV. A Crofs or St.u* upon the er.d of the Satttmhy 
 near the Refiri^ay fhcws Uprightnefs of Mind, one Cour- 
 teous and Peaceable, and obtaining a happy and plea- 
 fantoldAge. 
 
 LV. A Line from the Vital falling upon and cutting 
 the EpAtica, fhews Shortnefs of Life, and an hot Liver. 
 
 LVI. The SAturnia falling upon the A Ions Saturni to 
 the Adons Lnndi, ihews Adverfities and fccret Enemies, 
 and if it then turns back like a Hook to^vards the Adorn 
 AiercHYti, it fignifies Captivity or Impriibnment. 
 
 LVII. The CinguUim Veneris cut by Lines from the 
 Aions Siitkrni or Mons SoliSj denotes Difeales and Hurts 
 by Lafcivioufnefs. 
 
 LVIII. The Via Soils cut by the Cingulam Veneris^ 
 brings a Stain upon the Honor by foir.c Woman-kind. 
 
 LiX. Parallel Lines from the Ahns Veneris to the 
 Mons Mermrii, fliews a Coniunction or other AlpcC:t 
 of Venw and Mercury in the Gcniauc , and fjgnitie 
 great Eloquence. 
 
 LX. A 
 
chap. 26. ChtromMttcdy^fhortJms. 729 
 
 LX. A aooked Line falling from the Mons Saturni 
 into the Cavca Mards, threatens a Fall from an high 
 place or Drowning ; and this fo much the more emi- 
 nently as the Line is more crooked. 
 
 Qui in manH omnium hominnm Jtgnapofnitj m cognofct^ 
 unt opera ejni /tngnli. Job 37. 7. 
 
 Lihri Noni Fhu, 
 
 FOLY' 
 
^ JO Lib. X. 
 
 ,i»t i' I - - - ■■ . , . ^—- 
 
 TOLTGKAP HICES 
 
 Liber Decimus. 
 
 Of Painting and Coloring, or Staining 
 Glafsy Enamel and Gems, 
 
 SECT. L 0/ GLASS. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Salts for Glafs Works. 
 
 1./ ■ iH E Art of making Glafs we fhall not propofe 
 I in this Work ; but in regard fome of the In- 
 1 gredients, which go towards its Compofition, 
 "^^ may be of Ufe in lomc parts of the following 
 Difconrfe, we fhall do our Endeavor to ilicw you the 
 ProdlidVion of feveral of them in t-his- place: of which 
 the firlt thing uliidi is neceffary to be known, is the pro- 
 per SALT, which is uleful for the making of Glal?, 
 Crv'ftaU Enamel and Gems. 
 
 U. This Salt is nothing clfc but a Sd Alkali oi Pot- 
 AQics. Alh.H is an Arabick word, as the Particle Al 
 difcovers ; and Kal in that Language is Suit : but now, 
 Artifts call it by many other Names, as Polverins or Pal- 
 vefiney Rochetia and Soda. 
 
 in. Thcfe arc all the fame thing, and made of the 
 fame Matter, but do each differ in Goodnefs according 
 to the Place the Matter comes from, and the Order or 
 Method of making it. 
 
 IV. The 
 
ebap. I. Of Sdtsfip GUfs Works. 751 
 
 IV. The Matter of" which this Salt isiprK^e, is the 
 Hec-b K'aliy callti aJfo^or/^-, Saiic ;r,:it,' and Sa'j'U^ fem 
 its^ yklding a vaft quantii y Oi:' Salt : as alio -^rom -y^iga 
 Oi Mdpy which is Sea-nrack op SetitKe&ci^j calteJ itlio Sea^ 
 th(mgS:Ot Sea-Uces. 
 
 V. The Goodnefs of this fcki-b is according to the 
 Places of Growth it is. taken from ; th^it which grows on 
 the COiifis and Bank* or Syria^ ^*^.§y^ \ -he Lez'^m^ Stc. 
 is thebe(t: that which grows on the Goart=^o Spahi, I- 
 tf>Jy:,2knd ffenke is the nesc bell: that which grows oit 
 the Goalts ot France' 'm\voi{c: but thai which growf a- 
 boiit the Mouth ot the T/i^wtf.f, andioiher Maritime places 
 of Enghnd^ is ot" little or no w.orth at a-lli 
 
 VI. Of this if ^// there are itveraMbrts, moll-ofwhicfi' 
 aye good for nothinij;^ bucHy a^vav^ in ftnoak, one of 
 which is the Kali Sfmofnm, Avhich is nothing fit for- this 
 Buipole at alJ. 
 
 VII. All IbrtS'Of Afhes which come from th^EevAnt: 
 or £rty? are chilled Po/t^'^j^.^ becauib it is in Pouder : but 
 that which is. brou<;ht' in hard Lmnps, Ifke Stone, is cal^ 
 Jed Rochnta- and this. is better than the Allies; fortheffe- 
 Xjiunps, wjien they aae- great and hard, yield a whiter 
 a|id Iharpev Saltrthan-th&Bouder' atid- little- bits whieb 
 aye lefs* 
 
 yHI. This .-^w/«'?/it- which is made in ^jr?Vj <!y€^pr 
 and, the I^^'<V3H^ has- a- great deal of care taken in its Frc=' 
 paj-atioii ; they firft'oc ail.maJ<e a.L;A-ir//?»»of the Allies 
 tl^yfirdmake, with which they fprinklc the Herbs- they- 
 are to- Burn, after their having dryed them ; and thus: 
 they continue fprinkJing them each time with new Lye; 
 by. which- means they coagulate into great Lumps, and 
 very hard, like Stones, makin" very iharp Alhes, from*- 
 the abundance of Salt wherewith they are impreguated^ 
 by the continual Addition of the Lixiviwri. 
 
 IX. ^'o^rfwhich comes from ^y^gyft and Spain is.va^At'- 
 of; the fame Herb Kdi : it is cut down in the midlt of 
 Summer, when it is in its full Vigor, and being dryed in 
 the heat of the. Sun, it is gathered on heaps, and burnt 
 on Grates made of Iron, the Allies- falling thro' them in- 
 tQa Pit underneath, where they grow into a hard Mal^, 
 and are tlienee taken and Uid up tor Ufe^ and called 
 
 X. That 
 
732 PofygraphiceL Lib. X. 
 
 X. That Scia. which comes from SpAin an A the Levttnt 
 is good; where, by realbh of the heat of the Climate, 
 Kali grows in great quantities, and is green all the Win- 
 ter : But that Sodn which comes from zy£gypt, where 
 there is never any Rain, is the ftrongeft, and makes the 
 fti-ongeftand lliarpeft Salt. 
 
 XL Polverine on tlie contrary has no fuch Preparati- 
 on, but the Herb is only Burnt on Iron Gtatcs, and af- 
 terwards when they arc cooled, they arc gathered up, 
 and kept in proper Veffels for Uic : thcfe Allies have 
 indeed lefs Salt than Rochetta ; but for the quantity, it 
 feas not any the lels Virtue and Goo>.lncf5» 
 
 XII. To make the Saltout o^ Rochetta^ So.ia or Polve- 
 rine ; you mufl: reduce them all to a fine Pouder, by beat-" 
 ing in a Martar : then takt of thefe poudred Allies ftx. 
 Tartar calcined to whitenefs Itj. Water a lufticient quan- 
 tity; mix them, and boil with a moderate Fire, till the 
 Salt is all extradled, and a third part of the Water is 
 lx)i[ed away, often ftirringit with a Woalen Ladle : fil! 
 the Veffcl again with Water, and continue to iiir and 
 toil again, till one half is confumed. 
 
 XIII. All being cooled, put it out (Liquor and Afhes 
 together) into levcral well Glaz'd Eartlicu Pans, which 
 let ihnd fix days, that the Alhes may fettle, and the 
 Lye become clear : decant this Lye clear, leaving the 
 Allies behind ; and letting it (land two days longer, it 
 will become very clear : decant the clear Liqtior again ; 
 and this continue till it is perfectly fine ; otherwifc it 
 will become purely clear at once, if you will be at the 
 Trouble to filter it thro' brown Paper. 
 
 XIV. This pure clear Lye, put into a proper Vcflef, 
 and boil over a gentle Fire, to evaporate the Water, till 
 it begins to thicken, and ihooc into Salt, which will be 
 in about 24 hours time, when the Salt will begin to ap- 
 P«ir white on the Surface of the Velfcl ; then take a 
 Skimmer full of holes, and take out the Sale, lettiiigthc 
 Lye drop away from it into the Vclfel : put thisSalt in- 
 to tlic former Earthen glaz'd Fans, the better to drain 
 the Lye from it ; which put again into the tbrmer Lye, 
 and boil it again in like maiirer, till you have gotten al! 
 the Salt : but as loon as you Ice the Salt ly.giu to ihoot, 
 let the Fire be gentle ; tor a gre.u Fire will caufe it to 
 ^ck to tlie bottom, and fo burn it, which it pu^ht not 
 
 to 
 
Chap. i. OfSdUs for GUfs JVorh. 75 j 
 
 to do. If this Work be done in a Copper, it ought to be 
 well lin'd with Lead orTin^ becaufe the fharpLye will 
 otherwile eat away the Brafs or Copper, and bcfiics fpoil 
 the color of the Salt. 
 
 XV. This Salt thus drained , put them into little 
 Wooden Fats, the better to clear it of all its moifturej 
 and beating of it grody, dry it perfedly in a Furnace 
 gently heated : being dryed, beat it to a grofs Poudcr in 
 a Mortar, and keep it in a dry Vcflel and place, fx9^ 
 from Dull, to make CrylLil Frit of. 
 
 XVI. We mix liich a proportion of the Calx of Tar- 
 tar with the Poherincy &c. to make the greater quantity 
 of Salt, becaufe it makes a Wronger Attraftion of the 
 Salt out of the Polverine A!lies, and alfo makes the Salt 
 whiter too ; and by this means we get 8 or 9, and Ibme- 
 timcs 10 pounds of Salt out of 30 pounds weight of Pol- 
 verine L:vant^ without wliich fuch a quantity could 
 not be extracted ; and befides, it makes finer Cryftai 
 and more tranfp.lrent. Where note. That the Tartar 
 ought to have 5 or 6 hours Calcination, for fo it be- 
 comes whiter and more eafily diUblvable in Water. 
 
 XVII. A Salt alfo for this Purpofe is mcAe of Fern^ 
 which will make a very fair Cryjlal : It grows in moft King- 
 doms at Europe J Afia and America^ and that in a va{| 
 Plenty. They ufe it in Spain* and the Aihes or Salt 
 they make of it, they call Barilla or BarilUa. 
 
 Xvni. It is to be cut down when in its primci vi<. 
 from the end of Aday to the middle of Jt*ne, and in the 
 encreafe of the Moon, becaufe then it yields more, bet- 
 ter and virhitef Salt; It muil not be uied when it is wi- 
 thred and dryed as it fends, for then it will yield but 
 Very little Salt, and that wot good neither : but being 
 cut down at its full growth, and dryed as Kali^ and Id 
 in like-manner burnt, it yields very good Allies; and 
 by the lame Method, a very fine and good Salt, 
 
 XIX. And indeed any Herb or Plant Avhich abounds, 
 with a good quantity oiAlcaliom Salt, will ferve for this 
 Purpoie, as Alga or Sea-weed^ which is one of the moll? 
 excellent things next to Kali ; alfo all Ruilics, Reeds and 
 Sedge, which grow in Marlhcs, Pools and Ditches of 
 Water, and Banks of Rivers ; to which add bitter Herbs, 
 as Cardfiftt Ben. Centory^ Gentian, Hops, Southern-wood^ 
 WorfK-jvood }:'^ : nd Common ; ^s 2M0 Tobacco., the 
 
 E e e Body 
 
^J4 Pofygraphfces. Lib.X* 
 
 Body of the Plant and its Stalks ; with all forts of Mil- 
 ky Plants, as Dandelyonf Celandine, SoTV-thifiles, Spurges 
 or Tithymals oi all forts, the Fig-tree, Vine-branches, &c. 
 
 XX. But LegaminoHs Plants abound with this Salt 
 more than any other, as Bean Sulks and Cods, Peafe 
 Straw, &c. to which axkl the Fruit or Seeds, as Beans, 
 Peafe, T^.res, Lentils, Lupins, Sic. but the Salt from the 
 Stalks and Cods of Beans, is an admirable thing for the 
 4bakingofG7y?<z/. 
 
 C H A P. II. 
 Of making of frit for Cryjld, 
 
 T. 'T'O make this Frit, you muit have a great quantity 
 -*- oi' Tar fo, which is a Matter fufible, and capable 
 of being rendred white and tranfparent by force of Fire : 
 and this Matter is eitiier white and tranfparent Sand, or 
 fome forts of Stones : y^gricola lib. 1 2. fays white Stones 
 when melted, are the l-Tclt for this Purpofc : and Pliny 
 fays, That of fuch-likc Stones they make Glafs in India 
 moft admirably traniparent, that nothing elle is compa- 
 rable to it. 
 
 II. The Venetians and Italians make Glafs in the Klc 
 diMuran of a w^hitc Flint, Avhich they have out of the 
 River Ticinus, where tlicre is a vait quantity of them : 
 and they are found alio in tlic River Arnus, both above 
 and below Florence. 
 
 ill. In 7//^.t;zj they u(c a rich Sand full of Salt, which 
 is found in the Vale of Amus : alfo a hard white Mar- 
 ble, which almoil every liodv knows there, found at the 
 foot of the Mountnijis o{ Pifa, Sarvavc^.z^a, A'f.ifa and 
 Carrara ; of all which th.cy make very white Tar/o. 
 
 IV. Ferrandns Impcratus lib. 24. cap. 16. Ipcaks of the 
 Glafs Stone called Quocoli, which is almcJlt hkc rfhiie 
 Afarblc, but lomethini; tranfparent and hard as a Flint, 
 of a light green color like the Serpentine S.one^ and having 
 Vein?, WkQ Venice Talck : this being put into the Firs., 
 loofes its Traniparcncv, and becomes more white and 
 
 light. 
 
Chap. 2 . of mining of Frit for Cryftttl 7 j j 
 
 'ight, will not turn into Lime, but in length of time be 
 converted into Glafs. 
 
 V. And it is true , that all white and tranfparent 
 Stones, which will not become Lime, are fit for making 
 Glafs: thefe, and all Fire Stones, and thoic which will 
 [Irike Fire , v/hen they are calcined and reduced to an 
 impalpable Po-ider, and fi "ted thro' a very fine Siev^ 
 will make a moit admirable fine and pure G-yy?^/. 
 
 VL But the Art is, to reduce the Tarfo to fuch a fine 
 and impalpable Ponder, the Trouble oi which has cau- 
 fedthe GJais-men to give it off, and to ule, in the place 
 ©Fit, pure while fine Sand, bccaufe there is little or no 
 Expence in its Preparation, it needing only walhing 
 clean, drying and lifting. 
 
 VIL However, Flints have been found better and 
 more fine, and iiideed, being prepared into T^r/t?, make 
 a more pure fort o^Cnjid : and are indeed co be chofen^ 
 it you would make counterfeit Gems in Perfection. 
 
 VIII. To make the FWf, you muitdo thus. Bi Tarfo 
 prepared, or fine white Cry(ialine Sand ifc^rx. Salt of Pul- 
 vsrine^s before prepared tbxiii. mix well together, put 
 them into a Furnace to be calcined, making the Fire 
 gentle the firft hour, and continually ftirring it n-ith an 
 iron Rake, that the Ingredients may the better incor- 
 porate. 
 
 IX. The next five hours encrcafe the Fire to a very 
 ftrong heat, always (lirringthe Matter with a Rake ; af- 
 ter that time is over, ( if the Fire has been hot enough ) 
 the Frit may be reduced to Lunips of the bignefs of a 
 Nutmeg, which in breaking will be light and white, (if* 
 it is enough) without any yellow in it. 
 
 X. If you find it yellow or ycllowiih, you muft put 
 it into the Furnace again, till it loofes that yellow color : 
 
 I now, by how much the more the Mafs is fUrre 1 and cal- 
 I cincd in the Furnace, by fo much the more will it be re- 
 fined, and alio melc the more eafily in the Pots. 
 
 XI. This dor.e, take it out of the Furnace, and let it 
 cool ; then lay it on Boards in a dry place, for othernufe 
 the ka(t wet will diifolve the Saks iiito Water, and leave 
 Hothing but thzTarfo behind, which of it felf can never 
 be made into Glals ; and then cover it from Duft, tot it 
 is as white as Snow. 
 
 Eec 2 XILDuiiiig 
 
y^6 Pohgrdphices. Lib. X. 
 
 XII. During the time it is making, you muft fee whc'- 
 ther the Proportions of the Materials are right or not : 
 put fome of the Frit into a Crucible, and afterwards on 
 a clean piece of Glafs, fo will you fee whether it is well 
 made or not, by its joining together and being clear. 
 
 XITI. If it is too hard or too foft, you mult cither en- 
 crcafcordiminifhthequantity of thcSalt, which a little 
 Etperience and fome Tryals will loon make you fo ex- 
 pert, as to do it at firft fight. 
 
 XIV. If it is well prepared and kept in a dry place, rt 
 will keep good three or four Months, and may pofllbly 
 gro^v better, and be more fit to unite together. 
 
 XV. If you make the Salt oi Pulverine fiinple, with- 
 out any Addition of calcined Tartar, it is true,that it will 
 yield lefs Salt ; but it will make a very noble Cryfiil. 
 and full as fine as the truly natural, fit for the moll ex- 
 quifiteUfes, as counterfeiting Gems, &c. 
 
 XVI. From green Fem^ Allies or Pnlverine may be 
 made, and from thence a Salt, as before is direclcJ, 
 which being puriHcd and mixed with T^rfo or very fine 
 Sand, it makes a very fine Frit, which produces a vcrv 
 fair Cryjid, much better th:m tlTC ordinary, which wil! 
 be ftrong, and bend more than the Natureof G7y/<?/ wil' 
 mit, fo that it may be drawn into fine Threads. 
 
 XVII. With this Frit may be made a fine Gold color, 
 (if it be without any mixture of Salt of Tartar ) which 
 will be hicomparably fine ; of which all loitsof Veffeh 
 niavbemaue. 
 
 XVIII. f/7> made alfooffine Salt of P///z/?Ww£', (witli- 
 out mixture of any- fort o^T^-rtar) will make Cryjlal of 
 a gloriou.- GolJcn color ; but the Salt miiil be prepared 
 ana jTariiicd ;w.)s bcfoic dirc^ilcd : if it Ibould be made 
 of Sait ofFdvirh/e with T,:rt,;rj the color would be im- 
 -()crftct and be vtantin" of its true Splendor and Bcau- 
 
 ^y- ' ^ . . 
 
 XIX. Frit made of Pnlvcrinc, jnakcs orduiai'v whrsc 
 Jkjlals : that which is made of Levant Ruchetta^ makes a 
 
 : very fair Cryftal ; and that whith is made of Barilli.i of 
 Spain, (being foniewhat unchious) makes a Glals not lb 
 white and fair, but cnclining to an azure or bkwiili 
 color. 
 
 XX. To make ordinary Frit of Puherint^ Rochetta ant 
 BmHic* IJi Barilliri, &c. Ibxx. fine Tario Ifcxvii'i. or xvii jJ 
 
 I^UA ^ pjiikifig] 
 
Chap. 5 . Of Artificial Cry (1^1. 757 
 
 making the Proportion accerding to the good nffi and fatjiefs 
 of the Barillia : add to thefe of fine pure Sand "ihij. or ijfs. fi»- 
 Tpill yo'i have a Frit mhic'h nill yield a very rfhite and fur ;^ 
 Glafs. This Frit being calcined in the Furnace, pour 
 upon it a Pail of cold Water, and foput it in a cold 
 and moilt place : after which, from time to time, fprin- 
 kle it witha Imali or weak Lye for t"vvoor three Months, 
 fo will it be as hard as a Stone, and not to be broken 
 without a Hammer. 
 
 XXI. This Frit will eafily melt, and make a very 
 
 i white Glafs, almoft like CryliJy but eafier to work, which 
 
 i is caufed from the Salt communicated to it by the Lye : 
 
 : if you have none of this Lye, common Wat^er might do, 
 
 alcho' not fo well. 
 
 XXIL Tiiis fmall L^ is made frdm the Faeces of the 
 I ^toug Lixivium, of which the Salt of P«/i/m»f is made, 
 I as we have taught in Chap, i . SeB. 1 2, 1 3, 14, &c. afore- 
 I going, thus : Fill the fame Fejfels with fair Water boiling 
 mty mix them velly and let them (land fo lonz as to extrati 
 all the remaining Salt j after v^hich, either decant, or elfe 
 tvith a Ladle tate out the Water, mthout di/iiirbinf the Fceces 
 at bottom : let it (land to fettle, then decant the clear and fil- 
 ter it, and hep it for the aforefaid U/J?, it being pretty fharp 
 and full of Salt. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of Artificial Cry(lal, 
 
 I. 'Tp //£ Preparation of Mangaiiele. Take Manganefe 
 -*• or Magnefia in little pieces, put them into an I- 
 ron Ladle or Crucible, which put into a Reverberatory 
 Fire, and when it begins to whiten, fprinkle it witli 
 good Vinegar ; afterwards beat it, and wafli it whilft '\% 
 is hot, (as you will be taught hereafter to do Z/i^er) theii 
 dry it, reduce it into Ponder, fift it, and keep it in a 
 Glafs clofe Itopt for Ufe. Thus is Manganefe prcpa* 
 red. 
 
 IL This Mineral is called Alanganefe or Magne/id 
 from its Refemblance in color and weight to the Mag' 
 
 £ee 5 fies 
 
7|J Polrgrsphices, Lib. X. 
 
 nff or LoAi-(ione: the belt is cafy to break, and very 
 fliin'np • bnth greater and leller pkccsoFit arc very full 
 of a Pocky Matter. 
 
 III. f^irgil lays it gives both a blew and a green co- 
 lor : his Commentator lays it may be called the Soap of 
 (J/4/>, and that it will tinge Glais red, purple and black ; 
 but we ui'e it alio to make Glajs or Cryhl purely white 
 ©r colorlefs; however, it is the moft univerfal Ingredi-^ 
 ent in all forts of Colors tor Glals-works. 
 
 IV. This Magne(id is a kind ot" Load-rtonc, as Alher* 
 ttu and Cefalpimes will have it ; and it is thought to be 
 the fame kind of LwV-/?on(r of which both Agricoln and 
 Pliny treat, who fay, That it attrads the Liquor or Tin^ 
 dkiresof Glafs into it feh, that purifies it, and of green 
 or yellow, makes it white^ and that afterwards the Fire 
 confumes it. 
 
 V. Magnts was a Name given to the Load-jiont from 
 the place where is was firlt found ; it was in the Hills of 
 Magnefia, a Country ot Lyiia near Mac?donia, as Lu- 
 fretm has it. 
 
 jpwfw Magneta Vocam patrio de Nemlne Graii, 
 Magnetum cjHia Jit: Patriis in Montibtu ortits. 
 
 The Grecians from the Place divl give it Name, 
 JBccaufe from the MagntftAn Hills it came. 
 
 And fo this our Matter or Stone, being faid to be a Spe- 
 cies of the Load-flme^ might poHibly obtain the Name 
 Magnefta^ fmce the Country called by that Name alfo 
 produces it. 
 
 VI. Plinyy it is true, mentions feveral forts o^ Load-" 
 ^onesj and gives us their Differences and the Places where 
 they grow : but this our M^gnefta^ Avhich fer\T5 to tin^^e 
 Glafs, comes to us trom nearer home. It is found in 
 
 freat abundance in Germany ; in CantAbrU in a Icittrcd 
 ^ock ; in Jial;y , and in the Mountains of P^iterba^ and 
 in the State ofGenoa^ (which contains much Iron, and 
 gives a black color : ) but that of Pitdwont is bell known, 
 and the l^tnetUns hold it in fuch tlkem, that they ufc 
 no other, for that it gives a very fine color, takes away- 
 all Greennefs, and in a due Proportion makes the Glais 
 pr CryiUl white. And Ibme Years fmce it has been found 
 
 ia I 
 
Chap. ^. Of Artificial Cryftal. 759 
 
 in England, at Mendip-hilL m Sewer fafhirf, as good as 
 •any ufed at Moran : and wherever the Lead O.-r Men 
 find it, they conclude that Lead Oar lies under it. This 
 being (aid, 
 
 VII. To wah very fine Cryfel, which jhall be very 
 Tphitty bright, clean, diaphanoHi >znd bcatuiful. TakeCr}'^- 
 f-ial Frit, (in cap. 2.fecl.S. ad 15.) put it into a Pot in a 
 great Furnace, putting into it by little and little, at 
 lome little diltance of time, as much Piednoyit Manga- 
 nefe, prepared as above-faid, as lliall be fufficient : all 
 being throughly melted together, take out the Pot, and 
 put it into a large Earthen or Wooden VefTcl full of cold 
 Water ; fo will the Frit be fcparated from the Sandivcr, 
 which othcrwifc will fpoil the Crj'ital. 
 
 VIII. Put it again into a clean Pot, melt it, andcaft 
 it again into Water; this Work repeat till the Crvlbl 
 be feparated from all this kind of Salt : then let it ihx\.<X 
 5 or 6 days in the Pot in the Furnace, to boil, itirrii^g it 
 as little as may be with the Iron, becaul'e it is apt Lo dis- 
 color it, and make itblackifli. 
 
 IX. Being well boiled and clear, fee whether it has 
 Manganefe enough, which you may know by viewiiig 
 it: it it is purely white, it is well ; lor it is the Property 
 of A^anganefe, being added in a due Proportion, to tike 
 away the foul and dull green color of the CrylLil ; and 
 to give it a bright ai^dlliining Whitenefs, and to perfedt 
 it; but if it is ffill greeniOi, you niuf-l add more A-fan- 
 ganefe to it, and boil it, till it is of a bright and ihining 
 color. 
 
 X. But you mufl add the Aiangancfe, but by little 
 and little, kit in perfeding your Cry (lal you fpoil it, by 
 making it blackilli, and taking away its Luftre : thera 
 is no exait Rule for this, but you mu{t p!rfecl your 
 Knowledge by manifold Obfervations and Tryals. 
 
 XI. Few Work-men clear the Materials by cafiing 
 the Mais into Water; but for Eafincfs fake, only skim' 
 it off when it fwims on the top, with an Iron Ladle ; 
 for which realbn it many times does not all fepai^te, 
 and fo the Cryfel or Glafs becomes the lefs clear, dia- 
 phanous or fine. 
 
 XII. When you fee your Cry{tal is fine and fliining, 
 then ufe it without delay, to make what Veflels you de- 
 fjgned it for : in this Operation your Fire muft be very 
 
 Eee 4 cleaf. 
 
740 Poiygrtfhices, Lib. X. 
 
 clear, and without Smoak, that it may not foul the 
 Mais ; but it ought to be mcxe gentle than for common 
 Glafc. 
 
 XIII. The Iron Rois alfo muf^ be clean and well pa- 
 lillied, and the Necks or Collets of the GlafTcs where the 
 Irons touch, mull always be kept cut of the Potsof Cry- 
 iUl ; bccaufe Iron always diicolors the Mais. 
 
 XIV. To male comrKon Gl.ifs vehtre an.i cry'tAluu. 
 
 Take Frit of Pnlvf^im, {q will you b-ave therefrom a 
 common white Glals: if to this Frit vou add Salt of 
 Rcchc-a, yc>u will b^ve a fair Crvftal Glafs, which is 
 between ordinary Glafs and Cryltal : if again to this 
 you had a due Proportion o^ Pieimont Mdngxnffe prepa- 
 red as for Cr\-ltal, it will be very tine an-l cn'italine. 
 
 XV. Butif you would have your Glals very fine, you 
 mull always caft the Mafs into Water, to bring it to 
 Perfection ; which caftins into Water raufl be vcrv er- 
 actlv obien-ed ; for, bcfides its whitening, it is thereby 
 purified, and has fewer Blillers or Bubbles": after put the 
 NIarter into the Pot, and melt it again, and then put it 
 into Water agam, repeating this Work fo long, till the 
 Mafs is made very pure and fine. 
 
 XVI. Now, if you mix common Glafs ttrx. with cry- 
 flaline Glafs ftxx. and with punlied Salt of Tartar ffei?. 
 your Glals andCry:tal wiil be ertreamly fine: but ycxi 
 muft always beware not ro put the Collets of the Glafs 
 which have touched the Iron Rod into it, for thereby it 
 fviJl be fpoiJed: And this nc:e, That the AdA'tion of 
 the Silt of Tartar itij. ought to be when the Frit is in 
 making, that it may the better mix with the other In- 
 gredients. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Colors for tinging Glafs And Cr^Jial in general. 
 
 i. "T" Here are two principal Minerals ufcd for the ting- 
 
 ^ ing of Glafs, C^r. ti*. !• M/mgAntje oi A-iazn^- 
 ftdf which giv:-s Glafs, &c. a whitii'h «wlor, alfo a iiric 
 red cr bUcidih cclur, according to the Pro^Jortion ot'it, 
 
 which 
 
Chap. 4' Colors to tiftgeGUfsaf9dCryftal. 741 
 
 which is added to the Mafs, of which and iti Preparati- 
 on we have largely difcourfed in the former Chapter. 2, 
 Zajfera^ a Mineral coming ixomGervjany, which is faid 
 to tinge Glafs, &c. blew. 
 
 II. VVhat Z^Tjffr is, Authors have hardly detcrirrn-a 
 fome will have it to be an Earth, to tinge Glais bie-r 
 others will have it to be a Stone : others a mixturs 01 ic 
 venil Minerals, 
 
 III. There are but few Authors who have treated 0^^ 
 it, or fo much as named it : and thofe who do fpeak oi 
 it, tell us not what it is, but fpeak only by guels, lea- 
 ving the fubje<5l Matter undetermined. 
 
 IV. Cardantu de Subtilitate lib. 5. calls it a Stone : 
 There u ( fays he ) another Stone rvhich colors Glafs ht?,\.. 
 rohicb fame call Zaffcr. And Jnlim C^far Scaliger, who 
 animadverted upon that Book, and alio wrote a Trea- 
 tife of Glafs, no ways reproves him for calling it fo. 
 
 V. After the former Authors, Cafalpiniu lib. 2. cap. 55, 
 accounts it among Stones : There is ( fays he ) another 
 Stone, coloring Glafs blen>, called Z^Lfftv : of which, if too 
 much he added, it turns it from an Aflj to a Fnrple color : 
 it id heavy and brittle , and melts not of it f elf, but with Glafs, 
 rnns Hie Water. 
 
 VI. Ferranttu Imperatui lib. 28. cap. 8. fays, tint tbi;, 
 5tone is very like the Load-flone and Manganefe ; but A^ 
 gricola makes no mention of it, becaufe it is very proba- 
 ble it was unknown to him. 
 
 VII. Anfelntw Boetitu, tho' he has given us a large 
 Hiftory of all forts of Stones and Gems, yet has not enu- 
 merated Zaffer among them, notwitmtindino; it is 
 brought from Germany. PomttM in his general Hiltory 
 of Drugs, makes mention of a Mineral brought from 
 Sarat, of ablewilh color, which he calls Zafer, S>fre or 
 Sapher, which probably may be the fame, oroftbeiame 
 kind, for that (fays he) it will tin^e Glafs blevo. 
 
 VIII. Merret fays Z^^r is a Compound, but neither 
 of Earth nor Stone ; not mixing at all with Water, nor 
 breaking by fqueezing it between the Fingers ; and that 
 it is a Secret whole Compofition was found out by a 
 German. 
 
 IX. But fmce that Minerals can only tinge Glafs, and 
 no other Materials^ except Metaline ones, are yet found 
 for that Purpofe, Lis Coiyt^^ure is, th.^t it is compofed of 
 
 Copptt, 
 
742 Polygra^hices. Lib. X. 
 
 Copper or Bra^-, to which he chinks there may he fmte Addi- 
 tion of Sand, will) a Pr. portion of Lapis Calami naris : and 
 that the blew color it gives is owing to the Brafs, as that 
 oi A^an^anej? is to Iron. 
 
 X. The Preparation of Zaffer. 
 Merret orders it only to be ground to a very/mall Ponder, 
 and tc be jif:c'l thro' a vry pie Sieve or Serce. Neri has a 
 better Preparation, which makes Glafs much finer. R? 
 Zafi'er in the I argefl pieces, put it into Earthen Pans or Pots, 
 and let it jland one day in a Furnaee, then put it into an Iron 
 Ladle, to be heat red hot in the Furnace ; take it oftt, fprin- 
 kle it with jlrdng Wine-Vinegar : co4 it, grind it fine on a 
 Marble Stone, wafh it with warm Water in Earthen Pans or 
 Vejfels, letting the Zaffer /frf/f to the bottom, and gently de- 
 canting off the Water: Jo will the Fonlnejs and Impurity be 
 Jeparated, the ZafFer remaining pnre at the bottom, which 
 dry and grind again, and keep i: in a r'ejfel clnfe jhpt for 
 
 XI. The are feveral ways of giving Glafs, Golden, A- 
 methiji and Saphirine colors, but fome one way is more 
 particular and finer than the reft : as alfo to make Frit 
 of Natural or Rock Cryftal, which is an admiiabic 
 thing: to do all thefe things, you ought to be very nice 
 in the Proportion, Time, Ciraimftances and Accidents 
 of the M.iterial? ; for erring in any one of thcfe, the 
 "whole will be fpoilcd and undone, and different colors 
 than you propolcd will rcfult. 
 XII. A Milk-white Color. 
 
 Bf good Cryftal Frit ]ti;. Calces of Lead a)id Tin ana 
 ifcj. ^4;z^4«f/f prepared ^fs. all being poudred and mix- 
 ed together, put the Mafs into a Pot heated in the Fur- 
 nace, and let it ftand 12 hours: mix it well, and make 
 an Affay : if the color is not good, add more of the Cal- 
 ces of Lead and Tin, and mix well, after 8 hours it will 
 be as white as Milk, and fit to work. 
 XUl. Another fairer White. 
 
 Bj Pure Cryftal Frit Ibitx. Calx of Tin ftiij. Mangancfe 
 prepared $ii. all being poudred, mix them, andput'them 
 into a Pot heated in the Furnace for 8 days: tiicn calt 
 the Mafs into Water, dry it, and melt it again in the 
 lame Pot: if it istranfparent, you muft add to it more 
 Calx of Tin 5x1). mixing it well with the melted Metal : 
 after 24 hours it will be as white as Snow, and fit to 
 work. XIV. A 
 
Chap. 4- Colors to tinge Glafj and Cry ft aL 74} 
 
 XIV. A mhle Black. 
 
 B? Pieces of Glafs of fcveral colors tfexx. to which addl 
 a little lefs than half the quantity of ^<<«^<*«f/^ SisZaf- 
 fer : put the whole into a Pot in the Furnace : let it 
 itand till it is purified, and 'twill be as black as Vel* 
 vet. 
 
 XV. Another fairer Velvtt Black. 
 
 TV Cr^'fel Frit in pouder ttxx. Calces of Lead and 
 Tin ana tfeij- mix all well together, and put them into 
 a Pot heated in the Furnace : when the Mafs is well 
 incited and purified, add Steel calcined and poudred 
 fiij. Scales of Iron from the Smiths Forge poudred ^ii;. 
 which mix well with the Steel, and calx them in, that 
 the Glafs may not rife, but may be the better incorpo- 
 rated : let all reft 1 2 hours ; during which time, ftir them 
 Ibmetimes, and fo it will be fit to work, and of a moft 
 excellent color. 
 
 XVI. Another BUcJt fairer thm the former. 
 
 TV O^ Rochet [aVm^Ti%. Tartar fvjfs. Manganefe'ptt' '"■^t;^ 
 pared ^x. mix all together, put them into a Pot leiilirely 
 heat in the Furnace, that the Matter may not rile toa -^ 
 much: let it melt, and purify for about 4 da^^s : mix all 
 well, ca(t them into Water, the better to purify t!iem ; 
 then melt again: fo will you have a Black of exraordi-' 
 nary Beauty, and much lurpaffing tlie former, fit to bt '*'' 
 wrought. 
 
 XVII. A Marble Colr.- 
 
 Bi Cryftal Frit and work it as foon as it is me'tcl, 
 before it is purified, fo will you have a very fair Mar- 
 ble color. 
 
 XVIII. A Gold Tellew. 
 
 1^ Cryftal Frit made with Tartar, and not with Sani, 
 garts ij. Frit made two thirds Oi'TarJo, and one third of 
 fine P«/z/fri«f Salt, part;, mix them well, li? of ihis 
 Mixture of Frit Ibxxv. Tartar purified and fearced fine. 
 Piedmont Manganefe prepared, of each f 'v. mix all to- 
 gether very well, (tor you are not to caft them on mLltel 
 Glafs, as in other Colors : ) put this Mixture by little 
 and httle into a Pot, put them into a Furnace, letting 
 rhem ftand 4 days, but in an ordinary Fire, for fear of 
 rifn\^ and running over : when the Mafs is well purified, 
 it is fit tbi working into Vcfl'els, which will be of a faij 
 color. 
 
 XIX. ^ 
 
744 Pofygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 XIX. A fairer Gold rcllow. 
 
 If you would have it lairer, you muft put to the for- 
 mer Mixture more of the Poudcr, and it will be a deli- 
 cate Golden color. Ic" you would have the color yet fi- 
 ner, B? Cryrtal Frit made of Pulvrr'me ofRochetta, and 
 the Gold color will yet be more excellent. 
 
 XX. A Gr^nat Color. 
 
 15t Cryltal Frit, Rochnta Vnl ana ^^xijf?. Pitdmont 
 Adanganeje prepared ^Iv. Zajf:r prepare I ^ij. mix a\\ 
 weirtogether, put them by little and little into a Pot 
 made red hot in the Furnace, becaufe the Glafs is apt to 
 rife and run over: after 4 days the Glafs will be well 
 tii'ged auvl purified, and fit to be wrought. You may 
 make the color deeper or paler as you pleafe, according 
 to the Proportion of Pouder you put in. 
 
 XXI. A Peach Color. ^ 
 
 Ki Glafs prepared and tinged of a Milk white, melt it 
 well, and add to it fome Manganefe prepared by little 
 and little, ftirring it well in, each time, till the color i? 
 as fine and perfect as you defire it. Nots, you mult 
 work the Glals in time, otherwilc the color will be loit. 
 
 XXII. A S.iphir Color. 
 
 I3i Frit of Rorhetta ibxx\^ Zaffer prepared |iv. Mm- 
 vancje prepared ^ij- mix all well together, put the whole 
 into a Pot in the Furnace, letting it (land till it is melt- 
 ed and purified : the longer it remains on the Fire, the 
 finer it becomes, having a care to take it out from time 
 to time. Tiy the color, and either encreafe ordiminiih 
 it as you think fit. 
 , XXIII. A finer Saphir Color. 
 
 5i Choice Cryftal Frit ibxx^'. Z^jfer prepared |iv. 
 Manganefe prepared ^ij- mix and do ai in the former, 
 -Imd it will be tar more glorious. 
 
 XXIV. Lapis Laatili Color. 
 ' ' You muft ufc the Matter in Se^. 15. aforegoing, and 
 xvhen it is in tlifion in the Pot, add to it by little and lit- 
 tle blew Eiumcl in Pouder, which Painters u(e, mixing 
 it well each time ; try it, to fee if it is right ; when it is 
 fo, let it Itand 2 hours; llir it well, and make another 
 .Tr}'al: il the color is pertedt, let it ftand 10 hours, and 
 mix it again : if it changes not color, it isperl'edl, and 
 then you may work it : in working of it, caft in a little 
 t-eaf Oold, and it will immediately Hop the rifing of the 
 
 ., y,.- Metal 5, 
 
Chap. 4. Colors to tinge GUfsundCryftAL 74^ 
 Metal, (as Sugar will do in boiling Oil) and make it look 
 very like the Natural Stone. 
 
 XXV. An Amethiji Color. 
 
 'fy. Piedmont Mangmufe prepared ftij. 2'^^r prepared 
 f iij. mix them well together. IV Cr^^ilal Frit well made 
 with Tarfo (not Sand) ifcxK. of the foregoing Pouder ^xx. 
 mix them well together before you put them into the 
 Pot : put the Pot into the Furnace, and put in your 
 Matter by little and little, left the Violence of the Pouder 
 break the Pot : let it ftand and purify 4 days, fo will it 
 be of a beautiful and glorious Amethiit or Violet color, 
 proceeding from red and ble%v. You may cither encreafe 
 or diminiili the color, according as you make the Propor- 
 tions of the Frit and Pouder. 
 
 XXVI. A Pearl Color. 
 
 5» Frit of Natural Cryftalwell purified ^./. caft into 
 tt-at feveral times Tartar calcined purely white, mixing 
 all well each time : continue this, and make Tr^^als, till 
 the Glafs or Cryftal becomes of a Pearl color : there h 
 no let Rule in this caie, but Experience by Tryals muft 
 guide you. When the color is per: ed, you mufl prefent- 
 ly work it, anditwilibeextreamly beautiful^ otherwifc 
 itwillibonbeloit. 
 
 \yN\\. AJespRed. 
 
 Ill Cryltal Frit itxx. calcined Tin Itij. pieces of white 
 Ghils ibj- mix all well together, and put it into a Pot iw 
 a Furnace, that it may purify : being well melted, call 
 m calcined Steel in fine Pouder, Scales of Iron from tlx- 
 Anvil in Hne Pouder, of each §;. mixed together : ftir wci 1 
 the Glafs with an Iron Stirrer as you are putting in the 
 Pouder, to hinder it froin rifing too much. Put not in 
 too much of the Pouder, icft you make the Glals black, 
 which ought to be clear and lliining, and an obicare yet) - 
 low -.then Lake Copper calcined and prepared (as here- 
 ci'rer in chap. 7.) ^vi. caft it into the melted Mais, often 
 Irrringit for 3 or 4 times, and it will be as red as Blood. 
 The color being perfeL:l, prefently work it, for fear it 
 fhould become black. If your color lliould chance to be 
 ioli, 3'ou muit adtl more Scales of Iron, and it wall re- 
 turn. This Work will be tedious and tirefqine, but tint 
 you muft bear withal, if you intend this color. 
 XXVIII. A Fiperine Color. 
 
 Bi Rock Cryftal o£ a good Water, crude Antimony^ 
 
 Orpimirnt, 
 
74^ Pcfy^rM^hket. Lib. X. 
 
 Qrpimfnty ana ^ij. S,il yJrmon'ack ^j. make tfic three hd 
 into Pouder : put the bits of Cryftal into a good Cruci- 
 ble, and ftratity ^vith the Pouder, laying than (Iratum 
 fuper i^rarttm : thi« done, cover the Crucible with ano- 
 ther Crucible, having a hole bored ihro' its bottom ; lute 
 thein well together • and when dry, put them into the 
 middle o" the Coals in a Furnace, gradually kindle them, 
 that the Crucibles may grow hot by degrees : avoid the 
 Smoak, becaule it is dangerous, and you ought to go 
 out of the Laboratory, unlels the Furnace is in a Chim- 
 ney which has a good Draueht : let the Fire kindle of it 
 lelf, and at length let the Crucible grow cold ; then take 
 out the pieces of Cr^'ltal which lye on the top, and they 
 will have a Ruby color, marked ^^;ith fine Spots ; and 
 tbofe at bottom will have a green Vjixir color. Separate 
 the' other pieces from them which will be of other colors, 
 and polilh them at the Wheel like other Stones : tlicfe 
 beirj: let with Foils in Gold, will be of a very agreea- 
 ble color. 
 
 XXIX. To Calcine Red Cryfial for an extraordinary 
 Frir. 
 
 R' Pock Crylkl, heat it red hot in a Crucible cover- 
 ed dole, then onench it in Water, and reiterate this 8 
 times : dry it -well, and on a Porphyry Stone grind it to 
 an impalpable Pouder: ^ of this Pouder p.ij. Salt of 
 Rochecta p.j. make a Frit as is taught in cap. 2. fefi.S. 
 &c. then put this Frit into a Pot well heated in the 
 Furnace, and when melted, add to it a fit Proportion ot 
 Mangancje prepared by cap. ^.fect. i. afterwards call it 
 into Water to purify, by cap. '^.JeSl- 7,8, 11. and puri- 
 fy it very vcd\ at the Fire before you work it. This Avill 
 lurpals ii] Ecauty all that we have yet fpoken of. 
 
 XXX. T:> 7K,ike R'ick Cryftal of \he Color of a Ruby, 
 Topaz, Opah ^:ui other Gems. 
 
 Take Imall bits o." Rock Cryftal, which put into a 
 Cnicillc, layii .g them S. S. S. (Iractim juper ftrat:*??}^ ^vith 
 this followirg Pouder. f5? Gold colored Orpment., vvhitc 
 j^rfemcky ana ^iv. cnide An-imor.y^ Sal Armoniack^ ana 
 ^i). reduce each apart into Pouder, (&z 3 firit by Levi- 
 gation with Water, tl'C ^alt by beating in a Mortar) 
 dry the former, and mix all well to?eiher. The linall 
 bits of Cryi^al put at but om or tl.cCrticible, the greater 
 at top, cover it witli ai^otuwr Cxuciv.e, iuvii.g a hole 
 
 boicd 
 
 \ 
 
Cbap. 4. Colors to tinge Glafs a^d Cryftd. 747 
 
 bored in its boptom, lute them together, and do in all 
 refpeils as at uB:. 28. aforegoing : be liire that no Air 
 gets in at tl^ Juncture of the Crucibles, for then the 
 Cryttal will break or flaw, and be good for nothing : 
 when cold take the bits out, and Polilli them at the 
 Wheel, fo will they be fair, hard, and like Oriental 
 Stones. 
 
 XXXI. To Work Glafs. 
 
 Your Metal being in Fufion in the Pots, take your 
 hollow blowing Iron, dip it in, and take out what ^^^ou 
 pleafe, (which will be vifcous and clammy) roul it too 
 and fro upon a Marble, the more firmly to unite the 
 parts: blow gently thro' the hollow Iron, which will 
 raifc the Metal as blowing does a Bladder: but when 
 you take in Breath, as you mull often do vv^hen the Vef- 
 fel is large, take care to take the Iron out of your Mouth, 
 for fear of drawing in the heat, and apply the end there- 
 of to your Cheek : after this you mull take the Iron and 
 whirl it feveral times about your Head, to lengthen and 
 cool the Glafs ; and if needful, you mud flat the bot- 
 tom, by prefling it on a Marble : then giving it to ano- 
 ther Work-man, he muft gently break the Collet, or 
 that part of die Glafs which flicks to the blowing Iron, 
 and cafl it by among common Glafs: then this Glals 
 mufl be taken up, by flicking it to another Iron Rod, 
 to hcMt or fcald it at the mouth of the working hole : af- 
 ter which, with a Ponteglo, you mufl make it into fomc 
 form oi' (jjafs : with the Pcjfago you mufl make the Bowl 
 of the Glafs ; and with the Proceilo you muft widen it, 
 and make it more hollow and capacious. 
 
 XXXII. Then making it plain and even withSIiears, 
 cut off what is fuperfluous ; and with blowing, prelfing, 
 fcalding, amplifying and cutting, form it into what 
 iliape you pleafe, putting on Feet or Bottoms when 
 need rer]uires ; and with the Spisi put on Marblings or 
 Ornaments : this don, a Servant takes them away with 
 an Iron Fork, and puts them into a iiiperior Furnace or 
 Oven, to Anneal them, taking Ipecial care not to break 
 thtm, being now very brittle. 
 
 XXXIII. Andas you may thus make all flirts of Vcf- 
 fels and Figures ^vhatfoever of Glafs or Cryflal, io 
 being very tradable or pliable whilft it is hot, you may 
 uioid it, poliih it, adorn it, and joyn it together piece 
 
 ■ ' , by 
 
74^ Polygraphices. Lib. X. 
 
 by p)iccc, and indeed make all forts of Emboffed \Vorks» 
 as if it were in War, and Paint upon it, and Ting it 
 *vith any fort of Color, infomuch thatyoii may imitate 
 all Ibrts of Gems and precious Stones, as in the I'ollow- 
 ing Chapters of this Book, we fhall (hew at large. 
 
 See more Colorings of Glafs and Cryjial wcap.7. feci. 18, 
 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26 ani 27 follordng. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 Of Colors from Leaeh 
 
 I. f^Alcined Lead. 
 
 ^ Put the Lead into a broad Veffel upon a Fire 
 liot enough to melt Glafs, and not hotter, for if it is hot- 
 ter it will not calcine : when it is melted, a yelloivifli 
 Scum will be on the top, which fcrape together with art 
 Iron for that purpofe, always ftirring and fpreading 
 that which is not reduced to Scum : this Scum gatlier to- 
 gether, and put itinoa Furnace moderately hot, to re- 
 verberate it, fpreading it with the Iron, and continual- 
 ly ilirring it, till it becomes yellow ; thenfearce it thro* 
 a' fine Sieve. That which does not go thro', put with o- 
 ther Lead, to calcine afrefh, and be fure the Furnace 
 has a ')U.[\ heat, and be not too hot. ^ This Method will 
 dilpatch a great quantity in a lliort time. 
 
 IL To make Vitrum Saturni, or Glafs of Lead. 
 1^ Calcined Lead tt-xx. Cryftal or Rochetta Frit ( ac- 
 cording to the color you intend) Myxj. mix well, put 
 them into a Poc in a Furnace, and in 10 hours time 
 thev will be well melted: ivhicli done, ca(t all into 
 Water; after nhicli take it out and dry it : if there is a- 
 iiy grains of Lead at bottom, cart them an-ay, tor if 
 they be mixt with the rcll, they will infillibly break the 
 next Pot. The Matter being drycd, put it into the lame 
 Pot again ; let it be in Fulion 6 hours, then you may 
 work it, 
 
 in. Tn mah Vitrum Saturni, another nay. 
 
 them 
 
 Vi Calcined Lead ii;. parts, tmc Sand j part ; make 
 cm Uiio Gl;^.'^ ';>} a Furnace: aUb I)i calcined Li- 
 
 tharge 
 
Chap. 5. Of Colors from Lead. 749 
 
 tharge iij. parts, calcined Flint ;. part j melt and vi- 
 trify. 
 
 IV. An6ther way to male Vitrum Saturni. 
 
 R Red Lead itxv^ Cryftal Frit or common Frit Ifcxij. 
 mix well, and put them into a ftrong Crucible with a 
 ftrong bottom, which put into two other Crucibles of 
 like (trength ; and \\\i\\ a Fire of SupprelFion melt them 
 together, " the Matter will pafs thro' the iirfl and fecond 
 Crucible, and in the thiai you will find the Glafs of 
 Lead defired. 
 
 V. Another veay. 
 
 Bi Ailnium itxx. fine Sand, S^lt of PuhertnCj and'h-^. 
 mix well, ajid put them into a ftrong fingle Crucible, 
 in a Fire of SupprcfHon ^ {0 will you have good f^umm 
 SatMrni. It i? (aid, that Glafs or Lead, being infuied 
 in WinCj will work 4, 5 or 6 times excellently per fe- 
 fejfam. 
 
 VI. ToWrhGUfsofLead. 
 
 Take the Work-man's hollow Iron he ufes to take the 
 Metal out of the Pots with, and the l^'uram Saturni be- 
 ing in Fufion, let it cool a little : then put in the twX 
 of the hollow Iron, and take out what quantity of the 
 Metal you pleale, (which will be clammy or vifcous:) 
 this you muft roul too and fro upon a Marble, the more 
 firmly to unite the parts ; and work it as we havedirecfted 
 in cap. ^. Jeti. 31, 32. But you are to noie, tliat ihe 
 Marble ought to be a very hard one, and made very 
 clean when you ulc it, and while the Glafs is cooling, 
 you muft wet the Marble with cool Water, otherwife the 
 Glafs would fcale it, and the Marble would ftickto itj 
 but if the Marble is hard, this is m.uch lefs to be fe:vred; 
 
 .VI I. To »?^/('f prjEcipitatus Saturni^ 
 
 ■R Litharge in fine Pouder inmalpable q. f. put in a . 
 glazed Earthen Vcflel over a ftill Fire : add to it difitlled 
 Vinegar, fo much as to over-top it 4 inches : mix ^ycll, 
 and let them fettle, till the Vinegar becomes of a Milk 
 color: decant it gently, and aftule frellidiftilled,Vi;ie- 
 gar, continuing this work till it yields no more White- 
 nefs : put all thefe Decantiugs together into a gla- 
 zed Earthen Veffcl, and let it ftand till tht Lead 
 prascipitates to the bottom : decant oft* the clear Vi- 
 negar ; and the Milk-colored Sediment is that which 
 is Prxch'u^itm Saturni, If it does not precipitate 
 
 J^i£ welh 
 
7^0 Pofy^a^hiees. Lib. X. 
 
 well, fo ^5 to leave the Vinegar very clear, put into k 
 feme cold Water : if that does not do, but the Vinegat 
 isftill muddy, fet all the Water awd Vinegar over a gen- 
 tle Fire, and evaporate to drynefs : £b will the ipiritous 
 parts of the Vinegar be left in the Sediment, which keep 
 ^vith the rtft ot the Pracipitartes Saturni for ufe. 
 
 VIII. This is faid to be a noble Preparation o{ Satwn, 
 and tho'it is not properly the Spirit, yet it is that which 
 contains the Spirit, and is exceeding ufetiil for Glafa 
 Works : but it is there propoled as a thing proper for 
 making red Enamel, and is that which does very nobly 
 heighten and improve that kind of Work. 
 
 IX. As for Gl(i(s of LcAiij it is without doubt the fair- 
 eliand noblcltGlais of any other; for that thereby you 
 may imitate all the colors of Oriental precious Stones: 
 but if yoti work it not -with care, no Pots nor Crucibles 
 will hold it, ior that it will crack them, and let it run 
 6ut. In making it, you mult always drop the Glafs in- 
 to Water wlien it is jrieitcd, for the lea ft live Lead re- 
 maining in it, eats out the botto;ns of your Pots, and 
 fo makes you loofe yoiu- Matter. 
 
 X. To mah Glajlif Lcad^ of n fair EnieraUi Color. 
 , E? Cr^-flal Frit j-)ciidred and fcar'ced itxx. Calx of Lea.l 
 fifted itXTJ. mix w^ll ; put them into a Pot heated in 
 the Fnrnace, and in 8 or lo hours it Avill be melted : 
 Gift it into Water, and caretliUy take the remaining 
 Lead from it : the Matter thy, and put into the lame 
 Pot ap,am) and in 7 or S hours it will be melted ; rcitc- 
 late thiscalting of the melted Mais into Water, .-ind le- 
 parating the Lead, that the Glals may be cleanlcd from 
 all Fouinefs, and becoine very relpiendent. Put it again 
 into she Pot, aiid let it melt and purify again: when 
 melted, put to it thrice cal :ir.cd Scales of Copper in fine 
 Poudcr^vi. Crociu Aian!Vm:\Az\Y\i\\ Vinegar m Ponder 
 gr. Jtxiv. mixt together. Pat in this Poadcr at 6 times, 
 always mixing well, letting almolt a minutes fpace be 
 between Kich time : let it rat an hour, and itir it again^ 
 and lee if the color picatcs ; if ^o^ let it Itand 8 hours in 
 Fufion, that all mny be well incorporated : Itir again 
 T^^cll, and let it reli a whilc^ that tlk Frees (if any) 
 inay prsEcipitatc, and lb work it. It is-fcaxccly to bo 
 tHftuiguiliicdfrom a true EiKeiuid. 
 
 XI. A\ 
 
Chap. 5. of Color 5 from Lead. 751 
 
 XI. A more gldriofn Emerald Color. 
 
 To do this, you mull change one Ingredient of the 
 former Sedlion ; and inftead ot~ thrice calcined Scales of 
 Copper, you mull put the fame quantity of the C<ip>i!: 
 MortHHm Vitrioli Venerii j and then proceed exadlly as 
 in tfee former ; lb ^vi! I it be an exquifite Emerald Grdeft. 
 
 XII. A Golden Color. 
 
 R Good Crydal Frit in Pouder, Calx Satftrni in Pou- 
 der, anf. il-^n. Capper Scales thrice calcined in Ponder 
 §vj. Crociii Mams made with Vinegar gr. xlviii. mix 
 well, and put all into a Pot heated in a Furnace : after 
 12 hours caft the Mafs into Water; feparate the Lead, 
 and put the Mafs again into the fame Pot, and purify 
 it for 1 2 hours more ; then (Hr it well, and lee if the co- 
 lor plealcs : if it chances to be greenifh, add to it more 
 Crociu Afdr.is^ and the (jteennefs will vanilli ; fo will 
 you have a noble Gold color, which will be as fine here, 
 as it will be in CryrtaJ. 
 
 XIII. A G'-dnat Color in Vitro Satnrni. 
 
 1^ Crylial Frit il'XX. Calx of Lead ittvj. Piedmont 
 ■Mangdnejc prepared ^iij. Za^er prepared ^fs. mix all 
 well, and put it into a Pot heated in the Furnace : after 
 1 2 hours cali the melted Mafs into fair Water, and fe- 
 parate the Lead : put the Matter again into the fame 
 Pot, and let it purify for 10 hours : mix well with the 
 Iron, and let the Fsces precipitate \ if the color pleaies, 
 then work it. 
 
 XIV. A Saphir Color in GUpof Uad. 
 
 Vi Cryttal Frit in Pouder itxv. Calx of Lead fceifced 
 ifexij. Zajfer prepared |ij. A4anganeje prepared gr. xxivo 
 mix well, and perform the Operation exactly as the for- 
 mer, and the colot will be like the true Oriental S^phir ; 
 then work it. 
 
 XV. A Topaz. C(dor in Glaji of Lead. 
 
 Vi. CryRal Frit in Pouder itxv. Calx Saturrii in Pou- 
 der Ifcx. learce fine, mix them well, and put them into 
 a Pot hot in the Furnace ; melt and keep them in Fufi- 
 on 8 hours ; C2.il the Mafs into Water, Icparate the Lead, 
 if any, and put the Matter again into the Pot to be melt-* 
 ed, and caft it by Intervals into the Water : add to this 
 Mafs half its weight of Golden-colored Glafs ■At feci. 12. 
 above, incorporate, purify well, and ydu will, have 
 Glafs of an Oriental Topaz color fit to be wrduglit. No^, 
 
 Fff 2 i 
 
75^ Poiygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 a Topaz, is a lighter color than an Emerald, wliicli ca(h 
 Ray? of a GoKien color. 
 
 XYI. ^ Sky or Sea Green in Glafi of Lead. 
 
 1^ Cr\ftal Frit ftxvf. Calx Saturni ifcx. mix well, and 
 put them into a Pot gently heated in a Furnace, and in 
 1 2 hours they will be in good Fufion : ca(t the Mafs in- 
 to Water, feparate the Lead, and put it again into the 
 Pot to melt : after 8 hours caft it again into Water j fe- 
 parate the Lead again, and it will be well purified : put 
 it again to melt in the fame Pot, and when it is well 
 melted, caft in at fourdilVmcl times, §iv. of fmall Cop- 
 per Leaves prepared as in cap. 7. Z>.iffer prepared ^li- thele 
 two being firlt mixed together, (tirring the Mafs each 
 time : 2 hours after Hir all well again with an Iron Rod, 
 and try if the color is good : then let it ftand 10 hours 
 to punfy, and to incorporate, that the colors may be 
 perfe6t : let it reft a while to fettle, and it will be ht to 
 work. 
 
 XVII. To make Sulphur Saturni. 
 
 Bt Ctr'^fe or white Lead ground impalpable, aflftife 
 thereon diftilled Vinegar enough to make it fiipernate 4 
 inches ; but aftufe it gently till all the Violence is gone : 
 digcft it on a Sand Furnace, to evaporate an eighth part 
 away: let it cool, decant the remainder, which will be 
 well colored and full of Salt: on the remaining Cerufe 
 aftiife frclli dillillcd Vinegar, digeft, evaporate and de- 
 cant as before: and reiterate this Work wichfrelh Vine- 
 gar, til no more Tindh-ire orSweetnefs arife. Put all 
 thele tinged Vinegars together, filter, and then over a 
 gentle Fire evaporate to drynefs ; fo will you have at bot- 
 tom a white S.-iccharam Saturni. Take a Glafs Matrals 
 well luted to the middle of the Body, put into it your 
 S.iccluu-!iWy and digeft it in a gentle S:in.l heat for 24 
 hours, covering it with Sand up to tlic Neck, digeft till 
 it is as red as Cinnabar, and grmd it on a fine Marble; 
 if it is only yellow, you muft digeil it 2^ hours longer, 
 but with inch a heat as it may v.ol n-.elt, for then it is 
 fpoikd : being pertedly Red, and Levigated, put it a- 
 gain into a Glals Cucurbit ; aftiile thereon dilHUed Vi- 
 negar, as before; and when deeply tinged, decant and 
 affidcfrelh Vinegar, and contiiiue this Work till all the 
 Salt is dilfolved, and the F^ces ieparated. Put all thcfe 
 [lindlures into Glafs VelVels, and let them Ibnd to fettle ; 
 
 decant 
 
Chap. 5. Of Colors from Lead, 755 
 
 decant the clear and filter. Put this filtred Liquor into 
 a Giafs body, evaporate, and you will have at bottom 
 a very white Sacchanm. This Sacchamm being very dry, 
 dilfolvc in common fair Water, let it (tand 6 days, that 
 the Fsces may precipitate. This Water filter, and eva- 
 porate in aGlaisbody to drynefs over a gentle heat; fo 
 will you have a Salt as white as Snow, andfiveet as Su- 
 gar. Repeat this Work of diilolving in Water, filtering 
 and evaporating for three times ,• after which take the 
 S.Kch.'^rum Saturni, put it into a Glafs body in a Sand 
 Furnace over a gentle heat, where digeft for feveral days, 
 fo will it become red as the fineft Cinnabar, arid give a 
 Calx finer than white Starch_, w^hich is Sulphur Saturni. 
 Ifaac Holland us. 
 
 XVIII. This Sulphur (which is perfe6lly fine) is to be 
 ufed ini\Qa.doL Minium, for making Palts ^otChynfoliteSy 
 Emeralds, Granats, Saphirs, Topaz,es, Blevps, and other 
 colors ; and it is to be ufed in the fame Proportion as we 
 ^hail hereafter limit, obferving what is faid concerning 
 Baking in cap. 13. jeEi. i. following. The Palts made 
 w'i\hx[m Sulphur, will not have that Greafe and Yellow- 
 nefs, nor be (o apt to be affeded by the Breath as others : 
 but you wall lave Stones of differing colors, fair as the 
 Natural ones, and not eafy to be diitinguilhed from 
 them. 
 
 XIX. To male very hard Pajh with Sulphur Saturni. 
 
 13i Rock Crylial prepared ifcx. Salt of ^oiT/W^j purified 
 and fcarced it.vj. Sulphur Saturni Itij. mix all well, put 
 them mto an Earthen glazed Pan ; put on them a little 
 fiuv Water, to make all into a Mafs fomething hard : 
 diviJ.ethe whole into Lumps of three ounces, making a 
 hole in the middle, the better to dry them in the Sun : 
 being dryed, put them into an Earthen Pot well luted, 
 and calcine in a Potters Furnace : then beat and grind 
 the Matter well on a Marble, and fearce thro' a fine 
 Sieve. Put this Ponder into a Glafs Furnace to melt, 
 purify it for 3 days, then call: the Mafs into Water, dry- 
 it, and put it into the Furnace again to melt, and pu- 
 rify for 1 5 days, that it may be without Spot, and it be- 
 comes of the color of fine Cryital. 
 
 XX. This cryrtaline Matter may be tinged of feveral 
 colors, as of an Emerald with treble calcmed Copper: 
 ot a Topa^y with prepared Zajfer, &c. as we hereafter 
 
 F f f 3 teach. 
 
754 Pplygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 teach. In this cafe,"yoij mui\ put into the Furnace as 
 many Pots as vou deri,2;n to make diiitrent colors, witii 
 the fbriTier crylV^line Matter, add'n? to it in due pro- 
 portion the tin2;ing Materials ; fo will you have Stones 
 of fiiKT and more glorious colors t!;an rhoic which arc 
 truly Natural, and coining nearly to tlis-ir hardneis, but 
 efpecially in that of the Emerald. 
 XXI. To miike S icurnus Dcpuratus. 
 R Good Lytharge or Venice Cerule q- y. levigate it, 
 and put it into a gvcat Glals Cticurbit, atti-ifc thereon di- 
 ftilled Vinegar, to over-top it 4 inches : digeft on a gen- 
 tle Alli or Sand heat, till the Vinegar is well colored 
 and impregnated ; decant, and continue this Work till 
 the Matter will yield no more Tindture. Take all this 
 tinged Vinegar and re6iiry it 4 times on Tartar calcined 
 towhiteneis: filter it, put it into a Glals Cucurbit, and 
 on an \fli or Sand heat gently evaporate to dryneis, till 
 itisjuil skin'dover: then putting the Vclfel into a cold. 
 
 Elace, covering it, let it llioot into Cryllals, which will 
 e pure and fufible : take them out of the Veffel with 
 a Skimmer full of holes : the remaining Liquor evaporate 
 again till it is skinn'd over, and cryilalize as before : 
 thcfe Cryftals dry well, reduce them into lubtii Pouder, 
 and keep them in a Glafs dole (iopt for ule : of tliis you 
 oughtto make loor 12 poimds at a time, for it is of no 
 leis ettcem for making Palts for Gems, than the Sulphur 
 SaturKt. 
 
 XXII. To make Pa-ic of Saturnus Dcpuratus. 
 B» Tranfparent Flints calcined, or Rock Cryftal pre- 
 pared, S.tcHrnh'i Depiiratu^^ ana Ibx. each in fine Ponder 
 mixt well together : put the Mafs into a Pot in a Glats- 
 houlc Furnace, to melt and purify 3 days: then calt it 
 into a Wooden Velfcl full 0^ cold Water : dry it, put it 
 into the lame Pot in the Furnace, to melt and purify a- 
 ^ain; take out the Pot, and when cold, make it into an 
 ynp ilpable Pouder on a Miirblc, and keep it in a Glals 
 %vell iiopt, to lerve for a Balis^ of which to make all 
 ibrts of Artificial Gem?, as we iFiall hereafter teacl«i. 
 XXill. To wrt/-f r^/^w Fvocaillc. 
 U; A-i.nhir?': IhJ. fine white Sand ibiii. mix and beat 
 tJhem to;!.ether very vv^cll in a Mortar ; put all into a 
 firong Crucible covered and luted: being dry, putitiii- 
 10 a Wmd or Glals Houfe Fiunacc, where the Fire is vi- 
 olent. 
 
Chap. 6. of Colors from Iron. 755 
 
 knt, to reduce the Matter into Glafs, which m^ke up 
 into Grains or Beads as you pleafe. 
 XXIV. To wake Green Rocailie. 
 Bi Mmwrn ft;, fine white Sand itii;. in melt 
 ing, it will be very firm, Avill alter its color, anct 
 become a pale red, and fo change again. OFthefe jRo~ 
 cailles they make the Beads and Bracelets which they 
 carry to America., and fell to the Indians, and may 
 be made into all forts of colors : it cannot be prepared 
 without red Lead, but it is full of Impurity. We fre- 
 fluently ufe it in Painting on Enamel and Glafs, thp' 
 it is ill qualified and full of impure Lead, yea, even that 
 which is moft clear and tranfparf at. But to fuch as 
 work in Enamel, I think the cry(ialine Matter made of 
 St^tHrnm Depurate, is mucii better than this. 
 
 CHAP. vr. 
 
 ^ of Colors from Iron. 
 
 1. '^i^AtHral Ferretto. 
 
 -*-^ The Name comes from the Italians and Spani- 
 Ards, as Cccjalpinus lib. i^.cap. 5. fiith : and it is fo called 
 becaufe it is found in Iron Mines: fbme of it is black 
 like Iron: but the bed is red, being beaten, and almolt 
 like Cinnabar when well calcined: Fomem in Hift. lib. 
 
 2. cap. 18. fays it is the Lap^ Hematites., and that this 
 Stone is that which we call Ferretto of Spain : it is of a 
 reddidi color, hard, weighty, and pointed waih long 
 i"harp Points. Pliny lib. 26. cap. 20. makes mention of 
 five kinds of Hematites or Blood-ibnes, and tliat they 
 have a Magnetick Virtue in attradiing feveral forts of 
 Metals to them. There are indeed no Iron Mines in 
 which it is not found. 
 
 II. To make Ferretto of Spain. 
 1^ Clean Filings of Iron and Sulphur in Ponder, lay 
 them S.S.S. firatam faper firatam in a Crucible, begin- 
 ning and ending with the Sulphur j after which cover 
 the Crucible with another, or w^ith a Tile : lute it clofe, 
 and let it (being dry) in a Furnace with Coals rwnd it, 
 
 Fff4 for 
 
ntS Polygrtfhices, Lib. X. 
 
 for 6 hours, cncreafinp the Fire everv 2 hour? : let the Fire 
 or Coals be 6 inches trom the Crucible the firlt 2 hours; 
 3 inches the fccond 2 hours, aini let them be covered all 
 over the lalt 2 hours : then the Matter being cold, beat 
 it into fine Pouder, and keep it for ufe. It is called 
 Ferreito of Spmn^ becauie the molt we ufe comes from 
 thence : formerly it came from Afcfrplm in E^ypt and 
 Cypns, now not. Neri and Merret uie only Copper or 
 Brafs to make it of, but true F^rrr^ff/e cannot be made 
 witho'it Iron, and that from Iron is finer, redder, and 
 more pure. 
 
 III. yi not her vray to w^^f Ferretto of Spain. 
 
 B? Fine Steel, (for in that con hits the Pcrfed^ion of the 
 Work) make ic into tliin Plates, or file it: do the fame 
 alfo with Copper or Brafs: 5^ of Steel Filings p. ii. Cop- 
 per or Brafs Filings p. i. put them into a Crucible S.S.S. 
 lute them, and put them on a gentle Fire for 8 hours ; 
 then take it out, and melt the whole in a Wind Fur- 
 nace ; after call it into an Ingot, or make it into Plates, 
 and it is done. To ufe this in Glafs, you mult calcine 
 thefe Plates, beat them mto fine Pouder, and fearce it, 
 and fo keep it for Ufe. All thefe Ferreito s arc of won- 
 derful Ufe for tinging and coloring Partes, Gems, Ena- 
 mel and Glafs. 
 
 IV. Another Fcrretto. 
 
 1^ Copper or Bnfs Plates in bits, put them into a 
 Crucible upon a bed of Sulphur, and lay them and Sul- 
 phur S.S.S. till the Pot is full ; cover it with another, or 
 with a Tile, lute it well, dry it, and put it into a brisk 
 Fire for 2 hours, to calcine : being cold, it will be black 
 and crumble ; beat it into fine Pouder, fearce it, and 
 keep it for Ufe. It is of vail Ufe to give hw^ colors in 
 Glafs ofLe^d; but mixt with convenient quantities of 
 Ferretto made of Iron only, it caufes a vait variety of 
 beauiirlil Appearances. 
 
 V. AftO'her Ferretto. 
 
 Vf Bits of thin Plates of Copper or Brafs, Coppcrafs 
 or Vitriol in PouJer, ana q.f. put them in a Cmcil.ilc, 
 laying thon S.S.S. and a bed of Copperas at bottom 
 and on the lop ; and perform the Calcination exactly, 
 as m the hi(t Section, in 3 days times : take out the Cru- 
 cible and the bi^s that arc hi it; and with frelh Coppe- 
 fHS put them in again S.S.S. and reverberate as before: 
 
 this 
 
Ghap. 6. Of Colors from Iron, 757 
 
 this do for 6 times r fo w\\\ you have an excellent Fer- 
 rettOy which beat into Pouder will tinge GJafs and 
 Gems into extraordinary beautiful colors. 
 
 VI. To mah Crocus Martis. 
 
 .5i Pure fine Filings oFTronorStee!, which are better, 
 p.j. Sulphur in Pouder p.iij. put them into a CrtTcible 
 upon a bed of Sulphur, 5".^. 5". calcine with a very ftro.ig 
 Fircifor 4 hours : take o:.)t the Crucible, let the Mrurer 
 cooK grind and fearce it thro' a line Sieve: put the Pou- 
 der into a Crucible, lute it well, and put it into a Re- 
 verberatory for 1 5 days or more; and from a reddiili 
 color, it wiI\become a verv deep red, almolt p. r^l.; 
 keep it in a ^:lofe VeiTel f^r Ule. It gives 1 r'.d color 
 more or lefs bright, and may be mixed with Tiridures of 
 other Metals. 
 
 VII. yinothr Crocus Martis. 
 
 Bi Filings of Iron or Steel, put them into Earthen 
 Pans ; fprinkle them with ftrong Vinegar, lb as to make 
 them throughly wet ; fet them in the Sun or open Air 
 to dry; {)ouder them, and fprinkle in like manner a- 
 ^ain, drying as before. This Work of fprinkling, dry- 
 ing and. poudering repeat 8 times ; then pouder, grind 
 fear(^, and keep it for Ufe. This tinges Glals, &c. of 
 a true Blood red color, and complies very much with 
 Greens and the Emerald Glafs of Lead ; and is ufcd in 
 Partes for the lame color with Verdigrifc, ?nd in 
 Blacks. 
 
 VIII. Another Crocus Martis. 
 
 5j a Bar of Iron or Steel, give it as red hot a heat as 
 you can j and having a long large Stick of Brimttone, 
 put the end of the one to the end of the other, over a 
 great Pan full of Water, fo will the Metal fill down in 
 grandi or little drops, melting like Wax; take thefe 
 Grams dry, and with Pouder of Sulphur, put them in 
 a Crucible S.S.S. put them into a Reverberatory to be 
 calcined to a red Pouder j which grind, fearce, and 
 keep for Ufe. 
 
 IX. Another Crocus Martis. 
 
 1^ Fihngsof Iron or Steel, put them into glazed Ear- 
 then Pans; fprinkle them y^'ixh A qna fort is," ittthtm. to 
 dry in the Sun, and reduce them into Pouder • repeat 
 this Work leveral times, as before, in the Vinegar : 
 wnen you fee the color very good and red;, pouder, fearct 
 
 it. 
 
75^ ?ij//^M/>^/Ve/. Lib. X. 
 
 it, and keep it Fci Ule. This makes ths red color of the 
 Iron yet more raanifelt in Glals, even 16 rcfplcndcnt 
 and bright a^lcems almortincredible. 
 
 X. ^-/«or/j«- Crocus Martis. 
 
 1^ Filings of IrojMir Steel, put them into a Glafs Bo- 
 dy well kited; ?.^nihthtxconyiqffa Regal !Sy and difToU'e : 
 keep them fo 5 days, (tirring theni every day well ; du- 
 ring which, add frcih FiUngs by little and little ; indo- 
 irig which, be very cautious, for the Fermentation will 
 :ncike it rife lb much as to endanger breaking the GLifs 
 or running over : digell 3 days, then putting the Cu- 
 curbit on a gentle Fire, evaporate to dr;^ eis. This is 
 admirable tor tinging Glafs, and is the pdt of all, it 
 yielding more Divcrfity of Colors than aU the others. 
 
 XI. Another Crocus Martis. 
 
 Bi Filings of Iron or Steel, reverberate them vvith a 
 very ftrong Fire of the 4th degree, till the color becomes 
 purple : then take it out, and being cold, put it into a 
 Vcifel full of Water, IVir it ftrongly about, and then 
 ■prefently decant the Water into another Veflel, and re- 
 iterate the walliing ; fo will the Iron not yet calcined, 
 remain in the mil Velfcl ; this reverberate again, to a 
 purple color, and walh as before, prelently decanting 
 the troubled Water. Thefc Wavers mix all together, 
 and evaporate to drynefs; li") will you have a very red 
 and very fine Pouder, of no lefs Virtue and Beauty than 
 the former, which keep for life. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of Colors from Copper or Brafs. 
 
 J. ^O Calcine Copper to vf^de Vitriol of Venus. 
 
 -■- 1^ Thin Leaves of pure K<?ww, put them into 
 Crucibles with common Sulphur in Pouder S-S.S. cover 
 aiid lute well the Crucibles, and being dry, put them 
 into a Rcverbcnitory Furn;icc with a gooA Charcoal Fire 
 Vor 2 hours : let them liard and cool, and you'll find 
 the yenns blackiHi, enclining to a deep purple :_ pouder 
 and fearcc it. Ct of tliis Pouder ifcij. Sulphur in Pou- 
 der 
 
iCh^p. 7* ^[Colors from Copper or Brafs, 75^ 
 
 der ^xij. mix, and put them into a flat-bottom'd Ear- 
 then Pot, ftrong enough to endure tlie Fire : lay upon 
 the Furnace a ftrong Earthen Dilli, fill it with through- 
 ly kindled Charcoal, and place the Pot, having the 
 Pouder in it, thereon : as it grows hot, and the Sulphur 
 takes Fire, ftir it with a long Iron Hook, that it may not 
 ilick to the Pot : continue this till all the Sulphur is con- 
 iiuned and fmoaks no more. Take the Pot off the Fire, 
 and take the Copper out with an Iron Ladle : beat it 
 well in a Brals Mortar, and fearce it finely, fo have you 
 a blackilli Pouder : reiterate this Calcination thrice with 
 like Proportions of Sulphur, and the third time let the 
 Copper remain till it becomes red and yellow : take it 
 ofi", beat ic in a Brais Mortar to Pouder, and fearce it, 
 beating and fearcing until all is gone thro' the Sieve ; {o 
 |iav€ you a well-colored Calx of Venus, which keep for 
 Life. 
 
 II. To male the TinHare of Venus. 
 Take Glafs Cucurbits as many as you pleafe, put ixi- 
 to them your Calx 5 and to ifc). of Calx oi Venns put 
 Water Itvj. digell in a gentle Sand heat for 4 hours, e- 
 v^aporating a third of the Water : let it cool, and decant 
 the clear Water into another Veffel : dry the Sediment 
 in a Cmcible on the Furnace ,• and let the Wat:^ fettle 
 for 2 days, and very fmall Grains of Copper, of a blacl^- 
 iili color, will fall to the bottom: filtrate the Water, 
 and gather the Grains to add to the former Sediment. 
 Take all thefe Sediments, and to every pound add Pou- 
 der of Sulphur ^vj. and calcine it thrice, as exa6lly as 
 we have taught in the former Sedlion. To it;, of this 
 Pouder put Water itvj. and extract the Tin6lure exa6tly 
 as is juli: now before declared ; which decant and referve 
 with the former. Gather the Sediments and Grains 
 which remain, and repeat the Calcination thrice in the 
 lame manner, and with the fame quantity of Sulphur: 
 which done, extract the Tincture in the lame manner 
 before declared, vvrith fair Water, adding it to the for- 
 mer Extradlions : all this whole Work repeat 6 times, 
 lb will the Copper or Sediments remauiing in the bot- 
 tom, l3ecome a loft impure Earth, deprived of all its 
 Blewnefs or TinCkue, and fit for no Llie in our way, 
 the chief Virtue of the Copper being now contained ia 
 the Water or Tin^iure. 
 
 III. n 
 
y6o Polygraphices. Lib. X. 
 
 III. To male the P^i trial of Venus. 
 
 Put all your former Tin<fturc into a lo-w Glafs Cucuf' 
 bit, which put into a gentle Afh or Sand heat ; let the 
 Gourd hold about 2 qairts, and put inio it about 5 
 pints of your TinClure, to evaporate gently: the rc{t of 
 the Tinclure put into Ghi's Bottles, Avhich fet round the 
 Furnace, to warm the Tindhire ; and at let liincs, as 
 you fee the Humidity to evaporate out of the Gourd, fill 
 It again out of the Bottles : evaporate i^x of this Tin- 
 chireto ibiifs. or li/ni. at moft : then decant it into 2 or 
 3 glazed Earthen Pots, and fet it into a cold moill place 
 to cryttalize; lo will the Crylfals or Vitriol (lioot to the 
 bottom and fides, and Ifick there like little long Iceicles, 
 having the tnie color of an Oriental Emerald : pour the 
 remaining Water or Tinclure into the Cucurbit, and e- 
 vaporate again to one half, and cryibhze as before: and 
 thus continue to evaporate and cryltalize, till you have 
 obtained all the Vitriol : thefe Cryflals or Vitriol gather 
 and dry, that it may not itick, and keep it in a Vcifei 
 clofe Hopt. Its Excellencies are admirable, not only in 
 the Art of Glafs, and in Mctalick Works, but in Phy- 
 fick alfo. 
 
 IV. To ExtraEi the Spiru of this Fit r hi. 
 
 R Of the former Vitriol ihj. put it into a Glafs Re- 
 tort well luted, which being dry, fet it m a Sand Fur- 
 nace, with a very large Receiver : kindle the Fire, let it 
 be gentle for 4 hours, left by the Impctuofity of the Spi- 
 rits corning forth, the Receiver lliould break, when the 
 Spirits alcend in white Clouds, encreafethe Fire gradu- 
 ally, fill the Receiver clears again and cools, and all 
 the Spirit comes together. Then let the Fire go out of it 
 fclf, and after 24 hours unlutc the Jovnt?, take away the 
 Receiver, and put the Lujuor into Glafs Bottle?, which 
 itop dole with Glafs Stopples. This lubtil Spirit con- 
 tains a noble Blew, and affords wonderful Tinchires, 
 having uielfimable Operations, as well as furprizing 
 Effect in Phylick, whole excellent Qualities ought not 
 tobeexpofcd to the Ravage of propliane Hands. 
 
 V. To [ep^'irute the Caput Mortuum. 
 
 Take what is lelt in the bottom of the Retort after the 
 Diitillation or' the former Sjtirit, by breaking the Retort: 
 then reduce it to a fine Ponder, with a mixture of Z^f- 
 fer prcpared,(to i\jis. of itadd|iv.ofZ.?/frJ and keep it 
 
 for 
 
Chap 7. 0/ Colors from Copper or Brafs. j6 1 
 
 for Ufe, viz,, to tinge Cryftal Frit of an admirable Sea 
 green color. This is an admirable Mixture beyond Com- 
 parifon, and is what is made ufe of to give this fine 
 Water color, or Egmarine on Glafs and Cryttal, not to 
 be equalled by any other Compofition whatfoever. 
 
 VI. yi Sea-Green far finer than any other. 
 
 "Ri Of the former Caput Mortnum Ifciij. Z offer prepared 
 |viij, mix them, a'ld put it into a Pot filled with Cry- 
 ital Metal very fine, and well purified from its Salt: 
 ftir the whole well with the Glals for the Ipace of 2 
 hours, atter which try the color; if too pale, put in more' 
 oF the Mixture : v/hen it is well, let it (find or reft 24 
 iiours : Itir the whole again, that the color may be well 
 incorporated, and then it may be wrotight. It will be 
 an extraordinary and beautiful Sea-green. 
 
 VII. Another way toCahine Copper or BraJ?. 
 
 Bi That kind oi Brafs made into thin Leaves, which 
 is almoii of the color of Gold, and maybe dipt with a 
 fmallfine pair orSilfars; which Brafs Leaves are called 
 Fcjloons : cut them into fittle pieces, put them into a 
 Crucible, which cover and lute over ; and being dry, 
 put it into the mouth of a Reverberatory to calcine for 
 4 or 5 days, lo that the Leaves may not melt, for then 
 they would be fpoiled : l3eat them on a Porphyry, and 
 fearce them thro' a fine Sieve ; fo will you have a black- 
 ilh Ponder : fpread it on Tiles, and put them into tlie 
 fame Furnace for 4 days longer : take it out, blow off 
 the Allies, pouder and fearce it again, and keep it for 
 Ufe. IF It IS well calcined, and as it ought to be, ic 
 'will, Avhen put into the Glafs, make it fwell ; if it does 
 not, you muil calcine other Leaves, this being worth 
 nothing. This gives a fine Blew. 
 
 VIII. Another way. 
 
 iii The fame Leaves as the former cut fmall, put them 
 into a Crucible with Sulphur in Pouder S. S.S. put it on 
 live Coals (beingfiri-1 covered and luted) at the mouth of 
 the Furnace, to calcine for 24 hours : then take out, and 
 put it into an Earthen Pan in a Reverberatory for 1 1 
 hours : take it out, pouder, and keep it for Ufe. This 
 makes a tranlparent Red, Yellow and Chalcedony. 
 
 IX. A fourth way to Calcine Copper. 
 
 Bi Copper in thin Plates, and in bits, put it into a 
 ^reat Crucible, and keep it in the Furnace till it is cal- 
 cined, 
 
7^2 Poly^dphices. Lib. X. 
 
 eincd, without meltinj^: reduce it to Pouder, which 
 win be very ral ; fcarcc it, and keep it for Ufe. It is afn 
 admirable thing for coloring Glafs. 
 
 X. The treble Calcination of Copper. 
 
 TJi Of the red Pouder in the former Se6l"tbn, put it ort 
 Tiles, and calcine again for 4 days; lb will it be black, 
 and coagulated into a Mafs: pouder and feaice it, ancf 
 in the lame Furnace calcine again for 5 or 6 days, and 
 it will become grey without coagulating. With this 
 Pouder you rnay make Sky-colored blew, Turcois color, 
 a green Emerald, and divers other colors; if it be cal- 
 cined above thrice, it will not color Glals ; and you may 
 know when it is well calcined, by putting Ibme of it 
 into a Pot of boiling Glafs ; if it unakcs the Glafs fwcll, 
 it is right; if not, it muft be calcined 24 hours longer; 
 othervvile you muft begin a new Procefs. 
 
 XI. Another treble Calcination of Copper. 
 
 R Scales of Brafs, wal"h them clean and dry them, 
 put them into one or more Crucibles, let them juft in 
 the mouth of the Revcrberatory for 4 days, then grind 
 and fearce ; put this Pouder into the Furnace to reverbe- 
 rate for 4 days longer, and it will be in little Balls of a 
 black color: pouder and fearce again. Then put this 
 Pouder once more into the Revcrberatory for 4 days more : 
 pouder, fearce, and keep it forlile. You may know if 
 it is well done, by making Tryal. 
 
 XII. Another Calcination called .'Es Uftum. 
 
 R Bits or tliin Leaves of Copper ijsv. Sulphur in 
 Pouder |x. Sea Salt in fine Pouder 5v. fill the Crucible 
 S. S. S. put it in a Furnace of live Coals, and leave it till 
 the Sulphur is wholly confumed : take it out, and it 
 will be of an Iron grey, but reddilh within; it gives a 
 noble fine Tindlure. 
 
 XIII. Another Es Uftum. 
 
 ]3j Thin Platesof the reddert Copper, (the Rofc Cop- 
 per) make it red hot, and extingui'.h it in Urine, rn 
 wbich common Salt has been dilfolved : reiterate this 
 Work till it becomes of the color of Gold both within 
 and without : after which cement thole places with this 
 Pouder. \k Sulphur 3hij. Saltpetre itij. Vitriol calcined 
 torednefs it.;, make all into a Pouder. Put the Plates 
 with the Pouder into a Crucible S^S.S. cover it with a- 
 nothcr Crucible, having a hole in its bottom ; lute them 
 
 together. 
 
C^ap. 7. Of Colors frmn Cffpper or Brafs. j6 5 
 
 together, and bein^ dry, put them into a cifculatory 
 Fire (having hot Embers underneath) for 6 hours : the 
 firft 2 hours, let the Fiie be a foot dillant from the Cru- 
 dbk ; the fecond 2 hours, let it be but half a foot from 
 the Crucible ^ and thelalt 2 hours, let it be dole to, co- 
 vering the Crucible. Have a care that the Fire is not 
 too great, that the Matter may not melt, for tliCn it is. 
 fpoilfd. Being cold, beat it into fine Pouder, walli it, 
 di^r it, and keep it for Life. 
 
 XIV. Tt^ w^f Crocus Veneris. 
 
 Bi Of the former zy£s U?jfw, choice Verdigrife, fixt 
 fuHlSal Armoniack, ana q.v. beatall well together, dry 
 them over the Fire in a Frying-pan, aid Urine, ana 
 make all boil till the Urine is coniiimed, which repeat 
 to the third time : pouder the Matter, eatcine well in a* 
 Reverberatory : make it into an impalpable Pouder, 
 put it into an Earthen glaz'd Pot, affulc thereon Urine, 
 adding to each pound of Urine fixed fufd Sal Armoni- 
 ack f iv. boil on a gentle Fire for a quarter of an hour^ 
 then decant the Urine into fome Glafs VeiTel : put more 
 of the fame A^enfirmm upon the Matter, boil a quarter 
 of an hour, and decant as before : repeat this Work fo 
 long as it will extract any Tindiure. Mix all thefe Tin- 
 ^res, filter, then evaporate 3 quarters over a gentle 
 Fire: put the remainder into an Alembick, and diflll 
 to drynels. At bottom you have Crocm yenerisy of ad- 
 mirafik Ufe for coloring Glafs. 
 
 XV. j^nother Crocus Veneris. 
 
 1^ Thin Copper Plate?, and hay them in an Earthen 
 Pan with common Salt S. S. S. put it on the Furnace, 
 letting it fend till the Matter is very red : extinguilli 
 and walli away the Blacknels in cold Water: reiterate 
 this Work with common Salt as before, doing it as oft 
 as you pleaie. At laft affufe warm Water on that 
 where the Plates have been extingiiilTied : let it (land 
 Ibme time, then empty it, and at bottom you will find 
 a Crocus Veneris red as Blood. Walli it fcveral times to 
 cleanle'it, then dry it, and keep it for Ufe. 
 
 XVI. Another CrocLis Veneris. 
 
 Br <i^s Vjhm prepared with Sulphur and Salt, heat 
 it red hot 5? times, cjuench it as often in Linked Oil, 
 then di:y and poud«r it. Some arc contented with this 
 Ptcj^arittian. 
 
 XVII. Amthir 
 
764 Fotygraphices. Lib. X. 
 
 XVII. jinother Crocus Veneris. 
 
 Bi Copper calcined perfe Yt>). Sulphur Vive ftviij. all 
 being; well poudred, mix, and put them into a large 
 Crucible, which fet on live Coals in a little Furnace 
 ftirring it continually with an Iron Rod, till the Sulphur 
 is coniiimed : reiterate this Work 6 times, then caft it 
 into an Earthen Pan of boiling Water, flirit often with 
 ' a Stick, whilrt the Calx is dcfcending to the bottom : the 
 W^ater being lettlcd and clear, evaporate 3 quarters of 
 it, and fet it to crylklize, or evaporate the whole j and 
 at bottom you will have the Crocus VenerU of a delicate 
 fine red color. 
 
 XVIII. A Beryl Color, or Green Blew, viz. a Sea Green 
 forGla^. 
 
 ^ Cry(tal Frit without Man^anej^e q. v. melt it very 
 thin, and skim off the Salt (which Iwimson the top like 
 Oil) with an Iron Ladle, otherwife the color would be 
 foul and oily : the Matter being purified, to it-xx. of it, 
 put of the calcined Copper in jeEl. 7. above ?vl. Zi^er 
 prepared 5Jis. well mixed together: put this Mixture in- 
 to the Pot of Metal by little and little, fur fear the Cry- 
 ftal fliould rife or fwcll, and run over : Rir it well all 
 the while : this done, let the Metal (iand and fettle for 
 3 hours, that the color may incorporate, and then fHr 
 It again. Make a Proof of it, and after 2| hours mixing 
 the Pouders, and well (lirring or mixing it, it may be 
 wrought, becaufc the color is very apt to fall to the 
 bottom. 
 
 XIX. Another Sky-Cr>lcr, or Sea-Green. 
 
 To Jfcxx. of well purified Cryftal Frit made with Ro- 
 chet:a, put calcined Copper {atfe^.j. above) Ir;. obfer- 
 vingthe Rules in the toxmtr fection ; fo will it be an ad- 
 mirable color, which you mud make lighter or deeper 
 as you pleale. Two hours after flir it well again : after" 
 which let it ftand fiill 24 hours without {turing, and 
 then work it. 
 
 XX. Another Sea-Green. 
 
 Tk Cryftal Frit without Afantranefe, well boiled, skim- 
 med and purified ibxx. Ponder of Copper thrice calcined 
 at/fiT/. 7. aforegoing a^vj. Zajfer prepared in Poudcr f fs. 
 mixthele Pouders together, and put them in at 4 times, 
 rtirring it each time well, for fear of running over : 2 
 hours after it is wixcd, incorporated and fettled, ixiake 
 
 a 
 
fchap. 7. Of Colots from Coffer or BfAfs. 765 
 
 a Tr^^ali to fee if it is deep enough . It will fccm green- 
 ilh at firrt, but be nqt concerned for ttiat, for the Salt 
 will waili away all that Greennels, and change it into 
 blew : the color will be lighter or deeper, according to the 
 quantity ot' the Ponder you put in : there is no Rule in 
 this cafe, but the Reafon and Difcrction of the Artirt. 
 After it has ftood 24 hours itill, without itirring, you 
 may work it. 
 
 XXr. A Sea-Green rr Shy-Color in Cryfial. 
 \^ Cryltal Frit well purified from its Salt, and which 
 has not been put into \Vacer, tbxx. treble calcined Scales 
 of Brafs atyk?. 11. abo\c in Poader Itfs. Zajfer prepa- 
 red l/o'i.^ii- mix the Pouders together, and then mix 
 them gr.idiinm in the Pot, Itirring the Mafs well for 2 
 hours: if the color is gool, let it ftand iHll 24 hours; 
 iHr well again, that the color may be well incorporateJj 
 then you may work it. It will be a delicate Blew, and 
 may be heightned as you pleafc, but beware of making 
 it too high. If you \m% Cryfial Frft with Rochetta Frit 
 in equal quantities, you will have as admirable a Blew 
 as can be defired. 
 
 XXII. Another Sky-Color or Sea-Green^ Cl'^t fcwfthing 
 inferior to the Uii.) 
 
 R Cryftal Frit mad6 of Rochetta of the Levant^ and 
 Barillia otSpMn, without any A-Ianp-anefe, and not caft 
 into Water, Itxx. mix with it the fame Pouder, and in 
 the lame Proportions mentioned in the \:kii Jeclior/, (it 
 being firft throughly purified from its Salts) and obfer- 
 ving the Directions in /a7. 18, 2D, and 2j. above, you 
 will have a fine Sea-green or Sky-color, fit for almoll a» 
 ny Ufe. 
 
 XXtll. A wonderful Green. 
 
 ^ Common Glafs Metal made with Pulverinf -with- 
 out Mn/igMieje : being well melted and purified, put 
 in a fit (juantity of the following Pouder, as we direil 
 in Emerald colors, and which by Tryal you may eafily 
 find out; lb will you Irive an admirable yello.vilh' 
 Green, very fair and beautiful. Take the Pouder of the 
 treble Calcination of the Scales of Copper at'j/f??. ji. a- 
 bove : Pouder of Scales of Iron, only wallicd, dryed, 
 beaten and learced, without any other Preparation, of 
 tach eqtul quantities : mix them for tlie Purpolc albrc- 
 
'J 66 Poly^r4phiees, Lib. X» 
 
 faid. The Scales of Iron diive away all the dull natu- 
 ral Green Oi ilic GLits. 
 
 XXIV. yl Gisen Emerald Color in Glafl. 
 Va Common Glals well purified from its Salt, without 
 Miingancjc^ being well mtked and purified, itxx. Crocw 
 Mantes made as direded with Vinegar in cap.6.jeft.j, 
 aforegoing 5^'. mix and incorporate it well with the 
 Giaf?, and let it reit an hour, that it may throughly 
 take the color; lo will the Mctil loofeits nauiral ill co- 
 lor, and become green: then add Pouder ot treble cal- 
 cined Scales of Brafs at fcEl. i t . above ^vifs. which put 
 in at 6 times, mixing and flirring it well every time: 
 let it (land 2 hours to be imprc;gnatctl with the Tindlurc, 
 then ilir it again, and fee i. it is right : 'if it is too blew, 
 add more Crocm A4ariis to it, and it will be a fine E- 
 merald color : aRer 24 hours (landing, (tir it again well, 
 and then work it. 
 
 XXV. Ail Emerald Green, fairer than the former. 
 
 ■R? Cryllal Frit without Marigancfcy twice wallied in 
 Water to free it from the Salt, It.xx. common white Me- 
 tal \y'\X.[-\oi\\. Mang.wefe Ifcx. mclr, mix and purify them 
 %velJ : add to the Ma's the Pouder of thrice calcined Cop- 
 per at feti. 10. alx^ve itis. Crocus Mart is made as diredcd 
 lii cap. 6. feti. 6. a bregoing 3'''- i"*^'^ them well together, 
 and put it in ai 6 times, ibrring the Mais well each time, 
 obicn'ing tlieDiredionsin /i-^/. iS,20, 21, and 24.above: 
 if too bic\v, add more Croca; Martls ; if not blew 
 enough, more Pouder of calcined Vcntis. 
 
 XXVI. A?t Ork'tital Ef^crald Green, pier than all tly 
 reif. 
 
 Rj Cryfhl Frit well v.-,Thcd llivijfs. common Frit of 
 Tnlverine if.vj. commoii '\ liitc Giais in Pouder Itviils. 
 Aiinhrm or red \e:id it-ivls. mix all together, and in a 
 fliort time they will be prettv well purified: calt all in- 
 to W.itcr 10 purify It uK^re. leparating the Lead, (if aiiy 
 be.) The i^'lils thus "wa ;ed anddryed, melt it again^ 
 and puri.y it tor 24 heurr: then add of the Capyr. /Hor- 
 f«;.'»y of Venus at /^t'/ •> aforegoing, 'ji.wA.CrocH<: A'farus, 
 of each a little, and fini:. the Mais as in the former O- 
 
 FerationF. The Afmiim beat a?ain, calcine at a good 
 ire, and reduce it to a Pouder for this Work. 
 
 XXVII. To make a Twcois Blew, 
 
 ^i-Cryltal Frit of a full fair blew color, melt it wcH; 
 
 put 
 
Chap. 8. Cements y Mineral Color s^ he, 7^7 
 
 put into it by little and little well deciipitated Salt, re- 
 duced to a white Pouder, mix it well and gradually, as 
 you do metaline Colors : fo will the clear tranfparent 
 Blew become thick, for the Salt penetrating the Glafs, 
 takes away its Tranfparency and caufes a Palenels, and 
 gives it the Turcois color. When the color is perfed, it 
 mud be prel'ently wrought, for the Salt will evaporate 
 and beconlumed, and then the Glafs will be as tranl- 
 parent as formerly. If in working you find the color 
 to go away, or the Metal to be tranfparent, you muft 
 revive it by adding a little more decripitated Salt. The 
 Salt is to be well decripitated, otherwife it will be apt 
 to fly in the Work-man's Eyes: alfo it is to be put in 
 by little and little, till the color is perfe6t and right. 
 The Frit for this Purpofe you may make thus : Rj Cryjial. 
 Frit J good Rochetta Frit, of each equal parts j milt dnd 
 mix them, and it mil be a very fair Blew. 
 
 S E C T. 11. 0/ G E M S. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 Of Cement Sy Miner d Color Sy and Gems, 
 
 t. *TpO A'lelt Cryft.d for a firong Cement: 
 
 ^ Beat Crylbil to bits, and put them into an Iron 
 Spoon, cover it and lute it well, and heat it in the Fire 
 till it is red hot, which quench in Oil of Tartar : this 
 do fo often j^ till they will eafiiy beat to pouder in a 
 Mortar, which wiil then eafily melt. This is of ufe to 
 make firong Cements, and to counterfeit Jewels with. 
 II. To make a Cement for broken Glajfes. 
 Glair of Eggs mixed with Quick-lime will join broken 
 pieces of Glafs together, a:nd all Earthen Pots, f© as" that 
 they lliall never be broken in the fame place again. 
 
 _ III. Or thuiy Take old liquid Varnilli, and join the 
 pieces therewith ; bind them t©gether, and dry them 
 •well in tiie Sun, or in an Oven, and they will never 
 
 G g g 2 ungkw 
 
7^8 Polygraphices. Lib. X, 
 
 uncilew again : but then put no hot Liquor into tficm. 
 
 iV. Orthns, Take White Lead, Red Lead, Quick- 
 Li me, Gum-Sandrack, of each |;. mix all with Glair 
 of 8 Egsis. 
 
 i V. Or r/;;^/. Take White Lead, Bole, liquid Varnilh 
 as much as lufiiceth. 
 
 VL Or thiu, Take White Lead, Lime, Glair of" 
 Egg?, as much as lufticcth. 
 
 VIL Orthw, Take fine Pouder of GlarsQiiick-Limc, 
 liquid Varnitli, of each a fuflficicnt quantity. 
 
 VIIL Or thm, Take Quick-Lime jxHidcrcd, liquid 
 Varnilh, (jlairof Eggs, of each alike; grind them upon 
 a Stone : this is a Ihong Glcw, even for Stones. 
 
 IX. Or:hHS, Take calcined Flints, and Egg-Hiells, of 
 each alike, and with Whites of Eggs and Gum-Traga- 
 canth, or Dilfolution of Gum-Sandrack^, make Glew : 
 th'S in few days will be as hardasStone. 
 
 X. Or thtUy Take calcined Flints itii. Quick-Lime ifciv. 
 Linited Oil fo much as may temper the Mi^rture : this is 
 woiidcr 111 lirong; but with liquid Varnilli it would be 
 ftronger. 
 
 XL Or th-a, Take Fil"h Glew and beat it thin, then 
 foak it in Water till it is like Palte, make rouls thereof, 
 which draw out thin : when you ufe it, difiblve it in 
 fair Water over the Fire, letting it Iceth a while, and 
 fcLimming of it, and whillHt is hot, ufe it. This net 
 only cements Glals, but Tortoiie-lhell, and all other 
 things. 
 
 XIL To mcJ-.e GJ^i^ Green. 
 
 Green Glafs is m.ide of Fern Allies, becaufe it hath 
 much of an Alkali Salt. Cryfhil or Venice Glals' i^ 
 tinged green with Ore of Copper, or with the Calx of 
 Copper, 5 or 6 graiil'^toan ounce. 
 XIII. To Cuy.ut'erfeii a Di.-^rr'r-id. 
 
 Take a Saphire of a faiiit color, put it into tiic midJIe 
 of a Crucible in Quick-Lin.e, and put it into a gentle 
 Fire, and heat it by degrees till it is red hot, keep it lo 
 tor 6 or 7 hours; let it itiud in the Crucible till it is coKI, 
 (left taking it out hot it ihould break) lo will it lole all 
 its color, and be pcr^cdly like a Diamond, lb that no 
 File will touch it: ii die color is not allvanillied at the 
 J&rH heating, you muli heat it agam till it is pcr.ect. 
 
 XIV. To 
 
Chap. S, Cewents^ Mineral Colors^ Src. 769 
 
 XIV. To prepare the Salts for Counterfeit G:ms. 
 
 The Salts ufcdin making counterfeit Gems, arecluef- 
 Jy two, the firll is made of the Herb Kaly, the lecond 
 of Tartar ; their Preparations are according to the uiiial 
 way, (b;it in Glal's Velfels.) , 
 
 XV. To prepare the Matter of which Gems are made. 
 The Matter is either Cry(l;il or Flint that is clear and 
 
 wliite : put them into a Crucible in a Revcrberatory 
 Iieat, (the Crucible being covered) then take them out, 
 andcaft them into cold Water, i'o will they crack and 
 cai'ily reduce to Pouder : of which Pouder take an equal 
 (luanlity, with Saltof Tartar (or^".?/^/^^//; J to which 
 Mixture' add what color you pleaie, whjch miiil be ci- 
 thcrMetaline or Mineral: put them into a very ilrong 
 Crucible, (filling it alx)ut half full) cover it clofe, and 
 melt all in a llrong Fire till it becomes like Glaf?. 
 
 XVI. Where note^ in melt in s!^ yosi my (I pHt an Iron Rod 
 jnlo it, aad take npfomeof it ; a!7d if it is free from BuhleSy 
 Grains or Spech, it is fifed enough { if not ^ yon mufl fnje it 
 till it is free. 
 
 XVII. To make a Counterfeit Diamond of Cryflal.^ 
 
 Put Cryltal in a Crucible, and let it in a Glais Fur- 
 nace all night, and then bring it to fiiic Pouder, mix it 
 with equal parts c>{ Sal T^rtari, digeltall night in ave- 
 }]f ment heat, but yet not to melt, then take them out, 
 and put them into' another Vtlfel wh'ch will (toatly en- 
 dure the Fire 5 let them Ibnd melted 2 days, and take 
 out the Mafs. 
 
 ' ' XVIII. To make a Chahedon. 
 
 j* Mingle with the Pouder of Cryftal a little calcined 
 silver, and let it Ihnd in Fufion 24 hours. 
 J XIX. 7p make Connterfeit Pearls. 
 
 Mix Calx of Luna and Egg-lhells with Leaf Silver 
 ground with our belt Varnilli, of Avhich make Pafte ; 
 and having bored them with a HogsBrilUc, dry them in 
 the Sun or an Oven. 
 
 XX. To Counterfeit a Rtdhy. 
 
 T-AkcSal Alkali i^w Cryilal ^lii. Scales of Brafs ^fs. 
 Leaf Gold gr. vj. mix all, and melt them in a Reverbe- 
 rator y. 
 
 XXI. To Counterfeit a Carbsincle. 
 
 Mix Cryli'il with a little red Lead, putting it into a 
 Furnace for 24 hours, then take it out, pouder and iearcs 
 
77© Polygraphicts, Lib. X. 
 
 It, to which add a little calcined Brafs j melt all again, 
 and add a imall quantity of Lcif Gold, flrinii^ it well 
 3 or 4 hours, and in a day and night it will be done. 
 XXn. An Artificul AmethiJi. 
 
 Take Cryflal itj. ALvig.wfJe 3i- mix them together, 
 and melt them. 
 
 XXIII. Or thus, Take Sal AlUi'^\\j. Ponder of Cry- 
 ilal ^iv. Filings of Brafs half an ounce, melt all in a' 
 ftroRg Fire. 
 
 XXIV. An Artificul J^icynth. 
 
 Put Lead into a Ihong Crucible, and fet it into a 
 Furnace, let it itand there about 6 Weeks, till it is like 
 Glals, and it will have the natural color of a Jacynth, 
 not eafily to be difcerned. 
 
 XXV. An Arnficial Chryfolite. 
 
 Mix with melted Crylial a fixth part of Scales of Iron, 
 letting it rtandin a vehement Fire for 3 days. 
 
 XXVI. Or thhSj To the Mixture of the Topaae add a 
 little Copper. 
 
 XXVII. An Artificial Topaz.€. 
 
 To Cryllal ib;. add Crocus Martis ^ij- red Lead |iii. firil 
 putting in the Lead, then the Crocus. 
 
 XXVIII. Arnficial Corals. 
 
 Take the Scrapings of Goats Horns, beat them toge- 
 ther, and infule them in a {kiow^ Lixivium made o( Sal 
 Fraxim for 5 days : then take it out and mingle it with 
 Cinnabar diifolved in Water : fet it to a gentle Fire that 
 it may groAv thick ; make it into wh.jt form you plealc, 
 dry and polilTi it. 
 
 XXIX. Or thus. Take Adinii |j. Vermilion ground 
 fine^fs. Quick-Lime and Ponder of calcined Flints, of 
 each ^vj. a /J.v/t/ww of Qiiick-Lime and Wine, cp.ough • 
 to niake it thick : add a little Salt, then make it into 
 wiiar form you plealc, and boil it in LmfcedOil. 
 XXX, An Artificial Emerald. 
 
 Take Brafs calcined in Poixlcr ^iii. which put agam 
 into tlie Furnace with Oil, and a weaker Fire ; let it liay 
 there 4 d.'iys, adding a double quantity of rine Sand, or 
 Pouder of Cryfhl : after it isfomcthing havd, W:q\) it at 
 a morcgcr.tle Fire tor 1 2 hours, and it will be a lovely, 
 picalant and glorious Green. 
 XXX J, Another EmeraLl. 
 
 Take fine Cryftal fijls. S/. Alk4i ^y. FUs <i.'F.ri< in- 
 
 fufed 
 
Chap. 8. Cements, Mineral Color s^^c» 771 
 
 fufed in Vinegar and ftrained 5'. Sal Tartari fifs. mix 
 and lute them into a Crucible, and put all into a Glals- 
 makers Furnace ibr 24 hours, and it w ill be glorious 
 indeed. 
 
 XXXII. Another EmcraU. 
 
 Take Cr^-ttal ^x. Crdcns Mart'u and Brafs t^vice cal- 
 cined, of each it;, mix and melt them, iHrrmg them 
 well with an Iron Rod. 
 
 y.y.Y\\\. An Aniflci::! SA^hin. 
 
 To melt Cryttai, put a little Zaphora, (^ij. to ftj. of 
 Cryltil) then IHr it continually from top to bottom with 
 an Iron Hook, till it is well mixed, keep it in the Fur- 
 nace 3 days, and it is done ; yet when it is well color- 
 ed, unlefs it be preicntly removed from the Fire, it wiil 
 loofe its Tincl:ure agaii:. 
 
 XXXIV. Artificul A?:>hcr. 
 
 Boil Turpentine in an Farthen Pot, with a little Cot- 
 ton, (fome add a little Oil) liirring it till it is as thick 
 as Palte, then put it into ^vhatyou pleafe, and fer it in 
 the Sun 8 days, and it will be clear and hard ,• of which 
 you may make Beads, Hafcs for Kniv^es, and the like. 
 
 XXXV. Another tray to Counterfeit Aj9!her, 
 
 Take 16 Yolks of Eggs, beat them well with a Spoon j 
 Gum Arabick§it. Cherry-tree Gum |j. make the Gums 
 into Ponder, and mix them Avel 1 with the Yolks of Eggs ; 
 let the Gums melt well, and put them into a Pot well 
 leaded, then let them 6 days in the Sun, and they will 
 be liard and lliinc like Glafs; and when you rub them, 
 they will take up a Wheat Straw as other Amber doth. 
 
 XXXVI. To make yellorv Amher joft. 
 
 Put yellow Amber into hot melted Wax v/ell faim'd, 
 and it will be foft, 16 that you may m.akc things therc- 
 ot in what form and falliion you pleafe. 
 
 XXXVII. Another Artificial Ansher. 
 
 Take Whites of Eggs well beaten, put them into a 
 Velfel with ikong White-wine Vinegar, itop it dole, let 
 it itand 14 days, then dry it in the Shade, and it will 
 be like to Amber. 
 ' XXXVIII. Another Artificial Amhcy. 
 
 Break Whites of Eggs^vv'idi a Spungc, take oft the 
 Froth, to the reic put Saffron, put all into a Glafs cloie 
 itopt, or into a Copper or Brazen Velfel, let it boil in a 
 Kettle of Water till it be hard: then take it out and 
 
 G g g 4 Ihapc 
 
<77« Pofygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 /hape it to your liking, l:iy it in the Sun, and anoint 
 it often -with Linleed Oil mixed with a little SatVron ; 
 orclfc being taken out of the Kettle, boil it in Linfccd 
 Oil. 
 
 XXXlX.romahmiteEn.mfl. 
 
 Take Calx of Lead fii. Calx of Tin ^iv. make it into 
 a body with Cn ftal ^xij. roll it into round Balls, and fct 
 it on a gentle Fire for a night, ftirring it about with an 
 Iron Rod till it is melted, and it is ^onQ. 
 
 XL. The general Preparations and Proportions of Aiine- 
 r^l Colors. 
 
 Plates of Copper muft be made red hot, and then 
 quenched in cold Water ; of which gr. v. or vj. mixed 
 with Cryftal and Sal Tartari, of each |(s. and melted, 
 will color a Scargreen. 
 
 XLL Iron muft be made into :iCrocm in a reverbcrato- 
 ry Tire ; of which gr. viij. or x. will tinge the faid f i. of 
 mixture in a Yellow or Hyacinth color. 
 
 XLW. Silver is to be diliolved \n Aqua Foriis, and 
 precipitated with Oil of Flints, then dulcified with Wa- 
 ter and dr}^ed ; of this gr. v. or vj. to |i, gives a mixed 
 color. 
 
 XLin. Goli muft be diflblved in Aqna Regis y and 
 precipitated with Liquor of Flints, then Iweetned and 
 dryed ; of which gr. v. or vj. to ^j. gives a glorious Sa- 
 phirine color. Gold melted with Regulm Martis ni'rofm 
 gr. V. or vi. to |i. gives an incomparable Rubine color. 
 
 XLIV. A-f.igneft.t in Pouder only gr. x. or xij. to ^i. 
 makes an Amethyit color. 
 
 XLV. Granata in Pouder only gr. x. or x\'. to^i. '^viil 
 tinge the Mifs into a glorious Sniaragdinc color, not un- 
 Jike to the natural. 
 
 XLVL Common Copper makes a Sea-green : Copper 
 of Iron, 71 Graf-vrccn : Granats, a. Sn;/!ragdine : hon, 
 Tellovf or Jhacmth : Silver, White, Tellnv, Green and 6V.;- 
 nat : Gold, n fun Sh-c>)lor : Wilmut, d common Ble>v: 
 Magncfia, an yimethyii color: Copper and Silver, an 
 Amerhy} cofor: Copper and Iron, a f.^/^" GV^-fw ; Wil- 
 mut ard Magncfia, a Purple color : Silver and Magncfii, 
 an Opal, and the like. 
 XVII. To make Az^ure. 
 
 Take S,:l Amivni.ick ^ii). Vcrdigrife 5vi. make them 
 into Pouder, and put tliem into a Glals with Water of 
 
 Tartar, 
 
Chap. 9 . Of Arttfchl Gems In general. 775 
 
 Tartar, fo that it may be fomewhat thick, (top the Glals 
 and dispell in Sand in Horfe-dung for 8 or 10 days, aiid 
 it will be good Azure. 
 
 XLVIII. Another way to male good beyond Sfa Az.tire. 
 
 Beat common Azmc with Vinegar, and anoint there- 
 with thin Plates of Silver, and put the lame over a Vcf- 
 lel full of Urine, which let over hot Allies and Coal?, 
 moving and Ifurmg it till it looks like good Azure. 
 XLIX. To Foliate LooMng-GUjfgs. 
 
 Take Jupiter and Saturn, of each p. j. melt them; 
 and forthwith add of good Tin Glals p. i;. carefully skim 
 off the Drofs, take it from the Fire, and before it is cold 
 put to it good Quick-filver p. x. iiir all together, and 
 keep this foliating Liquor in a clean ne^v Glafs for ule. 
 When you ule it, Itrain it from its Drofs through a 
 Cloth. 
 
 L. T9 reduce Talcl^ &c. into fifie Ponder. 
 
 Firlt heat great lumps ot Talck red hot, and then cart 
 them into cold Water 8, loor 12 times, and they Avill 
 be immediately reduced into a mealy Calx, Snow white. 
 Where note, i. You mufhake £/!^///^ Talck, nolFene- 
 sian, for that will not do. 2. Alter the fame manner 
 may Cryltals and Flints be brought in 4 trice mto a ve- 
 ry liibtil Ponder. 
 
 LI. To reduce GUJs into its firji Principles. 
 
 Take Bits or Ponder of Glals ij. v. with an equal 
 quantity of the Salt which Glals-men ufe in making of 
 Glafs; melt them together in a Ihong Fire; then dil- 
 Iblve all the melted Glals in warm Water: pour olf thc- 
 Water, and you lliall fee no Glals, but Sand in the bot- 
 tom. Thus you may fee, that the Fulion of Glaf?, is not 
 the !h(1 Fufion, nor beyond any Reduction. 
 LIL To make a cold Cement for Bricks. 
 
 Vk Old Che/hire Cheefe freed from its outfide, and 
 grated fmall itj. Cows Milk ifcij, mix and let them Hand 
 all night. Then take of the be(l unflacked Lime in ve- 
 ry fine Ponder itj. put it to the former, and Itir them 
 ^vell together : to this add the Whites of 26 or 28 Eggs, 
 and mix them perfe6tly well; io will you have a wlnte 
 Cement for cementing Bricks together, to make a Block 
 or Mais for Mouldings, Qipitals, Carvings, &c. If you 
 would have it of the color of Brick, add very fine Brick- 
 
 Liii. n 
 
774 PclygrsphUes, Lib. X. 
 
 LIIL To n-.v;^ a hvt Cenunt for Bricks. 
 9i Rofin iliv. Bees-wax ^. ' Chalk, Brick-duft, both 
 in fubtil Ponder, »?«.? 5ii- mix and boil all together a 
 quarter of an hour, IVirring it all the %vhile, then let it 
 ftand 4 or 5 minute^-, and keep it for life. Firft make 
 the Bricks hot by the Fire, then fpread on this Cement, 
 and rub them too and ho, till they fit as clofe as you 
 would have them. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 of Jrtificial Gems in general. 
 
 I. TT is our Endeavour in this Work, to make Art imi- 
 ■■' late Nature • and that is here done to fuch a degree, 
 as that the Artificial Gems Jeem to f>trpajl the natural Ori- 
 ental rves in Beauty md Color, and want nothing of their 
 Perfedticn but thacof Hardnefs; which, whether it mil 
 cverbeattaihci to by Arc. is a Point we leave to the fu- 
 ture Series of Tnne to determine. 
 
 II. The Bafis of Artificial Gems, is Natural or Rock 
 Cryliil, being a S-.th^ratum made or. I y of a congealed 
 Water and apurc fubtil Earth, as other precious Stones 
 arc. 
 
 lU. But they differ from CrylUl in this, that they are 
 tinged with a proper Sulphur or undluous Subltuice, 
 which has infiniuted it lelf into the Pores of then Com- 
 pofition, which not only linages them, but alfo hxe= them, 
 and gives to them that admirable Beauty and Hardncls 
 which they polTefs. 
 
 IV, This Sulphur is thought to be an Exhalation of 
 Metaline and Mineral Spirits, afccnding up by force of 
 a Terrene Centural Fire, containing a vaft number and 
 variety of Colors undetermined, till brought into Act, 
 and fix't in their proper Subjcds. 
 
 V. iVow, the Art of making tbefe ciuntcrfe'itGe-ri^. is thf 
 Imitation of Natnrfi, by giving to' a proper Matter, or Bo- 
 dv, fuch as is that of Rock Cryltal, liich Mctalinc and 
 Mineral Tindiuc?, as lliall be extradcd from Metals and 
 Minerals, perfedlly tine and liibuliiithemfelves, and a- 
 
 ble 
 
Chap, 9. OfArtifcid Gems in general, yji^ 
 
 bleto leiift tbxC Fire : and thefe TintSlures, tho' Volatile, 
 are fixed in Cryftal without altering their color. 
 
 VI. VerUgratid. Verdigrife, when put on the Fire, 
 tho' it changes it: color, yet being mixed with Cry ilal in 
 Fufion, ittsfixt, and unchangeable in its Tindhire ; for 
 Metaline and Mineral Colors always return to their 
 Principle, and tho' they be Volatile, yet they are re- 
 tained by the great quantity of the fixed which Chains 0£ 
 over-powers them. 
 
 VII. You muft therefore chufe unalterable Colors, 
 which have a Fixity in ihe midft of Fire, being mixed 
 one with another. Ex. gr. Blevi and TV/Zow make a 
 Green ; you muft therefore take fuch a Blew as cannot 
 be altered by Fire, nor be totally overcome by the TeU 
 low you mix with it ; as alfo a Tellowj which the Fire 
 cannot change, nor yet be totally overcome by the Blew : 
 the fame underftand of other Colors. 
 
 VIII. He who firit wrote on this Subic6l was Ifaac 
 Hollaridus : he it was that firft difcovered this admirable 
 Art of making Gems, and performed many other things 
 almoft incredible : here we lliall give youfomeofhis 
 Preparations, amongft the heap of Modern Curiofities of 
 this kind, in refpeit of Pjtfies, Tintittres and Operations^ 
 or Modes of Working, which every Artiit may confider 
 of at Leifure. 
 
 •IX. To Prepare Rod Cryjlalfor this Pptrpofe. 
 
 1^ A good quantity of pieces or bits of Rock Cryftal, 
 put them into a large Crucible, which cover, that no 
 Allies may fall into it : put it into a Furnace in the 
 midft of a good Fire, till the Crucible and Cryfiil are 
 throughly red hot : then quench the Cryftal in a large 
 VefTcl full of cold Water : take out the Cryftal and dry 
 it, put it into the Crucible again and heat it red hot, 
 and quench it again; this Work repeat 12 times, fo 
 will the Cryftal eafily break and crimible; if any thing 
 is black in it as a black Vein, or the like, be fure to 
 pick it out: then beat it to Ponder in aBrals (not Iron) 
 Mortar, and grind it impalpable, not on a PorphjTy, 
 but in the fame Mortar, and pals it thro' a Scarce ; 
 %vhich Pouder keep for making Artificial Gems of. You 
 mult not life Cryftal Frit, nor Chalcedony, nor Tarfpy 
 nor any other Stones, how good and iair Ibever they Be ; 
 for that which is made of them will- be far lefs fair and 
 
 rcfplen- 
 
77^ Poly^raphttes, Lib. X. 
 
 rel'plendcnt, tbaia that which u; m;ide of this Poudcr of 
 Natural Cn>'{t il , wliich the iten.rf it approaches to the 
 Subfimcc di" Cjcms or precious Si.o,-,cs. See another Pre- 
 pay tion in f.'/J. 4. feii' 29. ar'ore:;oin_^. 
 v.. To m-iks v(yj pvre S.d' ofTjtr-.ar. 
 
 ^ Rheniih Tartar, put it in a Crucible or Pan, and 
 calcine to I'/eynefs: extiaCt ihc Sn.lt in warm Water, 
 iilter, and ev.:::orate 10 dryaeis : diilolve this white S.ilt 
 again in fair wji n Water, and evaporate a^ain over a 
 «cntk Fire : take it off the Fire, an I call it into cold 
 Water, and you will find a thick Froth on the Surfiicc 
 thereof, which skim oft with an Ivory Skiinuicr, having 
 holes in it, no ! j^ige: tl:an a fmall Pin : put it on the 
 Fire again, and evaporate, and calt it upon fre!"h cold 
 W^ter, and skim it as before; repeat this Work fo long, 
 till you find no more Frotli afecnd; thon evaporate over 
 a gentle Fire to dryncis, and keep thi? Salt in a .Glals 
 clofc ilopt for Ule, freed from all its Foulncfs and lln- 
 ctuofity, which caufes its caly Fufion. It is uied in Crv- 
 liil with your Colors when they are put to be melteci. 
 
 XL Tho' tlic making, of Pafks is an effential Point, 
 bccaufe the Beauty of the Gem depends upon it ; yet 
 the baking or btMling is alfo of material confcquencc, 
 becaule, if that is ill done, the whole is Ipoilcd : you 
 murt not only well regulate the Fire whilll the xMatter is 
 in the Fur "'ace, but you mult be careful that your Cru- 
 cibles do not break ocffne the Mafs is well boiicd and 
 ,puwfied : if it breaks, ar.d vou put the Ma(s ir.to another 
 Crucible, it will be full of Pujtulesand Blillcrs, and in- 
 deed be fpoiled. 
 
 XII. In this cafe, iris better to let tkeCruciU? cool, if it 
 is not quite broken, and tlien lute it well, putting it into 
 the Furnace again, to finilh the boiling. 
 
 XIII. But,"to avoid the danger of breaking your Cru- 
 cibles, you ought to get them made of fuch Earth as the 
 Pots for making Glals are made of, which will endure 
 t'lc Fire longer than here we lliall have any occafion for: 
 ctlKrwile you may make ufc of the blew Germ an Cruci- 
 bLs, bccaulc they will endure the Fire much better than 
 our ordinary ones. 
 
 XIV. Or th'ts. Take our ordinary Crucibles, or the 
 Germm Cnicib'cs, heat them in the Fire, and quencli 
 them in Oil Olive, letting it foak a little in ; tiicntake 
 
 Glals 
 
Chap. 10. Jqfta Marifia, 777 
 
 Glafs reduced into impalpable Pouder, adding to it ibme 
 Borax in Pouder, to help the Fufion, and lirew it all 
 over the Crucible, both wichin and without, as thick' as 
 you can : put it into a Ftirnace in a Imall heat, and 
 after encreafc the Fire to a meltine heat ; lb will the 
 Glafs melt, and vitrify the Crucible, and thereby be 
 made able to endure the Fire much longer, than can be 
 any wavs required for this Work. 
 
 XV. Next, as to the Padres, you mufi put a fit Pro- 
 portion of the Color into them : if you make fmall Stones 
 for Rings, the color mu(t be the deeper, becaufe of their 
 Imalncis: if they are made for Pendants, the color muft 
 yet be deeper: but if greater Stones, the color may then 
 be the lighter : but this nuich depends upon the Skill 
 and Experience of the Artilt or Work-man. 
 
 XVI. It is alfo to be obferved, that a very fine Red 
 may be extraded from GuN ; and one a little more ob- 
 fcure from Iron : an excellent Green may be had from 
 Copper; and a GoUen color from Lead: a delicate Bki^ 
 from Silver ; but a much tairer from Gran.zts of Bohemia, 
 which are of fmall Price by reafon of their Imalnefs, but 
 yield a very excellent color: and the lame maybe done 
 irom Enjeralds ^ Saphirs, Rnhies, and other precious 
 Stones. 
 
 XVII. It is alfo to be noted, that Glafs of Saturn 
 always makes Stones ib.ter and heavier than other-M;t- 
 terials: but if we make them of Rock Cryital, they will 
 lemuch harder, addiiig to it the Tindures which color 
 them, and the fine Sal Tartariy as made at fe^. lo. a- 
 bove ; for this opens the Cryltil and makes it the better 
 to imbibe, or be impregnated with the Colors you intend 
 to tinge the Mafs of, making them more bright and 
 Ihining. • 
 
 XVill. L4ly, That prepared Rock Cryfhl at /ff?. p. 
 above, is the Bafis, or Ground and Foundation of all otrr 
 Artificial Gems or Precious Stones -, and without this, 
 nothing excellent or drawing to Perfection, caii be done 
 in this Art. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
77^ ^olygraphices. Lib. X. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 %y£ Fajh for a Beryl ^ or Sky-Color^ cdlkd 
 Aqua Marina* 
 
 I. A P^l^^ f^^ ^ ^^n^' 
 
 ^ 9* Rock Cr-ftal prepared ( as in cat. 9. [eft. g. ) 
 ?x. Minimi or red Lead ^xxv. Zaffer prepared 5v. gr. v. 
 being all in fine Poudcr, mix, and in a Crucible cover- 
 ed and luted, proceed as in c-^p. 14. /fcr. 3. following, io 
 will you have a fine Sky-color. Or, ft Rock Cryftal 
 prepared ?x. <v£j Vjhm ^j. gr.xv. mix, and in a Cru- 
 cible prrformthe Work as the former. 
 
 II. Another Eery I or E^marine. 
 
 1^ Pouder of Rock Cryfial |x. fine Salt of Tartar C in 
 cap.g.fcB:. 10.) 5^. Salt of Vitriol ?lx. all being in fine 
 Poudev, fearccd and mixed in a Brafs Mortar, proceed 
 as in cap. 14. /f^. 3. following. 
 
 III. Another deeper Beryl or Egmarine. 
 
 Pi Prepared Rock Cryltal |x. fine Verdigrife ^iij. 9>;. 
 fine Salt of Tartar ^xiijfs. mix all in a fine Pouder in a 
 Brafs Mortar, and proceed as before, cap. i.^.fecl. 3. 
 
 C H A P. XL 
 
 To make a Chdcedony, 
 
 1. ^T^O male an Aqua Fortis for this Ptirpofe. 
 
 ^ R Rocb Alum calcined on a Fire-lhovcl ifijcv. 
 refined Nitre ftv Cryfialine Arfenick ^xx. all bcin^, iji 
 fine Pouder, add to it fine Sand or Lime ^^ixxv. mix, and 
 in a Glafs Cucurbit make an Aijifa Fortis^ diftiliing to 
 dr^'nefs. To every pouiid of the Caput Mortnum add re- 
 fined Nitte, mix and put it into the Cucurbit, and af- 
 fufe thereon all the before diltilled A. F. and diihl a- 
 gain. Thisy^.F. is called Water of Separation, and is 
 that which is fitfor our Life. Nore^ Some infkad of the 
 Roch AJum, take tlie beft Roman Vitwol, fuch as if it is 
 
 rubbed^ 
 
Ch^p. II. 1 n:-4he a Chdcedofrf. 779 
 
 jubbcd on a piece of well poliChecl Ixm^ will leave' a 
 Copper color behind it. _ This Ro?nan Vitriol ought to be 
 purified by diiToIving in f^ir warm Water, letting it 
 itand 3 days, that the yellow Fccces may fettle : then 
 decanting the clear lAquo.-, filtrciting it, evaporating 
 and cryttalizmg, and repCciting this Work of diffolying, 
 filtering and ayftalizing 3 times. 
 
 II. To make a fair TelloKV Precipitate. 
 I. 1^ Of the aforegoing A.F. ifcij. pat it into_ a Bolt- 
 head ; and put to it tine Silver in Filings or thin Plates 
 5iv. and in a gentle Sand heat or v/arm Water, dilTolve, 
 which will be injftantly done. 2. H> y^.F. (at/^f?. i.) 
 Itjfs. put it into another Bolt-head ; and put into it 
 duick-filver fvj. mix and diffoive. 3. Pi|p both thefe 
 Solutions together in a third Bolt-head much greater, add 
 to it Sal Armoniack |v;. diflblve over a gentle Fire, or 
 in B.M. vi^. warm Water. 4. Then add to it Zaffer 
 prepared |i. Manganefe prepared 5fs. F(tre:to of Spain f fs. 
 put them in by little and little, for fear of breaking 5. 
 Add to thefe things Crosw Aiartj^ made with Sulphur 
 (in cap. 6. feEt. 6.) |;. Scales of Copper thrice calcined, 
 ( in cap. j.feB. 11.) which ought to boil like Manganefe 
 |i. blew Lake which Painters ufe, MiniHrn, of each |j. 
 the whole being in fine Poudcr. 6. In putting in thefe 
 Poudcis, gently lliake or (tir the Glafs, that th°y may 
 the better incorporate with the A. F. and let there not 
 be too much heat ; ilop the Matrafs dole, digelt lodays, 
 itirring it ev^ery day, that the Ponders dilfolving may 
 vet precipitate. 7. Evaporate the -^. F. in agentle Sand 
 Fiunace in 24 hours ; fo will you have a yellow Prazci- 
 pitate, which keep in a Glais clofe ftopt for Ufe. 
 III. To r}7ah a fair Chalcedony in Glafs. # 
 Bi White Cr\'i{al Glafs well purified, or which has 
 been often melted itxx. which put into a Pot and melt 
 it : of the former yellow Precipitate ^iii- put it in at 5 
 times, mixing it well after each time, that the Precipi- 
 tate may well incorporate : let it fiand an hour, ibr it 
 well again, and let it ftand 24 hours: after ftir it again 
 the laft time, and make an Elfay, to fee whether it gives 
 a yellowiili Azure color : if right, take the Pot out and 
 Jet it cool ; fo will you have Colors reprefenting t\m 
 Waves, and feveral other Appearances. But, if you 
 would hav£ it ^. fair Ghalcecloriy^ you jouft put fnto^the 
 
 former 
 
780 Polygraffhices, Lib. Xi 
 
 fonncr melted Metal, this Mijrturc. 15^ Cilched T^irur 
 cAcined to nhi'enefs in 6 hours'^vwu Soot purified fij. Cro- 
 cus Martis calcined with Sulphur ^fs. Tf^ix them vcell: let it 
 be put in at 5 or 6 times, !e(t: it fwcll violently and 
 break the Pot, %vhich is avoided by putting it in by lit- j| 
 tie and little, ftirrinj^ it well each time, that the Ingre- I 
 dients may well incorporate : make the Pot boil, and I 
 let it ftand 24 hours, and then you may work it. It will 1 
 be green, blew, white, red, yellow, and ot other co- 
 lors, &c. looking on it obliquely, it will look red like 
 Fire; and if held to the Sun, it will have by Refledion, 
 the colors of the Rain- bow, being polilhcd at the Wheel. 
 It' it is pale, you muft add to it more ot the la it Mix- 
 ture, ItirriHg it well, (^c. It is uled for Princes Heads, 
 Cups, making Seals, &c. bccauie being graven, the 
 Wax will not ftick to it. 
 
 IV, To rrah anOr^ngeTawney Pr.fcipitate. 
 I . Bi ^. F. lt,j. put it into aGlals Matrafs; to which 
 put Filings or granulated Silver cupulated f iv. diffolve. 2. 
 Ik A. F. %}. put it into another Glafs Body : add purified 
 Quick-lllver «v. dillblve. 3. Va A.F. ft,/, put it into a- 
 ncther Glafs Body; to which put Sal Armoniack ^ij. 
 mix and Jiffolve: after it is diitolved, add to it Crocw 
 Aiartis made with A.F. (in cap.6.fecK g.) Ferretto 
 ( made as in cap. 6. fetl. 4.) Copper calcined (in cap.y^ 
 fe[i. p.) Leaves of Copper ot Brafs calcined (in cap.j. 
 fe[l.S.) of each ffs. all being inPoudcr, put it in by lit- 
 tle and little, IcH the Vellel ihould break. 4. ^ A.F. 
 Jfc). put it into another Glals Body ; to which put Sal 
 Arriionlaci'^u. being dilfolved, Add Grad/itfw, crude An- 
 timony, blew Hnaiucl which P.iii^.ters ufc,^ red Lead^ 
 Vitriol w?ll purihed, ana ^Cs. all being in fine Poudcr. 
 5. j3j A.F.ibj. put It into another Glals Body; and 
 put to it Sal Armoniack |ij. being diifolved, add to it 
 Z.^^fr prepared fii. Cinnabar ^i. thrice calcined Cop- 
 per (in cap. 7. lefL 10.) ?fs. alJ being in fine Poudcr, 
 put it in by little and little, for fear of brcal^ing. 6, ]^ 
 A.F. lb;, put it iiito another Glals Bo ly ; Sal Armoni- 
 ack 51;. bciii^dilTolvcd, add Cerufe |ii. by little and 
 little, becauie it makes a great Fermentation : then add 
 Paintcrsred Lake, Scales of Iron from the Anv\\, ana fil. 
 putting them in Ciradmm. 7. The Solutions oi: the Ma- 
 terials being done, in about 12 clays. time, put ;iil toge- 
 
Chap. II. To make 4 Chalcedony. ySi 
 
 ther into another large Matrafs well luted, fhake them 
 jvell together ; and putting on a Glafs-head, in a gentle 
 Sand heat, draw off the A.F,m about 24 hours time : 
 towards the end, let the Fire be very gentle, left the 
 Pouder is fpoiled by too much heat. This Ponder keep' 
 in a Glafs clofe itopt for Ufe. 
 
 V. To make a Chalcedony finer than the former-. 
 1^ White Glafs or Cryllal ft20. meltit well in a Pot^ 
 
 and put thereto of the former )rellowi{'h red or orange 
 Tawney Prsecipitate ^iij.ormore, ftirring and digefting 
 till it is perfe6l, as we have before directed. 
 
 VI. To Ppirify Sea or Common Salt. 
 Tk Salt q. V. diifolve it in fair warm Water q.f. let 
 
 it reft 24 hours, decant the clear from the Faeces, and 
 evaporate to drynefs in a Glafs Vefl'el or Cucurbit : dif- 
 folvc again;, aiKl evaporate to drynefs ; and this conti- 
 nue till no more Faeces fettle, io is it purified and pre- 
 pared. 
 
 VII. To male a Green-yellom Fr£cipitate. 
 
 I. y^ A.F. it;, put it into a Glafs Matrafs, and put 
 to it Leaf Silver |iv. mix and diffolve. 2. Rj A.F. %„ 
 Quick-filver purined with Salt and Vinegar till its black- 
 nefs is gone |v. mix in a Glafs Matrafs, and diffolve. j.' 
 8? fine Silver in Fihngs or Leaves ^iij. amalgamate it 
 with Quick-filver, (as Gold-fmiths do) add to it the full 
 weight of common Salt purified : mix, and over hot 
 
 . Coals evaporate the Mercury, the Silver remaining puri- 
 fied and calcined at bottom. 4. Add to this calcined 
 Silver an equal weight of Salt purified, (atfeH-. 6.) miK 
 well together, and in a Crucible calcine anew ; tree th« 
 Calx from the Salt, by wa'lnng in warm Water; after 
 boil it in fair Water, which do 3 timeSj and then dry 
 it. 5. 5* A.F. itj. put it into a Matrafs, and pt.it to it 
 the former Calx of Silver, ftop the Velfel and let it dif-r 
 folve. 6. Bi A.F. itj. put it into another Matrafs: Sat 
 Armoniack purified ^iii. (viz,, diffolved and filtered tiU 
 it leaves no Faeces) fine Silver Calx ^ii.niix them. 7* 
 i}iA.F.^j. Sal Armoniack 51;. being diffoived, putin» 
 to it Crocm Martps made v;ith Sulphur, (in cap. 6\jeth 6.) 
 Cinnabar, Ferretto ot' i'^^^iw, (in a?/?. 6. /ft?. 4,) Ultra- 
 
 - marine, ana |fs. all being in Pouder, put it in Grada- 
 tim, andftop the Matrafs. 8. ^t A. F. itj. purified Sal 
 Armoniack |ii. beingdiflblved, add to kCrocuf Mann^ 
 
 hhht (^ 
 
782 PolygrAphkts, Lib. X. 
 
 ( in cap.6.f(B:. 7.) Putty or calcined Tin, Zafter prepa- 
 red, Cinnabar, /r«<f ^fs. \»il it in Gradatim. p. R ^.F. 
 iti. Sal Armoniack|ii. diffolve, and add Copper Leaves 
 calcined (in Citp.y. /^£?.8.) ^j. Scales of Copper thrice 
 calcined, (in cap.j.Je^. it.) Piedmont Manganefe pre- 
 pared. Scales oflron fallins; from the Smith's Anvil in 
 Pouder, ana ^k. all being in fine Pouder, mix Grada- 
 tim. 10. 5* yi.F. it;. Sal Armoniack f ij. mix and dil- 
 folve : add to it Scales of Copper thrice calcined (in cap. 
 7. ft^. II.) ^i. red Lead, crude Antimony, Cdpnt Mer- 
 tHHm of Vitriol purified, (in cap.y.JcQ. 5.) ana ffs. mix 
 Gradatim. ii . V^tyi.F. iti. Sal Armoniack fij. diffolve, 
 andadd toitOrpiment, white Arfenick, Painters Lake, 
 4na ^fs. being in Pouder, mix gradatim. 12. All tbelc 
 Compofitions being well diflblved in the Waters over a 
 gentle Sand beat, or in B.M. and digelkd 15 days in 
 the fame heat, Itirring them often every day, then put 
 all that is in each Matrafs together into a great Glafs 
 Body, by little and little ; mix well, and unite them to- 
 gether: digeH: w^ell dole ftopt for 6 days; and after- 
 wards, in a Glafs Cucurbit well luted, draw off in a 
 eentle Sand heat the A.F.to drynefs, letting the Fire 
 be very gentle towards the end, for fear of fpoiling the 
 Colors, and that fome of the Spirits may remain in the 
 PrsEcipitate, which will be of a green yellow. 
 
 VIIL To make a Chalcedony j much furpajfing the former 
 tyro in Beauty. 
 
 B? Purified Glafs Metal, or bits of fine Cryftal (not 
 Frit)It2o. being melted, put into the Pot of the former 
 Prxcipitate 5iii-"a"<-^ ^ii-l^ to it, in its due time, calcined 
 Tartar |viij. Soot purified ^ij. CrocHs Martin made with 
 Vinegar (in cj/i. o. fed. 7.) Ks. obferving all that we 
 have faid \nJeB:. 3. above, after which you may work 
 it, being of an extraordinary Beauty, beyond Expe<ita- 
 tion. 
 
 CHAR 
 
Chap. 12. Pafiesfor anOrientaiChryfotite. 7S5 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 Fafles fir an Orienul Chryfiliu, 
 
 1. AN Oriental Chryfolite. 
 
 *^ ^ Rock Cryftal prepared ^20. MimHm in fine 
 Poudcr |So. or ifcv. Crxicm Martis made with Vinegar 
 (in cap.d.fe^.y.) ^ij. mix all well together, put it into 
 a Crucible, and into the Furnace, leaving it a little 
 longer there than you d(5 in other?, that it may be pu- 
 rified from the Lead ; fo have you a Palk for an Orier.- 
 tal Chryfolite, which will appear wonderful, fet with 
 a foil in Gold, 
 II. Another way. 
 
 Bi Ponder of Rock Cryfial, (in c^.p. p./fff. <?.) S>itur-^ 
 nm Depwatu^, ana 510. Crocm Mortis prepared ^1. all 
 being in fine Pouder and well mixed, pat thcin into a 
 Crucible, which cover and lute, obfcrvirig the fime Or- 
 ders in the Boiling or Baking as in the former j 10 will 
 you have a delicate green Chryfolite color. 
 
 III. It is to be noted, That what the Ancients called 
 a Topaz, or ChryfopM, which is a Gsm, green and. dia- 
 phanous, with a GoldLuihe, our Modern jewellers call 
 a Chryfolite, becaufe fome of them have a gre.it Rclein- 
 blance one of another. It is a Stone very bard, and 
 will not eafily endure the File ; and ibmetimes pieces 
 of it have been found big enough to make Statues of 6 
 foot high J as that made ni Honor of (X.ArfhioCj Wife 
 of Piolomefts Philadelphia. 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 Of making fair Oriental Diamond!* 
 
 I. ' I ^HE firf} way of r/zaling VuDKonis, 
 
 ^ ^ Prepared Cry Itif in Pouder (in cap. p. '}cb. p.) 
 ij.v. fill a Pot ivith it, put it in a Glais-houic F-Uiiace 
 1 2 hoars, to be melted and purified ; put it into cold 
 
 Hhh 2 Water, 
 
7^4 Polrgraphices. Lib. X, 
 
 Water, dry and reduce it again to Pouder : add to that 
 Poudcr its eqiud weight oF our pure refined Salt of Tar- 
 tar, (in cap. g. fdh lo.) mix them well, and make little 
 Pillsor Balls thereof, with fiir Water : wipe them, and 
 put them into an E.irthen Pot, over a fhong Fire, to 
 grow red hot without melting for 12 hours: then put 
 them into a Pot in a Glafs-houfe Furnace, to melt and 
 purify for 2 days: after which put the Matter in the An- 
 nealing Furnace, to cool or.tiAtim : break the Crucible, 
 and you have a pure Mafs for Diamonds, which cut and 
 polilli at the Wheel. 
 
 n. The fecond n^y : To make the Diamond d/ ATan- 
 fon. 
 
 Put Filings of Steel into an Earthen glazed Pot, with 
 fome Vinegar q. v. in wliich place, one by another, Cry- 
 flils cut and polillTcd : put common Water gently on 
 it ; warm and boil for 1 2 hours, adding frelh boiling 
 Water as it confumes : then fee if the Cryitals have ob- 
 tiincd the color and hardnefs you defu"c; if not, conti' 
 niie the Fire ibme hours longer, and they will be like the 
 true Ah.njon Diamonds : poliili them again at the 
 Wheel, to give them Beauty and Brightnefs. 
 
 III. The third iv.iy : To ILirden Cryjial and Alanfon 
 DUmcndi. 
 
 ^ Dach Trcpdi^ make a Pa(le of it with Smiths Forge 
 Water: in this wrap up the Cryltals you delign^ cut 
 and polilh, put them in a Cmciblc, which cover and 
 Jute over a graduil Fire, let it Hand till the Pot is red 
 hot : after a while take it out, and take the Stones and 
 polilh them at t-he Wheel, to give them their Color and 
 Water. To let them, take Indim Paper and Leaves cf 
 Tin like thofc put bcliind Looking-Glalfes, and they 
 will be diiicult to Ailccrn from thole which are true. 
 
 IV. The ^mrih wuy: To H.-rden Cryjhl and Alanfon 
 DLiniOiids. 
 
 Vi Fine BcU'lcy Meal, mix it with P'etroleum, and make 
 a Parte: cut it m the middle, and put all your Stones 
 into it, but lb as they mav not touch one anodier : co- 
 yer ihem with the other half of the Palte, put the Mafs 
 into a Crucible covered vvith another, and well luted 
 together: when Jiv. fct it in a gradual circulary Fire for 
 6 hours : for tlie firll 2 hours, let the Fire be fmall, and 
 then encrcaie it troui 2 to 2 hours to the end of the 6 
 
 hour? 
 
Chap. I J . To make Oriental Diamonds, 785 
 
 boiirs. Let all cool of it felf ; break the CrLicible, and 
 your Stones being repoliOit at the Wheel, will be verv 
 beautiful, fine, clear, fliining, and fparkiing like excel- 
 lent Diamonds. 
 
 V. The fifch nay : To Harden Cnpis ml Alanfon 
 Diamonds. 
 
 Rj Load-(bne, Qviick-lime, ana Itj. Sulphur Itfs. all 
 in Vouder ; mix them well : Avith this Pouder cement 
 Cryfta?? and Alanfon Diamonds well cut, in a Cruci- 
 ble, laying them S. S. S. cover and late it well : being 
 dry, fet it in a Glafs houfe Furnace 3 days, in a conti- 
 nual red hot heat, butfoasit may not melt- : afterwards 
 take not out the Crucible at once, but let it cool gra:lu- 
 aily, led: the Stones break. Break the Crucible, take 
 cut the Stones, and polilli them again at the Wheel, and 
 they will be very beautiful, ibining and fparkling, re- 
 fembling Diamonds of the old Rock, Icarcely to be di- 
 flinguilbt from true ones. This is a great Secret. 
 
 VI. The Sixth ixay : To Extract the Tin^iwf^ ani 
 male very fair and 'hard Diamonds of Jargons of Au-^ 
 vergne. 
 
 I. You muft boil thefe Stones in a Pot of Mutton 
 Suet; fo will they loofe all their red color, and become 
 •^vhite. 2. 1^ Emery, lulphureousTV/pv//, Pumice-llone, 
 Cryftal, ana all in fine Pouder, and learced thro' a fine 
 Sieve: make a Pafle of it with Brandv, and therewith 
 cement your Jargons, laying them S. S. S. in a great Cm- 
 cible ; cover it wiih anodier, and lute them well : being 
 dry, put tljem in a Furnace over a genik Fire for half an 
 hour; then encreaie it till it is hot eno'igh for Fufion; 
 in which leave the Crucibles for 14 hours : let the Fire 
 go out, and the Crucible cool of it lelf : then break it, 
 and 3^our Stones will be fine, harvi, lliiningand fpark- 
 Jing, and of a true Diamond color, loexaCl, thatGoId- 
 Imiths and jevveilers have been cheated \vith them. 3. 
 ThellilphureousTWpo//' is thus made: i^ Cnic Antinrt- 
 ny^ Tripoli, Salphm-, ana : ^r'lnd them imp.ilnabJe on a 
 Porphyry ; mah them into a P-fre rinh I'^ine'^ar; r;hich be- 
 ing dry, reduce into P-jidcr frr the firmer U'r. 
 
 VII. The feventh way: To ch^vigc a White Sa^bir into 
 a true Diamond. 
 
 Vji Pure fine Sand, walli it in Water til! it is p:;rfe6l- 
 ly clean, and dry it : fill a Crucible ha If full of it, then 
 
 Hhh 3 put 
 
7S6 Poljffmphiees, Lib. X. 
 
 put in your Saphir, and fill it up Avith the fame Sand : 
 cover the Crucible with a Cover of the fame Earth, lute 
 the whole with good Lute, laying it an Inch thick, and 
 dry it in the Shade : then fet it in a Giafs-houfe Furnace, 
 letting it nearer and nearer to the Fire by degrees, leaving 
 it 1 2 hours in the fame degree of heat : Dike it out gra- 
 dually in the fpace of 6 hours, and let it cool eauly : 
 when cold, break the Crucible, and you will find your 
 Saphir of the finenefs, l"hining and hardnels of a Dia- 
 mond, leeming (when polillied at the Wheel) even to 
 furpafs Nature. 
 
 VIII, The eighth rvay : Another w^ to turn a White 
 Saphir in'O a true Diamond. 
 
 ft Leaf Iron and wrap up your Saphir in it ; then 
 -take fine Gold q.f. flux it in a Crucible in an ordinary 
 Wind Furnace: when it is in good Fufion, put in the 
 Saphir covered with the Leaf Iron orthni Plate, fo that 
 it may float on the Gold, and fmk into it : gi\'c it a 
 ftrong Fire for 12 hour?, thcGold bemg all the while in 
 Fufion : then with a fmall pair of .Tongues take out the 
 Saphir, ihaking off the Gold which may hang to it, let 
 it cool gently, for fear of breaking; fo will you have a 
 Saphir, having all the Perfedlions of a true and natural 
 Diamond ; polilli it at the Wheel, and work it. The 
 fame may be done with fine Silver. 
 
 IX. The ninth v;ay : Another Afethcd to turn a White 
 Saphir into a true Diamond. 
 
 Fill aCruciblehalf full of Filings of Iron or Steel, put 
 in your Saphir, and fill up the Crucible with more Fi- 
 lings, fo as to be wholly covered. Set the Crucible in 
 the Furnace, and give it a good Fire, that the Filings 
 jnay be red hot without melting : when it has been in 
 foine time, take it out with a pair of Tongs, and fee if 
 it is right colored; it not, put it into the filings again ; 
 and repeat tliis Work till it is perfect. The lame may 
 be done with ecjual parts of Filings, and white Enamel 
 in Poudcr, being made into a Pa lie with Spittle, and 
 Well drycd, putting the Saphir in the middle, &c. 
 
 C H A p. 
 
Chgp. I4» Pafies for an Orienul Emerald, 787 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 Pafles for an Oriental Emerald. 
 
 I. *TpO make an Oriental Emerald. 
 
 -■- ^ Of the Pafle in cap. V />.5?. 22. fx. Verdigrifc 
 prepared Jls. Ferretto of Spain (in f<«/7. 6. fe5l. 2.) 3fs. all 
 being in fine Pouder, mix too;ether, put it into a Cru- 
 cible, cover it with another, lute it and dry it : fet it 
 in a Glafs-houfe Furnace fw 3 days ; and after in the 
 Annealing Furnace for 12 hours: then break the Cruci- 
 ble, and 3^ou will find tlic Mais tinged of a very fine O- 
 lientaJ green color, which then cut and polilh*, 
 
 II. A no- her yoay. 
 
 Va Of our Cryltal |x. prepared Sal Tanari (in cap. p. 
 JeEi. 10.) ^xfs. Crocm Martls ff?. all being made mto a 
 fine Pouder in a Brafs Mortar, pat it into a Crucible, 
 which cover with another, lute them together, and put 
 them into a Glafs-houfe Furnace for 24 hours 5 and then 
 into an Annealing Furnace lor 1 2 hours, to cool grada- 
 tim : then take it out, cut and polilli it, and it -will be 
 a right Emerald. 
 
 III. A Pafle for Oriental Emeralds. 
 
 "fy. Rock Cryrtal prepared (in cap.o.feEi.Q.) fx Mi- 
 ninm or red Lead|xx. poudredand icarced: fine Verdi- 
 grifc well beaten |fs; Crocm Aiards with Vinegar pre^^ 
 pared (in cap.6. fe^. 7.) ^Y.yil. mix all well together, 
 put it into a ftrong Crucible able to refifl the Fire, lea- 
 ving an Inch or more empty: cover it with an Earthen 
 Cover, lute it well and dry it : put it in the hotteft place 
 of a Potters Furnace, and let it (tmd as long as their 
 Pots: when cold, break the Crucible, and you will find 
 a very beautiful Emerald, which when Poli/ht and jet in Goldy 
 mllfMrpjjI in Beauty the true Orient al. You mufi: make 
 Tryal wnether it is fine and pure enough; if not, you 
 mutt put it into the Furnace again till it is enough ; and 
 this you may know by lifting up the Cover; if it ap- 
 pears iTiming, it is well ; if not, you mult lute the Co- 
 yer on again, and put it into the Furnace as before, till 
 it is throughly boiled and purified : if you break the Cru- 
 cible before it is enough, and then put it into another 
 
 H h h 4 Giiiciblc, 
 
/ySS PolygfAfhices. Lib. X. 
 
 Crucible, your Parte will be painted, difcolored and 
 fullofBlifter?. 
 
 IV. Another deeper Emerald. 
 
 T^ Rock Cr)'ftal prepared (in cap. p. fe^.p,) |iv. Mi- ^ 
 fiium 5xiii. Vcrdigriie prepared ^\]k. Croim MartU ( in ' 
 cap. 6. fed:. 7.) gr. xx. mix well together, and proceed ex- 
 adlyas in the tbrmcr/f(^/ow, only here, letting the Mat- 
 ter (iand longer in the Fire ; fo will you have an excel- 
 lent Oriental Emerald, which being fet with a foil of 
 the fame Metal in Gold, will be admirably fine and 
 fair. 
 
 V. A fairer Pajie for Emeralds. 
 
 Vft Rock Cryfhl prepared ( in cap. p. fe[l. 9.) ^ij. Mi- 
 nium'^vx]. Verdigrifegr.xviij. Croctu Martugr.x. all be- 
 ing in Ponder, mix well and proceed as we have direded 
 infeH.^. aforegoing ; fo will you have an Emerald fit 
 for Imall things, but not fo hard as the former, becaufe 
 of the great quantit}' of Lead in it: keep it long m the 
 Fire, that the pale color of the Lead may vanilli. 
 VL Another fairer P^fle for Emeralds. 
 
 B; Rock Cryftal prepared tttfupra |ij. Miniitm in Pou- 
 der ^vj. fine Verdigrile in Pouder gr. vii;. mix all well 
 ■together, put them into a large Crucible, which cover 
 and lute well, put it into the func Furnace as before, 
 following the Direilions inJeB. 3. above, &c. This will 
 iTiuch furpafs the former. 
 
 WW. Another Pafte very fair. 
 
 ^ Rock Crylial prepared u^ftipra 5iv. red Lead, fine 
 Verdigrile fcarced, ana^'u. mix all together, and pro- 
 ceed as in the former atjn?. 3. leaving the Crucible 36 
 hours in tilie Fire : after which you may cifl: the melted 
 Mafs into a Marble Mold heated, and put it near the 
 Fire to cool gently; io will you have abeautiiiil Eme"- 
 rald, far harder and finer than any of the former, becaufe 
 it has lels Lead. . 
 
 VIIL An Obfervatio:i. 
 
 If you h;u'e not a Potters Furnace near at hand, you 
 may contrive one your iclf, which may hold 20 Cruci- 
 bles at once, 0^ as many diftering Matters and Colors, 
 fo that one Labour may ferve for many Works : but in 
 hcatnig your Furnace, you ought to uic dry hard Wood, 
 (as in boiling the Glafs) and continue the Fire 24 hours ; 
 111 wliixh fpace your Work ought to be finillicd, but for 
 1. .. certainty 
 
Ghap. 1 $ . Pafiesfor an Orient d GrAnat. 7S9 
 
 certainty fake , you may continue the Fire for 6 or 8 
 hours longer, and then it will be boiled enough; which 
 being cold, and poliilied at the Wheel, and let with a 
 foil in Gold, will exceed the true Oriental Emerald. 
 
 C H A P. XV. 
 
 Pajles for an Oriental Granat, 
 
 \. A Pafie for an Oriental Granat. 
 
 -^ R Rock Cryftal prepared (in cap.^. feci, p.) |i;. 
 Minium '^vj. Manganefe prepared gr. xvj, Zaffer prepa- 
 Tedgr.ij. all being in Pouder, mix them, put the whole 
 into a Crucible, which cover and lute, and proceed as 
 direded in cap. i^.jeEl. 3. aforegoing : fo will yeu have 
 a Granat as fine and refplendent as the tmly Oriental. 
 
 II. Another deeper Oriental Granat. 
 
 Bt Rock Cryftal ut fnpra ^y. Mininm |vfs. Manga- 
 nefe prepared (in cap. i^.feEl. 1 .) gr. rv. all being in Pou- 
 der, mix them well together, and wholly proceed asdi- 
 red^ed in cap. i^.feB:.':^. only leave more empty fpacc in 
 the Crucible, becaufe the Mafs here rifes more ; fo will 
 you have not only a deeper, but a fairer and more beau- 
 tiful Oriental Granat than the former ; which poUlTi, &c. 
 
 III. A Pafie making yet a fairer Granat. 
 
 IV Rock Cryftal m jupra |i;. Minium or rather Ver- 
 milion, in fine Pouder ^vj. Manganefe of Piedmont pre- 
 pared gr.xxx\7. Zalfer prepared gr. iv. mix all well to- 
 gether, and put them into a Crucible, leaving a greater 
 ipace than in any of the others, becaufe the Matter rifes 
 rhore, and proceed exadly as in cap. 14. /^ff. 3. fo wiljL 
 you have a very fine Granat, more beautiful than any 
 of the former. 
 
 IV. An Obfervation. 
 
 There are feveral lorts of Granats, ( as there are of E- 
 meralds and other Gems) both Oriental and Occidental, 
 feme deeper than others, which Jewellers and Gold- 
 fmiths know how to diftinguifti by fetting them on Sil- 
 ver Foils : but this is to be noted, That a Granat is very 
 JiKc to a Carhmcle, for both being expofed to the Sun, 
 
 they 
 
7^ Polygraphices. Lib. X. 
 
 they give the color of liye burning Coals, which is the 
 exa<3 color of Fire, being a mean between Red and 
 Yellow. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 Faftes for ah Oriental Jacymh. 
 
 I. A Pa(ie for a fair Jacynth. 
 
 ^ Vn. Rock Cr>'(tal Pouder Cf*ffftpr^J 5ij. Minium 
 ^v. Sublimate |fs. Verdigrife fine gr. xlviij. Leaves of 
 Silver N°. xii. all being made into fine Pouder in a Brafs 
 Mortar, ana fearced thro' a fine Sieve, mix them well to- 
 gether and put into a Crucible, \vhich cover with ano- 
 ther, and well lute them ; boil and purify in a Glafs- 
 houfe Furnace for 1 2 hours : take it out, and being cold, 
 pouder and fearce it again, and put it into a new Cru- 
 cible, covering and luting it well, and fet it again in a 
 Glafs-houfe Furnace for 24 hours 5 and afterwards 1 2 
 hours more in the Annealin^ Furnace : when cold, tak€ 
 out the Mafs, cut and polilli it, and it will be of a de- 
 licate Jacynth color. 
 
 II. Another fairer Jacynth. 
 
 '^ Of our Cryliil in Pouder (in cap. p. feB. p.) ^xj. 
 Afinjur^ ^vj. Verdigrilc fine S'fs. mix all well together, 
 being made into Pouder, in a Brafs Mortar, and fear- 
 ced : put them into a Crucible, cover and lute it, and 
 proceed exadJy as in the former ; lo will your Gem be 
 admirable. 
 
 III. Another Oriental Jacynth. 
 
 R Rock Cryltal C»^ff*praj ^ij. Minium ^vj. Arfenick 
 prepared as for the Topa-c ^ii. Vitriol calcined to rednefs 
 |ij. all being made into a Pouder in a Brafs Mortar and 
 learced, proceed as diredlcd in feU:. i . above ; fo will 
 you have a very fine rcddilh yellow Jacynth, fuch as are 
 the truly Oriental. 
 
 IV. To make Jargons of Avcrnia C^hich are called, 
 faJfe Jacynthsy nhen tloey are of an ill color) to he red and 
 like tKe trne natural Jargon. 
 
 Make a Pouder of equal parts of purified Sal Armoni- 
 
 ack. 
 
Chap. 1 7. Vafiesfor Artifcial Pearls. 791 
 
 ack and Tartar calcined to wtiiteliefs ; being in fine 
 Pouder, mix them wfll, and put your Jargons into sl 
 Crucible , laying them S'. S. S. beginning and ending 
 with the Pouder : put the Crucible into a good Coal 
 Fire, but not lo hot as to melt the Stones, but only to 
 be red hot, that they may be only penetrated by the 
 Pouder : then let it cool, and you will have your Jargons 
 very fine, and of a red and Ihining color like a Jacynth, 
 but fiill as good as tlie beil colored Jargons. 
 
 C H A P. XVII. 
 
 Pajles for mahiftg Artificial Pearls, 
 
 I. *Tp/f £ fr/} ivayy to imita:e Oriental Pearl. 
 
 fk Thrice dillilled Spirit of Vinegar ftij. Vtnux 
 Turpentine Itj. put all into a Glafs Cucurbit with its 
 Head and Receiver, luting well the Joynts ; and in a 
 gentle Sand heat draw oft" the Vinegar. Put this Vine- 
 gar into another Glafs Cucurbit, in which hang quan- 
 tities of Seed Pearl (hung on a fmall Silver Wyre, and 
 done about with a piece of very fine Silk : put on the 
 Cucurbit a blind Head, lute it well, and digeft 14 days 
 inB.M. lb will the heat elevate the Fume';, and make 
 them circulate about the Pearl, bringing them to the 
 Confilkncc oF Palte : then take them and mould them 
 up in what form you pleafe, round or longilh, or Pear- 
 like, and as large as you defire, making them in proper 
 $ilver Moulds : bore them through witli a fmall Silver 
 Wyre or Pin, and fo let them dry a little: thread them 
 again in Silver Wyre, and fetthem in a Glafs clofe co- 
 vered, to dry throughly to a perfe6l hardnefs : then put 
 them into a Giais Matrafs, in a Stream of running Wa- 
 ter for 20 days , and they will come again to their firft 
 Solidity and Strength. Now, to make them Splendid 
 and Oriental, you muft take the Pearls, (hing them on 
 Silk, and hang them in a Glafs Velfel vcherein is Aqua. 
 Jl-fercfirii, i'o they will become humid, fwell and retrieve 
 their Oriental Luftre : take them out of this Water, and 
 put them into a Matrafs, which Seal Hermetically^ and 
 
 fo 
 
792 PclygraphUes, Lib. X. 
 
 fo r>nt it down into the bottom of a Well, leaving it 
 there tor % n lo days: then draw it up, and take them 
 out, and you will find them beaiit-ifuland fplcndid, and 
 as good even asOrental Pearls themfelvea. 
 
 II. The Jfconi way. 
 
 "^ Oriental Seed Pearl q. v. make them into impal- 
 pable poudcr on a Porphyry : diflblve in Aqm Mercurii 
 or ciarified ]uice of Limons, in a Cucurbit in a gentle 
 Sand heat : what Cream or Skum appears at top, care- 
 fully take off as it arifes : take the VclTel from the Fire, 
 let the Matter fettle a little, and decant the Liquor gent- 
 ly into another Glafs Body, and the Pearl will be in a 
 Pa(te at bottom. With this Paftc fill your Silver Moulds, 
 made to what form and bignefs you pleafe, preffing in 
 the Palk (not with your Fingers, but) with a Silver 
 Spatula., foHuit them up 24 hours, after which bore them 
 through Avith a Silver Pin or Wyre, clofe up the Moulds, 
 and put them into an Oven in Barley Dough, which 
 ■when half baked, take out and open, taking away the 
 Pearl ; and then fteep them in the above decanted Li- 
 quor, putting them in and out fevera4 times : clolc them 
 aga'n in their Moulds, and bake them again in like 
 Dough a? before, only let thisbealmoft burnt up before 
 you dra'v it out; fo will your Pearls be well hardned. 
 Open the Moulds and take out the Pearls, ftring them 
 on Silk, and fteep them in Aqna AiercHyii for 14 days; 
 put them into a Glals Body, Rop it clofe, and dry them 
 well in the Sun ; io will they be line and fplendid. 
 
 III. Th( third -ixay. 
 
 R Oriental Seed Pearl ground impalpable q. v. dif- 
 folve it in Alum Water : decant the clear, and the 
 Pearl Pafte will be at bottom : wm'Ti it in diRilled Ra^n 
 Water, and digert it 14 days in Horfc-dungor in B, M. 
 then take out tllc Vclfel, and the Matter being reduced 
 to the Confiitencc of a Paiie, form it in your Silver 
 Moulds, bore them with a Silver W^Te or Pin, firing 
 them on a fiiie Silver Wyre, and hang them in a dole 
 fiopt Glals Alcmbick, that the Air may not fpoil them : 
 thus dryed, Silver them one by one with Leaves of Silver ; 
 fplit up a Barbie, lay them m it without touching one 
 another; dole up its bod/, which put in Palle of Bar- 
 ley Meal, and bake it with a Batch of Bread, and no 
 more : draw it out, and let them dry ; if they be not 
 
 hard 
 
Chap. 1 7 . PAJies for Artifcial Pearls, 795 
 
 hard enough, you imi{t bake them again. To give them 
 Tranlparency and Splendor, firlt heat them, and then 
 cool them in the following Water, repeating this heat- 
 ing and cooling 6 or 7 times. Rj Seed Pearls fv;. Li- 
 tharge of Silver, Nitre, Roch Alum, ana ^u Waters;./. 
 boil over a gentle Fire 2 or 3 hours ; and the Water is 
 prepared for the former Work. But, if yet your Pearls 
 Ihould not be hard enough, you muft once more bake 
 them in the following Parte, ^i Impalpable Pouder of 
 Lapis CaUminaris ^ij. Oil of Vitriol |ij. Water of Whites 
 of Eggs ^ij. mix all in a Retort, luting thereto a Re- 
 ceiver ; diftil to drynefs in a Sand heat, and you will 
 have a Spirituous Water ; with which and Barley Meal 
 or Flower, make a Parte, in which put your Pearls, and 
 bake them as before ; fo will they be^very hard, and rc^ 
 fume their original Orient Beauty. 
 
 Ohfervations. 
 
 tV. To make the Aqua Mercurii afore-mentioned. 
 
 13i Putty or Tin calcined very fine and pure |j. Quick- 
 filrcr purified 5ij. mix and make an Amalgama : wadi\ 
 this with fair Water till it comes off clear and colorlefs : 
 then dry it perfectly, put it mto a Matrafs, with fuch a 
 degree of heat as is neceifary for Sublimation : when 
 fublimed and cold, take out the Sublimate, to which 
 add Venetian Corrofive Sublimate |i. grind them well to- 
 gether on a Porphyry : put them into another Matrafs, 
 clofe it very Avell and fink it all over in a Veifel of Wa- 
 ter 5 lb in a lliort time the whole Mafs will be refolved 
 into Water : this filter into a Glafs Receiver, and coa- 
 gulate on a gentle Sand heat to a crvrtahne Subftance: 
 this reduce in a Mortar to a very fine pouder, which 
 learce thro' a fine Sieve, put it into a Matrafs, flop it well 
 and dig«(t in B. M. to be refolved into Water, which 
 keep for life. 
 
 V. To whiten and make Oriental j ill-colored Pearl, fucJr 
 Ai arefpottedj dnll, browny red, or of a dark yellow. 
 
 This is performed, i . By cleanfmg and foaking thein 
 in Bran W^ater made by boiling two handfuis of WheaC 
 Bran in a quart of Water ; and the Pearls being rtrung, 
 to put them into a third part of this Water almort boil- 
 ing hot, letting them lye therein till almoft cold ,• and 
 
 then 
 
794 l^olygrAphkts, Lib. X. 
 
 then gently to rub them with your Hands ; and repeat- 
 ing this Work with tlie otlicr two thirds of the VVater 
 remaining. 2. By putting them in fair Water Blood 
 warm, and waihing them clean in it from the Bran 
 Water, and drying them (without handling) on a Sheet 
 of white Paper. 3. By fteeping them 24 hours in the 
 former Mercury Water. 
 
 VI. Othtr veays to Whiten and Cleanfc thew. 
 
 I. Bi Impalpable Pouder of Alabafter, and rub the 
 Pearl very gently with it ; and let them remain in it for 
 fbme day?. 2. Impalpable Pouder of white Coral or 
 Chalk Avill do the fame thing. 5. Tartar calcined white 
 to rub them withal, and lay them for Ibme time in it, 
 is very efFe6tual. 4. Bay or He of May Salt diflbhxrd, 
 filtered and coagulftted, then dryed and ground fmall, is 
 a fmgular thing for cleanfmg and blanching of Pearl, 
 rubbing them therewith for fomc confiderable time. 
 
 VII. The natural Oriental Pearls are generated in a Fi/hj 
 Tvhofe Shell is Mother of Pearly "and they are found in the 
 Eajt^ the belt and mort beautiful being of a Silver white 
 and exceedingly fplendid, being found in the Perfian 
 Gulph, about the Iflc of Ormm^ Bajfora, &c. and fome 
 in the Wej} Indies nearly as fair. There are Occidental 
 ones alfo found in our Oyhrs, the bell of which are fel- 
 dom of any better color than that of Milk: thefc are 
 found m Europe, not only in the Sea, but in frelh- water 
 River?, and come from Scotland, Bohemia, Silefia, Lorrain^ 
 Frifta, &c, but thofe from Frifia are very fmall. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 Other ways of making JrtificUl Pearls. 
 
 ^ Diflblve Mother of Pearl in Spirit of Vinegar^ 
 then prjEcipitate it with Oil of Sulphur per Campanam, 
 ( not with Oleum Tartar! , for that takes away the Splen- 
 dor ) which adds a Luflre to it ; dry the Precipitate, and 
 mix It with Whites of Eggs, of which Mais you may 
 make Pearls of what iargeuefs you pleafe, which betorc 
 •6 they 
 
Chap. 1 8. Of making Artificial Pearls, 795 
 
 they t)fc dry, bore through with a Silver Wyre ; fo will 
 you have Pearls fcareely to be difcerned from thofe 
 which are truly natural. 
 
 II. Thefecond way. 
 
 Bi Chalk, iput it into the Fire, letting it lye till it 
 breaks : grind it impa^able, and mix it with Whites of 
 Eggs ; of which ferm Pearls, boring them as aforefaid ; 
 dry them, then wet and cover them with Leaf Silver. 
 
 III. The third way. 
 
 9i prepared Crabs Eyes ground into impalpable pou- 
 der, and with Glaix make Pearls ; which bore as afore- 
 faid ; dry them, and boil them in Cows Milk ; then in 
 the Shade (free from Duft) dry them wellj they will 
 pleafe. 
 
 IV.Thefoftrthvpay. 
 
 "B? Potters Earth, and make them of what form you 
 pleafe: dry them in the Sun, or in the ^entle heat of a 
 Furnace : then wet them with Glair of Eggs, lightly co- 
 lored with Bole Armoniack, and cover them with Leaves 
 of Silver, being firrt wet with Water : when they are 
 dry, polilli them with a Tooth, and they will be Orien- 
 tal. Then take bits of Parchment, arid wafli them in 
 warm Water till the Water grows fomewhat thick, boil 
 and ftrain it, and ufe it warm : then falten each Pearl 
 through its hole upon a fine piece of Wyre, and plunge 
 them into the Water of Parchment, taking them out a- 
 gain : then turn them round, that the glewy Liquor may 
 equally cover them : thus the Silver Whitenefs will the 
 better Ihiae through, fo that the Pearls will feem to be 
 truly natural, and being compared, will rather exceed. 
 
 V. The fifth way. 
 
 Calcine Mufcle and Snail Shells in a Crucible till they 
 are very white, even as Snow; with Glair make Pearls, 
 which bore byfeB. i. dry them in the Sun, dip them in- 
 red Wine, dry them again, and they will be fair. 
 
 VI. The ftxth way. _ 
 
 5i Sublimate |ij. TinGlafs|;. mix them, and fiib- 
 lime them together, and you will have a Sublimate not 
 inferior to the beft Orient Pearls in the World ; of which, 
 with Glair, you may form what you pleafe 1 
 
 VII. Thejeventh way.^ 
 
 ft Any of the aforefaid Particulars, and mix them 
 (infiead of Glair) with Varniili O^^de of Gum 
 
 Animate 
 
79^ Pofygraphices. Lib. X. 
 
 ^nma and the ^Icool of Wine ) of which make Pearls i 
 thcfewill in allRefpcdls be like the natural; for thcle 
 win no more difTolve in Water than the truly natural; 
 which all thole that are made of GUir of Eggs are una- 
 voidably fubie6l to. 
 
 VIII. The eis^hth vpay.^ 
 
 After DifTolution, Prxcipitation, Edulcoration, Sicca- 
 tion and Formation, put the Pearls into a Loaf of Breads 
 and bake it in the Oven with other Bread fo long, till 
 the Loaf is much burnt : then take them out and walh 
 them, firlt in good Juice of Limons, then in clear Spring 
 Water; and they will be as fair as the truly nauiral. 
 Or, after baking, give them to Pidgeons to eat, keeping 
 them clofe up, and in the Dung you will find the Pearl 
 exceeding fair : where note, you mu(l give the Pidgeons 
 nothing to eat in 3 days time. 
 
 IX. The ninth way. 
 
 AfterDiiTolutionof fmall Oriental Pearls in Juice of 
 Limons, make the form thereof with clarified Honey, 
 luoirtning your Hand with Aqua Mellls : this done, per- 
 k€t them as before. 
 
 X. The tenth way. 
 
 ^ Filtratcdjuiceof Limons, Ponder of Pearl, of each 
 |v;. Talck f i. put them into a Glafs, and (bp it clofe, 
 fet it 15 days in Horle-dung, and it will be a white 
 Pafte ; of Avhich form Pearls, bore them, and dry them 
 in the Sun ; at lalt in Pafte of Barley Meal ft//^. a Bar- 
 ky Loaf) 4 Fingers thick, ftick the Pearl fo that they 
 may not touch, ftop the holes, and cover them with 
 Pafte : fet it into an Oven and bake it with Bread, and 
 you will find them hard and clear. 
 XL The eleventh way. 
 
 Having formed them of the Matter intended, bored 
 and dryed them, put them into Quick-filver, fet over a 
 glowing heat, ftirring them well about, tliat the Quick-^ 
 filver may ftick to them : then dip them into Glair of 
 Eggs upon a glowing heat, and they are done ; or be- 
 ing dry, boil them in Linfeed Oil, and walh them in 
 warm Water. 
 
 XIL The twelfth way. 
 
 Til Pearl ^iij. prepared Salt 5;. filtrated Juice of Li- 
 mons, lo much as will cover them 4 Fuigers breadth : 
 let it iUnd lb long till it be a Pafte ; the Glais being 
 
 very 
 
Chap. 1 8 . Of miking Artificial Pearls. 797 
 
 very clofe rtopped, fliakc all together 5 or 6 times a day ,• 
 and when it com^s to Pafte, put it into A Glafs with 
 ftrong Spirit of Vinegar, and lute another Glais over it j 
 digefl: it 3 Weeks in a cool place under the Earth fo long, 
 till all be diflblved : then mix it with a little Oil of 
 Eggs or Snail-water, till it be like Pearl m color : then 
 put this Pa(k into Silver Moulds, and clofe them up for 
 8 days; after which take them out, and bore them by 
 JeEi. I. and put them again into the Mould for 8 days : 
 this done, boil them in a Silver Porringer with Milk : 
 Jaftly, dry them upon a Plate in a warm place, where 
 neither Wind nor Duft may come, and they will be 
 much fairer than any Oriental PcarL 
 
 XIII. The thirteenth Tvay. 
 
 After the Preparation of the Matter in Juice of Lii- 
 mons or Spir. Nitrij with clean Hands make them into 
 Pal^c, and waCh them in diiHUed Water; which put 
 into edulcorate Calx of Silver, and digeit in Horfe-dung 
 for a Month ; fo will they be fair and very Oriental. 
 
 XIV. The fourteenth way. 
 
 Dilfolve the Matter in Spir. Nitri^ ( which let over- 
 top it a Fingers breadth ) in a Glafs Gourd, till all be 
 incorporated into one Body ; which put into Silver 
 Moulds which have holes through them, and having 
 itood one day, bore them through the holes as they lye 
 in the Mould, with a Silver Needle : being quite dry, 
 take them out, put them into a Glafs clofe covered in 
 the Sun, till they be quite dry : then put them upon a 
 Silver Wyre, and let them lye covered in their own Fat 
 (that is, that fatty Subltance which fwims on the top 
 of the Menjirmm in their Diffolution ) fo long, till they 
 are very fair ; then being Itrung, put them into a Glafs 
 'E^g, and let them itand 9 days in Digeftion, and they 
 will be as fair as the natural. 
 XV. The fifteenth Wiiy. 
 
 ■R Tobacco-pipe Clay, of which form little Beads, 
 (hyfe5t. 14.) dry them in the Sun, and burn them in a 
 Potters Furnace, then cover them with Bole Armoiiiack, 
 tempered with Whites of Eggs ; being dr^^, dip thnii m 
 Water, lay on Le.if Silver; which dry again, and po- 
 lilli them with a Tooth : then take clean Shavings of 
 Parchment, cut fmall, and walhed well with w irm 
 Water : boil them in a new Pot with a fiow Fire, cill 
 
 I i i they 
 
79^ Polj/grAfhices» Lib.X. 
 
 ihey become fomewhat thick, (train it ; and being warm, 
 put in the Pearl upon a Needle or fine Wyre, that the 
 hole niay not be ftopt, take them out, turn them round, 
 that the Water or Glew may not Ibttle in one place, 
 dipping them lo often (drying them every time) till they 
 be thick enough, and they will appear full as fair as the 
 truly natural. 
 
 XVI. The ftxteenth way. 
 
 IJi The impalpable and Snow-white Calx of Taick, 
 and with our belt Varnilh make a Palte ; of which form 
 Pearl?, and bore them wiih a Silver Wyre, on which 
 let them dry: this done, make a Mixture of the Alchool 
 of the incomparably pure red diaphorctick Mercury, 
 Calx of Talck aforelaid, llicll Gold and Silver, (in lib. 
 2. cap. 21. feH.\,) in a ju(t and due proportion, (as by 
 many Tryals you may find out ) in which roul your 
 Pearl? till they be all over pcrfe6tly covered, then varnilh 
 them with our aforefaid Varniili, which let dry accord- 
 ing to Art, and if need be, polilh with the impalpable 
 pouderof Putty and W^atcr. 
 XVII. The Jeventecnth vfay, 
 
 1^ Mercury and the fineit Pewter, of each itj. make an 
 Ama'gama, which waOi lo well till the blacknefs is 
 gore : luake it into little Cakes, and lay them on a 
 Marble Si one : then take Melcury fublimatc in very fine 
 poudcrlf.i;. and Itrew it upon the Cakes, put them on 
 a Glafs Diib, and let them ii; a very moilt Cellar todif- 
 folve into an Oil, which rectify by aGlalsHcimin Bal- 
 n;o M^rria, and lb there will be drawn off by a gentle 
 Pile a Mercurial Water. Then take of the belt fmali 
 Oriental Pea.ls ^j. put them into the Mercurial Water, 
 and in 2 or 3 days they will be reduced to a Palie, 
 which, in a Silver Mould, you may form into Pearls oi' 
 what bignels you pleafc. At the lame time you inuft 
 hole them with a Silver Wyre : then put them, when 
 they are moulded, into a new Crucible, but io that they 
 touch not'one another ; the top of the Crucible being 
 we A covered and luted clofc ; lo fct them in a Glals- 
 inakeri^An.calingFurn lectin they be ver^-hard, whicli^ 
 will be. ii- a liiiie tin. v.-. Afterwards make a Pye of 
 Flower, let it he vcrv thick, and take the hardncd Pearls, 
 putting than on a Silver Nv'yre, and fo fix them in the 
 r J e, that they touch not any part of it, nor one another. 
 
 Lalliy, 
 
Chap. I S. Of making Artificial Pearls, jc^c^^ 
 
 Lartly, put the Pye, made ciofe up, into an Oxtw ot 
 Bakers Houflnold Bread, and let the Pye itmd all the 
 time tliat the Bread is baking; ; after -".vhich you ^vill 
 find the Pearls to be as well colored as the belt Ori-' 
 ental. 
 
 XVIII. The eighteenth way to make .Artificial P^arU. 
 ■Ri The bcft Spir. Nitri ^\j. corrofive Sublimate ^(i?. 
 
 mix, diffolve, and let it boil a little on a Afh heat ; take 
 it from the Furnace, let it cool, and limd in the Vef^ 
 fel to the open Air 2 or 3 Nights, and it will llioot intd 
 Cryllals very fair ; wain them in fair Water twice, to 
 free them from the A.F. and only the Cvyltals remain. 
 Put the Veffel with thefe Cryttals for Ibme days into 
 Horfc-dung, till they dilfolve into Water ; which keep ' 
 for Life. Then take Oriental Pearls, put them into 4 
 courfe Linnen Bag, tying it with a Thread a crofs, al- 
 lowing them good ftore of room : hang this Bag in ths 
 Neck of a Veliel, in the bottom whereof is Juice of Li- 
 mons or Lime Juice: let it boil for 6 hours, fo that 'the 
 Fumes may go about the VelTel ,• take out the Bag, and 
 you will find the Pearls foft as Wax, and in a kind of 
 ralte. Have ready a Silver Mould, and your Pearls be- 
 ing in it, bore a hole with a Silver Needle j putthenuo 
 harden in a VelTel of Glals, fo as they may neither touch 
 the Glafs, nor be expofed to the Air ; afterwards put 
 them for 8 days in the above-faid Water, then change 
 the Water, and let them lye 8 days longer in more of 
 the lame VVater, to give them a Luilre : after which tak? 
 them out, and dry them well upon Glafs. 
 
 XIX. The nineteenth way to make Artificial Pearls. 
 
 Bi The faired Seed Pearl, bruiie them, and diilolve 
 them in Alum Water ; this is all the Secret : make them 
 iinto a Palte, and waih it gently with fonie diif:lied 
 Water : afterwards make it up into a Palte of a good 
 body with Bean Flower Water, ai-id digclt in Dung for 
 15 days. Now, havmg the Cojiliiteiicj o': PaRe ij) a 
 ■ Silver Mould, form it into Pearls, and pierce them with 
 fmall Silver W^yre : hang them in an Alembick dole 
 itopt , that the Air may not alter th^m : after which 
 roiil each one a part in Leaf Gold, ( or Leaf Silver) cleave 
 a Barbie in the middle, and put them th.erein : make a 
 Parte of the faid Barbie with Wheat Flower, and bake it 
 in an Oven as you bake Bread. If they liave not Lultre 
 
 111 2 eiKuek 
 
8oo PolygTAfhicts. Lib. X. 
 
 enough, take fomediftilled Water, and pouder of Pearl 
 §vj. Salt-petre ^i. Roch Alum and Litharge of Silver ^i;. 
 the Pearls being made, you lliall heat them a little, and 
 quench or cool tliem in this Compofition, then dry and 
 wafh them, repeating this 5 or 6 times. Then, to har- 
 den them, take L^/);.f G?/4w/;j^r/V in pouder, Vitriol, of 
 each ^i. Glair of Eggs ^./. mix, anddiftill fromthema 
 clear Water ; which, with fine Barley Flower, make a 
 Parte of, in which put your Pearls, to be baked in an 
 Oven. 
 
 XX. Tke twentieth rcay. 
 
 IJi Pure Chalk freed from all its Groflfnefs and Sand, 
 make a Parte thereof, and form it into Pearls in a Mould 
 for that purpofe; pierce them thro' with a fmall Silver 
 Wyre, and dry them in the Sun or in an Oven : Ih'ing 
 them'on a Silver Wyrc, color them over lightly with fine 
 Bole diluted in Glair of Eggs, wiiii a Pencil and fair 
 Water, and apply Leaf Silver over all and let them dry : 
 which di:ne, burnilL or polilli them with x Woolf's or 
 Boar's Tcoth till they Ihine well. To give them the true 
 color J Boil Parchment or f'^ellom Shavings Casing firji clean 
 Tx/.ijhi in rearm Water) in Spring Water to a Gleiv or fit 
 thicknef, [Iraining it nhilji hot. In this Giew, bein§ warm 
 and on a flat Veflel, dip your String of Pearls, lo as all 
 may be done equiilly over, and then let thcmclr)'. If 
 they be not yet pertedt, dip them once more ; io will 
 they have a very fine and traniparent Whitenefs, a cer- 
 tain Darknefs within, and a Luihe without, which 
 perfects t'lcm, and brings them to the Beauty of fine 
 and real Pearls ; but in this lart Cafe, if inftead of this 
 Glew you dip or varniili theBeads after they are filvered, 
 with a Avhitc Vavniili dcfcribed in the next Book, and 
 fo poiirti them, they v/ill not only be fairer, but more 
 durable, like true Pearl. 
 XXL To Whiten Pearls. 
 
 I^ Common and Roch Alum \\j. Solomon's Seal ^\j. 
 Caiviphir ffs. dillil therefrom a clear Water, and reai- 
 fy it, and ule it with a foft fine Linncn Cloth. Or thnr^ 
 Tahich is betirr. Take white Salt It;, confound^ Water, 
 Alcohol ot Wine, ofeach^xij. Lime, Eggs, of each |i. 
 Bean Flower ^fs. mix and diftil them. Or th.n, Wafii 
 them in a Lixivinm of burnt Tartar, and keep them on 
 a warm Stove. Or thtfs, Take Water a quart, Wheat 
 
 Bran 
 
Chap. 1 9. Pafksfor Oriental Rubies^ Src. 801 
 
 Bran 2 handfuls : boil, and then decant half the Water ; 
 and in a white Ware Porringer, in which lliall be the 
 Pearls ftrung, pour in the laid Bran Water, and let 
 them lye till the Water is almolt cold, that yoii may 
 nib them gently with your Fingers till the Water is per- 
 fed^ly cold : caft away that Water and put on frelh ; 
 and thb Work fo often repeat till your Pearls are very 
 pure and fair : at la(t put in fome of the faid Bran Wa- 
 ter warm, and clear the Pearls without rubbing or touch- 
 ing them ; which repeat the fecond time'; and fo put 
 the faid Pearls, without touching or unrtringing them, 
 upon white Paper ; put them in a Cellar without cover- 
 ing them, letting them remain there 24 hours. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 Pafies for Oriental Rubies and Carbuncles. 
 
 I. 
 
 Pyijhi for an Oriental Ruhie. 
 9i Of the Pafte (in cap. '^.fe^. 22.) ^k. Crocus 
 Martin (in cap.6.feU.j.) of our Vitriol (forac lay Mer- 
 cury) calcined, ad Rubedinem, Sal Gem, ana'^v. fine 
 Verdigrife lijfs. all being in fine pouder and well mixed 
 together, put it into a Crucible, which cover and lute : 
 put it in a Glafs-houfe Furnace for 3 days ; after that 
 take it out, and put it in an Annealing Furnace for 12 
 hours, to cool gradatm ; lb Avill your Matter be of a fine 
 Rubie color, w^hich cut, poliib, O^'c, 
 
 . II. Pajhsfor ABaUfhihie. 
 
 ^ Of the Parte (in cap. 5. feB. 22.) 5xi;'. Crocm Mar- 
 tisj Vitriol (but fome fay Mercury) calcined ad Ruledi- 
 newy ana ^j. S.ilGem ^(s. all being in very fine pouder, 
 mix them w^ell together, and proceed as in the former 
 SeSlion; fo will you have a Mais of the fine color of a 
 Balafs Rubie, wMiich is very bright, refembling a Ver- 
 milion and Crimfon Rofe, being mixt of a natural Red 
 and a Sky-color. 
 
 HI. Pajlefor a Carbuncle. 
 
 Bj Of the Palie (in cap. 5. /"ff. 22.) ^x. Cecils Martis 
 (in cap. 6. Jed. 10.) |fs. mix aU well together, being in fine 
 
 lii 3' pouder, 
 
S©4 Tolygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 poLider, put into a good Crucible, cover and lute it 
 well : put it into a Glals-houfe Furnace for 3 days, put- 
 ting it^radatim into a Ihongcr and (Ironger Fire, till it 
 is in the rtronged: : then taking out the Crucible, take 
 the Mafs out, and grind it very fine in a M.irble Mortar 
 with its a]ual weight of Sal Gem ; put it into another 
 Crucible, cover and lute it as before, and put it into 
 the fame degrees of Fire gradatim as before : let it ftand 
 24 hours in a good F iwon ; then take it out, and put it 
 T 2 hours in an Annealing Furnace to cool gently : break 
 the Crucible, and you will find the Mais of a hue Car- 
 buncle color ,; which being cut and polilhed at the 
 Wheel, will fecm lo be per.cdl. 
 
 IV. A Pujie for Carbuncle s^ much more glorioHs than- 
 the former. 
 
 Bj Of the Pafle ( in cAp. <,.fe^. 22.) ^x. Gold calcined 
 Ij. a1! being in fine pouder, mix them well together, and 
 put it into one or' the Itrongelt Crucibles, not letting it 
 be half full : cover and lute it well; and when dry, put 
 it into a Glals-houfe Furnace for 3 days, bringing it 
 nearer and nearer to the Itrongert Fire by degrees : after 
 3 days take out the Pot, and put the Mafs into a Marble 
 Mortar, make it into impalpable pouder, to which add 
 an equ.1l weight of ^^/ Gem in fine pouder alfo : mix all 
 well together and fearce thro' a fine Sieve, the better to 
 mix tliem. Put this pouder into a new (hong Crucible, 
 lb big as not to be half full, cover, lute and drjMt, and 
 put It into the fune Furnace as before, bringing it nearer 
 10 the firoiigert Fire gradatm^ Avhere let it Hand 10 hours : 
 then take out your Crucible and put it into the Anneal- 
 ing Furnace, letting it cool for 12 hours. Break the 
 Crucible and you will find the Mafs tinged of a noble 
 Carbuncle color, the inoft lively, refplendent and glori- 
 ous that any Stone can be endued withal. This cut and 
 polill-i at plcafure, it is illullrious beyond all Comparifon 
 with other Gems. 
 
 V. The Calcination of Gold for the former Wori. 
 
 ^ Fine did in little bits ^i- AqnaRegis^n]. mix and 
 dilfolve : then add to it Qiiick-filver purified and pal's'd 
 thKo" Leather |iv. lb will the Gold precipitate, joining 
 it felf to it : when the A.R. is clear, fo as that it has no 
 inorc Gold in it, dccaiit it off, and waOi the Precipi- 
 tate with warm Water, to take off the Salts ; the Pre- 
 cipitate 
 
Chap. 19* Pafies for Orkmdl Rubies y^c, 805 
 
 cipitate being dr^'ed, add to it Flores SHlphnm a.n equal 
 weight, mix them well together, put all into a Crucible, 
 covering it with another Crucible, having a hole bored 
 in its bottom, lute them together and dry them : put 
 them into a circulary Fire, which give them by degrees 
 for 4 hours, the Crucibles being the lart hour covered all 
 over with Coals, which let kindle and cool agam. Open 
 the Crucible, and you will find the Gold calcined : a- 
 malgamate it now with frefli Qiiick-filver fiv. adding 
 to It Flores Sulphurs |v. mix all well, put it into a Cru- 
 cible as before, luting, drying and calcming in like man- 
 ner 5 and this Work repeat the third time : after which 
 put it into a deep white glazed Earthen Baion or Gaily 
 Pot : affuie thereon Spirit of Wine fo as to over- top it 2 
 inches, which deflagrate ; then edulcorate with warm 
 Water diftilled, and dry it ; fo have you a pure fine 
 impalpable Calx of Gold, which keep for the Purpofe* 
 afore-mentioned. 
 
 VI. The Ruble is a truly naiural dfw, D'uphanotn ani 
 very Radumt^ of the color of Blood, Scarli^^ an.i tranfpa-^ 
 rent Lacca, having about the edges of its Fire, a lictle Ar 
 zure color, and is found in the tile of Ceilon, and in the 
 River Pegu, in a Rocky Matter of a Rofie color ; which 
 Rock Matter, if it is tranfparent, yields theBalafs Ru- 
 bie ; Rubies, by reafon of their Finenefs and Largenels, 
 have been taken for Carbuncles, fo that fome have mi- 
 ftook them one for another, but they are truly two dif- 
 ferent Subftances. 
 
 VII. As for the Carbmcle, whether it be a Gem found 
 in the Bowels of the Earth, is yet undetermined : the 
 moil credible Authors affirm the contrary, agaiiiif ail tliat 
 the Ancients have faid of it ; for that no luch tiling is 
 now to be found in the World ; and iome boltly lav, 
 that it is a Stone not at all formed by Nature, but only 
 made by Art ; and that made by Art is far mors preci- 
 ous and glorious, and filled with a more ilUiftrioiis Splen- 
 dor than any Nature can form ; for that by Art you 
 may in a few hours time make fimple Rock Cryftal as 
 valuable as any Stone which Nature can produce, and 
 which fhe fpends fo many Ages in bringing to Pcrccdi- 
 on. And, as we are perfvvaded, (from tiie re iding of 
 Authors) that there is no luch natural Stone as a Car- 
 buncle i fo we believe, that if any fuch be in the World 
 
 1114 indued 
 
So4 Polygrufhices. Lib. X. 
 
 indued with fuch an illuftrious Shining and Glory, that 
 they muft be only the Prod'Ms of Art^ not of Natttre : and 
 fuch a one is this lafl:, which far furpaffes in Beauty 
 Granats, Jacynths, Rahiss, or whatever Nature has yet 
 produced. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Pafies for an Oriental Saphir. 
 
 I. A Pajfefor a Saphirine Color. 
 
 • -^ Bi Rock Cryttal prepared ( in cap. 9. feU. p.) ^Iv^ 
 
 yl///?/«w |ix. Painters blew Smalt gr. lij. all being in 
 
 • fine pouder, put them into a Crucible, cover and lute 
 them well ; put them into a Furnace and boil or bake as 
 'directed in cap. i^. feB. ^. and in other places ; fo will 
 you have a beautiful Violet cobr, drawing near t© 
 
 -Blew. 
 
 II. Another Oriental Saphir. 
 
 Bf Rock Cryfial r«r //«pr^J 5i^- -Min'tHnt ^xij. Z(^er 
 prepared (in f^p. 4. /?f?. 10.) ^i.^i- A^anganefe prepared 
 ^r.xij. all being in fine pouder, mix', and proceed as in 
 •the former ; fo will you have an Oriental Saphir of a 
 pure Violet color, more beautiful than the former. 
 
 III. Another Oriental Saphir muih deeper. 
 
 ^ Rock Cryttal C'i^ f^pra) fiv- Minium |x. Z offer 
 prepared 5i- gr-xxiv. -4i';?«^4«f/f prepared gr.xvj. all be- 
 ing in an impalpable poucler, mix, and proceed as in 
 t'/fp. 14. /^£?. 3. and other places; fo will you have a 
 deeper Oriental Saphir than the former , fomething 
 tending to a Violet, color; which cut, polilli and let in 
 Gold. 
 
 IV. Another Oriental Saphin 
 
 li Of the Paltc in cap.'^.feH. 22. ^x. Calx of Sol (in 
 cap. ip. feet. 5.) ^ij. mix well, and proceed as in cap. ip* 
 ffti. I . io will you have a fair Oriental Saphir. 
 
 V. Another Vinkt Saphir. 
 
 V,t Rock Ciyfhl prepared (in cap.c). />S.p.) ^iv. fine 
 Salt of Tartar' (in cap.p.fcB. 10.) fivfs. Salt of Vitriol 
 j?f?. mix, and proceed as before ; fo you will have a fine 
 Violet Saphir. : • Yl. Another 
 
Chap. 2 1 . IpAJiesfor an Orient d lopAz. 80 % 
 
 . Vl. Another Violet Saphir yet deeper. 
 
 R Rock Cryital utfupra ^iv. of fine Verdigrife ^x. gr. 
 xlviij. of Azure ^j. gr. iv. Sublimate |fs. all being in fine 
 pouder, proceed as in the former j it will be of a very 
 'deep color. 
 
 VII. A blew Saphir of the Male Und. 
 
 15i Rock CryRal pouder ut fupra^w. fine Salt of Tar- 
 tar ^iv. 9;. Salt of Vitriol 5fs. hne Verdigrife gr.xij. A- 
 2ure »r. iv. mix, &c. fo will you have a blew colored 
 Saphir, no lefs agreeable than thofe of the Violet kind. 
 
 VIII. Another excellent Saphir. 
 
 Tb Rock Cryftal nt fupra Iw. fine Salt of Tartar (in 
 cap. p. fe^. 10.} '^w. fine Verdigrife 5x. gr.xlvii;. Azure 
 Ji. gr-iv. all being in pouder, mix, &c. and you'll have 
 ■a very fine Saphir. 
 
 IX. Another admirable Saphir. 
 
 l$t Rock Cryltal ttt fnpra |iv- fine Salt of Tartar ^|. 
 being in pouder, mix well, put it into a Crucible cover- 
 ed and luted : boil 24 hours in a Glafs-houfe Furnace ; 
 then in the Annealing Furnace let it cool 1 2 hours ; fo 
 will you have an admirable blew Saphir j which cut and 
 poliln. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 Fafies for an Oriental Topaz. 
 
 X, A Pajle for an Oriental Topaz.. 
 ' ^ 1^ RockCrylhl pouder (inc4/).p./^^.p.) 5iv. 
 Minium or red Lead in fine pouder ^xiv. mix well toge- 
 ther; put them into a itrong Crucible, leaving it empty 
 about an inch deep, for fear of running over or ftickui» 
 to the Cover of the Crucible^ which will fpoil all ; ana 
 proceed as dire6led in cap. i^.JeB:. 3. fo will you have an 
 admirable Topaz. ■ 
 
 II. Another fine Topaz,. 
 
 '^ Rock CrylUl (ut fupra) 5iv. Native Cinnabar in 
 fubtil pouder |iv. ey£j Ufiinm in fine pouder ^iv. Putty 
 or calcined Tin in fine pouder fxyi, mix well, put all 
 jjito Crucible, wliich cover and lute, and put them ni- 
 
 to 
 
8o6 T^ly^rapbiees. Lib. X. 
 
 to the Furnace for 30 hours, in a Fire n6t too violent, 
 rbecaufe this pouder will eafily melt) and always of the 
 lame degree ot" heat ,• fo will you have a fine Topaz 
 color, &c. 
 
 III. A very fine Topaz,. 
 
 Igi Of the lame Cryital ^iv. Croctu Alartis^k, Mini- 
 um a little : mix, and proceed exadly as in the former. 
 
 IV. Another Oriental Topa^,, 
 
 R Of the Palte in cap. 'y.feH. 22. 5fX. choice Orpiment 
 in fine pouder ^j. mix them well, put all into a Cruci- 
 ble, which cover, lute -vveil and dry : put it into a Glafs- 
 houfe Furnace for 3 hours, and then in the Annealing 
 Furnace gently cool ; cut and polilh it, and it will be a 
 delicate Oriental Topaz. 
 
 V. A Bajlard Topaz, very beautiful. 
 
 R Rock Cryftal atfupra $iv. Minium |xii. fine Salt 
 of Tartar utfupra^ij. fine Verdigrife gr. xvj. all being 
 in fine pouder, mix, and proceed as in a jacynth incap. 
 16. JeEl. I . and you will find your Scone very fine. 
 
 VI. Another Bajlard Topaz,, harder than the former. 
 ?i Rock Cryftal ut fupra 5iv. Vitriol calcined ad Ru^ 
 
 hedinem^'u Salt of Vitriol |fs. fine Verdigrife gr. xvj. fine 
 Salt of Tartar ( in cap.^.fe£i. 10) ^vfs. gr. xvj. all being 
 made into fine pouder in a Brafs Mortar, mix them : 
 put all into a Crucible, which cover with another, lute 
 them ftrongly, dry and put it into the Furnace for 1 2 
 hours ; take it out, cut, polilh, &c. 
 
 VII. It is to be noted, 
 
 I . That the Topaz, of the Ancients, is the very Stone 
 which our Moilerns call a Chryfolite: and the Chryfolite 
 of the Ancients, is that which the Moderns call a Topaz,. 
 2. That Oriental Topaz.' s are indeed the;r:oft hard of all 
 Stones next to the Dia?mnd. 3. That their Color is like 
 Water tinged with 5'^ro» or 7«r;7;fr/«r^, but pure, fhi- 
 ning and c\iaphanous! 4. That fome are found in Europe, 
 but they arc generally loft as Cryftal, having fomething 
 of the Black, with a Golden color. «). But, that if they 
 be of a pure Golden color, they are not to be diftinguilbed 
 from the Oriental, but by their hardncls. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Cha.^' 22. Paftes fir 4» Oriental Jurcoffe. S07 
 
 CHAP; XXII. 
 
 Pafies fir a» Oriental Turcoifi, 
 
 1. X^Afte for a Turcoife. 
 
 ^ B; Of the PaUe in cap. 5. feSi. 22. |x. Z.'fer pre- 
 pared 5;. fine piuified Verdigrife Jfs. all being in fine 
 pouder, mix well together, put it into a Crucible, cover 
 it witli another, lute well and dry : put all into a Glaf*- 
 houle Furnace for 3 hours : then put it into the Anneal- 
 ing Furnace for 1 2 hours to cool genth^ : being cdd, 
 break the Crucible, take out the Mais, cut and poliili it, 
 and it will be a Turcoije like thofe of the Olft Rock. 
 
 II. The N^me of thus S:Dne comes from the place where it 
 raas firfi fofindj viz. Turky : but now it is alfo brought 
 from Perfia and Indodan, or the Eafi Indiesj where it is 
 found in abundance, whofc Color comes much nearer 
 to BlevD than Green ,• and which alfo dilHnguiilies them 
 from thQ Occidental J which are more green and whitilh. 
 
 III. The Oriental are called by the name of Stones of 
 the Old Rock ; the other, Stones of the Nerv Rock, Thic 
 Tnrcoije is a mi^cturc of Blevc, Green and White^ and 
 fomewhat imitates Verdigrije j and it is without doubt, 
 the fined, pureft and moll noble of all Op^- prechas 
 Atones. 
 
 SECT. in. 0/ E N A M E L S. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 of Enamels in general, 
 
 I. *T'i7"£ Matter of Enamel. 
 
 A ^ Lead in Bullets itxxjc. Tin in bits ItA-Kxiij. 
 mix them, and calcine as d\iLtStt^ cap. '^. feci. i. learce 
 the Calx, put it into a glazed Earthen Pot full of Wa- 
 ter; 
 
8o8 Polygrapbiees. Lib. X. 
 
 ter; put it over a Fire, and let it boil a little: take it off 
 the Fire, decant gently the Water into another VclTel, 
 which carries alone with it the fincft or Flower of the 
 Calx: reiterate this till no more Flower will arife : the 
 remaining Calx calcine again as before ; and then with 
 Water extrad its Flower as before. Put thefe Waters 
 into one large Body or Veffel, and over a very gentle 
 Fire evaporate to drynefs. 
 
 II. The Mixture, 
 
 R Of the former prepared Calx ftxx\'. Frit of white 
 Tarfo iearced ibxxv. (incap-i./e^.S. &€.) fine Salt of 
 Tartar (in cap. g.feEi. lo.) ^iv. mix all vcryw ell together 
 in a Pot, and let it ftand in aGlafs-houle Furnace for 
 10 hours ti^meliorate and purify : take it out ~.nd reduce 
 it to an impalpable pquder ; which keep clofc in a dry 
 Glafs for Ufe. Thus is the Matter prepared to receive 
 the Colors, of which we (hall treat in the Chapters fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 III. A fixt incomhijlihle Snlphtr ft}r Compofitions of 
 Enamel. 
 
 Bi Flornnt Snlplmris q. v. put them into a Glafs Cu- 
 curbit luted at bottom ; affiile thereon Oil Olive to fu- 
 pernate 2 inches : put it on a very hot Sand heat for an 
 hour; take it oft", and aflflifc thereon itrong Vinegary fo 
 will the Sulphur prxcipitatc, and the Oil fwim on the 
 top of the Vinegar : decant off this from the Sulphur, 
 and put on more frefh Oil, and do as before, repeating 
 this Work thrice ; fo will you have a fixt Sulphur for E- 
 ramel, but chiefly for red Colors. 
 
 IV. Another fixt incombHfiible SnlphHr. 
 
 J^ Soap-boilers (trong Lye 9. v. put into it Flowers of 
 Sulphur q.f. boil them for a good while ; fo will the Lye 
 cleanle the Sulj)hur from its Foulnefs and Unduofity, 
 and make it fit for our purpofe : decant the Lye from the 
 Sulphur, dry it, and it will be white, fixt and incom- 
 buftible.' 
 
 V. Ngwy the Method which Limners njey uhy AJujt dif- 
 pofw-e of their Colors ; to eftedl ^vhich, nothing more is 
 required, but a lighted Wax Candle and a hollow Pipe 
 of Metal for that purpofe, to make a blaze upon the 
 Matter, to make it malleable and foft ; on which he 
 jnay draw or imprefs the defigned Figures at pleafure. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
Chap. 24. Ihe way of Enamtling. 809 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 The way of EnAmding, 
 
 I. r\ F Difpofing Enamels. 
 
 ^^ They arc not to be promKcuoufly applyed to hll 
 forts of Metal, but according as the Nature of the Me- 
 tal requires : Copper agrees with all thick Enamels, but 
 fpoils the Limpid, unlefs they have a praevious Prepara- 
 tion. Silver agrees with purple Enamel ; fo alfo with the 
 Egmarine,\h.t ^^»rf,andthe Green : all other Colors, both 
 Clear and Opak, difagree therewith. Gold agrees per- 
 fedly with all, as well with the Opak as the Tr an/par enty 
 excepting only the clear Purple, it mightily changing- 
 the color thereof 
 
 II. The Qiiality of the Enamel. 
 
 It ought to be hard and durable ; for that which is fbft 
 ( being full of Lead ) is apt to change color, and eafily 
 becomes fullied and foul. The hardelt is always the 
 bed, and yet even of them fome loofe their color ni the 
 Fire, and fome are more or lefs lively and fparkling : but 
 thofe which we {hall hereafter defcribe in the following 
 Chapters, willhavenoneof thofe Faults; for being per- 
 fectly purified by Fire, they will endure all degrees of 
 Fire without change of Color or Quality. 
 
 III. To make the Enrnace. 
 
 I . It may be either round or fquare, arid made either 
 of Iron or tarth. 2. It muft be hollow in the mi;ldle, 
 to hold a good Char-coal Fire round about the Matter, 
 and over it, to make it melt the better. 3. It muft be 
 fo ordered, that you may eafily take your Matter out and 
 put it in again, as need requires. 4. In this cale, you 
 may for Conveniency fake ufe a Gold-fmith's Muffle, 
 which is a fmall Arch made of Cnicible Earth, almolt 
 like a half Crucible cut longwife : this is to be placed Oii 
 the Plain or Area of the Floor of the Furnace, the open- 
 ing of it lying juil againit the Mouth of the Furnace, to 
 put in and take out the Matter eafily ; over which a 
 fmall Grate is to be placed, but fo as not to touch it, for 
 fear of breaking it. 5. Over this Grate a good Fire is to 
 be made, and fo round about the Muffle, to heat the 
 
 hollow 
 
?io PolygrAphiees. Lib. X. 
 
 hollow very well, under which the Work to be Ena- 
 merd and Painted or Limned is put. 6. If you would 
 make any Effays or Tryals, you may do it on a little 
 Iron Shovel, the eafier to draw out : but making an Ellay 
 of the Ingredients for Enamel, it ought to be a little 
 blade of white Ename) fitttd for the purpoic. 
 
 IV. The Enan ding Fire. 
 
 It ought to be a Reverheratingy or rather a Fire of Sup- 
 pvcjpon, and never to be under the Matter or Work r 
 which thing is eafy to be conceived, and the realbn 
 thereof. 
 
 V. To prepare the Enamel for the AdetaU. 
 
 Take Enamel, ( fuppofe white) ponder it fine, affufc 
 on it a little AqunFon^Sy let it ftand, purify and refine 
 in a Imall Glafs Cucurbit : walli it afterwards often in 
 fair Water, dry it, and keep it in a Glafs cloli: (iopt 
 for Ufe. To make ufe of it, beat it fmall in a Stone 
 Mortar, wetting it with a little Water ; fo fprcad it on 
 the Plates, and put it into tlie Furnace as before. Thus 
 do with ail clear and tranfparent Enamels ; fo will your 
 Materials be al I in a readinefs when you intend to work. 
 
 VI. To prepare the Colors for Enamtl. 
 
 Becaufe Painting on Enamel is the molt glorious of all 
 Painting, you mail: chufe the livelieil: and moft noble 
 Color?, and fuch as will eafily melt and vitrify. What 
 thefe ave, we ihall teach you in the following Chapters; 
 But, for Enameling^ you mull firfl grind them on a Por- 
 phyry with the beit Oil of Spike or Lavender, or mix 
 them with other Matters for tlmt purpofe as you fhall 
 think fit to be mixed with calcined Enamels, and lervc 
 to make up the Paint for Enamel^ mixing them well to* 
 gcther as Paini"ers do on their Pallets. 
 
 VII. To make mixt Colors, ivhen others are wanting. 
 
 I. u4 Grey. It is made Ot a \Vhite mixed with Black. 
 ?. -r^ fair Green. T; k made of a Blew mixed with Yel- 
 low. 5. A fine Violet. It is made ot a Blew and Ilcd 
 mixed together. 4. A Rofe Color. It is made of a Red 
 mixed with a White : and lb 0^ fome others. 
 VIH. The Vfc of Rocailh. 
 
 Moli Artilfe make ufe of this for vHrnilhing their Co- 
 lors, but it has an ill Etfed 5 tor, becaiile of us too 
 much Lead, not pcrfeilly feparated, it diminillies the 
 Life and Beauty of the Work, it always looking dull, 
 
 clpuJy 
 
Chap. 25* To Emmel on Metals. 81 1 
 
 cloudy and tarniflied. But, our Enamel being well re- 
 fined, will produce Works fo fine, beautiful and agree- 
 able, that it is not poflible for any thing in Nature to 
 exceed them. 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 To Enamel on Metals. 
 
 1. Tp HE roay to Enamel on Copper. 
 
 •*- Have a Plate of Copper polilTied or forged very 
 fmooth, and apply your £«4w^/ of the color you intend, 
 both above and under the Plate; put this into the Re- 
 verberatory Furnace, and when you fee it receive the 
 'Polifhing, then draw it forth. Copper takes all thick and 
 dark Enamels J but fuch as are diaphanotu or ■r.i.ifparenty 
 it will not well endure : in this cafe, you miiit fir(t lay 
 a lay of green or black Enamel, and over that Leaf Sii- 
 ver, that it may be able to receive the Enamel you de- 
 fign. For Copper is fo impure, that its Fhf^/es deftroy the 
 Beauty of the Enamel in the Furnace : nor does Enamel 
 ever ftick fo clofely to it, but that it is eafily divided, 
 felled, peeled or broken off j which never happens to 
 the fine Metals. 
 
 II. To Enamel on Gold. 
 
 Have a Gold Plate, (made of fine Gold, becaufe on 
 impure Gold tis Enamel grows dull and ill-colored, ta- 
 king away the Life of the Enamel J which let be a little 
 rifmg, and forged very fmooth ; you mult apply white 
 Enamel on both fides, tho' it is to be wrought bui: on one 
 fide ; but this is neceifary, i . Becaufe the Work is the 
 neater and finer for it. 2. Becaufe, if itAvas Enameled 
 but on one fide, the Fire would fwcll it, and make it 
 rife into Bubbles ; and this it is apt to do when tlie 
 pieces are great, and the Enamel carelefsly laid on : this 
 blilteringand disfiguring of the Work, is avoided by lay- 
 ing the Enamel on both fides : the firlt lay of white Ena- 
 mel remaining fmooth, fcrvesas a Bafisor Field to place 
 all your other Colors on, as we lliall anon fhew. Thick 
 and Opak Enamel muft be dillblved as it were, and 
 
 made 
 
8 1 2 Folygrdphites, Lf b. X. 
 
 made thinner (as in cap. 2^. feci. 5. above) before it can 
 be applyed : as for the Tranjparenr, you need nothing 
 but pure fair Water, and then you mull fprcad it flat, 
 and then border it with the Metal, or not border it, the 
 Field being all Enamel ; but this is troublefome, becaufc 
 the limpid Enamels j as they melt, often mix, and fo 
 confound the Colors, which always happens when the 
 pieces arc finall. But red Enamels do not fo, except by 
 chance, and they generally come jyf/^i^jr;/^ out of the Fire, 
 for as foon as it is applyed, the Gold alters the color; 
 but you may quickly bring it to a perfed Rednejiy by 
 turning it at the mouth of the Furnace when you are 
 taking it out of the Fire, and then it is that the Artift 
 makes it red^ and gives it its true color. And tho' Gold 
 admits of all kinds ot Enamel^ tranfparent or opai, yet 
 bright /7«rf/^ is excepted, bccaufe it is altered by the yel- 
 low color Oi the Gold, and therefore fuccecds not fowell 
 here as on Silver , on which it ought only to be ufed. 
 The way of n'orking of every kind of Enamel^ is alike ; 
 fo that we lliall not make any needlefs Repetitions. 
 III. To Enamel on Silver. 
 Your Plates of Silver muR be forged like thofe of Gold, 
 fmooth and rifln^^ a little from the edges towards the 
 middle ; and having fpread the Enamel all over on both 
 fides, only to qualify the rifmgs and bubblings of the 
 Metal, whicii would ciufe unevennefs and a difagreea- 
 blcnefs on the Surface : you muft put the Plate into your 
 little Rex-erberatory Furnace to melt, and as foon as you 
 fee it polillit, take it out from the Fire. But, as foinc 
 kind of Enamel does not agree with Gol^ fo there is iomc 
 ether fort which agrees not with Silver : Silver makes 
 white Enarr;el to appear yellovp, and therefore you are to 
 make the leaft ufe of y*hite on this Metal, becaufe it be- 
 comes yellQwijh and unpleafing ; but you may make ufe 
 of the jr/vVf underneath the plate, for that it there fen'cs 
 to qualify the rifmgs and bubblings of the Metal in the 
 Furnace. On the contrary, Silver agrees well with 
 BUtX', Egmanne, Green and a bright Pnrple, becaufc the 
 Whitcuds of Silver gives them their true Lultrc and 
 Splendor. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
chap. 26 , Of Painting on EndnteL Z i j 
 
 CHAP. XXVl. 
 
 The Method of Painting on Enamel, 
 
 }. \JO\xi plate of Gold miift be Enameled with White ; 
 -^ whicii done, you mult delineate or dra.n' ( ac- 
 cording to Art) your Dcfign thereon: this done, trace 
 or draw over again with a dark Red. 
 II. This dark Red is thus Ttj.'ide. 
 ^ IJi The Capm Mortimm which remains after the ma- 
 king of y^;^«;t Form, from Vitriol and Nitre, and grind 
 it with Oil of Spike or Lavender ; lb have you a dark 
 Red for the {mrpoie afore-mentioned. Or, It CrocH4 
 Mortis and giind with Oil of Spike or Turpentine j it 
 ivill anfwer the lame end. 
 
 III. The Pidure being perfectly drawn,and the Lmc^ 
 compleat according^ to the Subject, put the Piece or Ta- 
 blet on the Muffle in a Reverberatory Fire, to fix, as h 
 before directed, 
 
 IV.' Then takeout the Plate, and apply the Colors 
 in the fame Method as Limners do, with this only dif- 
 ference, that you m.-^ke the White ground fer\'e for filling 
 up where that Color is required, to let off the heightnings 
 and brightnefs of the Light, as is done in Aiinia^Hre. 
 
 V. And becaufe it makes much to the heightning 
 thereof, f t^i-c. the improving their Light ) in other Culors, 
 you ftall have a mo(i excellent Prefcript for that pur- 
 pofe mcap. 2y.fecl. 3,4. following, which %\'ill fingular- 
 ly ferve upon this occafion. 
 
 VI. The piece being thus finilhed, put it again into 
 the Furnace to fix the Colors; and as Ibon as you per- 
 ceive it to vernilh or polilli, draw it out, Left the Colors 
 fhould mix and fpoil one another ; bur taking out the 
 Work, you may revile it, and this as often as you pleafe, 
 putting It dill every time into the Furnace, to receive its 
 ;urt GlofsorLuftre. 
 
 VII. This way of revifing and ccrre6ting the Tablets, 
 is done by Lmners and Puinten ; who oblen'C, that 
 Pieces are not to be handled till they are welldryed in 
 the Air ; fo in liJie manner thefe in Enamel mulV be let 
 
 K k k aEloir? 
 
Si 4 PolygrAphkts, Lib. X- 
 
 alone till they receive their Compleatment aod Perfedli- 
 on from the rire. 
 
 VIII. This Art o^ P Aiming on Enamel^ is almofl ine- 
 ftimable, for that it is {o wonderfully beautiful, and fo 
 infinitely Lifting, having lb natural a Glofs, and a Glo- 
 ry never to be defaced : and could large Works be done 
 with it, they would be above all Value, bccaufe of their 
 perpetual Luftre. 
 
 IX. And, tho' Painting on Enamel feems to be more 
 difficult than Limning, yet Experience tells us, that it is 
 equally eafy, and that any Hiftory may bc.reprefentcd 
 on Enamel as well as in Limning ; only the Colors are 
 not prepared the fame way : and as in Limning the 
 Work is dryed by the Air ; fo in this o^ Enameling we 
 
 . dry and varij^lli our Enamel-Painting by Fire. 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 Of Milk-white- EnamL 
 
 1. A A'fill-Txhite Enamel. 
 
 f 
 
 9i Of the Mixture (in cap. z^.feB. 2.) ftx. Man- 
 an:fe prepared ^i. DJ. niix and put them together into a 
 *ot to melt and purify over a very quick Fire, which 
 will be quickly done : then.caft it in pure^fair Water: 
 dry it, and put it into the Pot again to melt : repeat this 
 3 tink?, changing the Water. If it is purely white, it 
 is. good; if greeniili, add a little more Aianganeje to it, 
 tin it becomes white as Milk ; then make it up in Cakes, 
 and keep it for life. 
 
 II. Vv'e have in cap. j^.JcEI. 12,1^. (hewed you how ta 
 make Glafs of this color ; here w^ have taught you to do 
 it on Enamel with as much Beauty, which ferves not 
 Only for the Bafis, Ground or Field for Painting upon, 
 but isufcd for the Ornaments of Virginity, the tmblem 
 of Innocence, and the Symbol of Candor and Chaftity. 
 III. A White for Painting on Enamel. 
 For a white Ground to Paint withal, i. R the for- 
 mer white Enamel ground into fine pouder ; this you 
 are to manage with Artifice, to heighten and illuftrate 
 
 your 
 
Chap. 2S, Of Biack Enamel. 81 <l 
 
 ycwr Lights, which is neceffary to be clone in all Colors 
 m MiniatHre. 1. B? the Mixture in r^p. 23. jeih. 2. oc 
 the former white Enamel pouder, cleaiife them with A.F^ 
 wafli, dry, and afterwards grind ^vith Oil of Spike. 
 
 iV. Or ^ly thiu. ^ Fine Putty or Tin calcnied, let 
 it vitrify in a Glafs-houfe Pot with S times as much 
 Cryflal Frit : then pouder it fir.e as we have taught iu 
 cap. 2^. feci. 2. ajid keep it tor Uic. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIIL 
 Of Black Enamel. 
 
 I. A Black Enamel. 
 
 -"• 9i Of the Mijrture (in cap. 2^.f;B. 2.) itvi^ zV- 
 fer prepared fiij. A-fanganefe prepared ^ii.i- being in fine 
 pouder, mix all well together: put them ir.to a glazed 
 Earthen Pot in the Furnace for fome hours : let the Pot 
 be very large, becaufe the Metal will fwell much : when 
 purified, caft it into cold Water, and dry it : put it in- 
 to the Pot again to melt and purify: then, if the Color 
 is good, keep it for Ufe : if nor, you mult put in more 
 or lefs of the coloring Matter, till it is perfect, then make 
 k into Cakes. 
 
 II. Another black Enamel. 
 
 Bi Of the Mixture C^-fypraJ Itvj. Z<^r prepared Cint 
 cap. i^.JeEl:. 10.) Crocm Marin made with Vinegar (in" 
 cap. S.JeEl. 7.) Ferretto (in cap. 6. Je^. 5.) ana f\j. all be- 
 ing in fine pouder, mix them -^vell together, put them 
 into a glazed Earthen Pot m the Furnace to melt and 
 purify: when well digelted, caft it into Water, dry it, 
 and put it into the Pot again-; let it melt and rehnCy 
 then take it out, and make ic up into Cakes. 
 
 III. Another yelvet black Enamel J finer and fairer thm 
 the former. 
 
 Bi Of the Mixture Cnt/fipra J \tvj: red' Tartar Itv/, 
 Manganefe prepared fii/. all being in fine pouder, mix 
 and put them into a very large glazed Earthen Pot, be- 
 caufe the Mafswill fwell : melt and purify, caft it into 
 Water, dty it, aad put it" into the Potr ajjain, melting 
 
 Kkk 2: and 
 
8 16 PolygfAfhicts. Lib. X. 
 
 ^nd purifying, as before : inakc it up into Cakes, and 
 ^ccp it tor Uie. 
 
 IV. A Black for Painting on Enamel. 
 I. The former black Enamel levigated with Oil of 
 Spike, makes an excellent Color. 2. ^ black Enamel 
 of either fort, Peregrine well calcined, ann ^iv. mix and 
 make an impalpable ponder, then add Oil of Spike; 
 and it will a^rcc excellently with the Enamel. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 Of fine Blew and Turcois Efjumels, 
 
 I. A Fine Blew Enamel. 
 
 ^ R Of the MixUire ( in r^. 23. JeU. 2.) ftv;. Zaf- 
 fcr prepared |iij. Copper thrice calcined ( in cAp. 7. JeEl-. 
 1 1.) 5;. gr.xii. all being in fine ponder, put it into a 
 white glazed Earthen Pot ; when the Metal is Avell 
 melted, caft it into Water : dry it, and put it into the 
 Pot again, and let it Hand till it is Avell melted, purifi- 
 ed and incorporated ; take it oft and make it up into 
 Cakes. 
 
 II. Another noble Blew. 
 
 l}i. Of the Mixture (^«f fupra) iivj. plates of Copper 
 calcined Cm cap.j.feELj.^ fiij. Zaffer prepared ^j. gr. xii. 
 being in fine ponder, mix and melt as before, cafting it 
 into Water: dry it, andretnrn it into the Pot again to 
 melt, purify and incorporate, then take it oft* and make 
 it into Cakes. 
 
 III. Thefe gloriow Slews almoft all People are takea 
 withal, as being the molt agreeable Sight of all others, 
 their Beauty and Splendor being lb great and tranlcend- 
 jng all other Colors, they only having the Refemblancc 
 of Heaven it felf, for which rcalon the Romanijls clteem 
 it a Sacred color. 
 
 IV. A Blew Turcois Enamel. 
 
 Bj Of the Mixture (m {upra) ifcvj. putit into a white 
 glazed Earthen Pot, melt and purify it, cait it into 
 Water, and dry it : put it into the Pot again, melt it, 
 and add to it at 4 times the foUowmg Mixture. 5^ Scales 
 
Chap. JO* Of Green Emmel. 817 
 
 0/ Copper thrice calcined (in cap. 7. ictft. ilO ^iv- Zajjef 
 prepared (in cap. 4. fe(5l. 10.) 9iv. gr. vj. Manganefe pre- 
 pared 0« cap. ^. fe6l. I .) gr. xlvii). all being in fine pou- 
 dcr, mix and itir the Mais very well each time with your 
 Iron Hook, that the ponders may incorporate : being 
 well colored, take it out and make it into CaJ^^s. 
 
 V. But this is to he noted , 
 
 You mud be fiire the color is ri^ht good and perfedt 
 before you empty your Pot ; for it is Experience mult 
 teach you how to proportion the tinging Ingredients for 
 more or lefs : if the tinging Matter istoo exuberant, add 
 more of the Mixture ut jupra ; if too faint, add more of 
 the Tin^lure or tinging Pouder till you fee the Color 
 compleat and perfedt. As this Color is very fine, fo ir 
 is very difficult to make well, and rec^iires much Expe- 
 rience and many Tryals : therefore you are not to be 
 difcouraged if you fail inyourfiritElfays, for by conti- 
 nuing to make farther Tryals, you will at length come 
 to do well, and to be able to fee and know when you aip 
 in the right, and when in the wiong. 
 
 VI. A Blew for Fainting on Enamel. 
 
 I. Oi Any of the aforegoing Enamels, purify them 
 with Ac]iM Fortis, and grind them with Oil of Spike as 
 for other Colors: thefe are fome of the noblelt which can 
 be uied for this Work. 2. Take Painters Enamel prcr 
 pared, put it into a Glafs Bottle ; add Acja.t Vit£ to 
 lupernate 4 inches, 4 times a day ; fo will the grolTer 
 parts fall to the bottom : decant the clear Liquor, evar 
 jiorate the Spirit and dry your A^ure, fo will it he very 
 fine; then grind it on a Marble, and it will be fit for 
 this Work, and far beyond Ultramarine ^ ' which yet may 
 bp made ufc of as Occafion requires. 
 
 CHAP. XXX% 
 
 Of Gnen Endrntls. 
 
 I. A Fine Green Enamel. 
 
 ;^ ^ Hi Of the Mixture (in cap.21. feEl, 2.) Ihvj. put 
 't into a white glazed Pot, let it melt and purify 12 
 
 Kkk 2 hours: 
 
8 1 2 Polygraphices. Lib. X. 
 
 hours : caft it into Water, dry it, and put it int« the 
 Potapin, and let it be p>crre6lly refined: then take 
 Scales of Copper thrice calcined ( in cap.y.JeH. 1 1 .) ^ii;. 
 Scales of Iron from the Anvil Ji-gr.iv. all being in fine 
 pouder, mix and put it at 4 leveral timc3 into the Pot, 
 llirring the Nfafs very well, that it maybe throughly and 
 equally tinged : if it is right, let it (bnd a whife in the 
 Fire, and then malie it into Cakes : it is a delicate 
 Green. 
 
 II. Another excellent Green. 
 
 "B! O^ the Mixture (titfupra) itvj. Ferretto (in CAp. 6. 
 fccl.'y.') ^I'u Crocm A-fartis prepared with Vinegar (in 
 cap.6.JetLj.) gr. xlviij. all being in fine pouder, mix 
 xvell and put them into a white glazed Pot, melt and 
 lefine: caft it into Water, dry and put it into your Pot 
 again, and let it refine well : fee whether the Color is 
 good, then let it itand Ibme hours longer to refine : if 
 Bot, add more of the tinging Pouder ; and when per- 
 fet5^, let it ftand a while, take it off and make it into 
 Cakes. 
 
 III. Another very fine Green EnAmel. 
 
 Bi Of the Mixture (^«r fnpra) Itvi. let it refine in the 
 Furnace, cart it into Water, dry it and put it into the 
 Pot. Take Scales of Copper thrice calcined (in cup.j^ 
 fetJ. II.) fill. Crocw Alariis {'mc>ip.6.fect.j.) ^'u gr.ivo 
 being in pouder, mix well and put it in at 3 feveral 
 times, rtirring the Metal with the lion Hook, to incor- 
 porate it ; let it reft on the Fire till_ it is well refined ; 
 and being well colored, take it off and make it into 
 Cakes for Life. 
 
 CHAP. XXXI. 
 
 Gf Purple Eftarnds, 
 
 I. lyUr pi c- colored Enamel. 
 
 \}i Of the Mixture ( in c^p. 23. fe^- 2.) itvj. Man- 
 j;ancfe prepared jii;. mix and put them into a %vhite^ 
 glazed £arthcn Pot very large, becaule of the rifing of 
 the Metal ; when melted pcrtecftly, caft it into Water j 
 
 dry 
 
Ghap. 52. Of Rofe-colored Enamels, 81 5 
 
 dry it, and put it into the Pot again to purify ; and it 
 it IS well colored, make it up into Cakes and keep it for 
 Ufc. 
 
 IL Another Purple Enamel. 
 ■ 5i Of the Mixuire C«r fupra) ifcvj. Manganefe pre- 
 pared ^iij. Scales of Copper thrice calcined (in cap. 7. 
 feH. II.) |vj. all being in impalpable pouder, put it in- 
 to a white glazed Pot, melt and let it refine : cart it in- 
 to Water, dry, put it into the Pot, melt and refine a- 
 gain ; and if the Color is right, take it and make it in- 
 ;to Cakes for Life. 
 
 III. A f^iolet-colored Enamel. 
 Bi Of the Matnxt Cut fupra) itvj. Manganefe prepa- 
 red ^ii. Scales of Copper thrice calcined {incap.y.jeEi, 
 !i.)gr.xlviij. all being in yery fine pouder, mix well, put 
 it into a white glazed Earthen Pot, and proceed exadly 
 as in the former. 
 
 chap: XXXII. 
 
 of Rofc'colored Ennrnds. 
 
 I. ^~T*0 male a Rofe^ colored Enamel. 
 
 -*• Ri Cryilai compound ( in fetl. 3 . following ) Ifcx. 
 melt it in a glazed Pot in a Glafs-houfe Furnace ; add 
 to it at 4 times red calcined Copper, (in cap.y. feB-.iD.)^v. 
 ftirring well tlie Mafs every time : then put in Manga- 
 nefe prepared, ( in cap. ^-fe^. i •) Croca-s Martis ( in cap. 
 6.Jei^.p.) ana q.f. let it alone to refine for 6 hours : and 
 if the Color is notperfedl, put in mox^Crocus Martis by 
 little and little, till the pure Rofc color is complcat and 
 perfed. 
 
 II. Another very fine Rofe Color. 
 ^ Of Cryrtal Compound ( mfetl. 3. follo-.ving) \ix. 
 melt it in a glazed Pot in a Glals-houle Furnace : caft 
 it into Water, melt it over again, and add to it, by 
 little and little, of the Mixture (in cap. 23. /fu. 2 J fii;. 
 ^vj. (Hrring the Mafs every time to incorporate:- Jet it 
 alone for a while till you lee it of an Alh colon when 
 you fee that, put in no more Mixture, leii it be too 
 
 Kkk 4 white; 
 
Sao Tolygnphices. Lib.X. 
 
 white : let it refine, and then add to it Minium ^v. pu- 
 ^rify, refine and caii it into Water : dry, melt and puri- 
 fy again for 8 hours ; after add treble calcined Copper 
 (in cap.j.JeEi, lo.) ^iij-ovj. crude white Tartar ^iij.Svj. 
 Blood-lioire in poudef, fixt Sulphur (in cap.2:^.feEL 3.) 
 dnx gijf?. all being in fine pouder and mixt together, 
 ftir the Mafs very well that they may incorporate, and 
 fee if the Color is exacl : if too deep, put in a little more 
 Adan^Aueie to make it lighter : if too pale, add more of 
 the lalt Compofition till you find it pcrfe(ii, which will 
 be an exceeding; fair Color. 
 III. Cry/ial Cowpnnnd. 
 
 Bi Salt of P^lverine, Rochetta or Soda \\>\\]. Frit itii;. 
 ( in cap. 2. feSi.S.') mix and pouder finely : put them in- 
 to Water, fo much as to make the Mafs into a body like 
 Pafte : make it into fmall thin Cakes, and in a calci-- 
 Tiing heat let them remain for 4 days : then make them 
 into impalpable pouder, and add thereto of the Mixture 
 (in cap. 23. /ffl. I, 2.) itij. Tartar calcined white Itij. all 
 bein^ mixt and in fine pouder, put them into a glazed 
 Pot in the Glafs-hqufe Furnace to melt and purify : ca.l\ 
 it into Water, dry, melt, purify and ca(t it agaui into 
 Water ; which Work repeat the third time, and then 
 keep it for the Ufe afore-faid. ' 
 
 . IV. NotCy You murt always be careful, that if you 
 find any Grains of Lead remaining in the Pot when yoti 
 caft the Matter into Water, that you caft them away, 
 h^ they eat your Pot out at bottom, or break it. • ; 
 
 CHAP. XXXIII. 
 
 Of Red Enamels, 
 
 I. *T^0 rmh fiffible Manganefe. 
 
 -■- R P/VrfW(j;jf Manganefc, (for no other will fervc 
 the Turn) Nitre, ana q.v. mix and calcine in an Ear^ 
 ihcn Pot in a Rcverberatory Fire for 34 hours: feparate 
 the Nitre from it by wafhing iu warm Water ; dry it 
 well, and it will be of a red color. To this add an 
 cqu;il quantity of Sal Armouiack : giiiitl them on a 
 
 Porphyry 
 
Chap. 3 9.' Of Red Ensmels. 821 
 
 Porphyry with diftilled Vinegar, dry and pouder it ; 
 put it into a ftror\g Glafs Matrals or Bolt-head to fub- 
 limc for 12 hours: break the Matrafs, and mix all the 
 volatile and fixt parts together, adding to it an equal 
 quantity of Sal Armoniack, weighing it cxadlly : grind, 
 pouder and fublime as before, and repeat this Work fo 
 long till the Mangansfe remains fufible at bottom of the 
 Matrafs ; which keep for Ufc. This is that which tinges 
 Cryftal, makes it red and diaphanous, or tranfparentas 
 a Ruble. 
 
 II. A Blood-red Enamel. 
 
 1^ Cryflal or common Frit Jtx. Glafs of Saturn (in n?p. 
 ^J'e^.Z.) ttvj. a,ilbeinff in very fine pouder, put it into 
 a glazed Earthen Vol in a Glafs-houfe Furnace, melt, 
 boil and refine: then caftinto.it thrice calcined Copper 
 in pouder ( in cap. 7. feB. 1 1 .) as much as you think coa' 
 venient : ftir all well, that they may incorporate ; add 
 pouder oi red Tartar q.f. and Itir till the Mais becomes 
 as red as Blood: make Tryal and fee the Color j if it is 
 too pale, put in more of the pouder of Copper and Tar- 
 tar till it is perfe6t ; fo will you have a noble, deep, blood- 
 red, tranfparent Enamel, fit for any nice Work. 
 
 III. Another Blood-red Enamel. 
 
 Igt Cryftal Frit itx. Vitrum Saturni ifevj. put them into 
 one of the Glafs-houfe Furnace Pots, let it melt and pu- 
 rify : caft it into Water, wafli, dry and put it into the 
 i?ot again : when melted, caft into it Pouder of thrice 
 calcined Copper ( in cap. f.jeB. 10.) ^y\ or vj, which put 
 in at (cveral times, ftirring it in with the Iron Crook to 
 mix and incorporate them : add alfo Pouder of red Tar- 
 tar |v. or vj. itirring it ftill: when well boiled and puri- 
 fied, lee if the Color is right ; if not, add again Pouder* 
 of Copper and Tartar, ana q.f. till you find it to be 
 perfect. 
 
 IV". A Red Enamel of a Rpthle Color. 
 
 Bi Cryftal Compound (in cap.^2.jeB.'^.) itivj. fuflbis 
 Manganefc itvijls. mix and let theMafsbe \yeirpurilic.i :- 
 try the Color, and according as you find it, add more 
 or lefs of the Manganefe or Cryftal Compound, till ir is 
 brought to its juft Perfeiition, 1//'^. of a very admiral Id 
 and furprizing red^color, and of as lively and trar.i.p ..- 
 rent a Luftre as the moft ennobled Rubie is poilibie to 
 beof, . ■ " • 
 
 V, A 
 
 Mil 
 
 I 
 
S22 Folygraphiees. Lib. X. 
 
 V. A Biiliff-I'uhie col r.rcd Enamel. 
 
 "fy Cryftal Compouiixi r«-''/«/'r4 J Itvj. put it into a 
 g1a2ed Pot to ineit and refine in a Glafs-houle Furnace : 
 caft it into Water, dry and melt again ; then add to it 
 of fnhl.le Manganefe at Jkpra q.f. and it will be purple- 
 colored. Add to it Pouder ot" Alum .;./. at 8 times, t(j 
 bring it to a Red ; but take heed you put not in fo much 
 Al:,manoblackenit, but only tomakeityellowilTi- fo 
 thf? Mariganefe vanilliing, it will become red, of a fine 
 Balafs-Rubie color. 
 
 VI. Red Paints for Enamel. 
 
 I. 9i Any of the red Enamels, grind it, and purify it 
 with Aqua Fortis: watTiit, dry it, and grind with Oil 
 of Spike for Ufe. 2. Take of the Mixture (in cap. 2j, 
 feB. 2.) ^vj. Gold calcined (in cap. ip. fed*').) ^'w. Some 
 melt them together, purge with ^.F. walli with fair 
 Water, dry, and then grind with Oil of Spike : others 
 only mix them by grinding on a Porphyry, and then 
 
 frind them together with Oil of Spike as other Colors j^ 
 ut this latter Method is not without Diipute. 5. Take 
 yellow Rocaillc ^iii. Calx of Gold ut fupra ^'nj. mix, 
 grind and melt them together: purify with ^. F. waih, 
 dry; then .£rind with Oil of Spike for Ufe. Others on- 
 ly mix the Rocaille and Calx together by grinding on a 
 Porphyry, and then grind with Oil of Spike : this way 
 is doubttul ; but this Color made with Rocatlle, by rea- 
 fon of the great cjuantity of Saturn it contains, always 
 makes the Work dull, foul, unpleafant and defectivci: 
 4. Take Vitriol calcined to Rednefs, and purged with 
 A. F. waih it in fair Water, and grind it with Oil of 
 Spike as before. 
 
 CHAP, xxxiy. 
 
 of Te/Iofv Enamel, 
 
 1. "TTO malr Tellow Enamel. 
 
 -*; lit Of the Mixture ( in cap. 2^. fed. 2.) ft\-j. Tar- 
 tar ^uu Manganefe prepared 5'- gr. xij. all being in an 
 iiHpalpiible pouder, mix well and put it into a gla/ed 
 
 £arthe» 
 
Chap. ^ 5 . 7o make China Ware^ Sec. S 2 5 
 
 Earthen Pot large enough for the fwelJin^ of the Metal ; 
 melt, iHr well and incorporate : catt it into Water, 
 waili, dry and put it into the Pot to refine again well- 
 Try the Color ; if well, make it into Cakes for life, to 
 be applycd on Silver, not upoa Geld, unlefs among o- 
 ther Color?, for that the color of the Gold would be apt 
 to dull and fpoil it. 
 
 II. ^ Tellow for to Paint on Enatnel. 
 R Of the former Enamel, mix and purify it with 
 -^F.then wafh in fairWater and dry it : afterwards |rind 
 it with Oil of Spike on a Porphyry j and it is ht for 
 Ufe. 
 
 III. A^o^<?. As for the Variety of other Colors, wc 
 need give no other Diredions, but to take the Enamels 
 themlelves, for they are fo perfedlly fine, that other Pre- 
 parations of Colors arc needlefs: and therefore mixing 
 and purifying them A\ith A.F. wailiing with fair Wa- 
 ter and drying, and then grinding, they are made fit fefr 
 Painting 
 
 IV. Alfe, you may make a Mixture of Colors, by 
 mixing divers colored Enamels together ( ^ti TeHou) and 
 Blew Enamels, which make a fair Green : ) then purifying 
 the*Mixtufe with A. F. wailiing with fair Water, then 
 drying, and grinding with Oil as before. 
 
 CHAP. XXXV. 
 
 7o fade China WarCy Enamdy Painty and 
 
 Gild it, 
 
 I. 'T'O mah the pHrnace. 
 
 -*- It is to be made with good Bricks well biirnt, or 
 Crucible Earth, and of fuch Stuff as-wi 11 belVcndurc the 
 Fire: a fquare Form is belt, becaule of the opening, and 
 of what largenefs you plcafe, in proportion to the Vel- 
 fel you place therein : let it be made with 3 Stories ; the 
 firlt and lowert for the Allies, a footer 15 inches high 
 from the Ground for the Air fake : the fecond or middle 
 Story for the Fire, underlaid with a good Iron Grate, aiut 
 an Opening for the Fuel, which mult be vaulted like 
 
824 VolygrAphiets. Lib. X. 
 
 an Ovcn^ about 12 or 14 inches in height, having an 
 hole \\\ the middle of it of the fhape of the Furnace, 
 whether Iqiure or round, and proportionjite in bignefs, 
 thro' which the Flame is to palbto the upper Story: the 
 third, laft or his,he(t Story is to be at leaft 2 feet high, and 
 its Opening 14 or 1 5 inches, to put in and draw out the 
 Vcfiels, ( for in this they are to be put to bake : ) the top 
 mud alfo be vaulted with a fquare or round hole in the 
 middle , according as the Furnace is fquare or round ; 
 and over this a Funnel is to be put, for the paflagc of 
 Flame and Smoak. A Furnace of this kind maie of 
 thick cad Iron, which may be luted within fide, and to 
 open and fliut eafily with clofe Iron Doors, would be 
 bed for this Occalion. 
 
 II. The Ufes of thii Furnace. 
 
 It will ferve for many Purpofcs bcfidcs this of making 
 China Ware ; as, to Melt, Calcine, Cement, Reverbe- 
 rate, Anneal, Crc. becaufe you may have in it all the 
 degrees of Fire, by reafon of the opening of the lower 
 Story and the Funnel at top ; bcfides, at each corner you 
 may have a Recorder, which will encreafe or diminilh 
 the heat at plealiare. 
 
 III. To make the Ptfijie for China Ware. m 
 
 IJj Oyfkr-rhells made white as Snow, beat them in a 
 Mortar to pouder, grind them on a Porphyry, fearce 
 and make the pouder impalpable : make this into a Fade 
 with Gum ArMck VVatijr, ( an ounce of very white Gum 
 to 3 gallons of Water ) in which dilfolve or quench as 
 much Quick-lime as the quarter pare of your Pouder 
 weighs; (but mod ule fair Lime-water without Gum.) 
 or this Fade ( being fird well kneaded and beaten) form 
 all forts of Vcfiels, accortiing as you defire: let them be 
 better than half dry before you polilb them with your 
 fmoothing Indrumtnt of Copper or Iron, and lb leave 
 them till throughly dry : then glaze tiiem over with white 
 Enamel, prepared as in the next istHon ; lb fet them \n 
 the Furnace to bake and be finillicd : which done, let 
 the Fire go out of it felf, take them out and paint them. 
 Put them in to bake a lecond time, let the Fire go out 
 of it felf, and when cold, you may take them out in 
 Perfection. 
 
 IV. To mah a iinil of Bafiard China. 
 
 Tiiis is to be made of a very fine and pure fort of white 
 
 Earth, 
 
Chap. 35. Jo mdke China iVare^ &c. S25 
 
 Earth, foch as is our Tobacco-pipe Clay, or finer Earth, 
 if any be, as Whiting ; this form into Veffels as the for- 
 mer , and proceed in all refpedls as is above-direded ; 
 which is, in reducing it into fine ponder, makir.g it in- 
 to Pafte with fair Water, kneading or beating of it, for- 
 ming it into Veffels, half drying them, poJilliing and 
 through drying again, glazing, baking, painting and fi- 
 niihingthem as before, according to Art. 
 
 V. To Enamel China Ware. 
 
 ^ The Milk-white Enamel (in cap. 2j. feci, i.) grind 
 it very fine as Painters do Colors ; put it into a Cjlafs 
 Cucurbit, affufe thereon A. F. digert to cleanfc it from 
 its Foulnefs, till it becomes fine and tranfparent : de- 
 cant the A.F. walli the Ponder in Water 2 or 3 times: 
 grind it afterwards with a little very thin Gum-water 
 on a Porphyry, and therewith glaze your Veffels, both 
 within ana without, dry them in the Air, and bake 
 them in the Furnace as before. 
 
 VI. Another way to GUx.e them. 
 
 Heat your Veffels to a Rednefs, and melt the Ena- 
 mel perfedly well; in which dip the fmaller Ware, but 
 pour it on the larger, for that they will take up no more 
 than win fervethem: fet them by turns in the Furnace, 
 flopping it clofe to avoid the Air, bake them : let the 
 Furnace cool of it felf, then take them out, paint them, 
 and bake them over again as before. 
 
 VII. To Paint China Ware. 
 
 This is to be done exadiy according to the Method in 
 cap. 26. afore-going ; but much more eafily, if you only 
 imitate the Chineje grofs Rud flovenly way of doing it : 
 Grind your Colors on aPorphyrywithOilof Spike, and 
 lb paint with them on your Veffels, Portraitures, Houfes, 
 Landskips, or any other Story you pleafe ; then bake 
 them over again as bcfore-diredted. 
 
 VIII. to Gild upon China Ware. 
 
 Ui Tobacco-pipe CJay, or Ibme other fit Earth, white 
 or red ,• grind it with drying Oil upon a Porphyry ; and 
 with this trace out your Figures, &c. dry it for 2 n'hole 
 days or more, then apply Leaf Gold upon it, leaping 
 the Figures with a Graver : after which put the Veffels 
 into an Oven after the drawing of the Bread, the heat 
 being no greater than ones Hand can endure, for fear of 
 
 ciackin» ; 
 
82^ Pofygraphkes, Lib.X. 
 
 cracking : after 2 or 3 hours take them forth, and they 
 will be finil'hev.l. 
 
 IX. To make the drying Oil. 
 
 ^ Linfeed Oil very fine itiij. Litharge of Gold in fine 
 ponder ^iv. mix and make them boil : then immediately 
 add Gum Arnhick in fine ponder '^vj. to purify it: boii 
 for half an hour or more, after which filter it thro' a 
 Linnen Cloth fiiU of clean Sand : let it fall into a Glafs 
 Bottle, in which Camphir^vj. is before-hand put: iliakc 
 the Bottle well till the Oil is cold^ then infolate for 15 
 days, and it will be pcrfc6lly fine. The longer it is kept, 
 the better it will be. 
 
 X. Another way to Gild China. 
 
 Moirten the places you would Gild with Gum-water 
 lightly, then apply your Leaves, letting them dry : and 
 this is enough for fimple Gilding. But if you would 
 have it car\'ei.l or otherwife figured, you mu{t do it with 
 a Steel Graver. Take Gold Leave?, moiikn them with 
 Water in which Borax has been difiblved, and ftrew ov^cr 
 with Cryftal-pouder, or Milk-white Enamel made into 
 an impalpable ponder : the Gold being applj^ed, prefe 
 down with Cotton or a Hares Foot ; then fet the Dilli 
 on a reverberatory Fire, that the Enamel may melt, and 
 the Veltel be poliflied. This will be noble and iiveljr,^ 
 firm and not to be effaced, very Ornamental, and (if 
 the Veilel h entirely Gilded) will look as well as fine 
 Gold. 
 
 SECT. IV. Of Painting GLASS. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVI. 
 
 Of Painting on G la fin general ^ and of the Qolors, 
 
 L •T'O make the "Furnace for Painting on CUJS. 
 
 ■^ You muft build it 4 fquare, of good Itrong well- 
 burnt Brick, two feet and half high, or there abouts. If 
 mult have 3 Stories ; the firji and lowermoft u for the Alhesy 
 
 which 
 
Cbap.:^. OfPmtJtifjgv»Gidfs,Scc. S^y 
 
 which mull be 8 or 9 incH'es high, "arid, miiii have an 
 Opening 6 inqhes broad, an4 6 or 7 dccpyt^'ijec^nd'or 
 middle Story muft be 9 inches high, having' at itsi)ottoiii 
 a ftrong Iron Grate ; it muft have an Opening 6 inches 
 broad and 4 inches deep ; there mutt alio be 3 Iron Bars 
 to be laid acrofs, to fupport a ftrong Earthen Stove or 
 Pan made of Crucible Earth or Glafs-houfe Pot Earth, 
 which is to hold and contain the painted Ware, and in 
 which it is to be baked and annealed : the third anil 
 higheji Story muft be a foot high, with an_ Opening in 
 the middle before, 5 inches high and 3 or ^^ inches broad, 
 to put in and draw out the Ware a baking, and to fee 
 when it is well done : in this upper Story is the S:ove to he 
 pjit, whofe bottom ought to be an inch and half thick, 
 and from thence up to the brims 9 or 10 inches high or 
 deep : it is to be fquare as is the Furnace, and have two 
 inches or two inches and half room, clear on all fides, 
 that the Fire may flame round about it, to bake and an- 
 peal the Work, and is therefore to be placed exadl:Iy in 
 the middle of the Furnace : there muft be alfo in the Fire 
 . jpart of this Stove an Opening juft againft, and ot the 
 lame fize with that of the Furnace, for the Conveniency 
 of putting in the Ware, and of taking it out. This 
 Furnace muft have a Cover on the top of it, made alfo of 
 Crucible Earth, and fquare alfo like the Furnace, having 
 a round hole in the middle of it, and a fqaue hole at 
 each corner. As foon as the Stove is lull of Ware, the 
 Furnace is to be covered with this- Cover, and luted clofe 
 to the Furnace', that no Air may pierce thro' but thro* 
 the 5 holes, which are the breathing places for the 
 Smoak and Flame. 
 
 II. To male the white Ground for Painting on Glaf?. 
 Bi White River Pebbles , calcine them by heating 
 them red hot in a Crucible or Iron Ladle, and quench- 
 ing in cold Water, repeating this Work 8 times more or 
 leisj then being dry, beat them to pouder, and grind it 
 impalpable on a Porphyry : add to it a quarter part of 
 Nitre, calcine in a Crucible again; beat, grind and caU 
 cine a third time over a gentler Fire than the former, 
 and fo keep it for Ufe. Take alfo Cip, ( a kind of Talck 
 found among Plaifter Mold) bake or calcine it on Coals 
 to a ivhitenels, and reduce it to impalpable pouder. Tate 
 fof the two former Calces oj: Poudsrs, and of R%\flitle, 
 
828 Polygtdphioes, Lib. X. 
 
 ma q.v. grind them all three well together in a hollow 
 plate of Brals, with Gum-water i fo is ydur White pre- 
 pared for Ule. 
 
 III. To njftie a Black, 
 
 R Scales of Iron from the Smiths Anvil, ^rind them 
 for 3 hours on the fhallow Copper or Brafs Plate, (fuch 
 as Spectacle-makers ule to grind their Glaflcs on.) . Take 
 of this Pouder, and ofRocaille, ana q. v. add a little cal- 
 cined Copper, to hinder the Iron from turning red. in 
 the Fire : grind all impalpable, and keep it in a Glafs 
 clofc (topt for Uic. 
 
 IV. To make a Tellorv. 
 
 ■R? Fine cupulated Silver in Leaves, or in Filings, oic 
 in thin Plates, put it into a Crucible with Sulphur or 
 Nitre in pouder, laying them S. S. S. calcine in a Fur- 
 iiace • as foon as the Sulphur is confumed, put it out 
 into an Farthen Bafon of Water, beat it to pouder in a 
 Stone Mortar, and grind it with Water on a Pophyry 
 for 6 hours, or till it is impalpable : then add to every 
 ounce of this Pouder of redOker ^ix. grind them toge- 
 ther for an hour, and keep it for Uie. 
 
 V. To make a Blew. 
 
 9i Fine white Sand |xij. Zaffer, Mmmm^ ana Jii;*. 
 beat them to a fine pouder in a Bell-metal Mortar: put 
 this Pouder into a very rtrong Crucible, fuch as that in 
 cap.p.fe^Li^. cover It and lute well, and being dry, 
 calcine over a quick Fire for an hour: take out the Mat- 
 ter, and beat it again as before : then to |xvj. of this 
 Pouder add Nitre in pouder |iv. mix, put them into the 
 Crucible, cover and lute it, and calcine for 2 hours in a 
 very flrong Fire : take it out, grind it as before, add to 
 it a 6th part of Nitre, and calcine again as before for 3 
 , hours more : then ^vith an Iron Spatula red hot, take out 
 the Matter kit it Ihould (tick, being very clammy and 
 not eafily emptied. 
 
 VI. To make a' Red. 
 
 Bi Litharge of Silver, Scales of Iron, ana Z)- Roca'dU 
 piijfs. Ferretto of Sp^in ^fs. Blood-ttone beaten to pouder 
 m an Iron Mortar ^lii. Gum Arahick made impalpable 
 in the fame Mortar, to take oft' what (Hcksof the Blood- 
 ftone, 3i- grind the firlt three things upon the afore- 
 named hollow Brals for half an hour ; then add therert, 
 ivhich are yet ftill t© be continually ground, that the 
 
 Blwd- 
 
Chap. 26. Of Pointing oh GUJs', Sec. S29F 
 
 Blood- ftone may not be fpoiied : in grinding add Water 
 by little and little, but only lb much that the Muller 
 may rub eafily, and the Mafs be in a good temper or 
 thicknefs for Faintmg; this done, pat ali into a flint, 
 or other fine Wine Glafs, and drop on ir, drop by drop, 
 io much Water as may make it of the thicknels of a 
 raw Yolk of an Egg, or fomewhat thinner: cover tiie' 
 Glafs, let it fettle for 3 days, and then decant the fx- 
 neft of the Colors which arile at top into another Glals, 
 without troubling the Sediment ; let it fettle again for 
 2 days more, and decant the fineft of the Color again : 
 this decanted Matter put into a little Gials Matrals, and 
 in a gentle Sand heat evaporate to drynefs, and keep it 
 for Life : when you ufe it, moillen it with a little fair 
 Water, and it will be excellent for a Carnation ; the 0- 
 ther Foeces remaining, which are very thick, are alio to 
 be dryed for Ufe, and to be ufed as the former with 
 Water, for Drapery, Timber-color, Hangings, Cur* 
 -tains, &c. 
 
 VII. A Piirple Color. 
 
 R Fine white Sand jxii. Minium 511;. Z.r^-r^ P&i'* 
 genx very pure and clean, ana 5)is. beat all n\ a Bell- 
 metal Mortar, grind impalpable on a Porphyry, cal- 
 cine, &c. doing all things exad^ly as is dire<fl:ed in fdl, 5* 
 above ; fo will you obtain a fine purple color. 
 
 VIII. A Green. 
 
 9i Fine white Sand |xij. Minium^ zy^s Ujhm? Cm cdpi 
 7. Je^. 12.) ana ^iij. beat all in a Brafs or Bdl-metal 
 Mortar to a very line pouder, calcine, &c. doing exad^ly 
 as is taught infect. <,. afore-going ; lb will you have a 
 very excellent Green. 
 
 IX. A Carnation. 
 
 B; Of the red Color mJeEl.6. fj. Ferretto o( Spain (in 
 cap. 6./^^. 3.) |i. Rocailk ( in cap. 5. feci. 23, 24.) f i. grind 
 thefe on your hollow Brafs with Gum- water, till it is 
 fit for Ufe. 
 
 X. A dark yellowifh Red. 
 
 Bj Of the red Fceces in feEi. 6. above ; Ferretto of Sf>ain. 
 (m cap. 6. feci. :^.) Scales of Iron, ana '^u. Rocaiile '^W, 
 grind all well together on the hollow Brafs, moil^nnig 
 them with Gum-water till they are made of a fit Confi- 
 dence ; fo have you a Red enclining to a dark yeliow., 
 Other Colors may aifo be produced by mixtion* of thfi 
 
 L 1 1 primft 
 
830 Polygraphices, Lib.X. 
 
 prime Colors, as we hinted in cap. 24. JeB. 7. afore- 
 going. 
 
 XI. To Paint Globesj &c. of varioM Colors. 
 
 Put warm Gum- water into your Globe, &c. and rowl 
 it therein, lb as to wet it all over, and fo pour it out 
 again : then your Colors being all teady, with or thro' 
 a hollow Pipe blow them into your Globe, i . Vermilion 
 to reprefent Clouds or Wavings. 2. Pouder of blew E- 
 namel. ^. l^oudct of Copper Scales. ^. Orpiment mipou- 
 der. 5. Lake in fine pouder. 6. Water-Gold in pouder. 
 7. Z<(f^/5'/7i/fr in pouder, together with any other Colors 
 you better like, and what belt anfwers your Defign : 
 you may blow them to what parts of the Globe, &c. you 
 pleafe, by dire6Hng your Pipe accordingly. 
 
 XII. This done, take Plaifter in fine pouder, put a 
 good quantity of it into the Globe, &c. and lliake it wel 1 
 all over, before and until the Gum-water is dry ; fo will 
 it itick faft round about ; and what remaiHs loofe iTiake 
 it out; fo will the outfide of your Globe be finely mar- 
 bled and colored to Admiration. 
 
 XIII. To make the afore-faid Gnw-water. 
 
 1^ Fair Water a quart : fine Gum Arahich, or rather 
 Mouth Glew, ^ij. more or lefs : digelt it in warm Wa- 
 ter for 2 or 3 days, then gently boil it till allis melted, 
 ftrain it thro' a Flannel whiHt hot, and keep it for the 
 aforefaid Ufe. ' 
 
 CHAP. XXXVII. 
 
 Freparations of Vegetable Colors, 
 
 I. A Fine Scarlet-colored Lake, or TinHure from Kermes 
 
 •^^ Berries. 
 
 ^ Strong-waters of the firtt running or diftilling q.f,- 
 put it into a Bolt-head : add Roch Alum itj. mix and 
 diilblye: then put in Kermes-berries in very fine pou- 
 der fj. digeit, Ihaking the Matrafs 2 or 3 times a day : 
 after 4 days, decant the Tin«5hire and relcrve it. Take" 
 fair Water ^./. Roch Alum fiv. mix and dilfolvc: put 
 tills itto the former Tincture , to caulc a Separation : 
 
 Itraia 
 
Cftap. ^7. Of t^'egetabk Colors. S31 
 
 ftrain it thro* a Linnen Cloth, or rather filtering Paper ; 
 lb will the y^(f«/?r«»wpafs, leaving theTindlureorLake 
 behind : Take it up with an Ivory Spoon, make it up 
 into Cakes and keep it for life. It is an excellent 
 take. 
 
 IX. Another Lah of the fame kind. 
 Bi Fair Water Itviii. Wheat Bran jfciv. Oriental Pira-- 
 flerSiJ. Foenugreek 3ij- digeit Blood-warm and encreafe 
 the Fire almolt to a Icalding heat ; let it fland 24 hours, 
 then decant the Lixivium and keep it for Ufe. Take' 
 fair Water itvi. put it to half the former Liquor, make 
 it begin to boil, and add thereto Kermes Berries or Grains 
 in fine pouder ?). beat a little crude Tartar in the fame 
 Mortar the Berries were beaten in, to take off what hangs 
 upon the Mortar, and add it to the former : Avhen the 
 Liquor begins to boil, take it immediately oQ^'and let it 
 cool. Take prepared Sliearings of Woo) q.f. put theiii 
 into the former Liquor, and deep half an hour : Iqucejs . 
 Out the Tin6lure into anoiher Velfel by ExprelTlon, and 
 do thus till you have gotten all the Tindkire : put the 
 Shearings into the lalt Velfel, IHrring them abuut with 
 a fmall Stick very well : boil all for half an hour over a 
 gentle Fire, otherwife the Tinclure will be black: then' 
 take out the Shearings, put theiri (being well dryed) . 
 into a Velfel of cold Water : after half an hoar decant 
 the Water gently : put freih Water on again, then pr.:f$ 
 and fpread them in a clean place to dry. Take Ai]ie$ 
 of Aln, Vine-llalks or Willow ; affufe thereon grj'.dd- 
 tim cold Water, and make a pure clear Lixivhm \ warm 
 it and put the Shearings into it, boil it over a gentk 
 Fire, and it will become red : try the Shearings by prcf- 
 fing them; if they are colorlefs, the Lixivium has per-^ 
 fe(^ly extra6led the Color: (train all thro' altrong Can- 
 vas Strainer by preffing, to get all the Color out of the 
 Shearings, which are then to b£wallit clean, and to be 
 kept for another like Occ:^fion. Take Roch Alum fxii. 
 cold Water q.f. diffolve in a Glafs Body, filter and mix 
 it with the former Tinclure : which done, ilrain all thro' 
 a. Linnen Cloth,; fo will all the Liquor go thro' colorlefs, 
 a;nd leave the Tin61:ure, Lake or Color behind. Gather 
 this Lake, and putting it upon Glafs Plates, dry it over 
 a Sand heat, lb as to make it up into little Cakes; which 
 dry perfeilly and keep for Ule. You may heighten of 
 
 LH 2 diminilij' 
 
8^2 Polygraphices. Lib. X.' 
 
 tUniinilh the Color, by putting in a greater or lelVcr 
 quantity of the Roch Alum. 
 
 III. To prepare the Shearings afore-mentioned. 
 
 Bi The finert Shearings of white Woollen Clotli (j.v. 
 fkepthcm in almolHcalding Water for 6 hours: what 
 Saiin arifcs take it all off, and fcparatc the Shearings, 
 which refervc. Take Roch Alum ^viij. cmde Tartar ^v. 
 all in fine pouder : fair Water ^./. mix and diifolve : 
 when it begins to boil, put into it of the former Shear- 
 ings it.i;. boil half an hour and cool it : take out the 
 Shearings, lay them in fair Water for 2 hours, then prefs 
 them out, dry them, and keep them for Ule. 
 
 IV. To make Tinware or Lake jrom Braz.iL 
 
 This is made exadly as that of Kermes^ either by the 
 firit or fecond wav, ( hyfeB. i, 2. above) only obferving 
 not to put io much Alum to each ounce of Brazil, as to 
 Ij. of the Berries, for that Brazil contains more Tin6lure, 
 and deeper ; lb that vou muft add the quantity of Alum 
 as you find by Experience and many Tryalsis nccefTary. 
 But if you make it the latter or lecond way, youmufl 
 put a gieatcr quantity of Brazil ( than of Kermcs-bcrries ) 
 to each pound of Shearings; io will you have a fine 
 Lake, Icls changeable and full as rich as that Oi Kermes 
 tor Pain ling. 
 
 V. To make TinB'Areor Lake of A/adder. 
 
 Madder comes generally from Ho/land and Zealand ^ 
 being a Root ufecl by Dyers : if it is good, it is red and 
 fairer rhan Brazil, and gives a better color. You mult 
 firlt make it into fine pouder, and then you may make 
 tlie Lake from it by jetl. i , 2, 4. afore-going. It will be 
 a molt excellent Like, perfectly fine, and fit for the beft 
 Performances. 
 
 VL To ?vale TinFiure or Lake from Broom-floivers. 
 ^ Make a pretty flrong Lye with Pi)t-a(]-ies and Qiiick- 
 Jiinc: piftinto it Ihoom-nowersovera Sand heat, digcli 
 tUl the Lye has drawn forth the Tincture, and left the 
 Floivers colorlels : take out the Flowers, add as much 
 Roch Alum as the Liquor will dillblve, and boil in a 
 (ilals or glazed Larthen Velfcl, adding to it fome fair 
 Water ; Io the ycl low La ke or Tindurc wi 1 1 precipitate : 
 when tljc Water is clear from the Color, decant it gent- 
 ly, and atiiifc more freili Water, to wafii it and free it 
 from the Salts and Alum j which walking reiterate 2, 
 
Chap. ^2, Of Mintrd Mors] 85 j 
 
 3 or 4 times as you fee need ; fo will the Lake be ex- 
 ceeding fine and bright ; fpread it on pieces of white 
 Linnen or whited brown Paper, and dry it in the Sliad^ 
 on new-baked Tiles; fo will you have a moil excellent 
 and admirable yellow Lake for Painting.. 
 ■^ VIL To makeTinElures or LakeSy of Poppies jblewFlovaer- 
 de-luces^ red Rofes, Violets^ and all forts of green Herbs. 
 
 B? Of the Lixivium- ( in feB. 6.) q. v. put into it any 
 of the former things, fleepiiig and boiling io much as to 
 extract the Color perfedly ut JHpra: decant the Z/fxzw- 
 »w, fetitovera Fire, and beginning to boil, put into it 
 as much Roch Alum as it will well diffolve : take it from 
 the Fire, put it into a large glazed Earthen Veffel : mix 
 with it fair Water ; fo will the Color precipitate, which 
 being fettled clear, decant off; then affufe more frelh. 
 fair Watej, Itir it well and let it {land to fettle ; decant 
 again, afftife more frelh Water ; and this continue till 
 all the Salts and Alum are feparated from the Lake, 
 ■which will be of the famecolor with the Flowers or Herbs 
 were of from which it was extracted : dry k, and make 
 it into Cakes as the former. 
 
 VIII. Another way to ExtraB: the TuiclHres or Lakes 
 from Poppies, Flower-de-luces , red Rofes, Fiolets^ grjert 
 Herbs ; 04 alfo from Borr age-flower s^ Car/i actions, CwflipSy 
 red ColevPortSy Flags, Orange-lillies, Mallows, ALarigoldSy 
 Peach-flowers, &c. 
 
 Put any of thefe into a Glafs Cucurbit or Matrafs, 
 frelli gathered: upon which affule S. V. fo much as to 
 fupernate 4 or 5 inches: digelt with a gentle Sand heat, 
 having luted a blind Head to it ; fo will the Spirits ex- 
 trad the Tin6lLire : decant the tinged Spirit?, which put 
 into another Alembick, and with a very gentle B. M. 
 draw off the Spirit to drynefs ; lo will vou have the 
 Tincture or Lake at bottom of its original Color. 
 
 CHAP, xxxvin. 
 
 Preparations of Mineral Colors. . 
 
 I, "^Q know whether Lapis Lazuli is good, 
 
 •*- It It is good, it muit come^'from Perfla or the 
 
 L 1 1 2 Eaii: 
 
S^4 ^ ^■'^'Polygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 Eall Ind:e! : Put "pieces of the Stone into a good Fire, 
 blowing continiL'illy tor an hour: if after this they have 
 their firftHardnefs and Color, they are good ; but if they 
 M'ill crumble, they are naught. Or, Put fomc pieces 
 into an Iron Lndk, into a Furnace with a llrong Fire, 
 to heat red hot, and then quench them in ftrong Wine 
 Vinegar: if the Color is good and fplendid as before the 
 burning, it is good; otherwife naught, 
 
 II. To Calcine Lapis Lazuli. 
 
 Break the Stone into final I bits, put them into a Cru- 
 cible in a Wind Furncce, or into an Iron Ladle, to re- 
 unite : then quench them in Spirit of Vinegar ; which 
 Work repeat 7 or 8 times, to prepare them for pouder- 
 jng, and prevent (ticking to the Mortar : thus calcined 
 and dryed, pouderit in a Stone Mortar with a Cover on 
 it, and fearce it, and keep it forUfe. 
 
 III. To make Violet Gam-Water for Grinding Lapis 
 Lazuli. 
 
 Bi Spring Water ifcij. Honey |iii, mix, boil and fcum 
 till no more Scum willarife ; which refeive. Take choice 
 Sanguis Dr^conii |fs. grind it on a Porphyry with fome 
 Oi the refen^ed Water, till it is iaipalpable or dilTolved ; 
 to this add mere of the referved Water, lb much as to 
 bring it to a Violet color ; which keep clofe covered for 
 Llle. This is to be added to^ your Lapis Lazjuli in Gild- 
 
 m- 
 
 IV. To Grind Lapis Lazuli. 
 
 Rt Of tiie PoudcV at feci. 2. ^viij. grindit in a Porphy- 
 ry Mortar or Stone, adding by little and little fome of 
 the former Vfokt Gum-water: grind them together for 
 an hour or longer, ftill wetting it, till about jiv. of the 
 Liquor is fwal lowed up ; but grind it not too long, left 
 it loofe its Color: this done, dry it in the Shade, andco* 
 v.ritfrom Dud; when dry, ifitealily pouders between 
 ■your Fingers, it is good : but if clammy, it is from the 
 nocev, and miift be purified by Cementation ; of -.vhich 
 afterwards: but, firltyou mult walb it well with lomc 
 olthc mild Lixivium, (in the following jfff/o« J putting 
 in io much as may owr-top the Pouder 4 or 5 inches ; 
 then walli it well with your Hands, and let it fettle; 
 <^ecant the clear, and let the Ppiidcr dry in the Shade in 
 the fame Vellel it was walht in, and keep it for Cemen- 
 tation. 
 
 V. To 
 
chap. 38. Of (JMimrd Colors, 8 3 $ 
 
 V. To ntah the Lixivium's for this Worh 
 I. 5* Vine Stalk Afhes well fearced, ten handfuls: 
 put them into a VefTel or Earthen Stein, which may have 
 a Brafs Cock or Tap at bottom : prefs the Allies very 
 well together, and affufe thereon fair warm Water Itxx. 
 when funk to the bottom, open the Cock or Tap, fo 
 that the Lye may come forth only dropping into the Re- 
 ceiver : Filter this Liquor thro' a Felt, or brown Paper, 
 and keep it for Ufc : This is the flrong Lixivium. 2. Af- 
 /ufc on the fame Alhes again fair warm water itxx. and 
 do as before: This is the mean Lixivium. 3. AfFufe on 
 the fame Allies more fair warm Water Itxx. and pro- 
 ceeding in the former method, you will have the mild 
 or weak Lixivium. 4. Take white Calx of Tartar Ifciij. 
 fair Water q. s. boil, let it cool and fettle, and decant 
 the clear for Ufe. It is good to wafli the Lapis Laz,u!i 
 with, and to ftrengthen and improve the color thereof. 
 
 VL To make the (ircng Qment for Lapis Lazuli. 
 9iPineRofm, per Rolin, ana^jx. fine Venice Tur- 
 pentine |vi. Maltich, Bees Wax, ana |iiiifs. refined Lin- 
 feed Oil ^i;. 5i;. fii'li put in the Turpentine, to melt over 
 a gentle Fire ; then 'dddgradatim., the Pine Rofm in bits ; 
 after that, the Burgundy Pitch ; then the Maflich in 
 pouder j lattly the Wax, thin fliced ; ftir all continually 
 to well mix them : which done, add the Oil, Hirring it 
 as before, and letting it boil gently for a Quarter of an 
 Hour. Then drop fome of it upon cold water, if it fpreads 
 it is not enough, if it does not, it is boiled enough, and 
 h to be taken off. Strain it boiling hot, thro' an Hypo- 
 eras Bag, (before hand lleeped in hot Avater) letting it 
 fall into a Veffcl of cold water, fqueezi-ng the Bag from 
 top tobottom Vvdth 2 flat Sticks, that none of it may re- 
 main in the Bag : then work it well with your HaiJsy 
 till the water is workt from it ; and if it chances to ii ck, 
 anoint your Hands with fome of the Linfeed Oil : Lait- 
 ly, keep it in a VeiTel of cold water, lliitting the water 
 twice or thrice a week, lb will it keep good for ip..:".y 
 Years. 
 
 VIL To make the vceali Cement. 
 Bi Burgundy Pitch ^ix. Pine Rofrn, VeU'ce '^' 
 tine, ana ^vj. Bees Wax |jfs. Linfeed Oil pui 1 
 better: mix, and make the Cement in i" 
 the former. Note, this Cement opens tl:. ^ ?. 
 
 L114 ..:■, 
 
$l6 VolygYAphices, Lib. X. 
 
 !Lapis, and draws the color much quicker and better than 
 the ftrong Ccmeht, which ought rather to be ufed after 
 the ufe oFthis Avc.iker: The whole fecret of ieparatin» 
 the Color, confjlh in the right ufing of thefe Cements, 
 for which rcafon, you mult order" your Work accord- 
 ing! v. 
 
 VIH. To refine or pUrifie Linfeed Oil. 
 Ri Pure clear yellow colored Linfeed Oil q. v. fair 
 water a double Qiiantity : iLake them well together in 
 a Glafs for a Qiiarter of an Hour : then put all of it in- 
 to a hir^e Glafs Funnel, llopt at bottom with a Cork: 
 let all alone till the Oil and Water are perfedly fettled, 
 t':'' ^'\ iwimming on top: then pulling out the Cork, 
 let all ihe water out : add more water to the Oil^ lliake, 
 &c. doing as before, and this Wofk repeat footten, till 
 the M'ater comps out as clear and fair as it went in j then 
 keep it clofe flopt for Hie. 
 
 IX. To mix the Pofiicr cf Lapis Laz^uli in Sed. 4. mth 
 the Cements. 
 
 Bj of the ponder, and of the ftrong Cement, ana it;, 
 cut the Cement fmall, put them into a glazed Earthen 
 pot or pan, and melt it over hot Embers, butfo that it 
 may not boil, (which if it fliould, you mult add a lit- 
 tle Linfeed Oil) then having a Spatula anointed all over 
 with Linleed Oil, put in the pouder by very little and 
 little, that they may the better incorporate, (hrring all 
 the while with the Spatula, till it becomes exactly like 
 anEmplaltcr: then caft it howling hot into an Earthen 
 Bafen, almolt full with cold water; taking off, alfbat 
 the moment, all that /licks to the fides of the Pot, and 
 putting it into the water j when it is cold, if it lecmsto 
 be well colored, you have done well; then rubbing your 
 Hands wqth purified Linfeed Oil, work it as you do Parte 
 or Dough for an Hour ; the longer you work it the better, 
 and the eafier the color will be drawn : after which, 
 make it up into a round Loaf or Cake, which put to dry 
 in a white ware Dilh ; pour upon it ibme Irelh f lir wa- 
 ter, ai.d let it itandordigi'll: 15 days, the longer the bet- 
 ter. 
 
 X. The fir a way of fepArating the JJUrarmarine fi cm 
 the i apis Laz^uli. 
 
 Va f he tormcr Loaf or Cake, and walh it in th;! fame 
 water;, cxtrcamly well with your Hands j weigh it, to 
 
 know 
 
 1 
 
Chap. 3 S- Of Mherd Colon. S^j 
 
 knew the Quantity of Oil it requires, and put it into 
 an Earthen Difh, glazed very Imooth, rubbing the bot- 
 tom firflwith Linfeed Oil ; then put in water not Blood 
 warm, fo as to fupernate 2 Inches above it ; let it Itand 
 ^ Quarter of an Hour, then decant the colored water in- 
 to fome proper Glafs Vellel : add more warm water, 
 and the Mafs will foften : continue tiiis work till all the 
 Tincture is extraSed from the Cement. Now whiift it 
 lies in the warm water, you mult move it gently up and 
 down, and round about with 2 Ivory Spamla's, 
 fmoothly rounded at the ends like a Wallnut, and near- 
 ly an Inch thick. If the Mafs (ticks to the bottom, 
 moiitcn your Hands with Linfeed Oil, and Itir it about 
 leifurely, that the water may be colored, which decant 
 to the former, holding up the Mafs with the Spatula's, 
 left it il-iould (tick to the Veflel. A little fteeping at firlt 
 will color the water very much, and when the Mais is 
 ju(t yielding its color, it will emit certain Blewiih Streaks, 
 like the Sun Beams, this water you mu(-t (train out a- 
 inong the other, that the groller part of the Cement m^iy 
 ftay behind. Then affule graciatim frcQi warm water, 
 itirring the Cement eafily, that it may not dilate tod 
 much, nor give its color all at once; and having ftirrcd 
 it ■5- or 6 times about, dole it up into a lump again, by 
 which you fee how much it is wafted, and how much 
 color it ha? given. If the Lapis was very good, ,n the 
 fir/} Steepings it will yield 4 or 5 Ounces of Ulrra-mcvrine^ 
 whi:h, (tho' it appears groifer or courfer than what is 
 afterwards made, by realbn of the Gold colored Vv.ins, 
 yet) is the beft and finelt Color, and is therefore to be 
 kept by it lelF. Fror/t tl.e fecond Steepir.g, (follow ir.g the 
 former method) you will have 3 or 4 Ounces: This will 
 indeed be finer than the former, but not of fo good a 
 color ; keep this alio by it felf. Frorri the third Stetpings^ 
 you will yet have lei?, (following (till the lame manner) 
 which will be yet finer than the former, but paler, and 
 more bright colored. In thele Operations let the water 
 be no hotter, than to be jult difcerned 10 be warm. You 
 will be 8 or 9 Hours in extracting the colors ; and the 
 waters will be at leali 12 Haurs in fettling. If the color 
 comes not eafily out, add to the water a third part of 
 the weak Lixivium (at Setl. 5 above) if that does not do, 
 wit all Lixivisimj but let it be cold ; ' it that is yet too 
 
 weakj 
 
SjS PolygrAphices, Lib. X. 
 
 weak, mnkc life of the mean, or ftrong Lixivium, and 
 with this heated, walh your Cement very well, as be- 
 fore, &c. 
 
 XI. To cleanfe the Ultra-marine y when feparated from 
 the Cement. 
 
 I. Affufe upon it fome of the mild Lixivium, and 
 wadi ic with your Hands, (but not rubbing it between 
 them) iluis the grcafy parts will be taken away : then 
 wafh it 3 or 4 times in fair water, and let the waters 
 fettle well (at leait 6, 8 or lo days) and fo decant. 2. A 
 fecoad way. Take Yolks of Hens Eggs, prick them with 
 a Pin, and fo moiften the colors, Kneading the Mafs with 
 your Hand? ; after ^vhich, walli with the weak Lixivium, 
 till it coir.cs off clear, then wafli 3 or 4 times with fair 
 water, as before, &c. 3. A third^way. After the colors 
 are wa'lied, as before, as well as may be, you mu{t 
 call in by little and little, eafily rubbing it with your 
 Hands, which done, walli often in fair water, and the 
 Ultra-marine will be in perfection. 
 
 Xn. To iirain off the UUra-marine. 
 Take for this purpofe a fine Searce, and cift thereon 
 thelalt Avateis; and Strain again thro' a finer Searce; 
 and again thro' another finer; letting them in Straining 
 every time Icttlc till they are pcrfedlly clear: and then 
 foakoftthe water carefully Avith a Spunge : but be uire 
 not to Strain them all promifcuoufly together. This 
 being done to all the Avater?, let the colors lettle in thcii 
 proper VclTel?, and dry in the Shade; when dry, tye 
 thcmclofe up in little Leather Bags, mbbino them with 
 your Hands, fo wall they attain a wonderful fairnels, 
 the Greahnefs and Llnctuofity by theli^ means being 
 quite taken away. 
 
 XIIL To exalt the Colors to a much greater Pcrfeciion. 
 Take the colors before prepared, mix them again with 
 the fhong Cement, and proceed exadly as directed in 
 Set'l. 10. II. 12. above, fo you will have them exceeding 
 fine, (but a little diminilhed in their Qiiantit\-s) one 
 Ounce of which w^ill go farther than ^ii;. of the forjncr. 
 
 XIV. A fecond way to make Ultra-marine. 
 
 li La[>ii Lazuli it j. calcine it in a Crucible ; quench 
 
 it in Wine Vinegar, dry it, beat it to ponder, levigate 
 
 it with larr water on a Porphyry', put it in a Glazed 
 
 ->^lute ware, or China Velld, and dry it in the Shade ; 
 
 after 
 
Chap. ^ 8 . Of Mineral Color Si S ^ 9 
 
 after which, in a Glafs Mortar poudcr it again. This 
 Pouder put into aw other Earthen Veffel, and put to it 
 ;the following Cemc nt hot, (Hrring them with the Spa^ 
 tula till they are per. fedly mixed : let it itand a whole 
 4ay ; then affufe thereon boiling water, Itirring it wife 
 the Spatula very hard ; when it begins to cool, decant 
 jthe water ; and aflPufe .inore hot water ; and repeat this 
 work till all the color is extra6led : You may feparatc 
 and keep the waters apiirt, as in the former, to di{tii> 
 guiili the purity of colors. If the Colors are clammy of 
 greafy, fteep them in water, in which Tartar is diiToIr 
 ved, then walli them in w arm water, and they will be 
 well purified, 
 
 XV. To mahe the afore fai'd Cement. 
 
 . Bi Pine Rofin ^iiii. Frani'cincenfe, Greek Pitch, Ma- 
 iftich, ana ^ii;. Oil Olive ^ij. ilril put in the Oil, to which 
 w^hen hot, add the Rofm, then the Pitch, after that the 
 ' Frankincenfe, and lalViy, the Maiiich in pouder, ilirrirvg 
 them all the while with a Spatula^ let tliem boil a littl^ 
 ^and it is done. 
 
 XVI. A third way to make Ultra Marine. 
 Calcine bits of Lapis Laz^uli m a Crucible, when red 
 
 kiot quench them in fair Avater ; and this do 7 times, to 
 jraluce them, (by grinding on a Porphyry) to a fubtil 
 'Pouder. Take of this Pouder ftj. of the following Cement 
 ■fx. melt the Cement, and then put in the ponder gi-a- 
 dually, continually iHrring with a Stick to mix them : 
 which done, caft the Mafs into a Avhite ware E.irthcn 
 Balbn, and anointing your Hands with Linfeed Oil, 
 make it up into Cakes or Rouls, which leave in cold 
 water for 5 or 6 days, ihifting the water eveiy other day. 
 Afterwards put them into a clean well glazed white 
 Earthen Baton, affuling thereon fair hot water: and 
 when that is cold, put on more hot water, which do 
 till the Mafs foftens : which done, put them into warm 
 water, and let them lye till it is of a Blevvilli Color: 
 Strain this water out, (to fave the groifer matter) into 
 another white ware Bafon. Put more warm water to 
 the Mafs, which afterwards Itrain thro' a fine Scarce, 
 and continue thiscourfe till all the color is drawn forth. 
 All thcfe colored waters are to be cleanied from their 
 greafmeis, by letting them Itand iHll for 24 Hours, in 
 which time the color will precipitate to the bottom. De- 
 cant 
 
84b Polygrdphices, Lib. X. 
 
 cant the water gently into another VeiTel, and thegrea- 
 fie matter will go along with it : Strain it afterwards in- 
 to the Vcffcl where the Color is, thro' a fine Searce, and 
 all the grcafmels and filth will be left behind; Repeat 
 this work thrice, rtirring the color well every time the 
 water is returned to it, that the grcafinefs which (till 
 adheres to it may afcend to the top of the water, which 
 will always ftay behind on tlie Searce in /training; At 
 laft let the color precipitate intirely ; and afterwards 
 decant the water very gently j then dry the Blew Ponder ^ 
 and you will have an admirable Ultra-marine. See a 
 courfe fort in Lih. 2. Cip. 30. SeEl. 13. 
 
 XVII. To make the Cement aforementioned. 
 
 1^ Pine Rofin, common black Pitch, Wax, Maftich 
 in Pouder, Turpentine, ana ^jx. Frankincenfe, Linfced 
 Oil purified, ana ^iii. melt all together, iHrring them 
 ver^r well, that they may be mixed: then caft it into 
 water, and keep it for Ule. 
 • y^\\\. To make German Blew. 
 
 Bt Sal Armoniack ifcij. Flowers of Sulphur fxij. Quick- 
 filver ?viii. beat and grind theic in an Iron or Marble 
 Mortar, till the Mercury is wholly mortified, anddifap- 
 pears, then put it into a Glafs Body, well luted up to 
 the middle, fet it in a very gentle Sand hc^it uncovered, 
 till all the moifture is vaniilied: itop it clofe, and gra- 
 dually increafe the heat, to make the Mafs fublime ; io 
 will you have an excellent Azure or Blew, which grind 
 on a Porphyry to a fubtil Pouder, tor ufc in Painting. 
 
 XIX. To mah a Gloriotu Mineral Red. 
 
 T^kc Native Cinnabar q. v. beat it to Pouder in an Iron 
 
 or Stone Mortar, then rjind it with water upon a Por- 
 
 £/w7, till it is impalpable; dry it, and keep it forUfe. 
 
 1 he fame you may do with Artificial Cinnabar, which in 
 
 Pouder is called F'ermiUion. 
 
 XX- To make a Mineral TcJlovc. 
 
 1^ Auri pigmentum 5X. Leaf Silver ^i. mix, and grind 
 them upon a Porphyry to an impalpable Pouder, with 
 water: which dr}'', and keep tor uJe. If Leaf Gold ^fs. 
 or ?^i;. be ground with it, it will yet make two other 
 differing forts of Yellows: So alio if pure red Crocia 
 Afartis be added, in place of the Gold. But as to the 
 proportions of thefe things, Rcalon and Experience mujl 
 teach yoH. Mafficot in another Aiincral Tellow : See it 
 Lib. XI. Cap. 2. Sect 20. CHAP. 
 
Chap. 9 9. Of Coloring GUfi. 841 
 
 CHAP. XXXIX. 
 
 Of Coloring Glafi from Kzndk Holme and 
 Gerard Wane. 
 
 I, (~^ Keen. IPn Minium ^]i Copper Scales It;, white 
 ^^ Flint ifcv. divide them into 3 parts : then take 
 Sal Nitre as much as one of thofe parts, and put them 
 into a Crucible, and melt them with a ihong Fire ; be- 
 ing cold, pouder it and grind it on a Porphyry. 
 
 II. Purple. B? Minium Ifcj. brown Stone \t]. white 
 Flint itv. divide them into 5 parts, and add to them as 
 much Sal Nitre as one of thofe parts : calcine, melt and 
 grind it as the former. 
 
 III. Red or Carnation. Bi Red Chalk itiv. Jet ftiij. 
 Gum Arahick it;, let all be finely fhaved : grind them 
 well on a Copper Plate with Rain-water very thick, and 
 let it Hand 3 days to fettle ; then dry it in an Earthen 
 Dilli, and grind it again on a Copper Plate. 
 
 IV. Pointure or Black. ^ Iron Scales p.j. Jet p.i/. 
 Or, Take Iron Scales p.j. Jet p. jfs. Or, Iron Scales 
 p.ii;. Jetp.iii. Copper Scales p.i;. it will be a pleafan£ 
 Color. 
 
 V. Artificial Jet for this Purpofe. & 
 
 ■ Vk Minium or red Lead p. iij. Flint or white Pebfele* 
 ftones p. j. mix, calcine and grind them. 
 
 VI . Blerv . R Of Pouder Blew It; . Sal Nitre Ifcfs. mvg 
 and grind them well together. 
 
 VII. Tellow. 9s Spanijh Brown p.x. Silver p. j. (Leaf 
 Silver) Antimony p. Is. put all into a Crucible and cal- 
 cine them well. 
 
 VIII. White. Tk Of Jet p.ij. white Flint ground on 
 a Glafsveryfine p.j. mix them. 
 
 IX. White. "^ Adinium or red Lead \\'\\j. Sand from 
 the Glafs-houfe itj. mix them. 
 
 X. Carnation. R Red Chalk ^xvj. Jet ^viij. Iron 
 Scales, Litharge of Silver, of each ^iv- Gum Arahick |i. 
 diifolve in Water, grind all together half an hoiii- .i« {lift- 
 as you can ; then put it in a Clafs and (tir it well ; let 
 it lettle 14 days. 
 
 XI. Pointure or Black. T^ Iron Scales |;. Copper Scales 
 |i. Jet 5rs. being in pouder, mix them. XII. ReL 
 
Vt2 Pofygra^hiets. Lib. X. 
 
 XII. Rei. ^ Jet 5iv. Litharge oF Silrer ^ij. reel 
 Chalk Ij. being in fine poudcr, mix them. 
 
 XIII. Gold Color. Bi Silver |ij. Antimony |j. melt 
 them in a Crucible, then beat ihe Mal^s to pouder, and 
 grind it on a Copper Plate : add to it yellow Oker or 
 Brick-dult calcined again |xxx. grind them, well toge- 
 ther with Water. 
 
 XIV. Green. ^ Minium or red Lead |iv. Sajnd |;. 
 Copper Scales calcined Sfv. mix them. 
 
 XV. Vernijh for GLiji. 
 
 Bi Oil of Turpentine ^vj. /^(f»i« Turpentine |ii;. Gum 
 Seders or Gum of Ivy (or rather Maftick ) |/. put theta 
 into a Glafs Bottle, which ftop well, and Wax it that no 
 Vapors may come forth: then diflolve iu B.A-f. which 
 will be done in about 2 hours time. 
 
 XVI. Te make drying Oil. 
 
 T^ Litharge of Gold very well calcined Jiij. Linfccd 
 Oil 5xviij. mix and boil them together till you fee it 
 grows thick. 
 
 XVII. A fine Golden or Tellow Color. _ 
 
 R Prepared Silver or Leaf Silver, ( which will do the 
 fame) put each of them fmooth and even upon a Plate 
 of Glafs, and burn or anneal the fame together, and the 
 Glafs will be of a delicate Golden or Yellow color. 
 
 XVIII. A nohle Red or Green Color. 
 
 B^ Leaves of Gold or Calx of Sol made by Calcinati- 
 on or Aijm Regis ^ put either of them on Plates of Glafs, 
 and heat them gradually red hot together; fo will the 
 Glafs be tinged of a noble Red color, or elfe of a florid 
 Green ; which Colors refult from the Purity or Impuri- 
 ty of the Gold. 
 
 XIX. Aljo divers Fofiils and Mineral Earths will, by 
 the help of Fire, impart tranfparent Colors to Glafs, dif- 
 fering Ibmetimes from thofe of the Bodies themfelvcs. 
 
 C K A P. XL. 
 Some other Colors for Famifjg Glaf. 
 
 YElloro. Take a very thin piece of pure fine Silver, 
 and dip it into melted Briinlbae ; take it out 
 
 with 
 
Chap. 40* Colors for P /tinting GlAfs, 84 j 
 
 with a pair of Plyers, and light it in the Fire, holding 
 it till it feaves burning ; then beat it to ponder in a Bra- 
 zen Mortar ; and grind it with Gum Arahick Water 
 and a little yellow Oker. 
 
 ' II. Tellovp. Take fine Silver 3i- Antimony in poudec 
 Sij. put them in a hot Fire in a Crucible for half an 
 hour, and then call it into a Brafs Mortar and beat it 
 into pouder ; to which add yellow Oker ^vj. old Earth 
 of rufty Iron r5nj. grind all well together. This is fairer 
 than the former. 
 
 III. White. This is the color of the Glafs it felf ; you 
 may diaper upon it with other Glafs or Cryltal ground 
 to pouder. 
 
 IV. Blach Take Jet and Scales of Iron, and with a 
 wet Feather take up the Scales that fly from the Iron, a^ 
 ter the Smith hath taken his heat, grind them With. Gum- 
 water. 
 
 V. BlacL Take Iron Scales, Copper Scales, of each 
 3j. heat them red hot in a clear Fire-lliovcl : then take 
 Jet 3fs. firit grind them fmall and temper them with 
 Gum-water. 
 
 VI. Red. Take Sanguis Draconic in pouder, put to it 
 redified S. V. cover it clofe a little while, and it will 
 grow tender : wring it out into a Pot, that the Drofs 
 may remain in the Cloth ; the clear prclerve for Life. 
 This is a fair Red. 
 
 VII. Carnation. Take Tin Glafs fj. Jet|iii. redOkes 
 ^v. Gum Sy- grind them together. It is a fair Carna- 
 tion. 
 
 VIII. Carnation. Take Jet ^iv. Tin Glafs or Litharge 
 of Silver 3ij- Gum and Scales of Iron, of each 5'- ral 
 Chalk 5J' grind them. 
 
 IX. Green. Take Verdigrife and grind it well with 
 Turpentine, and put it into a Pot, warming it at the 
 Fire when you ufe it. 
 
 X. Blew. Provide the clearelt Lead you can get of 
 that color, beat them to pouder in a Brazen xMortaT : 
 take Gold-fmiths Enamel of the fame color, clear and 
 tranfparent; grind each by it lelf: take p. ii. of Lead 
 and p.j. of Enamel, grind them together as you did the 
 Silver* The fame anderjiand of Red ami Green. 
 
 CHAR 
 
'S44 Folygraphicef, Lib. X. 
 
 CHAP. XLI. 
 Of the way of F Aiming upon Glafi, 
 
 I. *'T*Here are two manner of ways of Painting upon Glaf: 
 -■- the one is for Oil Color, the other for fuch Colors 
 as arc aftenvards to be annealed or burnt on. 
 
 II. To lay Oil Colors upon Glaji. 
 
 You mu(t fir ft grind, them with Gum- water once, and 
 afterwards temper it with Spanifh Turpentine : lay it on 
 and let it dry by the Fire, and it isfinilhed. 
 
 III. To Anneal or Bnrn. your GlajSy to make the Colors 
 ulide. 
 
 You muft make a 4 fquare Brick Furnace, 18 inches 
 broad and deep ; lay 5 or 6 crof s Iron Bars on the top 
 of it, and railc the Furnace 18 inches above the Bars : 
 then laying a Plate of Iron over the Bars, fift (through a 
 Sieve) a lay dfflack'd. Lime over the Plate ; upon which 
 lay a row of Glafs, upon that a bed of Lime ; and up- 
 on that Lime another row of Glafs : thus continue S. S. S. 
 till the Furnace is full. 
 
 IV. Lay alfo with every bed of Glajlafiece of GlaJSy which 
 yoH may wipe over Ti-ith any Color ; (thefe are called Watches) 
 and when you think your Glafs is burnt enough, Avith a 
 pair of Plyers, take out the firft and lowelt Watch, and 
 Jay it on a Board ; and being cold, try if you can fcrape 
 off the Color; if it holdfafton, take out that row, al- 
 ways letting it abide the Fire till the Color will not 
 fcrape off. 
 
 Another Way. 
 
 V. TAe very white GlaJ?^ varnijh it very thin on one ftde 
 mth a white f^arnijh, then having fome fine Cut or Print 
 en Paper, juftfit for the piece of Glafs you intend to paint 
 that Defir,n on : dip it in Water, let it foak and dr}' a 
 Jittic, and clap the Pidure fi.ic thereof to the Varnilli 
 {i^Xt of the Glafs, as exacT: and fmooth, and even as you 
 can, and fo let it dry throughly : being dr^-, moilfen the 
 Paper on the blank fide, and with a blunt Grayer draw 
 off and trace the Lines of the Picture, which will after- 
 ■vvards remain perfect and dilfindt on the varnilht fide of 
 the Glafs* 
 
 VI. This 
 
Chap. 41 . Of Painting on GUf^ &c. 84 5 
 
 VI. This Dratight is for the Model you tkhJI p^nr, in 
 Tvhich yoH mufl obferve the Tracings, Strokes and Line t of 
 the Pi[l;ire, which are to direEi yon in your Shadcwir:!^ ; 
 which, if not well and exadtly performed, will bean ;i- 
 nifert Damage to the Pidurc : but the Mode of Pain'ing 
 on Glafi is contrary to that of Limning or Painting on Clmh, 
 ■Wood or P^elom ; for in this the Point being but on one 
 fide, it is plainly vifibic on the other; and here the Set- 
 tings o{f are firft done, then the compound Colors are 
 run over, and fo continued till the Work is perfeded ; 
 whereas Limning on Cloth, the Settings a'f or Hcightnings 
 are the lail Strokes ; and their Ground Color,^ is what 
 here we end withal, and is our lalt Lay upon Glals. • 
 
 VII. We treat not here of the making up the Colors, nor 
 hove to mix, or alter and finifh the Artificial ones, for that 
 has Relation to the Arts of Liw«i«^ and Painting, which 
 we have very fully and largely difcourfed of" in the for- 
 "mer parts of this Work, and therefore lliall fay no more 
 of it here. 
 
 VlW.The Painting on (j/^y?isjuft the fame as in Mi- 
 fiatHre with Water-colors, laying the Pi61:are underneath 
 it as before ; and this will lliew finer than if done in Oil j 
 the Colors moreover dry inilantly. 
 
 IX. ToHr Work being thm done in Oil or Water-colors, 
 yoH may add to it, and improve its Beanty, by over-laying 
 all the Colors with Leaf Silver, which will be exceeding 
 glorious and beautiful, if laid on Lakes, Verditers, C?'^. 
 whicliare diaphanous or tranfparent. 
 
 A Third Way. 
 
 X. Chnfe fach Glafios is white, purely fmooth and pldin^ 
 and having the Original in Paper which you mtend to 
 paint by, mark out each part of the Print or Pidure, 
 and trace them over with the Black in cap. 36. feci. 3. 
 with a Pencil, which do exactly^ neither too thin nor 
 too thick, and then let it f-fand 2 or 3 days or more to 
 dry, before you paint it. 
 
 XI. Then having all your Colors in a rcadir.e^^ fill the 
 part! of your De/ign 7rith them, for wiiich purpo(e you 
 mull ule the point of the Pencil, ciiiclly in Carnation, 
 in which you mull be very exad : you niulf be very care- 
 ful and expeditious, being cautious not to blot or blur 
 the Tracings, choofing r.ither to paint gn the other fide 
 of theGU-ifs. 
 
 M m m XII. All 
 
%/if6 Poljfi^raphices, Lib. X. 
 
 XII. yill the Cohrs, except yellow^ may he applyed on th€ 
 J.tni'e fide^ but tha: Color mufi be laid on on the other fide, bc- 
 
 caufe it is apt to run into or mix with the others Colors ; 
 and it' near the Blew, it will make the place Green, and 
 fo, For want of thelc Precautions, the whole may be 
 Ipoiled. 
 
 XIII. If the Tel low tranfrnts its felf thro^ the Glaf,^ it is 
 Oi vtell ,ti if It had been done on the fame fide: this it uiiially 
 does, whereas other Colors, by realbn of their grolTer 
 Confluence or Body, will not fuft'er ib cafy a Tranfi- 
 tioti. 
 
 XIV. Ths Tellow OM^ht to be very eLjmlly and truly Uii 
 on, in a greater or lejfcr quantity , according as the Sh/tdom 
 mHji be : you muli oWerve this in the other Colors, and 
 withal to lay them on as tpecdily as may be, chiefly the 
 Azure, Green and Purple, wdiich require much Exa6t- 
 ncis. 
 
 XV. To heighten and Jet of the Light Sj as infecting a. 
 Beard y defer ibing Hair in Drapery, fkc 
 
 Ule tlie Handle or But-end of the Pencil, pointed 
 Stick or Qiiill^ w^hcrewith take off thofc Colors in tboie 
 places you would enlighten. 
 
 XVI. ro Paint, as if bedawVd. 
 
 Trace your piece with Black and let it dry for 3 days,* 
 after do it over with the following Walli lightly and c- 
 qually ; w^hich lay lo thin on as it may not efface the 
 former Lines, and let it alio dry for 3 days ; then run it 
 over again withth.e lame Wafh, wdicre you find it con- 
 Tcnient to give a lecond tinge, and let it dry for 3 days 
 longer. 
 
 XVII. This done, to give it the true Lights and ft 
 Ueightnings, 
 
 Take the lliarp But-end of your Pencil, or pointed 
 Stick, or Pen, and t;ike otf the tclor ot the firft Walli 
 as bcrorc, in the moit necelfary places ; fo will your 
 Work be rtnillied. 
 
 XVill. To rr.ake the afore-mentioned Waflj. 
 
 Take a Pewter Cup or other Veifel, put into it a quan- 
 tity of your black Color : then dilfolve Gum Arabick 
 Pouder in its eciirJ weight of Wine, and put this into 
 the Black in the Pewter Difn or Sawcer, tha't it may be 
 ver>' clear, and not cnfily dryed ; and this is the Walh 
 for bedawbing and pamtingGlats grey or greyilb. 
 
 ■ XIX. Tour 
 
Chap. 4t, Of FAtnting on QlaJ^. %^f 
 
 XIX. Tour GUji bein^ thm painted-, and the Draught 
 perfeBly fint/hedj you miift now come to Baking of it, to 
 give the Paint a Confilkncy with the Glafs by Penetra- 
 tion, which muit be done in the Furnace defcribed in 
 cap. 36. f(^. I. or in that defcribed in /f^. 3. of this 
 Chapter. 
 
 XX. If yoH have many pieces of Glaji or Wirk, you mufl 
 put them into the Stove ( in cap. 36. feEli i.) laying them 
 one upon another, S.S.S, with very fine ponder of Quick- 
 lime thrice baked in a Potters Furnace, and poudred, 
 making the firfl Lay of Lbne half an inch thick on the bot- 
 tom of the S:ove, and upon that a Lay of hits of broken 
 Claji', onthatanother LayofPouder of Lime, and ano- 
 ther Lay of bits of broken Glafs : on that another Lay of 
 Lime Pouder ; upon which third Lay put your Pidiures 
 or Drawing of Painteti Glafs, with nothing but Lime 
 Pouder; and thefe to be laid as afore-faid S.S.S. till 
 the Stove is full ; and upon all a Lay of Lime Pouder. 
 
 XXL The reafon of this treble laying of Lime ^ with bits 
 cf broken GlaJI at bottom^ before y oh put in yoMr painted GlaS^ 
 is, to prevent the Injury which the Violence of the Fire 
 might do ( being very ina:rp ) under the immediate bot* 
 torn of the Stove. 
 
 XXII. All this done J cover the Furnace and Stove with 
 its proper Cover, luting them tvell together with flrong Lwie 
 round about ^ that the Heat, Fire orSmoak may come no' 
 where forth, but at the holes of the Cover. 
 
 XXIII. The Lute being throughly dry, begin to kindle 
 the Fire at mouth of the Furnace with Char-coal, but with 
 
 freat gemlenej^y and encreafe it very leifurcly, leli your 
 'ainted Glafs fhould break, or the Paint be fpoiled: 
 continue thus for 2 hours ; and then put the Fire far- 
 ther in, letting it remain for an hour; sfter which put" 
 it farther in till it iscompleatly umler the Stove, where 
 leave it for 2 hours longer: then encreafe the Fire by 
 degrees for 2 hours more, continually adding Char-coab 
 till the Furnace is full, and the Flame comes thro' every 
 hole of the Cover ; keep it in this degree of Violence for 
 3 or 4 hours, {hutting the Moa;h or Door oi the Fur- 
 nace. 
 
 XXIV. In this time you mufi often take forth your Watches 
 C mentioned in fe6l. 4. abrvej to Jee how your Work goes ony 
 which you may alfo perceive by the Iparkling of the Iron; 
 
 MmsLi 2 Baw 
 
 L 
 
848 PolygrAfhices, Lib. X% 
 
 Bars under the Stove ; and \vhen you find the Colors 
 ahnolt pcrfedt, encrcafc the Fire with very fmall Billets 
 of diy Wood, to make the Flame environ and rever- 
 berate, over and round about the Stov£ ; which conti- 
 nue till the Work is finilhed, which will be in 12 or 14 
 hours time : let the Fire go out of it felf, and being cold, 
 take your pieces out. 
 
 CHAP. XLII. 
 
 of Gilding upon GAijS*. 
 
 I. ^iTj^h the GlaJ^ you deftgn to Gild, moirten it over 
 -■- -with Gum-water ; and being half dry, put on 
 Leaf Gold wliere you intend it, and fo let it dry. 
 
 II. Cover your Piece over rvith any piece of hollow GUR, 
 and pur it on an Iron PLite at the mouth of the Furnace, to 
 he^t gently : and when it is well heat, put it in farther, 
 and ni a little time it will be red liot; then draw it a 
 little towards the mouth of the Furnace, and there let 
 it cool gradually. 
 
 in. NcTv, if your Leaf Gold is well laid on atjirj}, and 
 you have been careful in managing your Fire, you will 
 find your Gold to be fo well united to your Glals, that 
 It will be inipoffiblc for ever after to remove it. 
 IV. Amther jray, mhich is better. 
 
 Moidcn the Glats you defi^n to Gild every where with 
 (jiiin-watcr ; and when half dry, lay oh the Leaf Gold, 
 IctLing it drv. 
 
 V. TLis done, reafh all the gilded part nith Water in 
 Tihich Bor.ix ha< been dijfvlved; and fo duft it well with 
 unpalpablc PouJer of white Glals. 
 . VI, ^f:enM!rds fet it into the Furnace, firfl in a very 
 ^:ntle'hcat ', and encrealethe heat by little and little till 
 the Glals becomes red hot, and the rouder on the Gild- 
 in 2. is melted and runs. 
 
 V'U. Then dr.ivp it leifurely to the mouth of the Furnace, 
 r.hd Iff it cool leifurely ; fo ^vill your Glafs be admirably 
 Ciildcd, not to be hurt by Scraping, force of Weather, 
 Heat, Cold, or Age it lelf. 
 
 VIII. Thm 
 
Chap: 4?' 0/ Looking-GUffes, 849 
 
 VIII. There is another tvay of Gilding on Glaf, -ahich is 
 done mth Linfeed Oil, as we have taught in cap.^'^. feEl. 
 8,9, 10. to which I referr you : but the former ways are 
 fo excellent, that this is (tjeing (;:ompared to them ) but 
 truly Trifling. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 CHAP. XLIII. 
 
 A Difcourfe of Leoking-GUjfts. 
 
 I. ^T^HE Snhflance or Metal of Looking-Glajjes^ is to be 
 -■- Crpjial Frit J ( in cap. 2. it^. 8. ) or Frit wade of 
 Flints; the melted Matter of which is to be caft upon a u 
 excellently poli(l>t Table of pure tough Copper or Iron ; 
 which Table mufi be of the Magnitude you dcGre, and 
 its bottom fo much lunk as you intend the thicknefs of 
 your Glafs Plate to be, viz,, it is to have Edges round a- 
 pout it fo high as your Glafs is to be thick ; over this you 
 are to have a Plate or Runner of Metal, to (lidc and 
 prefs it on tlie melted Glafs, that it may fprea.l it lelf 
 all over the Copper or Iron Table, to make it cloie, 
 compad and even. 
 
 n. To Grind, Polifh and Cnt the GlaJI. 
 You mult lay it on Sand in a fit place, le(l it break in 
 xvorking ; then grind it with a Grinder and very fine 
 Sand and Water. 2, You mull grind it over agciin with 
 Pouder of Emery, to give it a greater Smoothnels. 3. It 
 is then to be ground with Tripoli in the lame manner, 
 which polillies the Glafs fingularly. 4. Lafrly,^ It is 
 brought to its utmolt Excellency and' Beauty by grinding 
 it with Putty or Calx of Tin, which gives it its perfeci 
 Poliih and Lufhe. 5 . The Diammd Cut is done by grind- 
 ing theCryltil on drift Sand and Water, to its iuli Di- 
 menfion. All thefe things were tbrmeriy done by Hand j 
 but now Art is come to that Perfedlion, tlut what was 
 fpruiierly performed v.ith valt L^or and Pains, Lxiidiis 
 
 M m m 3 au 
 
S 50 Polygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 an almofl invincible Care, is now performed eafily, and 
 cxailly, and as it were at once, by the help of an ad- 
 mirable Engine or Milly out-doing the Operation by the 
 Hands, almod a thoufand fold. 
 
 III. To File or Silver Loohng-Glajfcs. 
 
 Have a very firm, fmooth Table, much greater than 
 the GLifs, on which fpread one or more Sheets of very 
 fine Tin, full as thin as Paper, and fo prepared as to be 
 free from any Rumple, Wrinkle, Furrow or Knot, (which 
 will Ipoil the Glafs;) over thefe Sheets ipread good 
 Quick-filver, covering them all over with it : when the 
 Quick-Giver has limkt in well, place the Glafs thereon, 
 and it will ffick to them ; after which turn it, and fpread 
 Sheets of Paper on the Filings ; prefs it gently, Imooth- 
 ing and ftroking it with your Hands, to tak? away the 
 fuperfluous Qiiick-filver ; then dry it in the Sun or by 
 the Fire, and it will become abfoluteand compleat. 
 
 I V. To File GLiJfes with a DiAmoni Cut. 
 
 You muft have a Table for the Purpofe made with a 
 Diamond-ait rifmg Border, to touch the fides of the 
 Glafs, on which you muft lay it, with the back fide, 
 M^hich is to be filed, upwards : then lay on the Sheets 
 of Tin very fmooth and clofc ; over them the Quick- 
 filver, to difTolve them j then with the Sheets of Paper 
 coverall, and fo linooth and ruii it over with your 
 Hands, to take away the fupertluous Qiiick-filvcr, and 
 then dry it as before. 
 
 V. Another way to Foluite Loohng-GLi(fes. 
 
 1^ Saturn, Jupiter, ana p. r. melt them, and forth- 
 with add of good Tin Glafs p. ii. carchilly skim ofl'thc 
 Drofs, take it from the Fire, and before it is cold, put 
 to It good and pure Quick-filver p. x. i\\x all together, 
 and keep tliis foliatija" Liquor in a new clean Glals for 
 lllc. When you ufe it, lirain it from its Drols upon a 
 Cloth. 
 
 VI. Tb m,^h Concave Burnin^-Gl/ijfes. 
 
 The whole Myltery of making thelc is in the Moulds, 
 which mui\ be Fragments or Portions of a Sphere ;_ o- 
 thcrwife they will "have little or no Effects ni uniting 
 the Sun Beams. To make t!ie Glals Concave, you muil 
 have the Mould Convex, Avliich mult be done by a Sphere, 
 .tccording lo the bignefs you would have it; T;ike a 
 5'^hcrc ot what bignefs you pleali?, divide itetjually mto 
 
 two 
 
Chap. 4 J. Of Looking GUjfes, S^i 
 
 , two Hemi-fpheres ; and one of the Hemi-fj")here-^ eaual- 
 ly into 3 parts, by Plains parallel to the greaieit Plain; 
 the Convex Segment will then be the 6th part of the 
 whole Sphere, which is the Meaiiue of your Burnin»- 
 
 VII. To make Omvfx Burnin^-GL-iQ. 
 
 You mult then have Concave Moulds, and this you 
 may have two ways; i. Take two Concave Moulds 
 and dole them exactly together as Founders do their 
 Frames, and thro' the mouth of the Mould pour in your 
 melted Cryrtal Metal, to fill the Mould, and i'o lei: it 
 cool. 2. You may take two Concave G la (Tes, join their 
 Faces and loder them well round about, leaving onlv a 
 Jittle hole, by which you are to fill the hollow Ipace with 
 Spirit of Wine, and ifopping rhe hole up, put them in- 
 to Frames of Wood or Metal. This has a greater Influ- 
 ence in concentrating the Sun Beams than the oiher. 
 
 VIII. To make P^ir^iholick or Spheroidal Burnin^- 
 Clafes. 
 
 You muil make their Moulds as tiie former, obfcrving 
 their ;ufl Proportions; for if the Moulds are too much 
 raifed, their good Etfed? are hindred bv their deepneis ; 
 and on this Nicety depends the Succtfs of the Work : and 
 thefe are faid to be more powerrul than the former; 
 where note, That all' thcfe Glalles muft be extrearaly 
 well poliihcd, even to Perfeci: on. 
 
 IX. To nuh Steel BHrn'wg-GLiffeSj yvheiber Concave or 
 Convex^ Spherichs or Parabclicks. 
 
 The Moulds are to be prepared for them as in the three 
 former ^>ff/(?»j ; the Metal of which they are to be made, 
 is compofed as follows. Bi Copper Ihix. fine Tin Itiij. 
 TDhite Arfenick, Tartar, ana'|iii. firft melt the Copper, 
 tiien immergc the Tin in the melted Copp-cr, ellc it Will 
 fume away and leave the Copper bchnid : thcfe being 
 fnelted together, add to them the Arlenick and Tartar; ■ 
 keep them in this melting heat for 2 or 3 hours, and fo 
 caft it into the Mould or Moulds. Note, Some make the 
 Arfenick to be ^xxiv. others, inflead of the Arlenick, 
 put in Antimony ^xii. 
 
 X. Another Compofition for Steel Glalfes. 
 
 ■R' Refined Rofe Copper ^''li/- ^ch it, then add '•/ frie Tin 
 itix. A^foon as they are melted, add red Tn-rar calcined ^xviii. 
 Tvhite Arfenick jvj. Nitre ^iij. Alum f i. keep thele in. a 
 
 M m m 4 meltiiig 
 
S52 Pofygraphices, Lib. X. 
 
 iBcltinjr heat for 3 or 4 hours, that the Salts may evapo- 
 rate ; t!:cn call it into tiie Moulds. This is more folid 
 and hard ti^.an the tbrmer, and more fit for HatLooking- 
 GhiTcs. 
 
 XL Another Compofition , much better than the 
 former. 
 
 R Phne.< of Kofe Copper in fmall hits ftii. pHt them into a 
 Crucible^ and imhihe them reith Oil of Tartar per delique : 
 tah white Arfenici, or rather Orpiment, itXs. in poudcr ; lay 
 the Copper and Arfenich in the Crucible S.S.S. till the Crttci^ 
 hie is fall : affufe on them Linfeed Oil, to cover the Arfe- 
 riick and Copper ; cover and lute the Crucible, and let 
 it diy : let it on a Sand Furnace, letting the Sand rife to 
 the brims of the Crucible: let the heat be gentle till the 
 Oil begins to evaporate; lo \\\\\ the Oil prepare the 
 Venus fiir retaining the Arlenick, which ought to enter 
 almoft as caiily as a Sponge iiicks up Water: then en- 
 crcale the Fire lb much as to make the Oil evaporate and 
 boil up ; after Avhich take off the Crucible, cool and 
 break It ; lb will the Copper be of many colors, and 
 the better prepared, if Orpimentbe uied inftead of the 
 Arlenick. \yt of this Copper iii;. of Latten ibiv. melt 
 the Latten on a very hot Fire, and then put in the Cop- 
 per ; when well melted, calt thr Mafs almolt drop by 
 drop thro' a Birch Broom into a <;!azed Earthen VclTel 
 full of fair Water, to granulate it; by which means ic 
 will be lb hard as not to be touched ^yitha File, and as 
 good as Steel tor our intended I lies. 9^ of this hard Me- 
 tal p. 11/, of fine Tin f without Lead in ic J p. ;. ntelc the 
 Jfc:ai be ''ore you put in the Tin : melt and mix all welly and 
 then r.-if it into the Afonlds. 
 
 XIL To Polijh thefe Strl Glajfes. 
 
 To bring thefe Glalfcs to their perfc6l ExaC^nefs, you 
 mufl bring them to an excjuifite Polilli, workmg and 
 grmdiug away the out fide a r the Wheel, with the Sand 
 Stone which Braficrs mak-. ule of; and then applying 
 the Handle, to give thtm tlicir due Polilhing and'Lultrc. 
 Take it off this V\'heel and put it on a lecond, rubbing 
 It ni an oblique Line with prepared Emery, which will 
 |ivcit luch a fine PolilTiing, that Specks, Scratches and 
 r.i!-.e^ lli.ili icarcely be perceptible. Take it ot^'this and 
 r.rit it on another, "grinding or rubbing it with prepared 
 Vl.iiijatitef : a'tcr that vou mu!t w'ovk'it oblijuely witij 
 
 Putt:,- 
 c 
 
Chap. 4 J. Of LooVtng'QU^tsi 8^5 
 
 Putty or Calx of Tin, working it for a long time till it 
 has obtained its perfe(^ Poliili . If thefe Glaps are JHlUeA 
 cr made dull rnth the Air or any thick Vapor, you muft 
 clear tliem by rubbing, not with Woollen orLinnen, but 
 with a piece of Deers or Goats Skin, wiping it in an ob- 
 lique Line. 
 
 XIII. Another re ay to Polijh thefe Glajfes. 
 You may polifli them rvith Lead melted vaith Emery ^ ad- 
 ding Water in the Operation for the firlt Procefs: then fine 
 Emery and Lead for thefecond Operation : and laftly with 
 Hamatites and Tin JDre^ mixt together ; for that thefe 
 things make a finer Burnifh or Poliih than the former, 
 the Tin Drofs putting a liigh Polifli upon the Glals. The 
 reafon why thefe Metalick Glaffes are called Steel Glajfes j 
 is not from their being made of Steel, for there is no 
 Steel in them ; but from the very great Hardnefs of their 
 Temper and Compofition, equalizing that of Steel ; thefe 
 being extreamly hard, white, and not very brittle, and 
 therefore t^e more eafdy polilhed, and made admirably 
 fine. 
 
 Exf licit Liher Decimuf, 
 
 f OLT- 
 
 •v ^ i 
 
S54 Lib. XL 
 
 POL YG RAF HICES 
 
 LIBER IINDECIMUS. 
 Of VarniJJjingj Jafannvig and Gilding, 
 
 CHAP. r. 
 
 of Iftftruments and Vttnfils for theft Works. 
 
 I./ H !//£ Ch'uf Inlhumcnts are, i. Strainers. 2. 
 I Funnels. 3. Glals Bottles. 4.Varnil'hingPen- 
 I cils. 5. Drawing Pencils. 6. Mufcle Shells. 
 "^ 7. Dutch Rullies. 8. Tripoli, p. Linnen. 
 10. Oil Olive. II. A Culliion. 1 2. Swan-quill Pen- 
 cils. 13. Cotton. 14. A Pallet. 15. A BrulL. 16. 
 Shammy Leather. 17. A BiuniOier. iS. A Wyre Brulh. 
 jp. Grinding Stone and Muller, 20. Putt}^ 
 
 11. Strainers. They ought to be 3 or 4, made ofcourfc 
 Linnen Cloth, Sugar-loaf falhion ; lome of which are 
 tor (training your ordinary Varnilhes ; lomc for wliite 
 ■•Vartiifh, and fome for Lacca VarniOT. 
 
 \\\. FititneU. You may have of them alfo 3 or 4, or 
 more, and that ofGIafsorTin ; lome for common Var- 
 nilhes ; lome for white Varniih j fome for Lacca Var- 
 nilli, and (bmc for Lackering. 
 
 IV. Gh.fi Bottles and Fi^ls. Thcfe are to hold your 
 feveral lbrtr> of Varniihes, and they may be either great 
 or fmall, according to your Qtianttties. 
 
 V. Far/n/lvfJ!^ Penriis. Thefe mufl be great or fmall 
 according to vour Defign : ihey^ are made of Camels 
 Hair, and are very fort : of ditrering Prizes, according 
 to their Magnitude, from 6d. to 3 s. the Pencil. 
 
 Vi. Dr4wing 
 
Ctep. U of Infiruments 4ndVtenpls 8^^ 
 
 I •' VI. Drawing Pencils. Thefe mult be both greater and 
 leffer, as great Goofe, little Goofe, Duck, Cfow and 
 Swallow Quills, according to your Defign : the longe(t 
 haired Pencils arc the beft. 
 
 Vn. Sixms-quill Pencil f. You ought to have 3 or 4 
 of thefe, of finer Hair than ordinary, Avhich are general- 
 ly fold for 6d.A piece, and are ufecl chiefly in Gilding. 
 
 VIII. Aiufcle Shell;, Fine, fmooth, middle-fized 
 Horfe Mufcle-lliells are fitteft for thefe Occafions ; of 
 which you ought alwa^'s to have 2 or 3 hundred in a 
 readinefs, for mixing your Metals or Colors in, as need 
 requires j not that you will need the lOth part of them 
 at once, but that you might not be to feek for thein 
 when you want them. 
 
 IX. Dutch Rufhfs. You ought to be fun JHied with a 
 great number of them, which are to be had at the Iron- 
 mongers in FojJer-lane. They are to fmooth your Work 
 before you varnilh it ; and as you lay on your Ground or 
 Color, if any Knob or Roughnefs appears, wnth them 
 to rulli it oft'. 
 
 X. Trinoli. It ought to be made into fubtil ponder 
 and fifteci ; it is to polilh your Work after it is varnilli- 
 ed, and may be had at the Iron-mongers. 
 
 XI. Linnen. It may be ohl Linnen or Rags, both 
 courfe and fine, which are for clearing up the Work. 
 
 XII. Oil Olive. It is alio for linoothing, clearing up 
 your Work, and giving it an exad Polilh. 
 
 XIII. ACufhion. It muft be made of Leather, ftufft 
 very evenly and fmoothly with fine Tow, and ftrained on 
 a Board, 14 inches one way and 10 inches another. On 
 this you are to ait your Leavts of GoM and Silver, with 
 a thin, narrow, aad fometimes broad, (liarp and tinooth 
 edged Knire. Gilders commonly borJer this Cu liion at. 
 one end and 4 or 5 inches down each fi.le with a flip of 
 Parchment or Velom 2 inches high, to be as a Fence to 
 
 •keep their Leaves of Gold from VVind and Air. 
 
 XIV. Cotton Wool. It is of life to prefs down the 
 Leaves of Gold or Silver gently and evenly upon the 
 Work ; you are to breath upon it, and ihen with it to 
 touch. and take up the Gold, and ^0 to lay it upoji ihe 
 place you defign, prelfing it down, and dole therewith : 
 lome uie a Hares Foot for the lame Purpoic. 
 
 ' XV. A 
 
t^6 Pot^graphiees. Lib. XL 
 
 XV. A Vallet. It is the end of a Squirrels Tail, fpread 
 abroad and fa(tned to a flatPencil-itick, which is broad 
 at one end and fplit, much like an Houfc-painter's 
 graining Tool, but much lels. It fences for taking up 
 and laying on whole Leaves of Gold or Silver at a time ; 
 and ferves for all the fame Ufes with the Cotton afore- 
 mentioned. 
 
 XVI. A Brt4(h. It is to be made of Hogs-hair, and is 
 of Ufe after Gilding, and that it has lain by a day, ta 
 beat over the Work gently, that the Gold or Silver may 
 be preffed clofe and forced into all the uneven hollow 
 parts of the Carving ; and after all, to bruHi off all the 
 loOiC Leaves into a Sheet of Paper for other Ufes. 
 
 X VII. Shammy Leather. It is of Ufe after the Gilding 
 is throughly dry, to rub it over, fmooth and poliih it. 
 The Leather ought to be white, and very fine and foft. 
 
 XVIII. A BHrnifher. They were ufed to be made of 
 a Dogs Tooth put into a Pencil-lHck, or fome fuch-like 
 thing: But of late they are made of Agats and Pebbles, 
 which being form'd or ihap'd, are highly polillit, that 
 they may the more contribute to heighten the Luftre of 
 the Gold and Silver. Thefe make a quicker difpatch, 
 pcrtbiming with a more facil Expedition. Thefe Peb- 
 ble Burnilhcrs are worth 5 s. apiece, an,d much to be 
 preferred before tiiofe of Dogs Teeth. 
 
 XIX. A Wyre Brufh. if is iold a.t the Iron-mongers, 
 and is defigned to fcrub thofe Silver, Copper and Brafs 
 pieces which you defign to Gild over ; thereby perfedlly 
 to free them from any Dirt, RuR, Naftinefs or Filthi- 
 ntfs which may adhere to them ; whkh not being taken 
 off, would hinder the clofmg of the Gold tiierewith. 
 
 XX. Grinding S:ont and, ylfullcr. Thefe are not only 
 for grinding Pouder and Colors very frnall and fubtil, 
 but alfo to grind your Gold Size and Oil together, when 
 you intend to Gild in Oil. 
 
 XXI. Putty. It is Calx of Tin, and is of Ufe in Pa# 
 ]i("hing, to ?,ive the laft Smoothncls, Shining and Glof=; 
 upon VarniTned and japanned VSTorks after the Uie of 
 
 C H A P. 
 
Chap. 2. Of Materiah: S 57 
 
 CHAP. IL 
 
 f Of the Materials necejfary for thefe Works, 
 
 li^lT'HE chief Materials are, i. Re6liiied Spirits. 2. 
 -*• Gums. 3. Rofins. 4. CoIob. 5. Metals and 
 Minerals prepared for this Purpofe. 
 
 II. ReBified Spirits. They are jnade from Wine, or 
 Sugar, or Mault Liquors ; or from Cyder, Perry or Mo- 
 loifos; or from the common Spirits made of thofe things 
 by Reftification. They are for the DifTolution of Rofins 
 or Gum Rofins J and therefore if not highly redified, 
 are unprofitable for thefe Ufes. Now, to know whe- 
 ther your Spirit is ^ood or no, you muit put fome of it 
 into a Spoon, -and put a little Gun-pouder to it ; then 
 fet the Spirit on Fire, if it burns all away and fires the 
 Gun-pouder after it, it is good, and will difTolve your 
 Gums; otherwife, not. 
 
 III. Gnm^y^rahick. ^ Chufe that which is whiteft, clear 
 and tranfparent : it is of life for to make Gum-water, 
 and is worth about 1 2^. a pound. 
 
 IV. IJinF-glaJ^ or: Ichthyocolla. That which is cleareft, 
 whitert and freelt from Yellow, is the bert. It is of Ufe 
 for making Size -, and may be had for about 4 ;. a pound, 
 more or lefs. 
 
 V. Sanguis Draconu or Dragons Blood. You mutt' 
 chufe that which is the brightctt Red, and freeif from 
 Drofs or Filth : the belt is that which is called Drops^ 
 made up in a kind of Leaf or Husk, Avorth about 7, 8 
 01 9 d. an ounce, according to itsGoodnefs: that which 
 is in Lumps or Cakes, is courfe. 
 
 VL Cambogiaor Gutta Gamha. You are to chufe that 
 which is the brighteft Yellow, and freelt from Drofs ; 
 •not that which is brgwn, dirty, grofs, and thick or clou- 
 dy. It eafily diilolves in Water, and makes a yellow- 
 ftaining Liquor, to walh Pi6kires and Maps with; and 
 is worth about yx. a pound. 
 
 VIL Gum-Lac, called Seed-Lac. The beft is that 
 which is bright, clean, large grain'd, and free tirom Dull, 
 Sticks and Drofs ; it is worth from 1 2 to 18 </. the pound, 
 accorduig to the Gopdnefs. 
 
 VIII. Ghw 
 
85S Polygrdphkes, Lib. XI. 
 
 Vin. Gum-Lac, called Shell- Lac. The beft is that 
 which is mod tranfparcnt and thinncft, and which, if 
 melted with a Candle, will draw out into the longell 
 and finc(t Hair, like melted Sealing-wax, becaufc ot its 
 toughneis^ It is fometimes adulterate, and therefore 
 you may difcern thetnie b}^ thefe Directions : befidesits 
 Ul'e for making Varnil"hes, it is the principal Ingredient 
 for making Sealing-wax: the bell is worth from 16 d. to 
 t s. the pound. 
 
 IX. GHm-Animi. It is either Oriental, coming from 
 the Eafl Indifs, or Occidental, coming from the VVfji In- 
 difs, as in Hifpaniola, Cuba, Janj/iica, Neva Spain^ &c. It 
 is a Rofm of a whitiHi Yellow, much relembling G»m- 
 Copal. The bcit is whitilh and clear, like unto xvhitc 
 Amber, and that which ismoft tranfparent, is the beft: 
 this G^rzias will have to be Cancamnm, but it is not. ^ 
 
 X. Gnm-CopaL It comes from Hifpaniola, Cuba, and 
 other places oi the SpaaiJhWej} Indies : it is of a yellow- 
 ifn white color, odoriferous, hne, clear and tranlparent. 
 Chufe that which is whitefl, cleared;, molt tranfparent, 
 and freelt from Drofs. It is not io fweet or odoriferous 
 as the Giim-Animi, nor fo fat or oily ; but it is more 
 pure, clear and white, and of the more excellent Sub- 
 ftance ; and therefore to be chofen before the Animi for 
 mechanical Ufes. 
 
 XI. Gum-SandArack. It is brought from Barhary in 
 little longilh Tears or Drops, of a whitiHi-yellow color, 
 and a 1 molt tranfparent, very hard, and if reduced into 
 fine pouder, is called Pomce : this diffolved in Linfeed 
 Oil, makes that called Lupid f^arnijh. That which is 
 largeft and w-hitelt, and calls the lealt yellow, is belt, be- 
 ing free from Drofs or Dult. It is worth about izd.Sk 
 pound. 
 
 XII. Benjam'me. That which is the brightelt and of 
 the molt tranfparent color, and very like to clarified 
 Rofm, is the belt. There are fevcral kinds of it ; as, i. 
 The Awygdnloidesy Avhich has white bits or fpots in it 
 like blanched Almonds. 2. ThcGreyip?. 3. The iS/.jc/-^ 
 ijh : but that which is hardelt and molt tranfparent, is 
 to be chofen for our Ufes. 
 
 XIII. Roftn. The belt is that which is clear and 
 transparent, and clarified or freed from its Drofs and 
 Filth, worth about ^d.a. pound; but there is a white 
 
 Rolin, 
 
Chap. 2. Of Materials, S59 
 
 Rofin, whlfh is alfo white and clear, and worth abeut 
 '.5</. or 6</. apound. 
 
 *. XIV. AiJlkhe. It is the Gum of the Lentisi-tree 
 ■growing in Chio^ ^^gyp^ and SyriAy and is brought to us 
 'out o(Tfirkyy from Smyrna and Aleppo, but the belt is 
 trom ChiOy which is of a light color or whitiHi yellow, 
 free from Drofs or Filth, in grains or drops, friable, clear, 
 and almoft tranfparenr. 
 
 XV. OlibanKm. This was the true ancient Incenfe; 
 but from what Tree iu is produced, Authors have nota- 
 
 '^reed. But my felf being in the Weji Indies^ I gathered 
 It plentifully from the Fler'ulian Cedar, which is the Ce- 
 driis Baccifera: See my Scpb./tumy lib. p. cap. ^S.Jeti. 3, 4. 
 The belt is in roundilh drops, fome bigger, fbme leifer, 
 and it is pure without either Bark or Wood, of a yellow- 
 illi white, ( but the whiter the better ) and which, if 
 crackt or broken^ are very clear, ^ and almoft tranfparent. 
 This rnay fupply and be ufed in place of A-f^j^iche, ( if 
 that is wanting ) and poffibly is the better Eofm of the 
 two. 
 
 XVI. GHm-Elemi. That which is the {tifteft, whiteft 
 and cleareft, and freefl from Drofs or Filth, is the be(h 
 It comes from the Spanifh Wcji Indies^ and is a bright, 
 white, foft, and almoft tranlparent Rofin, cncUningto 
 a yellowifli-greeniili color. 
 
 XVII. Turpentine. There are fevcral forts of Turpen* 
 tine, as the Common, Venetian, Strasburg, Cyprus and 
 Chio; of all which Varnlfhes \x\7ix be made: but that 
 which is chiefly in ufe in theie Works, are the Venetian 
 and StrasburfT j of which two, the former is the mo(V 
 ufefuf; chule that whicli is whiteft, cleareft and fineft, 
 which is worth about 16 or iS d. the Pound. 
 
 XVIII. Bole Armenim. This is that which we call fine 
 Bole, and is as fine as Red Oker, and is of a deep dark, 
 blackifh Red Color, foft, and as it were greaiy, and free< 
 from Gravel, Sand, or other filth : if it is choice and 
 good, it Avill fiick very fift to the Tongue when it toadi- 
 es it. 
 
 XIX. Lamp-BlacL It is made bv the burning of 
 Lamps, having many Wieks, coverevl with a very large 
 Top, at a due difiance, to receive the Smoa<<, which 
 continually flicking upon this Top, produces this blacrC 
 Color : every h^Uf Hour take off the Top, and with a 
 
 Feather 
 
S6o Polygraphices. Lib. XI. 
 
 F^eather fweep off all the black on it: fnuff your Wicks, 
 and put on the Cover again ; and thus continue till you 
 have what Color you dclirc, or a41 your Oil is butnt up. 
 A Quart of Oil, valued at 6 d. will make BUck enough 
 to do a large Cabinet : It is of Excellent Ufe for Black. 
 Varnifh. 
 
 XX. Afflfticot. It is a Mineral Yellow, and made of 
 Lead. Bi Thefirfi Calx of Lc^A made by Incincrationyyi. 
 the grey Afhes: calcine them in a Reverberatory Furnace 
 Tvuh flaming Fire^ fo ordered J notwithjianding that the Calx 
 may not melt. And when the Calx nas changed Color, and 
 begins to grow yellow , it becomes that Color or Pigftient (fo 
 much in reqtteji among Painters) which they call Mafticot. 
 This, if it be yet Calcined till it is Red, it Ijccomesthat 
 which they call Minium. 
 
 XXI. Red Lake, the common fort ufed by Painters. 
 Vi any Roots, Woods, Ltaves, Flowers as of Alkanet, Bra- 
 
 fd. Logwood, Red Sanders, Madder Sajfflower, Clove-Gilli' 
 flowers, Red Rofes, Szc. q.v. add to them about a fixth or 
 eighth p.irt of Salt of Pot Afhes, and fair water a fufficient 
 Quantity, which boil away to one half : filter the Liquor, and 
 precipitate the Lake with water in which Alufn is difolvcd, 
 or that is acnated with Spirit of f^inegar. Sulphur, (^itripl 
 or Nitre, putting info ntnch till the ^ervefcence ceafes: im- 
 mediately the whole Liquor will become thick, as if it was 
 Coagulated or Curdled. This Coagulum edulcorate by the re- 
 peated Affufion of fair water, feparate the Lake by filtrationy 
 ythich dry upon Paper, and keep for Ufe. 
 
 XXII. Florentine Red Lake. It is made from Sc.irlet 
 Cloth, or from Cochenele, or Kermes Berries, (with which 
 the Scarlet is Dyed) exactly according to the former Me- 
 thod iu all reipeiits. And in the fame manner all other 
 lubtil Vegetable Colors are produced. 
 
 XXIU. Priming. It is made of any Color which has 
 a Body ; a5 Ceruie, VVhite Lead, Whiting, Brown or 
 Red Oker, Umber, fine Bole, &c. ground in Oil pretty 
 light. If the color is too dark, it may be altered, by 
 adding a little White Lead: with this your Work may 
 be tlnnly primed over, and io futfered to dry. 
 
 XXIV. Fat Oil. Put Linked Oil nito Leaden Veffels 
 made like Dripping Pans, io much as to be an Inch 
 deep: cxpole them to the Sun for 6 Months, till it be- 
 comes as tlidck as Turpentine : the longer it Itauds the 
 
 fatter 
 
 ) 
 
Chap. 2 . of Materials. S5 1 
 
 fatter it will be, and give to Gold a greater glofs. If it 
 is almoft as thick as Butter, fo as you may in a inannef 
 out it with a Knife, it is admirable, and ought to be caro- 
 fullv kept for life. 
 
 XXV. Drying Oil. Mix Linfeed Oil a Quart, with 
 Litharge of Gold fij. or iii.and boil them for a Quarter ot* 
 an Hour: if you would hare it more drying, boil it a 
 while longer; but have a care of boihng it till it is too 
 thick, and unfit for ufe. Or thus. Take Red Lead and 
 Umber in fine pouder, ana |ifs. Linfccd Oil ifcij. bod as 
 before ; If when it has ilool 2 days, it has a Skin over it, 
 it is then fit fc'»r Ufe. Drying Oil is worth 2 d. an oLuice, 
 and fine Varnilb 3 d. an Ounce at the Color Shops. 
 
 XXVI. OilofTHrpsntine. It is ufed to diflblve the 
 Colors, and make them fpread the better, and to make 
 the Work to dry the foonef, and is now worth about 6 d<, 
 or-8 d. a Pound. 
 
 XXVII. Braji Dull, commonly called Gold Buji.^ The 
 beft, (which comes from Germany J is that '.vhich is fi;iei^, 
 and of the brighreit and moft Gold- like Color, v/hich 
 you may perceive, by taking a little of it between 3-our 
 Finger and Thumb, and rubbing them together ,♦ iritis 
 good, it Avill be oFa bright, rich, Gollen Luibe ; if bad, 
 it will be of a dull clayilh Color. The courier fort works 
 well with Gold Size, but not with Gum Water: It is of 
 difitring Prizes, according to the gooJneis : the btft is 
 worth 12 or 14/. the Ounce", whilit Ibme other Ibrts 0/ 
 it is not worth above 4 or ^y. the O.iiice, beiug very 
 mean and bad. The midcile loft, vv'hi..li is worth 8 oi 
 ps. tlie Ounce, will work well. 
 
 XXVIII. Sliver D^jl The belt coraes iTom beyond 
 Sea, having a lively bright Lufire, like that of Pcrliihed 
 or new Coined Silver, wh;ch you may Rnd by rubbing 
 it between your Finger and Thumb; ^vherc.is the worler 
 fort (which is made in EaglartdJ is dull, dead, aiid hea- 
 vy, more fit for a Color, than a Merai : by comparing 
 them together, you may fee the difference. The bed is 
 worth 16 J. the Ounce: the other counterfeit is not v^a- 
 luable. 
 
 XXIX. Green G:tld. It is an Adulterated or n>"'Nt 
 Metal, calbng a kind of deaJ greeiii'.n color; and is^ 
 worth about 6 .u the Ounce. This, as alio the folkv.ving,^ 
 
 N n 11 aies 
 
S 6 2 Potygraphices. Lib . XI. 
 
 arc iifcd in Garments, Flowers, Houfes, and the like, 
 making tlic work look more beautiful and furprizing. 
 
 XXX. Sullied or Dirty Gold. It is another kmd of A- 
 dulterated Metal, bearing fbme refemblance to drolfy 
 Gold, its price is 6 j. the Ounce, and is ufed for the 
 lame occafions as the former. 
 
 XXXI. Tin Duj}, or Ponder. It is made of Block 
 Tin ground to Poudcr, which is of a dull, dark, but 
 Silverifli Color, made ule of in Rocks, &c. and is Sold 
 for 6 .«-. an Ounce. 
 
 XXXII. Natural Copper Pouder. It is made of Copper 
 ground without mixture, to Du(t: this is of the true na- 
 tural color of Copper, and is Sold for 6 or 7 j. the 
 Ounce. 
 
 XXXIII. Arnficial Copper Po-Ader, This exceeds tlie 
 Natural, and is more deep and Red, but very clear, and 
 of a bright lliining color, which lliews how far Art can 
 out-doNature : it is Sold for about 10/. the Ounce. 
 
 XXXIV. yldulterate Copper. It is of a thick, heav7, 
 dull, Mctalick color, and commonly uled to work ether 
 Metals on: for being laid as a Groimd, you may hatch 
 or iicightcn with bright Gokl, or other ihining Metal: 
 and i? Sold for about 6 s. an Ounce. 
 
 XXXV. Speckles. They are of divers forts, as Golden, 
 Silver, Copper, and many other colors, fome finer, fome 
 courfer, which arc to be ufed according to the Fancy of 
 the Ariiit, and as the nature of the matter may requuc : 
 they are ufed on Mouldings, outfides and infides of Bowls, 
 Cups, Boxes, DniAvcrs, &c. Thofe of Gold, Silver and 
 Copper are ufed about Indian Work. They are made 
 in England very well, and are Sold each of them at the 
 iame price, vi^. 4, 5 or 6 s. an Ounce, according as they 
 are in finencls, and to be had at a Gold Beaters, over- 
 againft Mercers Chappel in Cheapfide ; and at another of 
 the lame Trade, at the Hand and Hammer in Lonv 
 Acre. 
 
 ^ XXXVI. Colors Tr.znfparent. Thefe are laid upon 
 Gold, Silver, or fome light color ; by which they are 
 made to appear in their true colors, very lively and beau- 
 tiful. Ot thele there is, i. Fine f^erdigrije for a Green. 
 2. Fine Lake, for a Red. 3. Fine Smalt for a Blew. 
 Thefe muft be ground upon a Porphyry, with Nitt Oil, 
 io much as will ;ult moilteu the Qiiantity, and make it 
 
 fit 
 
chap. ^. Of Sizes andGuTthWatcit, S65 
 
 fit to work, grinding till the Mafs is as fine ani is 
 fmooth as Butter : then it is to be put into Mulble Shells 
 and mixed with Otl of Turpmtiney till it is thin eaoiigb 
 forUfe. 
 
 XXXVII. Thefe being laid upon Gold, Sil'/er, or any 
 other light color, will be Tranfparent, andchauge their 
 Lightncfsor Darknefs, according to the Metals, Colors^ 
 or Ground you lay under them: but in grindmg Red, 
 Lake, you mulluie Drying Oil, inftead of Nut Oil. 
 
 XXXVIII. Opake or Embodied Colors. Thefe are laid 
 upon the Black of your defigncdWork, where you would 
 have Birds, Bealts, Flowers, Shrubs, TreeSj &'c. The 
 chief of thefe are, i. Vermlion for a Red. 2. White 
 Lead for a White. 3. Flake White, which is a pure white, 
 if it be for any Nice Work. 4. Oker or Orpimem for a 
 Yellow. 5. An Opake Bleve : this mult be made witli 
 iS>«<?/f, grinding it with Gum -<4r^/>/V^ vvater, andaddhig 
 White Lead to give it a Body, in fuch Quantitys, as toi 
 make it lighter or deeper, as you defire it: and thus you 
 mult do with all tranfparent Colors, which have not a 
 Body of themfelves. 
 
 XXXIX. Son)e ufe Rofett, Fine Laie, and Sea Greeri 
 for a Fw^le : as alfo other forts of Reds and Greens ; 
 which ways of working are very manifold, and require 
 much Pradice and Experience to find out what things 
 to mix together, and their various and jull proportions 
 for lightnefs or deepnefs of the Color. 
 
 XL. Lafily, all theje Opake Colors are to he Liyed with 
 Gum Water : thofe who have a mind to work either in 
 Gum Water or Gold Size, iliall in what follows receive 
 fufHcient Dire6Hons : But the Tranfparent Colors arc to 
 be wrought with Nut Oil, as has been faid already. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 of Sizes and GstmW'Msr^ 
 
 ■T 
 
 ^O make I/inglaJ^ Six,e. 
 ^ Fine Ifmglafs in fmall bits |j. fair water itfis,- 
 Ul it {-land 1 2 Wouis oniy warm ; sfterwatds ice it boii^ 
 H n H 2 but 
 
8(54 Pofygraphices, Lib. XL 
 
 but very gently, and continue the fimmering till it is all 
 diflblved, the water being alio waited away to a Pint 
 or lefs: let it cool, and keep it forUIc. It will be thick 
 like a Gclly, but will not keep above 2 or 3 days; fo 
 that you ought to make no more than prefent occafioii 
 requires. 
 
 II. To wake Gold Sizat. B? Gum Animi, Afphaltum, 
 ana^j. Minium, Litharge of Gold, Umber, ana ^jfs. all 
 being in very fine poudcr, add thereto Linfeed Oil ^iiij. 
 Drying Oil ^viii. (in Cap. 2. SeU. 25.J digeft over a gen- 
 tle Fire which does not Flame, io as it may only fimmer 
 or bubble up, not boil, (for fear of fetting the Houfe on 
 Fire,lhould it run over) keep it conllantly Itirring with a 
 Stick, till the whole Mafs of Ingredients arc dilfolved 
 and incorporated, and forbear not IHrring it till it be- 
 comes thick and Ropie, and is boiled enough ; being al- 
 molt cold, Itrain it through a courfe Linnen Cloth, and 
 keep it for Ufe. 
 
 III. To prepare it for reorkin^. R of this Gold Size 
 q. V. put it into a Mufcle Shell, adding Oil of Turpen- 
 tine enough to diffolve it, making it as thin as the bot- 
 tom of yom Seed-lac-Farni/h, hold it over a Candle to 
 melt, and then Strain it thro' a Linnen Rag into ano- 
 ther Shell: To thele add VcrmUion^ fo much as to make 
 it of a darkilli Red. If now it is too thick for Drawing, 
 you muft yet add fo much Oil of Turpentine as may 
 make it thm enough for that purpofe. The cheif ute of 
 this Size is for laying on of Metals, which we Ihall here- 
 after teach you- 
 
 IV. The he(i Gold Siz^e for Burniflnng. 
 
 Tji. Fine Bole q.v. grind it finely on a Marble with 
 Water ; then fcrape into it a little tried Beef Suet, grind 
 all well together : after which mix a fmall proportion of 
 Parchment Size, with a double proportion of Water, 
 and it is done. 
 
 V. To make Silver Siz-e. 
 
 ^ Fine Tobacco-pipe Clay, grind it fmall, (and if 
 you pkife, you may add a little Lamp-black, to turn 
 II of a light Alh color) fcrape into it a Uttle DeersSuet, 
 and grind them together cxtrcamly fine ; then add a 
 niixnik of Size and Water as bcfore-diredcd. 
 VL yittoibcr Silver Sizj. 
 Jik fiuc Tobacco-pipe Clay in fine pouder^.z'. fcrape 
 
 into 
 
Chap. J. of Sizes and Gum- Water. 86 5 
 
 into it foine bLick Lead and a little Genoua Soap : grind 
 them aJI well together, then grind them with Parchment 
 Size, m fiipra. 
 
 VII. yi Siz.e for Silver or Gold. 
 
 R Fine Bole in fine ponder Itj. black Lead ^i j. in pon- 
 der, grind them together: then add Oil Olive ^ij- Bees 
 Wax ^i- melted together : grind all thefe very finely in 
 a Mafs ; and laftlv'grind them together with Parchment 
 Si^e and Water. Remember this, That you never grind 
 more Gold or Silver Size at a time than will ferve the 
 pi^lentOccafion. 
 
 Vin. To make Parchment Siz^e. 
 
 ^ Cuttings of clean Parchment itj. (price about 3.'/.) 
 £air Water ifciv. boil to a Gelly : ftrain hot, tlien let it 
 cool, and it will be a Ihong Size. This may be ufed, 
 as well as for the former Occafions, in white Japan-work, 
 infiead of Ifing-glafsSize. 
 
 IX. The IV ay to ufe thii Siz.e. 
 
 Melt fome of it over a gentle Fire, and fcrape into it 
 as much Whitiing as may only color it: mix and incor- 
 porate them well together with a clean Pencil : with 
 this Frames, &c. may be whited or prepared, rubbing it 
 well in with your Brulh, that it may enter into every 
 hollownefs of your Carved-work, &c. letting it dry on. 
 Melt the Size again and put in more Whiting, fo as to 
 make it fomewhat thick j and with this you are to whi- 
 ten over your Frames, &c. 7 or 8 times, letting it 
 throughly dry between each time: but after the \x[\ go- 
 ing-over, before it is quite dry, you are to dip a clean 
 Brulli-pencil in fair Water, to wet and fmooth it over; 
 which, when throughly dry, you are to ruili it over as 
 the neceflity of the Work ih;ill require. Afterv/ards with 
 a Gouge or Chizel, not half a quarter of an inch broad, 
 open the Veins of the Carved-work which the Whiting 
 had choakt up ; then wath a fine Rag wetted and your 
 Finger, carefully fmooth and Avater plain it all over; 
 w^hich, when dry, is then fit to receive the former Gold 
 and Silver Size. 
 
 X. To make Gold Siz^e in Oil. 
 
 Bj Yellow Oker in fine pouder q.v. mix it with Lin- 
 feed Oil, which is fomewhat fat q.f. grind them well 
 together, and put the Mafs into a Gally-pot, upon which 
 put /Ibme fat Oil to keep it iiom skinning : cover it cloie 
 
 N n n 3 with 
 
$66 Tolygrapbicts, Lib. XI. 
 
 •with Bladder or Paper, and keep it for Ufe : it will 
 keep good I o or 1 2 years, and be better, not worfe. This 
 Gold Size is ahvays preicnt and ready for any urgent 
 Occafion : and if you would have your piece extraordi- 
 narily done, let it be twice thinly primed over with the 
 Priiningin cap. i.JeB:. 23. and laid by for 3,4 or 5 days, 
 to drv- throughly. 
 
 XI. To maie Gfim-WMfr. 
 
 Rj Thcwhiteft, cleareftandbcftGum-^r^rWr^lj. fair 
 Water 5xii. mixafiddifTolve : when throughly dinolved, 
 ihain it thro' a fine Holland Rag, and keep it in a Glafs 
 Bottle for life. 
 
 5<II. Laltly, As to IJtng-glaR Siz.€y this Camion 16 to 
 be nhirrvcd. 
 
 When you lay Blew?, Whites, or any other Colors 
 wiih it, let it not be too ftrong, but rather very weak, 
 and fufficient to bind the Colors, and make them Itick 
 on the Work ; for if it is too ihong, it will be apt to 
 crack and fly off. But when you lay or wa!li with clear 
 inng-p.l.ifs, to keep yourVarnilh from foaking into or 
 tarntliiing your Colors, then it 13 to be ftrong, and of a 
 full bodv. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of making l^arnilbes, 
 
 I, nr H E beft white Varnini. 
 
 ■ ' "*' Bi Of tht vehiteii and L'.rgcji Gum-Sandarack rohich 
 dip the Icafi yelloiv f xx;;. of clear Venice Turpentine ^iij. 
 wbitCil Gnw-Animi and Gwn-Copal^ ana ^ifs. choice Ada- 
 Tiche %]. clearel: Bcninnnn^ Gum-Elcmi, white Ro/in, ana 
 ^is. To the Sandarack and Aiajliche in psuder^ pttt rettified 
 Spirit e[ Wine Ifijfs. in a Bottle by it fei<\ To the Venice 
 TftrpentinCy ytnimi and Benjamin, ( both in fine pouder ; J 
 f'Si of the laid Spirit ^vij- To the Copal and Rofin in pouder^ 
 jjft' vf Spirit ?vii;. To the ElefKi^ by it fch\ put alfa of Spi- 
 rt |tv. dijfilve each apart y bee aalc they r/tore eaflly and better 
 ■dfl](ih? apart than together, /having the Bottles once in two 
 tc'in for ihe f^fi dav, and then ona or t:vice a day for 2 flr 3 
 
 d.:ys 
 
Chap. 4. Of making Varm(hes, S6j 
 
 days more : this done, thro' a fineLinnen Strainer jftraiii 
 all the Diflblutions in each Bottle into one large one : 
 digeftali together for 6 or 7 days, the longer the better, 
 and gently decant as much as will mn clear, refen-ing 
 the thick and muddy part for ordinary Ufes, as mixing 
 with other Varniili for black work, and to glcfs the iu- 
 fldes of Boxes, &c. 
 
 II. Another white Varniili inferior to the former. 
 Bi Gum- Sandarack in ponder ^xij. hcjl rectified Spirits 
 
 ifciv. mix , Pyake them well together, and digejl for 2 or ^ 
 days : then decant or firain the clear into another Bottle. 5c 
 Adajhche in ponder |xi;. reBified S. V. itdv. digeji 2 or 3 
 days as before, then decant or jirain into another Bottle, ani 
 keep it for Ufe. Now, Avhen you defign to Varnilh a 
 Print or any other thing with thefe Varnilh es, you mult 
 mixthefe two together thus. R? of the Sandarack Var- 
 niili |iv. of the MafHch Varniili ^viii. mix them well. 
 The reafon of this Mixture, is, that we may have the 
 Vamiih to anfwer our deiire in Hardnefs or Softnefs : 
 when you have fet by your Work for 2 days, you may 
 try its Temperature, by prefTmg your warm Fingers on 
 it,' if it leaves its Print behind it, it is then too foft, and 
 you mult ufe a waili or two of the Sandarack Varniili, 
 to harden it; but if it not only refills your Touch, but 
 hasfome Streaks, Flaws or Cra:k!cs like Scratches ni it, 
 more orlefs, it is then too hard, and mull: then be hclpt 
 with a walli or two of the Malliche Varniili. 
 
 III. To make Seed-Lac Varniili. 
 
 15i Befi reUified Spirits itvii;. Seed Lac l^xir. pHt dlimo 
 a very wide-mouthed GlaJI Bottle • mix and di^e/I 24 ho irs^ 
 or till it is dijfohed, often poking it very svcll, to keep tl e 
 Gum from clotting together : this done, take another Gl^js 
 Bottle as large, and jirain the dijfdved Aiattcr thro' aS y/ii- 
 ner of Flannel, fhaking all well together- before yon p:^p it 
 thro' the Scrainer ; and then in llraining; fjaee-c: iti-wjih 
 your Hand, leaving the Faeces or Dr.gs behin;], which are of 
 no Ufe, but to be cid ivay .' then if op up the Bottles 0'' Var- 
 nlfh., digcfl in a vo.-'.rm Sand heat 5 or 4 day r, and hiivg ?? ell 
 fettled, decant off very ryently the top or p::re cle./r of yixir 
 I'^amijh^ jo long as it v/ill run clear:, and na hniver. Let 
 the remainder jettle again for ^ or i\. days, aid decant off all 
 that which is fine, and hep it for Uie. 
 
 IV. Now, here is to be noted. Til vt upon any urgent 
 
 Nn 11 4 '^ Occafiou 
 
86S Polygnphices, Lib. XI. 
 
 Occafion yoii may make this V.-irnifh in Icfs than 24 
 hoviis time, and ule it immediatclv ; but the former 
 Preparation is the better : befidcs which, the clear Var- 
 rilL you thus decant off from the top of the Bottle, is of 
 extraordinary Uie to »adorn your Work, and make it 
 more glofTy and beautiflil. Some make this Varnillii by 
 boiling, but that is an ill way, becaufe the Strength of 
 the Spirit is lofl, which out!,htefpcciallyto be preferred; 
 bcfides which, you may hazard the fetting your Houfq 
 01) Fjre, and therefore alfoto be avoided. 
 
 V. To make Shell-Lac Varnilli. 
 
 B? Of hcjl rectified Spirits \W\\\. of the hfj} pell Lac^jcaW. 
 mix a.yjdjhike the/K well together ^ and let them (land 24 or 48 
 hours, and ff, jlr.iin ut fupra thro' a Flannel Bag, and keep 
 U clrf^ (lopt for Ufe. This is that wliich the commoi? 
 Varii;l>icrs moRly ui^c, for that it has a double or treble 
 Advantage with it; i. That you need not wait any 
 time for its Perfe6^ion, but it is fit ibr Uie the fame mo- 
 ment it ism.ade. 2. It has a greater Botly than that of 
 Seed Lac, and therefore lels Labor and kls Varnilli goes 
 to psrfeding the Work, and make it look tolerably 
 bright. 3. That it is a fit Varnilli for ordinary Works 
 which recjuire not polilliing, it looking well when firft 
 -4<^i"ie, or for a Imall time ; but it is couimonly attended 
 with a Mift or Dulnefs. 
 
 VI. Thele foUoifing things are alf.) to he ohjcrvid. 
 
 I. That the Seed-Luc Varnifh has nmch Sediment and 
 Dregs in making it ; whereas this Shell-Lac l^.^rniPo has 
 tiione, (ox it wb.oUy diiloives, and is free from all Foecea 
 and Drofs or Foulncls ; yet it is requihte to llrain it, kit 
 Jiny Sticks or Straws finould be in it. 2. That tho' mis 
 Varnilli has noSedimcp,t, vet it is much inferior to the 
 orh^r in other Refped?,; tor this Shell- Lacy ami jh will 
 rever be fine, clear and transparent as the other is, and 
 tJicrtfore it will be in vain either by Art or Induihy to 
 tfadcavor the makiiig it lb. 3, That if ^^ou dtfign a neat 
 'pj:)liyj-)icce ofWoik, ycumufi totally banilh this Var- 
 r.ill-i from voiir Hie: but it iscom.mordy ufed in ordina- 
 ry Varniihings, as of Olive-wood, \VaUiiut-tree, and 
 
 LjC like. 
 
 Vn. Another n\iKt ShcJ-Lac VarnilTi. 
 VsL Of Shel'Lac yarnijh itiij. denies Turpentine $vi, 
 mx and difj'ihe in a gends Sand he.it. This will harden 
 
 well, 
 
Chap. 4. of making VArmjhes. S69 
 
 well, and is a Varni'li good enough for the infides oi 
 Drawers, Frames of Tables, Hand Pillars, Frames of 
 Chairs, Stools, and the like. 
 
 VIII. To make a Yellow .Securing Varnifli. 
 
 IJi J^enke Turpentine q.v. h:il it per fe in a PipHn with 
 A very gentle Char-coA Fire, birring it continndly with a 
 Stick : boil it fo long till being cold, it tnay be crumbled into 
 a fine yell orv Ponder. Tah of this Ponder ^'u of the finefl 
 Seed- Lac F'arnifh ^iv. mix them in a large Gb.f Bottle, Hon 
 it clofe, and digefl in a very gentle hent or only narrmh, till 
 the Rofin is mojily diffolved, now and then anfioppinp- the 
 Claji, to prevent its breaking: then digej; 2 days cool^ and 
 decant the clear into another Bottle, iund hep it ch)je jlopt 
 fcrUfe. 
 
 IX. Here is to he ibferved ; 
 
 I. Whatfoever yoii defign to do with this Varnilli, 
 whether Gold- works, Metals, Colors, Rocks, Plains, 
 Woods, or other Figures, to give them a Glofs, and keep 
 them from Tarnilliing, ought to be doiie in a warm 
 place, that it may alio the fooner dry ; if that cannot 
 be had, you muft give it the fpace of half an hoar to dry 
 in, between every waili, however it will become glolTy 
 either way. 2. Take a Pencil proportionable to your 
 Work, dip it in the Varnilh, and go over your VVork 
 Iprig l3y Iprig, and part by part, as Leaves, Stalks, 
 Flowers, Rocks, Figures, &c. with a (leady Hand, ha- 
 ving a care not to trefpafs in the leaft upon your Black 
 or Gro'tind-work. 3. Having run over all your Work 
 thus 3 or 4 times, (not oftnei, ieii: you fpoil the Color 
 of your Metal ) red fatis'ied, tliat your VVork, -whether 
 oF Gojd-fize or Gum-w^ater, is df tended againfl: any 
 thing of Tarnilbing, or whatothcr Injury of Air or Age 
 foever, atid that there is added to the native Luiire of 
 the Metals a very bright, admirable and durable Glofs. 
 
 X. A white poiiihing Varnilli, much like fome of 
 the Indian Performances. 
 
 ^ P^enice Turpentine it.;, fair Water l^'i'j. vnx and hojl 
 4II over af^entle Fire in a clean Pipkin, (iirring ir of:en Kith 
 A Slick fo long, till rchcn cold, yopi can reduce it to fne p-m- 
 der, rahich rvill be rvhite as Paper. 15? of tlrU Ponder'^], of 
 Seed-lac Varnifh Iviij. p%t all into a Bottle which mil holi 
 5 XX. ftop it clofe and dige.Iover a gentle heat (noiv and tl::;t 
 opening the GlafI) till t/je Tirpentine is nearly all dijfolved : 
 
870 PelygrAphices. Lib. XI. 
 
 then digcf} in a cool pLicc for 2 or 3 days, and decant the clear- 
 e!i for Ufe. You mult wafh oftner with this Varnifh 
 than with that ju(l before, before you can make your 
 Work acquire a glittering Polilh. 
 XI. Here is to be obferved; 
 
 Fir}, That your piece now lying before you, drawn 
 and finii"hed, you may fecure againft all Danger by 
 means of this laft VarnilTi. Take a fit, neat, clean Var- 
 nilli-pcrcil, dip it into this Varniili, (put into a little 
 Gally-pot) always Itroaking it againrt the fides of the 
 Pot, for fear it fhould be too full of Varniljh ; and with 
 this (without any diltinilion ) walh over your whole 
 Work, both Draught and Ground, and repeat it 5 or 6 
 times, as you fee your Gold or Metal keeps its color, 
 gently warming it and throughly drying it between each 
 walli, but let it be but jult warm, for if more, it will 
 ipoil all. 
 
 XII. Secondly, This being done, and that very evenly 
 and fmoothly, kt it lye 4 or 5 days or more, and then 
 polilTi it thus : R Tripoli m fine pouder, and a fine Rag, 
 dip the Rag intoaBaion of Water, and lick up with it 
 fome of the Tripoli, with which rub your Work with a 
 gentle and even Hand, till it becomes linooth and glolly j 
 and let your chief Aim be to render your Ground or 
 Black fmooth and bright. 
 
 XIII. Thirdly, To take off the Tripoli, you muft ufe a 
 foft Spunge dipt in Water, to walh your Work with ; 
 and then a clean, foft, dry Rag, to free it wholly : af- 
 ter which mix a little Oil and Lamp-black together, and 
 with a fine Rag rub it up with that, and then with a 
 dry Rag clear it from the Black and Oil : laftly, with 
 one clean, foft, dry Rag more, rub it gently lb long till 
 it fhines, and is fulficiently polilht, according to the 
 utmoit of your dcfire. 
 
 XIV. To make V.unifn tbi Prints oiPidurcs in Oil, 
 called THrpcntiric Vxrniih. 
 
 ^ Venice Turpentine ^iii. py^t it into r.n E.v.ken Pot over 
 'he Fire: vehen melted, add to it Oil of Turpentine ^vj. ,is 
 foon as they boil, take off the Pot, and when cold, put it up 
 'into A GU(i Bottle, which keep clofe llopt for Ujc. • With 
 rhi5 you may varnifn your Prints on Glafs, or other 
 thinjis, to render them tranfparent ; and this is what 
 rhc Shc-is feil k:v Hue Varniih. If ir ihouid prove too 
 
 thick, 
 
Chap. 5* Of other hmds of Varnifhes, 871 
 
 thick, you may make it thinner by an Addition of more 
 Oil of Turpentine. 
 
 XV. A more excellent Varniflti for Pi(5lures in Oil, 
 or making Prints tranfparent. 
 
 Bj Of the he(i Oil of Turpentine ^xlviij. pure, clear, tvhite 
 Majliche in fine ponder ^xvii;. mixandfhake them rvell toge- 
 ther till the Mafiiche is dijfolved : then hang the Bottle in a 
 V^effel of Water, hut not to deep as to touch the bottom, and 
 make the Water boil for half or three quarters of an hour or 
 more, taking it out in that fpace ^ or ^ times, tofhake it -, fo 
 will you have Varnilli as good in its kind, for thefe 
 Furpofes, as any other whatfoeyer. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of making fomt other kinds ofVarmfhes. 
 
 I 
 
 ^Ommon Liquid Varnifh. 
 
 ^^ V)i. Linfeed Oil a. v. Gum Sandarack q. f. being 
 in fine pouder, mix and diffolve over a gentle heat, and 
 keep it for Ufe. 
 
 II. A Varnifh for Painted PiElures. 
 
 li White Rofin ft;. Gum Arabick, Venice Turpen- 
 tine, Linfeed Oil, ana ^ij. firft melt the Rofin and Lin- 
 feed Oil together, and rtrain it very hot : fteep the Gum 
 in Oil Olive q.f. till it is diiTolved, and rtrain it: mix 
 both thcfe together, and add the Turpentine ; then digcll 
 over a Stove Fire till they are well mixed, and fo keep it 
 for Ufe. When you have occafion for it, ufe it hot. 
 
 III. Another for the fame. 
 
 5i Gum Sandarack, Olibanum, both in pouder, ana 
 5iv. Venice Turpentine q.f. mix, melt and incorporate 
 over a gentle Fire, and ftrain it hot out. When you 
 have need of it, ufe it hot, and it will dry immediately, 
 and Ihine, and be gloffy. 
 
 IV. Another for the fame. 
 
 "^i Pure clear Amber (diffolved in Oil of Turpentine ) 
 sfiij. mix it with refined Linfeed Oil fj. over a gentle Fiie, 
 itLrring them well, and it is done, 
 
 V. A 
 
Sj2 Folygraphices, Lib. XI. 
 
 V. A gsnAViXmi^ for GoUy Silvery Braf^ Cupper ^ Irorty 
 Steely Stnncy IVoor/, Velom or Paper. 
 
 R Bennit\un in fine poudcr cj. v. red^ificd Spirits fo 
 much a-: to llipernate 4 inches : digeft 4 days, then 
 Itrain it, and it will be bright and lliining, drying im- 
 mediatelv, and retain its Briglitnefs many years. Nore^ 
 If it is Silver wliich is to be varnillicd, you ou^ght to ufc 
 the white part of the Benjamin only ; but if it is Gold, 
 or any thing gilded, chuie the clear part of the Benja- 
 min; and bclbre {training, put in a ihv Blades of Saf- 
 fron for the Color lake. 
 
 VI. A Farnilh fsr Wood and Leather. 
 
 IV Tincture of Safiron, or Tunnerick made -vtith re- 
 <ftifie • Spirits it;, prepared Gum-lac q. f. diffolve the 
 Gum in the 7 inclure, awd it is done. This Varnilh is 
 alio of great Ufe to lay over Gold and Silver, or any 
 thing which is expofcd to the Air. 
 
 VII. A V'txrnijh p.trtkaUrly [or Gold, Silver^ Tin or 
 Copper. 
 
 Vji. LinfcedOil^xij. Maftiche, Aloes, ana ^j. (in pou- 
 der) mix all in a glazed Earthen Pot, which cover with 
 another; in the bottom of which let be a hole, wherein 
 to put a fmall Stick with a broad end, to itir withal: 
 cover them all over with Clay, (except the hole) let it 
 over a gentle Fire, and (tir it as often as it boils up for a 
 while, and then ftrain it for Ufc. Firft let the Metal be 
 poJifhcd, then /trike it over Avith this Varnilli. 
 
 VIII. To make a cowman fort of l^arnifh. 
 
 ^ Rectified Spirit ]tiv.ShelMac|ix. Rofm^iij. diffolvc 
 the Gums in a gentle heat, (being clofe covered) then 
 let them fettle, and llrainor decant oft the clear, which 
 keep clofe in a Glafs Bortle for life. The thick which 
 remamsyoii may fquceze thro' a Strainer, and keep for 
 other Purpofes. 
 
 IX. To mah common Varn'ij}}. 
 
 R' Gum Sandarack in ponder. Oil of Spike, Oil of 
 Turpentine, ann ibj. mixanddiifolve over a gentle heat, 
 and it is done. If thro' Carclclfnefs the Fire ihould 
 catcli hpld of it, clap a Pewter Diih or Cover, with a 
 wet Wocileii Cloth, the top of the Velfel dole, and it 
 •will immediately go out. 
 
 X. Veriiix Italica, The Italian Varn\fl:>. 
 
 15i Pur« Venice Turpcntuieiviij. evaporate to dryncfs 
 
 over 
 
Chap. 5' Of other kinds of Vnrnifbes, 875 
 
 over a very gentle heat, and reduce it into pouder : affufe 
 thereon gradmm Oil of Turpentine twice iLs weight; 
 digeft till the Pouder is diflblved : decant the clear from 
 the Faeces, and keep it for life. 
 
 XI. Th: Ala rich y^wnifh. 
 
 ^ Oil oF Turpentine itij. Grains of Maftich in fine 
 pouder ftj. or fo much as the Oil will diiTolve : when 
 cold, feparate the clear from the Faeces, and keep it for 
 Ufe. 
 
 XII. The Olihanum V^.rnifh. 
 
 R It is made altogether as the former : fo alfo a Var- 
 nilh of Gurn Animi, of Cop~il and of G:im SAndaraci. 
 Thefe Afatich, OlibiViMf^y ylnimi. Copal and S^wdaraci 
 Varnillies are all of good Ufe for the prefening and fet- 
 ting off of Pichires : and being laid upon things Gildec^ 
 or Siivered over, or laid ever \vith the Leaves of any Me- 
 tal, they fo prefen-e them, that they loole not their Co- 
 lor or Glofs. 
 
 XIII. To mah a RedVarnifh. 
 
 ^ Rectified Spirit ifcij. Shell-lac |iv. Sangnk DtacotUs 
 in fine pouder fviii. Cochenele f i. digelt a week over a 
 gentle heat, and Itrain out for life. 
 
 XIV. To niAe a TelloTP F'arn^h. 
 
 Bi Rectified Spirit itii. Saffron Ij. infufe4days, ftrain 
 out, and add Sanguis Draconis fii. fine Aloes |;. digeft 
 a week in a gentle ^and heat, and (train out. 
 
 XV. An exceUenr Univtrjal f^arfjijh. 
 
 ^ Of the belt rectified Spirits itiv. of the beft Oil of 
 Turpentine f\-iij. Gum Animi, or Copal, or Gum Sanda- 
 rack in fine pouder itj. mix, and diifolve by digeitingin a 
 gentle heat : decant the clear, and keep it in a Bottle 
 clole Itopt for Ufe. 
 
 XVI. Th; Amber r.-rni/h. 
 
 ■gj Clear Amber in fubtil pouder c;.^. affufe thereon 
 Linfeed Oil or Oil of Walnuts, lb much as may melt 
 the Pouder : gently boil them till they acquire a black 
 color ; then pour all out upon a wet Marble: beat this 
 Mafs into pouder, and dilTolve it grada:i?K in a lufHcient 
 quantity ot' prepared Linfeed Oil, and keep it for Ufe- 
 as vamilliing Canes, Sticks, Fans, Pots, Cup?, Tables' 
 Stones, Statues, Cabinets, c^c. being laid on vritii ahard 
 Brulli Pencil, the better to fprcad it over. 
 
 XVI. Tbt 
 
S74 Polygrdphkes, Lib. XL 
 
 XVII. The Indian yarnijh for CnhinHSy CoacheSj ani 
 fitch lil^e. 
 
 9i Re£lified Spirits itiv. Sced^lac or Shell-lac i(xij. put 
 thcin into a Glals Body and diffolve in B. ^W. (but be 
 ima the Water in the Balneum boils not, for then it will 
 turn the Varnifh white : ) ftrain thro' a Flannel Bag, 
 and keep it in a Glafs Bottle clofe ftopt for Ufe. This 
 Prcfcrves Leaf Silver it is laid on from the Injuries of the 
 Air^ and. makes the Silver look of a Geld color ; for which 
 jReafon Coach-makers and others ufe it. If it is laid on any 
 Other Color, it makes it look very much more beautiful : 
 and if in any place it lyes rough, you may polilli it with 
 fine Pouder of Emery and Water, or rather with Tri- 
 poli. 
 
 XVIII. A (irong Varnifh or Cement to make a Dial 
 plain on a Wall. 
 
 ^ Lime and Sand, which temper with Linfccd Oil 
 
 af. This fpread upon the Wall, will harden to the 
 ardnefs of a Stone, and will not decay in may Ages. 
 This is the jlrongeji and mofi la^ingyarnilhy Cement or Pla- 
 fier for this P^rpofe ; hat if you cannot get Oil, you may 
 temper your Lime and Sand mth fcummed Adilk ; and this 
 you mil find ivill lajl 6 ti?nes ai long as the common or ordina- 
 ry Plajier, made of Lime and Hair with Water. 
 
 XIX. To make an excellent White l^arnifh. 
 
 1^ Rectified Spirits itiv. Oil of Turpentine ^iv. Gum 
 Sandarack, Maltich in fine pouder, ana ^mj. ^nj. Gum 
 Animi in fine pouder Jij. ^vj. mix ; digcft in a large 
 Bolt-head or Matrals, in a very gentle B. M. or Sand 
 heat, not fiillout boiling, which (lop well or cover with 
 a blind Head ; and in about 8 hours time all will be 
 diffolvcd; decant the clear into a Glafs Bottle well 
 %varmed before-hand, in which keep the Varnilli clofe 
 Itopt for Ufe. 
 
 XX. If you J^arnifh upon Paper p/tjied on a Board, you 
 rfjfijl firji prepare your Paper nith Ifmg-gla(i Siz^e, rubbing 
 it over with a Brulh of (Jatnels Hair 2 of 3 times, which 
 jstobc throughly dryedcach time; then putting a little 
 of the Varnilh into a warm Gally-pot, (you muft Hop 
 the remainder clofe, for fear, if the Spirits ihould evapo- 
 late, the Varnilli Ihould curdle and the Gums feparate) 
 lay on the Varnilli with a BruQi feveral times, letting 
 it ftand an hour befo;;c the Fire between each wafliing o- 
 
 veri 
 
Chap. $. Of other kinds of VAfnifljes. 87^ 
 
 ver : after 3 or 4 days time of drying it, pollfli it with 
 finePouder of Tr/po//, Emery 01 Putty y by help of a Rag 
 and a little fair Water. 
 
 XXI. Vernix Japanica, The Japan or Indian Varnifh 
 hy another Proceji. 
 
 ^ Rectified Spirits ftiv. Seed-lac in fine ponder ^xxxij. 
 mix them well, by ftrongly •Thaking them in a Glafs io 
 long till the Spirit has diffolvcd the Lacca : digeft 2 days, 
 fhaking it 2 or 3 times a day : then let it fettle and ftraiii 
 thro' a Flannel, or decant the clear j which keep in a 
 Bottle clofe ftopt for Ufc. 
 
 XX. Novp^ here is to he obferved ; 
 
 I . That tljis thin VarniHi, being laid upon any thing, 
 immediately drys, and that it ought to be continually 
 laid on, till it is thick enough and the Superficies equal 
 and fmooth. 2. That it is chiefly to be ufed in Aprily 
 May, Jtmey July or Anguji in a clear lliining day ; or if 
 in cold Weather, in a clofe warm Room with an Iron 
 Stove in it, or before a good Fire ; othetwifl it wall be 
 apt to chill, and your Work will be cloudy and opacous, 
 not clear and bright : after wdiich it is to be dryed in a 
 gentle heat for 6 or 7 days. 3. That it may be laid 0- 
 ver any Color, by which means the Color will look much 
 more beautifiil and glorious ; or otherwife it may be 
 mixt with the Color, being in fine pouder and iix)i{tned 
 with rectified Spirit ; or if the Color will yeild a Tin- 
 <5lure, it may be mixt with a TinClure of the fame color. 
 4. That being put upon Leaves of Metal, as of Gold, 
 Silver, Tin, Brafs, it makes them look much more glo- 
 rious, and preferves them alfo. That the yamilhed 
 things may be made fmooth and even by rubbing them 
 with Pumice-Stone and Oil Olive : and Ujilyj they may 
 be farther poliiht by rubbing them with Qialk or Putty, 
 by which means they will iliine, and look as clear as 
 Glafs. 
 
 XXIII. A Farnijh to preferve Timber or Wooden Works 
 from Rotting. 
 
 JJi The bell and hardeft Rofin, purify it well : add to 
 it a fufficient quantity of Linfeed Oil, lb much as may 
 conveniently ferve to toughen it ; melt and incorporate 
 them well together : then take Umber ground very fine, 
 and mix therewith j which being well mixed together, 
 
 and 
 
876 Polygraphiccf, LIS. Xl. 
 
 and whilft hot, you may lay oTi and varniili Timber or 
 other VVoi-iden Work thercwkli at plcafure. 
 
 XXIV. Here is alfo to be obfrrvcd ; 
 
 That it is an excellent VarnilTi to prefer\''C Timber or 
 Wooden Work, the Border-boards of Garden?, or any- 
 other thing, which you would have la(t long in Wet or 
 Moifture, as the Pillars of* Horiz^ontal Dials, Wooden 
 Pails, Rails, Gutters, Arbors, C^f. for it lies \\kz China, 
 Varnilli, and will endure lo times as lon^ as any Paint- 
 ing. 2. That it is an excellent thing to prime HoglTicads 
 or Barrels with which you ufe to keep Water in. Wooden 
 Cilkrns, &c. which may be done both within and on 
 the outfide ; and being fpread on Cloth with a Trowel, 
 it will make a moll excellent Covering for Tents, Huts, 
 Pcnt-houfes, Houfes of Pleafure, &c.^ 3. That the burnt 
 Umber is the beft Color to mix with it, yet you may 
 mix other Colors therewitii, as Minik-mj Ma/iicoty Li- 
 th.irge) rerdigrife, ScC but this lafl fome obied againft, 
 becaule of its corroding Qiialitv. 4. That the beft way 
 of laying it on, is, firft to heat it hot, forfeit will ftick 
 the ctoler and falter to the Wood. 
 
 XXV. To Prepare Linfced Oil for the Arfiber Farniff7 
 at Se(ft. 16. above. 
 
 Bj Linleed Oil q.v. put into it a piece of Bread ; fo 
 will an Eftcnxfcence be made by the Aqueous Particles : 
 then put in fome Alfali, as Lime, Clialk, Whiting, and 
 feveral Calces of Lead, that the Acid may bcabforbed: 
 let it fettle, decant the clear, and clarify it; fo it is pre- 
 pared. VJt of this prepared Oil, and put in per vices, 
 Pouder of Amber, Sandarack, &c. 
 
 CHAP. VL 
 Of making J^p^ff f^ar^ijbes, 
 
 I. \\JITite Japan Varnifh. 
 
 ^ ^ Thick Seed-lac Varnilli or the beft ^vhite 
 VarnilL ^vj. white Lead or flake Lead in fabtil pouder, 
 enough to color it white ; mix them. 2. R; of the thick- 
 eft, or rather beft white Varniih |vj, Venice Turpen- 
 
 tmc 
 
Chap. 6. Of making Japa» Farmfies, Sjj 
 
 tine |l. mix them well :' add white of flake Lead enough 
 tocolar it. 3. R; of the fineft whir^ Varnilh ?vj. pure 
 flake Lead in fine ponder, enough to color it white ; 
 mix them to be ufed as iliall hereafter be dire6ted. 
 n. Black Japan P^arnijh. 
 
 I, B? Of die thickeft Seed-lac Varni Hi ^vj. Lamp-blacI? 
 enough to color it t mix them in a Gally-pot. 2. gj oS 
 the thickeft Seed-lac Varnilli |vji F'enice Turpenri ne f ?. 
 3. B? of the finelt Seed-lac Varnilh^vj. Lamp-olack q-fi 
 mix them, to be ufed as hereafter direded. 
 IIL Another Black Japan f^arnijh. 
 Make the two jfirfl: degrees as 'before; then take of the 
 fineft Seed-lac Varnilli, of the hd\ white Varnilh (iri 
 cap.^. fe^. I.) ana ^iii. mix them well ; and then Tin- 
 6lure it with Lamp-black as before-dire6led. 
 IV. lied Japan F'arnijh. 
 
 I. Bi The thickelt Seed-lae Varnilli fW. Vermilioii 
 (j.f. viz,, as much as your Judgment and Experience 
 iKall direct you, to give it a good Tindtare : mix and 
 keep it for life. 
 "' V. A deep or dark Red Japan. 
 I. Make the Red in the jbrmer i>5iow. 2. % thick' 
 Seed-lac Varnilli |vi. fine Sanguis Draconis in fubtil pou- 
 der q.f. mix them. 3. IV fine Seed- lac Varnilli %v\. San-^ 
 guis Dracotiis in fine pouder^. /. mix therii for Wit. 
 VL A pale Red Japan Varnilh. 
 Hi Vermilion q. v. mix it with fo much white Lead 
 as to make it become of the Paleriefs you delire, or ra- 
 ther paler, becaufe the Varnilli will heighten^ it : mix 
 this with Seed-lac Varnilh, according to the afore-ooing 
 Methods. 
 
 VIL Olive-colored Jap^n. 
 
 ^ Thick Seed-lac Varnifh^vj. Englilh ^'mk in fiibti^ 
 ponder, mixed with Lamp-black and white Lead in due 
 proportion ^./. mix them fof Life. If it is too light, 
 help it with Lamp-black : if too dark, Avith white Lead i 
 if too green, with limber ground fi~ne, for this wili= take 
 away the Greennefs.' 
 
 VIII. Chednnt-colored Japdn^ 
 
 1. R? Indian Red or Red-brown Oker, grind with Or- 
 dinary Size or Water-till it is as fine and as loft as But- 
 ter ; then mix a little white Lead, which grind Ifrongly 
 as before: and la fl:ly Lamp-black in a At proportion^ 
 
 O o ' itia- 
 
878 Pol^grdphices. ' Lib. XL 
 
 ttirring and mixing them welt together. 2. If the Mix- 
 ture is too bright, darken it with Lamp-black : if too 
 dark, lighten it with white Lead, varying the Proporti- 
 ons till you have perfected the Color you aim at ; foe 
 what Color exa6tly you have when thus mixt and wet, 
 the fame alfo will arife when varnilhed, tho' drying 
 without Varnill), it will look otherwife. 3. \^ thick 
 Seed-lac Varnilli ^vj. of the former prepared Color <j./. 
 mix them in a GaUy-pot over a very gentle Fire, for 
 Ufe. 
 
 IX. Blerv Japitn. 
 
 I . Vit. White Lead, grind it upon a Porphyry with 
 Gunvwater till it is impalpable. 2. IV the finell and 
 beft Smalt, which mix with Ifmg-glafsSize: to this put 
 of your white Lead fuch a proportional quantity as you 
 w^ouldhave it in ftrength ol: Body; mixthcfe together to 
 the Confiftenceof common Paint. 3. If the Blew is too 
 pale and weak, add more Smalt, and no white Lead j 
 but if it is too deep, then add more of the wliitc Lead. 
 
 C H A R VIL 
 
 Of making Luckering Varnijhes. 
 
 I. ^ir^H E common Lacker Varnifl?. 
 
 J- \^ Rc6Vihed Spint? it>iv. Shel-lac in ponder lb;'. 
 j)ut them into a Gallon Glafs Bottle, and let them ftapd 
 till quite diiro!ve<:l t Ihain, and then add a little com- 
 mon SitngHu Dniconis in fubtil ponder, and a little Tor- 
 merick in fine poudcr, both tycd up in a Rag : digcft a 
 day or two, olten Ilia king it, and it is done. Where 
 note. That you may heighten or diminifh the Color^ by en- 
 creafing or diminifhing the qHAntity of the coloring Ingrt" 
 dients. 
 
 11. Another Lacker. 
 
 Tk Reitiiied Spirit Itiv. Shel-lac Ifcj. diiTolveandftrain :, 
 then initcad of common Sanguis Draconis^ take a very 
 little of Drop O'L^m S.wgMs Draconis in fine pouder, and 
 Engltjh Saffron dryed; which tye up in a fine Linncn 
 Rag, and put into the Varniln as before. JfyouwouU 
 have the Color deeptr, or more lik( Copper, add more Sanguis 
 
 Dracomsj 
 
/ 
 
 Chap. 7. Of mdkiff^ Lackering Farttijhes, 879 
 
 Draconis ; but if lighter and more -pkajam, then the mart 
 Saffron. 
 
 III. A Lacier Varniflj to he ^fed wit hoMi Fire or Stn. 
 9t.Of the following Varnid>>in/f6?.4.ibJv. VemceXxxi- 
 
 p€Htinefij.HJ.oriv. mix and diffblve it well irv-ith the 
 Varnifh. With this yon may Lacier or F'arnifh any thing / 
 in the open Air^ Tf hu^h, altho" it may look dull and clomy 
 juft after Varnifhing, ytt rfiH that quickly vanifh, and it 
 mil obtain in ajhort time a pleafing and goodly L'tflye. 
 
 IV. To nxeh the be^ fort of Lacker f^arnijh nm :ffed by 
 the Gilders. 
 
 I. 5^ Fine Seed-lac Varniili (in c.-.p.^.fcEl. 3.) I'd], 
 with which mix Ornatto in fine pouder q.f. dillbh-e it 
 in a Gally-pot over a gentle Fire, which referve in a 
 Bottle cloie ftopt. 2. Va. fine Seed-lac Varnilh '^f\u 
 Cambogia in pouder as much as it will dilioive in a gen- 
 tle Sand iteat : referve this alio in a Glafs cloie ftopt for 
 U{e. J. It Seed-lac Varnilli ftij. and add to it 5 or 6 
 Spoonfiils of the fidt referved Tin6lure , and 10 or 12 
 Spoonfuls of the fecond referved varnilli Tin61ure ; to 
 which add dryed Saffron 5 is. tyed up in a Rag : diged: 24 
 hours, being firll well Ihaked together. 4. Then mak-e 
 a Tryal of this Varnilh upon a bit of Silver ; if it is too 
 yellow, put in more of the Ornatto or lirit referved var- 
 nilh Tin6lure ; but if too red, then put in more of tlie 
 Cambogia or fecond referved varnilh Tin(5iure : thus en- 
 creafing or diminifliin^ die Proportions till you have 
 brought it to the exa6l Golden color, which is the Ulti- 
 mate or only thing aimed at. 
 
 V. To Lacier Oil Paintings Siz,ed Worlsj or Burnip^t 
 Silver, 
 
 Warm your Frame or piece of Work before the Fire^ 
 then putting out fome of your Lacker into a large Gally- 
 pot, with a fine large and fall Brulh of Hogs-hair or 
 Camels-hair, nimbly pals over your piece, arJ be line 
 to mils no part of it, nor yet to twice walh any of the 
 iame ; but be fure to lay it thin and even, and prefently 
 warm it by the Fire whilit it looks bright ; (or by their 
 means you may Lacker it again in a quarter of an hour, 
 warming it before and after the Operation. Repeat the 
 Work t^vice or thrice, and if the Color is not deep 
 enough, do it a fourth time ; but beware of doing it toe* 
 deep, for that is a Fault not to be mtnded. 
 
 Ooo 2 W.To 
 
SSo Pol)graphices, Lib. XI. 
 
 VI. To make Lackering look like Burnifht Gold. 
 
 h your Silver is before- baud well burnillied, and your 
 Lacker of a true Gold color, and it be carefially laid on 
 ivitli an even hand, not thicker in one place than in a- 
 nother, niattins^ it as you do burniOit Gold ; it will be 
 lo exadly like Gold Foil or Gilding,, that it will be able 
 to deceive tlie moil lubtil and curious Eye, not before- 
 hand acquainted with the Fallacy. 
 VII. JVo}i>, here is to U noted ; 
 
 That in L.Tckerine; Carved Works, you mufl be quick, 
 and llrike or iobb your Bnilli againit the hollow parts of 
 it, to cover them alio, matting orvarniihmg them deeper 
 and more dull th:in other parts of your Frame or Piece: 
 and this dccpning is done with the Lacker Varniili made 
 deeper wiiii the Orn.nto Varnilli, ( or with Ornatto it I'elf, 
 worth about 4^/. per ounce; ) which being well mixt, 
 with the iame,all the hollow and deep Places and Veins 
 of your Work, are therewith to be touched and deepened, 
 whereby you accoinplilli its Color, and bring the Refle- 
 <!;lioii of a pcrfcil Glory. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. . 
 Of the Way and Manmr of Far»ijhiffg, 
 
 L "TT H E Intent of Varnilliing, is, either to prefervx 
 ■■- the Glols of Paintings or Pidlures, or clle to rc- 
 prefcnt and imitate ihe Forms of lliiwing and periucid 
 Bodies. 
 
 II. To Vavmlli Paintings and Pi6lures, 'tis no more 
 but With a Pencil dipt in the Varnilli, to go over the 
 lame, then letting it dry ; and lb going over it io often 
 as ni Realon you lliall lee convenient, 
 
 III. If you are to imitate any thing, as Awher^ Lapis 
 La-^fili^ A'Lirhle, Torioih-fhelly SiC. you mu(t rirll make 
 the Imitation uf them upon that which you would Var- 
 lii'h. With their proper Colors, as in Liinnjiig or Paint- 
 ing with Oil, vvliich mult be throughly dry : then by the 
 tormer SetHon go over all with the Varnilh lb often, till 
 >ou Ice it thick cuoLi^h, letting it dry every tune leillirely. 
 
 IV. How 
 
Chap. 9- OhfervAtions inVArnifhing, SSi 
 
 IV. How to ule xht-Securing Farmfh and the whitt^ 
 Polifhing Varnifhy we have at large tau.8;ht you in rj/j. 4. 
 JeB. 9, 1 1 , 1 2, 1 3 . fo that no more need be faid of it in 
 this place. 
 
 y. Having Varnillied your piece fiifficiently over, and 
 being perfedly dry, according to the Nature and Curi- 
 oiity of it, it IS to go either unt>oliiLed, or to be polilh- 
 ed. If it is to be polilhed, i. You are to rub it with a 
 fine Rag, and fine Ponder of Tripoli and fair Water till 
 the greatert of its Roughnefs is taken away. 3. Then 
 ■walliing it clean from the Tripoli, if it is black Varnilb, 
 you nmrt perfed the Poiiibing of it with aiiorher fine 
 Rag, Lamp-black, and a little Oil Olive, rubbing it lo 
 long with them till it Ibinesand looks like a perfect Mir- 
 ror or Looking-glafs ; but if it is a white or light-colored. 
 Varniib, you inuft take ( inltead of the Lamp-black ) 
 very fine Pntty or Chalk, rubbing with that in likemau' 
 nertillthe PolilTiingisperfcdt. 
 
 VI. This being done, to clear the Varnill-iing of the 
 Lamp-black, or Putty, Chalk and Oil, you mylt rub 
 it with a fine, foft, dry Rag till the Lamp-black, Putty, 
 Chalk and Oil arelickt up with it, and total iyvanilli : 
 after which taking one clear, fine, loft, dry iids, nsore, 
 rub it gently and eyenly till it acquires the Cle.innels, 
 Glofs and Luitre you defire. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 Some general OhftrvAtions ia VitrnifJjing. 
 
 : I. T E T the Wood you would Varniil-i be clofe grain \\ 
 ^ free from all manr.er of Knots, Flaws, Holes or 
 Greafinefs, and verv fmooth and clean; wiiich,.it lo, 
 ; then Rulh it well all over with your J)-4tch Rulhcs. 
 : n. Lay with your Varni;hing-penci Is your Bl.icks or 
 • other Colors very even and imooLh, witho-'t any Knob?, 
 ; ^perities or Roughneis : irany liich thing appc^irs, with 
 your Ruih take them away: and. this you muli: conti- 
 nually do lb long as thole Inlpcdimciifi, Ihall follow 
 your Work. 
 
 Ooo 1 UJ. Work 
 
8S2 Folygrapbices, Lib. X!. 
 
 III. Work always in a Stoved Room (if in Winter) 
 and near a Fire, keeping your Work always warm, but 
 by no means hot, for then it will certainly bli(ter, or 
 crack and flaw, which is irreparable, and can never be 
 rectified or amended but by fcraping oft' all the Varnifh. 
 
 IV. After every diltind: walli you ought to let the 
 Work be throughly dry ; if not, it will always be full 
 of Knob?, Afperities or RoughnefTes, which will enforce 
 you to the cC)ntinual life of yourRullies. 
 
 V. Let your Work lye and relt after it is Varnifhcd 
 a? long as may be, or as your Convenience will admit ; 
 io wiii it prore the better, and receive the more exquifitc 
 Poliiliing. 
 
 VI. In Varnilliing, begin always your Stroak in tlie 
 middle of the Table, Box or Plain, (and not from one 
 end to reach to another ) and fo ftrike it to one of the 
 ends ; then taking it oft', put it to the place yoii began 
 at, and draw it to the other end ; and thus continue itj 
 till the whole Plain is VarniHit over. 
 
 VII. For if you lliould at one ftroak draw your Pen*! 
 ell from one end to another, it would hang upon thd 
 Edges and Mouldings of your Box or Piece, the Varnillr 
 lying in Drops and SplaHies, caufed by the Brufhes be-' 
 iiig at beginning of the Stioak over charged and too full ; 
 of Varni'ih ; for which Rcafon you ought t-o Itroak your 
 Pencil onoe or tv.^ice againit the fides of the Gally-pot, 
 to hinder this Abundance or Superfluity. 
 
 VIII. When you come to Poliiliing, let your Tripoli 
 be I'crapcd with Glals or a Knife, that it may be as nnc 
 and iot't as Ponder for Hair ; let your Rags alfo be very 
 foft, fine and clean, tho' for the more ordinary or com- 
 mon Work, coiwkx Tripoli and Rags may ferve: rub 
 indifferently hard, but fmoolh and even, Polilhing one 
 place as much as you intend for that time, before you 
 leave it and pais to another. 
 
 IX. Never Pohfli your Work to the ultimate fmooth- 
 nefsat one lime, but let it rtit 2, 3 or more days after 
 your fird Endeavour?, and then give it the Hnilliing iuid 
 concluding Stroak?. 
 
 X. Be careful alfo that you come not too near iliff 
 Vv'ood, !'.';{ your Work looks t'lin and hungiy, and as 
 ii wtic Tiin.;^d-barc; if 5011 wear the Varnifliing thu:* 
 
 • too 
 
chap. 10. Of Varnil^ng Wood. %%i 
 
 ^00 much away, there is no Remedy for it but by ano- 
 ther Varniiliing. 
 
 XI. life a large Quantity of Tri/jo/i at firft Poliiliing, 
 till it begins to be fmooth; afterwards a fmall matter 
 will be fiifficient ; and be fure there be no Gravely Grit, 
 Sand, or grating matter in it, kit it rale or fcratcli your 
 Work : iffo, you muit rub (mth ths Rag about your 
 Finger) till you Iiave polillit them out. 
 
 XII. When you come to clearing up your Work, walli 
 off your Tripoli mth a Spunge and Water, and after- 
 wards wipe it dry with old, foft, dryLinnen. 
 
 XIII. Then (your piece being black VarnilTi) mix 
 Laffrp-htack with Oil, and with another foft, dry Rag 
 rub your Work all over with it, letting no corner or 
 Moulding cfcape ; for this will abfolutely free your piece 
 from the remaining Tripoli. 
 
 XIV. This done, with another fine, clean, foft Rag 
 or Cloth, rub it well all over, not Iparing any pains, 
 with a nimble and quick Stroak, and as hard as you well 
 can ; fo will its Glofs and Luftre be incomparable. 
 
 XV. But if it is white Work, when you are come to 
 clearing it up, you muil not liiliy it with Lamp-hlack j 
 but give the ftiilhing polifh to it by Oil mixt with P.«*% 
 ox White G^alk, or Grounds oi Hair Pouj.r; concluJiug 
 with a fine, foft, dry Rag or Cloth, as in the foriReir. 
 
 CHAP. X- 
 
 Of Varnifhing Wood without Colors. 
 
 I.^TpO Varnifh Olive VVaodj TMes^ S-:mds, Cahinets^ 
 -■- Looking GlajfeSy Drr/Jing Boxes, Szc. R'^jh ovei t'le 
 piece you intend to Famiihy Nvliich being well done, let 
 it by a foft and gentle Fire, that it may be well wann- 
 ed, and fo made Ht to receive tlie Varniili. 
 
 II. Then walli it lo or 12 times over with thick Seed 
 lac Farnifh (which remained after t'nc top or fine was 
 poured off; with a Pencil fitted to the bii^:ncfs of your 
 Table, Cabinet, Frame, &c. letting it thvouglily dry 
 between ever\" waihing. 
 
 Ooo 4 III. If 
 
884 rolygraphicts. Lib. XL 
 
 III. If any Hil rocks, Knobsorrouohnefs does appear, 
 when dry, then rulli them off, at every turn as you 
 meet with thein ; and continue Rulliing it, till it is very 
 linooth. 
 
 IV. After all this, walTi it over again, fix feveral 
 times with the fimji of the Seed lac f^arnijh', and fo let it 
 itand tliree days, to dry throughly. 
 
 V. Then take Tripoli fcraped with a Knife: and take 
 a fine loft R:ig, dip it in tair water, and then in the 
 Tripoli, with which rub and polilh it, till it acquires an 
 adiriirabic fmoothnef? and glofs. 
 
 VI. But you muft be very careful, that youmb it not, 
 jior wear awav the Varnilli too much, • for that is no 
 wavs to be repaired, but by trclL VarnilLiiig it again;. ■ 
 
 VII. After yoLi have rulbed fbme confiderable time 
 ■with the Rag and Tripoli, you will do well to ufc the 
 Rag often wetted without Tnpo//, whereby you will ob- 
 tain the better Glofs. 
 
 VIII. Then Avipe off your Tripoli Avith a Spunge full 
 of fair water ; and afterwards \vipe off the water with a 
 dry Rag : Rub it M-ith Lawp-black and Oil all over, and 
 wipe off that with a dry Cloth: and ckat it with 
 another. 
 
 IX. If after all this pains, your Work looks dull and 
 hcavv, and the-V^irnilhing milty, (which is caulcd by 
 polilLingit be;oreit was throughly dry, in moid, damp 
 We.uher) you muft give it another (light Polilh, and 
 clear it up, as before, and that will give it its due Lu(hc, 
 
 X. If you have b/Sen too fparing of your Varnitli, lb 
 that it is not thick enough to endure a throngh Polilli, 
 you muft ule again your fmcj} Seed Lie Furnijh, giving it 
 5 or 6 WafTies more. ' '^ 
 
 XI. And then, afrcr 4 or 5 iiys time, in which it 
 will be throughly drycd, you mult l-'oliiL it, and clear 
 It np, as bctore. 
 
 Xn. If ycu defire to keq)theabfolute, true, natural 
 at d genuine color of the Wood, you muft then oiilyuic 
 X.\\K:]V!:vel^(vrniih (in Cap. 4. S;:d . \.) tor that is the only 
 thing which complcatly anlwers this end, tor that being 
 o. ten walned with it, it necellarily heighlcusand iiicrca- 
 les the true natural Olive Color. 
 
 XIII. r.i K'rnijh Wallnut Wood. ^ The fame Method is 
 to be oblei-ved in this ai in that Ol Olive, and the lame 
 
 Rules 
 
Chap. II. Of Dywg JVood, Bo^es, Sec! 88 5 
 
 Rules will hold exa6lly in all other forts of Wood which 
 are clofe and h:ird, and of a fmooth Grain, as Box, 
 Lime Tree, Pear Tree, Yew, crc. 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 Of Dying or Staining Woody Bones y Ivory and 
 Horns, 
 
 I. COmetimes Tables, Stands, Cabinets, Dre(Ting-Box- 
 
 ^ es, Looking Glaffes, Frames, &c. being made of 
 differing Woods, and of Colors which are difliked, you 
 may by the following Rules, Dye or Stain liich forts of 
 Woods, Bones, Horns,, &c. of vvhat Colors youpieafc, 
 and then by the former Rules Varniili upon them ; io 
 will they look very pleafmg to the Eye, and as if truly 
 Natural. 
 
 n. To Dye Wood of a Beautiful Red. 
 
 Make a Rrong Alum water, put your Wood into it, 
 and let it boil a little : then take it out, and put into 
 the faid Water a fufficient Quantity of Ground Bralll 
 Wood : put your Wood in again, and boil a Qiiarter of 
 an Hour, and it is done. When dry, Rulh and PoliHi 
 it, and you will find it a Rich and BeautiRil Color. 
 Note, Woods which are vnhite^ take this Dye befi. 
 in. To Dye or Stain a fne Tellow. 
 
 Take Knotty Alli, or any other Wood w^iich is ^vhite, 
 curled, and knotty; fmooth and Rulh it well; then 
 warm it at the Fire,and with a Brurti dipt m^.F. w:ij]i 
 over the Wood, and hold ii to the Fire (as you do Jap.vi 
 work) till it leaves fuioaking. When it is dry, Ri^/h it 
 again, for the ^.F. will make it very rough; Polilh it, 
 and if you plcafe Varnilli it with fine S:ed-lac VarnilL ; 
 and being dry, then Poliih the Varniih, and you will 
 find (becaufc the knotty and airled parts will admit of 
 great Variety ) that no Out-landiih Wood will iurpaCs 
 It, and that a pleafmgVariety will be interwoven, much 
 beyond whatever you could imagine or cxpccl:. Note, 
 If aljo yofi put Filings of Aletals, m of Silver, Copper, 
 Brals or Iron into the A. F. or Gold into it wl:h Salt or ^A 
 
 Armoniack' 
 
886 Welj^sphkts, Lib. XL 
 
 Armonbck, etu:h Mnd yeill prodftce a dijferent TinElttre, 
 ivhich will Dye the Wood accordingly. They oftentimes 
 Stock Pillols with fucli kind of Woad as tliis. 
 
 IV. To Dye or Stain Woods for Inlaid or Flomed Works 
 for Cabinet-makers. 
 
 ^ Juice of the moitteft or rew-made Horfe-dung ifcviij. 
 put it into 6, 7 or 8 feveral Veflels, and put into each 
 VeiTel Roch Alum and Gum Arabick, ana about the 
 (Quantity of a large Nutmeg, diflblving them : tlien put 
 into each VeiTel a different Color, as Red, Green, Blew, 
 Yellow, Orange Tawny, Purple, &c. fuflfering them to 
 Hand 2 or 3 days, often flirring them : then take your 
 Wood, (cut thinner than an Half Crown, and of what 
 breadth you pleafe ) viz.. Pear-tree or other white Wood, 
 put it into the faid fa'^eral Liquors boiling hot, in which 
 let it lye as long a time as is needful, to color it, but 
 fome pieces longer than others, for the longer they lye in 
 the Liquor, the deeper and higher the Color j fo will you 
 take them out throughly dyed, and of as many differing 
 Colors as there were Pots of Liquor. 
 
 V. To Dye or Stain Wood Black. 
 
 ^ Logwood and boil it in Water or Vinegar, and 
 whilft very hotbruili over or dip your Wood in it 2 or 3 
 times : then take Galls p.iv. broken into bits, Copperas 
 p. j. boil than well in the Water, with which wain the 
 Wood fo often, or Itccp it in the Liquor till it is perfeftly 
 black. 
 
 VL To Dye BonCy Horn, Ivory, &c. Black. 
 
 1^ yi. F. q. V. put bits of Brafs into it, letting it fland 
 till it is turned green, with which walli your Bone, Horn, 
 Ivory ( being firltPolilTicd) 2 or 3 times : then put them 
 intoa (trong Decodion of Logwood in fair Water whilft 
 hot, letting tliem lye a wiiilc : which done^ Ruili and 
 Polilli tlieiu, and tlicy will be as black, and have as 
 good a Glols as any Japan or Ebony. 
 
 VIL If yon rvoyJd have any Figure or Jet of Flowers, &c. 
 remain white upon the Ivory , draw them neatly on the 
 Ivory with Turpentine Varnifh before you Itrain it ; for 
 thole places which are covered w^ith the Varnilli, are lo 
 Iccured, that the Dye or ilaining Matter cannot touch or 
 difcolor them. After the Mitter is dyed, you may hatch, 
 engrave or cut them with a Graver according as you dc- 
 
Chap., 1 2. OfVarntjbingFrints, 887 
 
 fign, and then fill thofe Lines with I^mp-bkck mixt 
 with Oil, to make them appear in their Perfection. 
 
 VIII. To Dye or Stain Boies^ Horn, Ivory^ Wood of a 
 Green Color. 
 
 Firft boil them in Alum-water, then take Wine Vi- 
 negar c]. V. Spanifh Green or common Verdigrife well 
 ground q.f. Sal Armoniack half as much as of the Ver- 
 digrife, mix them, and put the Wood, Ivory, Horns or 
 Bones into the fame, keeping them in a gentle boiling 
 heat till they are fufticiently llained. If the Wooden 
 Work is top Jarge to go into the VefTel, walli it over fc- 
 veral times boiling hot till the Color is good. 
 
 IX. To Dye Bones, Horn, Ivory or Wood Redt 
 
 Vi Rain Water q.v. Quick-lime q.f. mix and let it 
 diflblvc, and fland for a night : theri decant the clear 
 Water, ftraining it thro' a Cloth. ^ of this Water ftviij. 
 Brazil-wood fcraped or ground |iv. mix and boil gently: 
 then your Wood, Ivory, Horn or Bones (being firfl boiled 
 in Alum-water) put into and boil in the former Tin- 
 dure of Brazil till it is fufticiently Red. 
 
 C H A P. XII. 
 
 Of Varnijbing Prints, 
 
 I.- /^ E T a fmooth Board of a fize fitiirg your Print or 
 ^^ Pidlure, and with ftrong common Size made of 
 Parchment or Leather, Size it over thus ; Melt the Size 
 at the Fire, and fcrape Whiting into it to mak'e it of a 
 moderate thicknefs; and with a loft Hogs-haii Brulli or 
 Pencil fit for your Work, wafh it once over, letting it 
 dry : then white it again, and fo repeat it till it tie^ n-ith 
 a fair liibftaiitial Body, pcrfedtly covering the Gniin of 
 the Wood, whether it be Deal, Oak, Walniu-tree, or 
 any other. 
 
 II. Then with your Ruflies Rufh ofl* fome pnrt ofyour 
 Whiting pretty dole, and make it very fmooth ; but do 
 it not fo much as to difcover the Grain of the Wood. 
 
 TIL With FlcTYcr cr white Suirch ami Wat-r 7?>ake ^ Pc.'^ey 
 which with a Urge Bmil>pencil b'cliiiear ovci the bad-j- 
 
 iiic 
 
888 Volygraphites. Lib. XI. 
 
 fide of the Print or PuSlure, and carcflilly with an even 
 and ftcidy hand lay it upon the Board, prefTtng it down 
 and Imoothing it on, that it may (tick as clofe as may 
 be, withont Avrinkles, cockling, bliftering or any rifing 
 up ; which if you find, lay another dry Paper upon it, 
 and by preflTmg and itroking the Paper every ways, firee 
 it from the fame. 
 
 IV. Be cautious in this Pafting, that it be fo well 
 done, that not the leaft fwelhngor bubble be found up- 
 on your Work ; for if it be, the whole Beauty of the 
 PiiHire will be loft and deftroyed when you come to 
 Varnifliing. 
 
 V. Being thus fixed to the Board, let it throughly dr^' : 
 then take the cleareft of your Ifmg-glafs Size, ( in cap. 3. 
 Je^l.i.) being juft warm, with a foft Pencil walli over 
 your Print or Pidhire : let it be perfectly dry, and repeat 
 this Walking again ; which reiterate alfo the third time, 
 letting It be throughly dry. _ 
 
 VI. After 3 or 4 days time wafh it over -with your 
 fineft white Varuilt (in c^p.^. feji. i.) in a gentle heat, 
 not too nigh the Fire to avoid bliftering, letting it dry 3 
 and then repeat it 5 or 6 times more. 
 
 VII. This done, let it reft 2 or 3 davR, and give it 8 
 wafhes more of the fame Varnilli in like manner : let 
 it relt for 2 or 3 days more, and then give it 6 or 7 other 
 wallies of the fame Varniih. 
 
 VI IT. Being at length throughly dry, Polifh it with 
 fine Tripoli, a Rag an\l Water ; and laftly clear it up 
 with Oil and Putty, or white Search, or Wheat Flower, 
 as is bc!bre taught. 
 
 IX. To yarnijh Pi: tares cr Prints Tvithout Polifhing. 
 
 T}i. Of the bcft white Varnilli, of Varniih made with 
 Maltich and Oil of Turpentine (in CAp.j^.fd}. 15.) ana 
 %\]. mix them. Into this Mixture dip a Camels-hair 
 BaiiVi, and therewith Varnilh over your Print 4 or 5 
 times by the Fire as you do other Varnilli j and when it 
 is drv. It will have a \xvj rich Glofs. 
 
 X. To yarnijh Prints or PictnreSy and Polifh them Hie 
 Jap^'n. 
 
 This isdonc with japan Varnilli, walliing it ■>, 6or 7 
 times over in all refpccts as the former : then bciiig dry, 
 PoliiL with Tripoli, and clear it up with Oil and Put- 
 tv, CTf. 
 
 XI. Td 
 
Chap. 15. Of Woods for Japanmng, SS9 
 
 XI. To Finipyy Polijh And ^arnijh Picittres not laid, np- 
 on GlaJS. 
 
 Touch the forefide of your Pi6lure with Hiell Gold in 
 Gum-water ; or elie after you have Vamillit it 2 or 3 
 times with the belt white Varnilli , take Japan Gold 
 Size, with which hatch and lay it over with Gold Dull : 
 and as your Judgment and Experience lliall advifc, touch 
 and heighten all the Rrongeft Lights, and deepen your 
 Shadows alfo, by which you will give fo much Life and 
 Spirit to it, as that a Limner himfelf may miftake it for 
 a piece of real Painting. 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 OfPreparwg Woods for Japanning. 
 
 I. •rpAkc PJaifterers Size,, diffolve it oyer the Fire, ma- 
 -■- king it pretty warm ; and mix Whiting with it 
 
 in fine pouder till it is of a good Body, but not too 
 
 thick. 
 
 IL Take a Brulh of Hogs-hair fit for the purpofe, with 
 
 which and the former Mixture lay your Work once over, 
 
 letting it dry very well : and fo often repeat this till you 
 
 have hid all the HoUowneffes, Crevifes, Pores and (jrain 
 
 of your Wood, letting it throughly dry between every 
 
 Laying. 
 IIL Afterwards" take a fine wet Rag and rub it over 
 
 all your Work, till you have made it as fmooth as poffi- 
 
 ble ; and this is called Wnter-PLiin'mg^ 
 
 IV. When it is dry, Rulli it even and fmooth, and 
 as dole to the Grain as pofTibly may be. 
 
 V. This done, walTi over your Work twice with the 
 thickell of your Seed-lac Varnilla , letting it dry each 
 time J and if it is not fmooth, Rulli it again to moke 
 it fo. 
 
 VI. A day or t^v1D after Varnilh it over with Black, 
 or what other Color you defign, according as has been, 
 directed ; and when fufficiently dry, you may finiih it 
 bv Polil'hing it. 
 
 't> 
 
 VII. By 
 
Sfo Potygr^phices, Lib. XI. 
 
 VII. By this Method you muft Prime Carved Frames 
 for Cabinets, Stands or Chairs, if you would have tliem 
 to look well, fave that thefe are not to be PoUfhcd, and 
 therefore require not fo great a body of Varniih, but on- 
 ly to make them to look ihining aiii gloffy. 
 
 VIII. But for the tops of Tables, B9XC5, fides of Ca- 
 binets, &c. where the Wood is ordinary and rough 
 Grain'd, as Deal, Oak, &c. you may take common or 
 3o3^ners Glew, diflblve it in Water till it is fine and 
 thin, into which put the fineii SawKluft, tUl it is mdif- 
 fercntly thick. 
 
 IX. 'Then with a Brufh fit for that purpofe lay it all 
 over your Work ; and being dry, repeat it lb often till all 
 the Roughnefs and Grain of the Wood is fufficiently 
 hidden. 
 
 X. After 2 or 3 days let a Cabinet-maker fcrape it 
 with his Scraper as Pear-tree and Olive-wood are done, 
 to make it as fraootli and even a? may be ; tlien Varnilh 
 it as formerly direded. This, if well done, will not 
 come behina any otlicr Work for Beauty and Durabi- 
 lity. 
 
 XI. But after all, if every thing be weighed, your ck)fc, 
 firm and fmooth Grain'd Woods are chiefly and only to 
 be chofcn j ok all wlich Pear-tree is the fm. in ElHma- 
 tion. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 OfjA^aming Wood mth Colors, 
 
 I. Black Japan. 
 I. ^Om Wood being clofe Grain'd, well wrought and 
 ■*- fmooth, Rulh it fmooth, and keep it warm by 
 the Fire or in fome warm place ; but be always careful, 
 that whiUl you Varnifliyou fuffer it not to comefo near 
 tlic Fire as to burn, fcorch or blifter it, for which Fault 
 there is no other Remedy, but fcraping off and new Var- 
 nilhing the piece again : in this cafe, to work in a St£)ve, 
 is doubtlcfs the belt way, becaufe it gives an even antl 
 moderate heat to all parts of the Room. 
 
 IT. Then 
 
Chap. 1 5. Of Woods for Japafming, 891 
 
 II. Then take of the Japan Varnifh ( in cap. 6 feU. 2. 
 N^. I.) put it into a Gally-pot, and with it firJft wafli 
 over or Varnifh your piece 3 times, letting it dry through- 
 ly between each time : again with more ot the fame 
 vamiih wafh it over 3 other feveral times, letting it 
 throughly dry between each time, and Rulh it fmootli 
 between each of them. 
 
 III. Take of the Japan Varnilli (in cAp.6.feEi. 2. ».2.) 
 and w^alli your Work over with it 6 times, lettin* it 
 ftand 12 hours between the 3 firit and the 3 laft Var- 
 niihings. 
 
 IV. Your Work being thus far done, taJce the Jap^ti 
 Varnifly (in cup. S.feB. 2. ».3.) and with that let it he 
 Varnifhed li times, ftanding 12 hours between the firft 
 6 and the laii 6 Washings ; then let it lye 6 or 7 days ; 
 after which Polish it with Tripoli and a Hag as befone- 
 direibd. 
 
 V. But in Polishing, you mufl: work at it till it is ai- 
 moil fmooth, and fo let it lye for 2 days ; then Polish it 
 again almoft^ enough, and again let it lye 6 days : and 
 lalHy Polish it fully, and fo clear it up with Oil and 
 Lamp-black as formerly direiled j ib will you have a 
 good' black Japan, fcarcely at all inferior to the true 
 Indian, 
 
 II. Another Black Japan. 
 
 VI. Lay your Black as before (in/f^. 2, 3.) then 
 take of the Japan Varnifl? (in cap. 6. feU. 3.) with which 
 Varnish your Work 7 or 8 times, letting it itand 24. 
 hours between each time to dry j and then repeat it 4 (^ 
 5 times more, Itceping it but juliwarm. 
 
 VII. Then let it ttand 2 days, and wash it 6 or 7 
 times with fine Seed-lac Varnijh only^ and after ^ or 7 
 days Polish it as before-direcied m jeQ.^^ 5. above. 
 
 VIII. If your Work jhould afur a little time grow duUy 
 cloudy and mifiy, it is to be rcHnedied with a flight Polie^h, 
 and clearing it up afterwards ; ^ for that this Dulnds 
 might becaufedby reafon that either your Varnish was 
 not yet throughly dry, or that it was not laid thick e- 
 nough on. 
 
 IX. If it if fr%m the Hrfl Cdnfe, a new Polisliing mends 
 ■ it ; // it is from the latttr Canfe^ ycHJ mud mend it by 5 
 
 or 6 Washes more of your fine Sad-lac f^amijh j and tben 
 Polishing again as before, 
 
 X. If 
 
S92 Folygra^hicet, Lib. XI. 
 
 X. Ic ii alfo to he noted. That in this and all other Ja- 
 pan Works you muft never ftrikeyour Pencil twice over 
 the fame place, for it will make your Colors or Varnish 
 lye rough and ugly ; but let every ftroak ^vash a new 
 place, carrying a Ikady, quick and even hand, begin- 
 ning at the middle of the Table, and lo drawing your 
 Bnisli to either end, till the whole piece has been paffcd 
 over- 
 Ill. White Japan. 
 
 XI. In doing this, you mtifUct nothing come near it 
 which will foul or foil it: your firft work muft be to lay 
 the Ground, which is made with Ifmg-glal? Size ( in cap. 
 5. feEi. I.) mixt with as much Whitin^g, fcrapt into it, 
 as will make it of a reafonable thicknets, ?^r fo long till 
 by a ftroak of your Pencil dipt into it, it will Avhiten the 
 plain of your Work ; but let it be neither too thick nor 
 too thin : this Whiting witli your Hogs-liair Brush mix 
 very well with your Size. 
 
 XII. Whiten- your Work once over with it, and when 
 itis throughly dry, doit again; and when dr^s reiterate 
 it the third time : after w^hich let it dry 1 2 or 24 hours, 
 covering it from Duli 
 
 XIII. Then with fome Dutch Rushes, let it be Rusht 
 as oear to the Grain of the Wood as you fee fitting. 
 
 XIV. Take fresh Ifing-glafs Size q. v. Avhite Flake 
 q^ f. fo much as make the Size lye with a fair body ; mix 
 them well together, and with this go over your Work 3' 
 feveral times, letting it throughly dry between each time ; 
 then Rush it very Imooth. 
 
 XV. Then take white Starch boifd in fair Water tilf 
 itiglbmewhat thick ; and with it, almoft Blood warm, 
 wash over the w^hole Work t\vicc, letting it dry between 
 each time ; and 16 let it ftand t or 2 days. 
 
 XVI. With a pure clean Pencil (washt in rectified 
 Spirit, to free it from Duft) dipt into the fincit white 
 Varnish ( in cap. 4. JeH: i .) Avash over your Work 6 or 7 
 times; and after 2 days repeat the like number of Var- 
 nishings again : th's, ifw^clldone, will give a finerGlofs 
 tlian if it was Polisht : but if itis flovenlydone, PoHfh^ 
 ing will then be abfolutely necclfary, for which realon 
 you mult give it 5 or 6 Varnishings more. 
 
 XVII. If this laft is well done, it will need no Polish- 
 ing ; and tlien two washes more will do : but if it rco'iirej 
 
 Polibli-- 
 
Chap. 1 4. Of Woods for Japanning, 895 
 
 'Polishing, you muft then give it 3, and a weeks time of 
 , drying before you begin to Polish . 
 
 XVIII. In Polifhmg , you muft ufe the fineft Tripoli 
 and Rags, not tco wet nor too dry, with a light and 
 gentle hand : and in clearing, ( inikad of Lamp-black 
 and Oil) you muft ufe Putty and Oil, and conclude 
 with white Stjrch mixt with Oil, to give it the finishing 
 Stroak. 
 
 XIX. But there are fome w^ho wholly rciecT: this work 
 with Size, liking that only which is performed with 
 P^arnifh : and thereforei, fuch may, if they pli^ale, ufe the 
 white Japan Varnilhes (in cap. 6. feci, i «.• I, 2, 3.) ex- 
 adly,* according to the method laid down for the black 
 Japan, in Je£L 2, 3, 4, 16. above, which will nve a 
 -more than ordinary Satisfadion : and befides it will not 
 be lb ready to Crack or Peel off. 
 
 IV. Bleiv Jap-in. 
 J XX. ^ Gum-Water, q.v. white Lead, cj:f. grind thein 
 well upon a Porphyry. & Ifing-glals Size, ij. v. of the 
 £neft and belt Smalt,. q_. J. mix them well, to which add 
 of your white Lead before ground, fo much as may give 
 it a fufficient Body ; thele mix together to the confiit- 
 tnce of Paint. 
 
 XXL With this mixture, go over your Work, and do 
 it 3 or 4 times, till you fee your Blev^r lies with a good 
 and fair Body, letting it tlry throughly between each 
 time : if your Blew is too pale, put in more Sfjiah into 
 your Size, without any white Lead. 
 
 XXIL Then i?«/^ it very fmooth, and go over it again 
 •ivith a ihonger Blew : and when it is through dry, wafh 
 it twice over with the cleareit Ififg-gUp Siz.e alone ; and 
 covering it, let it dry 2 days. 
 
 XXIIL Then gently warming your Piece at the Fire, 
 ,with a clean Pen'cil Avaih your Work over v.-ith the fi- 
 neft white Varnifh, (in cip. ^. JeB. 1.) repeating it 7 or 
 8 times, and let it dry apin 2 days as betbre. After 
 which repeat again the thud time, your washes 7 or 8 
 tunes in like manner. 
 
 XXIV. Let it now dry for a Week, and then Polish 
 it as before diredted ; and with Lamp-black and Oil 
 clear it up, to give it a Poiue, and Glolfy api>earance. 
 - XXV, As to the Color yon mu[i be guided by your Reajon 
 md Fancy, vehetber yon wll have, it light or deep, for a 
 
 P P p ' ima,U 
 
g^*4 PolygfAjfUces. Lib. XI. 
 
 inxill proportion of the Lead makes it deep, a^reater 
 proportion light. Alio the Size for laying Whites, 
 Blews, or any other Color, oiioht not to be too ttrong, 
 rather weaker, and iull luHicient to bind the Colors, 
 to n-'akcthem iVick on the Work, for if it is too IViff, it 
 will be apt to Cr.ick and fly off. And the Reafon of 
 washing twice with clear Size, is to keep the Varnish 
 from finking into, or tarnishing the Colors ; and in this 
 cale it ought to be of n ihovg nni full Body. 
 V. CoTKTKon Rid Japan, 
 XXVI. ^ Ifing-slaisSize, or rather thethickeit Seed-lac^ 
 Varnifh,(-dS lomGadviic,becaiiie it will not then break off 
 in Polishing, as that mixt with Size commonly does, be- 
 fidesit better helps to bear the body of Varnish, which 
 mu(t afterwards be laid over it) cj. v.Rnc pure Vermili- 
 on ^. /. as your Reaibn and Judgment shall direct ; 
 mix them well. 
 
 XX VII. Warm your work by the Fire, and with a 
 Pencil Varnish it with the former mixture ; doing it 4 
 times, and letting it dry between every time; after 
 which Rufh it finooth. 
 
 XXVIII. This done, wash it 8 times with the ordir 
 71. vy Seed- lac FarnilJoj and let it relf for 1 2 hoius ; then 
 Riijh it again, tho' but flightly, to make it look Imooth. 
 
 XXIX. Laltly, for an Exquifite outward covering, 
 wash it 10 times with the Z^f/? Seed-lac Vannfh -, let it 
 lie 7 days to dry, and then Polish it with Tripoli^ and 
 clear it up, with 0/7 and Lamp-black. 
 
 VI. y^ deep cr dark Red Japan. 
 
 XXX. Firlt lay on your common 'Red, as before di- 
 rected : then take thick Seed-lac Varnilli cj. v. fine 
 Sanguis Draconic in liibtil Poudcr q. f. mix it by little 
 and little with the Varniih : a very finall matter of it 
 will extreamly heighten your Color, and every walh 
 will render it deeper. 
 
 XXXI. When the Color is almoft a§ deep as you de- 
 fign, forbear the Sani^His Draconis, becaule tiie atter lay^ 
 ings of the Sced-lac rarnijh, will add to the Color what 
 js wantmg. 
 
 XXXII. Then eonfidcr how many Varnilliings arc 
 (lill to be laid on, and accordingly ul'e your Sanguis 
 Draconis, perfecting the Work, as is dircdted in the ibr- 
 nier CMmmm RU 'favan. 
 
 VII. A 
 
chap, i 4. Of Woods for ^a^anmng. ^9 5 
 
 y\h A pde Rdjapan. 
 
 XXXIII. Take the pale Red japan VaTnilli (in cap^ 
 6. feU. 6.) and %va(li your Work over wiru it four times, 
 letting it dry bet\reen every time ; and follow the Me- 
 fM tt^\^ laid d^wn in SeEh 27, 2% 2^. atorego* 
 itig. 
 
 XXXIV. Where Note, that in making- this mrxture, 
 \"0u muft tliink with your 'i^d:, ho\r many times 3-0U 
 are to Varnilli after your Red is laid on ; for if many, 
 then know, tiiat they will incrcafe and heig^hten the 
 Color, for which reafon you muft make voiir mixture 
 the Paler. In thefe things you muft be gtiideA both by 
 Reafon and Experience. 
 
 \\\\. Olive Colored Japan. 
 
 XXXV. Take Ifinglafs or Parchment Size (in cap. 5, 
 feU. r, 8. ) q. V. EngliOi Pink in fine Ponder, cj. f. 
 grind theiTit together till they are as thick as Butter : then 
 mix with it Lamp-black, and white Lead in due prO-^ 
 portion, which by fomeTryals you will calilv find ; add- 
 ing Lamp'black, if too light j white Lead, if too dark. 
 
 XXXVI. If it is too Green, help it with Ravf Umb&i 
 ground very fine with Size, for tliis will tal;e away the 
 Greennefs. 
 
 XXXVII. Or, take the Olive colored Japm Krrnifh 
 defcribed in cap. 6. Sech 7. which is very much the let- 
 ter; and with either of thcfe, Varnilh over your piece 
 according to the aforegoing Rules, Polilliing, andciean-^ 
 iiig of it, as before direckd. 
 
 - XXXVIII. Where Note, i. That no Colors laid in 
 Size, will endure lo Ih-ong a Polilli, as thole in Var- 
 riilli, but are more fubicdt: to be rubbed off. 2. That the 
 fnifhiiig f^arnifhy muft be the beji white Farnijhj that the 
 Colors may not Tarnijh. 
 
 IX. Chelimit: colored Japan.- 
 
 XXXIX. It is made of Indian Kcd^ or brown Red 
 Oker, either of tliem being ground with Ifing-glafs or 
 Parchment Size, upon a Porphiry, till they are as lott 
 and fine as Butter, &c. (in cap. 6. fdh S. N. i, 2. 
 
 XL. Or, take thick Seed-lac-I^arniP>, and mix it 
 with the fame Cofors as \'0u did the Size ; lightning it 
 Vv'ith the white Lead, if too dark ; and darkning it 
 •with Lamp-black, if ttoo bright or light, till the Color 
 
 P pp 2 reliilt? 
 
?9^ Poljgraphices. Lib. XI. 
 
 rciults which youccfirc: this mixture with the Seed- 
 Uc r.irni/h you -will hiul to be much the better. 
 
 XLI. The Cclnvs bcins thus mixt, if you ufc the Size 
 mixture, put ionic of it iuto a Gally-pot, over a geutlc 
 Fire, to melt it, or p,ivc it a fit Temper, not too diick, 
 nor too thin; then with -a Hogs-h.iir-hrufJy^ waOi there- 
 with your piece liuooth'v over", and let it dry, which 
 repeat lo orlen till your Color i.cs kill and fair. 
 
 XLII. Being thro' drv, Rnjh it fmooth, but not clofc 
 to the. Wood, and fo let it rcll a day or two: and then 
 waOi it with thick Seed-Lic r.trnilh three or four times, 
 Jelling it dry throughlr. 
 
 XL]I1. Or you may begin and lay your ground Work 
 with the mixture o( thick Sced-Lw f^arnifh, (in fett. 40. 
 .abo^•e) going over your Work as with the Si^e mixture : 
 and then being dry and milling of it ; you may go over 
 with it 3 or /f times again, with fimple thick Seed-lac 
 Varriifh^ letting it drv as before. 
 
 XLIV. This being done, whether with the Siz^ mix- 
 tare^ or with the Famii'-i mixtttre^ and they being 
 throughly drv, then Varnish it again up to a Body, 
 with your fine while Varnish, (in cap. j\. jeB. i.) till it 
 is fit to be Polished, which perform with fine TW/^o//, and 
 a Rag and Water, and lo clear it up w'nh Lamp-bL-ck 
 
 and on. 
 
 X. Lapis Laz^uli Japan. 
 
 XLV. Take Ifmg-glafs Size, ott\-\Kk Seed-lac Varniflpy 
 and make a mixture with Spodmrn or white Lead, with 
 which Varnish your Piece 3 or 4 times over, laying it 
 . for a ground Work ; letting it dry between each time. 
 
 XLVI. Let it lie 2 or 3 days, that it may be through- 
 ly dry, and then Rnlh it, till it is very linooth, lettuig 
 it lie after the RHJhing 2 or 3 days more. 
 
 XLVM. Then take thick Seed-lac f^arnifh q. v. and 
 mix with it pare fine Blew Smalt, with %vhich go over 
 your Work 4, 5 or 6 times, letting it dry between each 
 time : then let it lie 2 days, and kn/h it'again. 
 
 XLyill, After it is liuoothly Rnjhr, Varnish it twice 
 over with the be;} rt'hi.'e rarnijh, and let it dry again for 
 two days more. Then mix pure Ultramarine, or fine 
 Pleiv Smalt, with the /-fi ivhiie yarnijh, and therewith 
 Varnish it 5, 6 or 7 tiiiies, till it comes to a full Bo- 
 
Chap. i^. Of Murble^ he. Japan. 897 
 
 dy, and a perfed likenefs, letting it dry between each 
 tinie. 
 
 XLIX. In tbe larttime of Varrii(hing with yomlleiv 
 Varnilh, mij IteigUngly over all your Piece, in wiki ir- 
 regular Streaks (as a reiaiibiance ot' Nature) with Li- 
 qnid or Shell-Gold^ filling the Blew as you Ice occalion, 
 and adding very Irnall Specks up and down, and Inch 
 other various Colors, as are uilial to be Iccn upon the 
 Stone. 
 
 L. This done, and the Work throughly dry, Varniili 
 it 3 or 4 times over agiin, with the lejl wkite f^jmifh^ 
 letting it dry between each time : kt it lie 2 or 5 divs, 
 then Polijh it with Tripoli, and clear it with Larrip- black, 
 or Pntty and Oil, as formerly directed. 
 
 LI. Lajlly, this is to be Note J, that by thefe Method^ 
 you may make and ufe any Color you can Fancy, oi;- 
 which Reafon and Experience may direct you to : \)\xt 
 withal, that all Colors which arc Light, and apt. l^ 
 Tarnilh, and loofe their Beauty, or Glois with i'«'f<if-/^(r 
 Var/iiih, muit be covereA and Hnillied with the bui 
 Tpkite f^arnijhj that ot Seed-lac, being prejudicial. 
 
 C H A P. XV. 
 
 0/ Marble and Tortoije Shell Ja^an. 
 
 I. To make marble Japan. 
 I. "pRepare your Wood in all rtlpecb as for white Ja- 
 
 •*• pail ; do it over with Flahc p.hite, or white Lead : 
 if you dcfjgn a U'/iiVf, with fome Veins, uie fome Kiwir 
 Black, (made or the cuttings of Vines, Burnt and 
 Grotind ) iiiix with a very weak Ijwg-:Aajs S^e, being 
 %varmed, l\\t^A\^l'i,ie black, -And. vyhie' Lead, makiiig 2 
 or 3 degrees of it, till you biave produced the inte ded 
 Colors for the Clouds, and Veins o. the Marble. 
 
 II. Then with a large clem Braih, wet your Piece o- 
 ver with Water ; and befoie it h- dry,, with a Cancels 
 .Hair Pencil dip in the pa!(?il: thin mixture, aiid lay the 
 fainted large Clouds and Veir.s ;• '.vbich being la;d oiv 
 while the Work is wet, uill lie (oft and fwcet, like 
 that which is Natural. Pi-'p 5 iJl. And 
 
^8 Pol^grafhuei. Lib. XI. 
 
 IH. And before it is too dry, with a fvnUer Pencil , 
 and oiic dc!;rcc darker, f!.cntly touch all the Icflcr Vein?, 
 and variety of the Marble, endeavoring as much aB may 
 be, to imitate, the exact foot- fteeps ot Nature. 
 
 IV. Ahcr thi?,with a linall pointed feather, and the 
 decpell Color,_ touch and break all your fmailer Veins, 
 making them iragular, wild, and coniuled, as they ap- 
 pear in the rcaUStone : then kt it dry for a day or two, 
 and walli it over with Jfi/ig-glaJS Siz^e^ or Parchment 
 Sice. 
 
 V. Let it dry for 2 or 3 days, and then Varnifli it 
 over with the hcji nhite Varnifh (in cup. 4. fe[l. i.; 5 or 6 
 times, letting it dry well between eveiy time : Let it 
 relt Icven days, and then Polilb and clear it up, exaiflly 
 
 ' in all thinge, according to the dire6lions for Varnilli- 
 ing, in c.rf . 8. je[t. ',, 6. 
 
 VL If you would have it white or grey A-farble, you 
 i-nuli ule the hej} nhite lAtrnip? ; but \£ ydlonifh, or of a 
 Parcbrtient Color, you muit ule the hcjf Sccd-h.c f^ivrnifhj 
 either alone, or mirt with the rvhite Varnipp at plea- 
 fuie. '>l;:;'^'^' 
 
 H. ylnother Aiarhlc Japan. 
 
 VIL 9i Of the be{t white Var"nil>i, (in cap. 4. {eci. 
 t.) or of the Varnilli univerlal, (in cap. <^. fett. iS-) with 
 which mix white Lead in lubril Ponder and Lamp- 
 black, or Ivory-black in liich proportings as you lee lit 3 
 making three levcral degrees ot the lamCi 
 
 VIIT. With the lirll and lightcft Degree, gtJ over your 
 whole Piece with a Biulh Pencil, clouduig and marblc- 
 ing the thing as Nature requires j and go over it 4tiinc3, 
 letting it dry between cveiT time. ' -^ ' 
 
 IX. With the Iccond darker Degree, and a frclh dean 
 Pencil, go over your Work agam, vi^. Some of the 
 Clouds, and eilgcs of the Clouds, as alfo fomc o\ the 
 greater md lefrer Veins, fomethingihadowing and ma- 
 king ihtm deeper ; ar.d'this work repeat in differing Pla- 
 ces, in iome tAvicc, in lome thrice, and in lome fou^ 
 lime-. 
 
 X. With the third and ilirkcft Degree, go over the 
 edges of lome of the greater Veins, and over all the leller 
 Vein?, repeating Utc work in Spots and j'larticuhir Vl.i- 
 Ci.s 4 linies, as youuid betorc. 
 
 XI. All 
 
Chap. 15. Of Mtirhky Sfc* Jajun. 899 
 
 XI. All this beiiig done, Jet it lie 2 or 3 days, and 
 ihike it over 4 or 5 times or more-, either with the hej} 
 white f^i.irni/h, or n'ith tliQ l?q.r Seed-lac f^arni/h, letting it 
 dry between every time : then let it dry fevcn days, and 
 fo Poli/h it, and cleai- it;* as we ha\'e before taught. 
 
 III. 71; wake Tondip S-kell 'japan. 
 
 XII. That which wc cndwivor to imitate hTortoife 
 Shell laid, upon Silver Fail, which gives it life and beau- 
 ty : no'vv to imitate this well, let your Woal be clofc 
 girain'd, fmooth, and well wrought, as Box, Pear-tree, 
 Wallnut-tree, &c. 
 
 XIII. But if it is courfe grain'd, as Deal, Oak, &c. 
 you muit prime it with St<.e and Whiting^ as we have 
 taught in cap. i^. Jet'h i, 2, 5. letting it dry between 
 each time, and at (aii RufJ-ying it (inooth. 
 
 XIV- Then take a ^x. Familhiyig Pencil^ -^ind with 
 your thickej} Seed-lac Varnijh^ (hike over the breadth of 
 a Silver Leafy which taking up with Cotton, lay on 
 Upon your Work whilil it is moi(l, dabbing it dole to 
 ihe Work, as you arc taught in GiUi.'ur. 
 
 XV. Tliisdone, Varnilh another Place, and in like 
 inaniier lay en (another Leaf of Silver as before, and. lo 
 continue, till the Avhole Work is covered over with 
 Leaf Silver : and then let it dry througlilv, and with a 
 fine Hair Brulli iWeepoft'all thQ loo fe Silver. _ - 
 
 XVI. Take Lamp-blacky or rather CJogne Earth, (which 
 comes nearcit to the Color of the Shell) q.v. and grind it 
 with Parcliment Size, or Gum-^vater, till it becomes 
 .very flue and impalpable : and being finely ground, 
 mix it with more Parchment Si/e or Cnim-water, agree- 
 ing with that you hrtt ground it withal. 
 
 XVII. With this n'lixturc Ipot the d.trkell- part of 
 your Shell, after a careleis cloudy manner, imitating 
 Nature as much as may be, letting a piece of the true 
 Shell lie by you to look upon, thereby to acuate your 
 Fancy and GeniiLs. 
 
 XVIII. Take Gum-water .7. f. and therewith grind 
 fine Sangnis Draconis very loft ; but lonie grind the San- 
 guis DrAconis diy, till it is very fine, and then mix it 
 With fine Seed-lac I'^arnil'hy wh?ch is.mo!i proper and a- 
 greeable for this W^ork, and woi fo ap/i tv) Poliili oix as 
 Size or Gum-wate;r. 
 
 ppp 4 XIX. Now 
 
900' Polygraphices,. Lib. XI. 
 
 XIX. Now wherex , there arc feveral Reds lighter 
 and darker lo be foLind on the edee<^Oi" the blacker Part, 
 aiid lomcTiiTics lie in Streaks, and Cloud?, on the tranl- 
 parert p.>rt ot" the Shell, we arc now to imitate tiiat 
 with • 'p.e ot ihe two former mixtures o.' Dragons Blood. 
 
 XX. Dip a /»;^?// Pencil into one of thofe mixtures, 
 and dafh iheihid Red?, flufhing them in and about the 
 dark Places, both thicker and thinner, fainter and ligh- 
 ter, an.', with Icls Color towards ihe lighter part of 'the 
 Slicll ;> th'ea Iwecten it fo, that by degree?, it may lb 
 looic its lirengih o- Rednel?, as to be (]uitc lolt in the 
 Silvcr,'o'r"!r;oi-e tranfparent parts of the Work. 
 
 XXI. This done, give it 6 or 7 wallies of fne Sesd-lac 
 J'^arnifh, (in cap. 4. feet. 3.) and letting it dry i or 2 
 days, lufli it gently and very fmooth, to make it fit for 
 the next Operation. 
 
 XXII. Hi Fhic Sanguis Dracohis, Ca?f:bogi^, ana q. f. 
 grind ihcm dry to alnbril Pouder ; mix it with as 
 ii'ucli fuie Sccd-lac Farnip7, as may Varnil"h the piece 6 
 or 7 times more : and let it dry 1 2 hours or more. 
 
 XXill. Then give it another or third Varnilliing with 
 the lalt mixture, doing it fo often over, till the Sihet 
 fcems to be changed into a Gold-like Color. 
 
 XXr\^ L^/?/t,' take heel that your Varnilli be not 
 tf)0 thick and high colored with the Sanguis and Cambo- 
 gi.r, but rather he'ghten it by degrees, kit your Silver 
 be too high colored, before it has received a lufhcient Bo- 
 dy of Varnilli. Let it dr^- 6 or 7 d.iys, then Polilh 
 and clear it up, as before direcied. 
 
 IV. Another Tortoife Shell Japan. 
 
 XXV, Firit prime your piece verywell, as you arc 
 taught in cap. i:^. fc^t. i, 2, 3, 4. Then Lacker and Size 
 it in Oil, as you are taught in the Art of Gilding. 
 
 XXVI. Then lay on your Leaf Silver, Aud kt it dry 
 very well : and have rc.idy fint-ly grotuid in Oil, thele 
 Colors, vix. R'.d Lah, Cinnabar^ bronn Pinl:, Cologne's 
 Farih, and burnt LV/.ifr, placing them dilHnctly on vout 
 Pal I a. 
 
 XXV^II. Strike over your work with Turpentine Var- 
 niib (in cap. 4. f'.tl. 14.) and wliilU it is net \ mix late 
 anJ bronnPini, thin with Varnilli, at.d with it lay all 
 your fainiLll Clouds or Spots, wliich loften fwceily 
 ivhilft the Varnilli is moili 
 
 XXVIII. Let 
 
Chap. 15- Of Madk, kc, Japan, 901 
 
 XXVIII. Let it itand four hours or more, and if the 
 Colors are dry, with a large foft Pencil, pafs it lightly 
 over again : and again moiftning it, put in more 
 Clouds, which more and more darken with Umber, and 
 Cologne Earth, before it is dry; alwa)^ obferving the 
 Life, and fweetning your Work, w^hich is by blending, 
 and infenfibly mixing the Colors after they are laid, 
 (b as you cannot perceire w^here each of them begin or 
 end. 
 
 XXIX. Jf the Churls are not dark enongh, reiterate the 
 Clouding ^nd Varnilhing once more, as you fee need 
 requires : ^yhen well dryed, Glaze it 2 or 3 times with 
 hroven Pink, yj\\h .a little TinEiure of I'^crdigrife in it : 
 or you may Varnilh it with fine Seed-Uc F'arnijh, and 
 then finiili it as the former. 
 
 V. Another Tortoife Shell Jap.rn. 
 
 XXX. Firit lay a white Ground as bcLore taught : 
 then v.'ith proper Colon-, as P^erwilion, yinriphment^ 8zc. 
 duly mixt Vvith common ovTwpentine VarniPo iheakand 
 cloud, or llnaddoAv the rvhite Ground with any irregular 
 fancy you pleaie, as nearly imitating Tortoife Shell as 
 you can.' 
 
 XXXI. Let it throughly dry, and then (hike it here 
 and there Avith thereddiHi yejlow Varnilli, mixed with 
 a little Cmnaber, or Indian Lake, clouding it up and 
 down the Work as nature reitiires; and touching it al- 
 fo with lO.rniih, mixt with l^amp or Ivory-black. 
 
 XXXII. This dojie, Varrilli it 5 or 6 times over with 
 the finejl jvhite f0.rntfh,'n\ c\.t\ ^. Jecl. i. or th^imiverjal 
 Vurnij]},_ in cap. 5. jeELi'^ ; or \\\\hfine Sced-lacV'arniih, 
 jetting it dry between tvery time. 
 
 XXXIU.'Let it now diy a Week, and with Pannce' 
 ^onc in tine Pouder, but nither fiiie Tripcli, and a wet 
 ^ Cloth, Polilli it by gentle rubbing. 
 ■.' XXXIV. LajHy, go over with it again 4 or 5 times 
 "with the ^«f White, or fint Seed-lac f^arnilh; and when 
 throughly dry, Polilli it \vith Tripoli, and clear ic widi 
 Patty and Oil, as betore declared. 
 
 VI. Another Tortoife Shell Japan. 
 XXXV. Firlt lay a white Ground as before, and 
 fmear it over with Verniilion or fomc luch like, over 
 which \2iy Leaves of Gold ox Silver, as beibre t.iught, with 
 
 Gam 
 
902 PolygrMphiees, Lib. XI. 
 
 Gum AwmomACMnty hccA f^arnijhj common V.trnijh, SUc 
 01 G I jir. 
 
 XXXVI. This done, and being throughly dry, Sha- 
 dow, cloud, and. Itain it, bv ibme of the former Directi- 
 on?, according as the Reafon and Nature of the thing 
 requires ; (trikin^ it over here and there with ycllo\v 
 Varnifh, or redtlTi veHow Varnifli, and red Varnilli 
 mixed, with yellow Varnilh in perfed imitation of the 
 Shell. 
 
 XXXVIII. lafily, ftiike it 6 or 7 times over citlier 
 with the he(} white f^arnifh (in cap. 4. fe^i. i.) or with 
 the fine Seed-l^c f^arni/hXin cap.^.fe^. 3.) letting it dry 
 bet'.veen e\Try thne : then after 7 days drying, Polilh 
 and clear it as before. 
 
 c H A P. xvr. 
 
 of laying Speckles or Strewings on Jit An 
 Work. 
 
 I. '"pO Icxy Speckles or Stnmngs en the out or inftdts of 
 -■- Boxes, Drawers , Mouldings, Szc. Mix yotir 
 Speckles (enough toanlwerthe preient Occafion) with 
 your Ordinary Uc l^^.rnijh, li much as may make it fit 
 to V\'ork, hit not fo thick is for Colors, and mix them 
 well with a proper Brufh, 
 
 II. Warm your Piece gently before a Fire, and with 
 a fit Pencil waOi it over wit!; the former mixture, and 
 bt:mg dry, repeat it again, and lb often, till your 
 5pcrZ-/^) lie as thick, and as e-en as you defire. 
 
 III. Then being throughly drv, go over and beautify 
 von r Work 3, 4 or «; times with Seed-lite Farniih, mixt 
 ivirh Turpeniine, audio let it dry ; the work being now 
 done, unkfs you intend to PoliG^ it. 
 
 IV. Bu: ifyo'A defim a PoHjhing^ then you inurt walli 
 it 8 or 10 tiiucs over with the hdl Seed-lac l^.'.rnifh^ let- 
 ting It dry every time, after which Polilli it as foriiicr- 
 ly directed. 
 
 V. All 
 
Chatp. i6. OfSpeMs^kc. J Af an Work. 90 j 
 
 V. All forts of colored Speckles ma}^ be thus uleii, 
 except thofe of Silvei^ the laying on of which requires 
 the ieji and fincjl of ^'Dur Seed-Lie J^arniP?^ or the bejf -^hite 
 Varnijlj, ^vllich muit make it fit for Poliiliing^- but if 
 you intend notto Polilli it, fewer waili'es of yoiir 'Var- 
 nilliwill liiffice. 
 
 VI. To lay Speckles on the dramng -part of Japan Woriy 
 as on Flovpers, Iferhs, Tress^ FoTxIsy Beajfs, ^ocks, tlar- 
 -menu, &c. Make a Tiffany Siev;^ of a Wooden Pill- 
 Box, by (hiking out Bottom and Top, &c. Then with 
 your VarniJ]! and Pencil (hike over tiie Places you 
 would Speckk. 
 
 VII. Which done, before it is dry, putibnie of yoiir 
 "Speckles into your Sieve, and gently ii"hake the Srex'c, 
 over the Places you defign, till they are all fpeckled ac- 
 coi'-ding to \t)iir Intention. 
 
 VI il. But for Rrcks^ with a dry nen^ Pencil, fwecp 
 all the iiragling Speckles^ which lie beyond the wet 
 Paits, into," and upon tlie fides and top of the Rock, 
 wdiich will render the work, not only thicker ot Spec/des, 
 but alfo more faiuiful, and giv^ it a kind ©f Shadow 
 and Refl'CKimi. 
 
 IX. As loon as one Part is compleated, rou inuil go 
 on with ai-iOther, Ixit not before the other is perfecTly 
 <ity ; your Rock Works alio, ought to be o^" diftirent 
 Colors, and as iiiany Shapes, tiM your wIjqIc delign is 
 Compleated. 
 
 X. Your Woi-k being cold, it will ceitainly far the 
 prelcnt lo^-^k dull and cloudy, and as if very ilfdone, or 
 xvith ill Matciials without either Life or Beaut v j but 
 let not this <iilcon.rragc you, for it will in a little rime 
 obtain its Lullre and Glory, and by the help ot vour 
 Securing far/iijl be m.ulc firm and durable. 
 
 CH A P. 
 
904 VolygTAphica. Lib. XI. 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 Of Japanning Metals rvith Gum Water, 
 
 I. 'npO vpork Metals or Colors vith Gam-water. 
 
 -■- When you defign to work Japan in Gum-watery 
 it is only to be done with thofc Colors which have a bo- 
 dy, not with tranlparent Colors. 
 
 II. Take Gum-water (in cap. 3. feci. 11.) put it into 
 Ti Mufcle Shell, with which mix lb much of your Metal 
 01 Color, as may make it neither too thick, nor too 
 thin, but tiiat it may run fine and fmooth from your 
 Pencil. 
 
 III. And bed^re you mix no more for your Metals, 
 but fo much as is requiike for your prefent Bufmefs ; for 
 by keeping mixt they will Ipoil, and become uielelsj 
 oefides their gathering of Du(t which renders them un- 
 lit for ule, and {0 unkrviceable. 
 
 IV. And for your Colors, your Siaells mult be often 
 fliifted and changed, for otherwile the Colors and Gums 
 will become knobby, thick, and out of Order. 
 
 V. Your Metals or Colors thus prepared, and well 
 mixed ; with a Hn^s Brujh Pencil., lay on your dclign, 
 with a fmooth and even Hand, diawing the Pencil on 
 the fide of ihc Shell, that it may not be over loaded 
 with the Metal or Color, when you defign todrawfmaM 
 Lines or Stroaks, that they may be clear and fair. 
 
 VI. But when you draw broad things, as Leaves, or 
 ether large Works, then charge your Pencil full, yet lb 
 that !t may not drop.. 
 
 VTL A'<?>p here ts to he Noted .^ 
 
 I . That the praCtifc oiGum-rvater is ufelefs and unne- 
 ccifarv, m the ule ot Gold Sine. 2. That your Gum Wori 
 being iliroughly dryed, you arc to run it over 8 or 10 
 tinier with your fine Seed-lac f^arnifh., othejl white P^arnijh: 
 and then Poliih it, and clear it. 
 
 VIIL Your Black or Ground, you intend to make 
 your draught on, when cleared up, will b^ lo Gloliy, 
 as if it wtrc Greafy, io that your Metal ur Color u-ill 
 iioi eafilv itick na : and therefore you ought to rub it 
 wuh a 7r;pf;/i Cloth, and lurta it to dry : fo will the 
 
 draught 
 
Chap. 18. Of Japanning h Gold Size, 90 5 
 
 draught of your Pencil be fmooth and neat, and (tick 
 on according as you defirc. 
 
 IX. If your Tfork mth the Gttm-rvater Jhonld not fuccecd 
 to your Jatisfa^ion, as not being even,^ or regular, or 
 lines at a due diftance (as it may fometimes happen to 
 young Beginners) you may with tht Tripoli Cloth wipe 
 out all, or any part, of that which you think unhand- 
 Ibm, or unfit to ftand, and then immediately nuke a 
 new draught. 
 
 X. And fo by thefe means, you may mend, alter, 
 add, detraft, blot out, change, and varioufly contri- 
 bute to your Defign, till the whole Piece is of one in- 
 tirc perfection, and good, and anfvverable to each part 
 of the undertaking. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 Of JapAnmng in Gold Size, 
 
 I. TP HE mahng and preparing this Siz^e for norlinT^ 
 -*■ we have taught in cap. 5. JeEl. 2, 3. when there- 
 fore, you have wrought your Work, and that you pur- 
 pofe to decipher on it, you muft draw this Size ail over 
 that Part, and that Part only, which you rclblve to 
 Gild, or adorn with Gold, pafling over thofe places 
 where you intend to lay your other Metal or Colors, as 
 Silver, Copper, Brafs, &c. 
 
 II. Tour Siz,e being thns vorought for the Gold, let it re- 
 main till it is fodry, that when you put your Finger 
 upon it, it mult be glutinous and clammy, and liick a 
 little ,• bat not^ io moilt, that the leaft particle of it 
 iLould come off with your Fingers, but that it may be 
 much like to thick Glew, whemt is half dry. 
 
 III. When it is in this condition, it is the very jun- 
 6lure of Time wherein you muft apply your Gold 9 then 
 take a piece of fott, wallit Leather, or the like, wrap it 
 about your Fore-finger, dip it into your Gold !)«?, and 
 %ih it, where the Gold Siz.e is laid, for it will itick on 
 the Size, and no where elfe. 
 
 IV. If 
 
9o6 Poiji^jffhicej'. Lib. XL 
 
 IV. W M\y Gold Duli lies fcartlcrcd aboitt jai^ 
 Work, brnlh it all away into your Gold Paper, with 
 a fine VainiUiing BrulTi which has not been uli?d. 
 
 y . Then take your Pencil a£;ain, and draw that pars 
 which you dcfigntbr the Copper, with: Gold Size alio : 
 and when it is dry as the former, covrrit with Cgppey 
 T>f4, jult ill like nunner as yoa did it witli tlie Gold 
 Du(L 
 
 VI, This done, take your Pencil again^ and lay Sil- 
 ver Si^ae (in cap. 3. fe^. '^, 6.) and wlicn it is dty c- 
 nough, lay on your Silver Dajiy in like manner, as you 
 did thetvvo former. 
 
 VII. But this you mn(i ajl ways observe, that you lay 
 thefe Mctalinc Colors iiicccflivclv one atter another, let- 
 ting each to be covered and throughly dry, before you 
 begin a dilHndColor^ 
 
 yill. After all thefe, lay your other Colors (not Mc- 
 taline) if your defigw requires aaiy, with Gu^t-rvater ; 
 referving the Rocks, &c. for flie lalt part of your 
 work. 
 
 IX. If you haye mixed morcCjold Size, than you can 
 conveniently ufe at one time, or that you are called off 
 from your bufinefs, that you cannot hnilh till the next 
 Day, youAvill obferve that your Size, even after 5 or 6 
 hours, will have a Skin upon it : to prevent this, put 
 tlie Si-a^e with the Pencils alfo into fair Water, fo as to 
 be covered, till the next time you ufe them : and if your 
 Size lliouid grow too thick, thin it with f^enke Tnrpen- 
 ^ne : But know, that oftner douig thefe things than 
 once, will quite Ipoil your 5"/^?, and make it fit only to 
 be calt away. 
 
 X. Let your Size be fb ordred, that being of a mean 
 Confj(-tency, neither too thick nor too thin, it may run 
 fmooth and clear, and your ihoaks be fine and even, lo 
 that you may be able to- draw with it the molt fubtil and 
 hairy Lines. 
 
 XL If you would exactly imitate Japan Work, avoid 
 filling and thronging your Black with Draughts and Fi- 
 gures: in true /i?r//>« Work the Ground is never crouded 
 wp with many Figures, Houfes or Trees, but a great fpace 
 is allowed to a little \Vork, for the Black addsLuftre ^ 
 the Gold ) and the Gold gives an- Excellency to the 
 BLick, 
 
 XII. In 
 
Chap. I S> Of Jdfomiig in Gold Size, 907 
 
 XII. In thefc Works fome Variety of Metals may be 
 indulged, but in a very {lender proportion to that c^ 
 Gold, which is the general Ornament and Charackri- 
 iXick of the genuine or true Japan- work. 
 
 XIII. Be always careful and cxa6t in tracing or drav^'-- 
 ing out your Defign in Vermilion or Gold, that it may 
 be done with an even hand : then your Gold Size being 
 ready prepared, with a fmall Pencil make ^vkh your 
 Size the outward Lines, the Boundaries of Rocks, and 
 thofe things which feem to lye beyond the Buildings. 
 
 _ XIV. Begin alfo w^ith thofe parts w^hich are fartheft 
 diflant from you, for then you will not be liable to the 
 IncoMvenience of rubbing or deikcing any thing whillt 
 it is wet. 
 
 XV. The farthcft parts being done, work iuft accord- 
 ing to your Pattern, (if you liavne any) and draw your 
 Gold Size on the places anfwering to the black Lines of 
 your Print or Pattern, and no ndiere elfe, leaving tlis 
 white for the black Japan or Ground of your Work. 
 
 XVI. And in all re f peels nfe yoxr Siz^Cy as if ym i^ere t^ 
 Coppy the Print or Pattern on vphite Paper with Ink or black 
 Lead ;. only take care, that whiKt you are working ia 
 one part, you fuffer not that already done with Size, to 
 dry lb much, that it .will not hold talt your Metals ; for 
 ^vhich caufe you miift often try what Condition yiour 
 already fized Work is in. 
 
 , XVII. For this Caufe lake, you mull foinetimcs be 
 Drawing ; lometimes Gilding : and then be Drawing a- 
 gain, and then Gildmg ; continuing thus alternately till 
 your whole piece is compleated, 
 
 XVIII. If you find it troufelefome to draw the White, 
 and over-pafs the Black ; or on the contiary to draw the 
 Black and omit the White, on the tops of Houfes, Pol- 
 dage of Figures, Faces, or the like ; then for your Eafe, 
 over-liiy all thole parts.of Buildings, Foklagcs, Faces, CTc. 
 with Gold Size, lay your Metals thereon ; and when 
 w^ell dryed, wa'h over thofe places only which you de- 
 fign to let off with Black, with your Securing f'^arnijh. 
 
 XIX. Tho' in fome Japan-woric Silver is lometiraes 
 made ufe of; yet it is but very Icldem, except in Ibme 
 taifed Works, becaufe the bell and brightell Silver is too 
 Iplcndii a. Metal tor black Japan ; and therefore we 
 
 chuie 
 
9©8 Polygraphices, Lib. XI 
 
 chiile to ufe in place thereof a kind of dull or dhty Sil- 
 ver, which is Potider Tin. 
 
 XX. I. .-My, Yoii may fet off your plain Metals when 
 rubbed o\\ Gold Size, either with Metals mixed with 
 Gum-water or Gold-fizc, viz,, when the plain Metals are 
 laid and throughly dry, hatch or work in the Size for 
 letting off, as you would do with Metal? mixed with 
 Gum-water ; and w^ithout doubt you will find the Gold- 
 fize to be beft. 
 
 CHAP. XTX. 
 Ofjapannhg rvhh Gold andColors, 
 
 I. "pvRaw or trace out your Dcfign, and fill mofl part 
 ■L-' of your liTiall Works with Gold, paffmgby, not- 
 withfhmding, lome few of them to be relcrved for bright 
 Copper, green Gold, &c. to be lo added to the pieces, 
 that they may grace and enliven the Work. It is uliial 
 with the Japan Artilts to fill frequently w^ith dead Me- 
 tals, and bintlthemiji with Gold.. 
 
 IL Suppofe you have great Flowers ; one of thefe 
 Flowers you may fill the leeded part thereof with Silver, 
 the Leaves with Vermilion, and in letting oft, work i^ 
 in Black Diamond-wile; and the little Ipots of Black 
 wliich Ive in the W^hite, work ^vitli bright red Copper: 
 then the part which is filled with Red, bind in with Sil- 
 ver, and vein it with the lame. 
 
 III. Another great Flower, you n->ay fill the Seed 
 thereof with bright Copper ,• the Leaves with Silver : and 
 in lotting off, border the Seed with* Black, the infide 
 with Silver, and compals in the Leaves with Gold, hatch- 
 ing tliciii with Black. 
 
 IV. If any great Flower is partly hid with a large 
 Leaf or Leaves of the Plant, let tbe Seed of this be green 
 Gold : lome parts bright Gold ; and if any Spots are in 
 thole parts, let them be done with pure Cinnabar; the 
 Leaves o\ the Flower with Orange Tawncy, and let 
 off wMth Silver ; andtlic Leaves of the LJant with yellow 
 Green. 
 
 V. If 
 
Chap. 19. Of Japanning with Gold^^c, 909 
 
 V. If there is another Flower, do it with green Gold, 
 its Seed with bright Gold, fquared with Black : other 
 Flowers may be laid with Silver, leeded with bright Cojv 
 per, and hatched and fquared with Black; other Flow- 
 ers with Cinnabar, the Seeds with tranfpiarent Green : 
 cnclofe them with Vermilion, and hatch in the Leaves 
 with Silver. 
 
 VI. If another large Flower, let its Seed be red, bind 
 it in, and chequer it with Silver ; cover the Leaves with 
 Blew, hatch and fiirround with Gold : other Flowers 
 which are lefs, make them with Red -, their Seed with 
 Blew, and fet oflf with vSilver. 
 
 VII. Another great Flower may be laid with trans- 
 parent Blew, bounded and wrought with Gold ; the 
 Leaves covered with Silver, and hatcht with pure fine 
 Cinnabar. If there be another Flower like to the for- 
 mer, let it be laid in like_ manner with Blew, its Seed 
 with dirty Copper, fet off and encloled with Silver, its 
 Leaves with deep bright red Copper, and hatch with 
 Black. 
 
 VIII. Other Flowers, lay their Seed in tranfparcnt 
 Red, fet them off with Silver, border with Black, make 
 the Leaves Silver, and hatch with Black : or, make the 
 Seed bright Copper, compaffed and fet off with Black j 
 the Leaves red Copper, which you may hatch and en- 
 elofe with White. 
 
 IX. Thefe things we hatve given you for Example 
 f:ike, and thought good to make the Exemplar in that of 
 Flowers, as being that in which the grcateft Nicety and 
 Difficulty lyes, ic not being I0 eafily performed as other 
 things ; and yet in this very thing the Licentia Fid:Hralis is 
 very large, the Artifl being left chieiiy to his Fancy, on- 
 ly with this Caution , That every where he ufes Yar 
 riety. 
 
 X. And tho' in what has been faid, filling and fet- 
 ting off has been mentioned together, for the more eaiy 
 apprehending of the Matter ; yet you mull be fure al- 
 ways to lay your plain Colors before you think of letting 
 them off, becaule you afc more ready to let off with one 
 Color before you undertake another, and your Fancy is 
 more ready to adorn and furniih or fill every hnglg 
 Flower and Leaf. 
 
 Qqq XLBuf 
 
^10 Poljfgraphices. Lib. XI. 
 
 XI. But the Flowers being filled, you arc next to 
 conhder what is to be the Covering of the great Leaves : 
 adorn them with Metalinc Colors, generally fuch as arc 
 «reen, fuUied Gold, pale, dull Copper ; but intcrmix- 
 Tng here and there tranlparent Blew and Green: bound 
 and vein them with fuch Colors as give the greatcft Life, 
 fucli as may be chearful, plealant and delightful. 
 
 Xll. Sometimes double the Borders in the Leaves with 
 the Ground Black of your piece left between, as your 
 Patterns will inllrud you ; and make all your Veins, 
 finilliing Lines, and the Stroaks you fet off with, fine, 
 
 clean, even and iinooth. 
 
 C H ^ P. XX. 
 
 Of Raffed and Emboffed Works. 
 
 I, T^ H O' they who live in great Cities, where theic 
 
 -■- arc variety of Artificers, have no need of fomc 
 part of the following Difcourfe ; becaufe they can buy 
 EmbolTed and Carved Frames, Boards, Tables, Pieces, 
 &c. ready made to their hands : yet for thofe who live 
 in the Country, and have not the opportunity or conve- 
 niency of procuring fuch, xve thought good toaddinthis 
 place a few Rules and Direclions how they may do the 
 lame things, audliipply thofe wants themlclvcs. 
 I. ThefiriiWay. 
 
 IL Toi4- mn^ firft make the Aiodel of your Deftgn j Ani 
 that wuji be done with Clay. 
 
 Take good tough, well tempred Clay, and with pro- 
 per Tools model it, and work out any fort of Carving 
 or Embonincn* which you fancy ; then lay it afide to 
 dry in the Shade, ioy either Sun or Fire will crack it. 
 
 IIL When it is perfectly dry and hard, andyeu pur- 
 poit to calt the Moulds on the Models, Oil your Models 
 verv well witii Lmlecd Oil ; and having wrought the 
 Pafie extreamly well between your Hands, clap it on 
 and prels it down dole every where, that it may be a 
 perfect Mould iuall parts; whicli, when it is dry, it is 
 
 IV. T0 
 
Chap. 20. Of Raifed and Emhoffed Works, 91 1 
 
 IV. To mah the Fajie for making your Aionlds of. 
 Make aGlew-watcr (h'ouger than any Size, yet lome- 
 
 thing weaker than Joyners melted Glew : mix Whiting 
 in fine poudcr therewith, till it is as thick as Pa(k or 
 Dotigh ; knead it very well, wrapping it up m a dou- 
 ble Cloth ; in \vhich it may lye and get heat troiii the 
 Fire ,• for 5-ou are not to let it grow cold, for then it will 
 harden, and fo be made imfit tor Uie. 
 
 V. To make the Modi of any Carved Frame-, thereby 
 to imitate it in Pajte. 
 
 Take fome of the former Pafte, according to the length 
 and magnitude of the Leaves and Flowers yo^a would 
 take off J you need not take off a whole length, for poi- 
 fibly you may find one and the lame thing many tiuies 
 over in one fide, fo that one Mould may ierve allof that 
 Ibrt, they being well united or joined together. Woi;k 
 the Parte between your Hands, and clap it in that part 
 of the Frame wliich you intend to take a Mould oh lu€t 
 there be lb much Paiteasto make tlie back of the Mould 
 flat and even : and whilft the Mould is warm, take it 
 from the Frame, and at the fame infiint fix it to a Board 
 which is larger than it ielf. After this manner you may 
 take otf any Ibrt of Emboll-work or Carving from any 
 part of your Frame ; all which Moulds you may glevv 
 on little Boards, and fo leave them to dry and liiuv 
 den. 
 
 VI. To place your Pa[le on Frames. 
 
 The Joyner i? to make \oi\t Frames acc:ording to your 
 Defjgn, which being ready, as alio the Palh and MouLls, 
 you are to Oil the Moulds very wcN with Liiitccd Oily- 
 Itriking the BruOi into every little Crevife and Corner, to 
 prevent the Moulds (ticking to the Paite : then take as 
 much warm Palfe as will fill up the Moulds; work it 
 .'igain between your Hands, and whillt thus n-arm and 
 in^ood temper, put it into the Mould, prciTmg all parts 
 of it with your Tliumbs and Fingers ; and then with a 
 Knife cut oft the fupenlucns Palte even with the top of 
 the Mould. Turn cut this new-tatnioncd E'nbolt or 
 Carved work on your Hand, and before it cools brudi it 
 over with thinGiew, as alio the place it isdefigned for,. 
 and immediately put it upon your Frame in the iaine> 
 place, where it mull" always abide, prelfing it down of 
 ; ch)fe gently. 
 
 Gqq 2 Vli. NoA'^r 
 
^12 Poiygra^hices. Lib. XL 
 
 VII. Now Oil your Mould again , and with frelTi 
 Paltc prepare more Emboiincnts or Carved-works in like 
 manner, wliich call oft', and place it upon your Frame 
 as the tbrmer : and this Work fo often repeat till your 
 whole Frame is filled with your Embofment-s according 
 as you dcrue. 
 
 VIII. Let it alone to dry for 5 or 6 days ; after which 
 you may lafely lay your white Ground, which you may 
 Paint, Varnilh, japan, Gild in Oil, or Burnilh, as the 
 Nature of your Work requires. 
 
 II. Another way to make Raifed or Emboli Worls. 
 
 IX. Make a ftrong Gwm- Arahid Water, twice as 
 Itrong as that in cap. 5. jeU. 1 1 . take Wliiting, fine Bole, 
 ana ^i. grind thcie with the Gum-w^ater q.f. till they are 
 as fine and fofi as Butter, and lb thin, that if a Stick 
 pointed be dipt into it, the Mixture will iult drop from 
 It: if it IS too thick, make it thinner with Gum-water j 
 if too thin, add more or the Whiting and Bole. 
 
 X. Dipfuch a pointed or taper Stick into this Mixture, 
 and drop on the Rock, Hotile, Tree, Flower or Fruit 
 which you dcfign to Raile or Embofs, repeating this 
 dropping of tiic Mixture lb often till you have raifed your 
 Work as bold and as Ir.gh as you think fit. 
 
 XI. Sometimes you willfnd your Paile to bladder or fntlly 
 hxt tins is cau'ed fro?K an infajficient grinding of the Whiting 
 and Bole with the GHrji-water. Thefe Bladtlers, if not pre- 
 vented or cured, will make your piece, when dried, to 
 be fnll 0^ hole?, and lb fpoil its Beauty. The preventive 
 par'. Ave have taught you : but to cure it, ( if it is palt 
 prevention ) you mult when dry, wet a fine Rag, and 
 with yi)ur Finger rub it over and over again, till the holes 
 and cracksitre choakt and (foptup ; and then being per- 
 fcdtly dry, Rui}-. it well till it is very fmooth. 
 
 XII. in the Japan, which is raifed for Garments, 
 Rocks, G'f. iomc parts are elevated and higher than o- 
 thers, as in Pleats and Foldings of Garments^ thofe which 
 leem to lye underneath, are always at the greater di- 
 fiancc. in F loners y thole which are firft and nearelt the 
 Eye, are liigheil: ; and thole Leaves which lye firlt, arc 
 Iji'giicr than thole which lye behind them. So'inRocisy 
 the firft and ncarclt you mu(t always rile higher, and 
 Iwell beyond that which isalmoit hidden, orlecmsto 
 lye behind. 
 
 ^ XIII. Thii 
 
Chap. 20 . Of Rat fed and Emhoffed Works, 9 1 ^ 
 
 XIII. This Rule holds firfn in all things of like Qualiiyy 
 and therefore you mud raife your Deiign accoitliiig to 
 Nature, to its due height, whether Figure, Tree, Hoiife, 
 Flower, Fruit or Landskip ; and being w^cll dryed, with 
 a little Gum-water, Vermilion and a Pencil, you muft 
 trace out the Lines for the Face, Hands, Foldings of Gar- 
 ments, Leaves of Plants, Seeds of Flowers, Fruits, Houfes, 
 Trees, Rocks, &c. in their proper Shape, according to 
 thofe Lines which were drawn as Boundaries, for laying 
 the Pafte in its proper Figures. 
 
 XIV. Then you muft have feveral Inftruments ; as, 
 I. A bending Graver, inch as Engravers ufe. 2. Several 
 
 fmall Chiz^els, the broaciett not exceeding a quarter, of an 
 Inch ; all the other proportionably lefs. 
 
 XV. With theje yonr Raijed or Emboj} Works kj'aj} he c^t^ 
 carved, cleared and fcraped, in height, (l^ape and proporti.)n 
 to your Pattern, or \\hat is afn!^eJ)le mth Nature and rhe 
 Defign : in this cafe, your Inltruinents muft be esquifit- 
 lyiharp, and the Hand of the Artili: very eafyand gen- 
 tle, left the Work breaks off in any place, to the f])0!ling 
 of the Piece : lartly, fmooth it w^itha BrnOi, which has 
 been often ufed before, to make it fit for Painting, Var- 
 jiilhing, Japanning or Gilding. 
 
 III. Another way to perform thefe Raifcd or Emhofl 
 Works. 
 
 XVI. I. Strike or trace out vour Dcfign, as well the 
 infide as the outlide of Faces, Necks, Hands, Legs, the 
 chief Stro;iks of the Foldings of Garments, Leaves of 
 Plants, Flowers, Seeds, Fiiiits, Hoiiies, Trees, Hocks, 
 Birds, Beafts, &c. 
 
 XVII. 2. Take your Pafte before made in ff 5. p. yet 
 fomewhat thinner, and with it raiie the lower parts of 
 all or any of the Particulars afore-named, which require 
 the leaft height or railing ; and let it dry thronghlv. 
 
 XVIII. 3. Then take the thicktif Sced-Uc f^araifh, 
 and w^th a very fmall or tine Pencil dipt therein, var- 
 nilL juft the edges of your Railed- work, tbr this Realbn, 
 that as you raiie the othci- parts of the Work higher, it 
 Xjiay hinder thefrelli wet Pafte from incorponit'iig Avith 
 the dry, which would make the Work look ill. 
 
 X. 4. This Work of yarnifh'mg the Ed^es, yo;tniu!i do as 
 offers as ym raife one part above another: and ftill as vour 
 Work grows higher, your Pafte muft: be made thicker, 
 
 Q.qq 3 and 
 
9i4 Folygfaphices, Lib. XI. 
 
 and each part raifcd in order, beginning with the lotv- 
 ti\ and cndins;^vith the highefh 
 
 XX. s- When all is dry, fmooth it (if need require) 
 withaRuIln, to make it in apolturc to receive your Co- 
 lors and Metals, or what cKc you are plcaled to put up' 
 on it. 
 
 XXI. 6. Your Mctaline Colors being read}^ mix them 
 ■with Gum-water, and lay them on the Embolments and 
 places where they ought to lye ; which being through 
 div, burnill) with a Burnillicr ( in cap. i.Jeti. i8.) till it 
 is blight, and iliines with a good Luftre. 
 
 XXII. 7. This done, with your fine Seed-Lie Varnifh 
 and a proper Pencil, go over all your Embofments twice 
 or thrice ; and then let it otf orlliadow it, as the Rea- 
 ion ot the Deiign requires. 
 
 XXIII. 8. Grind no more Palte than you canule at 
 once, left it be dry before you ufc it a lecond time : but 
 if it be dry, you murt grind it again, and it will be as fit 
 as before: it ought not to be made too\veak; if it be, it 
 ]x\\\[\ be {trengtbned with more Gum-water, which by 
 jnany Tryals and Experiences you will at length fully 
 find out ; and alio {ce,that it is polliblc to make a Pa(te 
 lo hard or iHfFand tough, that a violent blow with a 
 Hammer iTiall hardly break or bruile it. 
 
 IV. To Jet of Raijed or Enihojid Works ivith BLtch, 
 
 XXIV. Your Work being Varniilied and Burniilied, 
 with Lamp-black mixt ^vith a little Gum-water, (hardly 
 ciiongh to wet it, and incorporated with a Bnilh-pcncil, 
 with (0 much fair W^ater added to it a? with a linall 
 Mell pointed Pencil will make it to run in fine black 
 Stroaks) draw the Lineaments and Features of the Faces, 
 FoidagcofGarments,Veinsof Leaves, Flowersand Seeds, 
 with the black Hatchments of your Flowers, Bodies of 
 Trees, &c. 
 
 XXV. And if you would have any Rocks fpcckled, 
 firl^ pals tiicin over with the laid Black; and when dry, 
 give them two waflies with the .SVcw/w,'^ /^^.f/vn//?; and 
 lafily lay on the Speckles : but if the places you would 
 ipccklelhould be too llipp^ry, to as that there ihould lie 
 a hazard of their Hiding oti ; in this calc, you mult re- 
 move this gre.iiv kind of Slipperyncis by a Ii)ft and gen- 
 tle rubbing a\ itli a Tripoli Cloth. 
 
 XXVI. This 
 
Chap. 20. Of Raifed and Emboffed Works. 915 
 
 XXVI. This way of fetting off is more ufed than that 
 of a Tracing-pencil or breathing on it ; not only for 
 Raifed or Emboli: Work , but for Flat-work too ; for 
 your piece being dry, ftroak it once over with xht Secu- 
 ring F'arnijy (in cap.^.fe^.S.) then with a black-Lead- 
 Pencil hatch and vein at pleafure, and the fame do with 
 other Metals and Colors befides Gold. 
 
 XXVII. For inflance : If a red Floorer is to he fn off'mth 
 Silver ; firit fecure your Red with Varnifli ; -which being 
 dr}% hatch and vein it with Silver : this Rule you muli 
 obferve in all cafes, where you intend to work one thing 
 upon another, whether Color upon Metaly or A-fetal up- 
 on Color ; or Metal Ibmetimes upon A4etal. 
 
 XXVIII. Your Work being thus adorned and fet off, 
 if it is flat or plain Work, make ufe of white Poli/hing 
 Varniflj (in cap. ^. feEl. lO.) to fecure it both as to Draught 
 and Ground- work, which will endure a Politliing. 
 
 XXIX. But if it is for Emboft or Railed Work, then 
 you muft ufe the Secnring l^arnijh ( in cap. ^.JeEl. 8.) be- 
 caufe Embolt-work will not bear a Polilliing as tiie other 
 will J but muft only be fecured and cleared up : but 
 withal you may note, that this lail named Vanuih may 
 be uled either for Plahi or Ewbr>j'i-work, Avhereas the 
 former is only fit £o\: fiat Work. 
 
 XXX. In VrOrki.ng with Gum-water, he careful that it hs 
 not too jiijf of the Gmn^ for then it mil quite fpoil theheaa- 
 ty and liijire of the Ale t aline Colors : but \yhen you have 
 fufficiently mixed them in the beginnig, if you find the 
 mixture too (hong of the Gam, you may afterward 
 w^cakenit, only with fair Water: and therefore ■ Itreng- 
 then them only fo much with G^m, as may canfe thcin 
 to ftick clofc to the Work, and tivlmQrarniJhiHg with- 
 out coming off. > 
 
 V. To manage Rock-WorL 
 
 XXXI. Thefe we formerly told you were lo he done 
 laft of all, bccaufc they could not be well finillied, till 
 all the reft were com'pleatcd, except only iome few 
 fcattered Plants, iuppos'dto grow upon them, that tliey 
 might not appear naked : yet not too r.iaiiv ot them 
 neither, left their number lliould nilcrrupt ibc Sha.knv, 
 and confound the Sight. 
 
 Qqq 4 XXXII. If 
 
gi6 Polygrafhices, Lib. XI. 
 
 XXXII. If tkeff Rock 'ire to be covered with Metaline 
 Color \ then lay Cjo///, Silver or Copper with your Pencil^ 
 in a full body, round the outward Streaks (which n- ere 
 traced with your Pe>icil) in breadth about a quarter of 
 an Inch ; but take care it be not too wet. 
 
 XXXIII. Then take a Urc/ Gonfe Ontl Pencil, cut off 
 its Point, making it flat, ar.d bluntat the End; and 
 with this loach or dab your Metal: after which do the 
 like to the black or bmwn part ot the Rock, that lb it 
 may be Itrewed with lome o\ the Metal too, and by 
 little and little coi-tinue it, till the whole is ttrewed 
 ov^r : but thefe Speckles fhould be thicker towards the 
 Sides and Top, than in or pear the Mladle. 
 
 XXXIV. U>i1y, Vfher Metals, Artifidcd and Ad;d- 
 ter^.te, n.a: br laid on, according to thcfe Dv-cBions, \vhich 
 you may dipofeon aiid Work, both with your Finger, 
 and the blnnt Gooje QhU Pencil aforementioned, ac-r 
 cording asyourReafon ihallintormyou. 
 
 CHAP. XXL 
 
 Of Bantam Work. 
 
 I. A S the Japan Work, is both Plain and Embojfed, 
 ■^ and is wrought moll: in Gold and other A/e^als: 
 fo the Bantam Wrk is alio Plain and Carved, and is 
 wrought moft of it in Cdots, with a very fmall fcatter- 
 ino of Gold here and there. 
 
 II. The Wood is prepared for this, as it is for the 
 Jap in Work^ and the Prinsi^g with Whuing is the lame : 
 and for t\\Q fiat Work, it is done in Colors mixt with 
 Gtm;-uaur, as the nature ot the design requires , the or- 
 dering 0^ which Colors with the G>mi-i\ater we have for- 
 ii.cily laughtyou. 
 
 111. Ti'c Crved Wnrk is performed thns. 
 Your Cabinet, Table, Boxes, &c. let be made of 
 Deal, or fome other courle Wood ; this Prime with <!>7if 
 an4 Whitings Icttmg it dry ; this muil be io often repeat- 
 ed till your Iinning is alinoft a quarter of an Inch thick, 
 lettiiii; kdi V between every time. 
 
chap. 21. Of B Ant Am Work. 917 
 
 IV. But this you mufi note, that your Whiting and Si^t 
 THuji he made thinner than for Janan Work, but for that 
 reafon it mult be done fo much the oftner : for if it is 
 too thick, it will not only lie rougher, and be apt to 
 Crack, andflv off: but it will notfo eafily penetrate to 
 the bottom of any Crack, nor go into every little Cre- 
 vice," Notch and Hole, as it will certainly do, if it is 
 pretty tl^in. 
 
 V. Tour Piece now Prin?ed to its due thiclnefs, and 
 through dry, is then to be Water plained, viz.. to be 
 rubb d with a fine Rag, and a little i'air Water ; after 
 which, being dry- ^//^itasfinooth as you can. 
 
 VI. Then lay on yo'ir Blxck, and F'arnifh it un rpith a 
 pod Body ; and after 6 or 7 d.iystirae of drying, Polifh 
 it with Trip ,7/?, Water a. id a fine Rag, rubbing it wirh 
 an even, eafie and gentle Hand. 
 
 VII. This done, trace and draw om your defign nith 
 Cinnabar and Gtim-ixaier, in the very fame manner in 
 which you jvtcnd to Cnt and Carve it; with all the cir- 
 cumftances andexactnels Poiiible. 
 
 VI.II. AUf'" -rm- hM-:ane Figures, Birds, Be alls, Li- 
 ff^s, Houfa, Treei, Fhveers, Rocks, 6zc. in their dne A'fca- 
 Jures and Propo^-f'ons : The foldings o/ Garments, leaves 
 of Trees and Plants, withal other things, draw 
 them fo, as ii" they were fo to remain without the leail 
 Akerar.on. 
 
 IX. Then having a [harp Graver-, and other cMtino- In- 
 jlrMmen. s, of dijf-ring Forms, cut out yonr Work deep or 
 llialloiv, as • you think beft, but never Carvnig deeper 
 than the Whiting lies, for the Wood it felf, ought not 
 to be touched widi the Graver. 
 
 X. Leave alio black Srr oaks for the Dr/:pery, and fdd- 
 ings of Garments, and for the di'jlingmfhing of one thin? 
 from another. Carving where the white is, and leaviiig 
 the black untouched, according as your Exemplar or 
 Pattern may be, taking inffrucfions alio from a variety 
 ci Bantam Pieces, which difter vaiHy irom thofe oc ^'a- 
 pan, in the very manner of the Daughts, as well as iii 
 their other pcrlormances and linilliing. 
 
 XI. To^<r Carved Work being cut out cle.m and fn'o th, 
 and finilhcd, and your Colors w(?ll mixeJ, witli riiic 
 and clean Pencils lay them into your Carved Work, as 
 
 \o. 
 
91 8 Polygraphices, Lib. XL 
 
 your Reafon, and the Nature of the thing fhall clkcdt 
 you. 
 
 XII. The Colors being laid on And finifhed, then lay tlic 
 Gold on thole places you defign it for, which may be 
 Ponder Gold, or Brajs DpiH, mixt with GmK-voater ; but 
 rather Leaf Gold, becaufe it not only looks Richeft, but 
 is that which the Bantam Artijis always ufe. 
 
 XIII. But it niu'ii be laid with fomething a fironger Gttw 
 water, and to be Jaid on with a Pencil, and whilit it is 
 moiit, your Gold is to be laid on, being firtt cut with a 
 very lliarp, fmooth, edged Knife into little Pieces, either 
 on your Leather OAJhion,Q)Y. on a piece of Leather Itiaight- 
 Jy nailed to a Board. 
 
 ' XIV. Take up the Gold with a little Cotton, and with 
 the fame Dab it cloje upon yonr Work, lb (if your Gum- 
 water is Itrong) it will look Rich and Beautiriil : other- 
 wife (if weak) it will appear as it were Hungry and 
 Star/cd when dr^f. 
 
 XV. All this done, fee you carefully clear up your black 
 with Oil, but without totiching your Colors, led you jhould rub 
 them of, or fully them ; for this is not fccured as the flat 
 Bantam Work is; if any wet fhould come to them, the 
 Colors will bcfpoilcd and comeoif. In this cale, it is 
 beft to leave out the Tamifhing Colors, and only ufc 
 fuch, as you may apply the Securing yarnijh to, without 
 lofs of their Splendor and Beauty. 
 
 CHAP. XXIL 
 
 Of taking off' Japan Patterns, 
 
 X.^SJ 0\'^ R black or other Colors being Farniflied, thin 
 L Polilh, and make it jit for draning : but you inuil 
 have your draught or defign before you, in Paper, cither 
 dra^vn or printed, 
 
 II. This Draught r.r Print, let be rubbed all over the 
 back fide with Whiting or fine Chalk, wiping o*f all 
 that Whiting or Chalk, which lies rough and dully up- 
 on the Paper. 
 
 III. Then 
 
Chap. 2;. Of Gilding in OiL 919 
 
 III. Then I Ay this Paper , Draught or Print y upon yonr 
 varnifht Table or Box, ^vitli the wjj-ited fide next to it, 
 and upon the very liimc place where you defign the 
 Draught iTiould be made, and with a piece of Imall 
 Wire, or a Needle fixed in a final I Wooden Handle, 
 round (not fharp Pointed) which is called a Tracing 
 Pencil, go over, and Trace as much of the Print as you 
 fee convenient. 
 
 IV. Take the moj} material and OHtrvard Stroah with 
 all the rejf, "which you think will be hard and difficult to 
 draw without the Pattern or Draught. 
 
 V. Thus by the help of the Whiting or Chalk, you will 
 hare the grofs Falliion of your Print or Draught, and 
 fuch other lines, which will be a dire61:ion to you, how 
 to perform that which you would have done on your 
 Table or Box. 
 
 VI. Having thtis finifht your Draught mth Whiting, if 
 you draw in Gold Si^e, ui^cfine Cinnabar imKl with G^m~ 
 tvater, and with AJmall Pencil dipt in it, go over all the 
 lines made by the Whiting ; for this will caufe it, that 
 it lliall not eafily come otf, but you may work upon it 
 with your Gold Siz,e at pleafure. 
 
 VII. If you rvork Metals or Colors in Gum-water, then 
 trace or draw over your deiign with Gum-rvattr, -r/iixt 
 mth Gold or Brafs Dufi : by either of thefe ways when 
 it is dry and tinillied, viz.. either in Gum-raater or Gold 
 SizjC, you may compleat and tiuilli your Work. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Of Gilding and Lackering in Oil, 
 
 I. 'T'O mix and lay on the Gold Si^.e. 
 
 ^ Firlt Prime the Piece with due priming in cap. 
 ^.feU. 23. Bj Then the hdl Gold Size, fit Oil, ana. 
 fo much of each as you think the piece may require : 
 Grind them well upon a Porphyry, and put all into a 
 Gally-pot. Dip a clean Bruih into the Size, and pais 
 over all the Piece very thinly, jobUng and (Iriking thv: 
 
 poiiit 
 
920 Fclj/graphices, Lib. XI, 
 
 point of the Pencil into the hollow places of the Canned 
 Work, {o that no part may cfcape. 
 
 II. \i anyplace heuntoucht with the Gold, Siz,ej the Gold 
 will not Hick upon it, but it will be full of faults, and 
 look very ill. 
 
 III. Let it rejl 24. hnnrs or morey fo as it may he hut 
 clammy enough to hold the Metals : breath upon it, if your 
 breath ftays upon iiilike a mift, you may then lay ou 
 your Gold : or if0 is fo dry, that it does not dilcolor 
 nor ilick to your^ngcr, but is clammy, and not very 
 willing to part with your Finger ; it is then in a good 
 Condition. . , 
 
 IV. Should yoH Gild before the Siz,e is dry enough , it 
 would as it were'drown, and deprive your Gold of its 
 Glofs and Luftre,';and if you (lay till the Size is too 
 dry, you have then loft your opportunity, for the Gold 
 will not flick. 
 
 V. To lay on the Leaf Gold. 
 Upon your Culhion (in cap. i. f^ci. 13.) you are to 
 cut the Gold and Silver ^ with a thin, broad, lliarp, 
 fmooth edged Knife. Then take your Pencil, Cotton, or 
 Pallet, (made of a S.pirrels Tail) breath upon it, and 
 therewith touch, and take up the Gold ; lay it upon 
 tlie place you intend, prefling it clofe with the laid Pen-;^ 
 cil 01 Cotton. 
 
 VI. Then cut Jome Leaves into fmall Pieces, to cover 
 fever al other parts of your Work, which m.%y have efcaped 
 Gilding : and thus muft you proceed till the whole is 
 over-laid and finillied ; after 24 hours, with a fine large 
 Hogs-hair Brulh, jobb down, and prefs over the Work 
 gently, that the Gold may be made to (tick upon all 
 the uneven and ho) low parts of the Carving ; then with 
 fine loft iliammy Leather, as it were, Polilh and rub it 
 over fmoothly. 
 
 VII. This being well done, your Gold will appear of an 
 admirable Lt'.jhe, and its beauty will be fo dui-ible, that 
 tho' cxpofed to tlit Wind and Weather, it will not re- 
 ceive any damage for many Yeirs. 
 
 VIII. To Lacker in Oil, juch things oi are to he expo- 
 fed to the Weather. 
 
 You mult obierve the fame method here, as in the 
 former, excepting in tiiis, that your Pntmug ai^ht to be 
 
 vfhiicr 
 
Chap. 24. Of Gilding Woody &c. 921 
 
 rehiter than the laft, which is done by mixing a little 
 vfhite Lf^rf, which has been Ground along time with the 
 former GoU Siz.e. 
 
 IX. Alfo your Silver Siz,e ought not to he fo dry as that 
 of Gold^ when the Leaves are laid on : If thefe things be 
 rightly obferved, you caanot poflibly Err in performing 
 your Work. 
 
 X. To Gild Carved Worked in Oil which is not to be 
 4Xpofed to the open Air. 
 
 Take Size, melt it, and put in fo much Whiting as 
 will only make it of a white Color : with this Size o- 
 ver your Frame once. 
 
 XI. Then add more Whiting, till it is of a convenient 
 ThickneJ^ : and with this lay it over 3 or 4 times or more, 
 as you find the Work requires it, letting it dry through- 
 ly between every time. 
 
 XII. Being now dry, with a piece of Fifli Skin, or I>utch 
 Rullies, riib and f moot h yonr Worl: after which, with 
 a fine Rag, dipt in Water, Water plain it, rubbing it 
 gently till it is very fmooth, and fo let it dry ; arid then 
 Size it with ftrong Size. 
 
 XIII. When the Siz,e is dryed. Lacker over your Piece twice, 
 ly a gentle heat ; and laying on your Gold Size, perforin 
 every thing, as is before diredled. 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 Of Gilding Wood with B(frni[bt Gold and 
 
 Silver, 
 
 I. Vji. "OArchment Si<,e (in cap. 5. feFl. 8, 9.) and ma- 
 ■■■ nage it as there dire6led, for the Priming or 
 Mm»^ of your Piece, which repeat 7 or 8 times over 
 letting it dry between every time. 
 
 II. But if it is a Carved Frame, and you intend Gilding 
 vfity then take yellow Oker, and grind it finely with 
 Water, adding a little Weak Size to bind it : with this 
 when warmed color over your Frame, and let it dry lei- 
 furely. 
 
 in. n 
 
^22 Polygraphices, Lib. XL 
 
 III. To Gold Siz,e yoftr Piece. 
 "fy. Either of the Gold Sizes (in cd^. 5. feci. 3, 7.) yer 
 rsiihct the Fir jl of them, melt it, making it Blood warm, 
 but lb as it may befomewhat thin ; Itir it well with a 
 fine Bmjh, and therewith Size otcr your Piece twice, 
 without touchuig the hollows, or deepeit part of the 
 Carving; becauiethe yellow Color firlt laid or, is near 
 in color to the Gold, and a fault in that kind will not 
 lo cafdy be difcovercd , becaufc of the (liadows. 
 
 IV. ^fter 5 or 6 ho-Ars drying, try if your Gold wilF 
 Burnilli upon it, if not, alter your Gold Size, and do it 
 over again. 
 
 V. To lay on ymr Gold for Bpimifhinr. 
 Having fixt your Work ahnort upright in a little re- 
 clining Polkire, that the Water may run off, and jiot 
 fettle in any of the Cavities ; lay fomc Leaves of Gold 
 on your Cufhion, which hold in your left Hand with your 
 Pallet and Pencil : have aUo a Balon of Water by von, 
 and dry IVhitingj to rub your Knife fometimcs with, 
 that the Gold may not ftick to it. 
 
 VI. Then with a Stvam QmiI Pencil, or a large one of 
 Camels-hair, h tg dipt into the Bafon 0^ Water, wet fo 
 much of your Work, as will take up 3 or 4 Leaves, be- 
 gining at the lower end, alcending and Gilding up- 
 wards, laying on whole Leaves, or half Leaves, or leller 
 pieces as your Work requires; and your intereit alio, 
 which is to lay them on without warte. 
 
 VIL This done, ivct .fnch another part of yoHr iy«r;(-, lay- 
 ing on your Gold Leaves, with your Pencil, Cotton, or 
 Pallet, and gently preffmg it clofe : and this method 
 purliie till the whole Piece is finilhed. 
 
 VIII. Now view over your Work, and fee what parts 
 have efcaped your Pencil or Gilding : In this cafe cut Ibme 
 Leaves of Gold into fmall Pieces, and with ?. fmall Pen- 
 cil, wet the ungilded Parts, and spply the bits of 
 Leaves as before direded : all this being done, let it 
 Itand 24 hours and no longer, and then come to bur- 
 nilliing of it. 
 
 IX. To Burnifh your Wori. 
 
 This is to be done with the Bumifher, (in cap. r. feci. 
 
 18.) by rubbing it fmoothly thereon, till it attains a 
 
 Glofs : now having burnillied io much of your Work 
 
 ^ you defi^n, leave llie Ground of your CaiTing un- 
 
 toucht. 
 
Chap. 24. Of GiUing Wood, 925 
 
 toucht, and fome other parts which you fliall think fit, 
 which being rough in refpe6l of the other, will fet off 
 and beautifie that which is Bumillied. 
 
 X. That rvhich is not Burnifhed muft he clothed or fe- 
 cureH vcith Siz^, Seed-lac Varnijhj or Lachr, if you 
 would have it to be deep colored: but you ought 
 to touch thefe parts only, and not that which is Bur- 
 nifhed. 
 
 XI. Then the Work muji he fet off mith Lacier T^arnipj, 
 mixt rvith Sanguis Draconis and Saftron, or mth Ornat- 
 to : with which and a fine Pencil touch the hollownefs 
 of the Carving, hollow veins of Leaves, and foldings : 
 if you do not think it deep enough, go over it again, 
 with the aforefaid Lacker. 
 
 Xll. To lay on your Silver S'iz,e. 
 ^ Take Silver Size new ground, and mixed with weak 
 Size : warm it, and with a clear Pencil fit for the Work, 
 Size it over once or twice : let it dry to a jurt Temper : 
 and if your Silver will BtirnijJ?, it is well : if noty 
 you mutt Size it again, with iome Alteration in the 
 Size. 
 
 XIII. Then wet your Work, and lay on ye :* Leaf Silvery 
 in the fame manner as yon laid on the Leaf Gold without 
 the leaji Alteration, and to Burnilli it all over ; if it be 
 not frofty Weather, thefe things may be done, but if 
 it is in time of hard Froft, your Priming will be apt 
 to Peel off, and the Gold and Silver Siz.e will Freeze 
 in laying on. 
 
 XIV. Let yOur Parchment Siz,e he fomethin^ fi^ong 
 and new ; for if jlale it loofes its force : nor grind any 
 more Gold or Silver Siz,ej tlian will ferve the prefent 
 Occafion : Laflly, keep your Work clean and free from 
 Duft, both before and after it is Gold Sized, and 
 Gilded , otherwife in Burnillhing it will be fiill of 
 Icratches and look ill. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
924 Polygraphic€S, Lib. XI. 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 Of Gilding of Metals, 
 
 I. 'TpO prepare the Gold for this WorL 
 
 -■- 5i Leaf Gold, or Ducket Gold beaten very 
 thin, and cut into little bits ij. v. put it into a Gally- 
 pot, and putfo much Otiick-filver to it, as will jultco- 
 tcr it ; (tir them with a Stick, and make an Amalg^ma : 
 which done, ftrain them thro' a piece of Shammy Lea- 
 ther, fqueczing the Leather hard with your Hand : that 
 xvhich remains behind in the Leather (and looks like 
 Silver) is the Gold Amalgamated^ and that which ivt 
 mii/tufein this defign. 
 
 IL To Gild Silver^ Brafs, Copper ^ or Princes Metal. 
 
 Firft fcrub the thin?, you would Gild with a Wire 
 Brufh and a little fair Water, and continue fcrubbing 
 and wetting it, till it is perfedly clean. 
 
 in. Take Quic'i-fiiver |i. put it into' a little Viol, 
 and drop into it 3, 4 or 5 drops of y^9«4-fbmj : witli 
 this mixture and a Rag, rub over your Metal, till it is 
 every wliere as white as Silver. 
 
 IV. Now take your prepared or Amalgamated Goldy 
 and with a little Knife, Ipread it over the whole Piece, 
 not miffing any part of it ; and give it a heat over a 
 Fire, to force the OHick-fther to evaporate or fly away, 
 io will the Gold be left (ticking dole to the Piece._ 
 
 V. But before you give it a through Heat, let it have 
 2 or 3 little Heats, that you may with a fniall Hair 
 Brujh almoli like that of a Comh^ dab and fpread your 
 Gold, which you may theeafierdo, becaufe the warmth 
 vou give it, makes the Quick-fdver the more ready to 
 fpread : after \vhich give it the through Heat as aforc- 
 laid. 
 
 VI. Take it from the Fire, and with a Hair fcrub 
 Bmlh, which has never touched Otiick-filver^ rub and 
 clean fc it, as you did in the beginning. Where Note, 
 if there be any Ipot left ungildecl, you mud after it has 
 been cicanfed with the Wire BrHjhj proceed again as 
 aforefkid. 
 
 VII. If 
 
, IChap. 25. Of Gilding of Metals, 9 2 $ 
 
 .t; -VIL' If y(^u would hazK the Work more rich mA UjHng^ 
 Ibefm^ar it a^ain with Quick-fiJverRn&j^i F. ^ihdi lay 
 ■jonthe Gold again after the former Method : and this 
 you may repeat fo often, till your Gold lies as-thick as 
 your Nail upon the Metal to Ije Gilded. ,'.>')•';.'>'. . ; -' 
 Vni. To heighen the Color, if ym fee convenient^'/ 
 
 5i ■^rg'^U ^^^h 'Sftlphsir, ana q:-vi mix themj and jiJut 
 to them as much fair Water, as will cover tire thing 
 when put into it : boil them over the Fire, and Inving 
 tyed your gilded piece to a String, put it into the boil- 
 ing Liquor" for a little Ipace, viev\ing it every minute ,- 
 and when it has obtained the Color whicfb pkafes yoi^ 
 put it immediately into cold Water knd it is donel „ ' 
 IX. Another veay to heighten the color of your. Gold. ■ '• , 
 
 VjH Nitre, Sal-Armoniack, Sandiver, Verdigiile,' whlt^ 
 and green Vitriol, ^«^, grind tiiem vrith White ..Wine 
 Vinegar, which lay over all your Work, then. lay: it 
 on a JFire, and give it a fmall Heat, that it may Sitibad^:'} 
 and fo take it off, and quench it in Urine. : . '-l r,ru> 
 . ■ %, Another way to Gild Silver, Braf, &c. Firfl: ckanfa 
 your Metal with A. F. then quicken your work Avitlt 
 M&rcury, then take of the afore prepared Gold at^ SeB* i i 
 and lay it on with a little Knife, fpriading it every, 
 where, and do in all things, as in the other methods . 
 
 XI. To Silver over Brafs cr Copper, as Clock-wahrr. do 
 their Dial plates. Having Leaf or burnt Silver in a rcadi" 
 iiefs ,• put to it as much A. F. as will cover it ; having 
 ifood an hour or tvvo, decant .off the A. F. as clea« ias 
 may be : wal"h the Silver 5 or 4 times with fair.Water^ 
 and then let it dry ; and then mix it with j. pan of fin$ 
 Argal to iij. parts of the Silver, with a little fair Wa- 
 ter. 
 
 XII. Then when you male ufe of it, rnh it on the w rl 
 -vcith n Cork, till it is filvered all over'^ and lies- 9}(ry fatr^ 
 after which dry it well with a Linnen Cloth, aiid ha- 
 ving made it warm, waili it ovet 3 or 4 times m{h the 
 belt white Varnilli (in cap. 4. Jeci.^ I.) which will pre- 
 ferve it from Tarmfhing, and other injuries or the Wca- 
 tberj 
 
 XIII. To Gild BraJS, Copper, Iron or S:eel with Leaf 
 Gold Or Silver, 
 
 Kti ii 
 
926 Poljfgrafhictf, Lib. XI. 
 
 . If it is Braf or vU Iron' dea.nk it very well with a 
 Wire Brufh j but if it is nevf Iron or Steel, having firft 
 made it very linooth, hatch your work all over very 
 neatly with a hatching Knife, (which is a Knife with 
 a ihort Blade, and a long Handle.) 
 
 XIV. Then give it an heat fo as to make it loo\ Blew on 
 a Charcole Fire\ from whence take it. and lay on your 
 Gold or Sili/ler ; and with a Blood-ftone, or BHrnijher, 
 Bumifh it down a little : then give it the fame heat a- 
 gain, andBurnifli it all over. 
 
 XV. This vpork of Gilding, you may repeat 6, 8 or 10 
 times ; IHll obferving to give it the fame heat, before 
 you lay on your Gold 01 Silver, and then Bttrnip? it as 
 afore- laid. 
 
 XVI. To refine Silver. 
 
 Ifyou have lome Silver which is courfe, and you are 
 loth to loofe it, and are willing to make it icrve for 
 this Occafion ; firft melt it in a Crucible, then call it 
 into Water : when cold take it out and dry it ; then 
 take Nitre Ibfs. Antimony 5fs. mix and make a Pouder, 
 Layfon;e of this Pouder and your Silver in a Crncible, S. S. 
 S, cover it -with another Crucible, luting them very cloje tO' 
 
 f ether : being dry, put them into the Fire, rvhieh at prji let 
 e gentle, and encreafe the heat Gradatim, t» a melting 
 Heat : after a vchile remove them to a cooler Place j ani 
 Tvhen cold, break the Crucible, and you mil have the fine 
 Silver at bottom ; but the Scoria or DrojSin the upper pttrt^ 
 whieh cafi away. After the lame manner Gold may be 
 lepaiated from Copper. 
 
 ■■■ > 
 
 CHAP* 
 
 .'i. 
 
Chap, fi^. Of GiUing Meziotimo, 927 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 ' Of Gilding and Painting Mezzotinto 
 Prints, 
 
 1. *irHefe Unds of Prints, are to he preferred for this pur- 
 -*• pofe, before thcfe of Graving ; becaiife that the 
 former, if done with a neat and careful Hand, and on 
 a good and fine grounded Print can Scarcely be di- 
 IHnguiQit from Limning : whereas, in all thofe that a' € 
 Engraved, all the llroaks of the Graver are plainly 
 Vifible. 
 
 II. Of Mezzotinto Prints, feme have a courfe Ground ', 
 others have a fine and/oft : the lir(t are Rough j and look 
 as if they were the pricks oFa Pen : whereas the other 
 has foft and fine Shadows, like a piece neatly drawn 
 with Indim Ink, or a black Lead Pencil. 
 
 III. Before yotichufe your Prints to work upon, fee to the 
 Paper they are Printed on : if it is tOo thick, you may 
 ealily fee it, by wetting a Corner of it with Water, 
 or your Tongue ; where,^ if it paffes not thro' the Pa- 
 per prefentl^r, 'tis not for your turn ; but Pap;r which 13 
 thin and fpungy, is that which you mnil chufe. 
 
 IV. The Glajs yoH male uje of. Ought to he trn^ ground 
 Looking-G I aj?, white, mellPoHfht, and not thick: all othet 
 forts of Glals whatever, will fpoil your Work : if you 
 Paint on Window Glals, your Colors will never appear 
 Fair and Beautiful. 
 
 V. The Frames for GlaJ^ Painting are commonly made of 
 fiained Pear-tree, either Square or Oval, with narrow mould- 
 ings for little Pieces, which increafe in breadth, accord- 
 ing to the largenefs of your Pi6ture, and are made with 
 Rabbets i 
 
 VI. But the Frames for thofe Prints which yvA Paint 
 tptthout Glafi, are called firaining Frames ; you may have ■ 
 them Plain or Car\'-ed, Gilded, or Bhck, Flat, or withi 
 a half round ; and flat without a RaLha on the back fide,- 
 lialf an Inch lefs than the Edge of the Cut, every way : 
 
 , and the reafon of this is, becaufe the Ld^e of the Cut 
 
 R rr 2- ahnoit 
 
928 Poljgraphices. Lib. XL 
 
 almoit breaks the Paper in pieces round about ; fo that 
 lliOLikl not the Frame come in, upon the Cut, ev^ery 
 ■vvay beyond its "F:dg,e, it would hazard Tearing. 
 
 VII. The mxt thing tve come to is the painting of the 
 Print, and this is done fvith Colors either Tranjparent or 
 Opake. The Tr,v?fparent Colors' are chiefly Carmine, fine 
 Lake, hroTvn Pinh, fine Smalt, dijlilled t^erdigrife and Ul- 
 tramarine,. The chief Op^^if Co/or J are Flake rvhite, yel- 
 low or Dfitch Pink^ light and brown Red, Terra-vert, Umher, 
 Cologne Earth, Ivory-hlack, Bleiv-hlack, Vermillion^ hlevf 
 Bice, Afa/licot yellovaiindpale, red Orpimennt. 
 
 VIII. Carmine is the fineft and moft excellent Red, 
 and is Ibmetimes fold for 3 /. an ounce or more. Fine 
 Lake is alio an admirable Red, and is worth about 2 s. 
 or 2s. 6 d. an ounce. Bromi or Glaring Pinky is a Co- 
 lor much about the price of fine Lake, tine Smalt is a 
 good Blew, and worth 4 or 5 j. a pound. Difiilled Ver- 
 W/Vr//f Ground may be had at the fame rate with fine 
 Lake, or brov.'n Pink. Ultramarine is the richeft Blew 
 in tlic World, but of leveral Prices : the deepelt and 
 beft is worth 6 or 7 /.an ounce •, a mean fort is fold for 
 3 or 4 /. an ounce, and this is very good and fit for 
 this Life: another fort is worth 20 s. an ounce, which 
 may Icrve for Painting, but is too courle for CU- 
 x^ing. . ♦ 
 
 IX. The Opake Colors. 
 Flake White, finely Ground with Nut Oil, is worth 
 about 2 /. the pound. White Lead Groimd in the fame 
 Oil, i2f/.a pound. Tellow ot Dutch Pink when Ground, 
 3 J. 6 d. a pound. Light and brown Red, which are yel- 
 low and bronn Oker, Burnt and Ground 4;. the pound. 
 The fame finely Ground in Linleed Oil, 3 d. an ounce. 
 Terra-vert is but now and then uled in this Painting, 
 but much in all others. Umber, Cologne Earth, Ivory- 
 black, and Blcn-black when Ground, 3 d. an ounce. 
 Vermillion finely Ground is now Ai^orth 10 j. a pound. 
 Blew Bice only ufcfiil for making green Colors, 4//. or 6</. 
 an ounce. Aiajiicot, the finelt and free from Grit, 
 which is of the' brightclt Color is bed:, and is worth 
 2 s. an ounce. Red Orpimenty which mufi be mixed witb 
 drying Oi', 2 d. an ounce. 
 
 X. All 
 
Chap. 26. OfGildi^igMezzotmtoPrms, 929 
 
 X. All the tranf parent Colors muji he Ground mith Ntit 
 Oil', fee cup. 2. Je^\ 36. O^dh Colors are ground moftly 
 with Gtim-ivater, fome with Gold Size, and fome with 
 Linfeed Oil and drying Oil. 
 
 XI. Tb prepare yonr Prints without Glajl or firaining 
 Frames. 
 
 Firll (teep your Print in warm Water flat ways, for 
 ij. or 5 hours or more, if the Paper be thick, when it 
 is fufficiently fteeped, lay it fmooth on a wet Table, 
 with the Print fide downwards, and rub it carefully 
 and lightly with a bit of Spnngc^ rubbing it olf, and 
 peeling it lb long, till the Print appears tranfparent on 
 the back-fide : this done, with common Palte do tlie 
 back of your Frame, and Palte your Print upon it 
 whllft it is wet. 
 
 XII. Let it novp dry, and thenVarnifJy it on bet h fides , 
 4 or 5 times rtith A<fa:fich or T/^irpentine P^ar/iifJ^y till it is fo 
 tranlparent, that you may fee the Pi6lure as plain on 
 the back-fide, as on the fore-fide. 
 
 XIII. To Farnifl:', Polijh, andfinifh Pictures not laid 
 upon Glajs. 
 
 They are done as thofe on Glafs, but if vou have a 
 mind to adorn. Embroider, Fringe, or the like, witii 
 Gold or Silver, touch then the fore-fide of your PiChire 
 with Shell Gold in G>im-vrater, or ell'e after you have 
 Varnillit it 2 or 3 times with the be'} vchite rarni/hy or 
 fome other ; take the bcjf Gold Si^e, with which hatch, 
 and lay it over with Gold Du(i : and with judgmer.c 
 touch and heighten all the Itronged lights, and deepen 
 your fliadows too, on the fo re-fidc. 
 
 XIV. This gives fo much life to your \Vori,that Artifts 
 themfeives have fometimes been deceived, and took it for a. 
 piece of real Painting. 
 
 If now you would Varnifli and Polifli, any of the(e 
 kinds of Prints, lay on the Colors fine and ioft, and ve- 
 ry even on the back-fide, and after a Weeks time Var- 
 nifli them. 
 
 XV. As to the difpofing and laying on of Colors, it is 
 the part of a Limners work to do that, and thre'^orc is nit 
 ofirwork to teach here : but if you would be fnliy inihai- 
 ^ed in the method of doing It, have recouiie to Lib. 2. 
 Cap. 25, 26, 27, 28. where you cannot miii of all the di- 
 
 R rr :^ rcc-iuua 
 
9^o Volygufhkes, Lib. Xl, 
 
 rections -which are ncceirary for this purpofe : fee alfo, 
 Q/». 27. 5"^^. 8,4^ 31. following, 
 XVI. To Varnijh theje Prints. 
 
 Take the heil nbite Furnifh (in cap. /l. feEl. i.) Maflich 
 Varnilh (in f^p. 4. /ff?. i'^^ ana : mix them together, 
 and with a fine Camels-hair Brnfh, Varnilli over your 
 piece 4 or 5 times caretiilly bj the Fire, as is formerly 
 taught, and you will find it to have a very good and 
 firm GJofs. 
 
 XVII. But if yoH vpohU Polifh them after Varnifhingy 
 3'ou murt ufe only the h'fi white Varnifh, without any 
 Mjiilich Varnipo niixt with it, and therewith wafli over 
 
 Gold, and with Tri-^oli and Water Poliih it, and then 
 clear it up as you do nvhite Japan. 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 Of Uywg Prints upon GUfs, 
 
 L "T^ O prepare the Prints , rthether Afez,z,6tinto or En" 
 
 •*■ graved. 
 
 Steep your Prints flat-ways in warm Water 4 or 5 
 hour?, or more if the Paper is thick ; then with a thin 
 pliable Knife fpread P^enice Turpentine thin and even 0- 
 vcr theGlafs; and with your Fingers dab it all over, 
 that it may appear rough. 
 
 \\.\Afterwards take the Print out of the Water ^ lay Itdh 
 a cle-m Napkin very fmooth, and with another Hipkin 
 prcls every part of it lightly to luck and drink up the 
 Water. 
 
 III. This dr,?2e, lay the Print on the Glafs ly degrees y hf- 
 ^'nning at one end, Ihuiking outwards that part which 
 1- iiift" falhiing to the Glafs, tiiat no ^Vind or Water 
 iiiay lyc biLitwccn it and the Print, and which, you mult 
 be alvvii j's careful to flrqak out, 
 
 I\^. Then ivet the back jide of the Print, and mth a hit of 
 
 Spy.nge 
 
Chap. 2 7. Of laying "Prints upon Glafs. 9 j i 
 
 Spmge or your Finger rub it lightly over, to rowl off the 
 Paper by degrees ; but carefully avoid rubbing it into 
 holes, efpecially in the Lights which are molt tender. 
 
 V. When yoH have peeled it Jo long^ till the Print appears 
 tranfparent on the hackflde, let it dry for 2 hours ,* after 
 which Varnifh it over with Maflich Farnifh (in cap.^. 
 /f^. 15.) or Turpentine Varnifh ( in cap. ^. fed:. 14.) 4 or 5 
 times, or fo often till you may fee clearly thro' it, ana 
 after 24 hours you may work or paint on it. 
 VI. Another way to do the fame. 
 
 Soak tlie Print in Water, and dry it with Cloths as a- 
 forefaid j and fpread the Glafs with Oil of MaRich and 
 fomc Turpentine , or with A^fafiich Farnifh «( in cap. 4. 
 Jca. 15.) 
 
 VII. Then lay on the Print upon the Glaji exaElly oa he- 
 fore ^ and ychen it is almofi dry, roul or rub ojf all the Pa- 
 per, leaving only the Shadow or Figure behind : you may 
 bnifh it off with a Bruili till yon fee none but the inky 
 and lliadowed part remains, then Varnilli it over with 
 Mafrich Farnifh ', which keep to dry, and from Duit, till 
 you begin to Paint it. 
 
 I. To Paint Aiez^z^otinto or Engraved Landslip. 
 
 VIII. Whether in Landskip or other Prints, the firft 
 thing to be done in this Work, istoG/^^ifallthofe places 
 which require it : but do your Work fitting, not Ihnd- 
 ing, becaufe you will the more (kadily move the Hand 
 and Pencil : befides, you ought then to have a Table 
 Eafel, almoft like to a Reading Desk, faving that where- 
 as there is a Pannel or back Board for the Book, here the 
 Painting Desk is all open, only with 3 or 4 Wyres to 
 keep the Picture from falling tlirough, and a narrow 
 Ledge at bottom to lupport it, and little holes made e- 
 qually diftant on both fides thereof, as in Painters Ea- 
 fels, that by Pegs or Pins, and a Ledge laid upon them, 
 you may raile yourPidure higher or lower as hz\k agrees 
 with your Conveniency : lay alfo a Sheet ot pure white 
 Paper behind the Pidure on the Tabic, and you'll fiiid 
 it better for your Purpofe j than placed againil the 
 Window. 
 
 IX. If you would kiUve your Glazing to lye thin and dry 
 quickly, mix Varnilh when you lay it on the Pithsres, and in 
 4 or 5 hours time they will he fi. for to receive other ' olors : 
 
 Rrr 4 and 
 
g^2 Volyf^fAfhieti, Lib. XL 
 
 and in Lvidshps \'ow inoiil:! !ir(t Ghze the ncardt and 
 5reArTtW«^p- orouncling them wtll with bro'.vn Pink ,- but 
 if you v>v)ukl have them greeiici', add diltilled Verdi- 
 grjie. 
 
 - X. Trees rvhich you ivonld have of- a lively ^nd htaunful 
 ■Green, m ^.Ip Leaver, and Weds y inuft be Cilazcd with 
 7:)«.'f/;'Pihk and diiHlled Verdigrife ; but the Trees far- 
 'the-r o(f, 'Hvith Verdigrife alone.' 
 
 XI. Hills^ Mountains M'il' Trees at the greate/I di^anet 
 of A L are to be GU7cd with fine Smalt, a little Lake 
 ■iii^^V^r^Amk, all thinly miw^vith Varnilli. 
 ' ''YAi'Tor the Sly, tc.he Ultni'marinc, or lor want of it, 
 • fiHC S.Avilt : mix it thin with Varnilh, and Glaze it o- 
 ver 2 or 3 times with a clean large Pencil, and a very 
 -iWif: Stroak, for if you are tedious, 'twill dry lb faft, 
 that you cannot poffibly lay it even. 
 
 Xin. If ynur Landskip !s ftffnifhed vrith Figures, Build- 
 ing:, Roc k\ Ruins, Sec, they require finilhingjirft of dl, he- 
 fore any thin? elfeis done: the Mixture of Colors for thefe 
 thing? coniiits chiefly of Blacks, Whites and Tellovp, with 
 fonietimes a little Red : but the Mixture, Compofition 
 and Proportions of them muft alwayp be left to the Ex- 
 perience and Pra6ticeof the Artifi, with this Confidera- 
 tion, that all the Colors for this kind of Painting, ought 
 to be very light. 
 
 XIV. Now, to fmifl:> the Trees, Ground and Sky, ixiib 
 the red of the Pithre, begin as bclbre with the nearclt or 
 greatcft Trees : and with yellow Pink and white, Paint 
 over the lighted Leaves : but with a darker color of Pink, 
 and a little Smalt, go cleverly over the darkcfl and out- 
 w.ird Leaves >vith a fmall Pencil dipt in Varnil]i. 
 
 XV. Thefe Trees you would have beaut ifnl. Paint wth a 
 Mixture of yell on Mafticot, White and f^erdigrife : the 
 darker pait'^ with Pink, f^erdigri fe 3.nd White; as alio 
 thoie Trees ^vhicbi you Glazed with Verdigrile only, they 
 being mixed ver\ light with White. 
 
 XVL Bfit to finijh the Sky and Foreskip, if any Clouds 
 ap'^ear, tohch thew tvith Vernijh and light Color, n:,tde of 
 WNe, yello)v Okcr and Ldc : and with thefe likcwiic 
 toa:h the lighrcil parts of Hills and Towns, at remotclt 
 dilfeiices : 'mix alfo Smalt and White as light as you can 
 to Paint over the Sky: and to thefe add a Tindturc ot 
 
 Lake, 
 
Chap. 27. Of hying Prints upon GUfs, 93 5 
 
 J^ake, to fhadow over the darkeft Clouds, letting all youc 
 Colors lye thin and even. 
 
 XVII. If yoH would have the Piftare lock more lively y fet 
 itagaindthe Light or on the Eafel, andtho' it is Paint- 
 ed all over, yetyou will perceive the Lights and Shadows 
 through it ; if not, what was before Painted will dire61: 
 you; your Skie and Forefight then are to be Limned 
 with the fame, but lighter Cqlors than the former, and 
 every part befides refpedlively. 
 
 II. To Paint a Hnmane Body ; and fir/} the Face. 
 
 _XVIII. Glaze and touch tli£ deep Shadows thinly 
 with Lake, brown Pink and Varnifli ; and the white 
 Speck and black Ball of the Eye, as the Print l>.alldl~ . 
 re6l you : alfo the round white Ball of a convenient co- 
 lor. Make the Lips of a fine Red with Carmine or red 
 Lake : the dark fide of the Face lliadow with Vermilion, 
 yello^v Pink and white. Give fome touches on the 
 ttrongeit Lights of the Face, as top of the Nofe, Fore- 
 head, by the Eyes, Mouth and Chin, with a Color made 
 of white, pale Mafticot, or yellow Okcr, and a little 
 •: Vermillion, mist as you Iball fee fit. Then mix it a 
 a little darker, and lay it all over the Face not paiined 
 before ; but the Mouth and Cheeks jnake fomewhat red- 
 der. Then with a fine clean Pencil, a little worm 
 Hatch, and fweeten all your Colors and Shadows, 
 ckanfingthe Pencil as oft as it requires. If any part is 
 too pale, you may help it whiiit your work is moili 
 
 XIX. Now here is to be notcd^ that you muji ufe no l^^ar- 
 nifh in painting offlejh Colors, except what is ufed in Gla- 
 z,ing the Shaddows ; for iTiould you mix P^arnifh with 
 them, you will meet with this inconvenience, that the 
 Colors will dry fo fait, that you cannot be able to 
 fweeten the Shadows with the Flelh. 
 XX. A fwarthy Complexion. 
 Mix the Flelli color with white, yellow or brown 
 Oker, and light Red, with Shadows fitting. The like 
 obferve in Painting Necks, Shoulders, Breafis and 
 raked Bodies, as in the Face. When any 0; them are 
 dry, you may go over with them again, by which lecoiid 
 Operation, you abfolutely mix your Colors to your dc- 
 fire. Let your Hand be fieady, and let not your Pencil 
 traverfe or go over upon Lines of a diiffering Color. 
 
 XXI. For 
 
9H Folygr£phic€s. Lib. XL 
 
 XXI. For the Hair. 
 
 Ufe not Varnilh nor Colors near fo dark as the Life, 
 for the Print will darken it ; for black Hair, mix white, 
 black, red Oker, with a touch of Lake or light Red, all 
 which produce an Afli-color, and the Hair being 
 colored with it, will reprefent a natural Black. To 
 make the Curies ("hew fhronger, touch the lightert parts 
 with a lighter Color, and the darkett with the con- 
 trary, all which may be feen through, if not laid too 
 thick. 
 
 III. For Drapery. 
 
 If the Color is broken, take care of its mixture, fo as 
 to make 3 degrees 0^ the faid Color ; one the very Co- 
 lor, another more Light, and the third Darker, which 
 is for the darke(i Folds, as the lighted is for the light- 
 eft parts ; and the Color between both, for the other 
 parts of the Garment. Embroidery or Fringes are 
 done with Shell, orpoudred Gold or Silver. Mix your 
 Metals with Gum-water, and with a fine Pencil Hatch, 
 or Embroider your Flowers, and touch the Fringes or 
 what elfe you defire, before you either Glaze or Paint 
 the Drapery defigned. 
 
 XXII I. Changeable Drapery. 
 
 If you would nave the ground Purple, and the lights 
 yellow : take a fine Pencil dipt in Varnilh, and with 
 yellow Mafticot, touch thinly all the lighteit part of the 
 Tolds, and if need be repeat it, for your Colci muft 
 be very thni with Varnilli: when dry, glaze it over with 
 Lake and Ultramarine, or Smalt^ with Varnilli, once 
 or tu'ice, letting it dry. Then mix 3 degrees of a pur- 
 ple Color, of Lake, Smalt, and White,* and lay theii] 
 on, as directed in the laftSe6lion. 
 
 XXIV. Tclloiv Drapcry.^ 
 
 For the lightcft Fold?, mix yellow Oker, and White; 
 and brown Oker for the Shadows ; or limber, if you 
 would have it darker : but do the other Folds with yel- 
 io'.v Oker; or v/ith while niixt with yellow and brown 
 Pink. 
 
 XXV. The Mof: beaHtifal Tellorr. 
 
 Glaze your Drapery, or what you would have look 
 pkafant with brown Pink, once or twice, and the 
 4arKe(t parts oftncr : being diycd, touch the lightc/t 
 
 Fo^ds 
 
Chap. 2 7. Of hying Prints ufen GUfs, 9^5 
 
 Foldf with pale Matticot, then with yellow Marticot j 
 and if any part requires a darker Color, with yellow 
 or brown IPink, and a little Umber ; when dry, Paint 
 all with white except the Shadows. 
 
 XXVI. The hefi B[en>. 
 
 Mix with thick Nut Oil Ultramarine : or, if you 
 cannot wait the drying, inftead of Nut Oil, ufe Var- 
 nilli, and glaze the Garment 3 or 4 times over, letting 
 it dry between every time : when dry, mix three de- 
 grees of Smalt and White, very light, and with the 
 clearett white, do the lighteft Folds, and the rell as the 
 reafon requires. If Ultramarine be too dear, you may 
 by the fame method Glaze with fine Smalt, and Va/- 
 nilli it as often as the former, and Paint it ivith White 
 and Smalt. An ordinary Blew, is made with W^hite 
 and Smalt, mixt in fevcral degrees, but without Gla- 
 zing. 
 
 XXVII. Purple mthout GUz,ing. 
 
 Make a mixture of Lake, Smalt, and White, with 
 which perform your Drapery : heightning and dark- 
 ning the Folds, as before direited. ' 
 
 XXVIII. Purple Drapery, Painted and Glaz,ed. 
 
 Let it be thin Glazed once, with Carmine or Lake ; 
 and when dry, Paint it every where with Smialt and 
 White, hghter or darker as you defire ; letting Ihll the 
 lighteit Folds, have ftill a Color more light than the 
 other Parts. On the contrary you may have a Purple 
 by Glazing your Figure over with Ultramarine or 
 Smalt, and Painting it with Lake and White. 
 
 XXIX. Ordinary Red rvithont Glaring. 
 
 Paint tlfc (Irongert Lights w^ith White mixt with 
 Vermillion ; but the dark Shadows, with a dark or ligloi-' 
 Red, and the relt with Vermillion : for the iightei 1 FoKl^ 
 mix light Red and White : for dark folds, broivn Red ; 
 for the other Parts light Red only. 
 
 XXX. Another Red, almoj} as good as the fine'!. 
 Grind red Lake tineiy in Oil, temper it well v.-ith 
 
 drying Oil and Varniih, and with this Glaze over 
 3'our Garments 2 or 3 times ; andn-hen dry, Paiiit the 
 lighteft with White: the darkeft xvith light or brown 
 Red ; and the reft of the Drapery widi light Red uiily. 
 
 XXXL Tki 
 
93^ Pofygraphices, Lib. XI. 
 
 XXXI. The fine!} of 41 Reds. 
 Take Carmine and mix it witli Varnifh alone, with 
 \vhich once Glaze over your Garment, and if you would 
 have it very beautiful, two hours after do the fame a- 
 gain : when dry, Paint all (except the dark Shadows 
 which lliould have Red) with Vermillion and White, 
 or with Vermillion only. If you can (when dry) fee 
 thro' the Colors, touch the lightelt Folds over with clear 
 Vvhites, and they will appear yet more Beautiful. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIII. 
 Of ntaking Sealing Wax and Glervs. 
 
 I. 'T'O male on ordinary Red f oft Sealing Wax. 
 
 A 1^ Common Bees Wax, ft;. Turpentine, ^iij. 
 Oil Olive, 5i. melt all thefe together, then add there 
 to red Lead, ^ii.i- boil a little, and ftir till almoll Cold: 
 ca(t it into fair Water, and make it up into Rouls or 
 Cakc^. 
 
 II.' The hefi Red f oft Wax. 
 Vfi White iiqes Wax, tfcj. C/jio Turpentme, |iij. Oil 
 Olive, Ij. mix and melt: then add pure Vermillion in 
 fine Poudtr, well Ground q. f. or fj. mix and boil a 
 little, fhr till almoit Cold, caft it into cold Water, 
 and then make it up into Rouls or Cakes. 
 \l\. To make Green foft Wax. 
 "Ri Bees Wax. It-i. Turpentine, ^iij. Oil Olive, fj. 
 mix anil melt: -then add tine Verdigrilc, §j. mix and 
 m;'kc the Wax up as the former. 
 IV. To niAs Tellmjo't Wax. 
 I> Yellow Bees Wax, ibj, Turpentine, ziii. Oil O- 
 live, |i. mix and melt: then add Cambogia in tine 
 
 Peudcr, 
 
Chap. 28. Of making Sealing Wax ^ d)ic, 957 
 
 Pouder, |ij. Auripigment finely ground, fj. mix and 
 make the Wax as before. 
 
 V. To make Black feft Wax. 
 
 Bt Bees Wax, ifcj. Turpentine, ^iij- p\i Olive, |j. 
 mix and melt them together : to which add black 
 Earth, or Lamp-black, or Ivory-black finely ground, §;. 
 mix, &c. 
 
 VI. To mah Perfumed Joft Wax. 
 
 This is done by mixing with ^xx. of any of the for- 
 mer Compofitions, Oil of Rhodium, ^j. Musk in fine ' 
 Pouder, ^j. Civet , gfs. mix them well. 
 
 VII. yifter the fame manner you may male f oft Wax of 
 all Colors, having what Scent y(xi pleafe^ by mixing the 
 perfume intended either with the Oil Olive before 
 Hand ; or elfe by working it into the Compofition of 
 the Wax, after it is made. 
 
 VIII. To make ^ne Red hard SealingWax. 
 
 Bi Pure fine Shell-Lac, melt it in an Earthen Ve/Tel ; 
 and put into it a fufticient quantity of the Color you 
 defign your Wax to be of; to every it;, of Gum-Lac, 
 put of purely fii?e ground Vermillion, ^iii- to ^iii;. melt, 
 liir, and mix them well over the Fire : then take it off, 
 arid when it is of a fit heat, make it up into Rolls or 
 Sticks : upon which you may fet a Glofs by gently hsatini^ 
 them over a naked Char- cole Fire, and rubbing them mm 
 a cloth till they are cold. 
 
 IX. To make fine hard Sealing Wax of other Colors. 
 Blew Sealing Wax, is made after th^ fame manner, 
 
 and in the fame proportions, with Uitramarine, or fine 
 blew Smalt. Green Sealing Wax, with fine Verdigrile. 
 Tellow Sealing Wax, with finely oround Auripigmentum, 
 or yellow Mafticot. Purple Sealing V\^ax, with Vermilli- 
 on mixt with Ivory-black, or Lamp-black. Black Seal- 
 ing Wax, with Ivory-black. 
 
 X. To make courfe hard Sealing Wax. 
 
 I3i Shell-Lac, §xi;. Rofm, |vi. fine Vermillion, |vi;fs. 
 melt and mix them together, and when - in a due heat 
 make it up into Sticks or Rouls. Upon which you may 
 let a Glols as directed in feU. 8. aforegoing. 
 
 XI. To make mouth Glcw. 
 
 Diflblve Iflng-glaji in fair Water, in a gentle 5. M. 
 then ilraifl it thro a wide Hair Sieve whiLiti: it is hot, 
 
 upoa 
 
9^8 Pciygraphices. Lib. XL 
 
 upon arloilier courfe, and clofe Hair Sieve ; when it is 
 cold it will be thick like Gelly. Cut it into long hand- 
 fome Pieces, which put on a Sring, fo they touch not 
 one another, and hang them in the Sun, till thev arc 
 dry. You may give it a fine talk and fmell by mixing, 
 iweet and odoriferous things therewith. 
 
 XII. A jirongGlevD for Pipes and AquxdnEls. 
 
 Take Tobacco Pipe Clay, dry and make it into Poti- 
 dfer : mix with it goodftore of lliort Flocks, and beat it 
 up with Linfeed Oil to a itiff Pafle, like kneaded 
 Dough. This makes a long and lafting Cement for 
 Pipes and Aqu3Edu6ls: and being put upon Pipes 
 (though long a drying) is very ftanch and lading. 
 
 XIII. To make a very ^rong Glevn. 
 
 Soak the finefl Jchthyocolla or IfiHg-glaf 24 hours in 
 Brandy, then boil all very gently together, continually 
 ftirring of it, that it burns not, fo long till it becomes 
 one liquor or body (fave fome Strings not diflblvable) 
 which firain whilit liot, tliro' a courle Linnen Cloth, 
 into a VcfTcl where it may be kept clofe Itopt. A gen- 
 tle heat will melt this Glew into a ti^aufparent Li- 
 quor, with which you may Glew things lb ftrongly 
 together, that they will break rather in any other 
 Part, tljan in the place glewed. This muh exceeds com- 
 mon Glew. 
 
 XIV. To ?nah the hejl and jlrongeji Glew, for Glerv' 
 ing the Joints of Boards. 
 
 Bi Scummed Milk which has flood fo long, that no 
 more Cream wilUarife from it : Scum it very clean, 
 and fet it over the Fire in a Leaden Pot, Jetting it 
 boil a little ; and if any Cream arife take it off. 
 Then put into it a fufticient quantity of Joyners Glew 
 cut into Imall bits, which will foon melt ; boil it to 
 a good body, that it may be neither too thick, nor 
 too thin, (for in this boiling lies much of the Artj) 
 take it from the Fire, and keep it for ufe, as other 
 Glew. 
 
 XV. This Glew hinds beyond beliefs and mil not be 
 ftihjeB to refolve with any ordinary moijiure of the Wea- 
 ther : and the realbn is becaufe x\it Curdy P,irt of the 
 Milk, freed tioin its Oil, is joined with the Glew. Now 
 you mult take care, that it burns not to the fjdcs o£ 
 ^ the 
 
Chap* ftS. OfSealirtg Wax and Glews, 9 j 9 
 
 the Pot, for then it will be deprived of its ttrength : To 
 prevent which, (both in its nrft making, and in your 
 after melting of it) you had beft both to make and mele 
 it in B, M. or a boiling Veffel of Water, fo will you 
 prevent burning, and by thofe means boil it more 
 lafely to what body you pleafc, without danger of 
 hurting the Glew. 
 
 Ubri Vndecimi & Vlumti 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 ACompIeat Di6lionary of the Greek and Ronton An- 
 tiqmties, explaining all the obfcure Places in all 
 the Glalfic Authors, and Ancient Hiftorians. Compi- 
 led Originally in French for the Ufeof the Da»pbin, &c. 
 Now made Englifh, with the Addition of very ufefiil 
 Mapps. Printed for J. fsUcbQlJon^ T. Nevfhm»gh, and 
 
'advertisement. 
 
 DR.SALMON'j FAMILY PILLS, prepared and madefy timfelf 
 ; at hit Houfe near Black-Fryers Stairs, London. 
 The Price of each Box {containing 12 Pills ^ being 2, ^yOr ^Dofes') 
 is I Shillings with a Printed Paper ofDire^ions. 
 
 I. rhefe Family Pills are peculiar fdr the Cure of the Scurvy^ Drop- 
 /v, and Gout. They Cure the Scurvy^ Cthe chief Reigning Difeafe fA 
 this Kingdom J when it h grown fo bttd^ as to become Scandalous^ ft 
 that many People thinly it to befoine ill Difeafe. 
 
 II. For the Scurvy often caufes great pains in the Head^ Nofe^ 
 Shoulder Sy Arms^ Legs^ and Bones ^ with other pairts aO over the whole 
 Body: It caufes alfoDutmfs'and ffeaiiinefs, with redifl) or blueifh 
 SpotSy and breal^ings out in the Sl^n^ with Spots y Stains^ Pimples. 
 Fu/Jiesy Boils t Scabsy Scurff and Morphewy fcattered tip and down i. 
 many places, 
 
 III. The Scurvy alfo caufes a bad Stomachy and fomettmes hfs of 
 y^ppetitey loofenefs and forenefs of Teeth, Tlnoat and Mouth, weal^- 
 nefsin the Bacl^and LoinSy with a general weal^nefs and faintnejs all 
 over the whole Body, infomUch, that at Ufi it gets into the Bones^ 
 and infers the very Atarrow of them. Thit Cruel Difeafe thefe Fa- 
 mily Pills Cure at a few times taking. 
 
 IV. They Cure after an admirable manner the Dropfy and Gout^ 
 ta\ing away the Water in o«e, and the Pain in the other, tho' never 
 fo great, beyond expeHation, giving prefent Eafe, Relief and Comfort : 
 J hey worl>_gently by Stool and Vrine, (rarely by Vomit, unlefs the Sto- 
 mach be very foul) curing thereby mojl curable DifeafeSj even when 
 the Patient has been .pvrn over by others as uncurable, 
 
 V. They kj/l tUjortsofWotmi in Old or Toung -, and utterly roof 
 out the King's- Evil tho' of many Tears Jianding : They excellently Cure 
 Wind, Vapours, Fits of the Moth'.r, Cloggings, Stuffings, Gnawings, 
 Hud ilfnefs at Stomach, JaundiceyLingring Difeafe, Melancholy y La- 
 larrhs. Vomiting, Surfeits, and reflore in deep Confumpti6ns , where 
 are CoHghsy [Vhee:(ingiy Hoarfnefs, and faint SweatSy with hfs of 
 Complexion. 
 
 VI. They Cure the Cachexia inVirginSyGreenficlinefsy Head-ach, 
 lethargy. Megrim, Vertigo or Giddinefsy ftoppage of the Courfes in 
 fVomen, Rickets in Children, Fluxes of the Bowelsy dimnefs of 
 Sight, pain in the Ears, difficulty of Hearing, Rheums, Stinkiig 
 Breathy the Sciatica or Hip Gout, carrying off all fait, flsarp and evil 
 Humors. 
 
 VII. The) cleafe and cure a Gonorrhea, are good in the fou t Difeafe f 
 with aO its Symptoms, being duly ta^en for fame time : ' They qnicken 
 the Senfes, clear the S'iJ.it, add a g-ood Colour to the Face, and make 
 (he Sody able to withft and Difeafe s ; being of a Friendly quality, and 
 performing all their operations as nature her felf requires, with much 
 fafety and eafe, and without Griping or making Sicily being fitted for 
 all Perfms ofvphut A^ey SeXy or CmjUtuiim foever. 
 
1 
 
\ 
 
n:i3i 
 
 I 
 
1 
 
/z:v 
 
rr.^-1. 
 
/T^'VH 
 
I 
 
X 
 
72^X1 
 
^ 
 
/z!xii 
 
/Z.^'xni 
 
I I --^M 
 
 L^'^^% \ 
 
 "1 1 
 
 'I I 
 
 l^-^ 
 
 \^r 
 
 :x- 
 
 -Wi 
 
 ^Y i 
 
 iv /ill ' — ^ijT-'V'' 
 
 ^ 
 
 w 
 
 ^'_i 
 
 
 n. xv 
 
V 
 
. . Ibbi 7 7: 7-, . ,. , 
 
 it, vi coanDjcercni ovem^tts JmqiUx. 
 
/m ^ 
 
 

 GPTTY rFNTFR OBfiARV 
 
:£sinr. 
 
 » .' 
 
 f-ri' .• 
 
 * /•/